Saati

ae,

Wie ava
-

saaist

ance

bien

fos

a) ‘
‘rw
pay
On ‘

ni

TVVUTRVVTTUTVAVAETDULSETIVSETOEULEE

JOURNAL

oF

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY

or

BENGAL.

VOL. IV.

4

ad, LQ

et He

54

4 D * ’
Pad to hk op
» « ry

, ds Langs, .
7 eS

\\

rE

ak PL

Vol

ERs.

Oe ered

LLL IAD

THE

JOURNAL

OF

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY

OF

BENGAL.

EDITED BY

JAMES PRINSEP, F.R.S&.

SECRETARY OF THE AS8. SOC., AND HON. MEM. OF THE AS. SOC. OF PARIS. COR,
MEM, OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOC. OF LONDON AND OF THE ROYAL SOC.
OF MARSEILLES.

VOL. IV.

JANUARY TO DECEMBER,

1835.

“¢ It will flourish, if naturalists, ehemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of
scienee, in different parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing, and send
them to the Asitic Society at Calcutta ; it will languish, if such communications shall
be long intermitted ; and will die away, if they shall entirely cease.’’

Sir WM. JoNES.

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, CIRCULAR ROAD.

SOLD BY THE EDITOR, AT THE SOCIETY’S OFFICE.

1835.

(ie oe Rte
syeart abate
oe

Pie

y me fie

bi inet asain

= eral, ey

if

een ners ie :
els Eibaastias may 8 Akeni ‘varias one
fm if BATS Space tit Xe Bia at * ie
iver . : : a ; “yy ish

. AG / 4 = , "Oe ser "

PREFACE:

manta Cette

Tue Journal has now survived its fourth year of existence, or
including the Gleanings in Science, its seventh ; yet so far from
feeling its vigour abated, or finding its contributors grown lan-
guid, or its supporters falling off, the past year has produced a
volume overflowing with original matter, even to the exclusion of
extracts from the publications of Europe—a volume exceeding
by fifty pages of text any that has preceded it, and embracing
nearly double the usual number of plates.

The List of Subscribers in India remains in numbers much the
same as before; but the demand for the work in England increases
daily, and much of the new matter it contains is greedily trans-
ferred to the pages of European literary and scientific periodi-
cals of wide and established circulation. The Editor says thus
much by way of information to his numerous correspondents
throughout India, who have not the opportunity of perusing the
home journals, and who lose sight of their own labours the
moment they have entrusted them to his pages.

The pecuniary aspect of the concern, up to the end of 1835,
would not appear very encouraging to a speculator, but it is
satisfactory as far as regards the object of maintaining a recipient
for literary and scientific researches in India, at the smallest tax
upon its supporters, and yet without any ostentation of per-
sonal sacrifice. The collections up to the present day have been
0, MAE SE AS ASR A ACS Bi .. sicca Rupees, 16996 11 8

Mivers remain die ity Subscribers in Bengal, 1815 5 0
and by the Asiatic Society, for copies furnished to

its Members, in 1835, ed as . 1020 0 0
Also, due by Ssiabathe bessi a8 Bombay) “Madras,
Emm COV ions. Yeh. JQ. 3A 08 tise RMR» aad ee 1036 6 O

Making the total income of four years, Rupees, 20868 6 8

v1 PREFACE.

The printing expence for 3 years
ers Gen jr cS ns died cetoarneevsee sc bOI9O. TA “2
for 1835, say...... 3500 0 O
———— 14296 14 2
The expence of Plates for 4 yrs.... 1503 2 11
of lithographs,...... A149 1 8

3652 3 11
Expence of circulation, keeping accounts,
freight, postage, and other contingencies, ......... 3436 0 1

Making the total expenditure, Rupees, ........ 21585 2 2

And leaving upon the whole transaction a balance against the
Editor of Rupees 516 11 4 exclusive of the portion of
outstandings, which (with regret be it said) must be written
off as irrecoverable.

Although the price of the work is already lower in propor-
tion than that of any similar journal in England, France, or
India, the Eprror has felt it incumbent upon him to volun-
teer a further small reduction, for the sake of simplifying
accounts and uniting with the Asiatic Society in the adoption
of the new currency. Subscribers all over India will henceforth
have to pay one Rupee per number, without any regard to the
fractional excess of the late Calcutta sicca.

The loss to the Editor by this resolution would have been six
and a quarter per cent., had it not been most considerately met
by a corresponding reduction, from the old to the new rupee, in
the charges for printing by the Proprietors of the Baptist Mission
Press, to whom he thus begs to offer his public and sincere
acknowledgments.

The calculated amount of postage paid by up-country Sub-
scribers to the Government has been, in the past year, Sicca
Rupees 1200, without including the profits from an extensive
correspondence due entirely to the existence of the Journal.
The labours of the Post Office Committee are not yet completed ;
it would therefore be premature to hold out any promise of
more favorable rates to such subscribers as have been induced
to withdraw on account of the dak charge exceeding the price
(and it may be presumed in their eyes, the value) of the work

PREFACE. Vii

Some modification of the existing scale of postage may however
confidently be expected, which may save contributors especial-
ly from the heavy tax on the transmission of manuscripts*.

If it be asked, what has been the most prominent object of
interest discussed in the present volume, the answer must
naturally point to the Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, in
regard to the publication of the Oriental Works which had been
suspended by an order of the Supreme Government, dated the
th March, 1835.

Without venturing to impugn in any degree the wisdom or
policy of a measure which has in the face of all India with-
drawn the countenance of Government from the learned na-
tives of the country, and pronounced a verdict of condemna-
tion and abandonment on its literature, it may be allowable in
this place to prophecy, that the conduct of the Asiatic Society,
in stepping forward torescue the half-printed volumes of Sanscrit,
Arabic, and Persian, will be approved and applauded by every
learned Society andevery scholar im Europe. Left in their un-
finished state, they would have indeed merited the opprobrious
designation of an “ accumulation of waste paper,” applied to
them by the Government which had originally ordered, and had
expended vast sums upon, their publication.

There seems something so anomalous in this sudden change
of state resolve, that it can be explained (excused would be
too presumptuous a term) only by the peculiar constitution
of the British Indian Government, in which the interests of a
literature, and of languages, necessarily foreign to the deputed
ruler of these distant provinces of the British Empire, must be
left to the fluctuating opinions and influence of his local ad-
visers. The unbiassed spectator beholds, at one period, the
Government accusing itself of doing nothing for Indian learning
and making amends by establishing colleges and patronizing pub-
lications and translations into the Oriental languages : anon,
he beholds it throwing up all the works half translated or half
printed; and withdrawing all the scholarships and exhibitions,
which had been instituted for the encouragement and support of
poornative students ;—annulling mostof the appointments which

* In one case, Twenty-two Rupees on a brief article from Bombay.

Vill PREFACE.

heretofore were held out as temptations to the study of the
classical languages by Europeans—and leaving the completion
of the Mahabharat to the charity of private subscription, along
with the statistical information collected by BucHanan ; the
geographical and geological, by Moorcrort, Voysey, and HEr-
BERT! When he sees all this, and a contribution of 1200 rupees
refused for the printing of a Cochin Chinese Dictionary, tendered
by a Catholic Bishop, in the distressed state of his Mission,
even without demanding any remuneration for the labour of
compilation, can he divest himself of the idea that the pre-
sence or the absence of a Sir Wa. Jongs,a W1LKINs, a CoLr-
BrooxE and a Wautson have influenced these opposite re-
solutions? The learned world will at any rate rejoice that
our Hindustani, Bengali, Marhatti, Tibetan, and Sanserit Dic-
tionaries have passed into permanent existence anterior to the
epoch of interdiction ; and that while the Asiatic Society sup-
plies, however feebly, the patronage lost elsewhere, India need
not be wholly dependent upon France and Germany for its edi-
tions of the Sanscrit classics, and for the development of the
ancient history and philology of the nations under British rule.

This is the gloomy side of the annual picture ; but let it not
be imagined, that there is no sunshine ; nor that we seek to
shade it.

The government has liberally rewarded and patronized the
labours of Mr. Masson, and of Mouan La’t,—it has deputed a
scientific mission under charge of Dr. Watticn, into the tea
districts of Assam; it has in like manner deputed Mr. Anam,
to follow the steps of Dr. Bucnanan, in collecting statistical
information principally in connection with the education of the
people ; it has employed its engineer officers in a grand sectional
survey of a line from Rajmahal to Cutwa, with the view to
examine its fitness for a canal to join the Hugli and Ganges:
and it still supports on a magnificent scale the grand Trigono-
metrical Survey of India. The journal has not indeed been
favoured with any report of the progress of these great works,
but it is known that the canal survey is now finished :—and
that Major Everest has completed the measurement of a second
base near Seharanpur. Other official reports, such as surveys
of Socotra, of the Maldives, Mr. Gordon’s excursions in China

PREFACE. ix

and the discovery of inscriptions in Axabia, have been oblig-
ingly communicated by the Bengal and Bombay Governments.

The train of individual discoveries, physical and antiquarian,
has progressed without intermission : most interesting inscrip-
tions and coins have been brought to light, and illustrated.

Fossil animals, of new and extraordinary species, have followed
the discovery of Cuvierian genera, themselves but recently made
known, in the Sivalik range : the history of the Malayan states,
accountsof various sects, of ancient ruins, of Buddhist cosmogony,
and of Tibetan works, are among the subjects of the present
volume ; and it is but fair to state, that materials for a new
volume of the Quarto Researches have been collecting, and
printing, at the same time with the contents of the Society’s
Journal.

Contributions in Meteorology this year have seemingty been
wanting: they have however been received regularly from vari-
ous quarters, and, now that the year is completed, will be made
use of in a condensed form.

Criticism of Scientific Works published in India has indeed
been neglected, and that during a period when the press has
been unusually prolific. This department of labour, as far as
regards the bringing to public notice new works, has been am-
ply fulfilled by the daily press; and beyond this it would be
hardly safe to extend the province of criticism in this country,
where the Editor cannot conceal his own fallibility under the
disguise of an anonymous review.

Want of space and want of leisure must, in the last place,
be pleaded as an excuse for the absence of retrospective ana-
lyses of the progress of the Sciences in Kurope. The Epiror
hopes to obtain the aid of friends whose attention will be particu-
larly engaged in pursuing these branches of knowledge in the
ensuing year ; but all official functionaries in India are so fully
occupied, that it is hard to expect from them work of superero-
gation. It is some consolation, that the Indian reader being
himself somewhat in the same predicament, will not have
time to discover the blemishes and blanks of our amateur
periodical.

yt veil robs Miiliailit een

a dl hi nid yet 9: ot fl Sead
| AeA Ck ti eaniont ee Tee
nit dani: foul anti ut steaks viewer, Apert: Ae
‘eR omer Va aaa Chae oatike ag
ered alte pqancedl ia i ea cri bE Moe eee da
gah Pearl ah Hiren, ene ne Tae hoe: |
“ah ek ghia teeadaht bo a dante ‘call vitidaray Ha
ei ome tay eae dt ee et. ty ie 16 i: a |
crear io A0G-y it ute eqeed Gaia 6k ae ea a 2
sensual apelhcy sawsititel..oalt ieee aa >
pain ibhw.» Rr eetey OU aati a “aide we
AST AMebeled maid, tama oprtatiennld hex

a rs Ay allt Mor ai ee ad Py 3 a,
6 Kh fee GY . ot io fe
vee Aye Sn i 3 ine

a

MEMBERS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, 1835.

{To whom the Journal is forwarded at the Society’s cost.]

The Honorable Sir C. T. METCALFE, Bart. Governor General of India, Patron A. S.

His Excellency Sir R. Fane, Commander-in-Chief.

His Excellency the Right Honorable Sir R. W. Horton, Governor of Ceylon,
H. M.A.S. Hon. Mem. q

The Honorable Sir E. Ryan, Knt. (2 copies.)

The Right Rev. the Lord Bishop of Calcutta.

The Honorable Col. W. Morison.

The Honorable T. B. MACAULAY.

The Honorable Sir BENJAMIN MALKIN.

The Honorable Sir J. P. GRANT.

Adam, Rev. W.
Anbury, Col. Sir Thos.
Avdall, J. Esq.

Bagshaw, R. J. Esq.
Baker, Lieut. W. E. Engineers.
Baillie, N. B. E. Esq.
Beattie, J. Esq.
Bateman, Rev. J.

Bell, John, Esq.
Blundell, A. E. Esq.
Briggs, Col. J., Madras.
Burke, W. A. Esq.
Burney, Lieut.-Col. R.
——_— R. Esq-
Bushby, G, A. Esq.
Benson, W. H. Esq.
Binny, C. Esq.

Cautley, Capt. P. T.

Carr, W. Esq.

Colvin, J. R. Esq.

Corbyn, F. Esq.

Csoma de Kérés, A. Hon. Mem.

Dobbs, A. Esq.

D’Oyly, Sir Charles, Bart.
Durand, Lieut. H. M. Engineers.
Dwarkanath Tagore, Baboo.

Egerton, C. C. Esq.
_ Ellis, Capt. E. S.
Evans, Dr. Geo.
Everest, Rev. R.
——— Major G.
Ewer, W. Esq.

Falconer, Dr. H.
Foley, Capt. W.
Forbes, Capt. W. N.

Gerard, Capt, A.
Grant, W. Esq.
9, P.) Bsq.

Hare, D. Esq.
Hodgson, B. H. Esq.

Kyd, J. Esq.

Langstaff, J. Esq.
Loch, G, Esq.

Low, Lieut.-Col. J.

Macfarlan, D. Esq.

Macleod, Capt.

Macleod, J. M. Esq.

Macnaghten, W. H. Esq. Vice Pres.
Macqueen, Rev. J.

May, J. 8S. Esq.

Melville, Honorable W. L.

Mill, Rev. W. H. Vice Pres.
Mackenzie, W. Esq.

Montrion, Lieut. C.

Nott, Chas. Augustus, Esq.

Pearson, Dr. J.
Pemberton, Capt. R. B.
Prinsep, C. R. Esq.
——— H. T. Esq,
—— James, Sec. A. S.
Phayre, Lieut.

Radhacaunt Deb, Baboo.
Ramcomul Sen, Baboo.
Richy, Mons. L. A.
Russomoy Dutt, Baboo.
Ross, D. Esq.

Sage, Capt. W.
Seppings, J. M. Esq.
Strong, F. P. Esq.
Stopford, J. P. Esq.
Stocqueler, J. H. Esq.

Thomason, J. Esq.
Trevelyan, C. E. Esq.
Taylor, Capt. T. G.

T. J. Esq.
Turton, T. E. M. Esq.

Wade, Capt. C. M.

Wilcox, Capt. J. R.

Wilson, Professor H. H., Oxford.
Wallich, N. Esq.

White, Capt. S. M.

Associate Members. (Subscribers.)
Brownlow, C. Esq.

Piddington, H. Esq.

Dean, E. Delhi Canal Dep.
Stephenson, J. Esq.

SUBSCRIBERS,

{Who are not Members of the Asiatic Society, 1935. ]

The Honorable the Court of Directors, (by the Secretary to Government, General

Department.) ONE COPY.

Abercrombie, Lieut. W. Engrs. Burdwan.
Agra Book Club, Agra.

Allen, J. Esq. Calcutta.

Anderson, G. M. Esq. Caleutta.
Artillery Book Club, Dum-Dum.

Barlow, J. H. Esq. Bagundee.

Barrett, M. Esq. Calcutta. __

Beatson, Lieut.-Col. W. S. Ditto.

Beckett, J. O. Esq. Coel.

Bedford, Capt. J. care of J. Palmer, Esq.
Calcutta.

Bell, Dr. H. P. Calcutta.

Bengal Club, Ditto.

Beresford, H. Esq. —

Bird, R. M. Esq. Allahabad.

Blake, Capt. B., care of A. Smith, Esq.
Calcutta. .

, Lieut. M. T., 56th, Dinapur.

Blechynden, A. H. Esq. Calcutta.

Boileau, Capt. J. T., Engineers, Futtey-

ghur.

, Lieut. A. H. E. Engineers, G.
T.S. Agra.

Book Club, 24thN. I. care of Mr. T. Ostell.

Boulderson, H. S. Esq. Futteyghur.

, S. M. Esq. Moradabad.

Boutrous, F. Esq.

Bramley, Dr. M. J. Calcutta.

Brander, J. M. Esq. Pooree.

Bridgman, J. H. Esq. Goruckpore.

Brown, Capt. W. Seharanpur.

, G. F. Esq. Cape.

Brownlow, C. Esq. Calcutta.

Bruce, W. Esq. Ditto.

Butter, Dr. D. Sultanpur, Oude.

Byrn, W. Esq. Calcutta.

Barrow, H. Esq. care of Mr. Healey, H.
Co.’s Dispensary.

Batten, J. H. Esq. Seharunpur.

Betts, C. Esq, Calcutta.

Bonham, Capt. Arracan.

Borradaile, H. Esq. Calcutta.

Brodie, Lieut. T. Assam.

Buchanan, Dr. W. M. Muzzuffernugur,

Meerut.

Calcutta Periodical Book Society.
Campbell, Dr. D. Mirzapur.
-———__—_,, Dr. A. Nipal.
——_—, J. Esq. Cawnpore.
—_——, Dr. A. Moulmein.
Carte, Dr. W. E. Hansi.

Cheek, Dr. G. N. Banecoorah.

Coignard, E. Esq. Jungheepore.

Colvin, Major J. Engineers, Kurnal.

Conolly, Lieut. E. B. care of F. Macnagh-
ten, Esq. Calcutta.

Conoylal Tagore, Baboo, Calcutta.

Cope, Gunner, Meerut.

Cordier, Capt. &e. &c. Chandernagore.

Cracroft, W. Esq.

Crawfurd, W. Esq. Banda.

, J. W. Esq. Calcutta.
Crommelin, Capt. A. Engrs. Barrackpore.
Cunningham, Lieut. J. D. Eng. Calcutta.

, Lieut. A. Eng. Benares.
Currie, F. Esq. Ghazipore.

Chunar Book Club, care of T. Ostell, Esq.
Calcutta.
Cartwright, Capt. Agra.

Davidson, Capt. J. E. Lucknow.
Debudé, Capt. H. Engrs. Delhi.
Dixon, Capt. C. G. Ajmere.

Dorin, J. A. Esq. Ditto.

Douglas, H. Esq. Patna.
Drummond, Capt. J. G. Allahabad.
Dunlop, Lieut.-Col. W. Calcutta.

Edgeworth, M. P. Esq. Ambala.
Editor, Calcutta Courier.

, Chinese Repository.

, Asiatic Journal, England.
Elliot, J. B. Esq. Patna.

, H. M. Esq. Meerut.

Erskine, D. Esq. Elambazar

Fagan, Lieut. G. H. Neemuch.

, C. W. Esq. Seeonee, Jabbalpur.
Fane, W. Esq. Allahabad.

Fergusson, J. Esq. Calcutta.

Fiddes, Col. T. Muttra.

Finnis, Capt. J. Agra.

Fisher, Lieut. T. Kachar.

Fitzgerald, Capt. W. R. Engrs. Calcutta.
Fordyce, Lieut. J. Azimgurh.

Forster, R. W. Esq. Furrukhabad.
Fraser, H. Esq. Dehli.

,A. Esq. Ditto.

, C. A. Esq. Mynporee.

Garden, Dr. A. Calcutta.
Gerard, Capt. P. Subatoo.
Gordon, R. Esq. Calcutta.
Gorton, W. Esq. Benares.
Gowan, Capt. E. P. Calcutta.

SUBSCRIBERS.

Graham, J. Esq. Calcutta.
Grant, J. W. Esq. Ditto.

, Dr. J. Ditto.

Gray, E. Esq. Calcutta.
Greenlaw, C. B. Esq. Ditto.
Gubbins, C. Esq. Delhi.

Hamilton, H. C. Esq. Monghyr.

Harding, Ben. Esq. Calcutta.

Harris, F. Esq. Ditto.

Hart, Dr. T. B. Dinapur.

Hasted, G. Esq. Benares.

Hearsey, Major J. B. Com, 2nd Local
Horse, Sagur.

Homfray, J. Esq. care of Messrs. Jessop
and Co. Calcutta.

Howrah Dock Company, Ditto.

Hutchinson, Major G. Engrs. Calcutta.

Hutton, Lieut. T. Neemuch.

Hyderabad Book Society, Hyderabad.

Hogg, Capt. Delhi.

Heatly, S. G. Esq. Calcutta.

Inglis, R. Esq. Calcutta. ;
Irvine, Major A. Engrs. C. B. Calcutta.

Jackson, Dr. A. Calcutta.
Jenkins, Capt. Fras. Assam.

Kali Kissen, Maharaja, Bahadur, Cal.
Kean, Dr. Arch. Moorshedabad.
Kossipersaud Ghose, Baboo, Calcutta.
Kittoe, Lieut. Barrackpore.

Kennedy, Major C. W. Calcutta.

Laidly, J. W. Esq.

Laing, J. W. Esq. Simlah.
Lamb, Dr. Geo. Dacca.
Lambert, W. Esq. Allahabad.
Laughman, R. J. Esq. Dumow.
Lindsay, Col. A. Dum-Dum.
Lloyd, Capt. Rich. Calcutta.

, Major W. A. Rungpore.
Louis, T. Esq. Allahabad.
Lowther, R. Esq. Lucknow.
Lumsden, Capt. J. Futteyghur.

Macdonald, Lieut. R. Sagur.

Macdowall, W. Esq. Rungpore,

MacGregor, Dr. W. L. Loodianah.

Macleod, Col. D. Engrs. Moorshedabad.

Manson, Capt. J. Bittour.

Martin, Lieut. R. Engrs. Sheerghatty.

Masters, W. Esq- Calcutta.

Milner, Capt. E. T. Messrs. R. C. Jen-
kins and Co.

Military Board, Calcutta.

Montgomery, Dr. W. Penang.

Morley, C, Esq. Calcutta.

Morris, G. J. Esq. Patna.

Mouat, Lt. Sir J. A. Bt. Engrs. Calcutta.

Muller, A. Esq. Calcutta.

Murray, Capt. H. R. Noacolly.

Mozafferpore Book Club, Tirhoot.

Millet, F. Esq. Calcutta.

Military Library Society, Mhow.

Macleod, D. F. Esq. Seeonee.

Xlll

Mussooree Book Club.

Marshall, Capt. G. T. Calcutta.

Martin, Dr. J. Calcutta.

Mohun Lal Munshi.

McCosh, Dr. J. Assam.

Moore, H. Esq. care of T. Ostell, Esq.

McClelland, Dr. J. Messrs. Cantor and
Co.

Napier, Lieut. J. Engrs. Seharunpore.
Nicolson, Capt. M. Jubbulpore.
——__,, S. Esq. Calcutta.

Officers, 73rd N. I. Barrackpore.

, 12th Regt. N. I. Allahabad.
——., 22nd Regt. N. I. Nusseerabad.
Ommaney, Lieut. E. L. Engrs. Agra.
, M. C. Esq. Baitool.

Oglander, Lieut. Col. Meerut.

Parental Ac. Institution, Calcutta.
Parker, H. M. Esq. Ditto.

Persidh Narain Sing, Baboo, Benares.
Pigg, T. Esq. Calcutta.

Playfair, Dr. Geo. Meerut.

Plumb, J. B. Esq. Calcutta.

Poole, Col. C. Ditto.

Presgrave, Col. D. Ditto.

Proprietor of the Englishman Press, Do.

Rajkrishna Mukarjy, Fort William.
Ranken, Dr. J. Calcutta.

Rattray, R. H. Esq. Calcutta.
Renny, Lieut. T. Engrs. Cawnpore.
Robertson, T. C. Esq. Calcutta.
Ross, Capt. D. Gwalior.

Row, Dr. J. Barrackpore.
Richards, Benj. Esq. Monghyr.
Reid, Dr. A. Boolundshuhr.

Sale, Lieut. T. H. Delhi.

Sanders, Capt. E. Engrs. Calcutta.

Sandys, T. Esq. Patna.

Satchwell, Capt. J. Agra.

Saunders, J. O. B. Esq. Allyghur.

Sevestre, Robt. Esq. Calcutta.

Siddons, Lieut. J. Engrs. Chittagong.

, G. J. Esq. Calcutta,

Shaw, T. A. Esq. care of Messrs. Bruce
and Co. Calcutta.

Sleeman, Capt. W. H. Jabbulpore.

Sloane, W. Esq. Tirhoot.

Smith, Col. T. P. Dinapur.

, 5. and Co. Calcutta.

, Capt. E. J. Engrs. Allahabad.

Smoult, W. H. Esq. Calcutta.

Smyth, Capt. W. H. Engrs. Ditto.

Speed, D. W. H. Esq. Ditto.

Spiers, A. Esq. care of Messrs, Colvin
& Co.

Spilsbury, Dr. G. G. Jabbulpore.

Stacy, Major L. R. Allyghur.

Stainforth, F. Esq. Goruckpore.

Stevenson, Dr. W. Lucknow,

Stokes, Dr. J. Humeerpore.

Swiney, Dr. J. Calcutta.

Sylhet Book Club, Sylhet.

Syttasharan Ghoshal, Calcutta.

XIV

Stevenson, Dr. W. Malacca.

Spiers, Col. A. Ajmere.

Stewart, J. N. Esq. Messrs. Muller
Richie and Co.

Thomas, BH. T. Esq. Almorah.
Thompson, Capt. G. Engrs. Hazaribagh.
———., Capt. J. Engrs. Calcutta.
Thoresby, Capt. C. Delhi.

Thornton, J. Esq. Azimghur.

Tickell, Col. R. Engrs. Barrackpore.
Tregear, V. Esq. Jaunpore.

Trade Association Rooms, Calcutta.
Trail, G. W. Esq. Kemaon.
Tremenhere, Lieut. G. B. Engrs. Delhi.
Turner, T. J. Esq. Cawnpore.

Vicary, Lieut. N. Berhampore.

SUBSCRIBERS.

Udny, C. G. Esq. Calcutta.

Walters, H. Esq. Cape.

Warner, Capt. J. H. Bauleah.

Waugh, Lieut. A.H. Engrs. Dehra Doon.

Wells, F. O. Esq. Allahabad.

Western, Lieut. J. R. Engrs. Delhi.

White, Rev. E. Cawnpore.

Wilkinson, W. Esq. Pooree.

———., L. Esq. Assistant Resident,
Bhopal.

Wise, Dr. T. A. care of T. Ostell, Esq.

, J. P. Esq. Dacca.

Wooburn, Dr D. Sherghatty.

Woollaston, M. W. Esq. Calcutta.

Wilkinson, Capt. T. Hazaribagh.

Subscribers at Bombay, &c.

The Bombay Asiatic Society.

Editor, Bombay Literary Gaz.

Burn, A. Esq. Assist. Surgeon, Akulcote.

Burnes, Lieut. A. Kutch.

R. C. Chambers, Esq. Surat.

Capt. Thos. Jervis, Engineers, Bombay.

J.S. Law, Esq. Surat.

Dr. J. McNeil, with the Persian Em-
bassy, vid Bombay.

J. J. Malvery, Esq. Bombay.

C. Moorhead, Esq. Mahabaleshur Hills.

Dr. J. McLennan, Bombay.
Capt. R. Mignan, Ditto.
Rugghonauth Hurry Chundjee.
Dr. Geo. Smytton, Ditto.
Lt. R. Shortreede, Poona.
Rev. J. Stevenson, Ditto.
Shrecreestra Wassoodewjee, Chief Se-
cretary’s Office, Bombay.
Hon’ble J. Sutherland, Ditto.
Captain G. Twemlow, Arungabad.
W. Wathen, Esq. Bombay.

Subscribers at Madras.

Dr. Baikie, Neelgherries.
Lieut. J. Braddock, Madras.
Lieut. Balfour.

R. Cole, Esq.

Col. W. Cullen.

Lieut. T. Ditmas.

H. S. Fleming, Esq.

J. M. Heath, Esq.

Madras Club.

Col. J. S. Fraser.

W. Gilchrist, Esq.

Lieut. S. Macpherson.

Dr. J. G. Malcolmson.

J.C. Morris, Esq.

Hon’ble W. Oliver.

J. B. Pharoah, Esq.

T. G. Taylor, Esq. H. C. Astronomer.
Dr. J. Mouat, Bangalore.

Subscribers in England.

Lieut. J. S. Burt, Engineers.
Sir Charles Grey.
J. F. Royle, Esq.

W. Saunders, Esq.
G. Swinton, Esq.
Stephenson, J. Esq.

Subscribers in Ceylon.

The Hon’ble G. Turnour.
The Hon’ble Granville.

The Kandy Library.

Periodical works with which the Journal is interchanged.
Prof. Jameson’s Edinburgh Journal of Science.

Chinese Repository.
Asiatic Journal of London.

Monthly Journal, edited by S. Smith and Co. Calcutta.
United Service Journal, ditto by J. H. Stocqueler, Esq.

Literary Journal of the Madras As. Soc.

Calcutta Christian Observer.

The Journal is circulated to all learned Societies entitled to receive a copy of the

Asiatic Society’s Researches.

CONTENTS.

No. 37.—JANUARY.

Page

J.—Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. By M. Alexander Csoma de Kéris,
II.—Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree, with a Geological
Sketch of the Country, and Brief Account of the Customs, &c. of its

1

42 —

Inhabitants. By Lieut. Wm. Foley,........... ataslere ete tens Mcrae eee tate 20

I1I.—Description of the (so called) Mountain Trout of Kemaon. By Dr. J.
M’Clelland, Assistant Surgeon, 30th Regt. N. I. ......... SeeReeastelclete . 39

IV.—Discovery of the Genuine Tea Plant in Upper Assam,.......... ...-0..

V.—Abstract of Meteorological Observations at Nasirabad. By Lieut.-Col.
BET ePSPOOLLV Ele). tere steerer cea aia e cieinte ere ote ee ee Te aie ee Rte Sia: ara etna a,b 43

Vi.—Longitude of Nasirabad by Tanke Transits and by Observations of acd
Culminating Stars. By Lieut.-Col. Thomas Oliver,...............000005 52

VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society,...... Sido bade Meiaele sleiciatetst 5b tt weed

VIII.—Miscellaneous.

1. Explanation of the differences in the quantity of rain at different
CLEVATIONS y<\0.sicicie ss sree MW igaveccuvay mia yererettie ete ACREAGE BE CICIDEC TORE CARICTce ce Te ERROR ose 59
2. An unusual Sea-Monster in the Bay,............ Bid OlStmeno Oicachtne OG ODO 62
3. Suspension of the Survey of the Brahmaputra River,.. 63
PRG NPELCOLOIOP ICA LUCRISCE artic os'cc.e cbse cat ere tee oe baluels cele Mahe Bie ole peel Gt
No. 38.—FEBRUARY.

I.—Some Account of a Sect of Hindu Schismatics in Western India, calling
themselves Ramsanéhi, or Friends of God. By Capt. G. E. Westmacott,
Asst. to the Gov. Gen.’s Agent, N- EB. Frontier,.. 2.0.0.2... 80s weka cues 65

If.—Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree, with a Geological
Sketch of the Country, and Brief account ofthe Customs, &c. of its Inha-
bitants. By Lieut. Wm. Foley. Withamap, Plate IV.......... ..... 82

I1I.—Memorandum ofan Excursion to the Tea Hills which produce the ictes
tion of Tea known in Commerce under the designation of Ankoy Tea. By
G. J. Gordon, Esq....... 9i8)6.9 ens ole) « SodlWoms agoseC erefotetelsicfatetevatal tuts ete toleets 95

IV.—Observations on an Article in Loudon’s Magazine of Natural History, on
the subject of the Albatross. By Lieut. Thomas Hutton, 37th Regt. N. I. 106

V.—Roof of the New Iron Foundery at Kasipur near Calcutta,.......... Ago oeL ue

VI.—Miscellaneous.
1.—Desiderata and Recommendations of the British Association for the

Promotion of Science,..... eisregeter st ctokorens COIS Om a ree aie aE he aN y16
2.—Manilla Indigo, (so called,)........ Sooand HdeépoosoEnbooonuadetbagdg ly

VII.—Meteorological Register,......2.-. cece erceeecreeereee sta er atelateva cereeneitia O

No. 39.—MARCH.

I.—Account of a Visit to the Ruins of Simroun, once the capital of the Mi-
thila province. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. Resident in Nipal,.............. 123

I1.—Further particulars of the Sarun and Tirhut Laths, and account of Seer
Buddha Inscriptions found, the one at Bakhra, in Tirhut, the other at
Sarnath, near Benares. By James Prinsep, Sec. As. Soc. &c.. 124

TII.—Excursions to the Ruins and Site of an Ancient City near Bakhra, 13
cos north of Patna, and six north from Singhea. (Extracted from the

128

Tourdaliof Mr.1d~ StePHENSOM,)... 05+ ose 0s 0 10\e clnieiniele sfe'e'/azvio-wls|e.ofe,che\e'syo

XVl CONTENTS.

Page
IV.—Report on the Island of Socotra. By Lieut. J. R. Wellsted, Indian
Navy, Assistant Surveyor,.......-..-.- wale vie oitie cisislels « site cre SGA JomaIsc 138
V.—Note on an Inscription on the Mandara hill near Bhagelpur, (forming a
postcript to Article I11. of the present number,)..... twisleie sisiaieie a ¥ia\tie wee - 166
VI.—Extracts from a Journal kept during a Voyage from England to Calcutta,
in 1831.7 By Lient. 2. Ebutton, a 7th: Nic lsc cmtaeres- sterseetee taste eintieircrinen OL Od
VII.—Account of Oxygyrus; a new Genus of Pelagian Shells allied to tiie
Genus Atlanta of Lesueur, with a Note on some other Pelagian Shells
lately taken on board the Ship Malcolm. By W. H. Benson, Esq. panes

Civil Service,......... 0:8 o'eie wieuejaiels’ssletersley s[eaetere’s w:atele lols taiele CIstC rio ener Lae
VIII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic|/Society, sissies cs <> cle ceeicice cele eee mn Lad
IX.—Meteorological Registers: asics ieieeicleis\sllauisic/alelo)) «/sicielsicl-loiainieiatei eee iat:

No. 40.—APRIL.

I.—Description of Ancient Temples and Ruins at Chardwar in Assam. By Cap-
tain G. E. Westmacott, Assistant, Governor General’s Agent, N. E.
Frontier, ......> aka eine er efotoirioier ehavelatte Siois pela /stoleveto niotos) Serre ae

II.—Remarks on an Inscription in tip Ranja and Tibetan (U’chhén) ‘Chaene:
ters, taken from a Temple on the Confines of the Valley of Nepal. By

B. H. Hodgson), Esqeohe@stdentt, 1.1. «areioiae as!sicis) ctaienaclatweleinipele/s mieten rein ierere tere 196
III.—Journal of a Tour through the iaiacd of Raabe ee, (ema Sans.

Ramavati,) on the Arracan Coast. By Lieut. William Foley,............ 199
IV.—On the amount of Rain-fall at Calcutta, as affected by the Declination of

the Moon. . By the Rev. R. Byerest, ......05sscess a) sess nyslels ere OT
V.—Further Note on the Inscription from Sdrnath, printed in the last No. of

this Journal. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq....... swpelate sis: sieiciclelelsiy/otoie tenants 211
VI,—Description of two new species of Carinaria, lately discovered in the Indian

Ocean. By W. H. Benson, Esq. Bengal Civil Service,......-.... selaieeae oo)
VII.—On a new species of Snake discovered in the Doab,.... **...... canes) Shy
VIII.—Notice of an Extraordinary Fish. By H. Piddington, Esq,............ 218

1X.—Rules for Calculating the Lengths of the Drop-bars of Suspension Bridges,
the Length and Deflection of the Chain rise of the Roadway, &c. By Cap-
tain) I=; Phomson,yMineineers ga sitesi cake eicltialeis « Sones gee slaia (als iatetatatar
X.—Table shewing the Weight or Pressure which a cylindrical wrought-iron
Bolt will sustain when supported at the ends, and bonded in the middle of
its Length. By Captain J. Thomson, Engineers, ........ ninie oleisiaitare soee 225
XI.—A Table of the Scantlings of Beams of Teak or Saul Wood, to sustain a
Terrace Roof not exceeding seven inches in thickness; the deflection not
to exceed one-fortieth of an inch for each foot of length. By the same,.... 227
XII.—On the Temperature of Deep Wells tothe west of the Jamna. By the

222

Rev. Re EVerest.) rpciteeiteisteietstarelcils ScOCb bor Pedoupbootes sack Sdiebssc 229
XIII.—Abstracts of a Meteorological Register kept at ‘‘ Caineville,’” fixe
sooree (Masiri.) By S. M. Boulderson, Esq. ...... ASE SO S6Sq00 sOisaasad 2a
XIV.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society,...... Sooosbenoouee S50 B2e36 2 aces Laas
XV .—Mietegrolopical Register, . . scaciine cles visisaieia(sise nem, sles 05 a)nc siete sieee 2a
No. 41,—MAY.

I,—Sketch of the fowr Mendngkibowe States, in the interior of the Malayan
Peninsula. By Lieut. J. T. Newbold, 23rd Regt. Madras Native Infantry, 241

1I.—Comparison of the Heights of the Barometer, with the distance of the
Moon from the Celestial Equator. By the Rev. R. Everest, ........----. 252

{11.—Collimation Error of Astronomical Instruments. By J. G. Taylor, Esq.
H.C. Astronomer; Madrasse¢os esis « - vecununtelsiitcvG@ebn «hin eehin Gee p sme 2oe

CONTENTS. xvil

Page
1V.—On the Strata of the Jumna Alluvium, as exemplified in the Rocks and
Shoals lately removed from the bed of the River; and of the sites of the
Fossil Bones discovered therein. By Serjeant Edmund Dean,............ 26)
V.—Note on the Gold Washing of the Gimti River. By Lieut. Cautley,

LAsnE. AM ondtoou BOOEGeUGde OBO 6 UeOeUs OeeE OF sobqre roads sorcaoan eee 279
VI.—Notice of the Nipalese Spirit Still. By A. Campbel, Esq. M. D.
attached to the Nipal Residency.......... Seer iedinl atthe soe" OM pA og td Gotit!s4 282

VII.—Note on an Inscription found near the aoa Mound, in Tirhut. By
Borereuioet, BSG..(Pl. VIL. ME. 6.) 5 oc esis « epsien cle +oeims itis sdinn sc sins eaee) 280

VIII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society,........cesccece coscccscscscrcees 287

IX.—Meteorological Register, ..........cecsseeeeeeee woleistetseiaie selate aieustelslasisih 20

No. 49.—J UNE.

I.—On the Government and History of Naning in the Malay Peninsula. By
Lieut. J. T. Newbold, 23rd Regt, Madras Nat. Inf...... sie aieceueecisas meeiae 200

II.—Description of Heavandoo Pholo, the Northern Atoll of the Maldive
Islands. By Lieut. T. Powel, I. N. Assistant Surveyor. Plate XVIII. 319

III.—Examination of a Mummy Head, supposed to be brought from Egypt

by Lieut. Archbold. By Dr. George Evans, ... .....0...020- nodowencLe 322
IV.—Memorandum on the Fetus of the Squalus Maximus. By Dr. J. T.
Pearson, Curator,......... crests epeitte ¢.cteke's icleles © oem sees let of Malclede melee? Doe

V.— Results of the Observations made on the Tides at Madras, feild the 31st
May, to the 10th October, 1821, by means of a Tide-gauge fixed near the

north-east angle of the Fort, ....... pnoedahdngocs bocnsbabcouduoboeos cece 325
Vi.—Further Notes and Drawings of Bactrian and Indo- Seythie Coins. By
AMER, PLINISE Py SECs (OCC a ole 0 cieleieleicis = whelvivicie sisle'e s.apeieiele Abate HePake ots HI S27

VIT.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ........ccce00 secccesccecceccsess 348
VIII.—Miscellaneous.

1. Proposal to publish, by Subscription, an Illustrated Work on the

Zoology of Nipal,......-.00-+++-. AP GR. once eh Mobs sehils Aehleb cites gae

2. Proposed Meteorological Combination in Southern Africa, ............ 358
3. Statistics and Geology of Kemaon, ........002- scscesscdoverscvesess 35D
IX.—Meteorological Register, ......cccccccscccscscccscscccccscscccssecces 360

No. 43.—JULY.
I.—Notice of the Temple called Seo Byjnauth, (Siva Vaidyan4tha) discovered
by Sergeant E. Dean, on the 3rd December, 1834, on the Hill of Un-
chapahar, in the Shekawati Territory, ..........scescecccccecesseccsesss B6l
II.—Restitution and Translation of the Inscription found in the Ruins of
the Mountain-Temple of Shekawati. By W. H. Mill, D. D. Principal
of Bishop’s College, Vice-President, &c. &.......02%% e200 seserccccce 367
III.—Notice of Pugan, the Ancient Capital of the Burmese Empire. By
Lieut.-Col. H. Burney, H. C.’s Resident at Ava,.......ceceseecesecccces 400
IV.—Register of the fall of Rain, in inches, at Dacca, from 1827 to 1834, By
DD rreu GeWVis WADA, 'srataltelsia'e: sie wleilsie’scoleicte starelaraiecn cishe enetetcioteeteleie homens LAGE
V.—Register of the Thermometer at Ambala, for 1834. By M. P. Edgeworth,
VI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ...... scsssccscccscceccccoscsesesce 407
VII.— Miscellaneous.
1.—Abandoned Oriental Works,............
2.—Burnes’ and Conolly’s Travels, ........0scsceessen-coscces sovesce ALL
Si—Cevylonesey EUIStOLY,, se -1e), c/sialoinlceicieveieicveka'e tictouie stele ale ineeteetat.! 6-40.
MeV UADIe: PEDEtAIs, WOLKSs selec cisinigicciwin's viorcipityeiere mielevciniGicle) (sislciereiec» (1 r8Os

voce ce sesvesreccsreveccs £10

XVlil CONTENTS.

Page
5.—Botany of the Nilgiris and Southern India, .......-s.eseecsseeseess 41)
§.—Force of. the Unicorn Fishy) < ese... 6s or oiseiw oaisinie clelisissiccicls ein biele maison Alle
VIII.—Meteorological Register, ...... «/afeid fe iste pacingeeke (eae ouitte pice tet wont 412
No. 44.—AUGUST.
I.—Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. (Nil-giri.) By Dr. P. M. Benza,
Surgeon to the Honorable the Governor of Madras,............+2+0e00% 413
1T-——Notes of-a Tour through Palestine,” c/-j.10.. «c'<1-/aclelsle sisic’« o cetes sarcaieiicieneerets 438
11I1.—Characters of three New Species of Indian Fresh-water Bivalves. By
Isaac Lea; with Notes, by W. H. Benson, Esq. ......-...-- seer ADO
IV.—Description of the Bearded Vulture of the Himalaya. By B. H. peel
Bsq.) Residentin Nipal, yerrcrierteeereian ie steel erofalioioteieialstetaietei atten tetetas deve 454
~~ Vi——-Red-billed Erolia. By. the samegoein. o= se sieea:~ «epee eae eajeceetad 458
VI.—Hints for the Preservation of Objects of Natural History. By J. T.
Pearson,: ESqeiaiecisies cece raeteieere metefetstemetey steve tie oe asdccarb das ougs nislesies 402
VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, .......-....-- miayaieh Sy qpsteiatee tema ea npaplk Ae
VIII.—Meteorological Register, ......... Soke oer atlsiare aioisatdieerea/ neue sitio tel iulajehereis'a ne
No. 45.—SEPTEMBER.
I.—Account of the Inscriptions upon two sets of Copper Plates, found in the
Western part of Gujerat. By W. H. Wathen, Esq. Persian Secretary to
the ‘Bombay (Government; 2210" SID. tens. see ecelcee Naame metals ate Sarin 477
* I1.—Synopsis of the Thar and "Ghoral Antelopes. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq.
Resident in Nipal,...........- Seiad ob adooossos hotivedladionicwomog aS 487
I1I.—On the Wild Goat and Wild Sheep of Himalaya, with Reiners on the
genera Capra and Ovis. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. Resident in Nipal,.. . 490
IV.—On the Fossil Bones of the Jumna River. By Edmund Dean, Serjeant,
Sappers end) Niners, wens cece sii nn on eeeeiee eer ete re eee ese 405
V.—Note on the preceding. By James Prinsep, Secretary, &c...... Sore Matai > THOU
VI.—On the Fossil Elk of the Himalaya. By Lieut. W. E. Baker, Engineers, 506
VII.—Note on the Vegetable Impressions in Agates. By Mr. J. Stephenson, 507
VIII.—Chemical Analyses. By James Prinsep, Secretary, &c............ cess 509
1X.—Horary Meteorological Observations made at Calcutta on the 21st—22nd
September. By James Prinsep, Secretary, &c........... o\e,0\ dierete verte etetaton OLA:
X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society,......ccccceeseecs sevcoee ose? SIG
XI.—Extracts from Scientific Correspondence,..........eeceeceere bho Tc sieves) LG
1.—Prof. WHEWELL on. Semimenstrual Tidal Inequality,................ ib.
2.—Sir J. HERSCHELL on correction of Astronomical Instruments,...... 518
3.—Lt. JacoB on the correction of the Index Error,....... HiPatese ce cee LS
4,.—Dr. McLELLAND on the Fossil Shells of Chirra Punji,.............. 520
5.—Mr. STEVENSON on the Pea Stalactite of Tibet,......... Me Hatetterte cen ee
6.—Observations of Halley’s Comet at the Madras Observatory,.......... 521
XI1.—Illustrations of Nipalese Zoology,.........-se2+00- Fie Merde te a totter NSU,
XIII.— Miscellaneous Extracts.
1.—Influence of the Moon on the Weather. By F. Marcet, ............ 525
2.—On the Composition of the Rangoon Petroleum, with Remarks on the
Composition of Petroleum and. Naphtha in general. By William Gre-
Op IDS Jag TS Sal Up goon onepnsooboS a eee ce Mone Meee aD
3.—Extracts from Brapsedings of Zoological Society of London.—1834,.... 528
4,—Minerals of the Trappean Rocks of Bombay,..........e.e+eeeseseees 530

XIV.—Meteorological Register, ..0.<..:0-0-0 Peco coee et ooeeGeoe Ceoeeeseeeeesees

532

CONTENTS. xix

Page
No. 46.—OCTOBER.
i.—Report on some Inscriptions found at Hammam, on the Southern Coast
of Arabia, 1835. By Messrs. T. G. Hutton, Asst. Surgeon, and Lieut.

J. Smith, of the Palinurus Surveying Vessel,.......2.+..0..e06. 4 SAGULIGOM ABE
1I.—Account of Singie Ujong, one of the States in the interior of Malacca.
By Ensign T. J. Newbold, 23rd Regt. Madras Light Infantry,.......... 537

I1I.—Journal of an attempted Ascent of_the river Min, to visit the Tea Plan-
tations of the Fuhkin Province of China. By G. J. Gordon, Esq.

Secretary Tea Committee,............ shodeebayataey ae feltields SYeha «the. auiele a olor ole 563
1V.—Selected Specimens of the Sub-HimAlayan Fossils in the DAdupur Collec-

tion. By Lieut. W. E. Baker, Engineers, ............ccveceeccceccceccs 565
V.—List of Specimens from Bilwar. Collected by Lieut. Vicary, in De-

cember, 1834,..-... oper pases’ siplaytos ecodebayagep ere: chsas ie ole teaiicha kde Gane « 20. SRMACLI Eta 571

VI.—Note on Thylacinus iar otiigalated Extracted from the Osteological
Section of the Catalogue of the Museum of the Asiatic Society. By J.T.
PRSAUSOMi ENS cee cba denis wi =e teveh ovata la (eros SMS Sareea, Nasieat anal ols GOH. Fags toe es yi

VII.—Analysis of Copper Ore from Nellore; with notice of the Copper Mines
at Ajmir and Singhana. By James Prinsep, Secretary, &c.......... .... 574

VIII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ......5.cccccececees coceees veces e OSD

IX.—Meteorological Register, .............eeee0 oe Rieirterens ia. «ts atl bd oldie kets - 588

No. 47.—NOVEMBER.

I.—Notes taken by Captain C. M. Wade, Political Agent at Ludiana, in 1829,
relative to the Territory and Government of Iskardoh, from information
given by Chardgh Ali, an agent deputed to him in that year by Ahmad
Shah, the Gelpo or ruler of that country, ............0005 one “plots » 589

11.—Journal of a Tour through Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. By Capt.

R. Mignan, Bombay European Regt. F. L. S. and M. R.A. S........... 602

I1].—On the connection of various ancient Hindu coins with the Gresihn or
Indo-Scythic series. By James Prinsep, Secretary, &c........... etRercrsauntie 621

IV.—Application of Iron Reds, proposed to compensate for the strain occasioned
by the tension of the strings upon Piano Fortes, thereby to prevent warping,
and to render them more durable and better adapted to keep longer in tune.

By Col. D. Presgrave,........ GfEos Sadunouees Sogn ononao sosermcoe -o- 643

V.—Notice of two beds of Coal discovered. By Captain J. R. Ouseley, P. A..
to the Commissioner at Hoshangabad, near Bara Garahwara, in the Valley

orthe Narbada, Pl. TERE (ois ice sicieivve ciel: sis.0'0 avateNefchaWale, sfoars efor ete! si ste orccve 648
VI.—Specific Description of a new species of Cervus, by B. H. Hodgson, Esq. 649
VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society,........ Peheteblaratefakeys terete ceteversin ret sieucia leis 650
VIII.—Meteorological Register, ............... AG s come S doch osc orcas oan KEP

No. 48.—DECEMBER.
I1.—Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. By W. H. Wathen, Esq. Persian
Secretary to the Bombay Government,........... eWatefeletelatete fet e/a) sicievetelsic - 653
II.—Some Account of the Hill Tribes of the Piney Hills in the Madura District.
Extracted from the MS. Journal of the late Major Ward, Madras European
Regiment, communicated by Capt. T. J. Taylor,................ od donoab 664
{I1I.—Notice of Ancient Hindu Coins, continued from page 640. By James
Prinsep, Secretary, &c........ paobe ca 4aen eeiedetete selslesafiiicclal eie\helsiel«/elcrsie| OOS
1V.—Geological Observations made in a journey from Mussooree (Masti) to
Gungotree (Gangautri). By the Rev. R. Everest,...........csccesecee - 690
V.—Note on the Fossil Camel of the Sub-Himalayas. By Lieut. W. E. Baker,
MUNN IME CLA siMatateiaicterelcie cicicic)) o\ofs\sisielstetehcisiote’ainia siaalieleleie\s iclslcis! visialeisialsisinicie soe OOS

».@.4 CONTENTS.

Page
VI.—Examination of a Mineral Exudation from Ghazni. By H. Piddington,
DERG apocugano auc Sh ae ars Actelttoleie Nie raltte elt wie tnte Sie cteternte Bins vinislee\s sis) vie fale aisiele MOO

VII.—Corrected Character of the Genus Cuvieria of Rang, and notice of a
second species inhabiting the Tropical Indian Ocean. By W. H. Benson,

Ielg 15 (Ob to on sono ouddndbe TB DAS PI uOeOOr ODEO a Cooacmcno dren olaoan pm CEL
VIII.—Synopsis of the Vespertilionidze of Nipal. By B. i. Hodgson, Esq.
Resident at Katmandu,...... cacetts BSI OOuO DOO te eeicee cid ees eiciteitecies OGD

IX.—Note on the Red-billed Erolia. By the same,...........-.-eeceeeeeees JO01
X.—Description of the little Musteline animal, denominated Kathiah Nyul in
the Catalogue of the Nepdlese Mammalia. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq.
Resident at Katmandu,....... JAS OCOOLO -anOOGIDODE Peiols «lc ojereistelcrsrmamieteisi ena Ue
X1I.—Further Discovery of Coal Beds in Assam. By Captain F. Jenkins, .... 704
XII.--Synopsis of Fossil Genera and Species from the upper deposits of the
tertiary strata of the Sivalik Hills, in the collection of the authors. By
Capt. P. T. Cautley, Supt. Doab Canal, and H. Falconer, M. D. Supt.
Botanical Garden, Seharanpur. Northern Doab, Nov. 15th, 1835,........ 706
XIII.—Note on the Asurhar of the Rajmahal Hills. By Capt. H. Tanner, ... 707
XIV.—Extract from a Meteorological Journal kept at Kandy, Island of Ceylon.
By, Captain Ordy Bo Bey sieves ceils) icreisictseiele sis el aomgagrasioswaloc Sts occ -- 709
XV.—Postscript to the Account of the Wild Goat of Nipal, ntti’ in the Sep-
tember No. of the Journal, page 490. By B. H. Hodgson, ei voces oe V10
XVI.—Analysis of Raw Silk. By Mr. J. W. Laidlay, ..............-.2-0.2- tbe
XVII.—Extracts from Correspondence.

1,—Note regarding the Bhilsa Monument. By Dr. Spilsbury, ..... eae TIS
2.—Note on the Sarnd4th Building. By the Baron Hugel,........ -...+. tb.
3.— Note on the occurrence of the Bhauddha Formula,...... ... ......-. 713

4.—Extract from a Journal of a Residence, and during several Journeys, in
the Province of Behar, in the years 183] and 1834. By Mr. J. Stephenson, ib.
5.—Range of the Barometer and Thermometer at Port Louis in the Mau-
ritius in 1828, by Lislet Geoffroy, Cor. Roy. As. Soc. of the French In-
stitute, for the 2nd Vol. Roy. As. Soc. Trans, ......00 ccccccecesccccee T15
XVIII.—Meteorological Register, ......cscccccccscccecccccseccecscesssece TG

ERRATA.

=e

Page 102, line 7, for ‘ (720 dollars),’ read ‘ (720=1 dollar).’

112,
124,

24, for ‘ 123’ read ‘6 feet.’

14, for ‘%)’ read ‘ x,’ for |,’ read: ,’ for +g,» read + ca
e

and for ‘ eye,’ read ‘ artsy,’

15, for ‘ arurfa,’ read ‘ qrurfay,’ banabdhi.

173, line 26, dele ‘ American.’

174,

222,
223,

224,
226,

227, in the table, in column 22 feet length of bearing, for ‘ 13°14’ read‘ 13°9.:

2, for ‘ Ofus.’ read ‘ Ofus.’
10, for ‘ periferiz,’ read ‘ peripheriz.’
29, for ‘ lacertz,’ read ‘ Incerte.’
14, for ‘ Thecleobranche,’ read ‘ Nucléobranches.’
30, for ‘ by aline,’ read ‘ hyaline.’
23, for ‘ statistics,’ read ‘ statics.’
20, for ‘ 5’ read ‘ 3.’
ft. no. ft. no.
5, read 5 X 16 + 9°8602 x2 = 99°7204.
10, for ‘ 5,° read* 3,.’
19, for ‘ decreased,’ read ‘ encreased.’

for ‘ 12°10’ read ‘ 12°9.’
Pore V2 ounead.« lack?

— line 12 from the bottom, for ‘ depth,’ read ‘ diameter,’
228, line 26, for ‘ if beams,’ read ‘ of beams.’

267

270,
271,
276,
362,

364,
365,

25, for ‘ d’appine,’ read ‘ d’appui’
6, for ‘ of,’ read ‘ by the current.’
30, for ‘ in consonance,’ read ‘ inconsonant.’
4, for ‘ irregular,’ read ‘ is pretty regular.’
14, for ‘ Wurrum,’ read ‘ Nurrum coss,’ ‘narm kos.)

7, for from bottom, for ‘ Binining,’ read ‘ Bindg mandir,’ (temple

of Ganes.)
14, for ‘ at Midug’ read ‘ at mid-day.’

16, and 17, for ‘ been seen from thence and Bandra, two villages
or towns in the said territory,’ read ‘ been seen from Thinie

and Bandra, two villages or towns in the Jat territory.’
16, for ‘ jogies,’ read ‘ jognies.’
9, for * Delhi town pillar,’ read ‘ Delhi iron pillar.’

366, 43, for ‘ Pl. xxix.’ read ‘ Pl. xxx.’

369, last line, for * vol. i. pp. 82, 86,’ read ‘ vol. ii. pp. 82, 86.’

370, Ist line of inscription, for ‘ guts’ read ‘ gufad wv
379, line 26, for ‘ quantity,’ read ‘ quality.’
399, 22, for ‘ 150 miles S. W.’ read ‘ 100 miles South.’

«* In the second volume of the JourRNAL, page 79, the name of Ellora is written Ellore, in giv-
ing the site of trap rocks penetrated by tubular calcedonies. As the rocks at Ellore are of a very
different formation, it is desirable that this error should be corrected. Ellore is near Golconda.”

XXil ERRATA.

Page 400, line 37, 38, for ‘ Maha Yazawen wen dan gyee,’ read ‘ Maha Yaza-
wen dau-gyee.’
—_ 40, 41, for ‘ Thore Khettara,’ read ‘ Thare Khettara.’
401, 31, for ‘ Nga young gyan,’ read ‘ Nga zoung gyan.’
“— 33, for ‘ at the foot of,’ read ‘ at the ford of the.’
402, 3, for ‘ Nga young gyan,’ read ‘ Nga zoung gyan.’
— 6, for ‘ Tsalen wot thaken young,’ read ‘Tsalen wot thakan
zoung.’
— 7, for ‘ Kan shye young,’ read ‘ Kan shye zoung.’
— 9, for ‘ Than bethen,’ read ‘ Than bathen.’
—_ 10, for ‘ Nga young gyan,’ read ‘ Nga zoung gyan.’
— 14, for ‘ Nga young gyan,’ read ‘ Nga zoung gyan.’
— 15, for ‘ Tsalen wot thaken,’ read ‘ Tsalen wot thakan.’
— 18, for ‘ Nga young gyan,’ read ‘ Nga zoung gyan.,’
— 21, for ‘ Nga young gyan,’ read ‘ Nga zoung gyan.’
= 30, for ‘ Yonatha,’ read ‘ Yowatha.’
403, 26, 27, for ‘ Nga young gyan,’ read ‘ Nga zoung gyan.’
—_ 28, for ‘ Male mountain,’ read ‘ Malée Mountain.’
404, 1, and 2, for ‘ Taroup maur,’ read ‘ Taroup mau,’and in the note
for ‘ Symess Taroup mion’ read - Symes’s Tirroup mion.’
— 28, 29 for ‘ Toungug:’ read ‘ Toungngu.’
_ 30, before ‘ called,’dele ‘ is.’
— 36, for ‘ Wasted,’ read ‘ washed.’
— 37, for ‘ Langa manda,’ read ‘ Lauga nanda,’ and for ‘ Anauratha
zan,’ read ‘ Anarautha zau.’
413, last line, for ‘N. S.’ read ‘ N. E.’
429, 5, for ‘ Colophonite,’ read ‘ Colophonitic rock is.’
432, 25, for ‘ erratic,’ read ‘ euritic.’
505, 22, for ‘ Eclipse,’ read ‘ Bessy Bedlam.’

Errata in the 3rd Volume.
Page 178, line 24, for ‘ Fokien, Kyanti, and Kyang-nau,’ read ‘ Fokien, Kyan-si
and Kyang-nan.’

—_ 26, for ‘ Lu-ngau-cha, read ‘ Lu-ngan-cha.’

— 27, for ‘ Paelcha,’ read ‘ Pacul-cha.’
179, 10, for ‘ 62°5’,’ read ‘ 62°.5.?

180, 3, for ‘ Kyang-nau,’ read ‘ Kyang-nan.’

— 31, for ‘54°5’ Farh. read ‘54°.5 Farh.’
181, 14, for ‘60°9’,’ read ‘ 6° to 9°.’

182, 4, from bottom, for ‘1,200 or 1,400 feet,’ read ‘ 2000 feet.’
183, Erase the section.
184, 8, from the bottom, for ‘ 29° 30’,’ read ‘ 29° to 30°.
185, 8, for + 29°30,’ read ‘29° to 30°,’
reference at the bottom of the page, for ‘ Transactions,’ &~ ©

read ‘ Asiatic Researches,’ Vol. XVI.
186, 20, for * 29°30’,’ read ‘ 29° to 30°.’
— 25, for ‘ 12 to 1,400,’ read ‘ 2000 feet.’
— 28, for ‘mean,’ read ‘ main.’

XXVII.

XXVIII.

XXXI.
XXXII.

XXXITI.

XXXIV.
XXXVI.

XXXVITI.
XXXIX.
XL.

LIST OF PLATES.

Mountain Trout of Kemaon, t0 face, scan accrcervoene PALE

. Assam tea plant, and Nipal Camellia, ~~~ Benes
. Buddhist inscription from Province Wellesley, asec
» Map of Ramri island, na anencncnonecvarncensentere neve oy coteatantee ere
. Burmese prayers lithographed, ~ccrcnrnncrarnene neanrerensoveerececece
. Roof of Kasipur Foundery, ~ smececaccenaeee ae hes ee
. Laths of Radhia and Bakr, ~ 2.0000 Ge nada stem asec ractoces
. Facsimile of inscription on Radhia Lath, ~mcmccon x ainrcece
. Image of Buddha and Sarnath inscription, ~~ s-wsrecoaeeereee
. Site of ruins at Chardwar, in Assam, wo-rcnwernarce ihe pats seen
. Ranja inscription on a Chaitya, near Kathmandu, .....~~~
. Impressions Of Malacca seals,.-nnremwnenvwrcenerrecennceresenscericece
. Geological sections of the Jumna banks, ~--wm-wwseeneere
» Ditt0 Gitt0, crnconcncensiarccennnsessaresencverccecececeressseoeceveteressve sepltene rene

: ?
BBY EO CU b Org) cece ee eetocs aictnosine go kaat th anecion “hocevbunnen tb neve ncebterecs xbowrvenenier

Bae OVO RE OEIES) 100 od UII DOO 9 re opr esac ac sace orscceitereae te scinerewan eacanesn
. Gold washings in Nahan river. Nipal still. Kesaria inscrip.

RIGEVEGY Of be, MALAI V CS ere cter eran eemecrcrecperevers arancrosceorenercactredeceds

Bie Er oe 08) ch Ered Sg areesrerare ecetetre reed eosiec cr ca vieaeavencecereantronrerend
. Inseriptions on Bactrian coins,~..0.. wi eet as En cone
XXI.

to XX VI. Bactrian coins, of Gen. Ventura’s collection,
Map of Unchapahar, Shekhavati,..-nnnnvocrernnereereree
XXIX. XXX, Temples on ditto, and architectural

CIEE Sp Neale MORRIS 9 le SIRs Snares ee Ce cites
Facsimile of Shekh4vati inscription,........ LAS fo rod Sobel eh
Map of the Neilgiris, +... Be ecomcensinneite tienes A ussuttpestebs oo
Bossils: Of Che SUM TIVO so xesenn cosacesreoetreeie ste scons mnveoscnieon
XXXYV. Ancient Hindu coins, Behat,..
XXXVITI. Hindu coins, Rajput series, ~ormennwnrncencarce ae
Connection of Indo-Scythic with Canouj coins, canoe
Hindu coins, Canouj series,.0.--0.0.~ sesceentaaeicn AS Ane rr SPER Bano
Facsimile of Gujerati inscription, ~.....«

seOM MACE OL CIELO y xi rvenne manne cn eGievts oonete ororey i ass

Transcript of ditto in modern Character, -nceerenearervesenece

. XLIII. Ethiopic inscriptions from Arabia,.....0vorcnee eters
-) Wassil Bik of the sub-Himdlayas, osc cccvmnmaccrstnsareennnciesinore
. to XLVIII. Fossils of the sub-Himélayas, hyena,
; Hindu coins, Saurdshtta SUES, spencer neces nncennrcemnnnarenens
» Ditto; second, Canouy SCries, x ccnenacnnrcechecnsecesrncarresaresenioce
@ SERIO SCY GUIC COMMS, etre ceeret eres mean aap teiets nncere me aransovendaestenione
- Compensation rods for Pianos,
- Coal beds of the Nerbada valley, ~~ +.« poms areene nee ieteeeteetan
Bearded Vulture and Red-billed Erolia, cscs we:ecerececevcesece

LOD PLLA LO DOLE LO DEDEDE DE COLO LILO ID DELO LODR ODIO

40

4.8

56

94:

92
112
121
124
134
193
198
241
262
264
266
268
284
319

348

366

361
413
506
626
674
630
636

476

486
536
506
568
684
668
628
644
648
460

Tel d
W 4 + aS

sige nla eti f5 Beet
a. Tae bare gid baste 7
re 9 io, LOEG,
ASAT Meare iat oh nies ie
Pingare “ot cuew! be r BD oY enine
atti gidve zt 3598 sydialy 1 cay ate

Wee ae ae »

i ey ’ a wee 4 4
. Sn ottge neato een ALON Gos a! ail cS

~
i re
CO ag edited a xt On aft ‘ioe
ere heii io) ee ae ae

Marea hs ls im Aang 1 ay td ar er ie apes ae

y ase weg we i sheers ee ao eh each ppoe .
5 at
a8 , ’ il

Bs Hae Nielan awe Sane ing ook «wath sgrus ty ae eu: Ni, 34 bai
cee: ite iat ta ie Fant sig a se!

ath {ecse palaces ns pe een
wiltee s- awe
Pe 5 Narre eee
i eee,
ary ope Tey Api

vay pata “Glee te penta ~.

Onl: ¥

fi fs dow tty q

y SEE Tease |
{me aN

Ot, 3) aigigpoe

>

¥
$ a
‘ S44, Any the ee

Bae BARS mapas
RRS Se

~~

ova eae
» >) BEG

ny

BES ©
SAI ANES ks Ran aohersoeene, watadl Se

aces Au pieces (heaping: |

pier hs Paeiight sat

ort , b
Sem SNES Om pee Sommng ki ya ss oa

ae :
wy ’ z
Shiite? < ati

Sf eh ete ie Ce een ens
7 as
Y Rargoy sihetS, wed im poe
Laan A Ta

sa cae: ces ella gtth

JOURNAL

OF

me LE ASIATIC SOCIETY.
No. 37.— January, 1835.

I. ao of a Tibetan Medical Work. By M. ALEXANDER Csoma
DE Koros...

Tue principal work on medicine in Tibet, is that entitled the “ rGyud
bZhi” (@a-a6 the tract in four parts). It is attributed to SuHa’xya,

though not introduced into the Kah-gyur or Stan-gyur collections.

When in Tibet I requested the Lama, my instructor in the language
of the country, to give me an account of its contents, which he did in
an abridged compilation divided, like the original, into four parts. The
present translation of the Lama’s manuscript may be interesting to
those who are curious on the subject of Tibetan literature, and the
state of medical practice in that remote part of the world. The ma-
terials of the original are as usual all derived from Sanskrit works, which
have not however hitherto been made known in an English dress.

The following is the account given in the work itself of the manner
in which this Treatise of Medicine found its way to Tibet.

In the time of Kuri-sronc DenutsAn (in the 8th or 9th century
of the Christian era) a Tibetan interpreter Barrorsana (or Vairo-
chana) having cnekeee it in Cashmir, with the assistance of a phy-
sician-pandit (4’q" He a" 7 5)Q-Dava mNon-gah) presented it to the
above mentioned Tibetan king. At that time it was received by
“‘ gyYU-THO@ a learned physician, and by several others, and after-
wards it devolved successively to others till gyu-ruoc, (the 13th in
descent, from the first) styled the New gyuTuoe, to distinguish him
from the former physician of the same name, who is called ‘ the
ancient.’ This physician much improved and propagated it; and at
that time, it is stated, nine men became learned in medicine.

The Lama, who wrote me this extract, enumerated several works
on medicine, current in Tibet, of which the most celebrated is a

B

2 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. (Jan.

commentary on the present work, entitled ‘‘ Baidtirya snon-po” (the
lapis lazuli) written by “‘ Sangs-rgyas rgya mts’ho” Byayagy’
Ha SHS 2 regent at Lassa about the end of the 17th century.

The Lama states that there are about forty books or works written
in Tibet, on medicine, besides the five volumes in the Stan-gyur collec-
tion, and the scattered occasional instructions on medicaments in the
Kah-gyur.

The chief medical school in Tibet is at Chak-phuri (ajay wy 58)
a monastery at or near Lassa. There are also two others, in middle
Tibet, of some repute, called Chang-Ztir (gq"gx).

First Part.
This is entitled x-7qQ- Hx, rtsa-vahi-rgyut the root or basis of the
3)

(medical) tract. It is divided into six chapters.
First Chapter.

In this is described how CoompanpAs (SHAKyYA) transforming himself into the
shape of a chief physician, in a forest of medical plants, delivered his instructions,
in a superb palace, ia the presence of gods, sages (or Rishis), and a large train
both of heretic and orthodox hearers.

Second Chapter.

He (SuHaxya) addressed his audience thus :—‘‘ Assembled friends! be it known
to you, that every human creature who wishes to remain in health; and
every man who desires to cure any disease, and to prolong life, must be in-
structed in the doctrine of medicine. Likewise, he that wishes for moral virtue,
wealth, or happiness, and desires to be delivered from the miseries of sickness ; as
also, he that wishes to be honoured or respected by others, must be instructed
in the art of healing.’’ Then one of the hermits or Rishis (3&"¥ G-Drang-Srong)
expressing his desire of promoting the well-being of others, requested his advice
as to the manner in which he might become instructed in the doctrine of me-
dicine. Then the teacher (SHAKYA) said: (or commanded)’’ He must be in-
structed in the four parts of the medical science, which are the

BAIS — 5 WAV Q— 5 agraays}—; and Zar QSs
root or theory, explication, instruction, and lastly manual operation; farther,
he must be instructed in the eight branches of healing; viz. 1, the curing of the
whole body; 2, of particular diseases, incident to children; 3, to women; 4,
the curing of diseases caused by evil spirits; 5, of wounds made by a knifey
spear, &c.; 6, of all sorts of venomous or poisonous infections ; 7, of the infir-
mities of old age; and 8, the increasing of virility in men, ‘These are the
principal divisions of the whole medical treatise.

The number of chapters in the four parts of this medical tract, amount to
156.

In the explanatory part, there are 11 places or sections, and 31 chapters; in
the instructive part on cures or remedies for each specified disease, there are

15 circumstances and 92 chapters ;—the last part has four divisions and 27
chapters.

1835. ] Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 3

Third Chapter.

The theory of the human constitution is illustrated by a similitude taken from the
Indian fig-tree (9q'a"a 4s ). Thus, there are three roots or trunks ; thence
arise nine stems; thence spread 47 boughs or branches; thence 224 leaves; two
blossoms, and three fruits. The explication of the simile as applied to the states
of the body. The single root or basis of diseases ; the stems, branches, and leaves
arising thence, taken or considered in a healthy and in a diseased state. Distinc-
tions with respect to wind ; ditto, with respect to bile ; as also to phlegm; their re-
spective offices, operations or influences.

There are seven supports of the body on which life depends; the chyle,
blood, flesh, fat, bone, marrow,andsemen. Description of the three sorts of
excretions or sordes of the body; ordure, urine, and sweat.

The three generative causes of disease are: lust or ardent desire; passion or
anger; dulness or ignorance. By the first is caused wind; by the 2nd, bile; by
the last, phlegm. The accessory causes of disease are four: 1, season with re-
spect to cold and heat; 2, any evil spirit ; 3, wrong use of food; and 4, ill conduct
of life.

The parts of the body, commonly subject to diseases, are six: theskin, the
flesh, tbe veins, the bones, the viscera, and the bowels.

The proper places of the threv humours are: that of the phlegm in the upper
part of the body, as the proper place of dulness, in the brain or skull; that of the
bile, in the middle part of the body, which is appropriate to anger; and the wind
resides in the lower part of the trunk, in the waist and loins, as in its proper
place.

There are 15 ways or channels through which disease spreads itself. The channels
of the motion of wind are, the bones, the ear, skia, heart, artery, and the guts,
The blood, sweat, the eye, the liver, the bowels, are the ways or vehicles of bile.
The chyle, fiesh and fat, marrow and semen, ordure and urine, the rose and
the tongue, the lungs, the spleen, and the kidneys, the stomach, and the bladder,
are the vehicles for the conveyance of the phlegmatic humour.

With respect to the three humours, this farther distinction is made: wind is
predominant in the diseases of old people ; bile, in those of adolescents or youths ; _
and phlegm, in children. ;

With respect to place (or part of the body); wind occurs in the cold parts of the
body ; bile in the dry and hot parts ; phlegm abides in the moist and unctuous
parts. :

The several seasons, in which the diseases caused by any of these three humours
prevail, are thus stated: diseases, caused by wind, arise commonly during the
summer season, before the dawn, and about mid-day. Those caused by bile, in
autumn, about mid-day and mid-night. Phlegm prevails during the spring sea-
son, and in the morning and evening.

There are specified nine sorts of diseases, in which there is no hope of recovery.

On the 12 causes by which any of the diseases caused by aay of the three hu-
mours, is changed into another, as wind into bile and phlegm, &c.

All diseases are classed under two heads: heat and cold. Those, in which wind
and phlegm prevail, being of natural water, belong to cold. Blood and bile,
being of natural fire, belong to heat, The diseases caused by the worms and the
serum, belong both to cold and heat.

me

4 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. (Jan.

Fourth Chapter. On the symptoms of diseases. On examining the tongue and
urine. On feeling the pulse. On asking (orally) after the circumstances, how
the disease first arose, and its progress,—what pain is felt, what sort of food has
been useful or noxious?

Especially with respect to the tongue: If the tongue is red, dry, and rough, it
is the sign of prevailing wind ; if covered with a yellowish white thick substance,
it is the sign of bile; if covered with a dim, white, soft, and moist substance, it
is the sign of phlegm.

With respect to the urine: If the urine of the patient is blue, clear like spring-
water, and has much spume or froth, it is the symptom of wind ; if yellowish red
and thick, steaming or vapouring greatly, and diffusing a smell, it is the sign of
bile; if white, with little smell, and steam or vapour, it is the sign of phlegm.

With respect to the pulse: When the physician feels the pulse, if beating
greatly upwards it somewhat stops, (if irregular) it is the sign of wind; a quick
full beating is the sign of bile ; asunk, low, and soft beating is the sign of phlegm.

The physician’s 29 questions to the patient about his food, exercise, and the
pains or relief felt after having taken such and such a food, made such and such
an exertion, &c. are here detailed.

Fifth Chapter. On the means of curing diseases.

1. Witk respect to food :

The several sorts of flesh, grain, vegetables, and liquids employed successfully
in curing diseases caused by wind. Specification of the several sorts of animal
and vegetable food, and of soup and liquids or potions, by which bile is cured.
Ditto of those that are good against phlegmatical diseases.

2. With respect to one’s conduct of life or exercise.

It is good against wind to remain in warmth, and to have a companion with whom
one can best agree. Against bile: to remain in a cool.and still place, or undis-
turbed. Against, phlegm: to cease from exertion or business, and to remain in
warmth.

3. With respect to medicaments to be used against these three humours.

Those against windare of three different tastes: sweet, sour, and saline; and
with respect to their efficacy, unctuous, heavy, and soft. ;

Those used against bile are, sweet, bitter, and nauseous bitter :—their efficacy ;
coolness, thinness, and dulness, or bluntness.

Those used against phlegm are, hot, sour, and acrid :—their efficacy : sharp-
ness, roughness, and lightness. ;

Mixtures of medicaments with respect to their tastes ; for assuaging pains, and
for carrying off diseases, or for purging.

1. Assuaging medicaments :

Against windy diseases: soup, and medical butter (a kind of sirup).

Against bile: liquid medicine and powder.

Against phlegm: pills and powdered medicine (aromatics ?)

The several kinds of soup are: of bones, flesh, butter, molasses ; of wine, &c.

There are specified five kinds of sirup, according to the different principal in-
gredients, their several applications and effects.

2. Depuratory or purging medicaments.

In windy diseases: a gentle depuratory medicament.

In bilious diseases: a purging physic.

In phlegmatic diseases : emetics.

1835.] Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 5

With respect to the first there are specified three sorts of depuratory medica-
ments, the purging medicaments are of four kinds, the emetics are of two sorts.

With respect to physical (or chirurgical) operation, against wind: the smear-
ing of the body with butter, &c. and cauterising in the Hor (or Turkish) manner.
Against bile: palebotomy, and cold water (or bathing in ditto). Against phlegm:
warm applications, and cauterising.

Specifications of the several kinds of cures against wind, bile, and phlegm.
They amount to 98 (compared to so many leaves). If the physician is skilful and
diligent in his application, and the patient obedient and respectful, so will the
latter soon be delivered from disease.

Sixth Chapter. Recapitulation of the three last chapters. According to the
former metaphor or allegory of the Indian fig-tree, there are three roots (or
trunks) : 1, the root, place, or ground of the disease; 2, that of the symptoms,
and 3, tiat of the manner of curing.

There arise from the first trunk (or root) two stems: that of the unchanged
state of the body, and that of the changed or diseased state of the body.

From the 2nd trunk (or root) there arise three stems, namely: those of looking
on, feeling, and asking (or of inspection of the tongue and urine; of the feeling
of the pulse ; and of asking after the circumstances of the disease).

On the 3rd trunk there arise four stems: those of the food; of the manner of
living or conduct of life; of the medicaments used ; and of the operations per-
formed. Therefore, from the three trunks (or roots) their arise nine stems.

The number of the boughs or branches :

Those branching from the stem of the unchanged body are: disease, the seven
supports of the body, and the feces.

On the stem denoting the changed or diseased state of the body, there are the
following 9 boughs: cause of disease, accessory causes, beginning or injured parts,
place, way, time of arising (or of the fit), fruit or consequence, causes of transition
from one into another disease ; the reduction of all diseases to heat and cold.

On the stem denoting the symptoms of diseases, there arise the following eight
boughs: 2 of inspecting the tongue and urine. Of feeling the pulse, there are 3:
wind-pulse, bile-pulse, and phlegm-pulse. And in asking after the circumstances
of the disease, there are 3. Altogether eight.

On the stem denoting the manner of curing, there arise the following boughs
or branches: 3 of food or meat; 3 of drink or potion; 3 of the manner of living
or of the conduct of life; 6 of physic with respect to taste and efficacy; 6 of the
assuaging mixtures, with respect to taste and efficacy; 3 of depuratory physic.
There are also 3 boughs of medical (or chirurgical) operations. Thus in all
there are 47 boughs or branches.

The number of leaves (or of leafy branches) issuing from the 47 boughs :

Ist. On the top of the unchanged stem, the enumeration of 25 diseases.

2nd. On the top of the stem denoting the changed or diseased state of the
body, 63 symptoms or tokens of indisposition.

3rd. On the top of the stem of inspection (or examination of the tongue and
urine), 6 branches or leaves of inspection.

4th. On the topof the stem of feeling, three sorts of pulse (or three manners of
beating of the pulse).

5th. On the top of the stem of asking the patient about the circumstances of

- the disease, 29 questions.

6 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. [Jan.

6th. On the top of the stem denoting the food (diet, meat, and drink or potion)
of the patient, there are the enumeration of such, as: 14 in respect to wind; 12 to
bile; and 9 to phlegm.

7th. On the top of the stem of the conduct of life, 6.

8th. On the top of the stem of physic nine tastes and nine efficacies are enume-
rated, together 18 ; 3 kinds of soup or broth; 5 kinds of medical butter or sirup ;
4 kinds of potions; 4 kinds of powders; 2 kinds of pills; 5 kinds of powdered
aromatics ; 9 sorts of depuratory application. Total,=50 kinds of physic.

9th. On the top of physical (or chirurgical) operations, 7 leafy branches.

A summary exhibition of the above specified leaves :

1. On the trunk denoting the place and ground of diseases, there are 188 leaves.

2. On that denoting the symptoms, 38. .

3. On that denoting the manner of curing, there are 98 leaves. Altogether
making 224.

There are two blossoms: health and a long life.

There are three fruits: moral perfection (or good morals), wealth, and hap-
piness.

These are the contents of the six chapters of the first part of this medical tract.

Seconp Parr.

There are four things to be treated of in the doctrine of curing or
healing: 1, What is to be cured or healed? 2, With what is it to be
cured? 3, In what manner is it tobe cured? 4, By whom is it to be
cured?

lst Chapter.—With respect to the first question, What is to be cured? the
answer is: the disease in the human body. 2, By what means: By diet or
regular food, exercise, medicament, and by chirurgical operation. 3, In what
manner is it to be cured ?—so that the patient recovering from his sickness, may
remain long alive. To this place belongs the examination of the symptoms, the
rules of curing, and the manner in which the cure is performed. The contents of
this part of the treatise are reduced to four roots, and to 11 branches or minor
parts.

2nd Chapter.—Cure is ordained for the well-being of the body. The origin or
generation of the body. Cause, and accessory causes thereof. Tokens or signs
of birth.

The cause of the generation of the body is stated to be: the father’s seed, the
mother’s blood, and the arising of consciousness. If the first be predominant,
there will be born a son; if the second, a daughter; if both are equal, then a her-
maphrodite. Should it happen that the blood be formed into two masses, then
twins will be born.

Out of the semen are formed: the bone, the brain, and the skeleton of the
body. Out of the mother’s blood are generated the flesh, blood, heart, with the
other four vital parts, (lungs, liver, spleen, kidneys,) and the six vessels or veins.
From the soul or vital principle arises consciousness through the several organs.

After the body has been thus conceived, the cause of its increase is in the two
veins on the right and left sides of the womb, in the small vessel containing the
mother’s blood for menstruation, and in the chyle formed from the mother’s
food, which successively descending into the womb, concurs to the coagulation

1835.] Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. Y,

or union of the semen, blood, and the vital principle, and to their increase, in
the same manner, as water is conveyed, by certain canals, from a watering pond,
to a field, for the production of corn.

The body, by the agitation of the (inward) air, being changed during 38 weeks,
goes on continually increasing, for nine months.

The continual increase of the foetus, or embryo, is thus :* In the Ist week, it
is like a mixture of milk and blood. In the 2nd week, growing somewhat thick,
it is of aropy or tenacious nature. In the 3rd week, it becomes like curds.
In the 4th week, from the form, which the embryo takes, is conjectured whether
it will be ason, daughter, or hermaphrodite. In the lst month, the mother
suffers both in her body and mind several disagreeable sensations.

In the 2nd month, in the 5th week, the navel of the body is first formed. In
the 6th week, the vital vein (or artery), depending on the navel. In the 7th
week, the forms of both eyes appear. In the 8th week, in consequence of the
forms of the eyes the form of the head arises. In the 9th week, the shape of
the upper and lower parts of the trunk or body is formed.

In the 3rd month, in the 10th week, the forms of the two arms and sides (or
hips) appear. In the 11th week, the forms of the holes of the nine organs become
perceptible. In the 12th week, the five vital parts (heart, lungs, liver, spleen,
veins,) are formed. In the 13th week, those of the six vessels.

In the 4th month, in the 14th week, the marrows in the arms and thighs are
formed. In the 15th week, the wrists of the hands and the legs of the feet are
perceptible. In the 16th week, the 10 fingers and the 10 toes become visible.
In the 17th week, the veins or nerves, connecting the outer and inner parts, are
formed.

In the 5th month, in the 18th week, the flesh and fat are formed. In the 19th
week, the tendons or sinews and the fibres are formed. In the 20th week, the
bone and the marrow of the feet are formed. In the 21st week, the body is
covered with a skin.

In the 6th month, in the 22nd week, the nine holes of the organs are opened.
In the 23rd week, the hair on the head and on the body, and the nails com-
mence to grow. In the 24th week, the viscera and vessels become entirely
finished ; and then pleasure and pain is felt. In the 25th week, the circulation
or motion of air or wind commences. In the 26th week, the memory of the
mind begins to be clear.

In the 7th month, the 27th to the 30th week, the whole body comes to entire
perfection, or is completely formed.

In the 8th month, from 31st to 35th week, the whole body, both within or
without, greatly increases.

In the 9th month, in the 36th week, there arises a disagreeable sensation in
the womb. In the 37th week, there arises a nauseous sensation. In the 38th
week, the head turning to the entrance of the womb, the birth takes place.
But, though the months are completed, yet, on account of the mother’s men.
struation, and of wind, birth may for some time be delayed.

Farther it is stated, that if the right side (of the pregnant woman) is high,
and the body light, there will be born a son; if the left side is high, and the
body heavy, then a daughter ; if they both are in an equal state, an hermaphro-
dite. And if the middle or both the sides are high, then twins will be born.

The tokens and circumstances of approaching birth are then described.

8 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. (Jan.

(This may be seen at large, in the Kah-gyur, in the work entitled 551Q°Q"

NG" QE4] “ d,Gah-vo m,nal h,jug’’ Nanda entering into the womb.)

3rd Chapter.—The several members of the body are likened to certain things,
32 in number.

The manner of the existence of the body, under four distinct heads: 1. The
quantity (in measure or weight) of the several constituent parts ofshe body, and
the manner of existence of those parts on which the body depends. 2. The
state of the veins and nerves. 3. On the nature of diseases, the enemies of the
body. 4. The holes or openings for the circulation of the air, &c.

With respect to the Ist :

1. The quantity of the wind or air (in the body) is equal to one full bladder :
that of the bile to the quantity of ordure once discharged ; that of the phlegm—
to one’s three two-handfuls (the two hands three times full); that of the blood
and ordure to seven ditto ; that of the urine and serum to four ditto; that of the
grease and fat to two ditto; that of the chyle and the semen to one handful; that
of the brain toa single handful; that of the flesh—=500 hand-fuls ; (one handful
being as much as can be enclosed once in a single hand.) Women have an
excess of 20 more on account of their thighs and breasts.

There are 23 sorts of bones; in the back-bone, 28 are distinguished. There
are 24 ribs; 32 teeth; 360 pieces of bones. There are 12 large joints of
limbs ;—small joints, 250. There are 16 tendons or sinews, and 900 nerves or
fibres; 11,000 hairs on the head; 11 millions of pores of the hair on the
body. There are five vital parts (or viscera) (as the heart, lungs, liver, spleen,
and the reins or kidneys) ; six vessels, and nine openings or holes.—In Jambu-
dwipa the measure of a man’s height is one fathom or four cubits—deformed
bodies have only 33 cubits, measured by their own.

With respect to the 2nd section, showing the state of the veins. There are four
kinds of veins or nerves: 1, that of conception ; 2, of sensation; 3, of connexion,
and 4, that of vitality.

The Ist: From the navel there arise or spread three veins or nerves, one of
them ascends to the brain, and is acted on by the dull part of it, generating the
phlegm in the upper part of the body. Another nerve (or vein) entering into the
middle, forms the vital nerve, and depends for its existence on the vital nerve of
passion and blood; that part of it, which causes bile, resides in the middle.
The third nerve (or vein) descends to the privy parts, and generates desire
bothin the male and female. That part of it, which produces wind, resides in
the lower extremity.

The 2nd: There are four kinds of the nerves of existence or sensation.

For rousing (or exciting) the organs, in their proper place, there is in the
brain a principal nerve, surrounded with 500 other smaller ones. Another nerve
for making clear the organ of recollection or memory, resides in the heart,
surrounded with 500 other smaller ones.

That nerve, which causes the increase and renovation of the aggregate of the
body, resides in the navel, surrounded with 500 other smaller ones.

That nerve, which causes the increase of children, and descendants, resides in
the privy member, together with 500 other smaller ones—and comprehends or
encompasses the whole body.

The 3rd: The nerve of connexion consists of two kinds, white and black.
There are 24 large veins (or nerves), which, like as so many branches ascending

1835.] Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 9

the principal stem of the vital principle, serve for increasing the flesh and the
blood. There are eight large hidden veins or nerves for making the connexion
of the diseases of the viscera and vessels.

There are 16 conspicuous veins connecting the outward limbs, and 77 others
spreading from them, called myx vas bleeding veins (that may occasionally be
opened to let out blood). .

There are 112 hurtful or pestilential veins (or nerves); of a mixed nature,
there are 189 others. Thence originate 120 in the outer, inner, and middle
parts, that spread into 360 smaller ones. Thence smaller ones encompass the
body as with a net-work.

There are 19 strong working nerves, which, like roots, descend from the brain,
the ocean of nerves ; from among them there are 13 that are hidden, and connect
the intestines—six others, connecting the outward parts, are visible; from them
spread 16 small tendons or sinews.

There are three vital nerves (or veins) in aman. The one encompasses both
the head and the body; the second, assOciating with respiration, moves ac-
cordingly; the third is the principal, and connecting the veins or canals, for
the circulation of air and blood, is occupied with generating or increasing the body,
and being the vital nerve, is calied, by way of eminence, the artery or the principal
vital nerve.

With respect to the third point:

Diseases of consequence happen in the flesh, fat, bone, tendons, nerve, intes-
tines, and veins.

Such diseases are counted in the flesh, 45 ; in the fat, 8; in the bone, 32; in
the tendons or sinews, 14; in tne intestines, 13; in the veins, 190. On the
head, there are 62; on the neck, 33; in the trunk of the body, 95; in the four
hanging members (two hands, two feet), 112. Thus important diseases are
reckoned 302, of which 96 are said to be very dangerous, which cannot be cured
by any expence or skill. There are 49 that aredangerous in a middle degree,
but which may be cured by learned physicians. The rest may be cured by
others also; since they are of no great consequence, though they also be
reckoned among diseases of magnitude.

With respect to the fourth point :

Of the several orifices or passages for the conveyance of air, blood, drink, and
food, both within and without, are enumerated 13 in males and 16 in females.

Through inconvenient food and exercise, these passages being hurt, there

arises a distemper of the body, by the humours being either too much increased,
issued, or hindered ; or by taking wrong direction, confusion is produced. When the
passages are clean, and free from any hurt, then the body is in a healthy state.
_ 5th Chapter.—Characteristic description of the body. There is a two-fold
division: 1, Those parts which are subject toinjury (the body). 2, Those things
by which they are injured (bad humours or diseases). First, of those that are
subject to injury. These are thus distinguished: the supports, (or those parts
which keep the body together), seven in number ; as, the chyle, blood, flesh, fat,
bone, marrow, and semen. Excrements, as ordure, urine, and sweat ; also the dirt
of the teeth, and under the nails, and the impurity issuing from other openings
or passages.

Istly. The office of the seven supports of the body, and of the three excre-
ménts, is thus described:

c

10 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. (Jan.

The meat and drink, after being digested in the stomach, are changed into
chyle and feces. These turn into ordure and urine, thatis, for the nutrition of
the body, by increasing the blood. The blood preserving the moisture or humidi-
ty of the body, keeps up life, and increases the flesh. The flesh covering and
cleansing the body, both within and without, produces the fat. This makes
the whole body unctuous, and causes the increase of the bone. This supports
the body and increases the marrow. This improves the essential sap of the
body, and produces the semen virile. This conduces to the well-being of the
whole body, and to the production of a new one.

The service, rendered by the feces, is: theordure serves for the support of the
bowels, guts, &c. By urine, morbid humours are carried off; and it serves
also for a support of the thinner feces, and carries off the putrid thick sedi-
ments.

The office of sweat is to soften the skin, and to change the obstructed pores of
the hair of the body. ;

Fire-warmth ass is the common gentle warmth, or heat, of the whole
body. The warmth of the stomach is the principal cause of the digestion of meat
and drink of every kind. If this warmth is in good state, the digestion of meat
and drink is easy; no diseases then arise, the lustre of the face, the chyle, the
supports of the body and life, then increase. Therefore, the warmth of the
stomach must be kept up, (or if lost, must be restored,) with every endeavour.

The manner in which meat and drink are changed. Whatever is eaten or
drunk, is carried into the belly or stomach, by the vital air or wind; afterwards,
by the aid of phlegm, it comes into fermentation of a sweet taste, and increases
the quantity of phlegm. Afterwards, being digested by the aid of bile, taking a
hot and sour taste, it produces bile. Afterwards, by the aid of the air or wind
that conveys an equal heat to the whole body, the dregs or feces being separated,
and taking a bitter taste, it generates thin wind. The feces being changed into
thick (or solid) and thin (or fluid) parts, become ordure and urine.

The chyle, after having passed by nine veins from the stomach into the liver,
it becomes or changes into blood ; afterwards, successively, it is transformed into
flesh, and the seven supports of the body.

2ndly. The hurtful things or bad humours. These are three: wind, bile,
and phlegm, each with a five-fold division.

1. Of Wind. The life-keeping wind or air resides in the upper part of the
head ; that which operates upwards, has its placein the breast ; that which pervades
or encompasses all, resides in the heart; that which communicates or conveys
an equal heat tothe body, has its seat in the stomach; that which cleanses
downwards, abides in the lower part of the trunk.

2. Of Bile. The digesting bile resides in the stomach, between the digested
and indigested part; that which forms the cbyle, resides in the liver; that which
prepares or increases, in the heart; that which assists the sight (or causes to see),
in the eye; that which gives a clear colour, resides in the skin.

3. Of Phlegm. The supporting phlegm resides in the breast; the masticatory,
in the indigested part; the tasting, on the tongue; the refreshing (or that makes
contented), in the head; the conjunctive or uniting, resides in every juncture
(or joint).

The characteristic signs of the above-specified humours—that of wind; rough-
ness, lightness, cold, smallness, hardness, and mobility.

1835.] Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 11

That of bile; unctuousness, sharpness, lightness, foulness, depuratory mois-
ture.

That of phlegm: unctuousness, coolness, heaviness, and dulness, softness, or
gentleness, steadiness, adhesion, passionateness. °

6th Chapter.—On the works or action of the body. These are the body,
the speech, and the mind. Virtue, vice, and undetermined cases. The five
organs occupy their own place. The body is divided into basis (ground or
support), age, nature (or constitution), division of diseases. The basis hasa
triple division. Age also has the same number; that of nature or native dis-
position, has seven. With respect to disease, the distinctions are: indisposition
and absence of morbid state.

7th Chapter.—On the tokens of destruction (or approaching death) of the
body: 1. Tokens of a far distant death. 2. Ditto of a near one. 3. Uncertain,
and 4, Certain tokens of death. Distant tokensvare: any envoy (of death), dream,
and change (by age), &c.; the near tokens are distinguished into near and very
near. Uncertain tokens; as, when after recovering froma sickness, one may
live yet many years. Certain tokens, as, when the disease is incurable.

A physician should be well acquainted with the tokens of death ; that he may
know whether the patient be curable or incurable, and to perform his medical
service accordingly.

8th Chapter.—On the increasing and decreasing state of sickness. Here is
treated of the causes and accessory causes of the disease ; the manner of its
origin ; the diseased part; the character and distinctions of the importance of
each.

First. The causes are proximate, and remote.

9th Chapter.—There are three accessory causes that depend on the primary
cause : the originating and spreading, the gathering together and arising ; and
the taking away of the disease.

10¢k Chapter.—On the manner in which any disease takes place in the
body.

11th Chapter.—On the character of diseases ; as, an increasing, diminishing,
and a perplexed, disease. The causes of which are to be sought in the too great
or too small quantity of the three humours, of the seven supports of the body,
and of the feces.

12th Chapier.—Division of diseases ; with respect to the cause, the individual,
and the kind of disease. With respect to the cause: thisis attributed to the
vicious three humours of this life; to the consequence of immoral actions in for-
mer generations or lives, and to a mixture of both. With respect to the indivi-
duals: they are, man, woman, child, old persons ; and men of every description.
The several diseases peculiar to each are enumerated. The number of the kinds
of the common diseases is stated to be 404, which are divided or distinguished out
of several respects. As with respect to the vicious humours, principal humour,
place or injured part, and the kind of disease, 42 belong to wind, 26 to bile, 33 to
phlegm. Thus with respect to the humours, 101 divisions are made, and so on;
with respect to the other points also, many distinctions or classifications are
enumerated, each amounting to 101.

13th Chapter.—With respect to the conduct. What course of life is to be
taken, (to be free from disease :) 1. continually, 2, at certain periods, and 3,
occasionally, or as circumstances may require. The two first are treated in the

2

12 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work, (Jan.

next two chapters: 1, continually to be done are: worldly affairs and religious
exercises or occupations ; first, the leaving off every immoral action committed
by the body, speech, and the mind; and tke doing of such things as are agree-
able to these, in every circumstance of life: as ineating, walking, sitting, mount-
ing a horse, sleeping, &c.

2, Religious occupations are the exercise of moral virtues, and the desisting
from the ten immoral actions.

14th Chapter.—On the periodical conduct of life, according to the different
seasons, (as the first and last part of winter, the spring, the hot season, summer,
and autumn ;) with respect to diet, exercise, medicine, and chirurgical operations.

15th Chapter.—On the circumstantial conduct of life, with respect to several
cases, teaching that, one should not obstruct hunger and thirst (or abstain from
meat and drink); not hinder yawning or gaping, sneezing, breathing, coughing,
(or ejecting phlegm,) spitting, sleeping, nor any of the natural discharges,
since the obstruction or hindrance of them may give rise to any disease, of
which several cases or examples are enumerated.

16th Chapter.—The manner of using meat and drink: 1. The several kinds
of food, and the manner of using them. 2. Several kinds of food that do not
agree, and therefore may not be used together. 3. Temperature to be observed.

For food are used, grain (or corn), flesh, butter, vegetables or greens, and
dressed victuals. There are two kinds of grain: 1, growing in ears, and 2, in
pods (as pulse). Flesh or animal food of eight kinds or sorts. Several kinds of
unctuous or oily substances; as, butter, oil expressed from grains, kernels, fruits,
berries, and trees or shrubs; grease, fat, marrow, &c. To vegetable or green
things belong potherbs, &c. To dressed victuals or meals belong boiled rice,
soup, &c. Drinkable things are milk, water, wine, &c.

17th Chapter.—Enumeration of several kinds of food that it were dangerous
to take together; as, fish and milk, &c.

18th Chapter.—On the proper measure of food to be taken, or on temperance
in meat and drink.

19th Chapter.—On pharmacy, or the preparing of medicaments for healing
any disease. Taste of medicament, efficacy, digestive quality, mode of com-
posing, &c. appropriate to any specified disease.

20th Chapter.—On materia medica, the efficacy of every simple medicament.
The materials for medicaments are: precious and natural stones, earths, woods,
vegetables, and those obtained from animals. In the text, and in another quoted
work, 915 articles are enumerated, and stated of each to what disease it may be
applied especially, as a remedy.

21st Chapter.—Specification of the classes of medicaments; their preparation
and application to specified diseases.

22nd Chapter.—On the five sorts of (chirurgical) instruments, employed in
trying or sounding any disease, in cutting, &c.

23rd Chapter.—That one may remain in health and ease, rules are prescribed
to be observed.

24th Chapter.—Discrimination of the humours as the cause of any inward or
outward disease.

25th Chapter.—When the former are insufficient, it is taught, to seek it in the
vicious inclination of the mind.

26th Chapter.—To exhibit medical help, when the disease may be healed;
and to give it up, when it cannot be cured.

1835.] Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 13

27th Chapter.—On the manner of curing diseases. How? by whom? with
what? The measure or length of time of curing.

28th Chapter.—Detailed description of the curing of diseases.

29th Chapter.—Common and peculiar mode of curing diseases.

30th Chapter.—How to cure wind, bile, phlegm, is separately exposed or taught.

31st Chapter.—The requisite qualities in a physician, that he should be well
acquainted with the theory and practice of medicine; and be an impartial, up-
right, good-hearted man.

——

Tuirp Part.‘

Containing a full explanation of Diseases.

Chapter 1. Exhortation to the teacher (Sua’kya) to deliver a treatise ( 35)
or oral instruction on the mauner of curing diseases.

2. The curing of diseases arising from wind (or windy humours). There
are five distinctions: 1, causes; 2, accessory cause and effect; 3, division; 4,
symptoms ; 5, manner of curing (diseases arising from wind).

3. In the curing of diseases arising from (or caused by) bile, there are the
following distinctions: 1, cause; 2, accessory cause and effect; 3, division; 4,
symptoms; 5, manner of curing; 6, and stopping or hindering its pro-
gress.

4. In the curing of diseases caused by phlegm (or phlegmatical humours), are
considered: cause, accessory cause and effect, division, symptoms, and manner
of curing.

5. In the curing of diseases caused by the gathering together of the three
humours (wind, bile, phlegm,) and of blood, there are the following distinctions
or considerations : cause, incident or accessory cause and effect, place, time, kind
or genus, symptoms, manner or mode of curing, and the stopping of it for the
future.

6. In the curing of indigestion, the root (or primary cause) of inward diseases,
there are the following distinctions or sections : cause, incident or accessory
cause and effect, manner of its arising, division, symptoms, remedy or mode of
curing.

7. In the curing of a swelling (or a hard conglomeration or excrescence), there
is treated of: cause, incident, division, place, manner of arising, symptom, mode
of curing it,

8. The curing of white swellings, a kind of dropsy. Here are considered:
cause, incident, division, symptom, mode of curing.

9. In the curing of another kind of dropsy (x 13"45) there are the same dis-
tinctions as before.

10. The curing of dropsy is taught, by exposing the cause and incident, division,
manner of arising, symptom, mode of curing, stopping or cessation.

11. Inthe curing of phthisis or consumption of the lungs, AB] BGAN"
Ay 94'd, there arethe following distinctions: cause, and accessory cause or

effect, division, symptom, mode of curing. And thus there are six chapters on
curing inward diseases.

12. In curing feverish diseases (where heat prevails) in general, there are the

14 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. [Jan.

following distinctions: cause and incident, nature, name, symptom, mode of
curing.

13, 14. Farther explanations on the causes of the heat and cold, in fever.

15. In the curing of a fever, in its beginning, or where heat has not yet taken
the upper hand, there are enumerated the following distinctions: cause and
incident, nature, name, division, symptom, mode of curing.

16. Inanincreased or burning fever, the same distinctions are as before, except
a trifling division.

17 to 20. On curing several kinds of fever, such as are: the sly, hidden, inveter-
ate, and the mixed ones.

21. The curing of inflammation of any igre or wounded part of the body, with
several distinctions ; and that of inward and outward hurt: the inwards are, the
viscera and the vessels ; the outward parts are, the flesh, bone, marrow, tendon,
and fibre.

22. The curing of heat or fever (arising from the contest between wind, bile, and
phlegm), in which the mental faculties are troubled, with several distinctions to
be considered ; and so there are 1] chapters on ne fever (heat and inflam-
mation).

23. On curing epidemic maladies or infectious diseases, with several distinc-

tions and divisions; as, Z{Q|"45 akind of pestilence of Nepal.

24. On curing thesmall-pox: cause and effect, definition of small-pox, distinc-
tion, symptom, mode of curing; distinction into white and black variole, each
having three species.

25. The curing of infectious diseases affecting the bowels (colic), with several
distinctions ; purging the viscera and the lower vessels, affecting with greater or
less vehemence; and so there are eight kinds of diseases affecting the bowels.

26. The curing of swellings in the throat (or of ulcers and inflammations), and
infective diseases, as the cholera, Ry ya May: the first has 4, the second
11, subdivisions, or minor distinctions.

27. With respect to catarrh, are considered : cause and incident, kind, Ere ORts

mode of curing. And so are five chapters on inieeaous diseases, Law’ as,

to which belongs the cholera morbusalso, 4|Q4" 34" aa 1a Fai.

28. In curing the upper part of the body, the head occupies the first place.
Here are considered: cause, circumstantial accident, distinction, symptom, mode
of curing. There are eight distinctions, as wind, &c.

29. In curing the diseases of the eyes, are considered: cause, incident,
division, symptom, mode of curing, with 33 distinctions of opthalmic diseases.

30. Diseases of the ear; cause and incident, or accessory cause and effect,
division or distinction, symptom, mode of curing. Distinction into disease of
the ear, and deafness ; that has six, this four, kinds.

31. Diseases of the nose: cause and incident, division, symptom, mode of
curing ; there are five divisions or distinctions.

32. Inthe curing of the diseases of the mouth, there are to be considered :
cause and incidents, division, symptom, mode of curing. There isa six-fold
division ; as, the lip, the gum, &c. There are several distinctions of diseases, as
six of the teeth ; five of the tongue; six of the palate, and seven of the throat.

33. In curing the diseases of goitre or swelling in the fore-part of the neck, are
considered : cause and incident (or accessory causes), distinction, symptom, cure

1835.) Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 15

or remedy. There are eight sorts of goitre, as those arising from wind, bile, &c.
Thus six chapters are on curing diseases in the upper part of the body.
Now follows the curing of diseases affecting the viscera, and the entrails or

vessels.
34. Incuring the diseases of the heart, there is treated of : cause and incident,

division, symptom, and remedy. There are seven distinction of diseases in the

heart ; as the throbbing or palpitation of the heart Fo" QIN &c. &e.

35. In curing the diseases of the lungs are considered: cause, division,
symptom, remedy. There are eight distinctions of diseases.

36. Incuring the diseases of the liver, are treated of : cause, division, symptom,
remedy. There are 18 distinctions of diseases.

37. In curing the diseases of the spleen or milt, four things come into cone
sideration. There are five kinds of diseases, as inflammation, &c.

38. In curing the diseases of the reins or kidneys, there arefour considerations,

with seven kinds of diseases ; as wind in the reins, &c.

39. Incuring the diseases of the stomach, or the pit of the stomach, there are
likewise four things to be previously considered. And first, 16 kinds of diseases,
as heat, cold, &c. and again five kinds, as wind, &c.

40. In curing the diseases of the intestines or bowels are considered four
things, as cause, &c. with the distinction of five kinds of diseases.

41. In thecuring of the gut of the entrails or bowels, are considered: symptom
and remedy, with five distinctions of diseases ; as cold, puffing up, &c. Thus eight

chapters are on curing the diseases of the viscera and vessels qa a.

Diseases of the privy parts.
42, 43. In these two chapters for male and female cases are considered:

cause, &c. four, with nine and five distinctions of disease respectively.

This class of disorders is called 4}JG"4% (secret disease).

The curing of little diseases (L745).

44. In the curing of hoarseness, or difficulty of using the voice, are
considered: cause, incident, &c. four, with seven distinctions of diseases;
as wind, &c.

45. In curing aversion from food, or restoring the loss of appetite (arayr
Q8N"d) there are considered: cause, &c. four; with four distinctions of that

disease.

46. In curing the distemper of continual thirst, are considered: cause and
incident, &c. four, with five kinds of that distemper; as wind, bile, &c.

47. Inthe curing of the hiccup, the disease of yexing (convulsion of the
stomach HAIN QD 95 )s are considered: cause and accident, &c. four, with

five distinctions of that distemper; as from meat or food, &c.

48. The curing of the difficulty of breathing: cause, &c. four; with five minor
distinctions.

49. The curing of a sudden cholic, (45° aan, a distemper of the bowels, )
are considered: cause and accident, &c. four; with three principal, and eleven
minor, kinds of that distemper ; besides some others that are enumerated, as heat
and cold; worms and phlegm, &c.

50. The curing of diseases arising from worms (in the belly or bowels :) |
and insects, are considered: cause and accidents, &c. four, with two distinctions
inward and outward worms or insects ; as belly worms, lice, and nits.

16 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. (Jan.

51. In curing vomiting, are considered: cause and accidents, &c. four, with
four distinctions of that distemper, as wind, &c.
~ 52. In curing purging diseases (or dysentery), are considered: cause, &c.
four, with four distinctions of that distemper, &c.

53. The curing of obstruction of stools, or of evacuation, four things to be con-
sidered, and five kinds of that distemper are enumerated.

54. In curing dysury (or difficulty of making urine), is treated of the cause
and accidents, &c. four, with several distinctions of the kinds of that distemper.

55. In curing the frequent discharge of urine; cause, &c. four, with the three
kinds of that distemper, arising from phlegm, bile, and wind; phlegm has again
10 distinctions.

56. In curing the disease called the ‘‘ Indian heat,’’ (very dangerous to
Tibetans, by causing excessive heat and frequent evacuatioas, of which many die
who visit India,) are considered: cause, &c. four, with four distinct divisions of
that distemper.

57. In curing the swelling or enlargement of the feet, are considered: cause,
&c. four, with four distinctions of that disease.

58. In curing the gout AWN "Q) are considered: cause, &c, four, with six
distinctions of that painful distemper.

59. In the curing of diseases arising from the serum or watery parts of the
blood (3° NL yellow water, bad or corrupt humours), are considered: the man-
ner of its origin, its division, symptom, mode of curing, with several distinctions,

60. The curing of the disease called ‘‘the white vein,” 3¢'S 4%] with several
divisions and distinctions.

61. The curing of cutaneous diseases. Of these there are several divisions and
distinctions.

62. The curing of miscellaneous diseases of the smaller kind: suchas con-
traction or sinking of the sinews; dysentery; vomiting; any hurt caused by
fire; hurt or wound made with a needle; or when a needle or the iron- -point
of an arrow happen to be swallowed; choaking or suffocation: ; on the
stopping of any thing in the throat, as, a beard of corn, bone, fish-prickle ; the
entering or swallowing in of a spider or scorpion ; intoxication; stiffness of the
neck ; ill smell of the body ; hurt of the hands and feet caused by cold and snow;
the creepirg of any insect into the ear; the swelling of the teat of a woman,
The curing of all such diseases is called the cure of small diseases. Thus there
are 19 chapters on minute diseases.

The healing of wounds, sores, or ulcers.

63. The curing of ulcers (QQ~ ) bere are considered: cause, &c. four, with
several distinctions.

64. The curing of the hemorrhoids (piles or emerods in the fundament,
AQc’ Qqa): cause, &c. four, with six distinctions.

65. The curing of St. Anthony’s fire, (any swelling full of heat and redness,
ar’ RAR): cause, &c. four, with several distinctions, and the places (or parts)
where generally they occur.

66. The curing of the Surya disease (SL's) affecting the lungs, liver,
&c. its beginning, &c. four, with some distinctions.

67. The curing of cancerous or virulent bad sores or ulcers: cause, &c. four,
with eight distinctions. ,

1835.) Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 17

68. The curing of the swelling of the testicles (Ang BN) : cause, &c. four,
with six distinctions. =

69. The curing of a disease in the foot and thigh, called Kangbém, (aq QQH
or enlarging and corruption of the feet, &c. a painfal disease in the bones, accom.
panied with inflammation, and blue colour of the skin: cause, &c. four, with
several distinctions,

70. The curing of the ulceration in the perineum: cause, &c. four, with some
distinctions.

71. The curing of diseases incident to infant children, with the description of
several superstitious customs or practices which are performed at the birth of a
child, as examination of the time at which it was born, whether it is lucky or un-
lucky; imparting of the benediction; the cutting of the umbilical cord; the
making it live long; the making it suck, the time, &c. &c.

72. The enumeration of several diseases common to infants and childrens:
cause, &c, four, and the mode of curing them.

73. The curing of diseases caused by any (supposed) evil spirit, 12 kinds of
such diseases: symptoms, and remedy.

Thus three chapters are devoted to the diseases of infant children.

Then follow, on curing the diseases of the female sex. These distempers are
thus distinguished: general, peculiar, and vulgar, or common.

74. On curing the diseases of the female sex, in general, are considered:
cause, &c. four, with two distinctions, originating in the blood and wind.

75. The curing of the particular diseases of women: cause, &c. four, with
many distinctions ; as with respect to the several humours, of which they arise.

76. The curing of the common or vulgar diseases of women, with the circum.
stances of child-birth.

On curing diseases caused by evil spirits.

77. The curing of diseases caused by a ghost (or evil spirit), of which there
are18 kinds enumerated, from among the Suras and Asuras. Here are considered :
cause and incident, division, symptom, and remedy.

78. The curing of insanity or madness: cause, &c. four, with seven distinc-
tions, as it is caused by wind, bile, &c.

79. The curing of a kind of insanity called ‘‘ forgetfulness” (lunacy ?) enume-
ration of its several kinds, the symptoms, and the remedies.

80. The curing of palsical diseases, and the telling of the periodical time of
their occurrence, the symptoms, and the remedies for preventing their recourse.

81. On the curing of diseases, in which the body is infested with cancerous ulcers,
is eaten away and dissolved : considered cause, &c. nine, with 18 distinctions re-
specting its different kinds, and the places (or parts) which are generally affected.

The above five chapters are on such diseases as are supposed to be caused by
the influence of some malignant demon.

82. On the curing or healing, in general, of wounds, made by any kind of weapon
or tool. Here into consideration come ; 1, cause ; 2, accessory cause or incident;
3, nature (of wound); 4, definition or description (of the wound) ; 5, ite name; 6,
place ; 7, division ; 8, symptom, mode of curing or remedy, excision or cutting
out, cicatrizing.

83. The curing of wounds on the head, here are considered: the manner of
its being, examination of the injured part, manner of curing, recovering, or being

overpowered. (qays3, 4)

18 Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. [Jan.

84. Thecuring of wounds on theneck or throat, where the bone, vein, or nerve,
and the tendon or sinew come into consideration.

85. The curing of wounds on the upper and lower parts of the thumb of the
body ; manner or that of being ; symptom, remedy, healing.

86. The curing of wounds on tke hanging members (arms and legs), the
knowing the importance or consequence of, &c. symptoms in general, mode of
euring, or restoration.

Thus four chapters were on curing wounds ; henceforth the curing of poison, or
the remedies against poisoning.

87. The curing of injuries caused by artificial or prepared poison. Here are
considered: the kind of poison, entrance or infection; quality, the manner of its
spreading or prevalence; remedies employed, final cessation or remains.

88. Thecuring of simple poison, and of poison in the flesh. With respect to
the first: cause, symptom, remedy ; in the second case, two points more come in
consideration.

89. The curing of real or material poison. Two cases: 1, spreading; and 2,
not spreading. (Ba50°5 8A)

These three chapters were on curing injnries caused by poison.

90. On curing the weakness of old age, or procuring strength to weak, old
men. Emoluments, place, recourse to, remedy.

91, 92. On the means of increasing the power or vigour in men.

Here ends the summary extract of the 92 chapters, on the instruction of cur-
ing diseases.

FourtH Part.
Which contains the explanation of the practical part of Medicine.

Chapter 1. The examination of the pulse, wherein 13 cases are enumerated
On the character of the distemper.

2. The inspection of urine, wherein, as it is said, the vicious state of the
whole body may be seen, as in a mirror.

Thus two chapters are on examining the pulse and urine.

Afterwards, when the character and name of the disease has been found out,
what sorts of medicaments are to be administered, is exposed.

3. First liquid medicines, of which there are 54 for curing inward heat, and
23 for assuaging cold fits or ague. Together there are 77 sorts of liquid medicine.
When by these there is no remedy, further is an

4. Enumeration of powdered medicine, or medicaments in powder, of which
the mixture is stated to amount to 96, for assuaging the heat of any distemper ;
and 69 against cold fits. Both together=165. When they afford no relief, there
is taught of another remedy,

5. Physic or medicaments in pills, of which the different kinds of mixture
amount to 22.

6. The several kinds of sirup, (a kind of mixture’ are described or taught, of
which 15 are for assuaging heat, and five against cold fits. Both together=20.

For procuring strength to the body, and for drawing out\an inveterate disease.

7. Is taught. of a mixture, called medicinal butter (3 ay 1) consisting of

1835.] Analysis of a Tibetan Medical Work. 19

several ingredients, of which there are 14 sorts for curing heat, and nine for tak-
ing away cold fits. Both together = 23.

8. 13 kinds of mixture of calcined powder, for curing an ague caused by a too
much abundance of phlegm.

9. 17 kinds of mixture or syrup, especially for the purpose of assuaging heat.

10. 19 species of mixture of medicinal wine (or spirituous beverage), are enu-
merated, for curing diseases, in which wind prevails.

11. A mixture, as a remedy against any inveterate malady whatever, prepared
of precious stones, for curing the diseases of princes, and of opulent men.
One against heat, and 11 against cold; eight against both ; together=20.

Since men, in general, cannot have precious stones required for such a mixture
for curing diseases, in the

12. Is taught of such vegetables or plants that are procurable by all, of which
the several mixtures amount to 28 for curing heat ; and 14 for assuaging cold fit.

Thus taking together all assuaging remedies from the liquid to the vegetable
medicines, there are 418. So much of the assuaging remedies. When they are
insufficient, in the

13. Is taught of purging or deparatory medicines in general.

. 14, Of purging medicines operating downwards, for carrying away corrupt
blood, bile, and the relics of other diseases. There are three kinds of such
purging (or depuratory,) medicines, operating : gently, moderately, and strongly ;
of which all there are 82 species.

15. For carrying upwards or ejecting the remains of such diseases, as belong
to the phlegmatical kind: here vomits are prescribed, of which there are eight of
the stronger, and eight of the gentle kind, both=16.

16. A composition of medicine, for cleansing or purging the nose, five of the
gentle, and two of the strong kind.

17. Elixirs or extracted juices, for drawing downwards the diseases in the en-
trails or intestines and guts.

18. The same continued and specied.

19. Elixirs or mixtures for cleansing the veins, (or deparatory elixirs for do.)
Thus seven chapters are on deparatory medicines.

If by the above means there is no sufficient relief, in another sutra is taught of
other soft and hard remedies.

20. How to let blood in such distempers, when heat prevails. There are
counted 77 veins, of which any may be opeued for letting out blood.

21. The application of a caustic for curing diseases, when cold, or cold fits
prevail.

22. The use of a venomous mixture.

‘ 23. On the use of medical bath, for diseased members.

24. On adhibiting medicinal unguents.

25. On medicines operating downwards.

26. Theconclusion. Though there be many ways (1, 200) of examining the
heat and cold prevailing in any disease, they all may be reduced to the fol-
lowing: to look on the tongue and urine, to feel the pulse, and to ask (after the
circumstances of the beginning and progress of the disease in question.)

Thus the remedies adhibited against diseases, though they be counted many
(1,200) yet they may be reduced to the following four classes: medicament, ma-
nual operation, diet, and exercise. Medicament is eitlier assuaging or deparatory;

D2

20 Geological and Statistical Account of the (Jan.

the manual operation, is either gentle or rough; food is either useful or noxious;
the exercise is either violent or gentle.

Again : though there be numbered 360 practical modes of curing diseases, they
may be reduced to these three: examination of the patient (or of the symptoms
of the disease). Rules for curing such and such disease. And the manner in
which the remedy is applied.

There is taught also of preservatives for a physician, to keep himself safe from
any malignant infection from a patient.

27. Recommendation of this treatise to the care of the audience, by the teacher,
(Suaxya.) Classification and moral application of the above enumerated 404
diseases.

The volume concludes with an account of the mode in which this treatise on
medicine (consisting of four parts) reached Tibet, which is briefly incorporated in
the introductory remarks.

II].—Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree, with a Geologi-
cal Sketch of the Country, and Brief Account of the Customs, &c. of
its Inhabitants. By Lieut. Wm. Foury.

[Read at the Meeting of the 2nd Oct. 1834.]

The Island of Rambree, or Yamawaddi* as it is termed by the Bur-
mas, is not without those features common to the whole of Arracan.
The same high land, covered with a thick and impenetrable jungle,
every where presents itself fo the view of one approaching the coast ;
and the eye strives in vain to discover a diversity of feature in some
cleared spot, which would indicate the existence of a cultivation only
to be found in the interior of the island. It was with the view of
throwing some light upon the geology of Rambree that I prepared this
Journal for transmission to the Asiatic Society ; a consciousness of my
present superficial information on many points connected with the
geology of the island would have induced me to reserve this commu-
nication for a more favourable opportunity, was I not apprehensive
that such a season would never arrive, and that the little leisure I
now have at my disposal must of necessity be devoted to duties of a

* In the year 1148, Mugh series, two years subsequent to the conquest of the
country by the Burmas, Arracan was divided into four distinct provinces,each sub-
ject to a separate jurisdiction. They were termed thus, 1. Dwynawaddi (Ar-
racan Proper). 2. Yamawaddi (Rambree Island). 3. Megawaddi (Cheduba).
4, Dorawaddi (Sandoway). The proper name for Cheduba is Ma’ong. The
word Cheduba must have been introduced by the Bengalis, I fancy, for itis un-
known to the Mughs. The same may be said of Akyab, which should be called
Chetéwa.

[Rémdvati, Meghdvati and Dvdrdvati, in Sanscrit. See translation of an In-
scription in vol. iii. page 209, 213.—Eb.]

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 21

professional nature. To a brief geological description of the island, I
have added such other matter connected with the condition, and man-
ners of the inhabitants as appeared deserving of mention, either from
its novelty, or the value it may possess in the scale of utility.

With respect to the geology of Rambree, I fear there will be found
little that is new or interesting ; the rocks that have been hitherto observ-
ed are chiefly of the newest kind, or owe their origin to volcanic agency :
these with the alluvial and diluvial deposits will be found to cover
the greater part of the island. Several mountainous ranges occur in
Rambree, and their general direction appears to be from N. N. W. to
S.S. E. The elevation of these above the plain is not very great,
varying from 500 to 1500 feet for the principal extent, and not ex-
ceeding 3000 feet at the highest point. Other smaller hills are seen to
branch off from the larger ranges, forming those basin-like cavities
that afford space for the rice cultivation.

Commencing with Khyouk Phyoo*, situated on the N. W. point of
the Island of Rambree, I shall proceed from thence along the western
coast, passing in gradation to such other places as I may have visited,
-r have become familiar to me from the report of others.

The military station of Khyouk Phyoo, which takes its name from a
village distant three miles from the cantonment, stands upon the
verge of a low sandy plain, which extending from the south towards
the sea and harbour is bounded on the S. W. by a low sandstone
range, and on the E. by a small creek, which separates it from the
rich alluvial ground that lies at the base of the Nagadong and Oonky-
oung hills. Upon the surface of this plain there exists a vegetable
mould notexceeding four inches in depth, and this is succeeded by a bed
of sand and shingle ; the sand in some instances assuming a grey or
greenish appearance, and the shingle in every respect similar to that
found upon the beach. At the village of Townyeen, in front of the
parade, a chalybeate spring is supposed to exist from the presence of
carbonate of iron ;—the sand in this place has a ferruginous aspect,
but the space occupied by it is very limited, the ochre appearing at
the surface, and invariably succeeded by the grey sand above alluded to.

As has been already observed, a sandstone range extends itself on
the S. W. side of the cantonment. There are in fact two ranges run-
ning parallel to each other, the interval being taken up with patches
of rice cultivation ; and both are connected with the reefs extending
under the sea to the N. W. and marked off by the Reef Buoy.
Taking a direction to the S. E. they are terminated abruptly on the
margin of the creek which bounds the station of Khyouk Phyoo on

* Khyouk Phyoo, White Stones, (Shingle.)

22 Geological and Statistical Account of the (JAN. °

that quarter. The structure of both is alike throughout ; the sandstone
occurring in large disintegrated masses, rounded by the weather, and
loosely embedded in the argillaceous soil that forms the surface of
these hills. Here and there some appearance of stratification is ob-
served ; the sandstone dipping to the S. W. at an angle of 75 or 80°.
This order of stratification is most perceptible on the sea beach, where
the ranges in question are united with the reefs. The sandstone is
here of a grey colour, of a somewhat laminar structure, and in some
places so much decomposed by the action of the water as to approach
the nature of an aluminous schist. Progressing with the range, it
assumes a brown or yellow colour, is of a fine texture, and occasion-
ally interspersed with minute scales of mica. The surface of these
hills being composed of a stratum of clay, the ground at their base is
continually receiving a deposit of the same nature, affording oppor-
tunities for cultivation, and forming a striking contrast with the soil
in the immediate vicinity of the cantonment. This alluvial deposit
sometimes attains to the consistence of a yellow clay, sufficiently plas-
tic for the fabrication of bricks and earthen vessels. Beyond this
sandstone range, and bordering upon the village of Khyouk Phyoo,
the ground is still of that low diluvial nature which indicates the
transition it has undergone; in some places, intersected by narrow
creeks accessible to the tide, and every where covered with a thick
jungle of mangroves and marine plants. At the village of Khyouk
Phyoo there occurs an isolated hill, composed entirely of asoft grey sand-
stone, which had once formed part of some continued range, and was
subsequently torn asunder by the sea on its retiring from the island ;
it is one of the many instances that may be observed in Rambree of the
denudating effects of the waters of the ocean at a period that they
were subject to some violent commotion, produced probably by the
sudden rise of mountains from beneath.

January 12th, 1834.—Leaving Khyouk Phyoo at an early hour, and
proceeding along the beach with the Saddle and Knot Islands on the
right, my route lay towards the villages of Membraan and Kyou-
prath ; loose blocks of standstone, rounded by the sea, and apparent-
ly forming part of an under-stratum, extending to the Saddle and
Knot Islands, cross the beach in several places for the first few miles
of the road. The sandstone is of a grey colour, soft, gritty, and

_frequently intersected with veins of calc-spar ; I observed crystals of
iron pyrites on the surface of some of these stones, and red spots
on others, perhaps the result of aqueous deposition. The sandstones

in Arracan appear to contain much iron, in different stages of oxida-
tion.

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 23

Still following the sea-shore, at the base of a long sandstone
range, whose utmost elevation above the plain cannot exceed
300 feet, I passed the village of Membraan, the locality of some
old Petroleum wells, which I am told no longer afford a sufficient
supply of oil to induce the working of them. From Membraan
to Kyouprath, the road lay along a beautiful beach, covered with a
fine yellow sand and shingle. I observed the prints of tigers’ feet
in several places on the route, and in this place they were particularly
numerous. From the circuits the animals had made on the beach,
they would seem to have been sporting with each other by the moon-
light; a thing not unusual with the male and female of the Feline
species during the season of Jove. The ground on the left was higher
and more open than it had hitherto been on the road, and covered with
a fine green sward. Beyond me was the village of Kyouprath, pret-
tily situated on an eminence over the sea-shore, and at no great dis-
tance in its rear, the range of sandstone hills, between which and the
village I observed a few acres of paddy ground. The hills were in
some few places cleared of the forest and underwood, and presented
small patches of open ground devoted to the cultivation of cotton.
It was near 10 o’clock when I reached Kyouprath, and as my elephants
were tired, and it was getting warm, I was not unwilling to make a
halt at the place for the remainder of theday. After selecting a spot
for the elephants, my next care was to seek quarters for myself; and
for this purpose, I requested the villagers, who had already assembled
to have a near view of the Inglee*, to direct me to the house of the
Rovagony, or head-man of the village. After my request had been
several times repeated, before it was understood, I at length found my-
self seated in his house. The Rovagony was at work in the field, but
his wife, a cheerful-looking woman, was present, and very kindly gave
me a mat to lie down upon, some fire for my cheroot, and a fowl
for my curry, on the assurance that full payment should be made for
every thing received. I fell asleep upon the mat, and did not rise
until the sun was nearly down, when I took a stroll upon the beach,
and bathed in the sea, A few blocks of sandstone, and a conglome-
rate, consisting of a paste of sandstone, with enclosed nodules of a
calcareous earth, lay upon the beach; some of these rocks had a sco-
riaceous appearance, were encrusted with crystals of iron pyrites, and
bore evident marks of igneous origin. Returning to the village, I sat
down on the green, to witness a wrestling match between two young
Mughs. This is a game that they are very fond of, and I have never
seen better wrestlers among any race of people. The vigorous frame

* Inglee, Englishmen, general term for an European.

24 Geological and Statistical Account of the (Jan.

of the combatants promised a treat of no ordinary kind, and I was not
disappointed ; it was truly astonishing to witness the dexterity of the
parties in their endeavours to throw each other. The struggle was
long and violent, ere it was terminated by the fall of either party ; it
was impossible, however, that both should be declared conquerors,
one poor fellow was thrown, and fairly held down at the mercy of the
victor. One of my Mahouts, a great stout man, and a native of Chit-
tagong, was present, and had the impudence to speak lightly of the
science. He was immediately challenged by a young Mugh, who was
far his inferior in size, as well as age. They wrestled, and the Mahout
was thrown, once—twice—and three times, to his very great confusion,
and the chagrin of his caste. Boxing, wrestling, and the Keeldéme,
are among the favourite amusements of the Mughs. The latter game
is not unlike our “ battledore and shuttlecock,” with this difference,
that the ball, which is hollow, and made of cane, is impelled into the
air by the foot, instead of by the hand. Halfa dozen young men form
a circle, and it is the aim of each individual, towards whom the ball
falls, to keep it up in the air as long as he can ; not enly the foot but
the knee is brought into action, much dexterity is displayed, and he
that keeps the ball up longest is entitled to the greatest credit. In
addition to the games of more general occurrence, the Mughs, like the
rest of their neighbours, have their own peculiar festivals, and modes
of celebrating them. The principal of these are—

1. Sangrain-Kyadeh*.—This occursin the month of Tagoo-la,
(April,) at the commencement of the new year, and during this sea-
son, the games of Reh-loundee, and Léh-prinedee are held. The for-
mer very much resembles what is observed in our own country on New-
year’s-day. The women throw water over the men, who generally
return the compliment ; no distinction is paid to rank. The water
is thrown indiscriminately, and with an unsparing hand, upon high
and low, and all seem determined to enjoy a season that permits of
such unlimited freedom. The Léh-prinedee is the boat-race, which is
held at the same time: a number of boats assemble in a broad creek,
and start for a certain place, each striving to outstrip the other. The
boats are impelled with oars, and those that are light and well man-
ned, have a surprising speed upon the water. The shouts of the
rowers, the strains of wild music, and the gay appearance of the boats

* The wholeof these festivals owe their source to some fabulous narrative, pre-
served in the sacred writings or other books, and religiously believed by an igno-
rant and superstitious people. I regret that I am, from my very imperfect ac-
quaintance with the language of this country, debarred an opportunity of tran-
scribing ary part of these.

1835. ] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 25

decked out at the stem with branches of plantain trees and garlands
of flowers, give a most pleasing and striking effect to the scene. Re-
turned to the place from whence they started, a donation in money,
or a piece of silk, is generally presented to the winner by the master
of the ceremonies. Nautches and entertainments succeed the boat-
race, and the festivities are closed with offerings to the priests and the
Rautoo*, who is on this occasion carefully washed and adorned.

2. Oobho-chounde.—This festival is held in the months Wajho,
(July,) Wagoung,(August,) Tantha-leng, (September,) and Sadyne- Kyot,
(October.) The people fast for a few days in each month, and pro-
ceeding to the Kioumst, dressed in their smartest attire, prostrate
themselves before the Phraat{, and make suitable offerings to the priests.

3. Wingbauh-pée occurs inthe month Sadyne-Kyot, (October.)—
By way of celebrating this festival, a labyrinth is constructed by
means of bamboo fences, so placed, as to make the path very narrow
and intricate from the numerous turns it takes. People of both sexes,
and of all ages, flock to this place in the evening, dressed in their
smartest clothes; old as well as young thread the labyrinth, enjoying
the fun that is occasioned by their several mistakes in endeavouring to
get out of it. A temple is erected in the centre of the labyrinth, and
within it are four images of the Buddha saint, to which the passengers
severally make obeisance, placing small lamps upon different parts of
the building for the purpose of illumination. The evening of each day
generally closes with a display of fire-works, and the Bouthséy, a lu-
dicrous dramatic representation, very much resembling the Putlé of
India. In addition to the above, a ceremony, termed the Puddéysah, is
performed during the month of Sadyne-Kyot. This consists in the
construction of a frame-work, intended to represent a tree, which is
carried about upon the shoulders of the people, and upon it are hung
such bequests as are made by individuals, in the shape of cloth, silks,
dishes, &c. the whole of which are intended for the use of the inmates
of the Kioums. Much is collected in this manner, it being considered
highly meritorious to make even the smallest gift on this occasion.
The procession is generally accompanied by dancers and musicians,
whose services are wholly gratuitous ; for whatever they may individu-
ally collect, is, in like manner, devoted to the necessities of the Kioum.

4. The Ruttah-béeh is held in the month of Taboo-dwar, (February,)
when the cold weather is supposed to have ended. A small tree is
placed upon a car that had been constructed for the purpose, and to
each end of this vehicle ropes are attached. The people assemble at
the place from all quarters, and two parties (generally selected from

* Image of Gautama. + Monasteries. t Gautama,

26 Geological and Statistical Account of the [Jan.

the inhabitants of two neighbouring villages) are formed fora trial of
strength : one party pulling against the other. The successful party
is allowed to draw the car away to their own village, where it is finally
consumed.

Several other wrestling matches were made, until it became too
dark to prolong the game. I now returned to the village, and entering
my host’s house, found a supper waiting my arrival. It was laughable
to observe the curiosity of the villagers to see an Inglee at the feeding
hour. Men, women, and children mounted the michaun, to the verv
great hazard of its coming down. There was in the appearance of my
visitors nothing of that fear and abject submission so characteristic of
the natives of India. The women, as well as the men, stood gazing
upon me, and all joined in the laugh excited by the European mode of
handing the food to my mouth, to them so incomprehensible and ri-
diculous. The children were not afraid to approach, and I was not so
uncivil as to refuse them a share of the viands they apparently covet-
ed. It was received with pleasure, and offered in return to their pa-
rents. A mother had a very pretty infant at her breast, and I was
surprised to see her give it a piece of bread that had been previously
chewed. I found on inquiry that a child is fed with a mouthful of boil-
ed rice, reduced to a state of mucilage, on the second day of its birth.
This it is said conduces to its vigour, and hastens the period for its
final separation from the breast.

January 13th.—The sun had not risen before I was seated on my
elephant, and setting out on my journey to Ladong. Leaving Kyou-
prath, and proceeding towards Kaeng, the route at first lay along the
sea-beach, and afterwards over a rugged piece of ground, covered
with blocks of sandstone and a conglomerate, which appear to have
been borne down from the superincumbent hills, by the violence of the
waters on their escape to the ocean. These rocks very much impeded
my progress, rendering the motions of the elephant rough and te-
dious to an uncomfortable degree. At the further extremity of the
plain, and bordering upon the sea-shore, the remains of a few mud
volcanoes may be seen. They have the appearance of extensive
mounds, covered with green sward, and (as is invariably the case with
all the mud volcanoes in Arracan) have a few Jhow trees growing
upon their sides. Proceeding to the spot for the purpose of examina-
tion, I could perceive no further evidences of present activity than what
was indicated by the existence of a spring of muddy water on the sum-
mit of each voleano; the water rising in bubbles, if at all disturbed,
owing to the quantity of carbonic acid gas it contained. The mud
was of a grey colour, and impregnated with much calcareous matter.

1835. ] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 27

Emerging from the plain, the traveller may either proceed to Kaeng
through the interior, via Maen-grah and Moreng, or take the direction
of the sea-beach. In either case, the features of the country are
much alike ; sandstone is still the prevailing rock, and in some in-
stances, when the upper stratum of clay has been washed away, it
assumes the substance of an entire hill.

Leaving Maen-grah by a narrow path, almost concealed from
view by the heavy jungle protruding on each side, I observed a
bird that answers in description to the Buceros Homrai of Nipal.
Indeed, it so closely resembles a drawing of the Buceros publish-
ed in Part 1, Vol. xviii. Asiatic Researches, that I cannot for a mo-
ment doubt its identity with that bird. I shot one of the many
that were hopping about the branches, making a disagreeable
noise; their flight was heavy and awkward, owing apparently
to the shortness of their wings: opening the stomach, I found
it filled with berries resembling those of the Peepul and Burgh’ hut
trees ; this would seem still further to establish the opinion advanced
by Mr. Honeson, that the Buceros Homrai was not a carnivorous
bird. Passing through the large village of Moreng, the road to Kaeng
lay over an extensive plain, covered with clumps of trees, the most
conspicuous among which were the Girjan, Tilsah, and wild Peepul.
Large flocks of the mountain minah were passing over-head, giving
the clear chearful chirrup peculiar to these charming birds; andI ob-
served a species of jay that was new to me. It was of an inferior size
to the common Indian jay (Neel-kaunt), and of a different colour ; but
from its shape, flight, and general appearance, there was no mistaking
its genus. The plumage of the head, back, and wings was of a pea-
green colour; the under part of the belly and tail, of a lighter green,
and the legs and bill, yellow. Kaeng is prettily situated upon high
ground, not far removed from the sea, and at the mouth of a creek,
which separates it from the district of Ladong, surrounded by exten-
sive plains, clear of low jungle, and diversified with rice-fields, gardens
and plots of indigo sowings. This village is superior to any one that
I have seen on the island, both with respect to situation, and the gene-
ral appearance of neatness and comfort that prevails throughout the
place. Approaching /taeng by the sea shore (in preference to the
route above described), the remains of several mud volcanoes may be
seen upon the hills to the left. The undulating appearance of these
mounds, covered throughout with a beautiful green sward, and studded
with a few Jhow trees, has a striking and agreeable effect amidst so
much jungle and similarity of aspect otherwise common to these hills.

-E2

28 Geological and Statistical Account of the (Jan.

At the foot of the volcano, adjoining the sea-beach, I perceived several
boulders of a rock, resembling clink-stone ; it was very hard and so-
norous when struck with the hammer, of a sea-green colour, and inter-
sected with veins of calc-spar; it was not improbable that it had been
at one time ejected from these volcanoes in a state of igneous fusion,
along with other substances.

Crossing the Kaeng creek, I entered a district of Ladong ; extensive
plains devoted to the cultivation of rice, and only separated from
each other by the narrow strips of Girjun trees and underwood,
mark the fertility of this part of Rambree; the soil is so exceed-
ingly fruitful that the principal exportations of rice from the island
are derived from Ladong. There are many Petroleum wells in this
district, some of which yield a very fair supply of oil. The whole
of the wells known to exist in the islands of Rambree and Cheduba
are farmed by Government, and sold annually to the highest bidder ;
I conceive it would be (in the end) far more advantageous to
Government was the sale to take place every three years, instead of
annually : was more labour bestowed upon these wells, the produce
would be greater; but the present system deters a purchaser from
devoting his labour to the production of an article that may become
the property of a more successful candidate, before he shall have receiv-
ed any return for the capital he had already invested in them. The
wells were suld this vear for 120 rupees. I am told that six only of
the Ladong wells are worked. One well is said to yield as much as
three quart bottles of oil (or 24 seers) per diem, and allowing that the
remaining five are nearly as productive, the quantity of oil collected
during a season (from the Ist November to the Ist June), would
amount to as much as 70 maunds.

The oil is sold in Ladong at the rate of one-half tillia per rupee.
The weight of a ¢illia varies from nine to sixteen seers. The Ladong
tillia of oil is said to be as much as can be contained in 18 bottles or
135 seers. The oil is much used, especially for burning; it burns
long, and gives a fine clear flame ; it has, however, a very disagreeable
smell, and is so highly inflammable, that it must be used with caution.

The oil produced on the Island of Cheduba is not so abundant or so
pure as that of Rambdree. One of the Petroleum wells in Ladong is
said to exist on the site of a dormant mud volcano—a circumstance not
at all improbable, when it is considered, that the gases and imflamma-
ble substances forming the constituent parts of either, are, as far as
has been hitherto discovered, essentially alike. The soil thrown up
from these wells is highly bituminous, and in some instances abounds.
with very beautiful crystals of iron pyrites. —

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 29

I had made up my mind to put up at the thanna of Ladong, so
took the nearest direction to it. Tne path lay at the foot of a
range of sandstone hills, to the left of the plains; on the summit
of this range stood a temple dedicated to Gautama, and in front of
it the long pole usually erected near such places of worship. The
character of the rock was such as had been hitherto observed,
with this exception, that a few rolled pieces of chert and stalactites
were visible in a few places, strewed upon the surface. I was
fortunate enough to shoot a very beautiful species of green pigeon
in these hills : it was as large as the wood-pigeon of Europe, and had a
superb plumage; the colour of the head, back, and tail were of a
very dark-green, while the wings and belly presented a bright azure
colour.

I had not proceeded far on my way towards the thanna, when
my attention was roused by the sound of music and the report of
fire-arms. Entering upon the plain, I perceived a multitude of
people apparently met on some extraordinary occasion. I drew near,
and learned that they had assembled to perform the funeral rite of a
Phoongree, who had lately died. These high priests of Buddha deno-
minated Phoongrees, are common in Arracan, and much revered by the
laity ; they are never known to interfere in the domestic affairs of the
people, or exercise that spiritual dominion so generally usurped by
the ambitious priesthood of other countries. Confining themselves en-
tirely to the exercise of their religious duties, they are seldom seen
beyond the precincts of the Kioum; unless it be to make their morning
rounds through the neighbouring villages, accompanied by the boys, to
whose keeping are committed the voluntary contributions of the inha-
bitants. It is worthy of remark that these daily excursions are made
not so much for the purpose of obtaining supplies for the inmates of
the monastery, as to gratify the wishes of the villagers, who are desir-
ous of enjoying this opportunity of testifying their respect and attach-
ment for the ministers of their religion. The discipline of the Phoon-
grees is extremely rigid, and not unlike that preserved in the monastic
sects of Europe. To a life of celibacy is added the injunction of not
holding any communion whatever with the female sex; and so strictly
is this precept adhered to, that a Phoongree will neither converse
with a female, or receive from her hands the offering she may wish to
present to him. The dress of the Phoongree is confined to an orange:
coloured mantle, which extends from the shoulders to some little dis-
tance below the knee; his head is closely shaved, and always uncover-
ed. He sleeps in the Aioum, upon a mat, with no other covering than
that afforded by his mantle; and his diet is of the simplest kind, one

0 Geological and Statistical Account of the [Jan.

meal a day being considered sufficient for his subsistence. The food
is cooked by some of the scholars of the Kioum, or by the newly ini-
tiated of the sect ; and those Phoongrees who are desirous of maintain-
ing a character for peculiar abstinence, will not even express a desire
to satisfy the claims of hunger, however pressing they may be ; waiting
patiently until such time as food may be presented to them by some
inmate of the Kiowm - with these are many other observances, all en-
joining an uninterrupted course of humiliation and abstinence.

Some of these monasteries are very large, and contain a great many
monks, as well as the boys whose education they superintend. They
are erected by the villagers, and supply such accommodation as is re-
quired. Ina remote part of the interior of the Kioum is an image of
Gautama. Before this image the Phoongrees prostrate themselves
twice a day, and never leave the building without making an obeisance,
and intimating their intention to the Rowtoo : a similar duty is performed
on their return. This image is composed of more or less costly mate-
rials, according to circumstances. In some Kzoums I have seen the
Phraa entirely covered with gold or silver leaf; in others again, it is of
wood or stone, with little or no ornament whatever. Flowers, rice, and
parched grain are the offerings generally made at the shrine of Gau-
tama, either by officiating priests, or any of the laity, as a religious ob-
servance, and for the attainment of some particular object of desire.

The assumption of the monastic garb is voluntary ; the person who
expresses a wish to become a Phoongree is admitted into the convent
(without regard to country, or the religion he may formerly have
professed), provided he stipulates his readiness to conform to the
Buddhist observances in matters of faith and discipline, and there
exists no impediment (such as his having a family to support, or his not
having obtained the permission of his parents, &c.), to his abandon-
ment of earthly pursuits ; sickness, deformity, and a bad character
are also sufficient causes for rejection. Should none of these obstacles
present themselves, the candidate is admitted into the Kioum, and attired
in the prescribed dress, enters upon the duties of a Phoongree. If, as
is generally the case, his age shall not have exceeded 15 years, he is
appointed to the performance of the menial duties, and gradually initi-
ated inthe peculiar tenets of the sect, until he shall have arrived at the
age of 20 years, the time appointed for confirmation.

It is not uncommon for a Phoongree to devote only a certain period
of his life to the duties of the convent, returning to the world so soon as
that term of religious abstinence shall have expired. These Phoongrees
are generally young men, who are desirous of assuming the monastic
garb, either from a religious feeling, or for the purpose of performing

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 31

some expiatory service, and are enabled to do so through the assistance
of some persons who deem it an act of piety to defray the expences
consequent to their ordination.

In towns and large villages the education of the children* (the
male part of them), is chiefly entrusted to the Phoongrees, and it is a
part of their daily and uninterrupted occupation. No distinction is
made between the children of the rich and the poor : both are treated
alike and receive a similar education ; no remuneration whatever being
made to these good monks for their trouble, save the daily provision
that is voluntarily supplied by the native community for their subsis-
tence. Children under nine pears of age are not admissible into the
Kioum, being of too tender an age to undergo the discipline and
duties imposed upon them out of school hours, such as fetching wood
and water, cleaning the rice, and attending the priests in their daily
rounds, for it is the duty of the boys to carry the baskets containing
the contributions of food. Such children as are parentless, or of poor
parents, and even those who reside at some distance from the Kioum,
are fed as well as lodged by the priests. The other boys are allowed
a certain time to go home to their meals, but they are obliged to
sleep in the convent, for what they have read during the day is repeat-
ed in the evening or at day-break on the following morning.

There is another source of education equally peculiar to the Mughs ;
such as are not engaged in any pursuit or employment requiring all
their time, devote a portion of it to the education of children, entirely
gratis; less labour being expected from the children than is im-
posed upon them in the Kiowms. Children under nine years of age
and of both sexes are admissable to such schools, the rules, as before
observed, being less strict than those enforced at the monasteries ; it is
therefore not uncommon to meet with children of a very tender age at
such schools.

I know nothing so gratifying to a stranger as a visit to the larger
Kioums in the evening of a fine day. To observe boys of all ages
rushing from the scene of their daily labours to the tank or other
place of enjoyment, with that cheerful demeanour which marks the
school-boy in our own country when released from his task and join-
ing his fellows on the play-ground. At this time a group of monks may
be seen standing on the elevated Michaun at the threshold of the
Kioum, enjoying the evening air, or quietly watching the conduct jof

* T am indebted to my friend Captain WiiitamMs for much information on this
subject, as well as on other matters connected with this singular people. The
great popularity he enjoys with the Mughs, has given him favourable opportunities
for prosecuting his inquiries into their customs, &c.

32 Geological and Statistical Account of the (Jan.

the little urchins just escaped from their controul. To the eye of the
most careful observer, their countenances bespeak a tranquillity of
mind unknown to such whose passions are yet unsubdued. Thereis inthe
appearance of these priests an equal absence of puritanical zeal or
overweening confidence; their features are as placid as the sky above
them, and even with those whose religious duties are of the graver
cast, a smile of benevolence may be seen to break through the shades
of sorrow and self-degradation. Often have I, in passing, addressed
these monks, and have invariably received a courteous reply. On
some occasions I have found a welcome in the Kiowm when shelter
was denied me elsewhere ; and with that welcome the more substan-
tial evidences of good will in the shape of a repast prepared for myself
and followers. I never left the Kiowm in prosecution of my journey
without feeling grateful to those good monks, who had so charitably
received the white stranger into their mansion.

The Bhi Kuni (nuns), are equally common with the priests. They
either reside in a convent of nuns, or live separately in some house
constructed near a Koo (temple), superintending the offerings, and
leaaing a life of religious abstinence. The greater part of the Bhi
Kuni, have retained their virginity from early youth; others again
have retired from the scene of earthly cares at a more advanced age;
in some instances, after marriage, but only when that marriage has not
been productive of children. The dress of the Bhi kuni is similar
to that of the Phoongrees, and their discipline in every other respect
alike. Both are equally revered by the laity, and supplied with the
little food necessary for their subsistence.

Respected by the people when living, it is not surprising that the
Nigh-ban* of a Phoongree should be marked by circumstances expres-
sive of the sanctity of his character, and the attachment of his flock.
The nature of the preparations made to do honour to his remains will
depend much upon the means of the population residing in the neigh-
bourhood of the Kiowm. If these should be ample, the funeral obse-
quies will be performed on a scale of magnificence seldom surpassed
in their most expensive shews ; but if otherwise, the ceremonies will
of necessity be got over in a hurried and economical style. The
following will however be found to be the general practice with regard
to the obsequies of a deceased Phoongree, and such mode of perform-
ing them was adopted in the present instance.

When emancipated from the world, the body is opened and em-
balmed ; after which it lies for many weeks exposed to public view.
The body is then confined in a coffin richly embellished with gold and

* Nirvan, death ; properly emancipation.

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 33

silver leaf, and this is placed upon a lofty car that had been construct-
ed for the purpose. The inhabitants of the neighbouring villages flock
to the spot, and ropes having been fixed to the fore and hinder parts
of the car, a contention arises among the villagers for the remains of
the Phoongree. One party pulls against the other, and those that are
successful claim the honor of finishing the ceremonies. This is done
by a grand display of fireworks, the greater part of which are skilfully
directed at the car, which is at length set on fire and the body is con-
sumed*, Should the deceased Phoongree have maintained a character
for peculiar sanctity, a part of his remains is not unfrequently pre-
served from the flames and retained as valuable relics. The influence
of superstition has attached much value to such remains, and in ad-
dition to the worth they may be supposed to possess from the religious
character of the departed priest, they are held by the more ignorant to be
a common ingredient in those charms that are in use with the wizard.

The Mughs hold the practice of burning the dead to be more ho-
nourable than that of committing the body to the earth or the sea, pro-
bably from its being attended with greater expense and publicity.
Funerals are, however, conducted in either way, according to the means
of the relations, or other circumstances favouring the adoption of one
particular practice. The spot on which a funeral pile had been
raised is not unfrequently marked by a cenotaph, a garden, a clump
of trees, or such other monument of affection as the condition
of the parties will enable them to place over the ashes of a departed
relative. In some cases, the funeral rites are followed with donations
of food and clothing to the priests, and a further evidence of piety is
evinced in the adoption of some young man who shall express his readi-
ness to embrace the profession of a Phoongree.

January 14.—I had slept at the thannah on the night of the 13th,
and was up at an early hour on the following morning with the inten-
tion of moving on to Oogah. The distance from Khyouk Phyoo to
Kyouprath is at least sixteen miles; from that to Ladong is said to be
as much as twenty; so that I had travelled 36 miles in the two days.
Oogah was distant 12 miles from Ladong, and as the route lay over a
level country I was not detained very long upon the road. The villa-
ges in Ladong are remarkably large, and have a cheerful, comfortable
appearance. The whole face of the district, with the exception of the
narrow belts of Girjun trees and underwood before mentioned, is un-
der cultivation ; and but for the costume and features of the inhabitants
as well as the peculiar construction of the houses, I could have fancied

* See a full account of the same ceremony by the late Rev. Dr. Carry, As.
Res. xii. 389.—Ep.

F

34 Geological and Statistical Account of the (Jane

myself in Bengal. The general appearance of the Mugh, induces the
supposition that his condition is not only infinitely superior to that of
the poorer classes in many parts of India, but that he is comparatively
happy and contented with hislot. His clothing, though coarse and of
native manufacture, is ample for the climate, and his vigorous frame
of body bespeaks a sufficiency of nourishment. As his wants are few
and easily supplied, there is no call for that unremitting labour which
secures to the poor of other countries their scanty sustenance. The
earnings of one day of toil generally provide for the exigencies of two
successive days of ease ; and to such as are, from a more indolent ha-
bit, less willing to cultivate the soil or perform the duties of an hire-
ling, the forest and the sea present an inexhaustible supply of food.
It is to this abundance of the necessaries of life in some one shape or
another that we may ascribe the existence of that apathetic indiffer-
ence to the future, characteristic of the Mugh population, and until
some artificial wants are produced by a taste for luxuries hither-
to unknown, we shall look in vain for that display of activity and
toil peculiar to a more civilized, but less happy and probably less vir-
tuous, race of people. It is not however too much to affirm, that such a
change is already perceptible among those who are most in contact
with Europeans and the natives of India.

In the towns of Khyouk Phyoo and Rembree, we may observe this
indication of the growing taste for articles of foreign manufacture, in
the small investments of cutlery, glass-ware, muslins, and broad-cloth
exposed for sale in the shops along with the produce of the country.
Fhe people have already become smarter in their dresses, and were a
little more attention paid to their pattern of piece goods, I have no
doubt but the sale of these would be far greater than it is at present.
Long habituated toa state of being little remote from that enjoyed by
the brutes of the forest, the present generation are prepared to value
those little luxuries denied to them during the reign of Burmah des-
potism, and will not be slow in securing the possession of them if
placed within their reach. It is amusing, though melancholy, to hear
these poor people relate the state of things in former days, in as far as
regards the importation of foreign produce, and the prohibitions that
debarred them the privilege of wearing the muslin turban or angah,
even were they sufficiently wealthy to purchase the materials for one.
Asany exportation of the staple produce of the soil was seldom or ever
permitted, few returns were made in the shape of Europe or Indian
goods. They did, on some occasions, find their way into the country by
the Godoohs that returned from Calcutta and Chittagong, laden with
such articles of Europe or Indian manufacture, as the owners were
enabled to obtain in exchange for the gold leaf, deer horns, bees’ wax,

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 35

and earth oil, the produce of Ava and Arracan. The demands of the
Burmah Kaeng*, and the numerous exactions, with the expenses of a
long and dangerous voyage, were, however, thrown with such severe
but necessary weight upon the original prices of the several commodi-
ties imported, that none but the rulers of the land would venture to
evince a disposition to become possessed of them.

Property has now become comparatively secure; a stimulus has
been given to industry by the freedom allowed to the exportation of
produce ; with an increase of production there will be an augmenta-
tion of capital, and the agriculturist may look forward to the attain-
ment of those articles of comfort and luxury hitherto denied to him.
Still this change for the better will, of necessity, be very gradual. It
is as it were a newly discovered land, and as such it will require the
united efforts of capital and labour (joined with skill), to bring its re-
sources into play. As is well known, the staple produce of the soil is
rice. Great quantities of this grain are annually exported to Madras
and Penang : the returns being generally made in kind, and consisting
chiefly of Madras cloths and Europe muslins, which are either sold
in Arracan or retained for importation mto Ava. Iam not aware
that any other article of agricultural produce is exported from Ram-
bree. Both cotton and indigo are, however, grown upon the island,
the former on the mountain side after it had been cleared of the jun-
gle; tobacco is also produced in the ravines and clefts of the hills,
subsequent to the accumulation of alluvial soil deposited therein by
means of adam so constructed, as to oppose its escape with the torrent.
But neither of these are produced in such abundance as to permit of
a large exportation ; the quantity grown being little more than suffi-
cient for consumption in the province. A want of capital, and perhaps
a want of confidence in the Government, prohibiting agricultural spe-
culation, the production is generally confined to what may be deemed
sufficient for domestic purposes, or be grown with the sure prospect
of ultimate reward.

The morning was bitterly cold, and I was glad to dismount from the
elephant and walk. Snipe were very numerous ona piece of marshy
ground, through which the road lay, and further on, I observed two
deer of the same species as the Ratwa deer of Nipal; I could not
give a better description of this animal than referring my readers to
the account given of it by Mr. Hopeson along with the drawing, both
of which appear in Part 2, vol. xviii. Asiatic Researches. I had before
seen one that had been caught ina net, and brought unto me. The
‘ * Collectors of customs. The duty levied was usually aa much as ten per cent,
and not unfrequently paid in kind,

F 2

36 Geological and Statistical Account of the [Jan.

Mughs call the animal Ghi, and say, that they are very abundant upon
the island, residing in the recesses of the forest. The two deer above-
mentioned were seen at the skirts of the jungle, and were evidently
returning to their haunts after a night’s ramble through the plains.

There was nothing peculiar in the geological features of the country
between Ladong and Oogah. ‘The soil was, as usual, composed of a
rich clay, mixed with a small proportion of sand, and sandstone the
prevailing rock. The dip of the stratum, wherever a stratification
could be observed, being still to the S.S. W. and S. W. parallel to the
bearing of the hills.

Leaving the stubble fields of Ladong, I came once more upon the
beach, and could see the village of Oogah beyond me, very prettily
situated on a bight of the sea. It was surrounded with tamarind and
mango trees, and was on the whole a neat and comfortable looking
village. The prospect from Oogah was remarkably fine ; beyond it,
on the land side, lay Jeeka, the highest mountain in the island, and
immediately opposite to it, separated only by a small channel of the
sea, was the island of Cheduba, with its blue hills and undulating
plains. A Godoo was at anchor between the islands, and from the
reports of the crew who were on shore for water, it appeared that she
had come last from Chittagong, and was bound to Bassem, laden with
betel-nuts and sundries. The Soogree* of the village had come out
to escort me to his house, a snug looking building surrounded with a
strong bamboo fence. In front of the house, and under the tamarind
trees, a nice michaun had been constructed for the accommodation of
travellers, and upon this I lay down and slept until a room with a mat,
&c., should be got ready in the Soogree’s house for my reception at
night. I should have been very well pleased to have slept out in the
open air upon the michaun, but for the remonstrances of my host, who
pointed out the danger of doing so in a place so much infested with
tigers. It was perhaps as well that I did not sleep outside, for a tiger
came into the village during the night, and so much alarmed one of
the elephants that he broke loose. The old Soogree appeared to be in
very good circumstances ; he had a large house, abundance of poultry
and cattle, and in addition to these evidences of prosperity, he had
two wives. Polygamy iscommonenough in Arracan. There appears
to be no limitation ; a man may keep as many wives as he can afford
to maintain. The consent of the first wife should, however, be obtain-
ed previous to the conclusion of a second contract. It is seldom that
a refusal is given, and equally seldom that attention is paid to it,
Retaining the privileges of a mistress, and probably aware of her

* The head man of the eircle ; he collects the revenue.

1835.) Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 37

inability to enforce a compliance with the restriction she wishes to im-
pose, the elder wife usually signifies her readiness to receive into the
family a second helpmate for her husband. This new alliance is sel-
dom resorted to before the first wife shall have ceased to retain the
charms of her youth, and have become incapable of performing the
several domestic duties incumbent upon her.

The system of betrothing children to each other at a very early age,
so common with natives of India, does not obtain with the Arracanese.
Instances will occur when their marriage has been the result of a pre-
concerted arrangement on the part of the parents so soon as the
female shall have attained the age of maturity (15 years), and not
preceded by mutual attachment of the parties united. The young
people are not, however, unfrequently, permitted to form their own
choice, and where no great disparity of age exists, the consent of the
parents is generally obtained. As there is no seclusion of the females
there can be no want of opportunity for the display of those little atten-
tions, which in the eyes of the female sex distinguish a lover from a
mere observer. The lifting of a pitcher from the well or tank to his mis-
tress’s head, or the present of a bouquet of early flowers to adorn her
hair, are but few of the many ways by which the passion of her lover
is exemplified. Should such attention be pleasing to the fair one, she will
probably intimate as much by the gift of a neatly made bundle of cheroots
manufactured by her own hand. The attachment between the parties
being known to their parents and their consent obtained, the astrologer
(Hoora-dye),is consulted : the day, month and year of their children’s
birth is made known to him, and if the result of his calculations are
favourable to the union, every thing is arranged for its completion. In
the first place, a present of a fine silk dress ; some gold and silver orna-
ments, with a little tea mixed up with spices, are sent to the young lady
by her lover, who will perhaps follow in the evening of the same day
preceded by the young unmarried men of the village: these advancing
before him as he approaches the house of his intended bride, extend to
the right and left, and oppose his further progress until he has satis-
fied them with as many rupees as he can afford tolose. He now draws
near tothe threshold of his mistress’s house. She, on her part, is at-
tended by the young maidens of the village, and these oppose his
entrance to the dwelling until he has paid a fine similar to that imposed
upon him by his male companions. The lover now enters the house ;
and seated at his mistress’s side, flowers and water are scattered over
both by the hands of the oldest and most respectable person present.

This done, they both sit down toa meal prepared by the parents of
the girl, receiving the food from each other’s hands. The meal ended,

38 Geological and Statistical Account of Rambree. [Jan.

the hands of the bride and bridegroom are laid upon each other, (the
hand of the bridegroom uppermost,) and washed by the same person
who had sprinkled the water and flowers over the parties. The father
of the bridegroom then takes a ring from off his son’s hand, and
places it upon the third finger of the bride’s left hand. The marriage

* ceremony being now completed, a mantoh and entertainment is held at
the bride’s house. The bridegroom retires with the bride, and remains
seven days in her parent’s house, preparatory to his taking her to his
own home. This will be found to be the general practice of the peo-
ple on the occasion of their nuptials, but it is not uncommon for a man
to take to himself a wife without going through any part whatever of
the ceremony above described, nor is there any discredit attached to the
parties so united. The woman is viewed in the light of a wife, and
treated, in every respect, in the same manner as if she had been united
to the man in the manner I have detailed. A prostitute was a being
unknown to the Mughs before the country had fallen into the hands of
the British. Among the blessings attending the change of rule and
marking the progress of civilization in Arracan, is the introduction of
a gradual increase of that unhappy class of people, and with it the
miseries that are consequent to an unrestrained and promiscuous inter-
course. To the honour of the Mugh women I must declare, that in-
stances of prostitution on their part are still of rare occurrence; the
reputation for this viceis still more generally attached to their more
civilized neighbours the Bengalees.

So much liberty being allowed to the sexes in early youth, it may be
supposed that an unlicensed intercourse will, in many instances, be
found to exist between them previous to their union. It would be
unreasonable to affirm that a passion which is so often known to break
through the bounds imposed by religion and morality upon a people
who claim for themselves a superior degree of civilization, should not
in this country be known to exist in an equally unbridled state, and pro-
duce the evils consequent to an unrestrained intercourse and the shame
of an avowal. Instances of abortion or bastardy are not, however, of
frequent occurrence, the good sense of the parents, to whom the
attachment in its several stages is generally known, preventing by a
timely union of the parties, the evil which must originate from an
intercourse unsanctioned by custom and authority.

When it is considered how easily a divorce is obtained, and how
seldom sought for, we may naturally conclude that marriage is conducive
to the happiness of the people. Separation may be effected (privately)
by a deed drawn out by husband and wife, and witnessed by two or
more respectable neighbours; or both parties may appear before the

1835.] Mountain Trout of Kemaon. 39

meeo-woon or magistrate, and a separation is instantaneously effected
on their compliance with the rules laid down for observance in such
cases. If the wife objects to remain any longer with her husband, and
he shall be found to have repeatedly ill treated her, sheis at liberty to
depart, receiving from him the whole of her property, as well as the
children (both male and female), that may have been born to her.
The children are, in maturer years, allowed to reside with either parent
as choice directs. If, on the contrary, the wife shall be found to have
behaved ill, she pays a certain sum of money (generally about 25 or
30 rupees), to her husband, who also retains possession of the
male children ; the wife receiving no part whatever of the property
In cases where no criminality is attached to either party, and both
desire to be separated, a fair division of property is made, each receiv-
ing what he or she may have possessed before marriage, with an equal
share of the produce of their united labours; the husband retaining the
boys, and the wife the girls. The case being investigated and decided
upon, a pawn is broken into two pieces, one of which is given to each
as the emblem of separation. This done, the divorce has beeneffected,
and they are both at liberty to contract any new alliance.
[To be continued.|

nn ee"

HI.—Description of the (so called) Mountain Trout of Kemaon. By
Dr. J. M’Creuianp, Assistant Surgeon, 30th Regt. N. I.

From among the treasures of natural history of Kemaon that have
not hitherto been indicated, the following notice of a new species of
fish, which affords a plentiful article of food to those who reside in the
vicinity of small rocky streams, may not be uninteresting. From the
appearance of this species, it has commonly been considered by Euro-
peans to whom it is familiar asa common mountain trout ; a closer ex-
amination however, soon detects the mistake, and except that it belongs
to the class of abdominal fishes and inhabits fresh-water streams, there
is no natural connexion between this fish and the species to which it
was supposed to belong. ‘The following are its distinguishing cha-
racters.

Body compressed ; mouth situated under the head, lunate, retrac-
tile, toothless. Dorsal fin consisting of eight rays. Two ventral fins
situated on the centre of the abdomen, caudal fin bifid.

The colour of the back is bluish-black, diminishing in intensity on
the sides, which are each marked as usual with a lateral line, and the
belly is pale bluish-white. The scales are so small as to be scarcely
perceptible, and there is a slight golden lustre or iridescence about the
head ; the length is from three inches to nine. |

40 Mountain Trout of Kemaon. [Jan.

The habits of this fish are so peculiar as to deserve to be mentioned. ~
It derives its food from the green slime or moss that collects on the
surface of rocks under water, and which is removed with considerable
difficulty with the finger ; but so well has nature provided the creature
with the means of procuring its peculiar sustenance, that the object is
fulfilled with ease and apparent enjoyment. When feeding on the
upper surface of a stone, the animal glides forward with sufficient force,
and at the same time depresses the under lip, with which it scrapes
the slime off the rock as it passes over it, leaving a streak behind like
the scratch ofa stick. If the food is to be derived from the side of a
rock, the creature accommodates itself accordingly ; and if from the
under surface of a projecting ledge, it throws itself on its back and
darts forward with the most wonderful agility.

From observing these peculiarities of character it became necessary
to examine the anatomical structure of the mouth and digestive or-
gans of the animal, and the following is the result.

The under jaw or rather the under lip (for it cannot be said to have
any jaws, and in this respect it resembles the sturgeon and loricaria),
is composed of three small bones, the two outer are articulated at their.
bases to the inferior angles of the ossa malarum or cheek bones, (a
fig. 3. Pl. I.)and the centre one is in like manner attached to the sternum
(b), these bones (1, 2, 3,) have hinge joints by which the lip may be
depressed at its free extremity, and they are attached laterally to each
other by strong ligaments.

On the inner side of the bones of the lip is situated a strong mus-
cular mass (a fig. 4,) whose fibres originate on the inner side of the
sternum, and are inserted into the upper extremities of the bones and
ligaments of the lip, while that part of the organ which is used for
collecting food in the manner above described, is at once protected and
adapted to the performance of its singular function by a thick carti-
laginous covering. Whether we contemplate the peculiar figure of
the ossa malarum, the sternum, or of the muscles, nothing can be more
simple or complete than the means resorted to by Providence in adapting
the lip of this creature to the peculiar office it is destined to perform.

From the unyielding nature of the abutments to which the lip is
attached in order to enable it to resist the pressure it is exposed to,
as well as from the peculiar nature of the joint, it is incapable of any
other action than that of being depressed; but owing to its great
strength and necessary thickness, this motion alone would not be
enough to open the mouth sufficiently for the admission of food, and
this brings us to another contrivance still more curious.

There is a small bone (¢ fig. 3.) loosely attacked to what may be
named the nasal process of the frontal bone, by a hinge joint which

1835.] Mountain Trout of Kamaon. 41

enables it to swing freely backwards and forwards, and to the lower
end of this there is fixed a cartilaginous rim which forms the anterior
boundary of the mouth (d), and by the muscular structure of the
snout and palate the anterior boundary of the mouth is drawn forward
or retracted at pleasure. It is probable from the consideration of these
parts that they do not serve merely for opening the mouth, but also
assist in collecting or sucking food into it, by means of the vacuum
consequent on the enlargement of its cavity, the opercula being com-
pressed on the apertura branchialis.

From the soft pulpy nature of the food mastication would be use-
less, accordingly there are no teeth: the tongue is short and cartilagi-
nous. The last remarkable circumstance in the anatomy of this fish
which I shall mention is, the great length of the intestinal canal, it
being eight times that of the body, the stomach alone extending the
whole length of the abdominal cavity. These circumstances indicate
either the innutritious nature of the food, or the strong digestive powers
that are requisite: the latter would appear to be the case from the
muscular strength of the stomach, which is displayed to the =
naked eye by the numerous white bands of longitudinal 4
fibres which may be observed passing thus in a zigzag form 2
from one extremity to the other. :

The whole length of the canal was loaded in the specimen examined
with the peculiar slimy food already mentioned.

During the warm season these fish are seen sporting and feeding at
all hours, but in winter they spend their time chiefly under rocks and
stones, where they probably deposit their spawn, only coming out to
feed as the sun ascends in the meridian, and again retiring in the
afternoon; or on being frightened, they rush into their hiding places,
from which they can easily be taken with the hand, and in this way
the native fisherman in a few minutes secures as many of them as he
wishes. Conceiving them to be trout every attempt has been made to
catch them in the usual way with fly and bait, and though every device
has been resorted to, instances of success are so rare that they may
be almost referred to chance. A less refined but more successful
method of fishing (as I have been assured by an intelligent friend
who has seen it) is practised in the vicinity of Lohooghat by the black-
smiths during periods of relaxation from their more legitimate calling :
these persons, aware of the disposition of the fish to spend certain
seasons under stones, pursue the beds of the rivers, striking such loose
stones with their sledge-hammers as they may suspect to conceal fish,
which they thus kill by concussion.

@

42 Discovery of the Genuine (Jan.
IV.—Discovery of the Genuine Tea Plant in Upper Assam.

[The following official correspondence of the Tea Committee has been obliging-
ly handed to us for publication. We hasten to present it to our readers in its
original shape rather than attempt to make an abstract of its contents, because
the curiosity of the public is much raised, and they will naturally wish to follow
the whole train of the discovery, and give the credit thereof where it is due.—Ep.]

Letter from the Committee of Tea Culture to W.H. Macnacurten, Esq.

Secretary to the Government of India, in the Revenue Department.
Sir,

We request that you will have the goodness to submit to the Right
Honorable the Governor General of India in Council the enclosed copies
of the reports, which we have received from Captain Junxins, dated
the 7th and 19th May, and from Lieut. Cuaruton, dated the 17th May;
also a subsequent communication from Lieut. CHartron, dated the
5th of last month, together with the samples of the fruit and leaves of
the tea plant of Upper Assam, which accompanied it, and some speci-
mens of the leaves previously received.

2. It is with feelings of the highest possible satisfaction that we
are enabled to announce to his Lordship in Council, that the tea shrub
is beyond all doubt indigenous in Upper Assam, being found there
through an extent of country of one month’s march within the Honor-
able Company’s territories, from Sadiya and Beesa, to the Chinese fron-
tier province of Yunnan, where the shrub is cultivated for the sake of
its leaf. We have no hesitation in declaring this discovery, which is due
to the indefatigable researches of Capt. Jenxins and Lieut. Cuaron,
to be by far the most important and valuable that has ever been made
in matters connected with the agricultural or commercial resources of
this empire. We are perfectly confident that the tea plant which has
been brought to light, will be found capable, under proper manage-
ment, of being cultivated with complete success for commercial purpo-
ses, and that consequently the object of our labors may be before long
fully realised.

3. It is proper to observe, that we were not altogether unprepared
for this highly interesting event. We were acquainted with the fact
that so far back as 1826, the late ingenious Mr. Davip Scott, sent
down from Munipore specimens of the leaves of a shrub, which he
insisted upon was a real tea; and it will be seen from the enclosed
reports from the agent to the Governor General on the north-eastern
frontier and his assistant, that a similar assertion was strongly urged
in regard to the existence of the tea in Upper Assam. Still we felt
ourselves bound to suspend our decision on the subject until we should
be in possession of the fruit of the reputed shrub, the only test which
ought to guide us. We knew that several species of Camellia were
natives of the mountains of Hindustan, and that two of these were

1835.] Tea Plant in Upper Assam. 43

indigenous in our north-eastern frontier provinces; and taking into
consideration the close affinity between the two genera, we were dis-
posed to expect, that the alleged tea would prove nothing else but
some sort of Camellia. We have at length obtained the fruit of the
Sadiya plant from Lieut. Cuariron, and we are now enabled to state
with certainty, that not only is it a genuine tea, but that no doubt can
be entertained of its being the identical tea of China, which is the
exclusive source of all the varieties and shades of the tea of commerce.
With the view of exhibiting the peculiarities in the structure of the
fruit, on which depends entirely the difference between the Tea and
Camellia, we have desired our officiating secretary to annex to this
letter a sketch of the fruit of both, with explanatorv remarks.

4. We beg leave most respectfully to submit the preceding facts
to the particular consideration of Government, and earnestly to recom-
mend, that in the first instance, and as early as may be practicable,
one or more scientific gentlemen properly qualified for the investiga-
tion may be deputed into Upper Assam for the purpose of collecting
on the spot the greatest variety procurable of botanical, geological and
other details, which, as preliminary information, are absolutely neces-
sary before ulterior measures can be successfully taken with regard to
the cultivation of the tea shrub of that country. We also beg to ex-
press our opinion, that it would be highly desirable to adopt forth-
with the plan suggested in Lieut. CHariron’s last letter, of the 5th
of November, of establishing a communication with Yunnam by means
of a land-road, at least as far as Hookam, since, independent of all
other advantages, it would materially facilitate the operations of the
scientific deputation, which we have recommended should be sent to
Upper Assam with as little delay as possible.

5. We anticipate that the execution of the recommendations we
have made, need not be attended with any considerable expense ; but
it appears to us, with reference to the very great importance of the
occasion, that the only consideration which should have weight is, that
the money which may be required should be faithfully and cpeneee
applied to the purposes for which it may be granted.

We have, &c.
Calcutta, Dec. 24, 1834. Signed by the Committee of Tea Culture.

From Captain F. Jenxins, Agent to the Governor General on the N. E.
Frontier, to G. J. Gorvon, Esq. Secretary of the Committee of Tea
Culture, dated Gowahatiy, 7th May, 1834.

I regret the delay that has occurred in acknowledging your circular,
dated the 3rd March, to my address: it has been occasioned by un-
avoidable circumstances which I have further to regret will prevent

44 Discovery of the Genuine (Jan.

my replying to your communication to the length I could wish or the
subject deserves.

2. My little acquaintance with Assam will not admit of my replying
to all your questions, but from general information and my own obser-
vation, I am so fully impressed with the belief of the fitness of the
mountainous region which divides Cachar from Assam for the growth of
tea, that I beg to attempt to call the attention of the Committee to that
region in the most forcible manner I can, with a view to its examina-
tion by a competent individual.

3. The mountainous tract I allude to, commences from the east of
the country of the Jynteah Raja, and continues always increasing in
elevation until it reaches to the eastern end of the valley of Assam, and
is so far under the controul of British authority, immediately between
Cachar and Assam completely so, and farther on more or less directly
or indirectly. The part entirely under us ranges from 6 to 8000 feet
greatest heights, and farther east the mountains attain a height of
10,000 feet, and the valleys and beds of streams are from 2500 to 4000
feet above the sea. From the end of the valley of Assam this ceases
to be merely a west and east range, its direct continuation passes into
China into the tea countries of Sechuen and Yunnan: the northern
bend in the latitude of Sadiya meets a branch of the snowy mountaias,
and the southern divides off into the two mountainous ranges, which
border the Irrawady on either side, from its sources to the sea.

4. Every part of this mountainous country that I have visited, presents
nearly a uniform geological structure, being almost entirely composed
of clay-slate, and every where nearly of the same appearance, very much
broken and disintegrated, so much so as to be seldom visible in mass,
and being covered with a deep coat of soil and luxuriant vegetation
even on the greatest heights.

5. Camellias are found in every part of this hill country, and within
our jurisdiction in the Singpho district of Beesa, a coarse variety of the
tea plant is, as 1am informed, undoubtedly: indigenous. A plant was
given to me at Sadiya, which I have reason to suppose, was a genuiue
tea tree, and I intended to have brought it to Calcutta for examination,
but I received itin a sickly state, and from the prevalence of great heat
I was unable to succeed in taking it to the presidency. I shall endea-
vour to procure another plant or two for the satisfaction of the Com-
mittee. However, having no doubt myself of the fact of the tea shrub
being found wild in the eastern parts of Assam, I would beg to re-
commend the expediency of some well-qualified person being at once
sent up for the identification of the plant beyond any objection, for
the examination of the soilin which it grows as reported, and an in-
-spection of the tract of mountains between Cachar and Assam.

‘

1835.] Tea Plant in Upper Assam. 45

6. If this recommendation were acted upon, the person deputed
should be in Cachar by the 1st of November, and proceed immediately
to ascend the mountains in communication with the officer in civil
charge, Captain Fisnzr, who would previously have made arrangements
for his being provided with porters, &c. He should pursue nearly the
tract followed by me on the same journey, and on arrival at Bishonath
should proceed by water to Sadiya, and thence go up to Beesa at the
foot of the mountains dividing Assam from Ava.

7. As the individual thus deputed would of ,course be a competent
botanist, and perhaps geologist, I contemplate much indirect acquisi-
tion to science from the trip thus sketched out, it being almost entirely
untrodden ground to any scientific observer, and of course it is to be
expected that much benefit, in an economical point of view, might re-
sult to the state from the researches and suggestions of one who could
bring to knowledge the unlimited productions of the vegetable and
mineral kingdoms in the regions in question.

8. In case you should not have forwarded a copy of your circular to
Captain Fisumr, I shall do so, and request him to make a report to you
upon the subject of it with reference to Cachar.

Extract of a private letter from Captain F. Junxins to G. J.
Gorpon, Esq. dated the 19th May, 1834, with enclosures.

Since I wrote you officially, I have had the enclosed note from Lieut.
Cuartton of the Assam Light Infantry, regarding tea, and I have
been presented with the enclosed luminous map* of the tea districts in
Upper Assam by a Phokun who accompanied Lieut. Burnevrr in an ex-
pedition to the top of the Patkoye range of hills, dividing the waters of
the Burhamputra from those of the Kuenduen. On thisrange of hills
the trees grow in great abundance, and are described to reach the size
of small forest trees or very large shrubs. You will see how he says the
leaves are treated, which though it seems rather an odd mode of ma-
nufacture, he and others persist in saying is the way in which the
Singphos manage the tea. I never had an opportunity of trying it,
but those who had said it was palatable enough, and the leaves thus
prepared keep for ever. .

Copy of a letter from Lieut. Cuariton to Captain Jenkins, dated on the
Burhamputra, the 17th May, 1834, enclosed in the preceding.
With regard to the circular from the Tea Committee which you
showed me at Gowahatty, I have much pleasure in communicating the
little I know of the tea plant of Assam. { was informed-about three
years ago of its being found growing wild in the vicinity of Beesa at

* This map being of the most crude description is omitted here. It did not
accompany the Committee’s Report to Government.

46 Discovery of the Genuine [Jan.

the foot of alow range of hills and in the subjacent plains, from
whence I obtained three or four young trees, which I gave to Dr. Joun
TyTLer in Calcutta, with a view of their being planted in the Government
Botanical Garden. I have since understood they decayed soon after.

The soil where they grow was described to be alluvial like most parts
of Assam, and the trees rising to the height of twelve or fourteen feet
more, either at the foot or a small distance up the hills, but never on
the summit ; from which I infer a sheltered situation to be most favor-
able. The aspect was generally southerly or south-east. I am sorry
I cannot give you a minute description of the plant, not having it now
before me; but so much] recollect, the leaves were about two inches in
length and one in breadth, alternate, elliptic-oblong and serrate. The
flower white, very like that of the wild white rose, but much smaller.
The seed I have not seen; it was described to be contained in a red,
round, three-lobed capsule, the lobes detached or bursting along the
upper sides, with a single seed in each. From what | have seen of the
tea plant in different parts of the world, and lately in New Holland,
propagated by seeds brought direct from China, I have little doubt but
that that found near Beesa is a species of tea; and though it may be
spurious or even a Camellia, as Dr. Watticu suggests, its growing
there indigenous and in great abundance affords good grounds for sup-
posing that the introduction of the Chinese plant into Upper Assam
would be attended with success. I have not had an opportunity of mak-
ing any experiment on the leaves ; they are described as small in their
green state, but acquire the fragrance and flavour of Chinese tea when
dried. The Singphos and Kamtees are in the habit of drinking an in-
fusion of the leaves which I have lately understood they prepare by cut-
ting them into small pieces, taking out the stalks and fibres, boiling
and then squeezing them into a ball which they dry in the sun and re-
tain for use. I have written to Sadiya for a specimen of the tea pre-
pared in this manner, and for plants and seeds; I will send you some
if I am able to procure them, and write to you on this subject more
fully by and bye.

Copy of a private letter from Lieut. CHariton to Captain Jenkins, dated
at Sadiya, the 8th November, 1834.

I have now the pleasure of sending you some seeds and leaves of
the tea tree of Assam, and am sorry that the unsettled state I have
been in for the last three months has prevented my sending them so
soon as] intended. The leaves you could have had before, but I was
anxious to make them into something like tea, the best test that the
tree is not a Camellia, as Dr. Wauuicn imagines. It appears coarse,
owing to the leaves being large and much too old, which could not at

XN

1835.) Tea Plant in Upper Assam. 47

the time be obviated. By the end of the cold weather, when the young
leaves are on the trees, I hope to send you as good black tea as we
generally receive from China. I will make experiments in the interim
in the art of preparing green.

The tree I now find is indigenous to this place as well as Beesa, and
grows wild every here and there, all the way from this, about a month’s
journey, to the Chinese province Yunnan, where I am told it is exten-
sively cultivated. One or two people from that province have assured
me, that the tea tree grown there exactly resembles the species that we
have here ; so I think there can be no longer any doubt of its being
bond-fide tea. What a pity there is no means of communication between
Sadiya and Yunnan. A good land-road made only as.far as Hookam,
and there are no natural obstacles of any consequence to prevent it,
would afford an outlet for British merchandize into the very heart of

China.

Copy of a note from Captain F. Juenxins to Dr. Wauuicn, on the back
of the above, dated (at Gowahatty) 22nd November, 1834.

Thave only time to send this and to say, I have sent a jar of tea-

leaves and a box of tea seeds to go by to-day’s dak, Ihope you will
see from the seeds that there is no doubt ours is genuine tea.

Memorandum explanatory of the sketches which accompany the report of
the Commitiee of Tea Culture.

There is no danger of mistaking any plant for the tea except the
Camellia. Both are very closely allied to each other in general appear-
ance, in the form of their leaves and the structure of the flowers. It
is by the character of the fruit alone that they can be satisfactorily dis-
tinguished for practical purposes; in that respect the two genera differ
very widely.

In both the fruit consists of a roundish, more or less triangular, dry
capsule, of three distinct cells, each cell containing one solitary seed or
nut. At the period of maturity the dehiscence or bursting takes place
vertically, by means of three fissures, extending from the top of the
capsule towards its base. So far their capsules are precisely alike ; the
following are the points of difference.

In the tea, the capsule is more or less deeply divided into three
globular lobes, sometimes appearing as if it consisted of three round
capsules united into one. The general outline is therefore always
decidedly triangular, with extremely obtuse corners. The bursting
proceeds along the middle of the lobes or angles, when a large seed is
discovered through each aperture enclosed on all sides within its proper
cell, which cell is in fact formed by the corresponding lobe of the fruit.

48 Discovery of the Tea Plant in Assam. (Jan.

By this process six valves are, properly speaking, formed, (and not
three, as they are generally counted,) each lobe splitting into two
hemispherical valves. The partitions alternate with the lobes, andare
formed by the sides of two adjoining cells being, as it were, glued to-
gether, and extending to the axis of the capsule, from which they at
length completely detach themselves, when it disappears altogether.
The seeds or nuts are almost globular.

In Camellia the capsule is very obscurely triangular without any
tendency to become deeply three-lobed. It bursts along the middle of
each side (consequently alternately with the corners) into three very
distinct valves, each of which belongs to two adjoining cells, because
the three partitions originate lengthwise from the middle of the re-
spective valves, and are therefore opposite or contrary to these, con-
verging from thence to the triangular axis, from which they gradually
separate, leaving it finally unconnected and free. ‘The seeds are of an
oval oblong shape, smaller than those of the tea.

The preceding remarks are made with reference chiefly to the
Assam Tea and the Nipal Camellia; and purposely without technical
precision, the object being simply to convey a general idea of the
structure of the two sorts of fruit. But they admit of being applied
with safety to all other instances of comparison between the genera in
question.

References to the Figures in Plate III.

A The Assam tea. Figs. 1, 2, 3, ripe capsules scarcely enlarged ;
at 1, seen from below, deeply three-lobed ; 2, the common form, com-
mencing to burst ; 3, the same completely burst open, and discovering
the seeds; 4, the same, the seeds being removed, and one of these re-
presented separately ; of the natural size ; 5, the lower half of a ripe
capsule divided by an horizontal section and the seeds removed, exhi-
biting the places of dehiscence along the angles or lobes, and the par-
titions alternating with these and separating from the axis; a little en-
larged ; 6, outline of a full-grown leaf, of the natural dimensions.

B_ The Nipal Camellia (C. kissi). Fig. 7, ripe and entire capsule
slightly enlarged ; 8 and 9, the same after bursting, the free axis being
seen in the last figure; 10, a horizontal section as in the tea, much en-
larged, representing the places of bursting, which alternate with the
angles of the fruit, the partitions which are opposite to the angles of the
fruit, and the valves, separating from the free axis; 11, a detached
seed, natural size; 12, outline of a full grown leaf.

(Signed), N. Watuicu, M. D.
Off. Sec. te the Com. of Tea Cult.

H. C. Bot. Garden, Dec. 24, 1834.

ot. 1V. PUM

bisa hh abe
pies ie Sait ¥
; +

* ’ *
§ ag B

E 3

heat 6%

Sa meee one |S) :
er Se eM aR ss ede
PARE Ne Ae

ba RS arnt 4

1835.] Meteorological Observations at Nastrabdd. 49

[In the foregoing correspondence, allusion is made toa prior knowledge of
the tea-plant of Assam. The following extract from Captain WiLcox’s Memoir
of a Survey of Assam, published in the Asiatic Researches XVJI. p. 448, proves
that officer to have been aware of its existence in the hills east of Sadiya:—he
writes from Manché, a Khamti village, latitude 27° 29’ 16”, longitude 97° 29% :—
‘* according to promise, a specimen of the tea tree was brought to me from one
of the neighbouring low kills; it was a full grown one, that is about five feet
high ; the leaves were coarse and large, and not numerous.’”’? Mr. Scorr and
Captain Davipson had also frequently seen it, and the latter officer says, that
black tea is now brought to Goalpara from the Bhotan hills. In 1828, Capts.
GranT and PemMBEeRTON sent specimens of what the natives asserted to be the
tea plant to Mr. Secretary Swinton, from Manipur, but for want of the fruit,
its genuine nature was not identified. These travellers made tea from its leaves,
and found it approach very nearly in flavour to ordinary black tea.—Ep.]

V.—Abstract of Meteorological Observations at Nastrabdd. By Lieut.-
Col. Taomas OLIvEr.

TABLE I.—Barometer reduced to 32°. Temperature of the External Air, and resulting
elevation above Calcutta.

Year and | Barom. Fem of| Eleva- Year and | Barom. Temp. of| Eleva-
Month. |at4p.m.) Air. tion. Month. jat4p.M.} air. tion.
o Feet. | Feet.
Dec. 1832, ..| 28°432 Bier 1461 |Dec. 1833, ..| 28°39] 65°4 1518
Jan. 1833, .. *504 71°4 1440 iJan. 1834, .. °402 70°0 1511
Hew. j.esiss x °392 74°5 Se AC ser. ayegeat c "392 76°5 1501
Mareh,,....: *334 84°8 1431 |March,...... 281 86°5 1538
(i *234 96°9 | 1460 |April, ...... 212 93°8 | 1556
IBY ge s'- = os» °059 102°4 1545 MBA i s.3)5 2 ste ‘101 103°8 1512
PUNE, on eo oe 031 102'2 V5TSs MINS sey creas 27°980 101°0 1572
Mle cs - 27°965 97°1 1543" Oy duly; oso aiee "977 83°1 1576
Ti Cee 28°021 93°9 W5A Sy Av ee, 28°001 88°2 1534
S25 15 Ree 090 98°5 MATE SEP tances ccc
Beware Fe °296 93°7 PASAY VOCE. cela siete ox
Riis... "425 80°6 | 1497 |Nov........ .
28°232 88°5 1489

It is remarkable that the elevations for the nine months, since December, 1833, are
all with one exception so much in excess to those for the same months of the former
year: I am at a loss to account for this ; the average height of my Barometer for
the nine months in question being only °026 lower than the average for the same
months of the preceding year. —— =
TaBLe I1.—Mean Temperature of each Month, with the Differences from the Mean

of the Year.
Diff. Diff. Diff

Months. Ses from Neue from Ena from
ay. Mean. gnt- | Mean. “| Mean.
HO ioe me o- 0 oS ° ° o
RUEEYIVEAIY = bo) cirtiche: ¢ bie, cc aby tea 61°5 |— 17°9 57°9 |— 17°4 66°0 |— 15°8
BIEDIUALY.» bias o's o/sleleie «,« 67°8 I— 11°6 60°5 |j— 14°8 67°7 |— 14°71
March... 5 dine a ochevaebepegrs 75°4 |}— 4:0 719 — 3°4 SOc (= 101
ie els Senet Eabllealiig 2 85°2|-+- 58 80°9 '-+-- 5:6 88'°5 |+- 6°7
DBY.j0:cye.. =, 0:0: MESA Vos spabebaicucle 94°6 |-- 15°2 89°9 |-+- 14°6 96°9 |-+- 15°]
(SS eee te ee 93°6 |-4- 14:2 88°8 {4+ 13°5 94°6 |-+ 12°8
MUL giaieie) |'s cys! 3's Spa ie euatarete 88°3 |+ sg 84°7 |+ 94 88°0 |+- 6°2
PEERS yas vein sys,cisim ay of 6, 8671 |+ 6°7 82°1 fee 68 86°4 |-+ 4°6
Seni Aa eee 86°6 |+- 7:2 sz1 ib 78 87°7 |+ 5°9
(2 iia (oie a a 82°0 |-+- 2°6 78:0 |+- 2°7 855 |+- 37
ING) 1)) oa eae 72°7 |— 6°7 69°6 |— 5°7 771 '— 4°97
December, ............4. 58°7 |— 20°77 | 55°6 |— 19°7 | 63°0 z 18°8

Means,..... Dearie via'sie ace 79°4 75°3 po ers

H

50 Meteorological Observations at Nasirabdd. (Jaw.

TABLE III.—Temperature of the Air, and Depression (D) of Wet Thermometer.

; Sun-rise. 23 P.M. 4 P.M. | Sun-set.
Year and Month. —— : - telat,
Temp.{ D. |Temp.| D. !Temp.| D. |Temp D.

° ° o O) ° 0) oO go
December, 1832, ........ 48°] 76) 71-3 | 186 | 65°7 | 14:3 | 64-5 | 15°4
January, 1833,..-...... 50°4 9°7 | 73°3 | 20°0 | 71°4 | 19°! | 66°2 | 16°7
February, 22/0) 40288 5.cice 52°3 {| 10°4 | 76-0 |! 20°0 | 74°5 | 19°59 | 65°0 | 15°5
March’ i). oe -eee veeeee{ 62°7 | 13°4 | 86-7 | 27-1 | 84:8 | 26°3 | go's | 23°6
ENO8U, Goodgn uc cst ood ac 75°3 | 20°0 | 98's | 34°2 | 96°9 | 32°9 | 89°8 | 27-9
May)... 2250. ieee tages 82-7 | 15°6 | 105°6 | 34°3 | 102°4 | 32°6 | g6-1 | 28-2
June, viele se amen 81-9 | 12°F | 104-8 » 30°0 | 102°2 | 28°6 | 94-5 | 23-7
UNUM: Polen Come Goede 82°3 7°5 | 99:8 | 23°1 | 97°1 | 19°2 | 91°5 | 15°7
AUDUSts deme s ecsiice seieie 78°5 6°4 | 95°3 | 19°6 | 93-9 | 18°8 | 89-0 | 15°3
September sere ee --{ 80°9 | 11°21 | 100°3 | 25°9 | 98°5 | 25°2 | 92°6 | 22°3
October's)... trae cme .--| 73°6 | 15°4 | 965 | 30°4 | 93°7 | 28°8 | 88-4 | 25°9
Novemberyia. cence wee f 6271 82 | 83°5 | 20°8 | s0°6 | 19°3 | 77°1 | 17°4
December... asc mccee 48°5 49 | 67°4 | 13°6 | 65°4 |] 13°0 | 61°5 | 11°1
January, 1834,.. ... 49°90 9°4>1' -73°9: |--20°8-| 70°0'-| > 19:08 6527
Pebruaryg accident 54°3 9°0 | 78°7 | 23:4 | 76°5.] 22°53 |) 7o4 | 17°8
Marehish ss cxtats cieraahecbetnels 63°4 13°8 88°4 28°1 86°5 272 | 81°1 | 23°6
Aprile)... crea plate arnicer: 71°0 | 16°2 | 96°8 | 31°8 | 93°8 | 30°3 | $7°3 | 26°6
Ma Visas oionyr cis cueteieemeceet 83°5 | 184 | 105°S | 36°6 |103°8 | 35°4 | 97°6 | 31°T
DUNE, “ae cp iciancereeeiiecueiae 84°0 | 12°3 1 104°1 | 27°8 |} 101°0 | 25°5 | 94°7 | 21°9
AUN os cle aulGe eyetepenctstertere 80°8 4°4 | 90°8 | 12°8 | S81 ! 10°6 | 84°5 hae
ATIpUSE tas arcusto ements ot 76°9 3°7 | 89°9 | 13:1 | 88°2 | 1274} 83°8 8°6
September vereueriieeei 75°9 2°5 | 89:7 | 1275 a : 82°9 7°6
October.7- ee ae tere 67°4 5°7 | 8974 | 21°9 Sie: r 82°5 | 17°4

TaBLE IV.—Dew Point (S), Comparative Tension (T), and Grains of Aqueous Vapour
in a cubic foot of Air (G).

—

Year and

Year and |
Month. Ss. T. G. Month. Ss. Ay | G.
° ° |

Dec. 1832, -. 32°2 °371 2°42 |Dec. 1833, .. 40°2 °525 3:15
Jan. 1833, .. 28°4 294 2°11 |Jan. 1834, .. 27°3 *289 2°04
Febiccins tive 32°0 "265 2°36) PE CDs. <u ewe 29°4 | 261 2°15
March, 23'0 "189 2°03 |March, 30°6 198 2°20
Aprile poe 30-0 "139 Priv eal Aya owes ce 34°7 180 2°52
May Vastra 30°0 110 2°08 |May, ... 41°3 163 3°13
June, .... 59°0 326 5°66 |June, ..... 64°3 °382 6°69
UWA Garaa co 69°5 °500 7-03 Wily. ae one 74°3 694 9°37
Aue yee 67°7 53) FESO RAMEE seit. e 71°9 “689 8°70
Sept. sere: 60°5 373 5°96 |Sept. -.... 727 "722 8°94
Oaeiingneeie.e 40°5 212 3°03 |Qct...... 55°4 459 5°17
Woe.) a. 2p 46°4 401 3°87 te he Zt
Means, :....! 43°79 *309 3°92 Means, .... 45°2 °415 4°91

The means for the last year are probably but little affected by the want of observa-
tions in November, sinee the hygrometric state of the air for that month appears to
differ not very much from the mean of the year.

[The formula whence the dew-points in the above table are taken will be found
in the first Volume of the JOURNAL, p. 508, and in the GLEANINGS IN SCIENCE, i-
193.—ED.]

1835.]} Meteorological Observations at Nasirabad. 5l

Mean Results of four Years’ Observations.

| Barometer Temperature. Mean
Months. at 32° of Air. Temperature. |
—————— = tS} T. ! G.
4 p.M. | var. | 4 P.M.) var. Day. | Night.
inches a 6 ° Q
January, 28.475 |-+.232) 70.6 |—17.0| 60.9] 57.5| 31.6] .550) 2.36
February, -387 |-+-.151| 72.2 |—11.4] 66.4] 59.0] 34.9] .368] 2.66
March, .. -316 |+.080} 84.0 |— 4.4] 73.5| 70.5 | 34.9 | .265] 2.66
Apri... .224 |—.010] 95.5 |+ 5.6] 83.6] 81.51 37.4] .194| 2.80
May, ..-- .109 |—.127| 101.8 |+14.7} 92.6| 88.2| 40.1 | 175! 3.06
June, ....| 27.997 |—.239| 100.7. |+14.6| 92.5] 987.71 63.3.| .388! 6.52
Salys 2%. -974 |—.262| 92.8 |+.9.6| 87.5] 83-8] 71.7 | .604/ 8.60
August, ..| 28.024 |—.212; 88.8 [+ 5.7] 83.6] 81-1) 71.5 | .679] 8.60
September, .137. |— 099} 90.9 |+ 6.1| 84.0] 80.9] 66.4] .578) 7.39
October,.. -305 |4+.069} 90.2 (4 2.3] 80.7] 76.8| 46.7 | 4.00
November, 431 |+4.195! 79.3 |— 7.7 | 70.2] 66.7 | 43.2) .392, 3.47
December, 451 |-++.215| 67.3 |—18-.3| 59.6] 56.7 | 38.2 | .479| 3.05
Means, ..' 28.236 4781 86.2 33.0| 77.9] 74.2! 48.3 '.4171 4.60

The mean temperature (day and night) from these four year’s observations is
76°; but as Nasirabad is elevated above the level of the sea nearly 1500 feet,
the air is or ought to be cooler on that account by about 5°°5, so that the tem-

perature at the sea level would be 81°5, which is that assigned to the equator by
HumBowpr.

If we calculate the mean temperature for the latitude (26° 18’) by the formule

which have been found in most cases to agree well with observation, we shall
have,

Sep WEA ER S,...-..06 2) (== 84°52" Bin L) oo oe cc ce oe wee cen es == 10'°8
BREWSTER’S,.... 7 (= 81°5 cos. L) . Bes a i
Davsutsson’s,.. T (= 274 cos.? Lin ‘centesimal degreest) Ho coves GMA,
ATKINSON’s,..... T (= 97°08 cos*3 L—10°53) . aa dere 7

Mean = 72.5

which is 9° less than the observations give when reduced to the sea level. But
it must be observed with regard to the locality of Nasirabad that it stands on
an arid rock on which searcely any vegetation exists unless during the rainy
season: this will no doubt account for a part of the difference. Mr. ATKINSON
in his elaborate paper on Astronomical and other Refractions, (vide Memoirs of
the Royal Astronomical Society, 2nd volume,) considers that 4° may be deducted
from the observed temperatures of “large extended plains:’’ allowing this, we
have still 5° unaccounted for. However, on calculating by the same formule,
the mean temperatures of several places in this country where observations have
been made and recorded in this Journal, I find similar differences, part of which
may very probably be owing to errors in the instruments used, as it is well known
how great a dilference exists in the thermometers manufactured for exportation
to this country, no two of which are hardly ever found to agree in their indica-
tions, some differing several degrees from others. In the subjoined table, the
latitudes and elevations of some of the places are given by rough estimation, not
having at hand the means of ascertaining them accurately, but any probable
errors in these estimations cannot affect the results materially, The difference of

temperature due to elevation has been calculated by Mr. ATKINSoN’s Formula,
viz.

h
Required diff. in degrees —

, 4 being the elevation in feet.

251 + —_.
200

* Or, in Fahrenheit’s Scale.. .T=80°°6—48"'6 sin ° L.
H 2

52 Longitude of Nastrabad by Lunar Transits. [Jan.

Comparison of Observed Mean Temperatures with those deduced from the Formule o f
MAYER, BREWSTER, DAUBUISSON, and ATKINSON.

Differ-|Obd. Mn.|Mean_ | Ditference be-
Observed| ence |Temp.re-|Temp. |tween the cal-
Places. Lati- | Height Mean |due to|duced to|by the|culated & ob-

tude. | infeet. |Tempera-|Eleva- 'the sea) For- |served Mean

ture. ‘tion. {level. mule. |Temperature.
o | 0 0 O) ty) o
Gaziptr,......| 25.30 400 17-4 1.6 79.0 73.1 5G
Fattigurh, ....| 27.20 600 75-6 2.4 78.0 71.6 —6.4
Seringapatam, | 12.30} 2412 , 77.1 | 9.2 86.3 | 80-6) —5.7
NasirabAd,.... ; 26.18 1487 76.0 5.5 $1.5 72.5 —9.0
Delhi, ........ 28.27 800 73.4 | 3.1 76.5 70.7 Sees
Calcutta, ....| 22.50 100 78.1 0.4 78.5 | 75.0 —3n5
Landour, ....] 30.20 | 7000 56.7 | 24.5 $1.2 69.1 | 12.1

VI.—Longitude of Nastrabad by Lunar Transits and by Observations
of Moon Cuiminating Stars.—By Lieut.-Col. Tuomas Ottver.

By Lunar Transits.

See

|
Months. Longitude. Sums of Se- Means.
| | conds.

H.M. S H. M. S.
February 16th, 1831,...... 458 44 44 4 58 44
Ditto 22nd,. recceaee EOP SG 114 ate Sine oe
March 21st, SS eaten os bake) cept e) CRP ERNZ, 171 tee ey?
Ditto 22nd, Bea S biaver cavers «ifs ie ee aan wl bes 243 oe, vane Ol
September 14th,..... ‘ | 58 52 295 shi Leese 59
Ditto Poth ce deters ee lee Ret ta 342 Hpallicsea ay,
November 12th,.......... se | OF 2 423 cic eee OO
Ditto 13th,. Seveeiemee [ee Ae ROO 488 Se Peet VOL
February 8th, 1832, 58 41 529 gee non ee,
Ditto Othe. tent | eualioe | 59 07 596 oo ee eerGO
Nie MOUs eee Lsodamee 59rE 12 668 sen ate OE
ID Yiiaay WOH Salon solebon ok 59 00 728 oot ee OF
Witton 2Zths -- c.- olselcn see 11 tep Ou meeOO 788 Si eae OF
April 8th, See cassie Doe Os 855 Je Roe OL
Taveditlises stent dereco.s [meno Ilo 944 63
Ditto 9th wv scisvexe wie. eee |re a Oop 0 994 62
June Other cere HOrGBRE SS DG os Sele nS) 1053 62
Witto) Zhe serscrer. See ine moo mery 1102 61
October st, Meron cee. oe OOO Thay 61
November Ist, Hal loos aD: vy 1221 61
Ditto 29th;.. «save es 58 52 1273 Se eOlk
March Ist, 1833, . 59 09 1342 »» 61
Ditto 28th, Ss. Lye 59 05 1407 Pai iat iron 5)
Ditto 0th, ci). se. dexndnnr 59 05 1472 ac UROL
Ditto 31st, ..... Ses date 59 04 1536 eo ASG
ApMZethsisee eS ie Uke | o 958 MOF | 1593 se onkagtetyg (OL
Ditto 29th", Ls: QUE ofh59) 216 1669 cine Lope oe
Ditto 30th, . Felts siitae ubhey poole 1747 coe
Nvember 17th, nen. ou de lOO Haun) 1807 Ap res onl ty
Ditto 19th,. efelt oacietate Lien Oe ee | 1849 Aah, ape
Longitude by Lunar Transits, He HG fz 4 59 02

1835.) Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 5

By Moon Culminators.

Sums of se-

conds mul-

Intervals in tiplied by
Date. Stars. Sidereal Time.| Longitude.|the No. of| Means.

stars ob-

served.

1834. M. S. H. M. S. H.M.S.
Jan. 16th, .. |u Piscium,../—43 48°47 | 4 58 56 56 |4 58 56
Jan. 18th, .. |g Ceti, ..../+ 4 16°09 ; 59 160 53

Pate» coteneg + SUskO

Jan. 19th, .. Ju Ceti, ..../+20 33°68
OE reste Mist 422927 sO S60 340 . 57
fi Tauri,... 5 «| =725,, 10:92

Feb. 18th, .. |. Tauri,....|+20. 10°62

H Gem. °....|--40_ 40°58 |... .. 64 532

“ 59
Mp Oe ee SPB 84
March) U6th, |e Tauri; ss. )j- 28° 13°52. |. oe 48 580 |. 58
March 17th, ja Tauri, ....|+24 59°84
Bae va) a tics86-c19796- desist, es, 60 Lip 60
. Ce et Or 3038
March 19th, | Gem. ....|+34 56°58
S ssleceine ee ne +14 08°40 eo 2° 64 967 ; 60
Bi ashe sill 8 Fue A570
March 20th, |g Gem. ....|/+14 41°18 56 10
: OE OaAnCri ssi SOA AOU oy on 79 |. 60
April, 18th,.. |¢ Cancri,....|+28 27°10
a Leonis, ..|—31 .¥6712),..5 5, 44 1211 |.. 58
; Oi c/arsctigixa stell 242) S304
April 19th, .. |, Leonis, ../+28 07:98
ek ol Steen 416 “50°40: |'..' > 69 Wig. 59
ek AS Pr 2 Apes 82
May 17th, -- |, Leonis,....|-+39 41-06
TE Se EE
y Virg. .. ..|—33 35°14 ait highs] Oop a
Mh, ae ees are —48 37°70
May 18th, .. |v Virg...... |+22 03°22 |
Bak, ee Ne heey e 00°62 67 vee

OY Lvat atulcsloh sia nic ——D> 53°12 HO fabs ee 62
nae 3

ee eee. |—47 52°56

Longitude by Moon Culminators,........ .... = 4 859 02

The exact agreement of the two is of course a mere chance: I think it right

however to mention that I have inserted the whole of my observations, and not
a selection from them.

4

VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 14th January 1835.

The Reverend W. H. Mizu, D. D. Vice-President, in the Chair.

After reading the Proceedings of the last Meeting, the Meeting passed
to the Ballot for the Office-bearers of the ensuing year, when the Lord
Bishop, the Rev. Dr. Mutt, Sir J. P. Grant, and Mr. W. H. MacnacutTen
were elected Vice-Presidents ; and the Members composing the Committee
of Papers last year were unanimously re-elected.

54 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Jan.

The Honorable Mr. J. B. Macautay, the Honorable Colonel W. Mor-
Rison, and Mr. Winitam Carr, proposed at the last Meeting, were duly
elected Members of the Society.

The Secretary read an Annual Report on the state of the Society.

For the whole of the past year, the Society had been deprived of the presence
of its President, who had been driven to the Cape through ill health. The seats
of two Vice-Presidents had also become vacant, one by Sir J. FRanx’s departure
to Europe, the other, by Sir C. T. Merca.re’s appointment to the Government
of Agra. The Obituary List of the past year contained only the venerable name
of Dr. CAREY, upon whose death, in June last, a tribute of regret and esteem had
been recorded on the Society’s proceedings. The fate of another cherished Mem-
ber, Mr. J. CALDER, remained an object of great anxiety, nothing having been
heard of him since he sailed from India for the New Colony at St. George’s Sound
in October, 1833. The only faint hope of his safety rested in the report of
some natives at Swan River, that a wreck had occurred to the northward ; and it
was satisfactory at least to know, that a vessel had been immediately despatched
to ascertain the fact. The result has not yet transpired.

Of Members who had tendered their resignation for various causes, the follow-
ing names were mentioned: Messrs. G. Money, M. T. Ciemisuaw, M. Laru-
LetTTA, M. MaNukK, and Raja KALIKRISHNA.

The new Members elected, including those of the present Meeting, amounted
in number to fifteen, viz. Messrs. W. Martin, R. Sprers, A. Beatriz, J. S.
Srorrorp, W. Mackenzie, F. Renavuup, Dr. A. Hamitton, Lieut. W.
Fotry, Lieut. McLeop, Lieut.-Col. Low, Sir J. P. Grant, Mr. W. Grant,
Honorable T. B. Macaunay, Honorable Colonel Morrison, and Mr. W. Carr.

The following distinguished individuals had been associated as Honorary Mem-
bers: The Mexuara Mene of Ava, Mr. Csoma pE Koéroés, Professors HEEREN,
Kxaprotu, Rosen, and Buckianpb, Sir JoHN HERSCHEL, and Col. Syxzs.

The Expences of the year had been very moderate, leaving a considerable
balance in the Treasurers’ hands.

PAYMENTS. REcEIPTS.

To paid for Copies of the By balance of last year, .. 208 5
Journal Asiatic Society, By Subscriptions collected, 5472 6 0
furnished to Members in By Interest on Company’s
IR Sd Sc oo aereiaes 928 00 Paper, 17,500, at 5 per

To Establishment and con- CONfs, «vie c)o.ejonues ae mapas pie ae ee

tingent expences from Ist

Nov. 1833 to 31st Oct.

RY Se aa GHnSibGe onooe 2880 60
To balance of cash in hand, 3101 10 4

——

Sa. Rs. 6910 0 4 | Sa. Rs. 6910 0 4

Outstanding Quarterly Bills due, but not yet collected, Rs. 2817.

The Publications of the past year had been limited to the Index of the 18
volumes of Quarto Researches, now nearly completed, and the Monthly Journal.
The printing of M. Csoma pz K6ris’s Tibetan Grammar was terminated, which
would allow a new volume of Researches immediately to be put in hand. The Go-
vernment had been pleased to express its approbation of the manner in which
the Tibetan Dictionary and Grammar have been passed through the press, and

1835.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 55

had requested that the Asiatic Society would undertake to distribute copies of the
work to the principal learned Societies and Universities of Europe and
India. In complimenting the Author upon the successful performance of his
task, and ordering payment of printing expences, and arrears of salary, the Gover-
nor General was further pleased to direct the sum of money remitted to M. Cso-
MA by Prince Esteraazy and other Hungarian Noblemen in 1832, which was
unfortunately lost by the failure of the house of ArexaNnpe#ER and Co. to be re-
stored out of the public purse, an act of liberality which will doubtless be appreci-
ated in Vienna.

The Papers submitted to the Society, during the past year, had embraced the
discoveries of Bactrian Autiquities by General Venrura, M. Court, Dr. Mar-
Tin, Mr. Masson, Dr. Gerarp, Syed Kera'mer Att, and Monun Lat. The
notice of various Hindu Inscriptions, and particularly the Translation of one of
the Allahabad Inscription, by Captain Troyer and Dr. Mrii :—the discovery
of a submerged town, replete with antiquities, by Captain Caurtey; and ma-
ny other subjects of considerable interest. In physical research, the progress
of discovery had been unprecedently rapid, and the gigantic fossil bones exhu-
mated from the lower range of hills, by Dr. FaLconrr and Captain Cautuey,
had even surpassed the noble specimens presented by Dr. Srrztspury. It was
now rendered most probable that a belt of fossil deposit existed throughout the
whole line of secondary hills skirting the great Himd4layan ridge from Cashmir to
Ava. It had been penetrated in a few places—at Sewalik, Kooch Behar, and on
the Irawadi; but for many years, it might be anticipated that other spots yet unex-
plored would continue to furnish abundant stores for the investigation of the geo-
logist and the speculation of the cosmogonist.

Library.

Read a letter from Monsieur Lair, Secretary of the Society of Agri-
culture and Commerce at Caen, forwarding copies of the various publica.
tions of that Society for the past two years.

Read a letter from Monsieur Durrovumue, Secretary of the Royal Aca-
demy at Bordeaux, forwarding copies of its proceedings, &c. for the years
1832 and 33, and proposing an exchange of publications.

Read a letter from Professor J. J. Marcen, acknowledging his election
as an Honorary member, and presenting his recent publications :

Histoire de l’Egypte depuis la conquéte des Arabes jusqu’a celle des
Frangais.

Contes Arabes du Shekh el Mohdy, Nos. 10, 11, 12, 13.

The following Books were also presented :

Journal of a Tour through the Panjab,Afghanistan, &c. in company with
Lieut. Burnes and Dr. Gerarp, by Munshi Monaw La’t, a native of
Delhi—by the author.

Papers relative to the Mahratta War in 1833-4, by Mr. G.T. Lushington.

Hitopadesi, with a Hindee translation, made by a Pundit of the Raja of
Bhartpur—by ditto.

Prithivi Raja Basa, a Hindee Poem, by Chand,—by ditto.

Journal Asiatique, No. 77, August, 1834—by the Asiatic Society of Paris.

Meteorological Register, Nov. and Dec. 1834—by the Surveyor General.

A lithographed map of the Indus and the neighbouring countries, from the

56 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Jan.

The Government maps—by M. J. B. Tassin, Artist and Publisher.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 13—by the Editors.

The following books were received from the Booksellers.

Marsden’s Numismata Orientalia, 2nd vol.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Sismondi’s Roman Empire, vol. Ist.

For the Museum.

A series of Skulls, consisting of 1 Tiger, 5 Antelopes, 3 Chikaras (Rein-
deer), 1 Hyena, 3 Wolves, and 2 Pariah Dogs; also Models of the
Native Plough, of the Cotton and Spinning Wheel, and that of the Mill for
grinding Mustard Seed—also models of Carts, &c. used in the Bhartpur
Territory, and 2 Mewatté Spears, presented by Mr. G. T. Lusuineron.

Antiquities.

Read a letter from Major SurHeRLanpD, forwarding the Ancient Inscrip-
tion presented by Captain J. Low, on the 3rd December.

[A reduced facsimile of this Inscription is given in Plate III.]

An image of Buddha, mutilated in the upper part, was presented by Mr.
JAMES STEPHENSON.

A paper was read describing the locality and manner of its discovery at Bukra,
near the pillar known as Bhim Sen’s Lath in Tirhdt. Round the base of the
image was a Sanscrit inscription : the sculpture is in good taste and well finished.

Further relics and coins dug up at Behat, near Sehéranpur, were received
from Captain CauTLey.

A letter was read from Captain E, E. Westmacott, 37th N. I. Assistant,
Governor General’s Agent at Assam, forwarding a description of the town
of Shéhpuri in the Udayapur district, and also an account of the Ramsané-
his, a sect of Hindu Schismatics in Western India.

Physical.

A collection of the various formations of tufaceous kankar from the
bed of the river Jamna, inclosing shells, wood, and bones, was received
from Serjeant Dean, and a further assortment of the fossil bones disco-
vered therein.

A letter from Dr. Spitssury begged the Society would accept of the
fossil bones formerly transmitted for its inspection by him.

The following extract from a letter from Major Convin, Engineers, was
read:

“* You have been informed of the successful results of the researches which
have lately been carried on in the lower hills in this vicinity for fossil remains,
and the subject has been taken up with such spirit and desire to attain informa-
tion, that in all probability valuable use may be made of the facilities for studying
the subject so immediately in the vicinity of the deposit; but it has struck
me much good might result from the means of pursuing the inquiry being more
extended, by the Society’s Museum being provided with specimens of the fossil
remains of these hills, and asI am neither a geologist nor have the leisure
to make myself one, I have obviously no motive for collecting a cabinet
myself. I propose therefore excavating and collecting for the Museum of the
Asiatic Society, who will I hope accept of what the party I have set to work
may find; they have commenced under an intelligent man, who has learned to

- Vo PLT.
Copy of an Inscroption on a Stone found near the ruins ofa Buddhist

Jour. as. Soc.

yf moat Pere kia
: Perry ‘oes ey
Ea eet
g x ge
east se
UA RYRY © eH HAG OTB
ws my fo apis fT ® we : t 5 Ty

Capt JI Low de

See Ta 7

ern
ie
ROR HE} 1

=

-

By trea Raat

(icp Pre N aes

+ Reseed

i, stk

1835.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 57

recognize a fossil at sight, and to be careful in their extraction from the rock
when so situated: but so many have been found fallen down from their original
position, that many will likely be so now, and the wonder is that they have
not been before recognized and brought to notice through the natives in the
neighbourhood, who it would now appear have occasionally picked them up. The
space I have selected for the operations of my party is the portion of the hills
embraced between the embouchures of three mountain torrents, which united
form the Sombe river, lying about half way between the Jamna and Nahun, to
the right and left of which are the hills from which the specimens already col-
lected have been brought. I may therefore expect to be successful, and though I
have not seen the outlets of these three heads of the Sombe, I may presume the
sections in the range of hills to be both deep and extersive from the floods which
pass down there in the rains. I intend when I have an opportunity to visit them,
and in the mean time have taken measures to have the localities of the specimens
attached to each as brought out. I expect to be able to despatch the first results
of my search from Delhi before three months are over. These fossils appear to me
to correspond with those found by Dr. Spruspury, described in the Journal for
August. One lower end ofa thigh bone is little less in breadth than that drawn in
the plate, and an end of a corresponding bone of the fore-leg appears to me of
equally gigantic dimensions. I believe you have not yet actually seen any thing
from these hills, and inclose you a tooth I hammered out of the rock at the Kalo-
wala Pass, wrapped in Upland Georgia cotton.”’

The best thanks of the Society were voted for Colonel Convin’s obliging
offer.

With reference to the same subject, the following extract from a private letter,
(received subsequently to the Meeting,) from Dr. H. Fatconer will be read with
interest: it is dated Mussooree, 3rd January, 1835.

“ You have heard from Capt. Cauriey and Lieut. BAxur about the late fossil
discoveries up here : I have come in for a lion’s share of them. In one of my tours
I had to return by Nahun, and having heard of the tooth presented by the Raja, in
October, to Lieut. Baxer, I made inquiry and had a fragment of a tooth pre-
sented to me also. [I got a hint of where they came from, and on going to the
ground, T reaped a splendid harvest. Conceive only my good fortune : within six
hours, I got upwards of 300 specimens of fossil bones! This was on the 20th
November, a couple of days after Lieuts. Baker and DurAwp had got their first
specimens through their native collectors.

‘“‘ Capt. Cautiey has since got about 40 specimens: my collection amounts to
nearly 400: and it is exceedingly rich and varied. There are more species than
Messrs. CRAWFORD and WALLIcH got from the Irawaddi. Here are some of the
results from arapid examination of Capt. Cauriery’s collection, (not including the
Kalowala fossils noticed in all his late letters in your Journal,) and my own.

Mastodon Elephantoides. A most perfect cheek tooth, left side of lower

jaw, 134 inches long! indicating an animal of immense size. Por-
tions of the ivory tusks of do., ribs, and huge fragments of bones of
the extremities. H. F.’s collection.

Mastodon Latidens ? cheek tooth doubtful from being water worn. CAUTLEY’s.

Hippopotamus. Fragment of the lower jaw with teeth. H. F.’s collection.

Rhinoceros? doubtful. Cavtiey’s and H. F.’s collections.

I

58 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [JAN.

Tapir ? doubtful from water-wearing ;

Ruminantia. A beautiful entire half of lower jaw of a large deer. H. F.’s.

Crocodile. Vertebree of immense size, teeth, and other bones. H. F.’s collection.

Chelonians. Two species of Emys, one of Trionyx.

Vertebre of four distinct mammalia, which the want of means of identifying
satisfactorily prevents me from venturing a vague opinion of. <A great number
of other bones besides, which will admit, many of them, of being determined.
There are some traces of new forms of structure: among othersa tusk of a Pa-
chydermatous animal, about } of an inch in thickness, longitudinally channeled
like the tusks of the Hippopotamus, and curved, with its apex worn down to an
oblique disk ; but having a reniform, transverse section, channeled with a deep
fossa along its concave curve. ‘This is but the commencement of the discoveries,
and among the Pachydermata, I expect manyadditional results: either in Anoplo-
thera? Lophiodons and Anthracothera, or analogous forms in their place: and
most assuredly Tapirs at least. In fact, in Capt. CAuTLEY’s collection (the Kal-
lowala one from the clay marle) of which he has given you so much of the details,
there is a small tooth, which I imagine belongs to an extinct Pachydermatous
animal, allied to Anthracotherium. His zeal is beyond all praise. The moment he
got the scent, from some bones I found in the Limli pass, he was off to the field
in the Kallowalla Pass, and ever since it has been but a continuous search with
him. He has lately turned out a beautiful and most perfect molar tooth of the
upper jaw, right side, of a species of the genus Equus, which now puts his
inference of the existence of Solipeda in the deposit, at first deduced from an
incisor tooth, beyond all doubt. It has the roundish solitary lateral pit of the
inner side completely surrounded by a ridge of enamel: whereas in existing
species, the pit is open internally, and the ridge of enamel which encireles it, is
continuous with the other flesures of enamel of the tooth. It therefore, perhaps
belongs to a new extinct species. The Lithological details of the Sew4lik for-
mation are equally interesting with the fossil ones, and when worked out, will
read as instructive a lesson regarding the Geomorphic operations, at the foot of
the Himdélayas, during centuries of ages past, as the fossil remains do, regard-
ing the former tenants of the tract. By the bye, the fossils I have mentioned,
Mastodon Elephantoides, &c. establish an identity of formation between the upper
beds of the Irawaddi deposits and the upper deposits included between the
Sewalik and the Himdlaya range. Several of them are tke same as those
found by CRawForp and WALLIcH; and it appears, that all along the foot of
the Himalaya, from the Panjab, down to the Irawaddi, there is a nearly con-
tinuous series of tertiary formations, more or less upheaved at different points
along the line; but in all their great features, they appear chiefly developed in
the Jamna Gangetic portion, where they are upheaved to upwards of 1500 feet
above the plains.

In a late excursion to Jamnautri I collected materials for a section from
the snowy range on to the plains, like Dr. Royuz’s, but perhaps more copious,
I have found the trap rocks extensively distributed and far in the interior.
The whole tract on this side the snow is primitive ; and the line of the
snowy peaks is primitive also. I ara convinced that they are not like the high
mountains of the Andes, porphyries and other trappean masses burst through
the surrounding formations; but primitive schists upheaved to a higher level

1833.] Miscellaneous. 59

than the surrounding hills. You have heard much of the scenery, but I wish
you had seen some of it, for no pencil has yet done justice to it. To mention
one: concéive yourself on the top of the Choor mountain, nearly 13,000 feet
above the level of the sea, a lofty ridge half way between the snowy range
and the plains, high above every thing around. Imagine a glance to the north,
or front, with an uninterrupted stretch of upwards of 90°! of snowy mountains,
without a break, clear, white, and dazzling, starting up against a back-ground of
deep-blue sky, so rich and intense, as you have never seen: conceive an ocean
of mountain waves, running on from your feet to the snow, you looking down
upon and overtopping all. Turn round to the rear or south, and you bave an-
other sea of hills, with the plains of Hindoostan beyond, stretching far off into
the distance, and traversed by here and there a streak of silver, marking the
miniature course of the mighty Jumna. Look to right and left, and you have a
view of mountains, bounded only by the limits of vision: the huge masses of
huddled granite about you forming a fine offset to the whole. I imagine that as
a panoramic mountain view, that of the Choor is not to be exceeded in any
country, and it is but a sample of the rest. The only want is in lake scenery,
and of this there is nothing worthy of the name.’’

VIII.—Miscellaneous.

1.—Exzplanation of the differences in the quantity of Rain at different elevations.

It had invariably been remarked by meteorologists that a rain-gauge, placed at
an elevation, collected less rain than one situated on the surface of the ground,
yet no satisfactory reason could be assigned for such a discrepancy. The British
Association for the Advancement of Science determining to place the facts of the
phenomenon on such a footing as to be afterwards capable of tolerably strict
analysis, engaged Messrs. W. Gray and J. Puixrips, to conduct a year’s experi-
ments on the top of the Cathedral at York, and the result was made the subject of
a report by the latter to the meeting at Cambridge in 1833, which sets the matter
at rest in a most satisfactory manner.

The site of the experiments was well selected, York being in the centre of a
very extensive valley, and the Minster tower, elevated 200 feet from the ground,
looks down upon an area of 1000 square miles, with no object of nature or art
rising to within 100 feet of its summit.

One gauge of the simplest construction was attached to a pole, elevated nine
feet above the battlements, 242 feet above the river ;—another was registered on
the roof of the museum, 723 feet ;—and a third on the ground in the museum
garden, at 29 feet above the river.

The gauges were 10 inches square, and could be easily read off to the 1000th
of an inch fall.

The report gives a tabular view of the whole rain of the year, but it will be suf.
ficient here to notice the totals of the 12 months, which were as follows:

12

60 Miscellaneous. [JAN.

Minster. Museum. Ground.
Total Rain-fall in the year, 157910 20°461 24-401
or deducting asnow storm in Feb. 15°715 20-182 23-785

Mr. Puitires arranges the numerical results of the experiments, in relation to
n temperature, and the season of the year, so as to deduce the ratios of quan-

mea
tity at the several stations, in the following table:
————————————— ee
Of Rain,
Periods. Mean |Incheson/On wmu- On Ratios.

Minster. | seum. | ground.

15°715| 20°182| 23.785| 66:1 85°3 100

Temp.

Whole year, .--- 48°20

7 coldest months

Oct.—April, .. 40°8 7°089 9°725 12°079|58°6 80°5 100
7 warmest months

April—October, 55°5 117146} 13°669} 15.666'71°2 8771 100

5 coldest months

Nov.—March, 39°3 4°569 6°414 8.119} 56°2 79° 100

5 warmest months, 98°95 8°626 10°457 11.706!73°7. 89:2 100
Winter quarter, .. 36°3 1°626 2°326 3.2971 49-3 70:5 100
Spring quarter, .. 47°6 3°144 4°202 5.2561559°8 80° 100
Summer quarter,| 60°8 6°264 7°414 8-121) 77-1 292=5er 100
48°3 4°68] 6°240 ZolV1 | 65°38) 8767 e100

Autumn quarter,..
The first remark which occurs on the inspection of this table is that the ratio
of diminution of rain for altitude of position is nearly constant. Mr. Puinirps
shews that it is represented by a simple formula, depending on the square root of
the height with one variable co-efficient ; or m ./ 4 = the diminution of rain at the
given height.
Thus for the whole year (m being made = 2:29)
for the Minster, m 4/ 4 = 4/ 212°8 X 2°29 = 66°5, by observation 66-1, to 100.
for the Museum, m,/ h = 4/43°6 x 2°29 = 84:9, by observation 85°3, to 100.
In like manner for the seven coldest months, (m = 2°88,) the ratios are found

by calculation, 58 81 100
by observation, 58°6 80°5 100
and for the seven warmest months, (m = 1-:97,) the same quantities are found,
by calculation, 71°3 87°0 100
by observation, 71:2 87°1 100

and so on, for the five-monthly periods of averages. For the shorter periods, the
accordance is of course less striking, but it obtains even in single months, and the
same formula is found to apply to Dr. HesrrpEn’s experiments on Westminster
Abbey, with a due variation in the co-efficient m. Whence it is concluded that
the relation to height is constant.

But it is evident that the values of the variable co-efficient were very differ-
ent; that its maxima and minima, were, perhaps, not quite in the same periods of
the year at Westminster as at York, and that the range of variation in its value :
is much less. From M. Araco’s determination of the relative quantities of rain
falling on the observatory at Paris, and in the court below, the relative mean
value of m, at Paris = 1:24 ; while at Westminster, it is 4°23; and at York, 2°29.
These discrepancies are discouraging, and will probably deprive the most exact
local determinations of a general application. However, on account of the re-

1835. ] Miscellaneous. 61

markable regularity of the progress of monthly temperature at York, and some
obvious relations between the quantity of rain collected, and the mean tempera-
ture of the period, some inferences unavoidably suggested themselves.

First. The diminution at the upper stations is greatest in the cold, and least
in the warm seasons, and therefore the co-efficient is in some way inversely depend-
ent on the temperature. Mr. Puitiips found the relation very nearly represent-

2
ed by the formula 2 m = a =, + a a where a = the ascertained value of m

for the whole year, ¢ the mean temperature of ditto, and ¢ that of the particular
period.

Secondly. The relation between the values of m and the dryness of the air is
inverse, whether expressed by the difference between the mean temperature and
the dew point, or, as that is seldom known, by the mean range of daily tempera-
ture, which had been determined for York from a long series of observations by
Mr. F. CHoLmEtey, to be as follows :

Raimary range,..° S°O May,.,.....055.. 19°7 ‘September,’ ..)..2.'16°0

Beminary—,...0-. 0h June, iscn . e's. 20°1. October, .... 68. 1168

eC ne, se) ese ord) sdmly, 4.0) aes 19°60 Novemberyh, 2) 02" 90

Sete a) viel ea. aisle PAGED August, .. 0s. 17°27) December, 35.720 9 7°7

General mean daily range, 14°08
Now if m be taken inversely as the mean range of temperature, r, or m = a

ee ne accordance between the calculated and observed values of the co-ef-

r
ficient is very close:
(a = 2°29.) value of m. value of m.
for the 7 coldest months, by calculation, 2°98 by observation, 2°88
7 warmest months, ————-—— 1°86 ———_ 1°97
5 coldest months, ————————— 3°36 ———. 3°06

5 warmest months, ——————— 1°73 —_— 1°73
and so on throughout. The concluding remarks of Mr. Puriuip’s explain the
hypothesis he has framed for the explanation of the phenomenon which led to
the experiments, and to us it appears most clear and conclusive.

‘So remarkable and continued an accordance between the co-efficients fixed
by observation and those derived by two methods from a very simple view of the
condition of the air as to heat and moisture, appears to me decisive of the ques-
tion as to the general cause of the variation of the quantity of diminution of
rain at any one height above the ground. It has already been shown how strictly
the observations warrant the conclusion that the ratio of diminution at different
heights is constant through the whole year. It is therefore rather as a matter of
very probable inference than a plausible speculation that I offer the hypothesis,
that the whole difference in the quantity of rain, at different heights above the sur-
face of the neighbouring ground, is caused by the continual augmentation of each
drop of rain from the commencement to the end of its descent, as it traverses
successively the humid strata of air at a temperature so much lower than that of
the surrounding medium as to cause the deposition of moisture upon its sur-
face. This hypothesis takes account of the length of descent, because in passing
through more air more moisture would be gathered; it agrees with the fact that
the augmentation for given lengths of descent is greatest in the most humid sea-
sons of the year; it accounts to us for the greater absolute size of rain-drops in

62 Miscellaneous. [Jan.

the hottest months and near the ground, as compared with those in the winter
and on mountains; finally, it is almost an inevitable consequence from what is
kerown of the gradation of temperature in the atmosphere, that some effect of
this kind must necessarily take place. The very common observation of the
cooling of the air at the instant of the fall of rain, the fact of small hail or snow
whitening the mountains, while the very same precipitations fall as cold rain in
the valleys where the dew point may be many degrees above freezing is enough
to prove this. A converse proof of the dependence of the quantity of rain at
different heights on the state of the air at those heights, is found in the rarer
occurrence of a shower falling from a cloud, but dissolving into tke air without
reaching the ground. Lastly, 1 cannot forbear remarking, that this hypothesis
of augmentation of size of the elementary drops agrees with the result that the
increase of quantity of rain for equal lengths of descent is greatest near the
ground: for whether the augmentation of each drop be in proportion to its sur-
face or its bulk, the consequence must be an increasing rate of augmentation of
its quantity as it approaches the ground.

“« The direct mathematical solution of this problem, now that the laws of cool-
ing and of the distribution of temperature have undergone such repeated scrutiny,
may perhaps be attempted with success; but for the purpose of eliminating the
effects of periodical or local modifying causes, it is desirable that observations on
the same plan should be instituted at many and distant places,—both along the
coasts and in the interior,—in the humid atmosphere of Cornwall and in the
drier air of the mid-land counties. Always, at least three stations should be
chosen, as open as possible, one of them very near to the ground: their relative
heights, the mean temperatures, the mean ranges of temperature, and the mean
dew point for each month should be ascertained. It would be useful to measure
the size of the rain-drops, and, if possible, their own temperature. The height
of clouds according to the plan of Mr. DALton, in his Meteorological Essays,
and the direction and force of wind should be noted, and distinctions made be-
tween snow, hail, and rain. Some of these data I have not yet found the means
of procuring, partly in consequnce of the great labour and time required, and
partly from the difficulty of well arranging the experiments themselves. But since
it is now ascertained that the general results follow some settled laws, and that
the effects may be very well appreciated at moderate heights, I hope not only to
procure these, but also several other data towards the completion of the theory
of this curious subject, the patient investigation of which cannot fail to give us
new and penetrating views into the constitution of the atmosphere.”’

It will be a curious subject of investigation to determine the applicability of
the law of altitude and moisture to this country, and to fix the value of m. This
latter may, in some measure, be done from the long series of observations pub-
lished in the Surveyor General’s Meteorological Register: but for the law of
heigat, we shall require a bigher station, and we invite any zealous meteorelogist
who may have leisure to fix his pluviameter on the top of the OcHTERLONY monu-
ment ; a chuprassee may easily be taught to observe it daily throughout the rains.

2. An unusual Sea-Monster in the Bay.
[Extract of a Letter from Lieut. W. FoLry, 25th Noy. 1834. ]

On my voyage to Madras (in May last), I saw a most extraordinary fish, and
which had never before been seen by any seaman on board, although some of the

1835.] Miscellaneous. 63

officers and crew had been employed in the whale fishery. It was of the size of
a whale, but differing from that animal in shape; spotted like a leopard, ina
very beautiful manner : it came close under the stern of the ship, during a calm,
and we had a magnificent opportunity for viewing it: it had a very large dorsal
fin, which it moved about with great rapidity when made angry in consequence
of the large stones that we threw down upon it rashly; for it possessed
sufficient strength to have broken the rudder and stove in the stern of the
ship. Several large fish (seemingly Dog-fish), about a cubit in length and
upwards, were gamboling about the monster, entering its mouth at
pleasure and returning to the water again. The following will give you
some idea of its shape. The mouth very large, dorsal fin black or dark-
brown, tail also; body covered with brown spots like a leopard, head lizard.
shaped. May it not be the Plesiosaurus, or a species of that fish known to have
existed formerly in the waters of the ocean? Having given you this statement,
it is proper that I should give you the names of those who were also eye-witnesses
of the existence of this extraordinary animal, They are as follows:

1. Captain TrncaTe, at that time commanding the ship ‘‘ Cashmere Mer-
chant,’? now commanding the ‘‘ Competitor.’’

2. Mr. Smepiie, Mr. Pixs, and Mr. LANDERS, officers of the vessel.

The above gentlemen will corroborate my statement: Captain TinGate and Mr.
SMELLIE were old sailors, and had never before seen the fish, or one resembling it.
There were also several European seamen on board, not one of whom had ever
seen it before.

[All we can venture to say on this authenticated account is, that the monster
described is nota Plesiosaurus as Lieutenant Fo.ry suggests; as that reptile has
no ‘ dorsal fin.’”” What it may be, we must leave others more competent to de-
cide, but the unusual nature of the notice should by no means prevent the insere
tion of a description supported by such unequivocal evidence.—Ep.]

3. Suspension of the Survey of the Brahmaputra River.

For the last four years, an accurate trigonometrical survey of the Brahmaputra .
has been in progress, to connect the map of this river from Goalpdra, where it
terminated in Captain Witcox’s Survey of the Assam Valley, (see the 138th
sheet of the ‘‘ Indian Atlas,’’ or the lithographed map in the 17th volume of
Researches,) with the surveys of the Ganges, the Sunderbans, and finally with the
grand meridional arc. Captain WiLcox and Lieutenant OmMMANNey, Engineers,
completed the measurement of the Jenai, which now forms the main stream of the
Brahmaputra, from Jumdélpur to its confluence with the Ganges at Jafirganj,
and the latter officer had in 1830 since been engaged in tracing the line of
the river from goalpara round the difficult country at the root of the Kasia
mountains, to within 30 miles of Dacca, when a sudden order of Government
lately directs the whole work to be suspended, and in fact, allthat has been
done, to be rendered comparatively useless for want of the connecting link
which it would not have taken three months to complete! Geographers at home
will be at a loss, as we ourselves are, to account for a measure apparently so im-
politic, and we cannot help thinking, that a word of explanation to the proper
authorities would still be in time to remedy the mistake,

(Jan.

ERE ESOL ES LETT ETE PILE TL LE ITE NI IE RE TS EE ESE I EL PE TT a BE EE a a a ED

“iva JSUT OY} SULINP SV SUES 94} BAL Pest STUCUUNA|SUL OYJ, “AeJOMOULISY] Qjng-3aM ArvatpsO ay} pue ‘aone.iodeas Aq paonpoid oinjyetoduie} Jo UvIsssidep 3y)}
Surmmsvaut 10 Jojswmourstoyy [euereitp B JO peut Osye si uostvduloy -ysed sYIMOUL attOs TOF poatojsiser Usaq sey pasn jucurnijsui ay, *ArMorouI ayy Ul SU[[Y a10Joq,
19IVM paylog-[]aM YIM parjom used sey YOY JO eqn} oyy ‘lejouloIvgG ve uo pooeld aq AvUr sdULITEI IWYM MOYS OF oq [ITM SUOTBAIesqO s,(vah yuasaid ayy Jo jvalqo ayL,

Meteorological Register.

64

*‘Jayyeam pyoo-iveyo sare Aytey}A0U a " i j_BfoR, sir ( LoL 184°) Ler’ 80s‘ “8 9°L 08 8°29 €89° FIE* 166°66, “Uren
op *BOJ rors | “M “M OfO0T| Ef9F | #9 err] List | O'TZ | 9EL°! pat} PBG° F ‘TR }6'8 | 1°6 | H°Z9 | SPOS fpr | Fao 1
op op “MU AU iP Ol] Sab | 9 IGE} Sl | TIL | @S2‘1 gore] OSo' fF ‘62 |F6 | 2'8 OPIS | gar‘ {8906 0g
op op “AU MUL 8°86 | oc] 19 OTL! LOT Rae 8915! oats] BFOS § 628 |8°B | 8°8 989° | ger. 699‘ 66
op op NS) AK £80] OF | 99 | OFT) o'e1 | EOL | GELS! pRat}| BBO. F “eB FZ°L | wis S19* | HBbS |G60" | 8%
op op “MUL “aA GLO) Lop | eh SIT| GIL | 6°69 | FEL‘! gat FOOTE ‘FB |Z‘ gl 809% | age’ | scr* 13
op ep u mu U'cetl oer | 89 | 1'2t) FL | B89 | SLO‘! oses| SFOS} “OL (8°8 | o6 GI9* | Ee. |BPL“ | 9
op op “aU *N Sool owt | IZ | SIL! gtr | o'89 | 929°! pzet| 000% F 692 [o°6 | QOL LOO. | rBrs |g80" | GZ
op op ‘u *MU 0'%6 | oar | oO EET] fel | PGL | 9R9' zee‘| BIOS f ‘89 | Z°0T | SIL oeg* | gcg* |OIL‘0S! +%
op *1e2]9 "MN | ¢MU 0'S6 | tro} 69 WB} 261 | etZ | 9625) Faas) OZOS | “EL |S‘OT | E°IT 8ISS | Bab. |OF6GS; &%
op “spnoyo “MAS “MS a at v6 ¥9 | 1'L | FL | 18s! Felt] USGS | ‘86 less le 822° | gna‘ |Pe0‘08) Ze
*reayo cp "AA SANS = "+ | 06 | 72 | OTL | SCZ | Zag‘) got! 0885 F '86 |6.E | Le 992° | HL1° \0F6' 12
“Azey op “MS “AA oo “: G6 ro 1 9 | cel | zor‘! pro] 908° 4 ‘46 Joe | ee 899° | gae* |9c6‘ 06
op op 8s "as om -> { 88 | 0'8 | GL | P22 | a6L*| Fa0%) 948° § {96 |r | ab sro‘ | age’ 12666 | GI
op op *as “ul a8 ue ¥6 oc | 6S | S‘0L | 62s} OsT*| 628° | £06 }o'9 | 09 99° | ore’ 926° 81
op op i8 ‘au US a SL 1 901] 9fI1 | E°02 | GaZs| Part| FBS F “68 ic°B | HG pags | gees |L966S) Ly
op op “Ad “MU -- [ovr] t9 | Ler} ott | 3°69 | 69°| 99T*| 098°4 £98 |9L | O°L 919% | 88s. | POs OT
op op “AU “ANU 046 | ceg} 29 | of8 | z'er | 1°04 | OL4*| Far} peat | SL [96 | Of0T blo. | OFS" |PIOOS) ST
op "Ivayo “MU “ALU. rcor| ste¢ | 89 | Bar| Zar | ¢04 | OGL*! 090%) OSB | “IG jeco | Fg 9£h° | bE3* 10165 iat
op "Boy “MS “Ais 096 | seq | £6 | ec | Lio | 16s | g9a*) FOR] OGL | ‘86 JI | He BeL* | ser’ loses | er
op op "Mh “a FGOL] Soh fF PL €IL| [St | 0°69 | 99L*) OrIt| SiGs ge ‘F4 lOSTt | B°ST €9L* | pLo* | Les‘ ZI
op “Palo “M *M oor] Llp f 28 L'9 | gZ | 8°99 | Ge9°| Sees] PaO. F “78 |Z‘L | 88 IZ9* | 008° | 126°66} IT
op “OJ a. ul B'ZoL| Of%P J 9 Let OL | 9°89 | OSL*) FOL‘! PEGS | ‘18 |e'B | G6 999° | 828° | Phos OL
op op “a AAU Lite | sep | Lo | B*tt| ofet | 6°29 | POL*| DCTs} OGG. | “18 [BtZ | 8 P99" | 988. j0c0" | 6
op op ‘AU “MU 0°46 | 1°Zb | 89 611| OEL | 0°89 | 9G25} 99I*] GaSe S88 |8°9 | FB 099 } 80R* |890‘ 8
op op “MU “MU L'96 0%Sh | L9 L11{ GET | 0°89 | O06; BIS} 8605 F “84 166 | Lor 689% | 988* 1 890° L
op op ‘Mu “MU 96 | 6S | 69 LIT] GSI | 9°04 | gage) 020°| 8685 f ‘82 16 | 956 9LLS | OSS |NTO‘0E] 9
op op ‘MU *AAN 866 | 8609 | SZ BIL) ZI | FEZ | 999°] B6R‘| POLS | “EB [L's | L6 968° | GLO’ | 8rB* ¢
op op “MS “MAS *86 | ‘eo | 18 FOT| BIT | SEZ | PEGs} BBL‘) OTL‘ | ‘26 |o‘9 | o‘9 Peg‘ | 886° | G8‘ iZ
op op ‘U “MU | 8°66 | ‘ro | 6 S01) 9°01 | STZ | gags} OaGs| BOBS F “6 Jott | 08 981° | PETS | 0z6‘ £
op. op uw "AU ‘c6 | ‘oo | OL LOL) Oftt | BZ | 806‘| BS8°| 99L* | “68 yL°9 | TL PLL° | OBIS | P68" 3g
ot) f) *IBalo ul “MU “06 | O'PS | 18 9°6 (eel atl | glet) cee‘! O18t f 98 lee (08 VEB* | OG0* 108862) T

iS so) co tc) 2 4 > wool. Dl) mei oa a>! ~S/8On

: Se | g ¢{| ei] € | s|Se | S82] 82] 3] Ss] BelSe | 23) Ss] °2] 27) Sei g58| 2
iy 5 E. ist 5 we |] me 1B Be) eel sale | 6 2 & 6o| oo G4] 8 okek ee S
= = S Ss s i=} u (om) n 8 ° 0 op 3 i) " ne Qee2 bed \. a mn
5 5 oe 5 a a Bel p 7 Ke Lo al eee Gee oi eal
: : > | eee | g)se|ee| ee] Fe) es) 2] sas | “a eo Flee sn 8 8
g “soulanXg 5

“Tawa M “pul JaJBULOUTTSY ‘IW *d } JB SUOTJVALOSGC "I *V OL ye SUOTIZAISSqO =
1218159 sn

“Geant ‘hannunge fo yzuopy ay2 sof ‘02yn0I05 ‘ao hossy ayy yn yday <aagsrbaay 709160)0.10990 FAT

JOURNAL

OF

Sa HEASTATIC SOCIETY.

;

No. 38.—February, 1835.

I.- Some Account of a Sect of Hindu Schismatics in Western India,
calling themselves Ramsanehi, or Friends of God. By Capt. G. E.
Westmacott, Asst. to the Gov. Gen’s Agent, N. E. Frontier.

Or tar Manant or Reticiovs Superiors or THE ORDER.

-RAmcuaran, the founder of the Ramsanéhis, was a Ramavat Byra-
gi, born A. D. 1719*, at Sorahchasen, a village in the principality of
Jypur. The precise period, nor the causes, which led him to abjure ©
the religion of his fathers, do not appear: but he steadily denounced
idol-worship, and suffered on this account great persecution from the
Brahmans. On quitting the place of his nativity in 1750, he wan-
dered over the country, and eventually repaired to Bhilwara, in the
Udipur territory, where after a residence of two years, Bhim Singh,
prince of that state, and father of the present Rana, was urged by the
priests to harass him to a degree which compelled him to abandon the
town.

The then chief of Shahpura, who also bore the name of Bhim
Singh, compassionating his misfortunes, offered the wanderer an
asylum at his court, and prepared a suitable escort to attend him: the
sage, while he availed himself of the courtesy, humbly excused himself
from accepting the elephants and equipage sent for his conveyance,
and arrived at Shahpura on foot, in the vear 1767 ; but he does not
seem to have settled there permanently until two years later, from
which time, it may be proper to date the institution of the sect. Ram-
charan expired in the month of April, 1798, in the seventy-ninth
year of his age, and his corpse was reduced to ashes in the great
temple at Shahpura.

* A, Samvat 1776.

66 Some Account of the Ramsanehis, a Sect of (Fes.

Sadha R4m, Governor of Bhilwara, a Bania of the Deopura tribe,
was one of RA4mcharan’s bitterest enemies: he on one occasion dis-
patched a Singi* to Shahpura to put the schismatic to death; but
the latter, who probably got information of his purpose, bent his
head low as the man entered, and told him to perform the service on
which he was deputed, but to remember that as the Almighty alone
bestowed life, man could not destroy it, without the Divine permission.
The hired assassin trembled at what he took for preternatural foresight
in his intended victim, fell at his feet, and asked forgiveness.

RAmcharan composed 36,250 Sabd or hymns, each containing from
five to eleven verses : thirty-two letters go to each aslok, which give the
above total. He was succeeded in the spiritual directorship by Ram-
jan, one of his twelve Chéla or disciples. This person was born at the
village of Sirsin, embraced the new doctrine in 1768, and died at
Shéhpura in 1809, aftera reign of 12 years, 2 months and 6 days.
He composed 18,000 Sabd.

The third hierarch, Dulha Ram, became a Ramsanéhi, A. D. 1776,
and died in 1824 : he wrote ten thousand Sabd, and about four thou-
sand saki, or epic poems, in praise of men eminent for virtue not only
of his own faith, but among Hindus, Muhammedans, and others.

Chatra D4s was converted at the early age of twelve years, ascend-
ed the thronet in 1824, and diedin 1831. He is said to have written
1000 Sabd, but would not permit their being committed to paper.

Narayan Das, the fourth in descent from Ramcharan, now fills the
chair of spiritual director.

On the demise of a Mahant, an assembly of the priests and laity
is convened at Shahpura to elect a successor, who is chosen with re-
ference alone to his wisdom and virtues. He is installed on the
thirteenth day after the office falls vacant, on which occasion the By-
ragis entertain the entire Hindi population of the town with a ban-
quet of sweetmeats at the temple within the city-walls, known by the
name of Rammerit.

The only difference between the garb of the Mahant and that of the
priests consists in the quality of the cloth, which is made of cotton of

* Singi. A particular cast of Hindus, so called in Rajwara from their cone
ducting a number of their own, and of the Mahesri and Suruogi tribes of Banias,
to noted places of pilgrimage, free of all expence. The word is evidently a cor-
ruption from Sangi a companion.

+ Gaddi is the term invariably applied to the cushion of the superior and
Maharaj (mighty prince), the only title by which he is addressed and spoken of by
the Ramsanéhis. They approach him with profound obeisance, reverently
touch his foot, and lay their foreheads to the marble on which heis seated.

{ Meri signifies an upper-roomed house in the language of RAjwara.

1835.] Hindu Schismatics in Western India. 67

rather a finer texture than theirs: their diet is the same, and consists
of dry cakes of coarse wheat flour without any kind of seasoning.
The superior resides at Shahpura, the chief place of their réligion, but
occasionally leaves it for a period of one or two months, wandering
over the country to mortify his body and accustom it to endure fa-
tigue.

Religion.

The Ramsanéhis believe in the unity and omnipotentt of God, whom
they regard as the Author of creation, preservation, and destruction;
nor so far as I could learn, do they hold his nature and attributes to
differ materially from the doctrine professed by ourselves. They call
the Supreme Being, Ram; he is the source of all good, and the avert-
er of evil, and as none can fathom his decrees, resignation to them is
implicitly enjoined. Man is pronounced incapable of any exertion of
himself: whatever comes to pass is accomplished through the Divine
Agency ; and as God alone is the bestower of rewards and punish-
ments, the Ramsanéhis are instructed to be constant in his worship, in
the morning, at noon and night, and always to ask his blessing before
going to meals. The soul is believed to be an emanation from’ the
Divine spirit, which takes flight to heaven on the dissolution of the
human frame ; and they inculcate, if a person commit sin, who has en-
joyed the advantages of education and is versed in the scriptures, no
future act however exemplary can procure his remission from punish-
ment, but in the case of an illiterate man, that he may by study, oe
tion and repentance obtain absolution of his crimes.

The formation and worship of idols is expressly prohibited. The
Ramsanéhis pass the Hindu gods unnoticed, and no sort of images
or symbols of idolatry are admitted into their temples. When I
pointedly asked Narayan Das his opinion of idol-worship, he replied in
verse :—‘ As to lave the body in the ocean is equivalent to bathing in all
the rivers of earth, since they flow into the great deep ; and to irrigate
the roots of a tree is sufficient without further waste to nourish and
bring forth its leaves, its flowers, and its fruits; so to worship the
omnipotent God, does away the necessity of addressing all inferior
deities.’

The Mahant said it was a mistake to suppose the doctrine of the
sect was new— it had in fact existed in the world from a very remote
period, though shorn of its purity by admixture with debasing super-
stitions and false tenets, engrafted upon it from time to time by the
ignorant and designing. Men were born in every age who held
sound principles of belief, but persecution compelled them to recant
their opinions, or to take refuge in the wilds. It was reserved for

K 2

68 Some Account of the Ramsanehis, a Sect of [Frs,

Ramcharan to frame a code from the most approved writings of Hin-
du law-givers: to avoid giving a shock to the prejudices of the peo-
ple he desired to convert, he wisely took the Shastras for his guide,
culling that which was good, and rejecting all that he deemed mis-
chievous—and he called those who adopted his opinions Ramsanéhi,
friends or servants of God.

The Mahant readily engaged to furnish me with a complete collec-
tion of their sacred writings; but as there was but one copy in the
temple, I succeeded in bringing away with me only a few selections,
of which I subjoin a translation. The head of each page is inscribed
with the holy name of Ram, used by the society as an initial title of
respect, corresponding with the Alif (Allah) of the Musalmans, and
Sri of the Hindus, and signifying, that an author solicits the blessing
of God on commencing a work, and invokes success on the undertak-
ing.

The Mahant wrote the first Sabd in an elegant hand, the rest
were transcribed by the priests in a corresponding style of beauty,
and red ink-marks are introduced in the commencement and end of
each couplet. The religious works of the Ramsanéhis are written
in the Deva Nagari character, and chiefly in the Hindi language,
with an admixture of Rajwara provincialisms—but there are also a
great many Sanskrit and some Panjabi verses, and Arabic and Per-
sian words likewise find a place.

Of the Priests.

Priests are called either Byragi or Sadh, and are divided into
three classes, the two last of which, denominated Bedehi and Moha-
nf, I shall notice presently. They are enjoined to study the holy
writings, and to disclaim all merit in their works: to observe celibacy,
chastity, humility, abstinence, and contentment : to put a restraint
upon the tongue : to sleep little: to accustom the body to hardships
and fatigue : and to exercise charity, liberality, and mercy. Anger,
brawls, avarice, selfishness, usury, gaming, lying, theft, lust, hypo-
crisy, and all kinds of luxuries are strongly denounced.

Priests are commanded never to look at their face in a glass, nor
to use snuff, perfumes, or ornaments, as such things savour of vanity.
To go bare-footed, and on no account to ride on any kind of convey-
ance : never to destroy any thing animate, nor to live in solitude, nor
to ask or receive money. Dancing, music, and other frivolous amuse-
ments are forbidden, and to taste of tobacco, opium, and all intoxicat-
ing drugs and spirits.

They are not permitted to prepare medicines, but do not object to
receive them im time of sickness at the hand of a stranger.

1835.] Hindu Schismatics in Western India. 69

It may be right to mention in this place, that many of the reasons
given for the institution of particular rites were received from the
chief of the Ramsanéhis, to whom I made three visits: he usually
delivered himself in Sanskrit verse, which he afterwards explained in
the local dialect, for the instruction of his hearers.

It was a maxim of Ramcharan that woman and gold in the present
vicious state of society were the principal sources of mischief in the
world, he therefore enacted a strict ordinance for priests to shun both
of them. The founder, a married man without a family, set the ex-
ample of putting away his wife ; and this sacrifice, with the desertion
of one’s children, are essential to obtain admission to the order: but the
families of these Byragis are, I believe, in all cases comfortably pro-
vided for. So strictly is the rule of continence enforced, that a priest
is only permitted to converse with females on matters connected with
religion; the smallest approach to levity would involve the dismissal
of the culprit. Dulha Ram, the third Hierarch, was affianced at the
time he became a Ramsanéhi, and of course broke troth and cast
away the kangna or thread bound round a bridegroom’s wrist ; hence
his name Dulha or the Bridegroom. A Turan*, representing a bunch
of flowers in stone, is suspended under the porchway of his shrine at
Shahpura, in commemoration of the circumstance.

Gold is supposed to beget avarice, and to accept of it destroys the
integrity of all previous acts of piety and virtue. I combatted its
interdiction on the plea that the misuse, as of every thing else, was
to be guarded against, but that it was capable of working much good
—and inquired if women were thought so ill of, why the sect admitted
female converts. ‘‘ The touch of gold,” said Narayan Das, ‘is a lure to
sin, and marriage is prohibited to ecclesiastics (not to the laity),
because the cares of a family would interfere materially with their
holy meditations, The heart should be fixed on one alone (God), he
who places his affections on any thing mortal, ceases to be a Byragi.”
It is related, in example of the little value set on lucre by the Ram-
sanehis, that a man presented Dulha Ram on some occasion with a
philosopher’s stone, which the sage received in silence and cast into a
well. The author of the gift, indignant at the contempt shown to his
offering, preferred a complaint to the Raja of Shahpura, who asked
the superior the motive of his conduct. The man having acknowledg-
ed he bestowed away the stone, the Mahant inquired how he could

* It is usual among Réjpdts of all ranks, at the time of a wedding, for the
father of the bride to suspend a bunch of flowers made of silk or wood, called
turan, at his porchway, which the bridegroom strikes with the handle of a
whip or stick before he enters to bear away the bride.

70 Some Account of the Rdémsanehts, a Sect of [Fes.

in reason complain of the loss of what did not belong to him.—‘‘ Your
motive,’ said Dulha Ram, ‘in presenting the stone was to tempt me
to evil ; but I covet not gold, nor is the transmutation of metals fitting
employment for a mendicant: take ye twenty rupees and begone.”

A Byragi, convicted of receiving money, is branded on the forehead
with a metal coin, heated for the purpose, and ejected from the com-
munity. Yet this interdiction, however strict, must be regarded as
nominal, since lay followers receive money for the use of the order—
and two Banias of the sect residing in Shahpura are appointed ex-
pressly to receive remittances, lend out money, and carry on trade on
account of the holy fraternity.

A woman may become a priestess, as in the instance of Sartip, a
devoted adherent of Ramcharan, by abandoning her husband and off-
spring, and by conforming strictly to chastity and other statutes. Fe-
males are forbidden under pain of chastisement and excommunication,
to approach places of worship after dusk, as they form the residence of
the priesthood: it is considered prudent to guard them from tempta-
tion, although they are supposed to have acquired absolute controul
over the passions and all unlawful desires, before they are admitted to
the sect. The sexes sit apart in the temples, and never sing together.

In regard of the injunction to sleep little, and to follow habits of
industry, they say there is enough of sleep in the grave, life is evan-
escent, and of too much value to be passed in repose; and by wasting
the precious hours in slumber, man degrades himself to an equality
with the brute. Their aliment is poor, and taken sparingly, because
abstinence induces watchfulness, while a surfeit of food and sleep
make the soul heavy. Priests reside away from the habitations of
man, as the turmoil of cities would interrupt their meditations; but
they are at the same time commanded to live together, to correct the
foibles and relieve the gloom of each other. ‘‘ A solitary lamp,”’ added
the chief, ‘‘ however brilliant, casteth a shadow beneath it—place ano-
ther lamp in the apartment, and the darkness of both is dissipated.”

The priest changes his name on admission to the order, to denote he
enters on a new state of life, and the hair of his face and head (with ex-
ception to a small tuft on the crown) is shaved close ; there are several
barbers on the establishment, whose business it is to perform this
office ; they are wealthy, and receive occasionally valuable presents. I
heard of a Charan, who, in a fit of liberality, presented five hundred
rupees to one of them. The only covering worn by the Sadh is a
cotton cloth, of coarse texture, seven feet and a half long, with a small
piece for a waistband, and another for a percolater, water being always
strained before it is used for culinary or other purposes, to guard

1835.] Hindu Schismatics in Western India. a

against the destruction of animalcule. The sheet is coloured with
Gira, a kind of red-ochre, emblematical of humility ; they adda second
in the winter season, and sometimes a third, when if warmth be not
obtained, they throw off all clothing, to mortify feeling, disdaining, as
they express it, to be overcome by the wintry elements. This sheet is
brought over the head, and forms its only covering ; but woollen cloth
of similar dimensions is sometimes substituted for cotton in the cold
months. They all go bare-footed, and never ride on any description of
animal or wheeled conveyance.

A perpendicular mark of white clay, called Siri, imprinted on the
forehead, is a distinguishing symbol of the sect, denoting belief in the
unity of God, and they have a rosary of small beads used in prayer
about their necks. Metal utensils are proscribed. The Sadh drink
from wooden goblets, and eat off stone, china, and earthen-ware; the
latter, it is well known, are forbidden to orthodox Hindus. They ab-
stain from animal food, and what is singular, considering the extraor-
dinary anxiety shewn to provide for the safety of insects, partake of
nothing unsubdued by fire, fruits and vegetables not excepted. They
have no objection to touch the element, but refrain from preparing
their own food: thus it should seem, however fearful themselves, to
incur the deadly sin of robbing a creature of life, they do not view the
act in others with the same antipathy. Even the most loathsome
vermin are held sacred; whenever a Ramsanéhi kindles a light, he
covers it with a shade, and lamps are excluded from the temples from
an apprehension they may lure insects to destruction. Influenced by a
similar feeling, the priests look on the ground before they walk, and
never move out of doors, except on very urgent business, during four
months of the year, or from the middle of Asarh* tothe middle of Kar-
tik. The insect population being most active in the wet months, they
fear to crush them under foot in passing through the rank vegetation,
and should they be on a journey, halt without reference to situation,
till the season is over.

The total number of Sadh, so far as I could ascertain from inquiry
in various quarters, does not exceed eight hundred. No census has
ever been taken: they are dispersed over the country frequently at a
great distance from Shahpura, and never attend the festival of Phil
Dol together, so it is obviously impossible to arrive at a correct esti-
mate. The number at Shahpura constantly varies, and about a hun-
dred are sometimes met with in the temple at one time; the visitors
who come to make their respects to the superior, to consult him and
receive his blessing, usually remain for three days, and give place to
others.

* July, August, September, and October.

72 Some. Account of the Ramsanthis, a Sect of (Fes.

The priests may be considered wealthy, their few wants considered,
and the laity subscribe liberally to their support. Two of them visit
the town of Shahpura daily, to collect ready-dressed victuals from lay
members of the community and Hindus of the better class, who con-
tribute readily to fill their wallets. They do not accept food from
other sects, and the custom is observed, it should seem, as an act of
humility, certainly not from an avaricious motive. The fraternity
make their evening repast off these offerings, and purchase materials
for a simple breakfast, the only other meal, out of their own coffers.

Ramcharan had twelve pupils or disciples, called Chéla, whom he
selected from the priesthood, filling up vacancies as they occurred, from
the most virtuous of the elders, and this custom is continued by his
successors. They are called the‘‘ Baruh Thumbe ke Sadh,” or disciples
of the twelve pillars. The middle hall of the temple where the Mahant
sits, and prayers are read, being supported by that number of columns,
three on a side, beneath which the disciples range themselves. The
openings between the columns are hung with cotton cloths, dyed with
Girt, let down at night to exclude the air, and here the priests take
their repose; the pavement of the hall is elevated above the outer
terrace, and is the only part of the structure laid with mats, and dry
grass is spread upon the terrace in the winter, the only time of year
such a luxury is permitted, to serve as a cushion to the laity and visit-
ers who are not admitted inside.

The twelve do not reside permanently at Shahpura, but four or five
are always found there at one time. One of them denominated Kot-
wal acts as steward of the grain and medicines deposited in the temple,
and distributes a daily allowance of food to the inmates; nothing can
be taken from the store without the Mahant’s order; it is also the
duty of the Kotwal to summon the priests to midnight prayer.

Another of the body called Kapradar—keeper of the wardrobe—has
charge of various kinds of clothes presented by the laity and strangers
for the use of the brotherhood: these include coarse cottons, blankets,
and other woollens, but no coloured or rich stuffs are accepted. The
cloths supply the SAdh with raiment, and when cast off, are bestowed
in charity ; and some of the brotherhood are constantly employed pre-
paring dresses for the poor. The same individual keeps the vessels of
the refectory.

A third fills the office of censor, and maintains strict watch over the
manners and moral conduct of the fraternity. A fourth teaches the
priesthood to read, and a fifth instructs them in writing.

Another is appointed to teach reading and writing to men of all
persuasions who apply to him, while a seventh, usually selected for his

1885. ] Hindu Schismatics in Western India. 78

age and saturnine temper, instructs females in the same acquire-
ments.

The remaining five, with three disciples chosen indifferently from
among those mentioned above, form acouncil of eight, appointed by
the Mahant, to investigate into offences and infringements of the rules
of the order. The elder ecclesiastics have usually several disciples,
who are byragis, and in event of the absence of a member filling an
office in the establishment at Shahpura, a trust-worthy follower offici-
ates as his deputy.

Of the Priests called Bedehi and Méhant.

Bedehi, compounded of two words be, without, and deh, body, im-
plies that the persons so denominated are dead to all corporeal feeling,
and accordingly they go stark naked.

The Mohani, as the term indicates, feign insensibility and uncon-
sciousness of all that passes around them. Priests who have not suf-
ficient command over their tongues become ‘‘ Mohani,”’ not for life,
but a period of years ; and when they have brought their hasty tempers
into complete subjection, they resume the use of speech. They repeat
«Ram, Ram,” the watch-word of the sect, in acknowledgment of a
salutation, andpermit themselves to converse and answer questions on
subjects strictly confined to their religion. With exception to the
particulars noted, the Bedehi and Mohani differ in no respect from the
other priests.

The hungry, be their creed what it may, are never sent away empty
from the temple, and the ragged are provided with suitable raiment.
During Chyt, Bysakh, and Jeth, or from the middle of March to the
middle of June, the hottest period of the year, the mahant stations a
brahman*, with water-carriers at a distance of two miles from Sh4h-
pura, on the different roads leading to the city, to minister to the
wants of the thirsty traveller. And all the cattle of the town receive
a certain allowance of fodder and water during the above season from
the same bountiful source.

It will be seen, that the doctrine of the Ramsanéhfs inculeates the
mortification of the passions, with entire abstraction from the world,
and the renunciation of all its pleasures and enjoyments. The two
sins held in most abhorrence are incontinence and avarice, and are
never forgiven. The dress of the priesthood is kept scrupulously
neat and clean, and changed, I believe, every day, or second day, and

* It is barely necessary to mention, that a brahman is chosen, because Hindus
of inferior caste, and I might include foreigners, are gratified to accept the beverage
from his hand, while they might hesitate to take it from a man of low tribe.

L

74 Some Account of the Ramsanehis, a Sect of [Frs.

their modest quaker-like demeanour, as they respond “‘ Ram, Ram” to
the salutation of the traveller, prepossesses him strongly in their favour.
Of the Laity.

The laity, known by the general name of girhist, are at liberty at
any time to enter the hierarchy, and the office of mahant is open to
them. They are particularly enjoined to speak the truth ; to be con-
stant in their affections, and just and honest in their dealings. I omit-
ted to inquire, if females are forbidden to become Sati, but rather
think they are not, as two of the wives of the late Raja of Shahpura,
who was a Ramsanéhi, burnt in 1625. It might be that the force
of ancient custom was in this case too strong to be overcome, and the
noble often indulge licenses which would not be countenanced in the
peasant.

The girhist celebrate their weddings with none of the pomp and
rejoicing usual with the brahmanical Hindus, but conduct the ceremo-
nial in a quiet unobtrusive manner. Like the byragis, they are for-
bidden to mourn for the dead, as anact answering no purpose, since
death is the doom of all, and also because it implies a want of resigna-
tion to the divine will. They burn their dead, and chaunt Sabd over
a corpse.

Neither priests nor laymen observe Tija, Dashahra, Dewali, Holi,
nor any other Hindu festival, that I am aware of; they keep a strict
fast from sun-set until sun-rise, nor even when sick, are they per-
mitted to take any nourishment, but medicine during those hours.

The laity at Shahpura are in number about two hundred, of which
perhaps a hundred and twenty are of the male sex, and they are inter-
dicted turning Bedehi and Mohant, as attention to the rules of those
orders are incompatible with the discharge of temporal duties.

Converts.

The Ramsaneéhis are composed of all castes of Hindus, and although
no members of other sects have been converted, nor so far as I
could learn, have any applied for admission to the order, the tenets are
characterised by so much of liberality that I see nothing to oppose it.
Both Christians and Muhammadans are freely admitted to their places
of worship; all that is required of them, being to remove their shoes:
but in the matter of diet, the force of prejudice and ancient custom are
so strong among the sectaries, that I doubt if they would allow apos-
tates of any other faith to eat with them.

Converts can be admitted to the society by the superior alone in
the temple at Shahpura, and they are conducted for this purpose by
the priests from different parts of India. The superior makes the
novice over on his arrival to the twelve Sadh of the pillars, who are

1835.] Hindu Schismatics in Western India. 75

directed to examine him on the soundness of his belief, and to make
him thoroughly conversant with the tenets on which their religion is
founded. Should their report be favourable, the name of the convert
is changed, supposing he enter the hierarchy, but not otherwise, and
he is received into the order, after undergoing a novitiate of forty days.

Some brahmans have enrolled themselves, but converts have been
made principally from the mahésri* and agarval tribes of baneas.
There are no certain accounts of the number of Ramsanéhis dispers-
ed over Western India; they abound chiefly in Rajwara and Gujarat,
are met with in the neighbourhood of most large cities and towns, such
as Bombay, Surat, Hydrabad, Punah, and Ahmedabad, and there are
some at Benares.

When we consider the strict rules by which the ecclesiastics are
bound, and the hardships by which they are expected to subdue the
body, it is not surprising their number should augment but slowly ; but
the superior assured me, they had much increased of late years through
the quiet which Western India enjoys under British protection.

Worship.

Worship is performed three times a day, but the laity, busied in
their worldly avocations, do not all go at one hour, thoughonce seated,
they remain in the temple till the service is over. The book of pray-
er is always read aloud by a layman, who makes a pause at the end of
every second or third verse, to enable the mahant, and in other taber-
nacles, a priest of superior acumen, to expound and comment on the
texts in the dialect of the country. Not more than six or seven Sabd
are read in a day, and continued concordant to order, until the whole
have been explained to the congregation ; thus two years are frequent-
ly occupied in going through the sacred writings.

The Sadh rise at midnight, and continue at their devotions until the
first watch of the morning (8 A. m.), when the laity attend for a cou-
ple of hours, and the service concludes with a couple of Sabd or songs
of praise chaunted by females. Mid-day prayer commences at one or
two p. M., and lasts for several hours ; and evening service, at which
only men are present, begins at dusk, and terminates in an hour, during
which time, two arthi or hymns, are sung. As observed in another
place, men and women never sing together, and they sit apart in the
temples; and when the priests are alone, they pass hours together in
silent abstraction, and at other times, count their beads, repeating at
intervals the holy name of Ram.

* Mahésri from Mahésvar, a name of Mahadéva: oth tribes worship the
god under different energies.

E 2

76 Some Account of the Rdmsaneéhis, a Sect of [Fxs.

Festival of Phil Dol.

Annually in the month Phalgiin*, a festival called Phal-dol, is ob-
served at Shahpura, attended by as many of the priests and laity as
are within reasonable distance: the Sadh rarely allow two seasons to
pass in succession without attending. The five or six last days in
Phalgtin are, strictly speaking, the festival, but people begin to assem-
ble upwards of a month earlier from distant parts of India.

The name of the festival, signifying ‘“ Flowers swinging’ is borrowed
I understand from one of the eighteen Purans called Srimath Bhag-
avat, which contains an account of Krishna, and is intended more par-
ticularly for the instruction of his followers. A festival is annually
observed in Bengal, and probably in other parts of Hindustan, by the
worshippers of the god on the full moon of Chyt or Bysakh, when
he is encircled with wreaths of flowers, placed in a sort of cradle,
and swung by his votaries. I obtained no satisfactory reason why the
Ramsanehis, who do not observe the rite alluded to, should give
the name of Phil-dol to their great annual meeting.

Two or three Sadh reside in every village of consideration, and
from eight to twelve, and upwards, in each city andlarge town, aceord-
ing to its populousness : they are always relieved at the Phul-dol,
a regulation framed by Dut#a R&m, the third mahant, to prevent
their forming friendships and improper connections with the inhabi-
tants: on no account are they permitted to remain for two successive
years at one place.

Each of the princes of Udipur, Jodhpur, Jypur, Kotah, Bindi and
of some of the smaller Rajput states, although orthodox Hindus,
to evince their respect for the Ramsanéhis, send from eight to twelve
hundred rupees to Shahpura on the anniversary of Phal-dol, to furnish
forth a day’s entertainment of sweetmeats to the sect.

Besides the Ram-dw4ra or temple outside Shahpura, there is an-
other religious edifice within the city wall, called Ram-meri, which
has an establishment of five brahman cooks, five females to grind
meal, and a similar number of water-carriers for the service of the
brotherhood. Hither the high priest resorts with a few of the most
pious of the Sadh, on the last day of each month, to keep a solemn vigil
during the night, in commemoration of the death of RAmcuaran. Pray-
ers are offered up, and the holy writings expounded, and respectable
people of all persuasions are admitted to the building. The priests
distribute sweetmeats and food collected in the town to the congrega-
tion, reserving their own share till morning.

* February, March.

1835.) Hindu Schismatics in Western India. 77

Punishment.

When any member of the community infringes a rule, he is brought
to Shahpura, at the festival of Phil-dol, by some one of the byragis,
who, as already mentioned, are dispersed over the country to watch
the conduct of the sect. He is not permitted to eat with the brother-
hood, nor to enter the holy edifice; but seated at a little distance off
under a certain tamarind tree, where his food is sent to him ona platter
of dhak* leaves. The offence with which heis charged is investigated
by the council of eight, who make a report on it to the high priest.
If found guilty, the culprit is deprived of his rosary, a barber of the
establishment shaves the top-knot off his head, and he is ejected from
the community. What is stated above applies to grievous offences.
Slight infringements of order are investigated at all seasons ; and
sometimes when the culprit happens to be along distance off, the
priest stationed at the place takes a deposition of the case, and trans-
mits it to the mahant, when if considered fit, he excommunicates the
culprit, without ordering him to Shahpura. It will be seen, the
superior and council are a check upon each other, and they must coin-
cide in opinion before a sentence can be carried into effect.

Religicus Edifices.

Temples of the Ramsanéhis are known under the name of R4m-
dwara, or the gate of God. Among other places in Rajwara, where
they are met with, may be enumerated J ypur, Jodphur, Mertha,
Nagor, Udypur, Chittor, Bhilwara, Tonk, Bundi, and Kotah. The
one at Shahpura is by a great deal the handsomest, and distinguish-
ed for the richness and magnificence of its architecture: it is built
of rock quarried at Kati, a distance of twenty-four miles, and coated
with brilliant white chunam, formed of the same stone, reduced
to powder and mixed with milk and other ingredients, which adapt it
to receive a high polish. The entrance porch faces the east, and is
very lofty, withan arched balcony above, and like other parts of the build-
ings, neatly carved. From the centre of the pile, a handsome pavilion,
with open arches, rises far above the other towers; and in a vault be-
neath, the corpse of the founder of the sect was reduced to ashes.
Between the vault and pavilion, there is an equilateral apartment, sup-
ported on twelve pillars, connected by scolloped arches : this was the
favourite abode of RAMcHARAN, and here the mahant daily takes his
seat, to expound the doctrines of the faith, and the congregation assem-
ble on the terrace without, for morning and evening prayer.

On the south face of the temple, but quite separate from it, stands a
range of seven domes, to which you ascend by steps, six of them re-

* Butea frondosa.

78 Some Account of the Rémsanéhis, a Sect of [Fss.

pose on twelve pillars, and correspond exactly in their proportions :
three are built over the ashes of the Spiritual Fathers, who succeeded
the founder, and the others cover a similar number of venerated priests
of the community. The central or seventh dome has only five columns,
and is much smaller than the rest; it marks the spot where the re-
mains of a female named Sarv’P, a pious disciple of RAMCHARAN, were
burnt ; and the domes, with those of the temple, are painted inside and
out in ornaments of vivid colours. The Ram-dwara was built at dif-
ferent periods, when funds were available, and is said to have cost
about eighty thousand rupees: it is kept remarkably clean, and pre-
sents a unique and handsome appearance, essentially differing in design
from all Hindu edifices I have seen. On a level with the vault are
apartments for the priests and members of the sect, who resort to
Shahpura at the festival of Phul-dol, and here are also the stores of
linen and blankets belonging to the fraternity.

Behind the Ram-dwara repose the ashes of the ancient Rajas of
Shahpura, each in a distinct shrine. Bui’m Sineu, grandsire of the
reigning chief, was the patron of RAmcuaran, and was the first of his
family who embraced the new doctrines. ‘The late Raja died at
Udypur in 1825, but his turban was transmitted to Shahpura, and with
it two of his wives performed Sati.

*Selected Translations from the Religious Writings of the Rémsanéhis.

1.—The name of Ra’ma is the real seed, in which all things are contained :
for he is the source of the three qualities (of goodness, passion, and darkness); of
the fourteen regions (of Hindu cosmogony) ; of the twenty-four (incarnations) ;
the three hundred and thirty millions (of Hindu deities) ; and the three (principal
Gods, viz. Brauma, VisHNu, and MAnEswaRa), who should be adored, and
who not? Ra’mcHARAN says, the whole universe sprung from that only seed, as
leaves shoot forth and fall off in abundance from the same tree.

2.—The person who adores the all-pervading Ra’ma, and turns his back upon
the other gods; who visits his guru with bare feet, and stretches forth his
liberal hand; who has renounced the world, neither uses harsh language nor
jokes, and seeks not any pleasure ; who giving up all considerations on profit and
loss, resigns himself to the will of Harit; who is not addicted to gaming, steal-
ing, avarice, lying, and hypocrisy; who does not taste bhang}, tobacco, opium,

* T have to acknowledge my obligations to Babu Ka’st Prasua’p Guos
of Calcutta, for his courtesy in assisting me with a translation of these papers: he
purposely rendered it as literal as possible, and I am not sure if it would not
have been better had I left it in that form.

ft A name of VisHNu, but employed here and elsewhere along with Ra/MA, to ex-
press God in an abstracted sense; the frequent mention of these two as objects of
worship, is owing to the doctrine of the Ramsanéhis being mixed up with the tenets,
and these verses being selections from the books, of other Hindu sects.

An intoxicating potion, prepared from the hemp plant (Canabis Sativa).

1835.] Hindu Schismatics in Western India. 79

akhaz and wine; who drinks water after straining it, and looks before he walks,
is the true RAmsanéhi who hath attained his purpose.

3.— Ra’Ma is the sea of happiness and destroyer of misery—abandon him not,
O Ra’mMcHARAN, but be constant in his worship.

Song in the Panjabt language.

The faqir whois enamoured of the beauty of the All-Merciful is drowsy through-
out the eight prahars*, because he is fully intoxicated with his love. He (or his
spirit) has come from an inaccessible region, and entered the corporeal frame, and
after having witnessed all the troubles of the world will return to that region.
As long as He (or the soul) occupies the serai (2. e. mansion of the body), he
gives its proper rent (é. e. discharges the duties of humanity) and abandoning
his desires, resigns himself to the will of his deity. He wanders about at ease,
forms no attachments, seeks only his beloved (God), and bestows a portion (of
bread or any other thing) upon all who need it. He points out the path to
heaven, rescues others from perdition, conforms to the duties of this world with
his faith, and is influenced by no private motive. Ra’MCHARAN says, that few
individuals have followed the example of such a faqir, who gives no thought to
the world, but is content with his present condition.

2nd Song in the Panjabt language.

The faqir whose heart is firm (in God) is above all amirst; for he is a true
pirt. Knowing that the body is a hell, he places not his affections on the world,
and keeps aloof from it by frequently meditating on the Alif of Allah. Re-
straining his heart from going astray, he has laid it at the feet of the Almighty,
and remembers him at dawn, in the morning, at noon-time, and evening. He
absolves himself in the water of faith, and tells the beads of fatwa§. His cave
is in the sky (7. e. abstraction of mind), where he sits in contemplation. Ra’m-
CHARAN Says, that people do not understand the secret motive of such a faqir,
which is to obtain the indescribable Being|| in his body, whom he always serves.

4.—The darvésh is always happy who is free from desire. Hither remain at
one place, or roam about in the four quarters (of the earth): roam about in the
four quarters, and labour for the salvation of your soul. Be awake or asleep,
but entertain no selfish motive. Let your hair grow as long as was that of
Sahaka and others, or shave your head bare: for he who is free from desire is
always happy. Practise benevolence, and make your heart as pure and soft as
wax, and look down upon your feet. Be patient, speak the truth, and dance
without a mistake (i. e. discharge your duties properly). Having once placed
the hand of your spiritual guide upon your head, never be so shameless as to
undress yourself (7. e. refrain from all intercourse with women). He has subdued
his mind and heart, and taken his seatin perseverance. RA’MCHARAN says, this
is the height of devotion, as a person who attains it has cooled (subdued) his Pir
(senses), and never covets the society of women. He is not given to intoxica-
tion, love, or adultery, but is always engaged in contemplation, and from leading
a solitary life, his mind is free from all affection.

* An eighth part of the twenty-four hours.

+A chief or grandee.

} Asaint, or spiritual father.

§ Divine knowledge.

|| The human soul is believed to be a portion of the Supreme spirit, and con-
sequently worshipped as such.

80 Some Account of the Rdmsanéhis, a Sect of [Frs.

5.—If having fed yourself through the charity of mankind you sleep at ease,
with outstretched limbs, and fail to offer worship to Hani, the punishments of
Yama* will not be mitigated: do not take thy meals without adoring the lord sup-
porter Ra’ma, but abandoning thy habits of idleness, worship him day and night.
Abandon thy habits of idleness, and walk not without the fear of God. If you
neglect to follow (this advice), you are a hypocrite, and shall be doomed to pass
through the eighty-four (transmigrations). As a powerful creditor collects his
dues from his weak debtors by severe beating, so shall you be punished if you
take your food without adoring Ra/ma.

6.—The ignorant person who commits a sin becomes free from it by the ac-
quisition of knowledge, but the man of knowledge, who is guilty of vice, is like a
newly varnished pot, from which the dust (should any fall upon it) never goes off.
He is like a newly varnished pot from which the dust never goes off, or like a blue
stain (upon linen), A sin committed at a holy place of pilgrimage is like a wak-
ing dream. As the stupid man who mistakes his way in the day-time can never
discover the true path at night, so the person who possessed of knowledge per-
petrates a sin can never emancipate himself from it.

7.—He is areal faqir who makes the stone his bed, whose tent is the sky,
whose arms are his pillows, and who eats his food from earthen vessels: he is
the master of the four quarters, and is not regarded as low. The prince and the
peasant fall prostrate at his feet, and he subsists by begging.

8.—You must die one day, whether you live in the city or the wildernesst.
Some (i. e. the wicked) are taken bound in chains, while others (i. e. the good)
are summoned (by death). They are sent for who have renounced the world,
who have none to weep (for them), and who have always taken the name ‘ Ra’Ma,’
Ra’MCHARAN Says, the good abandon their homes, because they know that they
must one day perish, whether they inhabit the city or the wilds.

We should mourn over the corpses of the dead, if weeping could restore them
to life. If doctors could save mankind, then none of the wealthy would die, but
it is not in the power of any toescape death. Enquire of this from place to place,
and weigh it thoroughly in your mind. Life and death were created by the Lord,
who can do whatsoever he willeth. We should mourn over the corpses of the
dead, if they could be restored to life by weeping. You blame Ra’MA, and cry :—
6¢ Oh Ra/MaA, what have youdone, who will support my family, and who will superin-
tend my household works? What have you done, Oh Ra’MA? you have as it were
sunk the vessel in the middle of the stream.’’? You know not how long you may
live, and Ra’McHARAN declares without this knowledge you fall off from Hari’,
because you blame Ra’ma, and exclaim, ‘ Oh Ra’ma, what have you done?’

~9.—You may have followers, eloquence, and fame, without using any exertion
to obtain them; you cannot therefore fathom the will of Ra’ma. I look not for
means ; every thing comes to pass of its own accord. The will of Hariis power-
ful, who can revert it? Whatever happens is accomplished by Ra’ma; for I am
incapable of performing any thing, it is the very height of folly.

* The Indian Pluto, and king of Patal or hell.

+ Meaning the souls of those persons.

t The figures correspond with the number of paragraphs in the MS. selec-
tions.

1835. ] Hindu Schismatics in Western India. 81

2nd Leaf.

1.—Man clad in scented garments walks forth with conceited strides, but while
all in his outward appearance is fair, his inside is corrupt. He views his features
in the glass, and is puffed up with pride ; but is ignorant, that his body will suffer
dissolution at last, and that not even the fair skin (which now) covers the filthi-
ness within him, will remain.

2.—Woman and the objects (met with in this world) persuade the heart to
terrestrial enjoyments, and often level the most exalted mind; such is their
nature, therefore abandon them, Oh Ra’mcHaran! You can obtain nothing, Oh
Ra’MCHARAN, in this world without money, but to an ascetic money is nothing.
To an ascetic money is as worthless as a kowri shell; it destroys devotion,
knowledge, and ascetism; it ruins devotion, knowledge, and ascetism; for it
increases the appetites and eats up (7. e. destroys) the integrity of those three
qualities. Like achavan*, it absorbs every virtue; wherefore an ascetic sets no
value upon money.

3.—The body is the shrine of which the all-perfect Ra’ma is the god; the

anxiety (to see him) is the artit, and to remember him is true devotion. No
worship is better than the constant remembrance of him, and no offering is more
proper than resignation. Leave your heart’s individuality (or pride), and God
will listen to your adoration. He is quite content, Oh Ra’mcH4RAN, who has
understood this secret truth, that the body is the shrine of which the all-perfect
Ra'MA is the god. Destroying your works (é. e. abandoning the merit of them
hereafter), enjoy the sweets of humility, contentment, charity, and peace. Speak
the truth, curb your inclination and your tongue, repeat the name (Ra/’ma) inward-
ly, and acquire divine knowledge. Give up your desires, sit down contented,
retire to the woods, and immerse yourself in the pleasant ocean (of contempla-
tion). The faqir who has drunk of the love (of God) constantly meditates
on him, his aspirations and respirations are not in vain; for whether awake or
asleep, he never forgets his God. He is merciful, subdues his anger, and neither
indulges in avarice or delusion: he worships none but Ra’ma, and cares
not if the remaining three hundred and thirty millions of gods are displeased
with hia.

4.—The ascetic is always awake, and meditates himself, and makes others
meditate (on God). Whenever slumber comes upon him, he sings a hymn
—whenever he lights a lamp, he thinks of the safety of animals, and covers it
either with abhra or cloth ; by this means, the followers (of this doctrine) never
incur guilt, but attain virtue. Cuiran says, that many have obtained salvation
byvavoiding desire, and disclaiming all merit in their works.

5.—What will you achieve in lying, oh Kanir ?-—lyiug will bring on sleep while
death is near the pillow, like the bridegroom at the turan. What will you
achieve in sleeping, oh Kapin ?—awake and meditate upon Mardanif, for you must
sleep one day with your long legs outstretched. What will you accomplish in
sleeping, ob Kanir; strive to keep yourself awake, for this life is as valuable as
a diamond or ruby, and should be given up to (meditation on) the Lord. What

* The ceremony of sipping water before eating.
+ The ceremony of turning a light about the face of an idol.
~ A name of Krishna.

M

82 Geological and Statistical Account of the (Fez.

will you accomplish in lying, oh Kanirn? Arise and sorrow for nothing—how can
he whose abode is in the grave (i. e. who reflects on the evanescence of this life)
—(how can he) sleep in quiet ?

6.—By adoring Ra’Mma, the state of Brahm is attained; this has been fully
proved by his votaries. Let, therefore, all the Rémsanéhis meet together, and
raise a hallelujah to Ra’ma.

7—Should the devotee go forth in the autumn, and trampling upon the numer-
ous animals which are born at that season, occasion their death, he forfeits his
innocence, inasmuch as he destroys the feelings of his heart, and thereby commits
sin at every instant. Tuxst says, this is not devotion either in mind, deed, or
speech, but the devotee who is careful to remain quietly at home observes the
rules of virtue.

(These verses are dated Tuesday, the 6th day of Chait, in the Samvat
year 1855 (a. p. 1798), the year of RamcHaran’s decease.) ;

IJ.—Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree, with a Geologi-
cal Sketch of the Country, and Brief Account of the Customs, &c. of
its Inhabitants. By Lieut. Wm. Fotny. With a map, Plate iv.

(Continued from page 39.)

January \5th.—It had been my intention to cross over Jeeka, and
proceed from thence towards the town of Rambree, through the
Northern Hong*. My host of Oogah, and the guides he had furnished
me with, were, however, so fearful of accident, and unwilling that I
should incur any risk by passing over this wild and almost inaccessible
part of the island, that I abandoned the design, and consented to be
taken along the sea-shore to the south-west of the mountain, with
the view of putting up at Singhunnéthe, a village in the Southern Hong.
I afterwards discovered that had the day been any other than what it
was, (Wednesday,) I might have succeeded in inducing the guides to
take me over Mount Jeeka. The Mughs pay a superstitious deference to
what are termed the fortunate and unlucky days for any undertaking.
Wednesday (Boduh-hoo), happened to beamong thelatter number. Pya-
tho (January), 1s held tobe a very unfavourable season for building ahouse,
and marriages are never celebrated in the monthst Wajho, Wagoung,
Fodelin and Tsadinkyot. 1 left Oogah by the sea-beach, and passing a few
sandstone rocks, with an island resembling the knot in appearance and
structure, found myself at the foot of Jeeka. Its elevation above the
sea is probably as much as 3000 feet ; the very abrupt manner in which
it rises above the range with which it is connected, gives it, at a dis-

* Hong is one of the circles in the island ; there are two Hongs, (North and
South.)
+ July, August, September and October.

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 83

tance, the aspect of an isolated hill. A dense forest, with little variety
of shade, covers the mountain from top to bottom. The ground on the
summit is said to be level and clear, but it remains uncultivated, as no
Mugh will fix his habitation in a spot which not only abounds with
wild beasts*, but is, in his opinion, the abode of fairies, and evil spirits,
equally destructive with the former. I observed the prints of elephants’
and tigers’ feet in several places on the road, and from the diminutive
size of some of the prints, it was evident that these animals had been
accompanied by their young. The guides remarked that a herd of ele-
phants may frequently be seen during the evening feeding upon the long
grass and underwood at the foot ofthe mountain. By their account,
the elephants were particularly troublesome in the months of October
and November, (when the rice crops are becoming ripe,) at which time
they descend into the plains and do a great deal of mischief. Although
elephants are continually shot in the Sandoway district for their teeth, no
attempt has yet been made to catch or destroy the elephants on Mount
Jeeka and its neighbourhood, from the absurd opinion entertained by
the inhabitants, that they are not only invulnerable, but are endowed
with such superior sagacity as to render all endeavours to ensnare
them futile.

Thad hoped to find in Jeeka some departure from what had hitherto
been the prevailing character of the formations on this side of the island.
The almost impervious nature of the jungle at the base of the moun-
tain, and the great danger that I should have incurred in endeavouring
to ascend the hill on a quarter hitherto undisturbed by man, obliged
me to confine my observations to the ground over which my path lay,
and there I could find no one geological feature distinct from what I
had already met with. A brown ferruginous sandstone regularly
stratified, with an inclination to the south-west, was the only rock visi-
ble on the surface; whether the sandstone appears on the summit of
the mountain, or is succeeded by some other rock, I was unable to
ascertain ; but so anxious am J to satisfy myself on this point, and to view
the Fairy Land above, that I shall take an early opportunity of renew-
ing my visit to Jeeka. Ata little distance beyond the mountain, and
at the foot of a small range bounded by the sea, stratification of the
sandstone is beautifully distinct. The several layers rise from under
each other for a considerable extent ; exhibiting a similarity of appear-
ance with the sandstone that covers the lignite coal of Phooringooé, an
island to the east of Combermere Bay.

* Among these, are the elephant, the tiger, and the bison; I have in my pos-
session a horn of the last mentioned animal, which measures 14 feet in circum-

ference. I only wait for an opportunity to present it to the Society.
M 2

84 ‘Geological and Statistical Account of the [Frs.

Turning to the eastward over a few small hills intersected by ravines
and covered wirh jungle, the road leads to Rambreengheh*, Kyout-nemo
and Singhunnethe. I observed some very beautiful creepers as I passed
over these hills. The leaves, which were very small and delicate, were
of a pink colour, and at a distance had the appearance of clusters of
lilac blossoms. Of the animal tribe I saw nothing deserving of notice,
save a solitary GAi and a flying squirrel; (termed Tshen by the Mughs.)
It is a very handsome creature, and larger than the squirrel of Europe.
The head, back, and tail are covered with arich coat of dark-brown
fur; the under part of the chin, neck, belly and legs being of a bright
yellow colour. The skin about the sides and forelegs is loose, and
capable of being so much extended, that in making its prodigious
spring from tree to tree it appears rather to fly than leap. It is said
to be very destructive to gardens; if taken young it may be rendered
perfectly tame.

Entering upon the plain, the village of Rambreengheh, with its sur-
rounding hills covered with gardens of plantain trees, meets the tra-
veller’s view. A few well built Kioums are seen resting upon the side
of these hills, which are, in some instances, crowned with glittering
temples built over the ashes of the departed priests. The village
is large and remarkably neat. The soil in its vicinity, a rich yellow
clay, taken up with plots of indigo, tobacco, and pepper plants. Bricks
manufactured from this clay, and reserved for the erection of temples,
were piled up in several places outside the village. Beyond Rambreen-
gheh, and to the right of my path, lay the large village of Kyouk-nemot,
almost concealed from view by the forest of plantain trees with which
it is surrounded. Kyouk-nemo is accessible to the sea by a large creek,
and was at one time much infested with dacoits; through the exertions
of the magistrate at Rambree the reign of terror is now at an end, and
the village is apparently in a thriving condition. Approaching the
creek, which is at some little distance from Kyouk-nemo, I was fortu-
nate in finding two Godoohs with their small boats at anchor ; otherwise
as there is no ferry at this place, I must have gone round much out of
my way ; the merchants kindly consented to take me and my followers
over for a small consideration, and the mahouts prepared to swim
their elephants across. The shore on the opposite side consisted of a
deep clay, which made the progress of the elephants after landing a
matter of considerable difficulty. So heavy was the soil, that I was
unable to make my way through it unassisted by the boatmen, who in

* Little Rambree: it resembles not a little the town of Rambree, and thence its
name.
+ Red stones. - I saw none of them in my path.

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 85

their turn depended for support upon the young mangroves and other
marine plants that grew upon it. After some little exertion both
elephants and men succeeded in reaching the Terra Firma of a stubble
field. I here met the Soogree of the district, who had in some way
been apprized of my arrival, and came out for the purpose of conduct-
ing me to the village of Singhunnethe. It was at no great distance
from the creek, so that I was soon there, and in possession of the
house that had been allotted for my accommodation. Singhunnethe, as
was the case with all the villages that I had seen on the southern side
of the island, is surrounded with plantain trees, which not only afford
a wholesome and favourite article of food, but are in constant request
for the production of a solution of potash* used in the preparation of
dyes, more especially in those derived from indigo. The mode in
which the potash is obtained from the plantain trees is similar to that
followed in other parts of the world in its extraction from the differ-
ent vegetable substances that produce it, with this exception, that it
is held in solution by the water, which is not suffered to evaporate.
The stem and branches of the plantain tree are divested of the outer
rind, and then broken up into small pieces, which are laid upon the fire
and slowly consumed; the ashes are lixiviated with water which is
strained off, and reserved for mixture with the dyes. In front of the
Soogree’s house, and in the centre of the village, a nice tank had been
dug; the only one I had hitherto met with, tanks being seldom seen
except in the neighbourhood of large towns. The houses were neat
and built with more attention to comfort and order than is general in
the villages of Rambree. I remarked a hideous representation of the
human countenance drawn with lime upon several of the door-posts.
I was told, it is put up to deter the demon of sickness from entering
the dwelling. Much sickness had been experienced of late, and this
was one of the many absurd customs resorted to, with the view of
ridding the neighbourhood of its presence. I further learned that
when any one of a family has been a long time sick, and recovery ap-
pears doubtful, the inmates of the house assemble and make a tremen-
dous noise with drums and gongs, at the same time beating the roof
and walls with sticks to expel the evil spirit who is supposed to have
taken possession of the dwelling. One door alone is left open for
his escape, all the others being closed. While this is going on a Phoon-

* During the time that Government held the monopoly of salt in Arracan, the
plantain trees frequently afforded to the poor a substitute for the common sea
salt. So strictly were the Government rights protected, that a poor woman was
actually prosecuted in one of the courts for collecting a little sea salt off a rock
on which it had been deposited on the evaporation of the water left by the tide!

86 Geological and Statistical Account of the [Fes.

gree stands upon the road, opposite to the house, reading a portion of
the Khubbo-wah, a book that is held in particular veneration. A fur-
ther ceremony is sometimes observed by the invalid as an additional
Security for a complete restoration to health ; but it is only performed
by those who feel themselves, as it is termed, possessed, and called to
the exercise of the duty required of them, as a propitiatory sacrifice
to the malignant spirit from whose ill will their sickness is supposed
to originate. This ceremony, which is called Ndth-Kadéy, very much
reminds me of the antics played by the dancing Dervises of old. A
brass dish, or any piece of metal highly burnished, is put up ina frame,
and in front of this are laid offerings of fruit. flowers, and sweetmeats.
When every thing has been properly arranged, the invalid commences
dancing, throwing the body into the most ludicrous attitudes; and
pretending to see the object of worship reflected upon the plate of
metal makes still greater exertions, until the limbs are overpowered,
and the dancer sinks exhausted upon the ground. Should the sick
person be so weak as to render such assistance necessary, he, (or she,)
is supported by a friend placed on each side during the whole of the
ceremony. It is by no means improbable that this violent exertion has
on many occasions proved highly beneficial, realizing the most sanguine
expectations of the people. In cases of ague or rheumatism, where a
profuse perspiration, and a more general circulation of the blood
throughout the human frame is required, there is perhaps no other
mode of treatment more likely to produce the desired effect ; and could
some proper substitute be found for a piece of metal, the Ndth-Kadéy
might be introduced with advantage into our own hospitals.
Superstition, the companion of ignorance, is a part and parcel of
this benighted land. . Was I to credit all that is said of ghosts and
goblins, it would appear wonderful how this poor people contrived to
pass through life unscathed. Every tree or rock that has any singu-
larity of appearance is said to be the nightly residence of some hob-
goblin or departed spirit. Yet with all this absurdity, some of the
opinions held by the Mughs with regard to a future state of existence
are by no means unfavourable to the cultivation of virtuous habits.
It is their belief that there are many worlds, and that the earth has
been subject to the several and repeated actions of fire and water. (A
fact that will not perhaps be disputed by some of the most celebrated
geologists of the present day.) The soul, they affirm, may pass through
many stages of existence, either in this or another world ; the nature of
each change depending upon its moral condition. For instance, a person
of virtuous habits may aspire to a state of being far more elevated
than that before enjoyed: if on the contrary, he shall have been of a

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 87

vicious disposition, his future state will be that of an evil spirit, or
some grovelling and pernicious animal, such as a hog, toad, serpent,
&e. A gentleman residing at Rambree has made me acquainted with
a singular instance of the firm belief entertained by the Mughs in the
transmigration of souls. A young woman who lives at Ramoéree, in
very good circumstances, declares that she is the mother of a man
much older than herself ; this she accounts for by saying, that he was
born to her during a former life. She has a scar under the left ear
produced, as she affirms, by a cut from her husband’s dhao. She further
states that she died of grief, in consequence of the partiality shewn by
that cruel husband for his elder wife. This story is not only credited
by the neighbours, but its truth is assented to by the individual whom
she calls her son. The idea was probably produced, in the first in-
stance, by the circumstance of her having been born with that curious
mark under the ear, and afterwards confirmed by a dream or some
other cause favouring the publicity of a tale that owes its popularity
to a belief in the transmigration of souls.

January 16th.—As the morning was very cold, I did not leave
Singhunnethe before the sun had well risen, and the fog that hovered
round the mountains had been somewhat dispelled. The route at
first lay over patches of rice-stubble, and then took a direction across
several small ranges of hills, the most elevated of which was covered
with a red iron clay similar to that on the “ red jill” near the town of
Rambree. From the summit of this hill, I enjoyed a fine prospect of
the channel that divides the eastern side of the island from the district of
Sandoway. The hills of Lamoo and Kalynedong rose on the opposite
shore, and the distant mountains of Yoomadong were faintly visible
amidst the clouds that surrounded them. Descending this range I
approached the village of Saain-kyong, celebrated for its lime. The
limestone is found at the foot of a high hill to the left of the road.
This was the first limestone that I had seen on Rambree Island; and
it is so concealed by the jungle, that had I not been previously made
aware of its existence and inquired for its site, I should have proceed-
ed on my journey unconscious that such a rock was in my neighbour-
hood. From its appearance and more particularly from the rocks with
which it is associated, 1 am inclined to class it with the “‘ upper fresh-
water limestone’ found in tertiary formations ; it is of a greyish white-
colour; of a fine compact texture, but very brittle. It occurs in
several detached masses of a globular or columnar form, and although
I made every possible search along the ravines in its neighbourhood,
I could discover nothing that would indicate the slightest approach toa
stratification; nor has this species of limestone been discovered in

88 Geological and Statistical Account of the [Fes.

any other part of the island. There were no appearance of the fossil
remains sometimes found in this rock, such as fresh-water shells, &c.
The limestone is split into several large fragments by means of fire ;
these are again broken into smaller pieces, and the whole conveyed in
baskets to the lime-kilns constructed on the banks of the Saayre-kyong
creek, which at full tide has sufficient depth of water to admit of the
approach of large boats. The whole of the lime used in Rambree
Island, either for architectural purposes, or for the preparation of the
edible chunam, is obtained from this rock. I was told that the lime, if
taken in large quantities, was sold on the spot for 35 maunds per rupee,
and that there were generally from 100 to 200 maunds collected.
Crossing the creek at low water, I observed afew boulders of lias clay
and cale spar imbedded in its banks. Proceeding from thence by a
neat Kioum and grove of mangoe trees, I arrived at Seppo-towng, a
village situated at the foot of a high hill covered with forest trees, and
diversified with afew spots of ground cleared for the cultivation of
the plantain tree. The tall Girjuns, with their white trunks divested
of branches, were eminently conspicuous amidst their more graceful but
probably less serviceable neighbours. The Girjun yields the oil that
bears its name, and is used for combustion as well as for admixture
with paints, varnishes, &c. (See Jour. As. Soc. II. 93.)

These trees are very abundant upon the island, and are farmed by
Government. The mode of extracting the oil would appear to be as
follows: a deep notch is cut in the trunk of the tree by means of a
dhao or other instrument, and to this fire is applied until the wood
becomes heated, and oil is seen to exude upon the surface. In the
course of three or four days perhaps as much as a seer or a seer and a
half of oil is collected within the cavity, and the tree will continue to
afford a certain quantity of oil for five months or more, the collections
being generally made every fifth day. When the oil has ceased to
flow the tree is again cut in the same place, so that the whole of the
wood which had been consumed or scorched is removed; fire is once
more applied, and the oil collected as before. The notch has after re-
peated cuttings become so deep as would render any further attack
upon the trunk, in this particular spot, destructive to the tree; in
which case the dhao is laid upon another part of the trunk, and the
same process observed as before mentioned. The tree is said to yield
oil at all seasons of the year, precautions being taken during the rains
to exclude the water. A large Girjun tree has been known to pro-
duce oil for 12 successive years, and as others are constantly supply-
ing the place of those destroyed, there is no falling off in the amount
of the several years’ collections. The oil is sold in Rambdree at the

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 89

rate of two or three maunds per rupee, andthe greater part of it bought
for exportation.

Outside the village and facing the road was the large and comfort-
able dwelling of the Soogree of Seppo-towng.

He was an elder man, of respectable appearance, and bore a good
character in his district; inviting me to pass the night under his roof,
he set about making arrangements for my reception, and appeared
desirous of contributing as much as possible to my comfort. I learn-
ed from his followers who were sitting around me in an attitude of
careless and indolent attention, that the Soogree was a native of Ava,
and had come to the province when very young. He had since that
time enjoyed several situations of emolument, and was a man of much
consequence under the Burmah Government. The change of rule had
produced a change in his circumstances, and the net amount of per-
centage* he now realized during the year will not perhaps exceed 400
rupees, probably not one-tenth of what he was accustomed to receive
during the period of Burmah sovereignty in Arracan. Every thing
around me but too plainly betrayed the existence of this decline of
fortune. The stockade that surrounded his compound was gradually
giving way under the pressure of age; no new posts supplied the
places of those that had fallen in, and his shrubbery and garden forci-
bly reminded me of that which is said to have once belonged to the
“Man of Ross.” The Soogree, said one of his dependents, cannot
now afford to maintain that character for hospitality which once be-
longed to him; he cannot even provide for his most faithful followers,
rauch less give bread to the stranger ; he still continues to do so, how-
ever, as faras his means will permit, and there are none who approach
his door without receiving a welcome to his board. I respected the
feeling that induced the expression of these sentiments, and thought
more favourably of my host in consequence thereof.

At the time that Rambree Island was subject to the Burmah rule,
the Soogrees were invariably natives of the province; appointed and
removed at pleasure by the Burmah Méyowoon or other local authority.
The Rooagongs in like manner owed their nomination or dismissal te
the Soogree. There appears to have been no regular maintenance
authorized for the support of these functionaries, and consequently uo
limit to their exactions and misappropriation of the public funds. The
Soogrees were not only entrusted with the collection of the revenue,
(derived from demands made at pleasure on those able to comply with
them, and which might therefore be viewed in the light of a property

* A Soogree receives 15 per cent. on the collections, and a Rooagong four per
cent.

N

90 Geological and Statistical Account of the [Fes.

tax,) but were in some instances permitted to pass decisions in civil
suits and also in cases of petty theft and larceny: at atime when cor-
ruption was so openly allowed and practised, it may be easily supposed
that much gain was derived from this permission, and that little reli-
ance could be placed upon the justice of the decisions, or statements
made by these Soogrees respecting the gross amount of revenue der?-
ved from their several districts. One-fifth of the supposed produce
was generally retained for the services of those delegated: by authority
to convey the royal mandates to the Méyowoon, and the remainder was
devoured by that officer, the Mroosoogree, and others of the local Go-
vernment. The Soogrees and Rooagongs of districts having precisely
secured to themselves such a share of the spoil as they could safely
maintain without incurring the displeasure of the Meyowoon; the
proceeds of other sources of revenue, especially that derived from the
customs, (and which during the Burmah rule was in some: instances
considerable,) were remitted to the capital as the provision for the
Prince Royal, to whose safe and auspicious keeping the Island of Ram-
bree had been consigned.

In the evening I took a walk towards the Kioum, and on my arrival
there found the Phoongrees on the point of setting out to a small
village in the neighbourhood, with the view of performing the rites
of sepulture over a young woman and her child. The former had died
pregnant, and as is invariably the custom in such cases, the child: had
been removed from the womb, that it might be buried separately from its
mother. It is further* deemed necessary that a river or creek should
intervene between the graves of the parent and child ; a precaution that
was observed in the present instance. Desirous of witnessing a cere-
mony that was new to me, I asked leave to accompany the Phoongrees :
a permission that was readily granted. As we drew near to the house
of the deceased, the corpse of the young woman, borne upon a litter
adorned with gold and silver leaf, was brought upon the pathway, and
preceded by the Phoongrees, was taken to the ground appointed for its
home. Immediately behind the bier clothed in their white dresses and
with shaven crowns, were a group of Mey-thee-layéngt ; and next to

* It is ordered by Gautama that the womb of every woman dying pregnant
shall be opened, the child removed and buried apart from its mother; (a river
or creek intervening between the graves.) Otherwise the mother will be born
again for ten successive times, and be subject to the same misfortune.

+ The Mdy-thee-layéng ave an inferior order of nuns wearing white dresses:
and living in convents of their own. Their discipline is less severe than that
imposed upont he Bhtkdnni, and their knowledge of the doctrines of the Buddhist
faith less extensive.

1835.] Island of Rambree on the Arracan Coast, Ol

these followed the relatives of the deceased. A poor woman whom I
learned was mother to the deceased continued to utter the most bitter
lamentations the whole of the way, and did not cease from so doing
until the corpse had been borne to the spot prepared for its final recep~
tion. When the litter had been placed by the side of the grave, pieces
of cloth, with rice and plantains, were laid out as an offering to the
Phraa ; a leathern carpet was spread upon the ground, and on this the
senior Phoongree seated himself, assuming a look of deep meditation,
and partially concealing his face from public view by means of the
yattowing* that he bore in his hand. This done the Méy-thee-layéng
and relatives of the deceased kneeled upon the ground in two rows
(the former kneeling outside), and all made obeisance to the Phoongree.
Rice was put into their hands, and each individual pronounced the fol-
lowing words in an audible and suppliant tone, receiving from the
Phoongree replies to the several prayers that were put up.
(Congregation kneeling.) Ogddhzaht! Ogddhzah ! I once, twice,
and three times entreat for thy name’s sake, and for the sake of thy
holy ministers, that thou wilt forgive me those sins that I have com-
mited in this life; and I also pray that in the future migrations of my
soul I may be the first of human beings who shall meet with Hye-yee-
mud-deaht (ariya Maitriya), and finally attain to Nibbhan§ with him.

* Yattowing, a kind of fan, borne only by the Phoougrees.

+ Okdsa, Holy Being. ;

+ It is the belief of these worshippers of Gautama that the age of man was far
greater formerly than it is at present ; it is now said to be 60 years or more, it
will gradually become less, until 10 years will be the average term of existence.
This will be followed by an increase, so that 1000 years shall be the period of ex.
istence allotted to man. When this has occurred, all the images of Gautama,
and all his sacred writings will be miraculously collected and consumed at the
Bhédeebéng tree. (The branches of this tree are said to be of gold, and the leaves
to resemble emeralds. It is celebrated as the place where Gautama first became
a Phraa, or religious teacher. To ascertain the site of this tree, as well as the
locality of kingdoms and cities known at present by other names, was not one of
the least important objects of the Burmah mission sent into Hindustan some
years ago under charge of the méyowoon Thoowé-déng-sa-ga-soo.)

The destruction of the images and writings of Gautama will be succeeded by
the nativity of the Phraa Eye-yee-mud-deah ; and all good men thenresiding upon
earth will become his disciples. Occurrences similar to those above described as
consequent to the Nighban of Gautama will mark the departure of Eye-yee-mud-
deah from the world. Rémah Phraa will then appear, and he will declare his
successor.

§ Nibbhan, annihilation, properly. Ifa man, or woman, is eminently virtu-
ous in this life, he or she, may hope to attain to a Nibbhan, i. e. not to be born
again, but to become as air, smoke, &c. without sense, su®stance, or shape.

N 2

92 Geological and Statistical Account of the [Frs.

(Phoongree.) You have once, twice and three times entreated of
me in prayer, and you may hope that your sins will be forgiven to
you; and that you will hereafter meet with Hye-yee-mud-deah, and
attain to a Nibbhan.

C. Ogadhzah! Ogadhzah! once, twice, and three times I vow that
T will not commit those five mortal sins which are spoken of in the
holy writings, and which I am forbidden to commit.

P. You have declared that you will not this day commit those sins.
Is that which you have said true ?

C. I will do according to that which I have said.

P. Do you believe in the Phraa Gautama? do you believe in his
holy writings, and do you acknowledge his ministers ?

C. All these do I believe and acknowledge.

P. If you do believe in these*, take not the life of any living being
this day; neither steal; neither commit adultery; neither bear false
witness ; and do not make use of intoxicating liquors.

C. All these sins will I carefully avoid.

Gshén Phraat ! Accept of these offerings, I pray thee, and pardon
the sins that I have committed in this life; pardon also the sins of the
deceased for whom these offerings are also presented; and grant that
during this life, or m the future migrations of my soul I may not suffer
harm from the five enemies} of mankind, If I shall be born again as
man, let me, I pray thee, be placed in a condition far superior to that
enjoyed by my fellow creatures ; if as a spirit, let me be as Suh-gyah
(Sagya or Indra), in the world of , spirits.

Accept of these offerings, I pray thee; they are made not for my
good alone, but for the future benefit of my parents and relatives, as
well asfor my spiritual teachers and the rulers of the land. They are
made also for those who suffer torment in Ngah-yeh§ ; for the spirit
in the world above and for all living beings. I call Muth-soon-dyéh|
to witness that these offerings are made not for my individual good
alone, but for the benefit of all that have the breath of life.

(Water is here poured upon the ground through one of the pieces
of cloth that had been presented to the Phraa. The water percolates
through the earth, and is supposed to reach the abode of Muth-soon-

* These are the five mortal sins.

+ Lord! Master! &c.

+ The five enemies of mankind are, 1, Fire; 2, Water; 3, The Rulers of the
Land; 4, Robbers ; 5, Wild Beasts.

§ Hell, (q. Purgatory ?)

|| Muth-soon-dyéh (Vasundaré) is the ‘‘ Recording Angel’’ who resides in the
earth; hears, and marks down every thing that is said,

out: as. 50¢. Vt (KPO Ke
Burmese Toke the ep pegen translated in page 94

a eat
660790209006 (9907999! 09990510 895! 69905120968) 99995
10)
Sooo &SOj0720050)6 0@Og2»0 gerqodus000300100 (69 >)
&)
5) Gpf2q6 |E3fe Erode sada} qp QOD OV): 09 C.D 91 092901900
S °°
svo0 1909202490909" 2G aarsooara gefga-ocor 9:66) or
6029.94909.99 (af; 399 &Y Ei m9 VAaa0.d)w0r559 gr. QP 99'S)
O a) Dig 208 An ; O ce)
NGAI 102 ard(GS 9929900(0 4) weyt'aa7.09997 6999 99 G0) O
a 0.00.0 Qik yO
@ego agp 9289 CeorSiqeaos 99"036 07 (Pe warp pa,
I Se ee BS ER \ fe) \ \
GO}QGa QOD GVOIEP!$.9I} CDG G099 Gor opogorody ©
Gass econqmpsaz(Goqo)arGt u 19/02. Va'QCepa,s(@rqcaxm
OQ 9) AO 6) Q
Gjarr(od ro Sooo: di rdoygriqayp5iqdSicjoq a6) OR gunk:
8do095000% SFuspodtoo oorfoanmguscve gray (Seppe
. 0.On 0 co Oo) AOe C
aDyFoorye0209951 OREO? (moo PQING:GOZ1q Goa gr
MGSO Gos aogyodods HS coinnrgJq(a(O onjcorn rm
G@mar009 6 By2a2290 22050243, 05 99965 andIU20gWA5OGU26)
co ne aneamna 190905 6990599 903099093
)
murogoiedog.or97 6 a4 se eee u nO
Ree argu onooneyo oinngmedag ono njgoieney
ajseg00e00IC 34 1 ©020999ITIAIGEOI9GUIE P9999 4) 9.900
oA) Qg AS
$20 63099610609 09996195 w09 090. 0260999 O00 N05
ee gs 1M OF 4 ?
° 0) @) O { Q
ogy a3 wonanrgsy 4 Saar dlaore oqo 98 308)72 0090}

R. Faula Serye* JB. Tassin Ghh

ome ©2Q690 Sepsogeors gond)deoqeasu AVEP.FO YI BO
@ (9) ; QO, e
2S. eeptll 22098 Sip gost 290 DING eT ky
S9PIQIYMOW V VITOR YU NES a9 Edpqnause 2
p3,0020005% 9999940 92 9.49 6092195000 09950200990 Ga0t: ya
0 ° . 9 Q
63) 0291809049920 109 a5 635) @E:92 [3:01.03999.03 070
, a ° A_9O
2262 699N999aN QANs Ona usage sary Ey, OO GO cryu J)
EX k) a a oC) :
90202007072 1GIO MOG GEG) A) Gi u Jie gy ngex»qQ01 ©
: : : °
Savery t'3,5'039999 Oman 69 25120008 n0Gun © 23:6(o26?
: 0 00 ig eet Rao aici °
recoesmapeerargcay* (ag 19S8g3 19 OMe eD Qo
Q
25oR 0216 camdien.gegidaj def 93 Snags 5o8 Sims
Ne Elisa Catia: Saeseinese M0090 90):Q.9)
9960): jn: 26)d): sopguend: PERS EPS NARI OR
pody Saf ofa Soo QoSafqags)d 122GS. TIC NEI UOOI-TIOY
P50: oango% (qe o0eank: gence @: apSaategoo95a09
6ii(a90 099: 19 OP anOFeqe 969 agi % @)G0:600903 G1"5200

c

0) i 2 O OS @

MRM ANG I. AMO 1H }S 9 (OS) Go199 02020 E: 99 (ERE? ©

Oo ray C C fo ce O 9

Bit 2 © SOG. OP Op ner yGSO BOR REIN a0 FiENa aa Oat mma

Oo A 2
dnsNRoXZoin yev.cow oj Hn00hoQ gheGgo5ax0: ofa0g5
: eit & a CO : c aa Od lox
52 qjo0:60 0)a9 ey 1009 63 GY) OG f 02002-0990 39.9919 5, OR pam
Oo = a

ie mace p45 0% 2925"@d] qs002¢0n
K GE Ce y2€e9% err G9n99 M0205 cqow9(ybeoe209» oa te

# gj q00e9 (00620919 g) 97.44) 119996 322@ 1 We 89m W- ae Oo"

1835.) Fsland of Rambree on the Arracan Coast. 98

dyéh, who has been invoked to bear witness to the sincerity of the
above declaration.)

- This done, all arose from the ground; the corpse was taken out of
the litter and deposited in the grave. I observed that pawn and
spices had been placed in the mouth of the deceased, for the purpose
as I was informed of rendering the odour of the body, consequent to
decomposition, less offensive to the bystanders. At the sight of the
corpse, the poor woman commenced her lamentations afresh, and as
my curiosity was satisfied, I returned to the Soogree’s habitation,
leaving the Phoongrees to perform over the grave of the child (on the
opposite bank), a service in every respect similar to that I have just
described.

January 17th.—The Mughs can form no other idea of the distance in-
tervening between one place and another beyond what is derived from
the time taken in going over it. In acountry like this, abounding
with impediments of every description, any other species of measure-
ment was out of the question, so substituting my elephant for a Per-
ambulator, and making every allowance for the several obstructions met
with, I conceive the distance between Oogah and Singhunnethe to be
as much as 16 miles; from that to Seppo-towng 12 miles; and as many
more from thence to Rambree.

Bidding adieu to the good old Soogree, I set out at day-break on my
journey to the capital of the island. The Saaynekyong creek, after
winding through the vale to the right, suddenly takes a turn into the
interior, crossing theroad within a very short distance of Seppo-towng. As
the tide was at the flood the elephants were unloaded and swam across ;
a boat having been placed at the disposal of myself and followers. Pro-
ceeding onwards the route was but a repetition of what had been met
with on the preceding day. Patches of paddy ground, succeeded by
long mountainous ranges with the same abrupt ascent and inclination,
were the never failing features of the country passed over between
Singhunnethe and Rambree. The soil on the hills was generally a red
clay, containing nodules of chert, and felspar combined with talc.
Had I possessed even a common acquaintance with botany, I might
have derived much pleasure in the examination of the various vegetable
tribes that surrounded me. Unfortunately I was a stranger to the grea-
ter number, recognizing only those of most frequent occurrence, such as
the Girjun, Tilsah, Jharral, wild Peepul, and a host of Mimosas. There
were also some very pretty creepers, and a vine which corresponds in
description with that given me of the black pepper-plant*. After the

* The black pepper-plant is found on the hills in the Sandoway district.

94° Geological and Statistical Account of Rambree. [Frs.

first two or three ranges had been overcome, we approached the vil-
lage of Leppang, the site of an old stockade, and scene of an encoun-
ter between the Burmah chief Némyo-sooyah*, and the Ramoo Rajah
Keembrang, in which the latter was shamefully defeated. From thence
it is but a short distance te Tseembeeyah and Kéhsree, the latter pret-
tily situated on the plain, and surrounded with clumps of trees.
Among the inhabitants of Kéhsree are a class of people engaged in
the oil manufacture, and who shall receive further notice hereafter.
The oil is prepared chiefly from the Thél, and the mills are in every
respect similar to those used in Bengal. Beyond Kéhsree is Koyan-
downgt with the two guardian temples on its summit: and to the
right of that, the ‘“‘ Red Hilt” of Rambree; almost destitute of ver-
dure, and answering in appearance to that predicated by its name.
Tiger traps of a novel construction were very numerous in the ghats
leading to the town. Rambree has on several occasions been much
infested with tigers; they have been known to come into the town
shortly after dark, and entering the houses, carry off the inhabitants.
Cattle and poultry are even now continually taken away, and it is con-
sidered very dangerous to sleep outside upon the michaun. To faci-
litate the description of one of these traps, I have endeavoured to re-
present by a drawing the several parts of which it is constructed.

A, is a long§ pole possessing great strength and elasticity, which is
bent and held down by B, a peg connected with C, a good thick cane
rope. The peg B, is fixed with great care between the bars D, and E,;
the bar D, having been previously fastened to the two posts F, F, which
are driven into the ground. That part of the platform marked G, is
brought into contact with the bar E, and the peg B. H, is a
noose laid upon the platform, and I, a heavy wooden cylinder so
nicely attached to the cane rope that the least jirk causes it to fall.
The platform is laid upon the path frequented by the tiger, (generally
a gap in a fence, or a ravine,) and carefully concealed with grass and
leaves. The animal treads upon it and it gives way, disturbing the bar
H, and peg B, on which the pole springs up to its natural position,
bringing the wooden cylinder with such violence upon the arm of
the tiger, (already caught in the noose,) that it is generally broken by
the concussion. This cylinder covers that part of the leg that has
been entangled in the noose, and is of great use in preventing the

* Afterwards Meyo-woon at Rambree.

t+ Called ‘‘ St. George’s Hill’ by the troops quartered at Rambree during the
war. The temples were built by the Burmah Meyowoon Yeh-jutta-gong.

+ Already noticed in vol. 2nd (1833), Journal Asiatic Society.
§ A large branch of a tree sometimes serves as well.

Vol IV PLsie

Sous, us. $06,

Mode of catching Tigers.

93° 40' Long: Last from Greenwich

CHEDUBA ISLAND j aw war say

_ ADamsI? QO

OA Taarcn Cit.

Hie aa Amt iis

Gata. ne veoh waipnae
davriekinget

; mr v8 ea
P plcy 7 ee
LMT A pase” Fe eign ie Sa ad est *
“tyes
‘* 7 . 7 ee n _ ‘ :
ogee y ters) <Doeed Veta Staten acct! 9 Ra aor “e ’
F ~ Lar

AES TEM be

pied

yy epee te Rae St oS OSPR DEE. 5,
.

bare oaered Rell ea re Rey: Serna Si is a
rPNi ree aon er 2 det

1 a BR Seifert” Fee Laren

aa “path sft Hi Santa iecanalae

1835.] Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hilis. 95

animal from gnawing the rope. The beast hangs suspended in the air
at the mercy of the villagers, who dispatch him by means of clubs or
bamboos hardened in the fire, and pointed at the end so as to resem-
ble pikes.

Arrived at the highest point of the ascent over Koyandowng, the
large and pretty town of Rambree, surrounded with hills and divided
by a creek that is seen in the distance meandering towards the sea,
appears spread out to view in the vale below.

(To be continued.)

———

IlI].—Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills which produce the
description of Tea known in Commerce under the designation of Ankoy
Tea. By G. J. Gorvon, Esq.

[Communicated by Dr. N. WALLICcH, Sec. Com. Tea Culture.]

Having been disappointed in my expectations of being enabled to
visit the Bohea hills, I was particularly anxious to have an oppor-
tunity of personally mspecting the tea plantations in the black-tea
district of the next greatest celebrity, in order to satisfy myself
regarding several points relative to the cultivation on which the
information afforded by different individuals was imperfect or discor-
dant.

Mr. Gurzuarr accordingly took considerable pains to ascertain, for
me, from the persons who visited the ship, the most eligible place for
landing with the view of visiting the Ankoy hills; and Hwuy Taou bay
was at length fixed upon as the most safe and convenient, both
from its being out of the way of observation of any high Chinese
functionaries who might be desirous of thwarting our project, and
from its being equally near the tea-hills, as any other part of the
coast, at which we could land. As laid down in the map of the
Jesuits, there is a small river which falls into the head of this bay, by
which we were told we should be able to proceed a good part of our
way into the interior. We should of course have preferred proceed~
ing by the Ankoy river, which is represented in the same map as
having its source to the west of Ngau-ki-hyen and falling into the
river which washes Sneu-chee-foia, were it not for the apprehension
of being impeded or altogether intercepted by the public functionaries:
of that city. In order to make ourselves as independent as possible of
assistance from the people, we resolved to dispense with every article
of equipment which was not necessary for health and safety. The
weather had for some days been comparatively cold, the thermometer
falling to 55° at sunrise and not getting higher than 66° during the

96 Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. (Fes.

day, so that warm clothing not only became agreeable, but could not
be dispensed with during the nights; arms for our defence against
violence from any quarter, formed likewise a part of our equipments,
and, trusting to money, and Mr. Gurzuarr’s intimate knowledge of
the language and of the people for the rest, we left the ship on the
morning of Monday, 10th November, proceeding in the ship’s long
boat towards the head of the bay, where the town of Hwuy Taou is
situated. ;

The party in the boat consisted of Mr. Gurzuarr, Mr. Ryper,
(second officer of the ‘‘ Colonel Young,’’) Mr. Nicuousow, late quarter-
master of the “‘ Water Witch,” whom I had engaged for the projected
Woo-re journey, and myself, one native servant and eight lascars.
The wind being unfavourable, we made rather slow progress by row-
ing, but taking for our guidance the masts of some of the junks
which we observed lying behind a point of land, we pulled to get
under it, in order to avoid the strength of the ebb tide, which was
now setting against us. In attempting to round the point, however,
we grounded, and soon found that it was impossible to get into the
river on that side, on account of sand-banks which were merely
covered at high water, and that it was necessary to make a consider-
able circuit seaward to be able to enter. This we accomplished, but
not till 1 a. m. At this time a light breeze fortunately springing up,
we'got on very well for some time, but were again obliged to anchor,
at i past 2, from want of water. As the tide rose we gradually
advanced towards the town of Hwuy Taou, till we came to one of
those bridges, of which there are several along the coast, that extend
over wide sand-flats that are formed at the mouths of the rivers. These
bridges are constructed of stone piers with slabs of stone laid from
pier to pier, some extending over a space of 25 feet and upwards, and
others being from 15 to 20 feet space. As the length of this bridge
cannot be less than three quarters of a mile, the whole is very striking
as a work of great labour, if not exhibiting either much skill or beauty.
We were informed by some boat people that we should not find water
to carry us beyond the bridge, but observing some tall masts on the
other side, we resolved on making the experiment and pushing on as
far as we could. It was almost dark when we passed under the
bridge, and we had not proceeded far when we were again aground,
This, however, we attributed to our unacquaintance with the channel,
and as the tide floated us off, we continued advancing, notwithstand-
ing the warning of a friendly voice from the bridge that entreated us
to return to the town, promising us comfortable quarters, and a
guide, &c. Being rather distrustful of the motives for this advice,

1835.] Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. 97

however, we proceeded for some time longer, but at length found it
impossible to proceed farther, the ebb having at the same time com-
menced. We therefore spread an awning, and prepared to make our-
selves as comfortable as possible for the night. The day had
been the warmest we had experienced for a month past, but the
night was very cold, and our boats, as may be imagined, far from
commodious for so many people. At day-light we found that there
was not six inches of water in any part of the channel, and from the
boat we stepped at once upon dry sand. The survey from the bank
showed us plainly that it would be impossible to proceed any farther
by water. We accordingly prepared to march on foot, taking with us
three lascars who might relieve each other in carrying our cloak-bag
of blankets and great coats, as well as some cold meat. We ordered
the people to prepare a meal as fast as possible, intending to make
along stretch at first starting, and Mr. Nicuouson was directed to
remain in charge of the boat with five lascars, to move her down under
the bridge on the return of the flood, and there to wait our return for
four or five days. Crowds of people now began to crowd round the
boat, moved by mere curiosity. Mr. Gutziarr induced some of them to
get ducks and fowls for the use of the boat’s crew, and strange to say
prevailed on one man to become our guide, and on two others to
undertake to carry our baggage, as soon as we should be a little far-
ther off from the town and out of the way of observation.

After a little, an old gentleman made his appearance on a chair who
proved to be the head man of the town: he inquired whence we came
and whither we were going, which we freely told him. With these
answers he seemed perfectly satisfied, probably from finding them
correspond with what he had been already told by some of the people
with whom we had communicated on the subject in seeking informa-
tion and assistance. He measured our boat with his arms, but offered
us no obstruction nor even remonstrance. We observed him, however,
after he had interrogated us, sending off two or three messengers in
different directions, which made us the more anxious to be off. It
was however past 9 o’clock before Mr. Ryprer had completed his
arrangements for the boat’s crew, and the sun was already powerful.
We were soon joined by our guide and the coolies, and our cavalcade
winding along the foot paths, which are the only roads to be met
with, made an imposing appearance. Mr. Gurzuarr and the guide
led the way, followed by a lascar with a boarding pike; next came the
baggage, attended by a lascar similarly armed. I followed with pistols,
and attended by a lascar armed with a cutlass, and Mr. Ryper carrying
@ fowling piece and pistols brought up the rear, Skirting the town of

o

98 Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. [Frs.

Hwuy Taou, we proceeded in a N. N. E. direction at a moderate pace
for an hour and a half, when we stopped ata temple, and refreshed
ourselves with tea. Nothing could be more kind or more civil than
the manners of the poeple towards us hitherto, and if we could have
procured conveyance here so as to have escaped walking in the heat
of the day loaded as we were with heavy woollen clothes, we should
have had nothing farther to desire ; as it was, my feet began already
to feel uncomfortable from swelling, and after another hour’s marching,
I was obliged to propose a halt till the cool of the evening. Fortu-
nately we found, however, that chairs were procurable at the place, and
we accordingly engaged them at half dollar each. These were formed in
the slightest manner, and carried on bambu poles, having a cross bar at
the extremities, which rested on the back of the bearer’s neck, apparent-
ly a most insecure as well as inconvenient position ; but, as the poles
were at the same time grasped by the hands, the danger ofa false step
was lessened. We had not advanced above a mile and a half before the
bearers declared they must eat, and to enable them to do so, they
must get more money. With this impudent demand we thought it
best to comply, giving them an additional real each. After an hour’s
further progress we were set down at a town near the foot of the
first pass which we had to cross. There the bearers clamourously
insisted on an additional payment before they would carry us any
further. This we resisted, and by Mr. Gurzuarr’s eloquence gained
the whole of the villagers who crowded round us, to join in exclaim.
ing against the attempted extortion. Seeing this the rogues sub-
mitted and again took us up. Mr. G. mentioned that while we were
passing through another village, the people of which begged the
bearers to set us down that they might have a look at us, they
demanded 100 cash as the condition of compliance. The country
through which we passed swarmed with inhabitants, and exhibited
the highest degree of cultivation, though it was only in a few spots
that we saw any soil which would be deemed in Bengal tolerably
good; rice, the sweet potatoes, and sugar-cane were the principal articles
of culture. We had now to ascend a barren and rugged mountain,
which seemed destined by nature to set the hand of man at defiance ;
yet, even here there was not a spot where a vegetable would take
root, that was not occupied by at least a dwarf pine, planted for the
purpose of yielding fire-wood, and a kind of turpentine; and wherever
a nook presented an opportunity of gaining a few square yards of level
ground by terracing, no labour seems to have been spared to redeem
such spots for the purpose of rice cultivation. In ascending the pass
we soon came to places where it was difficult for our bearers to find a

1835.] Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hilis. 99

footing, and where they had consequently to pick out their steps as they
advanced. To assist themselves they gave the chair a swinging motion
with which they kept time in raising their feet.

This was far from agreeable, and the first impression felt was that
it was done merely to annoy, but we very soon saw that the object
was different. The highest point of the pass I should conjecture to be
about 1200 feet above the plain, and the descent cn the north side
to be nearly equal to the ascent from the south, say 1000 feet. At half-
past four we arrived at a rather romantic valley, which was to be our
halting place for the day. We proposed to the bearers to carry us on
another stage next day, but for this they had the impudence to ask
five dls. per chair, This of course we would not listen to for a mo-
ment, and were afterwards happy that we got rid of such rascals, as
good bearers and on moderate terms were procurable at the place.
The name of this village is Lung-tze-kio. It seems once to have
been a place of greater importance than now, exhibiting marks of
dilapidation and decay. Even the foot-path over the pass must
have been at one time an object of attention, as we found in
several places the remains of a sort of pavement, and of bridges
which were now nearly destroyed. The inn at which we stop-
ped afforded as few and mean accommodations as could well be
imagined, but we were able to get some fowls deliciously grilled, on
which, with the aid of sweet potatoes, and of the salt beef which we
brought with us, we made a most hearty repast. Among the people
who came to see us at the inn wasa very respectable looking young
man, a student, who won Mr. Gutzuarr’s heart by asking him for
instruction in religion. Unfortunately the whole contents of a box of
religious tracts, and other books had been distributed in the morning,
and Mr. G. was unable to supply him with any. The request was no
doubt prompted by the report of the people who had accompanied
us, and who had themselves partaken of Mr. G.’s liberality before
they volunteered. This young man strongly recommended to us to
alter our course, magnifying the distance of Twa-Bo to which we were
bound to 100 Z or 30 miles, and telling us that at the distance of 40
or 12 miles to the S. W. we should find tea plantations of a very supe-
rior description. The exaggeration of the distance led me to suspect the
accuracy of the information in other respects, and I had heard enough
of contradictory evidence already, not to be swayed by it in the present
instance.

Nov. 12th.—Got into our chairs at a quarter past six a. m. and
proceeded along a narrow rugged dell toa town called Koe-Bo. Several
nice looking hamlets were seen on the way. The people were engaged

or 2

100 Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hiils. [Fzs.

in reaping the rice, which seemed heavy and well filled in the ear. In se-
veral places! observed that they had taken the pains to tie clumps of rice
stalk together for mutual support. ‘Sugar-cane is bound in the same
way, and for additional security the outside canes are mutually sup-
ported by diagonal leaves, which serve at the same time to form them
into a kind of fence. The leaves are not tied up round the stalks
as in Bengal ; the cane is slender, white, hard, and by no means
juicy or rich ; yet, bating the black fungus powder, which is very pre-
valent, their surface is healthy, and close growing in a remarkable
degree. We arrived at Koe-Bo at eight o’clock, and finding we could get
water conveyance for part of the way on which we were proceeding,
we engaged a boat for that purpose. After a hearty breakfast we em-
barked at 10 a. m. amidst crowds of people who covered the banks of
the river at the ghat. On inquiry we found that the river on which
we were proceeding ina W.N. W. course, was the same which
we passed at Gan-Ke-Luyu, and flowed to Suen-chee-foo. The boat
was large, but light, and being flat-bottomed drew very little water.
The stream was so shallow that it was only by tracing the deepest
part of the channel from side to side of its bed that we were able to
advance atall. This was done by poling; in several places the stream
was deepened by throwing up little banks of sand so as to confine its
course within a channel merely wide enough for the boats to pass
through. I estimate the width from bank to bank at 200 yards, and
should judge from the height at which sugar is cultivated above the
level of the present surface, that the greatest depth in the rainy
season does not exceed 10 feet. Being entirely fed by mountain torrents
its rise must be often very sudden, but I did not observe any traces of de-
vastation in its course. Its name, Ghan-ke or ‘‘ peaceful stream,” is pro-
bably derived from this circumstance ; the valley on each side seemed
well cultivated, the banks being principally occupied by sugar-cane.
At every village the people poured as usual to see us out, vying with
each other in marks of civility and kindness. The day, however, be-
coming very hot, we took shelter from the sun under the roof of the
boat, to the disappointment of many who waded through the water to
gratify themselves with a sight of the strangers. Coming at last toa
high bank close to a populous town, they actually offered the boatman
400 cash if he would bring us to; and on his refusal, the boys began
pelting the boat with clods and stones. On this Mr. Gurziarr went
on deck to remonstrate, and Mr. Ryper to intimidate with his gun.
Betwixt both the effect was instantaneous, and the seniors of the crowd
apologised for the rude manner in which the boys had attempted to
enforce the gratification of their curiosity. We had been in vain all

1835.) Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. 101

yesterday and to-day looking out for a glimpse of tea plantations on
some of the rugged and black looking hills close in view, though at
almost every place where we halted we were assured that such were to
be found hard by. At three Pp. M. we reached a town near the foot of
the pass by which we were to reach Taou-ee, the place of our destina-
tion. There we proposed selling our gold, which for the sake of light
ness I had brought with me in preference to silver, not doubting that I
should find little difficulty im exchanging it at its proper relative value
whenever required. In this, however, we had been disappointed at our
last abode, and we were therefore much vexed at learning from our
conductors that the inhabitants of Aou-ee were of such a character
that the less we had to do with them and the shorter our stay amongst
them the better. Some proof of this we had as we were stepping on
shore, being for the first time rudely questioned as to our destination
and object, and why we had come armed; our reply to the latter query
being, that we had armed ourselves with the resolution of resisting vio-
lence should it be offered by robbers or others, we were allowed to pass
quietly on. The hill we had now to ascend was more rugged, and in
some places more abrupt, than that over which we were first carried ;
and though we hadset out at three o’clock, the sun had set long before we
came to the end of our journey. The moon was unfortunately obscur-
ed by clouds, so that nothing could be more unpleasant than the un-
fortunate hits our toes were constantly making against stones, and the
equally unfurtunate misses where an unexpected step downwards made
us with a sudden jerk throw our weight on one leg. At length we
reached a village at the further end of the pass, the inhabitants
of which were so kind as to light us on the remainder of our way, by
burning bundles of grass, to the eminent danger of setting fire to their
rice fields now ripe for the sickle. Arrived as Taou-ee we were hos-
pitably received by the family of our guide, and soon surrounded by
wondering visitors.

Mr. Gurzuarr speedily selected one or two of the most intel-
ligent of them, and obtained from them ready answers to a variety of
questions regarding the cultivation of the plant. They informed him
that the seed now used for propagating the plant was all produced.on
the spot, though the original stock of this part of the country was
brought from Wae-eshan, that it ripened in the 10thor 11th month, and
was immediately put into the ground where it was intended to grow,
several being put together into one hole, as the greater part was always
abortive. That the sprouts appeared in the 3rd month after the seeds
were putinto the ground, that the hole into which the seeds were thrown
are from three to four inches deep, and thatasthe plants grow the earth

102 Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. [Fzs.

is gathered up a little round their root; that Jeaves are taken from the
plants when they are three years old, and that there are from most plants
four pluckings in the year. No manure is used, nor is goodness of
soil considered of consequence, neither are the plants irrigated. Each
shrub may yield about a Tael of dry tea annually (about the 12th of a
pound). A Mow of ground may contain three or four hundred plants.
The land tax is 300 cash (720. ) dolk.) per Mow. The cultivation and ga-
thering of the leaves being performed by families without the assistance
of hired labourers, no rate of wages can be specified; but as the cur-
ing of the leaf is an art that requires some skill, persons are employed
for that particular purpose, who are paid at the rate of 1 dl. per pecul
of fresh leaf, equal to five dollars per pecul of dry tea. The fire-place
used is only temporary, and all the utensils as well as fuel are furnish-
ed bythe owner of the tea. They stated that the leaves are heated
and rolled seven or eight times. The green leaf yields one-fifth of its
weight of dry tea. ‘The best tea fetches on the spot 23 dls. per pecul,
(1334 Jbs.) and the principal part of the produce is consumed within
the province, or exported in baskets to Formusa. That the prevailing
winds are north-westerly. The easterly winds are the only winds
injurious to the plants. Hoar frost is common during the winter months,
and snow falls occasionally, but does not lie long nor to a greater depth
than three or four inches. The plant is never injured by excessive cold,
and thrives from 10 to 20 years. It is sometimes destroyed by a worm
that eats up the pith and converts both stem and branches into tubes,
and by a gray lichen which principally attacks very old plants. The
period of growth is limited to six or seven years ; when the plant has at-
tained its greatest size. The spots where the tea is planted are scattered
over great part of the country, but there are no hills appropriated en-
tirely to its culture. No ground in fact is formed into a tea plantation
that is fit for any other species of cultivation, except perhaps that of
the dwarf pine already alluded to, or the Camellia Obeifora. Mr,
GutzLarr understood them to say that the plant blossoms twice a
year, in the eighth moon or September, and again in winter, but that
the latter flowering is abortive. In this I apprehend there was
some misapprehension, as seed of full size, though not ripe, were
proffered to me in considerable quantities early in September, and none
were found on the plants which we saw. I suspect that the people
meant to say that the seeds take eight months to ripen, which accords
with other accounts. We wished much to have spent the following
day (the 15th) in prosecuting our inquiries and observations at Tawand
and its neighbourhood, but this was rendered impractible by the state
of our finances. We had plenty of gold, but no one could be found who

1835. ] Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. 103

would purchase it with silver at any price. We therefore resolved on
making the most of our time by an early excursion in the morning
previous to setting out on our return.

We accordingly got up at day-break, and proceeded to visit the spot
were the plants were cultivated. We were much struck with the variety
of the appearance of the plants; some of the shrubs scarcely rose to
the height of a cubit above the ground, and those were so very
bushy that a hand could not be thrust between the branches. They
were also very thickly covered with leaves, but these were very small,
scarcely above # inch in length. In the same bed were other plants
with stems four feet in height, far less branchy and with leaves 14 to
2 inches in length. The produce of great and small was said to be
equal. The distance from centre to centre of the plants was about 44
feet, andthe plants seemed toaverage about twofeet in diameter. Though
the ground was not terraced, it was formed into beds that were partly
levelled. These were perfectly well dressed as in garden cultivation,
and each little plantation was surrounded by a low stone fence, and
atrench. There was no shade, but the places selected for the culti-
vation were generally in the bottoms of hills, where there was a good
deal of shelter on two sides, and the slope comparatively easy. I should
reckon the site of the highest plantations we visited to be about 700
feet above the plain, but those we saw at that height and even less
appeared more thriving, probably from having somewhat better soil,
though the best is little more than mere sand. I have taken speci-
mens from three or four gardens. Contrary to what we had been
told the preceding night, I found that each garden had its little nursery
where the plants were growing to the height of four or five inches, as
closely set as they could stand; from which I conceive that the
tea plant requires absolutely a free soil, not wet and not clayey, but
of a texture that will retain moisture ; and the best site is one not so
low as that at which water is apt to spring from the sides of a hill,
nor so high as to be exposed to the violence of stormy weather.
There is nouse in attempting to cultivate the plant on an easterly
exposure, though it is sufficiently hardy to bear almost any degree of
dry cold.

By half-past 10 a. m. we set out on our return, in chairs which we
were fortunate enough to procure at this village, and reached the
banks of the river at Aou-ee a little before one o’clock. In the first
part of our way we passed by some more tea plantations on very
sterile ground. One in a very bleak situation, with nothing but
coarse red sand by way of soil, seemed to be abandoned. Our recep-
tion at Aou-ee was much more civil than it had been the preceding

104 Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. (Fes.

day; the people suggested that we should remain there till a boat
could be procured. The day, however, being tolerably cool, we crossed
the river, and proceeded on foot along its banks to Kre-bo, where we
arrived about four Pp. M. On the road a man who had seen us endea-
vouring to sell our gold the day before, told us he believed he could
find us a purchaser. Mr. Gurzuarr accordingly accompanied him to
the house of a farmer, who after having agreed to give 18 dollars for
30 dollar’s- worth of gold, suddenly changed his mind, and said he
would only give weight for weight. At Koe-Bo, however, we were
more successful, procuring 18 dollars for the same 30 dollar’s worth
of gold. On the road the villages poured forth their population as we
moved along. At one place they were actually overheard by Mr.
GurzuaFF thanking our guides for having conducted us by that road,
and proposing to raise a subscription to reward them. At Kre-bo
we learned that some petty officers had been inquiring after us,
which frightened our guides, and made us desirous to hasten our return.
Having procured chairs we pushed on accordingly to Koe-ee, our first
resting place, where we arrived about seven Pp. M., and halted for the
night. Next morning, the 14th, wemounted our chairs before day-break,
but after goingalittle way the bearers let us down to wait forday-light,
and we took the opportunity of going to look at a Chinese play which
was in the course of performance hard by. There were ouly two actors
but several singers, whose music to our barbarian ears was far from
enchanting. Crossing the pass we met great numbers of people carry-
ing salt in baskets hung in bangies, as in Bengal, a few with bas-
kets full of the small muscle reared on the mud flats near the place
of our landing. After getting into the plain we took a more direct
road for Taou than that by which we had left it. The people forsook
their work on the fields, and emptied their numerous villages to gaze
at us. As the morning was cold I wore a pair of dark worsted gloves,
which I found excited a good deal of speculation. The general opinion
was, that I was a hairy animal, and that under my clothes my skin was
covered with the same sort of fur asmy hands. In China gloves are
never worn. At length one more sceptical than the rest resolved to exa-
minethe paw, and his doubt being thus further strengthened, he request-
ed me to turn up the sleeve of my coat. I did so, at the same time
pulling off a glove to the admiration of the multitude, who immediate-
ly set up a shout of laughter at those who had pronounced the stran-
gers of a race half man and half baboons. We met some officers in
chairs attended by soldiers, but they offered us no interruption, not
even communicating with us. Our bearers, however, easily prevailed
on theirs to exchange burthens, each party being thus enabled to direct

1835.] Memorandum of an Excursion to the Tea Hills. 105

their course to their respective homes. We arrived at Hwuy Taou before
noon, and immediately embarked for the ships, which we reached at
three p. Mm. We learned from Mr. Nicuouson that after our departure,
and while the boat was stillaground, a numberof Mandarinscame down,
and carried off almost every thing that was on board, but the whole
was returned after the boat was floated down below the bridge. As
we had no explanation of the matter, we concluded that this proceed-
ing might have been intended for the protection of the property
from plunder by the people of the town. We found that one of
the seed contractors had despatched a quantity of Bohea seeds,
arrived during our absence, witha letter stating expectation of
being able to send a further supply and to procure cultivators, who
would join the ship in the 11th or 12th month. On the same even-
ing Lembarked on the Fairy, and reached Lintin on Monday the 17th
November, with my tea seeds, just one week after our landing at
Hwuy Taou to explore the Hwuy tea hills. I have been more minute
in my details of this little expedition, than may at first sight appear
needful, with the view of showing the precise degree and kind of
danger and difficulty attending such attempts. Our expectation was, at
leaving the ship, that we should reach the head of the bay by nine or
10 o'clock a. m. and attain a considerable distance from Hwuy Taou
the same day, and thus have a chance of passing without attracting
the notice of any of the Wanfoo or Government officers. Had we waited
to ask their permission it would of course have been refused, and we
should have been directed in the most authoritative manner to return
to the ship. We were not a little alarmed when aground in the
morning, lest the old gentleman who measured our boat should have
deemed it his duty to intercept our progress ; but we took care to goon
with preparations for our march, as if nothing of the kind was appre-
hended. It is this sort of conduct alone that will succeed in China.
Any sign of hesitation is fatal. Had we shown any marks of alarm,
every one would have kept aloof for fear of being implicated in the
danger which we seemed to dread; on the other hand, a confident
bearing, and the testimony borne by the manner in which we were
armed, that we would not passively allow ourselves to be plundered by
authority, inspired the like confidence in all those with whom we had
to do; for the rest of the narrative shows that from the people left to
themselves we experienced nothing but marks of the utmost kindness
and good nature, except indeed, where money was to be got :—there
the Chinese, like the people of other countries, were ready enough to
take advantage of the ignorance of strangers, though with such a fluent
command of the language as Mr. Gurzuarr possessed he was able to
P

106 Observations on the Albatross. [Fss.

save us from much fleecing in that way. I need scarcely add, that no
good can result from an attempt to penetrate into the interior of China
by a party of foreigners, unless some one of them has at least a mode~
rate facility in expressing himself in conversation with the people.

= See

EV.— Observations on an Article in Loudon’s Magazine of Natural His-
tory, on the subject of the Albatross. By Lieut. Tuomas Hutton,
37th Regt. N. I.

At page 147 of the 32nd Number of Loudon’s Magazine of Na-

tural History, a contributor observes :
<¢ COLERIDGE somewhere in his wild and magical ‘Rime of the Antient Mariner,”
says of the Albatross, whom he introduces as a bird of Omen.’’

“¢ At length did cross an Albatross,
Thorough the fog it came ;

As if it had been a Christian soul,
We hail’dit in God’s name.

‘¢ Tt ate the food it ne’er had eat,
And round and round it flew ;

The ice did split with a thunder-fit,
The helmsman steer’d us through.
‘© And a good south-wind sprung up behind,
The Albatross did follow,

And every day for food or play,
Came to the mariners’ hollo.’’

*¢ Had this Albatross been a sea-gull, the above might have been fact, as well
as fancy.’’

To which another writer adds, at page 372 of the 34th Number. _

‘“ And not less so, it may be remarked, if it be presumed, that CoLERIDE ac-
tually speaks of the Albatross itself. This bird is one of the Laride, or gull
tribe ; and as our correspondent Mr. Marn has in person remarked to us, ‘ every
voyager round the Cape of Good Hope may have observed it to follow and fly
round the passing vessel from day to day.’ He added, ‘ this large bird seems to
subsist on any animal matter which floats on the water. In their following of
ships they are easily caught by a strong hook baited with a bit of pork or beef.—
Their body appears emaciated, being small in proportion to the size of their plu-
mage ; as the wings, when extended, measure 9 or 10 feet from tip to tip. They
appear to be very stupid birds, perhaps from being broken-hearted, from the pau-
city of food they meet with 800 miles from the nearest land.’

‘¢ Dr. ARNOTT, as quoted by Mr. Renniz, remarks, ‘How powerful must be the
wing muscles of birds which sustain themselves in the sky for many hours! The
great Albatross, with wings extended 14 feet or more, is seen in the stormy soli-
tudes of the southern ocean, accompanying ships for whole days, without ever
resting on the waves.’ ’’

‘*Mr. Marn, whom apprehension of exceeding the truth always leads to speak
‘within bounds, gives above the spread of the wings at 9 or 10 feet ; Dr. ARNorT,

1835.] Observations on the Albatross. 107

as appears by Mr. Rennre’s quotation, at ‘ 14 feet or more ;’ while the specimen
ix the Zoological Society’s Museum in Bruton Street, and we have seen this spe-
cimen, is set down in the Society’s catalogue, where a picture of it is given at the
following dimensions :—‘ Length from tip of bill to extremity of tail 3 feet 4 inches,
expansion of wings, 9 feet.’ The mean of these three statements of the spread of
the wings of the Albatross is 10 feet 10 inches*: and although true, without doubt,
is the proverb ‘ medio tutissimus ibis,’ we care less about the precise dimen-
sions, than to show that the expansion is on all hands admitted to be great.
This great expansion of wings, and that wonderful provision in the physiology of
birds, by which they are enabled to charge and fill every bone in their body with
rarified air, to promote and secure as by a series of balloons their buoyancy ; and
together with the comparative smallness, and therefore lightness of the body, of
the Albatross, in part prepare us to give credence to a supposition entertained by
some, tkat this bird sleeps while on the wing, and the great distance from any
land at which it is frequently seen towards the close of day farther favours the
supposition.

“This power of sleeping in the air has been alluded to by Tuomas Moor in his
beautiful Eastern poem of Lalla Rookh, when describing a rocky mountain
beetling awfully o’er the sea of Oman, he says:

‘While onits peak, that braved the sky,
A ruin’d temple tower’d so high,

That oft the sleeping Albatross,

Struck the wild ruins with her wing,
And from her cloud-rocked slumbering
Started, to find man’s dwelling there,
In her own silent fields of air.’

“The Albatross is doubtless spoken of in the following facts, told us by a sai-
lor friend, now dead and gone: ‘A very large bird, sometimes alights on the
yards of vessels passing the coast of the Cape of Good Hope, and no sooner is it
upon the yards, than it is asleep, and while sleeping, is very easily captured.
When upon the deck, it cannot soar into the air, on account of the length of its
wings. It makes a loud and disagreeable noise when molested. It is called ‘ the
Booby’ by the crew.

“The term Booby is, we have since been told, commonly applied by sailors
to any long-winged bird, of a whitish colour ; although in the above case of the
Albatross, the term would seem to express its incautious or booby-like habit of
going to sleep within reach of molestation ; a habit which those who scout the
idea of the bird’s sleeping in the air will impute to the desperateness of its neces-
sity.”

* Tam informed by a gentleman at this station, who came out on the “ Wil-
liam Fairlie,” that an Albatross was shot on the 23rd March, in lat. 26° 57’ south,
long. 29° 9’ west, which was wholly white, with the exception of a few feathers
clouded with pale-brown on the wings. It measured 12 feet from tip to tip of the
wings. On the 8th April, five more were shot in lat. 37: 18’ south, long. 149
26’ east. The flesh was good, and not at all fishy to the taste. It was dry and
insipid.

Pp 2

108 Observations on the Albatross. [Frs.

As there are several points in this paper on which the writer seems
to be misinformed, and which are rather far-fetched, I have ventured to
draw afew strictures on it, and to add an extract from a Journal which
I kept during a voyage from England to Calcutta.

First then, speaking of Albatrosses, the writer says, ‘‘ They ap-
pear to be stupid birds, perhaps from being broken-hearted from the
paucity of food, &c. &c.”

The body of the Albatross, when cleared from the plumage, is cer-
tainly very small, and appears out of proportion to the great size of
the bird in length and breadth ; but, at the same time, though small in
size, the two birds which I dissected were extremely plump and fleshy,
bearing no signs of a paucity of food, of which there is an abundance,
for who that has rounded the Cape has not seen the shoals of flying fish
which ever and anon rise from the water as the ship disturbs them in
her course. Fish, Mollusca, and Meduse form the food of the Alba-
tross.

Why then should he break his heart at the thoughts of starva-
tion! !

Again, “ The great Albatross, with wings extended &c. is said to
accompany ships for whole days without ever resting on the waves.”

Here I would remark, that his not having been seen to settle, is no
proof that he did not do so, during these whole days, to say nothing
of the intervening nights—inasmuch as, it is very unlikely that he
was watched for whole days incessantly by any person, and those who
have been to sea, and have paid attention to these birds, must
acknowledge that they do not merely ‘“ fly round the ship,” but extend
their flight far away over the boundless deep, and are lost to sight,
ever and anon returning to the ship in their restless search for food.

Besides, the Albatross does not feed on the wing, but as far as my
experience carries me, invariably settles on the water before taking
his prey ;—therefore it follows that for ‘‘ whole days’’ he does not
feed. No wonder his heart is broken, and his body emaciated.
But surely the writer could never suppose that the almighty and
merciful Creator, who has so fully provided for the wants of all his
creatures, would neglect to supply the wandering Albatross, and
doom it to pine away in misery and a state of half-starvation !

Next comes a supposition, that the bird sleeps on the wing, and
that the great distance from land at which it is seen at close of day is
thought to favour the supposition ; in support of which, a pretty quo-
tation from Moors is brought in, to prove, that ‘‘ castles built in air,”
are as likely to break the rest of the wandering Albatross, as of man,
his lord and master !

1835.] Observations on the Albatross. 109

Now the Albatross being a sea-bird,; and furnished with webbed
feet—what hinders it from sleeping on the waves like other water-
fowls ?

Is not motion the effect of will? And does not sleep seal up our
eyes in forgetfulness? How then can the Albatross continue its
flight, when the will to move its pinions, and direct its course, is lost
in sleep? The quotation proves the absurdity of the supposition by
showing that the bird is ‘‘ running his head against a wall !’’ What
the wandering Albatross may do near land I cannot say, but at sea
I never saw one rise so high even as the yards of the ship, although
the Sooty Albatross (Diomedea fuliginosa) very frequently did.

With regard to the bird or birds which sailors call a “‘ Booby*,” I
can say little, as I never had the good fortune to see one captured ;
but certainly from its flight and appearance at a distance, I should
pronounce it to bea gull or petrel, but decidedly not an Albatross ;
here, however, I speak at random, and shall be happy to receive cor-
rection if necessary, Be it what it may, I cannot understand what
*‘ desperate necessity” there is for the bird’s sleeping on board of ship,
when it has a fine smooth sea to rest on, anda pair of good broad
webbed feet, and a thick impenetrable plumage, made for the very
purpose of enabling it to rest on the waters; we know that all water-
fowl resort to the land occasionally, and the Booby, being some
hundreds of miles at sea, may choose to rest on the only solid foot-
ing it can find, in order to break the dull monotony of a daily seat
on salt-water !

But joking apart, may I not ask, on what did the Booby rest, be-
fore ships had made the passage round the Cape? unless they could
sleep on the water, their necessities must have been much more dis-
perate than in the present day !

To the trivial names applied by sailors and casual observers, to these
birds, I attach no value whatever, as I have seen the folly of trusting
‘to such names; for instance, one of the Albatrosses which I caught
on my last voyage to India, was termed by the officers of the ship,
**a Mollymawk,” and they laughed at the idea of its being an Albatross,
merely because in size and plumage it did not agree with the bird
which they were accustomed to term an Albatross. Nevertheless, it is
a true Albatross! Another bird, the Sooty Albatross, was named
** a@ Peeroo !”

* On 2nd May, ‘‘a Booby’’ was caught asleep on the rigging of the ‘‘ Wil-
liam Fairlie.” It had the plumage wholly brown, and not white, as stated in
Loudon. On being seized, it disgorged ‘‘ five flying fish,’’ all of good size. Does
not this prove that there is no scarcity of food ?

110 Observations on the Albatross. [Fzs.

Sailors, like landsmen, who form opinions of the operations of
nature, from mere casual and superficial observation, without conde-
scending to look into causes and effects, must of course very often
come to erroneous and ridiculous conclusions. Witness the following
anecdote which occurred to me:

The boatswain told one of the passengers that the stormy petrels, or
Mother Cary’s Chickens, make no nest, but lay two white eggs on
the water, and then take them under their wings to hatch them;
during this time the male bird supplies the female with food !

This fable is, I believe, current among the lower class of seamen.

On telling this story, however, the chief officer laughed very
heartily, and cautioned me not to receive as gospel every ‘‘ yarn the
boatswain chose to spin ;’’ but lo! ina very few minutes, he told
me as truth, a story which appeared to me fully as marvellous as the
other: He said, that in some of the islands to the southward, and
about Cape Horn, there is a bird called the ‘‘ King Penguin,” which
had a pouch between its legs, inte which it puts its egg, (for the Pen-
guin only lavs one,) as soon as laid ; in this pouch the egg is kept for
24 hours, during which time the female remains on shore, but at the
expiration of that time, the male bird, who is also furnished with a
similar pouch, returns from his fishing excursions, and relieves the
female by receiving the egg into his custody for the next 24 hours.
They take a very long time to shift this egg from one pouch to the
other, and although there are several species of Penguin on those
islands none of them are furnished witha “ patent egg-boiler,” save his
majesty the King Penguin of the Southern Isles !!

He added, that the bird may be induced to drop the egg, although
reluctantly, by running a stick between its legs !!

Having offered these remarks, I shall proceed in my next, to give
you an extract from my Journal, kept on the voyage, in which I noted
down every circumstance connected with Natural History, and which
being written not from memory, but from facts at the moment occur-
ring, may perhaps be considered worthy of perusal.

Since writing the above, I have had an opportunity of perusing
Geirritu’s Translation of Cuvier, and find, that the Booby is stated to
be the ‘‘ Pelecanus Sula;” the plumage is thus described : “ Belly and
vent, all white, when young, all brown!” this is rather a meagre
description, but nevertheless proves, that the Booby is not an Alba-
tross, as supposed by the writer in Loudon’s Nat. Hist,

1835.] Account of the New Roof at Kasipur. 111

V.—Roof of the New Iron Foundery at Kasipur near Calcutta.

We have requested Major Hutcuinson of the Engineers, the archi-
tect of this elegant structure, to favour us with drawings of its various
details, that we may make known, as far as the circulation of our jour-
nal permits, his very successful combination of the cast-iron truss
with a wrought-iron tie to roofs of large span in this country. We
are so little accustomed to see any thing else in India but the heavy
flat roof with its massy timbers groaning under an inordinate load of
terrace-work heaped up most disadvantageously in the centre to allow
a slope for the water to run off, while the invisible white ant is scoop-
ing out the solidity of the timber, and the dry rot is corroding the
ends that support the whole on the wall,—that the eve rests with
quite a pleasurable sensation on the view of a light, airy frame-work
like that before us, composed of materials indestructible, wherein the
strains and prescures are counterpoised, the load lightened, the liability
to crack and leak lessened, and the repair of every part rendered easy
and entirely independent of the rest.

The progress of improvement is notoriously slower in Government
operations than in private works. When cast-iron beams were first
brought to India on private speculation, and were offered to Govern-
ment by a mercantile house in this town, they were rejected. The
roof of a large private godown was soon after constructed with them,
and their efficacy thus proved; then immediately a re-action took place,
and a large quantity was indented for by Government. The Hon’ble
Court sent them out, and they have remained until now totally un-
employed, although numerous public buildings have been erected
since they arrived.

It was, we know, a subject of lengthened debate what sort of roof
should be given to the foundery. A timber trussed roof had beer
sanctioned at 15,000 rupees, and we may, perhaps, rather attribute
the substitution of the present one to the numerical reduction of the:
pecuniary estimate, than to any actual conviction of its superiority in
other respects, for the beams being already provided, the whole cost
of the present roof, exclusive of them, has been only rupees 11,000.

_ The New Foundery, or rather the room in which the cannon are
turned and bored, is a spacious hall, of 1694 feet long by 50 feet clear
span in breadth, and 40 feet in height from the floor to the vertex of the
roof ; entirely open from end toend, lighted by a range of upper windows,
and surrounded by a suite of apartments of half elevation. The steam
machinery of the several borers and lathes, is arranged along one side
of this room, in a compact and exceedingly neat manner. It is impossible

112 Account of the Roof of the Kdsipur foundery. (Fes.

to attempt its description ;_ those who are fond of mechanical inventions, A
will be amply gratified by: an. inspection of the whole, especially by the °
ingénious contrivancé for adjusting the’ angle of the slide rests and ~
cutters, for the exterior bevil of the gun :—the circular revolving tools -
for turning the trunnions :—the crane carriage for the guns; &c.

The self-acting principle by which the exterior of the gun is turned,
while the interior is bored, so as to saye one half of the time, while it
ensures perfect concentricity of the-outer and inner circles, is; we be-.
lieve, an invention of Major Hut¢urnson’s, who took. the opportunity
when on furlough, of visiting some of the principal founderies in
Europe, and studied to adopt one improvement sugpested ee their
inspection.

The whole Be eee is driver by a small engine of 10 horse, power,
which also works a circular, and a-reciprocating, saw, and a loam-mill
for the casting. moulds: of the: foundery. 7s

The superficial: area df'the hall is 8462 square feet ;-to form anidea
of this magnitude, it may be mentioned that the noble edifice of the
new Town Hall in Birmingham, is said to contain a larger space than
any room in. Europe, and’ will accommodate between three and four
thousand persons sitting,: or ten thousand standing ; that room is 140
feet long, by 65 feet broad, making’a superficial area of 9100 feet, ‘
which is.only 638 feet more than the Kasipur apartment, ;

_The roof consists of 10 trusses, Plate VI. Fig. 1, each composed of -
a pair of cast-iron beams pitched at an elevation of plod feet in the.
vertex, and tied together at foot by a horizontal chain supported in the
centre by a vertical rod suspended from the angle. The truss-frames
are 15 feet 4.6 inches apart : they support light cross-beams and rafters
of wood, upon which the planking of the roof is nailed. The weight
of one truss with its entire load and chain, is equal to about five and
half tons, diffused over the two iron beams.

The chain is three inches deep by jone inch thick, = 3 inches in
section, consequently the applicable,,ferce of tension of the chain is
3x9 = 27 tons, and the ultimate strength of it 3x 27 —.8L tons.
The above, weight of five and half tons diffused over. the two beams,
= 23 tons on.each beam, gives according to the sine of the angle of
elevation, a»tension on the chains of about. five and half tons, or only
one-fifth the stretching weight, or one-fifteenth of the ultimate strength
of the chains.

Thé iron beams and chains were all proved before ties were put
up, by suspending for several days without effecting the slightest. ap--
parent alteration, a weight of six tons from the vertex;. producing .a.
trial tension! of about 12 tons, which. is: more than. twice the actual
tension. 3

seis Ae. Sec. Vol. IV. PL.VI

ee:

L834

"s
K
8
§
>
x
Q
S
=

eS
*
ie
S
S
3

Of feet Vee Figs. %. D5 te

Scale

Total Longth of Link 24f° In. ho
Do IUCUVATNFYUNTTTOTN TET vm

Section Ftg. 1.

HAGA
iNT

TT 3 fo
i a eS i

i
A lh
AH i

Longitudinal Section through the Vertex. A.B.
pga EE ERE =e IS. f4..910 j2- .

RPT oc7u29 0% qeSo &
‘poy 72212, x

EY e/a = CE NS ee aL ee. ee ee ee Ce AS

Scale of Fig.” 2 A, AR lt rf

as)
ig
t) ee
iS
i=
:
as
: 9
BRS
is
aS
eS
is
id
tS
+8
Ss
, >
i
; *
iv
>
6&8
is
ie
ion
iN

ES
Ze
bell NI
a ~
s ae
bs | -
A
Ss R
> 3
x ES
N $
4
N

N
H
3
kl
bs
F
Ee
BS)
s
iS
>
&
8
is
fs
3
i;
Fs
eK
=
rs
|
G&S
BS
IS
Ny
z
ys
Bes
BS
S

note: eit .& a ‘donoee ont “mies
, ay} pila icant OT: east aun
-pligual. oil} doniw di shoe silt.
Bret Agate dwt watvnd Ce ayy 4 foe
‘hus aulsde oft 16. 8 ate ne LqoomAe
1 & hodosits vioril gyovd bon a ne peaee “Rolenhgat
eh Jusmra gestion Gis .xosaR 968 3 Paes allt daeodh

gy ede oe”

7. ame? | Eduterdats au oa Be
a, “Ser sehere desist siti Roads Tass. Sp “bas 5p

pe wJasueg

fod

sf ome yin ‘ais wont doidw ot 4
ae \ : .

‘a eRHAns aos ASAE QS ails to Est dae fnthonived 29

oid fh akunet Gah, Oho EA, bas abst etry sly
ae PUREE od}. 0 biti aneitedt feboow ahs
5 ist ai57% "£9 foo C icanaeme
e 4 “io HOkBY: slash si git snevorg: ob Bf: { slondw ae "8 mt ;
oH jaut laagechs: oa Beaque "bist waves +f : Blok
Vouk Fetal ince deh stay Nite stisg basibi ang
ate aa page ed if tells
Brones2 ve mae tae “sit i Niven Gi’ doa Baw?
baticgquamt dain Te: aad fisralteqes Fat
isthe eit} wets ot oft: in yienorvete a930
of oe: ea to'" acted att Ao hesitant ends no
fdesvber “macro lal oe Bsgi ha arieaesaw re AAG)
SyijnhO) BS pas Gubeas Rad ae, Home ttey sid yo yon ote gaat ;
pets gittid ete Dib aiAde eo So aT ont to laps ot ;
a0 oft “a8 ‘ng eargad SAPS 5D at hs tee eae ~fenvifibse Ba
ae seesaw GO epi nseeng vied yoo, a toy om
agRh oe cot tad “eo

' ‘
wirolisha gar eaet

220) B eis WOO Se 4
ait ig Bio 0! Bite gig wad y
si} bag dat tH snide pat sat KID O.
| 4 ‘ome fais Fie go" Hiroe a: st borg
ate SY! Petr Pysises a eae
Dri aeenton er ae ma eno ts ge Hh

1835.] Account of the Roof of the Kdsipur Foundery. 113

Each extremity of the tie-rods is bolted to a kind of shoe, (repre-
sented in figs. 5 and 6,) resting upon a stone slab on the wall, into
which the lower end on the iron beam abuts, (Fig. 1.)

Fig. 2, is a plan of the roof, shewing the disposition of the frame,
planking and copper sheathing. In the section, Fig. 3, the longi-
tudinal rod is seen which steadies all the ties from lateral shake.

Fig. 7, (a) shews on a larger scale the mode in which the longitu-
dinal tie-rods (@) are united by a bolt, (Fig. 8,) having two right-hand
screws, passing through the central coupling plates of the chains, and
the eye of the suspension vertex rod. This rod being firmly attached
by two bolts (b) through the beams at the vertex, any derangement
whatever of the roof, either vertically or horizontally, is effectually
prevented. At each end of the roof the longitudinal rods pass
through the walls, to which they are firmly fixed.

Fig. 9, shews the horizontal overlaps of the copper sheathing,
which are cemented with white lead, and Fig. 10, the mode in which
the copper passes over the wooden battens fixed on the planks, to
which only the copper is fastened by copper rivets ; a copper cap or
ridge-tile lies over the whole length, to prevent the insinuation of
water at the fold: it answers this purpose so effectually, that the
roof was everywhere found perfectly water-tight, during the late heavy
season of rain, the first it had experienced.

The Kasipur roof was set up without the assistance of any scaffold- .
ing from below. An experimental truss of timber supported on
chains, having been previously made to shew the advantageous ap-
plication of iron chains instead of tie-beams of timber to roofs of
so large a span, it was converted into a platform, moveable upon
wheels along the top of the walls, upon which by means of a crane
fixed at one end of the frame, the iron beams and every thing else was
easily and expeditiously raised and fixed ; the beams, &c. for the op-
posite side of the roof being passed upon wheels across the platform.
The whole frame-work was put up in 20 days.

Before closing our short account of the K4sipur roof, we must notice
a curious optical deception, for which we are somewhat at a loss for a
correct explanation. On entering the room and looking up at the
roof, it strikes every beholder that the roof has somewhat sunk, and the
horizontal tie-rod is about five or six inches lower in the centre than
near the walls. So firmly impressed were we of this being the
case, that standing at one end of the room, and holding two flat brass
rulers, overlapping one another before the eye, we could readily mea-
sure the apparent angle of the tie-rod by raising the ends of the rulers
So as to coincide with the two halves of tie-rods. On mounting the

Q

114 Account of the Roof of the Kasipur Foundery. (Fes.

roof and looking in at the upper window of either end, the same effect
was still visible, though in a diminished degree, and we were not
convinced that it was a deception, until Major Hurcuinson at our re-
quest caused an actual measurement to be made by a perpendicular
wooden batten from an accurately adjusted level on the stone floor. It
was then proved that there did not exist a difference of level even to
the amount of a tenth of an inch. Whence arises the illusion? Is it
that the eye, judging of directions by comparison with other objects,
and having the numerous lines of the pent roof inclined in opposite
directions to each half of the horizontal rods, is thus perplexed in its
estimate ? the ruler experiment is opposed to such an explanation. It
may, perhaps, be owing to the effect of light from the upper windows,
which frequently gives a curved appearance to wooden beams from the
decrease of illumination from side to centre. If the phenomenon re-
semble the effect of the eyes in a portrait always looking the same
whencesoever viewed, or the curves formed by spokes of a wheel pass-
ing a railing, as has been suggested, the effect should admit of a rigid
explanation, and we may hope to obtain it from some one of our readers
who may have time to investigate this singular deception.

Norre.—The mode of calculating the strain upon the iron rods in the above
account is familiar to engineers, but it may be acceptable to others (for in In-
dia every man is his own architect), to be furnished with a correct table of the
strength of timbers and iron: the following extract therefore from Mr. Baritow’s
report on the subject to the British Association in 1833, may be acceptable. He
prefaces it by a precis of the various opinions and theories hitherto formed to ex-
plain the strain and process of fracture, and strongly recommends TREDGOLD’S
Treatises on Iron and on Carpentry. There is now no longer any disagree-
ment on the leading principles connected with the strength of materials, excepting
such as arise from the imperfect nature of the materials themselves, which fur-
nish different results even in the hand of the same experimenter.

Formule relating to the ultimate Strength of Materials in cases of Transverse

Strain.
Let J, b, d, denote the length, breadth and depth in inches in any beam, w
lw
the experimental breaking weight in pounds, then will “;7- = S_ be a con-

stant quantity for the same material, and for the same manner of applying the

straining force; but this constant is different in different modes of application.

Or, making S constant in all cases for the same material, the above expression

must be prefixed by a co-efficient, according to the mode of fixing and straining.
1. When the beam is fixed at one end, and loaded at the other,

BO Deseey
6d?

2. When fixed the same, but uniformly loaded,
1 lw

8;

wy b a?

1835.] Account of the Roof of the Kdsipur Foundery. 115

3. When supported at both ends, and loaded in the middle,
1 lw
1 Oe

4, Supported the same, and uniformly loaded,
1 lw

ree Una
5. Fixed at both ends, and loaded in the middle,
1 lw
6 *% bat
6. Fixed the same, but uniformly loaded,
1 lw
Wie ueha?
7. Supported at the ends, and loaded at a point not in the middle, » m being
the division of the beam at the point of application,

== Ss.

—_—
—

= 8.

=='S,

nm Z
bs =SsS.

Some authors state the co-efficients for cases 5 and 6 as } and ,;*; but both
theory and practice have shown these numbers to be erroneous.

By means of these formule, and the value of S, given in the following table,
the strength of any given beam, or the beam requisite to bear a given load, may
be computed. This column, however, it must be remembered, gives the ultimate
strength, and not more than one-third of this ought to be depended upon for
any permanent construction.

Formule relating to the deflection of beams in cases of Transverse Strains.

Retaining the same notation, but representing the constant by E, and the
deflection in inches by 5, we shall have,

32 Bw 5 \. Bw
pen Phasiqersny gag Be \liegase: p20 8 Sub dey SE
18is8 Bap 2 Pi
gl eh the Gea Benga dit aifLz
Pe aol b dS ee One EC Wines
1 x Bw — 15) 5 x Bw
Balan Op ype SAPP DN ST Wepre me

Hence again, from the column marked E in the following table, the deflection
a given load will produce in any case may be computed ; or, the deflection being
fixed, the dimensions of the beam may be found. Some authors, instead of this

B

measure of elasticity, deduce it immediately from the formula Sa a =e,
substituting for w the height in inches of a column of the material, having the
section of the beam for its base, which is equal to the weight w, and this is then
denominated the modulus of elasticity. Itis useful in showing the relation
between the weight and elasticity of different materials, and is accordingly intro-
duced into most of the printed tables.

The above formule embrace all those cases most commonly employed in prac-
tice. There are, of course, other strains connected with this inquiry, as in the
case of torsion in the axles and shafts of wheels, mills, &c. the tension of bars

Q 2

116 Miscellaneous. _[Fzs.

in suspension bridges, and those arising from internal pressure in cylinders, as in
guns, water-pipes, hydraulic presses, &c. but these fall rather under the head of
the resolution of forces than that of direct strength. It may just be observed,
that the equation due to the latter strain is
t(c—n) = mR.

where ¢ is the thickness of metal in inches, ¢ the cohesive power in pounds of a
square inch rod of the given materials, m the pressure on a square inch of the
fluid in pounds, and R the interior radius of the cylinder in inches. Our column
marked C will apply to this case, but here again not more than one-third the
tabular value can be depended upon in practice.

Table of the Mean Strength and Elasticity of various Materials, from the most
accurate eaperiments.

C Mean)
strength|S. saci a
Names of Materials. i of cohesi- 4 bd = See
a=) & on on an|Constants for bd
WOODs. = a inch sec-| trausverse |Constants for
2s Ep|tion, lbs.| strain. deflection.

Ash, English,.. besa eae rewrhibiescin te GA UN el WATE DLE 2026 6580000
Beech, ditto; a. 8s Cita cere c aerate 700) 11500 1560 5417000
Birch’ ditto, sec ncersleve ciereteeenie MOOV teeect: 1900 6570000
Dealt Christina,p. i, sis ser ecaheieeusc | 680} 11000 1550 6350000
Kim, English... s0apcc since ast O40 tov ol 1030 2803000
Bin, Rigas... « ste aalae seta ene OU) AOU 1130 5314000
Waren SCOLCD,- sec antec cisittets es arse 540] 7000 1120 4200000

; front <2 Gece ce (400). 9000 1200 3490000
Oakjmariables ay gj 189l 3k 400! 15000 2260 7000000
Poon, E. Indian, .. sidesiciow ss 4000 14000 2200 6760000
Pines pit Cliysrreiciesysiarcteiialeoiee ner 660; 10500 1630 5000000
Sati wood, Bs.\., csisc Ae > sneuers .«-{1020! 10866 2403 6929108
Saul, E. Indies, B. ose ee eteel OOF Ooo! 2290 8748000
SISOO,AAUCtOs Ubu ciecasn cree ce ete Ooe SOOO 2548 7922716
EAI cOLLGO ss a aleiere siete eis me ciel 750) 15000 2460 9660060
Ditto, ditto, B. 729! 21957 1447 6665142

IRON.
i FLOM | clelela cieriicmins (7200) LooUe.

Ghatanoes ie niet od Bilvore esgomier page eine eoLane00
Malleable iron, .............-.-- {7/60 60000 9000 91440000
Tron wine sen teterclereisiele orehotenn’ sy: -.--{| 80000

ecee eeee

[Those marked Ba are et fr om ees BAKER’S list in the sth sted
of the Asiatic Researches, which contains a very full and valuable list of the
strength of Indian woods.—Eb.]

V1I.—Miscellaneous.

1.—Desiderata and Recommendations of the British Association for the Promotion
of Science.

In addition to the list of desiderata promulgated by the Association, on its
first meeting, which we re-published in the first volume of this Journal, page
308, the ‘‘ Third Report,’’ for 1833, contains several new suggestions and inqui-
ries, whence we hasten to extract such items as it may come within the power of
Indian scientific men to elucidate.

In matters of scientific announcement, we are glad to perceive, that the Eng-
lish Government has undertaken the expense of reducing the observations of
BrapDLEY, MASKELINE, and Ponp, on the sun, moon, and planets, atthe suggestion

1835.] Miscellaneous. 117

of the Association. Also, that Colonel Syxrs has been requested to prepare for
publication his valuable statistical returns relative to the four collectorates of the
Deccan, subject to the Bombay Government; while Professor Jongs is to ‘‘ en-
deavour to obtain permission to examine the statistical records understood to exist
in great number in the archives of the India House, and to prepare an account of
the nature and extent of them.’’ Thus there may be some chance of the Reports
of Dr. BucHANAN seeing the light through this unexpected channel, although.
the Government of India has itself declined permitting the continuance of their
publication on the nearly gratuitous terms proposed and acted on by Captain
Hereert for the Dinajpar volume* !

DESIDERATA CAPABLE OF ILLUSTRATION IN INDIA.
Meteorology.

1. Experimental data for the theory of refraction.

What is the law of the decrease of temperature, or of density, in ascending?

How does this vary at different times ?

Can any means be contrived for indicating practically at different times the
modulus of variation ?

Does the refractive power of air depend simply on its density, without regard
to its temperature ?

Is it well established that the effects of moisture are almost insensible ?

Can any rule be given for estimating the effect of the difference of refraction
in different azimuths, according to the form of the ground ?

When the atmospheric dispersion is considerable, what part of the spectrum
is it best that astronomers should agree to observe ?

2. That the Committee in India be requested to institute such observations as
may throw light on the horary oscillations of the barometer near the equator.

3. That the Committee in India be requested to institute a series of observa-
tions of the thermometer during every hour of the day and night.

4. That the decrease of temperature at increasing heights in the atmosphere
should be investigated by continued observations at stated hours and known
heights. The hours of 9F A. M. and 84 Pp. M., as giving nearly the mean tempera-
ture of the year, are suggested for the purpose.

5. That persons travelling on mountains, or ascending in balloons, should ob-
serve the state of the thermometer, and of the dew-point hygrometer, below,
in, and above the clouds, and determine how the different kinds of clouds differ in
these respects.

6. That the temperature of springs should be observed at different heights above
the mean level of the sea, and at different depths below the surface of the earth,
and compared with the mean temperature of the air and the ground. Detached
observations on this subject will be useful, but a continued and regular series of
results for each locality will be more valuable.

7. That series of comparative experiments should be made on the temperature
of the dew point, and the indications of the wet-bulb hygrometer, and that the
theory of this instrument should be further investigated.

8. Observations on the horary oscillations of the barometer, at considerable
heights above the sea. This more particularly applies to places near the equator.

9. Observations on the phenomena of wind at two stations, at considerably
different elevations. The direction of the wind should be notedin degrees, begin-
ning from the south, and proceeding by the west.

Magnetism.

10. That observations should be made in various places with the dipping
needle, in order to reduce the horizontal to the true magnetic intensity.

11. Aregular series of observations conducted in this country on the diurnal
variation of the needle.

Geology.

12. That measurements should be made, and the necessary data procured, to
determine the question of the permanence or change of the relative level of sea
and land on the coasts of Great Britain and Ireland, (or other parts of the
world.) The measurements to be so executed as to furnish the means of reference
in future times, not only as to the relative levels of the land and sea, but also as
to waste or extension of the land.

* See Preface to the second volume of the Journal Asiatic Society.

118 Miscellaneous. [Frs.

13. That the history of ancient vegetation should be further examined, by
prosecuting the researches into the anatomy of fossil wood, which have heen
exemplified in Mr. WrrHAm’s recent volume.

: 14. That the quantity of mud and silt contained in the water of the principal
rivers should be ascertained, distinguishing as far as may be possible, the com-
parative quantity of sediment from the water at different depths, in different parts
of the current, and at different distances from the mouth of the river ; distinguish-
ing also any differences in the quality of the sediment, and estimating it at differ-
ent periods of the year ; with a view of explaining the hollowing of valleys, and
the formation of strata at the mouths of rivers. ;

15. That the experiments of the late Mr. GReGory Watt, on the fusion
and slow cooling of large masses of stony substances, should be repeated and
extended by those who, from proximity to large furnaces, have an opportunity
of trying such experiments on a iarge scale ; and that trial should be made of
the effect of long-continued high temperature on rocks containing petrifactions, ©
in defacing or modifying the traces of organic structure, and of the effect of the
continued action of steam or of water at a high temperature, in dissolving or
altering minerals of difficult solution.

16. That the dimensions of the bones of extinct animals should be expressed
numerically in tables, so as to show the exact relations of their dimensions to
those of animals now living ; and also to show what combinations of dimensions
in the same animal no longer exist.

17. That the following geological queries be proposed :

1. Are any instances of contorted rocks interposed between strata not
contorted ?

2. Is there any instance of secondary rocks being altered in texture or
quality by contact with gneiss or primary slates ?

3. Is the occurrence of cannel coal generally connected with faults or
dislocations of the strata ?

4, What is the nature of the pebbles in the new red sandstone conglo-
merate in different districts: do they ever consist of granite gneiss, mica-
slate, chert, millstone, grit, or any other sandstone which can be traced to the
coal series ?

18. The attention of residents in our remote foreign dependencies is invited
to the two great questions of comparative geology and paleontology. 1. Is
there or is there not such a general uniformity of type in the series of rock-
formations in distant countries, that we must conceive them to have resulted
from general causes of almost universal prevalence at the same geological era ?
2. Are the organic remains of the same geological period specifically similar in
very remote districts, and especially under climates actually different ; or are
they grouped together within narrower boundaries, and under restrictions as to
geographical habitats analogous to those which prevail in the actual system of
things ?

19. An examination of the geological structure of the countries constituting
the great busin of the Indus, where, if in any part of India, it is supposed a
complete series of secondary strata may be expected.

Zoology.

The Committee recommended to the consideration of Zoologists the following
subjects of inquiry :

20. The use of horns in the class mammalia; the reason of their presence in
the females of some, and their absence in those of other species ; the connexion
between their development and sexual periods; the reason of their being deci-
duous in some tribes, and persistent in others.

21. The use of the lachrymal sinus in certain families of the ruminantia.

22. The conditions which regulate the geographical distribution of mam-
malia.

23. The changes of colour of hair, feathers, and other external parts of ani-
mals; how these changes are effected in parts usually considered by anatomists
as extra-vascular.

24. The nature and use of the secretions of certain glands immediately under
the skin, above the eyes, and over the nostrils, in certain species of the gralla-
tores and natatores; the nature and use of the secretion of the uropygial gland.

1835.] Miscellaneous. 119

or

25. How long and in what manner can the impregnated ova of fishes be pre-
served, for transportation, without preventing vivification when the spawn is
returned to water.

26. Further observations on the proposed metamorphosis of decapod crus-
tacea, with reference to the views of Tuompson and RaTuHKE.

27. Further observations on the situation of the sexual organs in male spi-
ders, and on their supposed connexion with the palpi.

28. The use of the antennz in insects. Are they organs of hearing, of smell,
or of a peculiar sensation ?

29. The function of the femoral pores in lizards, and the degree of import-
ance due to them, as offering characters for classification.

Botany.

30. An accurate account of the manner in which the woody fibre of plants is
formed.

31, An investigation of the comparative anatomy, of flowerless plants, witk a
view to discover in them the analogy and origin of their organic structure.

32. The cause of the various colours of plants.

33. The nature of the fecal excretions of cultivated plants, and of common
weeds ; the degree in which those excretions are poisonous to the plants that
yield them or to others ; the most ready means of decomposing such excretions by
manures or other means.

Tides. (See Journal Asiatic Society, vol. IT. page 151.)

Falling stars. M. QurtTEeLet’s mode of observing and recording the charac-
teristic circumstances of these meteors is recommended to notice. ‘‘I take my
station out of doors, in a situation which commands a good view of the sky, with
a map of the heavens spread out before me. When a falling star appears,
I mark on the map the point of its commencement, the line of its
course among the nearest stars, and the point where it vanished. This is done by
an arrow-line. A number of reference is added, which connects it with a book-
register of the exact time, magnitude, duration, and other circumstances. Contem-
poraneous observations at distant stations are much desired.

2.—Manilla Indigo, (so called.)

There has lately appeared in the Calcutta market an article purporting to be
Indigo from Manilla. The packages containing it are to all appearance Chinese,
being covered with mats and tied round with split ratans like tea-boxes. A
sample of this having been sent me in August last, for comparison of quality
with other Indigo, I caused a portion to be incinerated, and found the ash highly
ferruginous, and weighing 52 per cent. of the whole,—18 being the greatest per-
centage I had ever found, and that only in refuse Indigo. The specific gravity was
1:0. Some of the ash dissolved in muriatic acid afforded a copious precipitate
to Mur. Barytes, and to Prussiate of Potash. I therefore imagined that the Indigo
had been precipitated from the vat with a ferruginous alum, and proceeded no fur-
ther with its examination.

Having been however recently favoured with another sample from Mr. C. K.
Rosison, under a suspicion that the substance was not Indigobut Prussian Blue,
I submitted a portion to tests which at once proved the truth of this supposition.
By digestion in caustic alkali, hydrocyanic acid may be taken up while the oxyde of
iron remains behind ; on acidifying the solution and adding to it a drop or two of
sulphate of iron, the Prussian Blue is again formed. The readiest test, however,
is to place a small portion of the suspected matter on a hot coal or iron. If it
be indigo, a fine purple smoke instantly rises, and it takes fire, The Prussiate
gives off water, and at last burns feebly. It is also much heavier than indigo, but
its colour, in the cake, is a fine clear blue, rather of a coppery streak.

It is reported that the article in question was manufactured in America, and
shipped to France, where Indigo was selling at 14 francs. Being unsaleable, it
was re-shipped to America, whence it found its way to Canton, where it under-
went some change, and was brought to Calcutta, and remains to spread alarm
among our manufacturers of Indigo, at the prospect of a fair competition in the
blue market they bave so long monopolized.—Eb.

*1nwNd
*Aystu1

“uN
“nd *119
*AqS ton
*1ynurnd

Meteorological Register.
$

“SUIUOA

120

*Iay1PEM OUT *uoosuour JO adueyo

“503 osuap

“Boy YOu)
*Aavay Op
*Aavay soy

*soyoul ‘arey

*1OYICOM

*]ensn se pajyenjis pue sures 943 syuaunaysurt oy,

IcIt | Sag Jeol [1° or

UNS UL JVO FY

*SOUdIIX |

TS}JIULOUIIIY,

Ioysisay

"Gest ‘Aumnsgag fo yuo ay2 of ‘wzjnojnZ ‘aofQ hossp ay2 qo day ‘toysehary yvo1b0j0.10aja AT
rene nce enn recesses SS SS SSS SSS SSS SS

886 6a} ULaTK

N

*
>
=

oN
ata

Coal
=

NAOMMRK NnDNDSOCONMD

Oo
=

~
~

_

~

SPs OTS

-

Ded SO Deh OO AI HO 19 OH HD

~

O19 6 HON OD Ian AN

an
~
~ Os
an

~
a
n
a

Sosoar~e
STASIS
=

~
q

~

a
~

*
n
aN

~
~

”
a
s
s

~

a
a

~
a
>
BS

TOO HO SO OD StH 1H HIN ELD. OD SH AH OD

eel oe ee Eee
et

~
ASCOoN
=
a

CIN SIreANA AD

-
~

isl

~

DOOONHOrMOM Orn
AD UD SO 19 OO Pid HOD AD

aa
AN A

B38 OO NSO het

aA a aA

mt CO Ie IRD OD

Lan

n
a

oO

-

momo
—

*

a
a

NOoOMmDnwatsHOS

onion

oso
Ln al

s

O18
| See
E

2

~

=

CD 0D CO Hrd DCO
MOOMMAMODY
Lond I ad

PA 09 HAG 6 POO

|

|
|

+

-dWIO Way L,
“L

ey

*Ia\9UOIs
-AW meq
“WOrSA FT
{HP Seis]
“qUsIB BIG |
“IIe UI Ie
*19}QUIOIS
-AH
“m0 sA PT
‘JIp S,39Ssa'T
‘op ‘IajouL
Ol0G 19M

“ssoideq
‘W410 “pod

‘W *d f ¥@ SUOTIVAIESYO

“qyUO 213 Jo Aeq

*"W ‘V OL 3® SuOl}yeAIOSqO

:

=
Ae

ee Sab, : 5

isis eee

Fi
Lhe oe SS ea ae get Oa de He See
; 2S & Mae ES See .
Be PS os ae Sa
Fa a 2 ;

Jour ds Soc Vol. IV. Pl. Vit.

The Radhia Pitlar The Bakhra Prttar.
tn gilla SArun. cn Tirhue.

The Mound and Dehgope al Kesariah. tn Trrhic.

N A
oN Nk \)
\ ay } wf ~
wae BN << M, nA:
if NS ‘\ SX } Wu (a
a ; “wins

WW ke re

dAnetent kuneratl Vases from ee neighbourhood of Hyderabad.
“Ss 6 7

Ny

aft Adil

JOURNAL

OF

mr ASTATIC SOCT ERY.

39.—March, 1835.

A —Aceount of a Visit to the Ruins of Simroun, once the ‘capital of the
ip ‘Mithila province. By B.H. Hopeson, Esq. Resident in Nipai.
ee eye > [In a letter to the Editor. |

, ae oT trust that the dene and inscriptions lately sent you from
ny ‘Bakra,-Mathiah, R&dhiah, ‘and Késariah, will serve to draw attention -
towards the remains of Hindu science and power still extant in this
direction—the Mithila, or Maithila Désa of the S4stras, and North
Bihar of the Moghuls. But it is not merely on the British side of the
boundary that these astonishing traces of ancient civilization exist ;
for, in the Nipalese Tarai, also within a few miles of the hills, where
now (6r recently) the tiger, wild boar, and wild buffalo usurp the ‘soil,
and a deadly malaria infects the atmosphere for three-fourths of the
year, similar vestiges are to be found. The Nipalese Tarai is synominous
amongst Europeans with pestilential jungle. It was in the halls of
Janakpur, however, that the youthful R&ma sought a bride: it was
from the battlements of Simroun: that the last of the Déva dynasty
gaeted so long the imperial arms ‘of Toenax Sain!

’ But the ruins of J anakpur and of Simroun still ewist in the Nipalese
be. lands: and he who ‘would form a just idea of what the Hindus of
Mithila achieved — prior , to the advent of the Moslems’must bend his
pilgrim steps” from: the columns of Radhiah and of Mathiah, in the
~ British’ ‘tertitories, to the last but still astonishing vestiges of the cities
oF Kings Janaxa and N&nvupa, in those ‘of Nipal.
= “Of the Nipalese Tarai it might justly be. said, until very lately,

“A goodly place it was in days of yore,

Ss .%- . . But something ails it now : the place is cursed.’ Sy
Five’ centuries of incessant struggle’ between Moslem bie gotry and°
Hindu retaliation had indeed stricken this border laid with the

: R 4

122. | _ Description of the Ruins of Simroun. [Marcu,

double curse of waste and pestilence. Nature, as it were, in very
scorn of the vile passions of man, having turned the matchless
luxuriance of the soil and climate into the means of debarring his fu-
ture access! Such was the Nipalese Tarai until 1816. But since that
period the peace and alliance existing between the two efficient Go-
vernments of the hills and the plains have given security to the bor-
derers, and man is now fast resuming his ancient tenure of this fertile
region. Still, however, there is little temptation or opportunity for Ku-
ropeans to enter it ; and as chance recently conducted me past the ruins
of Simroun, I purpose to give youa hasty sketch of what I saw and
heard; because these ruins are evidently disjecta membra of the same
magnificent body to which the mausoleum of Késriah, and the solitary
columns of Mathiah, of Radhiah, and of Bakhra belong. About 15
miles from the base of the hills, and at a nearly equal distance from
the Bagmatty, south of the former, and west of the latter, stand the
remains of Simroun, in the Nipalese district of Rotahat, and opposite
to the Champ4run division of the British zillah of Sd4run.

The boundary of Népal and of our territories confines the ruins to
the south, and the Jamuni Nadi to the west. On the immediate
east lies the village of Kachorwa, and on the north, that of Bhag-
wanpur, both belonging to Népal. Here, in the midst of a dense jun-
gle, 12 miles probably in circuit, rife with malaria, and abounding in
tigers, wild boar, and spotted axis, are secluded these wonderful traces
of the olden time. The country around is well cultivated now, both
on our and the Nipalese side, but no one presumes to disturb the
slumber of the genius of Simroun ; superstition broods over the taint-
ed atmosphere; and the vengeance of K4li is announced to the rash
peasant who would dare to ply an axe, or urge a plough, within her
appropriately desolate domain. It was only with difficulty that my
elephants could make their way through the jungle; and when I had
reached a central position, and ascended an elevation of some 25 feet,
composed of the debris of the palace, nothing but a wilderness met my
eye. Yet itis barely 500 years since Simroun was a pakka, forti-
fied city, the pride and the defence of Mithila! After the war with
Nipal, Lieutenant Bortreau, I think, surveyed these ruins, and drew up
a plan of them. What is become of it, I know not; and regret that
my own opportunity of research was limited to one hasty visit. In
this, however, I traced the northern wall, in all its extent : measured
the dimensions of the great Pékra or reservoir called Isra; and clam-
bered to the top of what were once the citadel and the Rani-bas or
Mahal Sarai. On my return I had much conversation with an intelli-
gent Brahman of Bhagwanpur, who told me that in April and May,

1835.] An ancient City in the Nipalese Tarai. 123

when the jungle is at its barest state, the form and extent of the city
may be distinctly traced. From his communications, and from my
own observations, I gather that the form of the city is a parallelogram,
surrounded by an outer and an inner wall, the former of unburnt, the
latter of burnt, brick—the one having a compass of seven cos, and the
other, of about five cos.

On the eastern side, six or seven wet ditches may still be traced,
outside the pakka wall, and three or four on the western side. The
Isré reservoir or tank is still perfect. It is 333 paces along each
greater, and 210 along each shorter, face ; and its containing walls or
sides consist of the finest burnt bricks, each of which is a cubit square,
and nearly a maund in weight. 50 to 60 yards of causeway, con-
structed of similar bricks or tiles, are yet entire in the neighbour-
hood of the palace; and vestiges of the same causeway, traceable at
other points, indicate that all the streets of the city were of this careful
and expensive structure. The remains of the palace, of the citadel, and
of the temple of the tutelary goddess, exhibit finely carved stone
basements, with superstructures of the same beautifully moulded and
polished bricks for which the temples and palaces of the valley of Né-
pal are so justly celebrated. I measured some of the basement stones,
and found them each 5 feet long by 15 broad and deep: and yet these
blocks must have been brought from a distance of 25 miles at least, and
over the lesser range of hills; for, till you come to the second or
mountainous and rocky range, no such material is to be had.

Some twenty idols, extricated fron the ruins by the pious labour of
a Gosain, are made of stone, and are superior in sculpture to modern
specimens of the art. Many of them are much mutilated ; and of
those which are perfect, I had only time to observe that they bore
the ordinary attributes of Puranic Brahmanism. Not a single in-
scription has yet been discovered : but wherefore speak of discovery
where there has been no search ? I noticed four or five pakka wells
round, and each having a breast-work about three feet above the ground,
similar precisely to the wells of this valley.

What I have called the citadel is styled on the spot the Kotwdli
Choutara, and my palace is the Rdni-bas. The latter has a very cen-
tral position. The Kotwali Choutara is in the northern quarter; and
the great tank, called Isré Pokra, is about } of a mile from the north-
east corner of the city wall. As already mentioned, the last is still
complete: the two former exist only as tumuli, some 20 to 25 feet
high; and more or less coated with earth and trees.

Hindu tradition, eked out by a couple of Sanscrit slokas, copy of
which I subjoin, asserts that Simroun was founded by NAnyupa Du’va,

R 2

124 Additional information respecting the Sarun [Marcx,

A. D. 1097; that sixt of the dynasty reigned there with great splen-
dour ; and that the sixth, by name Hari Sinua De’va, was compelled to
abandon his capital and kingdom, and take refuge in the hills A. D.
1322. The Moslem annals give 1323 for the date of the destruction
of Simroun by Togtax San. Of the accuracy of the latter date
there can be no doubt ; nor is the difference between the Musalman
and Hindu chronology of the least moment. But, unless NAnyvupa
had more than five successors, we cannot place the foundation of Sim-
roun higher than about 1200 A. D. That is clearly too recent; and,
in fact, no part of the tradition can be trusted but that vouched by the
memorial verses, which only give the date of destruction.

Memorial verses of the founding and desertion of Simroun.
uaefriasusfad vecafannTaTs :
qzlaqaufaarrant Rarreaifacareg az! hI
auifragniae afd wenasaTE waar caTaae |
warargayt ehdeest care (magarafatcfaae | &

The following is a literal translation of these memorial verses :

‘The wealth accumulated by Rajas RAma, Nata, Pururava, and
ALARKA, was preserved in a tank (that of Isra), and guarded by a
serpent. NAnvyupa Ds'va destroyed the serpent ; appropriated the
wealth; and built (Simroun) Garh with it. (His descendant) Hari
Sinwa, compelled by cruel fate, abandoned his beautiful city, and went
to the hills in the year of the Saka 1245.’

The kingdom of the Déva dynasty in the plains expired with the
destruction or desertion of Simroun. It extended frem the Kosi to
the Gandak, and from the Ganges to the hills of Nepal: at least, such
were its limits in the days of its greatest splendour, when consequently
it embraced all the several localities from which I have recently for-
warded to you such signal memorials of Hindu power and science.

I].—Further particulars of the Sdrun and Tirhut Liths, and Account of two
Buddha Inscriptions found, the one at Bakhra, in Tirhut, the other at
Sdrnath, near Benares. By Jamus Prinszp, Sec. As. Soc. &c.

[Read at the Meeting of the 11th March.]

The following note, from Mr. Hopeson, (alluded to in the preced-
ing article,) accompanied the drawings of Buddhist monuments, which
had been promised to the Society in his letter, read at the meeting
of the 28th May, 1834.

+1, Nanyupa. 2, Ganea. 3, Nara Sinna. 4, Ra’ma Sinwa. 5, SAKTI
Sinna. 6, Hari Srnwa, all with the cognomen Déva.

Jour as. S00. ai Vol.IV. PLVIL
Inscription on the Pillar at Radian in the Sarun district

me. db FS HN ete als
RSL ULC OLS EL SHLA LEAL EU PLAL YL OS &

¥ ? ALD tw) Mita VE

ee
Pama eth yckoy V7 pe De eg lie onlay bole
WA LAME LAALOILY NLL ULOAd 9 OSH ai esut. oy
X Ga Jef aC twee FAO LS

SAFHLLONBSLALEALRGWELIEAACIAEY BEANS ELA
W °
Leb SLEGAVSOSAY SLLASLHSHABEBACOLCSBLLAL 0 BL0)L
YA LD 7r
OFyVL SPL DBULY VLOULNAK
¥ : A of ?

POLCLEL LS Edd LOL LAO BY HELLS" L LPLSILd

qd b oy 'D I am oe i os Ao, x
Ld rsrcvov $n aay ee Neck DBA LALT<K

ris ONG ate d +

+ aes CdS 0 wi jrobteeto ca wtexd pane x dius

M4 béue A dew ‘o Lhe “La veuilec tue 2 ieee

VOedb+ pu
VOLGCLrese? Soukd i vei LHL LL LESLOL STR: Jets
} 6264 +94

es Peat (Foils oLdP 1" STA LLA Vleaeey cL

CTQSLFE DSL r PSL Dey vd rol Wicket SPLALUG AF IALSLECUM LS
Ad 6 6G ne GALL Av

Pac tuncserenticsiie res LOGICA Feet Ll

@ £ t4h

SLCHLAL LH “ b) gy ? 3 Laas me = pagent faestsat bi Leu
EO ede 8d Ate

CAA VIN eAP TLL KOLA 5 a ar Sey ,)

ieabcesie
ae tw ved Se ffCNLLL SANE A CAREER FELLIE
aie A DUA fete
Ube btse iat LS LALO LULEARA-OUL A Piautwceys wk
myc CE Pf vot ©

Me Ea Elle CAALLD Hanon rnb etvaha KOE
SPOHALL LEC Bees Lots £1 Cuurskedasd LBAdHS ede +o ho-PLops:
oY LEH Br Uobihe 5 SLLELA itt SEEPS é bfleLyk 4

tb WA BL SLA LUX pLLS 6 btSK= SLY Lat ULtEY iGuA TY OLRA

~

. "ed P in K
CiLdddk SSD Oy GULALY PLL SAM AL,

(2)

ATE ‘fe
Poxba tube Lets weaedufeatr cack ent weld
Lie ee SN “d PY na <x
ae OS ae ee
ae aa a | d 4 Ku + od
ROT OT 910} ChAT ORL Dc htt eo oe belee
LALLSB t#Z+67 ed eee

Le LL YI ir RcLeLe ee 8+ bea AUP

Dek eked fA
debit beast ddsi ceo (edh tung Py LWt8
odor b ig kcte men ke

Volar arcunsandetret cian var rutns gl~hd

wots cotsk ee bb Sat EEIBLLA se ion of ab ae
fee $o4 5B
bias rbutsorees AG vevapeadi rae wsnaree
ss WMG Wo
Sordvon rad Atorenerochedtrcse Pat ere

Berns Ah Bs { ¢e
EGA GS rowers sau winded Liou rhs CLK

eye ns §1l4e+0 Lh bet 6 CX LEILA “RPAS 1)

x Ed? dees age 14 8-4 <
KEWYLOH LEAS LIAS CLIIS BUALLVIII+E SL
Attra L
LoL ESA ROAM Caawonwaellb is ore ydr6 pt

LASS: Ret CORE.
SSreDULILTASHUDS HL OL LAL Ot Ot CAFEL

4 TLAM GE ad 6 J 41 |
CAHFL UK AULCK KOC SSCESL SHA CAATES LCS BE

A ey Mite & 4 2
tO LLIKKUSLE GILES LE OWES FLAT HOE YK KOdS6 CY

AEE | i Nite dd db 8
LYSSLFLYLC STE AS OL if neni ELOG“LHALLdebAK 1
y wer pO Kb bn
LUSLYAL CbU PAnb of CALYS VOSS ECA

( The inscription on the Dethé Column contains I lines more)

Srove. the Small letters between the lines are laken from the Delhi
inscryption . leters not found tn Hak version are surrounded
by wline[). and those wanting in the present version are
inserted with a caret n.

1835.] and Tirhut Pillars, and other Buddhist Monuments. 125

“‘T have at last the pleasure to sen’ you my drawings of the Bakhra column,
and the Radhia column, with their inscriptions, and a third of the Kesriah mound,
surmounted with its hemispherical temple or Dehgope. I trust you will animad-
vert severely upon the barbarous custom of cutting cyphers and names upon these
ancient monuments—if there were any inscription on the Bakhra column, it must
in this way have been scribbled over and destroyed.’’

At one of the very earliest meetings of the Asiatic Society, held on
the 29th January, 1784, I find by the records, that Mr. Law present-
ed ‘‘ A Short Account of Two Pillars to the North of Patna.” The
paper does not seem to have been printed, nor has it been preserved
among our archives ; we may therefore conclude, that it was of a merely
cursory nature : nor could we be certain to which of the three pulars,
now again brought to our notice by Mr. Hopeson, the remark applied,
were it not that the Bakhra pillar of Tirhut, and the Radhia or Arah-
r4j pillar of Sarun bear too palpable evidence of the visit of Euro-
peans, in the names engraved over the surface of the stone. In the
former we find the names of C. H. Bartow, 1780, General Brisco
and others in 1799 ;—in the other at the foot of the original inscrip-
tion is inscribed the name of ReusEN Burrow, 1792. This practice
of scribbling over and disfiguring ancient monuments is as barbarous
as the vain-glory of JzeHANeir, evinced in the zone of Persian cut
over the Allahabad inscription ; but fortunately in the case of the Bakhra
column, it seems to have been harmless: for there are no traces of an
ancient inscription upon it, at least on the parts of the shaft aboveground. '
Such Nagari characters as appear in Mr. Hopeson’s facsimile are all
modern, and record merely the names and dates of native visitors as
gothic as their European precursors. .

It is quite unnecessary, therefore, to give an engraving of the Bakhra
transcript furnished by Mr. Hopeson. The view made by his native
artist (see P]. VII.) is very faithful, and entirely accords with two already
in my possession, one by Mr. R. H. Rarrray, the other by Mr. J.
STEPHENSON*, whose accurate description of the monument, and of the
marks of an ancient city in the neighbourhood, as well as his discovery
of a Buddhist image there, form the subject of a very interesting note,
already submitted to the Society, and to which I shall presently allude.

Passing then to the Radhia or Sérun Lath, which is evidently the
one alluded to by Mr. Srirurne, (and not the Bakhra column, as Mr.
Hopeson supposed, for the latter bears no inscription,) it is satis-
factory to discover that this pillar is in very good preservation,
although it has lost its capital and surmounting Sinha or lion; for

_* Dr. Mixx has also favored we with a sight of two paintings of the same
column made by a native artist for Mr, J. R. ELPHINSTONE in 1814.

126 Inscription on the Radhia Column. (Marcu,

it bears a long inscription in the Allahabad character, No. 1, which,
upon a careful comparison with the plates of the 7th volume of Re-
searches, is also identical with that of Firoz’s Lath: so that we are
now in possession of four copies of the same inscription, three of
them perfect, viz. the Delhi, the Mattiah, and the present one, and
that of Allahabad mutilated. The dimensions of the Radhia Lath, are
thus given by Mr. Hopeson’s artist : (see Pl. VII.)

ft. in.

Height from the ground to the top of the shaft, ................-..6-- 39 0
Circumference at the’ bases. mascots cis cls sie ce nee cuictine neve stare teieeaceree, Likes te
Ditto, at the summit, . wae «lotelncevs tal «ai alanataeteneenstekara Mu OtlasO
Its locality is deSciibed' i in thie’ Portia sista Greed as in the village
of Pirnia, Lad 92 near Arakrdj, —),%,) zillah Sdrun. I find in ARrow-

SMITH’S map, a place called Purownah, between Gorakhpur and Bet-
tiah, which may probably be the spot indicated; for Mr. Hopgson
himself states it to be at Radhia, near Arahraj-Mahddeva, in the dis-
trict of Majhuah, in the zemindary of Bettiah, (Jour. Vol. III. p. 483.)

Mattiah, the site of the third pillar, is, by the map, a good way far-
ther to the north.

In my notice on the latter pillar I mentioned that it wanted the last
eleven lines of the Delhi version. The same omission occurs in
the present copy; which corresponds also in some other respects
with its neighbour, such asin having double letters, or letters super-
posed where they are single on Fi’roz’s Lath :—in having the half-
moon letter in lieu of the triangle; in the frequent omission of the
initial letter gj, and the addition of the final inflection X (See Vol. III.
p- 485). The suggested order of the reading, on Fi’roz’s Lath, namely
North, West, South, East, is also confirmed.

Being now in a condition to correct the few errors of the Delhi
version, by collation with two other, and in many parts with three,
authentic texts, I propose immediately to lithograph a revised copy
of it, to assist in the elucidation of this very curious monument of an-
tiquity ; while, in the meantime, I now annex a facsimile of the Sarun
version, (Pl. VIII.) with interlineary notes of its chief variations from
the standard text, to be consulted in any case of disputed reading.

With regard to the architecture of these columns, it has been point-
ed out to me, that Lieut. Burr’s drawing of the Allahabad column did
not render justice to the ornamental work on its capital, which has a
decidedly Greek appearance. That officer proves also in error (as was
suspected by Mr. Hopeson) in supposing the mutilated figure on the
summit to have been a bulil. I have been favored with the following
note on the subject from Lieut. Kirroz, whose architectural taste and

1835.] Farther particulars of the Allahabad Column. 127

peculiar study of the ornaments of Hindu and Muhammedan buildings
in such parts of India as he has visited, will, we may hope, hereafter
contribute to our better acquaintance with the detail of oriental

architecture of various epochs.

“On perusing No. 27 of the Asiatic Society’s Journal, for March, 1834, I ob-
served a long treatise on the Allahabad column, which has been lying partly buried
since 1804, when wantonly taken down by that enemy to Hindustani architec-
ture, Colonel Kyp, at which time the capital of it (of which I am about to treat)
was destroyed.

‘‘T obtained my information from a very old inhabitant, a Musalman classie,
who had seen the obelisk erect, opposite the inner gate-way of the Jumna Dur-
w4za ; he informed me, that a figure of a lion was on the capital before it was
destroyed.

“‘T am sorry to say, that from absorption of damp and saltpetre, the outer crust
is fast caking off, carrying the inscriptions with it; though, at the fiat of the
commandant of the garrison, a working party of a couple of hundred sipahis could
be sent and the column placed on stone trucks, or on logs of wood cut for the pur-
pose, and thereby be saved from further destruction.

“« My attention was first drawn towards this monument of antiquity by the un-
common ornament on the periphery of the mutilated capital, of which I enclose a
rough though correct sketch, (fig.4, Plate IX.) and upon examination, I found that
Lt. Burr’s bull wasonce a figure ofalion couchant, the claws in each paw being very
plain ; and the square shape in which the chest is cut between the forelegs, led me
to a supposition that there had been a like figure to the colossal representation of
the lion and elephant on the bridge at Jaunpur, and which was found in the ruins
of the fort there, during the repairs of the bridge by Capt. McPuerson, who
placed it on a pedestal—(if acceptable I will at a future period send a drawing and
description of it*.) Iam the more convinced of the correctness of my conclusion,
since the perusal of October’s number of A. S. Journal, in which a drawing and
description of the Mattiah Lath is given, on which precisely the same figure occurs,
the elephant excepted.

“‘ The ornaments on the periphery of the block will be found to resemble those
common in the cimarecta of Grecian cornices ; the astragal or beading of it is also
of common occurrence in Grecian and Roman architecture.

“On comparing Lieut. Burr’s copy of the character No. 1, I observed several
errors in the shape of the letters, and in their actual number ; this however has be-
come of no moment since your discovery, that the three inscriptions of the Delhi,
Pryag, and Mattiah pillars are each other’s facsimiles.

“* However, there is one omission, I consider, of great importance ;—that of the
interlineation of nearly the whole character No. 1, with one more modern, like un-
to No. 2, and which may probably be a translation into Sanscrit of the former ;
it is cut or rather dotted in a very rough manner, and in some places the letters join
into those of No. 1, to which I attribute the errors in the copy of that character.

**T shall here conclude by remarking, that the number of lineseffacedby JrHan-
Gir’s pedigree are seven, by correct measurement ; whereas three are the number
mentioned : this may probably be a misprint.’

* We shall esteem this a favor. There was however no elephant on the Al-
lahabad column.—Ep.

128 Account of the Ruins in the Neighbourhood of Bakhra. {Marcu,

The most important fact in the above note, namely, that of the ancient
inscription No. 1, being interlined with a more modern character, was
not adverted to by Lieutenant Burt, in his account of the pillar. I
accordingly requested our associate, Mr. Water Ewer, of Allahabad,
to re-examine the pillar, and his reply, received a few days since, says,
«True enough, the unknown character is interlined with Sanskrit, which
is the least distinct, and appears to be the older of the two.’’ It is
possible they may prove to be contemporaneous, and there will be
an end of the mystery which has hitherto hung over this writing.
Mr. Ewer has undertaken to make a copy of the interlineation, and
to collate the other printed inscriptions with the original.

I may here mention, that Major Cotvin of the Engineers has given
me notice of two more Laths in upper India, one at Hissar, and ano-
ther at Fatihabad near Delhi. The former, though in a decayed con-
dition, still contains a few characters: of both we may hope to obtain
further particulars in a short time.

I now return to the Bakhra column, for the purpose of introduc-
ing Mr. SrerHENsoN’s description of the discovery of an image of
Buddha in its neighbourhood. The Kesariah mound, of which
Mr. Hopeson has also favored us with a drawing (Pl. VII. fig. 3.)
is situated about 20 miles to the north of Bakhra, in sight of the
river Gandak.

IIIl.—Ewcursion to the Ruins and Site of an Ancient Gety near Bakhra,
13 cos north of Patna, and six north from Singhea, (Extracted from
the Journal of Mr. J. SrrpHEnson.)

[Read to the Asiatic Society on the 14th January, 1835.

Near to this village are the remains of a mound of solid brick-work,
about 40 feet high, and about the same diameter at the base : on the
top are two Musalman temples and the tomb of a saint, whose name
I was told is Mir-Abdulla, dead about 250 years ago. On the side
of the mound fronting the south, a large Burr tree rears its lofty branch-
es to a great height, and supported by about 30 trunks, forming a cool
pleasant shade to the Musalman devotees. A little to the north are
the ruins of a large fort of an oblong shape, one side of which is full
1000 yards in length. It is surrounded by a ditch, at this season filled
with water and jungle grass. Its elevation above the common level
of the country is from 6 to 8 feet, and it appears to have been entirely
built of brick—a circumstance of which the native Hindus have taken

1835.) Description of the Bakhra column. 129

advantage to build a temple on the south end of the ruins, which
appears about half finished. The mound and fort are no doubt coe-
val with each other, and of considerable antiquity, for no tradition
exists, that can be depended upon concerning their origin.

At 9", arrived at a remarkable pillar, and heaps of brick rubbish.
This superb monument is the only remains of former grandeur, that
has escaped the ravages of time, owing to the solidity of its structure.
The smooth polished shaft is an immense solid block of a small grain-
ed, reddish coloured sandstone, surmounted by a singular and beau.
tiful sculptured capital, on which rests a square tabular block, support-
ing a well sculptured lion in a sitting posture, of the same material.
This pillar seems to have no pedestal, though from the soft and allu-
vial nature of the ground, on which it stands, it is reasonable to sup-
pose, that it must have sunk and buried itself deep in the soil*. If a
part of the earth was removed by digging round the present base, its
pedestal might be discovered, and its real height accurately determin-
ed. It is also probable, that if it ever had a pedestal, an inscription
might be found, which would throw light on its present obscure his-
tory: I have no doubt but it is anterior to the mounds of brick rub-
bish by which it is surrounded, and which extends for the space of
several square miles in all directions. The numerous magnificent
(though old) tanks, amounting to about 50 in number, large and small,
strengthen the general opinion that this place is the site of a large
city, at a remote period inhabited by a numerous and civilized weal-
thy people. I found the dimensions of this pillar to be as follows :

Miength of shaft, 2... csv cece secs eces Lo uinPgaipletes,cc cree vieice seu fteet
From the top dt the shaft to the ide of did ioata dee, Wiaihicrdis beta sok's 0 O10.

PERMMUICTOHG ace ie ek le we ele ese eas sahive base pecs casdce sees cede OG¢
Circumference of shaft, four feet from the ground,.....2..cecesssaseeel2 dow

Such are the present dimensions, but I have no doubt but half its
height is at present buried in the ground.

The sculpture is better than the Egyptian, and the general appear-
ance striking and good. On the shaft are cut the names of a number
of Europeans who had from time to time visited the spot. The
native name for the pillars is Bhim Sinh ka Lattea, Lath, or Gada ;
literally, Baim Sinn’s walking stick. The following tradition is
prevalent amongst the natives of Bassar and Bakhra. 1 had it told me
by several, without deviation.

‘‘ Two thousand years ago lived Bhim Sinh the great. The pillar was used by
him as a walking stick, by which he supported himself when carrying a large tree

* Mr. Rarrray informs me that an excavation was once made to its base,
but no inscription was discovered.—Ep,
s

130 Account of the Bakhra column, and [Marca,

on his shoulder as a bhangt, laden with two hills. The bhangi however broke
with the weight near to the spot where the pillar stands, and two hills or mounds
were there left by Bhim Sinh, and remain to the present day, and are to be
seen, one near the pillar, the other at a distance of a few hundred yards. _

‘‘ Many years after this happened, the spirit of the place appeared to a Bengali
in a dream, and informed him that there was immense treasure buried under
the pillar in copper handis or vessels bound with chains. The spirit re-
quested him to take a journey or pilgrimage to the spot and possess it. The
Bengali travelled to the place, and found the pillar a few feet above the ground,
in the middle of a large jungle, inhabited by wild beasts of every description.
However, notwithstanding the danger, he began to clear away the jungle, and dig
for the treasure. Ata great depth, he came to a well or small tank, on the sur-
face of which floated a large silver choki (or seat), and through a hole in the
middle, the pillar descends down into the water to an unknown depth. By the
side of the well are stationed two swams (large black bees), the size of a man’s
fist, to protect the place and treasure. The Bengali entered this sanctuary, dis-
appeared, and was never heard of more. The pillar after this affair rose to the
height of two ¢ddi trees, and has since been ‘sinking at the rate of an inch an-
nually. Many years after the Bengali’s disappearance, an English gentleman came
to the place and dug down to discover the base of the pillar, but when he came to
the silver Choki he was attacked by two swdms, one of which stung and killed
him on the spot: since that time, no one dare venture to dig below the pillar,
which has subsequently remained unmolested.’’

It is easy to reconcile some parts of this tradition with natural caus-
es. For instance, that the place has at no distant period been a
jungle, inhabited by wild beasts, is very probable ; for several that have
been known to avoid the habitations of man are now found on the
spot, unwilling to quit their ancient haunts. On the elevated part of
a heap of brick rubbish a porcupine has now its den : four holes lead to
its tenement, which is situated at a great depth below. The quantity
of earth and brick rubbish this animal had thrown to the surface
might strengthen the idea that the den had been made by a larger ani-
mal, had it not been frequently seen by the natives who live close to
the spot, one of whom endeavoured to capture the animal, but his for-_
midable armour proved too sharp for the man’s hands and arms, and
he escaped into his den with the loss of a few quills, which I purchased
of the hardy hunter for a few pice.

A few yards to the north of the pillar stands a mound or tumulus
of solid brick-work, of a conical shape, similar to the one above de-
scribed, near Bassar : the top is surmounted by a large pipal tree, to all
appearance many centuries old. The outward parts of this mound
are dilapidated by time. The bricks it has been built with are a foot
square, and have been well burnt; mud has been used in place of
mortar. On the north side an excavation has been made to the very
centre, by a doctor (as I was informed), resident at Mozafferpur, 30

1835.) of the Image of Buddha discovered near it. 131

years ago, whose name I could not ascertain. The doctor, however,
(according to a native’s account, who assisted in the work,) found no
treasure, but only a well of great depth, situated immediately under
the centre, which I could not find any vestige of, although I made a
search for it. At present a Hindu Fagir has availed himself of
the doctor’s labours by converting the extremity of the excavation into
a place of worship, making a few images of clay, and fixing them to
the sides of the cavity.

One of these images, coloured black, attracted my notice from its
singular grotesque appearance: on closer inspection, I discovered
that the lower part was of stone, finely sculptured, and altogether
different from the upper which I found to be made of clay. I suc-
ceeded in purchasing the deity from the Faqir for two rupees, and
after washing, picking, and separating the outward covering of clay,
in an adjoining tank, a fragment of beautiful ancient sculpture was
brought to light. On further inquiry, the Fagir’s artfulness was
detected by a person present, who recognized the fragment to have
been found by the zemindar of the place when digging among the
ruins for bricks to build his present pakka house, a few hundred yards
distant. This fragment of sculpture represents the lower part of a
figure of Buddha, sitting cross-legged, according to the custom of the
east, with the arms resting across the upper part of the thigh. On
the soles of the feet (which are turned up), and on the palm of the left
hand, is represented the lotus flower*. The back of this fragment is
beautifully sculptured, with two lions standing in an erect position, up-
on two elephants. On each side of the base is cut alion half cou-
chant with a small female figure in the centre. The stone is the same
as that of the pillar, viz. a red fine grained sandstone, very hard. On
the lowest part of the fragment is an inscription in Sanscrit, which
the Pandits of this part of the country cannot as yet decypher.

I have no doubt but this fragment is coeval with the pillar, if not
connected with its history.

Note on the above by J. P.

The mutilated image thus fortuitously rescued by Mr. Stepuenson,
and by him presented to the Asiatic Society, is represented in Plate IX.
The inscription around the pedestal, which had baffled the pandits of
Tirhut, excited considerable curiosity on its exhibition to the Society,
from the circumstance of none of the ancient Buddhist images in our
museum, whether from Benares or from the Bhagelpur hills, possessing
such a characteristic.

* The emblem always borne by a Chakravartti, or universal sovereign, and
& fortiori by Buddha.—Eb.

s2

132 Note on the Inscription on the Pedestal [Marcn,

A singular coincidence shortly after served very materially to in-
crease the interest thus raised regarding this short and otherwise
trivial inscription.

It may not be generally known to the members of the Society, that
some of my Benares friends, Captain Tuormssy, Secretary of the San-
scrit College, Major Grant, and Lieut. ALexanpER CUNNINGHAM,
of the Engineers, stimulated by the success of General Venrura’s opera-
tions in the Panjab, have undertaken at joint expence with myself to
open carefully the large Buddhist monument at Sarnath*, so frequently
alluded to in the Asiatic Researches, wherein it is conjectured from
the evidence of some ancient inscriptions on copper, dug up near the
spot, to have been erected by the sons of Bhupala, a Raja of Gaur, in
the eleventh centuryf.

Lieut. Cunnincuam, who is still zealously occupied in this interest-
ing work, at such moments as his official duties will permit, has him-
self promised me a full account of his operations, when the whole shall
be completed ; but he has permitted me to anticipate him in mention-
ing the subject I am now about te introduce, should I be able to fur-
nish a full explanation; which the sequel will prove to be the case.

At the depth then of ten feet anda half from the summit of the
stone building, he extracted a slab of stone 283 inches long, 13 inches
broad, by 43 thick, bearing an inscription in an ancient form of Devana-
gari, of which, after referring in vain to the Pandits of the degenerate
K4si, he sent me an exact facsimile by dak.

The stone was found lying with its head to the south-west, among
the bricks and mud. It is of a pinkish hue, and all the letters are in
excellent preservation.

Lieut. CunnrneHam remarked the similarity of some of the forms
to the Sanscrit of the Manikyala coins, Plate XXI. figs. 10, 11; and to
some letters of the Allahabad inscription, No. 2. in the second volume.

The facsimile, (represented on a smaller scale in fig, 2 of Plate
1X,) reachedme, asI have before stated, while the Tirhut image was under
examination, and it immediately struck me from one or two prominent
letters, as well as from the general appearance of the whole, that the

* It must not be supposed, that in this enterprize, the feelings of the natives are
in any way offended. The Hindus are quite unconcerned about the tope, and
the two sects of Jains in Benares, who are now at variance with each other, had
joined in requesting me to open the building at their expence, that it might
be ascertained to which party (Digambari or Swetambart) the enclosed image might
belong. My departure from Benares alone prevented my satisfying their curiosity

in 1830.
+ See As. Res. vol. ix. pp. 74, 203; x. 130.

1885.] of the Buddha Image from Tirhut. 133

two inscriptions were substantially the same, although the characters
of the two differed as much from one another as the Nagari from the
Bengali alphabet. Upon shewing them to Govinp RAm Sudsrri, Mr.
Witson’s intelligent Pandit, and comparing theletters with the Tibetan
and Gya forms of the Sanscrit alphabet, the identity of the two was
confirmed, and several words made out, among them the titles ‘‘ Ta-
thdgata and Maha Sramana,” both of an important Bauddha accepta-
tion; but the context was devoid of meaning. The Pandit’s meritorious
efforts were communicated toourlearned Vice-President, Dr. Mitt, who,
recognizing at once the form of the ancient dh, a semilunate letter, which
had been taken for a v, was enabled to complete and give the true meaning
of the inscription, with the exception of the initial word, which (in con-
sequence of the stroke at the commencement) was read 44 hic, in the
S4rnath version, and ¥4, in the other sentence, instead of % quz, in both.
This mistake led to the reading of the word ywat prabhavo in the sin-
gular, in lieu of 3 War in the plural, and connecting with it the word
WH as part of the compound instead of wat separately, thus:

wa watawa Sq ay aad Wread asi FAT fatra Ua aay
AeA ||
the interpretation of which was thus given by Dr. Mix:

« This is the generative source of the cause of meritorious du-
ties. For the cause of these hath TaraAcara [or Buppwa] declared.
But as to what is the opposing principle of these, that likewise doth
the Mand Sramana [the great ascetic], declare.”

The Tirhut inscription was found to differ only from the other in
the substitution of two entirely synonymous words, the transposition
of two others, and the omission of the particle Ai ‘‘ for,” united to
avadat in the second line. The translation of the passage was precisely
the same. Introducing the corrections subsequently made, (as it is
unnecessary to repeat the reading in its imperfect state) the text of the
Tirhut image will stand thus in the modern Devanagari character :

oF aa SAINT GH VY Tara sare Tat a ar fatra ea areat
axel AAT |

We shall come to the corrected translation presently.

It was remarked that the latter part of the passage being in the
present tense, as compared to avadat and uvdcha inthe former part,
seemed to imply a continuation of the sentence; or, at any rate, left
something inconclusive and unsatisfactory in the translation.

The circumstance, however, of two sculptured inscriptions found at
distant places in terms of the same import, though varying in phrase

134 Original of the Sarnath and Tirhut (Marcu,

and in form of letter so much as to prove that one was by no means a
mere copy of the other, suggested to my mind, that they must
assuredly contain some very common text from the Bauddha scriptures,
and I accordingly hastened to enquire of my friend Mr. Csoma pE
Koroés, whether he had met with any similar passage, in his extensive
examination of the Tibetan volumes.

He did not at first recognize it, but promised to bear it in mind; and
sure enough, in the course of a few days, Mr. Csoma brought me the
pleasing intelligence that he had discovered the very sentence, agrecing
word for word with the Sarnath version, in three volumes of the Kah-
gyur collection; being in Tibetan characters, according to their mode
of writing Sanscrit, and without translation. Moreover on referring
to the corresponding Sanscrit originals, in the Lantsha and in the
modern Devanagari copies of the same work (forming part of the trea-
sures of Bauddha literature, made known to the world by our associate
Mr. B. H. Hopeson) noless than fifteen examples were brought to
light, of the verbatim introduction of the same text.

In all these instances.it- was found.to occur-as a kind of peroration,
or concluding paragraph at the end of avolume: Thus, it is intradu-
ced at the termination of the first, second, and third khanda of the
Prajnd Paramita, (Tib. Sher-chin,) each containing 25,000 slokas ; and
again, at the end of the 5th khanda, which is an epitome of the sata
sahasrtkd, or 100,000 slokas, contained in the four preceding sections*.
In the Tibetan version the sentence is sometimes followed by the word
QaN bkris, a contraction for Ay sy bkra-shis, blessing, gloryt,”
and sometimes by its. Sanscrit equivalent in. Tibetan characters
HEAq, Mangalam. :

Something however was. still wanting to remove-the ambiguity
of the abbreviated sentence, and this Mr. Csoma’s acute and assiduous
research soon enabled him to supply; for in the an Do class of the
Kah-gyur, vol. % or 9, leaf 510, he was so fortunate as to meet with the
same passage connected with another Sanscrit sloka, in the Tibetan
character, and followed immediately by a faithful translation into the
latter language. te ; ;

As the development of the passage has- thus acquired importance,
Mr. Csoma has obligingly transcribed the whole from the Tibetan vo-
lume, first in Sanscrit, and below in Tibetan, with a literal version in
the Roman character.

* See Mr. Wixson’s account. of the Kah-gyur. Guanings, vol. iii, page.
243, and JouRNAL, vol. i. Ui, 8 i

+ See Csoma’s Tibetan Grammar, page 24,

Jour. As. Soe. Vol. IV. Pl@_ IX.
: ==

Image of Buddha
dug up in the neighbourhood of the Bakhra Lith. in Tirhut
with an inseription on the pedestal

———— + ===
Pe ae —
=

Sa areleleloy tao 7

Inscription on a Stone extracted from the Sarndth Tope. near Benares.
A NIP Paes i 7 —
Nee HRT AFHIIT

ACNE GILG A R_

=~

Viet

ERAT ACTS YA QUenyy ||
mL fo ng : may ONY

al] vai i)

2OITUZ FUSTZAI
EGHgMal ¢e7z2434

1
|
Lihsse \
Inscription on a rock of the Mandara Hill. near Bhagelpur

Ornament on the periphery of the Capital of the Allahabad Lith.
b (Ste Vol. M. Pt.

( \ y /J Ry |, & (( }
( Wee f : We
I RRL YS OG

———

Pe ND —_ nee,
A NPS . ae a
OO A I OI

, Sgameme?1%4"
) ”\ PA Pra JW Wt Po)

eat om heghd a

1835.] Inscriptions found in the Bauddha Scriptures. 135

Sanscrit version in Tibetan characters.
Tie Iva ’ vy v = ay ° ae v ¥. BQ A? rary =e ©
imo BAYA 34244" SQ"4yI * Ds yA Bl W B
fay Vv
a Naas MMe T NANNY A LP ] AUS QAP TyTN ae if
’ °, - a 4 v ry v b ¢ v h ’ o *
WSLS ET THVT SANT |
Yé dharma hétu prabhav4, hétun téshati Tathdgaté hyavadat,
Téshaii cha yo nirodha, évam vadi Maha Shramanas.
Sarva papasyakarani (? am), kushalasyopasapradam,
Sva chittam paridamanum, étad Buddhanushasanam.

Tibetan Translation.
SN aN GIN SY EAVES 185 Raa ARNIS l
a eee Naa ay T Qk VARIG 25)" goa T ways"
Yo TN T Sara wayal’ Say ach T LOA Naar Fr uiGa

WsQ 7, Na Sy qy4'n’ Qa Ya” ATT

Chhos rnams thams chad rgyu las byung,
Dé rgyu de-bzhin gshegs-pas gsung,
Regyu-la hgog-pa gang yin-pa,

Hdi skad gsung-va dge-sbyong chhé :
Sdigpa chi yang mi bya sté ;

Dgé-va phun sum tshogs-par spyad ;
Rang-gi semsni yongs-su gdul ;
Sangs-rgyas bstan-pa Adi yin-no.

Here then was the solution of the enigma. The sentence thus fre-
quently repeated was the preamble to the quaint compendium of the
Buddhist doctrines, which was so universally known to the professors
of this faith that it was no more necessary to repeat it on all occasions
than it would be to insert the gloria patri at the end of each psalm in
our own ritual. The sense was now seen to run on from the present
tense of the second part of the sentence to the maxims which follow-
ed: and the whole passage was thus literally and intelligibly rendered
from the Tibetan by Mr. Csoma pe KO6ros.

«* Whatever moral (or human) actions arise from some cause,
The cause of them has been declared by TarHaGara ;
What is the check to these actions,

*In the last two lines of this version M. Csoma proposes to read wy aL’ re
akaranam, NaS sampddam, and zy fr 5 a a paridamanam, which

accord better with the sense of the Tibetan version. ‘The marks for 7 and am
° are nearly similar, and are often misprinted in the Tibetan books: so also
the subjoined r _, is often confounded with the vowel mark & Q:

136 Original of the Sarnath and Tirhut (Marcu,

Is thus set forth by the great SraMANAs.

‘No vice is to be committed :

Every virtue must be perfectly practised :

The mind must be brought under entire subjection ;
This is the commandment of Buppna.’”’

It is unfortunate that the Sanscrit text of the moral maxim
has not been any where found in the Lantsa copy of the Prajna Pa-
ramita. Its authenticity rests, therefore, solely on the Tibetan version,
in which there is apparently some error ; for the sentence, as it stands,
is not pure Sanscrit, and certainly will not bear the interpretation
which Mr. Csoma has given literally from the vernacular translation
of Tibet. Dr. Mizz has favored me with some valuable observations on
the passage, which, with his permission, I here insert. Mr. Hopcson
will doubtless be able to confirm the tr = oo = consulting the

Sanscrit original of the SWQ°Q4" Qy" QQ Ho'a" Qiks dPah-var
hgrovahi tidgé Adsin (Sans. shiirangama samddhi, the heroical extasy),
which may still exist in some of the monasteries of Népal.

‘“‘ The interesting discovery of the passageinthe Buddhist sacred books from which
the Sd4rnath inscription is taken, by M. Csoma px K6rés, removes all doubt as to
the reading of the first word which I unfortunately took for the demonstrative
pronoun way, whereas it is the relative 4 to which the aa in the next line

refers. It follows that the next word wal should be read separately from
the compound Sqaaar: which is of course plural. M. Csoma’s version is

here perfectly agreeable to the Sanscrit; and my translation of the former half
of this sentence requires to be corrected by his.

Iam by no means equally well satisfied-with the other sentence quoted by M.
Csoma as following the former in some of the places where it occurs in the Bud-
dhist scriptures : the Sanscrit text of which is certainly corrupted in the copies he
cites, and, except in the Jast line, exhibits no sentence corresponding in form to his
Latin or English version. I have also very considerable doubt of the accuracy
of the opinion, that this second stanza is the clue to the supposed enigma in the
first, or necessary in any respect to complete its meaning. That it is even the
object of reference in the former stanza, appears to me doubtful. The occurrence
of the former passage,—not only in the two several inscriptions of Benares and
Tirhut, by itself,—but at the end of chapters in the places you pointed out to me
from M. Csoma’s Lantsa MSS., seem to indicate that it has a complete meaning

in itself: and the wa ‘‘ thus’’ or “‘ alike’’ of the fourth line may as well be

understood with reference to the preceding clause, as to any sentence following.
The metrical structure of the two passages confirms me in the idea of their indepen-
dency : the latter being in the ordinary Anustup measure, with about the same
degree of license as we find that measure in the Puranas: whereas the former,
though approximating in places to the measure of eight syllables, is as remote
froma the rules of VALMIKI’s sloka as are the hymns of the Vedas: and it is equally
irreducible to the laws of the A’rya or any more modern poetical measure.

In the translation of the latter passage, I would advert particularly to the line
which M. Csoma has translated, ‘ Every virtue must be practised.’ I do not see how

1835.] Inscriptions found in the Bauddha Scriptures. 137

the Sanscrit, however amended, can bear that meaning. The first word, kusalasya,
ordinarily means ‘ of felicity,’ or else, ‘ of skill and cleverness :’ while the other
word, which, coalescing with Ausalasya, makes up the whole line, is certainly not
Sanscrit in its present state ; forthere is not, and cannot be, any such compound as
wuaye. By making the two last letters ae, i. e. mpadas instead of pradam,
(which however seems clear in the Tibetan character), and reading the last
word of the first line <pT instead of azxfor, I obtain the meaning, ;

‘ In the abstinence from [lit. non-doing of] all sin, is the attainment of felicity.’

A third meaning of kusaJa—though much less used among brahmanical Hindus
—is pointed out in the Néna-artha-varga of AMARA-S1NHA, who was himself a
Buddhist, in the following line, (Késha, lib. ili. c. 4, s. 23, 1. 206,) which may
furnish us with an approximation in ultimate meaning, though not in the structure
of the sentence, to the Tibetan explanation given by M. Csoma.

waif wagay gue fafea fay

“« Accomplishment, happiness, holiness : in these three meanings is the neuter
noun kusalam learnedly understood.”’

Adopting the last of these three senses, that of pwnyam or sanctity, and taking
the word wpasampadas in asense which the Buddhist* use of the term points out,
we may render the second line in question,

‘¢ The advancement, or high attainment, of purity.”’

The third line requires the omission of the anusvdra over the fi of the word
chitta, to make it good Sanscrit, viz. ‘ the subjugation of one’s own mind,’
wfanuiteaa ; unless, retaining this anusvara, we altered the other word
from paridamanam to paridamaniyam, viz. ‘ One’s mind must be subjugated,’
afar ufteaaty. I think the choice lies clearly between these two readings,
of which the former seems the best, and most accordant with the last line, as well
as with the rules of Anustup measure.

I subjoin a literal version of both the stanzas according to my notion of them,
dropping however the proposed emendation of wzacw for qacfu in the first

line of the latter, and adoptiag the reading sjqxcw as proposed by M. Csoma.

= = Quz que officia exstant in-causa- qud-
bal GeHT eqaeHal | c vis-oliginem-habentia,

SS. SN Jausam eorum SIC-PROFECTUS ille
G q q aT (2) Taat WIT | (Buddhas) quidem declaravit.

aut = St fazra Eorum que quod obstaculum ezstat,
*
Us Al AETHAT’ |
SATU ITHLA | Omnis-peccati renunciatio,
RUT aTS: Sanctitatis profectus,
atanufceast | Proprii-intellectis-subjugatio,
wag Sq | Hec est BUDDH A-disciplina.”
Dr. Mitu’s conjectural emendation of the 2nd line of the second of
these stanzas, has been since unexpectedly confirmed by the Singhalese

Ita quogue dicens MAGNUS ASCE-
TICUS.

* The word upasampada is technically understood of the superior order of the Bud-
dhist priesthood, the supply of which, when it had become extinct in Ceylon, has fre-
quently been an object of solicitude to the more religious of the Candian monarchs,
and has even been the occasion of embassies to Siam. For the attainment of the or-
der, the possession of 227 separate gunas or virtuous qualities is requisite : each of
which is distinctly mentioned in their treatises concerning ordination.

T

138 Report on the Island of Sccotra. (Marca,

Christian convert from Buddhism, Ratna-Psta: who repeats both
passages in the Pali or Pracrit form from memory—describing the
former especially as universally current among the disciples of Buddha.
His reading, however, gives upasampada (Sanscrit FUWASt: profectas)
in the plural. And in the former passage, that of the inscription, he
omits the particle hz, and instead of the verb avadat or uvacha, he reads
the synonymous dha. His Pali reading, which will be immediately

recognized by scholars as good Magadha Pracrit, is as follows :
‘ Ye dhammd hetuppabhava, Tesdn hetun tathayato
A’ha tesan cha yo nirodha: Evan vadi maha samana.
Sabba pdpassa akaranan: Kusalassa upasanpadda :
Sa chitta paridamanan : Etan Buddhanusdsanan.

but Ratna P&ua says that the latter couplet is not necessarily con-
nected with the former. On the contrary another series of verses ge-
nerally follows it in the daily service of the Buddhist temples of Ceylon.

The compendium of the precepts of Buppua certainly occurs in nu-
merous instances without the previous couplet. ‘Thus it is inserted in
the Tibetan version of the saint’s letter to RatnavAti, given as one
of the examples in Mr. Csoma’s new Grammar, which will also be
found among the extracts published in the third volume of this Jour-
NAL, page 61; and there would have been no reason to suspect that
it was implied in the inconclusive sentence engraved on the Tirhut and
Sarnath tablets, had not the actual text been found by our learned
Hungarian guest, to whose laborious and willing investigation of the
volumes which are sealed to all but himself, we are mainly indebted
for this probable if not conclusive solution of the enigma.

IV.—Report on the Island of Socotra. By Lieut. J. R. Weutusrsp,
Indian Navy, Assistant Surveyor.

The following Report has been compiled from a daily journal, contain-
ing copiousnotices of all that came under my observation duringa deputation
of two months on the island of Socotra, under orders of Lieut. Hanes, com-
manding the Palinurussurveying Brig ; butasthe admission of minute details,
illustrative of either the condition and character of the inhabitants, or the
productions, topography, &c. of the Island can scarcely be deemed necessary
in an official paper, similar to that whichby my instructions is required of me
in thisinstance, I have considered it necessary to condensethe whole into as
brief a space as has appeared consistent with the objects therein specified,
notifying at the same time, that I have preserved the original notes, in the
event of Government requiring either more detailed or extended informa-
tion on the various points to which my attention has been directed.

By separating the various subjects contained in this paper into sections

‘under different heads, I trust the Right Honorable the Governor in Coun-
cil will be enabled, without wading through any extraneous matter, to seek
at once the species of information which he may require.

1835.] Report on the Island of Socotra. 139

The [sland of Socotra appears to have been known at an early period
to the ancient geographers. Pronemy notices it under the appellation of
Dios Cavedis Ins: and Arrian specifies, that the inhabitants of it were sub-
jected to the authority of the kings of the Incense Country ; but from this
period it appears to have attracted little attention, and may almost be con-
sidered as lost to Geography, until the visit of Marco Poto in the 13th
century, who does not however make any particular mention of its inhabi-
tants or resources. Vasco pa Gama, in his memorable voyage from Lisbon to
Calicut in 1497, passed Socotra without seeing it ; but seven years after-
wards, it was made known to European navigators by Fernanprz Pererra;
and ALBUQUERQUE, at a somewhat later period, took possession of it. At the
commencement of the 17th century, when the increasing spirit of commerce
and enterprise led several of our squadrons to enter the ports in the Red
Sea, Socotra was frequently visited for shelter or refreshment; and in con-
sequence of a general belief during the year 1798, that Buonaparre, who
was then in Egypt, contemplated a junction of his forces with those of
Hyper Atrin India, Commodore Buanxet, with a squadron from the Cape
of Good Hope, was dispatched to take possession of it*. But notwithstand-
ing these several visits, our accounts connected with its inhabitants, ap-
pearance and produce, have been vague and contradictory. By one traveller,
Captain Dauntoun, a notice of whose travels is in my possession, it is ob-
served, that “ its chief produce is aloes, though the annual amount does
not exceed a ton—cattle may be bought but exceedingly small, according
to the dry rotky barrenness of the island—wood at 12 pence a man’s
burden, every particular is a very dear penny worth.” By another, it is
described as a populous fruitful island ; that the inhabitants trade to Goa
with its produce, viz. fine aloes, frankincense, ambergris, dragon’s blood,
rice, dates, and coral.

Inconsistent as these statements appear, there is reason to believe both
may have described with fidelity that which at the period of their visit
was presented before them. Independent of the evidence which exists as
to the former fertility of the island, it is necessary to consider, that those
parts which would be exposed to the view of the passing traveller are most-
ly naked limestone, parts of which are indeed covered with a scanty sprink-
ling of soil, but that of a quality so hard and bad, that it merely nourishes
a feeble grass, which dries up almost as soon as the rain ceases, which may
have caused it to spring forth. Upon our first arrival at Tamarida, in the
early part of January, some recent showers had clothed the hill with a
lively verdure to the very base of the granite spires, and the whole looked
fresh and beautiful ; a month afterwards all was parched and barren.

More than one vessel at different periods had been dispatched to ex-
amine the nature of its harbours and anchorages ; but owing to some cause
which I cannot explain, our information on these points could in no higher
degree be depended on. Our ignorance on these subjects strikes us the more

* These and the other scanty notices found in this paper, are extracted from books
in my possession on board; other information will of course be found in works to
which I have it not in my power at present to refer.

T2

140 Report on the Island of Socotra. (Marca,

forcibly when we consider the position of Socotra, its lying directly in the
route of the trade from India, by the way of the Red Sea: the entrance to
which, it. may be said to command on the one hand, and close to the track
of our ships by the way of the Cape on the other—a position, the advan-
tages of which under an enterprising population and enlightened govern-
ment, could scarcely have failed at some period to have brought it into
great commercial notice and prosperity. In periods of antiquity, Socotra
served as a station for merchants ; and it may be observed, that these
advantages were not over-looked by a maritime nation like the Portu-
guese. The ports which remain in the vicinity of Tamarida still attest the
importance which they attached to its possession ; but since the decline of
their power, at the conclusion of the sixteenth century, Socotra has conti-
nued to be disregarded by European nations.

At the commencement of this year, various causes combined to render the
establishment of a steam communication between India and Europe an ob-
ject of general interest, and discussion ; and the attention of Government
became particularly directed towards this island, along the shores of which
it was anticipated, that some well-sheltered harbours might be discovered,
which would serve at all seasons as a depot for coals. In order to determine
this point, Captain Hates in the Palinurus Surveying Brig was directed
to proceed at once to the island, and to execute a minute trigonometrical
survey of its exterior, while his attention at the same time was called to
“ obtaining the fullest information regarding the government, population,
produce, fertility and quality of soil, as well as the religion, customs, man-
ners, and wealth of its inhabitants.’ While Captain Hanes should occupy
himself with the former of these duties, confining his observation to the
sea coast and its vicinity, I was directed to proceed towards the interior
in order that I might, from personal observation, report on the various
subjects on which Government was desirous of possessing information.

Providing myself with camels, and a guide, I first journeyed by the interi-
or towards Colesseah, examining the greater part of the western portion
of the island. After concluding my observations in this neighbourhood, and
communicating with the ship, returned to Tamarida. A chief, in the
mean time,ynamed Hamep Ben T ary, arrived at Colesseah, who after leaving
most positive directions, prohibiting our further progress, again left for the
continent. We were in consequence closely confined to the town for a few
days, but I at length got clear and completed my survey of the western end.
The map will best exhibit the nature and extent of these journeys, and I
shall not enter into any detail of them here, or make any other remarks
than that the Arabs were unceasing in their attempts to throw obstacles
in the way of my completion of it.

The Island of Socotra is of the shape of an acute triangle, having for
its vertex, a flat promontory towards the east called Ras Mamse; the
coast line‘on the other side runs in aS. W. direction, and is nearly straight ;
the general direction of the northern face is formed by a succession
of small bays; the base is also indented by a deep bay. Its lengthis 714
miles, and breadth at the broadest part 214 miles. The whole island may

1835.]} Report on the Island of Socotra. 141

be considered as a pile of mountains of nearly equal height, which are almost
surrounded by a low plain, extending from their base to the margin of the
sea: this is of an irregular width, varying from 4 to 2 miles, excepting that
between Ras Kattany and Ras Shab, where the mountains rise up perpen-
dicularly from the sea, and it there disappears altogether. Throughout the
whole extent of this belt, with the exception of those parts which are watered
by the mountain streams in their progress towards the sea, and some
spaces hereafter specified, the soil is hard, and of a bad quality, and does not,
in its present state, appear susceptible of cultivation. The southern side,
though considerably less fertile than the northern, affords, nevertheless, in
the vicinity of Ras Mamse many of its productions ; but to the westward, it
is as arid and barren as the worst parts of Arabia. There the force of the S.
W. wind has blown the sand up from the sea shore, where it is so fine as to
be nearly impalpable, and formed it into a continuous range of sand hills,
which extend parallel to the beach for several miles: from hence it spreads
over the plain, and is even in some places deposited in vast quantities, at a
distance of three miles from the sea, at the base of the mountains, which
there form a barrier that alone could prevent it from overwhelming the
natural soil of the whole island on the northern side. This belt is stony, and
is covered with a dwarfish bush about six feet in height, the foliage of which
is retained throughout the year, and gives to the space, when it is grown, an
appearance of being clothed with verdure. Such is the appearance of the
sea coast ; but the high lands exhibit a great variety of soiland surface. As
a general remark, it may however be observed, that nothing in the N. E.
monsoon presents a stronger contrast than the western and eastern parts
of the island ; while the former is destitute of verdure, has but scanty pas-
turage, and has (with the exception of a few places near the sea) no other
water than that which is retained in natural reservoirs ; the latter or eastern
portion is fed by numerous streams; its valleys nourish luxuriant grass; herds
of cattle are numerous, and the scenery in some places little inferior to that
of our own country.

But we must now, as the most central and lofty, examine the granite
range of mountains in the vicinitv of Tamarida; steep valleys intersect
this chain, dividing it into narrow ridges, which extend in a north-easterly
and south-westerly direction. Of these the lower part is composed of a
red aluminous porphyry, and the upper of a coarse-grained grey granite
which protrudes several of its spires to the height, as was ascertained
by a trigonometrical admeasurement, of five thousand feet ; the summit
of these is consequently seldom free from clouds ; but when the weather
is clear, their appearance is broken and picturesque. The lower part of
this chain is covered with the same dwarfish tree which is found on the
plains : higher up there is a great variety of trees and aromatic plants ; but
the granite spires merely nourish-a light-colored moss, and are destitute of
verdure. Connected with the granite range, and extending from it to the
8. W. there is a lower ridge, averaging in height about 1500 feet, com-
posed of a compact cream-colored limestone. From this the hills diverge

142 Report on the Island of Socotra. [Marcu,

in short ranges towards the southern shore : their outline is mostly smooth
and rounded, excepting on the side nearest to the sea, where it in general
presents a steep wall. The whole of the western and the greater part of
the eastern portion of the island is composed of hills similar in their ap-
pearance, elevation, and structure to this range.

As the whole Island of Socotra may be considered as one mass of pri-
mitive rock, we cannot expect to find it distinguished by any remarkable fer-
tility of soil. I yet find it so varied, that it is difficult to speak of it in any
general terms. The summit and sides of the greater part of the mountains,
composing the eastern portion of the island, present in some places the
smooth surface of the rock entirely denuded of soil ; in others the rain has
worn the surface into hollows, and other irregularities, in which there is
lodged a shallow deposit of light earth, from whence a few shrubs spring
forth. On the sea face of the hills, on the northern side of the island, and
amidst the sides and elevated regions in the vicinity of the granite peaks,
we find a dark rich vegetable mould, which teems with the most luxu-
riant vegetation. In the plain about Tamarida, some portions near
Caédhaop, and several beautiful valleys and plains which I crossed on my
return from Ras Mamse, the soil consists of a reddish colored earth, which
nourishes at certain seasons an abundant supply of grass, and appears well
adapted for the cultivation of grain, fruits, or vegetables. In those valleys
through which the streams flow, there are now only extensive groves of
date trees ; but the existence of a broad border of beautiful turf, occasional
enclosures of Dekhan, and (though but rarely) a plantation of indigo or
cotton, indicate no want of richness or fertility of the soil.

Climate.

Though this island is situated but a short distance from the con-
tinents of Arabia and Africa, and is in fact on the same parallel with
their most parched and burning plains, yet from both monsoons blowing
over a vast expanse of water, it enjoys aclimate remarkably temperate and
cool : a register of the thermometer which I kept during our stay, from the
12th of January to the 14th March, exhibits the mean daily temperature
at 703°, while several springs at but a slight elevation from the sea, into
which the thermometer was immersed, indicated the mean annual tem-
perature at 73°. On the hills it is of course found to be much cooler. Until
within a few days previous to our quitting the island, the monsoon blew
very fresh, and even at times swept through the valleys with a violence I
have rarely seen equalled. The sky was usually overcast with clouds, and
while other parts of Asia and Africa, under the same parallel, had yet some
months to elapse before their termination of the dry seasons, Socotra en-
joyed frequent and copious rains ; for these she is principally indebted at
this season to her granite mountains : their lofty peaks obstruct the clouds
which strike against their sides: either depositing their aqueous particles
near their summit, or precipitating them in plentiful showers on the sur-
rounding country. It is these also which contribute to nourish the nume-
rous mountain streams which intersect several parts of the island. Several

1835.] Report on the Island of Socotra. 143

of these are of a width and depth that in Arabia would almost entitle them
to the appellation of rivers. They all originate near the granite moun-
tains, and rolling with a considerable descent down the rocky ravines, they
generally unite several with each other near their extremity, and after-
wards wind their way more slowly through the valleys into the sea. Those
on the western part of the island have a rapid descent, and are in the N.
E. monsoon dried up, at but a short distance from their source, while
those on the eastern side continue throughout the year to discharge their
waters into the ocean.

I could learn but little concerning the influence of the S. W. monsoon
here from the natives. They describe the rain as being frequent and
heavy, and the showers in July and August nearly incessant. No bugga~
lows at this season touch at their island, nor do any of their own boats
venture to sea. The trees, wherever the wind has reached them in their
inclined and beset position, bear good evidence to its power. Thunder-
storms are frequent at the setting in of the monsoon, and accidents from
the lightning are described to be of frequent occurrence.

Natural Productions.

Among the few natural productions which are found on this island, that
which holds the first rank is the aloe, ‘‘ Aloe spicata, and Aloe Socotrina,”
called in the language of the island Tayof, and by the Arabs Subal, for
this plant has been held famous from the earliest periods and it is con-
sequently too well known to need any description. They are usually
found on the sides and summits of the limestone mountains, at an eleva-
tion of from 500 to 1000 feet from the level of the plains. The plant
appears to thrive only in parched and barren places. Its leaves are pluck-
ed at any period, and after being placed in a skin, the juice is suffered to
exude from them. In this state they are brought in to Tamarida and
Colesseah, and there disposed of for dates. From hence it is mostly ship-
ped off to Muscat, where its price varies very considerably. In 1833, the best
sold for one rupee the Bengal seile (seer ?), while of that which was more in-
different, five seiles might be procured for the dollar. The Socotrina aloes,
when pure, are the finest in the world, but owing to the careless manner in
which they are gathered and packed, they contract many impurities, and
their value is proportionably deteriorated. Formerly every part of the
island producing the aloe was farmed out to different individuals, and the
whole produce at a fixed valuation was monopolized by the Sultan, who
then resided on the island. The boundaries, which consisted of loose
stone walls, and had been carried with immense labour over hill and dale,
still remain under the present unsettled government ; the descendants of
the owners to whom they were allotted have either withdrawn their claims,
or are forgotten. At present any one collects it who chooses to take the trou-
ble, and not a grain is levied on account of the Sultan, as they lodge but
little in ware-houses and merely collect it when the arrival of a ship or
buggalow creates a demand. The quantity produced has been erroneously
supposed to be much less than it is in reality ; but on the western side of

144 Report on the Island of Socotra. (Marc,

the island the hills for an extent of several miles are now so thickly stud-
ded with it, that it is not likely even at any future period that the whole
of that which might be, will be collected. The quantity reported within
the last few years has varied very much ; in 1833 it amounted to 83 skins,
or about two tons. Next in importance to the aloe comes the Dragon’s
blood tree, Pterocarpus Draco, the gum from which, Sanguis Draconis, is
also collected by the Bedouins at all seasons. As this gum is known to be
produced by several trees, and the species on which it is found in Socotra
may not therefore be known in Europe, I shall give a short account of it.
Like the aloe it is usually met with on the limestone hills, rarely at a less
elevation than 800, and sometimes as much as 2000, feet above the level of
the sea ; but it is never found on the plains. The trunk is usually about
12 inches in diameter, and its height varies from 10 to 12 feet ; the
branches are numerous, but short and thickly interwoven with each other.
The leaves are of a coriaceous structure, and about 12 inches in length ;
they are of a sword-like form, pointed at the extremity, and somewhat ex.
tended at the base, where they are sessile and somewhat resemble those of
the pine-apple. In this part they are connected with the branch of the
tree, and radiating from it an indefinite number, they assume a fan-like
shape. ‘These together form the upper part of the tree, and by the variety
in their shape and distribution, give rise to most fantastic appearances.
We were not sufficiently fortunate to obtain any specimen of the flower or
fruit, but Botanists describe it as belonging to the 17th class of Linneus,
and to the natural order Leguminosa.

The gum exudes spontaneously from the tree, and it does not appear
usual, on any occasion, to make an incision for that purpose. Two kinds
were shown to me, of which that which is of a dark crimson color, called
“ Moselle,” is esteemed the best ; its price at Muscat is from 6 to 8 rupees
the seile. Dragon’s-blood is called by the Arabs Dum Khoheil, and Edah by
the Socotrians. I was frequentlyassured, that not more than a tenth of the
quantity which might be procured, was ever collected by the Bedouins; but
this, as withthe aloes, appears tobe owing to there beingno regular demand.

From a tree, called in the language of the island, Amara, they procure a
light-colored gum, which is slightly odoriferous, but is much inferior to
that called Oliban, obtained on the Arabian coast. Sketches and descriptions
were taken of the other varieties of trees on the island, but as they do not
appear available for building, or any useful purpose, and are merely remark-
able for being indigenous to the island, I have not considered it necessary
to swell this paper with any remarks on them. A large collection of plants
was also made, and the Botanist on the granite peaks would yet meet
with a rich harvest. On the summit of these mountains the Bedouinscollect
a grey-colored moss, called Shennah, which is used by the Arab females to
dye their faces of a yellow color. It adheres firmly to the granite spires,
the whole surface of which is covered with it ; they thus receive a coloring
which is not their own, but which is not however far removed from it. As
agriculture is almost wholly unknown on the island of Socotra, the only

1835.] Report on the Island of Socotra. 145

grain which is cultivated on any part of the island is called dekhan ;
this is preferred to any other, because it requires less attendance,
and if watered, will produce a erop at any season: provided there is
water in its vicinity, they do not appear to be at all solicitous as to the
quality of the soil, or the spots they select to serve as fields. They mere-
ly remove the loose stones, and with them build up a well, to prevent the
inroads of the cattle ; the soil is then somewhat loosened with a pointed
stick, (for they have no articles of husbandry,) and after being divided by
low narrow embankments into small squares, the seed is thrown on them
much in the same way as it isin England. In the absence of rain these
squares are filled with water twice a day, until the grain has nearly attain-
ed its full growth, when once is considered sufficient. It is now tied in
the upper part into portions about the size of sheaves, in which state it is
allowed to remain until it is ripened and is cut down. When milk is
abundant, and they can obtain dates, dekhan-is rarely partaken of ; but
when the supply of these is but scanty, it forms the chief article of their
food. It adds not a little to the value which they place on this grain; that
they are enabled to keep it uninjured for a long period. No dekhan is
grown on the west end of the island ; but on the east the enclosures in some
of the valleys are very numerous. It is however to their date groves, next
to their flocks, that the inhabitants look for their principal means of sup-
port. With the exception of a small one at Colesseah, and another on the
west side of the granite peaks, these are also confined to the eastern por-
tion of the island. Here the borders of the numerous streams which in-
tersect it are lined for miles with them: the foliage is somewhat more scanty
than that of those of Arabia, but I observe no other peculiarity in the
tree. Some are fecundated at the latter end of December, and others as
late as the early part of March ; they must therefore secure to themselves
a supply of fresh dates for two months. Those which are cultivated
amongst the granite peaks produce the first crop. There are however
some groves on the sandy belt at the southern side of this island, which I
have been repeatedly assured bear two crops during the year; the one.in
May, after the N. E., and another in October, after the S. W. monsoon ;
the fruit is not held in much estimation. From the other groves, though,
a large quantity is collected, yet it is not sufficient for. the consumption of
the inhabitants, and a considerable supply is annually drawn from Muscat.

In all the other valleys which may have contained water, or through
which water may have passed, there are an astonishing number of Nibet
trees ( Lotus nebea, well known in Egypt and Syria) ; the fruit is about the
size of a cherry, of rather a pleasant flavour, and is produced at all seasons,
The Bedouins collect it, and after bruising the berry between two stones,
until it forms a paste, they mix with it a little ghee, and devour the whole
with much relish. Their camels are exceedingly fond of the young branches
of this tree, and from its bark the Bedouins extract a tan for their hides.
The tamarind occurs frequently among the hills ; as well as the wild fig ;
from the fruit of the former the natives decoct a cooling and refreshing

©

146 Report on the Island of Socotra. [Marcu,

drink, and the umbrageous foliage of the latter affords to the Bedouins a
most grateful shade during the heat of the day. The Bedouins also eat the
inner bark of a tree so called, which is found growing near the sea shore.
In the vicinity of Tamarida, some melons, beans, and a littletobacco, suffici-
ent for the consumption of the inhabitants, are cultivated; on the granite hills
some few orange trees, aspeciesof wild grape, and a kind of wild pear(?) are
also found, but no other fruits or vegetables of any description is produced
or known. I have already noticed the fertility of the soil in some parts of
the island, and the extraordinary advantages it possesses in its numerous
streams : both are utterly disregarded by the natives. The whole of theland
in the vicinity of the granite peaks is in the highest degree susceptible of
cultivation. Grain, fruits, or vegetables to any extent might be reared in the
plain near Tamarida, and amongt the rich valleys in the direction of Ras
Mamse. The face of the hills on the northern side might be terraced and
cultivated in the same manner, as is customary in Yemen and Palestine. In
a word, was it not for the prevailing ignorance and sloth which exists among
its inhabitants, Socotra in a few seasons might be rendered as celebrated for
the extent and variety of its productions as it is now remarkable for its
total want of them.
Natural History.

The only animals we saw in Socotra were camels, asses, oxen, sheep,
goats, and civet cats. The camels were as large as those of Syria, and were
more remarkable for strength than for speed. As they are continually
ascending and descending the mountains by bad passes, they become nearly
as sure-footed as mules; but being constantly fed on succulent herbs, they do
not, if this food is taken from them, display the same endurance of thirst as
those of Arabia; when confined to the parched shrubs which grow on the
jow land, they require to be watered daily. Camels are principally used either
by the traders while seeking ghee among the mountains; or by the inhabi-
tants, for the purpose of bringing dates or fire-wood from the interior ; the
whole number on the Island does not exceed two hundred. For those I
took with me I paid six dollars the month; the price for which they aresold
is usually from 20 to 30 dollars. Cows are very numerous in the vicinity
of Tamarida, on the granite range of mountains, and in many of the eastern
parts of the island. They are usually of the same color as that which
distinguishes the Alderney breed in England, though their size does not far
exceed the Welch breed, The hump which marks those of India and Ara-
bia is not observed here. ‘They find an abundance of pasture, are sleek and
fat, and their flesh of a most superior quality. The natives prize them for
the sake of their milk, with which they make the ghee, that is in so much
estimation on the coasts of Arabia and Africa. They are not therefore
solicitous to part with them, and the price they demand compared with that
for which they are purchased on the Arabian coast, is proportionally high ;
10 dollars was the sum we paid for those we procured. Their flesh was pro-
nounced equalto our finest English oxen. Should Socotra, as is contemplated,
become a station for our steamers, an agent would be enabled with little

1835.] Report on the Island of Socotra. 147

trouble to supply as many of these as might be required. The number on
the island at present exeeds 1600.

Vast flocks of sheep and goats are found in every part of the island,
the latter are indeed so numerous, that the owners never trouble themselves
with counting them; the sheep have not the enormous tail which disfigures
those of Arabia and Egypt; they are usually small, and lean, with remarka-
bly slender legs, and their flesh is not well tasted. The Bedouins wash them
every two or three months, to prevent them from getting the rot; their
wool is manufactured into the thick cloaks which are so well known in
Arabia and Persia. There are several varieties of goat on the island,
and a milch-goat, of which nearly equal care is taken with the sheep: ano-
ther kind, of a reddish color, with long shaggy hair, which is permitted to
rove about the island, and which appears common property ; a third is the
wild goat, which is only found in the loneliest glens, or on the summit of
the loftiest hills; their flesh is much prized by the Bedouins. When the shep-
herds are desirous of catching them, they seek about for their haunts until
they discover thetrack by which they pass up and down the mountains;
across this they spread a net. One of their number then ascends tothe sum-
mit of the mountain by another route, and makes his appearance before the
animal, who no sooner discovers him than he darts down the path and
becomes entangled in the net, where he is quickly secured by those who are
stationed there for that purpose. Amidst the hills over Tamarida and on
the plain contiguous to it, there are a great number of asses which were
described to me as differing in some respects from the domestic ass, but
after repeated opportunities of observing them I find there is no reason in
such a distinction. It is more than probable that the introduction of
camels superseded the necessity of employing them as beasts of burden, and
they were therefore permitted by their masters to stray where they pleas-
ed. They now wander about in troops of ten anda dozen, and evince little
fear until they are approached too close, when they dart off with much
speed. Although they were not applied by the natives to any useful purpose
they would no doubt be found, should occasion hereafter require it, of much
utility. The only wild animal that is known among the hills is the civet
cat, of which it is needless to give any description. This animal is very
abundant and was frequently brought to me for sale, but I have not been
able to learn that the natives take any trouble to collect much of its per-
fume. Hyenas, jackals, monkeys, and other animals which are common
to the hills on the shores of either continent, are unknown here; we do not
even find the antelope, which is the more singular as it abounds on most
of the other islands of the Arabian coast. The dog is also unknown, and
one we had on board was frequently mistaken for a swine. I saw but one
snake during the whole of the time I was on the island, and the head of
that was too much bruised for me to ascertain if it was poisonous, though
the natives assured me it wasso. From them I also learnt, that after the
rains a great many made their appearance, and some marvellous stories
were told me respecting their size and fierceness ; how true these may be, I

u 2

148 : Report on the Island of Socotra. (Marcu,

know not, but on the low land they have an astonishing number of scorpi-
ons, centipedes, and a large and venomous description of spiders, called (? )
the bite of which creates alarming inflammation, and even with young children,
it is said, sometimes proves fatal. In some places it was a chanceif a stone
was removed but that you would find one or more of these insects. Lo-
custs have rarely been seen in Socotra, and those which were, are said to
have been few, and were most probably stragglers. Ants are numerous,
and the bite of one kind is scarcely less painful than the sting of a wasp ;
near the dekhan enclosures, field mice are often observed, and on the hills
they are much troubled with rats and other vermin. The chameleon is a
native of this island. The only birds I saw were cranes, flamingoes, wild
ducks, a species of water-fow]l, wood pigeons (very numerous) ; the swallow,
the lapwing, owls, bats, and four varieties of the vulture: the last are par-
ticularly serviceable in cleansing the earth of carcasses and filth. There
is also a small bird, with a red beak and dark purple plumage, called in the
Socotrian language Mabeared, which utters a shrill and loud ery, not un-
like that which might be produced by an effort of the human voice. Cas-
sowaries are said to have been seen on the island, but I neither saw nor
could learn any thing of them.
Government.

It has already been noticed, that the government of the Island of Soco-
tra, from a very early period, was dependent on the kings of the incense
country, and the early Portuguese navigators found them, on their first ar-
rival, stillin the undisturbed possession of their ancient patrimony ; but
after ALBUQUERQUE had conquered and overrun the island, he vested its
government in the hands of some of his officers, who, with a remnant of
his troops, was left behind to retain it. The Portuguese appear to have
held possession until the decline of their power in India, when they inter-
married with its inhabitants, gradually lost their ascendancy, and Socotra,
after this short interruption, again resumed its solitary dependence, under
its ancient masters. From this period, there is reason to believe, that a
brother or some near relation of the Sultan of Kisbeen, on the Arabian
Coast, resided permanently on the island as its governor, until within the
last century, when it has been merely subjected to an annual visit from
Kisbeen. The revenue is then collected, and any complaints which require
the interference of the Sultan, are brought before him. When these ob-
jects are accomplished, he again takes his departure. During our stay at
Kisbeen and on the island, we made numerous inquiries to ascertain who
at present exercised this power, but this it proved'no easy matter to dis.
cover. The old Sultan is blind, and incapable of managing the affairs of
his government, and all has gone ta confusion. Various claimants appeared,
but ABDULLAH was pointed out as the influential individual; from him there.
fore we procured letters specifying the nature of our visit, and requiring
from the islanders every assistance which we might standinneed of. Little
attention was however paid to this letter, and during our stay another
chief, Hamep Bin Tary arrived, and under the threat of burning the town,

1835.) . Report on the Island of Socotra. 149

he succeeded at Colesseah in procuring about fifty dollars worth of ghee,
with which, after sending on directions to Tamarida, forbidding our being
furnished with either camels or guides, he again sailed for Kisbeen, and
openly boasted of what he had done. During the present year, no other
member of the family is expected on the island, and as the sum collected
annually, at other seasons, rarely exceeds in value 200 dollars, the autho-
rity of the Sultan may be considered as more nominal than real.

AxspuLLan in his visits has been known to inflict chastisement with his
own hand on the Bedouins, who have neglected to bring him the full quan.
tity of ghee, to which he has considered himself entitled, and even to im-
prison them for a few days; but I could not learn that he possessed suffi-
cient power to inflict punishment of any kind on the Arabs, the greater
number of whom are indeed exempted from contributing to any part of
his revenue. -It is from those who collect the ghee at T'amarida, Colesseah
and Codhaop that he procures the greater part of the only article which
he now draws from the island. The attention of ABpuLLan during his vi-
sits appears solely directed towards this object, and though complaints from
former usage are occasionally brought before him, yet the instances are
rare, and his decisions are not much cared for.

At Tamarida, an old Arab, who was formerly a sipéhi in India in the
service of Baji Rao, by virtue of his age, and long residence in the town,
possesses some influence. Another at Colesseah named Saunm, is also quali-
fied by the townsmen with the title of Shekh, in order mainly it would
appear that he might secure presents from the vessels visiting the port,
but nothing is more certain than that they do not possess throughout the
island a constituted authority, either civil or military, or of any description
whatsoever. Notwithstanding the singular anomaly of so great a number
of people residing together without any chiefs or law, offences against the
good order of society appear infinitely less frequent than amidst more
civilized nations; theft, murder, and other heinous crimes are almost un-
known. No stronger instance can be given of the absence of the former:
than the fact of my wandering for two months on the island, without hay.
ing during that period missed the most trifling article. Some intelligent
Arabs, who had resided there some fifteen years, assured me that the only
disturbances known were occasional quarrels among the Bedouins, respect-
ing their pasture grounds, and these were as usual settled either by the
individuals fighting the matter out with sticks, or by the interference of
their friends. It is no doubt this security of person and property, which
has brought from the shores of the continent on either side so many set-
tlers to the island.

Inhabitants.
_ The inhabitants of this island may be divided into two distinct classes,
those who inhabit the mountains and high lands on the western extremity
of the island, and which there is every reason to believe are its aborigines,
and those who reside in Tamarida, Colesseah, and Codhaop, as wellasseve-
ral tribes who occupy the eastern portion of the island: the latter are a

150 Report on the Isiand of Socotra. (Marcu,

mongrel race, the descendants of Arabs, African slaves, Portuguese,
and several other nations. Of the former I shall now give as full a
description as the limits to which I have considered it necessary to confine
this paper will admit. It is however necessary for me to premise, that
though from personal observations I have been enabled to elicit every
necessary degree of information connected with the present physical habits
and domestic manners of this isolated race, yet there were some interest-
ing points connected with their former condition, religion, and usages on
which I was anxious to obtain some knowledge. ‘This however from the
jealous and suspicious character of those with whom I was obliged to con-
verse, I found to be almost impracticable ; they either declined answering
the questions altogether, or they only furnished replies which were caleu-
lated to mislead. Some of this reserve melted away before we left, but my
inquiries did not tend to elucidate facts of any importance. Inthe sub-
sequent sketch I shall however have occasion again to touch on this subject.

On the Bedouins. The Arabs who visit Socotra, in consequence of their
pastoral habits and wandering mode of life, have bestowed on this class
the appellation of Bedouin, to which race, though they widely differ in some
points, there is yet in others a striking resemblance. The principles of
their political constitution are like theirs exceedingly simple: all are
divided into families or tribes, each occupying a determined domain on the
island, and each having a representative head, who formerly exercised
what might be termed a patriarchal authority over them. In general, the
office is hereditary, though it is sometimes filled by persons who have been
selected for the superiority of their abilities. It was to this individual
that the Sultan formerly, when he resided on the island, looked for the
collection of .his tribute, and to the Sultan he was also in some measure
answerable for the good order of the six tribes ; but at present his authority
appears to be merely that of an influential individual, before whom complaints
are taken for arbitration, but who possesses no power te punish a delinquent :
an individual may also carry his complaint before the Sultan, or his deputy,
or he may, which is the usual practice, retaliate on the injureror any member
of his family; but these affairs are not carried to the sanguinary lengths
they are in Arabia, where the murder of one individual is revenged upon
the person of his assassins or their relations. I made numerous inquiries,
but I could not ascertain that any of their quarrels terminated in blood-
shed: certainly this may be owing in some measure to their having neither
fire-arms nor weapons of any other description than sticks and stones ; but
these peaceable habits are forcibly illustrated by the fact of so many tribes
occupying territories so intermingled with each other, where the variable
nature of the pasturage, and the scarcity of water, compel them from different
quarters to meet on the same spot, without reference to the actual owners ;
and yet that skirmishing among them should be.of such rare occurrence.

Physical Character, Persons, Diet, &c. &c.

The men are usually tall: their limbs appear strong and museular, and

remarkably well formed; the facial angle is as straight as that of Europeans;

1835.) Report on the Island of Socotra. 15t

the nose is slightly aquiline; the eyes lively and expressive; tlie teeth good,
and the mouth well formed : their hair is worn long, and curls naturally, but
without the slightest approach to the woolly texture or appearance of that
of the Negro; they wear generally a beard and whiskers, but no mustachios:
their complexion varies a good deal ; some are as fair as the inhabitants of
Surat, while others are as dark as the Hindus on the banks of the Ganges.
They walk with an erect gait over the worst ground, and will bound over
the hills like antelopes. From constantly climbing the rocks and mountains,
they have contracted a habit of turning in their toes, which gives them
over the plains a slight degree of awkwardness in their walk ; notwithstand-
ing this slight defect, the regularity of their features, the fairness of their
complexion (for those which are very dark comprehend but a small portion
of their number), and the models of symmetry, which are occasionally pre-
sented to the eye, render them a remarkable looking race, far distinct and
removed from any of those varieties of the human race which I have seen
on the shores of the continent on either side.

Their dress consists of a piece of cloth wrapped round their waist, and
the end thrown over the shoulder. No ornaments are worn: in their girdle is
placed a knife ; but as they have no weapons,they carry in their hands a large
stick. In their various modes of dressing their hair they display a little fop-
pery: some frizzle it out like the Arabs on the coast of Egypt; others
allow it to curl naturally ; while the generality permit it to grow to a consi-
derable length, and plait it into tresses, which are confined to the head by
a long braided cord, made from their own hair. Their skins are clear and
shining, and remarkably free from eruptions or cutaneous disorders. Many
are however scarred from the application of hot irons for the removal of
local complaints—a mode of cure they are quite as fond of practising as
their neighbours the Arabs of the peninsula.

Of the Females. The same remarks which I have given to the person and
features of the men may be applied with little alteration to those of the
females: there is the same symmetry of form, the same regularity of features,
and the same liveliness of expression ; but their complexion does not vary
in an equal degree: few are darker than the fairest of the men, and some,
especially when young, were remarkably pretty : the legs of some of those
advanced in age were of an astonishing thickness ; but this defect is more
observable among those who reside near the low-lands, and it but seldom
occurs among the high-land females. Their dress consists of a coarse
Cameline, secured round their waist by a leather girdle, and a kind of wrap-
per of coarse Dungree cloth, which is thrown over their shoulders: around
their necks they wear a necklace made of red coral, colored glass, amber,
&c. with sometimes a string of dollars. Ineach ear they wear three and
sometimes four large ear-rings made of silver and about three inches in dia-
meter; two of these are worn in the upper, and one in the lower, part of
the ear. They go unveiled, and whenever we approached their houses,
they conversed with us.

152 Report on the Island of Socotra. (Marcu,

Of their habitations. In a moist climate like Socotra, it would be
impossible for several months to live in tents ; and as the variation of the
seasons compels the Bedouins to shift with their flocks in search of pas-
turage, it may be considered as a bountiful provision that they are
in the numerous natural caverns with which the limestone hills abound,
provided with habitations ready fashioned to their hands. A Bedouin
merely selects one of these, which from its size and situation is best caleu-
lated for his purpose ; he then by means of loose stone walls portions off
different apartments for himself and family, while the remainder is left to
afford shelter to his flock. Singular spots are occasionally chosen for these
places of abode: I have seen them on the face of a nearly vertical hill, at
the height of 800 feet from the plain. In the valleys, and on the margin,
they have another description of dwelling place: the rocks there whenever
limestone occurs is equally cavernous with the hills : a cave is selected ; they
widen if necessary the entrance, so as to allow it to open into an enclosure ;
the upper part is then covered over with rafters, on which turf and some
earth is placed, so that it becomes difficult at a short distance to distinguish
it from the surrounding country : a wall constructed of loose stones encloses
a circular space about 30 yards in diameter, which serves at night as a fold
for their sheep and goats. I visited the interior of several of these: the
only furniture they contained was astone for grinding corn, some skins on
which they sleep, other skins for holding water or milk, some earthen
cooking pots, and a few Camelines hanging on lines taken across the roof.
In one of these tied by the four corners and suspended from a peg by a
string, you will frequently see a child sleeping. It also serves as a cradle,
which they swing to and fro when they wish to compose it to sleep. In
hot-weather, when the ground is parched with heat, these caverns are of a
clammy coldness ; the Bedouins are by no means particular in keeping them
clean, and they usually swarm with fleas and other vermin. A few days
after my first arrival, I had occasion to ascend a mountain on the southern
side of the island, seeking for plants ; and other pursuits had detained me
until it was too late to descend. I therefore took up my quarters with a
Bedouin’s family in one of these caverns. . It was formed by the overhang-
ing of an enormous rock, which left a sheltered space of 50 yards in length
and 10 in breadth. In the interior the surface of the limestone exhibited
rounded masses, with cellular cavities in and between them ; but I could
not discover any stalactitic traces. These were the first Bedouins we had
met with, and none of the party had seen Europeans before. Our coming
unexpectedly on them, therefore, created with the females some little alarm ;
but a few words of explanation from our guide soon quieted them: a few
needles to the females and some tobacco to the men set the whole party
in good humour. Milk, dates, and whatever their cave afforded was readily
placed before us, and they cheerfully assented to our request of passing
the night there. At our suggestion, some grass was collected for us to sleep
on, but this unfortunately proved an inducement for the goats and sheep,
which were lodged in the same part of the cavern with several members of

1835.] Report on the Island of Socotra. 153

the family to visit and run over us wala during the night, so that we
obtained but little rest.

The men pass their time in tending their flocks, in collecting dragon’s’
blood, or aloes, and in occasional visits to the town, when the two latter
with their ghi areexchanged for dates, dhona, the jawari of India, and clothes.
Accustomed to traverse these mountains from childhood, they perform on
these occasions journeys of 30 or 40 miles, climbing almost perpendicular
precipices, and crossing deep ravines, without occasionally experiencing any
fatigue or inconvenience. The principal employment of the females abroad
is also looking after their flocks ; 2t home they make ghi, curd, and spin
wool, which they afterwards weave into Camelines, and attend to their other:
duties. They have a curious method of cleansing the wool : they place it
ina heap on the floor, over which they hold a bow, and snap the string
against it, until the whole of the dust has flown off. ‘Their method of
weaving is also very simple, but a description of it here would occupy too
much space. As it is very difficult to procure steel of any description on
the island, the Bedouins have recourse to a method of obtaining combustion,
which is practised by several savage nations. They procure two pieces of
wood, the one hard Nebek (if procurable), and the other a short flat lath,
from a date branch. The former is about 12 inches in length, and is
inserted into a hollow, which is formed for that purpose in the latter.

The stick is then twirled briskly between the two palms, until the dust
which is worn out by the friction, and which escapes down the side by a
small grove cut near one side of the hollow, ignites. The dust is then
placed on the top of a palm-branch, and a flame is soon produced. They
have a method of obtaining a whiff of tobacco equally curious and simple.
They slip off a branch of the Luhah tree of the required length and
thickness for the tube, the extremity of this is then cut much in the same
way as we doa quill before we split it: this part serves as a bowl, in which
the tobacco is placed, while a small wooden plug, having a hole in its
centre, at once prevents it from ascending the tube, and at the same time
permits the smoke to be ‘inhaled.

Food, Sc. The Bedouins subsist principally on milk, and the grain and
dates which they receive in exchange for their ghi. Whenever occasion
ealls for it, or a visitor arrives, they kill a goat or sheep ; their mode of
cooking is very simple: they separate the meat from the bones, cut it into
small pieces, and boil the whole in an earthen pot ; they use no dishes, and
the meat is placed on a small mat, round which they seat themselves in
eating. Contrary to the usual practice of the Musalmans, these islanders
always cut their meat with knives, which aati iebiaibs om from the whalers
and other vessels that touch at the island.

The moral character of the Bedouins stands high. The absence of any
heinous crimes aniong them has already been noticed, and in general they
may be considered as a lively generous race ; but the most distinguishing’
trait of their character is their hospitality, which is practised alike by all,
and is only limited by the means of the individual who is called on to

x

154 Report on the Island of Socotra. [MancH,

exercise it. Nor is this, as with the Socotrian Arabs, confined to those of
their own faith ; and while with the latter we were unceasingly tired with
silly questions relating either to our religion or our views on the island,
the Bedouins gave themselves no concern either about one or the other. A
watch excited much mirth among them, and it was long before they would
cease to believe it was a living animal ; but unaccustomed as they were to
the sight of fire-arms, what excited their utmost astonishment was a pair of
pistols .with detonating caps. Ever cheerful, they were always ready to
enter into conversation,or to be pleased with what wasshownthem. I saw
no instrument of music during my stay on the island, but they appear pas-
sionately found of song, and on one occasion, at a wedding, I observed
them daneing. A party stood round ina circle, and while one of their number
continued te sing, two or three others, without any pretence to a regular
-step, by a succession of jumps or bounds, endeavoured to keep something
like time to it.

The Bedouins have a great variety in their modes of salutation: two
friends meeting will kiss each other on the cheek or shoulder six or eight
times, then shake hands, kiss them, and afterwards, exchange a dozen sen-
tences of compliments; they have also thesame singular and indelicate mode
of salutation which is observed at Kishbeen, when they place their noses
together, and accompany the action by drawing up their breath audibly
through the nostrils at the same time. Male and female relations salute
each other in public in this manner. Those of different sexes, who are
merely known to each other, kiss each other’s shoulder or hand, except with
the principal individual of the tribe. When the females fall in with him, they
salute his knees, and he returns it on their forehead. The old men salute
children in the same manner. With the use of the compass the Bedouins
were totally unacquainted, and they had no terms in the Socotrian language
to express the cardinal points. The superiority of the Arabian numerals for
extended calculations over their own, has induced them to entirely discon.
tinue the use of the latter, and in all transactions among themselves, as welt
as with the Arabs, the Arabian alone are now used ; it was therefore not
without some difficulty that I was enabled to collect the Socotrian nu-
merals, they are as follows:

1 Tand 5 Hamish 9 Scab

2 Terean 6 Heitah 10 Ushari

3 Thedder 7 Heibah 11 Usharit and
4 Urubah 8 Tomani 12 Ushari terean

and so on to 20, which is two tens, or usharum, and usharin tand 21;
thirty, which is thedger ushari, urubah or three-tens; forty, which is
ushari, or four tens, and so on to one hundred, which is meyen or meian,
which is like the Arabic mit or meat.

But by this decimal mode of calculation they could advance no further
than ten hundred. I have frequently sought without success for something
to express a thousand: this gives no very high opinion of their mentat
capacity, and it evinces, unless they have sadly retrograded, a strong proof

18335.} ‘Report on the Island of Socotra. 155

of their never having made any considerable advances in civilization. Du-
ring my stay among these high islanders, I saw few cases of sickness; three
or four sufferers from cancer, and as many from elephantiasis, were brought
to me for medical assistance, and hard painful swelling of the abdomen,
brought on by irregularity in their diet, was also frequent; but this was in
no way surprising. A Bedonin will live on nothing but milk, and a little
Dekhan, for several days, and then feast most exorbitantly on asheep, the
flesh of which is but half-boiled. Some bad sores were also shown me, occa-
sioned by punctures from the thorns of the Nibek. But in general diseases
are of very rare occurrence, and the Bedouins may be considered a hardy,
healthy race. In the most solitary and lonely ravines and valleys I have
occasionally met with idiots, who are permitted to stray about by them-
selves. Food is given them when they approach any habitation, but they
usually subsist either on the wild herbs, which they gather on the moun-
tains, or on the wild goats, which they knock over with stones near Ras
Mami. I saw one of these men going about perfectly naked. I came on
him unexpectedly, but he fled with much celerity the instant he saw me.

Language. 1 am not sufficiently versed in oriental literature to ascer-
tain what affinity the Socotrian language may bear either to the Arabic
er any otherlanguage. I have therefore subjoined a copious vocabulary of
words in general use among the Bedouins, by which I trust the scholar may
be able to proceed in an inquiry that can scarcely fail to lead to most inter.
esting results. I may notice in passing that the mountaineers from the
Arabian coast are enabled to make themselves well understood by the
highlanders of Socotra; but the Arabs from Muscat, or from any of the
other towns, are quite unable todo so. The Socotrian language is spoken
even among themselves by all those who have permanently settled on the
island, and the Arabic is only used by the merchants while transacting
business with the traders who arrive in buggalows.
- At a period as late as when the Portuguese first visited Socotra, they
found in it books inscribed in the Chaldean character. I had anticipated
procuring some manuscripts or books which might have served to throw
light on the history of the island ; but in answer to repeated applications
which I have made to different individuals for them, I have always been
assured that some which they acknowledge to have possessed were left
behind in their houses when they fled to the hills ; and that the Wahabis,
during their visit, destroyed or carried them off. The latter is the most
probable, as these sectaries in their various eruptions are known to have
manifested a strong desire to. possess themselves of historical works*. The
only vestige which I have been enabled to trace of any other character
than the Arabic now in use, being adopted by the inhabitants of the islands,
are some singular and interesting inscriptions, which I discovered on the
sea shore about a mile in a direction from Ras Mami.

They are inscribed in the horizontal face of a sheet of limestone rock,
which is on a level with the plain, and is about 300 paces in circumference ;
é * Vide BURKHARBDT’s Trayels in Arabia, Vol. i. p. 393.

x2

156 _ Report on the Island of Socotra. [Manrcu,

those parts which by their smoothness are best adapted for the purpose
are covered with inscriptions and figures. J subjoin a sketch of a few of
the most legible, which for the sake of greater accuracy I copied a second
time. The resemblance in the character to some I copied near Wedgi
in Arabia, which are supposed to be Ethiopic, is so striking, that I am
tempted to believe they owe their origin to the same people. Should this
on further examination prove the case, some interesting inquiries would
suggest themselves. Independent of these inscriptions, there are immense
number of rude representations of the feet of men, camels, sheep, oxen,
asses, and cows ; some of the human feet were as small as those of an in.
fant, while others are treble their natural size ; they are all placed in pairs,
but with no general direction. The feet of the animals are cut so as to
represent a soft rock, yielding to the weight of their impression. These
occur sometimes in line, in others they are thickly crowded together, and
amidst the latter is usually found the characters. The cross occurs very
frequently, as well as a figure with a snake’s head. I passed several hours
in examining and sketching the most legible of the characters ; but vast
numbers are obliterated. 1 was at first tempted to ascribe these inscrip-
tions to the work of the shepherds in their leisure hours ; but they are so
numerous, and must withal from the nature of the rock have been execut-
ed with so much labor, that I cannot on reflection refer them to that ori-
gin. The unity of design, exhibited in the constant recurrence of the
same apparently unintelligible symbol, would rather induce us to suppose
that a place of worship or pilgrimage must have formerly existed in its
vicinity. At present there are half a dozen small ruinous buildings to the
southward, and the remains of a wall running along to the northward,
near it ; but nothing more to verify such a supposition,

In a hill near Tamarida, I discovered several caves, which contain hu.
man skeletons. A wall eight feet in length had been built up parallel to,
and at a distance of about seven feet from, the side, so as to allow a suffici-
ent space for the bodies to be laid at full length ; they appear to have been
deposited in layers, though at different periods. Between and above each
skeleton, there was a space of about two feet, which was filled up with
earth until the whole mass reached the upper part of the cave. Among the
mountains in the interior, I was assured, that these occur frequently, and
there is reason to believe, the Bedouins deposited their dead in them, until
alate period ; but as they entertained great dread of my writing them down,
as they termed it, they were never shown to me. I entered and discovered
these by stealth. Upon conversing with the Bedouins, afterwards, on this
subject, they admitted the fact of their serving as cemetries to their ances-
tors, but denied they had been used since the propagation of the Musalman
religion. At present they observe the same mode of interment as the
Arabs of Tamarida.

Of many other peculiar customs, a few only are now retained, of which
the most singular is that they do not circumcise their male children un-
til they are past the age of puberty, while with other Muhammedans, it is

1835.] Report on the Island of Socotra. 157

performed at a very early age. ©n the eastern part of the islands, amidst
the mountains, J was shown a rude stone chair, in which it was customary
for the Bedouins to seat their youths (who were sometimes brought from a
long distance) while the operation was performed. They have preserved
the remembrance of a singular trial by ordeal, which was formerly practised
on an individual supposed to have been guilty of any heinous crime ; he was
placed bound hands and feet on the summit of some eminence, and there
compelled to remain for three days. If rain fell during that period on or
near him, he was considered guilty, and punished by being stoned to death ;
but if the weather on the contrary continued serene, he was acquitted.

At first sight it may appear singular, that while, as will be shown by the
subsequent section, the population of the eastern portion of the island
should be found so mixed and varied, that of the western should have con-
tinued pure, and should still present the same general characteristics, but
the causes cn examination are almost self-evident. The Bedouins make no
seruple to give their daughters to the native Arabs, and even to visitors
who may pass but a short time on the island. The wives of the latter live
with their husbands ; while of the offspring by those of the former, the boys
naturally follow the avocation of the father, and rarely if ever turn to
the pastoral pursuits of their maternal progenitors : while the females are
married not to the Bedouins (for though the Arabs have no objections to
take a Bedouin wife, they would yet hold themselves disgraced were they
to marry their daughters to one of that race), but to one of their own class.
This accounts for the great disproportion which may be observed on the
mountains between the males and the females. Independently of this, as
one cause, want of water, which is felt on the western part of the island
during the greater part of the year, and its general sterility, offer so little
inducement to the native Arabs to reside there, that with the exception of
some hamlets on the sea coast, in which they take up their quarters for the
purpose of fishing, I did not in the course of my journeying in that part
meet half a dozen families. But of those which are comprehended under
the name of Bedouin, there are a few distinct tribes, of which it is necessary
separate mention should be made.

Those most worthy of attention or remark are of a small tribe, of about
150 men, called Bahi Rahom, in the vicinity of Ras Mami. Their fore-
fathers are said to have been Jews, and the features of their descendants
still retain a strong resemblance to those of that race. The Sari, the
Sayffi, the Dermi, and the Zirghi descended from the Portuguese, under the
general appellation of Cambar or Gambar, occupy the granite mountains ;
they are rich in flocks of sheep and oxen, and though the resemblance to
the European cast of countenance may still be traced, and even in some
instances they have preserved their original names, yet there are none of
those symptoms of physical degradation which are observed in the race of
the Portuguese at present in India. On the contrary, some of the finest
figures and the most intelligent of the natives I saw on the island were of
this class. Though readily recognized by the other tribes, their descent

138 Report on the Island of Socotra. [Marcu,

appears in no way to have been urged as a reproach against them. It was
told me that a few families amidst the mountains continued to speak their
own language, but I was never sufficiently fortunate to fall in with any of
them. Some of the hills on the north side of the island still retain the
appellations which were bestowed on them by this nation.

As I have reserved the nameof Bedouin, bestowed on the mountain
tribes, without regard to the general application of the term, it will be as
well to retain the name of Arab, with which the remainder with no higher
claim have invested themselves.

Under this designation are included those who occupy Tamarida, the
villages of Cadhip and Caleseah, and the greater part of the eastern
portion of the island ; they may all be classed as foreigners, or the offspring
of foreigners, who have settled here. The greater number are Arabs, who
being left by boats passing between Zanzebar and the Arabian continent, to
dispose of cargoes, take unto themselves a wife, and remain permanently.

The others are Indians, Sumaulies, Nubians, slaves, &c. who are attracted
here from various motives ; all are careful in preserving the recollection of
their original country, and for this purpose they subjoin its name to their
own. Thus our guide was called Suliman Muscaty, or Suliman from Mus-
cat. Though so mixed a class, the Socotrian Arabs wear the same dress,
and have adopted the same language and customs; their colour, features, and
figure, as may be anticipated from their different origin, are so varied, that
it is impossible to speak of them in any general terms. We have in fact every
grade, from the flattened nose, the thick lips, and the woolly hair of the
Negro, to the equally well-known characteristics of the Arab. Their dress
consists of a loose single shirt, descending below the knee, which is confined
to their waist by a leathern girdle, in which is placed all the arms they can
muster, Tho lower classes wear nothing but apiece of striped linen round
their waist, with another, when they are exposed to the sun, thrown over
their shoulders ; in rainy or cool weather, they all wear a thick woollen coat,
sufficiently large to completely envelope them. The dress of the females
consists simply of a long shirt of Indian cloth, over which is worn a loose
wrapper, which after being taken round their person, the end is brought
up over the neck, in order to serve them as a veil when they are desirous
of concealing their faces.

The only employment in which the Socotrian Arabs engage themselves
are either in tending their date groves, or flocks; in collecting ghi, or in
the trade between Muscat and Zanzebar. Their date groves give them but
little trouble ; for directly the owner can scrape together a few dollars, he
purchases a slave to attend them, and if his master’s wealth increases, he
adds to the number both of his trees and his slaves. Traders proceed among
the mountains on camels, taking with them various articles which they
exchange with the Bedouins for their ghi. The quantity collected is very
great.

The Arabs who engage in the trade to Zanzebar and Muscat with this arti-
cle receive in exchange for it grain and slaves. Contrary to the general prac-

1835.) Report on the Island of Socotra. 159

tice of the East, the Socotrian Arabs treat their slaves with much harshness;
they are hard worked, and indifferently clothed and fed. As these pursuits
can only be engaged in during the fair or N. E. monsoon, it follows that a
considerable portion of their time is passed without employment of any
kind. To obyiate the tedium of this period, I cannot learn that they have
recourse to games of chance, or amusements of any description ; the time
appears spent in visiting each other, drinking coffee, smoking, and sleeping.
In place of taking up their abode in caves, in the same way that the Bedou-
ins do, the Arabs who reside outside the town live in huts, which are
mostly of a circular form; the walls are constructed of loose stones, and
are cemented with a mortar of which mud is the principal ingredient ; they
are rarely more than four feet in height, and they commonly enclose a
space from 12 to 14 feet in diameter. On the top of these, and projecting
nearly a foot over their sides, a conical roof, constructed of the branches
of the date-tree, is sometimes raised, the apex of which at the point where
the ends of the branches unite together, is chunamed, in order to prevent
the rain from getting through. In others, though the walls are of the same
height, they first place rafters across in a horizontal direction, cover them
with date branches, and then cement them over with lime, mixed with earth,
and sometimes with turf: the goats may frequently be observed grazing on
the grass growing out of the latter. In several of these which I visited,
in which it was impossible to stand upright, which were swarming with
fleas, and which in size, it will be remembered, are scarcely larger than an
English pig-stye, two or three families, each consisting of four or five indi-
viduals, were residing under the same roof. It is not therefore a matter
of any surprise that fever sometimes sweeps off a whole hamlet. Were
the materials of which these wretched and miserable buildings are raised
scarce, and to be procured with difficulty, we might pardon or excuse
the little attention to comfort, accommodation, or health which their
construction exhibits ; but when they are abundant, and when they have
better models in the town before them, it furnishes a strong proof of their
sloth and indolence, and warrants with many other proofs which may be
adduced, that they have little inclination or capacity for improvement.

- Notwithstanding Socotra’s numerous inhabitants, Tamarida is the only
collection of houses which may entitle it to the appellation of atown. Cad-
hup and Calesseah are but small villages, and the Arabs on the western
portion occupy numerous small hamlets, consisting of from six to a dozen
houses. Concerning the two villages of Cadhup and Calesseah, all that is
necessary to be known of them will be found in Captain Hatnus’ descrip-
tion of the exterior of the island.

-Tamarida. {have been unable to ascertain at what period Tamarida was
erected; but both from its name and the appearance of the houses, I am
inclined to think it must have been anterior to the first visit of the Por-
tuguese, and most probably founded by those who followed them. The
natives date its existence from a much earlier period, but little reliance can
be placed on their testimony. The nearest range of mountains in the

160 Report on the Island of Socotra. (Marca,

vicinity of Tamarida approaches the sea in the shape of an arch, on the
chord of which, and nearly equidistant from the points where its extre-
mities reach the beach, is situated the town. It consists at present of
about 150 straggling houses, which are unconnected with each other, and
are surrounded with date trees: of this number not a third is now inhabited,
the others remain in the same ruinous state as they were left by the
Wahabis in 1801. Though small, the houses are well constructed, of lime
and coral, cemented over, and from this being kept white-washed, they have
a neat appearance. They are usually two stories in height, of a square form,
and with a tower in one corner, through which the stair-case is usually
built ; the windows face the N. E., and they are closed like those on the
houses of Arabia, with wooden shutters, cut with a variety of ornaments,
through the insterstices of which the air and light is admitted. The upper
rooms are appropriated to the use of the harem; in the lower, seated on a
platform, of which there are two, one on either side the door, with a passage
between them, the Arabs receive their visitors, and transact all business.
Attached to each house there is a small garden, in which is grown a suflici-
ency of beans and melons for the use of the inhabitants—enclosures of
tobacco may also be seen among the houses. The number of inhabitants
at the period of our visit did not exceed a hundred: several were absent at
Zanzebar ; but fifty added on that account to their number, gives the full
number of those who at any period reside here. The Arabs flock down
from the hills on the arrival of a ship, and may induce the visitor to esti-
mate their number higher than I have done. There are but two shops in
Tamarida, and the articles exposed for sale are grain, dates, and clothes ;
every individual, therefore, on the arrival of a boat supplies himself with
whatever he requires.

In commercial transactions among themselves, money is rarely if ever
used: certain quantities of ghi, &c. are substituted. Dollars are demanded
from strangers who visit their port, and from my party rupees were taken
when they were assured of their value ; but there is no small coin of any
description on the island.

The dollars are made into ear-rings for their women. Amber and ambergris,
both of which are brought from Abdul Curia, were formerly substituted for
money ; but the practice for some reason has been discontinued. Amber is
occasionally found along the southern shore of this island, but is not of fre-
quent occurrence. The plain enclosed by the range of mountains already
spoken of, which surrounds Tamarida, is watered by three mountain stream
flowing fast close to the houses, which are with the others at no period of the
year wholly dried up. A line of date groves on either side of each of these
extends from the base of the hills to the sea shore, where they spread out into
large groves. The ground through which these pass is composed of a few
sloping hills, and rounded hillocks, intersected by plains and small ravines:
these are destitute of trees or bushes, but the grass which is nourished there
affords good pasturage to sheep and goats. The soil in some of the valleys
and plains is of a reddish-coloured earth,and appears especially in the vicinity

1835.) Report on the Island of Socotra. 161

of the date grove rich and fertile ; in others, it is of a light colour, is filled
with small stones, and looks of a poorer quality. With the exception of the
palm trees, a few melons, some tobacco, and a few enclosures of dekhan, no
part of this plain is cultivated ; and the traveller who may hereafter visit
Socotra in the period between February and June, may from this circum-
stance and its then parched and almost sandy appearance form a different
opinion to mine respecting its fertility. But the least promising parts of
this plain, when cultivated for a single season, essentially alter their charac-
ter for the better, and others, on our first arrival in January, wore a most
luxuriant vegetation. I therefore repeat of the part particularly, what I have
only mentioned generally before, that not only might grain or vegetables
be cultivated here to a large extent, but that the nature of the climate and
the soil would also nourish the greater number of our tropical fruits.
Of the Inhabitants in general.

Notwithstanding the healthiness of the Bedouins, the Arabs appear a
weak and sickly race, and dangerous fevers are said to prevail among them.
After the rains the graves in the town of Tamarida are frightfully numerous;
and it may be truly said of Tamarida, that it contains treble the number of
houses that it does inhabitants, and of tombs more than ten times the
number of both included. In other parts of the island, where the vestige
of former habitations could be traced, there also might be seen the same
proportion of graves. The Arabs formerly paid great attention to the state
of their tombs: of three stones, one was placed at the head, another at the
foot, and a third in the centre. On the former of these was inscribed the
name, age, &c. of the deceased ; but the Johasmus, during their visit, from
their known aversion to any kind of decoration over the remains of the
dead, broke and destroyed the whole of these, which came under their notice
during their stay.

My attention is particularly directed towards obtaining information
respecting their form of religion. At present every individual on
the island is, or professes himself to be, a Mussalman. The Bedouins,
as in Arabia, hold the doctrines but loosely: many neglect the fast
of the Ramzan, few are acquainted with their morning and evening
prayers, and these few rarely trouble themselves with repeating them.
Circumcision, I have already noticed, is not practised until a late period,
and in some families, I have reason to believe, it is omitted altogether.

The Socotrian Arabs, on the contrary, are zealous professors of the Mu-
salman faith; although, at the same time, they are utterly ignorant of its
most essential doctrines, and like all those nations who possess but a slight
knowledge of its tenets, they are bigotted and intolerant to an insufferable
degree. During my stay at Socotra, individuals of the party occasionally
fell sick, and the horror which they expressed on these occasions at the idea
of its becoming necessary to bury a Christian on the island, convinced me
that if it was ever done, they would perform their threat of disinterring
the corpse with every indignity, and throwing it into the sea. The Ma-
hara Arabs, from the Coast of Arabia, a noble race of Bedouins, who occa-

¥

162 Report on the Island of Socotra. [Marcn,

sionally reside for a few months on the island, ridicule them unmercifully
for this spirit of intolerance, and have assured us, even in the presence of
the zealots, that the Socotrian Arabs were poor wretches, who had nothing
to plead in defence of it save the lowest state of ignorance, and their mon-
grel descent. After the receipt of Hamep Bin Tary’s letter, prohibiting our
further progress through the interior of the island, I was confined by the
Socotrian Arabs for several days in the town, and it was principally through
the influence which the Mahara Bedouins exercised on that occasion that
I was again enabled to set forward on my journey. The behaviour of the
former on this occasion exhibited a mixture of irresolution, timidity, and
avarice which I have never seen equalled ; they wavered between dread of
the Shekh if they permitted us to go, and their fear of missing what they
might gain by hiring out their camels if they prevented us. Exorbitant
demands were at first made ; and when they found that I would not listen
to these, they continued to hold councils for three days, during which pe-
riod, whenever I had commenced and packed up all in readiness for start-
ing, permission was given and cancelled more than half a dozen times.

It is observed by Marre’ Brun in his “ Universal Geography,” that the
population of this island might furnish a subject of lengthened discussion.
Henotices on theauthority of Purtosrorers, Eprisse, and Umpautay, that a
colony, sent here by AnexanpER THE GREAT, remained for along period ;
and during the time of Pariosrorces, an ecclesiastical historian, who wrote a
history of the church on the Arian principles at the conclusion of the fourth
century, that they spoke the Syriac language. Various other authorities are
cited by the same author, to prove the existence of a race of Christians with
which the island was peopled until as late a period as 1593, when the Nes-
torians and Jacobites had each a bishop residing on it ; and even when Sir
Tnomas Ror visited it in 1614, he observes, that “the Bedoignes, ’ashe styles
them, “were of the Nestorian persuasion.” In the absence of books or manu-
script of any description, for I believe no notice connected with the habits
or religious character of the islanders has since this period been handed
to Europeans, it might prove a hazardous task to venture, onthe mere
traditions of the islanders, any observation on the causes or events which
have led to the total abolition of the Christian, and the universal establish-
ment of the Mohammedan, creed. Information on these points may possibly
be gleaned from authors to which I have not at present any means of
gaining access; but I cannot, however, dismiss the subject without observing,
that as the channel of the Indian trade, at the early period to which the
above-mentioned authors refer, was by the way of Socotra, and the ports at
the entrance of the Red Sea, it can excite but a small portion of surprise
to find proselytes of these persuasions residing on a spot so far removed
from where the principles on which these were founded were avowed and
practised. It is observed by Satx, in his preliminary discourse, that the
persecutions and disorders which happened “in the eastern church, soon
after the beginning of the third century, obliged great numbers of Christians

1835.) Report on the Island of Socotra. 163

to seek for shelter in that country (Arabia) of liberty, who being of most
part of the Jacobite community, that sect generally prevailed among the
Arabs ;” and, although it does not appear that the southern parts of the
peninsula were subjected to the ecclesiastical rule of either the Nestorian
or Jacobite bishops, yet from the causes I have before mentioned, it is not
likely they would have overlooked a spot like Socotra, where there is every
reason to believe they could have indulged unmolested in the Open profes-
sion of their faith. With respect to the disappearance of these primitive
Christians, as well as those which were left on the island by the Portuguese,
the causes appear almost self-evident. It would produce an anomaly in hu-
man nature, almost as striking as that which is afforded by the history of
the Jews, if surrounded as they were by natives universally professing the
Mussalman religion, receiving no fresh influx from those of their own per-
suasion, and left an isolated and neglected race, if they alone had refrain.
ed from embracing the new doctrines ; and although occasional skirmishing,
consequent to a difference of opinion, may have occurred between the dif.
ferent sects, yet that this was accomplished by a gradual and silent change,
and not by any violent or exterminating measures, appears equally evident
by the simple fact of their descendants existing asa distinct race to the
present day. Evidence to the fact of numerous colonies of different countries
or persuasions formerly existing on the island may be found in the present
arrangement and distribution of its inhabitants into distinct tribes, many
of which are still recognized as of foreign origin.

Time has not produced a greater change in the government or condition
of this island than it has in its ecclesiastical masters. In place of an arch-
bishop and two bishops, we have now but a single priest, who combines in
his own person the various offices of Mullah, Muezzen, and school-master.
A single Cadi solemnizes the whole ofthe marriages which take place
throughout the island, and I have on more than one occasion met Bedouins
seeking him for a license, when he has been absent among the hills culti-
vating his date groves.

Two small and insignificant mosques at. Tamarida, the one called Mir
Advance, and the other Abder Rahan, and one yet smaller at Calesseah,
are now the only places of worship for the reception of the faithful.

It would form a curious subject of enquiry to ascertain what form of
religion the establishment of the Christian faith displaced. A ruinous build.
ing was shown me on the spot, marked out in the map, which was said to
have been an ancient place of worship ; but it was in too dilapidated a
state to enable me to ascertain the truth of the tradition, nor have I been
able to discover others that would serve to throw any light on the subject.

The population of this island, as stated by some travellers at a thousand
souls, is evidently much under-rated, but fromtheir wandering mode of life,
and other causes, it became difficult from any sectionof the island to form a
correct inference of the population of the whole. The method I adopted
was, at the conclusion of each day, to note the number of individuals I had
seen, and these I find amount to upwards of two thousand, though I am

¥ 2

164 Report on the Island of Socotra. (Marcu,

confident it does not comprehend more than half their number, for in se-
veral places they concealed themselves whenever we approached, and
though, as_ will be seen by the map, my rambles led me to many parts of
the island, yet there were necessarily many hills and remote valleys I could
not inspect. I am further strengthened in this belief by summing up the
number of the tribes, and I therefore fix the amount of the population at
4,000. Two intelligent Arabs, who have resided on the island upwards of
10 years, and have journeyed to many parts of it, tell me they consider
this far below the actual number ; but with Arabs an allowance should al-
ways be made for numerical exaggeration.

Comparing this calculation with the whole surface of the island, which
amounts to about a thousand square miles, it gives four individuals to each,
‘which when we reflect on the great proportion of barerock, which the sur-
face of the island exhibits, appears very considerable.

Although I have made diligent search and constant inquiries, I have
‘been unable {with the exception of those which indicate the stay of the
Portuguese) to discover any ancient vestiges or monuments that would
‘prove this island to have been peopled by a race further advanced in civi-
dization than the present, although I think there is reason to believe the
population must have been more numerous, and that the island was conse-
quently better cultivated. It is impossible to ascertain at what period
their numbers were thinned ; but that they have not been exempted from
contagious fever, or some other desolating scourge, appears evident from
the existence of such a multitude of graves in every part of the island, many
of which appear to have been constructed at the same period ; but that this
period was somewhat remote, is equally evident, not only by the total disap-
pearance of all traces of such improvement, on the face of the country, but
by the present condition of the inhabitants. It must not be referred to the
period immediately preceding the visit of the Wahabis, ashas been suggested
in some late discussions connected with the island ; for those fierce sectaries
confined their outrages, and the extent of their devastation, to Tamarida and
its vicinity, and they did not attempt to pursue the inhabitants who fled
from the town to the mountains at the first intimation of their approach.

[The length of the foregoing Report prevents our giving insertion to the equally
interesting remarks of Capt. S. B. Haines on the same Island. This Officer
was charged with the examination of the coasts and the circumstances of the
various harbours, which though more interesting to nautical men, and drawn up
in a most complete form, would not perhaps interest the general reader so much
as the view of the interior of the island. There are but 22 boats on the island,
capable of carrying about 80 gallons of water in fine weather. They are sewn
together with thongs of hide, or a kind of coir rope made from the young leaf of the
date tree. Tamarida Bay on the north of the island is the principal port during
the S. W. monsoon, but Ras Kourina lat. 12°38’ 35”: long. 53° 55’50”, affords
a better shelter, and is also serviceable in the opposite monsoon.

In the N. E. monsoon Gollonseer Bay is the best anchorage :—the town con-
tains about 130 inhabitants, and 16 fishing boats. There are unfortunately no
ports where vessels could ride in safety from all winds, and opposite sides of the
island must be resorted to with the change of season.

We subjoin a vocabulary of the Socotrian languagedrawn up by Captain Haines

‘from a Town Arab—it is confessedly imperfect, and contains a large admixture of
Arabic.—Eb.]

1835.]

Report on the Island of Socotra.

165

A few words of the Socotrian Language.

Rheeon,
Kurrhar,
Rheeho Rhain,
Rheeho Hali,
Rheeho Lahrer,
Ustal,
Kahr,
Jeerhae,
Eshookko,
Bundook,
Rohsahse,
Hussin,
Suffur,
Teheal,
Mushhein,
Altay,
Eerah,
Kokut,
Sheehein,
Sahbedah,
Setoah,
Stahooa,
Saahd,
Ardein,
Kussah,
Huhr,
Kuneree,
Aig,

A jah,
Mobiahee,
Aunt,
Cutthaine,

Shoohut,
Ucklaher,
Bild,
Baroosir,
Sinselah,
Duckhur,
Tormahl,
Seerar,
Deerah,
Famoose,
Bindeerah,
Teelaher,
Oubchaine,
Seerhoc,
Shalee,
Thermoohen,
Muckedeerah,
Burrh,
Degig,
Aishahr,
Toohlerdee,
Tooshdsheioc,
Tahdsab,

Hairah Tahr,
Kuneiah Teedailiw,
Deeah,

Deah,

Tashw,

Sonah,

Tall, long.
Short.
Salt water.

Sweet or fresh water.

Water to drink.
To eat.

A house.

Town.

Sword.

A musket.
Musket-ball.
Tron.

Copper.

Wood.

Day, fine.
Night, fine.
The moon.

The stars.

The sun.

Come here.

Go away.

Sit down.

Make haste.

To sleep.
Scarce.

To-day.
To-morrow.
Male.

Female.

Boy or male infant.
Large timber.
Small timber.
A month.

A year.

One thousand years.
A fishing line.
A hook.
Sounding lead.
Anchor.

A chain for anchor.
A mast.

A yard.

A sail.

A compass.

A lantern.

A flag.

A hill or mountain.
A stone.

At a great distance.

At hand, close.

A tree, forest, &c.

Jewarree.

Corn or wheat.

Flower.

Bread or cakes.

Come here.

Go away.

Go to market or ba-
zar.

Go to-day.

Come to-morrow.

Good.

Bad.

Well-dressed.

Correct, proper,
straight.

Kurrhain,
Geih,
Haraheeme,
Yashar,
Ferhain,

Adjoose,
Shebah,
Ree,

Shiff,
Teffcoose,
Tadhn,
Hadjhur,
Kidahen,
Nahreer,
Sheebah,
Thetrinsh,
Lissen,
Nuhharhur,
Konrie,
Tahdah,
Meer,
Aiah,
Asdbak,
Dthuffer,
Soab,
Ahrur,
Hammer,
Kutmehr,
Sulet,
Koof,
Dthedadjee,
Baithde,
Urhain,
Elhayten,
Kelb,
Jerback,
Gemecher,
Tahreeher,
Teh,
Sodah,
Bussell,
Serage,

Scheat,
Sebhem,
Ophir,

Gee Reeho,

Rheeho harehen,

Ebhem,
Kute,
Sahrey,
Kullum,
Donaiko,
Koortass,
Tokoothib,
Ketab,
Jild,
Kofeiah,

Ahmateenahe,

Thobe,
Ahrahder,

Umekfaf,
Sundook,
Koorsir,

Crooked.

Plenty, numerous.

Few, scarce.

Dry.

Dauchter, or female
child.

Old woman.

Old man.

The head.

The hair.

The eye-brows.

The eyes.

The forehead.

The ears,

Nose.

The lips.

The teeth.

Tongue.

The throat.

The shoulders.

The back.

The stomach.

The arm.

The fingers.

The nails.

The feet.

Rice,

Ghi.

Butter.

Oil.

Milk, sweet.

Fowls.

Eggs.

Goats or sheep.

Cows or bullocks.

A dog,

Civet cat.

Camels.

Antelopes.

Meat.

Fish.

Onions.

A light of a candle,
lamps, &c.

Fire.

White.

Red.

Plenty of water.

Scarcity of water.

A well.

Rope-

A knife.

A pencil.

An inkstand.

Paper.

To write.

A book.

Skin or hide.

A cup.

A turban.

A shirt.

A sash or cummer-
bund.

Trowsers.

A box or chest.

A chair.

166 Ancient Inscription on a rock south of Bhagelpur. (Marcu,
Sahahm, A plate or dish. Sunkab, Do not bring.
Merooah, A fan or punkah. Deeah, Good or well.
Medfar, A cannon. Deah, Not good, bad.
Baroot, Gun-powder. Ustah, To eat.
Seloobah, Stop, gently. Unetook, I have not eaten.
Tahfah, To give. Toohtahr, Come very close.
Telloo, Take hold. Teloosahr, Go away to a dis-
Sherachah, Go away. tance.
Tuchahtah, Come here. Haihhe, A man.
Tahrise, Kill. Dthamah, Alive.
Keen, Plenty of any thing. | Sahmee, Dead.
Toahde, Make haste. Shohoom, The sun.
Addahfaarhar, Te be on good terms. | Meeloa, A roof or top, awn-
Kasuh, To behave properly. ing, &c.
Semahto, To converse. Shemtahr, Dressed well or in
Aher or Urr, Take hold. good clothes.
Alleh, To ascend. Sheekah, Close to.
Tuckkafah, To descend. Seerhoe, At a distance off.
Estahel, Sit down. Enineshuch, What have you got ?
Tukaaee, To read. Aahumeh, True or truth.
Tennaffer, To mind. Toobat, Untrue, a falsehood.
Teneoash, To spoil. Fezaine, Take hold.
Trasher, To spread any mat | Enlazaine, Do not take hold.

or bed. Tuckahtab, Do not sit down.
Shahleen, To strike a bargain. | Tehtooah, Do not stand.
Taongah, To beat. Ishoop, To sleep.
Enlajhah, Do not strike. Tessobah, To wash.
Takassah, To break. Tohtatrer, To look.
Entuftuf, Do not break. An Tahteher, Do not look.
Anelpad, Make no agreement. | Taber, Broken.
Entenduff, Do not give. Tekoodaiher, Come near,
Aahrah, Remove or take a- | Tonde Sirhoe, Go away.

way. Habra Rheeho, Bring some water.
Arachenooch, To take any thing | Rheeho Durnaham, Salt water.

away. Ustugah, To buy.
Aldteeaiha, Do not take away. Kuthooan, To seil.
Nichiahn, To bring. Fsshenal, I will sell.

V.—wNote on an Inscription on the Mandara hill near Bhagelpur, (form-
ing a postscript to Article I11. of the present number.)

On considering the form of the Sarnath characters, it struck me

that they resembled considerably those of an inscription engraven on
the rocks above the Yalao called Pouphar, on the Mandara hill, of
which a reduced engraving is published in the second part of Colonel
W. Franxkiin’s Inquiry concerning the Site of Ancient Palibothra.
The mountain is situated to the south of Bhagalpur : it is covered with
mutilated images, fragments of stone and ruins; and although it now
exhibits images belonging to the Brahminical mythology or passing as
such in the present day, it may owe the abject condition of many of its
temples to their having been Bauddha structures, destroyed during the
well known persecution of this religion. Colonel FRANKLIN gives no
conjecture as to the purport of the inscription, of which he merely says :
‘* Descending from the summit to Sankar-kund, we proceeded to view
some figures cut in the rock on the north-west of the hill: their ap-
pearance was Singular.”

1835.] Notes on Natural History, &c. 167

I have introduced a drawing of this inscription, as fig. 3 of Plate IX.
as from the size and good preservation of the original sculpture it fur-
nishes some well-formed specimens of the written character of the
period. A moment’s inspection of this inscription shewed me my
favorite land-marks, the title of a great sovereign, mahardja adhi rdja
srt. Most of the letters forming this expression agreed closely with the
Allahabad forms :—the sri only differed materially, and corresponded
rather to the type found on severalof our ancient Hindu coins, especially
the remarkable descendant of the Indo-Scythic series discovered in the
cylinder at Manikyala (Plate XXI. fig. 9, of Vol. III. Journ. As.
Soc.) ; ‘

The restoration of the whole sentence, as far as I have been able to
convert it into Devanagari with the assistance of Govinpa Ra’Ma, is as
follows :

Y UH Weta HeTUS US A AE Wa SF Tal AT

“The mighty and venerable, the great king of kings, Sri Kunya-
Buarana Deva, the mountain of mercy.”

The letters of the name, however, are very doubtful :—the first seems
more like an &%; the dental 2 4 cannot follow the lingual 7 t, and the
letters read as deva are uncertain. Neither is sucha name known
among the sovereigns of Magadha or Mithila. I only introduce the
inscription into my plate to invite attention to it, as every authentic
name of Hindu sovereigns is of importance to history.

VI.—Extracts from a Journal kept during a Voyage from England to
Calcutta, in 1831. By Lieut. T. Hutton, 37th N. J.

On the 19th August in latitude 11°54’ north, longitude 25°24’
west. Thermometer at noon 88°; with hot, calm weather, the first
albatross was seen. Flying-fish, albicores, porpoises, bonitos, whales
and meduse were seen in abundance daily.

On the 14th September, in latitude 25°5’ south, longitude 30°38’
west. Therm. 704°; wind variable, we saw the first Cape pigeon.

This bird, called also the pintado bird, is known to ornithologists as
the Cape petrel, (procellaria capensis.) They are about the size of,
or perhaps rather larger than a teal (anas crecca), and look very beau-
tiful when sitting on the water; but their flight, although strong, is
rather heavy and ungraceful. They are prettily spotted over with black
and white, on the back, rump, and wings; head and neck black ; under
parts pure white, legs and feet black; beak shining black. Length
15 inches, breadth with wings expanded 2-6 feet.

168 Notes on Natural History [Marcu,

They are remarkably fat and plump, thickly clothed with feathers,
under which is a close beautifully soft down of a dark greyish-brown
colour.

The Cape petrels appear to be stupid unwary birds, easily caught
by throwing a line out astern, and allowing them to entan gle their
wings in crossing and recrossing the wake of the ship; or, perhaps
this may be attributed less to stupidity than to their great greediness,
making them more intent on securing any morsel thrown overboard,
than on avoiding the snares which are laid for them.

They are also taken with small hooks, and even crooked pins, bait-
ed with a little piece of fat, which they greedily swallow, fighting and
screaming over the savoury morsel, until a sudden jerk of the line,
hooks some unfortunate gourmand, and proves even to the poor petrel
the truth of the saying, “‘ there is death in the pot!”

When brought on board they both bite and scratch very sharply, and
often successfully defend themselves by squirting over the assailant
an oily liquid of a deep orange colour, smelling so rank and offensive,
as to render the clothes so bespattered scarcely bearable for many days
afterwards, and it is indeed very difficult to get rid of it from the hands
even after repeated ablutions. Along with this nauseous fluid, many
of them restored the pieces of pork with which we had so treacherously
supplied them.

The natural food of these birds consists most probably of molluscous
animals and medusz, particularly those which shine with a phosphoric
light in the night time, and which light, 7f the petrels are nocturnal
birds, as Professor RENNiE says they are*, may be the means of guid-
ing them to their prey; I am, however, rather inclined to doubt their
being nocturnal, for reasons which will presently appear.

In examining the substance disgorged by some of these birds, I
found a number of the interior cartilaginous membranes of the <“ vi-
lella scaphidia,” qauntities of which had been seen a few days before,
of a beautiful blue colour, floating on the surface of the glassy sea.

Their numbers varied considerably on different days, sometimes
following us in large flocks, and coming close to the ship’s stern,
while at other times there were only two or three to be seen.

I was much astonished at the coolness with which they would sit
on the swelling waves and even allow the spray to dash right over
them without rising, and seemingly with perfect indifference, conti-
nuing their squabbles for the baited hook, and diving very prettily
should the object sink before they could pick it up. They alight upon

* “ Architecture of Birds,’’ p. 30.

1835.] made during a Voyage to India. 169

almost every thing that leaves the ship, and this generally attracts the
attention of the albatrosses, which keep at a greater distance.

Tam much puzzled to account for the total disappearance of these
birds during the night, and not only of these, but the albatrosses,
stormy petrels and blue petrels also, for although they had continued
about us in numbers all day, yet no sooner did the sun touch the
horizon, than all disappeared as if by magic.

The question is, where do they go?

Petrels are said to be nocturnal ; but such cannot be the case with
the Cape petrel, stormy petrel, or blue petrel, for we had them sport-
ing in our wake the whole day, and at night they disappeared, to rest
I should suppose.

But where do they rest ?

Tf on the waves, is it not strange that we never found them sleeping
in the calm, clear moonlight nights, as we held steadily on our course?
Yet never did we see one after sunset.

To suppose that they could wing their way to some of the rocky
islands scattered through those southern latitudes would be absurd,
for often we had flocks of these birds around us, when the nearest
land must have been from 15 to 20 degrees distant, and although
their powers of flight must be great indeed to enable them to keep on
the wing with little intermission during the whole day, even when
“blowing great guns,” yet, as they did not leave us until sunset,
with what fearful rapidity they would require to fly, when 10 or 1200
miles at sea, in order to reach their resting-places before the shades
of night should overtake them !

Pigeons have been proved to fly at the rate of 60 miles an hour,
but the petrels would require to perform a flight of 3 or 400 miles in
the same time! !

That they are not nocturnal is clearly proved by their continuing
with the vessel all‘day, and as it is evident they cannot exist without
repose, we may fairly conclude that they rest at night, and again this
rest must be taken on land or water.

That they cannot rest on land, is plain, from what I have already
stated. There remains then nothing but the water for them, and we
may conclude I think with safety that the reason of our not seeing
them at night, is because they are able to descry the tall white-
robed masts of the vessel at a sufficient distance to enable them to
make a clean retreat before we came upon the spot which they had
occupied, and this is the more probable, as they would, like other water.
fowl when sleeping in any number, have a watchful sentinel to warn
them of the approach of dangers to which they must be constantly ex-

Zz

170 Notes on Natural History [Marcn,

posed from the monsters of the deep. I have repeatedly inquired of
seafaring men, whether they had seen these birds at night, but none
could recollect a single instance. One person mentioned having
caught a stormy petrel on asmall hook, which had been towing
astern all night, and therefore he concluded that the bird was noctur-
nal. But this is no proof at all, since he did not know the hour
when the bait was taken, and it is therefore more than probable that
it occurred at early dawn, when these little skimmers of the sea were
as usual on the wing in their restless search for food.

Quere—As the albatrosses and petrels must be many days at sea,
without being near land, whence do they find water to drink, unless
it be that of the briny ocean ? or, will their food, supposing it to con-
sist of mollusca and meduse, supply them with sufficient moisture ?

On the 28th October, these birds deserted us, and we saw them no
more during the voyage, having followed us from the 14th September
in latitude south 25°5’ and longitude west 30°38’ down to latitude
south 41°38’, and longitude east 33°8’, and up again to latitude south
31°54’ and longitude east 80°8’. A period of one month and i4
days.

Although we saw the albatross on the 19th August, we were not
fortunate enough to procure one until the 26th September, in latitude
33°38’ south, longitude 3°5’ west ; thermometer 54°, weather cold.

This bird was shot by a passenger, and although in all respects
agreeing with the generic description, and a true albatross, was by
the officers of the ship termed a ‘‘ mollimawk.”

The plumage beneath is pure white, as also the rump, head and nape ;
through the eye is a dark bluish-black stripe ; back and sides of the
neck, as also the back and tail feathers, slaty-brown : wings the same
but darker. Beak dark cinereous or grevish-black, and the legs and
feet yellowish flesh-colour. Length 3 feet, breadth 7 feet. Irides
yellow.

On the 21st October, in latitude 37°14’ south, longitude 69°8’ east,
thermometer 63°, with a dead calm, we saw several albatrosses appar-
ently of different species.

One of these birds came following up the wake of the ship, so
closely and with his eyes so intent on the water, that at first I thought
he was coming on board, but when he saw me standing on the poop,
he turned suddenly across the wake; at the same time I jerked up
the line with which I was fishing for them, and luckily struck him on
the wing, which throwing him off his balance, obliged him to settle
on the water from whence he might have made his escape with ease,
had he not in a fit of rage, and spite at being struck with the line,

1835.] made during a Voyage to India. 171

turned round to bite the innocent means of his discomfiture ; by so
doing, however, he contrived to entangle his wing, and to my great
joy I succeeded in hauling him on deck, unspotted and unharmed in
plumage.

He belongs also to the genus diomedea, or albatross, but whether
a young bird, ora distinct species from the large white-bodied bird
usually known to sailors by that name, I cannot positively determine,
as I have never had an opportunity of comparing them ; but from the
description of both, I am inclined to think them distinct.

The breadth from tip to tip of the expanded wings is six feet; and
its length from tip of beak to end of tail 2 ft. 54 in,

The whole of the under parts are pure white, as are the rump and
upper tail coverts ; the wings and back and tail feathers are of a very
dark chesnut-brown ; the head and back part of the neck are white,
faintly clouded with a tinge of bluish ash, which gradually grows dark-
er as it joins and blends with the dark colour on the back.

The legs are of a very pale bluish-white. The beak is very beauti-
fully marked on the ridge of the upper mandible with a line of clear
bright yellow, which is well set off by the rest of the beak being of a
jet black, except the hook, which is rosy flesh-coloured, and is a conti-
nuation of the yellow line.

At the base of the lower mandible is a small carunele, stretching on
each side from the edge to the bottom of the bill in a narrow line of deep
orange-yellow. The eye has a narrow stripe of bluish-black running
through it, and blending with the plumage on the back of the head and
neck. Irides hazle.

On examining the gizzard of this bird, we found the eyes of a fish,
which, to judge from their size, must have been froma pound anda
half to two pounds in weight.

Both of these specimens had a beautifully soft white down, very
close, beneath their feathers.

Whenever the Cape pigeons alighted upon any thing, the albatross
immediately perceived it, and sweeping over the waters with out-
stretched wing, threw himself into the midst of them with a hoarse
croaking scream, and obliged them to abandon the prey to him.

- On first alighting on the water the albatross holds his wings half-
folded high over his back, and if he finds any thing to devour, slowly
folds them in on his sides; bat if he is disappointed in obtaining prey,
he throws forward his head and neck, and unce more expanding his
long wings, runs with three or four splashing steps on the wave, and

then rising gradually into the air, skims along with incredible strength
and rapidity.

z2

172 Notes on Natural History, &c. (Marcu,

Nothing can be more majestic than the long, sweeping flight of this
bird, as he skims closely over the face of the deep, almost without
moving his wings, which are kept at full stretch, until he suddenly
throws himself far above the waves, and then with a long sweep dashes
down again, and skims away as before for many yards without any
apparent motion of the wing, save now and then a slight bending near
the tip as he avoids the foaming crest of a wave. They always alight
on the water before taking their prey, holding the head and neck very
erect when swimming, and looking both bold and graceful.

' The sooty albatross (Diomedea fuliginosa), called by the officers of
the ship, a ‘‘ Peeroo,” is both more numerous and more familiar than
the other kinds, and flies rather differently, not sweeping so long and
steadily over the surface of the deep as the larger albatrosses, and rising
far above the yards, impudently skirting the sides of the ship, and
looking down upon the decks*; they flap their wings frequently in
flying, which the larger birds do not. If the weather is calm, how-
ever, and the wind very light, they all flap their wings oftener, so that
the above description is more applicable to windy weather.

The sooty albatross or Quaker bird, was first seen on the 26th
September, latitude 33°30’ south, longitude 3°53’ west, thermometer 54,
weather cold wind variable ; and left us on the 26th October in latitude
33°34’ 5. longitude 77°16’ E. thermometer 593°. Thick hazy wea-
ther; wind S. S. EF.

The other albatrosses continued to be seen until the 29th October,
in latitude 29°37’ S. longitude 82°28’ E. thermometer 69°, Fine wea-
ther; wind easterly.

In Grirrrtu’s translation of Cuvier, the petrels are stated to “drop
upon their prey with extreme promptitude, and carry it off with their
bill, as with a harpoon: but they have not the habit of diving to at-
tain it. They are in fact never seen to submerge, and when the
animal they are watching is somewhat below the surface, they sink a
portion of their body in the water to seize it.”

This is not correct, as the petrels, or at least the Cape petrel, as I
have already stated, can dive very prettily, and I frequently saw them
do so, after the pieces of pork which we threw overboard to them.
They certainly alight very quickly upon their prey, but not with the
sudden and headlong rush of the rapacious tribes, as the word “drop”
would lead one to expect. It must however be remembered that I speak
only of the Cape petrels, which also devoured their prey before rising
from the water: other species may perhaps act differently.

* Perhaps CoLERIDGE may have alluded to this bird, in his “‘ Antient Mariner.”’

1835.] Note on Oxygyrus, and other Pelagian shells. 173

I am happy to find that my description of the manners and flight of
the albatross agrees so nearly with that of the author just mentioned.
He says, however, that this bird constantly dips its head below the sur-
face of the water, during its flight, in search of food.

This I never saw, although [have sometimes watched them for the
greater part of the day. Like the Cape petrel they always settled
before they seized their prey, and never rose until they had devoured it.

As truth is the grand desideratum in all.scientific researches, I do
not think it necessary to offer any apology for having set forth my
remarks in opposition to those of more experienced men, because I have
stated no more than what actually passed under my own observation :
whereas the authors above mentioned have written in a great measure
from hearsay, and consequently may have been obliged to take on
credit a great deal of unauthenticated matter.

[We regret that we cannot find room for Lieut. Hutron’s daily Journal, kept

during his voyage to India. We presume however that the principal facts in
natural history observed by him have been alluded to above.-—Ep.]

VII.— Account of Oxygyrus; anew Genus of Pelagian Shells allied to
the Genus Atlanta of Lesuxur, with a Note on some other Pelagian
Shells lately taken on board the Ship Malcolm. By W. H. Branson,
Esq. Bengal Civil Service.

The following characters of a new Pelagian shell, taken on. the
surface of the Southern Atlantic and Indian Oceans, may prove inter-
esting to naturalists, inasmuch as hitherto only one genus of the
family, viz. Atlanta, has been discovered ; and of the remaining fami-
ly of the order, a single genus, bearing a shell, is known, that of
Carinaria, of which scarce and beautiful groupe we took, in the Indian
Ocean, two new species, which I hope shortly to describe and _illus-
trate. The shell of the genus Atlanta was first made known by
LaMANoN, in a paper sent to France during the progress of La Pry-
ROUSE’S voyage. Overlooking the absence of septa, he called it ‘‘ Corne
d’ Ammon vivante.” The only specimens he met with were dead,
and were taken from the stomachs of Bonetas, which he supposed to
have brought them up from great depths, little dreaming that hun-
dreds of living specimens were nightly within his reach on the surface
of the Ocean. Lately the genushas been re- discovered by the American
French naturalists, the animal has been referred to its proper place in
the system, and a scientific name has been conferred upon it by M.
Lusvzur. I now come to my description of the allied genus, which

174 ' Account of Oxygyrus, a new Species (Marcu,

from its most obvious: distinguishing character, the rapidity of con-
volution, I have named Orygyrus. From oSvs velox, and Tvpow incurvo.
Class— Gasteropoda, Cuvisr.
Order—Nucleobranchi, BLAINVILLE.
Fam. Atlantide, Rane.
Genus, Oxygyrus, mihi.

Char. Gen. Testa subcartilaginosa, discoidea, cito convoluta, duo-
bus lateribus similibus, utroque latere profundé umbilicata ; anfractibus
exterioribus antecedentes fere amplectentibus ; anfractu ultimo laté et
acutissimé carinato ; carind ab ore usque ad dimidium periferie extensd,
illuc desinente, extremitate angulatd ; aperturd cordiformi, sinu carinam
intrante.

_ Operculum cordiforme, medio depressum, sabcanaliculatum. i

Animau spirale, capite proboscidiformi, tentaculis duobus brevibus
cylindraceis, oculo magno saliente ad basin exteriorem munitis ; ore
terminali ; branchiis pectiniformibus, inter jecur et penem oblique
sitis ; pede ald natando aptd, foliaced, lobis duobus preditd; lobo
majore versis extremitatem dilatato, cyatho ad latus posito ; minore
oblongo-ovato, membranaceo, tenuissimo, margine dentato, quasi rupto,
operculum facie inferiore gerente ; operculo corneo.

Shell subcartilaginous, quickly convolute; the first whorls being
nearly enveloped by those succeeding, discoid, symmetrical, deeply
umbilicated on each side; last whorl broadly and sharply keeled from
the edge of the mouth to about half the circumference ; keel angular
at its posterior termination ; aperture sinuous, heart-shaped, not entire,
being encroached upon by the preceding whorl ; peritreme acute, with
a narrow slit or sinus on the front edge, running into the keel, which
is there double.

Operculum heart-shaped, depressed, and channeled with a medial
line.

Animal spiral. Head proboscidiform, with two short cylindrical
tentacula, having a large prorninent eye on the exterior base of each.
Mouth terminal. Branchi pectiniform, lying obliquely between the
liver and the male organ. Foot a foliaceous swimmer, having two
lobes, the larger widening toward the extremity, and having a lateral
sucker; the smaller lengthened anteriorly, extremely thin, jagged,
and bearing the operculum on its under surface. Operculum horny.

The animal much resembles that of Atlanta, but differs in the form
of the greater lobe, the position of the sucker, and the foliaceous
appendage to the operculated lobe of the foot, which is traversed by
veins having the appearance of tendons, which admit of the contrac-
tion of the organ. The proboscidiform head is more swelled towards

1835.] of Pelagian Shells, taken on a voyage to India, 175

the centre and base, and is broader than that of Atlanta : the tentacula
are much smaller in proportion, and the centre of the spire is occu-
pied by the dark brown mass of the liver: whereas in Atlanta this
part appears to be filled with a series of forms resembling ova.

The shell differs principally in having whorls closely convolute, and
partly enveloping the preceding ones ; while in Aélanta, the whorls are
loosely rolled*, and the keel (which stops short at half the circumfer-
ence in Oxygyrus) runs on between the whorls, and connects them
together. In Atlanta the form of the mouth, which is entire, is ellip-
tical, with an operculum of the same shape. In Oxygyrus the oper-
culum is cordiform, corresponding to the form of the aperture, and in
the only species yet discovered the shell is cartilaginous, while in
Atlania it is testaceous. This cartilaginous shell shrinks in drying,
particularly the last whorl, the centre ones appearing to be of firmer
consistence. In the species described, the shell is tumid, herein widely
differing from the very compressed and flattened form of Atlanta.

Having sketched the animals of. both shells while alive, under the
lens, I can speak confidently regarding their affinity, which I. had
noted as probable, before I had an opportunity of examining the
animal of the new genus.

Like Atlanta, the animal moves by sudden starts, quickly agitating
itsswimmer. It occasionally adhered to the bottom of the vessels. in
which it was placed, by its sucker, which then was. flattened out-to
the surface to which it adhered.

We first met with the shell in the. Southern Atlantic from S. Lat.
15° to 20° 30’ and between W. Long. 29° 30’ and 23° 30’. In the
Southern Indian Ocean, we again met with it in 29° 30’ S. Lat. and
32° E. Long., and it continued to occur at intervals up the Bay. of
Bengal to N. Lat. 17° and E. Long. 87°. It has therefore a very
extensive range of sea and climate, and I am surprised that the French
naturalists, who have of late swept the seas with so much zeal and
success, have not met with it.

The animal comes up to the surface, with the Pteropodous mollusca
and the Firolide, shortly after sunset, and may then be taken with
the tow-net. With this apparatus I was extremely successful, during
my late voyage from England, in procuring Pelagian shells, as the
following catalogue will shew. My example being followed by two
other passengers, we allowed but few objects on our route to escape
us. I was also enabled, with a throwing-net, to capture such large
shells as were visible from the poop, and which would have otherwise

* Nore.—Oxygyrus bears to Atlanta nearly the same relation that Orbulites
does to Ammonites.

176 Account of Pelagian Shells. (Marcu,

passed at too great a distance from the vessel to have fallen into the
line of the tow-nets.
Gasteropoda.

1. Janthina, 6 species.

2. Litiopa (RanG.), 2 species.

3, 4. Two new genera, which I have not yet sufficiently examined.

5. Carinaria, 2 new species.

6. Atlanta (LusunuR), 2 species.

7. Oxygyrus, mihi, 1 species.

Pteropoda.

8. Limacina. A single new reversed species, being the second
discovered of the genus, hitherto confined to Arctic regions. I took
an unique specimen in Lat. 40° S. Long. 33° E.

9. Hyalea, 9 species.

10. Cleodora, 3 species.

11. A new perforate genus allied to Cleodora (rarissimum).

12. Cresis, (Rane, Manuel des Mollusques, page 115,) 3 species.

12. Cuvieria, (RanG.) 2 species. Our capture of two perfect spe-
cimens of this shell will enable me to correct the character given by
Rana, from imperfect specimens. Out of the number caught by us we
took only two perfect specimens, one of which I unfortunately broke,
its excessive fragility reducing it to the state in which Rane has de-
scribed it.

Cephalopoda.

14. Argonauta, 1 new species.

15. Spirula Peronii.

Cirrhipedes.

16. Anatifera, 2 species.

Tacertea Sedis.

17. Campylonaus (mihi). A new genus, which I am unable to as-
sign to any known class or order, from the three specimens taken by
Lieut, McNair being defective of the animal. I can only conjecture that
it may belong to the Firolid@, and that it is probably related to Cari-
naria.

It only remains to give the specific character of Oxygyrus.

O. inflatus. Testa tumida, anfractibus transverse confertim striola-
tis ; suturis profunde excavatis.

Shell tumid, whorls transversely and closely striate; sutures deep-
ly cut.

Calcutta, Feb. 21st, 1835.

1835.] Asiatic Society. 177

VIII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening the 11th March, 1835.

The Rev. W. H. Mut, D. D. Vice-President, in the chair.

Captain T. M. Tayxor, proposed at the last meeting, was duly elected
a member of the Society.

The Chevalier General Ventura and M. A. Courz, proposed as honor-
ary members at the last meeting, were unanimously elected.

The Honorable Grorce Turnour, of the Ceylon civil service, was prow
posed as an honorary member, by Dr. Mixx, seconded by Mr. J. PRInsEp,
and referred to the committee of papers.

The Secretary announced that two vacancies had been caused in the
committee of papers by the departure of Captain Troyer and Dr. Tyrimr,
for Europe; upon which a ballot was held, and Mr. H. T. Prinser and
Captain Pemserron, were elected by the majority of votes.

Read a letter from C. K. Roxtson, Esq. intimating, with reluctance,
that he was compelled to withdraw from the Society.

Read a letter from Dr. J. T. Pearson, stating that in consequence of
his residing at such a distance from the museum of the Society, he could
not any longer perform the duties of Curator, and therefore tendering
his resignation of the situation, and proposing that a person be sent for
in that capacity from England.

Resolved, that the thanks of the Society be presented to Dr. Pearson,
for his past services, and that the subject of his present recommendation
be referred to the committee of papers.

Read a letter from Mr. C. 'TREBEcK, on the subject of his brother’s
and Mr. Moorcrorr’s manuscripts. The Secretary also had received
a letter from Mr. W. Fraser of Delhi, offering to place such papers as
were still with him in the hands of the fis, on condition of their being
published for the sole benefit of the author's family.

Referred to the committee of papers.

Read a letter from Monsieur E. Burnovur, Secretary to the Asiatic
Society of Paris, acknowledging his election as an honorary member, and
noticing the receipt of the 17th volume of the Asiatic Researches and Ist
volume of the Journal of the Asiatie Society.

Library.

Read a letter from Captain H. Harxvyess, Secretary to the Royal Asia.
tie Society, forwarding the 3rd part of the 3rd volume of the Society’s
Transactions, also the first part of the New Quarterly Journal.

Read a letter from H. T. Prinser, Esq. Secretary to the Government of
India, General Department, forwarding on behalf of the Right Honorable
the Governor of Bengal, a copy of the Ist volume of Colonel Beauroy’s Nau-
tical and Hydraulic experiments, with numerous Scientific miscellanies.

Read a letter from Baron Sitvesrre ve Sacy, presenting his recent
publications as follows :

AA

178 Asiatic Society. (Maron,

De L’Aste, ou Considerations, Religieuses, Philosophiques, et Litteraires, sur
L’ Asin, 4 vols.

Extrait Du Sefer Tahkemoni.

Notice sur La Vie et les Ouvrages De M. Cuampotiion Le Jeune.

Discours prononcé 4 la Séance Generale de La Societé Asiatique du 29 Avril,
1833.

Alfiyya ou La quintessence de la Grammaire Arabe, ouvrage de DsEMA’L-ED-
pi’N MOHAMMED.

The following books were presented on the part of the Royal College
of Surgeons of London, with a letter from Sir AnrHony CaRLisLe,

Catalogue of the Library of the College of Surgeons.

Descriptive and illustrated catalogue of the physiological series of comparative
anatomy contained in the museum, vol. Ist.

Catalogue of the Hunterian collection in the museum, in 5 parts.

- Memoir on the Pearly Nautilus, with illustrations of its external form and
internal structure, drawn up by Ricoarp Owen, M. R. College of Surgeons.

Alleged discovery of theuseof the Spleenand Thyroid gland, by Sir A. CARLISLE.
. The following works were also presented.

Report of the third meeting of the British Association for the advancement of
science—by the Association.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, Nos. 5 and 6—dy the Madras Lite-
rary Society.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, Nos. 14 and 15—by the Editors.

Journal Asiatique, No. 78, September, 1834—by the Asiatic Society of Paris.

Ciceronis Opera Omnia, printed in the year 1596—dy Dr. J. Tytler.

A valuable Aldine edition of Herodotus, printed in 1513—dby Ditto.

The following works, published by the Oriental Translation Fund, were
received from the London Committee.

Tohfut-ul-Majahideen, an Arabic history, translated by Lieut. M. J. Row-
LANDSON.

An essay on the Architecture of the Hindus, with 48 plates, by Ra’m Ra/z,
native judge, Bangalore.

Travels of Macarius, part 5, translated by C. F. BELFour.

Travels of Evliya Effendi, in Europe, Asia and Africa, in the 17th century,
translated from the Turkish—by R. J. Von Hammer.

Description of the Burmese Empire from the MS. of father SanceRMANo,
translated by W. Tanpy, D. D.

Alfiya, an Arabic Grammar, by the Baron SILvesTre De SAcy.

Fifth general report of the proceedings of the Oriental Translation Fund, 1834.

The following books were received from the booksellers,

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, Middle Ages, Vol. 4th.

British Admirals, Vol. 3rd.

Tllustrations of Indian Zoology, Parts 15, 16, 17, and 18, (two in one.)

Illustrations of the Botany, and Natural History of the Himalayan Mountains,
&c. Part 4th. By F. J. Royie, Esq. F. L. S. and G. S., M. R. A. S.

The Secretary reported the completion of the Index of the first eigh-
teen volumes of the Asiatic Researches, and submitted a Bill from the
Military Orphan Press, for Rupees 1210, being the expence incurred in its
publication, which was ordered to be discharged, and thanks were voted. —

1835.] Asiatic Society: 179

Museum and Physical.

The Secretary announced that he had been requested by Lieut.-Colonel
‘Burney to beg the Society’s acceptance of the collection of fossil bones
from Ava, exhibited at the meeting of the 6th August, 1834.

The best thanks of the Society were voted for this splendid and costly
present.

A note was read from Mr. J. H. Srocaurner, presenting for the Museum
a spear, knife, and mallet, used by the nations of King George’s Sound.

These very primitive implements are made by cementing sharp splinters of
flint upon the side or end ofa stick with a kind of tough pitch. The mallet,
formed of two rounded stones attached in the same manner, is used for indenting
the gum tree, up which the aborigines climb in search of the opossum, and also
for killing the animal :—the pointed end of the knife for skinning him.

Three specimens of the navicella tesselluta (LAManc«), found adhering to
piles in the Hagli river, Fort William, were presented by W. H. Brn-
son, Esq.

Read, extracts of a letter from Lieut. Wm. Fonny, dated 6th January,
forwarding some specimens of Sulphuret of Antimony, occurring in vast
quantities in a hill near Moulmein.

Extracts of various letters from Captain Caurney and Dr. Fanconer,
describing the progress of their explorations in the Siwé4lik hills.

The rhinoceros, hitherto a desideratum in their fossil cabinet, had at length
been recognized by seven veritable molar teeth. The Museum at Seharaupur is
now so richly stored with subjects, that it will be better to await’ a full account
of it from the meritorious founders of it themselves, than to publish the detached
notices we have hitherto ventured to glean from their private correspondence:
but we could not refrain from announcing to the world the rapid progress made
at the onset, in this remote theatre of discovery.

Some vegetable stalactitic kankar and fossil shells of the Gawelgiri hills
were presented with notes by Dr. Maxucoumson of Madras.

Antiquities and Papers Communicated.

A letter from Dr. G. E, Ranxin, dated Riewara 7th February, 1835,
was read, forwarding a facsimile of an inscription from the ruins of a Hin.
du temple on the hill of Harsh in Shekawati, about 40 miles north of Sam-
bhur, and seven or eight south of Seekur.

A letter from Lieut. Newsoip, communicating a Memoir on the History
and Government of Naning.

Also a sketch of the four Menang Cabowe States in the interior. of the
Malayan Peninsula, by the same author.

The following valuable papers and documents were submitted and pre.
sented by Lieut.-Colonel H. Burney, resident in Ava,

A chronological account of the kings of Siam, obtained from the right.
ful heir to the Siamese throne, now residing as a druggist at Ava.

Translation of an epitome of the kings of Prome, Pagan, and Ava,
drawn up by order of the king of Ava for Colonel Burney.

_ Translation of the official registers of the population of the Burmese
Empire made in 1783, and reyised under the present king in 1826,

180 Asiatic Society. [Marcu,

The whole population of Burma proper from these documents, exclusive of the
‘¢ wild tribes,’? only amounts to 1,831,467 souls.

Translation with critical explanation of the proclamation made every
month in the city of Ava, as noticed by Crawrurp, enjoining the inhabi-
tants to observe certain moral precepts.

Colonel Burney having kindly undertaken to look over these papers, and
prepare them for the press, they were re-delivered into his charge for the present.

A description of the ruins of an extensive ancient town called Pora in
Assam, was communicated by Captain Wesrmacorr, Assistant to the
Political Agent on the N. E. Frontier.

[This will be published in our next.]

The following particulars of some singular ancient monuments in the
neighbourhood of Hyderabad, were communicated in a letter to the Secre-
tary from Dr. 8. G. Maucormson of Madras.

« Your remarks on the liquid from the Manikydla tope induce me to
think, that a notice of the singular tombs near Hyderabad may be inter-
esting. There is an account of them in a volume published by the Madras
Society some years ago from the pen of Captain Youne. They differ in .
appearance very much from those figured by Mr. Baxrneron, and also
from some in Mysore, mentioned in Colonel Wetcn’s book ; but are exceed-
ingly like the smaller, and ruder Druids’ circles, and in some no square
coffin or ‘‘ kiot” is found, their place being supplied by the small stones
and soil, which contains much clay, and some iron and lime, and becomes
naturally very hard when pressed together. In none did any mortar seem
to be used. Captain. Youne found bones and even skulls. _I was not so
fortunate, although very anxious for a skull, being in hopes of ascertaining
that they had been monuments of the same people, whose remains are
found in some parts of Russia. Some of the graves had been opened be-
fore, and I believe that in these skulls had been found. In those I open-
ed, there were many of the earthen vessels of very different shapes, and
the more perfect ones contained a peculiar soft almost unctuous looking
earth, in thin layers of a white and dark-gray color. In some places
there seemed to be a white powder like ashes interposed between the
dusky layers.”

The contents of two of the jars were sent up as first extracted ; but they
seemed to contain little or no animal matter :—the earth from its stra-
tification in their horizontal lamine had evidently been deposited by
gradual infiltration during’a long course of rainy seasons, until it had
completely filled the vessels.. Dr: M.’s sketches of the jars are engraved
at the foot of Plate VII. “ No. 1 was found inserted into one of the long
jars, and probably answered as a cover. The mouths of it and of No. 5 had
amore graceful curve, and in this respect had a distant resemblance to
some ancient vases.”

Adverting to Mr. Hopeson’s opinion that Buddhism had preserved an
identity of character in all times and places, Dr. Matconmson writes :

“In May, 1828, I passed through a town called Bandock, 18 miles from
Chanda, on the road to Nagpur, and finding many Hindu ruins well
sculptured on the sandstone of the district, I spent the day in examining

1835.] Asiatic Society. 181

them. To the greater number I could give names, but one insignificant head,
much injured, struck me as having the composed sleep-like appearance of the
Buddhist sculptures. This induced me to make some inquiries, and I soon
heard that in a hill two miles off there was a cavern, and on reaching it
I found an excavation consisting of three parts, the principal of which
penetrated 20 paces into the rock, but was narrow in proportion to its
length. Ina small apartment at its extremity was a sitting Bauddha
figure, six feet high. The passage was arched with several recesses on
each side, and near the entrance, the two other portions of the temple
extended 10 paces into the rock, like the arms of a cross, and were in
every respect similar. A rude outline of Buddha could be traced on the
rock, where it was smoothed away on each side of the mouth of the cavern.
There was a figure of Durga inside the temple, and one at'the door, on
separate pieces of stone, and of modern appearance. The small head
which first attracted my attention was found amongst the rubbish of a
ruined temple, which some Jain Banians in the town were engaged in
“removing in search of their images,and amongst these I found several of the
naked figures, (four or five feet high,) with curly hair, and differing amongst
themselves, usually found in Jain temples, and also representations of
Buddha in the sitting posture, with the hands laid over each other, the
palms uppermost, the hair curly, the forehead wide, with little figures
kneeling before him, and others fanning him; amongst them was a figure
of Durga. The Jains have also a modern temple there.”

Adverting also to the same subject, Dr. R. TyrLer mentioned to the
meeting, that he had remarked while in Scotland, the close resemblance of
** the little steeple at Brechin” to a Buddhist monument. The same remark
has frequently been made of the Round Towers of Ireland. He had written
a note on the subject in the Freemason’s Review, for October, 1834, which
he presented.

“The little steeple of Brechin consists of a beautiful slender cylinder or hol-
low pillar, about 80 feet high, with 60 rows of smooth stones, cemented by mortar,
and is surmounted with a cone of masonry of a subsequent period of architecture.
On the western front are sculptured figures of an elephant, having the feet of a
lion, and a forse: each 11 inches long and 8 broad. The combination of the
elephant and lion is observable on the temples of Java, and in many. statues of
‘Buddha elsewhere.’’

A note from B. H. Heneson, Esq. Resident at. Nepal, forwarded draw-
ings of the Laths or columns at Bakra in Tirhut, at Avahraj in Saran, and
of the mound at Kesriah, in the former district ;, with exact fac-similes. of
the inscribed characters on the two pillars.

Lieutenant A. Cunninenam, Engineers, forwarded the facsimile of, an
inscription on a stone slab extracted by him from the, Buddhist monument
at Sarnath near Benares.

A note by the Secretary on the same subject, and on the inscribed
pedestal of the Bauddha image, presented at the last meeting, was read.

[See the foregoing pages of the present number. |

Upon the close of the regular business. of the evening, Dr. R.. Tyruer

exhibited to the meeting several interesting experiments in Electro-mag-

182 Asiatic Society. (Marcu,

netism, concluding with the experimentum crucis of Dr. Farapay, by which
the identity of the galvanic and magnetic fluids, is considered to be
finally established. The magnetic spark was produced continuously by
Saxrton’s rotating apparatus, of which a description will be found in the
Arcana of Science for 1834.

Wednesday Evening, the 1st April, 1835.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, -President, in the chair.

The Honorable Grorce Turnovr, of the Ceylon Civil Service, proposed
as an Honorary Member at the last Meeting, was unanimously elected.

Captain M. G. Wurre, Sen. Asst. Commissary, Arrakan, proposed by
Mr. W. H. Macnaeuren, seconded by the Honorable Colonel Morrison.

Professor Lea and Dr. Haruan, of Philadelphia, were proposed as
Honorary Members by Mr. J. Prinsne, seconded by Mr. Macnacuren.

Read a note from Joun LackerRsTEEN, Esq. enclosing a letter from the
Right Reverend Jean Lovis, Bishop of Isauropolis, and Vicar-Apostolic of
Cochinchina, Camboge, and Ciampa.

The Reverend gentleman’s letter, in French, stated, that he had in his possession
a manuscript Dictionary, Cochinchinese and Latin, originally prepared more
than 40 years ago by his predecessor, Monseigneur PrigNraux, Bishop of Adran,
and revised and much augmented by himself during 14 years’ residence in the
country. He had also nearly completed a second volume of the same materials
reversed, or Latin-Cochinchinese, and he had prepared a grammar of the same
language in Latin, adopting for all three works the Roman alphabet, in lieu of the
complex hieroglyphic characters of the country, which somewhat resemble those
of China, but have different powers.

These three volumes he tendered to the Asiatic Society, requesting to be in-
formed of its intentions in regard to their publication. If it were possible to
print them at Penang, where the Bishop and a few of his Cochinchinese con-
verts have sought refuge from the severe persecutions to which the Mission has
been subjected by the present king (who owes his seat on the throne to this very
mission), he would there undertake the revision of the proofs: or if it should be
necessary, he would proceed to Calcutta for the purpose of superintending the
publication under the auspices of the Society. In the latter case, he must look
to tne Society for pecuniary aid, as all had been lost to the mission, through the
cruel treatment it had lately endured.

Resolved, that this important communication be submitted to the Com-
mittee of Papers, who will make the requisite inquiries regarding the
work, and report on the expediency, and on the means, of effecting its
publication.

Library.

Mr. C. EK. TRevetyan, presented, on the part of the author, a copy of the
Jame Bahddur-khéni, an epitome (4to, 600 pp.) of European sciences
in the Persian language, compiled by Kuan Banapur, son of Raja Mirra
Jira of Patna, including treatises on astronomy, optics, and mathematics,
and copious tables of logarithms for natural numbers, sines, tangents, &c.
Also, a small octavo volume on Perspective ( Z/m-ul Mandézarat), in the
Persian language, by the same author.

1835.] Asiatic Society. i83

Mr. H. Pinpineron presented a copy of the Transactions of the Geo-
logical Society of Pennsylvania, for August, 1834.

Meteorological Registers, for Jan, and Feb. 1835—by the Surveyor
General.

From the Book-sellers.

LaRpDNER’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, Swarnson’s Natural History.

Museum and Antiquities.

Read a letter from Mr. W. Dawes, of the Delhi Canal Establishment,
forwarding at the request of Lieut. Kirror, a drawing of an image found
about 10 years ago near the Herrod Ghat, on the western branch of the
Jumna, and offering, if desired, to send the image itself to the museum.
Resolved, that the offer be accepted with thanks.

A notice by B. H. Honeson, Esq. of an inscription in Tibetan and
Lantsa (correctly Ranza) characters, on a temple on the confines of Tibet,
was submitted.

[This will be printed in the next number of the Journal.]
Physical.

The President brought to the notice of the Society Dr. Prarson’s sug-
gestion regarding the Curatorship. He had conversed with the Baron
Hueex (who was present at the Meeting) on the subject of procuring a
competent person from Europe, and was assured that a salary of 150 or
200 rupees per mensem would be ample. The funds were in a state to war-
rant the measure. He therefore proposed, and it was resolved, that a Spe-
cial Committee, consisting of the Honorable Col. Morrison, Mr. W. H.
Macwacuten, Dr. Pearson, with the President and Secretary, be formed
for the purpose of carrying the measure into effect, limiting the vote of
salary to 200 rupees, and empowering the Committee to arrange other
incidental expences with reference to the present means of the Society.

Read a letter from Serjeant Dean, dated Delhi, the 20th March, ac-
knowledging the receipt of the remittance of Rupees 100, on account of the
expences incurred by him in transmitting fossil bones and other specimens,
and announcing further contributions from himself and friends.

A letter from. Lieut..N. Vicary, forwarding a small box of fossil bones
from Julalpur, on the banks of the Betwa river; also some fossils of the
Alligator, from between Chunar and Mirz4pur on the Ganges; and a
specimen of limestone from Landour, with impressions or erosions by water
similar to those alluded to by Dr. McCuenuanp.

Some of the bones from the Betwa, the metacarpus and femur of an Ox, were
lined with beautiful crystals of dog-tooth spar, which was also remarked lining the
cavities of the kankar conglomerate forming the matrix in which they were im-
bedded.

Mr. Benson, who was acquainted with this fossil site, stated his Opinion that

they were of modern fossilization, being found abundantly in the bed of the
Betwa river.

=——=

Mr. H. B. Benson exhibited to the members present, the collection of

shells made by him on his recent return to India, comprising many new
genera and species.

[Notices of this collection will be given in the Journal. ]

Meteorological Register.

‘ensn sv poyenyils pue sues dy} SJUSUINAYsUT oY, T,

-

184

Arp pure rvayo Ayperoues *aTqeiaea £80 | Bf f r } |

x BA Py fhe LIT | FLO} FL |GET | OST! 9°88 (Par‘T) TL9* | G62‘ OL GR6*O|0RG* | 126‘6cf"ueEW
op “ouy “uf omu Ad tMU ofoet | ets | 9 991 ala‘t! 919° | 888° ‘ angia
op "und op "MSS MS [S gszt | SOL 4 6L SSI 9FG‘L Fags ee" Te ae ee, fel ie
op op “Sor "Ud ya BEzt | OLE: FSS > aleve, (eis. eteMle 6 Sie atele BIT’ £1988 866 0€
op op “map *MS *MS 'S OST | BIZ f 9G £°NG FEST) 949° | O18" f mpabtlann’ | aces 3
op oP op “MS “M3 “MS O@EL | 0°99 § 09 SBI 986‘T igs 908" ot aor et oa. ag
op rea]? op ‘MMS AAS coer | #29 | 99 ost GLUT) 199 | OFZ‘ GZ | 9% A SM Nae
op -auy op “mS "MS “AA aos | L6¢ | Lg $03 FST‘T| 069° | TrL' 9'FI enee inearcde |. ae
op op op “MU MO *M OfTOL | Of19 f 9S £61 RBO‘T| BBOS | O42‘ gfe] B06. ie ae fe
op an99 op oN Se oir | 19} 2s 3'61 FOT'T| 869° | ZOZ4 99 | 0°91 Pnslaeee tierce ee
op “aya op ra: aA PA: ofrat | L°69 | 99 (‘Or Lert! 06G* | LE: LZ pepeuleee (aoe ee
op ‘aug. *1eayo “MA “MS crs Of9Sr | BFL} €8 6OT 982°T ase‘ 999° ae ae me a Eg

oe “au “pnos “AS “Mn cS OSL | PIL | 6L 0°61 908'1| 926* | 289" oe een an ie i

Se Avaya suns op 's “AAS ‘s 9.601 | BIL | 2 LST £26'1| (99° | BAL" oF BOOT Raat aane aL
sulteay> *azey “Soy “Ud "MS “5 0) GLit | col | 88 gt GIT‘1| Gals re" VS reat. nes oe ae

SREP NORD “pnojo “yun ie gts ‘0 BFIT | 9°99 } 88 18 woot t| 6aZ* | 682° of fear (eaeclegee Lot

; *Apnoyo *4SB019A0 "1SBIIOAO “mM “MS ‘Oo s‘sor | ¢*99 | 96 ae 0960} Leas lols re Ha a 906° “i
gael “ured ‘ured prey AL "9 9 020 6°99 are) ch ee 869 06a. za! OF enae 90" 016% OT
zat op yscumo | "SAM “AN OGLE | PFO | 88 ar BLOT] Fz8* | 9884] 96 | HF ocessltapesl greeel an

App 6 Ed eee ae aes | alo | 98 18 £860] 658 | aba4 96 | 9° rae noe face: | et

: op op “aS *as *o TLat | 99 | 82 Be BUT] 669‘ ‘ s© lee (;

[nuns *1R9]0 “Iva PRU as ‘oO oie! B99 | 9L Het rr oer wee ae ie aa ¥B6" ai
op *sppo wind ‘U °O0. MU cuit | P99 | 8. OE] 81L‘T| O92! | BLA! ae ce TE0* | 866° Il
op op ‘p ao “MU u “s+. | 199 7 82 tara 180‘T| 882° | 698" vee B60" uReo* ae 5

op op “ “Ss *MS ---. | $869 cg ay Ost ae « Bove an ealllaitee ©

oP “1ea[9 “Bog -yy | MS Ms ss ofter | 9} 19 eT Ha RC ES he Ane ene cee G
qeayo “uma ‘una f "MU mu ts Pot | S02 | eS foes | 997 LeT'1| Z99* | 618° 18 126" lean | Epos

oP pn *1vajo s Cis Suen STO} oe --| ogg f See! ---= 1 8°6 Fo0‘T| PLS | G08" iF Lon‘tht90" z86! ¢

“Kzey op "as ‘as “MS sees | 109 BQ | +-s- | FOL 990*1| o9/* | zegs ‘ Sad by gap

ioe op azey Js “MS *s Gey Cee MG QN ee YON 201 eat zi)! a eee age st é

hae Pe op eee | ee ---- | oO} 98 |---| 888 2£0°1| 969° | Zed" ar cus leer | Ole | 3
if avo maps s } ee 0°99 } GB | ---- | BO | 2°08 \S8o‘t| 229° | OZ‘ BF 1L8O|6r6*s| 028°Ga]_ T

& i > em ia 0] ad og ic aee aa, Pease inn, ae ae. = alae reas
: = 5 ~ © Be] & | sSieblos| £182) ss) 25) Pegs) Fh) Oe bs) as eS nem s
zB 2 Por § | S18 [BELT SE) Beeler ss | REF acl omg |e" je8 | ese) S
5 z 5 ee PLES! B pe /so| § |es| slo nieee [esis] "|eelF | ee 8s
R & 5 é = 5 ° jase! 30 g s oO ooh Mi Rau Cwlco om le og ° <a
j f 8, i BUsa'| >. BSB} Ro] Soa = | oo SiS 3 a 120 las fa =
2 5 ; Bri “35 5 nm] Meh th = a! 2 Bil° SB igs ® a
ah ae ® ef sl BYE tes eet te
A Me iechaba j g
IOYIvI MA “pum LaJIULOMIIOY L, “W ‘dp e SUOT}BAIOSYO : =
PR a W ‘V OT 3@ suotjVAresqO a

“GESl oe Jo y IMO att Lof “nynany ‘ag hosspy ayy yo pdoy ‘sagsebaay 1091b0j0.L0a}a [iT

JOURNAL

OF

THE ASIATIC SOCTETY.
No. 40.—April, 1835.

1.—Description of Ancient Temples and Ruins at Chardwar in Assam.
By Captain G. E. Wesrmacort, Assistant, Governor General's Agent,
N. E. Frontier.

Towarps the close of November last, I had occasion to proceed on
public duty into Chardwar, a small district in the northern division of
Central Assam, being on the north bank of the river Brahmaputra
between Lat. 26° 32’ and 26° 51’, and Long. 92° 19’ and 92° 55’. = It
has its name from conducting to four passes of Bhutan, and is bound-
ed onthe north by hills of various altitude, situate at the base of the
Himalaya, and inhabited by three wild tribes of mountaineers, called
Duphlas, Akhds, and Kupah Chowahs* ; the Brahmaputra, confines it on
the south ; to the East it has the Bhairavi river, which divides it
from Nondwar, and to the west the river Rhotas, which separates it
from the small district of Chiteah.

I think it necessary to state thus much in the way of introduction,
to point out the precise locality of the ruins I am about to describe, as
it is doubtful if many of my readers are aware of the geographical
position of a district placed in so remote a corner of our possessions.

In the south-east angle of Chardwar, a chain of granite hills, rising
from two hundred to five hundred feet above sea level, and clothed
with grass and forest trees, sweeps outwards in a crescent form from

* Kupah Chowah isa corruption from kupds-chor or cotton stealer, a name
to which the people are well entitled from their predatory habits; but the
Chirdwarians stand in much awe of these robbers, and shrink from bestowing
on them so uncourteous an appellative. They come of the same stock with the
Akhas, from whom they differ in few respects, and are said to have divided into a
separate clan about sixty years since in the reign of Lacumi’ Sineu king of
Assam.

BB

186 Description of Ancient Temples and [Aprit,

the Bhairavi to the Brahmaputra. The inhabitants assert, these hills
were originally called Agnighar or Agnigarh, the place or fort of fire,
from their constantly sending forth flames, or, a8 others affirm, from
a raja named Bana having made a fort on the spot of fire: they add,
that Krisana mounted on his gartra (a creature half-bird half-man,
corresponding with the eagle of the Grecian Jupiter,) brought hither a
supply of water and quenched the fires, and that in commemoration of
the event the name of the hills was changed to Porda, which in the dia-
lect of Assam signifies ‘ the burnt,’ a name they still retain. 1 thought
it possible this obscure tradition might be connected in some way with
the existence at a former period of volcanos, but after an active scru-
tiny of the spot no traces of subterranean fire were discovered to bear
out the supposition. I had taken up my abode temporarily in the
neighbourhood, when I accidentally learnt there were some gigantic
ruins to be seen in the wilds, respecting which the natives could fur-
nish no satisfactory information : on proceeding in the direction in-
dicated, I found it impracticable to conduct the search from the density
of the jungle, which consisted of lofty trees entwined with parasitical
plants, and reed-grass upwards of twenty feet high swarming with
wild animals ; these obstacles were partly removed with the assistance
of some peasants, and opened to view many interesting remains of an-
tiquity which amply recompensed me for the trouble I had taken.

The first temple I examined appeared to have faced the north, and
to have been provided with a portico supported on three columns of
sixteen sides; each shaft, not including the plinth and pedestal which
stand four feet above the ground, measured eight feet high and five
and a half in girth, and was wrought from a single block of fine granite.
The shafts have sculptured capitals, while the surbases take the form
of an octagon, and the plinths are circular at top, and spread into
four feet, making a sort of cross that measured four and three quarters
feet each way. Three gigantic stones, with the fragments of a fourth,
each hewn from a single block fourteen feet long, and cut into five irre-
gular sides of which the total showed a circumference of eight feet,
seem to have formed the entablature of the entrance porch, which I
judged to have been fifty-six feet long. The frieze has three tiers of
carving in basso relievo representing scrolls of flowers; the aper-
tures in which iron rivets were introduced can be distinctly traced, and
it is evident that no cement was employed to unite the materials. The
other members were too much shattered and dispersed to enable me
to conjecture the form of the temple; from a great portion of the sur-
rounding works being in an unfinished state, it affords the presumption
that the architect must have met some unlooked-for interruption ; and

1835.] Ruins at Chardwdr in Assam. 187

that this and the other buildings were overthown at the same period
by some hostile power opposed to the propagation of Hinduism, as-
sisted perhaps subsequently by a convulsion of nature. Earthquakes,
I need scarcely observe, are more frequent in Assam than in any other
quarter of our Indian possessions, and that they accomplish so small
an amount of mischief must be attributed to its never having been the
custom to employ stone and brick in the construction of dwellings.
All classes, from the king to the serf, build with such slight and pe-
rishable materials as grass, bambus, and timber; thus houses sustain
little injury from a shock however violent, and even if thrown down
could not do much mischief to their inmates*. Had time been the
sole instrument of overthrowing these structures, it is but fair to sup-
pose from the great solidity of the materials that the ruin would have
been less complete, and that the fragments would have lain in a nar-
rower conipass.

Chardwar at one period undoubtedly formed a part of the ancient
and extensive kingdom of Kémrap, but whether the city at Pora was
destroyed by the Muhammedans during their invasions, or by the
Ahom kings prior to their conversion to the Hindu faith; or was
overthrown at a later period by the Vaishnavas in their struggles
for pre-eminence with the Saivas, is alike matter for conjecture. In
the absence of inscriptions and other precise information we must
have recourse to the traditions current in the country, and to such
historical records as are within our reach ; these I now purpose to
advert to.

_ The inhabitants of Chardwar assert, that R4jé Bann, the founder
of Pora, was a demi-god, sixth in direct descent from Brauma; they
add on the authority of some work whose name has escaped me, that
his dominions were situate on the banks of the Nermada river; that
he journeyed into Kamriip, Chardw4r, and other parts of Assam, and
was the first person who introduced the worship of Maupz’va into
that quarter of India. The extensive walls which encompass the tem-
ples at Pora, are said to have made part of a fort or city founded by
him called Lohitpur, Sonitpér or Tejpir, all three signifying the

*Tn an ancient MS. I have met with, written according to the custom of the
country on the inner surface of the bark of the sachi tree, a very destructive
earthquake is recorded to have happened in the A. 8. 1529 (A. D. 1607), when the
earth opened and vomited a vast quantity of sand and water. On the 3lst March
last, two severe shocks were felt throughout Assam; the first cast down the stone
spire of a temple at Bishndth, fractured an idol within the shrine, and effected
other damage in the province, and on the 3rd of November following there was
another quake of less violence.

BB2

188 Description of Ancient Temples and {Aprit,

city of blood, perhaps in commemoration of a battle stated to have
been fought there between Krisuna and the Raja. The ‘Sri
Bhagavat,’ to which I referred, informs us that Banu was the son of
Batt’, the generous, and that he had a thousand arms, which probably
means in a figurative sense that he was endued with immense strength ;
this power is said to have been conferred on him by Siva, who also
promised to defend his capital against external foes, in return for the
pleasure he derived from the rajé’s musical performance, (a talent
in which he excelled,) when he played on some occasion before the
god who was dancing with his votaries. On obtaining this boon, the
invincible Banu subdued both gods and men, and returning to Sonit-
par surrounded his capital with fortifications of water, wind and fire,
and lived there in perfect security ; but when he found after a short
time that none were able to oppose him, his heart was swollen with
pride, and repairing to the court of Siva he declared, that as he was
indomitable the boon bestowed was worthless, and wished to know
if there really was any one capable of resisting him. The god, dis-
pleased at his arrogance, presented him with a flag, which he desired
him to hoist upon his palace, and promised that whenever it should
fall an antagonist would appear to humble his power : delighted with
the gift Banu returned home, and waited patiently the fulfilment of
the prophecy.

The narrative goes on to say, that Bann had a daughter called from
her extreme beauty, U’sa, or ‘morning,’ who was visited in a dream
by Anirup the son of Prapyu’mwna and grandson of KAmopr’va ;
that on awaking from sleep the damsel indulged in loud laments,
and was inconsolable at missing the lovely form imprinted on her
memory, and which had occupied so large a share of her midnight
thoughts.

One of her handmaidens, by name Cuirra-LikH or ‘ The Limner,’
daughter to Ku’msuanp her father’s minister, moved by her excess
of sorrow, inquired its cause, and U’sa, reposing confidence in the
attendant, related her eventful dream regarding ‘a man of sable hue
with lotus-eyes, long-arms, and clad in yellow garments, beloved
among women, who had abandoned her in the ocean of distress,’
CuitRa-LikHA soothed her affliction by engaging to produce the object
of her love: she painted the images of gods, of demi-gods, sages and
powerful kings of the earth, of the house of Brisunr’, of Anu-
pu NpDAVI’*, of BALARA’Mf, and of Prapyu’mna, which last (being the
likeness of her father-in-law,) as soon as U’sa looked upon she was

* Vasu-prE’va the father of KrIsHna. +’ Foster brother of Krisuna.

18385.] Ruins at Chardwadr in Assam. 189

ashamed. The limner next painted the likeness of Anirup, and
when U’sa saw it she modestly hung down her head, and exclaimed
smiling, ‘This is he who has robbed me of my heart.’ Recognising
the portrait to be that of Krisuna’s grand-son, Cuirra-Liku< left her
mistress and departed for Dwdrikd (on the sea coast near the gulf of
Cach, at that period governed by Krisuna,) and seeing Awnrrup,
sleeping on a couch, she by means of enchantments spirited him away
and brought him in safety to Sonitpir. U’sa, overjoyed at the sight
of her beloved, introduced him to her private apartments, and he intoxi-
cated with pleasure took no account of time. The military guard in
attendance on U’sa suspecting that some stranger had gained access
to the harem and seduced the lady from her maidenly vows, waited
on the prince, and apprised him his daughter’s conduct had
brought a stain upon his lineage. Banu, distressed at the news,
repaired with some armed followers to his daughter’s apartments, and
surprised the lovers playing the game of chess: ANirup starting
up on their approach, seized his bow and discharged a flight of
arrows with so much precision against the hostile party that they took
to fight; Banu, however, whose rage had now passed all bounds,
disregarding the tears and lamentations of his daughter, seized upon
Awnirup and bound him with cords,

Meanwhile Krisuna, having missed his grand-son during the four
rainy months, was filled with anxiety for his safety, a feeling in which
the other friends of ANnirup participated, and at length intelligence
of his confinement reaching them through a sage called Na’rap, the
race of Brisuni’ of whom Krisuna is the lord, went up to Sonitptr
with twelve legions, and attacking the city on all sides broke down
the walls and buildings and destroyed the orchards. Exasperated at
the mischief that was done, Bann came forth with an army whose
divisions equalled in number those of the foe, and assisted by Siva who
rode on his bull, and came attended by his sonand votaries, gave battle
to Bararam and Krisuna: a bloody engagement ensued ; but at length
Krisuna bewitched Siva whose votaries fled, and slew a vast num-
ber of Banu’s army.

Furious at the prospect of defeat the prince sought out Krisuna
and encountered him in single combat, but the god cut through his
adversary’s bow-string, destroyed his car, slew the charioteer and
horses, and sounded his shell in token of exultation. Ku’rasi’ the
mother of Banu, trembling for the life of her son, appeared naked and
with dishevelled locks in presence of Krisuna, and he ashamed at the
spectacle cast down his head, an oceasion which the lord of Sonitpur

immediately seized upon to make his escape, and fled for refuge to his
capital,

190 Description of Ancient Temples and (Apri,

After this event, Srva visited Krisuna’s army with fever; but the
latter not to be outdone in modes of annoyance created another fever to
contend with that of his adversary, and came off victorious. The
raj4 now advanced a second time to give battle, holding a variety
of weapons in his thousand hands, which he hurled at Krisuna, who
broke them with his. discus and hewed off the prince’s arms like branches
from a giant tree; seeing the peril in which he stood, Mauann’va
advanced and besought his brother deity to save the life of his favour-
ite. Krisuna made answer, that he was bound to gratify Maupr’‘va,
and that he intended to spare the prince because he was the son of
Baur and grand-son of PraunAp, whose race he had promised never
to destroy—‘ What I have done,’ continued the god, ‘ was to subvert
his pride, I have lopped off his superfluous arms, and the four which
remain are quite sufficient to enable him to enjoy eternal life.’ Thus
assured Bana fell at Krisuna’s feet, and brought forth ANnirup and
his daughter, seated in a car richly apparelled and ornamented, and
surrounded by countless armies; KrisHna was content, and returned
to his kingdom of Dwa4rika.

The next account, which has less admixture of the fabulous and
appears the most deserving of attention, is taken from ancient records
in MS. of the Assam kings, which speak of a place called Pratappur,
the splendid city, the capital of RAmacuanpra, usually known under
the name of the Pratappiriya raja, and which can, I think, be no
other than Pora. This town is stated in the MS. to have been
placed on the north bank of the Brahmaputra, a little below Bishnath ;
and as the entire country bordering the river from Pora eastward to
Bishnath, with the exception of a range of hills three miles above the
former, where the Bhairavi enters the great stream, is covered with
swamp to the extent of several miles inland; there are strong grounds
for supposing that Prataépptir and Pora are the same. The present
path from Poréto Bishnath, which is only practicable in the dry
months, often runs so far as six miles from the river, and the travelling
distance does not exceed twenty-six or twenty-eight miles; while to
the eastward of the Pora chain, extensive morasses skirt the Brahma-
putra, without interruption, as far as Chite4h, from twenty-five to
thirty miles distant. No ruins have been discovered nearer to Bish-
nath than the spot indicated, and though it is possible the site of
Pratappiir may have disappeared in the lapse of ages, it must not be
forgotten that it was always usual with the kings of Assam to found
their capitals on the bank of the Brahmaputra or other navigable
streams, and to choose a situation removed alike beyond the reach of
inundation, and the chance of being swept away by the floods—advan-
tages which are possessed by Pora in an admirable degree.

1835.] Ruins at Chdrdwdr in Assam. 19]

RAMACHANDRA was, according to the volume I consulted, the twenty-
fourth sovereigu of a kingdom which embraced part of ancient
K4mrtip, and made the eleventh of a third dynasty of its kings.
SnueAdav the thirteenth sovereign, and ninth and last of the second
dynasty, was vanquished by Vixrama’pitya, and was succeeded by
Jirarz, a pious Chhatri from Dabera in the Dakhan, who overcame
Kamrip, and on ascending the throne, assumed the title of Duar-
maA-PA’L. He was the progenitor of Ra’macuanpra, who began to reign
A. §. 1160, (A. D. 1238-9.) and is the first prince the date of whose
accession is commemorated in the volume. Ra’mMacHANDRa is stated to
have wedded with a daughter of the Kiat Raja, who ruled a coun-
try on the south bank of the Brahmaputra, and whose subjects followed
the occupation of fishermen; some remains of his capital are to be
seen, it is affirmed, on the Bakani Chapri, an extensive island
supposed to have been separated from the main land, or thrown up
by the river. The princess, his daughter, was known among the peo-
ple by the name of the Kamat& Kuwrr’, but in books she is styled
Cuanpra Prasad. She was walking one day during her husband’s
absence on the bank of the Brahmaputra when the god, becoming
enamoured of her extraordinary beauty, fell a prey to sensual desires,
and effected his purpose by embracing the princess with his waves;
but another account attributes her impregnation with greater show
of probability to a young brahman of the prince’s household, and
declares the amour with the river god was a fabrication of the lady to
conceal the lapse of which she was guilty from her parent. Passing
over that part of the narrative which details the discovery of her
inconstancy, and the means to which Ra’mMacHanpRA had recourse to
put a termination to her existence, all of which failed of success, we
come to the period when the princess, who had taken refuge at her
father’s court, gave birth to a son who was called from his beauty
SuasnAnx ; his head bore the impress of an 4rf-fish, which marked his
parentage, and hence he acquired the surname A/rimasrna, or A/RI-
MaTH, 7% e. having the head of an 4ri-fish. He passed his early
years with the father of his mother, and subsequently removed to the
north bank of the Brahmaputra, where he acquired territory ; he
made war upon Rajé Puenvua of Phenudgarh, in KAamrip, where
the remains of a small fort are still to be seen, and reduced that
prince to subjection; and afterwards constructed a fort called Bad-
yagarh at Hathimor4, in Kacharjf mahal, which is still in exist-
ence, and made it his residence. In the course of his wars A’RIMATH
extended his conquests to the kingdom of Ra’macuannra, of whose re-
lationship to himself he was ignorant; he laid siege to Pratappur,

192 Description of Ancient Temples and [Aprii,

and through the treachery of a drummer of the garrison, who gave
notice of a fitting time for attack, he surprised a part of the works
that were imperfectly defended, made himself master of the fortress,
and beheading Ra’macHanpra returned in triumph to Badyagarh.

Some discrepancies are here apparent in two MSS. I consulted; one
account states A’rimatH slew PuHenva, while another maintains that
Puenua usurped the throne of A’r1imatTH on the death of the latter,
and abode in Phenuagarh. Gasanx, the son of A’rimatu, succeeded
Puenva, and made his residence near Pratapptr, in the vicinity of
Agnigarh, and it is provoking that from this time no further men-
tion is made of the place. I shall merely add, that the last named
prince was followed by his son Sukrank, who died without issue A. S.
1400, (A. D. 1478-9,) when the dynasty of Jitari became extinct.

The destruction of the temples at Pora is ascribed by some to an
apostate brahman of K4noj, called Por& Suruan, or KALAPAHAR,
who was compelled to embrace Muhammedanism, and at whose
door the Chardwarians and others in Assam lay all the sacrilege and
mischief that has been consummated in the province. From their
massive proportions, and the carving and ornaments being so much
worn by time and exposure, the fanes are evidently the work of a
remote era; I sought in vain for an inscription, and neither the priests
of the district, nor the ancient families whom I consulted, could assist
my researches, or point with an approximation to accuracy, to the date
of their origin.

Unconnected with the first temple, and retired some yards deeper in
the wood, or rather grove of trees, which was in likelihood planted by
the priests who ministered at the temples, I found the ruins of six or
seven other enormous structures of granite, broken into thousands of
fragments, and dispersed over the ground in the same extraordinary
manner as those already described. Altars of gigantic proportions
were among the most remarkable objects: one of these measuring
upwards of six feet each way, and eighteen inches thick, was elevated
from seven to eight feet above the level of the plain, and approached
on each side by layers of stone disposed in the nature of steps. It
was hewn from a single block of granite ; underneath was a sort of
cavern: the top had holes for iron links, and a receptacle to receive
flowers and water to bedew the Nandi or sacred bull of Siva, who was
placed, my informants imagined, on the brink of the reservoir. Six
or eight other altars, one of them making a square of forty-six feet, and
eighteen inches thick, are to be seen in other parts of the ruins, and
several square blocks, each measuring from twenty to thirty feet, con-
cave in the centre, and sculptured in imitation of circlets of flowers,

7¢
4 | ; “a
WD AE eel 7
oe - i
saan pf Yo orrystier fee "A a ,
OO Aone ye ors ry in 0s |
fia age srturslep hog Inipaitt Ut i
J iu! DMN, AAA IK an Srey
a ; ty Lows iH IAS ie ; cia SO oA D 1e.t Nyame 4 ries ; .
iy pais -altitor AAW IRA t Woie Sr ewhe rh TY dtetvee tf
a mA al AO haa’ do owoqds ors Deqvino \ ue!
sarah As ope ash? ot Oh As f Bb ‘fara pel ait : i}! op Mae a if
En. i mgyeian’d 18941 apnoniagy nid HAC, Wee) ea
it Poon) gidla* ayo tart sutalg) Vy ROBE UST (eNte) Eper ne
ods tact nha tor: gee 1 ‘6 aiiytort: te atty al vO
"i Ww boi by ori RUM AMI red roa 2d vit ro weet bor tabs tty
‘naan RICA T CRONIN I (10M ESAS Sa I 8 dae: ‘i
ecierees sD | a rise! ie gohc st Pore 7 oad Ves ay ant
7 Fe SMARTUE afiat satlnp pone mt) Sigad ry Oh Bteoe
Mepis: ey Tedal ys BYE ee Se “em renvaree 4 epee aia! oe J

ven ee $m. mcihio Bus souek tile dee 10
¥ POLI agit tk doraseidivens b ag ger hails “Ye peers
fd eiseagerin bon RG Yum Ph bialedon IEG ig wick ;
wo gaaobive! sh eopat ocimcqts bra Sarlburd stip
fit tad2ior Bas. sebiginodat op 10} cin: es Pia Staci
tiae petinzces t mtociye do‘lins nt janinay ect tos Stars its prea
one mt aohwonizondgs ws.ctty isis are Mopianapeins c v473 |

Bieri SITS ‘Sei
scuoe-banizor Geh6 Aliutst te St yeti stow Rsbeempuceb ly: y :
es nt anv doidw ost id-sy ees tadgichinin Lita |
rig: edt baat 2 4, 8 lqor mot adr fir.5 rmodrior lei “Shae Mindy ets. ae
3 oisti ABalorit!. ee: ores “he gic pecrentee) Boeic ete.
eyine Of), Gi DIMER ear SY TREN Dien kt rina
Sitaoyip,. to, cateibAa eadixaealy pbaersii- Qs wht Cunard
gn? to ono: sooice sidedismes igen pa agonrul a

L woteltweddai sseilgio baa .vaw deme. jig branes fe ‘abe anis Wrist
Sana’ arias ons Jeciawal-u eyoda Joa) | Highs cy aves rial
pie ‘SIH? He ors, gi Dsaogerh SMEs +0 BTA Bh Uh, shiz pike
a w shigoowwbau i tigers To bsald elas, i Bite, aga arn
ante a908%.4 bn De L1G! oR ola Ants Poni £0 ern
Yoda porwdae 10 busy a AB Laine Brig xueene

Reed vik sto) boi aiieidemeo}:, ;

1 WORE 4 .

8M ‘ai Seeger pois: abetpa os Nal
ay) nao ot gaa be eg, yaa hetipa
a ea AEs “gal Oe uae

ae

Vot Ve PU. X.

Jour. ab. Soe.

eg

2 sani posto 6

RAN ASSN IY GLEE WG IE NS? 9. LOTION SOY POISE LYON WYER ESAS HEINE OIC
‘ WW ZAgZeeZ ZF, SINS Ca Oeaganges eS =U ERIS
A \ SS ge SEN Nis Gir co CIN) RN) SNe tele re
ASW ings tees INS SINISE 2ST IS
SN / Iie YK KE oT vamp sjormby DYN
NYG SSS Se
Sel ot aN SSS oie
Sin > ? a d Duy hi
Wj SESS e UID7A SSVLbO YbUF
ZA i Ke a) .
A) ONS z % 42 pobrur if % Puno ypu, J} now 0, :
DS seaniigeee » = aie tts a :
pe PRL DEP EDISGG ms BOOTED oR 3
BLA | i iW Lr) fr . *, a <
EAS ESS spivh Gf yooa a0 Geylss y
a a a Wa y
eee eburpyng vemctury, -
EVEN ee -- ‘3
Zipp ebb BRIS Se es
AG ie © ssoibh yboy Sond put 53
\\ ANS 3 mr Fes ob HOD ; r 88
IN \ It Dye J =! hus, we 5, in
WZ z . m reve
ie) -
Zs § oe. Ge 3. eles ae e3
Ti. (Moe Q R 7 PUL TORT Pe , = & ny >
SQW s ; eo BR ~1 98
SQA ee : a 8
Ff Is RIN g s a aie: aad BP 3
ay 3 y), Vf 7 i x , a : Be
CU Ge 2 7 sas Pale x
Wi gee
WA (7 ae oe = i ES
WG ee | ee he ie : §
Ne \ iy)
Wk Ys

SIN ‘S Wf iy NE

BSSSagy
Ze gli elucos
ZA :

fin

arnid ssvu r)

1 SPLOKR GOP WOM 77 Prk!) 09 Mey

fea Sy

2 e

8 z

2K tog oayo uid

spinh %or 279M. %
2204 $6 uofyryg tong UD

5 uaa . e ose = TPR 6
EON lf pemmtpany Oss

Uu? oad ssvibh yboy
LDOpsnyyy nme 70 sophutyy, snoumy Jo aprer

1835.] Rains at Chardwar in Assam. 193

must have formed the Bedi or altar-place of Siva, as there is a seat
for the Ling or symbol of the deity in the middle of each.

Among the specimens of sculptured figures that fell under observa-
tion, I discerned on a portion of frieze, nine images, each about a foot
high, of whom Kanueya playing ona flute, and flanked by two Suhelis
(damsels), were the only persons I could identify, though assisted by the
priests of Chardwar. There were four figures of naked children eight
inches high, that looked very much like Cupids; they were executed
like the rest in basso relievo and were dancing or gambolling together
in pairs, and another groupe of five figures, eight inches high, two of
them in an obscene attitude, appeared like the others to have formed part
of a cornice.

It will be seen from the sketch which accompanies this description,
that the ruins are partly encompassed by walls, which extend in so
many directions that it is scarcely possible to guess at the purpose of
the architect. The walls have their foundations laid very deep in the
earth: they are in an unfinished state, and were evidently constructed
at a period long subsequent to the temples ; they are built of massive
blocks of cut stone, sometimes disposed in a double row, and exhibit
a good deal of carving. The stones are of various shapes, and rise three
or four feet from the ground, and were all intended to be united with
bands of iron. The entrance of the principal enclosure appears to
have been from the south, where lie some pedestals, and three or four
wedge-shaped stones, about five feet long and three broad, of a flattened
pentagonal shape, intended I presume to have formed the voussoirs of
an arch ; andthe middle of the key-stone is decorated with a hand-
some diadem or plumed tiara.

A. little to the north of the wood, buried in a forest of reed grass,
which an elephant penetrated with difficulty, I discovered a very in-
teresting fragment ; this was a solid mass of granite, of a much finer
grain than the kind used in the temples, measuring ten and a half feet
in length, two and three-quarters in breadth, and two feet in depth.
On this were sculptured, in very high relief, eighteen figures of gods,
partially mutilated, but generally in a good state of preservation.
Fifteen of the figures correspond in size, andare each eighteen inches high,
and placed lengthwise in compartments, in groupes of threes. Of these
the two external groupes, and the centre one representing, I think,
Papma’ (Lacsumr), supported by two females, are raised on the
stone more than half a foot above the others ; and again, each centre
figure (Papma’) of the compartments is more in relief than its fellows.
The whole of the images have high cone-shaped head-dresses and

ear-rings, and Papa’ is represented standing on a snake, and the
cc

194 Description of Ancient Temples and [Aprit,

attendants are supported on or rising from lotos flowers. The groupes
of the two divisions, which are less elevated than the others, exhibit,
I believe, Dured, flanked by Lacsumr and Saraswati; five of
these figures are crowned with a sort of tri-pointed diadem, while the
sixth has around turban or cap. One of the forms of Durca’ has
the right foot on the head of the demon, while the left is twisted up
at her side, and the hands are clapsed over the breast, in the attitude of
supplication ; under the central groupe of the whole, and forming part
of what may have been intended for the ornamented frieze of the tem-
ple, is a seated figure of Ganusu in relief, five inches high, flanked by
two other persons, one of them playing on a stringed instrument, and
the other wielding a club. The lower part and sides of the block are
decorated with a band of carving, showing beasts of different kinds,
encircled by wreaths of flowers, in relief, and the gods are placed in
scalloped arches, supported by pillars, which divide each of the images
from its neighbour.

The priests are so little versed in the distinguishing characteris-
tics of the Hindu deities, that they could not determine whom the
figures were intended to represent.

Near the images are nine square pedestals of large dimensions, with
three carved feet, which must have been intended to give support to as
many columns: of these, several have almost disappeared in the earth ;
and it is likely, others are lost altogether. It shows at all events the
design of the temple must have been projected on a large scale.
These pedestals do not appear to have been moved from the spot
where they were originally carved, and they are so little impaired by
time and exposure to the elements, that I feel assured they are of
modern date, compared with the buildings in the plantation and on
the adjacent plains; they were, indeed, as fresh to look at as if but re-
cently executed by the mason’s chisel. Vast fragments of the epis-
tylium and frieze, carved with beaded drapery, also lie half buried in
the soil. The people at one time commenced fracturing the stones,
from an idea that gold was concealed in their cavities, but desisted, on
a mysterious warning of the goddess Durea’, who threatened to
visit such sacrilegious attempts with death.

In the south-west angle of the Pora plains, there is another curious
remnant of sculpture, also wrought from a single mass of granite, up-
wards of ten feet long, and two and a half feet thick at the middle ;
it appears to have formed the side of a gate, and has a band of carv-
ing three inches broad on each side, showing in relief elephants,
tigers, deer, rams, cattle, and swans, encircled by scrolls of flowers.
The stone has in all twenty-five figures of Hindu deities, disposed

1835.] Ruins at Chardwdr in Assam. 195

cross-wise upon it; of these, the eighteen upper ones are in six rows,
three of a row, and each in a separate compartment, while the centre
figure is much more elevated than its fellows: they represent male
and female divinities, twenty inches high; among them 5 recognized
Hanuman. Another image has a fish’s tail, and represents, I think,
the M4chh Avatar or first incarnation of Visanu, who is recorded to
have appeared in the form of a fish to Saryavrura, to warn
him of the great flood. Several other figures are playing on stringed
instruments, and the three lower ones are merely busts, with hands
clapsed over the breast. The lowest compartment embraces three
images, of whom Siva occupies the middle place, and is provided with
a venerable flowing beard; he stands thirty inches high, and on each
‘side of him are females, twenty-six inches high: one has been destroy-
ed, but the other is playing on a stringed instrument, and her ears are
strung with a pair of enormous circular rings. Over this compart-
ment are two groups of dwarf figures, six inches high, in a sedentary
posture, and the whole sculpture bears evident marks of having been
mutilated by a barbarian hand.

No quarries were discovered, to indicate that the stones were dis-
embowelled from the hills ; but quantities of chips were seen in places:
and once I came upon pillars and altars in an unfinished state, shaped
from blocks of granite, on the surface of the earth; and there seems
no question that all the material employed on the fabrics was similar-
ly procured from the masses of rock that cover the hills in great abun-
dance. Once or twice only I fell in with well-burnt bricks ; they were
smooth and thin, of rather a large size, but not badly shaped. Great
part of these extensive ruins are buried or have sunk into the earth,
and they cover altogether four or five acres of land. I have
been thus particular in noticing them, because there are not, so far
as I know, any architectural remains in Assam, that can challenge a
comparison with them for durability of material and magnitude of
design ; and it is certain, from the prodigious number of ruinous and
deserted temples, all of which appear to have been dedicated to Siva,
being within the circuit of a few miles of Pora (I discovered twelve
or fifteen in as many days on the hills and highlands at their feet),
that this spot must have been the capital of a sovereign Prince, or
a principal seat of the Hindu religion, and enjoyed a large share of
prosperity at some remote period”.

* The records of Assam, which I consulted, mention, that Cau Cuene Pua’, the
seventeenth sovereign of the Ahom dynasty, in a direct descentfrom Cuvu Ka Pua’,
the conqueror and founder of the kingdom, being stung with remorse for the

cc2

196 Remarks on an Inscription [Aprin,

1l.—Remarks on an Inscription in the Ranja and Tibetan (UW'chhén)
Characters, taken from a Temple on the Confines of the Valley of
Nepal. By B. H. Hopeson, Esq. Resident.

On the main road from the valley of Nepal to Tibet, by the Eastern
or Kuti Pass of the Hemachal, and about two miles beyond the ridge
of hills environing the valley, there stands a diminutive stone chaitya,
supported, as usual, by a wide, graduated, basement.

Upon the outer surface of the retaining walls of this basement are
inscribed a variety of texts from the Bauddha Scriptures, and amongst
others, the celebrated Shad-Akshari Mantra, Om Mani Padme Hom.
This is an invocation of Papmd Pani, the 4th Dhyani Bodhisatwa, and
presens Divus of the Theistic school of Buddhists—with an accessary
mention of their triad, under that symbolic, literal form which is com-
mon to them and to the Brahmanists*. It is not, however, my present
purpose to dwell upon the real and full import of these words; but to
exhibit the inscription itself, as an interesting specimen of the practi-
cal conjunction of those two varieties of the Devanagari letters which
may be said to belong respectively and appropriately to the Saugatas
of Nepal and of Tibet. Not that both forms have not been long
familiar to the Tibetans, but that they still consider, and call, that
one foreign and Indian which the Nipalese Bauddha Scriptures exhi-
bit as the ordinary ecriture; and which, though allowed by the
Nipalese to be Indian, and though most certainly deduceable from the
Devanagari standard, is not now, nor has been for ages, extant in

any part of India.

cold-blooded executions which he caused to be done upon many innocent persons,
erected a temple to ManEswar (Siva), and first established Hinduism as the
religion of the realm. According to one author, Cou Cuene Pua’ ascended the
throne in the year of Sakddityé 1524 (A. D. 1602), while another author places
the occurrence fourteen years later. He died A. S. 1563, (A. D. 1641.)

I think Dr. BucHaNAN must have been wrongly informed, when he asserts the
conversion of the royal family to the new faith was effected in the reign of
GapapuHar Sineu, who he calls the fourteenth prince of the family ; while I make
him out to be the twenty-ninth in succession to Cau Ka Pua’; he was however
the first Ahom sovereign who took the Hindu title, which may have led the Dr.
to credit the information communicated to him.

The proper name of the king Gapa’pHAR SincH was Cuv Par Pua’, and he
reigned from A. 8S. 1603 to 1617, (A. D. 1681 to 1695.) In A. D. 1692-3, he
dispossessed all the Bhukuts of their possessions, and compelled them to reside
together ia K4mrup, in Upper Assam; and in the year following, he cast all the
images of the votaries of VisHNu into the Bruhmaputra.

* Viz. the triliteral syllable Om, composed of the letters A, U, and M, typifi-
ing, with the Brahmanists, Brahmad, Vishnu, and Mahes4—but with the Buddhists,
Buddha, Dharma, and Sanga.

1835.) taken from a Temple on the Confines of Nepdl. 197

It is peculiarly Nip4lese ; and all the old Sanscrit works of the
Bauddhas of Nepal are written in this character, or, in the cognate
style denominated Bhujin Mitila—which latter, however, I do but
incidentally name. I wish here to draw attention to the fact that
that form of writing or system of letters called Lantza in Tibet, and
there considered foreign and Indian, though no where extant in the
plains of India, is the common vehicle of the Sanscrit language amongst
the Bauddhas of Nepal proper, by whom it is denominated Ranja, and
written thus, in Devanagari tsit; Ranjd therefore, and not according
to a barbarian metamorphosis Lantza, it should be called by us; and,
by way of further and clearer distinction, the Nipalese variety of
Devanagari. Obviously deduceable as this form is, from the Indian
standard, and still enshrined as it is in numerous Sanscrit works, it is
an interesting circumstance to observe it, in practical collocation with
the ordinary Tibetan form—likewise, undoubtedly Indian, but far less
easily traceable to its source in the Devanagari alphabet, and devoted
to the expression of a language radically different from Sanscrit. Nor
when it is considered that Ranja is the common extant vehicle of
those original Sanscrit works of which the Tibetan books are transla-
tions, will the interest of an inscription, traced on one slab in both
characters, be denied to be considerable. Singular indications, indeed,
are these of that gradual process of transplantation, whereby a large
portion of Indian literature was naturalized beyond the Himalaya, as
well as of the gradual eradication of that literature from the soil of its
birth, where, for four centuries probably, the very memory of it has
passed away*! Those who are engaged at present in decyphering
ancient inscriptions would do well, I conceive, to essay the tracing,
through Ranjé and Bhujin Milaf, of the transmutation of Devanagari
into the Tibetan alphabet. In conclusion, ] may observe, that this
habit of promulgating the mantras of their faith, by inscriptions patent
on the face of religious edifices, is peculiar to the Tibetan Buddhists,
those of Nepal considering it ahigh crime thus to subject them to
vulgar, and perchance uninitiated utterance.

The Tibetan sentiment and practice are, in this respect, both the
more orthodox and the more rational. But in another important re-
spect, the Nipdlese followers of Buddha are far more rational at least, if
far less orthodox, than their neighbours : for they have utterly rejected
that absurd and mischievous adherence to religious mendicancy and
monachism which still distinguishes the Tibetanst.

* The very names of the numerous Sanscrit Bauddha works recently discovered
in Nepél were totally unknown to the Pandits of the plains, who received the
announcement of the discovery with absolute disbelief.

+ All the four systems of letters are given in the 16th vol. of the As. Researches.
¢ The curious may like to know that Tibetan Buddhism is distinguished from

198 Remarks on an Inscription from a Temple in Nepdl. [Avrit,

I need hardly add, after what has been just stated, that the circum-
stance of the inscriptions being mantras proves the temple or chaitya,
adverted to, tobe the work of Tibetans, though existing on the very
confines of Nepal proper—a fact indeed which, on the spot, wants no
such confirmation. It is notorious; and is referrible to times when
Tibetan influence was predominant on this side of the Himalaya.
The great temple of Khdsa chit, standing in the midst of the valley of
Nepal, is still exclusively appropriated by the Trans-Himalayans.

Note.—So much has been published on the subject of the mystical man.
tra above alluded to, that it is unnecessary to do more than direct the
attention of the reader to the learned dissertation by Groner in the Alpha-
betum Tibetanum, page 500, &c. and to a more recent elucidation of the
same subject in Kiaprotu’s Fragmens Bouddhiques in the Journ. Asiatique,
Mars, 1831, p. 27.—The mantra is quite unknown to the Buddhists of Ceylon
and the Eastern Peninsula, and it forms a peculiar feature of the Tibetan
Buddhism, shewing its adoption of much of the Brahmanical mystic philo- °
sophy. A wooden block, cut in Tibet for printing the very passage in the
two characters, and from its appearance of some antiquity, is deposited in
the museum of the Asiatic Society.—Ep.

Note.-—M. Kuaprorn, in his memoir in the Nouveau Journal Asiatique,
where he has brought so much of the erudition of Eastern and Central Asia
to bear upon this Buddhist formulary, attaches himself to two versions prin-
cipally, as preferable to all that he finds elsewhere among Tibetans, Mon-
golians, and Chinese. The former is, ‘‘ Oh precieux Lotus ! Amen,” on the
supposition of 3; aforyy & being the true reading ; but if it be read, as he

justly prefers, 3j7 afaragt =, “ Oh! le joyau est dans le Lotus. Amen.”

There is no objection to the former translation, that of “ Om mani-pad-
ma him:” for the two nouns cannot be read as separate vocatives, “ Oh
jewel! Oh Lotus !” (as M. Csoma pe Koros informs us it is understood in
Tibet,) without reading mané au instead of aftr.

The latter translation of “ Om mani padmé him’ is not equally admissi-
ble: for it would require indispensably by grammatical rule, either the in-
sertion of a Visarga after mani, or the substitution of a long i for the short
one, so distinctly marked in the inscription; i. e. the nominative afar: or aut
instead of the crude form aft7. The junction of the two nounsinonecompound
is therefore as necessary in the reading of the locative case, as in that of the
vocative ; and this makes it necessary to translate it thus: “ AUM (i. e. the
mystic triform divinity) is in the jewel-like Lotus. Amen.” The legends
cited by M. Kuaprora respecting Buppua apply as well to this version
of the formulary as to his. I hope that Mr. Hopeson may hereafter fa.
vour us with the import of these words, as explained in the yet unexplored
treasures of Sanserit Buddhist literature in Nepal.” W. H. M.

Nipdlese, solely by the two features above pointed out—unless we must add g
qualified subjection on the part of tue Saugatas of Nepal to caste, from which the
Tibetans are free ; but which in Nepal is a merely popular usage, stript of the sanc_
tion of religion, and altogether a very differentthing from caste, properly so called ,

gee

sunpo.royo whroy

Whogheha tEdlehe

oN We yY Ow ov

Tpuvuryyoy S29 sme CF wovh vaUvy PD vlymy) D U0 WoL ISU

re ES

(ees ‘ores, te Herbs ee
cies eee Som ages ainak YG “aps
Ubot ib seriys 410 ley hs a a4 0 ‘haat o-s
has Rete egked boa 4 adits ae
alt 2 Sse i era was mae
syncs ae Ken ,
eetsth, a Sift Sot ete a: aes ‘greg ait
ae “abbyy, Bidet ald here lye. Saar ae $e 4

toy ‘aural <vorgynn: Saal nl oh, 1o4
ania aber nie ei tan” heiyaya cet hs:

“4 shee io"

eS

2 aes ore ene, ht ini pat aie
24 egg eet oil) ane ft gid: me blaes hay
a ae _praatemto ORR ot 2. Mt: PEF A057 eae,
ob hdabiee: ions beseuhin Mp nsaink y. Ragen NAAT te ‘short,
Bet flan 2% noitibagn anidatoioh aes) siorti ad) eee
ie suivorg. seuss of Levgory 07 Baruds Aan haere Jes
woed bed 26 aan ban Pietustlioings cated 78 doo
22H he ee a ons iu oh ‘av

pee *

A opt th. spied ont niet soaghadan
tng sis bya aids Adew At Wee aha
han ai ie bone
Bi disse

1835.] Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. 199

I11.—Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree, (Ramrt ; Sans.
Rémdvati,) on the Arracan Coast. By Lieut. Wii1u1am Foury.
[Continued from page 95.]

The town of Rambree*, with its meandering creek, fine wooden
bridges, and the handsome temples that surround it, is perhaps the
prettiest spot upon the island; and from no place is it seen to such
advantage as from the hill of Koyandoung. The creek is not very
broad, but it contains sufficient water to admit of the approach of
large boats to the market place—a matter of some importance in a coun-
try where land carriage is not to be obtained; or if procurable, would
scarcely be available, from the absence of good roads, bridges, and
ferries, throughout the island. The town is divided into the following
compartments; viz. Oung-tshiet, Shuwe-dong, Wedt-chu, Tath-tweng,
and Taing-kuman. The former commemorates the landing of the first
Burmah chieftain at the ghaut of Rambree, when the island was first
annexed to the dominions of Ava. In Shuwe-dong, a large pole,
covered at the top with gold, was erected; and in its immediate
vicinity, stood a house in which the conjurorst used to dance, invoking
the aid of their favourite idol on the occasion of any calamity. Wedt-
chu was so called from the great assemblage of pigs in that quarter.
Tath-tweng was the site of the Burmah stockade, and now the lo-
cality of the Government jail, formed chiefly from the materials of
that stockade. Taing-kuman is the place occupied by the Kuman-thst,
a class that shall be more particularly noticed hereafter. It is gene-

* Also called ‘‘ Téing,”’ or ‘‘ Yaing-Ruah’’ by the Mughs; the provinces
Rambree, Maong, and Thandowey having suffered considerably from the incursions
of the Burmahs and Thaliens during the year 791 M. S. the Rdjd CHoumMoENe,
on his restoration to the throne of Rukkhein-preh (Arracan), adopted such means
as were likely to restore them to their former flourishing condition ; and for that
purpose, deputed his minister ANUNDA’-SuyA’H to proceed to those provinces,
taking with him such Burmah or Thalien agriculturists and artisans as had been
able to quit the country. ANuNpA’-Suya’u, in the first place, visited Rambree
Island, forming colonies, and giving names to the several new settlements, accord-
ing to the various ominous appearances that presented themselves. It is said,
that during the night his vessel lay at anchor in the Rambree Creek, a voice was
heard to exclaim,

“ Thain-lo!”’ ‘ Thdin-lo?’ Stop! Stop! a favourable omen, inducing a
further stay at the place, and the foundation of a town that received the name of
“‘ Tding”’ or ‘ Taing-Ruah.”

+t A set of vagabonds, receiving little countenance from the people at large. A
man, attired in woman’s apparel, connects himself with another of the profes-
sion, whom he calls his husband, and obtains for this husband a woman as his
second wife, with whom both cohabit; every respectable native looks upon this
class with disgust and horror.

200 Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. [A pritsy

rally admitted that the town has increased in size (though perhaps
not in wealth) since it fell into the hands of the British; but this
augmentation has been slow, and by no means equal to the expectations
that might have been indulged on the change of rule. It would be
foreign to the purpose of this brief sketch of Rambree to enter into
a detail of those causes that seem to obstruct the accumulation of
capital; but this much may be said, that the multiplication of taxes,
by the intricate division of trades, and the vexatious nature of many
ef these taxes, is one grand check to the industry of the population ;
and from thence it is easy to deduce its consequences, as they may
affect the revenue, or the morals of the people.

The whole of those improvements which have been made in the
town of late years, and contribute so much to the comfort and conve-
nience of the inhabitants, it owes to the taste and liberality of the
magistrate* (now residing there), who has devoted large sums of mo-
ney from his private purse towards the erection of bridges, market
stalls, and other public buildings.

Noticing each class under a separate head, with the distinction of
sexes, the number of souls residing in Rambree town will be as much
as follows :

eS

Adult males.|Adult females.| Boys. | Girls. |Total of each.

Matohs iit . iil. 1549 1637 1393 | 1224 5803
Burmahsiy. diaslisws 6 554 473 359° | 9375 1761
Kuman-thsi,.. .. .. 407 383 324 323 1437

Grand total of souls, 9001

In addition to the above there are a few Musalmans and Hindus;
but their number is comparatively small, and their residence in the
town (especially of the latter), attended with so much uncertainty, that
I have not thought it necessary to include them in the census. The
Musalmans were either (originally) adventurers from Cathai and Ava, or
owe their extraction to the Musalmans of Bengal, who fell into the hands
of the Rukkhein marauders in earlier times, and were taken prisoners
during the wars of the Rukkhein preht Rajas with the Nawabs of

* Captain WittiaMs, 45th Regt. B. N. I.

+ Arracan, known in past times as Rekhd-pura; and so called from its having
been the abode of the ‘‘ Rakkhus ;’’ a fabulous monster, said to devour the inha-
bitants. The scene of this monster’s alleged depredations seems to have been in
the neighbourhood of what is now termed the ‘‘ Fort of Arracan!’’? (Mrou-
u-mu, built by Raja Cuoumogrne, in the year of Gautama 1150, and in
the common era 792, or A. D. 1430.) On the extirpation of this monster, Ar-
racan was termed ‘‘ Rukkhein-preh,” or ‘‘ Rukkhein-tding,”’ the country of the
Rukkheins ; an appellation equally common to the natives of Arracan with that
of Mugh, or Mogh: the Burmahs substituting the letter FY, for R, call them
“ Yukkhein.”

1835.) Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. 201

Chittagong and Dacca. They are now so assimilated to the rest of
the population in dress, language, and feature, that it is difficult to
conceive a distinction ever existed. As if ashamed of their Muham-
medan descent, individuals of this class have generally two names,
one that they derive from birth, and the other such as is common to
the natives of Arracan, and by which they are desirous of being
known. The Hindus, again, are generally natives of Chittagong and
Dacca, who came down into Arracan to pick up what they can,
returning to their homes so soon as a certain sum of money shall have
been collected.

Under the head of Mughs (Magas) are included many inferior castes,
such as the Hyah, Phrd-gyoung, and Dhiing. Much uncertainty
prevails with respect to the origin of these castes ; it is either involv-
ed in obscurity, or totally lost to those with whom I have conversed
upon the subject. By some, it is affirmed, that the Hydhs were ori-
ginally natives of a country beyond Manipur, but nothing further
could be obtained, so as to facilitate a discovery of their descent, or
account for their settlement in the province. In former days, the
Hyahs tilled the crown lands, were exempted from taxation, and
gave one-half of the produce to the sovereign. It is insinuated by the
Rakkheins, that not a few of the Hydh caste were employed as eunuchs
in the service of the Arracan Rajas. They now occupy themselves
in the cultivation of pawn and chilly gardens, but are looked upon as
an inferior caste, and consequently never intermarry with the Rak-
kheins.

The caste termed Phra-gyoung now no longer abound in Arracan,
or are so concealed, that it would be difficult to point out one parti-
cular person to whom this term can be properly applied. In Ava this
class is still very numerous, more especially in the neighbourhood of
the most celebrated temples* and Kioums ; it being the duty of the
Phrd-qyoungs to perform the several servile offices required, such
as sweeping the sanctuary, lighting the fires, and spreading the mats
in the monasteries. As a reward for these services, they are permitted
to remove, for their own consumption, the fruits, grain, &c. that may
be offered up to the Phré. The Phrd-qyoungs are said to have
sprung from those who, in a distant period, had been convicted of some
offence, and were made slaves for the seryice of the temples as a pu-
nishment for the same.

The Diings are believed to be of Hindu extraction ; their sillier
so like to that of the Dhims of India would seem to corroborate

* Such as Shuwe-Zettan and Shuwe- dag-gone.
cc

202 Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. [Aprit,

this statement; and it must be further remarked, that their occu-
pation in former days is said to have resembled that now allotted to
their namesakes in Bengél. The Dhiings of Arracan will not, how-
ever, so employ themselves at the present day; endeavouring to
conceal their true descent, they are generally rope-makers and fish-
ermen.

Burmahs of pure extraction are rare in Rambree; those that re-
tain the name are of mixed blood, and properly termed ‘“ Bunddth.”’
They are the descendants of those Burmahs who accompanied the
several Mey-o-wiins to the province; uniting themselves with the
Mugh women, and remaining in Rambree with their families on its
being given over to the British.

The class of Musalmans termed Kuman-thst* are particularly de-
serving of notice. There is little doubt but this interesting people
owe their descent to that devoted band of warriors which accompa-
nied the unfortunate SHa’H Suga’ into Arracan. As is well known,
both the Sua’ and his followers, (who were numerous) met at first
with a friendly reception from Meng-ka-mongt, the Raja of Rak-
khein-preh. But the repeated representations of the cold-hearted
AURANGZEB induced the wretch to adopt another line of conduct;
the Sua’ and his troops were several times attacked, and finally
defeated. The prince was put to death, and such of his followers as
survived the slaughter were made prisoners, and eventually distri-
buted in different parts of the kingdom. Lands and implements of
husdandry were assigued to them, and they were further encouraged
to marry with the women of the country. Many availed themselves
of this permission, and their wives did not object to embrace the faith
of Islam. There is a curious circumstance connected with the distri-
bution and final settlement of the Kuman-thsi in the province. When
brought to the presence of Meng-ka-mong, and asked what profession
they were individually desirous of adopting, a few who were unable to
speak the language of the country, put their hands up to their heads,
and pointing out the two fore-fingers, endeavoured to represent an
animal with horns; thereby intimating that they wished to follow
the occupation of herdsmen. Upon this the Raja directed a supply
of cattle and goats to be given to them, and those who received the
latter were placed upon asmall island that has since been termed
Tchye-ki-ant (Goat Island). In the time of the Arracan Rajas,

* Kamandar? Bowman? (Kaménchi more probably.—Eb.)

+ I feel a pleasure in giving the name of this individual, in the hope that it
may tend to perpetuate his infamy.

t Called ‘‘ Saddle Island” by the British.

1835.) _ Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. 203

and even so late as during the Burmah tenure of the country, the
Kuman-thsis invariably attended the prince royal, or governors on
their journey through the several provinces of the empire ; preceding
them upon the road, and bearing their bows and arrows in their
hands. These implements of war are now laid aside, and the Kuman-
thst are, in common with others, occupied in such. pursuits as are
more congenial to the age; being for the most part weavers and
dyers, and residing ina separate quarter of the town, the avowed
adherents to the Muhammedan faith, but ignorant of the precepts it
inculcates, and assimilating in practice to the rest of the population.
Seven generations* are said to have passed away since the event above
described; yet notwithstanding this lapse of time, and in spite of the
similarity of language and attire, the features of the Auman-thsi still
betray their superior descent ; while for beauty of stature, and agility
of limb, they surpass the Muhammedans of India.

* With the view of so many houses, and such a population as that
contained in Rambree, together with the fact of its being the second
city in Arracan, it is surprising to witness such apparent poverty in
the show of empty shops on each side of the street. Here and there
a Manchester shawl, a piece of chintz, or printed handkerchief might
be seen hung up to view, surrounded with the more homely produc-
tions of the country ; but the largest and best supplied shop of Ram-
bree would scarely be deemed worthy of notice in any one-of the
sadar bazars of India. Few engaging in trade: the greater part of
the population are either idlers, day-labourers, agriculturists, or fish-
ermen, (as circumstances may induce,) having no regular occupation
calling for the exercise of a dexterous and continued application. It is
difficult to ascertain with precision the period of the greatest known
prosperity in the town of Rambree. Different accounts are given by
different people, according to their views, or the ideas they may entere
tain. Those who admit the population and wealth of Rambree to have
been greater than they are at present, fix the date of such alleged
prosperity during the administration of the Burmah Mey-o-wun, Keo-
dine-Yéjah (A. D. 1805). At that time Rambree was the grand
emporium of trade; so many as. 60 large godahs were known to
enter the creek from different parts of Bengal, and proceed from
thence to Rangoon and Tavoy, receiving at Rambree rowannahs spe-

* By Dow’s account, it is 170 years ago. I must notice an error that the
historian of India has fallen into; there is no river running from any part of
Arracan into Pegu ; the native name for Arracan proper is ‘‘ Peygri’’ or

“« Peygi,” (signifying a large country,) and this word has been evidently con-
founded with Pegu.

ccQ

204 Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. [Aprin,

cifying the duties they had paid, to secure them from further taxation
on their arrival at any intermediate Burmah port. The town of Ram-
bree, and indeed the whole island, suffered much in later years in con-
sequence of the insurrection of the Mughs, excited by the Ramu
Raja Kimprane, and only subdued by the energetic conduct of
Nemyo-suya’H*, the Burmah chief to whom the Mey-o-wun Saori’s./H
had entrusted the defence. This rebellion was followed by a species
of retaliation that deprived the town of Rambree of nearly the whole
of its Mugh population. All the sigris, merchants, and others sus-
pected of having conspired against the government were put to death,
or obliged to fly the country.

It was the invariable, and, in some instances, necessary policy of
the Burmese to trust as little as possible to the good will of the con-
quered. Securing their position by a strong stockade, and separating
themselves from the inhabitants, they formed a little garrison of their
own in Rambree ; within this stockade all affairs both civil and mili-
tary were transacted, The Burmah Mey-o-wuns were not, however,
inattentive to the comfort of the people, or the embellishment of the
town: the large tanks, Kus, and Kiouwms now seen at Rambree,
were either constructed by the Mey-o-wuns, or by those who held
situations of emolument, under tlem. Some of these temples are
still existing, unscathed by the hand of man or the less hostile ele-
ments. Others, again, have crumbled into dust, the remains of those
stupendous monuments that have marked the propagation of the Bud-
dhist creed in the most distant parts of the world. Internally they
are filled up with earth, the wall being of brick, well cemented toge-
ther. Relics of GAurama, such as the hair, feathers, bones, &c. of the
several creatures whose form he assumed previous to his becoming
man, with gold and silver images, dishes, goblets, and other utensils,
are deposited in the interior: a certain portion of each placed in the
upper, middle, and lower part of the temple The Kioums at Rambree
town are, as might be expected, larger than those commonly met
with on the island. One of these attracts attention from its superior
size, and the elegance of its construction. It was built by.a native of
Rambree, named Kommnc-sHuwE-Bo, who had been dewan to the Bur-
mah Mey-o-wun Saori’sa’H, and was one of those to whom suspicion of
conspiracy was attached, but saved from death at the intercession of
the Chilkit Mounc-so. Komenc-sHuwe-so was in later years exalted
to the office of Mey-o-wun over the island} circles, the Burmah Mey-o-

* Afterwards Mey-o-win at Rambree.

+ The name for the Burmah Superintendent of Police.
~ Mrukyoung, Murajyne, Kweyne-Kgoung, Kyoung-saa-yah, Koukoh, and

+

Miue-du-in-du.

1835.] Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. 205

win SuuwE-DoNnG-sA-Ga-su residing at Rambree. The latter was-sub-
sequently sent on a mission to Benares, and his brother Mounge
appointed to officiate during his absenee. The mission was directed
to ascertain the existence of the Bhodibeng tree, as well as the site of
many places known to have been the scene of Gaurama’s early labour;
On the return of SHuwE-DONG-suU-GA-su to the court of Ava, with the
information obtained, he took the opportunity of effecting by the most
persuasive means the dismissal of his rival from office, and from his
unremitting but futile endeavours to regain that place by a method
equally expensive, KomENG-sHUWE-BO is now living in comparatively
reduced circumstances at the town of Rambree.

The change of rule has perhaps been as fatal to the prosperity of the
monastic sects, as it has been disadvantageous to those who once
constituted the higher classes of the people. The influence voluntarily
conceded to the Phingris by the Burmah Mey-o-wiins was astonish-
ingly great, and reminds one much of the power once possessed by the
priesthood of the Catholic kingdoms in Europe. In cases where a more
peaceable species of intervention had proved unsuccessful, it was not
uncommon for the Phingris to assemble for the rescue of a criminal
about to suffer execution. The spot selected for the process of decapi-
tation was in the neighbourhood of a large tree, at the S. E. extremi-
ty of the town. The unfortunate criminal, having been previously
manacled, was led out for execution between files of Burmah soldiers;
and when arrived at the ground was made to kneel with the head
inclined, as a mark of obeisance to the ruler of the land, and avowal
of the justice of the sentence. In the meantime, the head was severed
from the body (generally with a single blow of the dao) by the execu-
tioner*, who stood behind waiting the signal for the stroke. It being
deemed a crime to take away life, it is conceived, by the worshippers
of Buppua, an act of piety to endeavour to save from death even
the vilest of animated beings; and as little resistance was evinced
towards a class held in such peculiar veneration, the Phingris not
unfrequently succeeded in carying off the criminal before execution
had been effected. Taking him to the Kiowm, he remained there
until death or a change of Government secured him from the malice
of his enemies, and the vengeance of the law in punishment of his

crimes.

* The executioners were individuals who had been condemned to death
for heinous offences, and subsequently spared, on condition of their devoting
their lives to the performance of this odious service. They were at the same
time branded upon the cheek to guard against the chances of desertion.

206 Journal of a Tour through the Island of Rambree. [Aprit,

At some little distance below the town, and on the right bank of
the creek, is a small village, inhabited by that extraordinary race the
Kaengs, of whose origin still less seems to be known than what has
been imperfectly detailed of ather castes. The Kaengs of Rambree,
by their own account, came duwn many years ago from the moun-
tainous regions of Kaladong and Kyen-duing-mytt, in Arracan pro-
per; and as they can give no information whatever respecting their
first settlement in those places, it is possible that. they may be the
aborigines of the country. Divided into clans, and differing from
both Mughs and Burmahs in feature as well. as attire, the Kaengs
have many peculiar customs of their own, some of which deserve to
be noticed. When any one of a clan dies, the body is laid upona
funeral pile, and consumed: the ashes, carefully collected within an
earthen vessel, are conveyed to the mountain from whence the clan
was known to have originally come, and there deposited in the earth.
There is something awfully grand in this manner of disposing of their
dead, bespeaking the existence of that love of liberty and of country
still engrafted in their souls, which had in some instances render-
ed them* secure from their enemies. That same spirit of Freedom
dictated an observancet which, however revolting it may appear to
European ideas, cannot fail to attract the admiration due toa virtuous
feeling, that deems honor and reputation of more account than beauty,
and has induced the father of a family to disfigure the faces of his
daughters the more effectually to preserve them from the contamina-
tion of strangers. The mode of performing the operation is as follows :
The young maiden is enveloped in a mat, and fercibly held down to
the ground, while gun-powder or indigo is rapidly pricked into the skin
(over the whole of her face) by means of a pointed instrument. This
is generally done at an early age, and the pain produced by it ceases
after the lapse of three or four days. So soon as released from
the hands of her tormentors, the poor girl is presented to the dogs of
the village, and should they evince any signs of anger or surprise, the
Operation is deemed to have been effectually performed. The Kaengs
are not very numerous in,Arracan, being found more plentifully dis-
tributed along the Yiimadong, and the less elevated mountains in their

* The Kaengs of Arracan were on some occasions particularly trouble-
some to the Burmese invaders, who feared to follow them to their mountain
fastnesses.

+ The Kaeng women are generally very handsome, and the Burmahs, as
well as their predecessors, several times attempted to possess themselves of their
persons: it was with the view of saving their daughters from such degradation
that the Kaengs instituted the observance here described.

1835.] On the amount of Rain-fall at Caicutta. 207

neighbourhood. Residing in the thickest part of the forest, and su-
perior to the Rakkheins in hardiness of constitution, as well as bravery
of soul, they are chiefly occupied in the pursuit of game, or in the
collection of honey, wax, elephants’ teeth, and snch other forest pro-
duce as may meet with a ready sale in the plains. The Kaengs of
Rambree are for the most part engaged in the cu'tivation of vegetables,
and the manufacture of spirituous liquors, which are in general demand
with those of their own class, forming an essential ingredient on all
occasions of festivity, whether in the celebration of a marriage, or in
the more important ceremonies of a funeral. Indifferent to the nature
and quality of their food, they not only subsist on vegetables and
grain, but eat the flesh of most animals—a preference being given to
that of dogs and swine.

The Kaengs possess no written records whatever of their descent ;
and as they can neither read nor write, deeming it superfluous to in-
struct their children in such matters, it is not susprising that all traces
of their origin should be either lost, or enveloped in total obscurity at
the present time.
IV.—On the amount of Rain-fall at Calcutta, as affected by the De-

clination of the Moon. By the Rev. R. Everssrt.

Since my last paper upon this subject I have been enabled to com-
pare the meteorological registers with the Nautical Almanacks. In
doing this I have made out a table of the average daily quantity of
rain that fell in each rainy season with every 24 degrees of the
moon’s declination. I have now the honour to lay it before the So-
ciety, and to add, that where the registers were complete, I have be-
gun the average with the first rain that fell in April, and ended it
with the last that fell in October.

Average Quantity of Rain in decimals of Inches in the years

Moon’s 1824 Gen. mean.
decli- and
nation.| 1823 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834
29307 | °23i} -000 *353|1°187 152] °288) °320| °365| *189: °364| °345| -345
5°00 | °110) :002) *831) °230]°180) °369) -660) -076| -223) -175| -412| -297
7930’ | +167} -000} -080] *586}°440} 449) +126}.°119] +249}. -316! +329] -260
10° *315| *016) °164) °077/°229| 436} °350] +434] °332) °373)| °370) -281
12°30? | *142)°153} *688) °078/°252) °373) °267) 1141] +132) +079) +237) -231
15°0” | -483} -001) 340] °315]-502] +227), -230| -319f +144! +285] -249 281
17°30” | °133] °152] -211) °205]-223) -317] -419] +409] +134) -269] -186) -242
20°0” | °196} :036] °305) °261]°632] -251] +234] -311} °180| -386] +253] -277

22°30’ | 052] -096] °231 *332) °277) *282) -211
25° 721] °158 °622] +432) +483
27°30? |1°586 | 1580

Notr.—The periods for which these averages were taken, are for 1823, the
months of August and September; for 1824 and 1825, Nov. Dec. Feb. and
March; for 1826, May, June, July, August, Sept. Oct.; for 1828, July, Aug. Sept.
and Oct.; for the other years, from the first rain in April to the last in October.

208. On the amount of Rain-full at Calcutta. (ApRiL,

It will be observed that the numbers in the General Mean (the last.
column) are somewhat irregular, which I apprehend is owing to the>
series of years being too short for the subdivision I have adopted, viz.
2°.30’, if instead of that we take 5° as the subdivision, the numbers
come out regularly, as follows :

Moon’s declination. General Average of Rain-fall.

5 degrees. *321 inch.
10 do. "2A
15 do. 256
20 do. <209
25 do. 347

The results are somewhat different from what I expected, for they
shew an increase of rain, not only towards the maximum, but towards
the minimum declination of the moon. Had it been towards the
maximum only, we might have accounted for it by supposing the rain
to vary with the principal tide, either superior, or inferior ; and had it
been towards the minimum only, we might have supposed that the
rain was the effect of the mean tide, as in all latitudes, less than 45°,
the mean tide increases as the declination of the moon diminishes.
However, when our data are more perfect, we may be able to get an
explanation of the phenomena. In the meanwhile, lest any one
should object that the series of years for which the average has been
taken, is too short to establish the fact of an increase towards the
maximum declination, I beg now to offer some other reasons which
led me to the conclusion before I obtained a sight of the Almanacks.

I must first remind you that, owing to the revolution of the nodes
of the moon, her maximum monthly declination decreases for a series
of years, and then increases. Thus if we turn to the Table, we find
that in the year 1829, and for two years both before and after it, the
maximum declination was always less than 20°. This revolution of the
nodes is completed in a period of about 182 years, or more correctly,
6803 days, 2 hours, 55 minutes. Now then, supposing it to be true that
the rain-falls vary with the declination of the moon ; in those years in
which the declination is small the rains ought to be scanty, and vice
versd to increase as the former increases. We have no register of
rain for a long series of years, but we have a valuable record left us
for the illustration of this part of our subject, similar to that register
of the height of the annual inundations of the Nile, which the ancient
Egyptians measured by means of a NeiAocxoresov, or Nilometer, placed
on the bank of the river ; I allude of course to Mr. Kyd’s Register of
the height of the Hooghly in different years*.. In the map No. 4,

* See his paper on the subject, (Part 1. Trans. Phys. Class, As. Soc.) and
the map which accompanies it.

1835.] as influenced by the moon’s declination. 209

subject, (Part 1. Trans. Phys. Class, As. Soc.) and map to accompany it.
In the map No. 4, we have the line of the highest high water, and of
highest low water in the different years, and I have transferred those
heights into numbers (as nearly as could be done by common measure-
ment), and then taken the mean of both for the mean height of the river
in each year during the rainy season. Recollecting then, thatthe month-
ly maximum declination of the moon was at its least about Michaelmas
1829, its greatest would be about the end of May, 1820, and its least
again, very early in 181] :—and regarding the Hooghly as the
general rain gauge of the country*, we have the mean height of the
river in each season, as follows :—

1806. | 1807. | 1808. | 1809. | 1810. | 1811. | 1812. | 1813. ]1814.
ft. in.

1815.]1816.

1510) 1511)150 1156/14 414115 0 {141041310414 9 J15 4/14 1
min.
dec. *

il 1818. | 1819. | 1820. | 1821. | 1822: | 1823. | 1824. [1825. 1826.11827
te in.

15 5/164 415 8 |15 9 {15 9 1167 119 3 |1510)15 51/15 10/15 0
max.
declin. *
of ).

There is an irregularity in these numbers ; and both the minimum and:
maximum height of the river appear to have occurred from two to three
years after the maximum declination of the moon; but if we take the
average of five or seven years nearest the maximum, and compare it
with the average of a similar number of years nearest the minimum,
the difference will be striking. A curious question here arises—Have
we in history any record of inundations, or drought and famine corre-
sponding in the times of their occurrence with these different positions
of the moon? I think we have. But the question is one that de-
mands a very wide research, much more so than, with my present
limited means of reference, I am able to give it; but I hope at a future
time to be able to lay a few items of information respecting it before
the Society. In my last paper, I suggested that the great abundance
of rain when the moon’s declination was greater than 22°30’ might
be accounted for by the locality of Calcutta, but on consulting my
own register, I find that a similar effect was perceptible at Dehli
(lat 28°40’) last year. As a sample of it, I subjoin the days in the
month of July on which rain fell, with the amount, and declination
of the moon at noon.

* It must be remembered that the level of the Hooghly at Calcutta is also
affected materially by the tides of the Bay and by the prevailing winds of the
season.— Ep.

DD

210 Influence of the moon on the amount of Rain-fall. [Aprit,

Inches Moon's Inches Moon’s
Rain-fail. declination. Rain-fall. - declination.
1824, ond 1824. o ”

amon use sd abiae Shs! my Mos Goan Ac OFS. crele o- W 48,
ste e Sle On avcpeteverere: otleemO tan ==) avo, dra ereay 2200p ere a pine oe elo
od OF ORE secrets Ay 23 18): \(——= 20). oct OBI. os 0 23 44

3

4

Dh teesiean

Oyj. wore snopes Rp atte etaeie « 2a ul Oe —— Dae cle sles gO eh aleckateetsnail IO
7

8

cromomec alters serene a) i: mel aie ROI ea SHS galt yal
see OP D0 ciate oe SL OOM DOs aces ole Late ere een Rel

a ee a es 991) te. un, /O-Uie ed, meee NSS ai,
eT eer err 056 a se
1508 ceo 1p as ON a ee) O.Gier ae eng

I have aoe nee had Toners to compare ie lesronneede and other
indications with the moon’s declination, but I shortly intend to do so.
From present appearances I cannot help feeling sanguine that the
moon’s declination will be found to be the principal cause of the dif-
ferent atmospheric variations, exclusive, of course, of those which are
occasioned by the regular annual progress of the sun. However,
whether there be any thing of truth in these inferences, or whether
I have been misled by a series of chance co-incidences, time only can
determine. If those inferences are well founded, the years of drought
are past, and the years of plenteous rain approaching. By this test
let them be tried, for no one can desire a fairer.

Moon’s Dec. Moon’s Dec. Moon’s Dec.

1835. July? 2AF dese os CD Oo | Sept. Loy wise ae i2U ee

June? 151. 4-4 ay 2S°l ns 25, oi bar i2ayrk7 —— 14,........23 30 »
DSRS ec og IO CRED 21 36 Mea oi hieioo 2A) PAG)
PSG go dese CPaG an De ae eieiei> 17 46° |——— T6,. 2 oe ce oe 26 12
— 6,........ 1 128. 1|—— 30,.......0. 134 n.}—— 17,.......0. 25 42
—— 9 gene cokS 39; j— 3l,.. «. e244 28 8. 1G eet fen a

SOC CEROR NERC AL 71 by a= AY Js a eee 2A 1) 8
jeovseee. 2043 [——— 23,,....... 1°85.

Poa Vm vailes Sak | Tle
4

Dykes Sreescers ZORGD |. lat Diana cena oe
6

7

8

— 1l,........25 10

— 12,........2550 |——
— 13,........2444 |—— 6,........2541 {—— 27,........22 47
mo — 14,........22 7 — 7,........24 16 QBEI BL AMOS Ie
Se LAs eat opaypl 8521 —— Bye eee eee 2h 19 | — 29,00... ..26 18
ee Bie 6 BO. 0S. |———— ee Ruse SO Rec 2 OPO
ge ts tS Gn See ee, 1344 | Oct “ike. 2). 2323
a 238,06 6 oe 19, 53 n.|—— 16,.. 0. 6 17 53) | ——n 0 2 i 19 55
a Dee Se eee 2e OA). Hoe enc 2a) | |——— | Ose Ole Bens
—— 25,........624 56° J—— 18). 24 1 |-—10,.....-..19 40
ZOe el te 25 48 |——19,........25 35 |———I11,......5. 22958
—— 27,.. 2.4... 25 24 .|—— 20,........25 57 —— 12,,.......25 9
—— 28,........23 42 AI ec bc we LE OD —— 13,........2618
Sra Sob ces COA DSi Oo tet Anae2A0 -— 14,,.......2614
JUV Sake eae OO Nee eee eee ey, et a eee lo.
TSB Or SADA ity ee BE kd ogee Bo Wins L Giese etter 22 16

hy 2 90 ..Gi20923 31|2-onap i alen es S580K6. AF, cB ES 26
ak UP oases iy cog HO, [eee One caren Pe ONS ay 0 (te eae aa
——"10,,. 00... 25 22 SUS: ge ee eR Ie. cee ee
WI QT 1D -! (SepEsy, 24. VE POs age fe ogi 9 Cs Ope ay
Dimebag ge gt 9 94,5) lips Bs acide dee HESIOD lars Bom och ee ees
—— 1b arene eNOS Me 5 De Ba = OG le eee cg
pH 205%. oe ee Os I) 4B) ee ogig gy 67 eee eGG
“SET dye 3 30igsey © 22) 10/16 load, ged gaeor S43) ie] 28,4 -eces JeRaube

— 8

— 9

— 22,.. ee 59 EY tl) peeorvcee 3 26 s.(—- 20: 40 eee
Casino ap poe eescee 2 3 1.

1835.] Further Note on the Inscription from Sarnath. 211

P. S.—I have added the above table of the days in the ensuing rainy
season (1835) in which the declination of the moon is greater than
17° 30’ and less than 5°, in the hope that those who keep rain gauges
in different latitudes and who have not the Almanacks to refer to, may
take an interest in the subject, and favour us with some further in-

formation.

V.—Further Note on the Inscription from Saradth, printed in the last
No. of this Journal.—By B. H. Hopeson, Esq.
[Im a Letter to the Secy. As. Soc., read at the meeting of the 6th May.]

I have just got the 39th Number of the Journal, and hasten to tell
you, that your enigma requires no Gidipus for its solution at Kathmandu,
where almost every man, woman, and child, of the Bauddha faith, can
repeat the confessio fidei (for such it may be called), inscribed on the
Sarnath stone. Dr. Mitt was perfectly right in denying the alleged
necessary connexion between the inscription, and the complement to it
produced by M. Csoma pre Koérods. No such complement is needed, nor
is found in the great doctrinal authorities, wherein the passage occurs
in numberless places, sometimes containing but half of the complete
dogma of the inscription; thus:—“‘ Yé Dharmd hetu-prabhava ; hetu
teshan Tathagata.” Even thus curtailed, the sense is complete,
without the ‘‘ Teshdn cha y6 nirodha, evana (vddi) Maha Sraman’a,”
as you may perceive by the following translation :

“« Of all things proceeding from cause, the cause is Tathagata ;” or,
with the additional word, ‘‘ Ofall things proceeding from cause; the
cause of their procession hath the Tathagata explained.” To complete
the dogma, according to the inscription, we must add, “‘ The great
Sraman’a hath likewise declared the cause of the extinction of all
things.” With the help of the commentators, I render this passage
thus, ‘‘ The cause, or causes of all sentient existence in the versatile
world, the Tathagata hath explained. The Great Sraman’a hath like-
wise explained the cause, or causes of the cessation of all such exis-
tence.”

Nothing can be more complete, or more fundamental, than this
doctrine. It asserts that Buppua hath revealed the causes of (ani-
mate) mundane existence, as well as the causes of its complete cessa-
tion, implying, by the latter, translation to the eternal quiescence of
Nirvritti, which is the grand object of all Bauddha vows. The ad-
dition to the inscription supplied by M. Csoma, is the ritual application
merely of the general doctrine of the inscription. It explains espe-
cially the manner in which, according to the scriptures, a devout
Buddhist may hope to attain cessation from mundane existence, viz.

DDd2

212 Further Note on the Inscription from Sdrnath. [ApriL,

by the practice of all virtues, avoidance of all vices, and by complete
mental abstraction. More precise, and as usually imterpreted here,
more theistic too, than the first clause of the inscription 1s the terser
sentence already given; which likewise is more familiar to the Nipa-
lese, viz. ‘‘ Of all things proceeding from cause; the cause is the
‘Tathagata :’—understanding by Tathagata, Adi BuppHa. And when-
ever, in playful mood, I used to reproach my old friend, Amirta Nan-
DA, (now alas! no more) with the atheistic tendency of his creed, he
would always silence me with, ‘‘ Yé Dharma hetu-prabhava ; hetun
teshdn Tathagata ;” insisting, that Tathagata referred to the supreme,
self-existent (Swayambhu) Buppua*.

Nor did I often care to rejoin, that he had taught me so to inter-
pret that important word (Tathagata), as to strip the dogma of its
necessarily theistic spirit! I have already remarked in your Journal,
that the Swobhavika texts, differently interpreted, form the ground-
work of the Aiswarika tenets. It will not, however, therefore, fol-
low, that the theistic school of Buddhism is not entitled to distinct
recognition upon the ground of original authorities; for the oldest
and highest authority of all—the aphorisms of the founder of the
creed—are justly deemed, and proved, by the theistic school, to
bear legitimately the construction put upon them by this school—
proved in many ancient books, both Puranika and Tantrika, the
scriptural validity of which commands a necessary assent. As it
seems to be supposed, that the theistic school has no other than
Tantrika authorities for its support, I will just mention the Sway-
ambhu Purana and the Bhadra Kalpavaddn, as instances of the con-
trary. In a word, the theistic school of Buddhism, though not so an-
cient or prevalent as the atheistic and the sceptical schools, is as
authentic and legitimate a scion of the original stock of oral dogmata
whence this religion sprung, as any of the other schools. Nor is it to
be confounded altogether with the vile obscenity and mystic iniquity of
the Tantras, though acknowledged to have considerable connexion with
them. Far less is it to be considered peculiar to Nepal and Tibet,
proofs of the contrary being accessible to all; for instance, the
Pancha Buddha Dhydni are inshrined in the cave at Bégh, and in the

* The great temple of SwayamBuu Na’rn is dedicatedto this Buddha : whence
its name. It stands about a mile west from Kathmandu, on a low, richly wood-
ed, and detached hill, and consists of a hemisphere surmounted by a graduated
cone,

The majestic size, and severe simplicity of outline, of this temple, with its

burnished cone, set off by the dark garniture of woods, constitute the Chaitya of
SwayambBuu Na’TH a very beauteous object.

1835. Further Note on the Inscription from Sarnath. 213

minor temples surrounding the great edifice at Gyd; and the asser-
tion of our Ceylonese antiquaries, that there are only five Buddhas,
is no other than a confusion of the five celestial, with the seven
roortal, Buddhas! As I was looking over your Journal, my Newari
painter came into the room. I gave him the catch word, “ Ye
Dharma,” and he immediately filled up the sentence, finishing with
Tathégata. I then uttered ‘‘teshan cha,’’ and he completed the doctrine
according to the inscription. But it was to no purpose that I tried to
carry him on through Dr Ké6rés’s ritual complement : he knew it not.
After I had explained its meaning to him, he said, the substance of
the passage was familiar to him, but that he had been taught to utter
the sentiments. in other words, which he gave, and in which, by the
way, the ordinary Buddhist acceptation of Kushal and its opposite, or
Akushal, came out. Kushal is good. Akushal is evil, in a moral or
religious sense. Quod licitum vel mandatum: quod illicitum vel
prohibitum.

I will presently send you a correct transcript of the words of the
inscription, from some old and authentic copy of the Raksha Bhaga-
vali, or Prajna Paramitd, as you seem to prefer calling it. So will I
of Dr K6rés’s supplement, so soon as I can lay my hands on the Shu-
rangama Samddhi, which I do not think I have by me. At all events,
I do not at once recognise the name as that of a distinct Bauddha work.
Meanwhile, you will notice, that as my draftsman, above spoken of, is
no pandit, but a perfectly illiterate craftsman merely, his familiar ac-
quaintance with your inscription may serve to show how perfectly fa-
miliar it is to al/ Buddhists. And here I would observe, by the way, that
I have no doubt the inscription on the Dehli, Allahabad, and Behar
pillars is some such cardinal dogma of this faith.

In the ‘‘ quotations in proof of my sketch of Buddhism,”’ which I sent
home last year, I find the following quotation in proof of the Aiswarika
system. ;

** All things existent (in the versatile world) proceed from some
cause ; that cause is the Tathagata (Adi Buppaa); and that which
is the cause of (versatile) existence is likewise the cause of its total
cessation. So said Saxya Sinna*,’ The work from which this pas-
sage was extracted is the Bhadra Kalpavadan.

1 am no competent critic of Sanscrit, but I have competent autho-
‘rity for the assertion, that Dharma, as used in the inscription, means
not human actions merely, but ‘all sentient existences in the three ver-
satile worlds (celestial, terrene, and infernal). Such is its meaning’ in
the extract just given from the Bhadra Kalpavadan, and also in the
famous Yé Dharmanitya of the Sata Sahasrika, where the sense is

* The words bracketed are derived from commentators.

214 Further Note on the Inscription from Sarnath. [ApRiL,

even larger, embracing the substance of all inanimate as well as ani-
mate entity, thus: ‘‘ All things are imperishable,” or, ‘‘ The universe
is eternal,’ (without maker or destroyer.) The passage just quoted
from the Sata Sahasrika serves likewise (I am assured) to prove that
the signification of yé is not always strictly relative, but often exple-
tive merely: but let that pass.

The points in question undoubtedly are,—evistence inthe Pravrittika
or versatile world, and cessation of such existence, by translation to
the world of Nirvritti ; and of such translation, animals generally,
and not human beings solely, are capable. Witness the deer and the
chakwa, which figure so much in Bauddha sculptures! The tales of
their advancement to Nirvritti are popularly familiar. The word
nirodha signifies, almost universally and exclusively, extinction, or total
cessation of versatile existence; a meaning, by the way, which con-
firms and answers to the interpretation of dharmd, by general exis-
tences, entities, and not by merely human actions.

It is scarcely worth while to cumber the present question with the
further remark that there is a sect of Bauddha philosophers holding
opinions which confound conscious actions with universal entities
throughout the versatile world, making the latter originate absolutely
and physically from the former, (see my remarks on Remusat in the
Journal, No. 33, p. 431.)

It is not, however, admissible so to render generally received ey
as to make them correspondent to very peculiar schismatic dogmata.
“ Dharanatmika iti dharma,” the holding, containing, or sustaining,
essence (ens) is dharma. The substratum of all form and quality in
the versatile universe, the sustainer of versatile entity, mundane sub-
stances and existences, physical and moral, in a word, all things. Such
is the general meaning of dharma. How many other meanings it
has, may be seen by reference to a note at the foot of p. 502, No. 34,
of your Journal. The root of the word is dhri, to held. Wuuson’s dic-
tionary gives Nature asAmmura S1nuHa’s explanation of dharmd. This 1s
essentially correct, asmight be expected from a Bauddha lexicographer.

Note.—If Mr. Hopeson’s general interpretation of ua is the true one,

(which seems most probable, though its specification in the sense of moral
duties is more agreeable to M. Csoma’s supplement)—its implication, in the
present reading, at least, appears manifestly atheistic. For that it cannot mean
“ Tathagata or the A’di BuppHa is the cause,’’ is evident from the accusative
hétin (which is also plural causas). Even if we were to strike out the word
avadat or dha—the former of which is on theinscriptions, and the latter repeated
in Ceylon—still some word of that meaning is plainly understood: and this
may help to shew that the explication given by the Aisvaraka Buddhists (as though
the words were VAR @giaq: hétus tésham Tathagatas) is a more recent

invention,—and that the Buddhist system properly recognizes uo being superior
to the sage expounder of physical and moral causes,—whose own exertions aloe

1835.) Two new species of Carinaria, 215

have raised him to the highest rank of existences,—the Ericurus of this great
Oriental system,
qui potuit RERUM cognoscere CAUSAS,
Atque metiis omnes etinexorabile fatum
Subjecit pedibus.

What is mere figure of speech in the Roman poet, to express the calm dignity
of wisdom, becomes religious faith in the east; viz. the elevation of aphilosophi-
cal opponent of popular superstition and Brahmanical caste, to the character ofa
being supreme over all visible and invisible things, and the object of universal
worship. —W. H. M.

————————.

Vi.— Description of two new species of Carinaria, lately discovered in the
Indian Ocean. By W.H. Benson, Esq. Bengal Civil Service.
Class.— Gastreropopa, Cuvier.
Order.—Nucleobranche, Blainville-—Heteropoda, Lam.
Fam. Firolide, Rang.

Genus. Carinaria ;—Bory. Lamarck.

Sp. 1.C. Cithara. Testa dextra ; ultimo anfractu recto, compresso-
conico, versis spiram gradatim et eleganter attenuato, spiram terminalem
Jere amplectente, rugis obliquis ornato ; aperturd obliqud, oblongo-ovatd,
versus carinim coarciatd ; carind mediocri, striis sub-rectis signatd.
Habitat in Oceano Indico.

Shell dextral ; the last whorl straight, compressed, conical, gradually
narrowing towards the apex, nearly embracing the terminal spire,
marked with oblique wrinkles ; aperture oblique, oblong ovate, narrow-
edtowards the keel; keel moderate, marked with nearly straight striz.

The animal of this shell is more narrowed and cylindrical than in
any other described species, but as the Carinariz are said to have the
power of inflating themselves, too much stress should not be laid upon
this character. The body is attenuated and pointed at the posterior
extremity. It is by a line, with not very apparent asperities on the
surface, and has a central swimmer (on the side opposed to the shell) ;
but I found no appearance of the caudal swimmer, which is represent-
ed in the figures of C. Mediterranea. The male organ, and the parts
about the mouth are pale crimson. The viscera contained in the shell
are brownish, and the stomach yellowish or brownish, passing into red
posteriorly. After death, this red colour is often diffused through the
neighbouring parts. The scarf skin is very tender, and strips off the
animal, soon after death, in ragged portions.

' This shell, with that next to be described, approaches in form to
the scarce and precious C. vitrea, which is, with good reason, supposed
to be an inhabitant of the Indian Seas. Four specimens, of which
two were without the spire, were taken by myself and my companions,
between S_ Lat. 4° 30’, and N. Lat. 4° 30’, and E. Long. 87° 30’, and W.
Long. 90° 30’. They were all taken after night-fall, and from the eager-
ness with which we plied our nets after I had made known the value

216 Two new species of Carinaria. [| ApRin,

of our discovery, and our want of greater success, it would appear that
this and the following species are scarce, even in that region. Both
species, like all the others known, are hyaline, and very fragile. Their
spires consist of three whorls. The obliquity of the rug of the last
or straight whorl, together with its straightness and gradual attenua-
tion, will serve to distinguish Carinaria Cithara from any other species,
It is named from its resemblance in form and sculpture to a harp.

Sp. 2. C. Galea. Testa dextra, ultimo anfractu incurvo, compresso-
conico, spiram terminalem fere amplectente, rugis transversis ornato, late
carinato, caring rugis perobliquis, recurvatis ; aperturd transversd, ovatd,
versus carinam coarctatd. Habitat cum precedente.

Shell dextral, with the last whorl incurved, compressed, conical,
nearly embracing the terminal spire, marked with transverse ruge,
broadly keeled. Keel with very oblique ruge, which are curved up-
wards in the direction of the spire. Aperture transverse, ovate, nar-
rowed towards the keel.

The animal resembles that of the preceding species, but the yellow:
ish or brownish colour in the stomach is replaced entirely by pale
carmine. Belonging to the same type as the last species, and resem-
bling in form a compressed helmet, the shell is easily distinguishable
by the greater curve of the outer edge of the last whorl, which does
not decrease so delicately as in that species, as well as by the less
obliquity of the rugz on the body whorl, and the greater obliquity and
curvature of those on its very broad keel, The body strie being
parallel with the edge of the aperture, it follows that in the species
under review, the mouth is less oblique than in C. Cithara. Its keel,
the close embrace of the spire by the last whorl, and the breadth of
the latter at this point, will abundantly serve to distinguish. it from C.
vitrea. The keels of both C. galea and C. Cithara are from their
thinness and excessive fragility, very liable to injury even in their
native element.

The addition of these two species of Carinaria increases the num-
ber known to naturalists to six, the others being C. Mediterranea,
fragilis, vitrea, and depressa. Of these one is from the Mediterranean,
two from the seas washing the Western Coast of Africa and Mada-
gascar, and the fourth is supposed to belong to the eastern seas.

InN. Lat. 4° 50’, E., Long. 91°. Lieut. McNarr took two true Cari-
narie, the shells of which were replaced by a plate consisting of
agglutinated pieces of broken shell, adhering to the suspended viscera.
We captured also several species of naked Firolide belonging to the
genus Pterotrachea.

Calcutta, March, 1835.

1835.] New species of Snake discovered in the Doab. 217

VII.—On a new species of Snake discovered in the Doab.

A variety of Coluber, undescribed as far as my means of reference
allow me to note with regard to the Ophiology of India, having late-
ly come under my observation, it may be worth while to describe the
animal, as I observe at page 159 of the 15th vol. of the Encyclopedia
Britannica under the head of ‘ Coluber Mycterizans’ a variety described
as belonging to North America, very closely resembling that in ques-
tion. The animal was killed in the dry stony bed of a branch of the
Jumna, through which the Doab canal runs, near the Sewalik moun-
tains; its motion, as described to me by the person who killed it, was
similar to that of some varieties of caterpillar, who in their progress
forwards, elevate the body until the extremities meet, continuing their
journey in a system of jerks or steps.

The great peculiarity of this species con-

ee sists in the proportion of length to breadth,

and the extreme prominence of the upper

——— jaw—a sketch of which will be the only
way of making it intelligible.
ff. 240

Length of animal, .......... 2 cece ee eee eee 3 54
Beom-enout to'vent)? 25 282 eh tlh. 224% 2 23
Mem vorena of tail, 2°) 222092 SEPP TRH. aN. . 1 23
Abdominal plates, ...........0-2-52.085 .-. 206.
Srmmcaiadl, 62 POS OE PE KI ON BA 170
Diameter of middle and thickest part of the body, % of an inch.
Mermereror neck," HL OP ad + ditto.
Projection of upper jaw over lower, .......... % ditto.

Color grass green, with a yellowish white line running from the
cheek to the end of the tail on each side at the junction at the abdomi-
nal and subcaudal plates with the dorsal scales: a double line of the
same color running also centrically from the chin to the vent in the
centre of the abdominal plates ; nose very pointed, and upper jaw ex-
tending 4 inch beyond the lower ; head flat, one inch long, and 3 inches
over the occiput, color of eye raw terra sienna (light) ; not poisonous,
and without fangs. )

I subjoin an extract from the Hiéyalépedial Britannica, as above-
mentioned.

Coluber Mycterizans, ‘ Long-snouted snake ;’ 192 abdominal plates,
167 subcaudal scales, slender, with a sharp pointed snout: color grass
green, with a yellow line on each side of the abdomen. About three
feet anda half in length, and half an inch in diameter. Native of
North America, where it is often seen on trees, running very quickly

in pursuit of insects.”
EE B

218 ' Notice of an Extraordinary Fish. [ApriL,

VII.—Notice of an Extraordinary Fish. By H. Pippineton, Esq.

The following notices of a new and monstrous fish may probably be
worth recording in the Journal. They do not altogether agree with
those of the fish described in your January No., by Lieut. Fouey,
but there may be more than one species of these monsters.

In December, 1816, 1 commanded a small Spanish brig, and was
lying at anchor in the Bay of Mariveles, at the entrance of the Bay
of Manilla. One day, about noon, hearing a confusion upon deck, I
ran up, and looking over the side, thought, from what I saw, that the
vessel had parted, and was drifting over a bank of white sand or coral,
with large black spots. I called out to let go another anchor, but my
people, Manilla men, all said, ‘“‘ No Sir! its only the chacon !” and
upon running up the rigging, I saw indeed that I had mistaken the
motion of the sputted back of an enormous fish passing under the ves-
sel, for the vessel itself driving over a bank! My boatswain (contra-
mestre), a Cadiz man, with great foolhardiness jumped into the boat
with four men, and actually succeeded in harpooning the fish! with the
common dolphin-harpoon, or grains, as they are usually called, to
which he had made fast the deep-sea line ; but they were towed at
such a fearful rate out to sea, that they were glad to cut from it imme-
diately.

From the view I had of the fish, and the time it took to pass slowly
under the vessel, I should not suppose it less than 70 or 80 feet in
length. Its breadth was very great in proportion ; perhaps not less
than 30 feet. The back so spotted, that, had it been at rest, it must
have been taken for a coral shoal, the appearance of which is familiar
to seamen. I did not distinguish the head or fins well, from being
rather short-sighted, and there being some confusion on board.

As my people seemed to look upen ‘‘ the chacon,” as they called it,
almost in the light of an old acquaintance, which indeed it was to
many of them who had served in the Spanish gun-boat service, |
made many inquiries of them, of which the following is the result.

1. That there were formerly two of these monsters, and that they
lived (tenian su casa) in a cluster of rocks, called Los Puercos, at the
S. W. entrance of the Bay of Mariveles ; but that, about ten or fifteen
years before this time, or say in 1800, one was driven on shore, and
died close to the village in the bay; the inhabitants of which were com-
pelled by the stench to abandon their houses for a time.

2. That the remaining one frequented the bay of Mariveles and that
of Manilla, and it was supposed, that it often attacked and destroyed
small fishing boats, which never appeared after going out to fish,

1835.] Notice of an Extraordinary Fish. ST9

though no bad weather had occurred. This last account I afterwards
found singularly corroborated.

3. That it was considered as dangerous by the Spanish gun-boats ;
that they always when there kept a swivel loaded, the report of which,
they said, drove it away. My principal informant was a man em-
ployed as a pilot for the ports in the Phillippine Islands, whither I was
bound, who had passed his whole life in the gun-boats. He said that
one instance of its voracity occurred when he was present. A man,
who was pushed overboard in the hurry to look at the monster, being
instantly swallowed by it.

4. The native fishermen of the Bay of Manilla quite corroborate this
account, and speak of the monster with great terror.

About 1820 or 1821, an American ship’s boat, with an officer and.
few men, was proceeding from Manilla to Cavite; but, meeting with a
severe squall and thick weather, they were driven nearly into
the middle of the bay. They were pulling in what they thought
the best direction, when on a sudden the sailors all dropped their oars!
But the mate, who was steering, looking astern of the boat, saw the
open jaws of a huge fish almost over him! Having nothing at hand,
he threw the boat’s tiller into the mouth of the fish! shouting as loud
as possible ; when, the jaws closing with a tremendous crash, the
whole fish, which they described to be more like a spotted whale !
than anything else, dived beneath the boat, and was seen no more. I
do not now recollect the names of the ship, or of the captain, but I
thought the circumstance of the spotted appearance a remarkable proof
that the story was not an invention. ‘*‘ We do not like to tell it,” said
the American Captain, ‘‘ for fear of being laughed at; but my officer is
quite trust-worthy, and we have learnt from the fishermen too, that
there is some strange species of large fish highly dangerous to their
boats.”

Like the American officer, I fear almost being laughed at, were it
not that, could we collect more facts relative to these strange mon-
sters, they might perhaps at least explain some of the “‘ coral spots,”’
so often mentioned in our charts* : independent of its being a matter
of great interest to the naturalist. I therefore add here a vague notice °
of monstrous spotted fish, which are known in the Moluccas.

These are called by the fishermen of Ternate, Celebes, &c. a “ Than
Bintang,” (or star-fish,) from the bright light which they occasion, and .
by which they are recognised at great depths at night, in calm weather.
The Malay fishermen describe them too as spotted, as large as a whale,

* Horspured alludes to shoals of Devil fish. Lophius being perhaps mistaken _
for shoals.
REQ

220 ‘ Notice of an Extraordinary Fish. [ Aprip,

and highly destructive of their nets ; which they instantly take up when
they see the fish, if they can get time to do so; for it is known to
destroy boats, and whole lines of nets and fishing stakes, if it once
becomes entangled amongst them, to the ruin of the poor fishermen.
I had the same account corroborated at the Soolo Islands, both by
Malav and by Chinese fishermen ; as also at Zebu, in the Phillippine
Islands. At Soolo I was shewn large quantities of the skin of a.spotted
fish, cut into pieces and dried, for sale to the Chinese junks, which my
people said was the skins of young ‘“‘ chacons’”—* Pero no son estos
como nuestro chacon de alld, Senor.’ ‘‘ But these are not like our
chacon yonder, Sir,” was always added. This skin I should have called
that of a spotted shark*: the tubercles were excessively coarse and
rough.

It seems thus certain, that some immense spotted fish, of highly
destructive propensities, resembling in this respect the gigantic shark
of the West-Indies, (which is often known to attack and devour the
negroes in their canoes, and recently even a man and boat in Boston
Bay,)t exists in the seas of the Eastern Archipelago. It is difficult to
say, whether the one seen by Lieut. FoLzy was an individual of the
same species or not. As already stated, I was unable to see mine with
sufficient distinctness, to ascertain any thing beyond its enormons size,
great breadth, and spotted appearance. [add such conjectures as
my limited knowledge and confined means of reference have enabled
me to collect : I offer them only as conjectures.

Welook naturally, from the voracious habit of thesemonsters, amongst
the Rays or Sharks—Squalus and Raja—for something to throw light
upon what they may be; and it appears that, though,these two genera
have been classed by Broussonnet, Biocn, and Lacrpr'ps, there is still
much uncertainty existing as to some of the known species, ‘* which
may be placed indifferently in either genus, for the distinctive charac-
ters of the Rays are derived from the flatness of their bodies, and
those which are least flattened, and the sguale which are so in some
degree, approach much to each other.”—Bose in Nouveau Dict. Hist.
Nat. Art. Squale. As to their size, the largest individual which has been
subjected to trust-worthy measurement seems to be that mentioned by
Lacspr'pe; a Squalus mazimus, driven on shore near St. Mato ;
which was thirty-three feet long, and twenty-four in circumference :
but this is far surpassed by the size of those of which, in Europe at

* The tiger shark seems to be rather a striped than a spotted shark.

+ That some of them are sufficiently formidable, we have lately had evidence.

In Boston Bay, a man was recently attacked in his boat, and devoured by one of
these animals.— Encyclopedia Americana, Art. Shark, 1832.

1835.) Notice of an Extraordinary Fish. 92}

least, only the fossil remains are found. Bosc, speaking of the squats
RoussEeTTE, Squalus catulus et canicula, Linn., says of the fossil teeth,
«There is in the museum of Natural History at Paris, a tooth, an inch
and ten lines long, and two inches nine lines broad ; which according
to a very moderate calculation, by Lacrrz‘pn, must have belonged to
an individual fifty feet in length! Art. Squale, and in another place he
says, Art. Requin,’’—

«The length of the front teeth of a shark thirty feet long is about
two inches, and their breadth at the base two and a half; but there is
shown at the Museum Nat. His. at Paris, a petrified shark’s tooth,

found at Dax, near the Pyrenees, which is, also, exclusive of the root,
nearly four inches long. The animal to which it belonged must then
have been more than sixty feet in length! (Lacrpz'pr, from an unques-
tionable calculation, estimates it at seventy-one feet! and that the
jaws were nine feet in diameter !”) The authority of Lacrrr‘pE is so
high, that we may fairly conjecture the question of size to be so far set
at rest, that Lieut. Founy and myself will be acquitted of any
exaggeration; and the fact of their swallowing boat and fishermen
too, is farther confirmed by Biocn, (a good authority,) who says, speak-
ing of the preference given by the sharks to putrid flesh, that ‘‘ the
Greenlanders, who frequent a sea abounding in sharks, in little canoes
made of the skin of this fish, are careful to make as little noise as pos-
sible, to avoid the chance of being swallowed together with their boat
by these monsters.” Its colour is the next remarkable circumstance,
and it is worth noticing, that in this all parties agree. The dorsal
fin mentioned by Lieut. Fotzy and the lizard-like head I am una-
ble to speak to. It is quite possible however that there may be a
genus of these monsters which have the head far less flattened than
in general. Raja rhinobatus, which seems to connect the two genera»
has the snout lengthened.

I suspect the name chacon to be a West Indian (Carib or African)
one for a shark. I do not find it in any Spanish Dictionary, and I am
not aware that it is derived from any of the dialects of the Phillippe
Islands. We may hope that ere long some of our whalers may meet
with one of these monsters, and thus enable naturalists to form some
judgment of what they are. It would be a highly interesting circum-
stance could we procure some of the teeth, and these should be found
to correspond with those at Paris. Perhaps some of your Singapore
readers may be enabled to furnish us with more information from the
Malay fishermen, if the Ian Bintang is known in those seas.

I had just finished this paper, when I received from my friend Dr.
Haran, of Philadelphia, the first number of the Transactions of the

999 - Tables and Rules for the Chains [ApRii,

Geological Society of Pennsylvania, in which is a most interesting
“‘ Critical notice of various organic remains discovered in North
America,” by Dr. Hannan. At p. 89, is the following :

«* The bones of one species of shark, upwards of forty feet in length,
allied to the Carcharias, have occasionally been found in several loca-
lities. In Cuvier’s Theory of the Earth, by S. L. Mrrcuext, p. 400,
it is stated, ‘ The skeleton of a huge animal was found on the bank of
the Meherrin river, near Murfreesborough, N. C. It was dug out of a
hill distant sixty miles from the ocean. Captain Nuvitie and Dr. Fow-
LER, who visited the spot, gathered the scattered vertebrz and laid
them in a row thirty-six feet in length. If to this the head and tail
be added, the aninal must have been fifty feet or more in length, &c.
We have recognized them as the remains of a gigantic species of
shark.’ ”

He refers to other specimens, indicating sharks of forty feet or more
in length ; but this will, I doubt not, be sufficient to show that it is quite
probable the fish seen by Lieut. Fotry and the chacon of the Bay
of Manilla. may be individuals of the same family as those only known
to us as yet by their fossil remains.

IX.—Rules for Calculating the Lengths of the Drop-bars of Suspension
Bridges, the Length and Deflection of the Chain, Rise of the Roadway,
&e. By Captain J. THomson, Engineers.

The application of the following problem in statistics, to find the
Jength of the drop-bars and links of a suspension bridge, has, I be-
lieve, the merit of originality ; while it will be found extremely con-
venient in practice, in determining at once the requisite proportions,
and obviating the necessity of after adjustment, which will always occur
where the curve of such a bridge is assumed as a true catenarian.

If a be the angle of suspension,

b the length in feet of one of the links of the chain,

d the number of drop-bars in each chain ; then the tangent of the
2 Tan. a

d
ference between the tangents of the angles formed by the links of the
chain with the horizon. These tangents will be as follows : upper link
= Tan. a, 2nd = Tan. a — n, 8rd = Tan. a —2n &c. and the lowest

angle a, divided by one-half d= n = is the constant dif-

=Tan, a — m. The sines to radius 6, corresponding to these

d
2
angles, are the differences of the lengths of the drop-bars; and the’
cosines of these angles are the horizontal distances between the drop-

1835.)

and Drop-bars of Suspension Bridges. 223

bars, or the spaces which each link of the chain occupies in the span
of the bridge. If therefore the sum of these cosines, multiplied by the
radius 6, be deducted from the span of the bridge, the difference will
be the length of the horizontal space occupied by the two upper links;
and half of this space, multiplied by the secant of a, will be the length
of one of those links, The sum of all the links will be the length of
the chain. The sum of the differences of the drop-bars, added to the
deflection of the upper link, will be the total deflection of the chain. The
roadway may be made to rise with a fair curve, by making the rise
bear a'certain proportion to the fall or deflexion of the chain.

The sum of the deflexion of the chain, the length of the centre drop-
bar, and the rise of the road, will be the height of the point of suspen-
sion at the standard.

Example.

a = 15° = angle of suspension.

b = 5 feet = length of each link.

@ = 17 = number of drop-bars.

98.625 = distance between the points of suspension.

3.5 feet = length of centre drop-bars.

The rise of the road = =the deflection of the chain.
Tan. .
peat ergagaw pp RAMS wt BA8OS a Hanoy”
d 17
1 2 3 4 5) 6 7
Tang. of| Cosines} Sines] Differ. Rise of |Length of
deflection|of deflec-jof de- jof drop- |Roadway.} drop-
tion. flection|bars in ft, bars.
Upper Ist link, ....|.2679492 I Siok seed So | 2°5418 0083
Ist drop-bar, ...... [—— = —___~ -———| 9.4580
SRM ea c ecanteon 97a) | 2301) 11505 2301
PANG oe I Ce — | Ss 8.0774
3rdj.ed. cess eee {22049024 |) 9796 | .2007 |. 1°0035 2007
(EE OOS oa errr tae eam —_ —| 6.8732
4th, .. -.- {1733790} .9853 | .1708 | .8540 1708
A ie a2 Uses —+-—__|—_—__——| 95.8484
i) woe be oe L419555 |. 9901. },.1404.1... .7020 1404
Es ° ome OOO" =a (SSeS (ESP Ee eal = 5.0060
6th, seep [ol LO8S2E } &.9939" 1 1096 5480 -1096
Gy tees OE coe en ed —_ | ——— 4.3484
BE tien ss.00 .-.|.0788087] .9969 | .0785 | .3925 0785
BEE te -ads: Se ee eS ee 8.8774
Oth;..".. , |.0472853] .9988 | .0472 2360 0472
8th,... te age Se ——— —| 3.5942
Oth, .........-+.|-0157618} .9998 | .0157 0785 0157
Centre drop-bar, .. Se — 3.5000
7.9175 = sum of the cosines multiplied by
S54
39.5875 = horizl. dist. between drop-bars.
49.3125 = 2 span.

9.5250 = difference.

224 Tables and Rules for Suspension Bridges. (ApRiz,

1.0352 x secant of 15e,

9.8602 = length of upper link.
.2588 = & sine of deflexion 15°.

2.5418 = deflection of upper link.

fesse ix, ft. in.
5 xX 16 + 9.8602 x 2
The sum of column No. 5
Ditto No. 6
7.5068 + 1.5214 + 3.5

99.7204 length of chain.
7.5068 deflection of ditto.
1.5014 rise of roadway.
12.5082 height of the point of sus-
pension at standard.
N. B. Column 5 is found by multiplying column 4 by 5 feet.
Column 6 is one-fifth of column No. 5.
Column 7 is equal to columns 5th + 6th + 3 .5 feet.

The geometrical construction of this problem will answer as a
proof to the foregoing rule, and will be of assistance in making plans

Haw tl

of suspension bridges.

In the right-angled triangle ABC make the angle A = 15° =
angle of suspension, and the side AB = 5 feet = length of one link
of the chain. Divide the side CB into as many spaces, commencing
at C, as there are drop-bars in £ the space = 83 spaces, and join Az
A 2n, &c. From the centre A with the radius AB describe the are BD,
and complete the lines shewing the sines and cosines of the angles
formed by the line AB and the radii An, A 2”, A 3a, &e. Then as
these radii are parallel to the links of the chain, the sines of the
angles E 1, E 2, E 3, &c. are the differences between the lengths of
the drop-bars 1, 2, 3, 4, &c. and the cosines of these angles are the
spaces which the links of the chain occupy in the space of the bridge.
Supposing 2 = length of the centre drop-bar, the other drop-bars will

be as follows :
Centre bar 2.

8th, » + E 8.

"th n+ ES+4+E7.

6th, 2 + E8+E7+E6,andsoon. This does not in-
clude the rise of the road, however, which is an arbitrary quantity.

|

|

1835.) Table of the strength of Iron bolts. 225

X.—Table shewing the Weight or Pressure which a cylindrical wrought-
iron Bolt will sustain when supported at the ends, and bonded in the
middle of its Length. By Captain J. Tuomson, Engineers.

RR ESS SEY AE,
Leng. , In.| In. | In. | In. |Ins. |Ins. |Ins. ;Ins. |Ins. |Ins. }Ins. jIns. |Ins. |Ins,
of
bearg.! }] F 4 1/17 | 3] ? 2 3 4 6 ]8 lo | 12
!

me | me | ee | Ne | | J — | ef | Ee

Dm. |Dim.}Dm.
Ins. Hes

Wt. in |Dm.|/Dm. ;Dm.}Dm.}Dm. |Dm. Dm. Dm. Dm.|Dm./Dm.
Tons. |Ins.jIns. |Ins.|In. |Ins. |Ins. |Ins, Ins. |Ins. |Ins, | Ins.

'
ms | mf mm | a | fe | ee

—s |} ——.

—|—- | —.

2 °57| °72 1-89| *9 | °97 /1-03]1709 J1°14 [1°3 (1°44 [t'64]1°8 [1°95 [2-06
4 | -72| 9 |1-03;1714]1°23 11°3. [1°37 ]1°44 {1°64 1°38 12°06/2°28 | 2°46 |2°6
6 Ji: *}1°03 1718/13 [14 [1°49 11°57 11°64 1-88 2°06 |2°3612°6 |2:81 12-98
8 {1°33 ]1°14 }1°3 41°43 11°54 [1°64 11°75 |1°8 12°07 2.28 12°6 |2°86 [3-09 |3:28
12 «Ja lae3 [1-49lt-64 | 1-27 1-88 [1-98 2°06 |2°37'2°6 |2°98/3°28 13-54 [3.7
16 |2°66 1°43 |1°64]1°81 [1°95 |2°07 12°18 |2°28 {2°61 [2°86 |3°28/3°62 |3-90 [4-14
20 13°33 |1*66/1°77|1°95 |2°1 2°23 [2°35 [2°46 [2°81 |3°1 |3°54!3°90 14°20 14-46
24 (4° |2- 11°88/2'07 2°23 |2°37 12°49 [2°61 [2°98 [3°28 |3°7614°14 4°46 l4-74
28 |.... |2°33 |1°9812°18 }2°35 |2°49 2°63 [2°75 13°15 13°46 |3°9614°36 [4°70 |4-o8
32 |.... |2°66 |2°07/2°28 12°45 |2°61 [2°75 [2°87 13°29 13°62 14°1414°56 [4°91 |5-99
40 |.... 13°33 |2°23]2°46 ;2°64 ]2°81 |2°96 |3°09 13°54 13°9 [4°46]4:92 15-290 15-62
4g |.... 4° 12°*5/2.61 [et 2°98 13°15 13-29 13°76 |4°14 |4°74|5°22 15°62 [5-96
56 |....].. .. [3°11]2°75 12°96 }3°14 |3°31 [3°46 [3°96 [4°36 |4°98|5-50 15°92 [6-28
64 . |3°55|2°87 13-09 [3°28 '3-46 [3°62 [4°14 [4°56 |5:2215°74 16:19 16°56
72 ‘ v la. [ae * [3-21 [3-42 |3‘60 3°76 [4°30 [4-74 [5°4215°95 16-43 lena
80 |..., |e. +. Je. «+ 13°33 |3°33 13°54 13°73 13°9 14°46 |4°91 15-62)6-18 |6-67 |7-08
a a ee 3°66 ,3°44 3°65 [3°85 4°02 |4°60 15°07 |[5'8 |6°38 16-88 |7-30
96 ve foere eee [4s [3°54 13°76 3°96 [4°14 ]4°74 [5°22 |5°9616'58 |7-08 |7°52
104 aise .. |... [3°63 13°86 14°07 14°25 [4°87 [5°36 16°1416-74 |7-27 7-72
112 ee ae . 13°72 13°96 14°17 14°36 14°99 |5°49 16°2816°92 |7°45 |7-92
120 i dh Geet Cone 4°* 14°05 [4-26 {4°46 [5°11 15°62 |6°44|7:08 |7°63 18°10
128 2 en wla:3 14-14 14°36 ]4°56 15°21 15°74 |6°5617.24 17-8 Ig-ag

Observations on the foregoing Table.

There are two ways in which the bolt may be broken, either by a
cross strain, or by detrusion, which is the pulling out the part of the
bolt from between the points of support: besides these two ways in
which the fastening may be broken, the bolt may crush and cut away
the eye of the link which presses upon it.

{ If w=weight or pressure in tons,
/=length of the bolt between the points of support in inches,
d=diameter of the bolt in inches, then d= (.37 w 1) to

4
) w
support a cross strain; but when/ becomes less than ( 267 ) the

Jf
bolt will be liable to detrusion, to avoid which, d=(.08 w). But
detrusion can never take place when both the bolt and the link are
formed of iron, or the same metal, because when 7 becomes less than

7 Bs,
value of d should be —

(-. = )' the link may be cut by the bolt; to,obviate which, the

Ww s :
adi This last equation supersedes the first
t These rules are taken from TrEDGOLD, the arbitrary quantities assumed by
him being corrected by a comparison made, and a mean, taken from the best au-
thorities.

226 On the strength of iron bolts, &c. [Aprit,

when w—71.5 22. This place is marked * in the table.
Remarks on keys, hold-fasts, &c.
Put =the breadth in inches,
d—the depth in inches,
w=weight in tons,
t—length of aise in inches; then the breadth should never
( -37 wl\*
b

be made less than 7 and the section 6d?=.37 w J, or d=

Asan example, suppose a bar 1 inch square to support 8 tons was
fastened by a key; required the breadth and depth?

=8.—/=1 and = i a = bor the breadth required,

.37w 1 it he
i ( b ) = /8.88 = 2°98 inches, the depth required.

To support the accuracy of this table, a set of experiments was com-
menced, but the results from them were so unsatisfactory, that they
were not continued. But during the proof of three bridges in which
bolts of from 13 in. to 24 in. were used, with various lengths of bear-
ing, and pressures of from 20 to 15 tons, the dimensions marked in
the table were found sufficiently strong In every instance; but the
diameter of the bolt thus given could not be reduced much, or what
was the same thing, the length of bearing could not be decreased with
out a risk of failure.

a The best Swedish iron bolts did not sustain a greater pressure

ee than the ordinary English bolt iron, (rolled, not hammered.) The
Swedish iron when strained in excess bent, and became dented as in
the marginal figure: the side a was bulged or rose half as much as }
was indented or bent, on the other side ; when the bolts were formed
of English bolt iron (unhammered), numerous cracks opened on the
convex surface of the bolts at a and cc, when the indentation at 5
amountedto ,',ofthe diameter of the bolt ; the bolt failed by these cracks
meeting each other, and the centre part of the bolt was drawn out.

The bars, which these bolts connected, were calculated to sustain 9
tons per square inch of section, and the eyes ’7 tons, but when the
whole were proved by a tension 3rd greater than: the calculated
strength, the eyes broke more frequently than either the bars or bolts.

The following table, for which we are also indebted to Captain
J. Tuomson, Engineers, will serve as a practical continuation of the
observations on roofing, in the last number of the Journal,

1835.] Tabie of the Scanilings of Beams for Roofs. 227

XI.—A Table of the Scanilings of Beams of Teak or Saul Wood, to sus-
tain a Terrace Roof not exceeding seven inches in thickness ; the de.
flexion not to exceed one-fortieth of an inch for each foot of length.

———— ee eee

Distance a-
part of Beams, LENGTH OF BEARING IN FEET,
one foot from
centre to cen- ae = =o
tre. Rec eLOn i129). 14 | 16, 9) 18.4120 Ze 26 | 28 | 30} 32 | 34
aon Rag: Rom sities a a7 Nan pan n | A fan | ain wn
Breadth. Jo [28 |e (28 (28 28 122 ZS [28 28 28 28 28 le8 188
Inches. |23 23 | OY [os [eg og Joy |oy joy joy joy joy jo'g)a"s|o°S
SSR cS to Sak jae fale B.S Jee ISS ie Sie Sie Ses oie
03 6. | 8 |10- {12> [14> ‘16: |18+ '20- 422+ 194. |
1 4-76] 6-35| 7-94] 9:53]11-1 (12-7 |14:3 [15-9 |17-5 119-1 [20-7 \22-2 |23-8 |
4 4:16! 5:54} 6:92! 8:32' 9-7 11-1 ]12°5 {13-9 |15°3 16:7 18-1 ‘19-4 !90 8199-9! 93-6
2 3°78) 5-04] 6-3 | 7°56) 882 10-1 [13-3 |12-6 [13-14 15-1 [16-4 17-6 |18-9 20:1] 21-4
2k 35 | 467] 5-85] 7-02) 8-18) 9-35/10-6 |11+7 }1210;14- 115-2 116-4 117-6] 18-7! 19-9
3 33 | 4-4 | 5:5 | 66 | 7-7 | 8-81] 9-91/11- |12-B |13'2 [14-3 115-4 16-5117-6! 18-8
3} — | 4-18] 5-23] 6-27] 7-32) 8-36] 9-41[10°5 [11-5 |12°6 [13-6 [14-6 15-7 16-7) 17-8
4 —|4. [5- |6 47> | 8 | 9 [20° [22: 12 413+ |14° [15- (16° | 17°
43 —| — | 4-81| 5-77] 6-73] 7-69} 8-65 9-61! 10-6 {11-5 112-5 113-5 {14-5 15-4! 16-
5 —| — — | 5-57] 6:5 | 7-42} 8-35] 9-28] 10-2 |11-1 |121 113° |13-9'14-8. 15-8
53 —| — —] — | 629} 7-19) 8:09] 8:99} 9°89)10-8 |11-7 |12-6 )13-5/14-4| 15-3
6 —| — —] —| 611] 6-99) 7-86] 8-73] 9-61/10-5 {11-3 [12-2 ]13-1)14° | 14-9

Burgahs require to be made six times stiffer than beams, in order to prevent
cracks in the terrace roof; and as they are invariably placed one foot apars, and
have a breadth of three inches, they should be as many inches in depth as they
are feet in length of bearing between the beams.

Explanation of the Table, with Examples of its use.

The table shews on inspection the scantlings of beams to support
roofs not exceeding 80 lbs. per square foot, including the weight of the
timber. It has been calculated, according to the rule in TrepGoLp’s
Carpentry, Section II. par. 90, the value of the constant quantity,
a being taken at ‘01. The scantlings given in the table are measured
in the middle of the beam ; the lower side is supposed to be cut straight,
and the upper side with a curve of one or two inches, versed sine, for
each 10 feetin length of the beam.

As the stiffest beam that can be cut out of a round timber has its
breadth to its depth in the proportion of *6 to 1 nearly, the proportion
of the breadth to the diameter will be as ‘5 to 1, or the breadth will
be $ the depth.

As the cost of timber is partly proportioned to its contents, the deep-
er the beams are made, the cheaper the roof will be within certain
limits ; and as the cutting of timbers through the heart or centre of
the wood is supposed to render the beams more durable, all the tim-
bers should be cut into two beams, particularly as the strength of the
timber is not at all reduced by this measure.

There is, however, a proportion between the depth and breadth
which cannot be exceeded without the risk of the beam breaking side-
ways. TrepGoun’s rule is, (Sec. II. par. 82,) ‘‘ the breadth in inches
should not be less than six-tenths of the length in feet, divided by the
square root of the depth in inches.”

228 Rules for the scantling of Roofing timbers. (APRIL,

As the weight on each of the beams is proportioned to the distance
between them ; and as the strength of the beam is proportioned to its
breadth: the breadth in inches, as marked in the first column of the
table, must be multiplied by the distance in feet between each beam,
measured from centre to centre for the breadth of the beam ; or, if the
breadth of the beamsare given, the distance in feet between them isfound
by dividing their breadth by the breadth in the first column of the table.

Examples.

A room, 22 feet by 33 feet, has to be roofed in, the timbers provided.
for which are round, 18 inches diameter in the middle, and 25 feet
long. It is required to know the most economical manner of cutting
them up, the scantlings of the beams, and their distance apart.

The stiffest beam that can be cut out of an 18 inch tree is 9 X 15,
or if cut into two timbers, 42 « 15, to ascertain if this timber will
be so thin as be liable to break side-ways, the rule for this purpose

6 X 22 13.2

: en eet oy eee oe 1
will be applied as follows; i 307 = 3. 4 in. the least

breadth ; the beams 43 x 15, are therefore not too thin. By refer-
ring to the table, under 22 feet length of bearing, a cepth of 15 inches
requires a breadth of 12 inches. The breadth of the timber, 45, being
divided by 14, gives3 ft, the distancefromcentre to centre of the beams ;
this distance gives 11 spaces, or 10 beams, or 5 timbers in the 33 ft. ~

The timbers of the dimensions above stated could be cut into two
beams 12.7 x 6.4, having a greater section than that given above,
15 X 43; but on a reference to the table in the column of 22 feet
length, and 12-9 in depth, the breadth is 24 inches, and 6:4, divided
by 2°5, gives 2 feet 8 in distance from centre to centre, if beams re-
quiring 124 spaces, or 12 beams, or 6 timbers.

2nd Example.

Beams 83 X 12, having been provided for a roof of 22 feet span—
required to know the distance they are to be placed apart. In co-
lumn of 22 feet span, opposite a depth of 12 inches, is a breadth of 3
inches, and 84 divided by 3, gives 2 feet 10 inches as the distance
from centre to centre, at which the beams ought to be placed.

3rd Example.

Proposed to roof a room 18 feet wide, with timber placed 1 foot 3
inches from centre to centre, so as to be covered with tiles instead of
burgahs, the deepest timber procurable being 9 inches, required the
breadth of the beams.

In the column of the span of 18 feet, and a depth of 9 inches, the
breadth is 4 inches, which i Se by 14, gives 5 inches for the
breadth of the beam. Fs

1835.] . On the Temperature of Wells. 229

XII.—On the Temperature of Deep Wells to the west of the Jamna.
By the Rev. R. Everzsr.

During the last cold weather and the present, I have paid some
attention t the temperature of wells in the country to the west of
the Jumna. They are not usually more than 30 or 40 feet deep
within a few miles of the river, but beyond Rhotak, about 50 miles
to the west of this, on the road to Hansi, they are not less than 110
or 120 feet deep, and, in one instance I have met with (that of the
fort at Hansi) 160 feet. Farther than that I cannot speak from exami-
nation, but all accounts agree in stating those in the Bikanfr country
toybe the deepest, probably not less than 350 feet. I have almost
invariably fodnd the temperature to increase with the depth, but the
increase is modified by three circumstances.

Ist. By the locality, as in the case of a pool of water being near,
or the mouth of the well being broad in proportion to its depth, both
which causes tend to lower the temperature in the cold weather.

2ndly. By the season of the year at which the observation is
made. The tendency of the rains is to reduce all wells to the uniform
temperature of 78°, which is about that of the rain-water when it
falls. From this cause the deep wells are at their minimum about
the autumnal equinox, and get warmer during the cold weather. On
the contrary, the more superficial ones become colder during the same
pericd.

3rdly. By the quantity of water that is drawn from them. Those
that are not used are usually the lowest, and those where oxen are
working for the purpose of irrigation by a great deal the highest. I
have only to premise further that the mean temperature of the year
here, according to Major Outver’s observations, is 76°. The general
results I have obtained are as follows:

No. of wells. Depth to bottom. Temperature at the bottom,
1. Mean of 10 observations
made at nearly equidistant pe- feet.
MIOHS GHEOUSTIOUL CHE VGA; sc%ce c's oe) AE Wists ee mer aivarneteies Mane atta s 19.8'°G
PMOIHCINAULONS Pe cGies Atle ice f100l/: se teaaoate oP eeat (FOB

GRATE COs ncik scott chee «om SOO LOO. sac eiepaavde erate oe eae ORO
MEIEGO, | c:clc, > resist es) HAULS IL 20 Mths) Sewlne ie eee oe a Gone aon:
ME PANGEOS Sle: one, Oe a satelsl ake NGO fh eigtar. FOt eee es 80°0

The increase in Europe is said to be 1° centigrade, or 1° 8 Farht.
for every 35 or 37 metres (about 105 or 110 feet English), of depth.
Were I to select from my observations those made where bullocks
were working for the purposes of irrigation, the increase would be
much more rapid than what I have above stated. Thus:

No. of wells. Depth to bottom. Temperature.
ee siiidicl ce om »» OR eiieinisabe va staties >: o's 4 81
ieiiints wisest ans's, =» 90 le RE 81:9
2 eee, eet eener re 120 eereeeepeeeeer ee eer 82°7

230 Meteorological Observations at Masiri. [ Aprin,

I do not publish these observations with the idea that they are
sufficiently numerous. to establish any general law on the subject for
this country, but because my avocation here does not permit me to
extend them, and in the hope that some one who may hereafter travel
through the Bikanir country may be induced to take up the subject,
for there alone can any considerable depth beneath the surface be
attained.

P. S.—Lieutenant TremenneeErg, of the Engineers, in leaving this
on the Shekawatti campaign, had the kindness to promise that he
would make some observations on the temperature of the deep wells
that lay in his route, and this he has performed with great zeal and
assiduity. He has now placed the results he obtained in my hands,
and | have drawn up the following abstract of them:

No. of Wells)
observed.

Depth. Aver. Temp.

13....] 40 to 80 feet.| 78°
6s. 3. | 80) ton je lees 4
Ate. | b20 toneo.,. sc lmeske

These observations were made throughout a large tract of country
lying between 28 and 26° N. Lat. and 78 to 76° E. Long. And the
time of the year in which they were made was from the 26th October
to the 28th February. The mean temperature of the year for the sur-
face may be reckoned at 75°, if, as stated by Lieut.-Col. Oxiver, that
of Dehli be 73°. 4.

I see that in the above paper on this subject I have misquoted this
same datum of Colonel Ourver’s, calling it 76°. I took the number
carelessly from the wrong column, owing to its suiting so well to Dr.
Royue’s observations at Seh4ranpur, who makes the mean of that
place, I believe, 73°. 5. Oue or other of the two observations must
now be rejected.

XIII.—Abstracts of a Meteorological Register kept at * Caineville,”
Musooree (Mastrit.) by S.M. Boutvrrson, Esq.

1834. Therm.
Bar. atid, detd.
From 15th to end of May, : observations at 10 a. mM. 23.919 75 TonL™
wh at 4p. m.°'23.894° "75.6 | -79.5*
‘ % at 10 p.m. 23.905 74.8 79.7
Mean temperature at 10 a. m. and 10 Pp. m. 76°9.
Bar. at 4 Pp. M. compared with 10 a. M. Bar. at 4 P.M. compared with 10 P. m.
Mean diff. greatest. least. Mean diff. greatest. least.
(6 obsrs.)—0.043 —0.060 —0.026 (7 obsrs.)—0.0354 —0.006 0.04
Therm.

Bar. atid. detd.
JUNC Fer. «ais acs se eiga 7s «20, OOSerVations at LOA. Mee 25.897 71.8 fee
22 oes at 4 p.m. 23.815 71.4 71.1
23 ” at 10 Pp. M. °23.870 71.5 68.0
* I think that the temperature at 10 a. m. and 4 P. M. was considerably raised
by reflection. This was modified or obviated in the subsequent months.

1835.] Meteorological Observations at Masiri. 93]

Mean temperature at 10 a. Mm. and 10 Pp. M. 69°1.

Bar. at 4 Pp. M. compared with 10 a. M. Bar. at 4 P. M. compared with 10 Pp. um.

Mean diff. greatest. least. Mean dif’. greatest. least.

(18 obsns.)—0.073 —0.212 +0.040 (18 obsns.)—0.048 —0.210 +0.0l4
Therm.

Bar. attd. detd.
TINY y.<ochere wa eaids » plgcereyo observations at 10 A.M. 23.896 — 69.9 67.5

13 4 at 4 P.M. 23.830 69.2 68.5
28 % at 10 p.m. 23.879 69.6 67.2
Mean temperature at 10 A. M.. and 10 P. M. 67°35.
Bar. at 4 p. M. compared with 10 a. M. Bar. at 4 Pp. mM. compared with 10 p. wt.
Mean diff. greatest. least. Mean diff. greatest. least.
(12 obsns.)—0.058 —0.112 . +0.032 (12 obsns.)—0.043 9.104 +0062
Therm,

Bar. attd. — detd.
August,........+s0...+..25 observations at 10 A.M. 23.917 69.1 68.5

19 ue at 4 p.M. 23.864 68.3 67.5
28 “ at 10 a.m. 23.900 68.9 66.4
Mean temperature at 10 a. Mm. and 10 P. Mm. 67°4.
Bar. at 4 Pp. M. compared with 10 a. M. Bar. at 4 P. M. compared with 10 p.m.
Mean diff. greatest. least. Mean diff. greatest. least.
(17 obsns.)—0.060 —0.090 —0.022 (16 obsns.)—0.023 —0.066 -+-0.018
Therm.

} Bar. atid. detd.
September,........... .25 observations at 10 a. M, 23.994 67.7. | 67.2

13 “A at 4 p.m. 23.918. 67.5. 66.8
24 Br at 10 p.m. 23.960 68.1 65.5
Mean temperature at 10 a. m. and 10 P. M. 66°35.
Bar. at 4 P. M. compared with 10 a. mM. Bar, at 4 p. M. compared with 10 Pp. m.
Mean diff. greatest. least. Mean diff. greatest. least.
(12 obsns.)—0.064 —0.106 +0.006 (11 obsns.)—0.031 —0.086 +0.036
Bar. -T. atid. detd.
Wetaherisieti. ois Move Sess 23 observations at 10 4. m. 24.084 61.5 62.2
19 Fe at 4 p.m. 24.012 61.5 61.96
20 a at 10.e.M. 24.050 61.8 58.63
Mean temperature at 10 a. mM. and 10 p. m. 60°41.
Bar. at 4p. mM. compared with 10 a. mM. Bar. at 4p. M. compared with 10 p. m.
Mean diff. greatest. least. Mean diff. greatest. least.
(17 obsns.) —0.072 —0.140 —0.032 (16 obsns.)—0.043 —0.128 —0.008

Norr.—From the 2nd to the 9th, no observations taken.

Bar. T. atid. detd.
November Ist to21st... 17 observations at 10 A.M. 24.158 57.5 57.4

10 i at 4 p.m. 24.104 57.6. 56.4
19 “A at 10 p.m. 24.128 57.8 53.9
Mean temperature at 10 a. mM. and 10 Pp. Mm. 55° 6.
Bar. at 4 Pp. M. compared with 10 a. m. Bar. at 4 p. M. compared with 10 Pp. mM.
Mean diff. greatest. least. Mean diff. greatest. least.
(9 obsns.)—0.052 —0.074 —0.026 (10 obsns.)—0.034 -—0.058 —0.014

Mean of the mean temperatures from 15th May to 21st November, 66°17.
Height of Caineville, by comparisons with Calcutta Barometer.
By mean of 80 observations at 10 a. m. from 16th see to Above Calcutta.
RES HPANETISE ores sese cd: dataetmelo| © © ooue i q+ -bpkaparaeet,y 6287.5
By mean of 49 observations, at 4 p. Mm. do. do. enews 0, ecb ary 6285.9
By mean of 30 ditto, at 10 ep. m. July to August, . Jerens «sje o15)24}s thou -( O2s 47;

Mean, 6282.7

By 61 observations, Caineville above Seharanpur,...........+++- 5346.7
meberanpuriabove Calcutta; oi sledge cces yas csSkecenesececess 1012.3

6359

232 Asiatic Society. [ApRIL,

XIV.—Proceedings, of the Asiatic Society.
Wednesday Evening, the 6th May, 1835.

Captain M. G. Wurre, Senior Assistant)\Commissary,Arracan, proposed
at the last Meeting, was duly.elected a member of the Society.

Professor Lea and Dr. R. Haran, of Philadelphia, proposed as honor.
ary members at the last Meeting, were upon the favorable report of the
Committee of Papers, balloted for and duly elected.

Read the following report of the Committee appointed, at the last meet-
ing of the Society, to consult, with the, Baron Hucet on -the expediency
and on the best. means of procuring from Europe a competent Curator for
the Museum, -_. ads

“¢ Although the .measure of sending to Europe for a qualified’ curator would
ensure the establishment of a museumin Caleutta,; upon a-footing such as has not
hitherto been known., here, andperhaps.on.a par-with those in. more favorable
climates ; and although the unexplored and extensive. field around us promises an
ample store of novelties, such as would render our museum in time ‘an object of
attention to naturalists both here and at home, stillit cannot be concealed that
there are several points of view under which the scheme of procuring,acurator
from Europe does not appear the most favorable for the end to be accomplished.’ .

‘6 The Baron Hucet has favored the Committee with his opinion, that a compe-
tent naturalist, that is, a person acquainted with the branches of Zoology, might
be induced to accept the situation, on.a salary of 200: rupees a month. By making
this sum payable from the day of his embarkation from Europe, a separate allows:
ance for passage money.and outfit might perhaps be obyiated, and.a similar pro-
vision might be made in case of his return home: The Baron’s recommendations °-
through his friends at Vienna or Paris, would also be a,guarantee that the person
selected should meet the Society’s expectations, and faithfully perform the duties
assigned to him, while health should last: but he must necessarily incur. much
expence on his leaving his own country ; he would here be altogether dependent
on the Society in case of sickness, or he might become a burden, were he to
prove inadequate to perform his duty. It could not be expected that the samein=-
dividual should be a mineralogist or a geologist: these branches, therefore (and
they are important to us,) would still'be deficient. Again, though he might learn
a little English on his way out, he would hardly he. able to. write descriptions,
for publication, of the new objects of Natural History, which might fall under
his notice. : inolotosts

‘These considerations have led your Committee to listen favorably toa modifi-
cation of the original plan, which offers the opportunity of providing a. curator
on the spot.

‘‘ Dr. Pearson, your late honorary curator, in resigning this situation a short
time since, stated that he had found. it impossible to do much «hitherto for the
museum, while acting gratuitously: his. distance from the premises + ‘his attention
to his own collection, naturally interfered to preyent his attention being given toa
secondary object. These difficulties would however be in a great measure removed
were he to receive such allowance as the Society might determine, to devote to the
purpose of creating and maintaining a, museum : indeed he. would be, willing to.
accept the office at 150 rupees per month, which would be a positive saving of
50 to the Society, a material consideration in the actual state of its, finances:
This sum would enable him to take a house near the spot, or to procure the means.
of conveyance till: he could get one suitable: it would purchase as it,were his
exclusive services: for it he would consent to relinquish the further prosecution
of bis. own private: collection, and\to, devote hiscwhole.leisure to ‘the Society’s ~
museum. On the other hand, being in the,Company’s, Medical Service, he could
at no time become a burthen to the Society, which would, be at-liberty to annul
its engagement with him at any time, shoulda, fair trial prove that:the object of ©
forming a creditable museum was not attained, or was no longer desirable.

1835.) Asiatic Society. 233

‘¢ Your Committee therefore is unanimous in recommending, in modification of
the resolution of the Ist April, that the services of Dr. Pearson be secured at
the rate of 150 rupees per mensem, for a limited term at first, say one year, at the
expiration of which it would be seen whether or not it would be desirable to con-
tinue the system, or to have recourse to the obliging assistance of the Baron
HuGex to procure a regular curator from Europe.”

(Signed) BE. Ryan.
W. Morrison.
W. H. MacnaGHrTen.
J. T. Pearson.

After some discussion, it was resolved ; that the Society should avail it.
self of the services of Dr. J. T. Pearson as curator, and that a sum of 200
rupees per mensem should be devoted to the purposes of the museum for
the period of one year: the 50 rupees excess being intended for con-
tingencies, cabinets, &c. or for an assistant, for the office of which M.
Bovucue’ of Chandernagore was an applicant.

A letter from J. B. Garpner was read, proposing to repair the monu-
ment of Sir W. Jonxs, in the church-yard, for rupees 250. Referred to the
Committee of Papers.

Read a letter from Mr. J. K. Kane, Secretary of the American Philo-
sophical Society, forwarded by Mr. T. Ryan, acknowledging the receipt
of Part 2nd of volume xviii. of the Asiatic Researches.

Library.

Read a letter from Monsieur M. D’Avezac Dr Macava, Secretary to
the Geographical Society of Paris, &c. &c. presenting two pamphlets,

1.—‘ Examen et Rectification des Positions determinés Astronomiquement
en Afrique par Mungo Park.”’

2.—‘‘ Notice sur L’apparition nouvelle D’un Prophéte Mussulman en Afrique.’’

The following books were also presented.
Transactions of the Medical and Physical Society of Calcutta, Part 2 of volume
vii.—by the Society, through Dr. Hutcuinson, Secretary.
The Indian Journal of Medical Science, volume 2nd, Nos. 16, 17—bdy the
Editors.
id Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No. 7—by the Madras Literary
ociety.
Scorr Warine’s Tour to Shiraz by the route of Kazroon and Feerozabad—
éy H. N. ToHaxour.
Meteorological Register for March, 1835—by the Surveyor General.
Dr. R. Haruan’s Fauna Americana, presented for fhe author—Jy Mr. H.
PIDDINGTON.

Antiquities.
A letter was read from Mr. J. B. Exxiorr, Commissioner of Patna, for-
warding an impression taken in sheet-lead of an inscription on the plinth
of some figures of the Avatars, sculptured on a black stone which he ob.
tained at Kesariah in the neighbourhood of the mound depicted in the
last No. of the Journal.
ep note on the interpretation of the line was read by the Rev. Dr.
ILL.
_ Extracts of a letter from Captain Wape were read, communicating
interesting accounts of further progress made by M. Masson in his ex-
ploration of the Afghan topes.
Extracts of letter from Mr. Masson to Captain Wade, dated the 15th July, 1834.
** I had the pleasure ofaddressing you from Peshawar about the middle of May,
and now avail myself of a Cossid proceeding to Cabil to transmit through

your Agent Meer Syap Karamar ALI, a brief account of my proceedings since
that time.

234 ’ Asiatic Society. [Aprit,

“‘Tn three or four days after I wrote you, 1 left Peshdwar for Sittan Mano-
MAD Kywan’s Camp at Sheikan, and thence proceeded to Jalalabad by the route
of Abkanu. On arrival there, i recommenced operations on the topes remaining
in that vicinity, and these labors have fully occupied me until this time, a
continue to do so.

“«T rejoice to say that very fair success has attended my operations ; of seven
unpromising topes, as to appearance, opened near Chaharbagh of Jalalabad, four
yielded results satisfactory, one of which will be interesting from the coins therein
discovered. Of fourteen topes and tumuli opened at Hiddah, the greater por-
tion have alike yielded the wished-for results in relics and medals ; one
produced a very splended collection of relics and a great number of coins,
the major part silver Sassanian, but also seven gold ones, of which singu-
lar to relate, are five of Roman Emperors, two of THroposius, two of Leo,
and one of Marcranus. These coins are themselves curious, and the discovery
of them in such a place is not less so, and they may be of great use in assisting
to ascertain the epoch when the monument containing them may have been built.

‘‘T note the legends of the coins*, I have discovered for your information, and
when I receive your reply to this letter, shall forward to Mr. Prinsep, for pub-
lication in his Journal, an account of this interesting tope, and of the relics and
coins extracted.

‘‘T continue to hear of or to fall wpon others of these monuments in a variety of
situations, and as their importance is obvious, shall not relax in the pursuit of
their identification: they will fully occupy me until the winter, therefore I must
defer a visit to the countries north of the Hindu Kush until the next season.

“The 30th September, 1834. Nearly a month since I arrived in Cabtl and took
dn hand a tope which had been opened and abandoned by M. HoniGBerGeER, at a
spot called Gool Durah: from this were extracted eight fine: gold coins with
etcetera, seven of them of the king Kappuicns: the eighth of a prince of the same
family. I am now in the Kohistan for the purpose of operating on two topes in
‘eritical spots, availing myself ofthe presence of MauMAD AKBAR, Dost Manomep
Knan’s son. My collection of coins this year will far exceed that of the last, and
T have -found several new ones. Last night I procured a copper Menander of
very large size, and at Cabil I gained a silver one more large and beautiful than
any that I have seen or heard of. When the year’s labors close 1 shall draw up
the result, and I hope to be able to identify another Greek monarchy distinct
from those of Bactria and Nysa.’”’

In a letter to Coloael Porrincrer,M. Masson gives further particulars of the
Hiddah Tope. ‘‘ The relics tound there comprise a handsome gold box with cover
set with gems, and at the top a fine blue stone; this was originally filled with a
liquid perfume, in which musk predominated. This box was enclosed in a larger
silver one: with this was also a smaller silver one, contaiming’ four Sassanian
coins, One or two gems, and an unctuous substance. The whole was contained
in a box of iron, gilt, and this again was enclosed in a large copper vessel hand-
somely washed with gold, which was half filled with’a liquid mixed with earth
‘and impregnated with the oxyd of copper. \ In this copper vessel were 180 sil-
ver Sassanian coins, and two golden, probably Hindu, with three copper ones of
Koveen (?) types. In the iron gilt box were three golden Roman coins, andin
the golden box within it, two others of THroposius; the former wereone of Mar-
cranus and two of Lro. In the copper vessel moreover were two gold rings,
on one of them the gem engraved with the head of a sovereign, and among the
detached gems is another one engraved. Besides the gold ones there is a mul-
titude of plain silver ones, anda variety of fragments of ornaments: upon the
whole this has been the richest prize yet produced from any of the topes open-
ed.”’

[M. Masson’s correspondence with Col. Porrincer, with a sight of which
we have been favored, contains lists of all the relics hitherto collected by him,
and held at the disposal of the Bombay Government, in consideration of the

“* As we may expect 4 full account hereafter, it is needless to insert the legends
here; they are evidently genuine Roman coins.

1835.] Asiatic Society. 235

pecuniary assistance accorded him through Colonel Porrineer. The number
of coins sent to this officer amounts to upwards of 2220. They could not be
in better hands, and we trust soon to hear of their introduction to public notice
with the advantage of his learned elucidations. The number of topes excavated
up to the present moment has been in Duroonter, 10; at Chaharbagh 7 ; and. at
Hiddéh 14. Mr. Masson’s promised communication to ourselves will, without
doubt, contain the particulars of all these.]

A notice by Mr. B. H. Honeson on the Sarnath inscription was commu-
nieated.
[Printed in the present No.]

Physical.

A letter from Colonel Casement, Secretary to Government, Military
Department, was read, forwarding an extract of a dispatch from the Ho-
norable Court of Directors, expressive of the interest taken by them in the
experimental boringin Fort William, for the successful prosecution of which
they have caused a supply of tubes and rods to be sent out ; and directing a
full report on the further progress of this interesting object of public
utility. The following memorandum on the Society’s report. by the H.C.
Inspector of military stores was appended.

Memorandum on the subject of Boring for water, with reference to the Report
af a Committee appointed by the Asiatie Society of Calcutta upon experiments
made at Fort William, for the purpose of obtaining a supply of potable water.

‘¢ In submitting a statement herewith, of the pipes, rods and: tools for boring
for water, now under supply for Bengal, in addition to the ten’ sets of boring
apparatus provided upon the indent of 18th December, 1832, I beg to observe,
that anticipating the objection made to the length of the rods formerly supplied
to Bengal, viz. six feet, I had already caused those for the ten sets furnished upon
the indent aboye mentioned, to be made in lengths of 10 feet each, and have now
determined upen making the additional rods to be provided, in lengths of 20
feet, similar to those sent to Madras,.and. Bombay. . If these lengths are found
to be more generally useful than the old ones, the short rods which the Bengal
Government at present possess, can easily be lengthened by cutting them in two,
and welding in the centre of each a piece of the length required.

‘« As the screws of each description of rods are exactly similar in the thread, they
may be used together, which will enable the operators to penetrate to any depth
the soil, &c. will permit.

‘‘ With regard to the pipe, so necessary to the successful prosecution of the
work, (and the want of which has been so much dwelt upon,) 1000 feet of cast
iron pipe has been provided of the following interior dimensions, viz. 8 inch,
6 inch, and 43 inch; which will admit of the one being passed through the
other; but as it will not be necessary to. use cast iron pipe the whole depth, sheet
iron pipe (which can be readily made upon the spot of any size required) should
be used wherever it may be practicable. Two lengths of these of 53 inch dia-
meter are sent.as patterns.

_ “ With regard to the alleged breakage of augers; the second page of the Report
of the Committee appointed by the Asiatic Society, forwarded from Bengal, pre-
sents an abstract of the several experiments in boring : from which it would ap-
pear, that.in no less than eleven instances the work was given up in consequence
of the auger breaking, and inno one case the rod, I am inclined to think there
must be some mistake in this, for from the formation of the auger it is scarcely
possible to break it in the act of boring, it being stronger than the rod. In the
seventh page of Dr. Strong’s Report, allusion, however, is made to two instances
in which the rods broke and remained in the ground ; and in the ninth page,
he again mentions, that the borer broke, and 91 feet of rod were lost. From
this I infer, that in most of the instances of failure, it was the rod, and not the
auger that broke ; and that the accident would probably not have occurred, had

236 Asiatic Society. [Aprin,

the jumper and drill been used before the auger; or if it had occurred, that
the broken rod might have been extracted by means of a proper tool.

‘¢ The Diagram and plan alluded to in the Report, have not been forwarded
to England, which is to be regretted.

‘‘ Upon the whole, it does not appear that the results of these experiments, to
such extent as they have been carried, are at all discouraging, or that the failures
attending their progress have been more than might have been expected, consi-
dering the defective knowledge of boring in the early stages of the operation at
Calcutta, the deficiency of tools for piercing the various strata, and the want
of pipes to prevent the falling in of sand, or the irruption of the land springs.

‘‘The progressive improvement in carrying on the work, is evinced by the fact,
that the same depth has of late been attained in six months, that formerly occu-
pied two years. It may therefore reasonably be hoped, that upon being provided
with further facilities, and sucb tools as experience inthis country has shewn
to be necessary, the undertaking if vigorously prosecuted will eventually be
crowned with success.

(Signed) “J. T. Bonner, Inspector.”’

A letter from Major J. Cotvin, Engineers, dated 11th: April, 1835, an-
nounced the dispatch of six chests of fossils from the lower hills, in ‘fur-
therance of his promise to present the result of his labors to the Society’ s
Museum.

[These will be noticed further on arrival. ]}

A letter from Conductor Dawe, Delhi Canal _Department, dated 17th
April, noticed the discovery of a fossil Buffalo’s head of large dimension,
found in the vicinity of the Haripur pass, in the lower range of hills.
A sketch accompanied, and Mr. Dawe expressed ‘his willingness to present
the specimen itself to the Society Accepted with thanks.

A Memoir on the strata and formation of the alluvium of the Jamua
and Doab, with numerous drawings and sections, was received from Ser.
geant Dean, i in illustration of the series of specimens presented in his
name at the last Meeting.

(This paper will be published in an early number. ]

Further observations.on the moon’s influence on rain were submitted by

the Rev. R. Eversst.

J. T. Prarsow brought forward a motion to the following purport :

* That the committee of papers be requested to consider the propriety
of admitting a new order of members into the Society, to be called Asso_
ciate Members of the Asiatic Society, and to consider upon the terms of their
admission.”

The object of this resolution, he explained, was to obtain the assistance of
many Scientific men who were now prevented from joining the Society by their
inability to pay the quarterly subscriptions, The dignity of Honorary Member-
ship should be reserved for those distinguished orientalists out of India whose
contributions to our Transactions or our Library, or whose successful promotion
of the objects of the Asiatic Society, should merit such a reward. The grade of
associates would merely imply admission to all the privileges of ordinary paying
members, conferred upon those whose labours would be valuable in their respec-
tive departments, and who were unable to pay. It was so understood in the Lin-
nean Society, which derived material aid from its associate members.

The resolution was seconded by Mr. WwW. H. Macnacuren and adopted by the
meeting.

The Secretary called the attention of the Society to the late important
resolution of the Government, suspending the printing of all the Oriental
works hitherto in the course of publication under the AbehiCgs of the Ge.
neral Committee of Public Instruction.

’ He had ventured to bring ‘forward a motion on the subject at: the last meeting,
but had withdrawn it, under the impression that it was premature, and that

1835.) , Asiatic Society. 237

Government might be induced to reconsider the effect of such a measure. He
however now held in his hand a copy of the order to the Printers, directing them
to discontinue all the works in hand (with one exception), and to dismiss the
establishment hitherto entertained for the transcription and collation of MSS.,
and for the correction of the Sanscrit and Arabic Press.

The principal Sanscrit_ works thus consigned to sudden destruction were :

Ist. The Mahabharata, expected to form five quarto volumes, and printed nearly
to the middle of the 2nd volume, 1400 pp., or little more than one-third of the
work.

2nd. The Réjatarangini, comprising one quarto yolume of 620 pages, of which
about 200 remain to be printed.

3rd. The Naishada ; of this 600 pages or rather more than one-third have been
executed.

4th. The Susruta, to occupy 2 vols. royal octavo. Of these 714 pages, forming
the first volume, and three-fourths of the second, are already printed.

5th. The Sartrak vidya, a translation of an English work on Anatomy into
Sanscrit, of which 20 pages remain unprinted..

Of Arabic works, the order of Government will extend to

6th. The Fatéwa Alemgtrt, of which one-half ofthe sixth and last volume, only,
is deficient. (The Committee of Education have however recommended this work
to be completed.) ...

7th. The Khazdnat al Ilm, a valuable exposé of European mathematics in
Persian, of which 500 pages are printed, and 106 remain... ,

8th, The Indya, of which the last two volumes are printed, and 450 pages of the
second volume. 150 pages of the latter, and'the whole of the’ first’ volume (of
which a correct manuscript has with great difficulty been obtained), remain to be

rinted. ,
r 9th. A treatise on Algebra by Dr. M11, proceeding on the basis of a translation of
Bridge’s Treatise,» but much modified and. enlarged ;’ with an. Appendix on the
application of analysis to geometry and trigonometry... The two first.parts to the
end of plane, trigonometry. are finished.: but a continuation of the Appendix.to
spherics remains to be passed through the press. ;

Many other works might be enumerated, particularly the translations into Ara-
bicof Hurron’s Mathematics, Hooprer’s Vademecum, and CrocKker’s Land Sur-
veying, by Dr. Jonn TyTLeR, which areleft in an unfinished state. But prospective-
ly, the interdiction extends to all the Oriental classics selected by the late Committee
and by Mr. WILSON as eminently fit to be preserved in a printedform. The Rama-
yana, and some. of the Puranas ; the Mugdhabodha, with commentary, and other
works on Grammar ; yarions standard treatises on Law, Rhetoric, and Logic; and
eventually, the Vedas themselves :—also the standard Bauddha works in Sanscrit
brought tolight by Mr, Hopgson* ; the Surya Siddhanta, and.the works of Bua’s-
KAR A’cHA/RYA, urgently recommended for publication by Mr. W1LkINsON ; anda
vast number of others which might have been gradually undertaken.as the means
of the Committee should permit. ,

Without entering into any discussion as to the propriety of the measure as
regarded the great object of Education, he deemed it his duty as Secretary to bring
to the notice of the Society a resolution fraught with such destructive results to
the ancient literature of the country, and opposed so sternly to the interests and
objects of the Asiatic Society, which seemed called upon not only to remonstrate,
but in eyery way to exert its influence to save the venerable fabric of Indian
literature from such a catastrophe, and to rescue our national character from
the stigma of so unjust, unpopular, and impolitic an act, which was not

* A friend has pointed out to me the following passage of a letter published by Lieut. Wessina
Calcutta periodical in the year 1823.
_** Vow are yet all in. the dark, and will remain so, until. you-have explored the grand libraries.
of Patan, a city in RAjputana—and Jesselmere, a town north-west of Joudpur—and Cambay;
‘ther with the travelling libraries of the Jain bishops. These contain tens of thousands of
volumes, and Ihave endeavoured.to open the eyes of; some scholars. here on. the subject... At
Jesselmere are the original books of Bhauda (Buddha), the Sybilline volumes which none dare
even handle. Until all these have been examined, let us declare our ignorance of Hindw literature,
for we have.only gleaned in the field contaminated by conquest, and. where no genuine record,
could be hoped for.” ;

238 Asiatic Society. [Aprit,

far outdone by the destruction of the Alexandrine library itself! But it could
not be supposed, that the Government of a great, country could mean to with-
draw its support and. patronage altogether from the indigenous literature of
India, however it might have determined to separate this object from the business
of the Committee of Public Instruction, and to confine the efforts and the funds of
the latter to the support, and superintendence of schools and purely normal educa-
tion. It only required a public body, independent of such functions, and offering
a guarantee of competency for the task, to step forward and solicit to be entrusted
by the Government with this momentous object. None could so properly proffer
its services as the Asiatic Society, supported by all the eminent Orientalists of the
country : he had already the assurance of many both in Calcutta and in the interior,
that they would cordially join. He would then move the following resolutions :

‘* Ist. That a Committee be formed in the Asiatic Society, to be called the ‘‘ Ori-
ental Publication Committee,’’ consisting of the President, Vice-Presidents, and
Secretaries as ex-officio members, and of such members as may express a desire to
join it; as well as of all distinguished Oriental scholars, or patrons of Oriental
literature, Huropeans or. natives, resident in ladia, who not being members of the
Asiatic Society may be desirous of joining in the objects of the Committee.

2nd. That the Governor. General be requested to accept the office of Patron.

3rd. That no monthly contribution shall be. expected from ordinary or from

associated members, but.that subscriptions for specific objects may be occasion -
ally invited, as may be determined on in committee.
_ Ath. That the principal object of the Association is the completion of the
publication of those Oriental works which have been hitherto printed under the
auspices of the Committee of Public Instruction; but which, by a late resolution
of Government, haye been suspended, in order that the funds devoted thereto,
might. be wholly appropriated for purposes of Education by means of the English
language.

oth, That the Asiatic Society do present an humble but urgent Memorial to the
Government of India, or if necessary, to the Court of Directors, setting forth the great
national importance of continuing the publication of the series of Oriental classical
literature it had commenced ;, the high value set upon this undertaking by all
the learned of Europe; the difficulty of re-organizing the same establishment, or
one, equally well trained for conducting through the Press any Sanscrit or Arabic
works, if the Pandits, Maulavis, and compositors now employed be discharged
and dispersed ;—and soliciting, therefore, that the Government will still continue
its patronage to. these Oriental works, granting as a separate boon a sum of
money equivalent to what has hitherto been expended, or such sum as may be
sufficient for the object, and placing its,expenditure under the Asiatic Society, or
the Oriental.Committee, with such means of audit or control as may seem
advisable, to prevent misappropriation,

_ 6th. That the Society will engage to devote its attention gratuitously to the
careful and creditable execution of the important charge entrusted to it.

7th. That it will bring to the notice of Government other works which are
worthy of being printed, and use its utmost exertion to secure the careful colla-
tion of manuscripts and correction of the press.

8th. That it requests of Government the same advantages as the Committee of
Education has. hitherto enjoyed for this. purpose, in the use of the Pandits and
Maulavis of the Patsalé and Madrassd. =.

9th. That the Griental Translation Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society of
Great Britain be invited to unite with the Committee, as far as they have a com-
mon object in. view, namely, that of placing in a permanent form the ancient
classical literature of the country—by the printing of standard editions, with
or without translations in the English or Latin language. That to that end the
Oriental Fund Branch Committee of Calcutta might properly merge into the
new Association.’’

The Secretary concluded. by. reading a letter from Mr. Hongson, Resident in
Nipal, whose experience of the natives, and acquaintance with Bauddha and Brah-
minical literature, entitled his opinions to the utmost respect. [We may perhaps
find. room hereafter for the insertion of this letter at length. ] ;

1835.] Asiatic Society. 939

Mr. W. H. MAcNAGHTEN thought it would be useless in the Society to form
a Committee, until it were assured that Government would grant the same pecu-
niary support as heretofore, or at any rate, a sufficient aid; he would therefore
first propose that a memorial should be presented to Government, or if necessary,
to the Court of Directors, expressing the sentiments of the Society as a body,
on the late resolution, and praying to be allowed to continue the suspended pub-
lications at the public expence, in case no other arrangement was contemplated
for their completion. —

His own view of the effects of the measure on the education of the people, he
had expressed in another place—but he could not consent to relinquish these
arguments in an appeal from the Society, which was as much as any body open
to conviction that the improvement of the vernacular dialects, nay the very
grammatical formation of them, required the cultivation and preservation of the
parent and classical languages.

The Rev. Dr. Mizu entirely concurred in these views. To discourage sys-
tematically the study of the learned languages of the east,—was, as far as in us
lies, to barbarize the native dialects, and render them incapable of being the
vehicles of science and improved knowledge. This capability was now eminently
possessed by many of them, entirely through their natural connexion with the
Sanscrit, an advantage which it was chimerical to think of supplying by means of
artificial and exotic derivation from the English. Another observation had forcibly
struck him with respect to the late measure. There were fwo distinct classes
of publications overthrown by it, of which he feared only one would or could
be provided for by the Society’s proposal; namely, the perpetuation of the most
venerated monuments of Sanscrit, Arabic, or other oriental literature,—but the
Other class, comprising the 5th, 7th, 8th, and 9th of the works enumerated above,
which are intended to communicate the advanced kuowledge and science of
Europe, through the medium of the learned languages of India, either by trans-
lations or original treatises, and thus indirectly, but most powerfully, to encourage
the study of English among learned natives, fell peculiarly under the scope of an
Education Committee. It did not come within the Asiatic Society’s province to
attempt this, otherwise than by commenting on existing native systems of science ;
and although the object was so important as to warrant some latitude in the exer-
cise of its proposed functions, it’ seemed doubtful whether they could properly
undertake the completion of the four works thus suspended, already prepared and
half printed at so great an expence. °

Mr. TREVELYAN came purposely to support the formation of the new Com.
mittee. He thought the preservation of standard editions of the classics of the
country a national object, although he had done his utmost to disconnect it from
the business of national instruction. He had himself had a narrow escape of
being a great orientalist, for he had attained some credit for his progress in San-
scrit at College: but his Dictionary fell overboard on his voyage to this country,
and thus he was saved from the bias which an enthusiastic devotion to this ancient
tongue might have given to his views of education.

The PresipeEnt thought, it would be proper to confine the object of the Society’s
motion, to the simple question of the completion of the oriental works, which it
was given to understand had been discontinued. He also agreed with Mr.
MAcNAGHTEN, that the first step must be to ascertain whether Government
would continue its support, and to what extent; for this he recommended, that
Mr. Macnacarten and Dr. Mrit should be requested, in conjunction with the
Secretaries, Mr. J. Prinser and Babu Ram Komex Sen, to draw up an urgent
memorial to the Government, avoiding to the utmost all controversial points,
and to submit it for the approval of the Society at the next meeting.

_ This proposition was unanimously agreed to.

[The meeting was less numerously attended than usual, in consequence of the
usual notices to members having been omitted. At the last meeting it was direct-
ed, ‘‘ thatin future the day of meeting should be fixed regularly for the first Wed-
nesday of every month, and that notice should be only inserted in the * public
engagement’’ column of the daily papers.’’ |

Meteorological Register.

-ULOD TOULIOF 9

L

*SULDAA9 OY} UT S19}SaM-Y}I0U

“ApIOy NOS

*jensn sv pazenzis pue aures 943 S}UaUUNI}SUI OYL,

6L | LI

L°L1T

HTL

—— J——_ | ——

Ar |

—

“d ‘f—"pailsap oq p[NOd se s}MOUVINIJSUL OM JY} UdIMJEq DURPIODOL UR IesU se SMOYS ULOUT OU],
*YSiYy 002 1.Q0-() Spueys JoJoWOLeG AUL yey} SI y[NSex OY.

*JSVIIOAO

*Apnoyo

-auy
‘sul 4varyy

BR) f)
*a[zz11p
“aey
*9[Zz11p

op
bP) )
“ured
“Iealo
-Apnoyo

*1ea[o
op
op

“Ley

*una
*r19 “umd
op
-Apnoja

*IOYICI AA

BB tc) fy)
“11119
op

*7S8919A0

*soyoul * uley
“UMS UL JeOFT

I

*‘saWAIy XG
PESELICOLUGCIT AD

aysIsoy
a a OS WO eee Bee RE, Se 2 FE ee ge

“GEgl ‘qdp fo yjuopy ay} Lof “njjnajn9 ‘ang hossp ay2 qo day ‘aajsihaay 709160j0.109j9 JT

*IajOULOIS
-AW qey

>
oD
onl

a

>
on

aA >
=~ me

PSSQWOneo mos o

.

SosSsscaad

DRE AS SOs oo
=~ ONIN - oO
Mm mNNe

Nata Si ery
i
AAAS

SS AMA DOOHAIAN

smoisAy |
‘FIP sayseT | =

aun he

PUIIOH I | SS

I‘€l

q

-9NI0ULL0Y L,

*IIG UL Id

*poonpep
‘ua,L “sby

‘W *d } Je SUOT}BAIOSAO

“W *V OT 98 SUOI}eAIESqO

+0] 007 )T0-0 If 9peUL (FEST ‘AON “3% *JOJN 995) UOSIIE
*A1OVAIOSYO odeD ayy 4¥ Jeyostayy *f IIS JO LY} YIIM JoJoWOoIeg suey pIeMpy IIS Jo uosited
-wL09 [Njervd ay} Aq paystuany Uaaq sey UOpuOoT Jo Aja190g JeAOY ay) JO JUEUINA}SUL pIepUeys BY} YIM JoJoWIOIeg oDWJQ Aessy ay} Sutedui0d yo Azunj10ddo puoosas y

9°L | 94 | 9°F8 | B6L‘TIZZ9° | PL8*
OL | L°L | p6ce | poa‘Tipsss | B6Z‘
G9 | 92 | O'F8 | BATIBO‘ | 985
gL | OL | 8°68 | SBT‘ L|OL9° | BgBe
0°8 | 0°6 | 6°68 | 006‘T|069* | 068°
09 | 8°9 | 6°E8 | 9F1‘T|BF9S POLS
v9 | LL | 6°68 | ger‘1|00Z* | 8EB°
GG | OZ | 8°88 | F90‘T1808* | S28
6b | 9fg | 0°98 | 6Te‘TISI9S | FEBS
BG | 19 | 88 | Lea‘T|6c9% | GrBE
L‘L | 18 | 8°28 | gae*tl0srs | 8¢Z
IZ | 9° | p°L8 | eget |Zer® | OLL°
LEU) OfET| 8°68 | OLE‘T|BGES | 89L°
6°8 | L°8 | 9°98 | OFa‘T/86C° | BEBE
L‘01] 26 | {98 | 69a‘ T|OT9® | 6285
G8 | 6B | 6°S8 | OF ‘1\G8S° | 6c8
9°¢ | B°9 | 8°98 | OGa"TIGED* | BBE
0°9 | bfo | 6'e8 | IZT*T/ZeL* | 806"
Oo | o% | 1°68 | LersTj0SZ* | 2886
69 | p9 | L508 | e80'1/8z6* | 196
9°8 | a‘g | 0°S8 | 908'T|PIZS 0666
69 | Lt | L668 | SLIT (825 | 986°
L°9 | 91 1 $88 O81‘T|8825 896°
06 | O01] 8°28 | 9TTST|088" | 956°
PIL] a°¢ | 88 | GSI ‘TZI8 126°
OST] 269 | PZB | BIL‘1|968‘8| FL0“6S
ic Mas] Mlael ea! ry ap 13 SOW
abl re] DESH | Be lea | aes
BARBS OF Ole" jot] ucs
De WGA Ge th helt S55 1s* oy [nemesis
S./2c\g"| BPS lek | ge
“S| Pz a

SuRoN

0€
66

cteeVO

n> VITOR
= Salo

Hie, SAS. 5 28

1

| 0
ts
OWL,
iD
oW

at
t
3

Sieg? metlaemepean app aamavigs?

LIE LE IE RR SEB Te

“)

Dre cSt oe td

TO cos

I iF) Beto

ce

sea ee

2) ou

4

<4
Deieinied

*

oO

VS OD wt OM Seek ew

Sas Oro

Tenn aera fe

Oates
;

i j. tn
See YS
baee | ee
ea} Rs
7) moja & es
ae pap ph eee |
hig | Pla | tee
ae eee |

}

Pee!

1 ih, om

Stier 5

= we

hoe te
ras)

Bterat| are,
@,i8 SDS SES,

BES aR OS go BO na

Bec e eae saaoe 58"
E02 [EOGet! BRE PEL,
8.08 level Bes. PROD,
B88 GPC LY STE iE
) | BARR LEO eRe, | BBN
Se MBSE) {Sby | OLY
*y ee i ae

2,

<a a a

ohio SOB actors Fiesty } #02 39 enoligers

eka!

ys),
BA OLT

2 Rhee: p

Be proMEepe

eg
LOG

oe

| qe

|

&
ie aS,

e

A
Sheth tee COR Ae

ars

Shes Sy

4
3 ee

ed GD ce OF fo mee
fhe 8 2,

ga

te

Oh > Ge

=

==

=

Bae

Vet. IV Pl. XT.

Loo!
UES
pe

Seal of the present Sultan Fresent Hang deperTwan Muda
of Johore or Surgapoor of humbowe

Present haya dh Raya
of Single Oofong

J B.Tassin lth

JOURNAL

OF

mee ASTATIC SOCIETY.

No. 41.—May, 1835.

I.—Sketch of the four Mendngkabowe States, in the interior of the
Malayan Peninsula. By Lieut. J.T. Nuwsoup, 23rd Regt. Madras
Native Infantry.

[See Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 11th March, 1835.]

Tue inhabitants of the states in the interior of the southerly part of
the Malayan Peninsula, particularly those of Svingie-jong, or Sima-
jong, Rambowe, Johole, and Srimindnti, derive their origin from the parent
empire of Mendngkabowe, in Sumatra, more directly, than the natives
of the neighbouring states. This peculiarity, with respect to Rambowe
alone, has been cursorily noticed by Mr. Marspen and Sir Sramrorp
Rarries. The former, quoting the Transactions of the Batavian
Society, observes, that the interior boundaries of the Malacca territory
are “the mountains of Rambowe, inhabited by a Malayan people
named Mendngkdbowe ; and Mount Ophir, called by the natives Ganong
Leddng. These limits, say they, it is impracticable for an European
to pass; the whole coast for some leagues from the sea being either
a morass or impenetrable forest; and these natural difficulties are
aggravated by the treacherous and blood-thirsty character of the
natives.” If we give the author of this unpropitious account due
credit for veracity, we must, in justice to the MenangkAbowes, and the
tract they inhabit, acknowledge at the same time that the progress of
civilization has been rapid, and the change in the face of their country
corresponding.

The forests are, at the present time, certainly thick, and some of the
morasses deep; but during a recent ascent to the summit of Mount
Ophir, and a journey along the foot of the Rambowe mountains, I
found neither the one nor the other impenetrable or impracticable,

and experienced nothing but kindness and hospitality from the natives.
H H

242 Sketch of the four Menangkabowe States, (May,

Sir S. Rarruss, in a letter to Mr. Marspen, thus notices the state
of Rambowe: ‘‘ Inland of Malacca, about sixty miles, is situated the
Malay kingdom of Rambowe, whose Sultan, and all the principal officers
of state, hold their authority immediately from Menangkabowe, and
have written commissions for their respective offices. This shews the
extent of that ancient power, even now reduced as it must be in com-
mon with that of the Malay people in general. I had many opportu-
nities of communicating with the natives of Rambowe, and they have
clearly a peculiar dialect, resembling exactly what you mention of
substituting the final o for a, as in the word Ambo for Amba. In fact,
the dialect is called by the Malacca people the language of Me-
nangkabowe.”

The foregoing remarks apply equally to the three vicinal states,
Sungie-tjong, Jchole, and Sriminanti, and as has been already
observed, to Naning. It is also worthy of remark, that in the ancient
records of the Dutch, preserved in the archives of Malacca, the natives
of Rambowe and Naning are invariably styled ‘‘ Menangkabowes.”

The period when these colonies, from the heart of Sumatra, settled
in the interior of the peninsula, is unknown. It is generally admitted,
that Singapore and the extremity of the Peninsula were peopled by a
colony from Sumatra in the middle of the twelfth century, by the
descendants of which Malacca was founded nearly a century subse-
quent; as well as other places on the sea-coast, as Perak, Quedah,
Pahang, Tringano, &c.

Antecedent to this, according to the best native information, the
coasts of the peninsula and adjacent islands were inhabited, though
thinly. by a savage race, still known under the name of Rayet Laut,
(subjects of the sea,) the Icthyopophagi of the ancients, and termed
by Vauentyn, probably from their situation, ‘“ Cellates.’”” The interior
was peopled by those singular aborigines, the Rdyet Utan, (subjects of
the forest,) of whom there are various tribes. Those that have hitherto
fallen under my observation have all borne the Mongol stamp on their
features ; though the Sémang in the interior of Quedah is said to be
characterized by the woolly hair and thick lips, &c. of the Paptan.

Tradition ascribes the peopling of the interior of the peninsula by
the Menangkabowes to a more recent and direct emigration from
Sumatra than the one above alluded to. In absence of all historical
information, the following story, as current among the better informed
descendants of this colony, may perhaps not be out of place.

** After Sri Iscanper Suau had fled from Singhapura to Malacca,
im the seventh century of the Hejira, a Menangkabowe chief, named
Td Pattair, came over to Malacca attended by a numerous retinue.

1835.] in the interior of the Malayan Peninsula, 243

He ascended the river to Naning, where he found no other inhabitants
than the Jacoons, (a tribe of the Rdyet Utan), and settled at Taboo
and took to wife one of the Jacoon damsels ; an example speedily
followed by his vassals. This little colony gradually spread itself over
Sangie-djong, Rambowe, Johole, and other places, chiefly inhabited
by the aborigines, (who gradually betook themselves to the woods and
mountains, asthe intruders encroached,) viz. Jompole, Sérling, Jella-
ba, Srimin4nti, and Terachi.

In course, of time, Tu Pattair died, and was buried at Libo Kop-
pong, in Naning, where his tomb is to this day venerated as a Kramet.
From these accounts then it would appear, that the present inhabitants
of the interior of the part of the peninsula here spoken of, are chiefly
descendants from the Menangkabowes and Jacoons ; and those on its
coasts, from the Malays who fled from Singhapura, and the Rayet Laut.

The new settlers, rapidly increasing in numbers, divided themselves
into nine petty states, under as many Panghiilus or chiefs, feudal to
the Malayan Sultans of Malacca, and after their expulsion by Euro-
pean powers, to those of Johore, by whom they were consolidated
under the name of the Négri Sambilan, or the nine territories.

The names of these states, and the titles bestowed on their chiefs
by the Sultans of Johore, are as follow, viz. Segamet, under Orane
Kayu Mu’pa; Johole, Joan Le’tan Percassen; Naning, Maha-
raja Le’Lan ; Singie-tijong, Kiana Pu'tra; Jellabi, AkHir zema’N ;
Rambowe, Ler’tan Maharaja; Calang or Salengore, Tu’nxu Ca-
LanG, Ulu Pahang, including Serting and Jompole, Rajé Anpra
Sexa’rA, and Jellye, under Mahdrdjad Pu’rsa.

These titles were hereditary, and their possessors used to present
themselves (Mengadap) once a year at the court of Johore.

In a manuscript collection of treaties made by the Dutch in the east,
are found contracts principally of a friendly and commercial character,
with Rambowe and the Négri Sambilan, from 1646 down to 1759.
Prior to this period, the Dutch had assumed considerable influence over
the nine Négris: and, with the formal consent of the king of Johore,
Sultan Aspuy Jattt SHau elected a Bugis prince, named Dyzn Cam-
BoDIA, as chief over the whole nine. Naning had long fallen into the
hands of the European Government at Malacca, and Sriminanti rising
into importance, tacitly assumed its place among the nine Negris.

The Menangkabowes, disgusted with the arbitrary proceedings of
their Bugis ruler, invited over one of the princes of the blood royal of
Menangkabowe from Sumatra, named Rajé Mataywar. The Pan-
ghilus of Sangie-Gjong, Rambowe, Johole, and Sriminaati espoused

HH 2

244 Sketch of the four Menangkabowe States, (May,

the cause of the latter, whilst the five remaining states took up arms
in favor of the former.

The Dutch, it would appear from an official communication address-
ed to the Panghilu of Naning, in answer to a requisition made by that
chief for ammunition to defend himself against the Bugis, did not
take any active part in these disturbances, but pithily advised the
Panghilu to observe a state of neutrality, and in no case whatever to
intermeddle with such intestine commotions ; and refusing the supply
of ammunition solicited, informed him that, being a subject of the
Matschappy, he had not the slightest cause for fear.

In the event, the Men4ngkaébowe claimant, Rajé Mazaywar, was
successful, and Dyen Camesopta retired to Rhio, where he died about
1773.

The Panghilus of the four states, which had espoused his cause,
with the assent of the Sultan of Johore, and the government at Ma-
lacca, elected Rajé Mauaywar as their sovereign, under the title of
Eang depertian Besdr*, renouncing at the same time their allegiance
to Johore.

RajA Mazaywar was the first prince of the Menangkabowe dy-
nasty in the interior.

The five other states remained as before, feudal to Johore.

The following stipulations, a copy of which is said to be in posses-
sion of the chief of Sriminanti, were then agreed on: viz. that the
Menangkabowe sovereign, on all affairs of state, should assemble the
four Panghilus, and should submit to a majority; that his mainte-
nance should be supplied equally by the inhabitants of the four states,
each house contributing annually one gantam of rice, two cocoa-nuts>
and one siuku.

The Panghilus bound themselves to furnish a certain complement
of men, arms, ammunition, and provisions, in case of a war ; also on oc-
casions of deaths, marriages, circumcision, &c. in the royal family, to
send, each of them, three head of buffaloes, and to distribute a certain
sum in sadkeh (alms).

The instalment of the Hang depertuan Besar devolved upon the four
Panghilus, hence termed Punghilu Defantye.

To them also, on the decease of their sovereign, fell the duty of
transmitting the news of the event by letter to the Raja of Menang-
kabowe, who on its receipt deputed one of the princes of his house,
with pompous credentialst, vid Siac, Malacca, and Naning, to Ram-

* The title assumed by Menangkabowe princes of the blood.

+ A translation of these credentials is annexed: they bear a strong reseme
blance to the Menangkdbowe document published by Mr. MarspEn.

1835.) in the interior of the Malayan Peninsula. 245

bowe, where he was met and crowned in state by the four Panghélu
Defdntye. Hence Rambowe is termed tdnnah krgan.

From thence the newly elected prince proceeded to his asfdnah, or
palace, at Sriminanti, which is the royal burial place, and also called
tannah mengandong.

Peculiar Baleis are elected by the Panghilus in their respective ter-
ritories, for the reception of their feudal chief, the shape and fashion of
which it would be deemed high treason, Angkdra Mahdrijda Lélah, to
alter.

That at Sungie-tijong is called Bdlei Meléndtong, from the circum-
stance of its being built at right angles with the river ; and that at Jo-
hole, Balet Bertinkat, having two stories.

The revenue of the four Panghiilus is derived from the power they
possess in the states under their sway, of inflicting fines and levying
discretionary contributions, enforcing gratuitous labour, &c. The levy-
ing of the tenth on the crops is not in general usage.

The real power is monopolized by them, that possessed by the Hang
departiian Besar, being only nominal, and depending on opinion.

On the decease of the first deputed prince, trom Menangkabowe,
Raj4 Maraywar, Raj4 Apit was nominated by his father, the
reigning sovereign in Menangkabowe, as his successor; and having
arrived at Rambowe, was there duly installed.

Raja Avit died in 1795 or 6, leaving three children, Raja Assir,
Raja Sasun, and Tuanxu Putri, a daughter. He was succeeded
by R4jé Iram, also deputed from Mendngk4bowe; and Raja Assiz,
eldest son of the deceased Raja Apiz, became the first Hang deper-
tuan Méda. This innovation was made with the concurrence of the
four Panghilus.

Raja Iram died in 1808, succeeded by Ra4ja Li'neane Laut, who
was the fourth deputed prince from Menangkabowe.

In 1812, R4j4 Hansi, one of the sons of the Zang depertian Mida,
Raja Assiz, carried off by force his sister-in-law, in consequence of
the Panghilu of Rambowe’s refusing his consent to their marriage
on the ground of its illegality. A war ensued, in which the Hang de-
pertian Muda, Raji Assit, who had sheltered the fugitive couple at
Sriminanti, took an active and decided part in their defence against the
Panghilu and Ampat Siika of Rambowe. The latter then sent to re-
quest the co-operation of Raja Au1*. This notorious chief, whose life

* Réja Aut is about 50 years of age, low in stature, dark in complexion, of a
forbidding and rather ferocious aspect; negligent in dress and person; grossly

ignorant and superstitious: though, for a full enjoyment of the drug opium, he
would willingly relinquish his hopes of the Jannat al Firdous, in the seventh hea-

246 Sketch of the four Mendngkdbowe States, (May,

has been passed in feuds and bloodshed, and whose ambition has
since elevated him to the dignity of the Hang depertéian Besar, was the
son of the wife of the Menangkébowe prince R4ja Iram, by her for-
mer husband, Raj4 Haman, brother of Sultan Israuim, late Raja of
Salengore. Raja Aui’s mother is the daughter of the second deputed
prince from Menangkabowe.

Raja Aut, who had fied to a place called Stingie Nipah, beyond
Cape Rachado in Salengore, lent a ready ear to this proposition, and
repaired to Rambowe, accompanied and supported by the Dattu Mida
of Lingie. His weight turned the scale of events, and the Hang de-
perttian Muda, Raja Assiu, after some fruitful efforts at negotiation,
retired to Naning (1813), and eventually to Malacca (1814), where
he appealed to the then British Resident, Colonel Farquuar ; nothing
however favorable to his cause resulted.

Having obtained a private loan of 2,000 dollars in Malacca, he again
proceeded to Rambowe, but failing, retreated to Naning, where he died
shortly afterwards (1814-15); and was interred at the green knoll on
which stood the mosque of Bukit Tatu, near Alor Gajeh.

He left four sons and two daughters.

Raja Aut, this obstacle to his ambition being removed, was elected
as Hang depertian Mada, under the Kang depertian Besdr Linaana
Laut who died in 1824, leaving two sons, R4j4 Rapin, of Sriémindnti
and Raja U’sone; both by his wife, the daughter of the Raja of
Jillaba.

In consequence of intrigues and dissensions among the four elective
chiefs, artfully fomented by Raja Aut, a successor was not appointed
until 1826, when Raja Lasu, a son of the Raja of Menangkabowe,
bearing the ancient credentials from his father, and a letter from
the chief of Siac, arrived.

He was preceded by an adherent named Raja Kre’/san, and having
presented his documents at Malacca, went up to Naning. From thence,
escorted by the chief of that place, the present ex-Panghilu, he re-
paired to Rambowe, where he was installed according to custom. He
married with Tuanxu Iram, daughter of the late Tian Mida, Raja
Assi, and proceeded to his astdnad in Sriminanti.

ven, with all its black-eyed houris. In disposition, he is crafty and determined;
taciturn and deliberate in council ; but prompt and decided in action—qualities
of which I had opportunities of judging during a recent struggle between the
Rambowe and Lingie chiefs. These, added to his high connexions, which how-
ever were not sufficient to give him a lawful title to the eminence which he hae
attained, mainly contributed to his success.

1835.] in the interior of the Malayan Peninsula. 247

In 1830, in consequence of his countenancing the licentious pro-
ceedings of his follower, Raja Kru'san, and the intrigues of his wife;
and above all from the ambitious machinations of R4jé Aut, he was
compelled to quit Sriminauti, but shortly afterwards, having gained
over to his cause three out of the four elective Panghiilus, viz. those
of Johole, Sriminanti, and Sangie-fjong, as also the chief of Jom-
pole, besieged Raja Axt, in his mud fort of Bander in Rambowe.

Raja Aut held out resolutely against the formidable confederacy ;
till at length, through the pacific mediation of the Panghilu of Nan-
ing, after having lost one of their principal leaders, who was killed by
acannon shot from one of the old iron guns on the fort, they with-
drew their vassals, and retired to their respective states.

Raja Aut, his son-in law, Symp Sapan, and Raja Rapin, of Sri-
minanti, shortly after this seized on an opportunity afforded them by
the absence of the Fang depertian Besar at Stngie-tjong, of sur-
prising Sriminanti, and repossessing themselves of the guns which
Raja Lazu had formerly taken from Rapin, under the pretext of
their forming part of his regalia (Kabesdran.)

When tidings of this reached Raja Lasu, he marched, supported
by the Panghilu of Singie-tjong, Kiana Kawat, against Rambowe ;
but in consequence, it is said, of some horrid cruelties perpetrated
upon a female by some of their followers, they were deserted nearly to
a man.

Raja Lazu did not advance further than N&aning: whence, after
a short stay, he went down to Malacca, and finally, in 1832, recrossed
the Straits to Sumatra. His adherent, Raja Kresan, fled to Pahang,
and thence to Muar, and finally, to Johole, where he is now engaged
in fruitless intrigues.

He assisted the ex-Panghélu of Naning during his rebellion against
Government.

Such is the origin and decline of the Menéngk4bowe dynasty in the
interior of the peninsula.

_ Raja Aur was elected as the Eang depertian Besdr over the four
states, and his son-in-law, Suarir Sygp SaaBan, as Hang depertian
Mada of Rambowe at Bander, on the 13th September, 1832.

The question of succession still remains unsettled : among the elec-
tive Panghilus, great discordance of opinion prevails, arising principally
from the premature and impolitic revival of old but contested’ rights
appertaining to their titles by Raj&4 Aut andSyzp SaaBan. This has
led to rebellion, and the strangulation of the tin trade in Sungie-
jong ; and to bloodshed and disturbances on the banks of the Lingie
river, unadjusted at the present moment.

248 Sketch of the four Mendngkabowe States, (May,

. An innate antipathy to innovation, anda secret wish to revert to
the Menangkabowe dynasty, prevails more or less throughout the four.
states, and in case of the demise of R4jé Axi, if not previously, a
severe struggle may be expected between the partizans of the Hang
departéan Mida, SyapD SaaBan, on the one hand, and the advocates
for the addat dhaulu, or ancient custom, on the other.

Syep SaaBan, by no means Insensible that in this case, the best
way to secure an advantageous peace is to prepare betimes and vi-
gorously for war, has been for some time past actively engaged in
strengthening Sémpang, a post advantageously situated on the apex
of the delta, formed by the junction of the Lingie and Rambowe.
streams, and about six miles from their debouchément into the sea.
Hewe he has lately been joined by a chief from Sumatra, with a nu-
merous train of followers.

APPENDIX.

Translation of the Credentials called the Tromba Mendngkdbowe Kale Lye 293
brought over from Sumatra by the last deputed prince Raja Las’u.
The seals at the top are placed from the right to left, according to the order of
precedence of the princes whose titles they bear; all feudal to Mendngkabowe.
According to the etiquette of Malay letter writing, the ‘‘ place of honour}” for
the impression of the seal, is about the commencement of the epistle, to its ex-
treme right, and on the highest Mistar. In letters from a subject to a sovereign,

the impression is made near the foot. ,
6 5 4 3 2 1

The
Sultan firm in faith,
Raja Magat, Sultan Sultan Sulta‘n Sultan by the grace of

fromRogum,son Berkumbah of Indraghiri, of Jambie, of Palembang, Alla‘h, the great Sul-
of the Hangde- Puteh, from Sulta'n Sri entitled Bag- son of Sulta'n ta'‘n Mahara'ja’ dhiraja,

periaan of Sungie Pa- Kahil,son hindaTuan, Indra Rahim, son of the deceased,
Paggaru- ku, theson of, &c. son of, son of, Sulta‘n Abdul
yong. of, &c. © &c. &c. Jalil Mua/z-
zem.
i 10 y 8 7
The
Sulta'n Sulta’n Sulta'n firm in faith,
Sulta'n of Bintan, of Achin, Sulta'n of Indra’ pu- by the grace of
Tuanku of eniitled Sulta’n entitled Sri of Priamah, ra, entitled Sul- Alla’h, the great Sule
Siac, son Mohikat, Paduka Berpa- entitled Ma- tan Mahomed ta’n Maha'ra’ja' dhira'ja’,
of, &c. son of, kat Rahim, haraja’ son Sh ah, son son of the deceased
&c. son of, of, &c. of, &c. Sultan Abdul
&c. Jalil Mua’z-
zem.

2. Sultén Indra Rahim was the first monarch of Palembang, and grand-father
of the Eang deperttian Makat Denam, brother of Baghinda Abras.

3. Baghinda Tuan was the founder of the dynasty of Jambie, which extends
to Chi Jambie, of nine districts.

4. Sultan Sri Kahil was the founder of the dynasty of Indraghiri, which ex-
tends to tke sea.

5. Sultan Berkumpa Puteh was the founder of the dynasty of SGngie Paka,
which extends to Bandar Sapuloh.

6. Raji Magat was the founder of the dynasty of Rogum, which extends to
Kari, in the Mampawa territory.

1835.] in the interior of the Malayan Peninsula. 245

7. Sultén Mahomed Shah was the founder of the dynasty of Indr4pur4, which
extends to Moco Moco.

8. Sultdén Maharaja was the founder of the dynasty of Pridman, which ex-
tends to Tiko and Kakanuli.

9. Sri Paduka Berpakat was the founder of the dynasty of Achin, which ex-
tends to Telabu and Battu Barra.

10. Sultan Mohikat was the founder of the dynasty of Bintan, extending to
Batavia.

11. Sultan Suanku was the founder of the dynasty of Siac, which extends to
Patta Pahan, to Pulo Sawan, and Kasang Bunga.

“ Oh God, look down upon the greatest of Sultans, prince of great
men, the shadow of Allah in this world, renowned among Arabs and
barbarians inhabiting this material world, (created for) the children of
Adam : Oh Lord of the kings of the earth, it hath been declared in
the Koran that every day and night is to be accounted zs void of light,
until the dawning of the true faith in the appearance of Munammep
Sryp-au-Mursauin, the last of the prophets. Amin! Oh God of
worlds.

The Almighty hath caused this firman to appear in the Kor4n in
respect to princes, viz. ‘‘ Ihave created man infinitely superior to the
angels, the sun and the moon. I have given him sovereignty on earth.
I have created genii and mankind, in order that they may worship me.”

The Almighty caused the dry land called Pilo Langkawi to descend
between Palémbang and Jambie, as the place of residence for the ori-
ginal sovereigns of the world, viz. the descendants of Sultan Hipayer
AuuAg Ta-ata, whom he had brought down from the clouds.

Among these descendants was Raja Iscanprr zer Alkurnein,
whose country is Srang, and who is possessor of the iron lock intense-
ly green; sometimes assuming a red, sometimes a yellow, and some-
times a white hue; and, inshort, possessing all colours so vividly as to
dazzle the eye of the beholder; this forms part of the habesdran
(regalia) of the three royal brothers, who scatter profusely their jus-
tice and munificence to all the slaves of Allah, and to all princes who
are feudal to them and derive favor and advancement froin the be-
loved of Allah, Munammep. These three Sultans were very wise and
faithful protectors of all the slaves of Allah.

Tt hath been declared that the fountain in paradise, Jannat unnahim,
causes the young shoots to spring up from within the earth; in like
manner, the slaves of Allah exist by inhaling the fragrant odours ema-
nating from the glorious Bdlie (a sort of hall of audience) of their
prince.

Odoriferous as ambergris and musk are the prosperity and power
of the three royal brothers, viz. the Sultan of Ram, Sri Maharaja

re

250 Sketch of the four Mendngkabowe States, (May,

Autr, the Sultan of China, Sri Maharaja Depane, and the Sultan of
the Golden Island, in the territory of Menangkabowe, Sri Maharaja
dhi R4ja Bervouter. Amin, Oh God of worlds !

Whereas the following are declared to compose bare kabesdran
(regalia) of his majesty the lord of the state of Menangkabowe, viz.
the diadem of the prophet Sotomon: the web called Songsang kdla,
which weaves itself, a thread every year, until the completion of the
duration ofthe world. The wood Kéyu Gdmet, which is divided into
three portions, one of which is in the possession of the King of Rum, tlie
other in that of theKing of China, while the third remains with the King
of Menangkabowe. Theratan termed Mdnno ghiri, which erects itself.
The Pdrang (chopper) of gold. The Chongka Chongkye (a tray with a
pedestal). The mass* of gold, Kédah Allah, (lit. the tinder box of Allah,)
resembling a man in shape. The gold Jattah Jatti, to be suspended
across his shoulder. The tree Nagat Tarin, studded over with precious
stones and rubies. The Sépitt Pinang, (betel-cutter,) Kapdla bara,
which performs its office spontaneously. The Choie Siméndang ghiris,
with one hundred and ninety notches, occasioned by the wounds it
inflicted on the serpent Sicatimana. The mountain Bongsyé, from whence
the Sult4n ascends to the fiery mountain, and by whose supernatural
influence the rivers which flow from it possess rocks of gold, and
waters emitting odours delicious as those of flowers. The lance whose
shaft is of the Sdggar sdntan. The spear called Sambdrah, with a sheath
of Garda wood, on which is inscribed a passage from the Koran. The
kus Allang béra. The mat composed of Sdlang leaves, which is worn as
an ornament to the head by Mah4 Ra’rz, but forbidden by Maha Run-
gur, who were cotemporary with the origin of this country.

The elephant Sacte. The fresh-water sea extending a day’s sail. The
mountain emitting flames of its own accord, where grow the plaintive
bambus, which entrap wild birds by the fascination of their melody.
The petrified cotton. The Gandang Valigiri (a sort of drum). The
Gong jejdtan. The Gong semdndrang, the sound of which reaches to
the clouds.

* This mass of gold, according to the information of a native of Manangka-
bowe, was what remained after the making of the crown of one of the ancient
princes of that empire.

+ The Naga Tarin is supposed to be a tree transmuted into gold.

{ This instrument is said to be endowed with the faculty of ascending the Areca
trees, and cutting the nut without human assistance.

§ Vide Sejara Maldyu for an account of the combat which terminated by the
serpent’s being cut into three parts by the invincible sword of Sangsapurba, tradi-

tionally the descendant of ALEXANDER the Great, and founder of the dynasty of
Mendingk4bowe.

1835.] in the interior of the Malayan Peninsula. 251

The hall of audience Bdlie, whose columns are of the Selatang (a
species of lofty nettle), and the beams of Lendang root. The drum
Piillut pulut, headed with the skins of lice. The horse Sambardni*,

The bell Samédro Sdmbang hdte, whose perfect sound from the left
daily summons petitioners to the right of the imperial throne.

The buffalo Sibénoang Sacti. The cock Birang Sangunani. The well
Sikdtang. The cocoanut Nira Bdlie. The black Sanghidi, which is pro-
duced spontaneously. The paddi, Sitanjo Bani, on which his majesty the
Eang depertiian feeds at mid-day. The paddi called Sarampun déndam
kamara. The flower Sri, the odour of which extends a day’s journey ;
it is sovn, grows up, produces leaves, flowers and brings forth fruit in
the space of a single day, and the azure Champaka.

Such form the Sabesdran of the Eang depertian of Menangkabowe,
the Sultan who reposes cradled in the east, and on whose arising
from slumber the noubet is sounded. The Caliph of Allah, his majesty
the Hang depertian Sati.

These are the credentials of the beloved grandson of the Hang de-
pertian of Paggariyong.

The bearer of this friendly document must be assisted and well
entreated both by sea and land whenever encountered ; for the High
God hath said, ‘‘ First set your trust on me, next on MuHammMeEp
and doubt not.”

Do ye, therefore, all our children and grand-children, noblemen,
merchants, and nakhodas, agree in standing by and upholding our
ancient usages, which have been handed down by our forefathers,

Should this document be brought to Siac, Nila lawan or Patapaan,
to Campar kiri or Campar kanan, molest not the bearer by sea or by
land. These injunctions extend to Palémbang, Indraghiri, to Rogum,
to the villages and forests of Tambusai, to Battu Bara, to Pulo Pe-
nang, to Malacca, Qédah, Java, Batavia, Susu, Telabiah, Guttar,
and Bencoolen, which is subject to the Company, together with other
places on the west coast of Pulo Andalis.

Let us all, therefore, to the utmost of our power, place firm confi-
dence in the great and glorious God, according to our solemn oaths,
and the oath ‘‘ Bisa Gawye’ of our ancestors.

Should any person therefore molest the bearer of these, he shall
draw down on himself the ban of the Hang depertuan of Paggartiyong ;
his crops shall fail, and his subjects shall not thrive; but on the other

* The Sambar4ni cil phew is a fabulous horse, celebrated in Malay romance,

generally said to be winged.

252 Influence of the Moon’s Declination [May,

hand, whoever receives the bearer with kindness, shall be rewarded

with abundant harvests, and increase of subjects, and whithersoever he

may go and settle, prosperity shall attend him, whether on the coast

of the Island of Pulo Pércha or any other place by sea or by land.
Oh Lord of lords and Helper of helpers, the most wise God.”

11.—Comparison of the Heights of the Barometer, with the Distance of
the Moon from the Celestial Equator. By the Rev. R. Evsrusr.
[See Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 6th May, 1835.]

In my last paper, I shewed, that on an average of ten rainy sea-
sons, the daily amount of Rain-fall diminished, as the declination of
the moon increased, until it reached between 10° and 15°; but that
after that distance, the reverse took place, and the amount of Rain-
fall increased as the declination increased. The general average of
the 10 years for every 5° distance from the Equator gave the following

results: ‘i
Declination 0°5°10°15°20°25° from the Equator.
Inches of Rain °321 -271 -256 +259 -347

It was but natural to suppose, that the height of the Barometer
would vary ina similar manner, or rather the reverse, i. e. as the
one increased, the other would diminish, and vice versA—with this
expectation, I made a Table of the heights of the Barometer, as I
had before done of the Rain-fall. The 4 p.m. observations were
selected from the Registers, as being nearest the time of noon at
Greenwich, when the declination of the moon was taken; but I did
not at first obtain results so satisfactory as I had expected. On taking
the general average of the 10 years, a considerable depression (as
much as ‘040 in.) appeared, when the declination was greater than 20°;
but from that to the equator, the heights were irregular, and nearly
on a level. But in examining the Registers, for the purpose of making
out the tables, I could not help observing, that though all the greatest
depressions coincided (or nearly so) with the times of the moon’s
maximum declination, yet that many of the greatest elevations held
a similar situation. The inference of course was, that a principle of
compensation was somehow or other at work. I now became ac-
quainted with the opinion of an eminent philosopher, that any eleva-
tion of the barometer in southern latitudes must have the effect of
producing an equal depression in a corresponding northern latitude.
If we only generalize this assertion a little, and say, “ that any de-

1835.] on the Height of the Barometer. 253

pression in any particular spot must have the effect of producing an
elevation somewhere else,” then, we may see why in any one place
(taking the year throughout) the maximum elevations and minimum
depressions on the same days of the moon’s courses coincide, &c. But
it is straying from the subject, to attempt to reason upon phenomena,
while we are as yet only in the threshold of our inquiry.

In pursuance of the idea I have above mentioned, I next took the
maximum eleyation that occurred in each successive division of 5° of
the moon’s distance from the equator in each year, and then took the
general average of the whole 10 years. I did the same with the
minima, and obtained the following General Average.

Declination 20° 15° 10° a 0° Equator.
Bar. max. inches 30°032 | 033 | 026 "026 | -022
Do. minima, .. 29°236 | °313 | °355 | °379 | °375

These two series of numbers would very nearly form two curves,

with their convex surfaces to each other, thus :

Maxima. [We are sorry to perceive that
the diagram which was copied

Inches, 30°000 ;
“900

-800 oy: from the rough sketch in the MS,
ae Minima. without advertence to the text,
~500 | does not faithfully represent the
4009 figured statement ; but theauthor’s
“300 . . . -

29:20 intention will be easily under-

stood.—Eb.]

I will now leave this part of my subject, as I shortly expect some
further Registers and Nautical Almanacks for comparison, and I will
hereafter revert to it more in detail, and make out a Table more at
length, shewing the results of each year. I have brought it forward
now somewhat prematurely, because from sickness and consequent
removal from home, my labours must be suspended for some months,
and I am desirous before that happens, to bring forward the following
note, which [ humbly hope may not be without its use to a large and
important class of the community. This was the end which I pro-
posed to myself in commencing a long and laborious investigation,
and, if I attain it, in any degree, my purpose will have been more or
less answered.

Norte.

Shewing, that the greatest depressions of the Barometer do not, (as
some have conjectured,) coincide with the days of conjunction and oppo-
sition of the moon, neither with the days of her perigee, but that they
coincide, or nearly so, with the days of her maximum monthly declina-
tion.

For Example.
In the ten* years of which the barometrical daily changes have been re-

* The ten years alluded to are: 1823, 1826, 1827, 1828, 1829, 1830, 1831,
1832, 1833, 1834,

254 Influence of the Moon’s Declination [May,
gistered at Calcutta, there are (6) si# instances in which the barometer. has
fallen below the height of 29°200 inches.—I here add the dates of each instance,
with the heights of barometer and declination of moon three days before, and three
days after; also the day of nearest new or full moon. The hour of 4 Pp. m. has
been chosen, as corresponding better than any other to the hour of noon at Green-

wich, at which time the declination of the moon was taken.

1823. Bar. Inches. Moon’s 33
August. 4 P.M. Rain. Dees 5 hair
5th, noon, Perigee. Bo
6th, nearest. Ose & 8
12th ai: ie ss ae sah bags ates aetna 29-321 fi 1929S. 0 See
L3the aes ce Oe nels eee cee -313 2 22 8 of
TAthi se os : 276 oe 24 Al as
USE Seon oomAtoUGod usmo or on oc "180 0°52 |26 3 | 4
TG tia th es hs ra aic's cece vn eee Geer elebes “388 3°32 12612 8
TAT GRACE RA Pee eerie: ha Bic 2° D0\s WOO sa
18th,.... 526 3-00 |2259 ™9
1829. June, 21st, noon, Perigee. 30 days, 16 hours, new moon. A 2
CHI Gomes cca od od Sar OnOM One 29°185 6°20 Tas IN.
PSH og omao Ooo Seoueee ale tate cise eh 3: aes "407 4 16 34

OM sdagaaied Gacene COCO CO Gea anor 491 Se 18 0

SUGR, Aes sos 474 Ze 18 27

July.

Sty eteets sol Sco ttebaeiaind ciate Wi, tele 454 0°16 17 55

18th, midnight, Perigee.

30 days, 5 hours, new moon.

ADIN Aaao basa aC Fike cod ade 29°421 ai 17 36 N.
Bin ARS sae Go pouE Cangod an Ane 382 4c 18 20

BOEW Rowen ciewees wes an ele ttrs ‘298 0°72 18 6

Qt ayaa rei hatavele olele eateiareraNeeisiotale "159 0°28 17 +0

SEH cio forei arm pope s'a eee pois einai eile 301 0°58 15.46
Spiisdoddooc bodes Seahc 445 0°15 12 33

The declination at noon, 27th, is, 18° 20’ 5”, and the declination, 27th, at mid-
night, is, 18° 20’ 22'', so that the real maximum is within | day, 12 hours of the
depression of Barometer.

1833. May, 24th, noon, Perigee. 19 days, 1 hour, new moon.

Barometer, Rain. Moon’s Dec.
Oth, Sette wa tn ae 29°500 as 15 49N.
Bpelie2 MONT Mee Aah CRD -376 0°98 19 11
2\st, 5 Seles ous aaiete tal 28-868 2-90 | 21 30
PLP ree Rr Ae AR CS WEY Or 5:34 | 22 32
23rd, ope ee ry “425 22 7
rye eee Seem erm oT “340 a 207

The real maximum declination is 22 days, 6 hours, Greenwich time.

1830.

May, 20th, midnight, Perigee.

4 P.M.

°521

Rain.
Inches.

21 days, 19 hours, new moon.
Barometer.

Moon’s
Declination.
13° 5’ N.
16 4
17 56
18 36%
18 7
16 36
14 15
11 18
7 55

Note.—The greatest depression of barometer occurred at noon on the 26th,

1835.] on the Height of the Barometer. 255

when it stood at 29°008, and reducing this to the level of 4 p. M., by subtracting
(-087), the average monthly difference between noon and 4 Pp. M,, there is left
28-921 inches for the theoretical height of Barometer at that time. Noon 2¢th
is, of course, by Greenwich time, 25 days, 18 hours, nearly.

1834. August 7th, midnight, Perigee. 4 days, 18 hours, new moon.

Barometer. Rain. Moon’s Dec.
MMe noes. s.. soso | | 297178 . 22° 40’ N.
ene eieicictcias ol stele oc bs cere ee ae 110 2°20 24° 6
Spee. 8. cube... 22. 80a. P| 28°820 4:10 | 2411
PRUE MEP erelataliaia he icieislel sic no ols s se\s\6 29°344 0:70 22 47
HIP c.ottd cI GIDE RIGIOSIOCEICEIEICID bine *368 as 19 55

The real maximum is on the 2nd, nearly at midnight, or 2 days, 13 hours,
Greenwich time.

The Perigee is evidently out of the question. The comparison between the
time of conjunction, and that of moon’s maximum declination, with the barome-
tric minimum, may be more clearly stated in a table, shewing the distance of each
of the former in days and quarters of days from the latter, thus:

Distance of
Time of moon’s maximum declination.JTime of new moon.

Days. | Qrs.{Days.| Qrs.]
Ree RISER cht. fon cued voaioreaihs Of 2h 7 0
Pe A7th, oooh dcccsdecss ceeeced 3.1013 Hrom, the
MOU. ys le lhcsencesncetl 1 | 2a 0k mearen trates
1830, May 26th, ......... , MEMORY HWS galaly . SU 4 POMESTIC IS
Og ECT Se ee me Ue 1} 2 Ox | a
USAT aS Ore aitnopeie: oe 0 2 1 arty

Making the same allowance as is done in the case of the tides, viz. three days
before, or three days after the event, for a coincidence; all theseinstances of moon’s
maximum declination may be considered as coincidences with their respective
barometric depressions : it is evident, that the times of conjunction cannot be so
considered. We must observe that the only instance of great separation between
the time of moon’s maximum declination and the barometric depression, was in
1829, when the maximum declination of moon was at its least (not above 18° 20’),
and consequently only faintly felt.

It now only remains for us to notice the minor barometric depressions, which
have occurred during the same period, and we will first take the minima of the
years which were above 29°200 inches. From the increase of rain, which occurs
when the moon gets within 10 degrees of the equator, we might have supposed
that the next lowest depressions would probably be found there—and this turns
out to be the case. I here subjoin the details.

1827. Barometer. Rain. Moon’s
June. 4 P.M. Inches. Declination.
MRR tetetets Tore Gale cle's'G,obetees ats wai aves 29°314 we 9 40 N.
MEUIEMIERAS oie SA. cox sali ae Se 4 0,'be selaio Pipa) 4°40 yy Reb

BUMMER ds 2 so lsinlesiclleie ee va’ °207 3°72 Lol N.

July. |

SS eee eee °390 0°38 2 51S.
Nearest new moon, June, 23 days, 22 hours; say 24 days, or 7 days’ distance

from the depression.

1832. Barometer. Rain. Moon’s
October. 4 P.M. Inches. Declination.
SVG “Scchwttee's em dtarah s\n) s'nu.00\ als,’e.a, ae, <4 29°763 re 15 oss.
uly gant gr inceet CAE ens See ee *688 7A k Tora

LENE Sotctelas te Cae cio OTe oc c's cece ws “201 3°54 8 34

BEAIGO yinlWiats 82. PHI ee PES ee owas *696 1°65 4118S

9th, SO TR eee ee ee ee ee sess eeseeoes *697 ee 0 28N.

256

Influence of the Moon on the Barometer.

[May,

Nearest full moon, 9 days, 7 hours; or 2 days, 7 hours’ distance from the

depression.

The minimum depressions of the remaining years are still higher, and irre-
gularly placed with regard to the moon’s declination, as follows:

1826. Barometer. Rain. Moon’s
July. 4PM Declination.
27th, F lighs wage Bee ea oaks BOSE EES Le a 16 40 Ne
QBth yo orseueels Hein ee misters Nelelseneleieeiaure 5 *290 Ee, LOMA
29th eee tee de eet Licte o clatel stevens atets 313 0°06 20 41
SOC Siete cs nt coaces teasite BOdIOO OG Lo uot “361 1:08 2122

SUB Ue ie ck aliens Ore ekels Sal tee °487 2463

Nearest new moon, Aaese, 3 days, 7 hours ; or 6 days, 7 hours’ distance from

the depression.

1828. Barometer. Rain Moon’s
July. 4 P.M. Declination.
PIL SHistore) aie) Sais! s\alwilsrslinia jelolisie bie sich sfelsteln s 29°373 1:07 14 178.
SAMAR Lise ais tele din. wi laic la N eT eleats. sfarejeib le 7352 0°12 16 47
Senn en azaerhae pbeae sree °352 0:08 18 22
BAGG Tee's sroieter<suclessitiece eet sire Niere's 394 0°84 18 48
25th,. melodie sel saree sede! ae we °451 0°78 17 58

Neardst fall moon, 26 days, 10 hours; or 3 days, 10 hours’ distance from the
depression.
1831. Moon’s
July | Barometer. | Rain. Declination.
2200 Hiekels es ciara oie wisinleie « 0lp cle arse aisle 5 29°496 0°12 19 26S.
23rd, - sie 0 hu on *492 ie Teo
24th, afayaye eo °546 1°35 18 40
25th, : stavaieh east ieiots ores 451 16 55
26th, PPT UWI Ee 5 bedi Peldee v ak 379 0°38 14 19
AS GAG Wares tevereiel) dete cbalchaninbrilctsabe ae ale “291 as 11 0

3 TROON BIB OU OOS 302 0°25 7iaG

Maximum declination, 4 phate distance from depression.
Nearest full moon, 24° 9’, or nearly 23 days, distance from depression.

There are yet some further minor depressions, which we must not omit, as
though they are not the minima of any particular years, they are much lower than
some of those we have been considering. I subjoin the details of all under

29°300 inches.

Bar. Rain. Moon’s Bar. Rain, Moon’s
1823. Decl. 1823. Decl.
June. Ot July. 2 af
8th, .. | 29°405| Unknown, [25 47 S. {[16th,.. | 29°282) Unknown. {19 43 S.
9th, . "430 ee 26 12 E/ th. *255 Be 23 0
NO thie. °399 ate 24 41 Utena eye "311 25 13
Pith *267 ee 21 25 19th,.. °353 56 26 15
12th, . *274 Ve 16 48 20th,.. °355 <6 26 4
Nearest new moon, 8th. Full moon, 22nd.
Bar. Moon’s Bar Moon’s
1827. Decl. 1827. Decl.
June. Si July. as
U7tH, core e oe coke vse eo OO LON LGmINa, MU OUHSM:, staratese ate 29°271)12 33
A SGlag Rauctene’ tote ter ene. °245110 12 HFA iter Gepoc Ge Oooo "259115 33
MOM otemacouon so °252/13 36 HS Gla oteusictefenerer stelle “313117 49
20th; sae "404/16 22 IGS dab ob cob *312'19 18
21st, seccesef °459/18 25 D0th,.veccecsooeef ‘331/19 55
onde “509/19 39 DS tisnaeiarel overs herons 396,19 41
23rd, eo *473|20 2 Rain 1°66,
24th, *A86119 31

Dechnation ld time of depression,
10° 12’. Rain, 1°90.

1885.] Influence of the Moon on the Barometer. 257

Bar. Moon’s Bar. Moon’

1829. Decl. 1832. | Decl.
June. obese July. Dl,
SSRENGIEGie lois) c.0y/aierfa’ailels *314118 20 AGUA i steve iaisp elaleveieoal LCOS So OUIZOLOU
Wie cts ces. Paoagenl a ao a Seah 0) °302119 26
WEB Peteves spies. oie 10's *253115 45 ZB GDiy <0 e7 lars °296/16 39
GEN aris trates sckaes wears *494113 21 DOOR rsa cy a *371|12 48

Rain, 2°18. Rain, 0°87.

Bar. Moon’s Bar. Moon’s

1834. Decl. {1834. Decl.
June. SW July. CW,

Seeteer es | 29287118 50 8. (24th... 02. cr... | 293981] 1S.
Pe Las eS en "230/22 4 BUA, | Poles slaps (aches *298] 6 22
DAME eh Ac jeln cre eyo'e °342123 53 2Gtboertiacts hyensare « sya O| alu ae

2G oe °418|24 16 Rain 0°75,
7.5 ki °472|23 15

Summary of Depressions. Remarks.

6, greatest, ........ (all below 29°200.) Inone instance only, 3 days between
time of dep. and max. decl.
2, lesser,.. (between 29°200 and 29°220.) Both within 10° of equator.
10, least, .. (between 29°220 and 29°300.) Of which, in six instances, the time
between maximum declination and depression is not more than two days; in
one instance, three days; in one instance, moon’s declination was less than
10°; two instances, irregular; one, 12’ more than 10° from the equator; one
(291), of four days’ distance between time of depression and maximum declina-
tion. I must now end this paper, begging permission to resume the subject, as
I may find opportunity to do so.

Rosert EVEREST.

It may not be deemed out of place to notice here the amount of wind and rain,
which accompanied each depression. In five cases out of the six, a depth of rain
of from 6% to 9 inches was deposited within three days of the depression. In
1823, no notice is taken of the wind in the Register, but the Kedgeree report
states, ‘‘ light airs’? on August 15th, (the day of the depression,) and ‘ hard
gales from southward and eastward’ on the (16th), the day after. The Gazette
laments inundations in the upper parts of Bengal, loss of life, villages swept
away, and devastation of the crops. In June, 1829, the Register notes on the
day of depression “ violent wind all night, with thunder and lightning.’ In
May, 1830, and May, 1833, were violent storms or hurricanes, the effects of
which must be yet remembered by most of us. In August, 1834, was a heavy
gale of wind. In July, 1829, alone, neither the quantity of wind nor of rain
appears to have been great. The former is not noticed, the latter was less than
1°75 inches. We may remark too, that in the first instance alone, viz. that of
August 15th, 1823, was the declination of the moon south. The rest have all
occurred between the 20th May and 4th August, or from 31 days before the
Summer solstice, to 44 days after it.

258 Collimation Error of Astronomical Instruments. [May,

I1].—Collimation Error of Astronomical Instruments. By J. G. Tayuor,
Esq. H. C, Astronomer, Madras.

Ten years have now elapsed since Captain Katrr’s plan for deter-
mining the position of the line of collimation by means of a floating
Collimator was brought before the public, and his ingenuity rewarded
by the gold medal of the Royal Astronomical Society. It has happened,
however, with this, as with many other great and good inventions,
which are true in theory, that the application to practice is attended
with so much uncertainty, as almost completely to render the plan
unavailable ; hence it is, that the results of observations made with
the assistance of the floating collimator (if any there be) have never yet
been made public. I offer these remarks with a view of saving the
amateur astronomer from the vexatious disappointments which he may
expect to meet with in the employment of the floating collimator ; and,
at the same time, of offering a plan to supersede its use, which is
totally free from any sort of uncertainty : and can, moreover, be applied
with much greater facility than the floating collimator ; the plan in
question consists of making the telescope a collimator to itself, by viewing
the image of the wires reflected from a basin of quicksilver, at the same
time that the direct image is viewed in the ordinary way through the
eye-piece ; to accomplish this, it is only necessary to exhibit a bright
light behind the wires, so as not to interfere with the eye of the observer
when applied to the eye-piece—in the case of the Madras Mural
Circle, to which this principle was lately applied, I introduced a plain
silver speculum into the eye-piece of the telescope between the eye-
glass and the wires, having its polished surface directed towards the
wires; the speculum was suspended in the cell of the eye-piece by two
screws, allowing it to revolve on them as an exis, and was furnished
with a small hole in the centre, through which the wires in the tele-
scope could be seen; the telescope being now directec to the nadir to
a basin of quicksilver, the speculum was turned on its axis until a ray
of light (admitted through a hole about 7, of an inch diameter, drilled
in the side of the telescope), was reflected fromit, and made to fall per-
pendicularly upon the wires (an operation occupying about five minutes
to adjust, and not afterwards requiring alteration), by this means, in
addition to the ordinary direct image of the horizontal wire, a reflected
image was obtained, situated as much to the north of the nadir as the
other was to the south, and vice versa; nothing more was necessary
now than to clamp the circle and bring the wire to cover its reflected
image by the tangent screw, when the reading gave (the circle being
adapted to measure north polar distance) 180°+ colat. + E; subtract-
ing the two former or 256° 55’ 50” E., the error of collimation, became
known. Since establishing the above mode of observation, which I

1835.] Collimation Error of Astronomical Instruments. 959

‘propose to call the reflecting collimator, the error of collimation (or
index error as it is generally called) has been read off five times every
day, viz. at 6 a, M., at noon, at 6 p. M., at 8 p. m., and at midnight ;
taking the mean of these, the error of observation is necessarily very
small, and the effect of any accidental difference of temperature in the
room, which might alter the figure of the circle at any one time of the
day, is at the same time greatly diminished.

To shew to what extent this mechanical measure, as it may be
termed, can be depended upon, I here subjoin the result of the last ten
days’ observation compared with the index error determined by astro-
nomical means, thus :

INDEX ERROR OF THE Mapras Murat Circe.

By the Refiecting Collimator. By Astronomical Observation.
No. of Obs. Index Error. No of Obs. Index Error. Difference,
1835 isi fob ote
Feb. 21 5 —2°27°36 6 —2°27°39 0:03
22, 5 27°92 8 27°73 0°19
23 5 27°64 9 27°45 0:19
24 5 26°46 7 20°74 0°28
25 5 27°50 7 26°50 1:00
26 5 27°22 6 27°34 0°12
27 5 27°28 3 27°10 0°18
28 5 26°80 8 27°54 0°74
March, 1 5 26°91 9 27 e5l 0°40
2 5 26°83 9 27°54 0-71

As a further proof of the efficiency of the reflecting collimator, I
may adduce the result of observations made at this observatory with
the transit instrument. Here we read off twice the sum of the errors
of level and collimation, either of which being known leaves us ac-
quainted with the other. In the case of the Madras transit instrument,
which is furnished with a micrometer, giving motion to a wire parallel
to the vertical wires, I have always preferred measuring the error of
collimation, and computing the corrections rather than attempting by
mechanical adjustment to get rid of it, as is usual with small instruments ;
and, on the same principle have always allowed the axis to take up its
own position with regard to level; hence we have only to apply to
half the micrometer-reading of the reflecting collimator, the error of
level with the proper sign, and the sum or difference, as the case may
be, gives the error of collimation, thus :

Reflecting Spirit Error of
Collimation, Level, Collimation Ditto
or or b by
L+C L Refn. Coll. Inversion. Difference.
1835. , ” 4” Ld a
Feb. 7 4°34 2°60 1:74 1°55 0°19
9 4°22 2°97 1°25 1°20 0°05
il 2°92 2°74 0°18 1-00 1:18
11 9°80 2°74 *7°06 5158 1°48
12 9°28 2°41 6°87 6°73 0°14
13 9°18 2°61 6°58 6°62 0:04
16 9°83 2°42 7°41 6°29 1:12
17 9°97 1°63 7°34 ChE 0°17
18 9°89 2°04 7°85 7°20 0°65
20 9°37. 2°70 6°67 FONG, 0°52

* TI increased the collimation error.

260 Collimation Error of Astronomical Instruments. [May,

The above readings of the reflecting collimator are the result of three
measures occupying at most about as many minutes to make; and the
collimation error by inversion is from one inversion only. As regards
the wants of the amateur astronomer in India, the reflecting collimator
will I apprehend be eminently serviceable, if (as is very often the case)
the level attached for levelling the axis is dull in its movements, or
should it unfortunately be broken; and should moreover the observer’s
situation preclude the erection of a mark to examine the collimation
error—nothing more is necessary than a basin of quicksilver and an
eye-piece fitted up as above.

We will suppose that on looking into the eye-piece the centre
wire and its image are both seen, and that the reflected image
appears 10 diameters of the wire by estimation to the east of the
direct image ; this may arise from error of level or error of collimation,
or from both; to decide this question, we must invert the axis and
again estimate the distance between the direct and reflected images
of the centre wire—suppose the reflected image to be now situated
6 diameters of the wire to the west of the direct image: we have,

‘ Vaee ami a reckoning + for eastern and — for western devi-
ation: from the sum we find L = + 1.

——difference,.......... Shai ge bn

Shewing that the east end of the axis is too high by a space corre-
sponding to the thickness of the wire, and that the centre wire must
be moved towards the east four times its thickness. Other instances
might be adduced of the efficiency of the reflecting collimator, but the
above will I apprehend be considered sufficient.

A mere glance at the accompanying figure will explain all that is
necessary to the construction, which I need hardly remark can be per-
formed by any common workman.

Reflector, full size.

Madras Observatory,
5th April, 1835.
[The elegance, the simplicity, and the great practical accuracy of the method

described above by the Madras astronomer, will we have no doubt recommend it
to very general adoption.—Eb. ]

1835.] On the Strata of the Diab Alluvium, 261

IV.—On the Strata of the Jumna Alluvium, as exemplified in the Rocks
and Shoals lately removed from the bed of the river ; and of the sites
of the Fossil Bones discovered therein. By Serjeant Homunp Dean.

[The Specimens alluded to are deposited in the Society’s museum. ]

It has always been a matter of speculation with me, since my first
acquaintance with the Jumna, that presenting the obstacles to naviga-
tion, which it, undoubtedly, does at the present day, after seven years’
application of great talent, and a very considerable expenditure, what
a gigantic work it must have appeared at its commencement. Expe-
rience, however, and a careful research have confirmed me in the opi-
nion, that many of these impediments in one shape or another, were
then, and are now, not only such as, their existence once known, could
easily be removed, but there is every probability of some of the most
dangerous of them being at this instant in a state of active formation
and increase.

Taking a general view of the whole, as they occur between Agra
and Allahabad, I have found it convenient to class the oS most
to be dreaded by navigators, as follows :

Ist, Clay-banks or shoals; 2nd, Rocks; 3rd, Kankar shoals, and
4th, Sunken trees. This classification is adopted with reference to
the supposed degree of danger to the navigation that may be attached
to each, a detailed description of which I have endeavoured to ar-
range in this order.

The grand and perfect section of the Delta of the Jumna and Gan-
ges, (or I should rather say, from experience lately gained to the west-
ward, of the immense general alluvium of Hindustan, opened by the
channel of the former,) presents a regular alternating stratification of
the different modifications of which the general Diab alluvium is
formed ; which consists (as far as the section has allowed me to exa-
mine), of five distinct strata, interspersed with imbedded substances
which from their irregular growth, positions, and occurrence, cannot
be classed among the more regular strata. The regular strata occur
as follows, namely, Ist, Superior sandstone ; 2nd, Shale, and 3rd,
4th, and Sth, Alluvial, (fig. 1. Pl. XIII.)

Only two strata of the superior sandstone occur within the above
bounds that I am aware of. The elevated positions of both decidedly
have been produced by volcanic irruption, and will be described under
the head of rocks.

The Shale which approaches nearest to d, var. of A. in the first division
of McCuttocn’s synopsis, described as passing into clay, appears very
seldom. Note. The specimens marked “ y, 1, 2, and 3,” all stand the

262 On the Strata of the Diidb Alluvium, (May,

test of adhering on being applied to the tongue or lips. (Specs. y.
lst. Alluvial Clay, corresponding with a, var. of C., first division ;
is much intersected with seams of kankar 3 of an inch in average diame-
ter, colour dull yellow, grey, and dirty white, and is interstratified with
beds of nodule kankar varying between 20 yards, and half a mile in
length (as exposed by the river), and from one foot to 15 in thickness.
Qnd. Alluvial Compact Sand would forma var. e, of C., first division ;
does not agree with c, of the same division, as there is no por-
tion of clay, and it is only partially consolidated by the pressure of
superincumbent strata. It occurs both above and below the Ist allu-
vial stratum from 3 to 18 inches thick, and of indefinite length and
breadth ; in some places a few yards, in others several miles.

3rd. Alluvial Clay, with a large proportion of sand J, var. of C.,
first division of Mr. McCuttocu’s synopsis. This stratum is frequent-
ly varied in colour, giving it an appearance of divisibility ; but on ex-
amination, this difference will be found to extend to colour only, which
varies in many places between dull yellow and grey.

lst. Of Clay Banks or Shoals.

These banks (fig. 2. Pl. XIII.) so justly dreaded by navigators of the
Jumna, are quite as unwelcome to those engaged on the Jumna works,
as their removal is both troublesome and expensive. They are formed
of isolated and detached portions of the Ist alluvial stratum, by an
accumulation of sand forcing the stream into a new channel, formed by
the whole of the 2nd and 3rd alluvials, and least tenacious parts of
the 1st alluvium, having been swept away at high levels, leaving such
portions of the last as were sufficiently compact to withstand the force
of the stream, which are generally those where the natural toughness
of the clay is increased by the seam kankar before mentioned, (spec.
#,) which runs in every direction through it, literally lacing it toge-
ther, and giving the clay a durability which the action of the strong-
est current has, perhaps, less effect upon, than it would have ona
similar mass of stone of average texture.

The stream, which is generally confined in its course by these ob-
stacles, rushes past them with violence, polishing (as much as clay is
capable of such an operation) all those parts exposed to its action.

It was in the crevices formed by the washing away of the softer
parts of a bank of this description, (figs. ] & 2, Pl. XIV.) that the speci-
men of fossil bones, which were, I believe, presented by Capt. Suir,
and the tulwar, by Lieut. Burr, were found, whilst the clay bank was
being removed, the whole upper surface of which was covered with from
two to four feet of kankar, of the conglomerate formation. I should
wish this to be remembered, as I consider finding the latter in such a

Vol. IV Pl. XUI.

ai th Dien Ne ti

nets gi iS

Share it we ¥
Sut tes a

add, omnes days x
at ‘Ea clas accent Bs aia

£ id at tspinien

Taree.

1835.] and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 263

situation as peculiarly corroborative of my remarks relating both to
these banks and to the kankar formation. No instance, however, has
ever been known of petrified or fossil animal, or vegetable remains,
having been found fairly imbedded in or under this stratum.

Another formation of these banks is occasioned by the current. sap-
ping the high and abrupt banks of the river, by washing out the stra-
ta of compact sand, when such large masses of stiff clay are detached
and thrown into the channel, as to defy the efforts of the stream to
dislodge them, which if not speedily effected, a sufficient time has only
to elapse to clear the outer parts of the earthy matter which may have
fallen with them, which together with sand immediately deposits it-
self in rear, when every hour secures and strengthens them in their
position against the stream, (fig. 3. Pl. XIV.) The interstices (should
there be any) are soon filled up with any extraneous substances that
may be lodged by the current. Those organic remains which may
happen to be imbedded, or rather buried under this sudden deposit,
if petrified in that situation, may be easily distinguished, as they inva-
riably adopt in the process of petrifaction, the hue of the mass with
which they are in contact, and which, when the process is complete,
nothing will remove, and the porous parts of the bones either re-
main empty, or are filled with carbonate of lime, infiltrated, whilst
in solution. The same remark applies to wood or any other substance.
In every other situation the interstices of the fossil to which the water
has unrestrained access, is filled with either silicious or argillaceous
matter, and frequently with a composition formed of both. For the
proper consolidation of either of which, however, the presence of the
carbonate of lime is necessary.

Both these formations may be, and frequently are, instanced in one
specimen, where from fracture or decomposition, sand or clay may be
admitted to one part, when the composition is formed, whilst it is ex-
cluded from those more perfect, the pores of which will be either filled
with crystallized carbonate, or remain empty as above stated.

By the continual cutting away, and falling in of the banks of the
river, the accumulation of alluvial matter in some places is neces-
sarily very extensive. The strength of the current preventing its
deposit in the channel, it is carried down to the bend of the river,
next below whence it has been dislodged, in the shape of thick sedi-
ment, and deposited there ; the sand which accompanied its removal is
from its greater specific gravity deposited in the bed of the channel.
This alluvium forms in banks from 6 to 14 feet thick, and composes,
on a rough calculation, not less than 80 or 100,000 acres of arable
land, of the first quality, between Agra and Allahabad ; producing by

264 On the Strata of the Diab Alluvium, (May,

far the best crops of any land in the neighbourhood of the Jumna.
Many of these deposits (which occur at every turn of the river) are
several feet above its present highest levels ; these, however, the river
by having deepened in its course since their formation, rather dimi-
nishes than increases by washing out those veins of sand, (parallels
to the 2nd regular alluvial stratum of the Dijéb general alluvium,)
from one to six inches thick, which are invariably interstratified with
this deposit : the more compact alluvial stratum above these veins be-
ing deprived of their support, separate and fall into the water in
flakes, when, if the current is not too violent, the base of another de-
posit is formed, corresponding to the levels attainable by the river in
its present bed, causing the upper surface of the united deposits, either
to slope gradually towards the deep part of the channel, or the junc-
tion to be marked by a step or steep slope. All those, however,
which are covered with only a few inches of water at the highest
levels receive an additional deposit of sediment, which, however tri-
fling, answers the purposes of the best manure.
2nd. Of the Rocks.

This term (as understood on the Jumna) is applied to four distinct
formations, namely—1st, superior sandstone; 2nd, volcanic; 3rd, isolat-
ed masses, the remains of beds of nodule kankar, and 4th, conglome-
rate rocks, composed of kankar and extraneous substances.

Ist. Of the superior Sandstone. The only strata of this formation
occur at intervals between the neighbourhoods of Barriari and
Dhowrie, two villages on the right bank of the river, and near Mhow,
a village in the Bundelkhand.

Near Barriari a great deal of good stone for building purposes, and
of any dimensions, is quarried, (fig. 1. Pl. 3. spec. 1.) and sent to
Allahabad. Very good stones are also procured from many parts of
the bank near the above places, by removing two or three feet of
loose earth or clay. It is fine grained, and very similar in colour
and quality, to that procured from the neighbourhood of Bhurtpore.
In fact I believe them to be portions of the same stratum, but am not
sufficiently acquainted with the geological features of Bundelkhand (the
intervening tract) to make the assertion.

A portion of this stratum, thrown together in large masses by vol-
canic irruption, forms the curious little rocky island on which a Shiwa-
la is so picturesquely perched in the centre of the river opposite the
village of Dhowrie, about two days’ journey from Allahabad.

The other stratum occurs at Mhow only, and extends more than one-
third cross the river, and is so friable and coarse as to be totally
unfit for any useful purpose. Occupying its present situation, it

Vo IV Pl, XIV

Ex

45

lige
ov]

en 7

OAS

a Ay

4 os

‘hapiiy ay
SA Lae 2"

jess

ores ; ahs bane ha Seria Pa

: ait sa se Mii S: Pays ah. yall :
eprint sda peayater ls e+ Agel
jake bos Cae eae oo Mae oa
ditty [b aotneaphyainia 46, @ Eh
. RR He agai ORs ato vg

aS ="

Be he realy

becoses su tia : ‘odie: poet.
Psat bs eee: Wi37

ot Piz yo fii a id
i i ete wS me
Mg etis Mat) agh The

7 Wotan ci ehep iene Ciba eo ened ie

ly See. Sirois Tale. Meg 3 derhsne aan? tin

tus £ Pry Per che a?
3 Sued Saeed, 3 PSP ats cn
es calumny: Tiss petenatiy
ae bat + Bethe ;
£ 1 See Z a f Si Lees ae
ing neY ry Noor ear a)
5 : 1
Saddam 3 gs ATLL SLUR Re 30 pi pe

aA Fed Sed Jaco ley Bieogs secs eS pda AY eee vr . ee
Ove aon errr CLaTLcad ey, Bilis mean dg Suteacwict dibwiona aie " ; - = |
a ie ene en
; ii Rabie PAA ne? Se ee hin hou a ete thine ‘eerie ba ot E:
. wi TE ee at ies ostala mais: HOF MEER D) Bad 2. cyte: PAAR se hiniaade f
WE HAR RRB.rya ita 880 hs SL AR ag Bede SARA Aa gdi spy uae
| ; 1 Me vies Soom dO ape aaa ie aa aR i

when

2. en 56) TER

‘

1835.] and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 265

9)

has caused infinite trouble, not only by the interruption a body of
any sort must be to the navigation in such a place, but by the irre-
gularities of its surface (forming the bed of the river), acting as recepta-
cles for the moving kankar and other extraneous substances passing
ever it, in which have formed irregular masses of conglomerate rock
occupying two-thirds of the whole width of the river. These, per-
haps, at the time of their formation did not stand more than a few
inches above the bed of the river, (the upper surface of the sandstone
rock,) but the river deepening its bed in the course of ages has gradu-
ally worn away the sandstone, leaving the masses of conglomerate
(on which it can make no impression), in the awkward and danger-
ous positions which they now occupy, with deep water all round them ;
and although some of the most dangerous have been removed, the
passage down with a side wind is often impracticable to the clumsy
boats used on the Jumna. It has this advantage over Karim Khan,
(the worst pass in the river,) that the stream is not near so rapid.
Those portions of this stratum which lie near the edge are exposed
to the effects of the stream in a minor degree, and stand from one to
five feet above the lowest levels, presenting peaks and heads of masses
at irregular intervals over a space of about 500 by 200 yards. The
exteriors of these are of a dirty green colour, which penetrates about
one-eighth of an inch, and is, I imagine, caused by the action of the
atmosphere. Under this coating, the natural colour of the stone appears,
varying between every tinge of yellow and red, and pure white, which
would indicate the presence of some portion of iron ; but one sight of
the accompanying specimens will convince you, Sir, that but for the
presence of some consolidating medium, the sand of itself would never
resist the action of any stream. This consolidation occurs in the
shape of numerous veins, from one-fourth to two inches in thickness,
and from three inches to many feet in width, passing through it in
every direction, and rendering it quite impervious to the stream
with which it has to contend; and from the feeble attempts of which
it is in fact defended by some masses of volcanic origin, which are de-
scribed below. These veins (spec. 2) are either the deposit of some
ferruginous spring, which has had a passage over the stratum, and on
which the sand has from time to time accumulated, or is a lignitious
lava; they occur in every position, horizontal, vertical, and at every
possible angle with each of these: their outer edges are black, and bear
a very high polish, produced by the action of the water. The fracture
presents an appearance which would justify the conjecture of this
substance having passed into the present position in a state of fusion,

as it encloses a substance within itself, having a vitrified appearance.
L i

266 _ On the Strata of the Didb Alluvium, [May,

The total absence too of iron within the bounds I am endeavouring to
treat of, in any of the alluvial formations, and the intimate connexion
existing between the sandstone, and substances of undoubted volcanic
origin, strongly incline me to the opinion, that the heat necessary for
the production of the latter, might have split the former, and that the
interstices thus produced, have filled with the lava, (the present veins,)
in a state of fusion. Another circumstance, confirmatory of this, is
the fact of the sandstone being in a state of transition with the vitri-
fied substances; but owing to the brittleness of the intermediate sub-
stance, (spec. d.) it was with the greatest difficulty I could procure
the accompanying specimens.
Of the Volcanic Rocks.

These occur in two separate situations, namely, at Murka and Mhow.
You will perceive, Sir, that the specimens from the former place, agree
with Nos. 4, from the latter, although the shortest distance between
these places cannot be less than 20 miles, perhaps more.

The mass at Murka, consisting of rough spheroidal blocks, varying
from one by two, to three by five feet, lies on the right bank of the
river; their peculiar shape, appearance, and position, leads me to
imagine, that they have been ejected in a partially vitrified state, and
lodging in the water, the outer and angular parts have become slack-
ed, and have been swept away by the stream, leaving these blocks,
which, under these circumstances, are exactly similar to the core of
badly burnt lime; in no other way can I account for their peculiar
formation, which had it been produced by rolling, the same cause
would have scattered them widely, but this has not been the case, as
they lie in a clearly defined mass, (fig. 2. Pl. XV.) and in this instance,
have no other connexion with any other stratum than being super-
incumbent.

They correspond exactly with Nos. 4, from Mhow, both in the de-
gree of vitrification, colour, texture, and every thing but position ;
those at Mhow overlie, but are entirely detached from their bed,
(sandstone,) and the same quantity is scattered over a greater space
than at Murka. Their exterior is jet black, and so highly polished,
that it is impossible to examine them for any length of time when the
sun shines, the great light and heat they reflect during the day is pe-
culiarly distressing to the vision. The interior is a mottled dark, and
light red, one view of which is conclusive of its volcanic origin.
(Specs. 3 and 4.)

Nos. 5, are specimens also from Mhow, the originals, (spec. 5,)
occur in very considerable masses, having both sandstone and clay as
a base, and standing above it from 1 to 20 feet; the largest of these

Xk

lL.

IV P:

Kot.

FOC.

tae.

Sou

iT

+ eR pA IRE Ni gE
RR ls & orem? vehi Fie nado renee ate
nt cy cae yo Tee RR eae inp Babi rs hen ss. ead
oe a “Wm oo. oe oie Sy OH ee eam :
a i Sriat ‘pion (pis new ball
7 Se Na Hani Siri tptation AUS, erat
aal? 3a tb eh: ht apes OPEN: gneear, vheghiting weal rate

P

8 onde 0 anid sia i ‘Winonoe fe. alent a a an,

ASME iodeisrosy ett We ordi fite: pene 8

Salta Sven IOhe aauttonngen ad ig Teint Oe al
x ditaked nite He Mec Sie eine Bie nd
sf domi, satsot adit apse baw Shing 6 cis tae as

sob aneaee Siena tie: rgb: by te
ee erath %, ore. ilht NPS - —_ sacha ¥

beaver rer

; ey 4

al yaTintw cea ee dutoer nicer: yonroret a
sia id “hie & marie navisth Boss tne adeno palzeee

7 ra we ie

é pina sie ie yy ava “0 ne nee RY erret -

= Be
pide aide vd at ver Rast, thing tense aay ¢

“seer od rata svt eatarea Oe Oe Dampstoes” hope
te) save Oe barat: a Har aed Be gaes a a0) FB) we a)

iy! ese er ‘er ic at a Ms! pre? oo

eres ane seas

visice ,ainidtins > a oan tag het nual 4 yCL et

, na - e
nat SK? Dad Sy evs IAs 18 | My emia eons Tog sos?
ee gh To ; “i
, ‘eeyvivettal seay tea ad aeraonr tenses 352

Hy Paterna ay Tee: SET GS EER BPe ae: UeaT GE yuan fev ini
oy Bye fies Snag edi a oldsoilgga et nit ae roibahiee is

Apr isaynt ogfron (lade 14igo00' entmenst sesilt an
diiw bsieodtos glinissey lifteet bia nao’, qlindizixo 2a
Sevit.ord Io aad dooiv Sad hy

) t: load handdélgbnsd enlt-16 level onmievs: adi wolod Jost og
dial eo outing elt Lasanit spar aeienods ih ay tevii ont ae fi mm

ee) odode Sar sent 1 sonia at

=a 8

ove ‘ge liad
3 “aft ranayde adi of

1835.) and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 267

masses is about 45 feet in diameter, of irregular shape and lighter color,
than the detaclied masses, and evidently has not oeen nearly so much
subjected to the action of fire as the latter ; they are much softer, and
have interstices filled with earthy matter, which has been subjected to
great heat, but are only partially vitrified.

This substance either passes into unburnt clay of the Ist alluvial
stratum, or the stratum of superior sandstone, on both of which it
rests, (Specs. c and d.)

The singular appearance and conformation of the detached masses
could not fail to attach something of the marvellous to them. Native
tradition states them to be the stones which the army besieging Lunka,
under Rama and Lutchmun, were enjoined to bring for the purpose
of building the celebrated bridge ; but enough having been accumulated,
messengers were despatched with the news, two of whom posted
themselves at Murka and Mhow, two ghauts on the Jumna, and each,
Lungoor and Tualah, arriving with his load, hearing the welcome tid-
ings, it was deposited here, and he proceeded lightly on his journey.
J had this version from a Brahmin, who begged me, whilst getting my
specimens, to remember that such relics should on no account be
disturbed.

Of Isolated Masses, the Remains of Beds of Nodule Kankar.

Whenever these remains occur, the river is by their considerable
extent generally contracted in its course, causing the water to rush
through the narrow but deep passages between isolated masses of
what was once one continuous bed.

The passage at Karim Khan (fig. 1, Pl. XVI.) (the point d’appine of
the Jamna works,) is now and has been perhaps for centuries, solely
affected by the presence of the remains of an extensive bed of no-
dule kaukar, and is at the present moment the worst pass in the river
for boats passing downwards at all seasons and upwards in the mon-
soons. As a description of this is applicable in its general outlines to
every locality where these remains occur, I shall confine myself to it.
_ This bed has originally been and is still partially connected with
and resting on the right bank of the river; its surface I imagine to be
about 75 or 80 feet below the average level of the Bundelkhand bank,
and the bed of the river to be about 16 feet below the surface. The left
or Diab bank is not above two-thirds the height of the opposite one,
and is protected by a very extensive shingle shoal; had it been a bank
on which the stream would have made any impression, the river would
have certainly taken a course more free from impediments than the
one it now pursues. The stream being thus confined, has, by the
gradual deepening of the river throughout its course, been at last

968 Cn the Strata of the Diab Alluvium, (May,

thrown over this bed of kankar with sufficient force to break it up
partially, and the remains present a number of detached masses pro-
truding across two-thirds of the river, from the right bank, standing
from four to five feet above the surface of the water at low levels, ex-
posing the whole thickness of the bed, which varies between three and
five feet, and an average of two feet of its substratum a stiff clay, and
between them deep channels are worn. The action of so rapid
a stream on all sides of these bases of clay (the supports of the
superincumbent kankar) is gradually but surely reducing them, and
in the course of time, becoming too feeble to support its weight. The
kankar will be deposited in the bed of the river some 12 or 14 feet
lower than its present position.

These masses, which vary from afew feet to many yards in size,
are externally very compact and hard ; but on penetrating 18 inches,
it will be found, that they maintain inside this crust a similar appear-
ance and quality with any bed that might be opened in the centre of
the Diab, namely, the interstices between the nodules being filled
with a loamy clay, and having every appearance of having been un-
disturbed since the formation of the bed.

It was on the strength of the unsuccessful search I have insti-
tuted in and under such strata as this, that I hazarded the opini-
on that I should consider the slightest discovery of fossil (animal)
remains at a level corresponding with the deepest parts of the river, as
the merest possible accident : perhaps! should have rather said, fossil
remains may possibly be found in the Diab general alluvium ; but it
must be under parallel circumstances with those producing the Jumna
fossils, as it is impossible to suppose that during the accumulation of
this immense formation that such a space was void of animal life.

The question mooted by Grirritus in speaking of the fossil remains
of elephants, “* Can we suppose that none are buried there (in climates
to which the elephant is native), or that the bones have been decom-
posed by the force of heat;” chimes so much in tune with the idea
that possessed me on examining every excavation in the D&é4b to
which I could get access, previous to being acquainted with the sec-
tion formed by the Jumna, that even now I should feel little difficulty
in asserting, that unless some sufficient body intervenes between or-
ganic remains and the decomposing power of the sun’s rays, soon after’
their assuming a morbid state, no vestige of them ultimately remains.
Experience has proved that they are buried, fossilized, and petrified
within the limits of this general alluvium; but in my opinion. they are
not even cotemporary with this formation, but of a date more recent :
for with such an ample section before us, as is presented by the Jumna,

LVF AVA,

h

1

r PTL ee)

sed DS Taye

ray He eee
maggie’ bee gS T)% RN RE e sii oe
wuts. %. =e 1 i?
M
4 Vy eee, e 4 ahs ee Oe
ied 4 Vie ink ERI Ee 20) Re GER
+ Tests rin’ Lanes Mea eae te
; «
Sag 6
5 4
:
’
‘

ae 7 ee ae esi sods oy Tet bas cr
vides _ obeatalelaibe spin ra ora ir pi 4
ty : « aye eur (Ota stort ed
Ss iss ere Ww nen gaincien Seah

Seabee Setebotn SS enOOT Bae ie
. * Fi s) 3
" nt make OHMIC. a Pa A RES CA eR

iedet a ielegs: ah iyrendeaieih set Ulthy

atelaiel Peale an AL aasiire PRE est
Giii ra ase ahaeke te cay Ar Ns ae

Jey eae wi

ewe hh

4g Up Tet eo SE a eee
. 7 7

oe ee, opts) ot ree
i = = ,
won .
¥ vir wait area : iF Sot sy
+
(
».
es Fates
t . 2
, ne ' A
. i j
is 1 » > ‘
> ~ db
1 ey

1835.] and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 269

would it be possible, where from the presence of strata of the secon-
dary series, the complete section of the alluvium must be exposed, that
within the limits I have examined, not one instance of fossil remains
has occurred imbedded in it? To what cause then can their absence be
attributed, but that they have been decomposed by the force of heat,
before they could attain a state necessary for their preservation? To
what then do the present specimens owe their existence ? I must sup-
pose either to the interposition of some body (water for instance)
between them and the sun’s rays, or to their having been petrified in
the colder latitudes of the Himalaya, and lodged in the situations from
which they were procured by the action of the current.

The fact of their being found in every stage between freshness, fos-
silization and petrifaction entirely excludes the idea of their having
been uncovered by the deepening of the river having washed among
any portion of the secondary strata, by which they would have been ex-
humed from the stratum in which they had been petrified : had the
petrifaction taken place there, they must have all occupied that posi-
tion from the known age of the general alluvium ; a sufficient time to
have been all alike or nearly so, which is not the case.

The following observations made on the conglomerate formation
may throw some light on the. subject.

The Conglomerate Rocks,

Are composed of nodule kankar and extraneous substances—and
consist of two separate formations, both of which are strictly mechani-
cal, together composing one-third of the rocks of the Jumna. Their
difference consists in one formation being consolidated by means of
cement, the other by the intervention of carbonate of lime deposited
whilst in solution in all the interstices of any mass, thus connecting
the whole together.

Before proceeding further, it will be necessary to explain how
these nodules of kankar and extraneous substances are accumulated,
and then show the method of application of the consolidating bodies.
In all the high and nearly perpendicular banks of the Jumna, ravines
are cut out by heavy runs of water at short and irregular intervals,
which serve as drains to the surrounding country. During the heavy
periodical rains, considerable bodies of water rush through these ra-
vines with great violence, bringing down drift wood, rubbish of every
description, nodule kankar, and large portions of clay detached by
the water from the sides and beds of the ravines. The latter gene-
rally arrives in the river rolled into figures varying between a prolate
ellipsoid and spheroid, (spec. z,) of all sizes, and from 20 lbs. to 3 of an
ounce in weight. The clay being softened in its rolling progress,

270 On the Strata of the Diab Alluvium, (May,

attaches to its circumference every substance hard enough to make a
sufficiently deep impression to secure its hold; this continues until
every portion of the outer surface is covered, when, of course, the
accumulation ceases; in this state it is washed from the ravine into the
bed of the river, on reaching which, it is carried forward in a new
direction of the current of the river, which deposits it in the nearest
hollow in its bed, where after lying a sufficient time, the body disunites ;
the lighter earthy particles are swept away by the stream, whilst the
clay kankar, and other substances which may have been brought down
with them, remain as deposited there: thus are all the necessary ingre-
dients at once provided for the formation of a conglomerate rdck
except the sand, which in the course of a few hours generally proves
the most abundant article of the composition, when only a sufficient
time for the cement to set is necessary to present a rock, which the
carbonate of lime (which fills all interstices that may be left) ultimate-
ly renders the hardest, and from their situation, very frequently the
most dangerous rocks of the Jumna. (Specs. 6.)

The conglomerate in which carbonate of lime is the consolidating
medium is generally produced by the breaking up of the beds of no-
dule kankar, by the supporting pillar of clay (its substratum) being
washed away, or other causes, the loose or interior nodules, of which
are then deposited in the nearest hollow lower down the stream that
can detain them, when from the absence of clay (excepting this dis-
lodgement occurs in the monsoon), the cement cannot be produced, and
the deposit remains until by the usual process of tufa formation, the
whole becomes one consolidated mass, (spec. 8,) this, however, must
be the work of time, during which, sand often fills many of the inter-
stices, and becomes a part of the conglomerate body.

The fractured edges of remains of nodule kankar beds often present
this formation, although from the difficulties it has to encounter, a
very small proportion of the conglomerate rocks of the Jumna belong
to this class. The principal tufa formation that I am acquainted with,
was removed by Lieut. Marrin, Engineers, from near the village of
Orowal, where the accompanying specimens were collected. (Spec. 8.)

Most of the specimens in your hands, Sir, will speak for them-
selves. I select, however, one instance of the cement formation, in
which the fossil remains of an elephant are imbedded, which I con-
sider, claims a particular description.

The site of the mass containing these interesting remains on the
right bank of the river, about 12 miles from Korah Jehanabad on
the high road to Cawnpur, directly under the village of Pachkowrie,
which stands nearly 80 feet above it, lying amongst an immense as-

1835.] and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 271

semblage of kankar deposits of various ages and appearance where it
is conspicuous by its size and thickness*. The bank on which these
have been formed, is a portion of the first alluvium stratum.

The existence of these remains, m the position they occupy, bears
me out in the assertion that one-third of the rocks of the Jumna are
of a mechanical formation, and some may even possibly date their for-
mation within the memory of the present generation, that are now
some feet in thickness, and of very considerable extent ; others only in
embryo which may, on arriving at their full size, be able to turn the
course of the river. As Il imagine three feet to be the maximum,
and half an inch the minimum, thickness in ordinary cases of any lay-
er deposited in one monsoon ; for at this season only does it receive
any considerable addition : the product of a heavy shower or short
continuance of unseasonable rain, I imagine to be very trifling ; the
ground being generally in so parched a state near the banks of the
river (where the drainage is so rapid and complete), that an ordinary
shower is absorbed, or nearly so before reaching it, producing no other
effect than a run in the deepest parts of each ravine, which ceases
almost as soon as the shower.

Others, however, of the same formation are entitled to be consider-
ed of proportionally great antiquity ; for if my position be established,
that it is to some peculiar quality of the water, combined with the
other consolidating bodies, we owe not only the majority of the rocks
of the Jumna, but the organic remains that have been or may be dis-
covered, there must be some instances of both existing, whose ages
must be coeval or nearly so with the river itself, as the same causes
must always produce the same effects, and once produced, their posi-
tions and appearance may be altered; but the greater their age, the
more combined ana natural do these substances become, until their
appearances present so little in consonance with conglomerates of the
most ancient structure, that nothing, but an examination equally mi-
nute with that I have bestowed on the subject, can distinguish between
them. Those having pretensions to antiquity are the ones occupying
levels to which the river seldom now ascends, and never continues at
such heights more than a few hours together, with others quite out of
the reach of the present highest levels.

In the specimen before us, the form of each bone in its position in
the deposit has been accurately preserved, but not in a state in the
slightest degree approaching what it would have been, had they been
exposed to the uninterrupted action of the water, which proves that

* The plate referred to here in the MS. is omitted.—Ep.

272 On the Strata of the Didb Alluvium, [May,

the animal has either died in, or has been after death washed, to, the
position it now occupies, on which the deposition of kankar and other
substances has still continued, thus rapidly enveloping it in a crust,
which accounts for the absence of petrifaction, (specs. a and 6 ;) for I
have observed that in very few instances, where organic remaius have
been imbedded in the kankar deposit, has the bone materially differed
from the present specimen. Instances have occurred, and still may be
referred to, as existing at the present moment, whereon the deposit
having attained the highest level of the river, or from the sinking of
the river in its bed, it has been left at a level scarcely ever attained
now at its highest rise ; where the formation has necessarily ceased in
these cases, those bones which with other extraneous substances help
to form the upper crust or surface of the deposit, are generally from
their being larger than the nodules of the kankar, but partially imbed-
ded; that part which has been exposed to the action of the water, is
perfectly petrified, and is rather darker than the surrounding kankar ;
whereas the part below the surface maintains the same colour, ap-
pearance, and quality, (fossilized, but not petrified,) as this specimen or
nearly so, allowing for the difference in the size of each, (spec. 7,)
and the proximity of the petrifying medium to the former, which, I
consider ample proof of the rapidity of the formation ; as, if the process
was slow, many instances must occur of bones or wood in a thorough-
ly petrified state, being met with imbedded in these masses. I have
found, however, nothing approaching nearer a state of petrifaction
than specimen Nos. 7, which are completely fossilized, but not
petrified.

Another proof of the rapidity of the formation is, that the interior
is not much more consolidated than the interior of a bed of loose no-
dule kankar, and the only difference between them is, that the inter-
stices between nodules in the latter are generally filled with loamy
clay, whilst here sand occupies its place.

The antiquity of this particular specimen must be very considerable,
‘as I question if the upper parts are covered during the highest levels.
The river has deepened its bed abreast of it about 25 feet, which even
supposing it to have never occupied a higher level than at present,
which cannot of course be now ascertained, precludes the possibility
of any addition having been made to it for ages.

Numerous instances of organic remains occur in other masses of
different deposits lying in all directions round it, but the grand scale
both of these remains and of the mass in which they are imbedded,
completely throws them into the shade.

1835.) and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 273

The sides of the mass presented to view in the accompanying sketch*
are evident fractures caused by the breaking up of the field by the
deepening of the river in its course, and although the present mass is
of the largest dimensions met with of this formation, I have no doubt
it forms but a mere particle of the field as it originally stood, the re-
mains of which now occupy various isolated positions in the river
abreast of it, which run across two-thirds of the whole breadth.

Many other observations might be made on this deposit (and this
specimen of it in particular), that do not now occur to me; but they
will readily suggest themselves to some more intelligent visitor, who
may be induced, from these remarks, on passing the spot, to give it an
hour’s examination.

As I believe no instance is on record of any other organic remains
than shells having been found in those strata of kankar opened in so
many parts of the Diab, in excavating wells, and for the purpose of
being burnt into lime, &c., the conclusion I draw from the observa-
tions I have been enabled to make, are all in favour of the opinion
given in my letter of the 2nd of August, that I do not consider the
fossil remaius of the Jumna, as at all connected with the natural kan-
kar formation, for wherever the specimens hitherto collected have been
found, circumstances quite as conclusive as those above pointed out
attend to shew that only these mechanically formed masses are in the
slightest degree connected with the fossils, and that the formation is
decidedly confined within the action and limits of the river, either
past or present ; but very possibly similar ones may be met with in
parallel situations in other parts of the Diab, generally alluvium, as
yet unrecorded.

‘In your note on the Narsingpur fossils, I consider A A, the rocks
in which the bones are imbedded, to be a most accurate description of
the deposit rocks in the Jumna, if kankar was substituted for rounded
pebbles; of course, this difference the localities of these specimens has
alone effected, as the distance from the hills Gwhich alone could sup-

ply rounded pebbles of the Nerbadda, at Narsingpur) is so much less
than the Jumna at Pachkowrit.

* A rough pencil sketch is here given in the MS. of the mass of kankar “‘ of the
deposit formation,’’ containing the fossil elephant near Pachkowri; it lies 43
feet above water-mark: the description in the text has been deemed sufficient
without the plate.—Ep.

t+ This conglomerate varies its character according to the rocks which have
supplied the rounded pebbles of which it is composed; these are sometimes gra-
nite, sometimes kankar, and sometimes jasper or vitrified clay.—A description of

extensive deposits of it in the Rajmahal hills will be found in the extract from
M M

274 On the Strata of the Didb Alluvium, (May,

The position too of the rocks shewn in section, (fig. 1, Pl. 21, of
Vol. II.) as containing fossils, is such, as I should have given them,
had an elevation of the bank of the Jumna been required of me. Of
course, I have had no opportunity of comparing the specimens from
the above places; but from their general coincidence in position, and
the fossil remains found in each, I am led to believe an intimate
connexion exists between them in date, formation, and structure, and
if, Sir, you think I have satisfactorily shewn the system of the deposit
kankar formation in the Jumna, I think the same description would
apply to similar formations in the Nerbadda.

3rdly. Of the Kankar Shoals,

These are composed of every variety of substance that is ever in
motion in the Jumna, the most common of which are broken bricks,
bones, shreds of earthen vessels, wood, fragments of granite, sand-
stone, quartz, agate, water pebbles, petrified clay, and composition
shingle, of every variety of mixture that the clay of the surrounding
country and sand of the Jumna will admit of. This last bears a pro-
portion of four-fifths to the whole, which being mistaken for kankar,
(of which the quantity is very trifling,) has occasioned the misnomer
of kankar shoals.

It is among this heterogeneous assemblage of substances, that the
best specimens of petrifaction are to be found. Bones, however, in
every stage between freshness and a state approaching the hardest
stone are procurable by turning over the surface about a foot deep ;
but I imagine, in fact I have ascertained, that not only more perfect,
but a considerable abundance of the best specimens would be found
at greater depths; as, during levels of the river sufficiently high to
cover these shoals, the fragments near the surface are subject to vio-
Jent attrition, and bones and other fragile substances, to total demoli-
tion, from the masses which are at such times continually rolling over
them. Numerous instances occur in some of these shoals to support

Bucuanan’s MSS. published in the GuEaniNGs, vol. iii., where also its
characteristic of containing ‘‘ giants’ bones’’ is preserved in the very name of
the place, Asurhar :—this circumstance has been brought to our notice lately by
Mr. StePHENSON, who has lately learnt that a gentleman at the Burdwan colliery
has collected a number of fossil bones, and shells from the sides of other hills of
the same range. Being very anxious that this field should be again and more
thoroughly explored, we have republished the passage from Dr. BucHANAN on
the cover of the present No., and would direct the particular attention of our
correspondents at Monghyr, and of the engineers engaged on the R4jmahal canal
survey, to the whole line, which will probably prove as prolific as the Nerbadda or
the Jumna. It may also afford proof against Mr. Dran’s account of the formation
of the conglomerate, and introduction of the bones within it by the action of the
river.—Ep.

1835.] and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 275

the opinion before advanced, namely, that the force of heat is capa-
ble of causing the decomposition of bones, unless shielded by some in-
tervening substance, applied during a state of freshness, and conti--
nued up to a certain period, the time of which must vary according to
the quality of the bone; but my experience does not enable me to set
bounds to the time necessary to render one of any quality proof to the
effects of the sun’s rays. I imagine, the seasons may cause so much
variation, that the exact time necessary for them to continue under
this protection, cannot be better defined than between the time of
their deposition in a state of freshness, and the extinction of every
animal or vegetable property, when they become nothing more than
consolidated earth; (see specimens, the remainder of a pipal tree,
Nos. A 3,) and even in this state I am led to believe, that exposure
to the sun would cause decomposition, and to this, as well as to the
effects of attrition, must be attributed the very few perfect bones found
in these positions. I once found the femur of a camel, the middle of
which was covered by a large damp stone, the portion covered was
perfectly petrified in its whole circumference, whilst both ends were
decomposed ; but the absence of fossil remains in the whole section of
this general alluvium is more conclusive than any minor proofs that
can be adduced.

Very few specimens of wood occur in these situations. To the rea-
sons advanced in explanation of the imperfect state of the bones is to
be added the greater degree of brittleness of this substance in a pe-
trified state. I have never procured more than three specimens from
the kankar shoals, which I will forward with the other specimens of
the collection.

Petrified clay (Specs. 9,) is found generally in small portions, and
is transmuted by the same process as the earthy substance, to which
wood is reduced previous to petrifaction, (spec. A 3,) which to all
appearance has every property of indurated clay, the specific gravity
of each being nearly the same.

Composition shingle, or cement pebbles, are produced by the admix-
ture of clay or sand in almost every proportion of each: the most com-
mon process of the formation is as follows:

After a heavy shower, the water in its passage through the ravines
near the river brings down with it clay in the shape of a thick sedi-
ment; this in many instances, after leaving the mouth of the ravine,
has to run over large sand beds before it reaches the river, through
which any considerable body of water cuts deep passages or gulleys,
which run nearly horizontal 10 to 20 yards, and then fall 4 to 12 feet ;
running on again, they fall and run on irregularly, until reaching the

276 On the Strata of the Diab Alluvium, (May,

river. When the principal body is passed, the sediment becomes thicker,
and dropping over these falls, mixes with the sand of the horizontal run
beneath, forming first a single irregular mass on the upper side, whilst
the under is pretty irregular, and of a rounded form: in this at first
the sand predominates, the sediment continues dropping and adding to
the stone, until all the sand within reach has been sucked in, when the
formation ceases, and all the sediment that continues to fall on the same
spot, adds nothing to, but merely rests on the composition, and is washed
off by the next run of water, leaving a perfect stone. Six or eight
stones are very frequently formed in this manner, of different shapes
and varieties of composition, under the same fall, which is entirely re-
gulated by accident; in some of these sand predominates, (specs. 10
and 11,) in others clay : again, the composition consists of nearly equal
portions of each. One fall may produce 10 or 12 stones separate,
which another run of water may from the sediment falling on a layer
of sand deposited since their formation unite, thus forming one stone,
(spec. 12,) the difference between the first formed and their cement
being very perceptible. The cement becomes set and as hard as dry
mortar in two hours after the mixture has taken place, and after three
days’ exposure to the sun, they attain the substance of stone more or
less hard, according to the justness of the proportion of the composi-
tion ; these stones being generally round, are more frequently in motion
than any other substance, and is owing to mistaking them for natural
kankar, (I say natural, as I believe the substance to be kankar, of
mechanical formation, the same ingredients forming in my opinion
both,) that the term kankar shoals has been applied.

Of the Sunken Trees.

This dangerous obstacle to navigation is so well known from its
occurrence in almost all navigable rivers, whose banks are covered with
wood, that little need be said of it here.

The trees have originally occupied a position on the verge of the
bank, which the stream having undermined, they have fallen into the
river, with a quantity of earth attached to the roots, the weight of
which firmly anchors them to the bottom, the head laying with the
stream. In the Jamna any portion visible above the lowest levels is
cut off to the water’s edge by the inhabitants of the nearest village,
leaving the bluff stumps of the large branches in the most dangerous
position possible, at average levels. In 1833, the whole of these be-
tween Agra and Allahabad were sought for and taken out, and by the
precautions then taken by the superintendant, it is next to impossible
that any other instances can occur for many years, as every tree with-

1835.) and Site of Fossil Bones in the Jumna. 277

in a certain distance of the river has been cut down, and others still
farther back marked for the same purpose 10 or 12 years hence.

_A few may perhaps be drifted out of the Chambul and other tribu-
tary streams, but of so little consequence from their small size (the
large and dangerous ones lying where they fall), that this obstacle may
be said to be almost entirely surmounted.

Description of a cluster of four palms and a pipal tree. These re-
mains have belonged to trees once growing on the general level of
the Bundlecund bank, which having been sapped by the stream, they
have slipped down with the earth, in which they grew, in the manner
represented in sketch No. 7, (7. fig. 1. Pl.)* The pipal having been
nearest the river has fallen lowest, and according to their distance
from the edge do they now occupy their present positions, forming as
it were a graduated scale, proving more strongly than any other in-
stance I am aware, the petrifying qualities of the water. All I
could write on this subject would not be so conclusive of this asser-
tion as one glance at the specimens, which I shall merely describe.

A is the bark of the pipal stump, five feet in diameter, and about
14 feet long, lying on asloping bank, with the root towards the river.

A 3 are portions of the body or trunk, which is reduced to that
state, which I conceive necessary for any substance to attain before
petrifaction commences, viz. a total extinction of all its animal or ve-
getable properties: whether the wood is actually changed into stone, or
the gradual formation vf stone merely destroys and takes its place, [
am not able to decide; I can only say, when once properly petrified, the
rings, the marks of annual growth of the tree, remain as apparent as
when in a vegetable state.

A 2 roots of do. in a similar state to A 1.
B remains ofthe palm No. 1
C do. of do. No. 2
D do. of do. No. 3
E do. of do. No. 4

The very apparent difference of texture between specimens Nos, 1
and 4, is caused by the former lying lower; it has been more frequent-
ly exposed to the action of the water than the latter. Nos. 2 and 3, oc-
cupy intermediate levels.

In adopting the term ‘‘ petrified,” as regards the palms, it is ne-
cessary to observe, that the striated fracture precludes the idea that this
is the wood, the grain of which would be longitudinal, and confirms it
as a tufaformation, enveloping the several parts of the tree expos-
ed, Still I imzgine, there are sufficient portions of fibres really petri-
fied, to warrant its being applied as a general term to these specimens.

* We have conceived it unnecessary to insert this sketch.—Ep.

of sketch No. 7.

278 On the Strata of the Didb Alluvium. [May,

P.S. Ihave found on comparison that I had come to wrong conclu-
sions, with respect to some of the vertebre, I had the honor to send
with the last parcel, of which opportunity I availed myself to send all
of which I had the least doubt. The teeth too, which I have hitherto
called camel’s, cannot have been rightly classed, as they bear
not the least appearance of having belonged to the existing species, at
least, the evenness of the crown differs entirely from any anatomical
specimen to which I have access.

I should have forwarded the whole of the undermentioned speci-
mens before, but obvious reasons induced me to wait the present op-
portunity.

List of specimens illustrating observations on the obstacles to navigation in the
Jumna, forwarded from Delhi, 22nd October, 1834.

A, B, C, D, E. Specimens of the remains of a cluster of one pipal and four
palms.

F. Parcel containing 10 specimens of petrified animal remains, viz. Nos. 2
and 3, teeth. Unknown.

», 14 portions of Asiatic elephants’ jaw and tooth.

», 38 and 39, upper extremity of femur and kneepan.
(Of these I had myself no doubt, as having belonged to a camel ; but some doubt
having been expressed in another quarter, I have left it to your decision.)
Nos. 40, 41, 45, 48, 49. Vertebree.

x. Specimens of pipe kankar.

y. Supposed shale.

z. Rolled clay connected with the formation of conglomerate rocks.

aand b. Fossil remains of an elephant from Pachcowrie. Femur and ena-
mel of tooth.

c. Specimens of clay passing into or vitrified clay.

d. Specimens of sandstone passing into ditto.

1. Fine sandstone from Burriarie.

2. Coarse ditto, from Mhow.

3. Specimens of vitrified clay from Murka.

4, Ditto of ditto, from Mhow.

5. Ditto of ditto, from ditto.

6. Cement formation of conglomerate rock.

7. Tufa ditto, of ditto, containing blade bone of camel and other animal re-
mains.

8. Specimens of outer edge of beds of nodule kankar, conglomerated by car-
bonate of lime.

9. Specimens of petrified clay.

10. Composition shingle, in which sand predominates.

11. Ditto ditto, in which clay ditto.

12. Ditto ditto, of separate formation, cemented into one mass.

13. Specimens of sandstone peculiar to the Jumna.

Nore.—We intended to have given plates of the principal fossils forwarded by
Serjeant Dran, but the friend who had kindly undertaken to draw them has
been prevented from accomplishing his task in time; we must therefore reluc-
tantly postpone their insertion and notice.—Ep.

1835.] Note on the Gold Washings of the Gimti River. 279

V.—Note on the Gold Washings of the Gimtt River. By Lieut.
Cautiey, Beng. Art.

In the 18th volume of the Asiatic Researches (Physical Class), the
occurrence of gold in the line of mountains skirting the foot of the
Himalayas has been brought to notice by Captain Hergert, and as in
his specification of the points where it has been found, he has drawn
our attention chiefly to the Ramgunga, and its tributaries east-ward of
the Ganges, and has not noticed the tract of mountains upon which the
town of Nahun stands: and as in the system adopted by the natives
in washing the sand, as described in the paper alluded to, there is
some difference from that of the Nahun washers; it will be perhaps
interesting, not only to bring forward this new locality, but also to
shew the simple means adopted in procuring the mineral.

The late grand discoveries of organic remains in the hills under
Nahun, and the consequent desire of prosecuting the inquiry as far as
means would allow, have like many other searches led to the discovery
of an object of a totally different nature from that in pursuit ; nor may
we be far wrong in agreeing with Captain Hersert, that the ultimate
discovery of gold in abundance in these regions will eventually either
benefit some fortunate individual, or else come at once under the eye
of the ruling power of the district.

I will however enter upon the subject of this note, previous to dis-
cussing the probabilities of discovering the ore in situ.

The rivers from the beds of which the sand containing the ore is
procured derive their sources solely from this lower tract of mountains,
and are not in any way connected with the Himalayas! There does
not appear to be any river free from the ore, although many of them
are considered by the washers as more abundant than others, and con-
sequently more worthy of their labor: that to which I shall particularly
refer is named the Gimti river, which leaves the mountains at the
village of Charan; Guimti being the name of two villages on the
right and left of the stream, about three miles in the interior, at which
there is a main junction of tributaries; the river opens into the
plains opposite to the town of Sidoura, to the westward, and parallel
to the Choura Pani and Markunda river, which carry off the greatest
portion uf the drainage from the hills directly under the town of
Néhun.

The gold-washers are by no means numerous, and are of the poorest
class, depending entirely on their trade for support. The Raja of N&hun
levies a tax of a masha per annum on each trough : but although there
is no restriction to the number of people employed, as long as this

280 Note on the Gold» Washings of the Gimti River. [May,

toll is paid, there does not appear to be any desire or competition on
the part of the natives to carry it on, by which we may draw a tole-
rably accurate conclusion on the returns of the trade as it now exists.

The apparatus used by the washers consists simply of a trough, a
sieve made of the Sirkunda grass, a flat piece of board, with an iron
edge for scraping up the sand, a plate or dish for carrying it away, and
triturating the sand with mercury, anda ladle or spoon made of a
gourd, for raising water: with these and a little mercury in the end
of a hollow bambu our gold-washer starts on his pilgrimage. I have
endeavoured in the accompanying sketch Pl. XVII. to give some idea of
the process, and this will perhaps be clear enough without much expla-
nation. The gold washer, inthe first instance, examines the soil by
washing a small quantity in his hand, the smallest particle or particles
of the metal are easily detected: the soil holding the greatest quantity
appears to be that in the line upon which the drainage of the river takes
place, for these mountain streams occupy but a small space of their chan-
nel during the dry months, or even at any time, with the exception of
those periods, during the rainy months, when very heavy and succes-
sive falls of rain charge every channel with its full supply. The
situation proving favorable, the washer then establishes his trough ;
the sand is placed on the sieve, and water thrown over it with the
spoon : the coarser particles are thus separated and thrown away ; the
man still continues pouring water through the sieve over the sand in
the trough, until nothing remains there but an almost impalpable
blackish powder ; in this powder the gold dust is perceptible. This
powder is then collected and taken out of the trough, forming a mass
capable of being held in both hands: this is triturated with a small
quantity of mercury on the dish or basin B, and the whole is again
subjected to a careful washing with the hand on this dish: this latter
washing removes every thing, but a small piece of mercury and gold
in amalgam. The gold-washer then lights a piece of cow-dung, upon
which he places the amalgam, and (as far as I observed in their manu-
factories) his labor was repaid by the smallest piece of the precious
metal imaginable. The rains are said to be the best and most profi-
table season: at this period, two rupees per day may be the return of
one trough under a gold-washer and one assistant, the worst day’s pro-
duce about two annas; the gold is either sold to the bunétds at the
large towns in the neighbourhood, or given to zamindars for an
equivalent.

There is a great loss of particles of the gold in the system of wash-
ing adopted here, many of which must pass off through the trough ;
there is also a total loss of mercury; the latter might be easily reme-

1835.] Note on the Gold Washings of the Gumti River. 28k

died, we should imagine, were the washers in the habit of giving the
amalgam to their employer, who might complete the process in close
retorts. It is evident that under the eye of an active and interested
person, a trade might be carried on here of a description by no means
contemptible: a much greater quantity of the mineral might be pro-
cured; and that on the adoption of a trade in the article, an improve-
ment of the apparatus might be effected, tending much to that point.
I have much pleasure in sending you three packets.

No. 1, containing the sand as found in the bed of the river.

2, the black powder, the result of the first washing in the
trough.

3, the gold ore ; and shall hope to see your note on the quality
as well as the natural state in which the ore exists: it would appear
from the account of the washers that lumps or larger particles than
those sent are not found, although it is by no means an easy matter
to get correct information on points of this sort*.

That the gold exists in any other shape than that of the present
specimen in these lower mountains is very improbable. The particles
may differ in size ; and we may in all probability detect the stratum
containing the gold dust, and so procure it before it has undergone
further attrition in the river’s bed ; but we must look to the Himalayas
themselves for the auriferous strata, from the disintegration of which
the sands of these lower hills have been supplied with the mineral.
Captain Herserr alludes to the occurrence of the ore having been
traced up to a certain point in one of the tributaries of the Ramgunga,
a fact corroborated by Mr. Ravensuaw of the Civil Service, in a note to
the Society. My inquiries establish a similar limit in the Gumti river :
this is a point, however, that would require very careful examination,
and that examination under the eye of an experienced person, who,
after all, in such a maze of mountains and rivers, would perhaps have to
depend upon chance for successful prosecution of his labors.

The occurrence of gold in alluvial soil is common to every quarter of
the glove, although South America and Africa provides the greatest
supply of commerce, and in all probability there is no extensive chain
of primary mountain that does not charge its drainage with the mineral
in question! Its incorruptible nature, and its not being subject to the

'* These have not yet reached us. The black powder is however doubtless
similar to that which accompanies the gold dust in the rivers of Assam and
Ava:—for the most part magnetic oxide of iron. Platina may also be found in
it but rarely. The use of a strong magnet would perhaps prove advantageous,
before rubbing in the mercury for amalgamation.— Ep.

NWN

282 Notice of the Nipdlese Spirit Still. [May,

effects of oxidation from common causes, is a sufficient reason for the
presence of this mineral, unaccompanied by others*.

With regard, however, to the Nahun and Ramgunga gold, we are
perfectly decided on one point, viz. that the rivers bearing the dust have
no connection whatever now with the great Himalayan chain, and there-
fore, that if the mineral exists in abundance at any one point, it will
be found in the hills from which these rivers derive their sources; and
it is to be hoped, that we may even look forward to the ultimate disco-
very of goldin comparatively as great abundance as the present fossils,
the existence of which, six months ago, would have been as much
doubted as the possibilitv of finding gold now may be.

Northern Dudb, April 10th, 1835.

VI.—Notice of the Nipdlese Spirit Still. By A. Camesety, Esq.
M. D. attached to the Nepal Residency.

The accompanying (Pl. XVII.) is a rough sketch of the still in univer-
sal use throughout the valley of Népal Proper, as well as its neighbour-
ing hilly country ; and so far as I can learn in the portions of eastern
Thibet, usually visited by Nip&lese traders, on the beaten commercial
routes, by the Keran and Kuti passes of the Himalaya, to Digarchi
and Lhassa. I believe it to be as different from that commonly used
in the plains of India, as it assuredly is from any with which I am
acquainted as existing in European countries, and as its use is con-
fined here chiefly to the Newar population, it needs no apology for
intrusion on the public attention.

In India, (so far as my recollection is faithful,) Nipalese men, man-
ners, and things are regarded, as pertaining exclusively to the ruling
class of the community, yclept Gurkhas; this arises partly from
want of better information on, or curiosity regarding, Népal affairs ;
partly from the common habit of identifying the whole people of a
_ country, with the few, who may for atime direct its destinies, but
chiefly from Nép4l being best known to us, as the theatre of a two-
years’ war between one power and the afore-mentioned tribe.

The Newars, as is well known, were down to the Garkh4 conquest
the rulers of this valley, and were, as far as at present ascertained, its

* In the specimens from the alluvial soil of the Brazils, the particles of gold are
much larger than those found in the Nahun sand, appearing like little boulders,
or rounded masses of the mineral. In my cabinet the Brazilian alluvium is clay,
or argillaceous matter, with rounded pebbles of white quartz. Mr. Mawe hav-
ing provided the specimen.

1835.] Notice of the Nipdlese Spirit Still. 288

original inhabitants*. At the present time they form the great mass
of the agricultural and artisan population, and the ruins of their well-
built temples and towns painfully manifest the giving place of their
civilization to the rude and barbarian horde of mountaineers who
now consume in military idleness the fruits of their fertile fields.
Like other tribes of the human race, the Newars have lost their day
of progress, and little remains to them now, save their eminently in-
dustrious habits, and a skill in agriculture far exceeding in efficiency
that attained and practised in the neighbouring plains of Hindustan.

The fate of the New4rs, and the many guod qualities by which they
are distinguished, renders all connected with them of much interest.
Their original country, previous to their advent in Népal, remains as
yet undecided. The decidedly Tartarian cast of their physical form, and
monosyllabic structure of their language, makes Thibet claim them as
her’s. The most popular fabulous traditions of the race point to India
as the source of their existence, while the religious creed as a means
of arriving at a correct knowledge of their origin has, as yet, I be-
lieve, proved defectivet.

The manners and customs of a people, when known, go far to shew
the intimacy of connexion with neighbouring countries ; and, I be-
lieve, that were those of the New4rs (in such purity as they existed
before the Gurkha conquest) taken as an index to their original
country, few links of close connexion would remain to bind them to
India, while many and strong ones would shew their Bhoteah origin.

The still, then, as an instrument of universal use, supposing it un-
known in India, and to be the only one used in neighbouring Thibet,
will go for something (triflmg enough it is true) in the enumeration
of domestic usages; and I now return to it.

The furnace on which the still is represented as resting, while at
work, is commonly the clay chula of India, or made of unburned
bricks. The body of the still (phiisi) is of copper, and is seldom
made to contain more than 15 or 20 gallons, and costs from 30 to 40
mohuri. rupees}. Over the open mouth of the phisi is placed the
portion marked (3) named putasi; it is of burned clay, about the
same size as the body of the still, and has a circle of round perfora-
tions, each the size of a crown-piece, flanking the large opening at its
base, as represented in (7) of the sketch. The junction of the phist
and putasi being secured by a luting of moist clay, the receiver nam-

* See Mr. Hopeson’s paper on the Aborigines of Népdl Proper, in the Jour-
nal of the Asiatic Society, for May, 1834.
+ It is calculated that about two-thirds of the New4r population of Népdl are
Buddhists, the remainder Brahminical Hicdus,
+ One moburi rupee is equal to 124 anuas sicca.
NN 2

284 Notice of the Nipalese Spirit Still. [May,

ed dibli, and marked (6) is put into the putasi; its base, corre-
sponding in circumference to the large opening in the latter, fills it up
completely, and leaves the circle of smaller holes free, for the passage
of the spirituous vapour, to ascend into the still head, or putasz. :

The receiver being placed as above noted, within the portion mark-
ed (3), the vessel (5), named batta, or condenser of copper, is filled
with cold water, and placed over, and into the mouth of the putasi,
or still-head, fitting so close, as to prevent the escape of any portion
of the spirituous vapour from the latter. Thus fitted, the distillation
is accomplished, care being taken to remove the condenser so often as
is necessary to replace the water become warm, by colder, fit for the
condensation of the spirituous steam.

The shape of the condenser suits the performance of its office; the
vapour rising through the smaller holes around the receiver comes in
contact with its entire surface, and being there condensed, runs to-
wards the apex of it, and thence falls into the sub-incumbent receiver,

The still is charged, cf necessity, previous to the fixing of the re-
ceiver and condenser, and these portions are removed at each fresh
charge; the receiver being either emptied of its contents and replaced,
or a spare one introduced.

At each removal of the condenser there is of course some loss
from the escape of vapour, but it is trifling, as there are usually two
of these vessels attached to each still, and thus the time occupied in
replacing a warm condenser, by a cold, is very inconsiderable.

It must be admitted, that this process is rather rude, and it will be
seen, that the construction of the still has not reference to the most
approved principles for economising fuel. It is deep and narrow, in-
stead of broad and shallow, yet it is very efficient ; and it must be re-
membered, that the shallow broad still even in Europe is of very
modern date, and the result of the severe excise laws, existing in our
own, and more civilized countries.

There is one peculiarity in the working of this still, worthy of re-
mark, and the advantages of which in saving fuel compensate in some
degree for its rudeness. So soon as the still is in full play, and a por-
tion of vapour has been condensed, and reached the receiver, a fresh
distillation commences.

The receiver heated from below causes the spirits to be converted
into vapour, which is again condensed, and thus a constant round of
distillation is carried on between the receiver and condenser, in addi-
tion to the proper distillation of the contents charging the body of
the still. Alcohol, at the specific gravity of 863, can be produced
from this still, and I have used it with complete success, in making the

Sous: ASIC.

Vol lV Pl. Xvuir
Gold washers in the Beds of the Rivers under Nithun,
welh the apparatus used.
Sigel.
Sta waa
ua HF}, Orme,
SEEGE ewe &,
4 (Pitage Das TNs
WALI hp Gi c
KEE fhe ee Sp i
4 Jo Gav) '@ ?

jo Gigs + as
Cig a ws ? Z| ‘/ iy
i ill A (, if a eee ai “ oe Hi;
agi
il a i TOT 6 WV

SENN

Fr :
ough eat

Sy. 6.
Fade piton onaprece of Salpture found near the Kestal mound.

© BD? Nay 4s WAZ EWAHQUSUUUAUHsH PIA

J B Tassin lith,

or Fide cike

= Pye qateition §
Semis noid a ie siden aa me ‘
¢ iene” _valninett Bao aalecws | 4 root
“eh i: Paine eae pie he Sng ak |
st SecGen Wes
ramet eosin ox Obie: cease hin
E oo Wout. ue sevawelods neguiahgan-

| as A) agon Foie er bug. i

tb ony wd: jeott en aol liken ‘aut Sa eer
agony we fasta s' iotpanead aes, haa dihses9 pal si yt,
wt galt dite yaRrtn| witizxatge bay ‘wate al orgee .

einatan sib 40 aude) sdf to when aQnney pw,
3 ‘iadeDBaltt dest ayaa ailt he eobuntatquen:
toads gaoues aganit

— seni it Cs bash Ah Vent ab
sean aa: is Rita: ie ba a hl Pa “olla #

r

tL sa ils aaibae siren he os
asa iil ar ates
| ae es ihe “oat
yy Sid mala bi ¥ ea

1835.) Notice of the Nipalese Spirit Still. 285

spirits of turpentine, and the residuum of yellow resin from the Ganda
Firoza of Népal*, both of these articles, being equally good for medi-
cinal and other purposes, as that to be had in Calcutta, and, I believe,
much cheaper.

The ubiquity of this still throughout the valley arises from the free-
dom of distillation sanctioned by the rulers. Excise laws for whiskey-
making are as yet unknown here, and were their executives to ap-
pear among the peaceable Newars, I fear the fate of some of them
might resemble that of Ropert Burn’s man of this craft.

Every Newéar, who can afford it, distils his own Rakshi (spirits from
rice), and all the lower orders of this people, and many of the respec-
table ones, are greatly addicted to the use of spirits. They are not
by any means given to habitual drunkenness, but they indulge for the
good of their healths, regularly and moderatelv. In the rice-field,
cold and wet as it is, the bottle is a great and ever present comfort ;
while at a religious meeting, or on the celebration of a birth or mar-
riage, it goes merrily and rapidly round; males and females, young
and old, alike partaking of it, to the increase of social happiness and
joy in all.

Few sights in Népal are more grateful to the foreign visitor, than
the feasts and merry-makings of the Newars: on such occasions they
congregate on some green and sunny spot, near a temple, or old
image, with a running stream of limpid water passing through it, and
there, for the live-long day, in the idle seasons of the year, do they
sing, play on the musical instruments of their tribe, often dance and
ever laugh, enlivened by the rakshi stoup it’s true; but the main-
spring of their joy is the cheerful and happy temperament they pos-
sess, to an eminent degree, in strong and pleasing contrast with the
sour looks and arrogant demeanour of the Gurkhas, or the melan-
choly and apathetic countenances of the inhabitants of Hindustan,
who sojourn for a time among them.

Reference to Plate of Still, and its component portions.

Names in Newéri language. English synonymes.
a, BBS Page Peres are re 1 Body of still.
a shail Set hhisiAh te 2 Luting (of clay).
SME Loe) ccSen iss 85% oe POUT. ME 3 Still-head,
Em eat LTA eS TT 4 Furnace.
EIEN see ses cere sc oes fee a 5 Condenser, (copper.)
eyeing ama 6 Receiver, (earthen.)
memset (Reckion. Of)... ... 205s vanes oe 7 Section of Still-head).

* Commonly called Ganda Biroza; it is well known to be the exudation from
the denuded trunk of the different species of the pine throughout these mountains,

286 Inscripiion from Kesariah. (May,

VII.—wNote on an Inscription found near the Kesariah Mound, in Tirhiit.
By J. B. Extrott, Esq. (Pl. XVII. fig. 6.)

{In a note to the Editor.]

Having seen mention of the Kesariah Mound made in the last No.
of your Journal, I beg to enclose the impression of an inscription cut
below the figures of the Avatars, sculptured on a black stone, which I
obtained at Kesariah several years ago froma fakir. The figures being
small and rudely sculptured, it is not worth while making a copy of
them; but as the inscription could not be made out by the Pandit of
the Chaprah Committee, it may be worth deciphering. I visited and
made some notes on the subject of the pillars, and other antiquities in
Champaran, which I may, perhaps, hereafter communicate.

Note.—This fragment, which is Brahmanical, not Buddhist, is in an
ancient form of Dévanagari, differing little from tiat noticed on the
Bakra image of Mr. Stppuenson. It breaks off abruptly with an
initial 7:—for it is only to kfrtiir tha that any meaning can be traced :
while the diphthong az or é is plain over the last letter, which I con-
clude to be an 4. The reading in modern Dévanagari will be as
follows: I have added a literal Latin version.

faa: RT qweew: wagne garrafeareaqag: Ae
Perpetuus B. CanpRApDAtTTUS Svu’ryaparti “ Sikti’’-(recitandi)-proprio-tem-
pore-(sc.)-Solis-die-natus. Gloria hic...... ..

The interpretation of which in English will be :—

“‘ The ever-living CHANDRADATTA was born on the Sunday appro-
priated to the reading of the Sukta by his father Su‘ryapatra. Glory
here,...... (The Siikta is the most sacred hymn of the Rig Veda,
closing its 3rd Ashtaka or Ogdcad—and has for one of its verses
the celebrated Gayatri.)

W.H.M.

[Nore.—I take this opportunity of pointing out, in reference to my observation
on the Bakra image inscription, (page 131,) that I had overlooked a plate in
FRANKLIN’S Palibothra, of a Buddhist image, with an inscription, to which Lieut.
CunniINGHAM has since drawn my attention. On turning to it, [ perceive, that
the two lines separately given are, though miserably perverted by the copyist,
precisely the same as the ye dharmma hétun, &c. of Sarnath. The three lines
on the pedestal, though stated in the text to be different, would appear to be the
same also ; at least the two first words, ye dharmméd, are distinct.—J. P.]

1835.] Asiatic Society. 287

VIII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 3rd June, 1835.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

Read the proceedings of the last meeting.

Mr. Joun Ricuarps, proposed by Mr. Bacsuaw, seconded by Mr. Trr-
VELYAN, was duly elected a member.

Mr. J. P. Grant was proposed by Mr. Trevetyan, seconded by Mr. J.
Coxvin. Mr. Wa. Ava, proposed by Capt. Forses, seconded byMr. Hare.
Mr. Wm. Hy. Benson, proposed by Dr. Mitt, seconded by Mr. Prinszp.

Captain Tayvior, Madras Cav. proposed by Mr. MacnacGuren, seconded
by Sir E. Ryan.

Dr. Evans, Mr. Puavre, 7th Regt. Bengal N. I., Mr. Sroceueter, and
Lieut. Monrriov, Ind. N. were proposed by Dr. Pearson, and seconded

by Mr. J. Prinsep.

The Secretary brought up the following:

Report of the Committee of Papers on Mr. J. T. PEaRson’s proposition for
creating a new order of Members, to be denominated ‘‘ Associate Members of the
Asiatic Society.’’

1. ‘* We consider Dr. PEarson’s proposition for creating Associate Members
to be worthy of adoption by the Society, and we would propose that they should
enjoy all the privileges of ordinary members; but we would suggest, that by way
of maintaining more than the mere distinction of name between the Associate and
the Honorary Members, some contribution, however trifling, should be re-
quired from the former class, The Associates, it may be presumed, would be
composed of men, whose reputation would not be sufficiently brilliant to admit
of their being classed among our Honorary Members. They would, in all proba-
bility, did their circumstances admit, become ordinary paying members, and the
principle upon whichthe present proposition rests, is, that the Society de-
sirous of removing this obstruction, and encouraging their labours, is willing
to admit them on a less expensive footing : at the same time, requiring a moderate
contribution to distinguish them from those eminent men, whom it considers
an honor to itself, to enrol in its list of members.

2. ‘* Under the above considerations, we concurin recommending that the annue
al payment of Associate Members be fixed at four rupees. Their election to pro-
ceed in the mode prescribed for honorary members, that is, to be previously sub-

mitted to the Committee of Papers for report.
‘* For the Committee of Papers,

“ 20th May, 1835. ‘J. PRINSEP, Secy.’’

The President,followed by Mr. J. R. Cotvin, proposed that “ the first
part of the Report be adopted, ‘«‘ That there should be Associate Members,
having all the privileges of ordinary members.”

Mr. D. Ross, seconded by Mr. McFartan, moved as an amendment, that the
words ‘‘ with the exception of any power of voting on money questions’’ be ad-
ded. This amendment was lost, as was another proposed by Mr. N. B. E. Bair-
LIE, seconded by Capt. Fores, ‘‘ that they should have all the privileges of
ordinary members, except the right of voting.”

The motion was then put and carried ; the second proposal was also
made into a resolution, viz. “ That Associate Members shall pay an an-
nual contribution of four rupees.”

_ The Secretary submitted also the—
Report of the Committee of Papers, on Mr. GARDNER'S application and estimate
for Repairing the Monument of Sir Witt1aM Jonzs.

“The Committee find on inquiry that the repairs may be executed at an ex-
pence of about 150 rupees.

“They trust the members will be unanimous in thinking it desirable, to evince
the respect of the Society for the memory of its illustrious founder, by authoriz-

288 Asiatic Society. [May,

ing the trifling expence which will be required to repair his nionument, and to
preserve from obliteration that beautiful epitaph which he wrote for himself, and
which is so characteristic of the independent uprightness and the unaffected piety
of its author. ;
, ‘¢ For the Committee of Papers,
‘¢ 20th May, 1835. “J. PRINSEP, Secy.’”’
Proposed by the Rev. Dr. Mun, Vice-President, seconded by Mr. Cot-

vin, and resolved, that the Report of the Committee be adopted and acted
upon.

ithe draft of a Memorial to Government, regarding Oriental Publica-
tions, prepared by a Special Committee, appointed at the last meeting, was
then read by the President, taking the sense of the meeting on each para-
graph. The following is the Memorial, as finally adopted :

To the Hon’ble Sir C. T. Metcatre, Bart. Gov. General of India in Council,

&c. &e. &e.
Honorable Sir and Sirs,

The Members of the Asiatic Society, now resident in Calcutta, have
requested me, as President of their body, to address the Honorable the
Governor General in Council, on a subject which engages their deepest
interest.

2.—It has come to the knowledge of the Society that the funds which have
been hitherto in part applied to the revival and improvement of the lite-
rature and the encouragement of the learned natives of India, are hence-
forth to be exclusively appropriated to purposes of English education.

3.—The Asiatic Society doesnot presume for a moment to doubt the pow-
er of the Government to apply its funds in such manner as it may deem to
be most consistent with the intentions of the legislature, and most advan-
tageous for the great object of educating its Indian subjects ; but they
contemplate with the most sincere alarm the effect that such a measure
might produce on the literature and languages of the country, which it
had been hitherto an object both with the Government and with the Edu-
cation Committee, under its orders, to encourage and patronize, unless
the proposition which they have the honor to submit, meet with the favo-
rable attention of Government.

4.—The Society has been informed, that this departure from the course
hitherto pursued has been ordered to take such immediate effect, that the
printing of several valuable oriental works has been suddenly suspended,
while they were in different stages of progress through the press; and that
the suspension has been alike extended to the legendary lore of the East,
and to the enlightened science of the West, if clothed in an Asiatic lan-

age.

Sree Tie cause of this entire change of system has been, the Society un-
derstand, a desire to extend the benefits of English instruction more widely
among the natives of India ; the fund hitherto appropriated to that pur-
pose not being deemed sufficient,

6.—The Members of the Society are individually and collectively warm
advocates for the diffusion, as far as possible, of English arts, sciences, and
literature ; but they cannot see the necessity, in the pursuit of this favo.

rite object, of abandoning the cultivation of the ancient and beautiful |

languages of the East.

7.—The peculiar objects of the Asiatic Society, and the success with
which its members have, under the auspices of their illustrious founder,
prosecuted their researches into the hidden stores of oriental knowledge,
entitle them to form an opinion of the value of these ancient tongues, inti-
mately connected as they are with the history, the habits, the languages,
and the institutions of the people ; and it is this which emboldens them

1835.] Asiatic Society. 289

to step forward on such an occasion as the present to offer an humble but
earnest prayer, that the encouragement and support of the British Govern.
ment may not be withdrawn from the languages and literature of the vast
and varied population, whom Providence has committed to its protection.
8.—Many arguments of policy and humanity might be advanced in sup-
port of their present solicitation, upon which the Society do not deem it
within their province to expatiate. There is one argument, however, which
appears to be of so conclusive a character as to require distinct notice
in this Appeal.
9.—It is admitted by all, even the most enthusiastic advocates of the Eng=
lish system of tuition, that this language never can become the language of
the great body of the people whose moral and intellectual improvement is
the benevolent object of the British Government. It is moreover admitted,
that the Sanscrit language, while it is directly the parent of the dialects
spoken from Cashmere to the Kistna, and from the Indus to the Brahma-
putra, is also the source from which every other dialect of the Peninsula,
and even many languages of the neighbouring countries, have been for
ages dependent for every term extending beyond the merest purposes
of animal or savage life. If it were possible to dry up this source of
literary vegetation, which gives beauty and fertility to the dialects of
India in proportion to the copiousness of its admixture ; the vernacular lan-
guages would become so barren and impoverished, as to be wholly unfit to
be the channels of elegant literature or useful knowledge. The same may
be said of Arabic and Persian as regards the Hindustani language.
10.—The Society are far from meaning to assert that the withdrawal of
the support of Government, from the cherished languages of the natives of
India, would put an end to the cultivation of them. On the contrary, they
think that the natural and necessary effect would be that both the Hindus
and Muhammedans would, in that event, adhere with tenfold tenacity to
those depositaries of all they hold sacred and valuable. But, incalculable
mischief, in a variety of shapes, would nevertheless be effected. If the
British Government set the example of neglecting oriental studies, it can
hardly be expected that many of their European subjects will cultivate
them. The field will then be left in the undisturbed possession of those
whose unprofitable husbandry is already but too visible, and who will
pursue it with a view to the perpetuation of superstition and defective
morality among the people. An influence will thus be lost, the benefit of
which to the more intellectual classes of natives can scarcely be estimated
too highly, arising from the direction given to their studies and pursuits
by those whe can freely acknowledge what is intellectually and morally
valuable in their previous systems, and distinguish it from what is of an
opposite character: and who take the first and most necessary step for
removing the wrong prejudices of others, by proving that they are without
unjust prejudice themselves. It needs no laboured proof to shew how
infinitely more powerful must be our protest against what is demoralizing
or debasing in the native institutions, when we act with this knowledge
and this spirit, than if we commenced by repudiating every thing Asiatic,
as contemptible, and acknowledged no basis of intellectual communication
with them, but what was formed in the peculiar fashions of modern Europe.
11.—If the Sanscrit and Arabic languages,consecrated as they are by ages
of the remotest antiquity—enshrined, as they are, in the affections of yener-
ating millions—the theme, as they are, of the wonder and of the admiration
of allthe learned nations of Europe ;—if these languages are to receive no
support from a Government which has been ever famed for its liberality and
its justice,—from a Government which draws an annual revenue of twenty
millions from the people by whom these languages are held sacred, it is the
decided opinion of the Asiatic Society—an opinion which they want words

00

990 Asiatic Society. [May,

to express with adequate force, that the cause of civilization and the
character of the British nation will alike sustain irreparable injury.
12.—The Society, therefore, earnestly beseech the Honorablethe Governor
General in Council, that ifjon full consideration, any reasonable doubt shall
be entertained bythe Supreme Government of the right of the native lite.
rature to a fair proportion of the sum appropriated by Parliament, “ for
the revival and improvement of literature, and for the encouragement
of learned natives of India,” he will then be pleased either himself to
grant, or if necessary, to solicit from the Court of Directors, some spe-~
cific pecuniary aid to be annually expended on these objects. And the So.
ciety will be happy to undertake the duty of superintending the expendi.
ture of this sum, under such checks as it may please the Government to
impose.
13.—-But whatever may be the determination of the Government on this
point, the Society respectfully intreat the Governor General in Council,
that he will be pleased to afford to them the assistance of the learned na.
tives hitherto employed in these literary undertakings, together with such
pecuniary aid as may be necessary, to complete the printing of the oriental
works, which has been interrupted by the resolution of Government to direct
the funds hitherto expended upon them to purposes of English education.
14.—Should Government be pleased to accede to this request, the Socie-
ty will furnish with as little delay as possible an estimate of the amount
which will be required for the attainment of this object.
15.—The Society cannot doubt that the Governor General in Council will
support their appeal te the home authorities with his powerful advo-
cacy, nor that the earliest opportunity will be taken of bringing the
merits of the important and entirely national question it embraces, be.
fore the Honorable the Court of Directors, in all its bearings. This
address has been dictated solely by the desire of proffering to Go.
vernment the services of an appropriate organ, through which the pub-
lication of the oriental classics may be continued, and that further
patronage extended to oriental studies, whichit cannot believe the Govern.
ment to have any intention of altogether abandoning.
Epwarp Ryan, President.
Asiatic Society's Apartments,
June 3rd, 1835. \
Upon the first five paragraphs one or two verbal alterations only were suggested.
Onthe 6th, which originally ended, ‘* but they would deeply regret if, in the pursuit
of this favorite object, it were thought necessary or advisable to abandon, &c.’’
Mr. Corvin begged to propose the omission of the word “ favorite,’’ as ap-
plied in the above paragraph of the Address to the object of extending the means
ot English education. It appeared to him to convey an unnecessary imputa-
tion, as if of prejudiced favoritism or partiality. He would here say (al-
luding to some remarks which had passed in conversation), that he enter-
tained as cordial a desire, as any one could do, to promote the literary pur-
poses, with a view to which the Society was formed. He, as a member of the So-
ciety, fully sympathized in the feeling which would seek to maintain the know-
ledge and cultivation of the oriental languages and literature, and he would rea-
dily join in an address to Government to obtain its patronage and pecuniary sup-
port for those studies; but he had hoped that the proceedings of the evening were
to be free from controversy. He had not been present at the meeting of the
previous month, but he had seen with great gratification, that the proposition
then adopted was for the preparation of a memorial, ‘‘ which should avoid to the
utmost all controversial points.’? He feared from the observations which had
been made that he should be disappointed in this respect. He had, however, been
unintentionally led, by what had passed, into a digression ; returning to the
object for which he had risen to speak, he proposed the omission of the word
“‘favorite” in the passage which had just been read.

1835.] Asiatic Society. 291

Mr. W. H. MacnacuTen could not help expressing his astonishment, at the
observations which had been made by the gentleman who had just sat down. He had
hoped that inthis place at least, oriental literature would have found protection and
favor : that, however ruthlessly and successfully the opposition to this cause might
have manifested itself in other quarters; here, at least, no enemy would be per-
mitted to enter under the garb of a votary, and that this sanctuary of science
might not be polluted by any unhallowed voice. Now he was tempted to exclaim,
Procul, O procul este profani ! When he heard a gentleman coming forward with
such an objection as has been made, he could not help ascribing it to something
more than a dislike to the epithet. What expression could possibly tave been
used more innocent or more appropriate ? Here was the factbefore them, that the
funds dedicated to oriental literature had been entirely carried off ; that works of
all descriptions, scientific as well as others, had been strangled in the very
act of coming into the world, and thrown aside as useless and pernicious; and
after all this, when they said that the authors of this to them grievous calamity
were actuated by another favorite object, they were taken to task for the expres-
sion. He really wanted words to express his surprise at such a frivolous objection
being urged, and he trusted the Society would evince the same sense of it as he
entertained, that it was wholly unworthy of being attended to.

Mr. Cotvin’s proposition was not seconded.

Mr. Prinsep, thought that the terms ‘ deeply regret’ were not nearly strong
enough to show the sentiments of the Society—he would suggest ‘ cannot see the
necessity’ as more appropriate.

This expression after some discussion was substituted.

On the perusal of the 12th paragraph, which stood originally as follows :

‘« The Society therefore earnestly beseech the Honorable the Governor General
in Council, that he will be pleased to solicit pecuniary aid from the Court of Di-
rectors, to be annually appropriaied to the revival of the oriental literature, and
the encouragement of learned natives, and the Society will be happy to under-
take the superintendence, &c.’’

Mr. H. T. Prinsep moved as an amendment, that the sentence be altered, (as
it now stands in the memorial,) to convey a stronger expression ot the So.
ciety’s feeling on the recent measure.

Mr. Co1vin said, that he must oppose the amendment. He took the liberty
of again addressing the meeting, as he was desirous to record his opinion on the
question which had now been brought under discussion. He would not enter
into an argument on the point of law which had been mooted. He had himself
always considered, and still considered, the orders of the Government to be fully
consistent both with the terms and the spirit of the act of Parliament. He must
think it difficult to believe, that the legislature, in the first, and only specific
appropriation which it had made with a view to the mental advancement of the In-
dian people, had intended not to entrust to the Government, to which it has com-
mitted the immediate control of these territories, the discretion of applying the
fund as it might judge most expedient and practicable, in order to the cultivation
of the most improved literature, and the communication of the most enlightened
systems of knowledge, whichits subjects might be found willing to receive at its
hands. It appeared to him a strange conclusion, that it had been meant by the
British Parliament to render compulsory the maintenance of a system calculated
to perpetuate the ignorance and prejudices of the people—that it had been
designed to fetter this Government and to restrain it from measures of
improvement. But he had said, that he would not go into a discussion of the
point of law. He would rather state what he considered to be the duty of the
Society in regard to the address which was now to be presented. Was it proper,
he would ask,—was it respectful, in going up to Government as applicants for. its
assistance, that they should assert, by implication, that it had, in its late measure,
deviated from its proper course? Was that a subject which the Society ought to
entertain at all? Further, he would urge that it would certainly be most disad-
vantageous for their own purpose, were they, in appealing to the liberality of

002

292 Asiatic Society. (May,

Government, to express in any manner disapprobation of its proceedings. Look-
ing only to the motive of securing the success of the application which they were
about to make, he would say, omit in the address all and every topic of contro-
versy. The Government, in receiving an address suck as was now proposed,
would appear called upon to vote its own condemnation. He would, on these
grounds, give his voice against the amendment.

Mr. MacNAGHTEN again rose, and spoke to the following effect :

Mr. PresipEnt, we have been assured by Mr. Cotvin more than once, that he
is no lawyer. He could not have asserted with equal truth, that he is no preach-
er, for he has favoured us with a very lengthy discourse on our duties, both to
the Government and the people. But J must take the liberty of differing with him
altogether, as to the doctrines he has propounded. We are an independent, and
I trust, a respectable body, congregated for the purpose of promoting by every
means in our power the cause of literature and science. As the guardians of
that sacred cause, it is not only our privilege, but our duty to appeal, respectfully
it is true, but earnestly, to that power which is competent to rescue it from im-
pending danger. I would go further and say, that if the Government could be so
infatuated as to declare open hostility against the languages and literature of the
people of India, it would be an obligation, of which we could not divest our-
selves without disgrace, to remonstrate against such a proceeding with all our
energies. If we think we have the law as well as the justice of the case on our
side, no liberal, no equitable Government would be offended by our pointing it
out.—Mr. Coxvin has again returned to the ground which he first took up, and
has indulged in the use of slighting and contemptuous language as applied to ori-
ental studies. He has moreover asserted, that such sentiments are entertained
by the natives themselves. Gentlemen, I have now been resident in this country
upwards of twenty-six years, and, I believe, I may say, that I have not been defi-
cient in my attention to the genius of the people, their languages, their literature,
their habits, or their prejudices, and I will venture to affirm, that nothing can be
more without foundation than the supposition which Mr. CoLvin appears to enter-
tain. Oriental literature has much to recommend it, and the natives of the coun-
try are passionately devoted to that literature. It cannot be otherwise. I cannot
sit down without again expressing my astonishment, that this place should have
been selected for such an attack. If havoc and desolation rage around us, we
may not be able to prevent it; but here in the citadel of our strength, that an effort
at our overthrow should be made, is to me astonishing. I have no fear, however,
that it will be successful, or that there will be difference of opinion as to the cha-
racter of the proceeding.

The Prestpent, however unwilling to offer an opinion from the chair, must
object to the amendment, because it appeared to entertain a doubt of the legality
of the course pursued. Government acted by advice, and there remained an ap-
peal to the proper tribunals if any interest were aggrieved. He was anxious to
impress on the Society the necessity of abstaining from legal and political dis-
cussions, as quite out of character ina literary and scientific institution. Otherwise
they must lose many members who could not vote, nay, could not sit, where
such topics were to be canvassed. The case was strong enough of itself; the
application for continuing the suspended oriental publications was a most proper
object for the Society to urge; it should have his warmest support, provided it
were unmixed with other matters which had been the subject of discussion else-
where, and upon which the Government had expressed their opinion. He hada
very strong opinion on the necessity of excluding debatable topics of this nature
from the Society, and if they were to continuesuch discussions he for one should
be compelled to retire. Literary and Scientific subjects seemed to him the only
matters proper for discussion with them, except the little usual business which
must of course be disposed of,

Mr. MAcNAGHTEN, with the most unfeigned deference and respect to the learned
President, must take leave to express his doubts, as to the doctrine which he had
delivered, or at all events to seek for some explanation which might solve his dif-
ficulties. He understood from him, thatin thisplace, they were never competent to
touch upon a question of law, and that if they did, those who are connected with

1835.] Asiatic Society. 293

the legal profession must cease to be members of the Society. This doctrine seemed
to him to involve the necessity of submitting to every species of spoliation. More-
over that they were not competent to advert in any way to the measures of Govern-
ment. Now it appeared to him, that they were not here as lawyers or as civil or
military servants of the Company ; and that when they met in this hall, they di-
vested themselves of those characters,and appeared only in the character of the ser-
vants of science and of literature, the guardians of oriental learning, and the re-
presentatives of its interests both in Asiaand in Europe. In that sacred character
they were bound to be vigilant and active. Indeed, he could conceive cases involv-
ing questions of law, in which they should feel themselves compelled to act. Sup-
posing the Government were to be advised that they held a mortgage in the So-
ciety’s premises, and that upon this hint, they were to proceed instanter to an eject-
ment. Ought they in such a case tamely to resign their right, because there hap-
pened to be lawyers among them? He could understand the motive which should
restrain particular gentlemen from expressing an opinion, but he could not con-
ceive any circumstance which would justify their surrendering without a struggle
the rights of their constituents. Those constituents are, he said, the literary men
of all nations. They had an awful trust imposed upon them, and they must ex-
ecute it faithfully and conscientiously as a great public body, without any per-
sonal motives, or any personal scruples.

Mr. Prinsep felt great diffidence in expressing his dissent from what had
fallen from the President, the more so, as he was himself a most unworthy
member, whereas the President’s merits towards the Society were of the highest
character. But he could not think, under British Government, any society, or
even any individual could have the least hesitation in expressing respectfully an
opinion, that the Government had misconstrued a law, when that misconstruction
was likely to do injury to the rights or the feelings of so large a portion of its
subjects as the native community formed in this country. No wilful error or wrong
was imputed to the Government: but surely it was not too much to say, as he was
confident was the case, that Government had in this instance been ill-advised and
misled. He did not speak as a lawyer, but as a member of this Society, whose
position in respect to the literature of India had been well described by Mr.
Macnacuren. That there could be no possible offence to Government in so
expressing themselves he felt assured, by seeing members and high officers of the
Government ready to join in so doing. He was somewhat surprised at what had
fallen from Mr. Co.tvin, as to the ancient literature of India, being calculated
only to perpetuate idolatry and superstition. What would be thought, if
England had possessed herself of Greece, a part of which was under her dominion,
and had bestowed funds for reviving its language and literature,—would any one
be listened to who should urge, that withthe language of Greece one would be re-
viving her mythology? The most advantageous thing for the advancement of
European literature in India was to revive that of the country, and place them in
contrast side by side: it was easy to see which must then prevail. He did not
think the Society should take so humble a tone as to ask, as a charity, that which
Parliament had given as a right, and would rather not succeed in the object that
ail had equally at heart, than take it in the shape of an eleemosynary donatior.

Mr. H. T. Prinsep quoted the words of the act, which he believed had been
grounded on a minute of Mr. H. CoLteRookr’s, specially pointed to the literature
and learned natives of the country. He thought there could be no doubt as to
the meaning of the clause, and if sucli were entertained by any present, he
should not hesitate to take the votes of members as to the construction to be put
upon the words. Entertaining this opinion, he thought the Society ought to have
no hesitation about expressing it ; and as for the fact stated, that the Government
had put a different interpretation upon the law, he knew not how the Society
could know that these questions had ever been determined by the Government.
But even if this point had been so ruled, that was no reason why the members
of this Society, if their opinion was clear as to the legal rights of this literature, of
which they were the patrons and protectors, should not express that opinion even to
the Government. He was quite sure it was the general feeling, that the grant was
made by Parliament tothe literature of India, which ought not to be robbed of

294 Asiatic Society. (Mary,

the provision so made to it. By the amendment, it was intended to express
this as delicately and respectfully as possible.

Sir J. P. Grant thought it right to state, that in voting for the amendment, he
did not mean to give an opinion upon the question of law. He did not think
that the amendment went to express any opinion upon the question of law, and
if it did, most certainly ne neither would nor ought to vote upon it. It merely,
in his opinion, asked of the Government to give its consideration to the question,
and in case they should be of opinion that oriental literature had not a legal
and parliamentary claim under the words of the act, then to make a new and
specific grant of funds for this important purpose.

Mr. W. GRANT was not disposed to blink the question which the Society wish-
ed to bring under the reconsideration of Government, and did not see that any
disrespect was implied in urging, however strongly, such reconsideration. The
Society had for a long time believed, that a particular fund was appropriated by
Parliament to objects in a manner confided by the public to the Society’s peculiar
care, and they now learned that this fund was no longer to be so applied. The
Society was bound to undertake the cause of oriental literature, and to urge
Government to reconsider a resolution so inimical to it. And if upon serious
reconsideration, Government should continue to be of opinion, that no fund was
by law appropriated at present to its conservation, then to urge an application to
the proper quarters for a fund which should be so appropriated.

Mr. Cotvin asked Sir J. P. Grant, whether the words of the amendment
which he read did not at least by implication convey an opinion upon the ques-
tion of law.

Sir J. P. Grant said, that in his opinion they did not, but that the words
in the Act of Parliament being such as they had that night been stated to be, the
amendment suggested to the Government, that it was a grave question, of which
it desired their reconsideration, and upon this view he was prepared to vote for
the amendment ; but the suggestion being made that it might be otherwise inter-
preted, he should not vote.

The amendment was then put and carried. The revised memorial was once more
read through, and, on the motion of Mr. H. IT. Prinsxr, seconded by Babu
Rasumay Dott, it was adopted nem. con.

Read a letter from Captain Wapz, enclosing one from the Chevalier
Ventura, acknowledging his election as an honorary member.

Read extract of a letter from Lieut. A. Burnes, enclosing copies of desi-
derata in Botany from Professor Granam, and in Geology from the London
Society.

Read a letter from Tuomas Dickenson, Esq. Secretary to the Bombay
branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, acknowledging the receipt of M.
Csoma’s Tibetan Dictionary and Grammar, and expressing the best thanks
of that Society for the same.

Library.

Read a letter from Epwarp T. Bennert, Esq. Secretary to the Zoolo-
gical Society of London, forwarding its proceedings for the years 1830
31, 32, and 33, with the 2nd part of the 1st volume of their Transactions,
for presentation to the Society. 4

Read a letter received through M. L. A. Ricuy, from Monsieur Garcin
De Tassy, forwarding for presentation copy of a work entitled “ Les
Guvres De Wali, (Dewan-Wali,) recently published by himself in Hin-
dustani at the royal press of Paris.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 18, was presented by the
Editors.

Meteorological Register for April, 1835, by the Surveyor General.

The following books were received from the book-sellers.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Simson’s Roman Empire, vol. 2nd.

, Germanic Empire, vol. Ist.

Library of Useful Knowledge—Natural Philosophy, vol. 3rd.

1835.] Asiatic Society. 295

‘
A List of the Pali, Burmese, and Singalese works, in the Burmese cha..
racter, (some with Burmese interpretations) inthe Asiatic Society’s library,
was submitted, and ordered to be printed in the out-coming catalogue.

Museum and Antiquities.

A model of the Taj Mahal at Agra, in ivory, was presented on the part of
Messrs. W. Carr and J. Prinsep,

A note from the Baron Von Hucgt, on the variance of the Tope at Sar-
nath, from the Dehgopas of Ceylon, was read.

[This will find a place in a future number. ]

A letter from Col. S. P. Sracy announced, that he had despatched for
the inspection of the Society, to the charge of their Secretary, his very ex-
tensive collection of Bactrian, Indo-Scythic, ancient Hindu, and Muham-
medan coins, of which he also forwarded a detailed catalogue.

This collection is more than usually valuable from its having been made prin-
cipally in central India, and it is mainly rich in Hindu coins, of which it will
serve to devolope many series with names hitherto unknown.

Physical.

Specimens of Copper Ore from the Ajmir mines, with a descriptive ac.
count by Captain Drxon, addressed to the Governor General, were present-
ed through Captain Smyru, Mil. Sec. G. G.

An account of the bearded vulture of Nipal, Gypaétos barbatus, by Mr. B.
H. Honeson, was submitted, with an accurate painting by his native artist.

Mr. Hopeson is in possession of upwards of 2000 iliustrations of the Fauna,
and the Ornithology of the valley, which he is now seeking to publish in a wor-
thy manner, in conjunction with eminent naturalists at home. The plates and
descriptions of the Mammalia are already gone to England, and the others will
soon follow. The whole will form a memorable monument of his zeal and in-
defatigable industry.

Extracts of a letter from Professor Winson were read.

The Ashmolean Society, is anxious to obtain through the Asiatic Society, an
entire skeleton of an alligator, for the purpose of perpetual comparison with the
fossils of the Saurian tribe at home. An inquiry has arisen which can be solved
only in this country, Do Elephants shed their tusks? The immense supply of
them brought from Africa to England, if derived from the death or destruction of
the animal, must it is thought soon lead to its extermination.

[Mr. Wirson, has, we are happy to remark, prepared the Vishny Parana, the
Sankhya Chandrika, for the press, and only waits the casting of a new fount of
type. The Hindu theatre has passed through a new edition. Moorcrort’s
Journals are still in Muraay’s hands, and the bust not commenced upon, by
CHANTREY. |

Notice on the foetus of the basking shark (squalus maximus ), and a pre-
served specimen, were submitted by Dr. J. T, Pearson

A paper was submitted by Mr. F. G. Tayior, H.C. Astronomer at
Madras, on a new method of ascertaining the error of collimation in
astronomical instruments by reflection from a surface of the mercury.

[This very valuable and simple method is described in the present number.]

A note on the mummy brought by Captain ArcuBoxp from Egypt was
submitted by Dr. Evans.

From the lateness of the hour the reading of the papers presented was
postponed to the next meeting.

Meteorological Register.

296

—

*Kavay Alaa pue

‘fjrva ured

*Kramoys ‘Atamoys ‘ulva Qusrys
‘snjeajs ‘110 “WWTU Snjea}s op
ulel snjeajs “Op Tynuno “aul
“1yMuNd "119 op Di iatiiaats)
‘Ays Aystur op *4SBIIDAO
op “Azey op
op *Tynuun9 *T7MUIMd
*Apnoyo “Apnojo *ySvo10A0
op “AZEY "T1110 ‘und
op *TTNUUNS *410 op
‘ouy ‘uy “Bayo
“sulIOYy es *Apnoyo op
*Azey ‘uno “AZeY “Apnoyo
op “ouy Arey
*11ey genic) op
op “Tynuund *IynuNd pnos
‘muna = 98 Surmoyq “Joy
‘yw “119 “Spl *syyes “AzBY
‘29 Avey op URL
‘Su woyyed *Azey *4SB010A0
*Apnoyo "U110}S8 UL SL YUps
yystu pue Avpye ur “py Asoa
“ly nuind *Azey op
4sv0 1aAo §«*SUTUayvaTy} —*T[NUTM “110
"[[ap op Stu pue'spjo
“Azey ‘Apnoyo
‘ouy Dei to) fa)
“nuns “spl> JUST
op * AYSIU
ouy op
“11ey *Ivalo
S =
3 3
5 5
os
*TOYIBO AA

ATA9YyINOS

*N
ou
‘ou
au
“au

“Pur AA

csst, Z°801

nl
SS Nerons
=o

=
=

Ears
hers
72a

a
-

Ee |
mito OD Pee

a

I
=

=

~

Wises NXKsss ont

~

*

”

HAM OoOonm

~
~

aA
an

-
>

Ig HORN
Sosas NXvs

a
~

~~

S
a

ato asaa
ce

aoa
aaa

a
=

Poly Baro oi]

n

mtd Pere

matt oond CO re DS MWANNtS
sae

a
>
a

>
oO
=

4

2 oD
Conia!
ako]
a
Sa

Bin)

|

‘qua1aBid |

|

+

-dUIOULIAY

t
yea | z

*m01sA
“FIP Sst[soT

“118 UL Id

“uns ut

*SOULOL KG
19} 9UOULIOY,L,

g98‘T

996°
988‘
SOPs
goes
Gers
g9e*

gers
$oP*
pars
eles
109°
og’

Ges.
GOP.
S61‘
9L1*
e9L‘

GPSS
Lees
pce‘
elo‘
P8e‘

“Wi *d Pp J SUOT}VAIESYO

“86 (E89

—_|—-———| —_____..

a

186‘ 1)9665

OSE‘ 116665
£96‘ L\ bars
918 T|9PS*
GIE‘T\E66°

828 T/90PS
gre' 1j9rEs
ape 1\0Le*
OTs‘ 1\8lrs
968‘ TOPLS
Boe T\gel'

aa A

Covent

SoVen tN

~aAn

1g id Sed is rs
=
NW -)

~
o

a
=
2a

aot

*

OLS T|F835
006‘ T|O8r*
BOLTIPSP S
GLI‘ T}O8PS
PorTiesgs
Gri‘ {9L9°

P635'T|06PS

aan
SC ANNO
> an

~

~
a

as

TRS RAN SBArowon

gee! 119¢PS
Lee TioLP
99‘ 1 \L2e°

coal

=

SHAAN POSCOON

>

Ke CDR ORR WO 5519 WIAD

Bae‘ 18h"
09°83 }908 6B

oD
)

ES
|

H

ite

*1ajJauIOIS
*poonpap
‘ua, ‘sby

-4H
‘op *19}0U

-o1eg 18M

“FEP_SAUSIT

*ssaideq *“L
‘W 10 ‘Zid

“mM "V OL JB SUOTJBAIOSAO

“CES ‘Avy fo yruopy ay2 wof ‘npinopvy ‘a0rQ hossp ayy yw qday ‘sazsrhayy povbojo..oajayy

TE ALTERS EN LR AR TNE NR ERENT ON TS EY A eS, SS SA ES oe SE A AS SE,

*£x0 1e10GeT Udo Uv JO JwYA SL UBATS Jeoy OY} OIOYM “QUIT 9Yy 7V ULYI asnNoY Sur[faap 94} Ur oInjzeIeduI9} roMOT

yonur @ sMoYs If Surdueduroooe sojaurourreyy oy} “YOU TO. UII A0YIO Ot} YIM soarse 41 nq “uoUMASUT JUOIAYIP est sAepUNsS UO potajsIdoL Aa}ouLOIe oI,

ogg’
e8g°
609%
6r9S
189°
69g*
8096
ool
pels
Pgs
aL‘
rel’
ge’
L6p°
ogg’
P69"
oRgs
6a9*
B6g*
99°
BIL‘
9LLS
PBZ
POL‘
OLL‘
asl‘

JL6L6

orl’
Bgl!
OBL‘

“oGE 32
Iajouoleg

“66

MAMTA OSROSACHK AMMO
SAS

piepueis

"U0 J ay} Jo Ae

JOURNAL

OF

foe ASTATIC SOCIET Y.

No. 42.—June, 1835.

1.—On the Government and History of Naning in the Malay Peninsula.
By Lieut. J. T. Newsoxp, 23rd Regt. Madras Nat. Inf.

Native Government of Naning.—The Government of Naning, set
ting aside its connexion with the European powers at Malacca, which
interfered very little in its internal organization, was at once feudal
and pastoral in its character. The classification of the people into
tribes was nearly as well defined as that of the children of Israel,
described by Moses in the Pentateuch.

Panghilis.—The office of Panghilu has been hereditary, subject to
the approbation of the Government at Malacca, agreeably, generally,
to the Menangkabowe law of succession of the Anak Perpdti Sabd-
tang, or the Tromba Pusdka Mendngkadbowe. The right of succession
devolving upon the eldest male child of the sister; who however
may be set aside in case of imbecility or other causes. This singular
law of succession prevails throughout Naning.

The last Panghilis of Naning were of the tribe Se Melongan.
They were generally brought down by the four heads of tribes, or
Ampat Siiki, to Malacca, to be confirmed by the European Government.

Jukra’ Macas, the first Panghilié of the last line, arrogated to him-
self the power of inflicting capital punishment on the inhabitants con-
fided to his charge. It was exercised and abused by his successors
until 1809, when it was rescinded by. the British Resident, Colonel
Farquaar ; a gentleman whose name is held in affectionate remem-
brance by most of the Malays, both of Malacca and the neighbouring
independent states.

The last death sentence passed by Aspun Sayap (or Duon Sayan),
the ex-Panghiili, was on a Queda man, named Sau, in 1805. This
Malay had carried off from Malacca two Chinese slaves, a man and

PP

\

298 On the Government and History of [Junz,

woman; meeting some resistance from the former, he had murdered
him, with his Aris, in the forest of Londoo, and proceeded with the
woman to Pila, in Sriminanti, where he sold her..

The present superintendent of Naaing, Mr. WxesTerHovt, who was
an eye-witness, described to me the ceremony of his trial and execu-
tion. The criminal was conducted bound to Buket Penialang, or
“execution hill,’ near Tabu. The Panghili, the Ampat Suké, the
12 Panglimas, the Bandhdra,: and the Makdim were all seated in
judgment under a cluster of Tambuseh trees, on the skirt of the hill.
The witnesses were brought forward and examined by the Panghili
himself. The evidence against the prisoner being deemed conclusive,
according to the forms of the Muhammedan law, he was sentenced,
agreeably to the Adat Mendngkdbowe, to pay one Bhar (equivalent to
24 Spanish dollars, and 30 cents), or to suffer (Salang) death by the
kris. Being unable to pay the fine, preparations were made for his
immediate execution. The grave was dug on the spot, and he was
placed firmly bound in a sitting posture, literally on its brink. For
further security, two Panglimds sat on each side, whilst the Pang-
lima Besér Sumun unsheathed the weapon that was to terminate the
trembling wretch’s existence. On the point of the poniard, the
kris panjang, the Panglémd carefully placed a pledget of soft cotton,
which he pressed against the man’s breast, a little above the right
collar bone. He then slowly passed the weapon’s: point through the
cotton, on which he kept the fingers of his left hand, firmly pressed in
a direction obliquely to the left, into his body, until the projection of
the hilt stopped its farther progress. The weapon was then slowly
withdrawn, the Panglimd still retaining the cotton in its place by the
pressure of his fingers, by which the effusion of blood externally was
effectually stanched.

The criminal, convulsively shuddering, was instantly preciptated into
the grave; but on his making signs for water, was raised. He had
barely time to apply his lips to the cocoanut shell, in which it was
brought, when he fell back into the grave quite dead. The earth
was then hastily thrown over the body, and the assembly dispersed.

The Ampat Stiki.—Next to the Panghili, were the four heads or
representatives of the four Sivktés, or tribes, into which the population
of Naning was divided.

In the ex-Panghiild’s time, the head of the

Suki Sa Melongan, was Maharajé Nunxato.
»» Anak Malacca, ,, Anvixa’ Maharaja.
», Liga Batta, » Datru AMBANGAN.
» Munkdh, » Orane Karo Ki‘ait.

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 299

- There are three other Suikius or tribes in Naning, viz. those of Batié
Balong, Tiga Neyney, and. Bodoandd. The number of individuals com-
posing these tribes being so insignificant, they were included in the
four general divisions.

The office of the head of the Suki was not exactly hereditary. In
the event of a casualty, the place was generally filled up by the remain-
ing three from the most eligible of the deceased’s family. Their
office was to assist the Panghili with their counsel and advice ;
if unanimous, they could carry their point against him.

They were always consulted in any matter of importance, and af-
fixed their seals to all deeds and agreements. Letters to the Govern-
ment at Malacca, and to the heads of independent states were invaria-
bly written in the name of the Panghihi and Ampat Saki. Each was
individually responsible for his tribe to the Panghilé, in matters of
revenue, levying men and settling disputes.

Their revenue was derived principally from the power they enjoyed
of levying fines on their own particular tribe, and from a portion allot-
ted to them by the Panghilé from his annual levy on each house of
five gantams of paddy.

Mantris.—The Mantris were a-species of privy councillors to the
Panghilis, two in number. The last were Mexa’nA’ Haxim and
Gompa’r. They fled with the Panghili to Miko in Rumbowe, but
have since returned.

- Panglimas or Hulubalangs.—The Panglimds are the war chiefs. The
ex-Panghili had 12; viz. Panglimas Besar, Jati, Arrip, Beibas, Sul-
tdn, Tambi, Prang, Troh, 2 Bangsahs, Kiodin, and Rajdé Balang.
Four of these were personally attached to the Panghiili ; viz.
Panglimds Besdr, Prang, Jati, and Arrip: the rest to the Ampuat
Stki.

_ Besides the levying of men in war, and leading them to combat,
building stockades, &c. the duty of a Panglimd is in peace, the appre-
hension of criminals, bearing official messages and letters, and making
requisitions.

On these occasions, the Panghiliu’s spear Tombok Bandaran was
sent with them, in token of their authority.

. This custom prevails generally among Malayan chiefs.

The above form of government was entirely abolished on the set-
tling of the country after the disturbances in 1832, as will appear
hereafter.

History.—Naning was taken possession of, together with the Ma-
lacca lands, by the Portuguese, shortly after the capture of Malacca by’

Axpuonso Atsuaquereaus, in 1511. Previous to this, it had formed an
P PQ

300 On the Government and History of (Junz,

integral part of the dominions of Munammep Suu II., Sultan of
Malacca; who, on the fall of his capital, fled to Muar, thence to Pa-
hang, and finally to Johore, where he established a kingdom. Nan-
ing remained nominally under the Portuguese, till 1641-2, when with
Malacca it fell into the hands of the Dutch, and their allies the sove-
reigns of Johore and Achin. According to a Malay manuscript in
my possession, ‘‘ the Hollanders made many bonds with the king of
Johore, on golden paper, including numerous divisions of shares
and territory,” among which are specified the interior boundaries of
Malacca, viz.‘‘ From the mouth of the Cassang to its source southerly ;
from the mouth of the Lingi river to Ramoan China northerly to Buket
Bruang, Bakowe Rendah, Ramonia Chondong, Padang Chachar, Da-
son Mariah, Dason Kappar Ula Malacca to the source of the Cassang
river. Done, written, and sealed by the Hollanders and king of Johore,
on paper of gold.”

VaLentyn, however, asserts, that (ie Ist article of the treaty be-
tween the Dutch and the king of Johore was, that the town be given
up to the Dutch, and the land to the king of Johore, reserving, how-
ever, to the Dutch so much territory about the town as is required, and
license to cut fire-wood. Be this as it may, Dutch policy soon extended
the meaning of this into the possession of an area of nearly 50 miles
by 30, which comprised the whole of Naning up to the frontiers of
Rumbowe and Johore.

This line of latter days has been extended beyond Buket Bruang
and Ramoan China, to the left bank of the Lingi river, which it now
comprehends.

History of Naning.—The Dutch, on their taking possession of Ma-
lacca in 1641, found Naning under the government of the Ampat
Suki, or heads of the four tribes, into which the inhabitants are di-
vided. In the Dutch Governor General AnrHonisy Van DieMeEn’s
administration, an agreement was made by the first Land-voogd, or
Governor of Malacca, Jonan Van Twist, on the 15th of August, 1641,
with the chiefs of Naning and the neighbouring villages: by which
the latter promised fidelity to the States General and the Company,
and abjured their former engagements with the Spaniards and Por-
tuguese. The property of all persons dying without issue to be di-
vided between the Company and the native chiefs; that of persons
guilty of murder, to be appropriated half for the use of the Company,
and the remainder for their heirs. The company to be entitled to one
tenth of the produce, and to a duty of 10 per cent. on the sale of
estates. Such taxes to be collected by native servants, who will be
rewarded by Governor General A. Van Diemen.

1835.) Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 301

In the old Dutch records, preserved in the archives of Malacca, we
find, in 1643, the inhabitants of Naning and Rumbowe, particularly
those of the districts of Mullikey, Perling, and Inac, noticed as being
in a very rebellious and disorderly state, refusing to obey their chief
Raja Meran, the first Panghild of Naning, on account of the banish-
ment by the Dutch of one of their chiefs, named Ment Tuan Leta
Reawan, from the territory of Malacca: and complaining ‘that the
administration of justice was not according to their customs.

In 1644, the Dutch Government resolved to depute commissioners
to Naning, in order to restore tranquillity, to take a survey of Naning
and its districts, to apportion lands to the inhabitants, (who, it is wor-
thy of note, are always styled ‘“‘ Manikabowes,”’ or settlers from
Menangkabowe in Sumatra,) to in fuse intotheir minds the advan-
tages resulting from habits of industry, to turn their attention to
agricultural pursuits, to persuade them to “ depart from the state of
barbarism under which they then laboured,” and finally, to furnish
Rajé Mzran, the chiefs and inhabitants there, with instructions how
they were to conduct themselves towards the Government of Malacca
in respect to the administration of justice in civil cases, and above all,
to take cognizance of every criminal case that occurred there.

To fulfil the objects of this mission, Government selected senior mer-
chant Snoveg. But citizen Snovne, the minute drily observes,
** brings in various excuses, saying he is unwell, and that the road to
Naning is impassable, that his legs are bad, and that he is not profi-
cient in the Malay language.”

Shortly after this, Snovrg@ still persisting in his objections, an
expedition is ordered to proceed to Naning, under Captain S. Atrx-
ANDER MeEnpos and Antonio Gonio Louts Prinsnro, consisting of 50
Netherlands, and 60 Malacca soldiers, with 20 peons, to convey pro-
visions and baggage, and a number of boats and boatmen—in all 180
men.

The following is the official account of the mission written by the
Governor Jerem1as Van Vue, who, it appears, proceeded himself to
Naning in the room of Snovga.

“On the third day, about three hours before the sun went
down, we arrived with the whole retinue at Pankallang Naning, as
far as is navigable, with a boat. Here we rested during the night, and
found Raja Merau, with some of the principal chiefs of Naning, who
shewed us every mark of respect and obedience.

“ Early on the morning of the fourth, we marched forward with the
whole retinue, through forests, to Melecque (Mullikey). We reached
this place at 10 o’clock, with the principal part of the troops, and

102 On the Government and History of [June,

awaited the arrival of our baggage. After taking some refreshments,
we proceeded on our journey to Naning, and arrived at this place
two hours before the rising of the sun. Raja Mrrau, with some of
the principal chiefs of Naning, and a great concourse of people, came
to receive us and pay their homage. They conducted us to Naning,
and had a band of musicians marching before us.

‘* The inhabitants of Naning and the other districts under our sub-
jection came to us to pay their homage. Thus every thing promised
a favorable result to the object of our mission. The chiefs and inha-
bitants of Naning had constructed a sumptuous bungalow for our
reception, and shewed us every attention and respect.

«« We received their compliments with every token of good will, and
so we past the day.

“In Naning we desired Raja Muran and the chiefs to be called;
and pointed out to them the atrocities which had been committed by
them and the inhabitants during the past year, viz. that murder and
robbery were common practices with them, arising fromno other
cause than a state of ignorance and idleness. It is therefore advise-
able, that they should devote their time to agricultural pursuits, such
as planting a more considerable quantity of pepper or paddy. Were
they to lead an industrious life, it would prove much to their benefit ;
malignity would then, no doubt, be entirely eradicated.”

The following points were laid before them :

Ist. «* That Incu1 Woppat, one of the chiefs and head-men at Melic-
que (Mullikey), having proved himself unworthy of that situation,
and on whom no confidence could be placed, it is required that they
should select three qualified persons at Melicque, out of which num-
ber, one would be chosen to fill the vacant seat.”

2nd. “ That they should keep the river, from Pankallang Naning
to Pankallang Nauwar, clear, and make it navigable for prows.”

3rd. ‘“‘ That one-tenth of the produce of the Naning rice-fields
should be paid annually, either in kind or money.”

4th. ‘‘ That Raja Meran, with the chiefs, should come down per-
sonally, or depute persons to pay their homage.’ (The records here
are almost obliterated.)

5th. ‘* That Raja Merau shall invite, by beat of gong, all the in-
habitants in the districts under subjection, in order to ascertain if they
have any complaints to bring forward against Rajé Munran, or the
other chiefs; and if they have no reason of complaint, notice should
be taken of their disobedience.”

6th. “‘ That we should furnish R4j4 Meran and the chiefs with
instructions, and point out to them the line of conduct which they

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 303

should invariably pursue, and how far their authority extends in the
administration of civil cases.”’

‘These points having been translated into the Malay language, we
had it proclaimed, and made known to all people, through the medium
of Raja Merau, who informed us, that the inhabitants accepted these
rules with due deference, but made some difficulty in complying with
the contents of that paragraph which enjoins them to keep the river
clear, for they consider themselves as his (Rajé Mrrau’s) subjects,
not his slaves. Raja Muraun further states, that the limited authority
with which he is invested is not calculated to command obedience.
But it is our wish, that Raja Merau confer with the chiefs and inha-
bitants on the matter, and inform them that what we had resolved is
principally to promote their interest. The clearing away on the banks
of the river is a service which could be performed by four persons,
andin a short space of time. The banks of the river should be cleared,
widened, and made navigable from Naning to the town; but they are
required to keep the river clear only as far as Pankallang Nauwar,
from thence it will be the business of our inhabitants to preserve the
cleanliness of the river. They ought to recollect, that this improvement
would, in a great measure, promote the prosperity of Naning; and.
how convenient it would be felt by every body in the transport of
paddy, sirth, and other produce. Perceiving their objection, we de-
sired, that the inhabitants should be summoned by beat of gong, in
order that they might consider this object more attentively. Raja
Merau and chiefs did accordingly hold a consultation with the inha-
bitants. We directed AtexanpER Mewnpos to be present at this
meeting, and to inform himself of every circumstance which might
occur, and instructed him how he should conduct himself towards
these obstinate people.

** ALEXANDER Mennos having appeared in the meeting, and hearing
some of the Manikdbowes making difficulties to obey the order regard-
ing the clearing of the river, alleging that their houses were too far
situated from the river, replied, that they should not murmur at such
a trivial labour, considering that the Governor himself had left the
town, and come up here for the purpose of punishing the wicked and
disobedient, and protecting the innocent and faithful, it would there-
fore be very imprudent to resist his wishes. Mznpos and Raji Mz-
RAH, impressed these salutary precepts on the minds of the inhabitants
of the villages under subjection, who with one consent and loud voice
exclaimed, ‘ the will of the Governor of Malacca be done,”’ and pro-
mised to be obedient to all his orders. In this manner did Raja
Menai, the chiefs, and inhabitants declare their willingness to accede
to the rules which we had prescribed to them,

304 On the Government and History of (Jung,

‘“‘ We directed all the men in the districts under subjection to ap-
proach our dwelling, and demanded to know if they were satisfied with
R4ja Merau and the other chiefs, and would submit to their orders.
If any person should be injured, and could procure no redress from
them,” (here again the record is undecipherable.)

‘“* We addressed the people in such a manner that they unanimously
declared, that they had nothing to bring forward against Raj4 Mz-
RAH, and consented to place themselves under his control. We have
in consequence read in the Dutch, Portuguese, and Malay languages,
in the presence of the inhabitants of the districts under subjection, viz.
Naning, Melicque, Inak, and Perling, the commission appointing
R4jéh Merau as our subordinate chief over the above-mentioned dis-
tricts ; and the tenor of the commission is noted down in the accom-
pany copy.

‘* Raja Merau had selected three persons from each of the districts
Melicque and Perling; out of which one will be chosen, in order to
increase the number of the members of the council in Naning, and
each of them should be a head man over a village.

«« Whilst Raj4 Merau, the chiefs, and the inhabitants were holding
a council, we took a survey of the lands and paddy-fields in Naning,
and proceeded nearly so far as the forests of Rumbowe. It is indeed
a fine and fertile land, bounded on both sides by forests. It is to be
desired, that Malacca could possess such advantages. In the districts
of Naning there is much waste and uncultivated land, which is well
adapted for planting pepper. If we could put our plan into execu-
tion, it is certain that the Company will derive great profit in time.

“« After the trial of many delinquents, there was one man, named
U’anc Cava Per Matru Meran, who was once one of the chiefs at
Naning ; who, having evinced symptoms of disaffection, proceeded to
Rumbowe, where he had spent his days in cock-fighting and gaming.
This man was ordered to be apprehended and fined in our council, with
the concurrence of Rajé Murau, in a sum of 50 crusadoes.

“‘ The enormous crime committed by ConteLia Lascarra, late head
man at Perling, for which he had been imprisoned here for a length
of time, was also investigated in the presence of the said chiefs. He
was condemned to pay a fine of 100 crusadoes. In failure of this,
he shall be scourged and banished the territory of Malacca.

“« The instructions, which we intended to furnish Raja Merau
with, being ready, we intimated the tenor of the same to him and
the other chiefs, and they appeared to be perfectly satisfied with them,
which gives us every reason to hope, that they would promote the
happiness and comfort of the people, and increase the confluence of
the Manikasowes, when the villagers of other places shall hear Naning

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 305

is become a well-regulated Government, and the character of the inha-
bitants peaceable and industrious, and that vice is severely punished.

‘‘ Every thing at Naning has turned out to our wishes. Raja
Merau and the chiefs were very submissive, and the inhabitants very
obedient to our orders.”

Governor Van Vu1eT had not long to felicitate himself on the sub-
missiveness and obedience of the inhabitants of Naning ; for shortly after
his return to Malacca, an extensive conspiracy was formed, in which
they assumed a prominent part against the Dutch Government, in the
denouement of which, two Dutch officers lost their lives at the hands
of the natives. The following paragraph from the records gives us an
insight into the method employed by the Dutch of this period, in
“persuading the refractory Manikabowes to return from the state of
barbarism under which they had the misfortune to labour.”

Well might Lord Minro, the conqueror of Java, commit to the
flames with indignant hands, those instruments of torture, so long
a disgrace to a city over whose ancient ruins the British flag
waved*,

This document is dated ‘‘ Malacca, 16th August, 1644.”

«« What an abominable treason and conspiracy have we not dis-
covered in Naning in the conduct of five Malays, named Incui Iam,
Bonesoz, Srurar, Porrara, and a slave of the name of Parcuuim,
who had been compelled by his master to join the conspirators against
Malacca. We have often trusted Iram with letters to the chiefs at
Naning and Rumbowe, but he has performed our commands in a very
unfaithful manner, by laying secret schemes with the said chiefs
against us, and three different times he swore fealty in favor of them,
against our Government, that he would not discover and make known
to us any plan which our enemy might project against our interest,
and if we should purpose to despatch a force thither, he would give
timely notice to them of our design. Moreover, he had undertaken to
lead 1,000 Manikdbowes to Malacca, in order to attack and destroy the
settlement. All this he did, and dissembled with us. Incu1, Sruuap,
Bonesoz, and Purrara were fora considerable length of time our inhabi-
tants, and were together with the troops where Captains ForsenBrera
and Meniz were murdered ; since which time, they have taken uparms
against our Government, and threatened to murder us in our council

* His Lordship, after the taking of Java, presented Malacca with a full length
portrait of himself, in which the burning of the instruments of torture is repre-
sented. The picture was formerly suspended in the Stadt-house, but now adorns
the court-house of Malacca.

Q

306 On the Government and History of (Jung,

chamber, and to run a muck against any one who would oppose them.
They did also pledge that they would set the town on fire, and retire
to the country with their wives and children. We were long of inten-
tion to punish these traitors, but have with the advice of our council
defered the execution thereof until the return of our commissioner
Snoveg from Johore. But the following is now resolved :

«That Incu1 Iram be tortured to death, and his body be exposed
on a gibbet.”

‘That Sizzape and Bonesor be decapitated, and their bodies be
divided into four parts, and exposed in several conspicuous places.”

‘That Porrara be beheaded, his head placed upon a gibbet, his
body separated, and exposed in several conspicuous places. He has
confessed to be guilty of horrid crimes.”

« That Parcuium the slave, be acquitted, and set atlarge, as it is prov-
ed that he has not taken up arms against us, and has been constrained
by his master to join the said conspirators. Moreover, he was the
medium of discovering the conspiracy.”

«‘God preserve Malacca and all states and fortresses from such
evil-designing people.”

“The villages of Naning and Rumbowe continue in a rebellious
state, the blockade of the river Panagy, (the Rumbowe and Naning
branch of the Lingi river,) by us is still carried on. Some days past,
two Rumbowe people have been seized by our inhabitants in the
river Muar. We had them executed; their heads were placed on
stakes, and their bodies on gibbets.”

‘‘God grant that we may apprehend some more of these traitors,
they shall all be dealt with in this way.”

«« By the disasters which had taken place at Naning, the continu-
ance of the rebellion excited by the insolent Manikabowes, and the dif-
fidence subsisting between this republic and the states of Johore, the
minor trade of this place has of late been decreasing, the supply of
all necessaries prevented, and the plantations along the river-side
deserted and abandoned ; for fear of the Manikdbowes, nobody would
venture to cultivate their gardens in those places. The revenue of
the settlement has in consequence diminished, and the inhabitants
very much disheartened. Even the people in the surrounding states
are not exempt from fear on this acconnt. We shall find it there-
fore expedient to conclude a permanent peace with the states of Johore,
by which means, it will be in our power topunish the Naning and Rum-
bowe people. We shall endeavour to treat all the subjects of the
chief of Johore ina friendly manner, and permit them to visit our
settlement without molestation.”

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 307

The Dutch for a considerable period afterwards experienced much
annoyance from the daring aggressions of these hardy natives, who
advanced in hordes within a musket shot of the fort, and up to the
very borders of the entrenchments, plundering and laying waste to the
gardens and houses in the vicinity, and destroying the plantations at
Bukit China. Government, at last, though not without considerable
expence and bloodshed, succeeded in restoring tranquillity.

In 1651, the Panghaléi Sri Raja Merau was publicly thanked for
his services in the apprehension of a runaway slave from Malacca,
guilty of murder. In 1652, he, with his three sons and two of the
principal chiefs of Naning, came down to Malacca, and presented to
Government a quantity of pepper as ‘‘an ordinary tribute.” On this
occasion, he was honored in return by the gift of a Malay sarasah,
one piece of red cloth, one of white cloth, and a piece of white
bafta.

Inferior presents were likewise bestowed upon his three sons and
the two chiefs.

In November, 1652, we find the following minute, which goes to
disprove the power of inflicting capital punishment, without reference
to the Malacca Government, which of later years the ex-Panghili
Duot Sayap arrogated to himself.

** Pursuant to our order of the 30th October last, a letter was
written in reply by Mr. Emanusi pv Moutyn to the chiefs of Nan-
ing, conveying our sentiments and surprise at the atrocities which
had been of late perpetrated at Naning, and the summary manner
with which the offender was put to death by the commands of the
chiefs in the case of Rajah Meran’s son-in-law, who attempted to
destroy his wife and father-in-law. This we must confess is a hor-
rid deed, but at all events, the offender should have been delivered in-
to our hands, and a regular course of trial in our court be instituted
against him. But when we take into consideration the sincere contri-
tion expressed at what they have done, we could not but impute it to
their ignorance, and it is therefore proper that we should not notice
it this time with that severity and censure, which under any other
circumstances it would be our bounden duty as lord paramount to
exercise,”

** We observe that there is another individual of the name of Incut
Jumat, who has shewn many instances of insubordination, and is
fully proved to have run a muck, and attempted the life of his chief at
Naning. We have resolved in council, at the suggestion of the chiefs
and inhabitants of Naning, and places subordinate thereto, that the
said Incu1 Jumat be put to death, and sincerely trust, that after the

Q 2

308 On the Government and History of (Jun,

extinction of such a dangerous character as the said Jumar, the dis-
trict of Naning will revert to its former tranquillity and happiness.”

The subjoined document, dated 27th May, 1664, bears upon the
collection of the duty on the produce of Naning.

** The captain of Naning and the chiefs preferred in council a
complaint against Marra Sitvens, collector of the customs on Sirth
brought from Naning, that he has not attended to the usual mode of
levying the duty on this article.”

«« The measure which it seems he has adopted is this—after receiv-
ing the duty, he would detain the people about five days, until the
quantity collected by him has been disposed of, by which means, the
Sirih remaining on their hands, became unfit for consumption, and
consequently not saleable. Through his negligence, the Bongsal, (reve-
nue store-house) in which this article is deposited, and wherein the
Naning people are compelled to take shelter at night, had become
very dilapidated ; nor has he troubled himself in the least to put the
building in a proper repair for the accommodation of these persons, who
were under the necessity of violating the prescribed rules, by taking
up their lodgings in different parts of the town, which expedient has
been attended with much inconvenience and disagreement amongst
the Naning people.”

«« With a view to preserve good order and tranquillity, another in-
dividual shall be appointed in the room of Maria Siivens, who it
would appear is also desirous to tender his resignation. We have
therefore deemed it advisable, at the suggestion of Raja Mzran,
and the chiefs of Naning, to nominate ANTHONY PinseRo and MaNvuEL
Frerg, as collectors of the duty on Sirih brought from Naning. The
president of our council having observed, that Manuen Frere is more
conversant in Malay language, and customs of those people, than the
first mentioned individual, has considered it expedient to propose him
for the performance of this duty, in which motion we unanimously
concurred, and have consequently nominated the said Manuxt Frere
provisionally, to execute the functions of a collector of the aforesaid
duty, and superintendent of the Bongsal, until our further orders.”

** Early in 1680, the agreement made in 1641, by Van Twist,
was renewed, during Governor General RisHior Van Gorn’s adminis-
tration by the then Land-voogd of Malacca, Jacoz Jarissoon Pits,
‘ with the ambassadors of Naning and Rumbowe, on behalf of the
king of Johore,’ with these additions, viz. ‘ that a duty of ten per cent.
ad valorem be paid to the Company on the sales of the pepper.’ The
Company promise to give an adequate subsistence to the chief at
Naning, besides one-tenth of the collected revenue.”

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 309

“Each boat coming down from Naning will pay a duty of one cru-
sadoe to the Company.” It appears by this treaty that the custom of
dividing the property of the natives of Naning, dying without heirs,
was introduced by the Portuguese prior to the capture of Malacca by
the Dutch ; we also find that all slaves flying from Naning to Malacca
with intent of embracing the Christian faith will be emancipated, and
the value of the same will be paid to their ancestors.

The Naning people likewise bound themselves not to trade with
foreign nations, but to convey their merchandize down the river to
Malacca.

In 1703, the Malacca Government appointed Sri Maharaja Juara
Magar, as Panghalu of Naning, for a service done to the king of
Johore, which will be shortly mentioned, and in consequence of the
incapacity and infirmities of the then Panghila Sri R4j&é Meran,
who had forwarded to Government the Company’s signet, which he
had been permitted to use as a token of his delegated authority.

The following are the instructions received by the commissioners
deputed for the installation of the new chief at Naning. They present
@ curious specimen of the native policy of the Dutch.

** Malacca, 5th May, 1703.

‘** Instructions given by Bernarp PHoonsen, Governor and Direc-
tor of the town and fortress of Malacca in Council, to Petsr ANTHONY
FieaRepo, burgher, and Incu1 Aroom, head man of the Malays at this
place, for their guidance in respect to the installation of the newly
nominated chief at Naning Sri Ra4jé Merau, and the conduct which
they should pursue during their stay at that place.”

Ist. ‘* On your arrival at Naning, you shall wait upon the Orang
Kaya Sri Raja Merau, in our name, and present him the accompanying
letter, and congratulate him on his retiring from office, which we
have granted him at his own request, and in consideration of his ad-
vanced age; and inform him, that his brother has been nominated to
fill the vacant office, for which he has received the arms of the East
India Company as a mark of his authority.”

2nd. ‘‘ You shall require the chiefs at Naning to pay all due re-
spects and submission to the authority who holds the said seals, and
with regard to the navigation of the river by boats, they shall invari-
ably conduct themselves as we have desired.”

3rd. “ Two days after your arrival, you shall nominate and appoint
the new chief in the name of the East India Company, and command
all persons to pay every respect, and shew due submission to him ;
in failure thereof, they shall be liable to punishment.”

4th. “‘ You shall diligently inquire into the case of Ssataum and
his followers, in order that we might be thoroughly informed whether

310 On the Government and History of (June,

he has been justly or unjustly accused, as we have heard repeated
complaints against the present reigning chief; but you must not omit to
caution SeaTHUM, as well as his followers, to attend to all orders and
requisitions enforced by the East India Company.”

5th. ‘“* That the sentence, which shall be pronounced by them
against an offender, must, in the first instance, be approved of, and
confirmed by us, before it can be put into execution. Such sentences
are also liable to be cancelled and altered by us, and our will must be
punctually attended to.”

6th. ‘“‘ They shall apprehend and send to town all evil disposed
persons and offenders, who may from time to time take shelter in the
districts of Naning. If resistance should be made on the part of
these persons, they shall use violence in seizing them, for we would
rather see them put to death than that one should escape with impu-
nity.” :

7th. ‘* No individual from town, or plantations on the river side,
shall be permitted to proceed to Naning without previous intimation
being given to the Shahbandar, or Malay translator, who will issue
on application a written permission to that effect ; and we direct that
all persons, not furnished with such license, be ordered to quite Nan-
ing, and return to the place from whence they came.”

8th. ‘* The inhabitants of Naning shall be permitted to export and
bring to market in town all sorts of minerals, timbers, fruits, &c., ex-
cept Sirih leaves. Our reason for forbidding the importation of this
article has been several times conveyed to them. In return they
shall be permitted to take to Naning from hence all sorts of provi-
sions and necessaries.”

The following account of the circumstances attending Juara Ma-
cat's elevation is related on native authority.

Sultan Aspuz Jauit Suau III., king of Johore, wrote a letter to the
chief of the Malays at Malacca, then Capitan Malayu, Datru Aru’,
stating, that one of his subjects, Ganta Dexanair, had carried off one
of the royal concubines to Malacca; and desiring him most earnestly
to render assistance in wiping off this stain on his honor. The Capitan
on the receipt of this epistle summoned Juara Magar from Naning,
and ordered him to seek out Denanert, to put him to death, and to
bring down the concubine of the Sultan to Malacca.

To this, it is said, Juara readily assented, but requested a kris from
the Capitan for the purpose, who gave him the choice of the whole
of his weapons, and on Juara’s not finding one “ lucky” enough,
desired him to go to the armourer’s shop in town, and make his own
selection. Juara turned into a Chinese shop, near the Trangueira
gate, where after rejecting all the inlayed and beautifully damasked

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 311

weapons offered him by the armourer, selected an old rusty looking
kris, blackened by the smoke and resin of the dammer torches, to the
trimming of which it had been constantly applied. He then returned
to the Capitan, and informed his astonished employer that the rejected
weapon he held in his hand, was the kris destined to pour out the
blood of Deuaneir as a sacrifice to the insulted honor of the Sultana.

With this wonderful weapon (fit companion for the enchanted
sword of king ArTHur), Juara returned to Naning. But Denanair,
hearing of his purpose, had already fled thence into Muar, and concealed
himself with the concubine amid the fastnesses of that wild country.
Thither the persevering Juara tracked his victim, and coming up
with him at the mouth of the river, plunged the fatal steel deep into
his heart.

The concubine he conveyed in safety to Malacca, whence she was
sent, with an account of what had occurred, by the Capitan, to the
Sultan of Jonors. The Sultén recommended Jvara to the Dutch
government, who made him Panghald of Naning; and bestowed on
him as mark of royal favor, two slaves, a man and woman; (from
whom the Siku or tribe at present known by the appellation of Tiga
Nenek sprang ;) a sword, termed Uldr-kenyang, ‘‘ the satiated serpent,”
a silk baju or vest, and lastly, a tract of the Gominchi territory, hence
called Pembdshi Tungan. To the Capitan Malayu was given a piece
of land extending from Kleybang to the Sungi Baru river, and inland
to Bertam. The title Sri Raja Meraun, the sword, Baju, and a genea-
logical book, generally preserved in the families of Malayan princes
and noblemen, called Sz/selah, have descended to Juara’s succes-
sors as a Kabesaran, or regalia.

Juara Magar was succeeded, agreeably to the Mendngkabowe law
of succession, by his sister’s son, Kuxan ; to Kuxan succeeded Ean-
GARANG or Muzana Garane, Jancot, TamBan, and Ansax or Buxit
Jooror. The present ex-Panghili Asput Sayan or Duon Sayan, suc-
ceeded his uncle Ansax, in 1801, when he was confirmed in his
office by the British Resident at Malacca, colonel Taytor,

When Asput Saran had control in Naning, the Kabesdran of his
ancestors was kept in a house-shaped chest, and was only publicly
produced once a year. Its contents were perfumed with the smoke
arising from acenser of odoriferous gums, and washed with water and
rice-flour, by the sacred hands of the Panghali himself. On their
being exhibited, the superstitious natives, not even daring to look at
these miraculous relics, fell prostrate with their foreheads pressed to
the earth, exclaiming, Dowlet, dowlet !

The properties ascribed to the sword are those generally known by
Malays under the term Betuah, which, among other meanings, has that

312 On the Government and History of [JuneE,

of any thing imparting invulnerability and irresistability to the wearer.
Secret enemies are detected, by their involuntarily trembling in the
august presence of the weapon. The silk bdji, it is believed, will fit
none but the Panghili or the person destined to become his succes-
sor. And to thisday, it is firmly credited by many of the Malays, that
the elder brother of Aspun Sayan was rejected from the Panghuliship
solely on account of his inability to get his head through the neck of
the vest, which is represented to be so small, as scarcely to admit of
the insertion of two fingers.

The truth of the matter is, that he was set aside by the Ampat
Suku, on account of his unfitness, and unpopularity. How the ex-
Panghilui contrived to slip his large head through the silken vest
must still remain matter of conjecture to the learned.

In 1795, the English took possession of Malacca and Naning ;
of the latter, under the same terms as the Dutch had held possession.
In 1802, Colonel Taynor, the Resident at Malacca, made treaty with
the ex-Panghilé and the Ampat Saki. Among other stipulations, it
was agreed on that the Panghili chiefs, Menangkabowes or Malays
of Naning, do pay one-tenth of the produce of the soil to the East
India Company ; but in consideration of their poverty, it is resolved,
that instead of paying the tenth, the Panghili come in person an-
nually to Malacca, and present 400 gantams of paddy to Government.
And further, that ‘‘ the Panghala and chiefs promise, in the name of
the said community of Naning, that whenever the chief rulers happen
to resign the Government, or any misfortune befal them, they shall
in such case propose one of the nearest and most qualified of his
family to the Governor of Malacca, for his successor; but it is not
expected that such a proposal must always meet the Governor’s ap-
probation ; on the contrary, it is optional with him, whom he thinks
proper to appoint.”

Colonel Farqunar became Resident of Malacca in 1803, and in
1809, reserved to the British Government, the power of inflicting
capital punishment on criminals in Naning. The duty of one crusadoe,
on boats coming down from Naning, was withdrawn.

In 1810, the Dutch again assumed possession of Malacca. In
1822, Governor TimMERMAN TuyssEN, had caused a statement of
the land’s produce of Naning to be drawn out, and transmitted it to
the Netherlands Government at Batavia, with the ulterior view of
levying the tenth. But before their decision was received, the British
flag was again hoisted at Malacca. This took place in April, 1825.
Up to this period, the 400 gantams, in lieu of the tenth, had been
annually paid by the different Panghilas of Naning. In 1827, the
Panghtlé and Ampat Siku, came down to Malacca to pay their re-

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 313

spects to the new Resident, Mr. Garuine, who had been appointed in
1826. In 1828, Mr. Lewis, Assistant Resident, proceeded to Tabu,
the capital (if a village be so called) of Naning, with the view of mak-
ing arrangements with the chiefs, for putting that territory on the
same footing as the Malacca lands, which, in pursuance of Mr.
Fuuparton’s plans, had been transferred, on the 15th of March,
1828, by the private landholders, for the aggregate annual sum
of 17,000 Sicca Rupees, to Government, from the Ist of Novem-
ber, 1828, but afterwards fixed from the Ist of June, until such period
as the British flag should continue to fly at Malacca. Mr. Lewis was
empowered to offer the Panghtlu the sum of 600 Spanish dollars,
and each of the Ampat Suki, 50 per annum, provided they would con-
sent to transfer their lands to Government, in order that the tenth
might be levied thereon, as well as on the Malacca lands.

These proposals met with a refusal.

In 1829, Mr. Cuurcn, Deputy Resident, was sent to Sungi-puttye,
on the Naning frontier, to confer with the Panghali, with instructions
to make known to him that Naning was an integral part of Malacca,
and that it was intended by Government to subject it also to the
general regulations affecting the rest of the Malacca territory, but
directed no immediate levying of this duty. He was further instructed
to take a census, and to make it known, that all offenders, except in
trivial matters, must be sent down in future to Malacca for trial. Mr.
Cuourcu, on the partof Government, offered the Panghilé and Ampat
Saké pensions as a compensation.

The census was allowed to be taken, but the rest of these conditions
met with an absolute negative.

When Mr. Fuuzarton arrived, he wrote to the Panghilié, who had
not presented himself with the annual tribute, summoning him to Ma-
lacca, but without effect. An expedition was then proposed to be sent
to chastise the sturdy chief; but deferred, pending a reference to the
Supreme Government. The Panghilé still further committed him-
self by the forcible and injustifiable seizure of a Duson, at Panchur,
within the Malacca boundary, the hereditary property of IncH1 Surin.

This man preferred his plaint to Government, and in consequence
another message was dispatched.

~The Panghila’s answer set forth a determination to retain the
Duson, affirming it to be his own property, and impeaching the right of
Government to interfere. A proclamation was now published, declaring,
that Aspu. Sayap had forfeited all his claims, and was thenceforth no
longer Panghalié of Naning.
RR

314 | On the Government and History of (June,

Such are the principal circumstances leading to the expedition in
August, 1831, its failure, and the subsequent successful operations in
1832.

Tabu fell on the 15th June, 1832, Asput Sayan having barely time
to carry off his family and his Kabesaran. The chest in which these
relics were deposited fell into the hands of the troops. The Panghili
fled first to Condong in Rumbowe, thence to Miko, and finally to Passir,
in Sriminanti. Here he left his family, and has been wandering
about the interior for some time past. After the evacuation of Tabu,
he paid several pious visits to the tombs of his ancestors, who there
lie buried ; he has since returned to Srimin4nti, where he lives in indi-
gence, and would probably come in on terms and deliver himself up
to Government.

His private property and lands have been confiscated.

The Ampat Saki fled to Sabang, but finally separated and sought
asylum in the neighbouring states. The two Mantris, Mztana Haxim
and Gompor, who principally instigated their chief to rebellion, are at
Miko, (since returned.)

Mr. Iserson visited Naning in the ensuing October, and created
15 Panghilis over the different Mukims, or parishes, into which the
country is divided, and thereby abolished the ancient power of the
Panghilii and Ampat Suki.

The office of these newly elected chiefs is to preserve peace and quiet
in their respective Mukims ; to examine into and decide matters of little
importance. Cases of a heavy nature are to be referred invariably to.
Government, and not as formerly to the Ampat Sukd, or heads of tribes,
whose authority is now at an end.

They are to assist in the collection of the revenue, and apprehension
of criminals ; and are constituted as authorized channels of communica-
tion between the Government and the peasantry.

They derive no further emolument from their office, than part of
their own lands, and produce being exempt from duty: this is also en-
joyed by the four priests of each mosque.

On the 27th of October, 1832, Government took the judicious step
of placing Naning and its new system of internal administration,
under the superintendence of Mr. Westrrnovut, a gentleman not
only eminently qualified for the task by his perfect knowledge of the
Malay character and capabilities, but on account of his extensive in-
fluence with the principal persons of the district and neighbouring
independent states.

The terms under which Mr. Wzstzeruour undertook the settlement
of the country are principally as follows: that he shall have the whole

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 315

of the tenth collected in Naning, until the 30th April, 1834, his travel.
ling expences to be defrayed on the usual scale. Mr. WestTeruout
is to introduce and establish the collection of the tenth, he shall make
a census of the population, number of houses, &c. The quantity of
grain sown by each individual is to be ascertained by him; also the
extent of ground belonging to those individuals who are exempt
from paying the duty. He shall likewise ascertain the quantity and
nature of the lands, lately the property of Doot Sayan, and send in a
return to Government of the new Panghilis and places under their au-
thority. The expediency of a number of wells being sunk at intervals
of half a mile apart, along the Naning boundary-line with Rumbowe
and Johore, was also suggested by Government.

On the 9th of January, 1833, Mr. Westrernout met the Rumbowe
chiefs at Sungi seaport, near the frontiers of Rumbowe, to arrange
the respective boundaries. The boundary line agreed on follows the
ancient one as far as Jirat Gunji, from thence as stated before.

The Rumbowe chiefs revived some old claims to the Ramoan Chi-
nas, stating, that in their old boundary papers, the line passed from
Qualla Lingi over Bukit Bruang, and through Ramoan China, &c. to
Padang Chachar.

We also find the Raja of Salangore making a somewhat similar
claim, in 1804, encroaching on the Company’s territories as far as Sun-
gi Baru. (Vide AnpuRson’s Considerations, page 203.)

They however readily ceded the point, when informed that accord-
ing to all European copies of former treaties, the boundary-line in that
quarter was the Lingi river, and that the Ramoan Chinas had always
been private property under the Dutch and English Government.

Thecountry, since the taking of Tabu, has been occupied by the Madras
troops; but as its security has progressed, and the inhabitants have
became more and more settled, the force has been gradually diminished.
Distress and poverty are still too visible. These powerful agents, ope-
rating on a few desperate characters, have produced, in many instances,
the natural results, robbery and murder. The newly-created Panghilis,
with families, crying out for food at home, and fearful for their own
personal safety, are at present very far from being useful as a police;
in time to come, after the machine has once received a proper impulse,
the inhabitants returned to their rice-fields, and the ex-Panghala, now
dwelling in the neighbouring state of Sriminanti, disposed of, then
the troops may be withdrawn, or concentrated in a centrical post, and
the Panghilts, with their Mata Matas, may then be found sufficient
for the duties required of them; but at present they stand more in

RR2

316 On the Government and History of [JunE,

need of support themselves, than they are able to afford it to the
wretched rayats under them.

Most part of the above was written while in camp at Alor Gajeh,
a place situated nearly in the centre of Naning, about 12 miles from
the Rumbowe frontier, during part of 1832, and the beginning of
1833. Since this period, up to the present (1834), the inhabitants
have, with few exceptions, returned to their native villages. The
ex-Panghila came down from Srimin4nti, and surrendered himself
unconditionally to Government, on the 5th of February, 1834.

He has been permitted to reside at Malacca, and draw a salary from
Government of 30 Sicca Rupees per mensem ; has been sanctioned on
this condition of his binding himself in 1000 Spanish dollars, and
finding two securities in 500 Spanish dollars each, that he shall be
forthcoming whenever called upon.

He has since this resided at Malacca, where he has received much
attention from all classes of the native population. He isa hale, stout
man, apparently about 50 years of age, of a shrewd and observant dis-
position, though highly imbued with the superstitions of his tribe.
His supernatural efficacy in the cure of diseases is still firmly believed
in, as that of certain kings of England was at no very remote period
by their enlightened and scrofulous subjects; and his house is the
daily resort of the health-seeking followers of Muhammed, Foh, Brah-
ma, and Buddh.

The census of 1833-4, has exceeded those of former years, amount.
ing to men, women, and children, 5,079. Although by the Muham-
medan law, a Musalman enjoys the privilege of possessing four wives,
provided he can maintain them, yet we find in Naning the number of
males exceeds that of females by one hundred and sixty-one.

Montesquieu, I believe, in a defence of polygamy among Asiatics,
adduces as a cause the superior comparative number of females pre-
vailing in the East. The population of Naning, like that of other
Malayan states of the peninsula, is in a low state; in absence of other
causes, generally assigned by political economists for this deficiency,
may be ascribed the natural unproductiveness of the females: few
bearing more than six children: the ravages of the small-pox, un-
checked by inoculation or vaccination ; the immoderate and constant
practice of smoking opium, by those able to purchase this pernicious
drug ; and, perhaps, may be added, the poverty prevailing in many of
its villages. The Malays, equally with other followers of Islam, are
religiously bound to marry ; hence we perceive few unmarried persons
who have arrived at years of puberty. Prostitution and its attendant
evils are extremely uncommon.

1835.] Naning in the Malay Peninsula. 317

I have observed many instances of longevity in the interior ; seven-
ty or eighty years is an age by no means rare. An instance of 120
years, has been related to me, on respectable authority, occurring in the
person of Darru Puan, a native of Lubo Koppong, in Naning, who
died some years ago at Sungi Baru. This truly patriarchal old man
lived to see his descendants in the fifth generation.

Produce of 1833-4.—The last rice crops were not so abundant as
expected, owing toa bad season, and the employment of the newly
returned inhabitants in rebuilding their houses, repairing the Ampan-
gans, or dams thrown across the rivers, for purposes of irrigation. The
total produce of paddy amounted to 137,985 gantams. The tenth
levied on this, and the other articles of produce, covered the expences
of the district of Naning witha small overplus. The face of the
country now presents every where the prospect of a plentiful harvest.

The Malacca lands, ceded during Mr. Futtarton’s administration,
by the Dutch proprietors to the British Government, in 1828, have
however by no means repaid the expence of holding them, being a
heavy annual loss to the Company. This I think is principally to be
attributed to the extravagant compensation sums paid yearly, for the
tenure right to the proprietors. Other causes operating indirectly
on the revenue, to account for a small portion of this deficiency, exist ;
for instance, the Sirih farm.

Collection of the Revenue.—The tenth* on the rice crops is levied
in Naning much in the same manner asin the ceded lands, just men-
tioned, in the vicinity of Malacca.

When the grain is ripe, a person on the part of Government visits
the rice-fields, attended by the owner, the Panghili, or Mata Matas of
the village, and several of the oldest inhabitants on the spot, in
order to agree on and assess its value. Regarding this point, a differ-
ence of opinion is naturally to be expected to arise between the taxer
and the taxed. This is generally submitted to the arbitration of the
Panghila and the village elders. But should these persons again
assess the crop at a lower value than the collector’s agent really
thinks it worth, the latter has still the resource of offering to purchase
the whole of the crop on the part of Government at the price the

* The sovereign’s right to the tenth has been from time immemorial acknow-
ledged in Malayan states. This custom is very ancient, and appears to have pre-
vailed over a great portion of the known world, and among nations of a very dif-
ferent character and religion ; for instance, the Jews, the Gauls, the Chaldeans,
the Egyptians, the Greeks, and the Romans. It was originally offered to the gods,
and their priests ; and then to sovereigns, who not frequently united the sacer-
dotal functions. with their temporal powers,

318 On the Government and History of Naning, &c. [June,

owner has justly valued it. This has been done ina few cases, I
believe, and has been invariably refused. It is not therefore improvba-
ble, all circumstances taken into consideration, that not more than 7 or
8 per cent. at the most ever finds its way into the Company’s godowns.
The tenth in kind on paddy is sold whenever a good price can be
procured for it on the spot, and the proceeds lodged in the treasury.
The tenth on the other articles of land produce is levied at tolls
placed at the entrances into Naning from Malacca, and there imme-
diately sold.

Much inconvenience and loss is experienced by Government, through
this uncertain mode of collecting the revenue. The tax itself too, as
it rises with the produce, operates practically as a check to progressive
increase in the cultivation.

A pecuniary compensation, or commutation, of the duty on the
sawahs, or wet lands, fixed for a definite period, not less than five
years, would be far more advantageous and convenient to both parties.
It should be very moderate for the first period, during which the
amount of the crops for each successive season should be carefully
ascertained, as well as the increased quantity of land that would na-
turally be brought under cultivation. To such an arrangement the
Naning cultivators are by no means averse, but they object to it with
regard to the Jadang, or dry land crops.

The desultory mode of cultivation known under the term ladang,
of which Mr. Marspren has given an excellent description in his
History of Sumatra, chap. iv., forms one of the principal obstacles
to the introduction of the new land regulations into a Malayan coun-
try. Added to this, is the notorious dislike the Malays entertain to
innovation and change, and their innate love of liberty and freedom
from all shackles. They have a strong aversion to be bound down
to the performance of any thing, even in matters which would afford
them much amusement and pleasure, were they to act from free will
and choice.

I am not aware of the /adang mode of cultivation offering any other
advantages to the Malays, further than the charms of a wandering
and shifting state of life.

The ladang rice, however, is affirmed by some to be sweeter and
whiter, and to keep better than the produce of the sawah.

Although it is certain, that the chief present object is to improve
and extend the agriculture of Naning, still its mineral resources
should not be neglected.

At Bukit Bertam, gold was formerly procured, and considerable
quantities of tin are known to exist throughout the district, particu-

5 al
~ . .
ra Ze : ih j
7 ;
‘ '
2 ¥
DY /
4 ¥ my
oa she
2 4 vers ve hia ven | y ‘ Gale \ 7 * :
S —s 4 eit = -
Bare ee
38 SK Mik ? at Ha Fite - ¢
iS
te
eae eS . ‘
4 ey, ,
Paat 4 Pk? Y
* > t
re S
‘ 4
7 ba * Y :
' Pra 5
_ geht
ai ‘
}
ae ;
r, ,
* ¥ y sah ‘ ,

.
Piel aha tiuaivtah 3 .
j “ wy a
« 7 4“ he ¥
wy } | ?
a ke i ri bi
, ? 1"
1
i” S Geen ‘
an ide, ze Pen de ti
a Ae wight ai yi thy eee git = .
aint ¥ Se Matieetele say Mf SETS wie .

eb OTs Vat ~ Bas f 4i% / : F
e334 had sf sbi DE eos! F s a a
to ‘

—_ J)

Vot IV. Pl. XVHI.

Jour. a6. Soc.

cg
Poitier, Br 2.
ae gE, ofbgnyy” BF cr or 8 br
OB FE Nn <P Re BF

PW ELUM EL N° PLPO208 Pos DULL 7 ,'f OOp UDA vvaH

*

6 Cop PIN) LN, ok EWG SLIM IEV M PF 08M» J COP UO DOP 07 VY ap jo]
z ae MOE ers jak : 2
purs pmy Ee oi 968s AUWod f'
74 ox 61 BE OL SF BF br oy or 06 a
Si DISIP PUD SF
in z SIPUDSIP PUD SPIILVIT
0% ;
Be gait Pee
: rq
One

200 yO bry 40
rE abe

peyuog

SJuDpgvyn doz °2
yopay

a.

ob °

= oor
aa — Oo “{ ie Le
2 a 06 fp iu0y 72: 4
YpLONS 00°00 Z ofVT so “n pote ag ee nt ae oe

204 oor .$? ' mere . 06, ie Mie
= g GB oe ee Ree

oor

bee TOV Yo g oop uve vafy

oor 8 > oor UDIDJVUIDE) ee a Be
pM DOP YIU) £ OFDPE’ we pop.musp.roo4
a ee ole EEE 20k ou
ex :
oe havaioy, plo) BS
Ad Qm
r Sad
A@AINS oe} OY} wo.d] gs
0 aN
SHAIMT VY 0? (VAM THY, x

DY)

hi

+

1835.] Survey of the Maldive Islands. 319

larly at Bukit Kuiktsan, Stingi Bilu, Uli Pondoi, and Sandi, near
Tabu. At the latter place, Mr. Wesreruovut has opened a mine, of
the first produce of which I possess a very favorable specimen. There
is in fact but little doubt that the mines in the vicinity of Malacca,
if scientifically worked by persons of some little capital and persever-
ance, would prove of much intrinsic value ; and otherwise benefit the
country, by attracting into it an enterprising and industrious popu-
lation.

The want of capital, and consequent haste to convert the produce
into cash, is the great drawback, not only to mining speculations, but
to the cultivation of pepper, and other spices, requiring still more time
before yielding any return to the cultivator.

Colonel Farquyar might perhaps have been a little too enthusi-
astic in affirming, that ‘‘ nature has been profusely bountiful to the
Malay peninsula, in bestowing on it a climate the most agreeable and
salubrious, a soil luxuriantly fertilized by numerous rivers, and the
face of the country diversified with hills and valleys, mountains and
plains, forming the most beautiful and interesting scenery that is pos-
sible for the imagination to figure,” &c. &c. But nothing could be
truer and better founded than his observation, viz. ‘‘ We have only
to lament that a more enterprising and industrious race of inhabitants
than the Malays should not have possessed this delightful region.”

Il.—Description of Heavandoo Pholo, the Northern Atoll of the
Maldive Islands. By Lieut. T. Powrut, I. N. Assistant Surveyor.
Plate XVIII.

GEOGRAPHICAL siTE, The Atoll Heavandoo Pholo, or head of the Mal-
dives, situated upon the meridian of Bombay, and between the parallels
of 7° 7’ and 6° 55’, north latitude, consists of twenty-two islands, two
islets, and two sand-banks, besides several small shoals and two large
barrier reefs; the latter form the boundary of the Atoll tothe S. W., W.,
and N. W., and along the outer age are dry at low-water spring-tides:
outside they are steep, having 50 and 60 fathoms close to them, and no
ground at 150 fathoms, at the distance of 300 yards.

The northern or principal barrier has 10 islands, and two small
islets on it : one of the latter, on its southern extremity, being close to
Heavandoo : these are all situated on the inner side of the reef, having
three or four, and in some places six fathoms water between them and
its outer edge, with small channels for boats between each, formed by
the natives having cleared away the coral rocks. Nearly in the centre
of the Atoll there are three small islands; the eastern side is clear of

320 Survey of the Maldive Islands. [Juns,

shoals, with the exception of two small patches between Gullandoo and
Mooradoo ; but on the western, there are several nearly dry, and some
sunken patches, having from 3 to |0 fathoms on them. The soundings
vary from 20 to 34 fathoms, the latter being the greatest depth of
water obtained.

Porunation. Of the twenty-two islands composing this Atoll, there
are only seven inhabited, viz. Heavandoo, Koorafooree, Katefooree,
Turracoon, Colligaum, Beeramerdoo, and Mooradoo. In the margin* I
have noted the number of inhabitants and boats upon each, by which it
will be seen, that the population, including men, women, and children,
does not exceed 760 individuals. The boats are all employed in fishing :
the trade between this Atoll and Tilla Dow Madow, whence they are
supplied with such articles as they reyguire, being carried on in those
of the latter.

The islands are so similar in form and natural productions, that
it would be a waste of time to describe them separately. I shall there-
fore give a sketch of Heavandoo, the island of greatest importance in
this group; not so much on account of its size, as from its being the
residence of the Sult4n’s Vizier when he visits the Atoll. It is of a trian-
gular form, about one mile in length, and is composed of coral, eleva-
ted about 12 feet above the level of the sea. The western side is
thickly covered with cocoanut and bread-fruit trees ; and the northern
and eastern, with thick brush wood : the interior, which is 3 or 4 feet
lower than the sides, has been cleared by the inhabitants for the pur-
pose of cultivating a small grain called Bimbi. The supply, however,
which with the exception of a few sweet potatoes, pumpions, and limes,
forming the only vegetable production of the island, is not sufficient for
their support. The village, consisting of about 50 huts and 150 in-
habitants, stands on the S. W. side. The huts, surrounded by spaci-
ous inclosures, are in general constructed of a frame-work of
the wood of the cocoanut tree, the interstices filled up with leaves
stitched together, and the roof neatly thatched with the same material.
In the vicinity there are good paths intersecting the island in different
directions, which, being kept remarkably clean by the women, form’

*® Island. Population. No. of Boats.
Fl cavandoo sss icis/oc die cle cvietslcleicidste stalda at 150 6
Kn OrgfOOree ir. si.) .-isisiaeisiniieketersienaeiite 160 5
IBN UONOA Gn Gooden deasdae G5odoqunor 70 3
PLUIELACOOM ste ocie’elc vals s siaisiere eteree erteictets 50 2
CoOWigamy | cite ssi, ioe ee hela ore eens * 150 4
Bebramenrdooys',. «,sieis's wee bee alets omlesiee 30 2
IMGOr AGOGO Siraaisis) spies acess s cetacean tetas 150 5

1835.) Survey of the Maldive Islands. 321

pleasant walks, shaded from the sun by the thick foliage of the cocoa-
nut and other trees. Like the natives of the other Atolls they gain their
livelihood by fishing. Cocoanuts, and the fish called by them Goom-le-
mus (Boneta), which are caught in great quantities, form their princi-
pal food: rice, being imported, is very scarce, and only procurable by
the better class of inhabitants. Fresh water is plentiful, wells having
been dug in almost every quarter of the island ; but the best is procured
from those situated in the burying ground. Fowls are abundant on all
the islands, but not easily procured, being remarkably wild and difficult
to catch, and the natives too indolent to take the trouble necessary to
secure them. Money, for which they have little use, will not fetch its
full value; rice, tobacco, and betel-nuts being the best medium of
barter.
WEATHER.

October. The winds moderate and variable from W. S. W. to
N. with cool, pleasant weather, and occasional hard squalls, accom-
panied by heavy showers of rain.

November. Light breezes from N. N. E. to N. N. W., and occasional
squalls from the eastward, until the 22nd, when dark, cloudy tempes-
tuous weather and incessant rain set in from the W. N. W. On the
27th, it cleared up, and continued fine for the remainder of the month.

December. Moderate breezes generally from E. N. E., with plea-
sant clear weather, occasionally from E. 8S. E., with squalls and rain.

During these three months, the mean temperature of the atmos-
phere ranged from 80° to 84°, frequently decreasing in the squalls to
78°.

The tides are extremely irregular, and at all times influenced by the
prevailing winds and currents.

During the strong westerly breezes, the flood set to the eastward, and
continued to run for the greater part of the day; but when they mo-
derated, the ebb, in like manner, set to the westward, the water falling
6 or 7 inches lower than I had ever seen it before even on the
springs.

In moderate weather, when the tides flow with somewhat greater
‘vegularity, the ebb always runs an hour and a half longer than the flood.

The rise and fall of water is then about five feet, and the velocity
about a mile and a half per hour.

In October, November, and December, the current to the westward
of the Atoll set to the southward, at the rate of 36 miles per day: the
natives say, that it commences about the middle of September, and
continues to the end of December, when the easterly winds set in,

then turns to the westward, and runs in that direction until April.
SR

399 Examination of a Mummy Head. (June,

Of this group, I conceive Heawandoo Island is better adapted than any
other for a coal depét: it lies nearly in a direct line between Point de
Galle and Socotra, at about one-third of the whole distance from the
former place, is easy of access in every direction, and possesses safe
anchorages for ships and steamers in all seasons. During the S. W.
ynonsoon, a vessel could anchor on the east side of the island between
it and a small reef, dry at low-water; in the N. E. monsoon, the best
anchorage is in the channel between the island and the south barrier
reef in 16 or 17 fathoms, sand and rocks. Opposite both these ancho-
rages, there are good landing places for boats, which are procurable in
sufficient numbers, and may easily be made available for the landing or
shipment of coals, &c. The natives, who are civil and peaceable, might
I think, be induced to work fora small hire, such as rice, tobacco, &c.
or any other remuneration they might consider adequate.

In approaching Heawandoo Pholo Atoll, from the eastward, a vessel
ought to sight Kilah, the northernmost Island of the Tilla Doo Matte
Atoll, and then steer across the channel to Heawandoo Island, passing
close to Gullandoo, to avoid the small patches between it and Moor-
doo.

HI.—Ezamination of a Mummy Head, suppesed to be brought from
Egypt by Lieut. Ancupotp. By Dr. Gnorex Evans.

[In a letter to the Secy., read before the Asiatic Society, July 1, 1835.]

[The mummy preparations, to which the following note refers, were presented
at the meeting of the Asiatic Society, the 3rd Sept. 1834. There were two
wrappers, supposed to contain the sacred Ibis: one of these was opened in the pre-
sence of Drs. Grant, Pearson, BRAMLEY, and Evans. The head, being in a
decayed state, was, after taking a sketch, to shew the mode of dressing the hair,
given to Dr. Evans, who himself kindly undertook to clean it as an osteological
specimen for the Society’s museum.— Eb. |

In returning these relics of antiquity, I have again to offer an apology
for having detained them so long in my possession; they are at length
put up as preparations, and as such will, no doubt, remain many years
in a good state of preservation.

In my examination of the smaller, I have so far succeeded as to
shew satisfactorily that four birds are embodied in the mass we sup-
posed to be the mummy of the sacred Jdis. With the aid of the marks
I have made, you will be able to distinguish eight distinct feet, with
their toes and claws, severally attached; also three heads: the fourth,
I take for granted, is there also, and seated below the parts already
exposed, but the crumbling and decayed state of the mummy renders

1835.] Examination of a Mummy Head. 323

its display somewhat difficult, and any attempt to bring it into view
would, I fear, endanger the spoiling of the preparation. I therefore
thought it best to leave it unexplored. What description of birds they
are, it is difficult to say; the form of the heads and mandibles would
lead me to pronounce them Plovers, but for the toe at the back of
the foot, which is altogether wanting in the genus Charadrius ; it is
therefore not improbable they belong either to the Rail or Tringa fami-
ly. Whatever theyare, it is evident they must have been enclosed when
very young, and barely fledged; for I can detect no quill feathers or
traces of any having been attached to the wings, although the smaller
feathers are closely matted together, and distinct enough. What further
tends to confirm this opinion is, the great disproportion of the bones of
the wings to those of the legs and other parts of the body—a discre-
pancy common to all young birds before they attain the power of flight.
T am consequently disposed to consider them as nestlings, and think
it not unlikely that a variety of birds, besides the Ibis Religiosa, might
have been deified by the ancient Egyptians.

In detaching the birds from the enveloping bituminous matter, I met
with a seed of the common castor oil plant, apparently in a good state
of preservation. As it is a curious circumstance, I have enclosed it in
a small phial along with the fragments of Beetles you sent for my in-
spection: these latter appear to be portions of a small kind of common
locusts ; elytra of some kind of Buprestis, and pieces of a species of
carabus; but in their mutilated condition it is impossible to identify
any of them with existing specimens.

The head is that of a female, rather below the ordinary stature of
women, and I should say about 20 or 22 years of age, judging from the
best criterion, the teeth, and the little attrition they seem generally to
have undergone. The dentes sapientiz in both jaws are only partially
advanced, which with the profusion and colour of the hair, and the tiara
kind of form it is drest in, I think are sufficiently indicative of
youthfulness. The lineaments of the face must have been small,
compressed laterally, and much sunken below the eyes, for the sinu-
osities beneath the orbits are remarkably deep, and the malar bones
very angular and projecting. The forehead is low, and though
straight for its extent is by no means ample, giving a facial angle of
about 78°, indicating no extraordinary development of the intellectual
and reflecting faculties, and an approach to what Camper would call
the minimum of comeliness ; but the angle is evidently diminished by
the great protrusion of the upper maxilla, from the nasal spine, of
which the measurement is made in taking the facial line.

s 82

“924 ~The Futus of the Squalus Maximus. [Junz,

The nasal aperture is wide and capacious, and nearly circular, owing
it would seem to the very divergent state or distance of the nasal pro-
cesses of the superior maxillz from each other; the separation being ta
the full extent of an inch, which is an unusual width for so small a
skull. Nasal bones large ard prominent, with a good bridge-like con-
vexity. The styloid processes, which in a full grown male adult have
often only a ligamentous connection to the temporal bones, have here
an ossific union, and are withal unusually long and firm, considering
the age and sex of the individual. The great foramen at the base of
the skull is elongated from before backwards, and would seem to cor-
respond with the compressed sides of the head, and projecting state of
the occipital bone, on which the organs of amativeness and philopro-
genitiveness are rather fully developed.

The only marked peculiarity observable in the lower jaw is the re-
cedent chin, which being on a contrary inclination to the facial line, is
a further departure from the Grecian ideal model of beauty, while it
isa strong characteristic mark of Ethiopian descent.

The vomer or bone forming the partition of the nose was found loose
in the cranial vault, and there is httle doubt, must have been forced
there at the time of embalmment, when the ethmoid bone was broken
down, to allow of the removal of the brain and contents of the skull,
which, it is evident, could only have been disposed of through the
chamber of the nose.

In my examination of this head, it appears to me, that the leading cha-
racters of the Caucasian variety of the human race (under which both
ancient and modern Egyptian are included) in this individual instance
are far from being prominent, or distinct ; and as some of the peculiar
traits that characterize the Ethiopian formation, (taking it in its wide
extended sense,) on the other hand, are most conspicuous, it is not un-
likely that the subject of comparison may be of mixed origin, and pro-
bably of Egyptian and Abyssinian descent.

IV.—Memorandum on the Fetus of the Squalus Maximus. By
Dr. J.T. Pearson, Curator.

This specimen of the foetus of a shark having been sent to me by
Mr. J. C. Wiuson, I have put it up in spirits, and have now the pleasure
of presenting it, in his name, to the Asiatic Society.

The species appears to be the Squalus Maximus of Linnezus; and
Mr. Wu1son states in his note that “‘a shark of 11 feet in length was

1835.] Tides at Madras. 825

caught by the Middies of the Hashemy on her last voyage here: on
being cut open, there were no less than 43 youngsters disclosed to
view, all alive and frisky. Two of them were embalmed in the way
you see by Mr. Dawson one of the middies, and by him presented to
me. It was the opinion of those on board, from the appearance of
-the young folks, that they must have been occasional visiters of the
salt ocean, and had only retired to rest when discovered.”

Upon this latter point it may be remarked, that setting aside the
impossibility of such a thing on other accounts, the specimen is, so far
as a mere external examination can decide, in the fcetal state; and,
consequently, unfitted for a residence for any time, however short, in
the water. Nor is such an idea in accordance with what we know
of the ovoviviparous fishes, being able to seek for nourishment them-
selves, and altogether independent of their mother, immediately
upon their being ejected from the womb.

June 3, 1835.

V.—Result of the Observations made on the Tides at Madras, from the
31st May, to the 10th October, 1821, by means of a Tide-guage fixed
near the north-east angle of the Fort.

Surface of the Water below the Difference

Phases and Age of} Time of Guage mark. between
the Moon. High-water. ——_—— ] high and

At H. W. | At L. W. [Mean level./low water.

M fia sin. ft. in ft. in. ft. iia
Full and panes. 8 58 hat “ot 6 wre PA iS)
2nd — 16th, .. S26 By te § Por GOO 7s 2 113
Brae — athe.) 1054.0 4 7% 7 8? Ghee Sitios
4th — 18th, .. 10 30 4 93 8 34 6 6% 3. 52
5th —19th, ..] 11 0 4 103 8 12 G 5% 3. 23
6th — 20th, .. ll 42 Ane ALS B:.-/#2 6 6% BUAMEYe 3
7th — 2Ist, .. TZ Ree SPE 3 7 1ilg¢ Or NITE 2 82
8th — 22nd, ..| 12 30 Be « AE 7 5 6 ng oe
9th — 23rd, .. 1-21 6 14 8-4-0 Fo== OF 1105
ith ——24th,. .. Sosa G 6 43 see 7B ee | ie
llth — 25th, .. 4 45 OF Oo reel 7 UME L239
12th — 26th, .. 5 24 Cary, Siti es Ze 068 1 102
13th — 27th, : 6 25 6 4% 8g Ad. 7, 43 2h 10)
14th — 28th, 7m iit Ly Soa 4 8 03 6 113 2 13
29th, ‘PURSY 5 8% S 0% 6 10% PD Sihee
Average mean leveland lift, .. 5 64 8 1 6 10 2 63

The Madras Herald of the 8rd June, 1835, whence the above table
is extracted, remarks: that ‘ until the 29th of July, the observations

326 | Tides at Madras. [June,

were frequently interrupted ; but that after that date, they were made
daily, at every tide, in every 24 hours: and as there appears some
difference in the results obtained from the subsequent period, they are
given in the following statement.”

Circumstances of the Tides from 29th July to 10th October, 1821, both inclusive.

SS -

| Surface of the Water below the Difference

Time of High Gauge mark. between high
Age of the Moon. Water. |———— -——__—_-——|:nd low water
H. W. L. W. Mean. nark,
h m. ft. in. ft. in. ft2 in. ft.) in.
Full and Change.| 8 54 Saye 8 45 6 103 2 113
2nd — 16th,.. 9 24 5 of 8 44 6.5.85 3 33
3rd — 17th,.. 9 54 4 112 Sala 6 7% 3 3¢
4th — 18th,.. 10 24 5 Of 8 2 6 a 3 1g
5th. — 19th;...|,.11 0 4 104 Sod 6 53 ees
6th -— 20th,..] 11 42 4 11% Stee 6 6% 3 25
gth ; i——AoUstssihii M2) AB 5 38 Fuel 1 6. (7k Bie Se
Sth — 22nd,..}| 12 BOY ND, | ee haa 3 Om ny, 2 5
Oth’ =Masrae ih oot 6 of | 8 03 in Mug 2 o£
10th — 24th,.. 3 6 6 44 87. 1é y POS 1 8%
llth — 25th,.. 4 24 6 6 Sere 7 5 1 10
12th — 26th,.. 5 24 6. it 8 545 7 6% 1 105
13th — 27th,.. 6 18 6 4 8 43 7 42 2. “62
14th — 28th,.. 6 48 5 10% Chees: ©* 20% 2 43
29th,.. Fis 137 5 5 Sa Bis 6. 9 2. Sf
Average level and lift, obo bo. 6F Su 2z 6 10¥ 2 7¥

«« Although this statement appears less anomalous than the last, in
some respects, it is not so in all; and as the other has the advantage
of including the period of the long shore winds and strong southerly
currents, it is a better average for the whole season than the last.”

[Note.—It would have been more satisfactory if the state of the moon’s decli-
nation, parallax, &c. had been attended to in the period selected for the above
observations. Still, however, the table will be useful, asa reply ¢anti to the
desiderata of the Rev. Professor WHEWEL1, regarding tides on our Indian coasts,
which was published in the first volume of the Journal. We wish we had similar
information from other points on the coast, and especially from the other side
of the Bay ; and we cannot let the present opportunity pass of bringing the sub-
ject to the notice of our friends at Chittagaon, Raémri, Moulmein, Penang, and
Malacca. A single period of a complete lunation, carefully observed as to the
direction, velocity, rise, and precise time of the day, and night tides, noting also
the time of the moon’s meridional passage, would be useful, and would cost but
little trouble. All who have seen Professor WHEWELL’s laborious map of the tidal
wave, traced in its course over the whole surface of the globe, in the last volume
of the Transactions of the Royal Society, would, we are confident, willingly con-
tribute to the perfection of so interesting and useful a problem.—Eb.]

‘

1835.) Notes on Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins. $27

VI.—Further Notes and Drawings of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins.
By Jamus Prinsep, Secy., &c.

Various causes have prevented the continuance of my imperfect notes
on the numerous and highly curious coins which have passed under
my inspection, since I last ventured my observations on the KanrrKos
and Kappuises group, as connected with the Maniky4la Tope. Want
of leisure to attempt the engraving of so many plates, and the desire
to profit by a farther collection, of which 1 had received notice from
Shekh KzeraAmart Ati’, but which has not yet reached me, were among
the principal causes of my dilatoriness. Some little deference however
was also due to many of my subscribers, who complained, that I was
deluging them with old coins ! Having at length found time to en-
grave the first six plates of my proposed series, in elucidation of the
principal new coins of Dr. Grrarn’s, Keramat Au’1’s, and Gen. VEN-
TuRA’s splendid discoveries, I cannot refrain from putting on record
the little I have to say regarding them ; the rather as we may soon ex-
pect to hear from Paris of the reception General Ventura’s collection
has met from the savans of that city, many of them so eminent for
this branch of enquiry ; and we are, on the other hand, expecting a fresh
memoir from Mr. Masson, which might anticipate some of the disco-
veries I would fain claim for myself, in this fair and highly interesting
game of antiquarian research! Little indeed can I claim as my own,
save the labour of classifying the coins, as they have come down at suc-
cessive intervals—two or three hundred from Krra’mat Auli, forwarded
through Captain Wapxr; then as many more from the late Doctor
Gerarp*, brought down by Monan LAt, who assisted him in procur-
ing them; and lastly, the rich spoils entrusted by Gen. Ventura to the
Chevalier Atuarp for conveyance to Paris. The careful examination
of the whole has brought to light the names of several princes un-
known to history, and some few not included in the very curious and
novel list of Mr. Masson, published in the 8rd vol. of this Journal. It
has also enabled me to appropriate to their right owners many of the
coins of Lieut. Burnes and other collectors, engraved in former
plates: further, it has furnished me a clue to the Bactrian form (if we
may so call it) of the Pehlevi character, which is found on the reverse
of many of these coins; and lastly, it has lain open a perfect link and
connection between what we have hitherto called the Indo-Scythic

* The death of this zealous and indefatigable traveller has not yet been record-
edin these pages. I trust that his brothers, whose labours have always been
equally prominent in the cause of science, will favour me with the materials for a
worthy obituary of their lamented brother.

328 Notes on Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins. (June,

coins, withcorrupted Greek inscriptions, and the Hindu coins attributed
with reasonable certainty to the Kanouj dynasties, immediately ante-
rior to the Mahomedan irruptions of the 1]th century. In afew more
years we shall doubtless have the whole series, from the time of ALEx-
ANDER downwards, fully developed :—at present in these detached
notices we can expect to do no more than hazard fresh conjectures,
and wipe out former errors as we advance.

There are but few authors to assist us in our task, and the passages
from them have been so often repeated, that it will be unnecessary
again to quote. Neither Bayrer’s work nor the Baron pe Sacy’s are in
our library : but, I have to thank Professor Wixson for kindly sending
me sketches made by himself of the Bactrian coins, depicted inthe former
author, and in Sestrnr and Viscontt, several of which I am able to
recognize. Of individual friends, who have favored me with their aid
in furnishing specimens and information, I cannot omit mentioning
Captain C. M. Wanpz, Dr. Swiney, and Col. Sracy*: the ser-
vices of the latter numismatologist will be more fully appreciated
when we come to talk of Hindu coins. In Bactrian, the field is of
course less open to collectors on this side the Satlej; yet not a few
very fine coins have been picked up even within the limits so success-
fully run over by Col. Top himself.

The coins of the two first princes of Bactria, by name Taroporus
the I. and II. are yet unknown ; perhaps they never struck money, but
were content with the Syrian currency then prevalent. With Ev-
THYDEMUuS begins our collection—a purely Grecian coinage, bearing
only Greek inscriptions, and, as far as hitherto known, all of silver. The
coins of DemErrivus are more rare, but equally beautiful with those of
his predecessor, and supposed father. Huxrocuus, the prince intro-
duced on the authority of Visconrt, will, I think, turn out to be our
Acatuocurs. With Menanoer begins the system of native legends
on the reverse, which is followed up without intermission throughout
the whole series to the barbarous Kappuiszs. Some only of the coins
of Eucratipss have a Pehlevi legend, as will be hereafter explained.

As the majority of the coins now to be introduced have these native
legends on the reverse, it will better enable us to describe them if we
begin by explaining what we have been able to make of the alpha-
bet of this native language ; which, from its marked difference from

other types of the same character, I have ventured to term Bactrian-
Pehlevi.

* Of Indian coins, my list of donors would be considerably swelled; but it would
be too like ostentation to enumerate them in this place.

1835.] Pehlevi: Alphabet of the Bactrian Coins. 329

Mr. Masson first pointed out in a note addressed to myself, through
the late Dr. Grrarp, the Pehlevi signs, which he had found to stand
for the words Menandrou, Apollodotou, Ermaiou, Basileos, and Soteros.
When a supply of coins came into my own hands, sufficiently legible to
pursue the inquiry, I soon verified the accuracy of his observation ;
found the same signs, with slight variation, constantly to recur;
and extended the series of words thus authenticated, to the names of
twelve kings, and to six titles or epithets. It immediately struck me
that if the genuine Greek names were faithfully expressed in the un-
known character, a clue would through them be formed to unravel
the value of a portion of the Alphabet, which might in its turn be
applied to the translated epithets and titles, and thus lead to a know-
ledge of the language employed. Incompetent as I felt myself to
this investigation, it was too seductive not to lead me to an humble
attempt at its solution.

In Plate XX. are contained the whole of these corresponding legends,
Greek and Pehlevi, collated from a very numerous collection, and
deemed to be of sufficient authenticity to be assumed as the data of this
inquiry. At the risk of being thought tedious, I will proceed to detail,
letter by letter, the authority upon which each member of the new
alphabet is supported.

1. 9,a. Noless than four names, viz. Apollodotus, Antimachus, Anti-
lakides and Azos, commence with the Greek alpha, which in all four
cases is represented by the Pehlevi character 9. To this, therefore,
there can be no reasonable hesitation in ascribing the value of the
initial @ or alif, although it will be seen presently, that there is another
a more conformable with the ordinary Pehlevi a. It must be remarked
that the present letter only occurs at the beginning of words.

9. ¥, e. Two names, Ermaios and Eucratides, begin with the epsilon,
and are found in the Pehlevi to have equally the initial ¥ ; this, on
consideration, may be a variation of the initial vowel above given,
to endue it with the sound of e. Another form of the same letter ‘h
occurs in one or two cases, expressing wu; but the examples of these
being too few to inspire certainty, I merely throw out the remark as a
conjecture of analogy with the application of the initial a/if of the Persian.

3. P, 0. The next circumstance of note is, that every word, without
any exception, ends in the letter P, sometimes written P. The latter
may perhaps be called the finished or capital character, bearing an
analogy to the Devanagari letter, which is completed by a stroke on
the top, as this is by one below: for we shall find that most of the
other letters admit of the same addition. ‘P, then, I have supposed to
represent the terminal 7] # of the Hebrew; or the short omicron of

TT

330 Form of the Pehlevi Alphabet [June,

the Greek, chiefly because I find upon the later series of coins bearing
native words in Greek characters, which I described in my last
Essay, (Journan, III. p. 436;) that every word there ended in o;
and, as I then remarked, M. Burnovr explains that sound, in the Zend,
to be the constant representative of the masculine nominative termt-
nation of the Sauscrit as, or Greek os.* The letter P never occurs in
the middle of a word, as far at least as my experience proves. Some
resemblance exists between it and the Zend o ; but no letter in the
known Pehlevi alphabets can be compared with it.

4. wuorY,m. Of this letter we have three examples ; one imitial
in Menandrou ; two medial, in Ermaiou and Antimachou : there can be
no doubt therefore of its being equivalent to m; although it differs
essentially from all the recognized forms of this letter in the Pehlevt
alphabets of sculptures and coins. It should be remarked, however,
that in the case of Menandroy, it is affected with a vowel mark, w ;
which, for reasons afterwards to be brought forward, I suppose to be
the short 2 or kasr. Sometimes a dot is seen under this letter, which
may have the power of some other vowel, probably the short a.

5. A, 2, 7, or y. This letter occurs in Azou, PAI, and in Ermaiou
PAUM? ; wherein it represents the sound of z and of y. It is analo-
gous therefore to the Sanscrit 4, which is pronounced both as 7 and y.
The Greek and the Hebrew have only the letter z for the former
sound. Nothing like this letter is found in the other Peh/evé alphabets,
in the same position.

6. PF, p. Of this character, two examples are found ; one in Apollo-
dotou, PSAP) ; the other in Philozenou, PEW PF where it probably
stands in lieu of the aspirated p.

7. €, n. Of this letter we find instances in Menandrou, PEew
(Minano ?) and in the example of Philovenou last cited. There are
others less decided, and some uncertainty prevails through the appa-
rent substitution occasionally of an / for an. The Pehlevi alphabet
of sculptures has nearly the same form of n.

8. “1,1, 4,?, 1, ». In the Chaldaic, and its derivative alphabets,
so much similitude exists between the characters representing k, b, d,
and 7, that it is sometimes difficult to distinguish them. On the
earlier and more perfect coins before us, this difficulty is increased
much by the circumstance of the dies having been cut by Greek artists,
who were in all probability ignorant of the Pehlevi tongue, and who
therefore must have copied carelessly from imperfect samples furnished

* “« Dans les anciens manuscrits Zend, é final représente la syllable Sanscrite
as, comme en Pdli et en Pracrit,.... 1’é long se trouve d’ordinaire 3 Ja fin d’un
mot.” —Ohs. sur la gramm. de Bopp, par M. Eug. Burnouf.

1835.} used on the Bactrian Coins. 331

by their native underlings. We have in our own copper coinage, similar
and notorious examples of the Nagari character so badly executed, that
few even in the present day could certify the letters intended. In the
more recent coins, and in proportion as the Greek deterivrates, the
Pehlevi improves; and our best examples are derived from the coins of
the unknown AZO2, Guided by these, rather than by the strict
analogy of the Chaldaic, I would venture to appropriate “ to k;
‘land? tod; 1and™ tov. As far however as examples go, 1 or ‘I
seems to stand indifferently for the two former, and for ¢ likewise!
Thus in the two last syllables of Kucratidou, we find P14.. (..tido 2)
In the same of Apollodotou, we have P1SL.. and P11.. (dato?) In
Antila-kidou P-h.., the place of & is assumed by a letter, different
from any hitherto found as such, and more like that we have on
slender grounds set down as an s. ‘h may be the & affected by a vowel
mark, or with an 7, as it occurs also in Fucratidou.

It is only on convention, therefore, that I shall in future reserve

8. 4, for k (and perhaps g).

9. ‘1 or P for d (sometimes misused for ¢ ?).

LOse7.or, for 2.

The same confusion will be perceived in the uppermost of the
Nakshi-Rustam inscriptions in Ker Portsr’s Travels, the most faithful
representation of those antiquities which we possess. Many reasons
would induce me to suppose this alphabet to be the same as ours,
the k, 1, d, and r are so nearly allied ; but the m forbids their union.

11. Vand q, 7. Here again is a perplexing case : the latter occupies
the place of J, in Apollodctou, Lysiou, Azilisou, Antilakidou : but the
former occurs in the word for ‘king’ PY11v (malakao) passim. It
might be an A, and the latter word PYALU (mahardo) ; but of this
we shall have to say more anon; at present I am constrained to
preserve both forms under the head of /.

12. ,f. This letter occurs on no coins but those bearing on the
reverse the Greek y; as Kadphises, Pherros, &c. It resembles consi-
derably the common Pehlevi form of p, and is only seen on the latest
groups of coins; but it is common on the inscriptions of the cylinders
found in the topes by Chev. Ventura and M. Court, and has there
frequently a foot stroke, straight or curved, as in the ¥ above noted.

13. x, p? Whether this letter (a), which appears only on the latter
coins of our series, in connections yet unread, be a mis-shapen variety
of the f, is hard to say. It is precisely the p of the known Pehlevi,
and if inverted, forms the m of the same alphabet.

14. ‘Ys. This letter rests on slight foundation ; namely, the penul-
timate of AziLisou PTHA) (aziliso). It is however very similar to the

Arabico-Persic-Pehlevi s on the Sassanian coins, given in the table of
TT2

382 Form af the Pehlevi Alphabet [Jung,

alphabets in Licutensts1n’s Tentamen Paleographie Assyrio-persice.

15. ‘and 4, @. This letter has so strong a likeness to the Hebrew
Y ain, that I have been tempted at once to assign to it the sound of
broad a, without any positive example in any of the Greek names of
princes to warrant it. Indeed, the aiz being unknown in the Greek,
it could not naturally express any member of that alphabet in the
names of Greek princes, which may account for its absence there; but
in the native words, its use is almost constant, and it frequently pre-
cedes P, forming the diphthong ao so prevalent in Zend words. It is
moreover identical in form with the a of thesculptured Pehlevi inscrip-
tions in Persia. No instance occurs of its beginning a word.

Several other letters are met with, for which counterparts in Greek
cannot be so easily assigned. Some seem to be mere variations of form ;
but the knowledge of them will be essential before the writing on the
cylinders can be decyphered.

16. 3 seems to terminate words, and may therefore be equivalent to P.
On the coin Pl. XX. No. 32, the combination $P occurs, which bears
a strong resemblance to the word malak, as written in the ordinary form
of Peblevi; but if two languages were exhibited on one coin, the dis-
tinction would have been more marked.

17. §, in some cases seems a badly written ‘1: in others it takes the
place of £, m; as in PéSw minano. In some examples it would be best
explained as a vowel, as in the first syllable of Hucratidou .. LS, also
found written....1%; and both these forms approach that of the
Pehlevi vowels e and wu.

18. %. This letter may naturally be supposed to be a variation in
writing of 1, which I have imagined to be the letter &, or d, affected
with the vowel mark 7; but so many examples may be shewn in which
they represent ¢ or #7, that perhaps both forms should be properly
given to that letter.

19. f. This letter constantly occurs on the Pherrou coins, and on
them only. It may be the \ inverted; but as the form f also occurs
once on the coins, and very frequently on the cylinders, it can hardly
be denied a distinct existence. I have no authority for its value.

20. S. This letteris found representing the Greek y in Antimachou ;
it has a considerable likeness to the ch of the common Pehlevi.

21. h. The curve at the lower end of the second stroke of this letter
alone distinguishes it from the D1, or p ; on the cylinders it generally has
thecurve : the tailis there extended below the line, and sometimeslooped.

22. nh, may be a variation of the supposed s, ‘Y; or it may be
the k affected by a vowel mark: it is a common letter on the cylinders.
Sometimes the hook is introduced on the opposite side of the stem,
thus 7, and this form may be a different vowel affection of the “or &.

1835.]} used on the Bactriaa Coins. 333

23. t+. This mark, which wears rather the look of an ornament, is
found on the coins having Hercules for the reverse, and only on them.
I should not have included it among the letters, had it not so closely
resembled the Arabico-Persic form of a, depicted in LicnrEnstEIN’s
table. He there states it to belong to the Sassanian coins, but I have
not remarked it on any that I have examined, either in books or
cabinets.

24.n. This letter may be a variety of A, or it may be a distinct
letter. On the cylinders it has a tall stroke inthe centre, sf; taking
the appearance of an inverted trident. I should have been inclined
to pronounce it 22 or 727, had I not already appropriated * to this
syllabic form. |

I need not say that all the above explanations are open to correc-
tion; andI fully expect before the end of the year, that the learned
members of the Asiatic Society of Paris, who have now before their
eyes the coins whence most of my data have been derived, with all
that I had ventured to guess upon them communicated by letter, will
have developed the whole alphabet, with an accuracy not to be attain-
ed, except through a previous knowledge of the ancient languages of
Parthia, and Ariana.

The only types of the Pehlevi character, with which we can institute
a comparison of the above alphabet, are those derived from the imper-
fectly decyphered coins of the Sassanian dynasty of Persian monarchs ;
and the inscriptions on the sculptures at Nakshi-Rustam, Nakshi-
Rajab, and the Takhti-bostan. These are attributed to the same period,
on the certain authority of the names of Basxc, his son ARpasuir, and
grandson Saapur, found not only in the Pehlevi, but also in the Greek
version, which fortunately oo. some of the inscriptions.
The Baron bE Sacy, to whose Memoires sur les Antiquités de Perse, the
learned world was indebted for the restoration of these valuable monu-
ments of antiquity, was only able to deal with one form of the Pehlevi,
namely, that situated below the Greek (see Ker Porrmr, II. 552): for
the inscriptions are generally trilingual ; the version above the Greek
being more rude than the other, and having a striking resemblance
to the Chaldaic. Ker Porter transcribes one or two portions of the
upper inscriptions in Hebrew; and informs us, that De Sacy always
found this character had the same meaning as the Hebrew, when
transcribed letter for letter. This author has given in Plate XV. vol. i.
of his Travels, a fine facsimile in the two languages of the Nakshi-
Rustam text, which had not been decyphered at the time of the publi-
cation of his work. A considerable portion of the members of our
alphabet exist precisely in the right hand version of this transcript ;

334 Notice of the Inscriptions [Jone,

such as 9, 4, 1, 1, 4, 1, uv, S, 4, &e.: but for want of a perfect alpha-
bet, or of a Roman version of the inscription, no comparison can yet
be made. The learned Licurenstsin, in his dissertation on the arrow-
headed character, has furnished aplate of all the varieties of Pehleviand
Zend, as known inhis time, from the travels of Nrmzuur, &c. By way
of exhibiting the analogy which exists between these and our new
character, I have carefully set them in comparison, in Plate X1X., tak-
ing LicHTENsTEIN’s imperfect alphabet of what he designates the
Arabico-Persic Zend, as the only available one of this type. The Pehlevi
inscription alphabet I have taken from Ker Porter’s facsimiles; and
the Pehlevi of coins from plates of coins in Marspsn, Kur Porrnr,
Hypr, &c., and from actual coins: but in most of the latter that I
have seen, the letters are so very indistinctly formed, that it is quite
impossible to read them; and, indeed, most of the attempts hitherto
made have failed to pass the common titles :—the names are very ob-
scure. A reflection here forces itself, that if the coins of the Sassanian
court were so illegible, we need not be surprised at equal or
greater difficulties attending those of the Bactrian princes.

In the 6th column I have inserted, at random, such of the letters on
the cylinders, as approach in appearance to the coin types. No reli-
ance however must be placed on this allocation, until a reading has
been effected of some portion. It is only intended to shew, that the
characters of the cylinders and coins are identical in their nature.

In the last column I have added the Zend alphabet, as restored with
so much ability by M. Burnour. It has a few points of accord-
ance with the Pehlevi; but the genius of it follows rather the Sanscrit
type; and the constant expression of the vowels, long and short,
distinguishes it essentially from the alphabets of Semitic origin.

Having thus completed our survey of the characters found on the
Bactrian coins, and on the curious inscriptions extracted from the
topes, (in which latter however we must expect to find such deviations
from kaligraphy as a written text naturally exhibits,) let us now apply
our uncertain knowledge, with circumspection, to the various names
and titles on the coins themselves, and see how they may be read in
Roman characters.

Plate XX. contains them all arranged—first, according to the full
inscriptions ; secondly, the names and titles separated. From what
has been said above, I would venture thus to express the names of the
Greek sovereigns in Roman letters.

Apollodotou,...... Papah) Apaladado
Antilakidou,...... PIMAWN) Atikalikado.
Antimachou,...... PSU) Atimacho.

1835.] in Pehlevt on the Bactrian Coins. 835
Hazon 20) 2eaee : PA) Ajo or Ayo.
Azilisown 3. ey PTHAD Aziliso.
Eucratidou,....... Patni? Lukratido.
PRG. sho. PAUMY Ermayo.
Menandrou,...... Peg w or PEEW Minano or Midano.
Pinloxenou;..\.)... Ppeteap Palatino or Palakino.
WayeIOU, YS. os PATH or PHLH Lisato, or Litato ?
PUONOW hss ees Pariah Ulalido ?
Unadpherrou,.... PAEE PNHYY Fareto nanado ?

It must be confessed, that many of these are highly unsatisfactory,
especially the last three. The name of Kapputsus is omitted, as being
still more indistinct.

Turning now to the titles and epithets, it does not seem difficult to
recognize the same appellation, for ‘‘ king,” and “‘ king of kings,” as is
read on the sculptured inscriptions at Nakshi-Rustam, and on the Sassa-.
nian coins, Plu malako, and PAU PL411u malakao-malako (for mala-
kdn-malaké). When another epithet is introduced, such as ‘‘ the great
king of kings,” it is found interposed between the words malakao and
malako, as PALLY PAIL PAAtyU. The same form of expression
exists in the Hebrew JINN NDoD NIIDINDID rex maximus rex
Assyrie. Every one will remark the close resemblance of this expression
with our text ; as well as of NodonIrDdn, the Pehlevi title of the Persian
sculptures, with PALUPA11u ; the terminations only being different,
as might be expected in a different dialect. But, if the language of our
coins be Zend, the word melek, for king, should not be expected in it :
especially when we afterwards find it replaced by rao and rao nano rao,
onthe Kanerxos coins. It was this Uap at that led me to
imagine the reading might be maharao ; but the combination mahardo-
maharé is inadmissible, and overthrows the conjecture.

Pass we now on to the next title of most common occurrence,
PAIN, or PVN, ZOTHPOS, the Saviour. By our system this must be -
rendered either rakako, radako, or radado. Now the first of these three
forms is precisely what might be expected to be the Zend reading of
the Sanscrit word waa, raksaka, Saviour, and that alone is a strong
argument in favor of its adoption as the true reading of the term.

The title METAAOYT BAZIAEN®, first, we are told, assumed by Evcra-
tines, belongs to so many of his successors, that we have no difficulty
in finding the exact version of the term in the Pehlevi. There are,
however, decidedly two readings of it; one PLI"NN, the other PYINN,
with the omission of the duplicated letter in the centre. The obvious
rendering of these two expressions would be kdk-kdo and kdkdo. But
I find in M. Burnovr’s Commentaire, that the Zend word for
“ ereat,” is maz, from the Sanscrit mahd, to which our term has no

336 Inscriptions on the Bactrian Coins (June,

resemblance whatever. It has most similarity to the Tartar appella-
tion khdkan, common to monarchs of Bactria in later days; and
it may not be unreasonable to assume this reading, until one more
plausible is discovered. At first I was inclined to read it ra-rao, in
conjunction with the preceding word mahardo, on the strength of the
expression before alluded to, of ao nano rao, on the Kanerkos coins ;
but in no example have I found the first letter 1 replaced by ».
The collocation of the letters is, again, exactly similar to those of the
Hebrew N27 rabreba, maximus; but for this reading we must
suppose & to be a J, which is contradicted by all other examples.

For ANIKHTOY, the unconquered, we find the terms PLHP) dpatilo,
and PLN) apatilako ; and for NIKHSOPOT, the conquest-bearing,
PALAI, dalako or djaladv ; of neither of these can I attempt a
solution, and the examples being few, we can not be very certain
of their correctness.

The inscription cut on the silver disc found in the casket of the
Maniky4la Tope, (Vol. iii. Pl. XXII. fig. 26,) may be read PHAEH Plu
famaro kanadako ; the second word without any very great straining
might be conceived to be the native mode of writing Kanerko ; and
if this interpretation be allowed, we may indeed look upon this tope as
the monument of that monarch.

The writing onthe brass cylinder itself (fig. 20 6 of the same
plate), which was from my ignorance inverted in the engraving, seems
to consist of the following Bactro-Pehlevi characters PPUYS 4 1h
panne h# fy, which in Roman letters would be kad+* malapo, far°
kamana papako, the purport of which I must leave uninterpreted :
nor will I endeavour to forestal the ingenuity of others, by any crude
attempt to convert into Roman letters the longer inscriptions given by
Mr. Masson, from the Jelalabad cylinder, (Vol. iii. Pl. XXII.), and by
M. Court, from the stone slab of another Maniky4la tope (Vol. iii. Pl.
XXXIII.). I have already remarked, that this latter inscription contains,
very legibly, in the second line, the word PY11U_ malakdo, identical
with the royal designation so common upon the coins.

It isnow indeed time to turn our attention to the coins themselves,
whence our data for the construction of the Bactro-Pehlevi alphabet
have been derived. Of these I need do little more than furnish a few
notes of reference to the accompanying six plates, in which I have
brought down the series of selected specimens from Euthydemus to
Kadaphes Choranos, a name so nearly allied to Kadphises, that the latter
may be looked upon as its patronymic; while the title that follows
it (Choranos) coincides so closely with what has been already described
as existing on the rao nano rao group (vol. iii. p. 448), that it would
seem to form the link of connection between them and the coins which
bear Pehlevi legends on the reverse.

1835.]} Description of new Bactrian Coins. 337

Coins with Greek inscriptions only.

With Euruypemus of Magnesia, who conquered Tuxzopvortus II, B.C..
220, commences our present series : of his coinage I now possess a me-
dal in silver, procured by Monan LA, for Dr. Gmrarp, near KA4bul. It
is superior in execution to the fine coin taken home by Lieut. Burnzs.
The exterior surface is of a dark-grey, like that of chloride of silver.
Pl. XXV. fig. 1.—Kuruypemus, silver tetradrachma, weight 240 grs.

’ Obverse. Head of the king in high relief.

- Reverse. WeERcuLEs with his club, seated on clouds; inscription BASIAEQS

EYOYTAHMOY.

Fig. 2.—A hemidrachma of Dermeratvus, silver, in the Ventura col-

- lection; a very beautiful coin, similar to one depicted in Sestini.

_ Obverse. Head of the king, with helmet shaped like anelephant’s skin and tusks.
Reverse. HERcuULES standing, inscription BASIAEQS AHMHTPIOY.

ne AGATHOCLES.

Fig. 3.—A silver coin of Acatuocuss, in the Ventura collection.
Obverse. A well-executed head, with the royal fillet : short curly hair.
Reverse. Jupiter standing, holding a small female figure, having apparently

a flambeau in either hand: on the sides BASIAEQS ATA@OKAEOTS, with a

peculiar monogram.

The general appearance of the head, and of the figure on the reverse,
resemble the unique coin of Hetiocies which Mr. Witson has sketched
for me from Visconti’s work. Should there have been any indistinct-
ness in the first two letters of the name on that coin, we may find
reason to erase Huuiocuzs from the Bactrian monarchy, and to sub-
stitute AcarHocies, of whom Mr. Masson has already made known
to us ten very peculiar copper coins, (Jour. III. Pl. ix. fig. 17.) The
inscription in Pehlevi (?) on the reverséjof those coins proves that
they belong toa Bactrian prince, and are not to be ascribed to ALEXAN- .
DER'S general of the same name, who is no where asserted to have
assumed the regal power. The name is common enough. It was in
revenge for a grievous insult offered to his family by one AGATHocuzs,
prefect of the provinces beyond the Euphrates, under Antiocuus
TueEos, (B. C. 250,) that the Scythian Arsaczs was roused to establish
independent dominionin Parthia. The same party may have followed
the example of assuming the title of king in some province of
Bactria. That the coin does not belong to Acaruocuzs of Syracuse
Ican now assert with confidence, having before me the most beau-
tiful plates of the coins of that sovereign, (whose name is always
written in the Doric genitive Agathocleos, or Agathocleios,) in the

* Tresor de Numismatique’, now under publication at Paris*.
* I discover in the same plate that the Greek coin (obverse, Minerva, and reverse

Pegasus), described by me in the second vol. of this Journal (Pl. I. fig. 2) belongs
Uv

338 Notice of new Bactrian Coins, collected by (June,

Mavus.
Fig. 4.—One of two copper coins of Mayvs, or Nayvus? in the Ventura
collection.
Obverse. Head of an elephant, with proboscis elevated ; a bell hanging round
the neck.
Reverse. The Caduceus of Mercury, on the sides of which the words BAZIAEe
QS MAYTOY, and a monogram composed of the letters M and I.

This is an entirely new name, nor can it be read as a Greek word
in its present shape, although the characters are perfectly distinct on
the coin, and the style of engraving corresponds with the early and
pure Greek types. There is no Pehlevi inscription. Could the third
letter be read as a gamma, the name MATOY might denote the union
of the office of chief priest of the Magi with that of king, and
the elephant’s head found on the coins of Menanper andof Demetrius,
might enable us to appropriate the present medal to one or the other
of these princes.

EvucRATIDES.

Figs. 5 to 10.—Coins of Eucratipes the Great.

Fig. 5.—A silver tetradrachma, badly executed. Ventura.

Obverse. Head of the king, helmeted.

Reverse. Two Bactrian horsemen, (or Castor and Pollux,) with wings on their
shoulders, and lances; the two first letters of the legend corrupt, PV2IAEQS
MErAAOY EYKPATAOYT ; monogram M.

Fig. 6.—A beautiful didrachma, of the same prince. Ventura.
Obverse. A neat head, without helmet; hair bound with fillet.

Reverse. Two horsemen; inscription BASIAEQ= EYKPATIAOY.

Fig. 7.—A very well preserved copper coin of the same prince, pre-
sented to me by Captain C. M. Wane.

Figs. 8, 9, and 10.—Three copper square coins of the same prince,
upon the reverse of which is seen, for the first time, the introduc-
tion of a Pehlevi legend. Several of the same coins are depicted in
Mr. Masson’s paper; they all agree in having the inscription on
three sides only of the square ; the Pehlevi letters are as follows:
Panhiy PAA PAIL The plates will shew the variation to
which the letters of the name are liable ; in Roman characters they
may be rendered malakao kikdo eukratido.

The history of Eucratipss is too well known to require repetition
heret. Bayer fixes his ascent to the Bactrian throne in the year

to Hreron II. of Syracuse, 270—216 A. C. The coins in this new and splendid
monument of art are all engraved by the medal-ruler invented by BaTE, from
originals in the museum of Paris, and other great collections.

+ See Journ. Vol. II. 409, and Maurice’s Modern Hindostan, I. 98.

1835.] Gen. Ventura, Dr. Gerard, and Syed Kerdmat Ali. 339

181 B. C. He was a cotemporary of Mrrurivatss I. of Parthia, who
assisted him in repelling Demetrius, king of India, as he is termed,
beyond the Indian frontier, and finally driving him from his throne at
the advanced age of 78 years. Onthe division of the conquered em-
pire, Mrruriparss had the provinces between the Hydaspes and Indus
assigned to him; and Eucraripsgs, all the remainder, east and south,
of his Indian possessions :—‘ all India’ is the term used, but it is
uncertain to what limit southward this expression should apply.

It has not yet been remarked by those who are curious in reconciling
the names of Indian legend and Grecian history, that the names
Evcratipes and VicramApitya beara close resemblance both in sound
and in signification: while the epoch and the scene of their martial
exploits are nearly identical. The Hindu accounts of VicRAMADITYA
are not to be found in the regular Puranic histories, but only in sepa-
rate legends, such as the Vicrama Cheritra and others, mentioned
by Witrorp, (As. Res. IX. 117,) all teeming with confusion, contra-
dictions, and absurdities in an extraordinary degree. The genealogical
tables of the solar and lunar lines contain no such name, neither
does it occur among the few notices of embassies to and from India to
Syria and Rome, in the authors of the west}. EvcratipEs’ empire was
so extended and matured that he assumed the title of BaotAeus weyados:
thus the peaceful coin, jig. 6, was doubtless struck before his expedi-
tions; those with the armed head, and the addition of ‘‘ the great,”
after his return: and itis remarkable that the latter only have a Pehlevi
legend on the reverse, being intended for circulation perhaps in his more
southern provinces, or imitating in this respect the coins of Mmnan-
DER, whose reign in India had been so glorious. If the date assigned
by Bayer (146 B. C.) to Eucratides’ death,-be thought too far remov-
ed from the commencement of the Samvat era of VicraMa/DITYA
(56 B. C.), it may be argued, that as Eucratipgs is acknowledged to
be the last but one of the regular Bactrian kings, all the new names
recently discovered—Acatuocies, Mayus, Puitoxenus, ANTIMACHUS,
&c. must find their places before him in the list, which may easily
bring down his date even a century.

The analogy between the Bactrian and the Indian heroes is, it
must be confessed, of very slender texture, just enough to be hazard-
ed as a web of speculation, which more skilful antiquarians may in-
dulge their ingenuity in spinning out, or brushing aside as visionary.

¢~ The embassy of ‘‘ Porus’’ to AuGcustus must have been immediately
after VicramMA’pitya.—lIt is stated that his letters were written in the Greek
character. The Scythians were then pressing the country.
uuvdzZ

340 Notice of new Bactrian Coins, collected by [Junz,

Konpvs.

Figs. 11, 12, 18.—Three small silver coins, inserted in this plate,
because their inscriptions are entirely Greek, though they have no
other pretension to be counted with Bactrian coins. The appearance
of the head-dress in the third is rather Arsacidan, but the names and
titles are altogether novel and curious. I have selected the three
most legible from among several coins in my possession. The first two
are of Monan La't’s, the third of Kuramat Anr’s, collection. The
name of KQA02 js altogether unknown.

The heads on the obverse of all these coins seem to belong to
different persons; the standing warrior on the reverse is alike in all,
and the inseriptions on the two first KwAOY MAKAP...... PAH@POY,
On the third coin, the titles differ, and are illegible, but the name
KUA,... is the same.

Plate XXVI. Mewannper.

Although Mznanper is well known to have preceded Evcratiprs
in date, I have preferred separating his coins from the genuine Bac-
trian group, and classifying them with those of Apontopotus, ANTILA-
KIDES, &c., as a distinct series, on account of the essential difference in
their style of execution. Their native legends, also, seem to denote a
different locality. Mrnanper, before he came to the throne of Bactria
proper, had, it is supposed, formed an independent dominion in the
more southern provinces on the Indus. This may be the reason of
the deviation from the Syrian type of coin, so remarkably preserved
by the earlier sovereigns of Bactria.

Figures 1, 2,8, one silver and two copper coins of MananpeEr.

Fig. 1.—A silver hemidrachma, weighing 37 grains, (one from KeRAMaT ALI 3
a duplicate from Dr. GrRArp,) differing from those depicted in Masson’s plates,
and from Dr. Swiney’s coin described in the Journal, vol. II. p. 406.

Obverse. Head facing the left, onthe margin BASIAEQS SQTHPOS MENAN-
APOY : a kind of sceptre, or crook, lying on the shoulder. ;

Reverse. Minerva with Jupiter’s thunderbolt, facing the right ; Pehlevi legend
Peew PAD PAALy, malakdo rakako minano, and monogram f¥ (see vol. Ill.
page 164.)

Fig. 2.—Has already been drawn and described by Mr. Masson. Vol. II. (¢.)

Fig.3.—Differs fromMasson’s fig. J ,inthe figure of Victory onthe reverse.(K.A.)

APOLLODOTUS.

Figures 4, 5. Two silver coins of ApotLopotus, both in the Ventu-
ra cabinet ; of the first the number is considerable, the latter is new,
and of very beautiful execution.

Fig. 4.—Has already been described from Dr. Swinry’s coin in JOURNAL,
vol. ii. page 406. The legend on the obverse is here quite distinct BASIAEQS
ZOTHPOZ KAI 6IAONATOPOS AMOAAOAOTOY. The Pehlevi inscription on
the reverse, however, has no addition for the words kat piAoraropos, being sim-

ply PuPAPD PAIN PY,

1835.) Gen. Ventura, Dr. Gerard, and Syed Kerdinaé Ali. 34]

Fig. 5.—Has on the obverse, the Indian elephant, with a monogram, and the
usual title; and on the reverse, a Brahmany bull, with the same Pehlevi legend.

Fig. 6.—Is a copper coin in Dr. Swi1ney’s collection, the precise fellow to
that described by Major Ton, in the Royal Asiatic Society’s Transactions.

Figs. 7, 8.—Are two from among several square copper coins brought down by
Monan La't. They are nearly the same as the coinin Lieut. Burnes’ collec-
tion, (J. A. S. vol. ii. pl. xi. fig. 7,) which, I then supposed to be a MenanpzEr,
but which I am now able to recognize by its Pehlevi legend. The examples on
these coins, are decisive of the orthography of P4‘1mM (Soteros.)

ANTILAKIDES.

Figures 9, 10, 11, are three selected quadrangular coins of ANnTILA -
KIpEs, from six in the Ventura collection. The name was first made
known by Masson, who supposes from the beards, (which are not
however so clear on the specimens before us,) that this prince and the
next AYTSIO= belong to a separate dynasty. He detects the conical
emblem of the reverse on one coin of Kucratipes. I have not how-
ever found any of the sort. One description will serve for all.

Obverse. Head of the sovereign, with the legend BASIAEQS NIKHSO0PO0Yr
ANTIAAKIAOY.

Reverse. Two plumes waving over two conical caps or bee-hives? Monogram

below ‘WS, ard Pehlevi inscription PAHHIND PILTAID PA LY, 97 ma-
lakdo ajalado atilikado, or atikalikado ?

Lystvs.

Fig. 12.—A copper quadrangular coin of Lystus, similar to two in
Masson’s series of Ausius :—the first letter is clearly an /, in Greek,
and this reading is confirmed by the Pehlevi 4. The monograms are
the same as in the last coin.

Obverse. Head of the king with the legend BASIAEQS ANIKHTOY AYSIOY.

Reverse. An elephant with a monogram AS, and the Pehlevi inscription
- Ss: PY malakdo....,. lisato.

Plate XXI.

I have designed in this plate from the Ventura collection several
very interesting coins, of new names and features, for which no loca-
lity can as yet be assigned. As almost all of them bear Pehlevi inscrip-
tions, they are evidently Bactrian ; but to admit them in the regular
series of that dynasty, would greatly extend the catalogue of its
princes. They rather bear out the fact of there having been several
petty independent dynasties, like that at Nysa, for which Mr. Masson
endeavours to set apart some of the coins to be presently mentioned.

PHILOXENUS.

Fig. 1.—A fine silver coin of Pastoxenus in the Ventura collection. This
name was borne by one of ALEXANDER’S generals, to whom Cilicia, west of the
Euphrates, was assigned in the division of his conquests. The coin, therefore,

cannot belong to him, though his title of ‘ unconquered’ would argue his power
and warlike propensity.

342 Notice of new Bactrian Coins, collected by (Jung,

Obverse. Head of the prince, in a helmet similar to that of EucratipEs,
legend, BASIAEQ= ANIKHTOY SIAOZENOY.

Reverse. The prince on horseback; monogram formed of two A’s; legend in
Pehlevi PEND PLA) Pryv.

Fiy. 2.—A square copper coin of the same prince, nearly allied to those of the
last plate.

Gbverse. A female figure holding the sotencopie. Greek legend, and mono-
gram as before.

Reverse. The Brahmany bull, with the same Pehlevi legend, and the letter 4
as a monogram.

ANTIMACHUS,

Fig. 3.—A small silver coin of ANtimAcuHuS, also a new prince. The character
of the horseman connects it with the preceding; the portrait of the Ee ig
wanting, nor can I find any record of his name preserved.

Obverse. Victory or Fame : legend BASIAEQS NIKH&OPOYT ANTIMAXOY.

Reverse. Horseman, and Pehlevi inscription PSUXD PALAD PYALY.

Fig. 4.—A copper coin recognized to belong to ANTIMACHUS, from the Pehlevi
mame. Vent.

Nonus.

Fig. 5.—A silver coin of Nonus, inthe same style as the last, and without por-
trait. Vent.

Obverse. Horseman, with couched lance ; scarf round the neck, part of the
legend visible BAZIAEQ= ...... NQONOY.

Reverse. Soldier holding a spear ; name in Pehlevi, P41Ydh. ......

Fig. 10.—A square copper coin of the same prince, in which his title of
peyadou, is apparent. The style of the copper coinage compared with the silver,
in all the above, connects them with the MENANDER and APOLLODOTUS
group.

Uncertain names.

Fig. 6.—The same as Masson’s No. 44. The name is not visible in the Greek,
and if restored from the Pehlevt, which is quite distinct, it is unintelligible, UL1-
TIzOU : the titles are of a paramount sovereign: the Greek letters corrupted.

Obverse. The king holding a sceptre BASIAEWS BASIAEWIN METAAOY.

Reverse. Jupiter seated in his chair. Pehlevi inscription PRAHH PHILLY
PAT.

Figs. 7, 8.—The grandiloquent titles in these are the same as the last, and
both, perhaps, on that account should be classed with the Azos series, in the
next two plates, which has invariably the title ‘‘ the great king of kings.”’

Fig. 9.—This square copper coin has the precise style of the Nonus and
the AziLisos device.

Obverse. A horseman with couched lance: letters visible of the legend
BASIAEQS NIKATOPOT AAEA®OPOY ?

Reverse. A seated figure, probably Hercules. Pehlevi leeendl though sharply
cut, not intelligible we PAN 414.

Fig. 11.—The title ‘ King of Kings’ is also visible on this coin, with the
emblem of an elephant on tke obverse. The king, seated on a couch, is placed on
the reverse. No native legend is traceable.

1835.] Gen. Ventura, Dr. Gerard, and Syed Kerdmat Ali. 343

Figs. 12,13, 14,—belong toa series of coins sui generis : the two first are of the
Ventura collection, the third from Masson’s plates. The head fills the obverse,
while the title in corrupt Greek surrounds a well executed horse on the reverse.
It is probable that all the horse coins belong to one locality: Bactria was famous
for its fine breed of this noble animal ; but he is generally represented mouated by
a warrior. This coin, and No. 8, are the only ones on which he appears naked.
The extended arm of the prince on the obverse is a point of agreement with
the common coin, fig. 25 of Pl. XXIII.

Plates XXII., XXIII. Azos.

We now come to a series of coins exceedingly numerous, and of
various device, bearing the name of a prince altogether unknown to
history. It was from a coin presented by Munshi Monan Lau, (Dr.
Grrarp’s companion de voyage,) to Dr. J. Grant, that I first recog-
nized the name of this sovereign, many of whose coins had passed
through my hands before in Lieutenant Burnes’ collection, and in
Masson’s plates, without presenting a legend sufficiently distinct to be
decyphered. General Ventura’s collection also possessed many very
distinct coins of Azos, and his name either in Greek or in Pehlevi was
thence traced through a series of coins that had been given to other
monarchs.

The title of Azos is always BAZIAEQS BASIAEQN METAAOY AZOY. In
Pehlevi PA? PIU PLAAALA PALAU malakdo, kakkdo, malako, Ajo,
or Ayo. The name is generally set upright under the device both in
Greek and Pehlevi; but an occasional exception occurs, as in fig. 12,
where it runs continuously with the rest of the marginal legend. None
of the coins of Azos bear his head, nor in general have they his
effigy, unless the seated figure in figs. 12 and 13, represent him, as is
probably the case, seated on a cushioned throne, with a sceptre on his
lap. The mode of sitting, it should be remarked, is entirely oriental,
and the animals depicted are such as belong peculiarly to the East, the
elephant, the Brahmany bull, the lion, and the Bactrian camel. The
cyphers or symbols on the reverse of these coins seem evidently
compounded of Pehlevi letters, on the same principle as those of the
more genuine Greek coins, from Greek letters; they may probably
denote dates, but it will require much labour to establish this point,
and the same symbol appearing on coins of very different devices, as
on figs. 2 and 11, rather militates against the supposition.

It is a peculiarity of the coinage of this period, that the pieces were
of a very debased metal, washed over with silver somewhat in the
manner of the coins of the Roman Emperor Ga.uienus and his
successors, and denominated ‘ billion’’ by numismatologists. Is it
possible that the scarcity of silver to which the origin of this species of
coin has been attributed in the West, had extended even to India?

344 Notice of new Bactrian Coins, collected by [Juny,

if so, it will fix the date to the latter half of the third century. At
any rate, it is fair to suppose that the system was copied from the
Roman coins, to which many other circumstances of imitation may be
traced ; among these, the soldier trampling on his vanquished foe in
fig. 14; and the radiated head of fig. 26, the coin without a name,
which is connected with the rest of the series by the equestrian
reverse, seems an imitation of the radiated crown of the Roman

emperors of the same period.

Plate XXII. figs. 1, 2, 3.—Three coins of Azos, having on the obverse, a
Brahmany bull, and on tie reverse, a panther or lion. The monograms on all
three differ: legends in Greek and Pehlevi as above described.

Figs. 4, 5.—On these the bull is placed with the Pehlevi on the reverse, while
a well-formed elephant occupies the place of honor on the obverse.

Figs. 6, 7, 8.—In these the place of the elephant is taken by a Bactrian camel
of two humps. No name is visible on any, but the Pehlevi word P Vv is plain
on No. 8, and their general appearance allows us to class them with the foregoing
coins of Azos.

Fig. 9.—Here a horseman, with couched spear, in a square or frame, occupies
the obverse, and the bull again the reverse: the word Azow is distinct on both
sides. The device and attitude of the horseman will be seen to link this series
with the coins of Nonos, Azilisos, and others, that are as yet nameless.

Figs. 10, 11.—A figure seated on a chair, holding a cornucopia, marks the
obverse of this variety; while on the reverse, we perceive a Hercules or Mercury.
It was from fig. 11, (a coin presented by Mowan La’t to Dr. Grant,) that I
first discovered the name AZOY, afterwards traceable on so many others.

Figs. 12, 13.—The obverse of this variety affords important information,
in the attitude of the seated prince. It plainly proves him to be oriental.

The scarf on the erect figure of the reverse is also peculiar. This coin accords
with one depicted in the Manikydla plate, vol. iii. pl. xxvi. fig. 2.

Plate XXIII. fig. 14.—Is one of six coins in the Ventura cabinet of the
same type. The soldier trampling on a prostrate foe hetokens some victory. The
female figure on the reverse, enveloped in flowers, seems to point to some mytho-
logical metamorpkosis. The name and titles are distinct.

Figs. 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21.—Are all closely allied, while they serve to
explain figs. 11, 12, and 15, in the plate of Lieut. Burnes’ coins, (J. A. S. vol.
li. p. 314,) and figs. 30, 31, 32, 33, 45, of Masson’s fourth series, vol. iii.
pl. x. They are for the most part of copper-plated, or billion, and in conse-
quence well preserved; the single Pehlevi letters 9,4, ‘\, and P may be
observed as monograms, besides the usual compounds. On 21 and 22, are the
first indications of a fire altar.

Fig. 22.—This copper coin is the last on which the name Azos occurs, and
although quite distinct in the Pehlevi, itis corrupt and illegible in the Greek.
The device is similar to the preceding, with exception of a curious circnlar mono-
gram, which will be found also on the coins of Kadaphes hereafter. Masson’s
fig. 47, is the same coin.

fig. 23.—A very deeply cut coin, commences a new series, in which,

the form of the Greek letters is materially changed. The legend is now

1835.] Gen. Ventura, Dr. Gerard, and Syed Keramat Ali. 345

BACIAEVC BACIAELIN CLITHP MEFAC, without the insertion of any
name*; and the monogram is the one frequently described as the key
symbol, or the trident with a ring below it.

In Pehlevi the first portion corresponds with the Greek,
PALLY PII P41tw; the conclusion is unfortunately not visible. The
letter “| appears on the field of the reverse, which bears a portrait of
a priest, extending his hand over a small fire-altar.

Figs. 24 and 25—May be safely called varieties of the above, still
retaining the Pehlevi on the reverse. A counterpart of fig. 24 will
be found in fig. 15 of Burnzs’ collection.

Fig. 26.—This is by far the most common coin discovered in the
Panjab and Afghanistan. Bags full have been sent down in excellent
preservation, and yet nothing can be elicited from them. The present
specimen is engraved from a coin in Colonel Sracy’s cabinet, found
in Malwa; but the same coin has been engraved in the As. Res. vol.
xvli.; in Burnes’ collection, fig. 13; also, 10 of pl. xiv., in the same
volume : and in Masson’s series, 26, 27, 28. It was the first coin
found in India on which Greek characters were discovered, or
noticed. The trident monogram connects it with the foregoing series ;
but it is impossible to say to whom they both belong. I have placed
them next to Azos, from the similarity of the horseman. They are
all copper coins, of high relief, and generally in good preservation.

AzILIsus.

Figs. 27, 28.—Were it not that the name in these two coins is dis-
tinctly AZIAIZOT in the Greek, and PY4.A9 in the Pehlevi, they
might both have been classed in the preceding group, especially with
fig. 9. The bull of fig. 28, is surmounted by two monograms, like
those of the Lysius coins. It is so far singular, that while the name
of the prince Azit1sus seems compounded of the two names 4zos and
Lysius, the obverse and reverse of his coins should be counterparts
of theirs. The name itself is quite new, and we can only venture to
assign his position in proximity to his prototype, Azos.

Plate XXIV. Hermaus.

Figs. 1, 2, 8,4. One silver and three copper coins of Hzermaus,
selected from a considerable number in order to develop the whole
circle of marginal inscription, seldom complete on a single specimen.
The description of one will serve for all, since, contrary to usage, the
impression on the silver and copper is precisely alike.

Fig. 1.—A silver coin in the Gerard collection.

Obverse. The king’s head with simple diadem ; legend in corrupted Greek
BAZIAEQS SQTHTOS ETMAIOV.

* Mr. MASSON attributed this series to a prince, whom he named Sotereagas,
xXx

346 Notice of new Bactrian Coins, collected by [JunE,

Reverse. Jupiter seated ; his right hand extended. Monogram mai; Pehlevi
legend PAUMY PINT PL ALY, malakdo rakako Ermayo.

Mr. Masson supposes Hermaus I. to have reigned at Nysa (hod.
Jelalabad,) because one of the topes opened in that neighbourhood
contained several of his coins; they have, however, been found in
equal abundance in the Panjab, and it will be safer in the present
paucity of our knowledge to adhere to the general term “ Bactrian,”
without attempting to subdivide the Greek dominion into the separate
states, of which it probably consisted throughout the whole period
of their rule.

UNADPHERRUS.

Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8.—Four coins of the prince made known to us by
Mr. Masson under the name of UnappHERRus. They are numerous,
of rude fabric, and more clear on the Pehlevi than the Greek side.
The device on all is the same, namely :

Obverse. A bearded head with diadem: inscription as made out from the
combined specimens BACIAENC CUITHTOC VNADPETTOV :—in some the titles

are in the nominative case.
Reverse. A winged figure of Victory holding out a chaplet or bow: Pehlevi

inscription P1¢¢ Piyny PYILY.

This may be rendered malakdo fareto nanado ; or the last word may
be P11" for swrnpos. If » be p and ~™ A, we might convert the word
letter for letter into phero; making f an r. The first half of the name
VNAQO or VNAA seems to be omitted in the Pehlevi, unless nanado
be intended for it; but then the title ‘ Saviour’ will be wanting.

The only recorded name that at all approaches to this barbarous
appellation is Phraotes or Phrahates, whom Pui.ostRatus asserts to
have reigned at Taxiles, south of the Indus, about the commencement
of the Christian era. He was visited by Apottonius Tyanaus in
his travels, who conversed with him in the Greek language. The
execution of the coins before us, does not well agree with the magni-
ficence and elegance of Puraotzs’ court, as described by Puitosrra-
tus, ‘‘ the residence of dignified virtue and sublime philosophy* ;”
but much allowance may be made for exaggeration. The Bactrian
sway was already broken, and the country in a disturbed state.
“Whether Parthian or Indian, Puraorses was tributary to the
Southern Scythians, whom he gladly subsidized to defend him against
the more savage Huns, who finally drove before them the Scythians,
who had seized upon the Bactrian kingdom}.” Apoxtuontus describes
a magnificent temple of the sun at Taxiles. The fact, frequently
mentioned in history, of the native princes of India conversing and

* Maurice’s Modern Hindostan, I. 152. t Ditto, I., 142,

1835.) Gen. Ventura, Dr. Gerard, and Syed Kerdmat Ali. 347

writing in Greek, is satisfactorily confirmed by the discovery of the
present coins bearing Greek legends with names evidently native.

Figs. 9,10, 11, 12, 13.—This very numerous group of copper
coins is attributed by Masson to Ermaus the Second, the first
three letters of whose name certainly appear on some few specimens
(as fig. 10) ; but his name is not to be found on the reverse in the
Pehlevi, which is totally distinct from the preceding coins, and yet it is
the same on all the specimens I have compared; although great variety
exists in the Greek legends, as if they had been copied at random from
ether coins. The device of all is the same.

Obverse. A head with curly hair, no beard, in general miserably engraved.

For marginal inscription ; Fig. 9. has .... AEQS3THPOS =YAD......
Fig. 10, BASIAE....ETM...
Fig. 11.—.... NO KAA®ICHC and fig. 12, BACIAEQS..... -EOY.

Reverse. A spirited figure of Hercu.es, standing with his club, and lion-skin
cloak. Pehlevi inscription, as well as it can be made out from a careful exami-
nation of a great many specimens, PEIAMTa P PAdh Wteu.

This text differs so entirely from all we have hitherto seen, that I
cannot attempt to decypher it, nor even to distinguish the titles from
the name. I have merely placed v at the head, from a faint trace of
the initial word PX Lu, between the letters of which other cha-
racters appear to be introduced. The decided trace of Kappuisszs’
name on several coins of the type, incline me to place it at the lowest
station in the present series, as a link with the series already fully
described of that Indo-Scythic sovereign: and it will be remarked
that the letter or symbol + is visible on the bull and raja coins of this
prince also ; indeed their whole Pehlevi inscription much resembles,
if it does not coincide entirely with, the present example.

KabDAPHES.

Figs. 14, 15, 16.—If any thing were wanting, however, to connect
the two lines, these coins would supply the gap. One of them
was presented by Lieut. Burnes to the Society, and was mistaken for
the horseman coin described in page 343. The name was more fully
made out from six coins of Ventura’s and three of Krramat Ati’s
collections. The monogram agrees with one of the Azos series,
fig. 22, as before remarked.

Obverse. A neatly engraved head with diadem and legend........ KAAA®ES
XOPANOY.

Reverse. Jupiter seated, left hand extended ; the wheel monogram, and legend
in nearly the same characters as that of the preceding coins.

This coin will form an appropriate conclusion to my present notice,
which, I believe, has embraced all the specimens properly attribut-
able to the Bactrian group. ‘The fire-altar on the next or Indo-Scy-
thic coinage, forms a convenient mark of distinction, as well as the

xx 2

348 Proceedings of the [Jung,

disuse of the Pehlevi character, which extends no further than to
the first coinage of the series, namely, that of Kappuiszs, with the
bull reverse ; and is quite illegible there, while the Greek is compara-
tively distinct. This group has, however, been sufficiently described
in my former papers.

Before closing my present notice, I must use my privilege of
amending the theory I advanced upon one of the coins from the
Maniky4la tope, (Vol. III, Pl. XXV, fig. 6, p. 441,) a Sassanian coin
bearing the distinct Sanscrit name of Sri Vasu Deva. This being
the patronymic of Krisuna, I supposed the figure to represent that
god as the Indian substitute for Mithra or HAO. The face, how-
ever, was that of an aged human being, and I think it may be more
rationally accounted for as such, on the following grounds.

Ferishbta asserts that Baspro had assumed the throne of Canouj
in the year 330, A. D.; that Bauram the Persian king, was at his
court in disguise, and was recognized by the nobleman who had taken
tribute to Persia from the Indian king*. Baspeo reigned 80 years,
and one of his daughters was married to Bauram. Now under these
circumstances, it is natural to suppose, that the Sassanian monarch,
out of compliment, may have affixed his father-in-law’s portrait and
name on some of his own coin: and the strongest evidence is thus
afforded both of the historical fact, and of the date of this individual
coin of the Manikyala set.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
Wednesday Evening, July 1, 1835.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Rvav, President, in the chair.

The Proceedings of the last Meeting were read.

The following gentlemen, Messrs. J. P. Grant, Wm. Apam, W. H. Ben-
son, Groree Evans, Lieut. A. S. Paayre, Mr. J. H. Sroqueter, Capt.
J. G. Tayior, Mad. Cay. and Lieut. Monrriov, I. N. proposed at the
last meeting, were balloted for, and duly elected members of the Society.

The Secretary read the following reply from Government to the me.
morial presented, in conformity with the resolution of the last meeting.

To the Honorable Sir EDWARD RYAN, Knt.

Genl. Dept. President of the Asiatic Society.
Honorase Sir,

I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of an address, dated $rd
instant, transmitted by you to the Governor General in Council, on behalf
of the Asiatic Society.

2. Iam directed in reply to forward to you a copy of orders issued by
the Supreme Government, on the 7th March, to the Committee of Public
Instruction, which will make the Society acquainted with the views and

* Maurice, I., 150.

BID) NI} ISD) 1942p

Peni ew

f ~ ae o :
matlakain scharaclers

on. te tee: Pehlevt Alphabets Compared Vol. IV. Pl. XTX,
; 3.8 & g S & Bactrian Bactrian Zend
os $ x > N “489 Pehleve Pehleve Alphabet
£ NER - rR S S § from from according
RN N ess g “ 8 S 8 Bactrian and the Writings to
8 3 - 8 N mf = < : Indoscy thic Cylinders Burnoufs
= = $ NAS ‘: a - Ss Coins found in the | Commentarre
N s 8 HES S S § 8 8 from Cabul — |Topes or Tumuli Sur le
| q iy BS 8 Q 8 < & S the Panjab ¥2 | tn the Pangab ¥! Yaena.
IAS N Vv AA H+ U 1 te? Moce a) aouwal a i
ee tee | WS a Pt ae ol hp PP Siti) wal
Giz2 Y ? i gh . g ©
D| 7 ¥ 3 §23 fe geiew. tape! ale, 5 te ah Qa~J
he\ 3} | Ab Ny rum P PP Per? jah OP OM
vu} 4 ) 2 Ce is ath edit? a LP) eo eS
jeu AY > éopdh
ay | if i$ > ™ AAT ty an 5
jchx| TT | AC = |
TD | ae y hs er LS see
I ie | 4 | D, ae mea IN el ere: Le of
| ,
Ri>7 7] 3 | 2 WT Pee i ee 8
Z| 9 3 Mae ome ities ees a a cy
mpat >| d | vob iy Meee a Te ¢ 6
N|2 4.¢ Upiag 8 a oer Se | € oti
s|D ee ly -| »- Pp lah A “
ay G | a pe itis ale
be DH’ | a Cobo, Pan, bee |mdeo
‘” 4 ON, es Sa a | 7 Qa WV
: q-X| Pp | | | kesh Ce
le a>) 35 Nae a IS Ss 5 Dey
shi | V 29) ay ae git. $2
t.6 KD) x doubtful Cs
: r lan of! an oP

ree. Sof

Sache XS
-

et oe 3
Bax i gts e

eae 3 Be

xH ae an 4H MOS FAIS MS, aT fia 9 h1D KB

ae ae ma" ger a3 rT oe

is
AS ,

Got a ped ee %e

Seas TS
er ie a

> ie
Maen » Mts:
Seay 7 LAWN V4
ah. ae Be hat cg i

3
We 1 OTR

Jour. As. Soc. Vol. IV. Pt. XX.

Lnscripltions in Greek and Pehlavi on Bactrian Coins.

ZBAZIAENE MELFAAOT EYTKPATIAOT PIAYKIY PYIVYIP SY IY
2BAZIAENEZ FATHPOL MENANAPOT Pe1w PrAAN PAANLVY
3BAZIAENE TATHPOL ATOAAOAOCTOT PAHAP? PA rw PAYAL
4BAZINEQE FTATHPOLT EPMAIOT PAVUO'Y PAI PIWVY
5 BAZTIAENE BAZTIAEQN MEFAAOT AZOT PAIPNLUPYIINI PAIL
6 BAZIAEQNE BAZTIAEQNN MEFAAOTAZINZIOT PTHAIPILY PYNYIPYILY
7BAZIAENZ ANIKHTOT PIAOZTENOT PEATH PLHhPA PII

8 BAZIAENE NIKHOOPOT ANTIMAXOT PSYAIPAIAI PYSIVY

OTC STS |i > cee NOXNOT Pe ie Pe tec
PO BALIANENE NIKHDMOPOT ANTIAAKIAOT PAMAADA PISA PYALY
|\7 BAZIAEQNZ ANIKHTOT AYEIOT PAH H PLHFP ID PNALYU

J2BAZINENE TATHPOT VNAAHEPPor Prt PFWNp PNDVY

14 BACIAEVC BACIAEWNCWTHPMELFAC OOMNK 44 OICHC
Y4Y4 hh AaXHYHYIFYYRPUMEEYT PRY

en PEE. -XOPANOY..........2I 5 B33 PPB 7...

/BBACINEQE ZTHPOE EVAG... 2? FP KPANCHH PIAZHYIHW+tY
Titles and Epithets.

76 BAZSIAENS fT MELAK OP “78 FAT 'H POF 79 AN\KHTOY
Paerayv PyYaIINN} Ba Te PYLHHA
PUIrI:MMGY aso cee Sie a | Pt 2 SY PX LH Rh
PyrvY PSS 7 Pr V3 w

BAZIAEQS BATIAEQAN PNY AAKYA P77 3% 20NIKHDOPOYT

PIT PNHIAZY a PTAT Patan?

Names of Princes

MeAmONAOACTOT: 26 ETKPATIAOT 28 MENANAPOT
PIF ah? PriwA WI IY Pt'S w
Mee ANTIAAKIAOY 27 EP MALOT Ptew
PA hHI147 PAUW* PeSw
| 2 ANTIMAXOT 30 S1AOZENOT ge AN Ber
ij PBY A? PEA Hh PAH H
| 24 AZOr
: x a2 =VAC...CKAA MIC). ae bt wa be
PAY PNULIAN

sP IHC
25 Le a ee 33 VNAAMEPAPOV
PrwHn? PILEPFrNP

i

ais Ane
FN iin neh igh ©

-

a4
ca a

cae
*

era

aos CRM
aver ter yen

.

Jour, As. Soc. Vol. IV Pl. XXI.

Bactrian Coins ; |
PHILOXENUS

:

‘wal ik} ait
j Eubit}
|

1 fan 1
hy 2,

;
:
£

Jonr As. Soc. ti ‘3 Vol IV. Pl. XXII.
Bactrian Coins.
SZ 1A,
j % TN A

ff go }

mui)

yl i i p
Wm fh:

Sour Asi Soc,

Beetrian Coins

Coe

1 ih

| Bast 3

on
a) ‘
|

\

Snr Woe

4} a \
Dr UA Nanaia creegeege= Q
Su AN NDS

Vol. IV_PL.XXIL.

ae Ee >

7

sew ee

ide

tea ae

Jour. As. Soc. ( Vol. IV. Pt. XXIV

| Bactrian Coins:

Xie eee. ek

SO Awad Yok
15 Ab SN

Jour. As. Soe. Oe Vol. WV. PLXXV,
| Bactrian Cons.

SPW

Wye

Ny nn

J Funsep del eC 3 col p-

PLAS

= 09790090869

ANTIAARIAT FDI IS

W \or
eS # =" | y =| - =) |
(Sake FOK |
Exepriaia) Mebtesiba :

Cz uavigyd ._- * *

fo)

Vol, IV. PL XXVI.

Bactrian Coins.
MENANDER

sIUS

APOLLODOTUS

Ea

1835.] Asiatic Society. 849

intentions of the Government, on the general question discussed in your
address.

3. With respect to the specific requests and recommendations contained
in the address, I am desired to state as follows:

4. The Government has no intention of soliciting from the Court of
Directors any specific pecuniary aid, to be appropriated exclusively to the
support of native literature, beyond the sums already devoted to that
object, in conjunction with the encouragement of English literature. Its
reluctance to take this step is not influenced by any doubt that larger
sums might be beneficially appropriated to both these objects ; but by that
financial difficulty which necessarily limits within narrow bounds the aid
to be so afforded.

5. The Government having resolved to discontinue, with some excep-
tions, the printing of the projected editions of Oriental works, a great
portion of the limited Education Fund having hitherto been expended on
similar publications to little purpose but to accumulate stores of waste
paper, cannot furnish pecuniary aid to the Society, for the further printing
of those works, but will gladly make over the parts already printed, either
to the Asiatic Society, or to any Society or individuals, who may be dis-
posed to complete the publication at their own expense.

6. The Government has the highest respect for the Asiatic Society,
and the valuable and laudable pursuits in which it is engaged ; but must
nevertheless consider the Committee of Public Instruction as the appro-
priate organ for dispensing the patronage bestowed by the Government
on Oriental studies, from which, as justly supposed by the Society, it is not
the intention of the Government to withdraw its support.

I have the honor to be, &e.
Council Chamber, i (Signed) G. A. BUSHBY,
the 10th June, 1835. Secretary to Government.
Copy of orders issued to the Committee of Public Instruction, 7th March, 1835.

‘* The Governor General of India in Council has attentively considered the two
letters from the Secretary to the Committee, dated the 21st aud 22nd January
last, and the papers referred to, in them.

“His Lordship in Council is of opinion, that the great object of the British
Government ought to be the promotion of European literature and science among
the natives of India, and that all the funds appropriated for the purposes of
education would be best employed on English education alone.

“* But it is not the intention of His Lordship in Council to abolish any college
or school of native learning, while the native population shall appear to be
inclined to avail themselves of the advantages which it affords ; and His Lordship
in Council directs, that all the existing professors and students at all the institu-
tions under the superintendence of the Committee shall continue to receive their
stipends. But His Lordship in Council decidedly objects to the practice which
has hitherto prevailed of supporting the students during the period of their
education. He conceives that the only effect of such a system can be to give
artificial encouragement to branches of learning which, in the natural course of
things, would be superceded by more useful studies, and he directs that no stipend
shall be given to any student who may hereafter enter at any of these institu-

850 Proceedings of the (June,

tions ; and that, when any professor of Oriental learning shall vacate his situation,
the Committee shall report to the Government the number and state of the class,
in order that the Government may be able to decide upon the expediency of
appointing a successor.

‘“‘It has come to the knowledge of the Governor General in Council, that a
large sum has heen expended by the Committee in the printing of Oriental works.
His Lordship in Council directs, that no portion of the funds shall hereafter be
so employed.

‘Tis Lordship in Council directs, that all the funds which these reforms will
leave at the disposal of the Committee, be henceforth employed in imparting to
the native population a knowledge of English literature and science, through the
medium of the English language ; and His Lordship in Council requests the Com-
mittee to submit to Government, with all expedition, a plan for the accomplish-
ment of this purpose.”

The Secretary hoped he might be allowed to make a few observations on the
reply of Government, in consideration of his having been the first to bring the
subject of the abandoned publications to the notice of the Society, and to sug-
gest the propriety of its intercession. The warmth with which his proposal had
been met by the friends of Oriental literature within and without these walls, and
the confidence of some aid from Government for such an object had, he confessed,
made him a little sanguine, and had led him to look beyond the sole object of
completing the several works actually commenced, to the organization of an Oriental
Committee, for extending the benefits of publication to the whole series of classi-
cal authors, as had been once intended by the Committee of Instruction ;—to
include also the nucleus of Bauddha literature, selected by Mr. Hopeson, and the
astronomical works recommended by Mr. WiLtkinson. But the pleasing dream
had now vanished; the reply of Government was before them, and, though none
could wituess the issue with greater regret than himself—none could bow more
submissively to its decree. There was however a passage in the reply, which
raised his hopes and encouraged him to make one more effort in the cause; this
was the offer to transfer to any Society the whole of the matter already printed,
provided it would engage to complete the works. Considering the light in which
they were held by Government, ‘‘as a mere accumulation of waste paper,’’ it
was hardly liberal to couple the offer with such terms; but still he was
prepared to recommend to the Society to accept even these conditions. He had
made careful estimates of the expences of completing all the works: the Printers
had liberally consented to reduce their rates; the pandits and maulavis had volun-
teered their gratuitous aid for an object so dear to them; and in short he would
venture, from the prospect of sales, andof subscriptions for copies from Europeans
and Natives of rank, to guarantee the Society from any risk of involving its funds
by the acceptance of the Government offer. The Secretary then moved a resolu-
tion, which we give in the altered form in which it was finally adopted. The
resolution was seconded by Mr. CoLvin :— :

‘¢ Resolued—That with reference to the 5th paragraph of Mr. Secretary
Busuey’s letter, the Society feels disposed to accept the offer of Government to
transfer the printed portion of the several Oriental works now in progress to the
Asiatic Society, and it entertains a reasonable hope of being able to complete the
whole of them without involving any material charge on its funds; but that the

1835.] Asiatic Society. 351

Society should request the Government to withdraw the exception alluded to the
Secretary’s letter, and to make over the whole of the publications lately in pro-
gress at the Education Press. And that the President be requested to address
the Governor General in Council, on the subject,”’

The proposition, as at first worded, applied the epithet ‘‘ Ziberal’’ to the “ offer
of Government,’’ and accepted the offer, ‘‘ with the exception of the works
reserved.’’ It also bound the Society to complete all the works they took over.
In the conversation that ensued, the Secretary stated, that much misapprehen-
sion existed as to the amount expended by Government upon Oriental litera-
ture. He had ascertained, that in the whole ten years, since the publication of
such works was commenced, no more than 60,000 Rupees had been devoted to
that object; in fact, it was not so much, for this had been the whole charge for
printing, aud included translations of English works into the native languages.
All the charges for translating, for care of the depository, &c. must be considered
as part of the expenditure on education, with which the Society had no concern.

Mr. MacnaGuHrten thought it needless to bind themselves to complete the works,
as Government required no such pledge. He would merely express a disposition
to complete the publications.

Mr. Turron asked what works were excepted by Government. The Secre-
tary said, there were two; the Fatéwa Alemgiri, and a Treatise on Spherical
Trigonometry, in Arabic.

Sir Joun P. Grant thought this did not sufficiently appear, and moved an
amendment (seconded by Captain Forsss) to the effect, that Government should
be requested to specify what works they intended to except.

Mr. Bususy gave his private opinion, that the Society would be permitted to
take over the whole, without exception, if they desired it. Mr. Turron pressed
the point. Mr. Macnacuren expressed his opinion, that we should ask for all
the unfinished publications. The President thought the proposed reference for
further information unnecessary, for they had it before them—the amendment
would have the effect of asking for the two works excepted.

After some further conversation, it appearing to be the general wish that
Government should be asked to transfer all the unfinished works without excep-
tion, Sir J. P. Grant withdrew his amendment, and the original motion was
modified accordingly.

Mr. Turton wished the word liberal omitted. He could not consider the
offer of what the Government looked upon as ‘‘mere waste paper,’? a liberal
offer. The term might be misconstrued, and it was disrespectful to use a word
that seemed to be introduced by way of irony. This opinion being assented to
all round, the word was taken out, and the resolution was put as above, and car-
ried unanimously.

Mr. Macnacuren then proposed that a letter, becoming the dignity of the
Society, in terms respectful to Government, abstaining from any bitter reflections,
should be written to the Royal Asiatic Society at Home, forwarding copies of the
correspondence with Government. This it was incumbent upon them to do in
testimony of their zeal for Oriental literature. He moved accordingly—

‘That a copy of the correspondence be sent to the Royal Asiatic Society, in
order to show that this Society has not been deficient in zeal in the cause of
Oriental literature, as well as in order to engage the support of that powerful
body to the cause which this Society has so strenuously but so unsuccessfully
endeavoured to uphold.’’

352 Proceedings of the [Junz,

The Secretary said, there was another reason for doing so, in the assistance
they might hope to obtain from the London Society, in promoting subscriptions
for copies of the works; and perhaps also in direct aid of their funds from the
Oriental Translation Branch of that Society, which must be interested in the same
object. He therefore seconded the resolution.

Mr. Turton wished, before the resolution was put, tosay a few words, explanatory
of the grounds on which he supported it, differing as he did in some degree on one
point, appearing in the correspondence which had taken place, from those whose
views in general he fully adopted, and was most anxious to promote. But think-
ing the object which they had in view one of the utmost importance, he was
desirous that it should not be put upon any assumption of right which could not
be maintained, especially when it was to be urged to the home authorities. He
alluded to the opinions expressed by some of his friends, that the Government
were bound by the act of Parliament to appropriate a certain proportion of the
funds devoted to literary purposes to the cultivation of native literature, and the
native languages, and had no right to withdraw the sums hitherto appropriated
through the Education Committee to that purpose. It appeared to him, that this
was a misconception, and he should be sorry to see aright set up which could not
be maintained; whilst, on the other hand, he would not ask as a favor that which
was founded on right. He heldin his hands the words of the clause in the Act of
Parliament upon which this question depended, the Act 53 Geo. III. c. 155, s. 43,
and with the leave of the Society he would read it,

After reading the clause Mr. Turron continued,

That, setting aside the question, whether Government were bound to appropriate
any funds to this purpose at present, it being extremely doubtful whether there
was the surplus out of which the fund were to be provided ; it appeared to him
that the fair construction of the clause which he had read, was to leave the whole
discretion of the application of the fund to the local Government. The legislature
pointed out the objects of encouragement. In his judgment, it evidently con-
templated both Oriental and European literature : but the extent, the time, and
the manner in which the one or the other, or both, should receive such encourage-
ment, was, in bis opinion, left to the local Government to determine ; and if they
thought fit to withdraw from the Society the funds which they had hitherto
appropriated to Oriental learning, and to appropriate it to the cultiva-
tion of English literature and sciences, which had hitherto been wholly
neglected, the Society, in his judgment, had no right to stand upfor. He
was also of opinion, with regard to the exercise of its patronage, that the
Government were correct. The Education Committee doubtless was the pro-
per channel for the distribution of their funds, entertaining the views which
the Government now had. This was a private Society, over which they could
exercise no controul; whilst the Education Committee were entirely subject
to the directions of Government. But at the same time he thought the Society
deserving of some consideration, more than at present the Government seemed
disposed to accord.

They were embodied many years before the attention of Government was
directed by the legislature to these important objects, and they had steadily pur-
sued their purpose, and expended considerable sums, raised by mere private con-
tribution, on Asiatic Literature and subjects connected with it. It was peculiarly
within the province of the Society to represent to the home authorities the error,

1835.] Asiatic Society. 353

into which, in the judgment of the Society, the Government had fallen. He was
satisfied, that the very object which the Government had in view, and in
which he (Mr. Turton) most cordially concurred—introduction of the English
language, literature, and sciences—would be greatly defeated, or at least re-
tarded, by creating an impression, which the withdrawal of these funds
would create, that they wished to discourage,—at least, were indifferent to,
the literature of the East, and the ancient languages of the country. He wished
to see the two objects united, and was satisfied, that English literature would be
more readily introduced, by going hand in hand with that to which learned natives
were naturally more attached. The latter was peculiarly within the province of
the Society to protect and guard. We had assumed a trust which we must not
betray, and when we saw the interests of that literature of which we were the
voluntary guardians injuriously affected, and, as we thought, injudiciously attack-
ed, it was our duty not to slumber at the post which we had taken upon ourselves
to watch and to defend.

Mr. Prinsep agreed in much that had fallen from his friend who had just
spoken; but Mr. Turron, not having been present at the last meeting, had mista-
ken the views of the Society : they had never insisted on an exclusive application
of the Parliamentary vote to Oriental literature. But it was impossible to
construe the words ‘ revival of literature’’ otherwise than as intended to em-
brace Oriental literature—the only literature that could be revived. There was
another clause perhaps more important still, providing for English science ; the
Society’s business was only with the first. The withdrawing of the minute fraction
of the fund devoted to this object, which he must attribute to the Education
Committee, was an insult to the natives of India, The laws of the country, as
well as its theology and history, were in those languages, and in those books
which it was now attempted to suppress. It was not unlikely that the natives
might be stimulated by this proceeding to do themselves what it was our duty as
their guardians to do for them ; but the reputation of the British Government
would suffer. Civilization and general information would never be spread
through this vast country by English education. Did ever a Government succeed
in so wild a project as to change the language of the country? Russia has set
us a very different example: she is making rapid strides in civilization by trans-
lations into her own language. ‘There was indeed one notable instance in the
attempt of Christophe, the late Emperor of Haiti, to extinguish the French
idiom, and introduce English in its place—and his mad experiment and himself
had fallen together. The literature of the West must be transferred into the na-
tive languages, and the first step towards this must be the cultivation and im-
provement of those languages themselves. He believed Mr. Turron’s opinions
were in accordance with his own ; but he wished to go further than the proposition
before them, and should therefore follow it up with a motion for a Memorial
to the Authorities at Home.

Mr. Turton explained.

Mr. Cotvin was grateful for Mr. Turton’s clear exposition of the point of
law, but did not see the object of the present discussion. The question before
them regarded an address to the Royal Asiatic Society, which had his cordial sup-
port. But Mr. Prinsep’s attack in a censorial tone and language not over measured,
had been directed against another body, which had no representatives or defenders
in this place. The question to which he had referred was one of the highest im-

b eg

354 Proceedings of the [JuNE,

portance, and all parties would unite, for the sake of that truth which was their
common object, in desiring to see it become a subject of general interest and dis-
cussion. But this was not the scene which Mr. Prinsep should have chosen
for any criticisms on the proceedings of the Education Committee. ‘‘ Cur in
theatrum Cato severe venisti ?’’ The debate here was totally out of place and
character. Mr. Turton had said, that it was proper to pay respect and attention
to Native feeling: who ever held a contrary opinion? It was not he alone who
said it—non meus hic sermo,—but there was the declaration of Government
in the Resolution of the 7th March, that while the Natives themselves desired it,
Instruction in Oriental Learning would be continued. Were Gentlemen to carry
their patronage of that course of tuition beyond even the wishes of the Natives?
It seemed to him that thereremained but little ground of difference between them.
It had happened in this as in other cases,

‘¢ When hot dispute had past
They found their tenets much the same at last.”’

He would readily support Mr. MacnaGurten’s resolution—which was then
put and carried unanimously.

Mr. PrRinseEP, after a few words of preface, moved the appointment of a Com-
mittee to Memorialize the Court of Directors and Board of Control. An amend-
ment was proposed by Mr. W. Grant, who would modify the wording of the re-
solution to secure unanimity. He wished to disconnect the proceedings from the
disputes to which the allusion had been made, which the Society need not notice.
This drew forth some remarks from Sir Ep>warp Ryan, who expressed his full
‘concurrence in the object aimed at, but objected to certain expressions in
Mr. Prinser’s motion, as conveying a censure upon the Government, and a
declaration on the legal point. His desire was to adopt the most conciliatory
‘and most effectual means of attaining the end.

Mr. Cotvin would agree to Mr. W. Grant’s amendment, and hoped the
members would come to an unanimous vote on this question, as they had done
onthe others. There would thus be an end tothe unnecessary discussions which
here and elsewhere had been carried on usque ad nauseam.

Mr. Turton also liked unanimity, but would not seek it at too great a sacri-
fice : he would not blink the question. We must tell the Government at home,
why we go to them. Mr. Cotvin’s unanimity was good in its way, but for
himself he liked consistency. ‘“ In another place (says Mr. Coxviy), I am
decidedly of a different opinion, but let us be unanimous here.’? This sort of
censistency he did not understand. There were societies at home which sup-
ported Scotch literature, Welch literature, Irish literature ; and why should we
consider the ancient literature of India less dear to the natives of this country ?
To proceed as the Government are doing is to make them think we have only our
own interested objects in view.

Mr. Cotvin explained. He had ever been a friend to all descriptions of liter-
ary pursuit, and he was a friend to Oriental literature, and could Support it asa
member of this Society, without compromising his opinions regarding the best
plan for the education of youth, a subject of which it was quite beyond the pro-
vince of the Society to take any cognizance.

The amendment was then re-modelled, and being re-moved by Mr. W. Grant,
and seconded by Mr. Turron, was unanimously adopted as follows :

1835.] Asiatic Society. 355

‘‘That it be referred to a Committee to prepare a Memorial from this Society
to the Court of Directors and Board of Control, stating that Government here
have withdrawn the funds hitherto appropriated to the revival of Oriental liter-
ature in this country,—and respectfully impressing upon the authorities at home,
the importance of having some public funds appropriated to this purpose, and
requesting them to adopt such means as they think fit for providing a sufficient
sum for this important object.”’

The following Gentlemen were named as the Committee: Dr. Miri, Mr. Mac-
NAGHTEN, Mr. Turton, Mr. Wm. Grant, Mr. Couvin, and Mr. Prinsep,

Library.

Read a letter from Professor H. H. Wiuson, forwarding, on behalf of
Counseller Von Hammer, a copy of his translation and text of the work
entitled, “ Samachscharis Goldene Halsbander,” or the Golden Collar of
Samaschari, for presentation to the Society.

Read a letter from J. G. Maucozimson, Esq. Secretary to the Medical
Board at Madras, transmitting a copy of his publication, called “ Essay
on the History and Treatment of Beriberi,” for presentation to the Society.

Read a letter from Colonel W. Casement, Secretary to the Government
of India, Military Department, forwarding cn behalf of the Government of
Fort. St. George, a second volume of Result of Astronomical Observations
made at the Madras Observatory, by T. G. Taytor., Esq. H. C. Astro.
nomer, during the years 1832 and 1833.

Also a letter from Mr. Epwarp Wa pots, to the President, presenting
for the Society’s Library, a set of Reports and Plans of the Boundary Com-
missioners under the Reform Bill, from the library of his brother, the late
Ricnarp Waxpoue, Esq. long a Member of the Society.

A copy of Select Specimens of the Theatre of the Hindus, translated
from the Original Sanscrit, by Professor H. H. Witson, Second Edition,
presented to the Society by the Translator.

Meteorological Register for May, 1835, by the Surveyor General.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, England, vol. iv. was received from the
Booksellers.

Museum.

A Stuffed Alligator, measuring about 11 feet, and the head and horns.
of a Buffalo, were presented by Lieut. Roperr C. NuTHatt.

Specimens of Gold Dust from the Streams of the lower range ; also, three
more ancient Coins from the ruins at Behat, were presented by Captain
Caurt.ey.

A Portrait of the late R. Homer, Esq. was presented by his pupil Mr.
A. Gregory, to be added to the gallery of pictures lately deposited in the
Society’s rooms by the sons of that eminent artist.

Mr. Grecory also submitted a short eulogium on his deceased master.

Papers submitted.

Dr. J. McCuexuanp presented a manuscript volume on the Geology,
Natural History, and Climate of the province of Kemaon ; illustrated by a
large geological map, and sections of the whole mountainous district, for
most part filed in from his own surveys and examination.

a a]

356 Miscellaneous. [ June,

[The manuscript was subsequently withdrawn by the author, for separate pub-
lication. ]

Observations on Organic Fossil appearances of a peculiar nature found
in Kemaon, by the same author, were also submitted.

VIII.— Miscellaneous.
1. Proposal to publish, by Subscription, an IllustratedWorkon the Zoology of Nipdl.

It is impossible to advert to the perishable, varying, and complex phenomena
of animation, without a deep impression of the disadvantages under which
zoological research, has heretofore been conducted, from an almost total disunion
of opportunity, and of the skillto make a proper use of it. Mineralogy, and even
Botany, may be easily and effectually prosecuted through the medium of
materials collected in one country, and used in another and remote one;
because these materials are subject to no, or to small deterioration; because
their bulk is limited, and their character fixed. Hence probably the rapid
progress of these sciences, owing tothe ample and effectual means of illustrat-
ing them which the learned of Europe have been able to draw from all
quarters of the world. The case is very different in regard to Zoology.
The transport to Europe of live animals, even birds, is difficult and expensive :
the observation of habits, manners, and economy can only be made on the spot,
with the advantage (never possessed by travelling collectors) of much time and
recurring opportunity: the characteristic form and corporeal habits of animals
evanish from the dried specimen, which besides can tell little or nothing truly
of those numerous changes to which the living individual is subject from age,
from sex, and from season: lastly, it is not possible without abundance of fresh
specimens, continuously supplied and used without delay, either to fix the real
external character of species amid the changes just adverted to, or to ascertain,
eyen summarily, their internal structure.

True it is, that from the external conformation of the hard and imperishable
parts of dried animal specimens, that of the internal and untransportable parts
may be inferred: true it is, that from the unknown genus or family, the unknown
figure may be conjectured. But who that has been never so little imbued with
the Baconian principles of investigation will be content to substitute analogical
induction for plain fact, when the latter is accessible? and who that has turned
his attention never so slightly to works of nataral history, is unaware that this
inductive process has resulted too often in monstrous disfiguration of the forms
of animals, and in serious errors relative to their internal structure, habits, and
economy? The scientific men of Europe have made the best use possible of
their miserably defective materials: but they are precisely the persons who
deplore the defect of those materials, and its necessary consequences, viz. the
multiplication of imaginary species, and the continuance of a wretched system of
arrangement, calling every year more imperatively for revision, and yet incapable
of being remoulded, without a knowledge of the internal, as well as external,
structure, the habits, and economy, as well as true forms, of the actual species,
in their mature and perfect development.

A gentleman who has been, for some years past, fixed in a favorable situation
for observing nature, with more leisure than usually falls to the lot of the

1835.] Proposed Tilustrations of Zoology of Nepal. 357

servants of Government in India, has amused himself by the formation of a
large stock of drawings and notes, calculated to illustrate the Zoology of the
district in which he resides: and he proposes by placing these drawings and notes
in the hands of some true minister and interpreter of nature at home; and by
establishing a system of reference between such an one and himself, to complete
his observations, during the next two or three years, under the guidance and
counsel of ripe science. The object of this gentleman is not to exhibit himself
as a Zoologist, which he is not ; but to aid Zoology, by marrying opportunity to
skill—-a project which he has means of accomplishing to an extent not hitherto
attained, nor likely to be attempted by others, with his advantages for its
successful attainment. It is not pretended, that the gentleman in question has
means or ability to supply the European master of the subject, with a tithe of
the information, the want and necessity for which have been above adverted to.
But it ts affirmed, that the author of this paper (the more immediate purpose of
which will be presently explained) has such power and will to do away with the
divorce of opportunity from the ability to make the best use of it, as are not
likely soon to recur; such power and will, as cannot fail to be highly
efficient, is put in action in the manner he proposes, in partially removing
the obstacles heretofore resulting from that divorce. The series of drawings
is now nearly complete, and embraces several hundreds of subjects, each of
which has been compared with several fresh specimens, in order to fix the
perfect aspect of maturity in the species with such variations, caused by
feminity or nonage, as it seemed desirable to delineate. The notes include
many particulars of internal structure, habits, and economy, of every subject
pourtrayed by the pencil; and it is believed, with reason, that if these
materials were put into the hands of an experienced Zoologist in Europe,
under whose suggestions their differences might be remedied by further observa-
tion and dissection, the result of such a conjoint plan must be to pour a flood
of light upon the zoological treasures of one of the most fertile regions of India.

Some inquiries have already been made touching the feasibility of such conjoint
labours; and the answers, from the highest quarters, encourage the notion
of it, except only in the article of expense, in reference to the drawings; the
publication of which, without the aid of subscription, it is apprehended might
mar an otherwise most hopeful plan.

Hinc ille lachryme! Hence this proposal, which is intended to solicit the aid
of such gentlemen in and out of the service, as are disposed to favour the project
by subscription to the work.

Specimens of the drawings may be seen, at the Asiatic Society’s rooms.

The amount of subscription will be fixed so soon as there appears to bea
prospect of realizing the object of it: and to ascertain that point, all those who are
inclined to patronise the work are requested to send their names to the Secretary
of that Society.

2. Proposed Meteorological Combination in Southern Africa.

We are indebted to Sir Jonn HERscueEt, for a copy of the printed instructions
for registering meteorological observations at various stations in Africa, and in
the South Seas, drawn up by a Committee of the South African Philosophical
Institution.

This eminent philosopher has, we doubt not, been the prime mover of this
important plan for obtaining a connected view of the winds and weather in the

358 Combination of Meteorological [June,

hitherto unexplored region of the southern hemisphere. It is what we have
been attempting to do for India, and not without success, although we have
hitherto avoided publishing the many registers with which we have been favored,
until they could be put together in a convenient form for comparison and analysis.
There will bea double advantage in having a counter-series south of the line, for
Sir JoHn had already announced to us the discovery, on comparison of the tables
given in our JOURNAL, with a series of 57 months kept by the Post Master at the
Cape, that the annual fluctuation in the Barometric tide there, having regard to
the difference of latitude, is precisely complementary to ours: that it amounts to
0.29 inch, on an average of the whole period ; the maximum taking place about the
21st July, and the minimum about the 19th January : ‘‘ thus in the latter month
when the Barometer in Calcutta stands 0.25 inch higher than the mean, and that
at the Cape, 0.15 lower—a propellant force equal to the weight of a column of
mercury, 0.4 inch, urges steadily and constantly the air towards the south, and vice
versé ; nor can its influence be confined to small tracts, but from its very magni-
tude and nature, it must communicate motion to immense masses of air.’’
When a master hand approaches the ordinary, yet complicated subject of winds
and weather, general results of great practical utility and importance are sure of
development. Their appearance in the field should not however discourage other
labourers, but rather stimulate their investigations: éach separate branch of
inquiry is in this science so laborious, as more than to occupy one head. The
influence of the sun, of the moon, of oceanic coasts, of mountain ranges, are all
separate questions of great intricacy.

The principal difficulty is to provide, that observers shall all note down on the
same daysand hours: we observesun-rise,noon, sun-set, and midnight, recommended
at the Cape, also 8 a. M., 2 Pp. M., and 8 Pp. M. Now the knowledge of the hours of
maximum and minimum has made us prefer 10 a. mM. and 4 Pp. M., 10 P. M. and
4 a.M.; butin our own and the Surveyor General’s series, we have enough points
to fill up the whole daily curve of temperature and pressure for Calcutta. With
regard to this essential point, we have been requested to call the attention of our
meteorologists in Jndia, Ceylon, the Straits, and China, to the following determina-
tion of the Cape Committee, to devote four days of the year to horary observations.

‘¢ With a view, however, to the better determining the laws of the diurnal
changes taking place in the atmosphere, and to the obtaining a knowledge of the
correspondence of its movements and affections over great regions of the earth’s
surface, or even over the whole globe, the Committee have resolved to recommend,
that four days in each year should henceforward be especially set apart by
meteorologists in every part of the world, and devoted to a most scrupulous and
accurate registry of the state of the Barometer and Thermometer ; the direction
and force of the wind; the quantity, character, and distribution of clouds ;
and every other particular of weather, throughout the whole twenty-four hours
of those days, and the adjoining six hours of the days preceding and following*.

* This is necessary by reason of the want of coincidence of the day in different
parts of the globe, arising from difference of longitude. In order to obtain a
complete correspondence of observation for 24 successive hours over the whole
globe, it must be taken into account that opposite longitudes differ 12 hours in
their reckoning of time. By the arrangement in the text, the whole of the astrono-
mical day (from noon to noon) is embraced in each series, and no observer is required
to watch two nights in succession,

1835. ] Observers in India and Africa. 8359

The days they have been induced to fix on and recommend for these observations
are, the 21st of March, the 21st June, the 21st September, and the 21st December,
being those of or immediately adjoining to those of the equinoxes and solstices,
in which the solar influence is either stationary or in a state of most rapid
variation. But should any one of those 21st days fail on Sunday, then it will be
understood, that the observations are to be deferred till the next day, the 22nd.
The observation at each station should commence at 6 o’clock A. Mm. of the
appointed days, and terminate at 6 o’clock p. mM. of the days following, according
to the usual reckoning of time at the place. During this interval, the Baro-
meter and Thermometer should be read off and registered hourly, or at all
events, at intervals not more than two hours asunder ; and the precise hour and
minute of each reading should be especially noted.

For obvious reasons, however, the commencement of every hour should, if
practicable, be chosen ; and every such series of observations should be accompa-
nied by a notice of the means used to obtain the time, and when practicable, by
some observation of an astronomical nature, by which the time can be indepen-
dently ascertained within a minute or two*. As there is scarcely any class of
observations by which meteorology can be more extensively and essentially
promoted, it is hoped that not only at every station of importance in this colony,
but over the whole world, and on board ships in every part of the ocean,
individuals will be found to co-operate in this inquiry. Every communication
of such observations, addressed by channels as secure and as little expensive as
possible to the Secretary of this Institution, will be considered as highly
valuable.”

3.—Statistics and Geology of Kemaon.

We perceive by our advertisement page, that Dr. J. McCLe.uanp is about to
publish, by subscription, his Observations on the Statistics of Kemaon ; embracing
an account of the Rocks, Minerals, and Mines, Organic Fossils, Waters, Population,
Wild Animals, Birds, and Insects of the province. Together with Observations on
the Goitre, on Earthquakes, and Climatology. The whole including a Geologi-
cal Map and Section of the district, with various other drawings, coloured.

Mr. McCrexxanp is appointed to join Dr. Watticu in his approaching trip to
explore the Tea Districts eastward of Assam. The expedition has also the advan-
tage of an able second Botanist in Dr. Grirritus, Mad. Med. Est., and as it
will meet Captain Jenxrns in the valley, its geological strength will have nothing
to desire. But we confess we think an Astronomer, or at least a Surveyor ac-
quainted with Astronomy should be added, to make the scientific corps perfect—
to note the position of the new points they will visit, and to sketch some of its
glorious features. When the British Government sends a party to set up Steam
Boats on the Euphrates, every adjunct of science, language, and art is superadded :
why should the Government of British India be less efficient in their preparations
for so interesting and profitable a voyage of discovery ?

* For example, the first appearances and last disappearances of the sun’s upper
and lower border, above and below the sea horizon, if at sea or on the coast,—or,
on land, the exact length of the shadow of a vertical object of determinate length
on an horizontal level, at a precise moment of time (not too near noon), &c,

ee a RE SC ET A RR I RNID aR FR TE OR ST a SP an SPY en SSS ES

84} 0} payorzjze yey udeq set

“YJIMAIOY] sooi8e o8vjdve oY} INQ “Are pr ur pepasdens JayoULOUIOY,L, ay) pend (Wd > y@ TOMO] pue
JO aoidap B SIAIp AxoOjeIOGQe] OY} UI [[eM eB 4sUIVse Suisuvy yuouINAsUT sty £ 41 YIIM BaiZe JY STU sUOIsUd} SNOaNbe ayy yey} ‘1a}eWLOINg
SIRS net ea ale cea sty} peLerer rescues ayy YolyM Aq J9joMIOULIOY,T, 9} ey} “pajou aq plnoys }] “[ensn se poyenyis puv ‘autes oy s}uaUINAysUT

‘oyerapOUr UIeL “aiqeiea OSsIt, Zor { 2°92 , 68 (0% ( 6'9 | H48 682‘T | GLI‘ |oBP‘}L‘06) BE | Of | 198] OFs‘T|I1e‘82| T99‘62 “wea
© € €
5 “MS aS ‘2 “0 } otZ8 ‘OL | 3G | 6E | OF | O'FB |OBTSL | 982‘ |aIH4 36 | SS | EE | BER! SLO‘TISar*s 1009 0g
45 ade “honors oe ie OO or ove |S | ce lee | 2% | eee \920°T | 6a lgoe'e ‘tal of | ee 888 OTI‘1|00P* org, bs
Paes i . : 09s LEN O8 *\) 9°18 11¥‘ oe | 80) BPS
mae et ee iy a |e | ste | 6's po0‘T| 992° |oge't co | Pr | °¢ | Lex] eptitlore’ jeare | Lo
eee As "as 06'T | 8S | TE | 0848 |BET‘L | OZaS |ece'h as | OE | HS | 2 FB! BolT 866" |96P" 96
ate eee ANS a joe | pe | Le |tet'T | g6ré lee] 16 | 9°€ | OF | e%Fal Ire‘T|66a° ore. | ss
vee a nee “MS "aS 08 ‘T 16 | 4h | &b | 6°98 \B9G‘T | OST‘ [BBE 16 | B°E | o°h | Bes) CHI <T|PEE® 6LP* xd
BPC: Saeco sumer qyas | vas cas = MS | ST | 0f00L | SFL J.16 |S | 9% | B°€8 |LG0‘T | aoa‘ lane‘t 16 | 9° | B'S | Z‘€8| gau‘tieces oIrS | £%
s EEE 2108 ig URE NOL tee 3-6 grr6 | GL P16 | Pt |oce | oe oat | ost later 16 | 8° jets | 1-99] eeartfore® fade, | ac
: : a ; ( ‘gh ne ‘ “9 a°Z | 1°e8
s aan ge Be ge ee Sie BS Oro en Loh 16 ig Le 6°98 62E'T | 860° lee 16 va Se 0198 aft Bae ue Og
“< i . . . . . 0 1 o06 | OF 16 |L°¢ | o'g | 2°98 |eeatt | pest Iolo] 16 | T | €°9 | 1°98! BZI°1
> BEST pe Sans rita “a | ovo | ees on 16 it Lg | e283 lplert | gos’ locet| te | 81 L | $98) aia‘t eres jooss | gt
S op Say: aie « ‘ou cou S ‘OUST LO | Btc6 =| BYZZ 1 16 | 99 | 09 | $28 lega‘r | 900° |6ar‘} 16 | OSE 19°F | L’s8] eos T|9FES |6bS Al
= Eanes saya CHO Meo [aw as oa BLOT | 9L | 88 | 0%6 | ofB | £188 \ore*T | BPS |POr'] 16 | 42°F | Bfe | Ges) Eaor1|8rE, | TLE" er
S ie *3S8t012A0 ‘Azey | ‘mu ‘as “MO O'SOT | OFOL | 68 | 59 | HG Le 086‘T | 861‘ |8Lp 68 9°9 nae 916° T/9PE ee ab
7 n G € € % 0Z
< ba Se “Kavy sazey ee “mS 2 Hoes peer ore 68 | LSL | eZ 608 OLUST 86g, i 68 ae a ce aoe ae By. at
2 : pees 5 ; cf ‘ #8 | EOL | oF 1'6 |p‘ | 826% |gor ‘g 58) GLE*T |S 08
3 op = op. op ‘S *S S ‘E21 oes 88 | ‘8 OB. $°16 OFT 901° j9Fo‘} 68 | 0'9 | L°9 on ee oue aa at
— ° . ee « ey G18 Los 6 Prete 2
S “3a anh ‘pn Ape eas eat O°6! 88 | U6 | oe | T't6 \ecerr | ters Lec’ 68 | 9L | off | E°68) B2e°T Bre ee 3
& ‘9[ZZ1.1p “148 “4110 ‘urpiey | ms cma S| 09S J otzit | OfFL [98 | ETT] TIL] 9°16 eap‘r | 9F0‘ \s9F‘| 68 | S'9 | ¥°9 ore Pee‘ I\P Baral ay
SS *BulIoy eS “T~mMuind *as *S O*eel an re ie is Bue 9
Ge eee sumo "419 3 ae eo es a ron oa 8 | PZT | OZ | 6°26 loGET | 990° gee 68 | 2°8 | ¥*8 | 0°06 Lov ‘161! oy 2
: . * °95 : 5 f r8 | PIL | of G°G6 \cOFRT | BOS [ETE] 88 | P'S | 08 | 006) E8E‘T|6% ‘
os 5 “a0 Wea = oe A aoe Bee 78 6'6 OG. 06 Core QZI‘ |8ze" 6 | S°S | 6'e | 8°68] DGE‘T|FES! jOET -
‘ouy OD ‘op ‘MS "MSO eler | eB | 88 | FOL) sor! 2°26 jorH‘t | OL0¢ los] G6 | L°E | L°9 | P88) Bze‘T\992 aac :
“Sulloyyes “aug *Ivapa “MS "s ‘oO 6etr | 9'GL 1:06 | 92 | 9%% | 8°68 lage‘t | e80t |TZrS 0°68 ieee | =
aes i Ree) © hepa Seas Hoe t s+ 3)ap> \sa [2
ie 5 = ic S & m | SORE 25| 2] 83) SE) SS/PSRE Sh yl Sal ee BS [okul &
> $s ° S 3 Be fst (SS) 2) pe] Fe) as ste cio d] oP eele% jar |Nost ¢
al pe =) iT we Cc s. >| o oo eA 3| 2, ao KS or —
: : F 8 2 | S1BF Fol B| Re Ps| Fleae a Pog 7/FEl's (ss | Bal 8
a =e = 2 a ml 2 ) ' 2
5 ao a Sapbss 4
5
*SOUI9I] XY ca &
“19 yeaM “pum peisyemLien Wd } 8 SUOTIEAIASIO “Ww ¥ OL I® SuOTIBAIEsyO :
’ Io}sI5ay

360

"GEgl ‘aung Jo yquopy ay? 40f ‘njjna)n9 ‘a0{Q hossp ayz 70 yday ‘sazsthaxy jooibojosoajayy

2
p i

ye OL s Cene

et oe Sy J

a

ap Sa aS

WAIV. PUXX EL.

5 ext eke

“Seung neE TATA RANT AGHA MAGIA Ha MMM HLS SS Gr OMGRATIGT Hea MET RRMA ICw”

cers HAGE cI TIRES TAT yE esi sIERMM AER RU AaMRMTAAGTASTIGRC
Sigg ST IMGAG AGAMA

F =< foe ach a = gy o ope ©
Bryagraa aan arereigg:ewens cHHaR ARE MMII Fasude

Hraesyealrakwaancagnsehes€G

5 ARERR LAINE TS aoe enengae
Herero s Tel Cal Hoa raargunganeneganea gs gaz Cay
re ernglans nara se FINN IRE THA SH Gur Gen en HTS NAAUTGS

TAL Oe ea ee eR as « Ss
SRO aT Ta piRtA GEA TEE QAI TH MAMaRTIaRUeUGTaeEen (HiqervseRMEAr ST gagigqpTrs

MOTE ONY GATE REYHIR Bia Leh NGA NRG aTGIM VTA se NGIS BHU STFNYTY: TMH SAATGEAT
Tyre Magner

URGE RE Be BONE RARE TE Rl Ge eine nanGumen sha ee ter ae
BMRA UTI Rs aT GUNRORTD TUR as emraea

ThA A

JOURNAL

OF

Pee AS LA TIC. 5 OCLE T Y.

No. 43.—July, 1835.

I.—Notice of the Temple called Seo Byjnauth, (Siva Vaidyandth) dis-
covered* by Sergeant EK. Dean, on the 3rd December, 1834, on the
Hill of Unchapahur, in the Shekdwati Territory.

[Read before the Asiatic Society, 5th August, 1835.]

{Some days prior to the arrival of Mr. Dean’s facsimile of the inscription
referred to in the following paper, another facsimile of the same inscription, taken
by Dr. G. C. RANKtN, was presented to the Society, (see Proceedings of the
llth March, 1835.) This unfortunately was so much smeared, and iajured by
rain, on the way down, as to be totally illegible. Mr. DEAN has the credit, there-
fore, of putting us in possession of the best, though not the first copy of this
ancient and valuable record. It is to his friend Sergeant Buttress also, that we
are indebted for the sketches of the architecture of the ruined temple. Lieut.
Kirttor, who has kindly undertaken for us the task of lithographing the columns,
has also added a note on the date of this peculiar style of Hindu architecture ;
having himself bestowed much study on the Hindu remains in the Western Pro-
vinces.—Ep.]

Plate XXV1I.—Unch4pahart (the high hill) rears its bluff head about
five miles S. E. of Sikar, and by its superior height alone, would be
a conspicuous object, within 15 or 20 miles: as when seen from a
greater distance, the outline would become blended with the general
masses of hills intervening and flanking it ; but it forms a decided and
prominent landmark for a much larger circle, owing to its exact posi-
tion being indicated by a tall spire, which can be distinguished above
the tops of all the surrounding hills at such a distance, as to appear

* I say discovered, as the resident bréhman informed me, they had never seen
an European on the hill before, and one of them, an old man, had been reared
here.

+ Dr, Ranxin designates the hill Harsh, from the name of a village on
the spot.—Ep.

ZZ

362 Description of the Ruins of an (Juny,

not higher than the human figure, although about 80 feet high ; and
even when viewing it at the distance of two coss from the bottom of
the hill, I still thought it might possibly be formed of one block of
stone, (as I had been informed it really was, by a Dourah, from the
hill fort of Rowasah, who had been residing all his life within five or
six miles of it,) which would entitle it to be classed among the Laths.
Fully expecting to find it so, I ascended the hill by the only regular
path, or rather causeway, which begins at the south side of the village
of Hurse, and is paved with stones laid flat and on edge. It is 12
feet wide, and takes a general zigzag direction to the southward.
The turns of each zigzag are particularly distressing in getting up,
as there are no landings, but one slope is led into another. The whole
length of the ascent is computed by the inhabitants of the neigh-
bouring villages to be one wurrum coss. I imagine it cannot be less
than one and half mile, with an average slope of two feet in 10.

On the way up by the side of the causeway, where the ground
will admit, several small chabutras are raised, two or three feet high,
on each of which is set a block of stone on end, blackened with
smoke and oil: and about a quarter distance from the top, a singular
building of cubical form appears, (Plate xxviii. fig. 1,) standing on a
natural platform ; thelength of whose side isabout 10 feet. It is dedicat-
ed by the present generation to Devi. Its singularity consists in the
peculiarly massive structure of a building of sucha size. Set in the
wall, opposite the door-way, are three orfour stones,on whichare carved
in bass relief, various symbols, among which are three figures of an
animal resembling the Nyl Gao*, more than the domestic cow, having
no hump, a short tail, and a neck very like the former animal. I have
given a sketch of some of the principal symbols, (figs. 2, 38, and 4.)
as they may throw a light to assist in tracing the origin of the temple
above, with which I think it is more than likely they are cotemporary.

About 100 yards from the upper end of the causeway, on passing
the crest of the hill, stands a Binising Mandir, dedicated at present to
GanesH. Jt is built of about 45 cubical blocks of stone, without
mortar or any connecting body; the side of each cube is about one
foot. It forms an enclosure to the N.S. and W. but open to the
E., and has no roof. The stones are extremely well hewn, and
without the slightest ornament. Some mutilated figures are lying on
the ground at the inside of the west face, (fig. 5.)

* The Nyl Gao is an object of peculiar sanctity in this country; the penalty of
the crime of killing one is loss of nose, ears and estate, and expulsion from the
village to which the perpetrator may belong.

1835.] ancient Temple at Harsha, in Shekdwatt. 363

The surface of the top of the hill is about one mile long by 100
yards average breadth, and shews many bare spots, where the second-
ary sandstone, coming to the surface, checks vegetation; there are
also large masses of felspar scattered in an unconnected manner over it.

The whole surface of the hill, both sides and top, is covered
with jungle of Dhau and Soldhri, 15 to 25 feet high, and thickly
studded with clumps of cactus. The jungle, when I visited the spot,
was without leaves, and presented the appearance shewn in the sketch.

On arriving at the building which had principally excited my curi-
osity from the plain below, I found it occupied a site about quarter
distant from the south-westerly end of the top of the, hill, and on the
precipitous verge of the northern face. The guide and officiating
brahmans informed me, that it may be distinctly seen from the hills
round Jeypore, 35 coss S. E. from Sambre, 30 coss south at Midag,
and when standing in relief against the dark background of a rain-
bow, it has frequently been seen from thence and Baudra, two villages
or towns in the said territory, distant 45 coss N. E. by E. Such is
the native account, which I think is entitled to belief, as I have myself
seen it from Taen, a distance of about 40 miles, at least I imagine so,
without taking much trouble to find it out. It is a plain building, of
a similar though plainer style of architecture, than the Mandirs of
Bindraband, Mathura, &c. It is reported to have been built by Sxo
Srveu, a Raja of Sikar, and great grandfather to the present Raja,
about the year 1718. Many of the stones composing its base are
specimens of elaborate and elegant sculpture, the remains of buildings
lying in confused heaps near it to the south-west.

These ruins, which are not visible from below, in their present un-
pretending state, on being discovered, entirely engross the attention ;
the only remaining perfect parts of them consist of two rows of
columns, of exceedingly beautiful proportions and workmanship,
covered with exquisite sculpture, every line and harris of which is as
finely preserved as if drawn on paper or executed in alabaster. They
are 10 in number, (Plates xxix. fig. 1.) These are flanked on either
side by square pillars, fig. 2, also beautifully carved, and are brought
up through (I must say, for want of a more applicable expression) a
ledge, which protrudes 2 feet in towards the centre of the apartment,
from each of its four sides being only broken by the two door-ways.
I have no idea of the use of this ledge, as it forms no necessary part
of the building, neither is it at all ornamental, unless it has been
used for the reception of offerings made to the deity to whom the
building has been dedicated, or for sacrificial purposes: but its presenee

zz2

364 Description of the Ruins of an [JuLy,

is entirely conclusive of this compartment of the original building
being still complete.

These columns and pillars support a stone roof composed of a
first set of ribs, whose ends are supported by four columns, forming a
square with a side of about 10 feet. Over the point of bisection of
each of these sides, another set of ribs are disposed, so that the angles
of a second and of course smaller square rest on the centres of the
lower ribs. The interstices of these figures are covered in with slabs,
forming between each four columns, a beautiful and simple figure, and
taken as a whole a roof of the most primeval architecture.

In the northern face of this apartment, a door-way (relieved by anu
architrave of most elaborate sculpture, divided into twelve compart-
ments, in each of which a group from the Hindu Pantheon occupies
a place,) communicates with an inner apartment, (the sanctum sanc-
torum), around which, at a height of about five feet from the ground,
are ranged 17 Jogies, about 34 feet high, executed in bold demi-
relief, in a superior style of sculpture. They are in a very primitive
state, as regards their habiliments, and placed in lascivious postures,
belonging to Devry, who herself about six feet high occupies a corner.
This figure has no connexion with the buildings, but merely reclines
against one of the walls, and has probably been brought here in latter
days, although from its style evidently coeval with the others.

In the centre of this room is a Jelahri, on which stands a Chau-
mana Mahadeo, worked in marble.

Near the entrance to the outer apartment lies a large slab of black
stone, about 34 inches thick, and 3 feet square, in which is cut an in-
scription in a fine clear character, in good preservation, of which I
have forwarded a fac simile, taken with ink on paper from the stone.

About 10 yards in front of the entrance lies, or rather sits, Nanor,
sculptured in a block of coarse white marble, with an ornamented
collar, and bells hung round his dewlap, and the back of his hump,
and another round his neck, about one-sixth larger than life. How
this immense block of stone (in itself a curiosity) was ever brought
to the top of this hill, considering the imperfect knowledge of machi-
nery possessed by the natives of the present day, is a matter of asto-
nishment to me.

The site of the main building, if we may judge from the remains of
an octagonal chaubutra, round the whole base of which are an im-
mense number of elephants, executed in demi-relievo, about a foot
high, and each one placed in a different attitude, some of them in the
act of destroying a human being, others assisting the Mahaut to
mount, others again destroying monsters; and from what remain, I

1835.] ancient Temple at Harsha, in Shekdwatt. 365

have no doubt, the ingenuity of the artist must have been exhausted
in typifying the sagacity, and different uses to which this wonderful
animal may be put. This base is about 30 yards south-west of
the part described, and bears every appearance of having belonged
to a noble building, of which Nos. 1 and 2 (Plate xxx.) are specimens,
being the crowns or upper courses of domes, which have rested on
gradually expanding courses, with the carving and style of archi-
tecture of which I am convinced a most intimate connexion in the
buildings surrounding the court in which the Delhi town pillar stands,
might betraced. I will by the first opportunity send you a specimen
brought thence, and which will give a good idea of the quality of the
stone, and although much mutilated, of the finish of the carving.

The whole of these remains have been worked in’ freestone of
excellent quality, which is no where procurable in the neighbourhood ;
neither have I met with it any where, but in the buildings before
mentioned, at the Kuttab, which are formed of the same sort of stone,
but of inferior quality ; and the finish of the sculpture will not bear
comparison. The natives could give me no account of whence it had
been brought.

Lying on the extreme edge of the precipice on which these ruins

and temples stand, are 15 or 20 figures, male-and female, about one
third larger than life, and although exposed to the weather, in very
good preservation. The numerous (I had almost said numberless)
groups, in some of which there are from 20 to 30 figures, consist of
processions, dancers, male and female, and musicians. (The instru-
ments used by the latter are generally the sitara, fife or flute, and drum.)
These fragments of sculpture are scattered over a space of two or three
acres; besides what from accident or design have fallen over the
precipice, as well as others built in the modern structure: and I should
think that the whole of the Hindu Pantheon must have been here repre-
sented in a style, the pecuniary ability to follow which has, I fear,
gradually passed away with the genius which was capable of designing
and executing such a work of art.
_ Not the very slightest tradition concerning these interesting ruins
is in possession of the resident brahmans (three in number), attached
to the temples of Siva Baijndth generally, but in particular to that
portion of the ancient one now remaining perfect. They say that it
is possible that they were contemporary with the palace of the Hur-
san Moreanrts R4ja, the site of which is still known, and which is now
level with the surface of the earth, but to the existence of which, other
than as ruins, no date can be affixed. The elk, leopard, hog, and
nyl-gao, are found in, and in the neighbourhood of, this hill.

366 Note on the Inscription [Juy,

Reference to the Map, Pl. X XVII.

This plate is intended to give an idea of tke topographical formation of the
hill, including the general direction of the ascent by the causeway, and the posi-
tions of the different buildings described in the accompanying paper.

The principal objects are distinguished as below:

a village of Harsha (or Hurse of RANKIN).

6 causeway.

ec temple (fig. 1 of Plate xxviii.) The site of building from that from

d Binsing Mandir (fig. 5 of ditto). | the ascent, or No. 3, is an enclosure

e site of the Siva Barsna’tH temple. eas of pillars and other fragments

F salt lake or Jheel. of the original building, built up by

g cultivated land. j the officiating brahmans.

h jangle.

[The names of many villages are mentioned in the annexed translation of the
Harsha inscription, by Dr. Miut, of which it is desirable to find the locality.
On reference to Mr. DEAN, we find that an accurate, though rapid, survey of the
whole district was executed, during the late campaign, by the several engineer
officers on duty; and we learn from Major Irvine, that Captain BoILEAv is now
engaged in putting the several divisions together, to form a complete map of She-
kawat. Should we find, when we have an opportunity of inspecting this valuable
addition to our geography of Upper India, that it will elucidate the subject of the
inscription, we will hereafter furnish a map of the vicinity of Unchdpahar. Of
the geological features of the country, Mr. Dean has collected numerous speci-
mens, now on their way to the Society’s museum ; he describes the volcanic field
as very rich in fine minerals. Of the copper mines of Singhana, we have been also
favored with specimens from himself and from Captain BorL—Eav.—ED. }

Reference to Pl. XXVIII.

Fig. 1, represents the temple dedicated to Devi, described in the map as about
one-third downwards from the top of the hill.

Nore.—The dark rectangular spots shewn in the interior are the positions, or
nearly so, of Nos. 2, 3, and 4.

Nos. 2, 3, 4. Symbols carved in freestone, and built in the wall opposite the
entrance.

No. 5. The Binsing Mandir, dedicated to GANEs, situated within a few yards
from the top of the causeway, as marked in the plan.

Remarks. This sheet and the plan of the hill are mere sketches, with the
measurements guessed at and set down on the spot, so if they are a trifle out, I
must plead want of time to be the accurate chronicler of these remains which I
would have been, had I had a little of the spare time others had, and with ten
times my ability for the office, in the camp. I hope this short notice may serve
to point some one’s attention to the spot, who could devote a month to the
pursuit of tracing the various groups alone: I am sure they would find ample
employment.

Note on Pl. XXIX.

Figures 1 and 2, called domes in the plate, represent the upper or key-stones
of ceilings of a very ancient style of Hindu architecture, used before the art of
vaulting was known in India, i. e. before the Muhammedan conquest. Of this
description of ceilings, there are several of most elaborate workmanship, and in a
good state of preservation, in the cloisters of the Atalah Masjid at Jonpur, ori-
ginally belonging to the temple, out of the materials of which the mosque was
built.

The same kind are to be seen at the Kuttab at Delhi, and at Kanouj, in their
original positions. The rectangular kind, (No. 1,) rests immediately on the archi-
traves, which are often three or more in number, one above the other, either
plain or ornamented, and each one slightly projecting beyond the lower one.
Those with circular ceilings, (No. 29,) (which have the appearance of a dome,)
have usually a single architrave (A), on which is placed a course, consisting of
eight stones, placed so as to form an octagon (B), on which is placed a third
course (C), placed so as to form a polygon of 16 sides, on which is finally placed
a stone (D), such as represented in fig. 2, Each layer slightly projecting beyond
the under one. M. KitTos.

Our, AS SOC.

Lol IH, XX VU.

WW

yf},

V),

FM

Mf we
===

Lio

\

Se

=——

SS
S \\
NZ WR
VS i OGM MY I> Ph ah 9)) SSS
| 44 on: ae Mf! [1 Wal { WZ Wk jj i |\ SSS .
Meg - 8 ty Yj /fi\' Up RTT TA ANS oAZ A LINAS
: ORI / 7 Df! ra WA ! TINS
| AUIS EAS

Ee oe

Ch mn
ihre a

aie,

£

——

Vol 1V. PLXX VU.

=A ian TTR
IV RC
THe © | ius
H | cma
| |
Hl
i

; th at fo HH age LL
SET THEE
|

aa

ESS

——

Toit?? 28. SOC.

im as. Soc. VOL. JV_PL XX IX.

5 al

————

we ete et
ne et ye
ia hate
ie

Sekai ganar)

-

Vol JV. FEREX. .

a

ity . i
aka 7)

= Sea ne
RAT EAD UAM ERT)
PLR a

Oe bimiis of Pha.

Lome -

=
a

ay ise

Pat

MA

= en
ee ii Be ek

ae — 9a peak
Or ee ee ro

1835.) Sound in the ruins at Harsha, in Shekdvatr. 367

Il.—Restitution and Translation of the Inscription found in the Ruins
of the Mountain-Temple of Shekdvatt. By W.H.Mutu, D. D. Prin-
cipal of Bishop’s College, Vice-President, &c. &c.

[Read before the Asiatic Society, August 5, 1835. ]

The inscription mentioned in the preceding article, is not unworthy
of the labour which Dr. G. C. Ranxin and Serjeant Dzan have
severally bestowed on it. Though abounding, like other monuments
of the same kind, with much that is little calculated to interest west-
ern readers, it is not destitute of philological and historical use,
in illustrating the political and literary state of India at the very
remarkable period to which it belongs. Its date precedes, by a few
years only, the first great invasion of the Mahomedans : who, ever since
that period, the close of the tenth century of our era, have so power-
fully influenced the civil and social state of the country. The charac-
ter in which this inscription is executed, joined with the extreme
precision of its date, gives it a value beyond that of its own intrinsic
information : furnishing, as it does, a definite standard, from which
the age of other monuments of similar or more remotely resembling
characters may be inferred with tolerable accuracy.

The character, though illegible at present to the pandits even of
northern India, presents no difficulty after the deciphering of the
more ancient inscriptions, whose characters resemble those of the
second on the pillar of Allahabad. This stone exhibits the Devanagari
in its state of transition, from the form visible in that and other yet
older monuments, to the writing which now universally bears that
name, and which may be traced without sensible variation in inscrip-
tions as old as the 12th century. From the facsimile of Serjeant
Dean, I easily transcribed all the legible letters of the inscription into
the last-mentioned character: and the circumstance of its being in
verse of various measures, (though written according to Indian usage,
in unbroken lines like prose,) with the exception of a few prosaic
enumerations near the end, helped greatly to the restitution of the
reading, where the stone was broken or partially defaced*.

* Of the 49 verses or stanzas of which the poetical part of thisinscription consists,
23 are in the measure the most nearly approaching to the freedom of prose,
the Iambic Tetrameter of the Ramayana and Mahdbhirata: and one is in the
ancient description of metre called A’ryd, in which, as inthe Anapestic measures
of the Greeks, the aggregate quantity of feet is preserved, withont regard to
the number of syllables. The remaining 25 (which the great length of some of
the metres causes to be the most considerable portion of the whole inscription,)
are in various descriptions of lyrical measure, seven in number, ia each of which
the number and the quantity of syllables is regulated with the same rigour

368 Account of an Inscription [Juzy,

The subject of the inscription is the erection of the temple, in whose
yet splendid ruins it was found, to Siva.-Maunapeva, under a name
by which he is not generally known elsewhere—Sri’ Harsna :
the latter word (=4 joy), being still the name ofa village in the
neighbourhood, and apparently of the high mountain itself, as we
learn from the descriptions of the site now published. The inscription,
however, connects this name with an event of great celebrity in the
mythology of India,—Srva’s destruction of the Asura or demon Tri-
pura, who had expelled Inpra and his gods from Svarga or heaven ;
and his reception of the praises of the restored celestials on this very
mountain: whence the name of Joy is stated to have been derived
to this hill? and the surrounding region, as well as to the great deity
as here worshipped.

After some of the ordinary topics of praise to Srv, in which the
mythology of the Puranas and the deeper mystical theology of the Upa-
nishads are blended in the usual manner,—and after the commemora-
tion of this peculiar seat of his worship,—the author begins in the 13th
of his varied stanzas, to recount the predecessors of the two Shekavati
princes, to whose liberality the temple was most indebted. A genea-
logy of six princes, of the same distinguished family whose head
then held the neighbouring kingdom of Ajmeer,—the family of the
Chahum4na or Chohans,—is continued regularly from father to son,
and terminated in Sinua Ra’sa, in whose reign this work appears to
have been commenced, A. D. 961. Then comes a seventh king ofa
totally different family, being sprung from the solar race of Raceuv.
The name of this descendant of Ra’ma is VigraHA Ra’sa; but in what
character he appears as the successor of the former princes, whether
as a conqueror or asa liberator from the power of other conquerors,—
and in what manner, if at all, he allied himself to the former race which
he is said to have restored, is not distinctly stated in the three verses
(19, 20, and 21), where the succession is recorded. We find only that
in his liberality to this temple of the god of Joy, heemulatea and surpassed
the donations of his apparently less fortunate predecessor Sina Rasa’,
and that in his time it was probably completed, twelve years after its
commencement, in A. D. 973. From this list of monarchs, which is not
without value as illustrating the discordant and divided state of India at
this critical epoch of its history, the author passes in the 28th verse to
what is of paramount importance in the Hindu mind—the commemora-

and precision as in the greater part of the Odes of Horace. These seven
measures are interspersed with the two other metres and with each other ad
libitum, as in the drama, and other classical writings of the Hindus.

1835.] on the Temple of Harsha, in Sekdvati. 369

tion of the chief brahmans of the temple and their predecessors. The
princes were but donors and benefactors, but these world-renouncing
men are represented as the actual builders, whose spiritual genealogy
from preceptor to pupil, the author proceeds to trace. The line when
apparently degenerating, is described as reformed by the zeal and
devotion of one who is an incarnation of the god Nanpv’ himself, the
greatest of Siva’s attendant deities,—and who, in his mortal state,
received command to erect this magnificent temple in the sacred
mount of Harska,—a work, however, which was not completed by
himself, but by his pupil. After some descriptions and panegyrics,
in which due mention is made of what excites the admiration of all
beholders of the ruins at this day, the conveyance of the huge stones of
the building to this mountain height, the poetical part of the inscription
ceases : and the minute account of the year, the month and the day, in
which the work was begun and ended, is followed by a list of
benefactors of various degrees, kings and subjects, with their several
donations of lands to the temple. The whole is concluded with a verse
eulogizing benefactions of this nature, and adjuring all future princes,
in the name of the great Ra’ma, to preserve them inviolate.

The last king Vierana is very probably the Yaso-Vicraua of Capt.
Frexu’s Benares inscription, the head of the family whence sprung
the last (Rahtore) kings of Kanyakubja or Kanoj: though Witson’s
calculation of only 24 years each for four generations would bring
that chief to A. D. 1024, fifty years after the date of this monument,
(A. R. vol. xv. p. 461.) But for the same distance of time, deduced
from more certain data, I should have been led to identify Viaraua’s
younger brother, whose name occurs in the 26th verse of the inscrip-
tion, with a prince who in the same year 1024, in conjunction with
another Indian chief called Brauma Deva, nearly turned the tide of
victory against Maumu’p Guaznevi, after his rapid march from
Ajmeer to Somanath, by arriving seasonably to assist his Guzzeratti
countrymen ; and whom Maumv’p, after his reduction of that place,
apprehending as a formidable enemy, took prisoner with him to his
capital bevond the Indus; whence being sent back to a kinsman of
his own, who had been left viceroy of Guzzerat, he succeeded by a
most remarkable adventure, in possessing himself of the kingdom of
that country. Certainly this prince, whom Ferisura calls (as well as
his kinsman) Da’ssHE.I’m%, is called by other authorities, Hindu and
Mahomedan, Dur.asna, the same name as that here assigned to the
warlike brother of Vicrawa.

* Dow, vol. i. pp. 74, 79, 82.—Brices, vol. i. pp. 70—80.—Ayin

AcbrEry, vol. i. pp. 82, 86.
3 A

370

Line on

the stones

I

bQ

Ancient Inscription from ihe Ruins of [Juy,

) (1.)

*orifaanad qufaa
yaaa farattmatgta l
afaatarcaralfatac
a aatta aqlz aariraa i}

(u1.)
eS ae . aa tran: |
MIATA Te 2a: — afeauctan q

(111)
UT aTaTATAT aafa dead TaATATaTArI
TEs: rai a: * afsaaty femrdtac: at janas : |
fuarzal wad wate fe yad we eT Ta
si sfhedrrarat sata aqutae a taratrat: l

(1v.)
ag ae Tireact othe | da Aatet]
qat [vat teate* aar | meanfaeat aparaas |
veiaateraa aa arta PANCIOE|
=a tien wefease: ofa: WIT GATT b

(v.)
qa KATAAT LA STAMAT AAITAT TAS
agar [aT goatee jase faiararage:

caret a WIYCYaaT aya Gaara
Vat Stat AEA we faaccprat atfcarat:

(vr.)
ara RAAT ATA TAA ATT Cet [yt srs
fy argeite aaa aca: SATTA |
qamernfaaraecacty aaa aaa aa wT
SUMS CASI WIA ACTAT Tae TAT: I
(vir. )
aa arartaemafaqegeteg[ait*] qeu: WE
BR eeiorerre ada taatater: qeraTaTys ae

1835.) the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdvati. 371

I.—To him who has effected the destruction of all obstacles, —who is
worshipped by the celestial gods,—who is to be adored even by Siva
herself [his female counterpart or energy],—whose birth is from
abstract essence alone,—the giver of religious devotion, of liberation
from worldly things, and perfection in what is of paramount and eternal
concernment,—to him I reverently bow, the granter of petitions, the
ever-blessed Siva.

II.—May he who is thus praised even by the pure gods, their minds
disturbed by his awful power ........ the destrover of the demon
Tripura, protect you!

{II.—-He at whose dancing the earth bows, moved by the rapid
tread of his feet, though fixed to the hood of her supporting serpent,
and even the whole system of the world, though joined with its chief
guardians, the lords of the several regions of space, together with the
sun and moon, is displaced—he, under the name of Sri Harsna,
conquers all, the bestower of compassion on the universe.

IV.—‘ The three-forked spear in thy left hand, the extended axe in
“thy right; thy head-dress the celestial Ganea’ herself ; a serpent the
** necklace about thy blue throat ; never was so wondrous vesture as
“* thine, O three-eyed one, seen any where by me.” May Hara, who
smiling was thus addressed sportively by his fair consort Gauri’,
protect you!

V.—May the river of heaven, fair as the moon, which agitated by
rains, pervades with her masses of waters in thousands of lines of
waves the region of the sun and planets, looking down even upon
the rapidly-flowing seas,—may she grant your petition, bearing gentle
sport, cricket-like, on the crest of the moon-crowned §:va, fast
bound with its shining horrid ornament [of clotted hair].

ViI.—May he, by whose will the moveable universe with its varied
expanse of worlds, mountains, rivers, islands and oceans, all long
before made internally, yet germinant with adoration, with its lords,
the Pramathis [attendant deities of Stva], the most excellent Munies,
the Yaties, and other immortals ;—he, by whose will and active power,
this universe while yet non-existent, is produced, and by whom it is
destroyed; may he, even Harsua-peva, the incomparable architect in
the fabrication of the worlds, protect you!

VII.—May Siva, crowned with the moon, the foe of Tripura, who
after consuming that demon with his fiery darts, when with joy spring-
ing thence, he was adored by the glad troops of liberated gods, Inpra
and the rest, on this very mountain, was thence called Harsnwa or Joy,
the name both of this mountain peak, and of the country [adjacent,]

aa 2

372

(Line.)

10

11

12

13

Ancient Inscription from the Ruins of - (Juny,

at swaratty Sal faftfrenayarearaes
ats wet fawent fea faauaas eatta: TaTHT 4

(vut.)

ae aaa aa joaceaalas ara
| Masa bea S TATA aaa |
SLAC HATH TATLTS fe EERE

er a: wen fafae qead cefastaaa Jy

(1x.)
[* wap] Tos eaSAAAT ATA |
aaaita: eearan fafeea arg & |
(x.) BOGS AT |

ania a farsi og vaste a Bat areata:

aamaumaAatataae [*faatsiata a] urd |
arat wa ware frarafanfetae Tafedtat

araraera acty fe gcd area cayarar: y

(xr.)
Wears fageatfaer Saal |
q Tal weary woah [fread *] 4
(xtz.)

waagquianifayeca Ara STARA TA TMs

_sraararaatsttac trata tray ate
act RATA Galeagquard TRUSTEE

aTaTeTETaHiat wate HAaaT BUSTY [aa] i

(x111.)
* Sa! Baraares Pearce ag saa a Sa.
ALAATATT AAT ACSA ATTA AE TTS | ]
wel Bears sonar rah an fair
arayatte eter vanfa wes: [atferat & atade:*] j

(xrv.)
7S! PTAA TIA TTA atayata:
Bqay YU TWH 4 TAUTATS Tatut |

1835.] the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdvatt. 873

for the benefit of Badrata [or India universally],—may he be yours
in the form of his phallic emblem, and with his mansion doubled.

VIII.—Whose form, essentially illumined with the fiery light of the
immense conflagration, that oft issues from the evil glance of his eye,
audibly flashing, darkening even the bow of heaven with the multi-
plied dense smoke of trees consumed by that long-standing flame,—
and which, uttering a tremendous sound at the commencement of the
fiery onset, destroyed even him of the incomparable arrows (Cama or
Curip], and thus became a subject of doubt to the gods beholding it,
whether his great periodical destruction of the universe was not
perpetually repeated, even in this tranquil time.

IX.—May this sacred mountain, possessed of the glory of the joy
{above mentioned], and thence called Harsha, on which thus sat the
eternal Samsau, destroyer of Tripura, with the breeze of heaven on
his head, protect you !

A hero speaks the following verse.

X.— May this mountain protect you, with pure and varied splen-
dour resting on its peak as of reddened gold, which the beauty—ah,
what, is not that beauty? of its pleasant gardens, brings delightfully
to my ravished bodily sense! Yet has this mount of Siva no other
transcendent and incomparable felicity, but this, that the eternal
SamBuv sat there: that is the paramount cause of its loveliness.”

XI.—To that mountain on which the Eight-formed one, the Eternal
endued with eight infinite perfections, chose to sit,—no one of equal
excellence exists in the world.

XII.—This temple of the blessed Harsua-prva, splendid by reason
of its complement of open chapels around, whose structure is embellish-
ed with eggs of gold, delightful for the sweet yellow flowers appended
to it, formed into garlands gathered for morning offerings ; a temple
vying in loftiness with the peak of Meru itself; adorned with a
door and sacred porch, on which is a finely wrought effigy of the bull
of Siva; distinguished moreover, as the frequent resort of various
celestial songsters—surpasses all others.

XIII.—Tue first Prince was celebrated by the name of Gu’vaxa, the
blessed, of the CuAuumana (or Chauhan) family, and obtained heroic
eminency amidst the multitude of kings in the several worlds from the
infernal world of the blessed Nagas upward : the earthly effigy of whose
glory shines forth doubly in this excellent house erected to Harsna-
pEvA, and is celebrated by the most excellent of beings.

XIV.—His son was Cuanpra Rasa’, the blessed, of glory pure as the
sky, arrayed in fervid splendour. And his son was again a splendid king,

374 Ancient Inscription from the Ruins of (Juny,

tiny TeTRbiea wafeataytawrscaaa4¢y: eeu
14 CaM UA Hs SHE _Aea* Jaralaia] sas |

(xv.)
ae WLHAHS Het THLE: |
STA aac Sg ASIA ITAT? |
(xv1.)
Fae at Seal waaay Saat attra
15 «maa arfaae: acta afeeet etgfeats[aqa*]
faqyaretaant aacafeawarnat saan
wuTaesaurat feta feta afaat Hifaaw: Waa i

(xvit.) FEST |
ah at te aulaet aq efces ATA wag
16 anaatay wan fiz rat URS VASAT |
aaata sia afetad eavad 4a
Hasrafatsaacaa: Wess was |
(xvuit.)
Saalentrd] Ga fare watt |
quasi Sti FATA SHS] AT |
(XIx.)
17 [*ear] Stacaeh avant Santerarsd
qe aa ae-aer ofafed frirfca fare |
aziasata yore fayarsrctent age
aaareiaurtrat caqe WaRTt GIA |
(xx,)

18 site| fa * a RRISINT ES Tae |
qatar qat fauttst 4

(xx1.)
eisascher faa Frat
viata aufe fase at aafa |
its wsqae facafaae
19 auifcata ceat fra [*e1jsaaeit! 4

1835.] the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdvati. 375

named like the first, Gu’vaka. From him sprung Cuanpana, the bless-
ed, inspiring terror into kings, of rays which, [like the sun’s,] produced
showers, who, having once without repetition proudly smitten his foes
in the fearful onset of war, obtained glory by this act, and was
worthily possessed of the full felicity of conquest.

XV.—Then came his son, the great king, the fortunate VAxpatt,
supremely glorious, perpetually victorious in war, foremost in
battle.

XVI.—By whom, possessing a fierce army that loosed the reins
altogether from their coursers, even TanrRra-pAta, the possessor of
conquered regions from the serpent that bears the whole earth, the
well-pleased governor of earth with its innumerable regions,—even
he, having his elephant terrified and driven into a lake by the sounding
cymbals of the hostile war-elephants, was forced to wander through
varicus countries, overwhelmed with the shame of defeat.

A hero speaks the following verse.

XVII.—The son of this fortunate king, VAKpatr, was the incom.
parable Sinua-rasa, who is sung in this terrestrial world, as equal to
the great Hariscuanpra, whose fame was spotless in the surpassing
excellency both of liberality and dominion, and whose justice was re-
splendent ; by whom money procured without deceit was spent upon
Hara (or Srva) for this sacred temple.

XVIII.—By whom was placed on the top of the house of Siva, his
own appropriate emblem, the golden figure of a full moon, and also
his eight proper forms.

XIX.—By whom,—when he had slain, together with Lavana, the
leader of the hostile spears, proud of the command of armies,—the
kings of men in every direction were annihilated in war through
his victorious might, and many also who had opposed his messengers,
were detained in a capacious prison of stone :—yet for the liberation
of this very king (Sinma-RA4JA) a conqueror of the world of the race
of Racuu voluntarily interposed.

XX.—This was the fortunate Vicraua-rasa, resembling VAsava,
[or Inpra,] when he had performed his adoration [on this same
mountain, to the same deity]; by this young prince were the wealth
of the race and the prosperity of victory, both rescued from de-
struction.

XXI.—[For he it was] by whom, when the wealth of the kingdom,
deprived of [her husband} S1nwa-RAJa, inquired, as in terror, ‘‘ Wino
now will be my Lord ?” She was peacefully answered—‘‘ Dwell thou
in my two arms,”—thus affording her a lasting resting place.

376 Ancient Inscription from the Ruins of [Juny,

(Line.) (xxir.)
aq SVeHaa Baas:
artwattarne] ears fer: |
Mata ana fit Hat
faatta fasts |
(XXIII.) ;
ae ureatcea Sat Sat
Rugat wats ahd Ha |
20 efesraareaa[ gar]
WIG TALS ABMS? |
(xxiv. y
aATEIE aaa BARI TT ae wei
AUR: UNL TATRAL eAMTR LTA! l
Sayers: 2 marr fa fe fare frrate: wie
210 feats: wifal*ckras]frfctea: areca: fae y
(XxXvV.)
EAMIAT FLUTAT facta: RALIUA: |
Gta SUAS GA faa TA ANAT |
= )
SETHI Fi aisasia fafa |
aqua ATHAT fama Saray: lI
( XXVIE :)
22 [*rer ersitaeht aTat Wap faTaTSaT |
steu HAS aT S RIAA ||
(XXVIII.)
WAITUTTAL Slate THAIS Tac gr |
TATUM AMA FITRHTNTTET: ||
(XXIX.)
23 8 = Sa Sanwa w faeqe(*aag jae |
TIM Sasa eyay wy: Hat ||
(xxx.)
ufa catsTare fret fete ataz: |
ai fentaigratenay reas l

1835.] the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdwati. S77

XXII.—-By whom also, having effected the conquest of his enemies,
the whole earth on every side being overcome, as in sport, with his
mighty arms, was as a servant beneath his feet, subjected to his will.

XXIII.—Whose glorious exploits, when good men hear perpetually
celebrated by mankind through the world, their body becomes repeat-
edly encompassed as with a panoply of solid gold, arising from their
extreme delight.

XXIV.—Who worshipped Sri’ Harswa with strings of pearls
without end; with wanton steeds, and gorgeous garments and wea-
pons ; with camphor, with cakes mixed with the fruit of the Areca ;
with the best sandal-wood of Malabar ; with immense ingots of gold;
with conspicuous gifts composed of the birds of every country and
species, of herds of elephants with their mates ; gifts without deceit,
delightful and most numerous, brought hither by his liege servants.

XXV.—By him, through his exemplary devotion, two villages
were presented with suitable deeds of gift to the deity called
Harsna, the best of these called Chhatradhdra, the second Sanka-
rdnaka.

XXVI.—Who also was adorned by his younger brother, the fortu-
nate prince DurLABHA, even aS was Ra’ma by Laxmana, and Bata-
ria by VisHNu, [i. e. by Krisuna.]

XXVII.—This series of great kings had the origin of all their
other virtues in devotion to Samsuu [or Stva]. Sri Harsua was the

tutelar god of their race; hence was their genealogy illustrious.

XXVIII.—Tue Spiritual teacher Visva-Ru PA was a happy and
learned master of replies, on an infinite variety of subjects, according
to the received discipline of the Panchdrthala tribe of brahmans.

XXIX.—His disciple was called Prasasra ; who had attained the
choicest mystic formule, and was skilled in the interpretation of all
that were produced to him ; an accomplished devotee of Siva, lord of
beings.

XXX.—His disciple, twice received as such, was one attached to
the earth, named Tonnara, sprung from a holy family of brahmans
of the Vargatika tribe ;

3B

378

(Line.)

24

25

26

27

Ancient Inseription from the Ruins of {Juy,
(XXXI,)
SAYA Bra: VTS craft |
aiantcanatataeat we fafaleta:* |)
(xxx)

A LWessaa At tare fata: |
Seas Tat GA ACTAATATA |

(XXX1II.)

SST HARTATE feuanaqaa: Azrael art

SSAC A AAAI AAA HSAICATS! |

STA Vasa TIAL AT at [Awa | SAteaeaT

Sac wuts gateatane atled Wawra y

(XXxXIV.)

afaisisian? mrufatetriaaitaat

sey Speaaaytaaraqa: StSATAUTATA |

Waa IR WIAs Alor sacar]

aTatyi fai fret aetata wattage asta
(xxxv.)
ardiatenent St earyTama: |
TY AI SHAT YAIAA: |
(XXXVI)

AAT MATATRHI LMS ACHATa: | ;
waa: Aihara VAST]

(XXXVI. )
Tera wy ofestat: frases |
TULSA AM aa AA TENA |
(XXXVIII.)

qenrmfargtedd Ta uitcay l
aanates faarmafeame |

1835.] the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdwatt. 379

XXXI.—Whose origin was from the place which is known as
a village in the neighbourhood of Harsha, called Rdna-pallikd, the
received discipline of which is that of the worldly tribe.

XXXII.—Then came in disguise Nanp1’, he whose rank among the
votaries of Siva is most eminent. He of his own accord descended
to the state of mortality for the worship of Sri’ Harsua.

XXXIII.—A brahmanical student from his birth—with mere space
for his pure covering, [i. e. a pure gymnosophist,] with subdued spirit,
addicted to self-torturing exercises, with his excellent mind singly
bent with eagerness on the worship of Sri’ Harsua, having forsaken
the infatuation of the external world—by him thus living, having |
assumed birth under the name of Suvasru, the best of youthful
corporeal beings,—and through his discernment of religious duty,—
was this ample well-compacted temple of Harsua caused to be built.

XXXIV.—Seeing thus by whom, on this mountain, bearing the
symbol of Cuanpa’ [the female energy of Siva], with its lofty peak
kissing the path of heaven, an incomparable temple has been raised
to that Lord of Creatures, as celebrated under the name of Sri
Harsua,—a temple resembling the rapid car of the pure gods, encom-
passed with ornaments and excellent delights, the habitation of many
immortals—it is clear that nothing is impracticable even to the bddily
power of sages who have renounced all selfish desire.

XXXV.—Of him [Nanpr’ or Suvastu], who was thus of the form
of a Naisthika or perpetual student, a splendid devotee of Srva, and
who multiplied his exercise of severe self-torment to that degree, that
the triple quantity of holiness, unholiness [or passion], and defile-
ment no longer existed within him—

XXXVI.—Of him [I say] thus similar in splendour to the great
deity himself, the disciple was the eminent religious teacher Sanpi-
pita, who was likewise conformed to the eternal Siva, and endued
with his splendour.

XXXVII.—This [Sannp1’pita] having received command from his
preceptor [Suvastru], who desired to consecrate this house of Siva,
obtained the consent of the deity himself, Hara, to the works as they
were already commenced.

XXXVIII.—By whom also in front of what was already dedicated,
a third ground-floor, including a hall for self-torturing exercises, and
extending as far as the place for distributing water, was splendidly
covered with well-compacted stones.
3B 2

380

(Line.)

28

29

30

ol

Ancient Inscription from the Ruins of [JuLy,
(xxxIx.)
A ~ ~
eq AHATAAT AAT GIS Alea |
atfenteal a *aet ca]TaTeCUTae jl
(xt.)

quasi TAU Teurst waraty |

ataeatae weartard TwaRifaare jl
(XLI,)

feascasiwy TUT fqeaa l

fagrata: ae ott aearta Ufcae: |
(xiI1.)

faanaray ESCMCICLIILS aereta
acfasquata: yetaet Te Ta |

qaatgerest sind aa ata
Henan: ated sufaar y

(xXLr11.)
qLAAHT Bla? CAE saats le: |
fran HAA arafaet[ face] fi
(XLIV.)
aa fateafae aaret
RATT aaa aHSTa l
YararaaTaea
auestaa TUS Gaa y

(XLV.)
UAALATT AT
dfenaaRaas Waa |
afaaqel Guat
BUfafce WieATTs |

(xLv1.)

arage | aye aa eCAS HRT ET TT

Waeaiaceacte faa ata Grad Sasha a a

1835.] the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdwatt. 381

XXXIX.—With the sweet water there contained, the sprinkling of
this sacred hall is ever to be performed, as well as the whole of the
duty attached to the watering place.

XL.—For the worship of Samsnu by the offering of beautiful
flowers, and also the giving of water to the cows to drink,—these two
works are alike regarded as meritorious by the choice band of men
ambitious of sanctity.

XLI.—Ethereal vesture (i. e. nudity), clotted hair, and ashes ; also
habitual adherence of mind to the destroyer of Tripura, and the hand
used as the only drinking vessel—to whom these things were held
dear and sacred—

XLII.—by that man was the ornamented area caused to be made,
level and pleasant for walking, in front of the house of Siva, having
for this purpose filled up with stony heaps what was before impas-
sable water mixed with unwholesome earth, and firmly bound the
whole with the smoothest stones.

XLIII.—For that architect was the famed son of Va'rRarupRA, all-
knowing and skilled in house-building craft, even as VisvakaRMA.

XLIV.—By whom was built this soul-ravishing house of Sankara
(Stva),—with its chapels, and its fine portico, graced with the presence
of Gara, the holy Asura,—even as it were a fraction of heaven by
the will of the Creator Vepuas [or Brauma’].

XLV.—In the house of the Lord of Ganea’, what glorious, easy-
flowing praise, interspersed with the histories of his consort Cuanpi,
was uttered by the prince of learned men, the religious son of
Urvxa!

XLVI.—As long as the lords of earth [i. e. the brahmans], the
earth itself and sky, the river of the gods [Ganea’], the lunar vary-
ing disk, and the holy occupation of the Yaties subsist;—as long as
Laxmr’ rests on the bosom of Mura’s foe [Visunvu], or as the sun and
stars shine upon the earth ;—as long as Gayatri the best beloved wife
remains most closely united with Braumé, so long may this house of

382 Ancient Inscription from the Ruins of (Juxy,

cine) WTS ATaatet TACHA HAT HAM
SH TATRA AN HAA CUSTT AAT |

(xLvit,)

320 at Fanaa: way ee ATH TWAT |
Sra aHIUAIT TUSSI fray a

aaq Yrs Bate BW fe vs
am urefa «adit 37)

(xLvitl.)

aaserat uve fequaaga feecrat was
830 wat arety[atar* Jaaacafeat Graem Tala)
atze: sayatar [fafa jaaue feat wear
THI & Gea fanaa fanfeataaee |

afe dazq Qoxe Brae yte wy frases quraaar
34 aaa ae* Jaarataes |

ARIMA: CAVE ZITAT
feeere |

aU ugaeatias VaTTAMIARUTTEL Arete

35 Hweutaniagy Ay qeyqaratwecate| ay aaa Bt

waa YWiseta Aaa Ga uae elasaar

TTY T TATA TATA SAT IAE AATHAT H T A ARTS
aaa TST |

1835.] the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdwati. 383

HarsuA-prva shine in orient light, its sign not removed from sight,
when the sun is shorn of its splendour !

XLVII.—He who subsists when even such duration has elapsed,
even Samsuu the eternal, how can he be defined by time? The time

however of the building of this his temple is consigned to writing, as

now seen.
In the Samvat year 1018, in the month of A’shadha, the first
division of the month, the 13th day. ........

XLVIII.—When a thousand years, with twice nine added, were
elapsed, the sun approaching the sign of Leo, on a lunar day, which
was the third of the waxing moon, accompanied with a fortunate con-
juncture of planets, and on a Monday—then did the builder aforesaid,
being commanded by the eternal Sampuu, who desired to give an
undefiled site and endued with essential holiness to his own sacred
name,—and having obtained the site accordingly,—commence the
whole work of erecting this house to Siva, who bestows absorption
on those who devoutly approach it.

Hail! in the Samvat year 1030, in the month of A’shddha, the
first division of the month, the 15th day, the deeds of conveyance, as
they were severally received, are written in the following order.

The great king, the king of kings, the blessed Sinwa-ra’sa, in the
12th day of the sun’s mansion in the sign of Libra, attached [to this
temple the village of] Sinha-prostha, with its revenues and produce,
which were his own.

He likewise made over by deed of gift, as long as moon, sun, and
ocean should endure, Ekalaka, Krisdnu-kuipa and Uru-saras, in the
district named in the deed, together with the hamlet of Kanha
in the Koha district, being four villages in all, to Sri Harsua-
pevA, the all-sufficient protector, seated on the hill whose sign
is the moon—on a holy day, remembering the sacred resort of pil-
grims Pushkara, [or Pokar near Ajmeer] for the sake of the solemn
celebration of festive journies thither, accompanied with ablutions,
bodily unctions, burning of incense and lamps; [that the same may

be performed by the Brahmans of Harsua without loss.]

384

(Line.)

Ancient Inscription from the Ruins of [Juny,

SN ~~ f Be
TUIZIa Baas: PAM salsa ]a aca

36 WAUAASTH TAA |

37

38

39

40

aU Stans Weacwaaerautefateaare |

TH SRLS ARTS TRIN PATA
ataugranfararenaaal [+a t aera rata
at glee Blew meneaufeatatat wa faaca: |

ivasirgarstys wgquiaaad eas
ALLOA Ql aT TEVA |

[*aat Tats: Strats: dine
VA Calay Whaat SAAT |

TU Gas Alea Ta WTA waaKeanfafsny
aa TU |

qaracaasearaarat [a A eu ofa Fa way
=a |

quate afta CayAtAatia wae tarat
fuusatanes fatenzisedfented weufeantat

mesa cummed, * jrawedviatnest ane fee
fears fattaacegutate |

(XLIX.)
aalrarattaat Aaa
WaT Wat ara UT |
arAtaitsa wae gaat
ATS ATS UTA watz: |

1835.} the Temple of Harsha, in Shekdwati. 385

Likewise, his brother, the blessed Varsa-rAgsa, made over by
deed of gift the village of Kardama-khdta, whose revenues had
been possessed by himself, for the purposes of obtaining victory.

Likewise, two villages were made over with a deed of gift, by the
blessed VicRAHA-RAJA, as it is written above. [See verse XXV.]

Likewise, the two sons of the blessed SinwA-rAsA, viz. the blessed
Cuanpra-rasa and Govinpa-r4sa, did religiously convey a hamlet,
consisting of two divisions, and a village, with a deed of gift entirely
written with their own hand, even to the prescribed formal enumeration
{of name, family, date, &c.], having first taken the holy water;
thus having made a record to all future times concerning the district
described in the deed, whose revenues were (till then) possessed by
themselves.

The blessed Duanpuuxa, though unconquered by the subjects of
Stnwa-r4sa, did, nevertheless, by permission of his liege lord, make
over the village of Mayira-pura, whose revenues were received by
himself, in the district of Khadga-hipa.

Likewise, the young prince, the blessed Jaya-Sni-rdsa, religiously
bestowed on Harswa-pgva, the village of Koli-kuipaka, whose reve-
nues were received by himself.

Likewise, by SAkamBARi, whose husband was the blessed Harma-
HATA, the whole of [the villages called] Lavana, Kuiaka, Prativinsa,
and Apaharshaka, was bestowed in the same manner.

Likewise, by a lady named Ta'vixa, one village, in a northern direc-
tion, was given through divine love to Sri Harswa.

Let us behold likewise, here, the lands bestowed by holy-minded
personages, the revenues of which are now enjoyed by the gods

- - = - = = = + = = = - the shade of holy pippila trees
in a beautiful hamlet - - - - = = - = = = = = = =
causeway to those who approach the sacred soil of Harsua - - -

- - - - - amighty force.

XLIX.—R<ma, the splendid, thus intreats all devout kings of the
earth that are to come after him : ‘‘ This common causeway of virtue
and religion to princes, [viz. the endowment of temples with land] is
at all times to be carefully observed by your highnesses.”’

N. B.—The star * throughout the Sanscrit slokas, denotes the commencement
of the line on the stone, the number of which is placed in the opposite
margin.

The brackets denote the spaces where the stone is broken or defaced. Whatever
letters or words are found between these are restored by conjecture.

3c

386 Notes on the preceding Inscription. [Juny,

Notes on the preceding Inscription.

J.—This verse is in a hendecasyllable measure, called Ratha-udgaté, of
which an exact idea may be formed by one accustomed to the harmony of
classical numbers, from the following slight transposition of a line in the
CEdipus Coluneus :

a te wt Ye we YD oO le
Nvé em dupaor BeBnk 6 ACO pi a
four of such lines forming a verse.

The two first lines are somewhat indistinct on the edge of the stone ;
and in the second of them, there might be some considerable doubt as to
the syllables sq qr and @1, were not the others connected with them
(particularly the fyq fe and q@) so clearly marked as to admit no
reading consistent with both metre and sense, beside the one here adopt-
ed, which is in strict accordance with the Indian notions of metaphysical
theology. The wyfear is here ovcia or abstract essence, antecedent to
qualities of any kind, of which the Hindu theosophists can discourse as subtly
and as unintelligibly as Puato in the Parmenides. Such is exclusively
their notion of Deity as existing prior to the developement of the ternary
forms or qualities, first in the Supreme Triad [Brauma’, Visunv, Siva, | and
next in the several orders of created beings: this first immaterial sub.
stance being the neuter 3 brahmd of the Upanishads and the Vedant—
the J&U: or male inactive principle of the rival Sankhya school—the
BYOOs or unfathomable depth of some of the Gnostics, who attempted the
introduction of these eastern metaphysics into Christianity. All these
schools teach that the immaterial essence of the one all-pervading Deity is
no otherwise connected with the diversities of created existence, than
through an independent feminine principle : which in the Vedantic system
is Ma’va’ ara, or illusion ;—but gayata : or Radical Nature, the female
parent of all, in the Sankhyasystem,—and ENNOIJA in that of the Gnostics,
(in which, as in the Sankhya, Nor= or Intellect afta : otherwise called aztq
is the first-born offspring, and then all separate individual essences.) Now"
this common mother of the external world ( Fax ) is identified in the
mythological part of Hinduism, with Siva’, or Durea’ AmBrxa’, the consort
of Stva. This identification is the principal subject of that celebrated
section of the Markandeya Purana, called the Chandipatha, or Devi-mahat-
mya; and is thus expressed by the great Sankara A’cua’RYA himself, in
the first verse of his famous hymn to this goddess, entitled, A’nanda-lahari,
(by which he sought to atone to the mother of External Nature, for his
efforts as a Vedantist, to lead his disciples from her illusions and fancied
diversities, to absorption in the one essence of abstract Deity).

fwa: waar ual afe wate wa: safag
ag2a aq ag ane: wiqaiy |
gata eicecfatcaitetacty
IU SIG A KAAAAgU: wate I!

1835.] Notes on the preceding Inscription. 389

* If Siva be united to his energy (his spouse Siva), he is able to exer-
cise dominion ; if not, the god is utterly unable even to move. Where-
fore Thee, the goddess who art worshipped by Visunu, Siva, Brana’, and
all other beings, what unholy person is competent to adore and praise?”
That the same reason should be assigned by the philosopher here for Siva
and the rest of the triad adoring his consort, (agreeably to the Chandipatha
aforesaid, especially the Ist and 4th and 12th books,) which is on this
inscription, made a reason for Siva being adored by her, viz. his nearer
approach to abstract essentiality—will surprize no one who has studied the
genius of paganism. The former is the Sdktya conclusion ; the latter that
of the Saivas: among whom also, as we may observe in this and the 6th
verse of the inscription, Siva has the properties of the other two mem-
bers of the triad, that of Creator and Preserver ascribed to him, as well
as his own.

The efforts of the human mind, at any time, to escape the metaphysical
difficulties that attend the connexion of Mind and Matter ; and the yet
more serious kindred difficulty, the origin of evil ; will never want interest
in the eyes of the deeper observers of our nature, its capacities and its des-
tinies. We cannot wonder that in the darkness of unaided reason, men
have been almost universally led to interpose some independent exist.
ence, some YAH, the source alike of Nature and of Evil, between the
creature and the Creator. But itis more extraordinary, that at the pre-
sent day, Sankara A’ona'rya, and the Vedantists, whose mode of meeting
the difficulty is by maintaining external Nature to be illusion, and the per-
fect identity in real essence, of all human souls with the Supreme, should
be represented by any as reformers of Hinduism, and as attached to that
only true theology, by which the Supreme Being is recognized, in the
-words of Sir Isaac NEwron, non ut anima mundi, sed ut universorum
Dominus. However natural be the desire in some, to unite the profession
of the most venerated school of Hindu religion with the boast among
Europeans of a pure and enlightened creed, the attempt to conciliate
things so dissimilar, and even opposite, as these, cannot long consist with
any accurate knowledge or study of either.

11.—The second verse is in the free, but harmonious measure of the Anus.
tubh class,(i. e. of eight syllables)—first unconsciously struck out,as it is said,
by Va’umixt, the Homer of India, on witnessing the cruelact of a sportsman.

am faare sfasi aaaa: WIA: Tar: |

qa aVasaATN: SARSAA II
Upon which, struck with the beautiful cadence of his own improvisation,
he composed the Ramayana in similar verses.*

* An account of this measure is given by COLEBROOKE, in his Essay on Sanscrit
and Pracrit Poetry, and by M. Cue'zy, (Essai sur le Sloka.) The following will
be found, I believe, a more complete statement of its rules than either. Each pdéda,
or quarter, (of which the last syllable is ever accounted common,) consists of two qua-

3c 2

388 Notes on the preceding Inscription. fJuny,

The first quarter of this verse is obliterated on the edge of the stone,
and it would be idle to attempt its restitution.

IJI.—This verse is like the first, a lyric measure, but of a different kind,
called Srag-dhard, each of the four lines being of the enormous length of
19 syllables, disposed exactly as in the following (transposed from the
end of the Orestes)—with the casura on the 14th syllable,

ee mene Feet meal en Nee ag Nee Nag) Na) Nagel) orm Nah) mone Tl Rag ieee ee
Znvbs Adumpols weadOpors Se TeAdow “EAEvny, ev0a oéuvais wdpedpos

The subject of this verse is the infuriate dance of Siva, as Buarrava,
after the sanguinary vengeance he exacted for the death of his self-devoted
wife Sari, (the first form of the great Durca’—as the mountain nymph
Uma’ Pa’rvati was the second,) as related in the Siva~Purdna, &c. &c.

1V.—The measure of this verse is a kind of reduction of the former to
15 syllables, and is called Manda-dkrantd.

— i Ol Oo oe ie i ts ——
Znvos Potkos weAdow ‘EXevnv, W0a céeuvais mdpedpos

For these descriptions of the god, see Moor’s Hindu Pantheon, under
the head Siva.

V.—This and all the following verses as far as ver. XVI, (with the
exception of the IX., XI., and XV., which resemble the II.) are in the
same measure with the ITI. verse, the Srag-dhara.

On the Ganges flowing from Srva’s head, vide Moor ut sup. The
threefold Ganges—the river of heaven and hell, as well as of earth—is a
frequent subject with the poets of India.

Of the last word @tf<aHrar: which is very clearly marked on the stone,
TI can make no better sense than that which I have expressed, viz. con.
necting it with Wai “the sport of a cricket.” Perhaps the word may
have some other meaning, which the standard vocabularies do not contain.

Vil.—aarat. The inscription apparently has qaqa, which is without
meaning: but asthe # in this ancient Devanagari might easily, by the
erosion of a slight loop, pass into a @, and as “ the daughter of the moun-
tain” is a Hindu poetical expression for a river, I have read it accord-
ingly.

In this verse, of which both the sentiment and expression are of a
higher order than in most others of the inscription, we have the doctrine,

drisyllabic feet. The former of these is subject to no other restriction than that it
must not have both the middle syllables short ; and in the even quarters, i. e. the
2nd and 4th, it must not close with an Iambus. The latter is more restricted : in
the even quarters, it is always without exception a Dijambus, ~w — w —, and
in the two others, the Ist and 3rd, it should be an Epitritus quartus ~ — — —.-
except that after a long syllable, the following four forms are sometimes admitted,
the first most frequently, the rest more rarely in the order of their position.

ww w w —

— ~

w
~

ele

=e —

1835.] Notes on the preceding Inscription. 389

well known among us as the Platonic, of the Universe existing in archetype
as ideas in the divine mind, before the material creation ; in the words
of our Spenser,

What time this world’s great Workmaister did cast

To make al things such as we now behold,

It seems that he before his eyes had plast

A goodly paterne, to whose perfect mold

He fashioned them, as comely as he could,

That now so faire and seemely they appeare

As nought may be conceived any where.

That wondrous paterne, wheresoere it bee,

Whether in earth laid up in secret store,

Or else in heaven, that no man may it see

With sinfull eyes, for fear it to deflore,

Is perfect Beauty, which all men adore:

Whose face and feature doth so much excell

All mortal sense, that none the same may tell.
Or as in the remarkable lines in Borrurvus, (Consol. Phil. lib. 3,) which
embody the whole doctrine of the Timzus on this subject, the gene-
ration and also the destruction of the material world.

Tu cuncta superno
Ducis ab exemplo; pulchrum pulcherrimus ipse
Mundum mente gerens, similique in imagine formans ;

od — —_

Tu causis animas paribus vitasque minores
Provehis, et levibus sublimes curribus aptans,
In coelum, terramque seris ; quas lege benigna
Ad te conversas reduci facis igne reverti.

The transition of the ideas of the Divine mind into separate individual
intelligences (from which Apunerus and others derive the whole theory of
Polytheism)—the propagation ofvarious orders of beings from these, down
to the grossest and most material ; and the destruction of the world by the
absorption of the lower in the higher existences, till all is lost in the Su-
preme—are points in which the Hindu schemes (as partially unfolded in
the present verse) wonderfully coincide with Platonism. They are parallel
corruptions of one great original truth, which in the quotations here giver,
appears with scarcely any mixture of error.

VII.—XII. The local legend in these verses has been already men-
tioned. The destruction of “ him of the incomparable arrows,” the Hindu
God of Love, thence ealled ANanea, or ArTanu, the Bodiless One+-as
alluded to in the turgid and somewhat obscure expression of the VII Ith,
is a favorite subject with the poets of India, and is told at large by Cati-
pa’sa in the 3d book of the Cumdéra Sambhava. An equivoque seems intend.
ed in the first line between one of these names of Ca’ma, and the adjective
Ga “ large or immense :” but as the former meaning would involve an
insipid repetition, it is discarded in the translation.

390 Notes on the preceding Inscription. (Juiv,

X.—Nothing is told respecting the Sia, or Hero, who is the speaker
of this flowery verse.

XIII. This celebrated family is here distinctly called @rsara, but
SISA, or Chéhuvdna, in the monuments quoted byWitson, whence the
Hindui term Chowhén, as used by Colonel Top in his great work on Raj-
sthan. Allowing 30 years, which is perhaps not too much, for each descent
from the father to his first-born son, the following will be the estimated
dates of accession in this branch of the family. (None of its six names are
_ to be found elsewhere, in any published monument within my knowledge.)

A. D.
GU? V AKA, Ti opecn aces thcenses'<snencwaciss became king probably about 800
CHANDRA) FATA, ac. costed cod ace eteeee lave-sckitanae, Lielaets csenwduceees (OOO

Geo ieee eS eee acai cane ied tee ees oan dosiael en Fax desde eee eS OO
CVA NDIAIN Ag rack Son cea a eee ONO e eee eaat Reno eee eee .. 890

Va’ PATI, (conqueror Of* TANTRAPA’LA), secscsccecsccsesrecreees 920

SINHA /TUAUTA, (-05..2-0- galsatila sive, incistlogiees act eiacc eee Teh
And his successor : ae 5 ‘antanal event =)
Vierana Ra’sa* “Soc se sesoeeee Certainly about 968

so as to satisfy the ent aes of the astrtpidn.

XIV. In this verse, the last part of which is somewhat involved in ex-
pression, I have given the best sense in my power to the enigmatical com-
pound @TATIN: aqueis-radiis-ille. The Hindus are in the habit of ascribing
showers to solar influence, agreeably to the line in Manu, (iii. 76).

sifeqianaa efeetrd aa: ast:
or (as it is stated with greater physical truth in the older cosmogony of
the Vedas,) to the joint operation of Mirnras (or the Sun) and the Ocean.

fad st yaad aeuy | foued fad waret area 11

“ T invoke Mirra of pure might and Varuna not passable by foes—both
producing showers that water the earth.” Rig-Veda-Sanhitd, 1. 1.§ 1. hymn 2.
XVI. XVII. In these two historical verses, between which we find once
more interposed the words wrwme “ Herois hoc,’ with what precise
meaning, I cannot tell—the metre is changed from the alternation of
Srag-dharé and Anustubh stanzas, to the most popular and harmonious of
all the very long lyric measures, viz. the Sardila-vikriditam, consisting of
four lines of 17 syllables, like the following transposition from Sophocles.

— —— Wo SS OS oS SS ee

Tay oav, Zed, diva tis (evOade Tapwy) dvdpwv Katd-cxo. Big
* This prince can scarcely be supposed to belong tothe Pa’La princes of Gaura ;
but was most probably an ancestor, or near relative, of the northern kings of the same
termination, who encountered the earliest Musulman invaders of India. The name

of TANTRAPA/LA is not found in any of the lists of PA’LAS supplied from several
monuments, by Prof. H. H. Witson, (A. R. XV. 464.)

1835.] Notes on the preceding Inscription. $91

XIX.—This verse is in the same measure, but preceded and followed
by an Anustubh, resembling verse II. There is a considerable obscurity
in this stanza, arising apparently from the author’s unwillingness to detail
the misfortunes of a prince whom he had just celebrated in the two preced-
ing verses, as the first benefactor to the Harsha temple, and whose actual
Victories over surrounding enemies appear evidently to be the subject of
the first three lines of this. But as the relative 4@ in the second line
thus evidently relates to king Sinna Ra/sa, the aa at the beginning of
the fourth must, by the ordinary rules of construction, refer to him also ;
(however we might be inclined, from the juxta-position of correlative
terms, to apply it to the imprisoned foes of the line preceding:) and
consequently he who thus imprisoned others must, after some unrecorded
and most unexpected reverse, have needed liberation himself. This is
effected, as it appears, by a more powerful monarch, a child of the Sun. Yet
no mention is made afterward of the liberated king as acting or reigning:
only the acts of the liberator Viekana Ra’sa are recorded, and by him
the place of Stnua Ra’sa is said to be supplied, as though the latter
were dead, or in hopeless exile. The truth, as collected from these obscure
hints, appears to be, that Vierana Ra’sa conquered the kingdom, and
restored the family of his predecessor to their former wealth and dignity,
after their head had been deposed or carried away captive by others.
For it is observable, that two sons of Sinua Ra/’sa occur in the list of
benefactors to the temple after Vierana Ra’sa, though without any royal
dignity attached to their names ; while the latter’s alliance to their house
seems equally clear from verses XXVI. and XXVII., including him and
his brother Durxuasua in the royal genealogy that had been traced from
verse XIII.

> 2.4 Geass aa. The position of the perfect participle of g in
the beginning of this compound, as anepithet of Va’sava, or Inpra, is
somewhat unusual ; but all difficulty as to its meaning is removed by a
reference to the legend in verse VIII. The conqueror Vierana, in his
pious devotion to HarsHa-prva in this mountain sanctuary, is compared
to the Indian Jupiter at the head of the celestials, who first adored
Srva under that name, on the same spot of old.

XXI.—This verse is in a favorite measure of 14 syllables, called Vasan-
ta-tilakam.

—-— —wo-wwvw—wre-—-v —-—
Tay oy em et Ta SU va ply Tis & YIP Ka TaaXOL;

The construction is very involved, but in a degree not unusual in San-
scrit poetry ; and is unravelled by appending the whole severally to three
principal words, @@ wu quo, fasciseaa: proprii-regni-fortuna, <fcat
compellata (est). The first, referring of course to Vierana, has for its
epithet the participle gaat dante, to which belongs the accusative
facafaara dinturnum-domicilium. The second has for its epithets
the participles of the first and second lines, to one of which fRagat

892 Notes on the preceding Inscription. [Ju.y,

cogitans, belong the words ¥3fq fauaa Al wa “ jam dominus equident
quis mei ?” for the connecting particle <fa immediately following, marks
this as the subject of thought. The third, which alone of the participles has
the force of a passive verb, denotes the answer which the personified For.
tune receives to her questioning thought in the second line: and here the
connecting particle ¢fq, which indicates the answer, though most awk-
wardly separated from it, refers undoubtedly to the words in the third
line following 4a, viz. Wa aS “ Habita (in) brachiorum Sbyx.”
The most unusual part of the sentence, however, is the junction of the word
uf (pax) with this leading participle in the compound 4¥8Wif<ar, which
can mean nothing else than pacifice-compellata. The stress laid upon this
circumstance of pacific answers and protection, seems to confirm the
opinion, that Vierana entered the kingdom originally as a conqueror.

XXII. XXIII. The measure of these two verses is the same as that
of the Ist, the Ratha-udgata.

XXIV. And here we return to the long measure of the III. V. and
following verses, the Srag-dhard.

The word faf<, whose instrumental plural occurs in the third line, is
inexplicable from any existing vocabulary, or oral information withia
my reach. As no probable emendation occurs to me of what is thus clearly
marked in the inscription, I can only give it the sense of the word most
nearly approaching to it, (faa) and suppose that the compound
warawaguraca: means, like warawuagafaaty : “ with birds
of every place and tribe.”

XXV. This andthe seven following verses are like the II. &c. in
the Anustubh measure.

XXVI. The prince Durnasna, thus honourably mentioned as lit-
tle inferior, or (as the second comparion might indicate,) even supe-
rior, to his victorious elder brother, may not impossibly be the prince
of that name who reigned at Guzzerét, separated only by a single
short reign from CHAmuNDA, who was conquered by Maumup Guaaznevi,
in 1024: as his elder brother is yet more probably the chief
commemorated in a Benares inscription of 150 years Jater date, as the
founder of the fortunes of the Rahtore family, that possessed them-
selves of the imperial throne of Kanoj about the same period*. The latter
hypothesis, which agrees with the history and probable origin of the Rahtore
family, requires for its verification, that we allot an interval of 33 years, or
a few more, (instead of 24,) tothe four generations that separate the Rahtore
chief Yasovicraua from Govinpa CHanpDRA, sovereign of Kanoj, (grand-
father of the last king, JavacnanpRa,) of whom we have a grant of land
dated Samvat 1177, or A. D. 1120, i. e. 148 years after the date of the

* Whether the ViGRAHA Ra’JA De’/vA, who is commemorated as a great con-
queror in the 5th Devanagari inscription ov the great Lath at Dehli, (A. R. vol. i.
Art. 21.) may not be identified with our VigRAHA Ra‘’JA,—there are no sufficient
data for ascertaining.

1835.] Notes on the preceding Inscription. 353

present monument. [As. Res. vols. ix. and xv.] The former hypothesis,
notwithstanding the greater distance of time, derives some plausibility from
the comparison of what the Ayin Akbery states concerning that Guzze-
rattee prince who is there truly called DurLasa, with the larger details of
others. It is stated by Aspun Fazx, that Maumu'p having, in A. H. 416, or
A. D.1025, conquered Cuamunpa, son of Mu’na-ra’sa, king of Gurjarastra,
or Guzzerat, (who was connected by the father’s side with the princes of
Dehli, but whose maternal grandfather and predecessor on the throne was
descended fron: the Kanoj kings,) took a prince of the same house, who is
called in his catalogue Duriasna, prisoner with him to his own capital,
at the request of another of the family, (called there Beyvser, perhaps
Vatsara, but by others Vannasaa,) whom he left viceroy in Guzzerat,
and who dreaded the ambition and martial ability of his kinsman. After-
wards, at the request of the same person, who had secretly provided what
he thought a more secure prison for his dreaded rival, Durtasaa was
sent back to the new king, who going out to meet with treacherous pro-
fessions the kinsman whom he purposed to immure in a dungeon, accident
ally lost his eyes ; and was on that account deposed by his subjects in
favour of his intended victim. Ferrisnta, who tells the same history
at much greater length in his Mahomedan History of India, (Briges, pp.
76—82,) and moralizes on the retributive close of it, gives to both of these
kindred princes, to Vauiasua as well as Durtasna, the name of Da's-
sHEu'm. Now of this last appellation, the name in the Anvdri Soheily
of the Raja for whom those popular stories were recited, (which originating
from the Sanscrit Pancha Tantra, after successive Pehlevic, Arabic, and
other translations, have become so well known in Europe as the Fables of
Piwpay,) we may observe that it is as naturally applied bya Persian
to any Indian prince who can be made to bear it, as the name of Hercunes
by a Roman to any great foreign conqueror, or Unyssses to any wan-
derer in unknown regions. In this case, where DurnaBHa and Da‘ssuE-
Lim are scarcely more unlike in sound than Opry and Opyssrvus*,—it is not
wonderful that the name should have been so applied by the Mahome-
dan invaders, men of much less critical judgment in these subjects than
the historian of ancient Germany ; and to justify the application of the same
name to VALLABHA, it isnot extraordinary, considering their strong attach-
ment to ethical stories of this kind, that they should have converted the
last-named princeinto something like his imagined prototype, aman of emi-
nent wisdom and virtue, living in contented poverty notwithstanding his
royal descent, until sought out for this viceregal honour by the Musulman
conqueror—like him on whom AtexanperR bestowed under nearly the
same circumstances the conquered kingdom of Sidon. Ferrisnta indeed
acknowledges, that this account of Maumv’p’s viceroy was doubted even in
his time ; and that instead of a hermit, he was represented by many asa
cruel and ambitious prince, who had before made several attempts against

*® See F, SCHLEGEL, Lect. 6, on the History of Literature.

3D

394 Notes on the preceding Inscription. [Juny,

his brothers and kinsmen ; but this account, (though most amply confirmed,
as we might imagine, by the sequel of the history astold by Ferisata him-
self,) is discarded by the worthy historian in favour of the more exciting ac-
count of the elevation of his hermit, “ Da’ssueri’m the Wise,” to the royal-
ty that he afterwards so deservedly lost. To the other warlike Da’ssnetim,
whom the more sagacious minister of Axper correctly calls DurLaBHa,
Fentsura seems to think (p. 77) that the characters of cruelty and ambition
more truly apply, notwithstanding the evident justice of his cause at the
close: and it is of him that he had shortly before (pp. 70, 71) recorded the
formidable but unsuccessful attack upon Maumup when besieging Somanath.

The great objection to the identity of this warlike prince with the
Durtasua of the inscription is, that it involves the supposition of his
being 70 years old at the period of this attack on the Musulman invader,
and 82 at the close of his own reign in Gazzerat ; but this is perhaps not
very improbable.

X XIX. USSAHAANY. What is this Panchdrthala or Quinquarti-
cular tribe of brahmans, to which a particular dmndaya or rule of discipline
is ascribed, I have not been ableto discover. It is evidently contrasted
with the contrary rule of a Sdnsdrika or worldly tribe aaa gaara:
mentioned in ver. XXXT.

XXX. Arqiz: Toniara is a most singular name for one descended of a
pure race of bréhmans: but it is so clearly written on the stone as to admit
of no conjectural alteration. The word fx twice is also clearly marked,
with the exception of the easily erased 7, (whose insertion is necessary to
prevent theshemistich ending with a triple Iambus, a thing absolutely inad.
missible): and to this I have affixed what appears the only possible inter-
pretation. The third quarter of the verse offends against a rule which
is scarcely ever found violated in classical writings, by giving two short
syllables ufe after the first syllable in the quarter: the proper name
Varcatmxa being perhaps the justifieation of the license. (See note on
verse IT.)

XXXII. It isa favourite practice of the Hindus to represent their
great religious teachers as incarnations of particular divinities. Sankara
Acna’rva, as it is well known, is considered as an Avatar of Siva himself,
incarnate for the purpose of maintaining Vedism in its spiritualities
against the Buddhists and other adversaries, after preceding incarnations
had maintained it in the exterior points of caste and ritual duty. And
his principal disciples and commentators are equally represented in the
8rd chapter of the Dig-vijaya-Sanacpa, that commemorates his conquests,
as incarnations of other minor Deities ; e. g. the scholiast A’nanpa-qiri of
this same attendant god Nawnp1’, Stva’s chamberlain, (or according to
another account, of Brauma’,) sl. 6,8. &c. &e.

XXXIII., XXXIV. In these two verses, the long Syag-dharé measure
of verses III., V., &c. is resumed.

In the latter the epithet <wja applied to the mountain, refers to some
symbol of the worship of the great Goddess Devithere. In rendering

1835.] Notes on the preceding Inscription. 395

the next epithet aaaqufaziaawa, the Shakspearean expression
“ Heaven-kissing hill,” appeared more seemly in English than the literal
‘translation “ whose extended horn or peak licks the path of Heaven.”

XXXV. This and the six following verses are again in the heroic
measure of the Puranas.

A Naisthika is one who abides perpetually in the duties of the first order
of brahmanical life, that of a Brahmachéri or religious student, as they are
laid down in the 2nd book of Manvu’s Institutes, without proceeding to
either of the other three orders, that of the married householder, the
eremite or the mendicant. The second chapter of the Dig-Vijuya-San-
aepa above-mentioned, written by Sanxara’s eminent disciple Ma’pHava-
A’cHa RYA, contains a friendly altercation between Sanxana’s father Siva-
Guru when a student, and his religious preceptor, in which, while the
latter urges the propriety of his accomplished pupil’s marriage, the other
declares his wish to remain attached to his spiritual father.

HawaaaTs uf WAT

sila aatfa aa wretara faery: |
estate afaaar a4 AEST

ae us sufsalrafastiatasee Ware i

“TI, O sage, embracing the blessed order of a Nuisthika,—dwell as long
as I live, attached to thy side perpetually,—with my pupil’s staff, and my
pallet of deer-skin, ever meekly submissive, sacrificing with the sacred
fire, perusing the Veda, anxiously desirous to cut off the possibility of
forgetting what I have perused already.”

In the second half of this verse (of which the first syllable is somewhat
obscure on the stone), a great Vedantic doctrine is contained, which the
Uttara Mimansa and Pétanjala schools practically inculcate, viz. that
by the practice of austere meditation on the Gne all-pervading Esseuce,
and abstraction of the mind from all surrounding objects, to which
conclusion self-torture (Tapas), is one introductory step, union is
obtained with the eternal Divinity in his (or rather its) transcendental.
primary form, existing independently of that triad of qualities which
was emitted for the creation, preservation and destruction of the
world. The liberated man (Mukta) who is thus absorbed into the
essence of deity, and freed from all future transmigration, or recompense
of works, whether for weal or wee, is freed at the same time from all re.
spect whatever to the three qualities above-mentioned ; i. e. freed from
the purity (aa or YY) which preserves, as well as from the passion (THT
or ayy which creates, and the defilement (qa¥ or aw) which destr OS.
This character of the Hindu perfect man (as all the Vedantic writers
teach, after the Upanishads or mystical parts of the Vedas), is distinctly
contained in the single epithet of our inscription yaraqurguaaay:

3 Dp 2

396 Notes on the preceding Inscription. (Jur,

« one in whom the threefold quality* of holiness, unholiness and defile-
ment is unborn or non-existent :” and surely nothing more is required to
shew how remote from morality, as well as pure theism, is that pantheistic
speculation to which some persons would point asa restitution of the pure
religion of ancient India: (though the elementary and heroic polytheism
of the other part of the Vedas appears certainly to be much older.)

XXXIX.—yyrecuag for yaTsxctt ay This is the only instance
in the whole incription of a final Anusvara being converted to the nasal
letter answering to the following initial consonant, whether dental, as here,
or guttural, palatine, cerebral or labial ; according to the constant custom
of Bengal, (observed also in the Mahratta copies of the Vedas, and perhaps
some other instances, ) which hasbeen scrupulously followed in Col. Hauen-
ron’s valuable edition of the Institutes of Manu. In every other instance
the inscription follows the rule of the best Devanagari MSS. in retaining
the Anusvara: only, (with many of these, as well as with a// Bengal MSS.)
always changing the Anusvéra to 4 at the end of a verse or a hemistich.
In the middle of words the inscription is inconsistent in this respect,
like most Devanagari MSS., sometimes giving the Anusvara, sometimes
the special nasal letter, (e. g. az or zg, &c. &c.) but more frequently
the former. In all these instances, the writing on the stone has been
exactly copied by me into modern Devanagari.

XLII.—This verse is in a measure of 15 syllables, called Mfdénint, which
is distributed thus.

ww wl we ie ae OO
Néa Tdde KaKd mor viv RABE poipa mad? diKTpQ.

The subject of this verse, as of verse XXXVIII., might probably be
illustrated by closer inspection of the ruins and their site.

XLIII. XLIV.—The former of these verses is like the II, in heroic
measure, the latter is like ver. I., in the hendecasyllable measure Ratha.
udgatd. The name of Gaya is perpetuated by the beautiful place in Bahar,
that is called after him (only a few miles from the birth-place of the head
of the rival religion, Gautama Brppua), to which all India resorts for
the performance of offerings to deceased ancestors. But why this sainted
Asura is particularly introduced here, does not appear.

XLV. This verse is in a more ancient description of measure than any of
the lyrical ones above described, being independent of the number of sylla-
bles, and regarding only their aggregate quantity, like the Dactylic and
Anapestic measures of the Greeks. It is called A’ryd, and is composed of
two unequal hemistichs ; the former consisting of seven Spondaic feet, (i. e.
each equivalent to two long syllables or four short ones,) and a redundant
syllable ; with no farther restriction on those feet, except that the first,
third, fifth, and seventh, must not be an Amphibrachys ~—w ; while the
sixth, on the other hand, must be either an Amphibrachys or a Proceleus.
maticus w ~ ~ w. The latter hemistich resembles the former in every

* Not ‘‘ quantity,’’ as erroneously printed ia the translation, p. 379.

1835.1] Notes on the preceding Inscription. 397

respect, except that instead of the Amphibrachys or Proceleusmaticus
above-mentioned in the sixth place, a single short syllable is there inserted :
and both hemistichs are divided into pddas or quarters at the end of the
third foot, (the last syllable of which is not accounted common as in the
other measures. )

Wicataa The reading on the stone most resembles wearna, to
which no good meaning can be assigned—unless by a violent ellipsis we
understand it to denote “one whose superior merit annihilates all rival
learned men.” The letters wand @ being nearly alike in this ancient
character, I have little hesitation in reading it as I have done, “‘ the
chief of learned men,” The use of @ra « serpent,” as of me “ tiger,”
faz “lion,” &c. &c. to denote pre-eminence, is a known idiom in Sanscrit-

XLVI. The allusions in this elaborate and not inelegant verse, which
is in the Srag-dharé measure, may be found explained in any treatise of
Hindu Mythology. The sign of which there is to be “ no-removal (4¥t)
even when the sun is bereft of its splendor ( WASH )’ should seem to be
the lunar emblem of verse XVIII. from which this mountain is called
aziafmuac: in the second of the records of gift that follow; or it
may be the emblem of Durga’, whatever that may have been, which obtain-
ed for the same hill the like-sounding epithet of ;e[wH in verse XXXIV.
The mark by which the mountain isnow distinguished from the distance
of nearly 50 miles round is, as Sergeant Drawn informs us, of modern
structure; but it has probably succeeded to the place of some equally
conspicuous sign erected 750 years before by Stvna Ra’sa.

XLVII. This verse, which is merely introductory to the first prosaic
passage in the inscription, describing the date at which the temple was
begun, is the last of the 23 Anustubh stanzas.

In the date that immediately follows, the well known abbreviation Qfe
su-di (for qauafea ) “the day of the former half,” i. e. from the change
to full moon, indicates that we are to follow here the astronomical year
of the Hinds, in which the moons are adjusted to the solar year (like the
ancient Attic system, but in a manner much more complex and artificial),
not the ordinary civil or solar year with its calendar months. According
tothe latter, since the Samvat or Vicraméditya year 1018 (coinciding
with 4062 of the Kéli-Yuga or 883 of Salivéhana), began on Saturday,
the 23rd of March, O. 8. A. D. 961, the 13th of its third calendar month
Ashadha would fall on Wednesday the 5th of June, O. S. in that year.
But the commencement of the first moon, which we are now to regard,
when computed according to the rules laid down by Colonel Warren in his
elaborate work, and followed by Mr. James Pruinsep in his useful com-
pendium, is found to precede by three days on that year the commencement
of the civil month called by the same name Vaisakha ; it fell on Wednesday
the 20th of March before 7h. p. m. ; and as no intercalation of moons takes
place until the beginning of two fall on the same calendar month, the 13th
Tithi or lunar day of the third moon Ashédha would thus fall within the
7th of the ciyil month so called, i. e, Thursday the 30th of May, O. S.

398 Notes on the preceding Inscription. (Jur,

A. D.961 [or ifcorrected according to the right astronomical position with
respect to the equinoxes, as fixed afterwards by the Gregorian calendar,
Thursday the 4th of June, 961.] To the other abbreviations beside wfz,
some of which are worn and indistinct, I am unable to assign any meaning.

XLVIII.—This verse, the last of the 15 Srag-dhard stanzas, (which con-
stitute about half of the poetical part of the inscription,) is extremely valu-
able for fixing by adefinite cireumlocution the number of the year, 1018, and
thus securing from all suspicion of mistake the somewhat worn numbers
of the figured date that preceded. But here its close coincidence ceases :
for while the prose date is the thirteenth of the former half of Ashadha, which
must have been either the Thursday aforesaid, or the Friday next fol-
lowing,—that of the verse is Monday, the third Tithi or lunar day in
the former half of some month not named: (for though the greater
part of the word @a lat is erased, it were impossible to read ae or any
other ordinal numeral in its stead.) Now, though one condition stated
in the verse appears incompatible with this lunar month being Ashadha,
viz. the Sun’s having entered or at least approached the sign Leo, which
it could not enter till long after the fourth quarter of that moon,—I
still think that the 3rd of the Ist quarter of the A’shadha moon, which
fell on a Monday, is the date here intended ; for by placing it later
we should not only fall on a different day of the week, but admit
the absurdity of making the commencement of the work, as stated in
the prose and in verse XLVII., prior to the divine command for undertak-
ing it: whereas now the alleged command precedes the commencement of
the work by the probable interval of ten days, viz. from the 3rd to the
13th of Ashadha, or from Monday the 20th of May O. 8. A. D. 961, to the
Thursday week following.

[It should be remarked that the word a¥, on which the above difficulty
turns, is very indistinct on the stone, and indeed more resembles 4¥ or 4@
which are unintelligible: though the compound word {@@crai “ in the
sign of Leo,” is not to be mistaken. ]

Here begins the enumeration of donors and benefactors to the temple ;
preceded by a date which marks the conclusion of the work, as the former
marked its commencement. Pursuing the computation, it is found that
the first moon of the Samvat year 1030 preceded the civil year by nearly
half a month, commencing on Friday the 7th of March, O.S., A. D. 973,
while its full moon (the Paschal full moon of the Christian year) fell
very early on Saturday the 22nd of March: and that of the third moon
Ashadha, which is the close of its 15th lunar day here specified, falling con-
sequently just 59 days after, that lunar day itself will coincide with Monday
the 19th of May, O.S. (or May 24th according to the Gregorian calendar)
the same year™. ’

* To give a notion of this, which is the date of the inscription itself, from contempo-
rary events in the West,—it may not be without interest t 0 observe, that it is later by
12 days than the death of the Emperor Oruo I., the greatest man on the continent of
Europe since CHARLEMAGNE, and in SISMoNDI’s judgment, his superior in many re=
spects ; whose memorable conquest of Italy occurred at the former date, viz. A. D. 961.

1835.) Notes on the preceding Inscription. 899

The first benefaction has its date assigned to the beginning of October,
without naming any year ; it may be A. D. 961 or some later year of the
reign of Sinna Ra’sa. That the word 4H means the sign of Libra, though
not to be found in that sense in any lexicon, is shews in the following A’rya
verse of the Sat-kritya-muktdvali of Raguunatna, well known to the
astrological students of India,

favarattirgag MCS AUT ATAST ATT i
FIR WRT Byard 33 I

on which the scholiast writes ¢fa @aretat fe fakads “‘ such are the special
names of Aries and the rest of the Zodiacal signs,” i. e. Kriya is for Mesha
vy; Téaburiis Vrisha x ; Jitumais Mithuna 9 ; Kuléira is Karkata s ;
Leya is Sinha 2; Pédtheya is Kanyd m; Yiékais Tula 2; Kaurpa is
Vrischika m; Tuauzika (as if from Tofov) is Dhanus f¢ ; <A’kokera is
Makara 9 ; Hridroga is Kumbha 7; and Antyabha is Mina X.

In the 2nd grant, I cannot be sure that I have rightly divided the names
of the villages, or even in every instance that I have exactly discriminat-
ed proper names, (e. g. Uru-saras which means “a wide tank,’’) while
the topography of the country and even the names of its Vishayas (dis-
tricts or pergunnahs, as they are called since the Mahometan conquest,)
are unknown tous. But from this general uncertainty of the proper
names in this paragraph, we must of course except the still celebrated
resort of pilgrims, Pushkara, or Pokar, situated about 150 miles 8. W. from
this mountain, and four miles west of Ajmeer, on a beautiful lake yaRr
from which its name is derived.

The 3rd grant, made by Varsa was undoubtedly during the reign of
his brother Snvua Ra’sa, as appears by its being placed before the gift
of the two villages, Chhatradhéra and Sankardnaka, by the new king
Vierana, repeated here as the 4th grant, after having been recorded in
the metrical part of the inscription. This proves what has been before
remarked, that the 5th grant by the two sons of Sinaa Ra’sa was subse-
quent to the accession by conquest of their protector Vicraua Ra’sa.
The word Weqra, enumeration, in this record, means the specification of
year, month, half.month, day, caste, family, and parentage, as prescribed
in the text of YasnavaLKya.

PAA AAS aI SAAB ASAT |
aamaicaiamaferafefsfean I

See Mitaxara, sl. 87—where, in the commentary, the above-enumera-
tion is called G@qr.

Of the decease of OrHo the Great, which took place in973, some remarkable particulars
are given by cardinal BARONIUS, from av author of that age, named WITICHIND, who
states the event to have been ‘‘ nonis Mati, quartd ferid ante Pentecosten,’’ i. e. ‘‘ on
the nones or 7th of May, the 4th day (Wednesday) of the weck before Whitsuntide,’’
(Annales, tom. x. p. 812.) I quote these words because they minutely confirm the
lunar calculation given above: for the Whitsunday of May 11 implies an Easter Sun-
day of March 23, agreeably to the time deduced above for the Paschal full moon of
that year, (Samyat 1030.)

400 Description of Pugan. Jury,

Nothing occurs particularly worthy of mention in the four grants
that follow, in which the names of persons and of places are in general
marked with very intelligible distinctness, until we come to the final re.
capitulation beginning with the word UU afa. After this and a few fol-
lowing words the import of which is very plain, comes an assemblage of
names, probably names of places in a great measure ; to which, except
in parts here and there, I can assign no meaning whatever. The Deva.
nagari letters, which are for the most part sufficiently clear on these two
last lines of the stone, are faithfully exhibited in the three lines of p. 384
preceding the concluding verse, for the benefit of such as may be skilful
or fortunate enough to discover the clue to their interpretation.

XLIX. This concluding verse is ina hendecasyllable measure called
Sdliné which may be thus represented :—(compare verses III. and IV.)

Piet SE Ree eee
Znvos 5h Adumpois eveorat meAcdOpois

This verse occurs in the Benares inscription often referred to (A. R. XV.
453)—and as Capt. Fein remarks inhis notes, p. 458, in other inscriptions
also, and insome,as he was gravely assured by certain pandits, that bore the
signature of the mighty Ra’ma himself in the Dvdpara Yuga. It seems to
be a general formulary annexed to grants of land, in order to secure
respect from the future lords of the soil, and excite them to do likewise.
Capt. Fern seems to have read aaa all, instead of HATA devoted,
and perhaps tia@*y: Ra’macnanpra instead of the synonymous C1TH#az:.

III.—Notice of Pugan, the Ancient Capital of the Burmese Empire. By
Lieut.-Col. H. Burney, H. C.’s Resident in Ava.

The celebrated Venetian traveller, Marco Poto, (see Marspsn’s
edition of his Travels, pages 441 to 451,) has given us an account of
the war between the Tartars and the people of Mien (the Chinese
name for Burmah), which occurred some time after 1272, and led the
former to take possession of the then capital of the latter nation.
Symes and Crawrorp, in the Journals oftheir Missions to Ava, as well
as HAvELocK and TranT in their accounts of the late war, have described
the extensive remains of Pugan, the former capital of the Burmese
empire, lying between Prome and Ava, with its innumerable ruins of
temples and columns. Perhaps the following account of the de-
struction of that city, translated from the 5th volume of the large
edition of the Royal Chronicles of the Kings of Ava, (Maha Yazawen
wen dan gyee,) may be deemed curious. Pugan, also called Pouwk-
gan and Arimaddana, is stated to have been founded by a king
Tuamu-pirit, A. D. 107, shortly after the destruction of the Thore
Khettara or Prome empire, and the king NaraTHIHAPADE, in whose
reign the Chinese took possession of the city, was the 42nd from the
time of its foundation.

1835.] ihe ancient capital of the Burmese Empire. 401

«In the Burmese year 643, (A. D. 1281,) the Talain WarzezRoo
killed the noble Aturmma, who was lord of the city of Mouttama
(Martaban), a part of the empire, and set himself up as king there.
In the same year, the emperor of China deputed ten nobles with
1000 horsemen, to demand certain gold and silver vessels, on the
ground that king ANAurataHA Men Zav* had presented them. Some
histories assert that they came to demand a white elephant.

‘‘ The Chinese envoys conducted themselves in a disrespectful
manner in the royal presence, when his majesty ordered the whole
of the ten nobles and 1000 horsemen to be put to death. One of
the ministers, Nanna PserzeeEn, respectfully addressed the King, say-
ing, ‘ Although the envoys of the emperor of China are ignorant of
what is due to a king, and have conducted themselves in a disre-
spectful manner, yet if it seemeth well to your glorious majesty, a
report of their conduct should be made to the emperor of China. If
it pleaseth your majesty to have patéence, and issue such orders as
may promote the interests of the country, such orders should be
issued. To put ambassadors to death has not been the custom during
the whole line of our kings. It will be proper then for your majes-
ty to forbear.” The king replied, saying, ‘They have treated with
disrespect such a sovereign as Iam; put them to death.’ The officers
of government, fearing the royal displeasure, put the whole of the
Mission to death, without a single exceptiont.

«When the emperor of China received the intelligence of the
execution of his envoys, he was exceeding angry, and collecting an
army of at least six millions of horse and 20 millions of foot, sent them
down to attack Pugan; the king of which, NaraTHEEHAPADE, as soon
as he heard of the coming of this force, placed under the generals
Nawnpa PEErzeEn and YANDA PertzEENn 400,000 soldiers, and numerous
elephants and horses, with orders to proceed and attack the Chinese
army. The two generals marched to the city of Nga-young-gyan,
and after putting its walls, ditch, and fortifications in a proper state of
defence, opposed the Chinese army at the foot of Bamau river, killing
during three months so many of that army, that not a grass-cutter
even for its elephants and horses remained. The emperor of China,
however, kept reinforcing his army, and replacing those who were
killed, by sending 200,000 men, when he heard of the loss of

* This King of Pugan is said to have invaded China about A. D. 1040, and
gold and silver flowers or ornaments are the emblems of tributary subjection
among all the Indo-Chinese nations.

t+ There is some kind of tradition at Ava, that the Chinese envoys insisted
upon appearing in the royal presence with their boots or shoes on.

3&5

402 Description of Pugan, (Jury;

100,000 men, and 400,000, when he heard of 200,000. Hence the
Burman army was at last overpowered with fatigue, and the Chinese
crossed the river and destroyed Nga-young:gyan.

‘“‘Asthe Nats or spirits attached to either nation were fighting
together in the air, four of the Pugan Nats, namely, Tebathen, (the
guardian of one of the gates of Pugan city,) T'salen wot-thaken young
Nat, Kan shye young Nat (guardian of the. long lake or tank), and
Toung gye yen Nat (lord of the foot of the mountain), were wounded
by arrows. In the new Yazawen, Tebathen Nat is styled Thanbethen.
On the very day on which the stockade of Nga-young-gyan was taken,
the Nat Tebathen returned to Pugan, and entered the house of the
king’s teacher, on whom he had always been accustomed to wait.
The king’s teacher was asleep at the time; but the Nat shook and
awakened him, and said, ‘ Nga-young-gyan has been destroyed this
day. Iam wounded by an arrow, and the Nats Tsalen-wot-thaken,
Kan shye and Toung gye yen are also wounded in the same manner.”
The priest and king’s teacher called one of his disciples, a young
probationer, and sent him to the king to report the loss of Nga-young-
gyan. His majestv inquired how this circumstance was known, when
the young probationer declared, that the Nat Tebathen, guardian of
the Tharabha gate, had just arrived from Nga-young -gyan, and report
ed the matter to the king’s teacher, who had thus learned, that that
place had been destroyed on that very day.

«‘' The king then summoned a council of his ministers and officers,
and addressed them as follows: ‘ The walls of the city of Pugan are
low, and enelose too small a space to permit all the soldiers and
elephants and horses to remain comfortably within, and defend
them. I propose therefore to build a strong wall, extending from the
eastward, from the village of Balen, in the upper part of the river,
straight down to the southward, taking in the village Yonatha. But it
is not possible just now to procure bricks and stones quickly ; if we
break down some of the temples, and use the bricks, we shall be able
to complete this wall most expeditiously.’ Accordingly, 1000 large
arched temples, 1000 smaller ones, and 4000 square temples were
destroyed. During this operation, a sheet of copper, with a royal
prediction inscribed on it, was found in one of the temples. The
words were as follows: ‘In the city of Pugan, in the time of the
father of twins, the Chinese destroying, will be destroyed.’ The
king thereupon made inquiries among the royal women, and learnt,
that a young concubine had just given birth to twins. |

«As his majesty now believed, that even if he built the intended
fortification, he would be unable to defend it, he caused 1000 boats

1835.) the ancient capital of the Burmese Empire. 403

with figure-heads and war-boats, to be made ready, and embarked in
them all his gold and ‘silver and treasures; a thousand cargo boats,
also, he loaded with paddy and rice; in a thousand state boats he
embarked all his ministers and officers, and in the gilded state boats,
his concubines and female attendants. But as the boats could not
accommodate all the royal concubines and female attendants, who
were very numerous, the king said, ‘These women and servants
are too numerous to be all embarked in the boats, and if we leave
them here, the Chinese will seize and take possession of them; tie
their hands and feet together, therefore, and throw them into the
river. The king’s teacher however observed, ‘in the whole circle of
animal existence the state of man is the most difficult of attainment,
and to attain that state during the time of a Buddha, is also most
difficult. There can be no occasion for your majesty to commit the
evil deed of throwing these people into the water. Such an act will
be for ever talked of even among kings, and will be registered in
the records of the empire. Let your majesty therefore grant per-
mission for any person to take such of the royal female attendants as
cannot be embarked in the royal boats, and by so doing, your majes-
ty will be said not only to have granted them their lives, but to have
afforded them protection.’ The king replied, ‘ Very true,’ and
set at liberty 300 of the female servants of the interior of the palace,
who were taken and carried away by different inhabitants of the city.

“ The king then embarked in his gilded accommodation boat, and
- retired to the Talain city of Bathein (Bassien).

“Nanna Peetzeen and Yanpa Peetrzzen, after the loss of Nga-
young-gyan, retreated and built a couple of stockades on the eastward
slope of the male mountain, where they again resisted the Chinese.
Both the generals, holding some fized quicksilver* in their mouths,
leaped 15 and 16 cubits high in the air at atime, and attacked
the Chinese; but whilst fighting in this manner, an arrow, which
had been discharged by one of the Nats of the two countries, who
were contending in the air, struck Nanpa PrrrzrEn, and threw him
to the ground lifeless. In consequence of this event, and the Chinese
army being very numerous, victory was unattainable, and defeat again
ensued. The Chinese pursued vigorously, and the Pugan generals re-
treated, keeping their force as much together as possible. On arriving at
Pugan, and finding that the king and the whole of the population had left
that city and fled to the Talain country, the army followed themto Bathein.

* Among the Burmese alchemists, fixed, or as they call it dead, quicksilver, is

an object of great desire, owing to the miraculous power which it is said to confer
on the possessor.

ae ie O.

404 Description of Pugan in Ava. [Juxy,

**The Chinese continued the pursuit until they reached Taroup*
maur, but their army, owing to the great distance which it had march-
ed, and its great numbers, began to experience a scarcity of provisions ;
and was induced to turn back from that place.

‘‘In the Burmese year 646 (A. D. 1284), two pat or quarters
wanting to complete the 27th lunar asterism, the king NaRATHEEHA-
PADE fled in fear of the Chinese. Hence he is styled Zuroup-pye-men,
the king who fled from the Chinese.”

After remaining five months at Bassien, the king, hearing that
the Chinese had retreated from Pugan, made arrangements for return-
ing thither. On his way up the river, it is recorded on one occasion,
his cooks having been able to serve him up a dinner of only 150
dishes, instead of the 300, to which he had always sat down every
day, he covered his face with his hands and wept, saying, ‘I am
become a poor man.’ Shortly after on his arrival off Prome, he was
poisoned by his own son, the governor of that place.

The building at Pugan, which Marco Poto calls ‘a sepulchre of
the king,’ must have been one of the large Buddhist temples, contain-
ing some relics of Gaudama. The body of a deceased king of Ava is
usually burnt within the palace enclosed, and the bones and relics
carefully collected in some vessel, and thrown into the Jrawddi river.

Like the early kings of England, named Rufus, Beauclerk, Lack-
land, Longshanks, &c., most of the Burmese kings are distinguished
by some sobriquet or particular appellation. A king, Naratuu, who
was killed by some Kulas or natives of India from Chittagong, about
the year 1171, is stvled Kula-gya-men, the king who fell or was killed
by Kulas. Another of Toungu or Toungugu, who was taken pri-
soner and carried away from Toungugu to Syriam, by the celebrated
Portugueze chief, Paine Dz Brito and Nicots, about the year 1612,
called Kula-ya-men, the king whom the Kulas obtained or seized, See
Modern Universal History, vol. 7th, page 118.

In the sketcht of the remains of Pugan, the large pagoda on the
proper right, is called Ananda ; it was built by a king Kyan-zExt-THa,
who reigned between A. D. 1064 and 1093, and was repaired by the
father of the present king of Ava, in 1795, when Captain Symus visi-
ted the place. The pagoda on the high point of land, wasted by the
river, is called Langa Nanda; it was built by ANAURATHA zAN, who
reigned between A. D. 1017 and 1059.

* Chinese Point, the same as Symes’s Tirroup-mion.
+ Weregret extremely that the number of plates in the present No. precludes
the admission of the sketch to which the author alludes.—Eb.

1835.] Register of the Weather at Dacca, &c. 405

IV.—Regisier of the fall of rain, in inches, at Dacca, from 1827 to
1834. By Dr. G. W. Lams.

1827. | 1828. | 1829. | 1830. | 1831. | 1832. | 1833. | 1834.

in. in. in. in. in. in in in.
January, ....006-| oe a all Ore Bo ree +. ae oe 1.0
February, ...... st Ore Ole 1d Seah a OP OA A Bec C7
NET Gi | SARegeIee ee Oo Orsconip tn OL Ono lin Ag. Sulla. 1G ne Benny
Pre A. go | tf. OF) ond | oO. LL feo IOSD | £5 oe
eee ete ee elo se haa Pe Bee 1047 6.6 112-454... 9
eee aeons 9 | 8 . 40 8 |L0.. 9128.6. 8.2) 5 .b 16. 6
Mecano to . 6) 9° B12 O70. 6 | 8. 451-6. 6h oS 7 o.6
PE USES)) Se ce< es. Sra Sire Ones FLA SOMO. Zane Zee 18s 9.0
BEEEMIBC Uy alae 1181.16 | 957 JEL a7.) 6.4 8126.6.) 9. Gej12 2 2) Mb ..2
MIPEOHEI Osis ie 4a) os OV l2li. Sued sky (40. 2 iid) oah oe 2 6.2
November, ...... . ae : Shece Ap Me 1.0 0.4
December, ......|0 610.4 i ‘ OieZial| yee Sn

74.0 [46.8 |80.8 93.9 |89.0 |66.7 |62.8] 68.0

Dacca, 20th June, 1835.

V.—Register of the Thermometer at Ambdla, for 1834. By M. P.
EverewortH, Esq. C. S.

{Having a great many registers of daily observations on hand, for which we
have hitherto been unable to find space, we have been obliged to confine our-
selves to the publication of monthly abstracts ; but we have prepared a copper-
plate, in which we hope shortly to exhibit the daily observations both of Barome.
ter and Thermometer for many localities in the same view, and in very limited
space.— Ep. ]

I have the pleasure of enclosing a register of the thermometer at
this place for last year. The temperature during the hot weather
is probably considerably too high, in consequence of the situation of
the thermometers in the fort town where I then resided ; but I hope
this year to obtain a fairer estimate, as I have now moved into a
bungalow, and the thermometers are placedin the north veranda, very
little exposed to glare, &c. Finding that there was scarcely any dif-
ference between the means deduced from the extreme temperature
during the day and that from the temperature at 10 a.m. and 10P. m.,
I have discontinued the latter. For the greater part of the year
the maximum and minimum are the extremes, according to the register
thermometer; but as frequently I am absent from this place on busi-
ness in the district, a native (on whose accuracy I can place confidence)
registers the temperature at sunrise, and at half past two in the cold,
and three in the hot, season, which I have observed to be the hottest
time of the day respectively.

406

Thermometrical Register at Ambdtla.

ry ULY,

Note.—The thermometers used were self-registering ones ; that for the mint-
mum with a metal scale by Newman; that for the maximum, with a wooden
scale by Hamitton. They were placed in a niche in a wall facing the north,
but exceedingly exposed to glare in the upper (3rd) story of the fort, a large
mass of brick, which consequently became exceedingly heated, and was slow in
cooling in the hot weather ; therefore the temperature stood considerably higher
than it would have done in the veranda of a bungalow or house, and cannot be
fairly compared with registers made in other places in consequence.

Jan...

Feb...

March,
April, .
May...
June,..

July, ..

Aug...
Sept..
Oct...
Nov. ..
Dec...

Whole
year, ..

MEANS. EXTREMES. ES
: Mean temp. of the Mini- ee Diurn.|=
4 ‘S| day Aeaneed from |" mum Maximum} sation :
os} (GES SCE SI INL) Ieee I ir oan ear
Bodies AGS ee Esher 1 ee 2
a oe ees apc awelu aes A 3 ea
¢ 2 B| So a SSE PER lee creel PA I Sze & Bel ee
a | © 2 | @
gets | ee Bee ce ee ee
© S Ge | OS. A ee eee | El Teo 9/1 8 |33
= ah ely ere le Aen” ARES on) ciple |] goed, tac eal
43.24) 63.17| 53.2 | 51.4 | 52.3 |23.5 57. |38.5:70.5156. |27.5| 9. | 1
51.35} 70.85) 61.1 | 60.2 | 60.6 119.9 \60. |41. | 79.165. |26.5) 8. | 5
58.97| 81.87| 70.4 | 70.5 | 70.45)23. |71. |50. | 95.169. (31. \14. | 5
67.16! 94.63) 80.9 | 80.85) 80.87,27.4 |82. |55. |111.180.5 '33. |15. | 6
82.5 ]117.7 |100.1 |100.0 |100.05/35.2 |90.5|72. |120./104.5.37. 25. | 1
83.65/110.1 | 96.82] 96.33] 96.52,26.45'95.5|70. |119.193. 136. \11.5) 8
78.87| 96.1 } 87.4 | 84.8 | 86.1 |17.3 87. |70. 108,/81. 26a \3. |22
78.2 | 96.88} 87.5 | 86. 86.7 \18.6 |85. 174. |105.,90. |26. | 9. 120
77.03] 93.2 | 85.1 | 84.1 | 84.6 [16.2 (84. |71. | 99.182. |21. |10. '14
67.33} 85.36) 76.5 | 75.2 | 75.8 |18. 78. HSL 96.169. 24a 5. |) 3
54.03) 76.06) 65.05] 64.3 | 64.77/22.03)62. |51. | 80.|71. 125. \16. | 2
47.9 | 65.96) 56.93] 56.85] 56.89/18.06/56. |42. | 72./59. |24. | 9. | 4
0 0| 76.59! 75.87] 76.23\22.13'95.5]38.5/120./56. (37. | 3. 193
No of days on which the wind blew.
: js Ae vi
Ps | ge | ae 5
ae 5 =e :
E a a ge Zz
HeMiVeh ae Gales wa be 22 7 0 2
Hebruary,.. «= :\.isiet 14 12 0 2
IMiarchiis..:c esye soreres 17 14 0 0
JN\ al ORSEIAO BOO OIse 19 7 3 1
INE Ga oo ga caoUdaOc 14 5) 12 0
June, .. 3 9 16 0
Hftly Socda 6 2 28 2 2
UNUETTIS FG pond. codac 5 16 10 0
September, o.. 2.005 ll 15 4 0
Octobers). ee see 16 14 1 0
November, .. .. 27 3 0 0
December, ....... 19 if 2 8

90

—
oO

By W. quarter is to be understood from N. W. to S. W. inclusive.

1885.) . Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 407 .

V1.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
Wednesday Evening, 5th August, 1835.

The Honorable Sir Epwarv Ryan, President, in the Chair.

Mr. C. Biyny, proposed at the last meeting, was balloted for, and duly
elected a Member of the Society.

The Secretary read the following reply from Government, to the appli«
cation made, in conformity with the resolution of last meeting.

To the Honorable Sir Enwarp Ryan, Knt.
President of the Asiatic Society.
Howoraste Sir,

I am directed by the Governor General of India in Council, to acknow.
ledge the receipt of your letter, communicating the request of the Asiatic
Society, that the whole of the Oriental Works, the publication of which,
at the expence of the Fund for Education, has lately been discontinued by
order of Government, and those that have been reserved by Government
for completion, may be made over to the Asiatic Society, with a view to
their completion, at the expence and under the superintendence of the
Society.

2. The Governor General in Council is glad to accede to the wishes
of the Society, and the necessary Instructions will be issued to the General
Committee of Public Instruction, to transfer the publications accordingly.

I have the honor to be, &c.

Council Chamber, (Signed) G. A. Busuey,

the 15th July, 1835. Secretary to Government.

Referred to the Committee of Papers, who will take measures for the
receipt and accommodation of the Books, and for the immediate continua
tion of the works now in the press. Resolved also, that a book of sub.
scriptions be circulated among the members, with a Prospectus specifying
the price of each work.

Read the following letter from the Honorable Mr. Grorer Turnour,
of Ceylon, acknowledging his election as an Honorary Member.

To the Secretary to the Bengal Asiatic Society, Calcutta.
Sir,

I beg to express my gratified acknowledgments for the honor conferred on me
by the Bengal Asiatic Society, in electing mean Honorary Member of their Institu-
tion. ;

Highly as I should, at any time, and under any circumstances, appreciate this
compliment, I consider myself peculiarly fortunate in receiving it, at a time when
I am engaged in the translation of a valuable historical work in the Pali language.
In addition to the data from which the ‘‘ Epitome of the History of Ceylon,’’
(published in the Local Almanac for 1833, and presented to your Society by the
Right Honorable the Governor,) was compiled, this work contains, besides detached
historical fragments, a chronologically connected Buddhistical History of India, from
B. ©..590, to B. C, 307.

It is within that interesting period, that the invasion of India, by ALEXANDER, and
the Embassy of MEGASTHENES to Palibothra, took place; which in their results
formed the earliest connecting link between the Histories of the East and West.

The account given in the commentary on his work, by the Pali historian, of the
Indian monarch of that period, ‘‘ CHaNDAGUTTO,”’ closely resembles JUSTINUS’
sketch of that usurper’s character under the name of ‘‘ SANDRACOTTOS.’’

In point of time also, this Pali History accords with the Chronology of the His-
tories of the West, with considerable accuracy. The reigns of ALEXANDER and
SELEvCUS NIcCATOR comprised the period from about B.C. 336, to B. C. 280, accord-
ing to the latter authorities; while the Pali historian assigns to the reign of their
contemporary ‘‘ Chandagutto,’’ the period from B. C. 385, to B. C. 351.

The valuable information brought to light by the researches of Mr. HopGson
and M. Csoma DE Kérés, and published in your Journal, ia reference to Buddhism,
will be confirmed, or further elucidated, by this more ancicat authority, on several
important points.

408 Proceedings of the [Juny,

After the disappointments which have hitherto attended the labor of orientalists
in their search for historical annals, comprehensive in data and consistent in their chro-
nology, atranslation alone of a Pali History of such extensive pretensions, would be
justly received with repulsing scepticism, as to its authenticity, by the literary
world. I have therefore decided on publishing the tert also in Roman characters,
pointed with diacritical marks. The entire work will occupy, with its supplementa-
ry notes and explanations, about 1200 pages of quarto. As the publication how-
ever is undertaken entirely at my own expence, and possibly official demands on my
time may prevent the early completion of the whole work, the reception the first
volume may meet with, and other circumstances, over which I can exercise n0 con-
trol, will hereafter decide whether I proceed beyond that volume.

While this quarto is in the press, a few copies in octavo of the early chapters are
also in progress of being printed for me. These, I purpose, in a few weeks, to dis<
tribute among the Literary Societies, prefixed to copies of the ‘‘ Epitome.’’

I invite the Members of the Asiatic Society, who have done me the honor to
associate me with them, to enter upon acriticism of this work. I allude not to the
traaslation (for the disadvantages or advantages under which I perform the unpre-
tending task of translating, will be undisguisedly stated); but on the original
work. If, as I believe, it will stand the test of that scrutiny, the foundation, I
conceive, will then be laid for the development and adaptation to chronological order,
of a vast mass of historical data, connected with India, which are now scattered in
detached fragments amongst the voluminous religious Pali records still extant in this
island ; and I trust also, that the attention of orientalists will thereby at last be
directed to the examination of the Pali works so often alluded to by Colonel Top

and others, as being still in existence in the Rajput and other western divisions of
Tndia.

{ remain, &c.
Kandy, 10th July, 1835. GEORGE TURNOUR.
Several Members present expressed a desire to possess Mr. Turnour's
work, and 12 copies were at once subscribed for, The communication was

referred to the Committee of Papers, to consider how the objects of the
author could be best promoted.

Read a reply of the Bishop of Cochin China, to the Secretary’s letter,
dated 2nd April, forwarding a portion of the MSS. Dictionaries prepared
by him for publication. Referred to the Committee of Papers.

The Secretary intimated the completion of a revised catalogue of the
Society’s Library, of which copies were distributed to the Members present.

Library.

Read a letter from Artuur Arktn, Esq. Secretary to the Royal Society
of Arts, &c. acknowledging the receipts of vols. 17 and 18, of the Asiatic
Researches, and forwarding for presentation,—

Transactions of that Society for the sessions 1633-34.

The following books were also presented :

Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London, Parts I. and IIe, for the
year 1834—by the Society.

Descriptive and Ilustrated Catalogue of the Physiological Series of Comparative
Anatomy, contained in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons in London,
vol. 2nd—by the College.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, Nos. 19 and 20—by the Editors.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No. 8—by the Mad. Lit. Soc.

A copy of the Kifayah, a Treatise on the Questions of Muhammedan Law, by
Hakim Maulavi Azspux Mogrp, and presented by the author.

A collection of Witty Sayings in Urdu—by Rdja Kaltkishan Bahddur.

Meteorological Register for June, 1835—by the Surveyor General.

A Lecture on the Vendidad Sddi of the Parsis, delivered at Bombay, on the 19th
and 26th June, 1833 ; also, an Exposure of the Hiudu Religion, in reply to Mora Bhat-

ta Dandekara, and, a Second Reply to Narayana Rao of Satara—by the author, the
Rev. John Wilson.

The following books were received from the booksellers:

Illustrations of Indian Zoology, from Major-General HARDWICKE’s Collection of
Indian Animals,

1835.] Asiatic Society. 409

Illustrations of the Botany and other branches of the Natural History of the Hi-
malayan Mountains, and of the Flora of Cashmere, by J. F. Roywez, Esq. F. L. S.,
and G.S. M. R. A. S.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia Foreign Eminent Men, vol. 1st.

Library of Useful Knowledge ‘Vaud’s Algebraical Geometry.

A cylindric pedestal, containing on its surface the three principal divi-
sions of the year in use in India; viz. the siderial, the luni-solar, and the
lunar, contrived to exhibit on inspection the corresponding day of the
European Calendar, by revolving rings, was presented by the Secretary.

Literary and Antiquities.

Read a letter from Ensign Newsoup, forwarding an account of Sungie
Ujong, one of the states in the interior of Malacca, with statistical infor-
mation obtained from native sources.

Mr. NEwso.Lp also transmitted an original Malay letter from a claimant to the
sovereignty of Menangkdbowe, to Mr. WESTERHOUT, a gentleman of influence at
Malacca, couched in the following laconic terms, and sealed with a signet large
enough to cover the whole of the writing, (similar but double the diameter of those
published in Plate XII. of the present vol.)

— ‘‘ The peace of God, &c. &c.’’ ‘‘ There are three hereditary kings in this world,
viz. the kings of Rim, China, and Paggartiyong (Menangkdbowe). Should you ac-
knowledge my descent, you will answer this epistle.”’

A description of the Ruins of the Temple of Harshé Deva, in the Shekd-
wati country, by Sergeant E. Dean, in illustration of an accurate fac-si-
mile of the ancient Sanscrit inscription discovered there and taken off by
himself, was read ; together with a translation of the inscription and notes
upon the whole, by the Rev. Dr. Mix1, V. P.

[Published in the present No.]

A description of Pugan, the ancient capital of the Burmese Empire, by

Col. Burney, with a Drawing of the Town, by Mrs. Burney, was submitted.
[Published in the present number. }

Physical.

Ensign Newsoxtp transmitted eight specimens of Tin, cast in native
moulds, from the principal mines in the Malay Peninsula ; also, the crude
ore from Salangore and Sriminanti, with a request that they should be sub-
mitted to analysis.

[This shall be done as soon as leisure will permit. ]
Also a small phial of the Spoh or Upas poison ( Towicaria Ǥ)|) used by

the aborigines of the interior of Sungie Ujong, to tip their arrows.

A letter from Dr. Bewza, Surgeon to the Governor of Madras, for-
warded for presentation, a Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries, (Ni-
giris, ) illustrated by a coloured map, and by a series of specimens of the
rocks and minerals of the range.

Duplicate specimens of the Minerals of South-India in the Museum of
the Madras Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, were presented by the
Secretary Mr. J. C. Morris.

Dr. J. G. Mautcoimson forwarded by the same opportunity a series of
specimens of the Zeolites, from the trap formation in the vicinity of Poona,
with notes on the most curious of them ; also a specimen of the native
Carbonate of Magnesia, now becoming an article of Export from Madras.

[We propose noticing these further after analysis. |

Lieut. W. E. Baxer, Engineers, presented notices and drawings of
some of the fossils of the Dadupur Museum, particularly the fossil elk,
the horse, the hog, the hyena, the buffalo, &c.

From Lieut. H. M. Duranp, Engineers, were also received and sub-
mitted, notes on the fossil Hippopotamus of the Sub-Himalayas, with
accurate pen illustrations.

G

410 Miscellaneous. [Juxy,

[We despair of being able to do justice to the beautiful drawings of these two zea-
lous contributors, but we will do our best to give them early publication. }

Two bottles of Sea-water, one from the Red Sea, the other from the
Arabian Sea, were presented by Lieut. A. Burnes, through Lieut.
T. Fraser, who on his own part offered for the Society’s Museum, a
specimen of the genuine Papyrus of Egypt.

The remainder of the fossil bones from the bed of the Jumna, present-
ed by Sergeant E. Dean, now Superintendent of the Delhi Canal, were
laid on the table, with a descriptive catalogue from the donor.

A collection of Insects from Kemaon, presented by Dr. McCiennanp,
containing many duplicate specimens of the collection formerly procured
by the Society from Sylhet, and a specimen of the silk of the Aranea
Diadema.

A collection of Snakes from Midnapore, presented by P. Curene, Esq.

A specimen of Monoculus, from Burmah, presented by Col. Burney,
Resident at Ava.

Specimens of Silicious Tufa in spherical concretions, from the hot springs
in Bhotan, were presented by Dr. McCuetLann, who furnished the fol-
lowing particulars of their formation.

“They are produced from hot springs in Bhotan, brought to Almorah by the
merchants of that country, and sold as Duck shot.

‘“ The substance melts before the blue flame of the blow-pipe, with the addition of
borax, into a porcelaneous mass. Without borax, itis infusible, nor does it form lime.

‘“ From the above properties, these singular little spherical bodies appear to be
silicious tuff, similar to what is afforded by the boiling springs of Iceland.

‘“* Dr. BLACK, as well as KLAPROTH, who long ago examined the Iceland waters,
and the small globules of tuif ejected from them, believed the silex to be held in
solution by the immense heat to which it was exposed, assisted by the slightly
alkaline character of the waters.

‘* The Iceland waters are propelled with great violence from the earth, at a boiling
temperature, to the height of several yards, and with the water the small globular
bodies of silex.

‘‘ The only other springs that emit siliceous tuff (as far as I recollect) are those
of Carlsbad in Bohemia, where the temperature of the water is (I think) 178° Fahr.
I am not sure that the tuff is there afforded in isolated bodies, or rather in stalactitic,
and coralloidal forms on the basins of the springs.

‘“ I was unable to learn the locality of the Bhotan springs, or their extent.’’

VIL. —Miscellaneous.

1.—Abandoned Oriental Works,

The unfinished publications of the Committee of Public Instruction, the printing
of which was recently suspended by order of Government through fear of increas-
ing their accumulation of waste-paper, have been liberally (we really consider the
gift to be both liberal and valuable, notwithstanding the danger of being suspected
of irony by some members of the Society), and unreservedly placed at the entire
disposal of the Asiatic Society. A pledge has been offered that the Society shall
incur no risk of loss from its engagement to complete them, altheugh the printer’ s
estimate amounts to upwards of twenty thousand rupees ; and although a writer in
the Friend of India, to whose solid judgment upon all that concerns the interests and
opinions of the natives the greatest deference is due, discourages the hope of any
patronage, or profit, from sale of the works, among the rich or the learned of the
country. Nevertheless, it is to these, and to the friends of oriental literature among
our Own countrymen, that the Society can alone look for reimbursement. It
must be borne in mind, that the Government having made a present of one half or
more of these works, the price at which the Society will be able to sell them will be
reduced in the same proportion, and that compared with the price of manuscripts,
these rates will be exceedingly low. But if indeed the books are held to be worth-
less and unsaleable, then will the worst fears of Dr. MARSHMAN be realized.
To meet this objection, and to satisfy the inquiries of those who might be alarmed at
spending their money on waste-paper, the Prospectus published by the Society
(and appended to our present number) has collected afew notices on the principal

1835.] Miscellaneous. 411

works, from the pens of those to whose judgment all will be willing to,succumb ;
and among the patrons of oriental literature in the older time, it is gratifying to
behold the name of the first Governor General of India. We will not allow it to be
imagined, however, that all encouragement hasbeen abandoned in these latter days :
it was in 1832-3, that the Tibetan Dictionary and Grammar were printed at a cost
of Rs. 5,000 to Government. A proposition for the printing of a Cochin-Chinese
Dictionary prepared by the Vicar Apostolic of that country is, we perceive by the pro-
ceedings of the Asiatic Society, about to be made. It remains to be seen whether the
fatal edict, almost the last of the late administration, will interfere to prevent the
patronage of this valuable addition to the languages of the east.

2.—Burnes’ and Conolly’s Travels.

The Geographical Society of Paris have paid a handsome compliment to our tra-
vellers, Lieutenant A. BuRNES, and Lieutenant A. CONOLLY, in testimony of the value
set upon the published results of their adventurous labours. On the latter they have
conferred a copper prize-medal, and to the former, one of silver.

The avidity with which interesting works on the newly explored regions of central
Asia are received at home, may be judged from the fact, that Lieutenant BURNES’
work passed through three English editions in a year, besides a translation into
French and German.

3.—Ceylonese History.

The Honorable GrorGcEe TuRNOUR of Ceylon, well known for his attainments in the
Pali and Sing4lese literature, is now publishing a translation of the Mahavanse or
History of the Rajds of Ceylon, from the landing of Vijaya on the island in the 9th
century before Christ. We refer to the proceedings of the Asiatic Society of the Sth
August for some particulars of this costly undertaking, to which we trust due en-
couragement will be given.

4.—Valuable Tibetan Works.

We are happy to announce that Mr. Hopeson, resident in Nipal, has at length
been able to procure a complete copy of the Stangyur collection, of which only a few
extracts were hitherto in possession of the learned, although a catalogue of the
contents of the whole collection has been drawn up by Mr. CsomA, and published
(in analysis) in the Journal Asiatic Society. Mr. HopGson proposes, with bis usual
munificence, to present this copy to the Calcutta Asiatic Society, while he destines an-
other complete copy of the printed Kahgyur for the Royal Asiatic Society of London.

Of the Sanscrit originals of these precious stores of Bauddha learning, Mr. Hope-
son is endeavouring to obtain copies from Digarchi avd Lhassa; they are not to be
had at Kathmandu. Our countrymen may feel happy that good chance has placed a
man of Mr. Hopeson’s zeal in the residency ef Nipal, in lieu of one of the new school.
But for him the 300 volumes of Indian literature, preserved beyond the snows ina
foreign dress, might still have been unknown, or, if known, despised and unrecovered.

5.—Botany of the Nilgiris and Southern India.

A splendid Botanical Book, with coloured copper-plates, including microscopic
dissections of new plants, discovered by the Rev. B. Scumip in the Nilgherries,
(Nilgiris), and sent home to Germany, has been commenced to be published by a
talented Professor of Botany in the University of Jena. The work will be worthy
of the Science. The lst No. is expected to reach India within afew weeks, and
every quarter of the year, one decade will appear. The sale of the work, if promoted
by the friends of the science in India, will greatly aid Mr. Scumrp in his zealous
Botanical researches, and doubtless lead to fresh discoveries.

6.—Force of the Unicorn Fish.

“« The ship Royal Saxon, of about 500 tons, is now in dock, undergoing the necessary
refit after the dreadful hurricane she experienced in the Bay (of Bengal). So furious
was the tempest, that when it somewhat cleared up, in addition to loss of main and
mizen masts, the bowsprit was found broken off just outside the head of the stem,
which was unknown to any body aboard, until so discovered. The diameter is 23 inches!
On looking at the bottom, the snout or horn of an Unicorn Fish was pointed out by one
of the native work-people, projecting beyond the surface of the plank about six inches ;
since which, a piece of the plank, with the horn, has been cut out, which
shews the fish struck the bottom in a diagonal direction, pierced the copper,
felt, and bottom plank of 33in. thick, as well as the timber, one inch. The com-
mander has this curiosity now on board.

I thiak a notice of this may prove interesting to some of the readers of your
Journal.—J. M. Ss.

[A similar fact was noticed, and the perforated piece of wood presented to the
Society, and noticed in the Proceedings of the 26th December, 1833.—Ep. |

*Aep Sutpao|
-ord ay) JO se poxoque yWNoue oy} pur ‘Surus0Ul oy} ur skemye YO pwor st adenS urexr9yL “yIUOUI sv] ay} JO SUOLILOIpUT BY} 0} pappe aq snut_soaidap g : Surpurys sedo.d
SJL palBAOIIL JL ‘jaqueyo peusysioul ® Ul peyitoa pue ueyeys uoy mM $066 pue .[6 UsamMIJoq Pel[orj}v sulodsq Ayyeyuepwoe savy O} PUNO; sem Jajyowors AY iiey 9y} JO X9pul ey

‘jensn uRyy UIVA a100K “MSS cL'Ll, 16 {192 | 26/1 [| 8% | ecg (9aT‘L | Los‘ (cor |Z6 | se | OF | L°as| SPI‘ T|\see'sa|Ler°6o\‘ueAT\
‘surtayyes “11Ry “11eJ ‘as MS OF OLO | 9°86 | BZ | IG | L'b | Liv | ofos |FOL‘T | 863° |26'\'6 LG | LS | 8°68 88r* |9T9* 1€
‘gzip = *Supwayyes =—*4S¥O.LDAO ah ia | 986 | (9£ | 6 | 6 | BS | Gee |LUr‘T | Ie‘ \BPr.FIG | 9'G | O°T | T’es) GBOTT|OEh. jets’ | oF
-Sumeyyes op “ured 'S “AS S| 09%0 | 9°28 ‘94 | 16 | BE | SE | os |ZPL‘T | FBS |E6ENSG | I'S | BS | E'e8) POT I/GLe joLr 6
“op op ajstumo | ms "SMO SLO | SoG | ESL FIG | SE | BFE | GER [OET‘L | OOS! [OGET TE | HFG | kB | T'ae) PEOTT/SZP* j9US! | 8s
“guy op “Aromoys | ‘as "MS “MS | OSD] HFG | BEL FIG | L'y | L'S | Ofpe SPI‘T | QLe° |1Gr‘\'TG | LS | 9° | GécB! BhO‘T|B6R. ops’ | Lo
op -Apnoyo sumo "ato | CMS "S| OPO | gies | ote a Gs) Ae vosé ., | 8.9 | PIB pos* | 96
*fr9MOys op ep “Ms ‘s “ms | G0‘ | o6g | L°92 116 | 9% | L6G | peg /99L‘T | spat [PLP Y‘IG | 9° | Z'e | Lhe] GELTIOFE. joer! | os
“Sueyies ‘oul az] “mS mS TMS | STL | S96 aire 16 | 2° | #S | Of98 |9IZT | O6TS \90P4'G6 | Of€ | Bie | SER] GLLTL|FBES 965. $3
‘fyemOoys “UTeT “4308 sured "4398 | “AIS “ms Ms 7 OF T | G68 Bich GG | LE | oh | GER |TEI‘L | 88° |GIF [6 | GL | 96 | T'1g] 686S0\06F. |6LF* &
: op op op "MS ‘9S "ms | OST | G88 | Pee | 16 | P'S joe | Lg |B1O‘L | SEs loge SE | 2°S | He | 6&ee] GLOTTIOLES 3
ag op “Aystur tayo. "um ms "mS My BLO | 606 | BDL | BG | P'S | Bh | Leg |L10°T | Let |Loe‘K26 | SE | Ih | 1'F8) OGL'T ore‘ Iz
eS sus yes =" AxaMOYs ‘ured “ms tat "Ay SBOP 968 | OL | a6 | LS | SE | GFR |PEIT | Boat |aGE|TG | 6° | Le | L*pg) TEL T8630" 02
-2 “JoMmoys op Tp {ek aes "S | StO | cL | 3'94 «, | 29 | ofs8 oly Fg | 0°€8 61
> “aug op ssupoyyes | "SMS 8 | f00l | #94 | 3G | I | etm | otcg |OLt‘T | aoat |gon'{‘16 | Ze | SF | 9%b8] SETI T/hBE al
Si op sauy ‘ynums | "98 ms +g FOO] O16 | O94 | 16 | 019 | L°9 | ofog [PIB‘T | OL1S |rBEN'ZE | O° | Lis | £’pe] OST 1960, Lt
RS runys "S143 “14s ‘WIND ep ee Seng aes <, | 900! | H9L [1G | HE | LE | Bog [9ec°T | oats 9Le‘[‘26 | G'e | EF | 8a) ZL1'1)LFo! 91
~ op op *Jse010A0 "MS *MS “Ms 96°0 | “E6 Gol 6 |S? | O'S | gfcg |6LTT | OpL* |618* 6 | Be | be | 6'E6| GeL‘1|POES cI
= “syes “110 “Apnoyo ‘uIvd yjas| “MS = “MS *s | SPO es | 9 | 6 | OP |e | I'Fg \BII‘T | 903° |bee‘|‘26 | Pe | O'€ | T'e9) BLO‘ Les" iat
aS *pnoyo uted *339S8 *4S2019A0 ‘Ss "aS ary S10 | 6°28 B°9L 16 | 8? ay ogg |Z6c°T | 00a‘ |2er{'16 | 9's | 9°€ | 9%F8] OIT'T99E SI
SI “qQuity +Aiamoys sspp-wea] “S's cas, | OL'0 | pte | Gad pea| wecenluGseo 19F* Lg | 68 : rd
"eS -UleL *Apnoyp> “ud piey “as ou “U 090 “101 6°84 GG v6 BG 1°98 BOUT 801‘ OL61'26 | SE ge | e998] 961'I seis It
S -Sureyyes *ay2z1ap ‘yseoraao | ‘ou cau» to | S40] ‘oot | L222 | 16 | FS | 169 | 289g [ober | 266° JoFE|.26 | Sfh | Ih | 8°98) Sa‘T/06T, Ot
S “ms 119 op quit wind | "8S “as 7o «| STO] “66 | S'8L | 26 | BF | GG | Ogg |09B‘T | O90‘ |BcE‘|.a6 | Of | FF | Of28] 88CET/POG 6
3S “TynUINO op SoDUMMno “08. are Les «| 00t | S82 J a6 | OF | of | ocze [aZe'1 | o1ré jse‘|'26 | oF | Ge | 1°28] PEa‘T|B6Le q
Ss “aug ‘Apnop ‘quit umo| ‘as ‘as “s | O10 | Zeeor | *84 | a6 | OF | Be | |ttg jaGa'T | B60¢ |OGE ‘26 | L‘E | BE | E*98) F9s"T|0E> L
sa ‘Supayjes —-*4S¥19AO *4St010A0 1S.) “MS Ss cz, | 8{86 | 6/82 9*F | pes gers 6S | L688 9
‘ey ‘yeaa *11ey “MS “AS s 00°F | efc6 ‘9L ., | 96 | of8 brPs 6S | PZ F ¢
-Apnoya op 4yseoraao0 | "MS “MU *s PF OCTH reg | cL | a6 | BS | so | E99 |aoa'T | BI’ |GPP'I‘SG | ae | O%E | Sire] BLTTT/8ZE v
suid piey *Apnoyo “110 “wInd “MU "MS ¢M ., | 2°96 a°Lh G6 | SP eh P98 |OFLSL | OLZ° [OTP YG | OE | LF | 7°98 816'T)99_ €
‘ouy op “ays "umd “ms tus sms f OL'0 | oso | G94 F 16 | 89 | $°9 | ofZe [BET | OBr’ SEP 46 | €°S | L°E | FFB] SFITBLE'8E g
“1ynuIN9 auy “ea[o ‘as *MS S ofgor | 8h a... I
ee ae ~_ 8 aiom | 0 fen| te | a0] sal ep] ealoalec| mel so) ga] 22 (BS lgea 9
Ls 5S s i) Ss ry © SiS) Ai ao oom oe as Sal ealeh mo 4o @ =| Sa loo > >
= > 5 “ > S | FS] 8 | REISE SS] oR] os] BF | ae P BSc sel oi aci/ ee jee (Sob <
2 : eB. z wer eeals «fice BeiSeiloo| Pe/ S12 jeae | so) .) 28185 l%o |Pa o
= z 5 : Fs B gat se /S%/ 28) Se) wicks | se) e8lesiee loe | sal
3 “ee g Bel See MS ME) BB Pol ei Pe| Fiog | 8 F
= pipe yl 2S eal BPs ¢ is
Ce a =
*SoULOI] XY Ss
“Ta JeO MA “pul seveULON OH. “Wl *d F Je SUOTIVAIASGO "HW “V OT 32 SUOTIEAIISGO >
Iaysis9yY 3

rst
“cegt ‘Ayar fo yjuopy ay? wof ‘njynajn) ‘ang fussy ayz qv jday ‘sajsihay 779160]0.109}8 [WT

Soul 3-306.

od. IV. PULXXXI. ~

LDIUL Y-prooyy AY)

B

Pudding stone

(lay
iveath

3 you

4 Fern

7 Otophonitic Rock
8 Greenstene or Hornbtande Rock

1 Black Sa
5 Pore
o Umber

2 Ye

(2 Lilhoma

MG Grane
egmalile
agnelic Fron Ore

mp Basalt

[oO Swenic Granite

Gee Aematkic lon Ore

mm fi.
mm i

Wj

—~ AY AY

S|
,

WP LS
Y.\ (Nan
ANAS

Wie
Nie 4
is

Pi

Gr
gg PAL
SSN

YE vy

KS \\/ ASS
Ue i] =
SSSA Ec (EG

If
LIGNIN CSE FOI
1 Dy X

‘To Sringapayoum

Gi \/ Wh Zz

TS higp L\ EZ,
Tiiniig 0 NE \<Z

Misi, SS &,-

4

\ ey
Ing,
f Uf Hs US

JOURNAL

OFr

Mh ASLATHO- SOCLET Y.

No. 44.—August, 1835.

I.—Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries, (Nil-giri.) By Dr. P. M.
Brnza, Surgeon to the Honorable the Governor of Madras.
[Read at the Meeting of the 5th instant.]

The group of hills, called the Neilgherries, may be considered as
the southern termination of the Western Ghats, which at this place
end in abrupt, lofty, and almost vertical precipices; the extensive
valley of Coimbatir, dividing them from the Palghat chain, which, in
the same direction as the Ghats, extends down to Cape Comorin.

The Neilgherries form an elevated plateau, projecting in an easter-
ly direction, from the line of the ghats, in the form of a triangle, the
base of which is the continuation of the ghats themselves,

They rise abruptly from the table-land of Mysore, in stupendous
cliffs, with an elevation of many thousand feet. Two rivers encircle
them, as it were, running round their base. The Bhow4ni river,
rising in the western side of the Kundas, and among all the hills of
that group, runs in an easterly direction along the foot of tke side of
the Neilgherries, and, just below the apex of the triangle, is joined by
the Moyar, which together with the Paykar, having their origin in the
Noddimatty range precisely opposite the sources of the Bhow4ni, and
making a sharp curve after leaving the hills, runs an easterly course,
joining the Bhowani at Danikncottah, and under that name, after
running about 30 miles, they discharge their water into the Cavery.

The Neilgherries*, being the highest hills in the whole of the
peninsula, south of the Him4laya, possess a greater degree of geologi-~
cal interest than any other group in this extensive region.

* “ The Neilgherry Hills are situated between the parallels of 11° 10”
and 11° 32/N. latitude, and 76° 59’ and 77° 31’ E. longitude from Greenwich ;
their greatest extent in an oblique direction, from S. W. to N.S, is from 38 to

oH

414 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. [Aue.

Their being almost in the middle of a district, in which one of the
most interesting rocks in the Indian formations (the laterite) is found
developed in all its characteristic features, adds not a little to their
importance in a geological point of view. On account of their superior
elevation, they ought to be carefully examined by the geologist,
before he extends his researches to the other parts of the chain, of
which they form the most elevated point.

It was, undoubtedly, after consideration of this kind, that the late
Doctor TurNButL Curistiz, of the Madras Medical Establishment,
had begun his geological survey of the peninsula from the Neilgher-
ries, as from a point where the rocks, found at a lower level, are seen
in their original state, unmodified, and unaltered by formations and
deposits, which events and revolutions, subsequent to the elevation of
the whole chain of the western ghats, must have produced; and had
his life been spared, he would, undoubtedly, have given to the public
the most accurate and comprehensive account of the geological form-
ations of this interesting part of India, and would have settled many
doubtful points in Indian geclogy, which now keep many of the ablest
geologists in a state of uncertainty and suspense.

The few memoirs he published regarding the geology, not only of
India, but of those places through which he journeyed, particularly
of Sicily, show what was to be expected from a man, who evinced so
much information and accuracy of observation on those subjects.
Unfortunately for Indian geology, he was cut off at the very beginning
of his labours on these very hills, which had in preference attracted
his attention and researches.

We are told that the experienced eye of the geologist can easily
guess the nature of the rock composing a hill or a system of hills, by
the simple inspection of its outlines: thus, spiry peaks show the
formation to be primitive ; rounded smooth outlines are indicative of
calcareous mountains ; while the castellated ruin-like appearance of a
mountain, is proper to the sandstone formation.

This criterion, however, would lead into error regarding the nature
of the rocks forming the Neilgherries. Although their contour is
even, smooth, rounded, and, as it were, undulating, the fundamental
rocks of which they are composed belong to the primitive class.

Their outline resembles those hills and eminences we meet in
districts, resulting from tertiary or alluvial deposits. What the rock

40 miles, and their extreme breadth 15; taking in account the great undulations
of the surface, and the breadth above stated being pretty constant throughout,
their superficial extent may be fairly estimated at from 6 to 700 square geogra-
phical miles.—Bathie’s Observations on the Neilgherries,

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 415

is, which gives those hills the rounded form they exhibit, will be
ehown hereafter.

With the exception of some vertical cliffs and mural precipices, seen
in the boundaries of this elevated plateau, and a few projecting masses
of the fundamental rocks on the summits and declivities of these
hills, the whole group is uniformly covered by a thick stratum of ve-
getable earth (No. 1*), which overlying a thicker stratum of red earth,
(to be described in the sequel,) supports numerous plants, chiefly grasses,
which, growing most luxuriantly in thick contiguous tufts, give the
surface a smooth carpet-like appearance. This vegetable earth in
general is clayey, and of a grey colour, and very friable. On this
soil we occasionally see small rounded pieces of the decomposed
subjacent rock, bestrewed particularly on those spots where blocks of
the decomposing rock are seen jutting through the soil.

This vegetable soil is replaced in the low valleys and flats at the
foot of the hills, by a black soil, such as we frequently see forming
the peat-bog in swampy grounds, in which a large quantity of vege-
table matter is decomposing (No. 2).

This soil is of a black, or deep brown, colour; of tenacious consist-
ence, when moist; crumbling into powder, and often splitting into
prismatic masses, when dry. At first sight, it resembles the black soil
of the plains of India. From this last, however, it seems to differ
greatly, in containing a large quantity of carbonaceous matter, and
much oxide of iron.

To deprive this black soil of the greater portion of its humidity, I
exposed it to a heat, sufficient to melt lead, and after having weighed
a certain quantity of it, subjected it to an intense heat for an hour ;
after this, it had lost more than 25 per cent. of the original weight, and
had changed into an ochrey red powder (No. 3), without undergoing
any vitrification, as is the case with the black soil of the Deccan,
(Voysey.) It would therefore appear, that the loss is owing to the oxidi-
fication and consequent volatilization of the carbonaceous matter.

This soil, although more frequently found in low situations, is often
seen in a thick stratum on the declivities of the hills, such as on the
slope of one of the Dodabetta group, facing the cantonment ; on that
of the Elk Hills, (S.) above South Downs; near the Kaiti Pass, and
in many other localities, where I have remarked about it, a most luxu-
riant vegetation of innumerable ferns, of which the roots are seen
decaying into a black powder.

In many places below this black soil, and sometimes under the

* The figures refer to specimens deposited in the As. Soc. museum ; the letters
to the accompanying Map.—Epb.

3H 2

416 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. [Ave.

vegetable earth, we see thick beds of a yellow ochraceous earth
abounding with silica (No. 4). Indeed, in someplaces, as at Kotagherry,
it resembles very much the yellow Venetian Tripoli, previous to under-
going preparation for the arts (No. 5). The geological position, how-
ever, of the two, differs very much—the Venetian Tripoli, which is
brought there from Corfu, and from the neighbouring coasts of Epirus,
is found (as I have had opportunities of ascertaining) in the sandstone
formation, which alternates with the magnesian limestone*. The
kind of Tripoli I met with on the Neilgherries, seems to be the result
of the disintegration of a species of iron flint found in primitive
formations; some of the specimens I collected, have a great resem-
blance to the Eisnkeissel of Werner (No. 54). Some varieties of
the finest white Tripoli arise from the decomposition of silicious
rocks, such as calcedony, in Corfu and in upper Italy; but in gene-
ral, the Neilgherry specimen is not so silicious, and seems to contain
a good deal of alumina and iron. It isin this yellow clay that
we occasionally see some tubular bodies, formed by concentric
layers of the same clay, round the numerous roots of plants that
grow on the soil above (No. 6). But what attracted my attention
most was, to see (at Kotagherry) those tubular bodies traversing the
thick stratum of black earth, which overlies the yellow clay, without
having a particle of it in their composition. As if the roots, by a
kind of capillary attraction, sucked up through the black soil, without
mixing with it, the particles of the yellow clay which, undisturbed by
the vicinity of the black soil, arranged themselves concentrically to the
root ; and the latter decaying has left the cavity of the tube emptyt.

* It seems to be an argillaceous iron ore, similar probably to the one at Ash-
burnham, used for the manufacture of Tripoli, and belonging to the Hastings
sands.—See Firron’s Geological Sketch of the vicinity of Hastings, page 50.

+ ‘« Broenrarr alludes to sometbing similar to these tubular bodies, enclosing
the roots of plants in sandy places, where the iron appears to aggregate the sand
round the roots; and he concludes the paragraph by confessing his inability to
assign the cause producing it ‘ et dans ces-ci la cause qui a accumulé J’oxide de
fer a l’entour de la racine .... est encore difficile 4 assigner.—Tabl. des Terr. qui
composent la Surface du Globe, page 56.’

My friend Mr. Malcolmson, Secretary of the Madras Medical Board, writes
to me as follows: On the banks of many of the streams in the Deccan, the black
soil is seen penetrated by tubular incrustations, resembling kankar ; they are evi-
dently formed round the roots of plants, the decay of which leaves a cavity which
may sometimes be seen to divide and ramify. Some of those in the banks of the
Kanar river, Kamptee, near Nagpore, are more than an inch in diameter.—B.

Sergeant Dean’s Jumna collection exhibits many incrustations of calcareous
and ochreous matter of a similar nature. —Ep.

1835.] - Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 417

Immediately below the vegetable soil, in almost all places, we find
a stratum of detritus (in general not above a few inches thick), which’
is different in different localities, according to the nature of the rock
on which it rests. Thus, it is ferruginous on those places where
iron ores are found: quartzy and silicious above the thick veins of
quartz, which intersect these rocks. But in general it is composed
of. small fragments, sometimes rounded, and sometimes angular, of
the decomposed rock (of which we shall speak hereafter), being iden-
tical with that we see on the surface of the soil (No. 7).

The simple inspection of this detritus, overlying, and correspond.
ing in position and nature to the subjacent rock, forces upon us the
conclusion, that it does not belong to the alluvium (terrains de trans-
pert), but that it has its origin in the disintegration of the rock tn situ,
without any, or any material displacement from the rock which has
given rise to it.

Another fact that proves this detritus to arise from the decomposition
of the underlying rock, previous to its becoming lithomargic earth,
and while in the dry friable state which seems to have preceded it,
is, that the porcelain earth, wherever this last earth is found in large
beds below the vegetable earth, is never overlaid with detritus ;
because the rock is all at once converted into porcelain earth, without
the intermediate passage into the dry friable rock, from which the
detritus arises.

This detritus is seen almost in all localities on these hills; the
numerous sections that have been made in their declivities, for the new
roads, show it clearly every where. On looking at the banks on the
sides of those sections, we observe the detritus adapting itself to all
the irregularities and zig-zags of the subjacent rock, or stratum.
Fig. 2 of Pl. XXXI. shows this conformity better than any descrip-
tion. It is taken from the bank of the road round the lake near the
bund.

That this detritus has not been transported from any distance is
further proved, by observing it on the surface of the soil in those
places where the protruding rocks are either decomposed or decom-
posing. We often see the still undecomposed nucleus of the rock
protruding through the soil, surrounded and enveloped by the numerous
concentric layers of the decomposed rock, the bassets of which we see
level with the soil, the upper portion of them having been disinte-
grated into a detritus, which is scattered on the soil in the vicinity of
the blocks. As far as I know, no organic remains have hitherto been
found either in this detritus, or in the black soil.

In some places the detritus, for causes difficult to guess, assumes

418 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. {Ave.

a degree of hardness, and approaches a conglomerate ; the small rounded
pieces being agglutinated by a clayey paste, resembling a pudding-
stone. This is particularly the case in those localities where it overlies
the iron ores, so abundant on these hills. When the subjacent rock
is the hematitic iron ore, the conglomerate resembles exactly the pisi-
form, or oolitic iron ore, and in some places it is hard enough to be
used for architectural purposes. The conglomerate in this state of
aggregation is similar to some varieties of laterite found in the plains
of the Carnatic. But this pisiform iron ore is not to be confounded
with another rock, which also resembles laterite, and is met on these
hills in enormously thick beds, hereafter to be described.

Below the detritus, in almost all places on the hills, we finda
thick stratum of an ochraceous red earth, which occasionally assumes
both the appearance and the composition of lithomarge, and for this
reason, I shall call it hereafter indiscriminately either lithomargic, or
red earth. In some of the lower hills, this stratum is above 40 feet
thick, as it is near the bund of the lake. It is this red earth, which,
filling up the interstices among the original inequalities of the pro-
jecting rocks, has given the hills their rounded appearance, by
smoothing all the asperities and irregularities of the original rock ; or,
to speak more correctly, the projecting points themselves have been
smoothed down by their own decomposition into lithomargic earth.

In general, this red earth is of a mottled colour, or streaked with
different hues of red, yellow, crimson, white, and grey or brown. It
feels unctuous to the touch, and crumbles into dust when pressed
between the fingers. It does not form a paste with water, but sub-
sides to the bottom of the vessel. The different colours of this earth
are separate and distinct, having a decided line of demarcation, so as
to show that they are produced by the decomposition of separate and
distinct minerals. We occasionally find in it thick veins of pure
white felspar decomposed into porcelain earth, traversing it in all
directions ; precisely as we observe the same veins of felspar, in an un-~
decomposed state, traversing the hard rock, which forms the hills.

This red lithomargic mould is evidently the result of the decom-
position of two of the rocks, which almost exclusively form the
Neilgherries ; viz. the sienitic granite, and the hornblende rock, or
primitive greenstone ; of both which we shall speak hereafter.

It seems that before the rock is transformed into red earth, it
passes into a dry friable substance, which sometimes has consistence
enough to be cut and used for architectural purposes; many of the
stones used in the construction of the Kunutr bridge, are of this
nature. The second stage of the decomposition is that, in which it

835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 419

‘becomes of a soft consistence and earthy texture: the minerals
composing the rock still retaining their relative position as before.
Thus we see in the lithomargic earth, what was hornblende, changed
into a red ochrey substance ; the felspar into a white clay ; the numer-
ous garnets into a crimson-coloured clay ; the quartz alone remaining
unaltered and undisintegrated, which, after all, occurs but ina very
scanty proportion in the rock (No. 12).

It is curious to observe, that the substance of the crystalline rock is
not protected from decomposition by the thick layers of its own
decomposed substance ; and notwithstanding its being buried many
feet beneath the surface of the soil, under athick stratum of vegetable
earth detritus and lithomargic earth, the decomposition appears to
be going on without the concurrence of the atmospheric air.

In many places the entire block has undergone the process of
decomposition, and in the sections for the roads, we occasionally see
many concentric layers of the decomposed rock, like the coats of an
onion when cut transversely. It is not rare to observe, that these coats
have, in many localities, a kind of crust (enduit) of a black substance,
probably oxide of iron (No. 13). The decomposition of the rocks takes
place from outside inwardly, and appears to proceed, or to have pro-
ceeded gradually. It seems that the felspar and the hornblende are the
first to be decomposed, the one (losing the alkaline matter? Sir H.
Davy) becomes opaque and whitish ; the other, by the hyperoxidation
of its iron, is converted into an ochreous clayey substance : the garnets
do not resist decumposition long ; but the only change that the quartz
seems to undergo is in its arate of compactness ; becoming friable,
and easily reduced into sand by the fingers.

If observations and facts were wanting to prove that this thick
mass of lithomargic earth is owing to the decomposed granitic rock
of these hills, the following is conclusive. The original undecomposed,
rock is, as I have said, traversed occasionally by thick veins of quartz.
These veins resisting decomposition (which affects the remainder of the
ingredients of the rock) are seen in a continuous course, penetrating from
the hard crystalline undecomposed nucleus of the rock into the lithomar-
gic earth, and into the concentric layers of the already decomposed rock.
Therefore, it is impossible to avoid the conclusion, that the red earth
and the rock were, at one time, one mass, traversed by the quartz vein,
which is still seen continuous and entire, notwithstanding the trans-
formation of one-half of the rock into red earth.

The appearance I have just described, is seen on the N. bank of
the road, which descends from Ootacamund to Kaiti valley, after
the steepest descent of the Kaiti pass is finished; and, I dare say,

420 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. _ (Aue.

may be found in many other places, which I have had no opportunity
of visiting.

What I have said of the quartz veins is also applicable to the more
numerous felspathic veins, which traverse the rock ; with this differ-
ence, that they are decomposed, and converted into porcelain earth,
while those of quartz are entire and unchanged. But the continuity
of the vein is evident, although one-half of it has changed nature.

An additional, although negative, proof regarding the transforma-
tion of the granitic rock into lithomargic earth, is, that on those
hills where no rocks containing hornblende are found, this earth is
wanting. . This is the case on the summits of Dodabetta, Elk Hill,
Kaiti pass, &c., in which places the protruding rock being either
granite, or pegmatite, it exfoliates in lamine like granite, instead of
decomposing into red lithomargic earth.

It would be worth ascertaining, whether the crimson-coloured dots
-and streaks in the lithomargic earth be owing to the decomposition
of the numerous garnets contained in the original rock. Ihave had
opportunities, more than once, to remark, that in those localities where
the sienitic granite abounds with garnets, the lithomargic earth,
resulting from its decomposition, has the crimson coloured dots similar
to those in the undecomposed rock (No. 14). I have made the same
observation in the decomposed gneiss in the Northern Circars, where
it abounds with this mineral.

A question naturally presents itself after the above remarks, regard-
ing the decomposition of the granite, and hornblende rock of the
Neilgherries. The same identical rocks are found in many parts of
the Peninsula, particularly along the chain of the eastern ghats ; and
yet their decomposition does not give rise to the same results. As I
have visited but very few localities in India where these rocks prevail,
I cannot positively say whether or not the result of their decompo-
sition in both localities be the same*. But, this is certain, that
the causes, which may have contributed to decomposition in one place,
do not exist in the other: of that class are cold, damp, frost, eleva-
vation, &c., which are not found in the low lands. Besides, is this
decomposition the effect of existing causes, or the consequence of
time and revolutions gone by ?

Here I must remark, that in some localities, such as near the bund
of the lake, on the road below the church, above the bazar, &c. the
red earth assumes the composition, texture, and appearance of real
lithomarge.

* Doctor Hryne says, ‘‘a red soil prevails where sienite forms the apparent
ground rock.”’—Tracts Historical and Statistical on India, page 349.

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 421

As I have proposed to abstain from speculations, and from far-
fetched theories, I shall not enter into any hypothesis respecting the
causes of this decomposition. It is enough to have noted a geologi-
cal fact, which requires but simple inspection to be certain of its
existence. I shall therefore proceed to describe some minerals, which
are found imbedded in the red earth; some of which might prove
very useful and advantageous in the arts. Such is the porcelain earth,
found in enormous beds, and of the greatest purity, in this locality.

This mineral is evidently derived (as it is almost in all places
where it is found in Europe) from the decomposition of the pegmatite
or graphic granite, which is chiefly met with in primitive districts. As
this rock does not appear to be common on the Neilgherries, I found
it difficult, at first, to account.fer the origin of the numerous and thick
beds of porcelain clay. It was after visiting and examining the summits
of some of the highest hills, that I found a variety of pegmatite form-
ing many of the most prominent rocks on them. Such are the
summits of Dodabetta, Elk Hill, Kaiti pass, some of the peaks of
the Kindas, and probably many other places which I did not visit.

It is undoubtedly to some of the erratic blocks and rolled masses of
this rock, or to the decomposition of those beds of pegmatite, into
which the true granite of the high hills seems to pass, that the
porcelain earth is owing. Of these blocks, still in an undecomposed
state, we see many in the valley of Kaiti derived, in all probability,
from the summit of Dodabetta, or from that of the rock of Kaiti,
where the pegmatite is seen in situ. _

By comparing a piece of this porcelain earth, just taken out of the
bed, with a piece of the hard pegmatite rock, one cannot but be
convinced of their being the same rock; the one in a hard, the
others, in a decomposed state. (No. 15.) The pieces of the crystalline
smoky quartz (which is the only other mineral entering in the
composition of the pegmatite, besides felspar) are still visible in the
same situation, as when the rock had not undergone decomposition,
having become more brittle, and easy of disintegration.

The porcelain earth is not to be confounded with that which results
from the decomposition of the pure felspar veins, so frequently seen in
the sienitic granite. By simply looking at both specimens, the differ-
ence is discovered (No. 16). The latter has no sandy particles in its
composition, such as are found in the other, which by such addition is
better adapted for the manufacture of pottery, in which silicious
sand is a necessary ingredient.

I speak with some hesitation regarding a mineral I found only in
one place on the Neilgherries, and I am doubtful whether it exists in

or

422 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. [Aue.

any quantity in those hills. It is a brown ferruginous clay, very
closely resembling amber, particularly that kind which is exported
from the Island of Cyprus (No. 17). I found it between two large
blocks of decomposing sienitic granite, or rather hornblende rock,
with garnets, close to the bund of the lake.

The next rocks to be described are two metallic ores, in all
probability, originally imbedded, as veins, in the rock: which last
being now decomposed, they are left imbedded in the lithomargic
earth: indeed, one of these ores is still seen as a vein, in the unde-
composed rock.

The first is the magnetic iron ore, so common in many parts
of India, and which, besides the metal, contains variable proportions
of quartz (No. 18). The places where I have met with this iron
ore are marked in the map: in some of them the ore is imbedded in
the lithomargic earth, while in others it is like a vein in the rock.
I saw it in this last position in the road descending to Kaiti valley,
where the metal is very little in quantity, compared with the granular
quartz, which in some parts of the vein predominates to the almost
entire exclusion of the metal (No. 19).

The two places on the Neilgherries, where I have seen this ore
very rich in metal, are, one near the village of Vartsigiri (Vrota-
gherry), and the other close to, and traversing, the Lake of Oota-
camund in two places. The specimen from Vartsigiri (No. 20)
is very compact and rich in metal. I took it from a large block, probably
the outgoings of a thick bed at the southern extremity of the valley,
at the other end of which the village stands.

Generally speaking, the quartz is lamellar, very rarely granular,
and it seems to alternate with the metal in parallel lamine. The
appearance, composition, and proportion of the ingredients of this
magnetic iron ore are very different in different places ; nay, in the
same vein. For instance, the vein seen just below the building
called Gradation Hall, between the road, and the margin of the lake,
in its N. E. extremity, has a compact, metallic structure, highly
magnetic, with hardly any quartz (No. 21): a few yards to the south-
west, the vein contains a good deal of quartz; the metal is more
oxidated, although maintaining still its magnetic powers (No. 22)e
Following the vein in the same direction, we see it appear in the
opposite side of the lake, in the banks of the road, which goes round
and close to the lake. There the ore has lost a good deal of its
quartz; the iron is more oxidated, and the rock assumes a kind of
columnar structure (No. 23). This is the appearance of the vein in
the section for the road. But the out-croppings of the vein at the

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 423

top of the same hillock are compact, scabrous, and of a slight cellular
texture (No. 24). Going on always S. W., we see the same vein
continued over the next hill, close to the road going to the Kundas ;
and so much divested of iron, that it resembles a friable stratified sand-
stone, the quartz being granular (No. 25).

It is in this kind of magnetic iron ore, particularly in the blocks
below Gradation Hall, that I remarked on the quartz lamine, small
brilliant, gold-coloured specks, precisely similar to those seen in the
auriferous quartz veins in the rocks of the Malabar coasts, specimens
of which have been deposited by my friend Colonel Cunien in your
museum. Does this appearance indicate the existence of particles of
gold in this ore? We know that in America, gold is occasionally
found in the siderocriste, which is a species of quartz iron ore, like
the one just described*.

It is the belief of some people, that owing to the similarity of the
rocks, of the detritus, and of the quartz veins, of the Malabar
coast, and of these hills, gold may be found in this last, as well as in
the former. The specimen of the earth I send is taken (No. 26)
from an excavation made, some years ago, by an officer, who had
been employed on the Malabar coast, for the purpose of ascertaining
the existence of gold in the detritus of that coast. It is said that he
found gold in the earth dug up on the side of one of the hills of the
Dodabetta group, facing the cantonmentf.

Before concluding my observations regarding this magnetic iron ore,
I must repeat what I said in the beginning; that it is found in thick
beds, evidently imbedded either in the original rock, or, which comes
to the same thing, in the lithomargic earth, the result of its decom-
position.

Iron ores are socommon on these hills, independently of the oxides
of that metal contained in the minerals forming the rock, that many
springs of water are of the chalybeate class}.

* The specimen of Colonel CuLLEeN is marked ‘ auriferous quartz, stratified :
Nelli Allum, Malabar.’’ The same gentleman sent to your museum another
specimen, which he calls ‘‘ auriferous micaschist,’’ which contains the same
kind of shining, gold-coloured specks.

+ The sand which results from the desintegration of this species of iron ore is
very nearly similar to what is called titaniferous sand.—Does any menaccanite
exist in this sand? The rock in which this ore is contained, appears to be similar
to that which is seen in Cornwall, from which the sand containing that new
mineral is derived. Professor SepGwick informs Mr. pe LA Becue, that the
menaccanite of Cornwall is derived from the decomposition of a hornblende
rock, composed of hornblende and felspar.— Geological Manual,

} Barxie’s Observations on the Neilgherries, page 14.

312

424 Geoloyical Skeich of the Neilgherries. [Ave,

The next species of iron ore on the Neilgherries is the hematitic,
forming immense beds, and sometimes whole hillocks, among the
hornblende rocks, and sienitic granite. In all the places where it is
found, large blocks of this ore are seen projecting through the soil,
having a scabrous, cellular, and sometimes cavernous appearance at
the surface.

As this rock resembles very much the laterite of this part of India,
I shall be more particular in describing its geological position and
association, in order that it might be seen whether it ought to be
classed with the laterite of the low lands, or among the iron ores
found in many other parts, associated and in veins, in primitive dis-
tricts.

Before entering into the description of this rock, I must remark,
once for all, that the position and association of the rocks on the
Neilgherries is not so easily ascertained, and clearly seen, as in other
localities of India, on account of the enormously thick stratum of red
earth and vegetable soil, which cover uniformly the whole plateau. So
that we are often reduced to the necessity of judging of the nature of
the rock composing the hills, by the few projecting masses at the top,
or on its declivities.

It is for this reason, that Iam unable to say positively whether the
rock [am going to describe be overlying, or one of those metalic veins
which traverse the original rock; although I have more than one
reason to surmise, that the last is the position of this ferruginous ore
on the Neilgherries.

All I have been able to ascertain regarding this ore, may be detailed
by describing one or two of the localities, where this formation is
seen developed in a more marked manner than any where else on the
Neilgherries.

The most extensive formation of this hemalitic iron ore is seen on
both sides of what I shall call Scotland Valley*. It is the valley
through which the superfluous waters from the lake discharge them-
selves into the Moyar river. This valley runs nearly E. and W. above
two hundred yards below the bund of the lake ; close to the left bank
of the stream, we see a large block of compact iron ore jutting through
the soil (No. 27). Proceeding westward along the right bank of the
torrent, for about a quarter of a mile, we come to a place where the
stream is joined by another flowing from the S.W. On both sides
of this river (until we come to this junction), the projecting rocks,

.* Sir Freprricx Apa, our present Governor, while on the hills, used to call

it by that name, on account of a resemblance he saw in it to some place in
Scotland. : ; »

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherrics. 425

which in some places make up knolls and hillocks, are of the usual
sienitic granite, with a good deal of hornblende and a few garnets.

On fording the riyer, at the place of junction, we see on the
opposite bank all the projecting rocks to have totally changed their
character; they are now cellular, hematitic iron ore, rich in metal
(No. 28). That rock is seen protruding through the soil of this
and of the next hill (W). Some of the enclosures for cattle on the
declivities of this hill are constructed with large masses of the
cellular iron ore, which however in some of them has a very compact
structure (No, 29).

The highest of the two hills appears to be entirely formed of this
rock, of which huge masses are seen in the intervening ravine.
On the summit of the highest hill, the rock assumes a pudding-stone-
like structure, being a hard conglomerate of numerous rounded pieces
of ferruginous clay iron ore, strongly agglutinated together by a
clayey cement (No. 30). A prodigious number of these rounded
pebbles are scattered about, covering nearly the whole of the summit
of the hill (No. 31). Many of the hard blocks of this conglomerate
resemble very much (if they are not identical with) the laterite of
the low lands of India.

Descending from the summit, along the western declivity of the
hill (facing Pinnapal Hill), and only a few yards from the top,
the rock insensibly changes its appearance and structure. It be-
comes by degrees more compact, and loses its cellular structure ;
in short, it assumes the compact appearance of common hzmatitic iron
ore (No. 32), very rich in iron; and in this state it continues to the
foot of the hill on that side, where some of the projecting masses
of this iron ore are flanked by others of sienitic granite, or rather
hornblende rock.

These two hills, on the N. E. side, and at their foot, close to the
stream, are skirted by immense masses of sienitic granite, through
which the waters of the river are heard roaring ; except at one place,
at the foot of the high hill, where the river is forded to go towards
the new road from Nandiwatam to Ootacamund. In that place the
iron ore bed crosses the stream; forms numerous projecting masses
on the slope of the opposite hill, having aN. E. direction ; crosses the
road of Nandiwatam, and terminates in the summit of the hillock
to the N. E. of the road; beyond the latter place, this rock cannot
be traced.

Now this filon of iron ore, after crossing the stream of Scotland
Valley, is evidently and clearly seen flanked on both sides by sienitic
granite, jutting in large blocks through the soil, in the very same way

426 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. [Aue.

as the masses of the iron ore shoot up; and therefore, it is fair to
conclude, that the last do not overlie the former.

I must here call the attention of the reader,to the almost imper-
ceptible transition of the cavernous tubular kind of ferruginous con-
glomerate, into the uniformly compact hematitic iron ore of this
hill: an appearance that I had an opportunity of observing also in
the Northern Circars at Pandagaram, near Samalkatah, where the
compact, slaty hematitic iron ore is seen passing into a conglomerate
very much like laterite (Nos. 33 and 34).

Another view of the hzmatitic ore is obtained below the bluff rocks
of the summit of Dodabetta, beyond the villages of Manta, close to
the road, which descends from the hollow between Kaiti rock and
Dodabetta. Coming towards Ootacamund, we see huge masses of ore
protruding through the soil (No. 35). It is scabrous and cellular, but
not perforated by tubular sinuosities like the laterite. Itis similar to
some of the masses of the same ore on the declivities of the hills of
Scotland Valley. This vein has but a few yards’ thickness, having a
N. and S. direction. On both sides of, and nearly in contact with
the blocks of ore are seen masses of sienitic porphyry, or rather
hornblende porphyry, containing some garnets (No. 36), which, as we
proceed towards the villages of Mantda, lose the garnets, and become
hornblende rock (No. 37).

The two hillocks S. E., and close to the lake, and on which Cluny
and South Down houses are built, are chiefly composed of the same
iron ore. The sections in these declivities, on account of the road which
goes round the lake, show the ore decomposed into a red clayey
earth, imbedded in the lithomargic earth, resulting, as we have seen,
from the decomposition of the original sienitic rock.

The same ore is seen near the summit of Dodabetta, on the hill before
descending into the Elephant Valley, and in other localities, which it
would be superfluous to describe, after having detailed the principal
features of those places where it most abounds. I must, however,
here recall to the memory of the reader what | have said, speaking of
the detritus below the vegetable earth. It is in the localities, which
abound with this iron ore, that the detritus is composed of ferruginous
rounded pebbles, occasionally cemented together into a hard con-
glomerate, like oolitic iron ore, by a clayey paste.

The hematitic iron ore seems to contain some felspar, which in this
rock is decomposed into a yellowish clay, lining some of the cavities
in the rock: but I never found any quartz in it.

Before concluding these details regarding this iron ore, I will point
out some particularities, in which (notwithstanding its similarity in

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 427

appearance) it seems to differ from the laterite of the other parts of
India, that I have had an opportunity of examining. The rock of
the Neilgherries is by no means so cavernous, and has not so many
tubular sinuosities as the laterite of the Carnatic, Northern Circars,
&c.; it seems also to be richer in metal, and, what appears to
constitute a marked difference, it is entirely divested of any quartz, or
sandy particles, which abound so much in the laterite of other places.
Besides, we are told by Doctor Heyrnz, that in the laterite of the Red
Hills, Nellore, &c. a marl or carbonate of lime is occasionally one of
the ingredients; no traces of this carbonate are found in the stone of
the Neilgherries*.

That this rock of the Neilgherries is to be classed with hzmatitic
iron ore, rather than with the true Indian laterite (an overlying rock),
is very probable, considering that rocks similar in appearance to it are
found in Europe, while the last is peculiar to Indiaf.

It is said of the Indian laterite, that it is associated occasionally with
trap. Onthe Neilgherries, basaltic dykes are not rare, yet I never
saw what Voysry remarked in other parts of India, viz. the passage
of basalt into wacke, and into iron clay, (by this last name, meaning
laterite ;) another additional difference between the two rocks.

Hitherto no organic remains have been found in this rock on the
Neilgherries, which appears also to have been the case with the laterite
of the other parts of the peninsula.

I am not positive regarding the existence of manganese on these
hills: my friend Colonel CunueEn says, that it is found mixed in the
iron ore near the lake; and I found a straggling piece of this ore in the
valley of Kaiti (No. 38), which I have not analysed, but which has
all the external characters of one.

The lowest visible rock of the Neilgherries is of the primitive un-
stratified class, including true granite, pegmatite, sienitic granite, and
hornblende rock : sienitic gneiss, and hornblende slate are occasionally
seen, but they belong more to the outskirts of the hills than to the
group itself, Besides these rocks, we find granitelle, and a rock
composed of four minerals, felspar, hornblende, garnets, and quartz.

True granite, composed of felspar, quartz and mica, is not of rare
occurrence; it frequently occupies the summits of the highest hills:
thus it is seen in someof the Kinda range, and of the Dodabetta group ;

* Tracts.

+ If my memory serves me right, I think I saw in your museum a specimen
marked *‘ black, brown, solid and perforated iron ore, from Poetzin Upper Lusatia,"’
which appears to me similar to the Neilgherries hematitic, cavernous iron ore.

t No. 38 is decidedly an ore of manganese.—Eb.

428 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. {Aua.

I never saw it, except in the form of erratic blocks, in the low valleys
(No. 39). In those places it has the usual appearance of immense
masses split both by vertical and by horizontal fissures, into columnar
or prismatic figures; they, however, no where assume the tor-like
appearance so common in the granitic hills in other parts of India.
The granite occasionally is of a dull, yellowish brown colour, owing
to the felspar, which assumes that tint, resembling in that state the
feuille morte of the French. Doctor Harpy has remarked the same
change of colour in the granite of Mewar.

The other species of granite, found always associated with the former,
is the pegmatite (No. 40), a rock composed of only two minerals,
felspar and quartz. The places where I have found this rock in situ
are marked in the map: itis a variety of the graphic granite ; in aspect
very different from the same rock found in other parts of Southern
India, in which the quartz is regularly crystallized, and the felspar in
long slender crystals, of a pale flesh colour.

In the variety of this rock on the Neilgherries, the felspar is milk-
white, lamellar; but not in regular prismatic crystals: the quartz is
occasionally of a smoky colour or bluish; and in angular pieces, this
colour is sometimes so deep as to appear nearly black. In some of the
masses are occasionally seen a few garnets, or a little hornblende ;
but in general, the rock is exclusively composed of the two minerals,
felspar and quartz*.

Of this rock some erratic blocks are seen in the valleys, at the foot
of those hills, the summits of which contain it in situ: this is the case
in the Kaiti valley, whither many of these boulders have been pro-
bably hurled down either from the summit of Dodabetta, or from the
Kaiti peak, where pegmatite is found.

It is undoubtedly from the decomposition of these masses, that the
porcelain earth described in the beginning of this sketch, arises.
By comparing the specimens of the one with those of the other, the
identity of the two is established.

The sienitic granite varies in the proportion of its component
minerals, and therefore in appearance ; sometimes approaching diabase
(primitive greenstone), and at others, granite (No. 414). It almost
always contains garnets as one of the minerals composing it; and
when this mineral is abundant in the rock, the quartz diminishes in
proportion. In the Dodabetta group, I have remarked in some

* This species of granite seems to be very common in many parts of India,
—Dr. Harpy appears to describe it in many localities, in his sketch of the

Geology of Central India. Many of the blocks jutting up in the plain between
Palaveram and Madras, such as that near the Race Course, are all pegmatite.

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 499

places the garnets, instead of being either amorphous, or in angular
crystallized pieces, assume the granular form, resembling colophonite ;
in which case, the rock containing it assumes a stratified appearance
(No. 41).

‘The colophonite is composed of granular garnets, greenish horn-
blende, a little felspar, and less quartz. I have seen in your museum a
specimen sent by Srruve from Norway, very much like the specimen I
now send. The geological position of this rock, which I have found
in one or two localities only, is the following: It is to be seen clear-
ly in the ravine just above the high road going to Kanar, and close
to the public bungalow of Kaiti. Two huge masses of a black-looking
unstratified rock are seen overlying three strata of a different rock.
The upper and unstratified mass isa hornblende porphyry, which
passes into sienitic granite. [tis very nearly similar to the rock of the
same composition I have mentioned as flanking the hzematitic iron
ore, behind Mantu village (No. 42). I have found precisely the same
rock overlying the sienitic porphyry of the Garabunda pass, in the
Northern Circars. its hornblende is shining and lamellar, and is the
most abundant of the component minerals ; the garnets appear to be
surrounded by a white powdery opaque felspar, they themselves half
decomposed. Below this half-rounded mass is a stratum of a felspar
rock, with a very little quartz and hornblende decomposing (No. 43).
The thickness of this stratum, which is uniform, does not exceed a
few inches; another, but thicker stratum of a granitic rock, lies under,
and conformable to the above, being composed of reddish felspar, some
garnets, little quartz, and mica; the passage from one rock to the other
is sudden, decided, and well marked. Under this, and conformable
to it, is a stratum of a rock almost entirely composed of hornblende
and granular garnets: this is the lowest of the rocks seen; it be-
comes harder as it descends, when it assumes the appearance of colo-
phonitic hornblende rock.

This lower rock appears stratified, and besides the seams of strati-
fication, it has some fissures, perpendicular to them; so dividing
the stone into prismatic portions. On account of the thick stratum
of soil at the foot of the rock, I could not ascertain whether the
last-mentioned was the lowermost rock. I must here remark, that
the appearance of the two rocks immediately under the hornblende
porphyry was that of a decomposing stone, as if from the action of
fire.

The rock which prevails in the Kaiti range, as well as in other
places, is the one which abounds both with hornblende and amor-
phous garnets. These last sometimes are of a large size, and not

3K

430 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. [Aue.

dispersed through the rock, but, as it were, in nests (No. 44). This
rock is very like the specimen in your museum from Norway, mark-
ed ‘“‘ large garnets in hornblende.’’ Indeed, I think that there is
great analogy between the sienite zirconienne of Norway and this
rock of the Neilgherries (No. 45). I remarked in one place of the
Dodabetta group some veins containing quartz and garnets ; the last
in the granular or resinitic form (No. 46).

Before dismissing the subject of the hornblende rock, I must
remark, that although this primitive greenstone is occasionally seen
on the summit of some hills, in general it occupies the declivities or
the lowest parts of them; and it often assumes a brilliant, laminar
crystallization, being then exclusively formed of hornblende (No. 47).

I have seen it passing into hornblende slate at the foot of the
Neilgherries, at the bottom of the Kuaniur pass. Here its strata
dip to the east, and I am informed, that the same stratified rock is
found at the foot of the same group of hills, to the west, the strata
in that place dipping west. It is in those places that this rock occa-
sionally passes into sienitic gneiss.

These are all the rocks I have met on the Neilgherries, of which
their extensive plateau is formed, and the relative position of which
can often only be surmised, on account of the thick covering of soil,
and of red earth, which conceals the rock generally.

I must in the last place notice the numerous basaltic dykes which
burst up through all these rocks indiscriminately, without however
overlying them, except in one situation ; and even there the basalt only
forms a small ridge, flanked by the fundamental rock.

I shall describe briefly those places where I have had opportunity
of examining this rock; and first, that in the Kant pass. Not more
than a mile from the bridge down the pass, and just below the village
of Kinir, in the road, many of the blocks which have been blasted,
are traversed by a dyke of basalt. In the little ravine close to the
road, the dyke is seen zm situ through the masses of granite in the
jungle. This dyke divides in two or three branches, inclosing betwixt
them the granite; then it is seen continuing in a north direction, till
close to the huts of the village. The projecting masses through the soil
indicate the direction of the thick dyke, which in a place near the road
is divided in well marked prisms above the granite (No. 48).

This basalt is very compact; has a dull, even fracture; but in one
portion of the dyke, I had the opportunity of observing, that the
part which was in contact with the granite had the appearance of a
crystalline hornblende, which passed into compact hard basalt to-
wards the centre of the dyke. I also remarked, that where the dyke-

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 431

was in contact with the granite, the basalt was projecting in a small
ridge, which was divided into small prisms, as if the consequence
of sudden refrigeration, and subsequent contraction (No. 49). The
masses under the village, exfoliate into concentric laminz, in which
are some needle-shaped shining crystals, probably of augite (No. 50).

Another enormous dyke of this rock is seen inthe chain of hills
which connects Dodabetta with Kaiti pass. The summit of the
hill, which is between those two mountains, is formed of basalt
in huge masses, some of which affect the prismatic figure. In
general the large blocks are not so compact as the thin ramifications
of the dyke traversing the rock, but the hornblende in the former is
nearly granular and shining, somewhat approaching primary green-
stone.

On the eastern and western slopes of this little ridge, the rock,
of which the hill seems formed, is seen in huge projecting masses, so
that the basalt does not appear to overlie the rock, but to have burst
through it, vertically, in the centre of the ridge.

Going along the ridge from N.to S. after passing a little hollow,
we ascend the hill, the summit of which is basaltic. The first intimation
we have of the existence of this rock, is seeing many of the blocks of
pegmatite traversed in all directions by a reticulated infiltration of
basaltic matter (No. 51). On looking at the surface of the blocks
level with the soil, we see it divided in irregular portions by the
ramifications of the dyke.

Examining some of these masses, we see evidently that, in many of
them, the thickness of the dyke diminishes as it proceeds upwardly,
and therefore showing the injection of the basalt to have taken place
from below. The following appearance exhibited by one of the
blocks, shows clearly this direction of the basalt. It is a large mass
of pegmatite exfoliating in thick lamin. Portions of one of these had
been removed, either by disintegration or otherwise; the remainder
(perhaps a foot thick,) was still overlying the nucleus of the rock,
which was nearly level with the soil. A basaltic dyke, an inch thick,
was observed in the nucleus of the rock, which had been denuded
of a portion of the lamine ; but this dyke did not penetrate into the
upper remaining portion of the laminz, which was incumbent on it.
This dyke continued evidently under the remaining portion of this
laminz in the nucleus of the rock.

Going from Ootacamund towards Nundiwatum, along the new
road, after about three miles, we meet with two basaltic dykes close
to the road.

The first is seen near a small stream, like a ledge projecting at an

3K 2

432 Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. fAte.

angle with the horizon, and the basset of which is hardly a foot above
the soil. Its dip is west ; its direction nearly N. and §S.; and it is seen
continued along the declivity of the hill for some hundred yards.
It is traversed by fissures in different directions, giving the pieces a
prismatic appearance. Proceeding N. we see in the next hill another
and thicker dyke, with precisely the same direction as the former.

The basalt in this place traverses sienitic granite, and it is seen
clearly on the side of the road. The pieces of all shapes, as prisms,
eubes, rhombs, are strewed below the newly cut road. Above the
road, the projecting masses of sienitic granite are traversed by innu-
merable ramifications of the dyke, enclosing between them pieces
and masses of the fundamental rock (No. 52).

The same observation made when speaking of the Kaiti dyke, is
also applicable to this: the small basaltic veins have a compact, and
dull texture, while the body of the dyke itself has a granular-like
structure, and somewhat shining (No. 53).

In some of the Kinda mountains, as that of the Avalache, I also
noticed some of these basaltic dykes ; and judging from the numerous
rounded blocks and pieces of basalt seen in the bed, and in the
banks of the river, which descends from the hills N. of the Avalache,
basalt must be very common in that group.

Basaltic dykes are not rare in those places, which I have had an
opportunity of visiting in the plains of India. Ihave seen them
through granite and gneiss in Mysore; through porphyry, near the
erratic hill of Adamanacotta; through hornblende slate, near Motti-
pollium ; through porphyry, near Garabunda (Northern Circars), and
in many other places. Are these dykes the fissures through which the
enormous mass of trap, overlying most of the rocks of the peninsula,
burst up? and which, subsequent events and revolutions having re-
moved, the vents only through which it was forced up remain to
be seen?

It is a well-ascertained fact that the structure, if not the nature, of
rocks in contact with the basaltic dykes, is often greatly changed or
modified. I saw nothing of this alteration in the rocks close to the
dykes I have been describing. The specimen I send, shews no other
change, except a slight diminution of cohesion among the composing
minerals, and that not in a very marked manner, nor in every locality.

The above described are the rocks I had an opportunity of examin-
ing on the Neilgherries, having met none of the secondary, and much
less of the tertiary class. It would appear from this, that the eleva-
tion of this plateau, and probably of the whole chain of the western

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 433

ghats of which the Neilgherries are the southern termination, hap-
pened at a period long anterior to the existence of life on our planet.

It is for this reason that I think Humsoxpt’s opinion not supported
by facts, when he says, ‘‘ the chain of the Ural, the Baloor tag, the
ghats of the Malabar Coast, and the Vringckan are probably more
modern than the ‘‘ Chains of the Himalaya, and the Teenckan*. We
know, that in the Himalaya, at several thousand feet elevation, and on
the declivities of the highest ridges themselves, organic remains have
been found in limestone, which seems of the age of the carboniferous
group.

The nummulitic limestone of Chira Punji, and the conglomerate
rock, which forms the Deria Dun at the foot of the Himalaya, appear
to assimilate those mountains to the Alpst. Therefore the Himalaya
must have been heaved up at a period posterior to that when the
Western ghats were elevated: these last containing not a trace of
organic remains in the rocks which form them, while the former
abound in them.

Eviz pe Braumont admits the greater antiquity of the Malabar
ghats over the Himalaya chain; but he conjectures, by the direction
of the ghats being parallel to the Pyrenese-Appenin system, that
they may probably belong tv his sixth revolution of the surface of
the globe. The passage, in which he expresses this perplexity, is
worth transcribing, to show of what importance it is to establish the
association, and the geological position of the laterite.

«« Vouloir suivre ce systéme jusque dans |’ Inde paraitrait peut-étre
abuser de la faculté des rapprochemens: cependant je crois devoir
faire remarquer que la chaine des gates sur la cdte du Malabar semble
se cohordonner 4 la direction, dont je m’ occupe. La grande faille, a
laquelle parait di l’escarpement occidental des gates, en élevant le
plateau du pays des Maharattes, du Deccan, du Carnatic a élevé du
méme tems, le grand depét argille-ferrugineux de laterite, qui forme
les points plus élévés de ce plateau, ainsi que le montre la coupe des
gates donnée par M. Curistiz. II est a regretter que ce depot de la-
terite, qui couvre dans|’ Inde de si vastes étendues, n’aie, jusqu’a pre-
sent, offert aucun fossile, et ne puisse étre rapporté avec certitude a
aucun étage geologique déterminé: mais on peut toujours remarquer que

* Edinburgh Philosophical Journal, October to January, 1832, HumBoxipT on

the Mountain Chains—Volcanos of Central Asia.
+ A writer in the Bulletin des Sciences Naturelles, concludes that the Dehra

Dun is analogous in formation to the Molasse of the Alps ; and'Doctor FaLconrr
is of the same opinion.— Der La Brcue, Geological Manual.

434 Geological Sketch of thé Neilgherries. [Ave,

tant qu’on n’ aura pas indiqué d’ autre chaine* qui produisse sur la
laterite l’effet mentionné cidessus, tout conduit 4 voir dans les gates
la chaine la plus récente de la presqu’ile occidentale de |’ Inde, dont elle
est en meme tems le trait geometrique le plus prononcé!”’

Then he says in a note, that the Himalaya are more recent than the
ghats, and the Andes more recent than the Allaghanys of America.

We see, by what Beaumont says, that he suspects the laterite to be
the equivalent of those rocks deposited during the period that inter-
vened between the deposition of the chalk, and the tertiary beds.
But fossil remains being the only sure guide in determining the ages
of these formations, and none hitherto having been found in the
laterite, the question must still remain sub judice. Besides, we must
remark here en passant, that the rocks of that epoch in Europe are
all stratified, which is not the case with the laterite.

Before concluding this sketch of the geology of the Neilgherries,
we must not pass unnoticed the fact of the absence of all sorts of
calcareous formation. Even the widely spread kankar is not met
with on the Neilgherries, although we find this travertinic deposit
at the very foot of those hills, near Mutipolium (No. 54).

The total absence of stratified rocks, and of calcareous formations,
in this group, seems an additional proof of the remote period of its
elevation. The only stratified rock, which appears to have been
deposited near the place, through which this plateau was heaved up,
is the hornblende slate, which is seen both on the east and on the
west sides of the hills, being highly inclined, and having an opposite
dip: the group serving as the centre of this anticlinal line.

On looking at the map, we see how the numerous valleys and
ravines have a different, and often an opposite, direction. Except three
or four of them, which diverge in opposite directions from a central
point (Dodabetta), the others are so irregular, that it is impossible to
refer them to one and the same cause. They certainly do not belong
to the class of valleys of denudation, much less to that of corrosion
by the streams: the volume of their waters being so very insignificant
and divested of pebbly or sandy detritus, which so much hastens the
corrosion of the rock, through which the rivers pass. They probably
are the original consequence of the elevating force, which either irre-

* ‘With regard to this part of this passage, to show that there are other
chains, having different direction from the Malabar ghats, on the summits of
which we see the laterite as an overlying rock, we may quote some of the branches
of the Vindiya range, where the laterite overlays either basalt or sandstone; and
also many sandstone hills on the Northern Circars: and yet the Vindiya Chain has
a different direction from the Malabar ghats.

1835. Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 435

gularly applied to the different points of the area, or the mass itself,
yielding irregularly in the different situations, gave rise to the inequa-
lity of the whole surface of these hills.

To conclude, therefore, it seems that the granitic rocks, which
occupy the highest hills of this group, forced their way, and were
heaved up through the hornblende slate, which was in consequence
distorted and lifted up, as it is seen in the outskirts of the plateau,
and in some of the low situations among the hills themselves, (the
valley S. and close to Kotagherry ;) we must also conclude, that the
decomposition of the rock forming the red earth, and the detritus,
must have happened at a period anterior to the existence of organic
bodies; no remains of which have hitherto been found in them.

Specimens from the Northern Circars.

The specimens (from No. II. to No. IX,) are from the hillock near
Puddapungali; a place not far from Yornagorium, and about five
miles from, and south of, Rajahmundry.

After traversing the alluvial plains of Ellore, the road passes near
a knoll, the rocks of which are very interesting in a geological point
of view.

Before reaching the foot of the little knoll in the plain, and in the
nullahs, are seen numerous pieces and blocks of a hard whitish lime-
stone, spotted in many places with numerous small black specks.
This limestone is compact, the fracture glimmering on account of the
many grains of calespar which enter into its composition.

In the deep nullahs, in the plain, and at the foot of the hillock
along the road, we see a conglomerate sandstone, which appears to be
the lowest visible rock in this place. Ascending the gentle slope
of the knoll, we come upon many masses of wacke, which is decom-
posing in thick concentric layers. Proceeding a little higher we
meet with a thick bed of limestone, similar to the pieces scattered
about on the plain.

This limestone abounds with fossil shells, which are clearly and
better defined in the upper than in the lower portion of it, where the
rock assumes a tufaceous consistence, friable, and almost approach-
ing the appearance of tertiary limestone. The shells are very numer-
ous in this upper stratum ; almost the whole rock results from their
assemblage ; they appear to be chiefly bivalves, with a few univalves.
Many of the shells have disappeared, their impressions only remaining ;
but the oysters which abound in this stratum are in excellent pre-
servation, and easily characterized.

This stratum of limestone, the basset of which is only visible in

436 Geolegical Sketch of the Neilyherrics. [Aue.

the slope of the hillock, has a W. and E. direction. It is overlaid
by a thick mass of basalt, which caps the whole hillock. In some
places, where this basalt lies immediately over the wacke, this last is
converted into jasper. Huge masses of basalt are strewed on
the top of the knoll, which forms a kind of table-land extending
eastward: some of these blocks in their upper surface assume an
amygdaloid structure, the cavities being filled with calcspar.

I could not in that locality see whether the lower compact limestone
was or was not stratified. The more superficial and loose blocks, scat-
tered about on the soil, had no appearance of stratification.

Judging from the appearance of the whole of those hillocks which
stretch from N. W. to 8. E. in the neighbourhood, they seem to
have the same geological features as the one just described. Indeed,
my friend Colonel Cunuen, with whom I was examining this knoll,
told me, that in some of the neighbouring hills, the position of the
limestone and of the basalt is seen more clearly,on account of the
abruptness of some of their sides, and the deep ravines which
intersect them in every direction, so shewing the order of superposi-
tion in the four rocks; which is the following: conglomerate red
sandstone supporting the wacke, overlaid by limestone, which is
covered by basalt*.

The specimens marked X. and XI. are from the diamond mines at
Mallavelly, near Ellore ; they appear similar to the alluvial detritus in
other localities in India, where this gem is found. The kankar
accompanies the deposit in the same way as every where else.

No. XX. is the gneiss of which the hillock near the village of
Carvera, close to Pundy, is found. In it the Cleavelandite replaces
the laminar felspar, and is seen not only disseminated through the
substance of the rock, but forming small strata by itself in long
acicular crystalst. It is associated, in this reck, with a prodigious
number of amorphous garnets, of which some of the strata appear
entirely formed.

The porphyry, No. XII., is from the hills which form the northern
boundary of the Garabunda pags, going from Kimidy, Garabunda,
Cassibogah, to Pandy.

The hills to the south, and close to the pass itself, are sienitic
granite, (No. XXXIII. ;) while those beyond the porphyric hills to the
N., towards the high hill of Mehendry, seem to be formed of that

*The trap near Sagur, described by Captain FRANKLIN, appears to have the
same association of rocks as the one of which I send specimens.—Asiatic Re-
searches, vol. xviii. Geology of a portion of Bundelkhand, &c., page 30.

t+ Is this the Pindyray of the Telingas, mentioned by Doctor Herne in his
Tracts, page 283?

1835.] Geological Sketch of the Neilgherries. 437

variety of gneiss abounding with albite, the continuation of which
is seen N. and near Pundy.

These porphyric hills, therefore, may be considered as the out-goings
of an enormous dyke of porphyry, which burst through the hills, hav-
ing the same direction with them, that is N. E, to S. W.; their
appearance is that of huge masses ofa black looking unstratified rock ;
in many places completely divested of any sort of vegetation, particu-
larly in those hillocks, which like the one called Chittakinda, rise
in abrupt, vertical cliffs, which seen within a moderate distance might
be taken for basaltic rock.

The porphyry exfoliates in thick concentric lamine, the more
depending portions of which falling off, leave the upper in immense
tabular masses, or cubic blocks, perched on the upper part, and some-
times on the declivity of the hill: this porphyry has a good deal of
hornblende in its composition, sometimes so much, as to become horn-
blende prophyry.

In more than one of these masses of porphyry, I remarked thick
veins or nests of a granitic rock, or rather gneiss, with pieces of
sienitic granite imbedded in it. The crystals of felspar in this por-
phyry are well defined, many of them two or three inches long, and
of a foliated structure. This porphyry seems, as I[ have said, to
extend as far as near the sea-shore at Pundy. Some huge masses of
it are seen jutting through the soil about a mile north of the village
of Carvera, flanked by the gneiss containing ablite and garnets.

I have put up many specimens of laterite from different localities,
by which may be clearly perceived the distinction between the original
rock and the conglomerate bearing the same name; but which _evi-
dently arises from the conglutination of the detritus of the former.
This appears to be the case with the laterite in some places of the
plains of the Carnatic.

The specimens (No. XXIII. to XXVI.) are from the hillocks, on
which the fort of Puddayaram (near Samalcottah) is built. The
position of the visible rocks in this place is the following: the
ferruginous sandstone is the lowermost, and has a great degree of
compactness, so as to fit it for architectural purposes, in which it
seems to be largely employed. It is evidently stratified, the strata
being nearly horizontal; the quartz particles are agglutinated by a
ferruginous cement.

The sandstone, nearly in the whole extent of the hillock, supports
a lithomarge of a whitish or flesh colour, sometimes having a bluish
tint. The stratum of this earth is not very thick, and in many
places, it is overlaid by a purple-red, compact, slaty hematitic iron ore,

3 L

438 Notes of « Tour through Palestine. fAua.

which passes insensibly in the upper part into a cellular rock, full of
tubular sinuosities, very much similar to the laterite. In some places
this ore lies immediately over the sandstone, without the inter-
mediate lithomarge.

Before I finish speaking of the laterite in these low lands, I must
mention an interesting fact f observed in the thick beds of laterite,
which caps the hill on the foot of which Bimlipatam stands, In this
place it overlies the garnetic gneiss 30 common all over this part of
the country ; and I was surprised to see a large piece of the subjacent
gneiss imbedded in the thick bed of laterite, more than a foot above the
point of contact of both rocks. This fact seems to countenance the
inference of the detrital origin of the laterite of these plains and
eminences. I am not aware that any pieces of extraneous rocks have
been noticed as imbedded in the original laterite.

Il.—Notes of a Tour through Palestine.

[We have been favored with the following extract from the private letter of a
junior revenue officer in the Madras Civil Service, by the friend to whom it
was addressed without any view to publication. This will be the excuse, if any
such be required, for the cursive style in which it is written, to ourselves a strong
recommendation in its favor.—Ep.]

Egypt is the most delightful country in the world to travel through ;
the boats (if previously ordered from Cairo) are the most comfortable
conveyances imaginable. In all the great towns you get excellent
leavened bread, and in every village, delicious milk, butter, eggs,
fowls, and vegetables. I never lived so well in my life; and the
weather was so cool and bracing, that I had a voracious appetite, and
enjoyed all the good things. Barring the voyage up the Red Sea,
(which except in the steamer is dreadful,) and the journey across the de-
sert from Cosseir, (which is decidedly disagreeable,) I know no place
so well calculated to re-establish the health of an Indian as the voy-
age down the Nile, between the months of October and April; but
perhaps January and December are too cold for enjoyment.

My friend and myself left Cairoin the beginning of April, and travelled
by land through El Arish, reaching Jerusalem in 14 days. This desert,
though tedious, is not near so much soas that from Cosseir. Part of the
way at first lies along the edge of the Delta through the cultivations,
with plenty of water, andfrom El Arish, the road is delightful, through
the finest pastoral country imaginable. From that place I have been
pleased, more than I can tell you, with every thing I have seen in
Syria, and have been agreeably disappointed in almost all my pre«

1835.] Notes of a Tour through Palestine. 439

viously formed anticipations. I had always understood Palestine to
be at present exactly the reverse of what it was in the time of the
Jews—barren, waste, rocky, inhospitable. Most travellers describe it
so; but this proceeds partly from the time of year at which it is
visited, and partly from the difficulties of travelling compelling people
to follow the same route. Travellers from India are generally too
early. The seasons here are similar to those of Europe—the spring
beginning in March, previous to which all is cold and uncomfortable.
You know what a striking difference there is between the black plains
of Nowlgoond, when covered with grain, and when bare, parched, and
cracked after the harvest. So here, where the heats of summer are
excessive, and burn up every thing, and the cold of winter is very
severe, the country both looks and feels wretched previous to the
approach of spring. We arrived in the middle of April, when every
thing was green and smiling; perhaps a month earlier, certainly a
fortnight, would have been better, to enable us to have avoided the
present heats, which since the beginning of the month have not been
exceeded by any I experienced in India, except perhaps when I was
shooting lions at mid-day in Guzeratin the month of May. Then
the usual route from Egypt is to land at Jaffa, and come through the
rocky mountains of Ramlah, to Jerusalem; and thence, having seen
the Dead Sea, to proceed by Nazareth to Burat, and sail thence ; most
of which is the worst part of Palestine. By coming by land, we saw
first the beautiful plains of Philistia; and the greater security afford-
ed by the Egyptian Government enabled us to visit with perfect ease
the country beyond Jordan, and indeed to see every thing we could
have desired.

To an up-country revenue man, the Holy Land must appear one of
the most beautiful and productive countries in the world, presenting
every capability for raising an enormous taxation, as compared with
its size and extent; and this, as well as the numerous evidences of
its former great population, presented every where in ruined towns,
deserted cultivation, &c. perfectly explains the important part it play-
ed when the seat of the Jewish kingdom. The centre of the province
presents a mass of limestone hills, running N. and 8., bounded by
plains backing to the sea-shore on the one hand, and by the valley of
the Jordan on the other. These hills are horizontally stratified, and
this natural formation, appearing like a succession of steps from the
bases to the tops of the mountains, seems to have suggested to the in-
habitants the mode of cultivation they have adopted, by improving and
extending these natural terraces, and covering them with corn, but
more generally with vineyards, fig-trees, and olive plantations. The

3L2

440 Notes of a Tour through Palestine. (Ave.

grey, broken stones, used in forming these ledges, contrast strangely
with the rich products above them ; and when the crops are off the
ground, and the trees not in leaf, look exceedingly cold and barren.
The hills are the richest portion of the land, and by far the best cul-
tivated. The plains are equally capable; but the people are less in-
dependent, less able to protect themselves, and are therefore more
indolent, careless, and miserable. These low lands are generally left
as pasture: where cultivation is tried, it is of the most slovenly and
dirty description ; weeds and thistles choke the corn, and the fatness
of the land vents itself in the production of the most beautiful and
varied wild flowers. I saw many wheat-fields so full of scarlet ane-
mones, wild tulips, poppies, blue corn-flowers, daisies, buttercups,
and a hundred others, many of which I had never seen before, that
they presented exactly the appearance of the richest Persian carpet,
but a thousand times more beautiful. Both plains and hills are most
abundantly supplied with water. Copious fountains gush out from
every rising ground, with which our industrious Reddy and Lingayet
ryots would convert the whole plain into one luxurious garden. No
tanks, no wells, no boring machines are required here, but merely
common intelligence and industry to guide and distribute the streams
which God has so bounteously poured forth. Besides the plains of
the coast, consisting of Philistia, that of Jaffa or Sharon, and those
of Acre and Tripoli, there are inland, the plains of Esdrarlon and
Galilee, between Samaria and Nazareth, and the Bekaa, the ancient
Ceelosyria, between Libanus and Anti-Libanus, both of great extent,
excellently watered, and of surprising fertility ; but now grey with
huge crops of enormous thistles, only occupied by tribes of wander.
ing Bedowins, with their flocks and herds and black tents.

In the land of the Philistines, we visited Gaza, a fine old town,
where they point out the grave of Samson; the Muhammedans calling
him Nabbit Abd-ul Aziz. We were inquiring from a Christian
about Samson, of whom he had evidently never heard; demanding
whether he was a Frank or what? when a green turbaned Musal.
man, passing by, gave us the desired information. We made out, to
our perfect satisfaction, the place to which he carried the city gates,
*‘on the hill over against Hebron.” Thence we went to Ascalon,
now completely in ruins, and deserted, but singularly well situated,
being contained within a low abrupt range of hills, of about two miles
in length, forming an arc round a portion of the sea coast, and termina-
ting in the sea at either end. This ridge was crowned with enormous
fortifications, the massive fragments of which, still remaining, attest
the former strength of the place. Ashdodis also completely de-

1835.] Notes of a Tour through Palestine. 441

stroyed, and the modern village of Shadid is built under the mountain
formed by the remains of the old city. At this place, (having first
gone to the site of Ekron, and thus seen four of the five great lord-
ships of the Philistines,) we turned out of the common and regular
route, avoiding the barren and inhospitable journey from Ramlah to
Jerusalem, and proceeded straight through the hills to Bethlehem, the
country like the hills behind Dharwar. I do not think any traveller
ever took this road before ; it is more direct, quite practicable, even
for camels, which we rode, and is very beautiful. The hills are co-
vered with flowers, with the green cistus and arbutus, the ilex, the
little white flower called the Star of Bethlehem, and a great variety
of others. Round Bethlehem are numerous fine vineyards, each with
its ‘‘ tower” and ‘‘ wine press’ init; the round tower, like acavalier
bastion, being probably to guard the produce, and keep the tools, &c.
Hence to Jerusalem is only five miles.

We remained in the Holy City, called here Ul Kids ul Sher‘ff,
nearly three weeks. Part of the time we devoted to an excursion to
Hebron, the Dead Sea, and Jericho. Hebron is one mass of terraced
vineyards : the Muhammedan mosque, once a Christian church, cover-
ing the cave of Macpelah, may not be entered by Christian feet; but
we went to Mamre, still recognizable in the name used by the Arabs
Ramre, and pointed out by Jewish tradition as the spot where their
father Abraham pitched his tent. It is not a plain: there are none
in the centre of the hills; but four valleys meet here, and there is a
fine supply of water, and it appears the Hebrew word rendered ‘ Plain”
may also be translated some kind of trees. The Dead Sea is the most
dismal scene I ever beheld, and looks like a present, existing miracle ;
so extraordinary and different from every thing else in nature does
it appear. There is no sign whatever of volcanic action in the hills
around, by which its original formation has been explained. The air
is always extremely hot and heavy, and indeed, we felt it most oppres-
sive throughout the valley of the Jordan. At Jerusalem, and at mid-~
day, in the open air, going to Hebron, the thermometer was only from
58° to 65°, in the valley it was 96°. I bathed, as all travellers do, in
the salt and pungent waters of the Dead Sea, in which it is impossible
to sink; butI infinitely more enjoyed a swim of half a mile down Jordan,
a small but deep and rapid stream: so much so, that the Israelites
could never have crossed it without the miracle that divided its
waters. The plain of Jericho is a fertile jungle, full of wildhog. It
is watered by a fine stream flowing from the fountain of Elisha, now
called BHin-us-Sultdn, and might easily be rendered what it once
was, the most fertile spot in Palestine, where only the balsam and

442 Notes of a Tour through Palestine. [Ave.

palm trees grew. Hin-us-Sultdn is a beautiful spot, abounding with
game, and flowing out of the ruins of Jericho, which are here,
and not at the village of Rihhah, as generally said. It put me exactly
in mind of the Diamond fountain described in the Crusaders, and must
indeed have been the identical spot where Saladin and the Knight
of the Leopard met; for it is directly in the way from Ascalon and
Jerusalem to the wilderness of Engeddi, on the shores of the Dead
Sea, whither, if I mistake not, the gallant knight was wending! It
may be so with as much probability as the spot pointed out to us by
the monks on our way back to Jerusalem, which they asserted to be
the identical place where the traveller fell among thieves, and was
relieved by the Good Samaritan in the parable—a mishap which
actually occurred to your friend Sir Freperick HenNIKER, who was
severely wounded and robbed here in 1818.

I was quite disgusted with the monkish legends at Jerusalem, as-
signing a locality to every act, however trivial, that is mentioned in
Scripture ; and also to many that are not mentioned at al]. Here
Peter heard the cock crow; here our Saviour fell when bearing the
cross ; here he rested his hand on the wall, and made a large hole in
it; here the holy maid Saint somebody gave him a pocket handker-
chief to wipe his brow. Then the whole locale of the Holy Sepulchre,
Mount Calvary, &c. crowded within the space of one church, is a
manifest and absurd fiction, and completely paralyzes all one’s sensibi-
lity and enthusiasm. The gross superstition of the Christians here
exceeds belief, and is only equalled by the hatred and animosity which
the different sects, Greeks, Armenians, Latins, Copts, Maronites,
entertain towards each other. This both explains and justifies the
contempt with which the Turks treat them, and all other Franks, in
consequence. As for the English, they say they have no religion at
all, and both Catholics and Musalmans concur in calling them Deists
and Atheists. Yet there are some excellent Protestant missionaries in
the country, (particularly Mr. Nicotaysen at Jerusalem,) whose lives
testify to the contrary. The Latin, that is the Roman Catholic, monks,
of the Franciscan convent at Jerusalem, were guilty of a most abo-
minable act about two years ago. An English traveller, Mr. Braprorp,
arrived at the convent very sick, and asked for the medicine, and the
medical attendant of the convent. They refused, unless he would
conform to the Roman Catholic faith: this he declined; but as he got
worse, he said he would do any thing, only give him medicine. He
died, and was buried in the Catholic burying- ground, with a fine Latin
inscription, abounding in false concords, recording his conversion
from the Protestant to the Roman creed! We were present at the

1835.] Notes of a Tour through Palestine. , 4

festival of the Greek Easter, (the old style,) when the Armenians,
Greeks, and Copts perform the miracle of the Holy Fire, the grossest
delusion ever practised by the priesthood on a superstitious laity.
All Saturday evening and night, the church was full of Greek and
Armenian pilgrims, running about the Holy Sepulchre in the most
indecent manner, shouting, carrying each other on their shoulders, and
every species of sky-larking. Two or three processions and some other
mummery occurred at intervals during the night; and on Sunday
forenoon, the Greek Patriarch and Armenian Bishop entered the
Sepulchre, and very coolly poked a lighted candle through a little
hole, declaring it to be the Holy Fire, just: sent down from Heaven.
All the pilgrims rushed to light their candles at it, the Armenians
succeeding in doing so first. The crush was tremendous, and was
followed by a melancholy catastrophe; for either the Greeks, jealous at
the Armenians’ getting away first, or from some other cause not
known, a rush took place to the door, which had been locked since
the preceding evening, and in the struggle numbers were trodden
down and suffocated. We were trying to get out, unconscious of
what was going on, and were nearly involved in the press. I cannot
express the horror I felt when I found myself hurried on to a heap
of dead and dying, from which I rushed back into the church. They
reported to the Pasha 133 bodies carried out for burial; but there
were many more not reported : the number must have exceeded 200.
The number of pilgrims was greater this year than had ever been
known; the Greck war and the conquest of Syria by the Egyptians
having prevented the concourse of devotees for several years. Their
number was estimated at 16,000. What made the circumstance more
singular was, that on the Friday the Armenian Bishop, through the
exertions, and indeed express stipulations of the principal people of
the Armenian race, who are rapidly rising in intelligence, had inti-
mated to the pilgrims, that the whole was a trick, and that it was to
be discontinued after the present occasion.

There are however many interesting localities about Jerusalem, of
which no one can doubt. Mount Sion and Moriah, the Temple Olivet,
Valley of Hinnom, Bethany, all of which are very striking, particular-
ly the very road by which our Saviour came triumphantly from
Bethany to Jerusalem, where he wept over the city, and which can
never be mistaken. I was deeply interested with this. The Mount of
Olives is beautiful: you have a grand view of the city and of the Dead
Sea from the summit.

We sawthe Jewish Passover, and visited many of the principal Jewish
families. They are an interesting race ; many of them, fine venerable-

444 Notes of a Tour through Palestine. [Aue.

looking men. They present the appearance of every nation of Europe.
The German Jewish are fair and blue-eyed; the Spaniards, olive and
dark; the Moriscoes from Barbary, swarthy and burnt; the Polish
different from all. Allspeak the languages of the countries to which they
belong; they have no national feature or appearance like the English
Jews. Many of the women were beautiful, and they alone, of all the
women I have seen in the East, enjoyed the same consideration with
the women of Europe, coming out to receive strangers, and joining
in conversation with their husbands.

From Jerusalem, we went to Naploos, the ancient Samaria, through
a very mountainous tract, full of terraced vineyards, and stood by the
well where our Saviour talked with the woman of Samaria, between
Mount Ebal and Gerizim; thence through the most lovely green val-
leys, each one with its little clear rivulet, to Sebaste, the capital
of Herod, where John the Baptist was beheaded ; and in two days
more, across the plain of Esdraelon, watered by the brook Kishon,
“that ancient river,” where Deborah defeated Sisera, to Nazareth.
There is nothing remarkable there, except the associations connected
with a place where our Saviour resided for 30 years of his life, and
over every part of which he must have trod. It isa pretty town
among green hills. Here my companion fell sick, and we found, that
though vaccinated, he had got the sn.all-pox, probably from the pilgrims
in the Church of the Holy Sepulchre. His attack being slight, I left
him in the convent, and proceeded a 12-days’ trip into the Haouran
with two other travellers, the Honorable Mr. Curzon and Sir Georear
Parmer. We passed Mount Tabor, Endor, Nain, and crossed the
Jordan at Bethsan, from which we had a most beautiful march to Adje-
lun, and thence to Jorash, through a finely wooded hilly country
that put me much in mind of some of the finest country about Kit-
hur, or a little more to the west of the Belgaum road, where the true
forest begins: the trees were fine oaks and ilices, and game abounded.
All this is comprehended under the general name of Gilead, more
particularly it was the land of Og king of Bashan, still as famous for
fine cattle as formerly. The castle of Adjeloon (see Josuua’s miracle
of the sun and moon standing still), is a grand object on the top of one
of the highest hills, towering over all the wooded eminences around.
The ruins of Jorash are very extensive and magnificent; a street of
ruined Corinthian and Doric columns, nearly two miles long, two
theatres, two temples, one with a grand portico in good preserva-
tion, and many other large ruins, attest its former magnificence. They
were stately fellows, these Roman Governors. Here we found at their
different towns of Bethsan (Scythopolis), Gerash, Ammon, Oomkais

1835.] Notes of a Tour through Palestine. 445

(Gadara), all within two or three days’ march of each otlier, forming
the district called by the Romans the Decapolis, in each place one or
two fine theatres, temples and great ruins, which proved how liberally
the Roman Preetors were allowed to disburse the public money with-
out sanction. Between Jorash and Ammon, we crossed the Zirkah,
the ancient river Jabbok, entering the country of the Amorites, still
hilly but destitute of wood ; and then getting into the plain of Haouran,
we skirted it to Oomkais, and lake Tiberias. This plain extends as
far as the eye can reach, I believe even to Bagdad, and is tenanted
by the Bedoweens only, of whom the Annesy tribe are found reaching
nearly to the Gulph of Persia. There are a few villages near the
Jebel Haouran, to one of which, named Bosra or Bostra, where there are
also fine Roman ruins, we wanted to go, but could not, from want of
water, and the excessive heat; and I was not sorry, for the plain of
Haouran is not inviting. The fine part of Syria ends with the Deca-
polis. Tiberias is more interesting than beautiful—a fine clear, blue
lake, about 16 miles long by eight broad, surrounded by bare rocky
mountains, but it is interesting from being the scene of most of our
Saviour’s early miracles. It is always very hot here, as it is in the
valley of the Jordan. The most remarkable feature about it is Mount
Hermon, covered with eternal snow, rising over its (the lake’s) north-
ern side. It is the most remarkable mountain in Palestine, visible from
almost every part, even from near Jaffa. Returning to Nazareth by
Cana, I found my fellow-traveller quite recovered; but alarming reports
being now prevalent of an insurrection having broken out against the
Egyptian government, we deferred our plan of proceeding straight
to Damascus, and turning westward to the sea coast we made the
best of our way by Mount Carmel, Acre, Tyre, Sidon, to Bieroot.
Here ascertaining that the commotion had not yet extended to Da-
mascus, we crossed Lebanon and got there, visiting the Ameer Basheer
in our way. The latter part of the road to Damascus was extremely
dry and barren, the weather too was extremely hot. We therefore
felt the full beauty of the situation of this city, for which it is chiefly
remarkable, in the plain of the Haouran, watered by the river Banady,
which irrigates innumerable gardens and orchards, and imparts an ap-
pearance of the richest verdure and fertility to the whole. The Da-
mascenes have been obliged to relinquish their bigotted hostility
towards the Franks since the rule of Munammap AI, and Christians
may now ride into the gate, wear the white turban, and enjoy all the
other privileges of Muhammadan subjects; nay, several of the chief
persons showed us the interior of their houses, and one ABpuLLAH Bua,

son of Assap Pasa, who has the most magnificent establishment in the
3M

446 Notes of a Tour through Palestine. [Aue.

place, even showed us his haram or the female apartments; but we
are the first Franks who had been admitted to them. They are truly
magnificent ; realizing the descriptions of what one reads in the
Arabian Nights. Spacious courts, with fountains and reservoirs
and orange trees growing in the rooms all around, ornamented with ara-
besque painting and gilding, windows of painted glass, and luxurious
divans. There is not a house that has not a fountain playing the
whole day; but to this is attributed the unhealthiness of the city,
which is extremely subject to fevers and agues ; the density of the
gardens, however, not a little contributing. The inhabitants give
themselves up to continual enjoyment; they think of nothing but how
to get most ‘ keef,”” a word they continually use to express their in-
dolent gratifications under the shade of their fruit trees, by the side
of the numerous streams that flow through and round the town.
All have a voluptuous and dissipated look, so that a Damascene can
be recognized any where. I own I should not like to live there, nor
to give myself to such an indolent Epicurean mode of existence, cou-
pled as it is with continual fevers and visceral complaints. The bazars
are very fine, and well but not grandly supplied. Ices abound, and
iced water is hawked about the streets for even the poorest. We re-
turned by way of Balbeck, the finest remnant of antiquity I have yet
seen ; add to which, the air is cool and salubrious, and the landscape
around remarkably rich and beautiful. Mr. P and our other two
friends finding it too hot, went straight back to Bieroot, andI alone took
a detour by the cedars of Lebanon, crossing the highest summit of the
mountain among the snow, to see the small and remarkable clump of
trees, the only ones nowremaining, and returned by way of Eden and
Tripoli, to this place.

I have on the whole been delighted beyond my utmost expecta-
tions, and I think have seen every thing in the most satisfactory man-
ner. The climate approaches so nearly to that of Europe, and so
many of the natural productions are the same, that a thousand agree-
able recollections are brought to the mind of a man who has been
long from home, as we Indians have been, which afforded a pleasure
I never dreamt of. Such were the feelings with which I first heard the
cuckoo—such those with which I first trod on a bed of snow, and saw
a flight of noisy jackdaws among the ruins of Jorash. The dog-
roses, wild honeysuckles and brambles, the pine tree, and mountain
ash, recalled many scenes of younger days in Scotland; while fields of
wheat and barley, mixed with jowarree and chenna, the vine, the fig,
the olive, the mulberry, gave to the whole a character peculiarly its
own. Great quantities of silk are manufactured all along the north

1835.] Notes of a Tour through Palestine. 447

part of the coast, the worms being fed on the large white mulberry,
but they use the large wheel in winding it, and the fibre is much
coarser and inferior to that of Dharwar.

The Egyptians came to Syria under the most favorable circumstan-
ces. The people received them with open arms, and more than by the
exertions of the invading army, promoted their success. The Pasha
promised them a three years’ exemption from taxes, and held out
many other fair prospects. But he forgot to keep his word ; nay more,
he levied much heavier imposts than the officers of the Sultan had
been wont to take: which from his greater military establishments, and
the superior energy of his government, he was enabled to enforce. The
miri or land tax of the Porte, is ,5,0f the gross produce. All the land is
therefore saleable, and the nobility and great men get a good rent, be-
sides the tax, from their private estates. Very large estates belong to
the crown, from the law that makes the Sultan heir to all his great
officers, and to all who die without direct heirs ; in which case the rent,
in addition to the miri, goes to the exchequer. The Government dues
are taken in three instalments or kists, and those due before harvest
are realized through an intermediate agent, called the Soo-basha, gen-
erally one of the great landed proprietors or Turkish gentlemen, who is
regularly recognised by the Government as the person through whom
such payments are to be made. He then, exactly as happens in India,
keeps a running account with the village, contriving that they shall
always be considerably his debtors; and in recovering his advances,
what with interest (18 percent. per annum), gratuities, fees, &c. he
contrives to make from 30 to 40 per cent. The Egyptian government
now says to the rayahs, ‘‘ we will release you from the Soo-bashas,
we will take our 10 per cent. only, in one instalment at harvest, but,
you must pay us also an additional sum, equal to the profits formerly
mnade by the Soo-basha. ‘The poor rayahs are forced to agree, and go
on borrowing from the Soo-basha as much as ever. They were not
ill off under the Porte, and now see their error, and bitterly repent
the aid they lent to their more imperious tax-masters. Again, the
Pasha has introduced lately his absurd system of monopolies, begin-
ning with the silk, which he takes ata price, a very low one, fixed by
himself, selling it again at a very enhanced one. I ascertained the
prices of grain in Egypt, where the same system isin force. He takes
+ of the produce of all rice ands in kind, and buys the wiole remain-
ing = crops at 25 piastres the ardib or measure, shuts it up in his
shoons or store-houses, and retails it for 75, at which price the very
fellah who raised it is obliged to re-purchase it. In Syria this gave
rise to increased discontent, and an attempt to enforce a military

3M 2

448 Notes of a Tour through Palestine. [Aua.

conscription fanned these angry feelings into a blaze, and the whole
of Palestine has been in open insurrection for the last five weeks.
The mountainous country I have described as forming the centre of
the province, is particularly favorable to undisciplined resistance ; the
first detachments sent against them were cut off and dispersed. Rein-
forcements sent for to the camp at Jaffa were intercepted and de-
stroyed, and Jerusalem itself was surprised. At last about 10 days
ago, Ipraui’m Pasha, the son of Muuammap Att, and Commander-in-
Chief, marched on Jerusalem from Jaffa with 7000 men. He was
attacked in a narrow pass, was obliged to make a detour with a small
escort to ensure his personal safety, (leaving his army to struggle
through, which they did, losing more than half their numbers, and
gained Jerusalem, which the peasantry wisely abandoned,) leaving his
guns in possession of the rebels. Two of his field officers were so
alarmed and astonished at this work, that they deserted their colors
and fled by sea. Reinforcements have been demanded from Egypt,
and so affairs stand at present, all eagerly desiring the return of the
Sultan. Meantime a general fermentation exists throughout the land.
A dangerous conspiracy was discovered, and quelled by sanguinary
punishments at Aleppo. At Damascus, the conscription was so clum-
sily and stupidly enforced by troops surrounding certain quarters,
taking out all sorts of men, whether of good condition or otherwise,
violating the sanctity of harams to get at them, that numbers fled
and joined the insurgents, and all the shops in the city were for some
time closed. 600 poor wretches are shut up in the castle, whom they
dare neither to release nor to embody in the ranks. A general feeling is
manifested against the Christians, on account of the privileges to
which they have been admitted ; and in several instances, the Muham-
madans have shown a disposition to rise against them. There area
great number of Greeks, Armenians, &c. in all the large towns, ge-
nerally people of some wealth. The people of Saphet two days ago
arose and massacred the Jews. So that every thing looks like an
impending storm, and I should not be surprised if it ended in the
Pasha being turned out of Syria.

I have no feeling in favor of the Egyptian government. It is true
they affect liberal opinions, protect the Franks, and imitate European
improvements ; but the sole motive and object of all this is the Pasha’s
personal ambition, and its only good effects are a good police and a
greater general security to person and property from all attacks—
but those of the Pasha himself. Munammap AI, is certainly a wonder-
ful man; but he is, lam now convinced, perfectly selfish, and is not ac-
tuated in any way by a desire to ameliorate his country or people. I

1835.] Notes of a Tour through Palestine. 449

was most unwilling to come to this conclusion, but the evidence is so
positive 1 cannot help it. He has drained the population of Egypt,
(which was 2,500,000) by continual conscriptions to keep up his regu-
lar army of 90,000 men, exclusive of some 20 or 30,000 for his fleet
and arsenals, and of those he has seized to labor in his manufactories.
So dreaded has this demand for men become, that the peasants now
maim themselves to be exempted from service. In the whole of Upper
Egypt, I could not find a single ryot who had not put out an eye, cut
off a finger, or broken out a dozen teeth; even children of 10 and 12
years old are maimed. I speak soberly and in strict truth when I say,
that during four days’ sail down the Nile, I landed frequently, and took
long walks, asking every individual I met, and I only found one not
maimed, and he was horn deaf and dumb! The aspect of the country
is wretched ; the villages are deserted and in ruins, much land lying
waste, the people looking squalid, poor and miserable. The severity
of the system was attested by the frequent insurrections that took
place a few years back, but in the open valley of the Nile these were
easily quelled. Meantime the Pasha, instead of husbanding his re-
sources to enable himself, now that he has established his power, to
reduce the burthens of his people, squanders away his revenue in ab-
surd schemes. He forces the produce of articles with expensive pur-
chased machinery, which he could buy cheaper from Europe in exchange
for the natural products of Egypt. He engages in splendid projects,
and seeks applause from the people of England and France. These
mad enthusiasts, the Saint Simoniens, told him of the advantage of a
rail-road across the Isthmus of Suez, and he is now surveying the
ground for that purpose. He is trying to realize the splendid idea of
Napoleon, of damming the two branches of the Nile, and irrigating
the whole of the Delta; and with an almost childish impatience to com-
plete his work, he drives the population of whole districts to the work,
neither paying them nor providing them with food, in consequence of
which many perish. Then he has sent 20,000 men to subdue Yemen,
and to attack the Aseers, a wild tribe of Bedoweens, who will lead them
into the desert, and probably destroy all the expensive materiel with
which the Egyptian armies are most liberally furnished. Many of these
schemes are worthy in themselves, but they are too great for the re-
sources of the country, and the attempt to force them has given rise
to a system of relentless tyranny, and reduced the people to a state of
misery exceeding what I have ever seen or heard of elsewhere. The
only thing I saw that gave me unmixed pleasure, was the Government
school at Cairo, where about 900 boys are educated at the public
expense, each boy receiving from 15 to 80 piastres a month, his food

450 On the Characters of [Ave.

and clothing. But there are not wanting who say, the Pasha only
supports it to raise up for himself good officers ; however, it is good in
itself, and the results must be good, and I give him credit for it. I
consider the principal points in his character to be ambition, and the
vanity of appearing a great and enlightened prince in the eyes of
Europe, and [ think these will explain his whole policy. He has had
the tact to win our representative, Colonel CampsE.t, completely to his
interests, and the good Colonel is his warmest and most enthusiastic
eulogist.

IlI.—Characters of three New Species of Indian Fresh-water Bivalves,
by Isaac Lua ; with Notes by W. H. Benson, Esq.

While our countrymen in India are hesitating to name or to de-
scribe as novelties their acquisitions in Natural History, under the
apprehension of re-describing that which may be already known to
the ‘scientific world, our brethren of the United States are forestall-
ing us, and are publishing in that distant land the acquisitions of
their fellow citizens, made under the unfavorable circumstances which
generally attach to cursory and hurried journeys through a country.
It becomes us, then, to bestir ourselves, and not thus tamely to allow
prizes to be carried off from our very doors, to swell the scientific
triumphs of our transatlantic competitors.

The following descriptions of three species of Unio are taken from
the 4th volume of the Transactions of the American Philosophical
Society, in which work characteristic figures are given of each shell.
The characters are from the pen of Mr. Isaac Lua, who has acquired
perhaps a greater knowledge of the species of this genus, and has
described more new ones than any other individual. Having during
several years attended particularly to this department of Natural His-
tory, and taken numerous specimens of the shells procurable in the
provinces, in which I have resided, I have ventured to add a few
illustrative notes. Besides Mr. Lra’s three species, and the well
known Unio marginalis of Lamarck, I am acquainted with three
other perfectly distinct species of Unio from the streams of the Bengal
and Agra presidencies, which I propose to describe in a separate
paper.—W. H. B.

Unio Cmruteus. Plate XIII. fig. 25. of Am. Phil. Trans. IV.

“* Testé angusto-elliptica, transversd, inequilaterali, subcylindraceé ; val-
wulis tenuibus ; natibus prominulis, rotundatis et undulatis ; dentibus car-
dinalibus lamelliformibus, et in dewtrdé valvula sold duplicibus ; lateralibus
rectis ; margarita ceruleo-albd et iridescente.

1835.] three New Species of Fresh-water Bivaives. 451

«« Shell narrow-elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, subcylindrical ; valves
thin ; beaks rather elevated, rounded and undulated ; cardinal teeth
lamelliform and double in the right valve only ; lateral teeth straight ;
nacre bluish white, pearly and iridescent.

Hab, River Hoogly, Hindostan, G. W. Braxir.

Diam. °6, Length °8, Breadth 1°6 inches.

“Shell narrow-elliptical, transverse, subcylindrical, disposed to be
straight on the sides and basal margin ; substance of the shell thin ; beaks
near the anterior margin rounded, somewhat elevated, and corrugated with
diverging undulations ; ligament rather short and straight ; epidermis
finely wrinkled and bluish green, particularly on the posterior part ; rays
very indistinct ; posterior slope furnished with small undulations and
two irregular rays on each side ; cardinal teeth lamelliform and double in
the right valve only ; lateral teeth straight and lamelliform + anterior
cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices within
the cavity of the beaks ; cavity of the beaks wide and rounded; nacre
bluish white, very pearly and iridescent.

* Remarks.—This species was brought from Calcutta by Mr. Buaxin,
to whose kindness I am indebted for it and many other fine shells. As far
as I have been able to ascertain, it has not been described. From the
roughness of the beaks it might perhaps be thought to be only a variety
of corrugata (Lam.). On comparing the two species, however, they will
be found to be entirely distinct ; the corrugata being “ ovato-rhombea,”’
while the ceruleus is ‘ angusto-elliptica.”’ In some specimens the nacre
is slightly rose-coloured along the basal margin.”

Note.—This shell is extremely common in tanks in the vicinity of
Calcutta, and is met with in profusion in the Ganges, Jumna, and
their branches. The epidermis is ordinarily brown, and I have only
met with the dark-green variety figured and described by Mr. Lea in
jhils in. Bundelkhand. It varies much in diameter, being sometimes
extremely ventricose, while another frequent variety is remarkable
for the smallness of its diameter. All the varieties may be at once
referred to this species, by attending to the generally polygonal out-
line of the posterior part of the shell, and to the ruge on the beaks
and slopes, which radiating in two different sets, form by this junction
on the back of the shell, in fine specimens, a series of acute angles.
The shallow variety above-mentioned, which has a paler green epi-
dermis, and which is somewhat alate posteriorly, shews this cha-
racter, in the greater perfection. The extreme varieties would be
regarded as distinct species, if alone presented for examination; but
I possess a beautiful series which connects them so gradually as to
leave no doubt of their identity as a species. My largest specimen,
which is an odd valve, is 1°95 inches in breadth. The nacre is occa-
sionally tinged with salmon colour.—W. H. B.

452 On the Characters of fAue.

Sympaynota Brnineata. Plate XI. fig. 19, of ditto.

“ Testé subelliptica, transversd, inequilaierali, compressa ; valvulis tenuis.
simis ; posteriort margine dorsali elevata connatdque ; natibus subprominulis,
undulas concentricas et duas lineas elevatas ad marginem posteriorem cur-
rentes, habentibus ; dentibus cardinalibus laminatis et in valvulé dextré solum
duplicibus ; lateralibus rectis ; margaritd colore sulmonis subtinctd.

“ Shell subelliptical, transverse, inequilateral, compressed ; valves very
thin; posterior dorsal margin elevated and connate ; beaks very slightly
elevated, concentrically undulate and possessing two elevated lines which
pass to the posterior margin ; cardinal teeth lamelliform and double in
the right valve only ; lateral teeth straight ; nacre slightly salmon co-
loured.

Hab. River Hoogly, Hindostan, G. W. Buaxt.

Diam. °3, Length °7, Breadth 1°3 inches.

“ Shell subelliptical, transverse, inequilateral, compressed, diaphanous ;
substance of the shell extremely thin ; beaks very slightly elevated, con-
centrically undulated, possessing two small elevated lines which pass
(posterior to the umbonial slope) to the posterior margin ; valves elevated
into a carina and connate in the posterior dorsal margin: dorsal margin a
right line ; ligament very small; epidermis shining, greenish yellow,
darker on the posterior slope ; cardinal teeth lamelliform and double in
the right valve only ; lateral teeth lamelliform, long and straight ; pos-
terior and anterior cicatrices both confluent ; dorsal cicatrices obsolete ;
cavity of the beaks shallow, very wide, and exhibiting the undulations of
the beaks; nacre very thin and slightly salmon coloured, darker in the
cavity of the beaks.

* Remarks.—This very small species was brought from Calcutta by Mr.
Buakie, with the U. c@ruleus (Nob.). Both were procured about one
hundred miles above that city. It resembles, in its outward characters,
the young of §. cygnea (Anod. cygnea, authors). It is, however, more
transverse, and differs altogether in the formation of the hinge, which is
furnished with perfect cardinal and lateral teeth. In the peculiar cha-
racter of the double tooth in the right valve, it resembles the S. ochracea*.
The dilineata is easily distinguished by the two delicate lines which pass
from the beaks to the posterior margin.”’

Note.—This species, which is tolerably abundant in the tank on the
skirts of the southern glacis of Fort William, is an Unio to all in-
tents and purposes. Mr. Lea’s genus Symphynota is founded on an
adventitious character which is incidental to most of the winged
bivalves. It culls from various genera, such as Unio and Anodon,
(already well separated on the best of all distinctive characters for
bivalves, the difference of the teeth,) species, which otherwise agree
with their respective genera, to unite them in one unnatural group.
Mr. Lza’s apology for its introduction, viz. the difficulty of defining

* See vol. iii, p. 455.

1835.] three New Species of Fresh water Bivalves. 453

the boundaries of the genera of the Naiade, can hardly justify its
_ adoption. The assumption that genera are separated in nature by an
hiatus has been ably combated by the zoologists of our present Eng-
lish school. Genera melt into each other, and the circumstance of
the flanking individuals of each cohort being in contact does not
militate against their grouping round the standards which form their
rallying points. Mr. Lea has named this shell from a character which
exists only in young specimens, and which is also observable in a
distinct and interesting species (U. Theca, Mihi), of which I possess
an unique example from the river Cane in Bundelkhand. The largest
specimen of Unio bilineatus in my possession, is in breadth, 2.3
inches. The adult shell has a brown epidermis inclining to fulvous
towards the basal margin, and occasionally the anterior side inclines
to form a wing as well as the posterior. Mr. Lea gives as a charac-
ter, cardinal teeth “ double in the right valve only;’’ but in every spe-
cimen which I possess, a thin lamina parallel with the principal lobe
of the cardinal tooth, is more or less developed in the left valve, and
interlocks with those on the right; and it is this double lamina in
the left valve which forms one of the most valuable distinctions be-
tween the adult didémeatus and the occasionally symphynotous young
of Unio marginalis, which has no trace of a double lamina in the left
valves. The concentric undulations, on the beaks, which are also
observable in the young of U. marginalis, also disappear in the adult
bilineatus.—W. H. B.
Unto Otivarius. Plate XVI. fig. 38, of ditto.

“ Testa ovatd, transversd inflata, pellucidé ; valvulis pertenuibus ; natibus
prominulis ; epidermide pertenui, levi et olive colorem habente ; dentibus car-
dinalibus magnis laminatis erectisque lateralibus laminatis brevibusque ; mar-
garitd pertenui albaque.

“Shell ovate, transverse, inflated, pellucid; valves very thin; beaks
slightly elevated ; epidermis olive, very thin and smooth. Cardinal teeth
large, erect and lamelliform ; lateral teeth short and lamelliform ; nacre
very thin, white and pearly.

Hab. Burrill river, India, Dr. Burroves.

Diam. ‘7, Length ‘8, Breadth 1-5 inches.

** Shell ovate, transverse, inequilateral, inflated, pellucid : substance of
the shell very thin ; beaks slightly elevated, rounded and devoid of un-
dulations: ligament very small: epidermis olive, very thin and smooth :
rays obscure, cardinal teeth large, erect and lamelliform; lateral teeth
short and lamelliform: anterior cicatrices slightly confluent : posterior
cicatrices confluent: dorsal cicatrices not perceptible; cavity of the
beaks wide ; nacre very thin and bluish white.

“ Remarks.—This interesting little shell is from the fine collection made
by Dr. Burroven, during his travels in India, and I am indebted to his

3 N

454 Description of the [Ave.

kindness for the specimen figured. It is a perfectly distinct species, and
may easily be recognised by its form, its pellucidness, and its smooth olive-
coloured epidermis. It somewhat resembles a young Anodonta on the
exterior, but the elevated lamelliform teeth easily distinguish it from that
genus. Its resemblance to a Spanish olive is very striking.”

Note.—This shell, which Lieutenant Hurron, (vol. iii. J. A. S.)
refers with doubt to the young of U. marginalis*, from which it is
perfectly distinct, is abundant in the shallow pools left on the sands
of the Jumna and Ganges after their periodical rise. I have never
met with a larger specimen than that figured by Mr. Lea. The
colour of the epidermis varies from a pale clear green to a pale brown.

In concluding these notes on Mr. Lea’s interesting descriptions, I
may observe, that the Asiatic Society is indebted to him for a series
of American fresh-water shells, chiefly Uniones, of which a list was
published in the J. A. S. vol. i. and for a copy of his Observations on
the genus Unio, printed in 1829.—W. H. B.

IV.—Descriplion of the Bearded Vulture of the Himdlaya. By
B. H. Hovason, Esq. Resident in Nipal.

Ordo Rarrores—Fam. Vutturipa.

Genus Gypaétos.

Rostrum rectum ; basi plumis setaceis autrorsum directis tectum; supra
robundatum ; mandibula inferior, basi fasciculo, plumis rigidis elongatisque
ornata ; cera plumis tecta ; tarsi breves, plumosi.

Species—Barbatus, Lin.

Synonyma.—Vultur barbatus, necnon barbarus, Lin. Vultur aureus,
Grsner. Nisser or Golden Eagle, Brucz. Bearded Vulture, Evwarops.
Lammer Geyer of the Swiss, SHaw. Father Long-beard of the
Arabs of Egypt, Bruce. The Bearded Vulture of the Himalaya,
so familiar a tenant of the western portion of these mountains, nor
yet unknown to, though much less common in, the eastern or Nipalese
division of them, seems to have escaped the research of Harpwickz,
and of Govup’s contributors. There is no delineation of it in either
the Century of the latter, or in the Illustrations of the former gentle-
man. It has also escaped the active and enlightened inquiries of
the Zoological Journal, notwithstanding the startling, and, I fancy,
exaggerated, notice of it contained in Hezer’s popular narrative. On
these grounds, I am induced to forward to the Asiatic Society a draw-

* Lieutenant Hurron asks if it can be the young of his Unio, No. 18," of

which the specimens deposited in the Museum Asiatic Society are U. margina-
lis. —LAMARCE.

1835.] Bearded Vulture of the Himdlaya. 455

ing and description of a very fine specimen killed in the Kheri pass,
by my brother Lieut. W. Hopeson: those who have better opportuni-
ties than I have of describing the bird’s average size and internal
structure, from comparison of numerous fresh subjects, seeming, year
after year, disposed to reject the task.

My specimen is apparently that of a mature bird; but its sex is
unknown to me. It measures, from the tip of the bill to the end of
the tail, three feet ten inches, and has a breadth between the tips of
the wings, not less than seven and half feet. The bill to the gape is
4 inches: the tarsi are 32 inches: °and the central toe and talon 48
inches. The dimensions are given, at length, at the close of this paper ;
meanwhile I proceed to notice the characters of the bird, and to
depict his general appearance and plumage, premising, that (according
to my information) his manners are decidedly more vulturine than
aquiline. Ordinarily, he is met with in groups, or pairs, or singly,
without marked distinction of habits in that respect. But the prospect
of an abundant repast is sure to collect numbers of the species, too
voraciously intent upon satisfying the cravings of an appetite depend-
ent for its gratification upon contingencies, to admit of their betraying
any of that shyness of man which the aquiline race invariably manifest.
If the flesh pots be exposed at Simla, or Massuri, or elsewhere in
the western hills, it becomes necessary to keep a good watch upon
them, lest the Bearded Vulture steal a share of their contents; and
the offals and carrion-carcases, freely abandoned to him by our
European soldiery, and by the peasantry, he rushes to devour, almost
heedless of the neighbourhood of human-kind. Such too in their
manners are the Bearded Vultures or Gypaéti of Europe and of Africa,
which I apprehend are specifically the same with our Asiatic type, due
allowance being made for the occasional exaggeration and inaccuracy
of describers, as well as for the remarkable variety of aspect which the
species itself is apt to exhibit. Of the lammer geyer of the Alps, I
have access to no particular description: but the detailed accounts
of Bruce and of Epnwarps, relative to the African bird, cannot be
carefully corrected by each other, and then applied to the Himalayan
subject, without leaving a full conviction of the identity of the species.
For instance, Bruce’s assertion of the partial nudity of the head, must
be amended by reference to Epwarp’s statement, that it is covered
with small, close plumes; or, must be accounted for by Brucr’s own
surmise, that the subject of his examination was under moult. Neither
of their descriptions require any other allowance, in order to suit our
bird ; for differences in colour are too notoriously caused by sex, age,

3.N 2 “s

456 Description of the fAve.

health, and season, in most species of the Raptorial order, to warrant
any nice distinction on that basis.

Epwarps gives seven and half feet for the breadth, and three feet
four inches for the length of the African variety of the Gypaétos ;
whilst Brucs’s measurements carry the size of it up to eight feet
four inches of breadth, and four feet seven inches of length. My
specimen of the Himalayan variety of this bird is intermediate
between those two statements: but I have been assured by my bro-
ther and others, that mine is decidedly a small individual ; and that,
whilst no credit is due to Heper’s statement of 26 feet between the
wings, there can be little doubt that the Indian Gypaétos frequently
has ten feet expanse of wings, and probably, sometimes, even eleven.
The general structure and aspect of the Himalayan variety of this
species, by their compound character, made up of Eagle and of
Vulture, indicate the excellence of Srorr’s generic title of Gypaétos,
or Vulture-Eagle. The bill and head have a distinctly vulturine cast ;
but the wings, tail, and feet are scarcely less decidedly aquiline; and,
upon the whole, the general semblance partakes more of the eagle
than of the vulture.

The bill’s length is to that of the head as 4 to 24; its form is
strictly vulturine, distinguished only by somewhat superior elonga-
tion, and by the considerably greater compression of the anterior
part, or that beyond the cere; where the ridge is almost sharpened,
and the sides (as nearly as may be) devoid of convexity. The cere is
wanting, and is replaced by a Jarge mass of bristles, originating with
the lores and forehead, which bristles, being directed forwards, and
closely applied to the bill, entirely conceal the cerous portion of it, as
well as the apertures of the nares. The form and position of the nares
agree very well with those of Vultur Pondicerianus : that is, they are
opened considerably, and occupy a place much nearer the tip than the
gape of the bill: but they are less vertically cleft than in Pondice.
rianus, and have a more anteal aspect. They are,long ovate, obliquely
transverse, opened forwards, and entirely hid by the bristly incumbent
cere coverts.

Another and similar mass of setaceous hair, to that just spoken of,
protects the base of the Jower mandible of the bill, being implanted
on its sides; and a third tuft originates on its inferior surface, where
the horn ceases, in order to afford extensibility to the gullet.

The last or gular tuft, like the ceral, is directed forwards, extend-
ing to the tip of the mandible, and there ending in a fork. This
last patch of bristles, (which gives its trivial name to the species,) is
freer, or less applied to the bill, than the others are. Hairs, scarcely

1835.] Bearded Vulture of the Himdlaya. 457

&
uv

Jess setaceous than those laid over the bill, are likewise directed
backwards over the head, shading the brows in two narrow lines,
which terminate near the occiput, and have a common origin with
the cere-coverts. The head, lores, and throat are perfectly clad in
short, soft, composed, narrow, and pointed plumes. These small
feathers give place suddenly, at the hind part of the head, to others
of the same lanceolate form, but of ample size and free set, which
adorn the whole neck, above and below, and have considerable affinity
to the vulturine ruff. The head is broad and flat crowned, but not
so flat or so broad as in the vultures: the eye, like their’s, mean and
small. The wings are of vast amplitude, reaching to within five inches
of the tip of a tail that is no less than 22. inches long. They are
high-shouldered, but less strikingly so than in the vultures, The
prime quills exceed the tertiaries by 6 inches: first remex 35 inches
less; the 2nd, which is very little if at all inferior in length to the
3rd, and 4th, the longest of all. The outer vane of all these quills
is not emarginated; but the inner is strongly so, remotely from their
tips. Though there be no appearance of moult in my specimen, I
suspect that the relation of the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th remiges, as above
stated, can hardly be the permanent and characteristic one; which
probably gives 4th quill longest. The tail is longer than in any
aquiline or vulturine bird I know, and is much and regularly gradated
on the sides, the extreme lateral feathers being six inches shorter than
the central ones; I should call the tail, therefore, wedged.

The legs are very short, and less muscular than in the genus
Vultur; tarsi low and completely plumed, as in the Golden Eagle :
thigh coverts long, reaching, (if directed towards them,) to the bases of
the toes. The toes and talons are of the aquiline type: the former
of medial unequal length and thickness, and reticulated, with the
outer toes connected to the centrals by a large basal membrane: the
latter, or talons, larger, acuter, and more falcate, than in the vulture,
and as much so as in most of the Falconide : the outer fore and hind
talon largest and equal; the central, less considerably; and the in-
ner, as much smaller again. The general colour of our specimen is
dark brown above, and rusty below ; but the whole upper part of the
back, and the top of the ruff on its dorsal aspect, are nearly unmixed
pale orange: the shafts of the wing and tail feathers are mostly
white; and their vanes, as well as those of the wing-coverts, are
irregularly varied (for the most part, internally) with yellowish
marginal or centralstreaks. The entire ruff, except where it fringes
the occiput, is saturate, unmixed, brown ; and the throat is essentially
the same, but paler, and touched, here and there, with yellow. The

458 Red-billed Erolia. [Aue.

head and cheeks are whitish for the most part: the ceral and gular
bristles, and those over the brows, pure black, as also a moustache or
stripe backwards from the gape: bill and talons seemingly horn-yel-
low ; and toes leaden-blue.

Dimensions.
feet. ineh.
Tip Of oil) £0 sper a Me eget icn sienn a a:s, Scorsese oraiale tiaieaist ee ine

Bill lense HOt bee Whats foc sss 5 ice wlenausa «a6 “aba MO eee
Ditto bsal Mei bee. osc nc wet see & 6.5 ose » 0 12
Dittolbasallbreadth.s..2c..2-ee- 0. 0. 2%
Expanse of wings,......... IEG
Tarsus, . 5A O 37
Central toes aden. corte, arth eeha hota te ettaorie O.« 3s
Dit tostallomy ctr scoters cachyexeuay eters ouandiac CN Ri ens eerao 0 1%

Sex unknown.

P. S. Since writing the above description, it has been suggested ta
me by Dr. Camppe.u, that I have overlooked an account of the
Himalayan Vulture-Eagle, by Lieut. Hurron, in the 34th No. of the
Journal. Adverting to that account, I find no reason to alter my
own, or to retract the opinion therein stated, that the Indian Gypaétos
is merely a variety of the single known species, which is common to
Europe, Africa, and Asia. Lieut. Hurron gives his bird the same
length as mine nearly, or 3 feet 11 inches; but he makes the
expanse of its wings 9 feet 6 inches. Is there not here some undue
allowance for shrinking in his ‘ old and mutilated’ specimen? The
wings of his bird agree very closely with mine in respect to the
relative size of the prime quills: bat I still think that this point
wants ascertainment, by reference to several mature specimens in
known full plumage. Again, I would reiterate, that differences of
colour are of no importance: my bird has no dark mark across the

head.

V.—Red-billed Erolia. By the same.

[Regarding the present paper, it is our duty to bring forward the following
facts. In November, 1829, Mr. Hopeson sent to the Asiatic Society (presented
and acknowledged, in the Proceedings of January, 1830,) this description, and a
coloured drawing of natural s‘ze of a Wader, which he called ‘‘ the red-billed
Erolia.’’ It accompanied several other similar notices, which are published in
the second part of the 18th volume of the Asiatic Researches. But by some acci-
dent, the Erolia seems to have been omitted and mislaid, nor can it be found
among the papers handed over to ourselves, in 1831, by the late Mr. CaLprEr,
who had previously conducted the publication of the Physical Researches. The
bird is a great curiosity, and has been very recently made known to the public

1835.] Red-bilied Frolia. 459

at home by Mr. Goutp as his discovery, although it is evident, that Mr. Hone-

son’s description and drawing were produced two years before. Mr. Hopc¢son

has only now had an opportunity of seeing the last volume of the Researches,

which has prevented his bringing the unfortunate omission to our notice at an

earlier period.—Ep.}

Ordo Gratiarores—Fam. Cuarapriapa—Genus Frolia.—Species
New red-billed Erotra.

As in the grallatorial order the Ibis links together the families of
the Ardeide and of the Scolopacide, so that remarkable bird which
I am now about to describe, admirably connects the latter family with
that of the Charadriadz. It constitutes besides a sort of central step
in the long gradation, from the most typical to the most aberrant
genera of the order of Waders—from those which have a great length
of legs, as well as of bill, to those which are deficient in respect to the
length of both. If to these interesting peculiarities belonging to our
bird, we add that the genus has been but recently established, and that
only one species is known, it will readily be allowed, our bird (which
is moreover a new species) is entitled to a full and minute description.

Without objecting to the generic character, as established by Vizm-
tor, [ shall take the liberty to dilate it as follows :

Bill, long, slender, weak, but not soft; well arched; upper man-
dible, rounded at the base; grooved for #ths of its length; smooth
and scarcely dilated or obtuse at its tip: lower mandible, rather
shorter than the upper.

Nostrils, wide linear; placed in the membranous part of the groove
of the bill, and near its base ; shaded above and behind by the mem-
brane; open. Face entirely clothed with feathers. Legs rather short,
and having but little of the thighs denuded. Feet cursorial. Toes
three, short; the outer connected with the central by a crescented
membrane as far as the first joint: inner scarcely connected at the
base; margins of the toes witi the skin subdilated ; nails short
obtuse, rounded. j

Wings elongated, but not acuminated; longest flags nearly equal
to greatest quills ; first quill longest*. Tail shortest; even; 12 feathers.
In further illustration of the characters of this bird, I may add, that the
bill bears the strictest essential resemblance to that of the Curlew,
scarcely differing from it at all, being rather more pointed or less
obtuse at the tip, and somewhat more decidedly arched throughout.
I speak thus from a comparison of the bills of three species of Cur-
lew (which are now before me), with that of the bird in question:

* Since found to bea mistake, by comparison of all the specimens : but the first
quill is not a siateenth of an inch less than the second and third.—Note of 1835.

460 Red-billed Erolia. [Ave.

and had I not adverted to the generic character of the Curlew as
stated in SHaw’s Zoology, I should have conceived that the bill of
our bird could not be more accurately characterised than by simply
likening it to the Curlew’s. Suaw, however, says, the Curlew’s
bill is long in the superlative degree, has its tip dilated, and the nos-
trils placed in a short groove.

Now I have only to say that of my three species, that emphatically
called the long-billedisalone remarkable (considering what family these
birds belong to) for length of bill; that all three have bills, which,
without being quite so thick at the base as the Ibis’ beak, have yet
some thickness there, which grows gradually and uniformly less to-
wards their tips; that their tips are scarce sensibly dilated ; that their
nostrils are placed in a groove which runs fully $ths of the length of
the bill, although it is only towards the base or around the opening
of the nostrils, that the sulcation is broad or membranous; and that
lastly, all these peculiarities, which to my apprehension belong to the
bill of the Curlew, belong likewise to that of the Erolia.

But for the decidedly Charadriadic character of its feet, not only
its long slender bill, but its general appearance, figure, and manners
would dispose us to range the Erolia with the family comprising
the Curlew, Godcwit, and Avocet ; and indeed, embracing almost all
the long feeble-billed Waders.

Few genera of the grallatorial order have legs so short or thighs
so little naked as those of the Eroha: and in respect to the brevity
of its toes and nails, still fewer even of the Charadriadic family of the
order, and none I believe of the Scolopaceous family, match it. Its
wings and tail have no peculiarity, and both are proportioned pretty
much as in the Curlews, Avocets, and Godwits. The new species
now before me (and which I propose should be called the red-billed)
measures nearly one foot five inches from tip of bill to tip of tail,
being in fact about the size and weight of the common Avocet. The
particulars of its size, proportions, and weight are given in the sequel;
meanwhile, I proceed to the description of its plumage. The whole
of the head above and below, as far as the eyes, hind part likewise of
the crown of the head, the chin and the throat, black, mixed with
grey about the base of the bill; and the whole black space margined
towards the body with white: rest of the body above, including the
back parts of the head, the neck, wings, and tail, full ashy blue: great
quills and false wing, dusky blue, and a large irregular bar of white
across the wings : upper tail coverts, black, with an ashy powder :
tail feathers, cross-barred with dusky, inthe manner of the Curlews ;
and all the feathers, save the two centrals, largely tipped with black ;

Journal Asiatic Society VOL. 1V PL: LIV

Bearded Vulture ( P 454)

TBlack, Astatre L ithograph tc Prefs Calecttia

1835. ] Red-billed Erolia. 461

the outermost tail feathers on either side having its outer web ofa
white ground colour, instead of a blue one, like the rest of the tail
feathers and body above. Passing now down the bird’s inferior sur-
face, we have the chin black and the neck blue, as on the superior sur-
face at bottom of the neck or top of the breast; a broad gorget of
black, confined on the side towards the neck with a narrower band of
white: rest of the body on this surface and wings and tail coverts,
pure white: quills on this surface, white towards their bases: iris
and bill, rich deep crimson: legs and toes, clear bluish grey, with a
strong but irregular purplish tinge.
Dimensions and weight as follows :

feet. in.
mat sherbill-tortip’of tail). .3 20 Vocse ce ote ees couse dk AE

Bength ofbill. (ima straight line) jo. cee oe clare epee ieee nas 34
Ditto a aMPee Ieee ect dh «i ater stale otaje Slavarale & eieNvel sls siento alate 4%
IDGRD QATUTEY GHGS G6 DUGOUT TOOT OECD EOC aun Heer iar 93
REE PRGE TONES 2 os ciassialc hae wto'cte lo dicla es ealele «oe SU BAO MDE Be
Length of tarsi, ....... eperemaren eter settee ss 5) 01 5c Seateimer sisi ctsreicte 25
Ditto omeentralltociand nail, ).jci.0 dor. s ois y+ s,0.8)0.0. 005,05 1$

Weight, 95 oz. av.

The only specimen I have been able to procure was shot on the
banks of a sandy stream in the valley, in October last ; and it was
apparently a mere passenger here, like the vast majority of the gral-
latorial and ratatorial birds which visit us, and which make only a
stage of our valley on their way from the plains of Tartary to those
of India, and back again.

|1t is with much reluctance that we have been compelled to insert these two notices,
without the beautiful drawings that accompanied them : but the number of plates in-
serted in the Journal hitherto, has been so great as to involve considerable expence,
and to do justice to the present specimens, large and richly coloured, would have
entailed a heavy additional charge. We have however the less regret in omitting
them, now that we are informed of Mr. HopeGson’s intentions to publish the whole
of his valuable illustrations of the Natural History of Nipal—a stupendous work, that
will require to carry it through, as we feel sure its merits will command, the patron-
age of all cultivators and admirers of the Fauna of India, here and at home.
Having had enquiries from several quarters as to the probable extent, and as to the
contents, of Mr. Hopeson’s proposed work, we have obtained from that Gentle-
man a Catalogue of the Drawings already sent home, to be put into the Publisher’s
hands, which shall be inserted, if possible, in the next No. of the Journal.—Eb. |

462 Hints for the Preservation (Ave.

VI.—Hints for the Preservation of Objects of Natural History. By
J.T. Pearson, sg. Curator As. Soc. Museum.

Preparations of natural history have two great enemies: insects and
damp. The latter requires great and constant attention to prevent: the
former are combatted by what are called preservatives. The preserva.
tives in common use are preparations of Corrosive Sublimate and Arsenic,

Of the former, a very good preparation is made by merely dissolving a
certain proportion in spirits of wine. For common purposes, such as ‘the
preservation of the soles of the feet, or inside of the mouth of animals, a
scruple of corrosive sublimate may be dissolved in one ounce of the spirit ;
but for the finer operations, where the colours of insects and feathers, &e.
are concerned, two grains of corrosive sublimate to an ounce of spirit, will
be strong enough : made of this strength, the solution dries without leaving
a white crust of crystals on the specimen; while it will prevent the attacks
of insects, and even mouldiness, if ordinary care be taken to keep the
specimens dry

Another preparation of corrosive sublimate and arsenic, together, is
recommended for the preservation of insects. Its composition is as foul-
lows:

Take of arsenic in powder, one ounce.

Corrosive sublimate, one ounce.

Spirit of wine, three ounces.

Spirit Sal Ammoniac, or Spirit Ammonia, one ounce. Mix them well
together, and keep them in a bottle, labelled “ purson,” for use.

But of all the preparations used for the preservation of the skins of
animals, the arsenical soap, invented by Becaur of Mentz, is the most
celebrated and most useful. It is made thus:

Take of Arsenic in powder, 2 lbs. White soap, 2 lbs. Salts of Tartar, 12
oz. Lime in powder, 4 0z. Camphor, 5 oz.

Cut the soap into thin slices, and melt it in a little w ater or spirit of
wine over the fire ; then add the salts of Tartar and the lime. Take
the mixture off the fire) and add the arsenic, taking care to mix it well by
trituration in a mortar, or other convenient vessel ; and when nearly cold,
mix in the camphor, previously reduced to powder by the help of spirit of
wine. When thus made, keep the arsenical soap ina glazed earthen pot,
or a wide-mouthed bottle, and when used, dilute it with water to the eon
sistence of cream.

The principal materials for both the above preparations may be pro.
cured in every bazar in India.

Mammatta.

The parts of Mammalia, (or those animals which suckle their young,)
which are at once the most interesting to the naturalist, and the most
easily preserved by the unscientific contributor to a museum, are the skin,
and the skeleton or bones. All parts, however, are very useful, though
there is some difficulty, to a person not accustomed to dissection, in pre-
paring them.

When an animal of but a small size has been procured, such as a
mouse, bat, rat, or even a squirrel, hare, or porcupine, the best mode of
sending it to a museum is by placing it ina glazed jar, a large, wide-
mouthed bottle, or a small barrel, with a large bung, filled three parts full
of spirit of wine, strong gin, very strong bazar arrack, or any other ardent
spirit, though on account of their not coloring the specimen, these are the
best. A small hole should be cut into the belly of the animal before it is
put into the vessel, to allow of the spirit entering freely into the internal
parts, to preserve them. When a sufficient number of specimens have been
placed, a wooden tally should be affixed to it, witha number cut thus

1835.) of Olyects of Natural Hisiery. 463

] oXXV. | oXL. | referring to a book, in which all the peculiarities of age,
sex, color of the eyes, form of the iris, if round or oval, height, length, size
in general, locality, &c. should be carefully noted ; close the vessel carefully
with moistened bladder over the cork, or bung, and cement it ali over with
a composition of bees’ wax, rosin, ruddle, and turpentine; or common bazar
sealing-wax may be used in default of any thing better, melted with
enough very finely powdered brick-dust, to make it set hard.

Bones. ‘The skeletons or parts of skeletons of mammalia, birds, and
reptiles require but little knowledge or trouble to prepare them. The
animal, or such part of it, the bones of which it is intended to preserve,
should be skinned, and as much of the flesh as can be readily cut off, should
be removed. The bones are then to be placed in a convenient vessel, such as
a barrel, for large specimens, and ajar, or even a bottle, for small ones ;
and water enough poured into it, to cover them well up from the air.
Close the vessel, and leave it for a longer or shorter time, as may be neces.
sary, fur the complete maceration of the bones ; till the remaining flesh
and ligaments will strip off with such ease, that the pouring a stream of
water from a height of four or five feet upon them, will be sufficient to
remove them. When freed from flesh and ligaments, the bones should be
put in the sunshine to dry ; and when well dried, they may be at once ar-
ticulated, or packed in cotton or saw-dust, to prevent their rubbing against
one another and being injured by carriage; and in this case the sooner
they are sent to their destination the better.

In macerating bones, it is necessary to take care that the water always
covers them, otherwise they will become indelibly black. The flesh must
never be scraped off, or the specimen may be injured.

In washing bones after maceration, care must be taken that those parts

which have become loose are not lost. This is likely to happen with the
incisor, or front teeth ; and with those bones, which, in young animals es-
pecially, are united to the other parts by ligament and by cartilage or gris-
tle. All such detached parts should be taken off, cleaned, and put bye ina
small bex or bottle, and labelled with the name of the animal of which they
formed a part.
_ As this method is attended with some trouble, and cannot be followed by
persons not stationary, and as it separates the bones too much from one ano-
ther to allow of their being sent toa distance without risk of losing some of
them, it may be as well to mention another: which, indeed, has been print-
ed and circulated in a separate form, along with a few more hints of the
same kind. In this process, skin the animal, and cut off all the fiesh from
the bones as clean as can be done, without scraping them. Separate the fore
legs, with the shoulder blades, from the body, and the hind legs, by taking
the thigh boneout of the socket at the hip. Cut off the head close, between
it and the first joint of the neck ; and allow it to remain in water for a few
days, when the brain may be washed out by directing a stream of water from
a bhisty’s mussack, or earthen pot, into the foramen magnum, or hole of the
spine. When cleared of flesh, hang up the skeleton to dry in an airy place,
but do not separate the bones from one another more than is mentioned
above. And when dry, pack it up in cotton, tow, or saw-dust, in a strong
box, for transmission.

Sxiys of Mammalia may be preserved by attending to the following direc-
tions. After the death of the animal, let it remain an hour or two in a
cool airy place, to allow the blood to congeal. Then lay it upon its back,
and make an incision in the skin from between the fore legs, along the
abdomen, to half way between the navel and the vent. The hind legs
are then pulled out gently, bending them at the knee or stifle joint, and
cutting them out of the socket at the hip. Cut off the tail close to the
rump, and draw out the body through the opening in the skin, as far as

302

464 Hints for the Preservation [Aue.

the shoulders, which separate at the shoulder-joint, and continue to draw
out the body ; an deut through the neck as close as possible to the head,
between its first joint and the skull. Next pull out the legs as far as the
fetlocks, either by the hand alone, or, as in large animals may be ne-
cessary, by fastening a cord to the bone, and attaching it to a hook in the
wall, or a cross-beam, and then pulling down the skin. When skinned, cut
off all the flesh from the leg bones, smear them well over with arsenical
soap, wrap them in a little cotton or tow, and return them into the
skin.

The head is next to be skinned very carefully, as far as the corners of
the mouth, taking the greatest care not to cut the eyelids when the eyes
are come to, and not to separate the lips from the gums; and the ears
must be cut off as close to the head as possible. If the eyelids are cut,
and the lips separated from the bones of the jaws, the specimen never
looks well when set up; and if the ears are not cut off as close as possible
to the head, they appear shorter than they ought to be. Having so far
skinned the head, it must be left hanging to the skin; the flesh must be
earefully cut off as clean as possible, the eyes taken out of their sockets,
and the brain picked out with a hooked wire, or flat stick, and pair of
forceps, through the foramen magnum, or hole for the spinal marrow at
the back of the skull.

The next process is to smear the whole inside of the skin well over
with arsenical soap ; taking care to put some also upon the bones, and
joints of the legs, and inside the skull, sockets of the eyes, mouth and
nose. The balls of the feet and toes should have an incision made into
each, and be well stuffed with arsenical soap ; and a little should be put
upon every part of the body which is naked of hair.

If the skin is very fat, as is the case with almost all the water animals,
especially those of the dolphin, porpoise, halicore, otter, seal, and other
cetaceous and amphibious genera ; the fat must be all removed, and the
skin rubbed over with powdered chalk or whiting, before the arsenical soap
is applied. A little chopped cotton or tow should next be placed inside
the head, and along between the skin and bones of the legs, face, &e. ;
and just enough in the body of the animal, to keep the sides of the skin
from sticking together. The operation is now completed, excepting the
skinning and stuffing of the tail.

‘The skinning of the tail is sometimes a more difficult business than
all the rest put together. The stump of the tail must be fastened to a
strong string, or in large animals, a cord, and the string tied to a beam,
or hook in the wall, so as to bring the tail about on a level with a man’s
elbows, so that he may have full power over it. Two sticks, with a
square edge on each, but the edges not so sharp as to cut the skin, must
be applied, one on each side of the tail, and tied so as to inclose the stump
between them. They are then to be taken hold of on each side, and
forced down the tail, separating the skin from the flesh and bones, as
they descend. This process prevents the skin from being turned inside
out ; which it is well to avoid, for it is very difficult, and sometimes im-
possible to get it right again. The skin of the tail is to be well smeared
inside with arsenical soap, and a very small quantity of tow, or a small
rope may be introduced by means of a split rattan, to keep its sides
apart.

‘ When the skin is thus prepared, it must be put in a cool airy place to
dry, and after a day or two, it may be set in the sunshine. In damp or
wet weather, however, it is better to put it in the sun immediately after
being prepared with arsenical soap, otherwise the epidermis or scarf skin
is liable to come off, and bring the hair along with it.

Care must be taken that skins thus prepared are well dried ; and they
should be sent off to be set up, as soon after they are dry, as possible. If

1835.] of Objects of Natural History. 465

kept for any length of time, they ought to be frequently sunned, and
always kept in an airy place, instead of being, as is too often done, shut up
in boxes. It is the notion that zoological specimens must be excluded
from the air, that has given rise to another notion not less absurd, that
they cannot be kept in India. The experience of some collectors is to the
contrary. And any person may analogically test it, by observing whether
paper, clothes, &c. are mildewed most, when shut up, or not.

When an animal has been skinned and stuffed as above, there are still
many parts of the body that are valuable to the comparative anatomist and
to the zoologist. ‘The bones of many animals are very valuable, and those
of new and rare species should always be preserved for examination. The
internal parts also of such species should be put into spirit and kept: the
parts most useful are, the thoracic and abdominal viscera, particularly the
heart and stomach; the organs of generation, external and internal ; and
the trachea, tongue and larynx.

The importance of affixing tallies to every specimen, and making notes and
memoranda concerning it, cannot be too much impressed upon the mind of the
collector. Every collection derives additional value from its having a good
catalogue attached to it; while without such a catalogue, the best preserved
specimens are often quite useless in a scientific point of view. As before
said, the age, sex, size, height, length, circumference, locality, manners,
colour of the eyes, form of the iris, and, in short, every thing peculiar about
the animal, should be noted with the greatest care.

Birps.

In birds the skinning process is still more easy than in mammalia; though,
as feathers are not so readily cleaned as hair, greater care must be taken
not to soil them.

Birds are best procured for the purposes of natural history, by the gun.
Those caught either in nets or by bird-lime, or any other means, are ge-
nerally more or less injured in their plumage. To prevent as far as pos.
sible the feathers being soiled by the blood, the shot, with which the gun
is charged, should be as small as is compatible with the size of the bird to
be brought down, and the quantity of powder should not exceed half the
usual load ; in short, just enough of both shot and powder should be employ-
ed to bring down the bird. If the bird is only wounded, it should be taken
hold of firmly under the wings, when by squeezing the sides of the body
together, it almost instantly dies. When dead, the feathers over the wound
should be blown aside, and a pledget of fine cotton placed upon it, to absorb
the blood as it oozes out. Another pledget should be placed on the vent, and
a quantity, proportionate to the size of the bird, must be put into the
mouth, to prevent the blood of the wounded internal parts from coming out
of the throat. The bird is then to be carefully wrapped in a handkerchief,
taken home, and hung in a cool place.

After being allowed to hang for three or four hours, to allow of the
coagulation of the blood, the skinning process may begin. ‘The bird is
laid upon its back, with its head towards the left hand of the operator ;
the feathers are carefully laid aside, and an incision is made from the
fore part of the chest above the merry-thought bone, along the breast
and abdomen, to midway between the breast bone and the vent. The
skin is carefully pushed aside with the handle of the scalpel, or the fingers
and thumb of the operator, backwards over the shoulder-joint, or that
joint where the wing joins the breast; an incision through that joint is
then very carefully made, (taking the greatest care to avoid cutting the
skin of the back,) so as to separate the wing from the body, and a similar
process is gone through on the other side. After having proceeded thus
far, it is necessary to introduce some cotton between the skin and the body
of the bird, to prevent the feathers from being soiled; and in fat water
birds, the parts should be well sprinkled with powdered chalk. The
mouth is next to be opened, and a pair of scissors pushed back into it, se

466 Hints for the Preservation [Aue.

far as to enable them to embrace each side of the neck, and cut the ver-
tebre or neck bones through as close as possible to the head. A hook is
then introduced into the fore part of the incision on the breast, so as to
catch hold of the neck ; when the bone may be readily drawn out, without
disturbing or injuring the feathers of the neck. A string is now to be
fastened to the vertebra of the neck, and the bird hung up to a hook in
the wall, or any other convenient place, and the skin very carefully drawn
off the back. 1t should be pushed rather than pulled, and with the fingers
and thumb nails rather than with the knife. Indeed, the less the knife
is used in skinning birds the better. Unless very great care is taken, the
skin will here be torn ; for on the back it is very tender, particularly so,
indeed, in some of the hawks and pigeons. When the hip joints are come
tu, the thighs and legs must be pushed up, so as to allow of their being
Gut off at the joint next to the hip-joint, leaving what is generally thought
to be the thigh, but which is, in reality, the leg, attached to the skin.
The skinning then proceeds down to the rump, and the skin is finally
separated by cutting through with a strong pair of scissors the rump bone
in the middle, leaving at least half of that bone attached to the skin.

Ja cleaning the head, the tongue and trachea, or wind pipe, attached to
it, must be drawn out ; and the gullet or cesophagus also, if that part has
not been previously removed by the withdrawal of the neck. <A pair of
sharp-puinted scissors must be run through the top of the inside of the
mouth into the brain, first on one side the head and then on the other, so
as to cut a triangular flap in the base of the skull. This flap is then to be
detached by seizing and twisting it out with a pair of forceps, long and
slender, like those in the common dressing case of a surgeon. The brain is
then easily removed through this opening, by means of forceps; a bit of
wire bent into a hook, and cotton wrapped round the end of the forceps
into a ball to wipe it out. When the brain is removed, the eyes are to be
taken out: and this is done by introducing from the mouth a hook form-
ed like the Look found in the anatomist’s dissecting case ; by means of
which, the eye is laid hold of and pulled inwards ; taking care, at the same
time, to detach it, by cutting the skin or folding of the outer coat of the
eye, from its connections with the eyelid; and this must be managed
carefully : for if the eyelid is torn, the head of the bird on that side never
looks well when set up. The inside of the skull and eye-holes are to be
well wiped out with dry cotton, and smeared with arsenical soap; after
which, a pellet of cotton should be introduced into the eye-hole, and the
eyelid closed accurately over it, so as to preserve the roundness of the
part, A small qnantity of cotton, dipped in arsenical soap, must also be
put into the cavity of the head.

When the body has thus been removed from the skin, the wings are to
be skinned as far as the first joint from the shoulder ; and in a large bird,
a little beyond. The flesh isto be removed from the bones of the wing,
and the bones smeared over with arsenical paste, and covered with a small
quantity of tow, dipped in the same substance. ‘The legs are to be treated
exactly in the same manner as the wings, skinning them as far as can be
done without injuring the feathers.

When the bird is skinned, the skin must be smeared all over with
arsenical soap, on the inside, especially about the rump and wings, where
a good deal of flesh always remains. The inner side of the wings along
that part of the bones not skinned, and the inner sides of the pinion,
must have a small quantity of a solution of corrosive sublimate in spirits
of wine, put upon them with a camel’s hair pencil. For birds with a
colourless plumage, it matters little of what strength this solution is made ;
but for those of the more delicate colours, two grains of the corrosive
sublimate to one ounce of spirit will be enough ; and this strength should
not be exceeded, or the colours may be injured. A certain quantity of
cotton is next to be put into the neck and body of the bird ; the plumage

1835.] of Objects of Natural History. 467

should be smoothed down ; a cone of paper, with the top cut off, to allow of
the protrusion of the bill, is then made, and the bird put into it, and hung
up to dry.

In the above process, there are some points in which the ¢ommon
rules of preserving the skins of birds are departed from in the following
particulars; in the first place, the skinning process is different from that
generally fullowed, in as much as the skin of the neck is never everted in
this as it is in the common way, so that all the stretching of the skin and de-
rangement of the feathers, which invariable accompany the other plan, are
avoided; and the inconvenience arising from which, in birds having large
heads and slender necks, is very great: so much so, indeed, that in some
birds, it is impossible to draw the head through the neck, and the making
an incision, even, at the back of the head has been recommended. ‘The
rump is only half cut through, instead of being taken almost entirely out,
whereby the feathers of the tail are faster and are carried better than
they otherwise can be ; and if plenty of arsenical soap is used, no incon-
venience follows from this. The wings are less deranged than in the com-
mon way; and by commencing to take off the skin from the fore part of
the bird, there is less danger of damage to the feathers from blood,
oozing from the inside, than if the hinder part is skinned first. By the eve
too being taken out from the inside of the mouth, the feathers at the side
of the head, which generally are of delicate colours and structure, are not
so frequently injured as by their being removed through the eyelids. Upon
this point it may likewise be remarked, that the eye may be left in altoge..
ther, if the cornea is touched with the before-mentioned solution of corro.
sive sublimate in spirit of wine: and when the specimen is dry, the eye
may then readily be cut out, and a ball of wet cotton put in its place ; and
the eyelid becoming soft, may be arranged as before.

Before a bird is skinned, it is well to notice several points that may be
useful to the naturalist, as well as to the person who eventually stuffs and
sets up the skin.

The colour of the eye should be noted down, taking care to define the
shade as accurately as possible. The weight of the bird, its length, from
tip of the bill and crown of the head, to the end of the middle toe, to the
rump, and tip of the tail, should be taken ; as well as the expansion of the
wings. If there are any naked parts about the base of the bill, or the
head, their colour must be particularly noted, as the colour of these parts
is apt to change, as will indeed sometimes that of the bill and legs: these
latter therefore should be mentioned too. In short, every thing that strikes
the observer as peculiar about the bird, should carefully be noted down.

RepriLes.

In the preservation of reptiles, no great trouble is required. When
taken, every thing likely to interest the naturalist, or any future observer,
it is well to record ; while their dimensions and weight should always
be mentioned. ‘They may be divided into three kinds for the purpose of
this essay. Ist, Chelonian reptiles, or those having a hard covering, as
the tortoises ; 2nd, four-footed scaly-skinned reptiles, forming the Lacertan
or lizard tribe ; 3rd, the Batrachians, or frogs and toads ; 4th, Serpents.

Chelonian reptiles are best preserved, by carefully removing the inside
by an incision made in the soft parts, by the side of the fore or hind legs ;
though in some, particularly in large specimens, it is necessary to separate
entirely the upper shell from the lower, cutting through the hard parts
at the sides, before the inside can be removed. ‘The less disturbance,
however, of the shell, the better, and the less the bones are deranged, the
greater the use of the specimen. When the inside, or so much of it as
can well be got out, is removed, the shell should be smeared on the in-
side with preservative, and the outside may be brushed over with the cor-
rosive sublimate solution. The brain of reptiles is very small, and enclosed
in a hard long case ; and it matters not much if it is removed or not, as

468 Hints for the Preservation [Auc.

enough of the preservative penetrates to that organ to prevent injury to
the surrounding parts, if the mouth is well filled, and an iron rod or
skewer employed to pierce the various parts of the head from the mouth.
Some reptiles of this order have long necks ; in them the neck may be
skinned through an incision made in the lower part, where the neck
joins the chest ; but when the shell is removed, there is no difficulty in
skinning the neck through the opening that is necessarily made.

Chelonian reptiles may be stuffed with cotton, like mammalia, for the
purpose of conveying them from one place to another.

The larger lizards, crocodiles, alligators, &c. must be skinned and
stuffed, and treated in all respects as mammalia. The smaller may be put
into spirit.

Frogs are very difficult to deal with: they are hard to skin and stuff ;
and when done, the colours for the most part fade. In spirit, the colours
fade also, but not so much, perhaps as when preserved dry, while the
form is kept better.

Toads are generally of a sombre colour, and keep pretty well either
stuffed or in spirit.

It is not an agreeable thing to stuff a toad. It is done by putting a
sharp-pointed pair of scissors into his mouth, cutting through the spine,
and drawing it, and the whole of the inside, out through the mouth. The
thighs and fore-legs are to be separated from the rest of the skeleton, and
replaced in the skin; or if time is allowed, the skeleton itself may be de-
nuded of all the soft parts, and replaced in the skin: and the skin is then
to be filled by the mouth with sand. The feet should be fastened down
with pins to a bit of card or soft wood, and the preparation put to dry:
when dry, a hole should be made in the belly, to let out the sand, and it
should be varnished with some good hard, colorless varnish: copal per-
haps is the best*.

Very large snakes may be stuffed as mammalia are, taking care, however,
not to fill the skin so full as is generally done. The size of the artificial
body should be as near possible that of the natural one. Small snakes
should be kept in spirit of wine.

Fisnes.

Fishes, if small, may be put into spirit of wine—if large, they must be
skinned, very carefully, and stuffed. It is an easy way of stuffing fish, to
make an incision along the side of the dorsal or back fin, laying the fish
open from end to end. The back bone, and all the inside, is then to be
taken out as close to the skin as may be, without cutting it ; the arsenical
soap is applied well over the inside, the incision sewed up, and the skin
filled with sand by the mouth. When full, the mouth should be open-
ed or shut, according to the position it is wished for it to remain in—a
wire, twisted into a tripod at each end, is placed to support the fish, and
allow it to dry ; and when nearly dry, it must be varnished, with the same
varnish as that recommended for reptiles ; by which means, the colours are
pretty well preserved. When the fish is quite dry, the sand must be poured
out at the mouth, and the specimen is ready to be sent to its destination.

CRUSTACEA.

Crustacea are found in various situations. Some are to be met with in the
nets of the fisherman; some, as the sea crabs, may be caught by a line, baited
with a muscle; others are found running about the sides of tanks, rivers,
and shores of the sea ; and others again, the parasitic crustacea, in various
situations about the bodies of animals, especially on the gills of fish, or
fixed on their bodies.

* Good copal varnish for this purpose is made by digesting powdered gum copal,
without beat, for 48 hours, in spirit of turpentine : pouring off the clear turpentine,
and allowing the varnish so made to evaporate in the sun to the proper consistence.
By repeated digestions with turpentine, the whole of the copal may be dissolved, if
pure; and the dissolution may be assisted by adding a little camphor to the turpen-

tine, before pouring it upon the gum.

3835.] of Objects of Natural History. 469

Crustaccous animals, such as crabs,‘ lobsters, cray-fish, &c. may be all
preserved in spirit of wine, but they generally lose their colours. Small
ones may be dried as they are, but the larger specimens require to have
the inside removed. Crabsare readily cleared, by taking off their shell,
and drying it separated from the body, which has been previously freed
from all the soft parts it contained. ‘The corrosive sublimate solution is
the best thing for the outside of crustacea, but arsenical paste should be
smeared within. Great care is requisite to prevent crustacea being injured
in drying, and they should be carefully packed in a good quantity of
cotton, or the legs or antenne will assuredly be broken.

Crustacea may be killed, if altogether breathers of water, merely by tak-
ing them out of that element. If partially or wholly livers upon the land,
spirit of wine kills them readily enough. But care must be taken in
handling some of them ; for the crabs in particular make nothing of cast-
ing off a leg or two, with as much ease as a lizard does his tail.

Insrcrs.

The class Insecta contains a vast variety of animals. The mode of pre-
serving them, however, is very much alike in all.

Insects are found in so many situations, that it is impossible to particu-
larize more than a few. Upon and within vegetables living and dead; be-
tween the bark and the wood, and in the trunks and holes of trees ; in the
loose earth at their roots ; under stonesor logs of wood that have long been
lying on the ground ; at the roots of grass ; between the leaves that grow
close along the stem of some plants, as the plantain, sugar-cane, and many
of the grasses ; in bones and horns, both within their hollow cavities and in
their substance itself. Dead carcases of animals and putrid animal matter
of all kinds contain some very beautiful specimens: and some of the finest
kinds are found in water, both stagnant and running ; in short, it is more
easy to tell where insects may not be found than where they may.

Insects that feed upon trees and high shrubs, may be caught by placing
a table cloth beneath, and beating the branches with a pole ; when the in-
sects are shaken down upon the eloth, and easily seen. A white chattah
answers the same purpose almost equally well with atable cloth, and is more
convenient to carry ; besides being serviceable in another way. They are
easily taken in a net made of curtain gauze formed like a cabbage net,
and fastened to a hoop at the end of a long stick. By making the handle
of your net with joints like a fishing-rod, you are enabled to reach the
higher branches. In using this net, which is well adapted for butter-flies,
dragon-flies, bees, wasps, and other insects that are caught on the wing,
a peculiar turn is given to bring the tail part of the net over the han-
dle, doubling it on the rim; by which means the prey is prevented from
escaping. Another net may be made to fold up, having two poles or
handles on each side, made of bamboo, or other easily bending wood:
these handles are straight until near the top, when they are bent off at nearly
aright angle, and fastened together with a string, or two pieces of wire,
looped together to form a hinge: the lower part of the side poles are fast-
ened together at a proper distance, say two and a half or three feet, with a
small cord, leaving enough of the lower ends, to form handles, by which to
use the net. The whole is then to be covered with gauze, from the upper
end down to the cord below, when the net is complete. ‘To use it, little
skill is required ; one handle is taken in each hand, and it is held up open,
against any insect it is wished to catch, and shut up by bringing the handles
together quickly, when the insect is secured between the fold of the gauze.
Large pincers with loops or rings, and with gauze between their loops, are
also used ; but the common nets, described above, are the best ; and, indeed,
all that are necessary. Coleopterous insects, or beetles ; Hymeropterous, or
wasps, bees, &c.; Hemipterous, or bugs, &c., and, indeed, all others, save
the Neuroptera, or dragon-flies, an d the Lepidoptera, or butter-flies, moths,
&c. when caught, are to be put into a bottle containing a little spirit of

3 P

470 Hints for the Preservation — (Aue.

wine. But those which have any particular marks of delicate colours, and
those whose colours depend upon a powder strewn over them, must not be
placed in spirit, but alive into boxes; and it is best. to put but one insect
into each box. Butter-flies must be taken between the thumb and finger,
and pressed at the sides of the thorax, just under the wings, when they al-
most immediately die. Dragon-flies may be killed in the same manner.

When the insects are brought home, those kept in the spirit should be
taken out, and if of sombre colours, placed in a solution of corrosive sub-
limate for an hour or two, when they may be put upon pins, and made
ready for preserving them. Those insects that cannot be placed in spirit,
on account of their delicate colours, &c., should be taken out of the boxes,
and put into a glass, or a wide-mouthed bottle, and the glass or bottle with
the mouth closed may have a bit of camphor or a drop of ether, or a bit
of carbonate of ammonia put into it, placed in a basin of hot-water, when
they soon die. Prussic acid has been used for the same purpose, and its
effects are said to be instantaneous: but its employment may be dangerous
to the operator, if great care be not taken.

When an insect is dead, it should be smeared over the under surface with
arsenical soap, or LaTREILLE’s preservative, the preparation of which has
been given before ; a pin, proportioned to its size, must be run, if a beetle,
through the right elytrum or wing-case, and brought through the under
side, between the second and third leg ; and then it must be placed in a box
or drawer. Other insects of all kinds should have the pin run through
the thorax, or piece of the back, just in front of the elytra, and brought
out between the legs below.

Asa mere collector’s cabinet, one convenient enough for the purpose
may be made of any box; a French claret box, for instance, answers quite
well enough, if provided with a close lid, to prevent ants and cockroaches
from entering it, and fitted up with trays to run in grooves about 24 inches
apart. The bottom of each tray must have a flat piece of solah well press-
ed; ora layer of cork, about 4 of an inch thick, covered with paper, fas-
tened on to it, will be better still, in which the pins, with the insects upon
them, are to be stuck: or the top, bottom and sides of the box may be
lined with solah or cork, so as to do without trays or drawers at all. Every
fine day this box should be placed in the sun, to dry the specimens ; taking
care to keep the lid shut, that the light may not enter: for light destroys
the more delicate colours of insects. With these precautions, insects may
be kept for any length of time: for when once well prepared, the only
thing requisite is to keep them dry.

Some very small insects cannot be run though witha pin. These should
be placed upon a triangular piece of quill, cut into this form p=, the
sharpest angle being introduced into the insect at its underside, between
two of the rings of the abdomen. A pin is then run through the broad
end, and the whole stuck in to the box thus da. This is an improve-
ment upon the plan hitherto recommended, of pasting the insect upon a
triangular piece of card, inasmuch as it not only looks better, but it al-
lows the under part of the insect to be seen, instead of hiding the charac-
ters of that part, which in some genera are very important.

Spiders are difficult to preserve, without their losing their plumpness
and beautiful colours. Spirit of wine has been recommended, and when it
is used, a good many may be put into a bottle together. If it is wished to
preserve them dry, they may have the inside of the abdomen squeezed
out, through a hole made in their under surface, and the cavity filled with
very finely chopped cotton, or with sand; and then they may be pinned
into the boxes. Larreinie recommends that the abdomen be cut off from
the thorax, stuck upon a stick, and introduced into a bottle, fastening
the stick into the cork, so as not to touch the sides, and holding the
bottle over a lamp or fire, till the specimen becomes dry, which is then
stuck on the thorax again. Any of these plans will do with some of the

1835. ] of Objects of Natural History. 471

genera of spiders, tolerably, but none of them answer well. Caterpillars

are. in the same predicament as spiders, though a method of preserving

them in all their beauty is said to have been discovered by Mr. Assorr, of

Georgia, which seems to have been lost at his death. ;
Motwvsca.

Those animals which, as their name imports, have soft bedies, and
which, for the most part, are covered with a true shell, are divided
into two kinds: those which inhabit the land, and those which live
in the water. The latter are again divided into fresh and salt-water
Mollusca ; and a third portion seems to dwell in marshes, the estuaries of
rivers, &c., forming an union, as it were, between the other two. The
fresh-water Mollusca are found in tanks, running streams, and watery
places of all kinds, either lying at the bottom, or floating in the midst,
or/attached to weeds, stones, and other extraneous substances. Salt-water
shells are found in similar situations in the sea ; some bury themselves in
the sand, which is covered at high-water by.the tide; while others may be
found floating along upon the surface of the waves ; and dead specimens lie
scattered upon the shore. Marsh shells are to be met with in the estuaries
of rivers and in wet places, whenever the salt-water mingles with the fresh.

The localities of land shells or snails, as they are generally called, are
numerous. ‘These shells are to be found upon the trunks and branches of
trees, and lying or creeping beneath them ; others are hidden under stones
and pieces of timber, or weeds, or other vegetable matter. The best sea-
son to procure them is in the rains ; and they are not found in abundance
saving in moist places.

Having learnt the localities of the various kinds of shells, no great skill
is needed to procure them. Land-shells may of course be picked up
with the hand, and taken home in a box: fresh-water shells, by looking for
them in their dwelling places, and by dredging them up by a net. Sea-shells
are dredged up by nets, having a kind of strong rake attached to the front,
to rake them from the bottom ; when by continuing to draw on the net, the
shells fall into it and are caught. Pelagian shells, those that swim upon
the wayes in the middle of the sea, are procured by a kind of small net,
that is towed in the wake of a ship, or cast by a dexterous hand upon the
floating animal from the deck. It is in the form of a cabbage net, about a
foot and a half in diameter, with a rim round the top, made heavy with
shot ; and fitted with a long line, to allow of its being towed, or pulled in
again after it has been thrown.

When procured, put the shells into boiling water, and boil them for a
few minutes, to kill the animal; so that it may be removed in the spiral
shells with a small hook, or a crooked pin: the animal of the bivalves may
be taken out easily enough with the fingers, or a pair of forceps. But
some of the very long spiral shells reyuire to be left in water till the ani-
mal becomes so putrid that it may be washed out. The shell should then
be cleaned with soap and water, dried, and kept ina box. In cleaning
shells, great care must be taken not to break or injure their margins or
mouths; and in land-shells, particularly, not to scrub off, er otherwise
remove the epidermis, or skin-like substance that covers them.

Each kind of shell should have a box to itself ; and the box must be num-
bered, or the number mzy be written uponthe shell itself, if it is large
enough to allow of that being done. The numbers should refer to memo-
randa of the locality, kind of animal, or any other interesting particu-
lar concerning the specimen, that may be knewn to the writer.

By carefully following these directions, a zoological collection may be
made, that will, with tolerable care being taken of it, keep in any climate.
The mounting, as it is called, or setting up the skins of birds and beasts,
to look like the living animals, is another branch of the subject ; and one
that can be followed only by persons stationary, and with success, after
long practice ; but as it is the step, to which the foregoing instructions have
been but preparatory, a few hints on that head will hereafter be given

3P2

472 Asiatic Society. fAue.

VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, 2nd September, 1835.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the Chair.

Mr. F. Corsyn, proposed at the last meeting, was balluted for, and duly
elected a Member of the Society.

Messrs. H. Pinpineron, E. Dean, and C. Brownto,w proposed at the
last meeting, were upon the favorable Report of the Committee of Papers,
elected Associate Members.

The Secretary brought up and read the following Draft of a Memorial
to the Honorable the Court of Directors, prepared by the Sub-Committee,
nominated at the Meeting of the 1st July last.

“To the Honorable the Chairman and Court of Directors of the East India
Company.
The Memorial and Humble
Petition of the Asiatic Society
of Calcutta,
Sheweth,

That the Asiatic Society, as your Honorable Court is aware, was instis
tuted in the year 1784, for the purpose of “ Enquiring into the History,
. Civil and Natural, the Antiquities, Arts, Sciences, and Literature of Asia.”

That since its institution, its exertions have been continually directed
to the above objects ; that it has numbered amongst its members all the
most distinguished students of Oriental Literature ; and that it has suc-
ceeded in bringing to light many of the hidden stores of Asiatic learning,
and in drawing and keeping alive the attention of your Governments in
India, to the great importance and advantage of such researches.

That it was soon discovered, however, that mere individual efforts, or
even the combined exertions of individuals, might, indeed, keep alive
the spirit of inquiry, but could do little to diffuse amongst the people
themselves, the knowledge of their ancient languages and literature, in
which the whole of the legal and religious institutions of Hindusthan
were embodied and preserved, and which, at the date of the introduction
of British rule, were found in the exclusive possession of the priesthood,
guarded with jealous monopoly as a means of influence and emolument,
and doled out and interpreted to the uninitiated, as it suited their preju-
dices and interests. The public aid and encouragement of the existing
Government was wanting to supply the resources formerly derived from
the bounty of the native princes and nobles, which had shrunk in propor-
tion as the British dominion advanced ; and the neeessity of it became at
length so urgent, as to force itself upon the notice of the local authorities.
Your Memorialists have only to refer to the recorded minute of the Right
Honorable Lorp Muyo, Governor General, dated 6th March, 1811, a copy
of which is annexed.

That the British legislature, upon the occasion of the renewal of the
Charter Act of 1813, (53rd, George III. ¢. 55,) made an express provi-
sion, that ‘‘a sum of not less than one lakh of rupees, in each year, should
be set apart, and applied to the revival and improvement of literature and
the encouragement of the learned natives of India, and for the introduc-
tion and promotion of a knowledge of the sciences among the inhabitants
of the British territories in India.”

That in pursuance of the above enactment, the Supreme Government,
accordingly, set apart the amount prescribed, which was appropriated, con-
jointly with sums previously granted by Government and other private
endowments, partly towards the support or enlargement of the Sanscrit-
and Hindu Colleges of Calcutta and Benares; the Muhammedan Col.
leges of Calcutta and Delhi, the establishment of English Schools in these
and other places ; and partly towards the publication, as well of standard
works, in the Sanscrit and Arabie languages, as of translations of English

18385. ] Asiatic Society. 473

works into those languages, a list of which is hereto also annexed, show.
ing what works have been completed, and what are still unfinished.
That this appropriation continued until the 7th of March, 1835, when,
by an order of the Supreme Government, a copy of which is annexed,
the whole of the works then in progress, and of which the particulars
are therein given, were suspended, and the funds before devoted there-
to, as well as those which should occur from the eventual reduction
of the Sanscrit and Arabic Colleges, ordered to be employed exclusively,
“in imparting to the native population a knowledge of English literature
and science, through the medium of the English language.” 7

That the Asiatic Society, considering the public and complete with-
drawal of all support, from the funds of Government, to the revival of the
ancient literature of the country, as a measure fatal to the objects and
principles, the advancement of which they had so long been labouring to
promote, were induced, by the urgency of the occasion, to make a humble
representation to the Government upon the subject : but that their endea-
vours were ineffectual, as will appear by copy of the Memorial and answer
also annexed.

That it is with regret and reluctance that your Memorialists are com-
pelled for once to step beyond the immediate objects of their institution,
and to become appellants to the liberality and justice of your Honorable
Court.

That your Memorialists do not presume, for a moment, to question,
either the discretionary power of the Supreme Government to apportion
the Parliamentary grant in question, to such objects as to it shall appear
the most deserving, or the soundness of the construction it has put upon the
terms of the statute; still less is it their wish or intention to obstruct or
depreciate the noble project of diffusing amongst the natives of India the
knowledge of the language of their rulers, and thus enabling them, by their
own efforts, to naturalize amongst themselves the arts and the sciences
and the literature of Europe. But inasmuch as the entire subversion of
the national language is a project neither contemplated nor possible, they
humbly submit, that the diffusion of the English language is manifestly
but one step towards the common end in view; that the study and im-
provement of the languages of the country isa step of at least equal
importance, and that no means have been yet suggested so likely to for.
ward that study and improvement, as the revival of the ancient languages
and literature, the objects still of popular veneration—the source of all
that is intellectual or valuable in the mixed dialects now in use, and the
only model to recur to for their amendment or purification.

That, so long as the laws of the Hindus and Muhammedans shall continue
to be the rule of judicial decision upon the rights of property, it is surely
essential to the due administration of justice, to render the repositories of
those laws generally accessible ; so long as their religious system shall not
be merely tolerated but protected, it is surely a matter of urgent conse-
quence to favilitate the access, not of the people only, but of their rulers
also, to the volumes that contain their tenets ; and if the advancement of
knowledge be regarded as the introduction to a’ purer faith, and higher
tone of moral feeling, your Memorialists would urge, that no measure can
be more effectual for the destruction of the sanctuaries of superstition,
than that of rending the veil of mystery and ignorance, that has hitherto
concealed its deformities.

That if the Governments of India had never stretched out a helping
hand to foster and diffuse the knowledge of Asiatic literature, your
native subjects might have regretted the apathy of their rulers, yet could
not have complained, either of caprice or of abandonment. But thus to
withdraw the support which it had for at any period afforded, appears to

475 Asiatic Society. [Aus

be such a destruction of their hopes, as the experience of British rule had
by no means prepared them for. And your Memorialists are well assured,
that if your Honorable Court shall deem it inexpedient to alter that eppro-
priation of the Parliamentary fund, which the local Government has
determined upon, you will readily and cheerfully devise some other means
of continuing that encouragement to the cause of Asiatic literature, which
reflected honor on the hand that dispensed it.

Your Memorialists, therefore, humbly pray, that your Honorable Court
will be pleased to continue the encouragement hitherto afforded to the
revival of learning among its native subjects, and to direct that such rea-
sonable sum may be supplied from the territorial revenues, as may be
sufficient for promoting amongst the natives at large the study of the
ancient language and literature of their country.”

Resolved unanimously, that the Draft be approved and adopted, and the
Memorial signed by the President, onthe part of the Society, be transmitted
without delay to the Honorable Court, through the local Government.

The Secretary reported the general opinion of the Committee of Papers,
in favor of continuing the publication of the “ Researches,” in the quarto
form, which was accordingly Resolved.

The report of the Committee of Papers, on the proposition of the Catho-
lic Bishop of Isorovolis, was submitted, as well as a letter from Govern-
ment, declining to patronize the publication of his Cochin-Chinese and
Latin Dictionary.

Resolved, that the Bishop be made acquainted with the unfortunate
result of the application to Government ; and with the great regret of the
Society, at having of itself no means to undertake such a work: with an
offer also, should it meet his wishes, to transmit the manuscripts home
to the Royal Asiatic Society, of which the Oriental Translation Commit-
tee may probably be induced to undertake the publication.

The Secretary submitted the determination and arrangements of the
Committee of Papers, in regard to the Oriental Publications made over by
Government.

[The substance of these will be found in the Prospectus published with the
July No.]

Library.

The following Books were presented.

Notes of Lectures delivered at the College Hall of Madras, by G. Noron,
Esq., Advocate Genl. of Madras, on the system of Government and adminis-
tration of Justice in India—dy Cavelly Venkata Laxmiah, through Kumar
Radhacant Deb.

Col. Beauroy’s Hydraulic and Nautical Experiments —by his Son, the publisher.

The Indian Journal of Medical Sciences, No. 21, for September— dy the Editor.

Meteorological Register, for July, 1835—by the Surveyor General.

Hurcutnson’s Report on the Medical Management of the Native Jails through-
out the territories subject to the Governments of Fort William and Agra—by the
Author.

Museum.

A letter from H. BuunpEern, Esq. Commissioner at Arracan, presented
for the Society’s museum, a cast metal Drum, as a specimen of the skill of
the rude and barbarous tribes on the northern frontier of the Moulmein
district, called the Red Kayrens. An extract from Dr. Ricnarnson’s MS.
journal of his mission to the Shan countries was read in explanation.

[This Journal should have been published long since; but it has been accident-
ally mislaid—we refrain from publishing the extract, in hopes of obtaining another
copy of the whole.]

A letter from M. Drs Novers, of the Mauritius, acknowledging his
election as an Honorary Member, and presenting a stuffed ‘‘ Devil,” (Dus.
yurus Ursus, ) from’New South Wales.

1835.] Asiutic Society. 475

A letter from Lieutenant Newsorp, announced the despatch for present.
ation of a series of Geological Specimens of the Malay Peninsula.
The following mounted specimens were presented by M. Boucue’:
1. Loxia Oryzivora, (the Ploceus | 6. Bucco.
Oryzivora of Cuvier.) 7. Oriolus Melanocephalus.
2. Merops Viridis. © 8. Brachypus Jacosus.
3. Columba Tigrina. 9. Pavo Cristatus.
4. Muscicapa (?) Saularis. 10. Anastomus Coromandelianus.
5. Bucco Cyunops. 1]. Canis Familiaris Extrarius.
Also a nest of the Lowia (Ploceus) Philippinus.
A live specimen of the Python Amethystina, was presented by P. Cu1enn, Esq.

34th Regt. N. I.

Literary and Antiquities.

Read a letter from W. H. Waruen, Esq. dated Bombay, June 1835,
enclosing fac-similes of two ancient grants on copper, dug up in Gujerat,
with an analysis of the form of Nagariin which they are engraved, a
translation, and a memoir on the subject.

[This valuable paper will appear in our next.]

A letter from C. Norris, Esq. Chief Secretary to the Bombay Govern-
ment, forwarded copy of a Report on some inscriptions found at Hummum,
on the Southern Coast of Arabia, by Assistant Surgeon Hutton, and Mr.
Smuitx of the Palinurus, while that vessel was employed under command
ot Captain Harnss, in negociating with the Sultan of Kishen, for the pur-
chase of the Island of Socotra, and subsequently on the survey of the South
Coast of Arabia.

[This paper will have early attention.]

A letter from G. W. Trait, Esq., Commissioner of Kemaon, forwarded
copies of several inscriptions in unknown characters (ancient Nagari), at
Buarahat and Gopeswar in Garhwél.

A letter from M. Ricuy, communicated a late discovery of a singular
inscription ou the passage leading to the theatre at Pompeii, of which an
account has been lately published by M. De Cuarac, Curator of Antiqui-
ties in the Louvre at Paris.

The inscription is as follows: AD XI K DECEMB. A XV, EPAPRA, ACVTUS,
AVCTVS AD LOCVM DVXERVNT MVLIEREM TYCHEN ET PRETIVM IN SINGVLOS A.
VIII M. MESSALA L. LENTVLO COS.

Without adverting to the shameless nature of the advertisement of the three
freedmen, this inscription is deemed a curiosity from its containing a specific date
(the only one found at Pompeii), and the name of two consuls, who had been the
subject of controversy among antiquarians.

Casts of three gold coins of the Indo-Scythic King Kappuisgs, were pre-
sented in the name of Colonel T. P. Suira.

These highly curious coins were procured in the common bazar at Benfres,
whither they were brought two years ago by a Marhatta pilgrim. The Greek in-
scription on all is most clear, BACLAEVC OOKMO KAA®ICHC, and the devices
differ from all hitherto discovered. One of them represents the king in a Grecian
war-chariot. We shall hasten to preseut our readers with an engraving of them.

The Secretary exhibited to the Members present, Colonel Sracy’s exten-
sive collection of Indian coins, just arrived from the Upper Provinces.

The series of ancient Hindu coins filling one cabinet is highly interesting,
and more complete perhaps than any hitherto collected. Of the Canouj groupe,
One coin attracted particular notice from its bearing in most legible characters
the name of Samupra Guerra, the sovereign mentioned on the Allahabad Lath ;
but no where else that has hitherto been discovered. We propose immediately
to glean some of the riches from Colonel Sracy’s labours, in illustration of our

Indian Numismatics,

476

*‘jensn sv pajyenyjis pue ‘oures 97 SJUSUINAJSUT

“TaYJVIM JTC(euosves ‘ysea pue yMoS =, OO'TT, E96 | FOL 9 “Gl eH | EF { 0°C8 (E0aT
oe) tees} “pULIOYIVS riquneaan) ‘mua AU MMU SS of SOOT | BLL § 696) He | 9'E | I°FB IsoU'T

‘ured paey “ured op SAKtte SS ANS mSAN OPSL | O66 | OfeL Lat 218
op ‘OZZ1Ip uIRd ‘O80 “AS ‘0 Ors fF O06 | Ze fF 66) FS | 6S | 6°38 loposT
*UI101S “Apnoyo *<pnoyo "MS ‘Ms ‘MS Go 4 ZEB ain ae e% | 2% | L668 |9805T
op op sured *}39S “ou ‘a e'eg | oS 51 9% | VE | 958 Zot
“<pnoyo ‘UIeI “YJA5 *UIeL ‘a8: ‘Ou SEL OLST F G28 abd ‘96 ee | 98 | 158 \ePL't
*UrRL *a[ZZ1Ap op ‘as vou ‘au FOG F168 | 8°Z/ | £46) Gs | se | tts jor‘
op “IQ ULL op pO: SocLNE er Gh 9'F6 e184 96) L'é | LE | e'98 |128'T

op ‘auy op “ou ‘8 ~au PCOT | 194 0°28
£ *4SVI19A0 op op 2) ‘a [oof J efeor | 164 | ‘P6| ee | gfe | Tae loge't
= op “{pnoyo op ‘ou ‘as “ sZ0r | B82 | FG) 1% | Ge | $28 \ooa‘T
3 op Op © op ‘aS tas =) Picgr | L544 | (1G) a9 | zo | 1°88 lze‘r
“3 op *aUy ‘uy a "as sf 905 7 F'20r a9 4 ‘ob 89 | HL | L'L8 leseT
- °Or7Z7 ‘ * . . Aveds ¢ “> ‘
a eu BUZZED 6: 107 3 ‘as ‘a 0g" $96 Ca 9'F | oF 198 [P33'T

Re “ul p 1pnwNd : a al os F098 | F, ; 9 | 068

a __f3uy ‘ouy "Tquutul ee S |e | roo | ete | | lots | aug
= siemoys "ays ‘mina *1S¥019A0 S ‘as "98 Or Of | e°OL 16 oe | Te | S‘F8 le6r't
ae) op ‘Apnoyo op ‘aS ‘as ‘asf OBS FE bI6 | Bed | 20) OF |otp | ofte \zer'T
a “out op “Tynuino S80) S88 ‘a oP op fag | Loh § 86) 0% | Le | bee les 7
aS *AIaMOYS op *JSCO19A0 ‘au tau 8 FG | GCL | 86) I | Ge | 9°98 logi‘T
SS) on op ‘ou 'N ‘as *as a: O'00T Ly ‘0g 0% | Fe | L£°68 cor't
= : Co) “In "MS “MS Q ¢ 9G ‘ol ‘g : ‘
oS “UILI aaek BH ues 'S 7 e 00‘T ‘68 Lich ee ie ate ee

3S *ouy *Tj7uM *4S8019A0 SAAS. CANES SOG IAA OOT | BGG | FLL Ge | $8
= *ki@mOys kzey op ‘HN ‘HN ‘oO | SOT} Sort | B42 | fag] eto | ots | $28 \zeat
*uIed prey op op “MS = “MS ‘0 Bor | UBL TG) Lo | 080 | 0°28 Ipar*T
Azey op op SOS “MG “M 0*cO1 £°6L *c6| Ob | Lb | 8°98 legg‘q
oP [ou ae oh) i SMS . | S201 erst ‘86 9°¢ Ls | 798 |5aa‘r
“aug }S2I19A0 pnojo Js os “AM 08° Ff 8°T6 €*9h 66) S°7 19 | 198 ipsT 1

uret ‘yap ured Mw "MUM 0 G8 9'e6 | BFL 9b | fas
“duluajzayy ‘auy *11Ry "9S '8SS AN 116 | O'LL F e6/S'> |r | 098 lect*r
- 5 e | 8 eg] EI E [39 fgz| eel ay) es] ee
: > < : > 8 5 me FSe| ae ml a | ata
S : i 2 5 3 : Ge ee PR | ee en | pe) ee
# z ee Be oe. B | 9 [8z|eclge| ee! su

. > ° oR o <7

eof ee si) aE

: a2 °

"SOUT Xx
“TayIeA MA *pulAd papacy ay ‘W *d } 3e SUOTIVAIESYO
19981594

G&S f°96
€7e 66
Loe‘

}06P 5°66
por ae
EF9 VLG
06g (86
GRE ELE
eur i r6
Bor‘

069166
099186

|
|
|

*1a alos
irey

“AW

~

Sos aaa

Aon S a

“m0 3A FT
Id SAlsoT

~
~~

n
OD <ttAg

‘IW ‘V OL Je SUOTJBAIESAO

=
~

|

3

Hf Piao aaa alos

an

<4

=

aCe An

NOMOWMHOOMHONDS

SOA Hepsi Ns

*

a a

-

Poa CN

QIHDAAHSAAHODS H

>

Oe
om st oo tH

10 “BIG
*I1@ Ul 19}

*ssoidoq “\L

“IN

0‘F8)

oes
L508
0°38
6°Z8B
0°€8
6°28
C8

|

SUIOULIA YL

"egg ysnbnp fo yuopy ay? sof ‘DyInI2n9 ‘a01fQ hossp ayy yw yday ‘uazsvhay jnorbojo.0azayy

OLIT

6ST

9L0‘1
B0L‘T
GIT
76051
9ST
666'T

BIG
Plat
PSZ‘1
BIG‘
g6lT

LLU
FOL‘T
90651
ZO‘
L8UT
plist

961 T
L8U‘I
OLLI
GEL‘T
G80'T

LOUT

*poonpop
‘sbv

Bich @

"OGG Jef 1e}oUl
-o1eg JM

OSP*83|169°6

016‘

Gar‘
aLrs
eles
919°
90L*
919‘
ess
96¢°
sae.
e895
780°
G09‘

HOOD Hin OOS

"oCE Je
syayomore |
yuo ayy Jo Ae

Vol IV PLXL.-

fANVNFAYSTATU
gt Gq h Ford g sy
catg¢qh8 F8Faa4

at axa Sg acy uudoy.
ugighahbaosox
yeeLIUF Rays

et eruvada ra

Phar uruaye

yu foo §ucye
goPyezx PaAaea
SEVIUZ TIPHACHFLALGAY
F Braga 5 eqg says fF

TEMA YC ZLUTEHLG
YkOSeAt OLS:

VaDitoge

~ \ —— > o ‘_m
oun ay. Soe. hae : : 7 FLXL. ~—

Vel IV.

Facsimile af Inscription in the ancient. character
yfautaguagu td serdy Fur Barvoussguyst¥ngag igetaru
ggtagtagttrasrcarvegy cg ra FWars Bugr hed Powdagry
Jayeesgr gustav arzayatytes Er va5azd$eae Lataaa
agateugeag sa oeaadz PBR 84505 Guex ot ava h gaat uray.
Bxeatorsag FV acygedy way pqardeaW du gig had bdosod
og fevaderi gua ga Gugds duydsauyry de yh Scrughagy
yosarghdpuchyusogr sre furuvsogs: Ru sr eerha8z rea
THAeyyeauarFuuatneals fF Fus Ae L ay Vd iftarwuayy
Sep IFKtyaklaw ZavdFuShasy oBsV ne v3 a fodqGudye
Rrvag Hacy gris yuJdysyfasz Yew dgtgopyes Eaaasa
pRPDE Zags ETA aE Y Bt usvare lg af: Fur reur az: ag zegyzaigag
gycudncggfagefurptaauczroae wey AQF At agd ugg tayrs fF
RTF SHaFHYCrFayRashasagyty ra edagsfeas gegenjeseg
dren Varurstgrhygdaud-qrasee feeb fen yrs Fa fons:
aiwoFaLycsujyitzwazcsgya VHF LoD ATS OFT G cea 84
dgwsguhseeugeSfaasAyIaucVoywestutsgs- gute
VEN AUNT GL eFSauZansgsgacgescMusVYAaTisFys:
guhaqcyotgyynayraaxr leg q-aravs CRF HT:
sHeaf AFAbLI KATA voOgyZ Ig Bustarautgysagemifoge

Tour, WS. SOC.

IB Tassin lilh

Aphihel f the antient Cheracer
with the corresponding letters tn Devanagurt Simple consonants

a es

=
AD Ewes ee eh es yn ou) A
&

NS

ee et ere ee a Or
Cove Bac

& 2 ah
Poy
:

oe
a0 Oo.
mae) 3y-
Ww F.
| Ss.
5 F-
BS s-
€ wT:
Bg aT
%
a! S-
4 3.
Vowels
¥
aT
"
ar Ahi

AY Grist be

&

Vwea a

Ly

Yas

AW:

A Mees Ay a a a

kit. [KF XLT.

( onmpound (Consonants
with and without vowels anneaed:

wy
my F
Dy PP

“ pF

® E

Bo Be Pe ee

2 Ge a et ee

Ae, A og

D
Y

ef oF. Siseee

¥

aoa 3 Be Re

2 Be oe. ee

AD ea OE Ee ate

oer: Se

Gy Wee

ges eae |

= a: |

a ea

JOURNAL

OF

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

No. 45.—September, 1835.

1.—Account of the Inscriptions upon two sets of Copper Plates, found in
the Western part of Gujerat. By W. H. Waruen, Esq. Persian
Secretary to the Bombay Government.

[In a letter to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society. ]

Several years since, I procured two sets of copper inscribed plates,
one of which had been discovered by some laborers employed in dig-
ging the foundations of a house at Danduca, in the Peninsula of
Gujerdt ; and the other in a similar manner, at Bhavanagar, in the
same province; the inscriptions being, however, in a character un-
known to the learned on this side of India, I found it impossible at
that time to decypher them.

Encouraged, however, by the very interesting discoveries brought
to public notice in your valuable Journal, as connected with the
hitherto unknown character of the inscriptions on the Allahabad
pillar, and the recent success of the Reverend Mr. Srrvenson, I
again endeavoured to decypher the two inscriptions, in which I deriv-
ed much assistance from the alphabet given in your number for
March, 1834; and having observed a repetition of the same letters
in many parts of the inscription, I concluded these were the titles
preceding the names of the kings of the dynasty, to which the
prince making the grant belonged.

In consequence, I found from your key the words Raja (J“z ), and
looking for Mahd, I discovered that the ( ) of the inscription was
m, instead of sh, which the alphabet given in the Journal would
have made it. The title Paraméswara next struck me, and led to
the discovery of Parma Mahesvara, and gave me a clue to the (U) p,
of the character used ; I had previously made out Svasti, of the com-

3.Q

478 Account of two ancient [Sepr.

mencement ; but it was long before I could understand the vowel
mark 7, (*) which I took for anuswara; after these, and a few other
letters had been ascertained, the first of the inscriptions was easily
decyphered, with the aid of a learned pandit.

The second was more defaced, and after the greatest trouble,
a part of it still remained unintelligible, the letters having become
obliterated by the effects of time and damp.

They are both grants of lands to priests; the first is about fifteen
hundred years old; and the date of the second, some hundred years
subsequent.

Thinking that an account of these inscriptions, and of the charac-
ter in which they are written, may be interesting to some of your
readers, and throw some additional light on the ancient history of
the west of India, I have ventured to trouble you with the accom-
panying paper, for insertion in your Journal.

A translation of the inscription A is transmitted, and the substance of
the other will be given in the accompanying observations. W.H. W.

The character in which these grants are written, is evidently
derived from the more ancient one which is found in the caves of
Kaneri, of Carli, and Verula (Ellora), on this side of India; it also
resembles that of the cave inscription decyphered by Mr. WiLxins
in the first volume of the Asiatic Researches.

With the view of facilitating the future researches of antiquarians,
who may meet with the same description of writing, a comparative
alphabet of this character and devandgart, (No. 1.) and a fac-simile of
one of the inscriptions, interlined with the modern devandgart, (No
2.) are annexed*.

One original character, being that found in the caves, appears to have
first existed throughout the western parts of India, that is inthe Dakhan,
Konkan, Gujerdt, and perhaps more generally. It seems to have un-
dergone gradual changes, until about two centuries subseqnent to the
zras of ViCRA’MADITYA and SALIva/HANA, an alphabet nearly similar,
or identical with that at present noticed, would appear to have been
introduced. In order to shew that there is considerable ground for

* See Plates XL. and XLI. We have separated the modern Sanscrit inter-
lineation, which permitted of being set up in type, giving figured references to
the lines of the more ancient Nagari lithographed in Plate XL. We have also
ventured to omit the 3rd and 4th pages of the lithographed Alphabet, containing
the compound consonants with their several vowel marks, as these combinations
will be obvious to those who know the letters, and have the necessary examples
before them in the inscription itself.—Eb.

}835.] Copper- plate grants from Gujerit. 479

such a supposition, copies of as many of the various cave characters, on
this side of India, as could be easily procured, were collected and
arranged in the order of what appeared to be their relative anti-
quity.

Selections from these, and also from grants of subsequent date to
those which are here principally treated of, have been made to give
an idea of the manner in which the ancient writing has gradually
been changed to its present form: these are all taken from copper-
plate and other inscriptions (which are deposited in the Museum of
the Bombay branch of the Royal Asiatic Society). From one of these
it appears, that up to Saca 730, or A. D. 808, no very material dif-
ference in the character had taken place. The accompanying lithogra-
phic plate (No. 3), contains specimens of varieties of writing from the
most ancient times to the present*.

The hope of meeting with a key to the alphabet now decyphered,
led to references to those of Tibet and other countries ; and a strong
similarity was remarked between it, the Kawi (Kavya Bhasha) cha-
racter of Java, used in that country when under the government
of its Hindu conquerors, the Pdli of Siam, and the alphabet of Ti-
bet ; from each of these, a few lines have been copied, by reference
to which, the close resemblance of many of the letters to those of the
inscription (No. 2), will be apparent.

Several of the provincial alphabets also have been evidently taken
from this source, long before the remodeling of the present deva-
ndgart: a few of the most striking coincidences are algo given in the
same plate with the above (No. 4).

The resemblance of this character to those of Tibet, and the sacred
alphabets of Siam and Java, may perhaps tend to throw some light
upon the zra of the conquest of Java, Sumatra, and Several of the
eastern islands by the Hindus, and also on that of the introduction
of the Buddhist religion into Tibet, and the countries eastward of
the Brahmaputra.

The contents of these inscriptions, as tending to elucidate the
ancient history of Western India, at the commencement of the fourth
century of the Christian era, are of some interest, as will be pre-

* We defer the publication of these comparative alphabets, because we think
they may be rendered more complete by the addition of those to which we have
access on this side of India. Such a paleographical table hag been long a
desideratum, and Mr. WaTuHeEN’s contribution will furnish a considerable portion
of the list. Our recent inscriptions from Shekdwat, and Benares must, howe
be added to complete it, and the various Pd/i offsets from the Magadht requir
be more fully developed.—Ep.

3 Q 2

ver,
e to

480 Account of two ancient [Serr.

sently detailed : a list of the princes enumerated will be found in
the Appendix, (No. 5).

In the first inscription, as well as in the second, the origin of this
dynasty is traced to Buararca SenApATI, who is said to have esta-
blished his power by signal bravery and prowess: his capital named
Valabhipura*, is also expressly mentioned in the first grant; both the
founder of this sovereignty, and two first successors, did not take
the title of king, but Sendpati, or General, whence it may be inferred,
that they were under a paramount sovereign, by whom the province
of Gujerat was committed to their charge ; and it is stated in the
description of the fourth prince of this family, that he was raised to
the royal dignity by “‘the great monarch, the sole sovereign of the
entire world,” meaning India.

The third in succession to him, named SripHara Sena, would ap-
pear to have thrown off all dependence on this paramount sovereign of
Ujayana or Kanouj ; for by the date of the first inscription, the Valabhi
Samvat or era would appear to have been instituted in his reign, its
date being Samvat nine : this circumstance induced the belief, at first,
that the era referred to was that of VickamAnirtya, until on referring
to the Ist volume of Ton’s Rajasthan, the existence of a Surya-
vansa dynasty in Gujerat, whose capital was Valabhipura, and title
‘* Bhatarca,” and also of a Samvat, or era peculiar to those kings, as
proved by Jaina legends, and inscriptions found at Somndth, Pattan,
&c. shewed that these grants must belong to those princes and their
era alone.

Colonel Top established, from the materials already mentioned,
the particulars of which may be seen on reference to his workt, the
following historical data.

1. The emigration of a prince named KenrxssEn, of the Surya-vansa,
or race of the sun, from Koshala{ désha, and his establishing himself
in Gujerdt about A. D. 144.

2. The institution of an era, called the Valabhi Samvat, by his suc-
cessors, who became the independent kings of Gujerat : the first year
of which era was the 375th of VicramAnitya, or A. D. 319.

3. The invasion of the kingdom of the Valabhz princes by a bar-
barian force, the destruction of their capital Valabhipura, in A. D. 524,
and the removal of thes eat of government to the north-eastern part of
Gujerat, most probably at first to Sidhapura, about A. D. 554.

The inscriptions confirm, in a singular manner, these several epochs.

* In Pracrit, it is written with a b, ‘‘ Balabhi.”’
+ See the chapter entitled ‘‘ Annals of Mew4r.’’ + The present Oude.

1835.] Copper-plate grants from Gujerat. 481

The first inscription is dated 9th Valabhi Samvat, corresponding with
3884 of Vicrama‘pitya, and A. D. 328.

Now allowing twenty years for the average reign of the six princes
of the first inscription, this will give 129 years for the interval be-
tween Sripwara Sena, in whose reign this era may be supposed to
have commenced, and Buatarca SenaPArTt, the founder of the dynasty,
which will place him as having lived in A. D. 190, or within forty-
six years of the time specified by Top, asthat of Kmnexs‘sn’s estab-
lishment in Gujerat. That Bhatarca was a family title, and not the
real name of this chief, is shewn by its being alone used in the seals
affixed to both the inscriptions.

From the second inscription, we have along line of princes, the last
of whom, Sizapirya Musatut, would appear, from an allusion therein,
to have removed the capital to Sidhapura.

Taking the number of kings, whose names are given subsequent to
SripHara Sena, the founder of the Valabhi era, at twelve, and the
length of their reigns at an average of twenty years each; this calcu-
lation will shew a term of about 240, or more years, to have elapsed
from this time, to that of SinApirya Musautt of Sidhapura, or A. D.
559, about thirty-five years after the sack of Valabhipura by the
barbarians.

On referring to the list of kings, another of the name of SinApitya,
it will be seen, just preceded the prince who made the grant con-
tained in the 2nd inscription, whose reign will thus approximate
to A. D. 524, stated in the Jaina legends to be the date when the
capital was surprised by a foreign army. From the same source also,
we find the name of the prince who then reigned, to have been
SiLAviTyA, as above.

These coincidences are curious, and tend to confirm the authen-
ticity of those fragments of early Hindu history, which Top has so
carefully collected.

The Jaina historical legends all mention the kings of this dynasty,
and their era, the Valabhi Samvat ; the capital, from its geographi-
cal position, would appear to have been the Byzantium of Prouemy ;
its kings were of the dynasty called by foreigners the Balhara, which
may have been a corruption of the title Bhatarca*, or derived from
the adjoining district of Bhala, and Rai or prince; the absurd man-
ner in which Hindu names were, and still are, corrupted by the Arabs,
and other foreigners, may easily account for the difficulty of recon-
ciling real names with their corruptions.

* Bhatarca, literally means cherishing sun ; it is a royal title.

482 Account of two ancient [Supr.

It is a singular circumstance connected with the destruction of
Valabhipura, that it would appear to have been conquered by a
Mhilechha, or Bactro-Indian army, which, it may be presumed, came
from a Bactrian kingdom then existing, in which were probably com-
prised the present Muilidn, Sindh, Cachha, and perhaps many other
provinces; whether this state became subsequently divided into
several petty principalities, one of which held the southern part of
Sindh and Cachha, is a query which remains to be solved; the south-
ern part of Sindh, however, has been known from the most ancient
times, by the appellation of Lar, which would be in Sanserit Larica :
now the kingdom of Larike is mentioned expressly by Protemy, but
is made to comprise the coast of Gwerdt, which might have been
conquered by it; the strongest fact in support of this theory is, that
many Bactro-Indian* coins, with the head of the prince, evidently of
inferior Greek workmanship, something similar to those found at the
Manikydla Tope, &c. have been found in great numbers in Cachha, and
in parts of Saurashtrat.

It may be here mentioned, that it is from this very family of Vala-
bhipura, that the legends of the present Ranas of Udayapur K@aeepene)
deduce their descent.

After reigning some years in the north of Gujerdt, the power of
the dynasty was destroyed, its kingdom dismembered, and the city
of Anhalwara Pattan became the capital, under the succeeding dynas-
ties of the Chawura and Chalukia (vulgo Solanki) races.

Both of these grants convey fields to brahmans as religious gifts.
The lands granted in the second inscription are stated to be situated
in Saurdshtra, and the donees are said to have come from Girinagara,
(Juinagur or Girnal,) and to have settled at Sidhapura.

Two facts, proving the great antiquity of these grants, are,—firat,
the measure of land being square paces; and the other, the existence
of the worship of the sun: one of the princes is named as being of
that sect. .

In the course of antiquarian researches in India, we cannot but
remark the very opposite course pursued by the Jainas, and the Brah-
mans, in regard to the preservation of historical legends; the Brah-
mans are accused by the Jamas of having destroyed, wherever they

* These are probably the Greek coins ARRIAN mentions as current at Barigaza
or Broach. [We skall, I trust, hear more of these coins from Col. PorTincrr
or Capt. Burnes. It is essential to know to which of our new series they
belong.—Ep.]

+ Saurdshtra, or the region of the worshippers of the sun, comprised the whole
of the peninsula at present called Kathiawar.

1835.} Copper-plate grants from Gujerat. 483

gained the supremacy, all the historical books in existence, which
related facts anterior to the Musalman conquest; and we certainly do
not find in the Dakhan, and other countries which have been long
under their exclusive influence, any thing whatever prior to that
period; whereas, on the contrary, the Jainas have treasured up in their
libraries, every historical legend and fragment that could be preserved
by them.

May it not be inferred, that the brahmans, sensible of the great
changes introduced by themselves to serve their own avaricious pur-
poses, in the Hindu worship, at the era of the Musalman conquest,
neglected the preservation of the historical works which then existed ;
for as no king of their own faith remained, and their nobles and
learned men must have lost their power and influence, no one was
left who took .any interest in their preservation ; and it appears pro-
bable, that at such period, the Purdnas were altered, and the novel
practices now existing introduced, to enable these wily priests still to
extort from the superstition of the people, what they had formerly
enjoyed by the pious munificence of their own kings.

The Jainas indeed assert, that the Puranas are mere historical works;
that Parasurdma, Rdmacuanpra, Krisuna, &c. were merely great
kings, who reigned in Oude and other places, and have not the slight-
est pretensions to divinity.

It may tend to confirm this theory, when we consider, that all the
great reformers of the Hindu religion, whose doctrines and whose
expositions of that faith are now followed, flourished about the same
period when India was thrown into confusion by the invasions of
those ferocious and fanatical barbarians, the Arabs, the Turks*, and
Afghans, or from five to eight hundred years back; SAnKaRa A’cHARYA,
VauasHa A’cudrya, and Ramanusa A’cHArRyYa, are all supposed to
have lived between those periods.

The great Hindu sovereignties falling to pieces, it became impossi-
ble to perform sacrifices requiring such prodigious expenditure}, the
kings of foreign faith, no longer ruling by the Shastras, no check
existed to the intermixture of castes: hence the Warna Sankara;
the Kshetriyas overcame, and fleeing from their foes, emigrated into
various parts, laid down the warlike profession, and engaged in civil
and commercial pursuits: hence the present Kshetri, the Prabhi,

* By Turks, I mean natives of Central Asia.

+ Such as Asvamedha, &c., notwithstanding the assertions of the brahmans
that these sacrifices of the horse, &c, have been abolished in this Kali-yuga, we
find instances of their performances recorded in inscriptions of 800 years and
later date.

484 Translation of a copper grant. [Supr.

the Bhatti, &c. once warriors, now scribes and merchants; the
brahmans then, to raise themselves, and degrade the other castes,
invented the fable of the destruction of the whole Kshetriya tribe by
ParasurAMA—a thing in itself incredible; but which story enabled
them to substitute the Puranas, for the Vedas, in conducting the sacred
offices, as connected with those classes.

Further, if we inquire into the origin of many of the present most
popular incarnations, as worshipped in western India, we shall no
doubt trace them to the era when the Puranas were interpolated and
converted from mere historical legends into books of scripture. A new
impetus was thus given to superstition, by the discovery of these
supposed miraculous emanations of Siva, VisHNnu, and Ganusa, in the
shape of Khundeh Rao*, Wittoba, and the Chinchwara Ganapati.

That great changes were introduced about the period of the Musal-
man invasion, into the practices of the Hindu religion, and that many
as they now exist, are far different to what they were previous to that
zra, are facts which will become better known and ascertained, as the
antient history of the country becomes more cleared from the obscu-
rity in which it is at present involved.

Translate of an ancient Inscription, dated 9th of the Valabhi Samvat,
or A. D. 328, and found in digging the foundations of a house, near
Danduca, in the Peninsula of Gujerdt, or Saurdshtra.

May prosperity (ever emanate) from the city of Valabhi! The
possessor of incomparable strength from the crowds of powerful
enemies and friends, who prostrate themselves (before him), who
earned glory in hundreds of battles fought in the countries of his
foes; whose prowess and renown dazzled (the eyes of the princes
of the universe), one enjoying the affections (of his subjects) by
grants of rewards and honors, and also by courteous behaviour.
The acquirer of royal prosperity by the strength (aid) of his nume-
rous dependents and attached friends, great adorer of Mahesvara
(Siva), (such was) Senapati Buararca (Buatarca, the general-in-
chief).

His son, with head tinged of a reddish colour, by constant inclina-
tion to the dust of his father’s feet, and thus rendered pure: the lus-
tre of the nails of whose feet (as mirrors) surpassed the diamonds of
Sucra’s diadem, whose riches were a constant source of relief to the
poor, helpless, and destitute, (was the) great worshipper of Mahés-
vara, Sri Senapati DuAra Suna (the general of the forces, DHAra
SENA).

His younger brother with forehead wholly sanctified by prostrations
at his (brother’s) feet, a performer of all the acts of devotion accord-

* These are all peculiar to the Mahratta country, their temples being at Jejury,
Pundarpur, and Chinchwar.

1835.] dug up in the West of Gujerdt. 485

ing to the precepts of Menu, and other holy saints, who, like Daarma
Raja (Yupurstruira), has arranged all laws, received his inauguration
to the throne, ‘‘ from the Great Sovereign* himself, the sole monarch
of the entire world,’ and whose accession to royalty was solemnized
by unbounded gifts. He was the great worshipper of Mahesvara,
Sri Maharaja Drona Srnuwa (the fortunate king, Drona Sinwa.)

His younger brother, who by the prowess and force of his sole
arm, as a lion, conquered the hosts of his enemies, mounted on
elephants, the asylum of all those who suught a place of refuge, con-
versant with all the various principles of science,—a celestial, all-
yielding tree to friends and dependants, affording to all enjoyments
according to their several wishes and tastes; great follower of
Buacavata (Visunv) (was) Sri Maharaja Duaruva Sena.

His younger brother, all whose sins were removed by prostrations
before the lotus-resembling feet of his (elder) brother, by whose vir-
tuous conduct, as a pure stream, the crimes of the Kali-yuga were
washed away ; whosefame was celebrated by crowds of vanquished ene-
mies, was the great adorer of the sun, Sri Mah4raja Duarapatran.

Whose son acquired the chief of virtues by adoration of his father’s
feet; whose sword from his infancy was his sole helper; who distin-
guished himself as the touch-stone of bravery ; the destroyer of multi-
tudes of foes resembling intoxicated elephants. The bright lustre of the
nails of whose feet were reflected by the splendour of the crowds of
his prostrate enemies; who fulfilled the import of the title “ Raja,”
by delighting the hearts of his subjects, and affording them protec-
tion, (and by governing,) as commended in the Smritis (holy books) ;
who surpassed Svara (Cupid) in beauty, the moon in splendour, the
monarch of mountains (/fimdlaya), in fixedness of purpose. In depth
{of thought and counsel) the ocean, the teacher of the gods in wis-
dom, the great master of riches (CuvEra) in wealth; who relinguished
as straw, the fruits of his enterprises, in his anxiety to remove the
fears of those who sought protection; delighter of the hearts of the
learned of friends and dependants, by bestowing riches far beyond
their desires; who enjoyed all the gratifications and luxuries of the
various countries in the world, as one who had himself travelled
through them, (was) the great worshipper of Mahesvara, Sri Maharaja
Grina Sena.

His son, for ever fortunate by the rays proceeding from the dia-
mond-like nails of his father’s feet;—all whose sins are washed
away by the pure water of the Ganga (Ganges); whose wealth
and prosperity are participated in by multitudes of friends and depend-
ants :—in whom all the qualities of beauty, have taken up their
abode, as if by the desire of associating with the beauties of his form;
who has astonished all those skilled in archery, by his wonderful
natural skill, improved as it is by superior and constant exercises; the
maintainer of all pious grants, bestowed by the will of ancient kings :
he that removes from power, those (evil ministers) who seek the
ruin of his subjects :—a unique example of the abode of wisdom and

* This evidently refers to some one of the successors of VicraMA’DITYA and
Swa/Liva’sHANA. The Pramara or Powar kings of Ujain cr Canoyj.

oR

486 Translation of Gujerdt Grant. [Sspr.

‘prosperity, in one and the same person, whose renown is alone suffi-
cient to destroy the power of his foes, whose royal dignity is heri-
ditary ;—great worshipper of Mahesvara, powerful wielder of the
battle-axe, Sri Maharaja Sripnara Sena,—peremptorily issues these
his mandates !

To those in office, and those unemployed ; to the governors of towns ;
to the chiefs of districts, revenue officers, forest chiefs, protectors of
the roads, &c. &c. and all officers howsoever employed !

‘ Br it known to you! that for the increase of my father’s and mo-
ther’s holiness, for my own salvation, and for the sake of obtaining
other objects of my heart’s desire, in this and in the next world, I have
granted fifty paces of land, (situated) at the southern boundary of the
village of Matsira, and sixty paces of land near the northern limit of
Veraputri, to a Lodrita brahman, learned in the Rig-Véda of the
same gotra (family), as Karna and others: also a piece of land of
fifty paces, on the western side of Prathapura, and eight paces near
Ishvara Deva Senak is likewise granted to a Rig-Véda brahman,
named Deva Sia of the same gotra, as TRivaALAM Bayana, &c. (this
part is very unintelligible in the original,) this land, with the hamlets
and other things thereunto pertaining, with its earth, water, wind, sky,
spirits, grain, and gold, is (hereby) given, with all that which may
thereupon be produced.

‘ All the ministers of state must avoid placing their hands on this,
as they would on the hole of a serpent ; for the constant and due per-
formance of the five great sacrifices (naming them), I have given
this; for as long as the moon, sun, seas, rivers, and this world shall
exist, to be enjoyed by the descendants, sons, grandsons, &c. By
pouring out water, (it is) given up as a brahmanical gift; to be en-
joyed on the terms usual with such grants; they may plough, cause to
be ploughed, or give it away. No one should cause any hindrance
(to this grant).

‘ Future pious kings, both of our family, and others, who will appre-
ciate the fruits of a grant of land, should approve and maintain this
my gift. (Here the usual quotations from the Mahd Bharata are
introduced, quoting the gift by king Sagara, and shewing the sin
of destroying such a grant of land).

‘ Written by the minister for peace and war, Scanna Buatra, Samvat
9, Vaishaca vadi 8. I, Maharaja Sri’pHara Sena, the heroic, my
pleasure! my hand!’

List of kings of the Valabhi or Balhara dynasty, as found in the two

inscriptions.
A. D. 144 or 190 1. Senapati Buatarca.
2s Duara SENA.
8. Maharaja Drona SINHA.
4, Durvuva Sena, I.
we DHARAPATTAH,
6. Grina SENA,

o. ———

CE ce
He (CO) 9) ec

—
Or

Transcript of the Inscription in the modern Devandgari character.

afeaatta: TATVATfaaIT TANITA SAS TIAAS HTT TAT TTT AT a
SIIATT: FATT: HATA AA TATA SHAT Fara TCA CAAT SAAT TT AAT ATT
Ali UCHAIS AT: Alwar yfaUzraMAga ana eMaaaafaderafec: fntiaaa
rage Hiarnfaghcarerat ine iret ara aresa saa rays: ULHATS aT:
Aaafaaa reagan faamiTaMTac hare fers feaeta hahaha ET
WAI TT fafeafaasareres at farnaaa eet aaearfaaracaeraarey
qoeausiiiar aefaarwara gatas WaAArSac: RaeITIAg UTS: figca

Taras: SAATATUTAAT FCISTISASH AAAS FIST ACUPHa; wewATaray
TAI PTAs seaulaai SaaS aT aI MS: YLAAATA: MASI
yadawEasaacUedaefasfaaraa saa: ganaeufaieaa faa
afaada: qaufafsarcfavastaaateat weal feewa: NASTICS: AMAACTSITANAA
guy: Weaaaasie daa Sta VaCIUIAIz ah eayafeaquafaas: aaa Tarcifa
FsagH aa mTI eT ay hae ee: THTH AIC aa sa CU SAISN SUCH AIST
quant re rari Mag fedare: MURS RUST e Pafrewy esa farsa a:
NCU AATMAISIA TCA A SUT ST A AITAR TYR: aren faardserara tea
fagqecavinecy: Wears TRAY TAAL MATA ITAA SAT: TASITIS
ea TUGACNeAaATTT AAAS ASA wea arefe ei fam Raa:
sufaasearasitaaradga eyaaifeaiaa: acea faa fara a:
aan fafrarfakatea fre teary at: TaRAcIfadalrea rarer ar ef eztT WET
Qraraaraa gtraaraaifemg aaa axfqat Pacaataryare: aearcta
quaaiafcamcataaa: HATA ITa ASA eaAM: WHAT SAC ASIST TTA

TTA ary aR MAAS ACS SHSM feaHa WSUS W Bas ayaa
sqATAIAIAG 4: sifafed war ararfear: qamraTaimasteary aaa fwatermaaTTy HZAT
fe afausiter VSAM GMAT AA ACTS SAM faM a aafere aa eA ATT ATA S Ty
Gas aceqaaa Buca Payer wr ay ds Saas ae aaa aT aS TAY Weranrataaa
SrawaraicacTaraya aa SCUS g <a aranrafated VATU AAAS
uma afehaxma ania a afaserag afr eisifatad sarees rai frarui aaq
Gurdarasiawaate feta feateeaarsta aa ara yae VenanTgqes frees
qarsifaaar wae shear rat aVaawaat wera a aaa aeafaaaataaaar
mnfaergeatafraregascfreraaarafetas aay @ ufseranaasaRlE:
BqAAz AAA AT: vicwafarag aternfe aretha aTaWIea VT
afaereraraa: aqaaa: wa ufeaa y wa Femsa Wee | ufsquas
aie au fasta fae: | asa erage ye aaa aca aaa) Gael fesnfaaraar
aa ufufec | wet avladi ae Sareea uae | ashraguiay cistfar aacife iar:
qaqa alae wagaamnea fafa i fafaia! tataayi amauta NTT Il
azaina azician aaaeagraare: | a waa vaT

er the Seal, under the bull, 4t azta:

Rs ds
di ad a

a ' eo

peR ee tee

wal ar pi

bs : are
wer tHeiy

veri ee Pere PR I PIF

APT PATE RE he

i Fath ae
L ae ae Fly
EE

1835. ] Synopsis af the Thar and Ghoral Antelopes. 487

A. D, 300 ee Sri/DHARA Sena, I.tf
8. Sizapitya, I.
9g, Cuaracrina, I.
10. Sri/pHaRA SENA, II.
1. Duruva Sena, Il.
12: Sripwara Sena, II.
1. Sizapitya, II.

At this part of the copper-plate the writing is so obliterated, that

the names of two or three princes cannot be made ont.
16. Maharaja Cuaracriua, II.

524 Ny & Sinapitya, III.

559 18. Srnapitya Musattt, IV.

The first two princes have the title Sendpati alone. All those sub-
sequent to No. 3, Mahdraja. The whole had the title of “‘ Sri’ Bua-
TARCA, and the device on their banner, was the ‘‘ Nanpt,”’ or sacred
bull of Siva, as appears from the seals attached to both inscriptions.

I1.—Synopsis of the Thar and Ghordl Antelopes. By B. H. Hoveson,
Esq., Resident in Nipal.

[in a letter to the Secretary As. Soc. read 7th Oct.]

I beg to forward to you, herewith, synoptical descriptions of the
Thar aud Ghoral Antelopes, derived from careful examination of a
great many individuals of both sexes, which were either alive or
recently killed at the time of examination. These descriptions are
preceded by an amended definition of the group to which the animals
belong ; that given by Smiru in the English Regne Animal being so
inaccurate, as to be calculated only to lead the inquirer astray. Mine,
now proposed, is drawn from an intimate knowledge of three out of the
four species comprising the group. But itis probable that very much
yet remains to be done before the vast genus Antilope can be success-
fully divided into subgenera, fitted either to illustrate natural affinities,
or even to render perfect, facility of reference. Mr. Owen has, since
the publication of the English Cuvisr, recast this entensive genus in
a manner very different from Smiru’s, though not, I think, superior
to it. Considering, indeed, how extremely superficial is our knowledge
of the greater part of this vast assemblage of the hollow-horned

* These seven are from the first inscription, the following from the second
inscription.
+ A. D, 319. In his reign, the Valabhi era is supposed to have commenced,
3 R 2

488 Synopsis of the Thar and [Szpr.

ruminants, it might be as well, perhaps, for our general classifiers, to
bear in mind the Baconian adage, that ‘‘ an over-early reduction of
knowledge into methods generates acquiescence” in misleading sys-
tems of nature.

My apology forthe amended indication of the subgenus NzmorueEpDus
of the English Regne Animal, now attempted, is, that the celebrity
of that work might fix and propagate errors which I happen to
possess the means of correcting ; and that, as I have an unusually
complete knowledge of three out of the four species comprised in this
group, my definition of it may perhaps stand the test of time, if the
group itself be allowed to remain.

Nipal, August 1835.

English Regne Animal Synopsis.

Sub-Genus XIII. Nemorhedus, Smitx.

Subgeneric character (nobis).

Structure assuming a caprine form, suited for heavy. climbing, or
for leaping; horns in both sexes, their cores hollow*, and connected
with the frontal sinuses, but not porous, and only sub-cellular, inserted
behind the orbits, short, conical, simply bent back, annulo-wrinkled,
parallel to the plane of the face, and nearly so to each other, sub-
remote at base ; suborbital sinus, small, or wanting; no inguinal pores ;
tail caprine ; ears longish, pointed, and striated ; muzzle small, or none ;
knees callous? maned, hair of two sorts, and thick; or, of one sort,
and spare ; four teats in the females. Reside in the mountainous and
woody regions of the continent and islands of India, solitarily, or in
small groups.

Sp. 1. A. Sumarrensis. Cambing Ootan.

Sp. 2. A. Duvaucexuit. Variety of Ghordl !

Sp. 8. A. Guorau. Characters—extremely caprine, being allied to
antelope only by its round and ringed horns. Size small, attitude
gathered, with back much arched, and_ structure adapted for
leaping ; limbs moderately stout and rigid ; general form of the
scull caprine, with the ridge line much bent, and the parietes
depressed at a strong angle to the frontal bones, and no indentation
before the orbits ; fifty inches long, exclusive of the tail, and twentv-
seven high ; horns seated on the crest of the frontals, six inches long,
the points inclined inwards, 20 to 25 annuli extending $rds up the

* This, as a generic character, has been used to separate Capra and Damalis.
from Antelope ; upon which I have only to observe, that I know four species still
retained under Antelope, which have nevertheless hollow-cored horns.

1835. ] Ghoral Antelopes of Nipal. 489

horns; annuli crowded and vague, especially towards the bases,
somewhat interrupted by faint longitudinal striz, truncated, inde-
pendant of each other, and equally developed all round; no suborbital
sinuses, a half muzzle; upper lip clad, tail conico-depressed, and
only half nude below ; fur of two sorts, abundant and loosely applied
to the skin; a short, semi-erect mane on the vertex. Knees usually
callous and nude, but not congenitally so ; colours of the animal rusty
and brown, paler below ; line of the vertex, tail, chest, anda stripe
down the front of the fore legs and back of the hind, brown black ;
outsides of ears rusty, lips and chin rufescent white, a large patch of
pure white at the junction of the head and neck, below ; horns, hoofs,
and muzzle, black ; iris, dark hazel; eye, mean. Inhabits juxta Hima-
layan region of Nipal. Female smaller and paler hued ; young, redder
and no marks or mane.

. Sp. 4. A. Tua’r, nobis. The Thdr of the Nipalese. New. Charac-
ters less decidedly caprine than in the last, very nearly allied
to the Cambing Ootan. Back straight, withers higher than the
croup, and structure suited for heavy climbing, not for leaping ; limbs.
very stout and rigid, with higher hoofs than in the last, the edges of
which are raised above the pads. General form of the scull cervine,
with the ridge line moderately convexed, and the parietes not depressed.
at a strong angle to the frontal bones. A deep indentation before the

orbits. Horns posterior to orbits, but below the crest of frontals, eight
inches long, rather stouter and less faleated, than in the preceding,
sub-divergent, with the points inclined outwards, 20 to 30 crowded
annuli, extending 2rds up the horns, the annuli truncated, equal all
round, independant, broken by decided longitudinal striz; one inch
below the eye, a suborbital sinus, opening ona nude space by a round
puncture, and furnished with a fleshy thick gland secreting a viscous
humour, asin Sumatrensis ; no maxillary sinus, a half muzzle; larger
than in the preceding, but existing only as a broad line in front of
the upper lip, whichis otherwise cladin hair. Tail shorter, depressed
nude below ; fur of one sort only, scanty, harsh, and applied to the skin;
a semi-erect-mane, as in Ghordl; knees, callous, perhaps congenitally
so. Sternum not so, size large, 64 inches long by 38 high, and upwards
of 200 lbs. in weight. Colour of the whole animal’ above, with the
entire head and neck, jet black ; on the flanks, mixed with deep clay
red. The fore arms and hams outside, as far down as the great
flexures, clay red, nearly or wholly unmixed ; rest of the limbs, hoary,
or rufescent hoary ; outsides of ears, dark ; chest, pale. No stripes down
legs; lips and chin dull hoary, and a stripe of pure hoary running

490 On the Wild Goat [Supz.

backwards over the jaws from the gape; horns, hoofs, and muzzle,
black ; iris, dark hazel; eye, mean.

Female as large as male, and like him in all essential respects. The
young, paler, and mixed with gray.

Inhabit the precipitous and wooded mountains of the central region
of Nipal, which they rush up and down with fearful rapidity, though
they do not spring or leap well, nor are speedy.

The Thar species are denominated Sarau, in the western parts of these
mountains, where it is as common as in Nipal. The Cambing Ootan
is its analogue in the Indian Islands ; but the species is not found, I
believe, in any other mountainous range of the continent of India.

III.—On the Wild Goat and Wild Sheep of the Himalaya, with Remarks.
on the genera Capra and Ovis. By B. H. Hopeson, Esq. Resident
in Nipal.

In the way of classification, there are few objects, I believe, more
important than the establishment of some distinctive marks to sepa-
rate Antilope, Capra and Ovis. The best naturalists of the present
day appear to think that M. Gzorrroy’s diagnosis of the former genus,
viz. cores of the horns solid, may be relied on. But small as is the
number of Antelopes accessible to me, I have proved with the saw,
that in respect to at least four species, (viz. Chirad, Thar, Goral, and Du-
vaucellii,) the fact is not so, all these four having sinuses in the cores of
their horns, connected with the frontal sinuses: and, if it be objected,
that of three of these the character is confessedly osculant towards
Capra, that cannot be urged against the fourth, which is a Gazella of
H. Smiru’s group.

It is certain, therefore, that solid horns constitute not an invariable
character of the genus Antilope; and it is highly probable, that this
character is not of such general prevalence as to warrant the distinction
founded upon it.

The truth seems to be this, that in Antilope, the bony nuts of the
horns are of a compact structure, possessing at their bases sinuses of
only limited extent, and nearly free from cellular partitions ; whereas
in Capra, and yet more in Ovis, the cores are porous and uncompact,
and furnished at their bases with large sinuses, crowded with cells*.

On the present occasion, I do not propose to make any further men-
tion of the genus Antilope, but to confine myself to some remarks

* The form of the scull along vertical line, forms a much better diagnosis than
the cores of horns,

1835.] of the Himalaya. 491

tending to illustrate the distinctions between Capra and Ovis, and
more particularly, to test the accuracy of those indications which are
generally admitted by authors, by applying them to the wild species
of either genus which belongs to the Himalaya.

For the last two years, I have had alive in my garden, a splendid
specimen of the mature male of each, and I have frequently compared
them together in all respects of manners and of structure. As the
goat in question, as well as the sheep is new*, I will begin with a
synoptical description of the two, and then proceed to notice the
points of difference and agreement existing between them.

Tribe Carpripz—H. Smitu.

Genus—Capra, Ditto.

Species—C. Judrat. New, the Juarat of the Nipalese.

Affined to the Alpine Gigagri, and to Jemlaica. Adult male, 50 to 56
inches long from snout to rump, and 36 to 40 high. Head finely
formed, and full of beauty and expression. Clad in close short hair,
and without the least vestige of a beard ; facial line, straight ; ears
small, narrow, erect, rounded at tips, and striated; eye, lively ; between
the nares, a black moist skin, nares themselves short and wide;
knees and sternum, callous; tail, short, depressed, wholly nude below.
Animal of compact, powerful make, with a sparish, short, and bowed
neck, deep barrel and chest, and longish, very strong and rigid limbs,
supported on perpendicular pasterns and high compact hoofs ; false
hoofs conic and considerably developed ; attitude of rest gathered and
firm, with the head moderately raised, and the back sub-arched.
Shoulders decidedly higher than the croup ; fore quarters superb, and
wholly invested ina long, flowing, straight, lion-like mane, some-
what feathered vertically from the crown of the withers, and sweep-
ing down below the knees; hind-quarters poor and porcine, much
sloped off from the croup to the tail, and the skin much constricted
between the hams behind; fur of two sorts—the outer hair of mode-
rate harshness, nor wiry nor brittle, straight, and applied to the skin,
but erigible under excitement, and of unequal lengths and colours;
the inner, soft and woolly, as abundant as in the wild sheep, and
finer, of one length and colour. Horns 9 to 12 inches long, inserted
obliquely on the crest of the frontals, and touching at base with their
anterior edges, sub-compressed, sub-triangular, and uniformly wrink-
led across, except near the tips, where they are rounded and smooth ;
keeled and sharpened to the front, obtusely rounded behind: the

* My own imperfect account of both, in the Society’s Transactions, is the only
one extant.

492 On the Wild Sheep [Srer.

edge of the keel not nodose, ‘and usually but faintly marked by the
continuation over it of the transverse wrinkles of the horns.

The horns are divergent, and directed more upwards than back-
wards: their points are slightly inclined inwards. The colour of
the animal is a saturate brown superficially, but internally, hoary blue;
and the mane, for the most part, wholly of that hue; fore arms,
lower part of hams, and backs of the legs, rusty; entire fronts of
the limbs, and whole face and cheeks, black-brown; the dark colour
on the two last parts divided by a longitudinal line of pale rufous,
and another before the eye, shorter ; lips and chin hoary, with a black-
ish patch on either side below the gape; tip of tail and of ears, black-
ish ; tongue and palate, and nude skin of tips and muzzle, black; iris,
darkish red hazel. Odour very powerful in the mature male, especi-
ally at certain times. Is found in the wild state in the Kachar region
of Nipal, in small flocks or solitarily ; is bold, capricious, wanton,
eminently scansorial, pugnacious, and easily tamed, and acclimatised
in foreign parts.

Remarks. Jhdral is closely affined by the character of the horns to
the Alpine Ggagri, and still more nearly, in other respects, to Jemlaica.
It differs from the former by the less volume of the horns, by their -
smoother anterior edge, and by the absence of the beard ;—from the
latter, by horns much less compressed and nodose. Jharal breeds
with the domestic Goat, and perhaps more nearly resembles the or-
dinary model of the tame races than any wild species yet discovered,
The western type of the Himalayan wild goat (called Tehr, at Simla
and Mustri) has the anterior edge of the horns decidedly nodose,
though less so than in C. Jemlaica.

The Wild Sheep. Genus—Ovis.

Species—O. Ndhoor, mihi.

The Ndhoor of the Nipalese. New? variety of O. Musmon?
Closely affined to Musmon, of which it is possibly only a vari-
ety. Adult male, 48 to 54 inches from snout to rump, and 32
to 86 high. Head coarse and expressionless, clad entirely in close
short hair, without beard on the chin or throat, or any sem-
blance of mane. Chaffron considerably arched. Ears medial, nar-
row, erect, pointed, striated. Eye dull, moist space between the
nares, evanescent; nares narrow and long. Knees and sternum
callous ; tail medial, cylindrico-depressed, only $ nude below. Struc-
ture moderately compact, not remarkable for power. Neck spa-
rish, bowed, with a considerable dip from the crown of the shoulders.
Limbs longish, firm, but slender, not remarkable for rigidity, and sup-
ported on laxer pasterns, and on hoofs lower and less compact than

1835.] of the Himalaya. 493

the goats ; false hoofs mere callosities. Attitude of rest less gathered
and firm, with the head lower and the back straight. Shoulders
decidedly lower than croup ; fore-quarters not more massive than the
hind, nor their extremities stronger. Hair of two sorts—the outer
hair, of a harsh, brittle, quill-like character, serpentined internally
with the salient bows of one hair fitting into the resilient bends of
another, but externally, straight and porrect from the skin, very
abundant, and of medial uniform length all over the body: the inner
coat, soft and woolly, rather spare, and not more abundant than in
the Goat. Horns, 22 inches along the curve, inserted high above the
orbits, on the crown of the forehead, touching nearly at base with
their whole depth, and carrying the frontal bones very high up be-
tween them ; the parietals being depressed in an equal degree. The
horns diverge greatly, but can scarcely be said to be spirally turned.
They are first directed upwards, considerably before the facial line, and
then sweep downwards with a bold curve: the points again being re-
curved upwards and inwards. They are uncompressed, triangular,
broadly convexed to the front, and cultrated to the back. Their an-
terior face is the widest, and is presented almost directly forwards ;
their lateral faces, which are rectilinear, have an oblique aspect, and
unite in an acutish angle at the back. They are transversely wrink-
led, except near the tips, which are round and smooth. Colour pale.

The colour of the animal is a pale slaty blue, obscured with earthy
brown, in summer overlaid with a rufous tint. Head below, and in-
sides of the limbs and hams, yellowish white. Edge of the buttocks
behind and of the tail, pure white; face and fronts of the entire limbs
and chest, blackish ; bands on the flanks, the same, and also tip of the
tail. Tongue and palate dark. Nude skin of lips and nose black.
Eye yellow-hazel. No odour. Is found in the wild state in the Ka-
char region of Nipal, north of the Jharal, amid the glaciers of the
Himalaya, and both on the Indian and Tibetan sides of the snowy crest
of that range. Is sufficiently bold and scandent, but far less pugna-
cious, capricious, and curious, than the Jhdral. Much less easily
acclimatised in foreign parts than he is ; in confinement more resigned
and apathetic, and has none of the Jhdral’s propensity to bark trees
with his horns, and to feed upon that bark and upon young shoots and
aromatic herbs. I have tried in vain to make the Ndhoor breed with
tame sheep, because he will not copulate with them. The female of
the species has the chaffron straight, and short, erect, sub-recurved,
and greatly depressed horns. The young want, at first, the marks on
the limbs and flanks, and their nose is straight.

3s

494 Wild Sheep of Himdlaya. [Suer.

Remarks. Differs from Musmon, to which it is closely allied, by the
decided double flexure of the horns; their presence in the females, and
the want of a tuft beneath the throat. With reference to the imperfect
account of the Nahoor, published in the Transactions, I should not omit
to say, inconclusion, that the Nahoor and Banbhera are separate species,
the former being the Himalayan type of Musmon perhaps: and the
latter, certainly, that of Ammon.

Having now completed the descriptions of the wild goat and wild
sheep, I shall proceed to the exhibition of the points of difference and
of resemblance existing between the two, beginning with the former.

Goat.

Whole structure stronger and more Less so.

compact.
Limbs thicker and more rigid.
Hoofs higher and more compact.
False hoofs well developed.
Head smaller and finer,
Facial line straight.
Ears shorter and rounded.
Tail short, flat, nude below.
Withers higher than croup.

SHEEP.

Feebler and more slender.

Lower, and less so.

Evanescent.

Larger and heavier.

Chaffron arched.

Longer and pointed.

Larger, less depressed and } nude only.
Croup higher.

Fore legs stronger than hind.

Croup sloped off.

Odorous.

Nose moister, and nares short and wide.

Horns of medial size, keeled and turn-
ed upwards.

Eye darker and keener.

Hair long and unequal.

Back arched.

Bears change of climate well.

Is eminently curious, capricious, and
confident.

Barks trees with its horns, feeding on
the peel and on aromatic herbs.

In fighting, rears itself on its hind legs,
and lets the weight of its body fall
on the adversary.

Fore and hind equal.

Not so.

Not so.

Less moist, and nares larger and narrower.

Horns very large, not keeled and turned
to the sides.

Paler and duller.

Short and equal.

Back straight.

Bears it ill.

Is incurious, staid, and timid.

Does not bark trees, and is less addict-
ed to aromatics.

In fighting, runs a tilt, adding hither the
force of impulse to that of weight.

The goat and sheep have in common hair and wool; no beard; no suborbital

sinuses ; evanescent muzzle ; no inguinal pores. Horns in contact at top of head ;
knees and sternum callous ; angular and transversely wrinkled horns ; striated
ears; two teats only in the females: horns in both sexes, and incisors of pre-
cisely the same forms.

Of the various diagnostics, then, proposed by Hamitton Smiru, it
would seem, that the following only can be perfectly relied on to sepa-
rate Ovis from Capra. Slender limbs; longer pointed ears; chaffron

1835.] On the Fossil Bones of the Jamna River. 495

arched; nares lone and oblique; very voluminous horns turned
laterally with double flexures. I should add myself, the strong and
invariable distinction ;—males not odorous, as opposed to the males
odorous of the genus Capra. But, after all, there are no physical
distinctions at all equivalent to the moral ones, so finely and truly
delineated by Burron, and which, notwithstanding what H. Smirx
urges in favour of the courage and activity of sheep, will for ever
continue to be recognised as the only essential diagnostics of the two
genera.

IlI.—On the Fossil Bones of the Jamna River. By Epmunp Daan,
Serjeant, Sappers and Miners.

{Extract from a letter, dated 2nd April, 1834, accompanying the first despatch of
specimens, read at the Meeting of the 3rd July, 1834.]

I have taken the liberty of sending for your inspection some speci-
mens from a collection of Jamna fossils, made by me during a period
of nearly two years, that I was employed under Captain E. Smirn,
in removing the impediments to navigation in that river.

I consider myself fortunate in having been able to procure several
portions of human bones, in so perfect a state, as to enable an
eminent medical gentleman to class the major part of them.

With regard to the specimens before you, No. 8, (an elephant’s
tooth,) resembles the 2nd and 3rd plates represented in plate x. fig.
10 of Parxinson’s Outlines of Oryctology ; and No. 9, the Ist and
2nd plates of the same tooth, excepting that the number of the
elliptic figures on the crown caused by trituration, is greater in my
specimens ; and that great difference in the thickness of the plates of
this and the common Asiatic elephant, (a specimen of which I observe
is in your possession,) which he appears to consider a distinguishing
characteristic of the different species, is not so apparent in my
specimens as it appears to have been in those of Parkinson. This
difference, however, must be confined to the Asiatic specimens, as the
length of his fossil tooth was eight inches, and it was composed of
13 plates, which would make two of them average 1°23 in. : this, allow-
ing for the very apparent diminution in thickness of the plates towards
the rear, would make my larger specimen, which averages one inch,
correspond nearly enough with the plates 2nd and 8rd of fig. 10,

Nos. 10 and 11, (figs. 1 and 2, of Pl. xxxiii.) I have been led to
suppose may have belonged to the species of tapir, the crowns of
whose teeth are described as being divided into five transverse risings,
and if by the enamel standing distinctly above the bony parts, the

3s 2

496 On the Fossil Bones of the Jamna River. — [Szpr.

term rising be understood, I consider this feature is pretty clearly
indicated in the larger specimen; if they do not belong to this
animal, I am utterly at a loss how to class them.

Nos. 14 and 15, Iimagine, are portions of the jaws and teeth
(broken off at the margins of their alveoli) of some extinct species of
the Saurian order, differing in every material point from any species
described by Parkinson ; the transverse section of either shewing no
cutting ridges, and the longitudinal section of No. 15, plainly shew-
ing from their curved formation, the impossibility of the teeth being
shed, or renewed, as also the existence of a core without any
cavity ; whereas a peculiar feature of the whole crocodile tribe is,
the teeth are never solid in the centre. Could the larger one
have belonged to that scarce monster, the Bhote of the Jamna? a
species of crocodile, I believe, that has never yet been described.

Of No. 19, it will be of little use for me to take more notice, than
by pointing out what appears to me to have been the outline of the
crown of a circular cavity, in the centre of the tooth, which might,
when perfect, have contained the nerve. Should this prove to be the
case, atleast one-third of the tooth must have been broken off,
and then the present surface would have been a fracture. The
exterior edges all round evidently present a decided fracture; but the
interior surface (so beautifully irregular) has every appearance of the
exterior enamel of a perfect tooth. Supposing it to have been arranged
in plates (of which however there is not the least trace), the decom-
position of the crusta petrosa might have occurred here, as in the
elephant ; but the separation (except by force) would have been ren-
dered impossible, by the texture of the enamel that surrounds it on
three sides, which is sufficiently strong, even had the crusta petrosa
been withdrawn, to have held it together. It might be urged, that
the exterior substance is not enamel, but an incrustation ; this indeed
might hide the disposition of plates ; but I am inclined to believe, that
the qualities of the whole and .fractured parts are so intimate, that
the position is untenable.

The teeth marked 0-2, 4, 6, and 16, have belonged to animals of the
deer and ox tribes, but I have not the means of accurately classing
them by comparison or otherwise.

-No. 44, (fig. 18, Pl. xxxii.) has defied the anatomical abilities of
every one who has hitherto seen it. I have been able to form no
opinion on it; never to my recollection having seen any vertebra in
the least resembling it.

1835.] On the Fossil Bones of the Jamna River. 497

Specimens of Human Bones, sent Aug. 1834*.

No. 1. Supposed to be the remains of the humerus, consisting of the
major part of the round head that plays in the cup of the scapula.
It was dug out from under a mass of clay ata depth of about 2 ft. 6
inches.

No. 2. May either be a portion of the fibula, or of the ulna, of a child,
or woman: this I imagine may easily be decided by any anatomist. It
must be of considerable antiquity, as the tube originally occupied by
the marrow is completely filled with a hollow concretion or spar,
externally solid, and takmg the exact mould or form of the concave
or inner figure of the walls of the bone. In the interior hollow of
this concretion a great number of very fine and sharp-pointed cry-
stals occur, with their points or vertices apparently pointing inwards
to a common elongated centre or axis ; from which it would appear
that the system of this concretion was either by the increase of the
crystals in size, or by their gradual projection from the exterior
inwards in aradiated manner, to fill up the cavity. This specimen was
found, and I have no doubt was petrified, amongst sand and shingle.

No. 3. Portion of the above, supposed to have belonged to a full-
grown man.

No. 5. One of the metacarpal bones.

Nos. 46 and 47. Assimilate nearly with the 2nd and 12th dorsal
vertebre; but have belonged to different subjects. (?)

No. 15. Appears to be a molar nearly perfect, and the remains of
another broken in its alveolus, with a portion of the jaw covering
each, and to have belonged to some of the larger species of deer.

No. 17. Posterior extremity of a rib of a young camel, having the
same peculiar concretion as No. 34. (See postscript.)

No, 22. A portion of the jaw of a camel, containing one of the
grinders.

No. 34. The remains of the blade bone of the shoulder of a young
camel, remarkable for the peculiar cement or concretion filling its
cancelli, originally the depositaries of marrow.

No. 18, (fig. 4.) Portion of the jaw of a pig, containing four grinders,

No. 26. Extremity of one of the ribs, and No. 23, portion of the
plastrom or breastplate of the Cuchwa, or mud tortoise of the Jamna.

No. 62. Portion of a rib of a buffalo, procured at a greater depth

* We have thought proper to insert this notice, in continuation of the preced-
ing, as the specimens referred to are deposited in the Museum, and have been
imagined by more than one person to be human. See the following note.

498 On the Fossil Bones of the Jamna River. [Serr.

(about six feet) under the clay than any specimen in the collection.
It was not procured im the clay, but imbedded in a layer of sand,
which the clay had enclosed in its deposit.

[The remainder of Serjeant Dean’s collection was presented early
in the following year, reaching its destination in May last. The follow-
ing is his description of its contents :]

17 pieces, No. 1. Teeth and fragments of bones of camels.

D7. » No. 2. Ditto and ditto of ditto of bullocksand buffaloes.

11——-,,_ No. 3. Portions of bones of elephants.

10 , No.4. Ditto of teeth of ditto and piece of tusk of
hippopotamus, (now recognized to be such.)

5 pieces, No. 5. Portion of tufa formation, occupying the place
of the marrow in the tusk of an elephant. These pieces are all that
remain of a very large tusk taken out of the river at Adhde, from
beneath a plate of kankar : the bony part of the tusk was fossilized,
but not petrified, and from its appearance, the sepoys engaged in the
work during the absence of the European non-commissioned officer,
broke it up to try the experiment of its making pipe-clay or whiting
for their belts, and on burning it, succeeded beyond their expectations.
It is now too late to regret this great loss, but I imagine it must
have been a great curiosity, as it is described to have been at least
eight inches in diameter.

4 pieces, No. 6, (fig. 16.) Portions of what I am told is the sting
of the sting-ray petrified ; also a perfect sting (fresh) ; and the jaw of

a water rat, (fig.15.)
29 pieces, No. 7. Teeth of deer of various species.
9 , No. 8. Portions of antlers of ditto and other remains
of ditto.
16 pieces, No. 9. Pieces of human bones.
5 , No. 10. Broken jaws of alligators.
5 ——. No. 11]. Teeth of garial.
21 , No. 12. Portions of the shell, &c. of the kachwa, or
mud tortoise.
3 pieces, No. 13. Pieces of teeth of hippopotamus.
2 , No. 14. Portion of jaw and teeth of goat or deer.
16 ——, No. 15. Petrified wood.
5 ——, No. 16. Specimens of pipe kankar.
2 , No. 17. Petrified perfect fish and shells.
I consider this fossil fish to be the greatest curiosity ever found
in the Jamna. (See note.)
3 pieces, No. 18. Ribs, unknown.

1835.] On the Fossil Bones of the Jamna River. 499

[On the receipt of the first batch of specimens, a correspondence
ensued, to ascertain the precise position of the fossils, and their true
geological age ; the opinions then upheld by their collector have been
since more fully developed in his intelligent memoir published in the
Journal for May. It will be as well, however, to insert here an
extract from Mr. Dean’s previous letter of the 16th August, 1834.]

In answer to your question, whether any specimens (fossil) have
been found under the kankar strata of the general Duab alluvium ?
Without any hesitation, I answer, not one instance has occurred.

It may be questioned, how in the deep bunds of the Jamna, exca-
vated for the purpose of removing the clay banks or shoals, which
are so dangerous to the navigation: trees, pieces of boats, and some
very few instances of bones have been discovered, at depths of from
2to 10 feet from the upper surface of the clay, from which perhaps
a crust of kankar, from one to four feet thick, has first been re-
moved, in a perfect state of petrifaction. This circumstance, on a
superficial examination, might be deemed conclusive of these speci-
mens having been actually removed from a level lower than the kankar
strata of the general Dudb alluvium, and from under what would
appear to be two regular and natural strata ; and that there was every
probability of their occurring at the same level under neighbouring
and other strata, having no connexion with the river ; but, Sir, I feel
quite satisfied, that at two feet in or under any natural stratum ofkankar
placed at any level reached by the Jamna, no specimen of animal or
vegetable deposit will be found; but I shall be enabled to prove in
my observations on the obstructions of the river, that both these
apparently natural strata of clay and kankar, are merely deposits, and
which being removed, only leave the river, at this place, at a depth it
has before attained ; but which, from circumstances I believe peculiar
to the Jamna, and which I shall hereafter treat on, may, from the ra-
pidity (comparative) of their formation, give an appearance of the
work of ages, to deposits, which have been the work of not more than
10 or 12 years.

I am aware, Sir, that I view this subject in a different light from that
in which it has hitherto appeared to you. I feel convinced, however,
that the researches of Indian geologists would be amply rewarded
in examining the bed of the Jamna; but I should consider the dis-
covery of fossil remains at a level corresponding with the deepest
parts of the river in the sandy soil of the Duab as the merest possible
accident ; and I shall be best understood when I say my firm convic-
tion is, that such specimens of fossil animal or vegetable remains, as

500 On the Fossil Bones of the Jamna River. [Supr.

are to be met with in the Jamna, owe their existence to some pecu-
liar quality of the water alone; and I do not consider the fossils of
the Jamna as at all connected with the natural kankar formation,
although at any depth that the artificial or deposit kankar formation
is found, they may reasonably be looked for.

IV.—Note on the preceding. By Jamus Prinszp, Secretary, &c.

More than a year has elapsed since Mr. Dean presented us with
a first selection from the fossil bones he had discovered while engaged
in blasting the rocks and impediments to navigation in the Jamna,
under Major Irving, and afterwards Captain Samira, of the Engineers :
a few months prior to that, in November, 1833, we had been made
acquainted with the fact of their occurrence by Captain Smita, to
whose valuable sketches on the stratification of the Dudb alluvium
and notes on the position of the fossils, published in the Journal
for December, 1833, I ventured to add a few remarks, suggesting
the probability of their being subjacent to the kankar, and therefore
of an age anterior to the deposition of the great bed of alluvium of
the Sub-Himalayan plains, when all this part of the present continent
was still buried under the expanse of waters.

This opinion has been combated by Serjeant Dean in the preceding
note, as well as in his memoir on the Duab strata, printed in page
273 of the present volume.

The evidence of an eye-witness must be deemed sufficient, and the
theory of original deposit with the alluvium must be given up. Still
the hypothesis advanced in its stead by Mr. Dean, of the fossilizing
powers of the Jamna, and the probability of all the present specimens
having been mineralized in siti, does not appear adequate to meet
the difficulties of the case.

It is so far true, that the bones are found in various stages of
transformation ; some in a crumbling state, the interstices filled with
the sand and kankar conglomerate of the river ; some lined, in the
cells of the bones, with calcareous spar, and chalky earth; while
others are, as it may be termed, wholly fossilized, of a dark shining
brown colour, ponderous, brittle, of a conchoidal fracture, and retain-
ing little even of the bone-earth itself in their composition. The
substance into which the bones are thus converted, is a hydrated
oxide of iron. The animal matter of the bone is probably first re-
placed by it, and then the softer portions. The hard enamel of
the teeth resists decomposition for a long time, and its whiteness,
contrasting with the dark brown of the cavities and encasing jaw

1835,] On the Fossils of the Jamna River. 501

gives these fossils the exact appearance of half picked, dried or roasted
bones. A fragment of the polished osseolite (for it deserves a
mineral appellation) yielded on rough analysis,

Phosphate and carbonate of lime,...... 17°5

RNSATCIEM tN as: clolsucid. wep erets tupiwiereme eleete g ie,8 6°0
Red oxide of iron (with alumina ?),...... 76°5
100

the specific gravity being 4°5.

Were the fossil ingredient every where carbonate of lime, some
support might be gained for the theory of the modern conversion
of the bones; but while no cause can be assigned for the ferruginous
impregnation, nor less for the siliceous, (of which if instances are less
frequent here, they are amply supplied from the analogous fossils of
Jabalpur ;) we shall be justified in seeking and assigning an extrane-
ous origin for the organic remains of the Jamna. Indeed the very
specimens upon which the greatest reliance might be urged by the
advocates of local formation, those in which the bone is seen entirely
imbedded in the hard kankar, furnish adverse evidence; for the
fragments imbedded are broken and rounded, and their substance or
composition is entirely heterogeneous to the matrix itself.

When to these arguments is added the strong fact of some of
the fossil animals being such as could not have existed in the dry
soil of Upper India, the point is in my opinion decided. Mr. Dean
mentions several imbedded specimens, and one whole animal, (the
elephant at Panchkourie*) as situated too high in the bank to be reached
by the highest modern floods of the river; to these, therefore, he
concedes the greatest antiquity, while of another he allows that the
parts must have been washed into the situation in which they now lie,
imbedded in the tufaceous conglomerate. Of the modern growth
of this calcareous tufa there can be no question. The incrustations
of roots and twigs (forming the pipe kankar of the specimens), and
even of fragments of boats or sunken weapons, lost in wrecks on these
dangerous shoals, are convincing proofs of it; but there is an
essential diffesence between this formation and the true kankar of

the banks.

There are two animals in Mr. Dran’s list, the camel and the human
subject, which have kept up a suspense of judgment as to the nature of
his fossil series, from their never having been discovered elsewhere :
this difficulty is now removed by the sight of the specimens. Dr.
Pearson, and Dr. Evans, are decided, that none of the fragments

* See the description and note in page 271—3,
3.7

502 Note on the Fossils from the (Sup.

described as human are such. Two of these are represented in the
accompanying plate as figs. 20 and 21. The former, supposed to be
the head of a human femur, is more likely to be the core of the horn
of some large deer; the other is far too uncertain to be identified.
The teeth and remains of the camel have been subsequently disavowed
by the discoverer himself (see page 278), and are found to be all
of the bovine genus.

We may then conclude, that the fossils now found in the bed of the
Jamna, entangled among the rocky shoals, have been washed thither
from some locality in which they were originally imbedded and fossiliz-
ed. From Mr. Dean’s account, it is probable, that they were enclosed
in the present bank, and have fallen in on its being cut away by the
gradual action of the river. Should this however not prove to be the
case, and search for their home be inquiringly extended to a distance ;
it is not necessary, as I had at first suggested, to travel back all the
way to the ample store-house of fossils in the Sewalik range of the
Lower Himalaya, whence such fragile materials could hardly be sup-
posed to arrive with any vestige of form ; for Lieut. Vicary has pre-
sented us with a nearer locality in the banks of the Betwa river*, and
Mr. Benson, from personal knowledge, confirms the probability of
this spot having been the source of the deposit in the rocks of the
Jamna. I myself incline to believe that both places have their fossils,
and that many more may still be found here and there where natural
sections of the alluvium have been formed by rivers, although to ex-
pect to fall upon them in the digging of wells would be as chimerical
(to use a homely proverb) as searching for a needle in a bundle of hay.

There is in every respect a complete analogy between the fossils
of the Jamna and those fortuitously discovered by CrawFurp under
the banks of the Irawadi in Ava. Their preservation is equally owing
to their impregnation and conversion into hydrate of iron. The
words of Professor BuckLanp would probably apply as well to the one
as to the other:

‘* At the bottom of the cliff, the strand was dry, and on it were found speci-
mens of petrified wood and bones, that had probably fallen from the cliff in the
course of its decay : but no bones were discovered in the cliff itself by Mr. Craw-
FuRD and Dr. Wa.tvicH: nor were they more fortunate in several places where
they dug in search of boues in the adjacent district. This district is composed
of sand hills that are very sterile, and is intersected by deep ravines: among the
sand are beds of gravel, often cemented to a breccia by iron or carbonate of lime ;
and scattered over its surface, at distant and irregular intervals, were found many
fragments of hone and mineralized wood; in some instances lying entirely loose

* See Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 1st April, 1835, page 183.

1835.} banks of the Jamna River. 503

upon the sand, in others half buried in it, with their upper portions projecting
naked, and exposed to the air. They appeared to have been left in this condition,
in consequence of the matrix of sand and gravel that once covered them, under-
going daily removal by the agency of winds and rains; and they would speedily
have fallen to pieces under this exposure to atmospheric action, had they not
been protected by the mineralization they have undergone. On examining many
of the ravines that intersect this part of the country, and which were at this
time dry, the same silicified wood was found projecting from the sand banks, and
ready to drop into the streams; from the bottom of which, the travellers took
many fragments, that had so fallen during the gradual wearing of the bank, and
lay rolled and exposed to friction by the passing waters. These circumstances
shew that the ordinary effect of existing rains and torrents is only to expose and
lay bare these organic remains, and wash them out from the matrix to which
some other and more powerful agency must have introduced them.”’

I must now briefly advert to the specimens which I have selected to
form the subjects of the annexed plate.—The space is far too limited to
embrace Mr. Deran’s collection, much less the extensive additions
received from Capt. E. Smirn, at Allahabad, since I engraved my
former plate (Vol. II. pl. 25), of Jamna fossils. I have therefore pru-
dently confined myself to distinguishing specimens, particularly teeth,
which, besides their value as the best types of the animal, are, from
their compact size, and hard quality, generally better preserved than
ordinary bones.

The teeth, with Dr. Prarson’s assistance I have been able to
identify; whereas without a complete Osteological Museum of exist-
ing animals (a desideratum we may hope, under his exertions, ere
long to possess,)—it would be hazardous and a loss of time to attempt
to classify the generality of mere mutilated fragments of bones. The
great advantage of such a museum over even the best executed plates,
was made most obvious in the course of the present examination : such
of the teeth, as could be placed by the side of the actual teeth of Mr.
Pzarson’s private cabinet, were at once referred to their correct
position in the jaw of the animal to which they belonged.

The drawings of all the specimens in the Plate are of half the true
lineal dimensions.

Omitting the fragments of elephants’ teeth, (Nos. 8 and 9,) as being
much the same as those already familiar to us from former plates,
I have commenced with the most important and curious of the present
series, figs. 1] and 2. The former, which was supposed by Mr. Dan
to belong to the genus Tapir, proved to be the last molar but one
on the right side upper jaw of the fossil hippopotamus, agreeing pre-
cisely with the drawing in pl. i. vol. I. fig. 3, of Cuvinr’s ossemens fos-
siles. This beautiful specimen is, to use the illustrious author’s
words, ‘‘ précisement- dans l'état de détrition on elle est le plus

3 T2

504 Note on the Fossil bones [Sepr.

facilement reconnoissable par les tréfles et les autres linéemens de
sa couronne.”

No. 2, is a young end tooth of the same animal, of which the
points have not yet been submitted to the grinding action.

I cannot forbear inserting here an extract from the Baron’s obser-
vations on the habitat of the existing hippopotamus, restricted to the
central regions of Africa, from the earliest period of antiquity ;—and
always a stranger to the continent of India.

“Outre le Cap et le Sénégal, ou saitpar BARBorT at par beaucoup d’autres voya-
geurs qu’ily en a quantité en Guinée etau Congo. Bruce assure qu’ils sont trés
nombreux dans le Nil d’ Abyssinie, et dans le lacIzana. Le VarLLanT en a vue dans
toutes les parties de la Cafrerie qu’il a parcourues ; ainsi l’ Afrique méridionale en
est peuplée presque partout. Mais n’y en a-t-il que dans cette partie du monde ?
C’est une ancienne opinion. Strasgon, (lib. xv, p. 1012, A., ed. Amsterd.
1707,) sur le témoignage de NEARqvuE et d’E’RATOSTHENES, nie déja qu’ily en
ait dans l’Indus, quoiqu’il avoue qu’ OnesteriTE |’eut affirmé. PAUSANIAS est
d’accord avec eux; et bien que PHILOSTRATE et Nonnvs aient adopté l’opinion
d’OneEsicrITE, il est de fait qu’aucun voyageur accrédité n’a rapporté qu’on en
trouve sur le continent de l’Inde, méme au del4 du Gange. Burron n’a été
nullement touché du temoignage de MicureLt Born, qui en place a la Chine ;
c’est donc 4 peu prés sans autorité que Linnaus, dans ses éditions x. et xii.
suppose qu’il y en a aux embouchures des fleuves de |’Asie; ainsi M. Fausas
paraissait bien autorisé 4 ne point admettre sur ce continent l’existence de I’
hippopotame ; mais peut étre n’aurait il di étendre sa négation 41’ Asie entiére ;
car M. MarspEn, auteur de considération, place l’hippopotame au mornbee
des animaux de fle de Sumatra.

“‘ Cependant il reste & savoir si M. MarspEn lui méme n’a pas été trompé.’’
— Oss. Foss. i. 279.

The animal, Marspen alluded to, was most probably the tapir, for
Messrs. Diarp and DuVaucet could find no trace of the hippopotamus
either in Java or Sumatra.

Fig. 3, is the third molar right upper jaw of a very large ox, or
buffalo, though the latter name, a stranger to fossil geology, should
rather wait further confirmation*. The specimen corresponds precisely
with the similar tooth of the largest buffalo in the museum.

Fig. 4, I at first took for the little fossil hippopotamus of Cuvisr,
vol. I. p. 334; but on placing it side by side with the upper jaw
of a large hog shewn me by Dr. Parson, in the Society’s museum, it

* T have just received a note from Lieut. BAKER, correcting, on this head, my
notice of the animals in his and Lt. Duranp’s Dadupur Museum, in the Pro-
ceedings of the Asiatic Society, for July last, (page 409.) The buffalo, he says,
has not yet been found in the Sewdlik hills, although the ox is very common there.
I possess a note and sketch, however, from Serjeant Dawe of a supposed
buffalo’s head, which is now on its way to our museum.

1835.] from the banks of the Jamna River. 505

agreed with the latter in every particular, save that it was one-
fifth larger.

Fig. 5, is the hindmost molar of the ox, a smaller animal than
the last.

Figs. 6 and 8, are too views of the hindmost molar of one of the deer
family. It corresponds precisely with a large antelope in the museum,
and the Cuvierian characteristics of the teeth of the camel, antelope,
goat,and sheep, which contradistinguish them from the other ruminants,
namely, ‘‘ qu ils ont la face externe de leurs molaires inférieures sim-
plement divisée en autant de piliers demi-cylindriques qu’elles out
chacune de doubles croissans,” are particularly marked in it. The
antelope is one of the animals not hitherto known in a fossil state,
therefore it will be improper to pronounce upon a single tooth; but
the goat and sheep are equally so, and the specimen is too large for
them, and too small for the camel.

Fig. 7, seems to be the interior spire of the tooth of a ruminant, of
which the exterior has been destroyed.

Fig 9, is the second milch tooth, in germ, of the ox or deer; and
fig. 10, one of the middle incisors of the latter animal.

Fig. 11, is the second or third molar tooth of the lower jaw of a
horse. It somewhat exceeds in size the corresponding tooth of the
celebrated racing mare Eclipse, of 15 hands high, whose skull is in
Dr. Pearson’s possession.

Fig. 12, is a fragment of the jaw of a small deer; the teeth are all
lost, but one, which is ground down by age, until all the marks are
effaced,

Fig. 13, is an incisor of some small ruminant.

Fig. 14, is rightly attributed by Mr. Dean to the water rat. The
delineations on the crown differ slightly from the drawings in
Couvizr’s synoptical plate of the ‘‘ Rongeurs;” but they agree with the
existing species. |

Fig. 15, are Saurian teeth, probably of the garial or L. Gangetica.
Several fragments of the jaw of the alligator appear in tlie collection,
and many of the vertebre of a dark-brown shining aspect, well
preserved. One of these is represented in fig. 21, (upside down,) to
shew the appearance of the processes.

Fig. 16, is correctly described by Mr. Draw as the fossil sting of a
ray fish, coinciding precisely with the recent specimen sent by him for
comparison (of which a portion is delineated under the fossil, fig. 17).

Fig. 18. Several pointed calcareous spiracles, without organic struc-
ture, but semi-crystallized, appear to resemble the pseudostalactites
thus described in Professor BuckLanp’s memoir on the Ava fossils :—

506 On the Fossil Elk of the Himdlayas. [Seer.

«‘There are other calcareous concretions that contain no kind of
organic nucleus, but are composed of precisely the same materials as
those which are found around the bones, and present many of the
irregular shapes of the tuberous roots of vegetables; some of them
also have the elongated conical form of slender stalactites, or clustered
icicles—a form not unfrequently produced in beds of loose calcareous
sand, by the constant descent of water along the same smal] cavity
or crevice, to which a root or worm hole may have given the first
beginning :” p. 383. Mr. Dzan’s collection has many examples of
encrusted twigs and roots.

Fig. 19, the specimen which so much puzzled the gentlemen who
examined the collection while in Mr. D.’s possession is in fact one of
the most curious of the whole, nor is yet certainto what animal it should
beassigned. Mr. Pzarson, on seeing it, pointed out its great resemblance
to the cervical vertebra of the young camelopardalis, which died in
Calcutta, a few years since, and of which he preserved the skeleton.
Lieut. Baker has favored me with a drawing of a similar bone, which
he states to belong to a fossil elk in Serjeant Dawz’s collection. (See
Pl. XLIV. and the description in page 507.) There are others of
much larger dimensions, he says, in the Dadupur museum, the contents
of which will form the subject of a plate in the ensuing number of the
Journal.

The specimen set down as a small petrified fish, which it much
resembles in outward form, is, on making a longitudinal section, found
to be formed of oval concentric concretions, similar to those of the
country almond; possibly they are the convolutions of some shell, but
certainly not a fish.

VI.—On the Fossil Elk of the Himdlaya. By Lieut. W. E. Baxer,
Engineers.
[In a note to the Editor.]

The fossils represented in the accompanying plate, XLIV., are stated
by the natives who collected them to have been found in the Haripur
pass of the Sub-Himalayan range. The original specimens are in the
possession of Mr. Dawe of the Canal Department.

The fragment of antler (fig. 3,) appears undoubtedly to have be-
longed to a species of elk, and it is possible, that the two vertebrz
(figs. 1 and 2) may have formed a part of the same animal: as they
are stated to have been brought from the same locality, and this
statement is corroborated by the similarity of colour and general ap-
pearance of the fossils. One of the vertebre (fig. 2) was actually

erie. Soe. Vol. W. PLXXXiIIL
Fossils from the bed of the Jumna River )

|

pene 4y
rear) .

1835.] On the Arborizations of the Sén agates. 507

adhering to the antler at the time when I undertook to clear away
the sandstone with which they were all partially covered up.

The fragment (fig. 4) consisting of one of the occipital condyles of
a large ruminant, was obtained afterwards from the same person who
brought the others, and who stated that he had found it in the same
spot. I purpose availing myself of the first opportunity of visiting
this pass, where, from the admirable state of preservation of these
specimens, I hope to meet with others equally perfect.

The axis (fig. 1) must have belonged to a very large ruminant,
being in linear dimension about double the size of the corresponding
bone of the common bullock of Hindustan. But supposing it to have
belonged to our elk, it would appear that this individual at least did
not in size equal the elk, of which the remains have been found in
Europe.

Besides the specimens represented in the plate, there are in the
Dadupur collection, many fragments of bones, more or less perfect,
of gigantic ruminants: amongst others, cervical vertebre, far exceed-
ing in size that represented in fig. 2.

Another year will, I hope, give us a more perfect acquaintance with
the former possessors of these huge fragments; in the mean time, it
may be worth while to note the discovery of the first undoubted remains
of the elk, as I am not aware that this animal has been hitherto found
in a fossil state in India.

Dadupur, June 9th, 1835.

VII.—-Note on the Vegetable Impressions in Agates. By Mr. J. Srz-
PHENSON.
[In a letter to the Editor.]

A few of the scientific gentlemen of Calcutta, who have seen
specimens of my collection of agates from the Sone river, having im-
bedded the organic remains of plants, have doubted the existence of
such remains ; asserting (agreeable to the old notion), that the appear-
ances are ceased by metallic oxides, merely assuming arborescent forms,
I am well aware, that long cherished opinions are difficult to eradicate,
and most people are tenacious of parting with what they have hugged
as truths for half a century. I well remember when Sir Humpurny
Davy explained Lavorsizr’s beautiful theory of combustion, that a
good many of my contemporaries would not be convinced, though
demonstration stared them in the face; and it was only after years of
argument, that they were compelled, at last, to embrace the new and

508 On the Arborizations of the Sdn agates. [Szrr.

splendid discovery. My object in this communication is, to convince
those who.doubt the existence of organic remains in agates from the
Sone river, or elsewhere. I therefore beg leave to refer them to the fol-
lowing passages in Dr. Urn’s Dictionary of Chemistry, published about
fifteen years ago, which, in my humble opinion, establishes my point.

‘‘ These curious appearances (meaning the organic remains of plants) were
ascribed to deposites of iron or manganese; but more lately they have been
thought to arise from mineralized plants of the cryptogamous class.’? And
again, ‘‘ Dr. McCuttocu has recently detected what DauBENTON merely con-
jectured, in mocha stone and moss agates, aquatic conferve, unaltered both in co-
Jour and form, and also coated with iron oxide. Mosses and lichens have also
been observed along with chlorite, in vegetations. An onyx agate, set in a ring,
belonging to the Earl of Powis, contains the chrysalis of a moth.”? Iam also of
opinion, that the arborescent appearance termed Dendrites in our magnesian
limestone, and flag sand-stone, are the remains of mosses and lichens. J have
several times tested the substance, but could only detect carbon, which certainly
indicates their vegetable origin. I doubt not when they are effectually examined,
but they will turn out to be the remains of vegetation.”’

The beautiful specimens from the sandstone of Chunar afford an
excellent opportunity to those who may wish to set the matter at rest,
and I must here remark, that you, as Secretary of the Asiatic Society of
Calcutta, might easily accomplish the desired examination.

T also have another reason for troubling you with this communica-
tion. Ifthe appearances in the agates are not the remains of plants,
Thave in that case asserted a falsehood in my advertisement, published
in No. 39 of your Journal. However, with such authorities as the
above mentioned, I need not fear again to assert, that the appearances
in my agates are the real organic remains of aqueous plants, in a state
of preservation not exceeded by any previous discovery, and altogether
(as a collection), wnigue.

Dr. Urs’s Geology affords further proofs to strengthen my original
opinion, that the appearances in my agates are truly the remains of
plants ; thepassage runs thus: .

‘Tf any further evidence of the aqueous origin of chalcedonies and agates. were
wanted, it has been afforded by Dr. McCuLtoca in an ingenious paper on the vege-
table remains preserved in these siliceous minerals, published in the 3rd volume of
the Transactions of the Geological Society. It is there shown that the mode in
which the delicate vegetables thus become involved is perfectly simple, and consist-
ent with the production of chalcedony. But we must distinguish their real causes,
from pseudo specimens of black arborizations, produced by the oxides of manganese
and iron, or by chlorite.

‘¢ When real conferve are present, the vegetable form is so perfectly preserved

‘that the plant seems to float freely as if in its liquid element. Even the green often
retains its lively hue.

Jour. As. See. Vol. WV. PLX LIV.

Fossil Elk prom the Sub-lHimatayas.

PI pee 8
iz- Natl. Ste.

/

Scale of Inches.

4 5 7

Hurree Se?

ahh coms Mb, ere
Se en efit eal sas Alba aber act Nigecpin faite
Ly,

1835.] Saltness of the Red Sea. 509

“Some of the large species of plants have been determined. DauBENnTon
describes the Lichen rangiferinus and digitatus, plants possessed of forms which

no minerals could imitate.”’
This account is accompanied with an engraving of a plant (a hypnum)

occurring in Chalcedony, which agrees with a few in my collection ;
but a great many others, I dare say, are undescribed plants in a fossil
state, and worthy the notice of the scientific world.

It cannot be otherwise than interesting to the Geologists of Europe,
as well as to those in India, to have a description of the various
species of fossil plants occurring in the Sone agates, with engravings
of a few of the largest ones; and I will endeavour shortly to supply
such a desideratum through your Journal as the fittest for such a

purpose.

VIII.— Chemical Analyses. By Jas. Prinsep, Sec. &e.

Under this head we propose to insert the examinations of various
substances sent to us by friends, of which they will be better able to
look for the results here than in detached miscellaneous notices. —Ep.

1.—Saltness of the Red Sea.

The Hugh Lindsay, Steamer, having given currency to the report
that the Red Sea contained more salt than the ocean, and that in con-
sequence she had been obliged to blow off much more frequently
while in that part of her voyage, Lieutenant Burnes, on his return to
India on board of her, took the precaution of filling two bottles, one
with the water of the Red Sea, the other with that of the Arabian
Sea, which he was so kind as to send to me under charge of Lieutenant
Fraser. (See Proc. Asiatic Society, page 410.)

_ After being allowed to stand for some hours side by side, to acquire
the same temperature, their specific gravity was taken in the most
accurate manner.

No. 1, Arabian Sea water, spec. grav. 1:0254 at 86°1
2p dted, Sea..Waterscfares i. tates wv tie a 1:0258 at 86°2

The difference is certainly in favor of the latter, but it is much too
small to cause any sensible effect in the blowing off.

Equal portions of the two were then analysed by the usual chemical
tests, although the hydrometer result would have been quite sufficient
to found a judgment upon. It was thought that perhaps the lime might
be in excess in the one case, and thus cause a quicker incrustation
in the boilers ; but both waters on evaporation began to be turbid
at the same time. The analysis was chiefly directed to the determin-
ation of the sulphuric acid and lime, the rest being performed in a
rapid manner: the results were as follows on one cubic inch of each ‘

3.u ;

510 Analyses—Sea-water—Magnesia. (Serr.

Arabian Sea: Red Sea.
Sulphuric acid, thrown down with barytes, 1°82 grs. 1°80

Lime, precipitated by oxalate of ammonia, 0°70 0°82
1000 grs. gave, with nitrate of silver,

chloride of silver,.: 2... 2.29% panne a Wie) 0 00) 81°95

= chloride of sodium, or common salt, 32°8 33°5

Although, however, the sea in mid channel may not differ materi-
ally from the broad ocean in its contents, it may be possible that in
insulated positions near shore, under a fierce sun, concentration may
proceed to a considerable extent—this is the only way in which I
can account for the very different result published in the London
Literary Gazette, on the authority of Dr. Urz’s analyses quoted in Mr.
Witxrnson’s work on Egypt.

The following is the paragraph alluded to:

‘‘ During my stay on the coast of the Red Sea, I had occasion to
observe the remarkable saltness of its water, and succeeded in ascer-
taining that it contained much more saline matter than the ocean.
I have since been favoured by Dr. Ure with the analysis of some
water brought by me from Berenice, from which it results that the
specific gravity is 1:035 ; that 1000 grains of water contain 43 of
saline matter, of which about four grains are muriate of lime, with
a little muriate of magnesia, and the remainder muriate of soda, with
a little sulphate of magnesia. The specific gravity of water of the
open ocean in the same latitude is only 1028, and contains not more
than 36 grains of saline matter in a similar quantity.”

To which the author attaches a note, explaining, that “after the
vernal equinox, the Red Sea is lower in winter ; but the prevalence of
the south wind after the month of September causes a considerable
rise of its level.”

The difference in the two cases isnot more than may reasonably
be explained in the above manner. The hydrometer is in all cases
the safest test, and it isa pity that it had not been resorted to in the
steam navigation of the Mediterranean, which has been the source of
such contradictory statements.

2.— Native Carbonaie of Magnesia from South India.

In my analysis of the Nerbudda dolomite, published in the Gleanings |
in Science, vol. I. p. 267, I expressed a desire to obtain some of this
mineral, stated by Dr. Tuomson to form ‘ whole rocks in Hindustan,
and to contain much less carbonic acid than it ought,’”’ though he was
curious to know whether the interior portions of the mountain might
not have their full proportion.

My wish has at length been gratified by Dr. Maxcotmson, Sec.
Med. Bd. at Madras, among whose specimens, recently presented to

1835.] Native Carbonate of Magnesia. 511

the Society, are several lumps of this curious mineral. Dr. M. writes:

“The native carbonate of magnesia from Salem has again attracted
attention. I at first supposed it to be a magnesite, from the great
difficulty of dissolving it, but subsequent observation proved it to con-
tain no silex. Its composition would seem to be, carbonic acid
47°5; water 4:0* ; magnesia 48°5. As it is likely to become an article
of commerce, and the statements regarding it are contradictory, I

-send some for your re-examination. It occurs in thin veins (from
an inch to a foot), and also, (it is said,) in beds.”

As the atomic weight of magnesia differs materially in different
chemical works, I was anxious to make use of this mineral to set the
matter at rest, and decide whether Berzrxtius, THomson, or BRANDE
was most to be trusted.

Three careful experiments proved, that the water contained was
0°8 per cent., while the slight adulteration of silica left, on dissolving
100 grs., was only 0°3 ; traces of alumina and oxide of iron were visi-
ble in the form of a delicate brown gelatinous film on adding ammo-
nia to the solution, but none of lime, even after adding sulphuric or
oxalic acid, evaporating to dryness, and redissolving in distilled water.
The solid impurities, therefore, being set against the gaseous, as nearly
in the proportions of the magnesian salt itself, it is evident that sim-
ple calcination of the solid mineral will give a very exact view of its
constituent proportions.

Ten specimens of 100 grs. each, treated in this manner, returned
from the fire, weighing respectively, 49°67, 48°26, 48°20, 48-40,
48°40, 48°38, 48°39, 48°33, 48°37, and 48°38. The firstof these
was in the solid form, and therefore may not have been thoroughly
calcined: the average of the rest gives,

Magnesia,.... 48°34 by Berzzexrus 48°31+
Carbonic acid, 51°66 51:69

100. 100.

or almost precisely the composition according to this accurate chemist—
which it may be remembered was the only one which would agree with
my analysis of the Jabalpur dolomite, a definite crystallized compound
of one atom of carbonate of lime and one of carbonate of magnesia.

To prove that no influential quantity of carbonic acid was retained,
two of the specimens were dissolved in dilute nitric acid, ina closed
glass tube—the gas extricated was less than the 50th of a cubic inch.

* Dr. MALcotmson afterwards corrects this error. A part of the carbonic
acid was driven off with the water.
+ By Dr. THomson, M. 46°2 C. A. 53°38; by BRANDE M, 47°2; C. A. 528.

on Dees

612 Analyses—Tin from Malacca. [Szupr.

The mineral was found to differ considerably in weight from the
statements of —THomson and Puititirs—the specific gravity of two
specimens being 2°970, and 2°897, at thetemperature of 85°. A good
deal of air was given off on its first immersion into water, and it adhered
to the tongue.

Another point to be ascertained, from this mineral, was, whether the
circumstance I noticed on the occasion alluded to, would hold true, viz.
that calcined magnesia would not become a hydrate, like lime, on slak-
ing, and that this earth might thus be recognized in mixtures.

Three of the calcined specimens were treated with water, which dis-
engaged considerable heat, and then exposed in a receiver, over concen-
trated sulphuric acid, to be ridden of hygrometric moisture. After 30
hours, they weighed respectively 60°45, 58°7,60°9 grs., shewing an
average excess of 10°0, which is about half an atom of water (9°8).
This result is so unexpected that it requires further examination, which
I hope to be able to give hereafter.

3.—Tin from Malacca.

Cast blocks of the metal of the principal mines, as prepared for
sale, were transmitted by Ensign Newsotp. With reference to my
observation in the 3rd vol. of the GLeAntines, I was contented to test
their purity by the specific gravity, which was as fellows :—pure tin,
at the same temperature, 84°°5, being about ...... 7°290

INo; 71: fom, Naning 20.1. 55 sete aeeeeeee LRG
No. 2, ,, Srimenanti (new mine) ...... 7°262
Ne} 3.863 4 Jonipole: nae cds sae eee 7°287
INQ. 4,1). oungie @ojanges. os Sk 7°223
No: 5;) 4, ) LukitinpSalangare... as. 1.22 7°349
No.6; ,;.. Rumbowes.. sas..cee ae ties, 2 BGS
No... A; Py Jelahaawt...! ote. see 7°314
INo/ Sats f OP erdice. 0 ee. BEARS! ra 77299

Two specimens of the ore also accompanied :—

No. 1, from Lukit, a fine grained black oxide of tin, had a speci-
fie gravity of 6°74, and yielded a produce of 70 per cent. of very good
metal, on simple fusion, with black flux.

No. 2, from Srimenanti, was in much larger grains or lumps. It
weighed, however, only 6°64 ; and yielded only 524 (?) per cent. of
metal—giving off some sulphur in the fire. It is therefore inferior
to the former, but probably not to the extent stated in the above crude
and single reduction.

4.—American Self-generating Gas Lamp.

Mr. Loneurvitte Cuarxe has one of these curious and ingenious

lamps, which are something on the principle of the little floating

1835.] Chemical Analyses. 513

candlesticks without oil, invented, I believe, by Woouaston. A
metal stem passes down into the liquid, and, once heated, is afterwards
kept warm by the burning vapour, which it causes to rise and
issue from the gas-jets encircling the stem. Some mystery is made
about the liquid, but its analysis proves to be very simple.

Specific gravity, -760 at 32°; easily volatile, with a smell of turpen-
tine. 100 grs. allowed to evaporate spontaneously, left barely a trace
of solid matter—resinous. 100 parts, mixed with water in a measured
tube, turned white, and 15 parts of pure colourless turpentine finally
settled at the top of the watery emulsion. In fact, a mixture of 85
alcohol, and 15 turpentine was found to possess precisely the
qualities of the liquid, burning with a clear flame, and without smell.

It is necessary to use the oil of, and not the rectified, turpentine,
which latter is well known not to be soluble in alcohol.

5.—Native Remedy for the Spleen.

The late Dr. Twin1ne gave me some pills used by the natives asa
cure for the spleen. They proved to contain nothing but sulphate
of copper, mixed up with meal and mucilage.

6.— Three bottles of Water from Hot Springs in Assam.

Captain JeNKINs is anxious for the result of their examination ;
but I really am uncertain of two, which arrived in a dirty and odo-
rous state—one, No. 3, containing an abundant putrid yellow scum,which
appeared like a compound of bitumen and sulphuretted hydrogen, but
was not further examined. No. 1, was a clear sweet water, having a
specific gravity, 9964 at 91°, and containing only common salt.

7.—Mineral Water from Ava.

Captain Macteop favoured me with a bottle of water from the
lake near the Khyendwen river, whence a mineral salt is obtained. It
hada spec. grav. of .9985 at 88°, and was consequently nearly pure.
But a second bottle, filled from a well only three feet from the same
lake, weighed 1:0006 at 88°, and yielded a copious precipitate to muri-
ate of barytes, and nitrate of silver, shewing it to contain a mixture
of sulphates and muriates, which are extracted by the people of the
neighbourhood.

8.—Hot Springs in the Mahadeo hills, (see Vol. 111. p, 390.)

The two bottles sent me by Dr. SpiusBury were so nearly pure, that it
was not worth while to examine them further than by the hydrometer.
9.—Minerals from Moulmien.

The following are, I believe, the correct names of the specimens
obligingly sent by Lieut. Foutny, in June. Nos. 1, 4, 16, irom pyrites ;
2, galena; 3, sulphuret of antimony; 8, 9, hydrated oxide of iron, hz-
matitic; 10, fibrous gypsum; 11, magnetic oxide of iron; 12, 14, 17,
granite with pseudo- metallic mica ;13, black oxide of tin.

514 Horary Observations at Calcutta, (Serr.

10.—Sulphuret of Molybdenum.

This was put into my hands by a mercantile house in Calcutta, with-
out however noticing whence it came.

It resembled graphite or plumbago so exactly in its qualities of
drawing traces on paper, of being unaltered in the fire, and very gra-
dually disappearing, that I should have been contented with these
appearances, had not its specific gravity, 4°64 to 4:5, been so much
higher than that of graphite, (1-4.) When heated also, white fumes,
devoid of smell, or slightly sulphurous, were perceived at the moment
of withdrawal from the fire.

It was digested with disengagement of red fumes in nitric acid ; leav-
ing a white insoluble precipitate in the filter, weighing 74°4 per cent.
The liguid gave immediate evidence of sulphuric acid, that had been
formed from the sulphur present. The white mass acted in all respects
like molybdic acid, and was known to be so from its peculiar property
of turning instantly blue on contact with metallic iron, lead, copper,
or silver: a fact, I believe, not hitherto noticed : water is required
to produce this effect. Heated red with carbonate of soda, the metal
was reduced with effervescence.

I am not aware that this singular mineral is turned to any profit,
but it is desirable to ascertain where it has been discovered. ‘The
high specific gravity of the Ceylon graphite, 2°37, leads me to imagine
that I may have mistaken that mineral also, and invites further inquiry.
It may be remembered*, that in an English cabinet of minerals, a me-
tallic ore was also found substituted for the true Borrowdale plumbago.

1X.—Horary Meteorological Register for Calcutta. By Jas. Prinszp,
Sec. &c.

The 21st September having been appointed one of the days for the
combined series of horary observations, by the Meteorological Associ-
ation, I could not allow it to pass without an attempt to fulfil the
prescribed terms, even at the sacrifice of a night’s rest.

The weather was not very favorable, although such as might be
expected near the equinox: the barometer was gradually falling, indi-
cative of blowing weather ; which in fact followed a few days after-
wards. The occasional violent showers checked the course of the
thermometer and hygrometer ; and the minimum temperature noted,
was that of the rain, rather than that of radiation to the sky. Asa
different barometer was necessarily used during the night, care was
taken to continue its readings during the day, to obtain an accurate
comparison with the standard instrument at the Assay Office. The
difference—‘017, has been added, to bring the whole to terms of the

* See Analysis of Graphite, GLEANINGS, vol. III. p. 180.

1835.] On the 2\st and 22nd Sept. 1835. 515

standard, which I have reason to believe does not differ more than
‘010 (in defect) from the Royal Society’s barometer.

The thermometers were all standards from Newman’s, agreeing very
closely together.

The diurnal tides for the two days are respectively 0:140 and 0:116,
from the former of which must be deducted the gradual decrease of the
pressure for 6 hours;’732-—-663-—-4—='017, leaving 0°123,and°116 +°123
—2 =0'120 is the mean, which is rather above the usual amount of
tide for the month of September. The nocturnal tide from 103 p. m.
to 42 a. m. is *700—-607 (with allowance for the half hours) =-083.
The hours of maxima and minima correspond with those used in the
registers of the Journal, and suggest the expediency of an alteration
in those fixed for observation by Sir Joun Hurscuen, (see page 358.)

Horary observations of the Barometer, Thermometer, and Hygrometer, made at Calcutta,
Srom 6 A. M. of the 21st to 6 P.M. of the 22nd September, 1835.

Thermometer , Wet wet (38
Baro- in the bulb | bulb ie te Ble ms
Hour | meter| Air. |Under | 7” depres-|'3 3 & Weather.
21st. | at 32° sky. |therm.| sion. [Zi] 4 | &
A.M. 6 |29.678 78.0 75.2 75.8 04) E, |Seud, cirri above.
7 | .699 | 79.4 76.2 | 3.2 e. |do., increasing.
8 -715 80.0 76.5 3.5 o. |cumuli, clear above.
9 -725 81.8 80.0 76.8 5.0 e. |do.
19 aie 85,0 85.2 78.1 6.9 e. jcumuli,
11 -702 84.7 97.0 rirfey 7.0 95 E. |do., fine.
noon. | .684 | 85.6 | 100.0] 78.4 | 7.2 94 E. |do.
1 -656 86.0 96.2 78.3 Vide) 93 e. overcast.
2 -621 79.2 91,0 78.6 | 0.6 100 e, {hard shower, clear.
3 2592 83.1 102.4 78.8 4.3 97 e. |fair.
4 -592 82.2 88.2 78.6 3.6 97 e. cloudy.
5 2595 82.3 85.7 78.7 3.6 97 e. {do.
6| .605 | 83.7 |(rain.)| 78.6 | 5.1 e. jcumuli, rain 6% p.m.
fale 646) | 78.5 | 74.0 | 7628 }) 1.7 Oo. |rain.
8 -657 79.7 77.5 PO. e. jovercast.
9 -688 80.1 717.4 ps7] E. |do., clearing.
10| .696 | 79.5 | 76.8 | 76.5] 3.0 ——_| e, |clear night.
11 -699 79.1 76.4 2.7 0.40| e. |do.
midnight.| .682 |] 78.4 76.2 | 2.2 e. |do.
22nd. 1 -658 77.8 76.4 1.4 e. |do.
2 -653 | 77.6 76.4 1.2 e. |cloudy.
3 -636 77.7 76.5 122 e. jovercast.
4 -618 Wieo 75.7 76.3 TE e. |do.
5 -621 Y hr AY | 76.8 1 Ue | E_ |cum. stratus,
Coty 643) (0 07-7,| 76.8.) 76.4 1.3 E. |do., wet.
7 | .646] 78.3 76.5 1.8 E, |do.
8} .654{ 79.1 76.6 | 2.5 E. /do., clearing.
9 -662 80.3 Tek Ao, E, |scud.
10 -663 83.0 78.1 4.9 E. |fine.
11 .647 83.9 79.6 4.2 96 E. |cumuli.
noon. -620 | 83.4 | 93.0] 77.4] 6.0 94 E. /do.
Hi) 1595 | 80.4.) 83.2 776.2258 99 E, jrain, dull.
2 -568 81.5 88.4 bed 4.0 9S E, |cumuli.
3 -544 81.5 85.8 77.5 4.0 98 E. /overcast.
4 544 80.4 79.6 76.6 3.8 99 e. |hard rain.
5 547 79.2 79.0 Vip lee 2.0 99 e. {do.
6 | .574 |X77.6 75.7 | 1.9 0.60) E. jclearing.
Mean ist
24hours, |29.6605| 80.61 77.26) 3.35 0.40/e byn|showery.
Mean 2d

24hours, }29.6317] 79.58 76.96| 2.62 0.60j/ebysiditto.

516 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Sepr.

X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
Wednesday Evening, the 7th October, 1835.

The Hon’ble Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

Messrs. J. Benx, G. Locn, C.S., J. M. McLeop, Mad. C.S., and Lieuts.
H. M. Duranp and W. E. Baxer, Engineers, proposed at the last Meet-
ing, were ballotted for, and unanimously elected Members of the Society.

Mr, J. Srepuenson, proposed at the last meeting, was, upon the favour-
able report of the Committee of Papers, elected an Associate Member.

Read a letter from G. A. Busupy, Esq., Secretary to Government,
intimating, that the Society’s Memorial would be dispatched by an early
opportunity.

Read a letter from J. C. C. Suraertanp, Esq., Secy. Genl. Com. Pub.
Instr., forwarding the list of Oriental Books, transferable to the Society.

Read a letter from M. A. Court, acknowledging his election as an Honor-
ary Member.

Read a letter from M. E. Burwour, Secretary to the Asiatic Society
of Paris, acknowledging the receipt of Volume XVIII. of the Asiatic
Researches.

Read letters from J. Forsuauu, Esq. Secretary to the British Museum,
and H. Harkness, Secretary to the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain
and Ireland, acknowledging the receipt of copies of M. Csoma pE K6r6s’s
Tibetan and English Dictionary.

Read a letter from Professor H. H. Wixson, forwarding statements of the
Society’s accounts with Messrs. Parpury and Co., made up to the end of
December last, exhibiting a balance of £23 11s. 1d. in favor of the Society.

Library.

Read a letter from Counsellor Von Hammer, forwarding for presenta-
tion the undermentioned books published by himself.

History of the Ottoman Empire, vol. 10th.

Jahrbucher der Literature, vols. 65, 66, 67, and 68.

Uber die Linderverwaltung unter dem Chalifate.

The following Books were also presented :

Statuti dell’ Accademia delle Scienze e Belle Lettere—dy the Academy of
Palermo.

De redigendis ad unicam seriem comparabilem meteorologicis ubique factis
observationibus Conventio Proposita et Tabulez Supputate ab Equite Nicolao
Cacciatore—by the Author.

CrLovcGn’s Pali Grammar, with a copious Vocabulary, 1 vol., anda Dictionary
English and Singalese, 2 vols.—by the Author.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, No. 3--by the Society.

Moor’s Oriental Fragments—dy the Author.

Proceedings of the Geological Society of London, No. 37—by the Society.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 22—-by the Editor.

Roopra Van Eysinea’s Datch and Malay Dictionary, 2 vols. and

ANGLEBEEK’S Malay Grammar, 1 vol.—dy Dr. Vos.

Hikaitismyateem, 1 vol. Malay Language and Character—éy ditto.

Meteorological Register for August, 1835—by the Surveyor General.

A copy of the Tibetan, Mongol, and Chinese Vocabulary, alluded toin M.
Kiaprotn’s notice sur le Tibet, procured through Mr. Ineuis of Canton, and
presented by the Secretary. 3

The following Books received from the Book-sellers :

Illustrations of the Botany and other branches of the Natural History of the
Himalayan mountains, by J. F. Royur, Esq. F. L. S. and G. 8. M. R. ALS.

SowrrRBy’s Fossil Conchology.

Lanxpner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, Germanic Empire, vol. 2nd.

—— ——, Ireland, vol. Ist.

1835.) Semimenstrual Inequality of the Tides. 517

Museum.

A variety of bows, arrows, and other weapons from Chota Nagpore,
Singhbhim, and the Jungle Mehals, were presented by Lieut. G. W.
Hamriron, 34th Regt. N. I.

Prepared skeleton of the hood of a Cobra de Capello Snake, presented
by Colonel L. R. Sracy.

Literary,

Read a letter from Lieut. G. W. Haminton, 34th Regt. N. I., forward.
ing two manuscript volumes of a poetical translation of part of the Shah
Nameh of Firdausi, by the late Francis Goxp, Esq., Assistant Surgeon,
34th Regt. N. I.

Physical.

A memoir, with drawings, of the Stvutherium Giganteum, a new fossil ru-
minant genus fromthe valley of the Markanda, by Dr. Fauconer and.
Captain P. J. Cauriey, was read.

Also, a notice of the fossil Crocodile of the Sewalik Hills, by Captain
CaurTLey.

Minerals from the neighbourhood of Kabul were forwarded by Syed
Kera’mar Att, for presentation ; also a large supply of flower and fruit seeds
and medicinal drugs, from the same place, and a further collection of
Bactrian coins for inspection.

The seeds were directed to be transmitted to the H. C. Botanical Garden,
with a request that they might be examined, and bestowed to the best advantage.
The medical drugs, in like manner, to be transferred to the Medical Society.

The collection of Coins, consisting of about 750 pieces, 11 gold, 72 silver,
and the rest copper, possesses one silver EUrHYDEMUS; one ditto ANTILAKIDES,
(new ;) two ditto MenanDERs; one ditto Lysivus, (new ;) a fine gold KApDPHISES.
The remainder are of the Indo-Scythic, Sassanian, and Khalif dynasties.

The minerals collected by the praiseworthy and intelligent Syed are some
from the neighbourhood of Kabul, and others from Demavend, &c. in Persia.
Among others, a fine green talcose sectile steatite or agalmatolite from Kabul,
native sulphur, gypsum, specular iron in large lamine, &c.

A letter from Captain Conotiy, accompanying the despatch, states that
Keraart Aur has collected a large store of statistical information during his
stay at Kabul while agent for the British Government, which it is his intention
to put together for publication in Persian.

At the conclusion of the business of the evening, the Secretary exhibit-
ed a very powerful electro-magnet, lately received from London, which
produced a brilliant spark, decomposed water freely, imparted a consider-
able galvanic shock to the human body, and lighted a spirit lamp.

XI.—Exztracis from Correspondence.

1.—Semimenstrual Inequality of the Tides.

[We hasten to publish the following letter from the Rev. W. WHEWELL, of
Cambridge, in correction of a quotation from the learned Professor’s Essay on
Cotidal Lines in our editorial notice of Mr. Sinciarr’s tables of the Calcutta
tides, in the third volume of the Journal, p. 408. We regret that the period
fixed for the contemporaneous observations on the shores of England should have
passed: but we once more repeat a request to our friends on the coast to fur-
nish the information now called for.—Ep.]

‘In the number of your Journal for August, 1833, is given a table of the times
of high water at the principal places between Calcutta and Point Palmiras, by

'Mr. P. A. Stncuarr: an addition to our previous materials for a map of
3x

518 Division of Astronomical Instruments. [Serr.

Cotidal Lines which I saw with much pleasure. But I am desirous of removing 2
misapprehension which J perceive in the remarks accompanying this table. Mr.
Suvcrarr has given the time of high water for every day of the moon’s age, at the
places contained in his table, calculated on the supposition of a daily retardation
of the tide, to the amount of 48 minutes : and in the remarks arule is quoted from
my paper for the correction of the time so given. But the rule quoted is errone-
ous for the purpose there stated. The rule which should have been given is the
following nearly.

Correction to be applied to the time of high water calculated by supposing
it to be always at the same interval after the moon’s transit as it is on the days

of new and full moon. hours.
Time of moon’s preceding transit, 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 11
Corrections) 1s... .c6 a.) <- minutes, 0—16—31—46—6 1—72—75—65—34 0-13-11

The fact is, that the correction quoted from my paper belongs theoretically to
the ‘* correct establishment,’’ or mean of all the intervals of moon’s transit and
tide, not to the ‘‘ vulgar establishment’’ or interval of moon’s travel and tide on
the day of new and full moon, which is the establishment taken by Mr, Srn-
CLAIR. ;

The correction which I have given above is probably not exact for India, for
it is taken from the London Tide Observations ; and it would be extremely
desirable, as you have observed in your Journal, to verify or correct it by obser-
vations at some stations in the Indian seas, made daily for a sufficient length of
time. I may add, that the above correction is what has been called the semi-
menstrual inequality, and does not arise from the inequality of the moon’s daily
motion, but from the varying angular distance of the moon from the sun, in con-
sequence of which the solar tide sometimes coincides with the lunar, and at other
times is separated from it by a large angle.

Iam very glad to find you expressing your hopes that you will be furnish-
ed by your correspondents with tide observations from an extensive range of
places in India. I would observe, that for the purposes of science, the daily ob-
servations themselves are much more valuable than the ‘‘establishment,’’ or any
other inference collected from them.

In conclusion, I would beg particularly to state, that directions have been
given for tide observations on the whole coast of England from the 9th to the
22nd of June in this year: that I have strong hopes that these observations will
also take place on the shores of other states of Europe and America, at the same
time; and that it would be very interesting and useful to have contemporary
observations made on the shores of India at as many places as possible.’’

March 21, 1835.

2.—Mr. Taytor’s mode of determining the Errors of Division in Astronomical
Instruments.
[Extract of a letter from Sir Joun Herscuet, dated C, G. H. April 20, 1835.]}
Feldhausen, near Wanbey, C. G. H.
‘“¢The Journal for August, 1834, contains Mr. Tayior’s application of the
collimating principle to the examination of the mural circle at Madras. It is
somewhat singular, that not long before I had suggested to Mr. Maciean, the
Astronomer Royal here, and had also written to Professor Arry at Cambridge,

1835.] Correction of Index Error. 519

suggesting its application to the circles in the British Observatories, as the only
fundamental mode of enquiry into their errors, a process which coincides in
almost every particular with that adopted by Mr. Taytor, and which amounts
in fact to an aerial re-division of the circle in sita-

‘¢] do not mention this as in any degree wishing to interfere with Mr. Tay-
Lor’s just claim to independence and priority of invention; but as I consider
the method in question to be one of great importance, and likely to supersede
every other method of examination, I wish to obviate any misconception which
may arise from the appearance in England in any of the journals, &c. of this
method, as proposed by myself, without mention made of Mr. Tayior’s name---
what he had done being then entirely unknown to myself, and my own thoughts
having been turned upon the subject in the course of a severe examination to
which Mr. Macrean has been subjecting the Cape circle, and respecting which
he did me the honor to consult me.’’

3.—On a simple mode of Correcting the Index Error in taking observations for
latitude. By Lieut. W. P. Jacos, Bombay Engineers.
[In a letter to the Secretary As. Soc.]

I send you the results of a few observations, made lately at Karanja and
Bombay, in illustration of a very simple method by which the errors of an
altitude instrument, when employed in finding the latitude of a place, may be
rendered insensible. It consists in observing pairs of stars which have nearly
the same meridian altitude, the one N. and the other S. The errors of bothin
altitude will then be the same, but with respect to the pole they will be in
opposite directions, so that the latitude resulting from the mean of the two will
be free, not only from the errors of the instrument, but also from those caused
by the uncertainty of refraction.

In the present instance, the instrument employed was a 10 in. circle, reading
10,’’ which had been subjected to very rough usage, having more than once been
bent and reflattened, so that its errors sometimes amount to 40” or more; each
star was observed four times, twice with face to the right, and twice to the left,
and the observations were afterwards reduced to the meridian,an operation which
is very easily and quickly performed by means of the sliding rule:

At Karanja. At Bombay Light house.
Stars obsd. Latitude, Mean of each pair. Stars obsd. Latitude. Mean of each pair.
Cephei 18 51 07.0 a Persei,.. .. 18 53 23.

{i pice Aust.is 51 31,6f 18 51 19:3 Npmniaded, a se aitg eae Baie
a Persei,.. 18 51 07.6118 51 15.5 oa Geminorum, 18 52 28.3) 18 53 34.4
y Eridani, 18 51 23.4 J —-—— q Cans. Mins. 18 53 40.5

18 51 17.4

——

Diff. Lat. of Karanja and
Light house by trig. | +2 16.6
Survey,

18 53 34.0 Lat. of Light house,..... .... 18 53 33.3
Here while the individual observations differ greatly, the several pairs have a
close agreement, and would doubtless have been still nearer, had the altitudes
been more nearly equal, for a Persei and y Eridani differed more than 2° in alt.
By this method with a moderately good instrument, the Latitude might be
found in one night within 1’, or much nearer, supposing the catalogues correct:
Mahadeo, 4th March, 1835.

3 = 2

520 - Fossil Sheils and Pea Staiactite. (Serr.

[The method pointed out by Lieut. Jacos is so obvious as to have been, we
imagine, at all times practised by astronomers; we however give insertion to it
as likely to furnish an useful hint to amateurs and beginners.—Ep ]

4.—Fossil Shells found in the Kasya Hills. By Dr. McCLELLAND.

‘* Though not two days in these hills, I have found about a thousand specimens
of sea shells, at various altitudes, from 1000 to 4200 feet, and even in and
around the station of Churra Punji itself. On a hasty glance, I think TI have re-
cognised of known genera, Pectens, Cardiums, Turritella, Teredo, Serpula, Melo-
nia, Cirrus, and Pleurotoma, among my collection ; but many will probably be
found on examination to be new genera, and all the species or many of them at
least will be found to be new.

‘What makes the discovery of these remains of more consequence is, that I
kave found them in rocks that have been hitherto considered as primitive in
India, at least ; but we shall now be able te correct our classification, and to re-
move many contradictions that exist between the result of Indian and European
observations ! !

‘*The Ponar Fossil is here in great perfection, and is connected with the numu-
lites; but it must come into a new genus, or sub-genus, which may be called
annulite ; it was the thing that first struck WALLIcH and GrirFiTH in the rocks
of the Doli river, at the base of the hills, though I did not point it out.”’

5.—Note on the Pea Stalactite of Tibet. By Mr. Strvenson.

The accompanying sample of a calcareous concretion was a few months ago
sent to me for examination, from Dr. Campserxt of Nipal, and fuund in Tibet.
The mineral is used in medicine by the Tibetans, and called Kari by the inhabi-
tants of Nipal.

It appears to me to be a variety of the Roe-stone of geologists, in a disinte-
grated state, probably washed from its matrix by hill torrents, and deposited in
pools.

A careful analysis of an average from the bulk gave me the following result :

Description. In globular concretions, from the size of a grain of mustard seed,
to that of a pea; colour cream yellow, and a few slightly tinged blue, very compact
---hardness equal to statuary marble, externally opake, internally crystalline,
crystals needle-like, and radiated from the centre of each globule. Effervesces
strongly in sulphuric, nitric, and muriatic acids, in which it readily dissolves,
leaving a few grains of various coloured sand. ;

According to my analysis, it is composed of,

Carbonate of lime; oe eieriactale |< a:sacersyels cle) oie oles.e1e oseiccyoie’s fekenersaoaeioe aan
INMIMITAS Aon oo dG ono cc Coan cCoodode Pietaks fake! sic: dye eperoleleteters
Silica, or sand of various colours,........... Sirs janie steretede

100.

If I may be allowed to venture an opinion, I would say, that it is a new mine-
ral, or one not described in any of the European scientific journals. If so, Dr.
CAMPBELL will be entitled to the thanks of mineralogists, for his discovery. I
would (though with diffidence) suggest that the mineral sh ould be named Camp-
bellite, or Tibetan comfits, though the latter is not a scientific name, notwitli-
standing its comfit-like appearance.

1835.] Haliey’s Comet—Catalogue of Nipalese Zoology. 521

6.— Observations of Halley’s Comet, made at the Honorable Company’s
Observatory at Madras.
The comet first made its appearance on the 30th August, at 15th. 40m. mean
time, astronomical reckoning, or August 31st, at 3h. 40m. a. M. civil reckoning
—the observation are as follows :

Madras Right
Mr. Ascension. Declination.
Hsson Da Oh. mM. — s, he Ine OSs hastimiaess:
Aug. 30 15 47 30 Datei 22 +24 43 O
lee Vie 33° 128 HPA ga 2 24 50 0
Sept. 19 15 39 40 GH L057 29 36 30
20 015.206) 48 GwIl25 43 30-0 + 6
De VA Ar old G8 17429 31 36 46
26 4 22 59 6p24039 SSE VASES

From the above observations, it would appear that the comet is about ten days
later than the time predicted for its return.—At present it is invisible to the
unassisted eye of ordinary observers, and will probably remain so until the 21st
of October, when it will be situated in the constellation Corone Borealis, near to
8, the proper time to look for it on this day will be immediately after sun-set.
T. G. Tayuor,
September 28, 1835. HT. C. Astronomer.
[The comet has been visible here since the 12th Oct., after sun-set, and is now
very bright.—Eb. ]

A French translation of Lieutenant Burness’s interesting Travels to Bokhara,
&c. has been announced as in preparation at Paris, with notes, by KLaProtuH,
the distinguished orientalist.—Foreign Quarterly Review.

XII.—Illustrations of Nipalese Zoology, prepared for publication.
[We have been requested to insert this catalogue in continuation of the Prospectus

published in p. 356.—Eb.]
MAMMALIA.

Part Ist.

Plate 1.—The Jharal, wild goat. Capra jharal, mihi, mature male. Inhabits
the Kachar.

Plate II1.—The Nahoor, wild sheep. Ovis Nahoor, mihi. Fig. 1, the mature
male; 2, the head of mature female; 3, young male. Habitat. Kachar.

Plate III. fig. 1, the Thar antelope. Antelope Thar, mihi, mature male;
figure 2, the Ghoral antelope. A. Ghoral, Harpwicxs. Mature male. Inhabit
central and northern divisions of Nipal respectively.

Plate IV. fig. 1, female Ghoral; fig. 2, young male.

Plate V.—The Changra or shawl goat of the Himélaya towards Nipal. Fig. 1,
the larger or true shawl goat; figure 2, the lesser variety. Inhabit the Kachar.

Plate VI.—Sculls. Figs. 1 and 2, the Jharal mas.; 3 and 4, the Nahoor
fem. ; 5 and 6, the Thar mas.; 7 and 8, the Ghoral mas. ; 9 and 10, the Banbhera,
or Himalayan variety of Ovis. Ammon. mas. junior; 11 and 12, the Phusro
Jarai, or Cervus Aristotelis. Horns cast. mas.; 13 and 14, the Ratwa Mantjae,
mas. (N. B. Several of the sculls, with the horns torn off, show the cellular cavity
of the core.)

Plate VII. figs. 1 and 2, head of the larger Changra ; 3 and 4, scull of the lesser.

522 Catalogue of Nipalese Zoology. [Sepr.

Plate VIII. fig. 1, head of the Thar, mature male; 2, scull of ditto; 3, fore-
foot, and 4, hind foot of ditto.

Plate IX. fig. 1, head of the Chiru antelope, mature male; 2, direct front
view of the nose of ditto, showing the position of the intermaxillary pouch and
its connexion with the nares; 3, scull of ditto; 4, the inguinal peuch of ditto.

Plate X.—The Chiru antelope. Antelope Hodgsonii, C. Ape, mature male.
A. Gazella of H. Smitn’s sub-genus. Habitat. the open plains of N. E. Thibet ;

fig. 2, represents the female.
Part 2nd.

Plate I. fig. 1, the male; 2, the female; and 3, the young male of the
Ratwa Mantjac. Inhabits the central region of Nipal.

Plate I1.—The Nipalese Paradoxurus. P. Nipalensis, mihi, mature female.
Inhabits central and northern regions of Nipal.

Plate I1J.—The Wah. Ailurus Fulgens, mature male. Figs. 2 and 3, show-
ing the attitudes of repose of the same. Kachar only.

Plate I1V.—The Kathiah Nyool of Nipal. Martes Kathiah, mihi. Central and
northern regions.

Plate V.—The Bharsiah of the Nipalese, mature male. Ovrsitaxus Inauritus,
mihi. Pennanr’s Indian Badger? Fig. 1, the head of ditto, natural size; 2,
scull of ditto, ditto; 3 and 4, direct and oblique views of the lower jaw; 5 and
6, ditto ditto of the upper jaw; 7, the fore foot, and 8, the hind.

Plate VI.—The Koiral of the Nipalese. Sciwropterus magnificus, mihi. Cen-
tral and lower regions of Nipal.

Plate VII.—Different views of the preceding.

Plate VIII.—Head of the Ratwa Mantjac, mature male.

Plate [X.—Head and members of the Nipalese Paradoxurus. Fem.: 1-1, vulva
and glands; 2-2, anus and pores; 3, fore foot; 4 and 5, hind foot.

Plate X.—Scull of the same animal.

Plate XI.—Front and side views of the head of the Wah. Figs. 1 and 2
exhibit the ear, denuded ofall hair, and invested with it; 3, the fore foot (sole of) ;
and 4, the hind foot.

Part 3rd.

Plate I.—The Machabba, or Malva of the Tarai. Paradoxurus Bondar? In-
habits the open tracts of the lower region of Nipal. Figs. 1 and 2, side and
front views of the head; 3, sole of hind foot.

Plate I1.—Thulo Chuah of the Nipalese. Norway Rat? all parts of Nipal.

Plate III. fig. 1, the Nyool of the Tarai. Mangasta Cafra? 2, the Nyool
of the hills. MM.* Javanica ? Central region of Nepal.

Plate IV. fig. 1, Viverra Indica. The Sayer of the Tarai; 2, Viverra Rasse,
also called Sayer. Both inhabit the Tarai portion of the lower region of
Nipal exclusively ; 3, head of Rasse; 4, ditto of Indica; 5 and 6, anal and
genital parts, with the skin on and off; 7, the hind foot to the tarsus; 8, head of
Rasse.

Plate V.—The Chittra Bilow of the Tarai. Felis Serval ? varietas, mature male.
Felis Viverrinus of HAnpwicke? Open parts of lower region of Nipal only.

Plate VI.—The Biraloo of the Nipalese. Felis Lynchus Erythrotus, mihi.
Central region and lower ; 2, the young of ditto; 3, the Moormi Cat, F. Murmen-
sis, mibi. Central region only. Mature male.

* Since ascertained to be a new species of M. auropunctata, mihi. Gold-tipped
Mongoose.

1835.] Catalogue of Nipalese Zoology. 523

Plate VII.—The Arna, Bos Arna, mas. The Tarai and Bhaver.

Plate VIII.—Gulo Orientalis. Lower hills of Nipal. Fig. 1, the fore, and
2, the hind, foot.

Plate IX.—Sculls. 1-1, the Sayer; 2-2, the Machabba; 3-3, the Mul Sam-
pra, or Martes Hardwickii ; 4-4, Oriental Glutton ; 5-5, the Highland Nyool, or
Mangusta Javanica.

Plate X.— Lowland Nyool. 1 and 2, the head; 3, the ear with hair reflected ;
4, fore foot, and 5, hind ditto; 6-7, head of Highland Nyool; 8, its ear; 9, its
fore, and 10, its hind, foot; 11, 12, 13, 14, scull of Lowland Nyool,

Part 4th.

Plate I.—The Phusro Jarai of the Nipalese. Cervus Aristotelis of Smiru,
mature males, and head of ditto. Figs. 1 and 2, from one specimen, and 3 and 4,
from another.

Plate II. fig. 1, scull of Ailurus Fulgens ; 2, upper teeth of ditto; 3, lower
teeth of ditto; 4, scull of short-tailed Manis ; 5 and 6, upper, and 7, lower, jaw
of ditto ; all nat. size.

Plate I1].—The Lokriah Squirrel, S. Lokriah, mihi. Central region of Nipal.
Nat. size.

Plate IV. fig. 1, common Musk Shrew of Nipal. Sorex Indicus ? 2, common
field mouse of Nipal; 3, Sano Chuah, or lesser common rat of Nipal. MM.
Ratus. Black rat? All natural size. Fig. 4, the scull; and 5, the hand, of
the Shrew.

Plate V.—The Nipalese cat. Felis Nipalensis, mature male; 2, head of ditto.

Plate VI.—Black and white flying Squirrel. Sciwropterus Alboniger, mihi.
Central and northern regions. Fig. 1, the fore foot, and 2, the hind. Nat. size.

Plate VII.—Ghoral Antelope. Figs. 1 and 2, head of mature male, 3; head of
young male: 4, scull and korns of male ; 5, the fore, and 6, the hind, foot.

Plate VIII.—The Buansu, or wild dog of the Nipalese. Canis primevus, mihi;
fig. 2, reclining figure of ditto.

Plate IX.—Comparative views, on an uniform scale, of the Buansu, Indian
jackal, and Indian fox.

Plate X.— Head of the Buansu, nat. size; fig. 2, small front view of ditto.

Plate XI,—Sculls of Buansu, Indian jackal, and Indian fox. Figs. 4 and 5,
scull and teeth of Buansu of nat, size.

Part 5th.

Plate I.’ fig. 1, scull and horns of the Bara Sinha, or Indian type of the true
Stag. Inhabits the Bhaver and saul forest of Nipal. Fig. 2, horns of the Chittra,
or spotted Axis; fig. 3, horns of Laghuna or Pada or Porcine Axis. Two latter
inhabit the Tarai. All three on an uniform scale.

Plate II. figs. 1, 2, 3, various specimens of the horns of the Phusro Jarai of the
Nipalese. C. Aristotelis of Smita. Hipehaphus of Du VAuceEt; 4, horns of the
Rato Jarai; 5, horns of the Kalo Jarai; 6, horns of the Bahraiya, Cervus Bah-
raiya, mihi. (The Maha of the western portion of these hills.) All the animals
inhabit the saul forest and Bhaver of Nipal.

Plate I1I.— Young males of the two varieties of the musk proper to the Kachar
region of Nipal.

Plate [V.—Female of the Nipalese variety of Felis Serval. Head of the same.

Plate V.—Head of the Machabba, or Malva of the Tarai. Paradoxurus Bondar ?
mature male. (N. B. Long hair moulted off.) Fig. 2, the male organs of genera-

524 Catalogue of Nipalese Zoology. [Supr,

tion with the bald secreting surface on either side the sheath of the penis; 3,
female organs of generation and anus; 4, the fore foot, and 5, the hind foot.
(First despatch.)

Plate Vi.— Pteropus of central region: Pt. Lencocephalus, mihi. 1 of nat. size,
(11 inches by 4-8; body and muzzle, uniform saturate brown; whole head and
shoulders, rufous yellow.)

Plate VII. figs, 1 and 2, Rhinolphi, and 3, Vespertilio, of central region. Nat.
size.

Plate VIII. fig. 1, Péeropus; 2 and 3, Vespertiliones, of central region. Nat.
size.

Plate [X.—Heads and sculls of the Vespertilionide of the three preceding plates.

Plate X.—Head and members of the Langoor monkey of the central region.

Part 6th.

Plate 1.—The Chikara or Chouka, A. Tetracornis. Figs. 1 and 2, horns of nat.
size. Habitat Tarai ; mature male.

Plate I1.—Snakes of central region. (N. B. All of them are innocuous.)

Plate IL1.—Young Porcupine of central region.

Plate 1V.—Tibetan Mastiff, two varieties.

Plate V.—Common Hare of central region. Figs. 2 and 3, Locusts of same
region.

Plate VI.—Common Otter of Tarai.

Plate VII. fig. 1, common Toad, and 2, common Frog, of central region.

Plate VIII.—Panther and Leopard of central region. Mature males.

Plate IX.—Cabool grey-hound and scull; 3, scull of Prochilus Labiatus.

Plate X. fig. 1, Prochilus Labiatus of Tarai; 2, Ursus Tibetanus of central
region of Nipal. Fem, junior.

Part 7th.

Plate I.—Dentition of Rhinoceros unicornis of the Tarai.

Plates IJ. and IJ1.—Fishes of central region.

Plate [V.—Members of the fishes of the two preceding plates.

Plate V.—The Khar Laghuna, or brown Porcine Axis. Fem. Fig. 1, mature;
2, junior, from living animal in 2nd and 3rd year of age.

Plate VI. figs. 1, 2, scull and horns of Yak of Tibet, mature male; 3, 4, 5,
scull of Ursus Tibetanus of central region, junior; 6, scull of the Lassa Mastiff,

old. ;
N. B. For the clime and physiognomy of the three regions of Nipal, (2. e.

the Northern, Central, and Southern ones,) see the published Catalogue of the
Mammalia.

Plate VII. figs. 1 and 2, Zibet of central region of Nipal: two figures from
different specimens ; 3, the Urva of central and northern tracts; 4 and 5, fore
and hind feet of Urva.

Plate VIJI.—Indian Dimba sheep, mature male; 2, Cabool ditto ditto,
ditto.

Plate IX.—The Barwal or domestic sheep of the Kachar of Nipal; fig. 2, the
Hoaniah or domestic sheep of Tibet and of the Himalaya. Mature males.

Plate X.—The Wool-bearing Paradoxurus, Paradoxurus Lanigera, mihi; nat.
size. Habitat the northern region of Nipal.

Plate X1.—The short-tailed Manis of the central region of Nipal. (N. B.
Pyoves to be a new species.)

1835.] Influence of the Moon on Rain. 525

Plate XII. fig. 1, Chittra or Axis; 2, Jhou Laghuna or spotted Porcine Axis ;
mature males. The Tarai of Nipal.

(Second despatch.)—Eztra sheets, three.

Plate I. figs. 1 and 2, scull of Ovis Nahoor, old male; 3-4, ditto of Ovis
Banbhera, junior; 5-6, ditto of musk of Kachar; 7-8 ditto, of Antelope Hodg-
sonii, old male; 9-10, ditto of a Cervi Capra.

Plate I1.—Head and limbs of Ovis Nahoor, old male.

Plate I1I.—5 sketches of horns of Ratwa Muntjac, (to prove the various forms
they are apt to assume.)

Two more extras.

Plate [V.—Ursus Tibetanus, male cf two years; and head and limbs of ditto ;
and 3, views of scull and teeth.

Plate V.—Ant. Tetracornis, Chikara or Chouka, male head of ditto, separate.

(March, 1835.)—Another extra sheet.

Plate VI.—Capra Jhdral, wild goat of the northern region. Views of head and
horns separate. —

(The Tehr of the western hills is a variety with nodose horns, and probably
identical with H. Smiru’s C. Jemlaica.)

(July 1st.)—Eztra sheet.

Plate VII. fig. 1, The Arna; 2, Gouri Géo, mature males. (Bubalus Arna
and Bisonus Gavcens.) Tarai.

Plate VIII. figs. 1, 2, Arna;3, tame Buffaloe; 4, Yak ; 5, 6, Gduri Gao. Sculls

and heads.
N. B. The delineations of the extra sheets to be substituted for prior draw-

ings of the same subject.

XIII.— Miscellaneous Extracts.
1.—Influence of the Moon on the Weather. By F. Marcer.
[Extracted from Jamieson’s Edin. Phil. Journal, 1835.]

On the question whether the moon has any influence on the weather or not, there
are two opposite opinions : the great mass of the people, including sailors, boatmen,
and most practical farmers, entertain no doubt whatever, of the influence of the
moon; whether the change of the weather at the lunar phases will he from fair to
foul, or from foul to fair, none of them pretend to decide beforehand, but most
_of them think, that at the new and full moon, there is generally a change of some
kind. On the other hand, philosophers, astronomers, aud the learned in general,
attribute this opinion altogether to popular prejudice. Finding no reason, in
the nature of atmospheric tides, for believing that changes should take place on
one day of the lunatioa, rather than another, they consider the popular opinion
to be unsupported by any extended series of correct observations.

Tn the Annuaire for 1833, AraGo, the learned editor, has presented the result
of the observations of ScouBLER in Germany, during twenty-eight years, or 348
synodic revolutions of the moon. During this period of 348 new moons, &c.
the number of rainy days were as follows :

It rained on the day of the new moon, ............ 148 times.
SIG ets eelOss «0%. afiTStiqUarier,.& spies esie< oh00 . dO.
RRM ele te oie SO... ss full moon,..... Metal ordidels on Ol 00.
See te SU. + <o.. « 1ABk QUAK(ED yc. veas.ce as aw Fan? iO

3 Y¥

526 Influence of the Moon on Rain. [Supt.

The observations of ScHUBLER were made during eight years at Munich, four
years at Stuttgard, and sixteen years at Augsburg. As a good meteorological
register has been long kept at Geneva, the author thought it would be interesting
to ascertain from the tables, (which have been carefully published in the Biblio-
théque of that city,) whether, during a period of thirty-four years, viz. from 1800
to 1833, any inferences could be drawn for or against the popular opinion on
the subject of lunar influence.

He finds, during these thirty-four years, the number of rainy days and quantity

of water fallen, to be as follows:
Rainy days. Water fallen.

At the new moon,..... PEE. steyetousuetencalal'«: 6 123 432° lines.
inst quantetyercya0 a teisle sates 0» @e are nie fees pu cee 429°6 ditto.
Full moon,....... Spare susf asec syne che oicosevert ais pss 132 415°9 ditto.

Dast quarters tyes -snchsiew «panini a sdarnes 7 elas 368°6 ditto.
Throughout the whole period,............ 3,657 968 in. 93 lines.
Thus it appears, that during thirty-four years, or 12,419 days, comprehending
420 synodic revolutions of the moon, there have been 3,657 rainy days. This
gives for every 100 days, 29°45 rainy days; and we find, that

For every 100 days of new moon, 29°29 have been rainy.
Do. do. first quarter, 29°05 do. do.
Do. do. full moon, 31:43 do. do.
Do. do. last quarter, 30°48 do. do.

Hence, it is evident, that during these thirty-four years at Geneva, the days of
new moon and the days of the first quarter have been just about as liable to be
rainy days as any other common day of the month; while the days of full moon
and those of the last quarter have been rather more liable. But although the
days of full moon have been rather more frequently wet days than those of the
new moon, it does not follow that more water has fallen at full moon, than at the
change. The result of observation in that respect is as follows :

For every 100 days of new moon, there fell 102°9 lines.

Do. do. first quarter, do. 102°3 do.
Do. ; do. full moon, do. 90°0 do.
Do. do. last quarter, do. 89:9 do.

The average quantity for 100 days is 93:6 lines, whence it appears, that at
the new moon, the first quarter, and the full moon, more water has fallen than
on common days; at the last quarter, less. The quantity fallen on the total of
the lunar phases, surpasses that on other days in the proportion of 98 to 93°6.
Another question is, whether a change of weather is more liable to happen on
the four principal days of the lunar phases than on common days. But it must
be first decided, what is meant by the term change of weather.
| This term should, the author thinks, be limited to a change from clear weather
to rain, or from rain to clear weather, and not be understood to include, as some
meteorologists make it, all changes, such as that from calm to windy, or from
clear to cloudy, &c. As the author accepts it, the weather must have been
steady during two days at least; that is, that the weather has been clear, or
that it has rained more or less during two consecutive days. For example, a
week has passed without rain; it rains on the eighth day, and on the ninth, the
weather is again fine. In this case, according to the author’s definition, there is
no change of weather.

So also, if it has rained during five successive days, the sixth and seventh must

1835.] _ Composition of Rangoon Petroleum. 527

be clear, in order to constitute a change of weather. This may be arbitrary, but
at least it is not vague ; and if practised, it will prevent, in the balancing of
calculations, any leaning to a favorite hypothesis. To avoid another error, into
which some may have fallen, the author marks no change as occurring on lunar
phases, but those which take place on the very day, and never those which may
happen on the evening before or on the next day. With these precautions, he
finds that, during the thirty-four years, or 12,419 days, there have been 1,458
changes of weather. Of this number, 105 have taken place at the epoch of the
two principal lunar phases, viz. 54 at the new moon, and 51 at the full moon.
Now the whole number of principal phases during the thirty-four years is 840 ;
therefore, as 12419: 840 :: 1458: 98°6, the number of changes which would
have taken place at new and full moon, had these lunar phases had no more
than the share of common days; but instead of which, the number was 105. Of
the 54 chavges at new moon, 32 were from rain to fine weather, and 22 from
fine weather to rain. Of the 51 at full moon, 31 were from rain to clear, and 20
from clear to rain. Thus at the new and full moon, the changes to fine weather
are to those to rain as 63 to 42. Having thus proved, that the epoch of new and
full moon are not absolutely without some effect on the weather, the author
examined, whether this effect was confined to those very days, or extended to the
day following. On the days following the new and full moon, there were 129
changes, instead of 98°6, which would have been the number had these shared
the proportion only of common days. With respect to the days of the first and
last quarter, the changes on these were 96, which bring them nearly to the
condition of common days. It is thus shown from the tables, that the chance
of change at the new and full moon, compared with the chance on ordinary
days, is as 125 to 117, and that the chance on the day following these two phases,
compared with the common days, is as 154 to 117. Upon the whole, therefore,
this examination lends some support to the vulgar opinion of the influence of
new and full moon, but none whatever to any special influence of the first and
third quarters. With respect to the barometrical pressure, it is ascertained, that
out of the 1,458 changes of weather, there were in 1,073 cases_a corresponding rise
or fall of the barometer, according as the change was from rain to fair or the
contrary. Thisis nearly as3 to 4. Of the 385 false indications of the barometer,
182 were on a change from rain to clear, and 203 ona change from clear to
rain. Finally, of the 385 anomalies of the barometer, 17 were at full moon,
and 10 only at new moon.
2.—On the Composition of the Rangoon Petroleum, with Remarks on the Composi-

tion of Petroleum and Naphtha in general. By Wittiam Grecory, M. D.

F.R. S. E.

The author first adverted to the discovery, nearly about the same time, of
paraffine by RercHENBACH, and of petroline by Dr. Curistison. The former
occurred among the products of destructive distillation ; the latter was found in
the Rangoon petroleum, and they were soon found to be identical. REIcHENBACH’S
researches on naphtha were then quoted, by which it appears, that that indefatigable
observer could not discover, in the kind of naphtha which he examined, any
trace either of paraffine, or of any other product of destructive distillation. On
the contrary, he found, naphtha to possess the characters of oil of turpentine,
a product of vegetable life ; and he succeeded in obtaining a precisely similar oil
from brown coal, by distillation at 212°. The facts had led RercHeNnBACH to

oYve

528 Extracts from the Zoological Journal. [Sept.

the conclusion that naphtha in general is not a product of destructive distillation,
and consequently, must have been separated at a comparatively low temperature.

The author showed, that Dr. CuristIson’s discovery of paraffine, of which Dr.
REICHENBACH was necessarily ignorant, is inconsistent with this view; and detailed
some experiments, by which he has rendered highly probable the existence in
petroleum of eupion, another of the products of destructive distillation. This
substance is a liquid of sp. gr. 0°655, boiling at 110°, and very fragrant. The
author obtained from the Rangoon petroleum a liquid of sp. gr. 0°744, boiling
at 180°, and rather fragrant.

The oil of turpentine, as is well known, boils at 280°, and nas a sp. gr. of 0°860
so that, at all events, the naphtha from the Rangoon petroleum is not oil of
turpentine. This was farther proved by the tests of nitric acid and iodine,
Similar experiments on one or two other species of naphtha led to similar
results. They all yielded a liquid of sp. gr. about 760, and, consequently could
not be oil of turpentine. The kinds of naphtha tried were Persian naphtha,
obtained from Dr. THompPson, and commercial naphtha, sold by M. Roziauet,
at Paris.

The author concluded, that if the naphtha examined by Re1cHENBACH were
genuine, there must be two kinds of naphtha; one a product of destructive
distillation, the other the oil of turpentine of the pine forests of which our coal-
beds are formed, separated by a gentle heat, either before or after their conversion
into coal. It is obvious that our common coal-beds have never yet been exposed
to a heat sufficient for destructive distillation, since they are destroyed by a
moderate heat ; and we may therefore expect the petroleum of these coal-beds to
be of the kind described by ReicuenBacu ; while the Rangoon and Persian
petroleums, being products of destructive distillation, must have their origin, if
in coal-beds at all, in such as have been exposed to a high temperature, and must
consequently be very different from the oridinary coal-beds. In confirmation
of this view, it may be stated, that Dr. Curistison could find no paraffine either
in the petroleum of St. Catherine’s or in that of Trinidad or Rochdale.

The author finally directed attention of the application of the paraffine as a
material for giving light, as, when pure, it burns with a clear, bright flame, like
that of wax, and might doubtless be obtained at a cheap rate in the East.—Edin.
Phil. Journ. 1835.

[Since the above was in type, we have received a copy of the papers, and a
specimen of the paraffine from Mr. G. Swinton, with a list of queries which we
will endeavour hereafter to resolve.—Ebp. ]

3.— Extracts from Proceedings of Zoological Society of London.-—1834.

August 12.—A collection of land and fresh-water Shells, formed in the
Gangetic Provinces of India by W. H. Benson, Esq., of the Bengal Civil Service,
and presented by that gentleman to the Society, was exhibited. It comprised
forty species, and was accompanied by a descriptive list prepared by the donor,
and also by detailed notices of some of the more interesting among them. These
notices were read: they are intended by Mr. Benson for publication in the
forthcoming No. of the ‘ Zoological Journal.’

From the time that he first became acquainted with the animal of a shell
resembling in all respects, except in its superior size, the European Helix lucida,
Drap., Mr. BENSON regarded it as the type of a new genus of Helicide interme-
diate between Stenopus, Guild., and Helicolimax, Fér. He had prepared a

1835.] Extracts from the Zoological Journal. 529

paper on this genus, for which he intended to propose the name of Tanychlamys ;
he finds, however, that Mr. Gray has recently described (Lond. and Edin. Phil.
Mag., vol. v. p. 379°, the same genus under the name of Nanina. The generic
characters observed by Mr. Benson are as follows :

Nanina, Gray.

Testa heliciformis, umbilicata; peritremate acuto, non reflexo.

Animal cito repens. Corpus reticulosum, elongatum. Pallium amplum, fora-
mine communi magno perforatum, peritrema amplexans; processubus duobus
transversé rugosis (quasi articulatis) omni latere mobilibus instructum, unico
prope teste aperture angulum superiorem exoriente, altero apud peripheriam
teste. Os anticum inter tentacula inferiora hians; labia radiato-plicata. Ten-
tacula superiora elongata, punctum percipiens tumore oblongo situm gerentia.
Penis pregrandis ; antrum cervices elongatum latere dextro et prope tentacula
situm. Solea complanata pedis latera equans. Cauda tentaculata ; tentaculumn
subretractile, glanduld ad basin positd humorem viscidum (animale attrectato)
exsudante.

Mr. Benson describes particularly the habits of the species observed by him,
which he first discovered living at Banda in Bundelkhand on the prone
surface of a rock. The animal carries the shell horizontally, or nearly so; is
quick in its motions ; and, like Helicolimaz, it crawls the faster when disturbed,
instead of retracting its tentacula like the Snails in general. In damp weather,
it is rarely retracted within its shell, the foot being so much swelled by the ab-
sorption of moisture, that if it is suddenly thrown into boiling water, the attempt
to withdraw into the shell invariably causes a fracture of the aperture. In dry
weather, the foot is retracted, and the aperture is then covered by a whitish false
operculum, similar to that of other Helicide. The two elongated processes of the
mantle are continually in motion, and exude a liquor which lubricates the shell,
supplying, apparently, that fine gloss which is observable in all recent specimens.
The fluid poured out from the orifice at the base of the caudal horn-like append-
age is of a greenish colour; it exudes when the animal is irritated, and at such
times the caudal appendage is directed towards the exciting object in such a
manner as to give to the animal a threatening aspect.

Of several specimens brought to England by Mr. Benson in 1832, one sur-
vived from December, 1831, whev it was captured in India, until the summer
of 1833.

Another shell particularly noticed by Mr. Brnson is the type of a new genus,
allied to Cyclostoma, which he has described under the name of Péferocyclos in the
first No. of the ‘ Journal of the Asiatic Society of Calcutta.’

Specimens of a species of Assiminia, LEacu, were preserved alive in a glass,
replenished occasionally with fresh or salt-water, until after the vessel in which
Mr. Benson returned to England had passed St. Helena.

A Snail, obtained near Sicrigali, and the river Jellinghy, one of the
mouths of the Ganges, is characterized by Mr. Benson as Henix inter-
rupta.

In the character of the excrement being voided from an opening in the termi-
nal and posterior part of the foot, instead of from the foramen commune, the
animal of Hel. interrupta differs most materially from the other Helices. The
angulated periphery of the shell shows an approach to Carocolla ;but Mr. Benson
is not aware that the animal of this genus differs from that of Helix. From Hel.

530 Trap Rocks of Bombay. [Sepr.

Himalayana, Lea, the Hel. interrupta is distinguished by its peculiar sculpture ;
its spire is also more exserted.

The collection also contained specimens of an Arcaceous Shell found in the bed
of the Jumna at Hamirpur in Bandelkhand. Mr. BrEnson proposes for it the
generic appellation Scaphula.

Referring to specimens contained in the collection of a new form of Solenace-
ous Shell, described by him in the ‘ Journal of the Asiatic Society of Calcutta,’
under the name of Novaculina, Mr. Benson describes alsoa second species of the
genus which he has recently obtained from South America, and points out the
characters which distinguish it from Nov. Gangetlica.

The following Note by Mr. Benson, relative to the importation of the living
Cerithium Telescopium, BruG., adverted to at the Meeting on March 25, 1834,
(vol. v. p. 145,) was read.

‘« The possibility of importing from other countries, and especially from the
warmer latitudes, the animals which construct the innumerable testaceous pro-
ductions that adorn our cabinets and museums, the accurate knowledge of which
is so necessary, to enable the conchologist rightly to arrange this beautiful depart-
ment of nature, must be an interesting subject to every naturalist, and will
render no apology necessary for the following notices extracted from my journal.
Their publicity may incite others who may have opportunities of trying the
experiment, to follow the example.

“January, 1832. Observed near the banks of the canal leading from the eastern
suburb of Calcutta to the Salt Lake at Balliaghat, heaps of a Cardita, with longi-
tudinal ribs, of alarge and thick Cyrina, and of Erithium Telescopium, exposed to
the heat of the sun, for the purpose of effecting the death and decay of the includ-
ed animals, previously to the reduction of the shells into lime.

‘¢ Karly in the month I took specimens of them, and leaving them for a night
in fresh water, I was surprised to find two Cerithia alive. I kept them during a
fortnight in fresh water, and on the 22nd January, carried them, packed up in
cotton, on boarda vessel bound for England. After we had been several days at
sea, I placed them ir a large open glass, with salt water, in which they appeared
unusually lively. Ikept them thus, changing the water at intervals, until the
29th May, when we reached the English Channel. I then packed them up, as
before, in a box, and carried them from Portsmouth to Cornwall, and thence to
Dublin, which I did not reach until the 14th June; here they again got fresh
supplies of sea-water at intervals. One of them died during a temporary absence,
between the 30th June and 7th July; and on the 11th July, the survivor was
again committed to its prison, and was taken to Cornwall, and thence to London,
where it was delivered alive to Mr. G. B. Sowrersy on the 23rd July.

‘¢ This animal had thus travelled, during a period of six months, over a vast
extent of the surface of the globe, and had for a considerable portion of that
time been unavoidably deprived of its native element.’’—W. H. B.

4.—Minerals of the Trappean Rocks of Bombay.

The following list of the minerals which occur in the volcanic rocks of the
several islands in the harbour of Bombay is extracted from a paper by Dr. R. D.
Tomson in the ‘ Records of General Science,’ for April, 1835.

1. Basalt of Salsette: dark-grey or blackish, with numerous crystals of olivine
and augite interspersed.

1835.] Trap Rocks of Bointay. 531

2. Black basalt of Elephanta, presenting a homogeneous aspect when frac-
tured, but frequently containing minute portions of olivine, sometimes in
rounded granules, at others crystallized: texture highly indurated. This and
the other variety fuse before the blowpipe per se into a mass resembling pitch-
stone. The celebrated figure of the elephant, close to Galliputi, consists of this
rock, but it appears to be of limited extent.

3. Amygdaloid, appearing at the great temple of Elephanta, possesses a hard
wacke basis, containing cavities filled with rock crystal and zeolites, &c. The
rock has a purplish aspect, and is.evidently decaying in many situations, by the
readiness with which the atmospherical influences act by the medium of the
amygdaloidal cavities. Before the blowpipe this rock simulates fused basalt.

4, Yellowish gray claystone porphyry, at the lower cave of Elephanta. The
predominating particles have a yellow resinous appearance, with a black basis.

5. Green claystone porphyry, appearing at Babula Tank: fine ground, and
admitting of a good polish, interspersed with dark-coloured soft particles, which
have an even fracture, and appear to be small masses of indurated clay.

6. Amygdaloid, witha light-coloured porphyritic basis and green cavities,
accompanied generally with large crystals of calcareous spar from the neighbour-
hood of Parell. The caic-spar is sometimes dark-coloured, probably from the
effect of reflected light.

7. Numerous large fragments of shell conglomerates may be observed on the
shore of Elephanta, consisting of a nucleus of porphyry, or amygdaloid, closely
surrounded by adhering bivalves, which afford means of extending the limits of
the growth of the mangrove.

The amygdalvidal cavities contain numerous species of various classes of miner-
als, of which under the genus silica may be enumerated, 1, rock crystal, termed
palanca in the Malabar language, and spadika in the Grantham dialect ; 2, quartz ;
3, milkand rose do. ; 4, caleedony ;5, amethyst ; 6, agate; 7, cornelian; 8, oriental
jasper, or bloodstone, rare at Bombay, but abundant in Gujerat and Cambay.

Of the alkaline class are; 1, calcareous spar; 2, mesolite, whose composition
(by Tuomas) is expressed by the formula 3 Al. S + (C+4N) S*° + 3% ag.

3. Heulandite, in Caranja and Elephanta, in large white crystals.

Of the cornelians a beautiful variety is brought to Bombay, containing elegant
arborizations resembling the ramifications of inclosed mosses, a phenomenon
which in many instances appears to be justly attributable to such a cause. The
remark of Pxuiny, ‘‘ Infestantur plurimis vitiis—aliis capillamentum rime simile*,’’
with regard to rock crystal, refers to the presence of titanite. The same natura-
list observes of rock crystal, ‘‘ Oriens et bene multis, sed Indice nulla prefer-
turt,’’ which is ignorantly denied by Garcias ab orto, who was for several years
viceroy of India. He says, ‘‘ nullo autem ex predictis loco crystallus invenitur
quemadmodnm nec per universam Indiamt.”’

The bloodstone, or oriental jasper, appears to be imported from Gujerat. It is
characterized by presenting a greenish appearance, with numerous blood-red
streaks or veins, traversing it in various directions. It is to the latter species, or
to the mock pearls so frequently employed as ornaments by the inferior castes,
that we are to refer the expression of the historian of ALEXANDER “ lapilli ex
auribus pendent§.’? But with regard to the ‘*‘ gemmas margaritasque mare
litoribus infundit,”’ it is not easy to give a satisfactory explanation, although the
Jatter obviously relate to the pearls of the Indian Seas.

* Hist. Nat. Lib, xxxvii.c.2. f xxxvii. 2. t Hist. Arom. i. ¢171. 171.

§ Quint. Curt. i, 8. c. 9.

*partayaid oq 200.1989 .1M0] BY} Jt “OLE PUL 99-61 ‘ZEE1 10 £Z1-BI ‘snsny
EL-St ‘Aine ‘1L-21 “ounr “2IA ‘yjmoj-auo AjIeaU Pasvaroul Os[e aq P[Noys ysvd syyuOUL sexy} AOJ UreL OIL, *[[eJ JO out) [enjJoe ayy ZIM puodsari09 0} Aep au yovq AL{UAa Yea}
Suiind Ajaxeut ‘10qs1Her sferouey 10A2AANG 2Y} WOIJ pajdasUl U9Eq YINOUL SI4} SLY ULeA dy} ‘patajsiFer OJaYIIL AeJeWOLAN]d 9Y} UT pasaacostp ueaq Suravy yvol JUSS Y

‘a[qeuosvas ‘A1amoys *a{qvesueyo PEG | BIOL { O9L | “6 | OS (8°9 | Ofeg (TOS‘T| TLE‘ |G6g'c6 , TF | BF | L'E8| GOT‘ LIP 19°8a/c0L‘6a)‘UeON,

op ‘1eayo *re9]9 “MU ‘oO °s Stet | Bl 6°6T | 028 orl‘ g°L | 9%F8 408 0g

sea] ‘uy sou “Mh ‘s 3S Sell | 9S ! PIL | 9°98 oul‘ 0°9 | 6°88 ors‘ 66

‘au. "ius “Apnoyo ‘mw = 8A OMS 8°60L | OCLL i BIL | 9'¢8 629° 8S | BSB aoLé 83

“1eayo “ea “1ea]o “MA CANS s U‘Zor | oe O‘SL | L‘¢9 Lr9° 9°8 | 0'08 aol’ Ks

‘urea ‘und op sured “MS s *S | aro | Ofc8 | Grd |, 1? | 008 689‘ cg | 0°18 Fol‘ 96

*Apnoyp “ured ayes ‘as “as *S [os | ofos | s'eL | 86 |'p6% | o'% | T'tg [880% | 869° \egos 9% | 9'8 | e's] S60‘ |LF9* \arZ‘ &

ae *a[ZZ11p -Apnoyo *TTnuNd as tas asa | bL‘O | OSB | SEL | 96.) oe | se | of%g |S80" | ESS° \go9' 9% | ef | e'a8| ZIT’ |96G* jEIZ’ | ¥
d *4Se010A0 “ued “UIeX ‘as ‘aS ‘a [seo pris. | OL | “Ol pz | ofe | a'aQ [920° | P8h* |oges L% | L5G | GB] E50 |O09S jsso. |} &%
> *uler op ‘urer Aavay| °2 9, "HA “| 080 F r'zor | OFZ | 66 | oz | BE | Heg |OIT’ | PEP. |ppor ar | Ze | 1'e8| GoLS jges* |gcgs GS
= “fpnoja *Iynumo *pnos ‘2 aul 2 «| PHO | G86 | BOL | 16) es | 9's | 1%pQ 9ST | BEP* \pec' 08 | o'€ | L668] GaLS 68s" |FIZé | 12
o uy “UIed ‘aie ‘yas | °O ‘s xe) 868 | 8th |. v9 | size) Peg‘ 6% | 86L 6EL. | 06
Rg “Azey op op “MS "MS 0 6°66 | 9°oL | FG | ot | 9% | L'hg \68L" | oth |pes 8°E | wh | GER) GELS jess’ |saL* 61
ae *Apnoyo ‘ouy *319 ‘uLNd ‘as “MS “AM f ¥G°O § Stor | PSL | 6 | Ht | 6H | OfFg LPL’ | SBF \ze9' 8‘e | pp | ef198] Fe0S \ceZ* |69L6 81
= *a{ZZ11p *}S¥019A0 op ‘MS TMS 8S O'cg | Vel | 86 | 6% | OE | 9%8g NGI" | FBP‘ loTOS O° | 9°% | L618] 0G0S |909¢ |g69° fF LT
2 “1103S “ulI01S ‘uri ‘yjas | ‘2U ‘AN CN 00 F 1.9L | oL | 86] Te | 0'€ | Ofsg |8PO | aoe‘ lorPT'86 | Ef | BE | Pes! PRIS |ZPe* | L6PS 91
= *Aamoys ‘Tmp “ays ‘und ‘ou 6 AN 6“HN [OPO [SIG | PBL |. 9g | tae 2 aes’ 9°9 | $68 e99° |. ST
= “snquIlu op op [Onn gou ‘u SIL | 0108 | 88 | gts | 18 | 76g DEE | sor‘ Igoe! 19 | 9 | $°88| GGS° \6Te* | 119° tL
= op op op ee NS ee Bol | 1.9L |. L'sT| O88} Bigs oth | 1°98 60L. | et
S op op “1ea{9 TCL OIE PEN ‘0 OBIT | G*ZZ | FB | eG | BOL 6a SEE | O28" 909 8°9 | oc2 | HL8| GLa° |LrpS joods Ff SL
= ‘ouul ‘ug op *3as “3S 0) Oe1T | BLL | £8 | 9° | TOL | 9°88 |SZE_ | 08a‘ |cogs G9 | 19 | P°98| Ga‘ \eaPs |FaL‘ It
= “138 ‘wind “qjnumo -2uy “MS TANS ‘s BSI | B'ZL F “68 | OFZ | a8 | 08g \EGE | 09e' legs 0°G | ag | fen] FESS |aps |goL. F OT
Ps ‘TTap op op "MS “MS OG GLot | 16L F°86 | 1g | L6G | aigg MEI" | Stes |gge' er | of | 6e8) GELS 26S [969% 6
| *TTnUNs *<pnoypo sumo ‘aI9 | “MS “AS ‘Ss «| 9601-| OLL 7°86 | 9%9 | S°9 | 1°98 |PSS! | geet loge 1% | ag | 1F8| 8st’ |tees l60LS | 8
‘TInp op ‘uy "as “OS “qa «| SEO} cae | OfS4 | 961 6tE | ath | Gig GZ’ | BFFs | Zzo% 0G | gf | Of¢8) O6IS \ere* feed‘ £
2 ule *1TNUNd Dalbuls a0) “aso “a 6°88 | GOL 9F | Bas 4 00L' 1‘9 | $°€8 2 GLLé 9
cad aug op ‘TyauMs "eS ‘as “A _, | Veor | S22 72 | 0f8 | e's | ogg |608) | Lra* lgcu* BS | o% | 6'G8) BESS |gzPS jugg* g
bd ‘Sulujealyy = =—--"9s "wind *7e9]0 “au "MS MAN F OL'O F poze | 08 | 96 | 0% fete | 929 {486° | LTS legrs £ | 1% | 192] 26a |ZFE* |er9* v
“A1ey op -ouy “MSM Te) GOI | OLZ | 16 | Lig | HS | Sfog \OOE | 26° Leg" S6 | 8°E | 2*e | 268) SLTS loGr. |699° €

“aug. ‘ou “yyw "StS “aS BOL | OGL | 1G | 8°G | 9G | Gieg \ISS_ | Oce* |Zu9H'96 | 9°E | He | LéeR| IZTS jops’ ITZ‘ é
*a[Zz1Ap *488013A0 cere) p) “as 9s oan FOOT F BFG | OSL | LE} 0% | Ub | etre [PAUL | OLE |pgrHe6 | FS | ez | 9%G8) SLT T\BIr‘esi16s6a, I
= rel i ~ =} FQ Rm me] - [ee a) wos x sy o ay 2H

0 = z ees Be lap e 82 fssi<e oe ee ae me leelesi ae 72) 82) 85 RS ons §

~ 3 = ° 3 5 pe 7 53/85) oO: 39 be se | ots a Sen eiiets eae) g @ wos eS

2 |e ae ae eae 5 | o fSESS/S8/ a2] SS’ wifes | SSiSoles alae [veep &

> a Z PES Fole2/ Fat Prt Rigalsal Pol gigi 8 ies | so) F

5 alee} a} ot is Biv sl "IS" 1S | 2

3

*IOY ICI AA “pum “MW *d F 3e SUOTIPAIOSGO ‘W °V OL 38 SUOIJeAIOSqO >

532

CEQ] ‘Hay maldag Jo ymopy ay) sof ‘njInaIvQ ‘e0fQ hossp ay7 70 day ‘sazsthayy jv9Vb0j0100)a

JOURNAL

OF

Pik ASTATIC .SOCLET Y.

No. 46.—October, 1835.

1.—Report on some Inscriptions found at Hammam, on the Southern
Coast of Arabia, 1835. By Messrs. T. G. Hurron, Asst. Surgeon,
and Lieut. J. Smitu, of the Palinurus Surveying Vessel.

{Communicated to the Asiatic Society by the Government of Bombay. See
Proceedings, 2nd Sept.]

March 14th, 1835.—The accompanying inscriptions were found in
the neighbourhood of Dis, a Bedouin town, a few hours distance
from Ras Sharma, on the southern coast,of Arabia.

The natives who came off to the ship represented it as a populous,
well-cultivated district, abounding in vegetables and fruits of various
descriptions. Having learned from these persons that there were a
number of ancient buildings, and some writing in a character unknown
to the Arabs, we naturally felt an inclination to make a personal
inspection of them; and to effect this with security, Captain Harness
sent our pilot, a native of the place, on shore, to request the Ruling
Sheikh to grant us his firman, and afew Bedouin attendants. In
reply, a letter was sent off, making a most exorbitant demand of
money, rice, copper, and sundry other very useful articles, specifying
the individual quantities with much nicety and precision, as a price
of his protection. This of course was politely declined; and froma
subsequent conversation with some of the party themselves, they
appeared not only to regret the exercise of their cupidity, which had
deprived them of at least a few presents from the ship, but seemed
to be sensibly ashamed of a conduct so much at variance with the
hospitable treatment we had universally met with since leaving
Maculla.

32

534 Inscriptions from Hammam [Ocr.

We left Sharma without remarking any thing further than the
remains of two water tanks, much resembling in form and structure,
those we saw onthe summit of Hasan Ghorab. There appeared
also to have been a fort and a small town on the point of the cape ;
but time had been so active in her work of destruction, that the
traces merely were visible. At Gossyrh, we were more fortunate, and
although the distance was greatly increased, it was deemed desirable
to obtain some correct information of a part of the country, which in
all human probability may never be visited again under such favour-
able circumstances, and which promised to prove so interesting in an
antiquarian point of view. With the permission of Captain Harnzs,
Mr. Situ and myself started from Gossyrh, and after a tedious
journey of about 15 miles, through a flat, barren country, we halted for
the nightabout 10 p. m. under the ruins of a very old fort. Here
we slept, and the following morning commenced our researches.
The Bedouins, who attended us, unfortunately knew nothing of either
the ruins or the writing; but having recalled to our recollection the
name of a Bedouin, who had been on board for medical assistance at
Sharma, we inquired for his residence, which he had informed us
was in the neighbourhood, and found him exceeding civil and obliging
in showing us every thing he considered might be of interest to us.
Like all his Arab brethren, he knew nothing but what his own exter-
nal senses had taught him: and in common with them, he adopted the
easy method of accounting for forts, tanks, inscriptions, &c. by
ascribing them all to the superior genius of the Feringis, of whom
they seem to have entertained a kind of superstitious dread : of course
little else than the names of the places could be procured. ‘The fort
is called Hasan el Meimelf, and from its size, the nature of the
materials of which it is composed, and its form, appears never to have
been remarkable for its strength or stability. It is now completely
in ruins. After traversing great part of the neighbouring country, which
is known by the name of Hammam, we at last came to Jibul Aaledma,
where we were directed to look for the inscriptions.

About half way up the hill. which we estimated about 200 feet, we
came to a spacious cave, on the sides of which, wherever a smooth
surface presented itself, we discovered the traces of writing. Most of
it was executed in a species of red paint, but in one or two parts, a
black composition had been made use of; by the ravages of time, many
of them were nearly obliterated ; but in others, by wetting the surface,
and removing the dust which had accumulated, the characters became
much more legible, and in one part in particular, the colour became
quite brilliant, looking as fresh as though it had been just laid on.

1835. ] on the South Coast of Arabia. 535

Having discovered and copied those very perfect inscriptions of Hasan
Ghordb, we were at once struck with the resemblance they bore to these
now before us, and on a more minute comparison, the letters will be found
generally to correspond, although there are a few here, which do not
present themselvesin the former. As it would appear, that the style of
writing is now extinct, at least entirely so in this part of Arabia, it
becomes a pleasing subject of speculation by what persons they could
have been executed. The characters certainly bear a stronger
assimilation to the Ethiopic than to any other known in the present
day; and consulting the history of Arabia, we find, that prior to the
Persian conquest of Yemen, under Novsuirvan, the whole of that
fertile province was under the sway of the Abyssinians, many of whom
having become enamoured of its beauties, permanently settled here. I
think such are fair grounds for assuming that these are the remains
of that people, especially as we know them to have been an enterpris-
ing commercial nation, with talent and qualifications, which fitted
them for such design as Hasan Ghorad, from the execution of which
the native inhabitants would have shrunk with despair. For a solution
of these difficult questions, however, it will be more becoming in us to
preserve silence, and leave them to the disposal of persons better
qualified by their peculiar studies and more extended information on
such points. I may here mention the coincidence of the name
Husan Ghordb, and Bait Ghoradb, the fort and house of Ghordb,
which latter is one of the most populous and powerful tribes in
the neighbourhood of Hammam. On questioning one of the tribes
concerning the origin of his title, he told us, his ancestors came from
Hasan Ghordb, a place, however, only known to him by hearsay.
There are now many intermediate tribes between the two places, so that
should the information be correct, we may infer that this is merely a
branch of the family drawn here by the comparatively fertile nature
of the soil over that about Hasan Ghordd.

With respect to the general features of the country about Hammam, it
wears a most unpromising aspect, there being to all appearance nothing
but barren hills ; but on entering the ravines and valleys, the scene be-
comes suddenly changed, and the eye is once more gratified by the visible
marks of cultivation and the industry of man. In each corner of the
valley may be seen a thriving date grove, and sometimes pretty large
portions of grounds, covered with Taam, onions, garlic, sweet potatoes,
and a variety of melons and pompions, one species of which is called
the ‘‘ Bortugal,” for what reason it would not appear very evident.
The Nebek and cocoanut thrive well. After searching about for fur-
ther curiosities, we left Hammam about noon, and instead of

3 Zz 2

536 Inscriptions from Hammam, &c. [Ocr.

returning direct to Gossyrh, we chose a path nearer to the distant
range of Assad, and after much fatigue, and some little risk, we
arrived at the old fort of Maaba, about 12 o’clock at night. We
were led to make this deviation in consequence of the character we
received of the fort from the natives, who informed us, it was composed
entirely of hewn stone, and in a high state of preservation; a distant
hope too of finding further inscriptions prompted us to visit the place.

In our search for inscriptions, we were disappointed, neither could
we learn from the people about, that there existed any. This, how-
ever, should not damp a person’s ardour in quest of antiquities, as many
of the Arabs positively cannot recognize writing when they see it, if
it differ at all from the modern Arabic. We saw an instance of this at
Hammam ; having accidentally founda few characters engraved on a
stone on the road side, we immediately stopped to take a copy, while
the Bedouins anxiously inquired, ‘‘ why we were writing the stone,” as
they simply expressed it ; and on being informed that we were copying
the writing upon the stone, they seemed half incredulous about it. A
short time after this, one of them took me to look at a stone on which
he said there was some writing ; it proved, however, to be nothing but
some natural marks on the surface of the rock, and when I told him
this, he laughed, and candidly told me he knew no better.

The fort of Maaba, to all appearance, has been strong and well
constructed, of stones and mortar ; though the former are not hewn, as
we were informed they were. There are no embrasures for guns, but
numerous loop-holes for muskets or matchlocks. The plan of the
building seems good for defence, and its position admirably chosen on
a rising ground, in the point of convergence of three fertile valleys well
cultivated and thickly planted with date groves. It was said, this
was one of the castles that defended the market road to Hadramaut,
where are many others of a similar description. The road still passes
under its dilapidated walls. From hence to Gossyrk is about five or
six miles.

April \st, 1835.—In prosecuting the survey of the coast, we again
heard of some inscriptions about 40 miles to the eastward of Hammam.
Lieut. Sanprrs, Mr. Situ, and myself, with the concurrence of
Captain Harnss, started off for the purpose of copying them, after
having previously examined the ruins of Hasan Mesdndh,
situated close to the beach, on a gentle insulated eminence. The
foundation wall is now all that remains, the stones of which have
evidently been hewn, and strongly cemented with mortar. Every
thing around bears striking testimony of its antiquity. It has
originally served for the protection of a village, the position of which

Jour as. See. Ve, IV. Fl. XL

trecriptions near Dus on the South Voast of Arabia. |

P Snaioue ee . } 3
d4FY14X 43 gat O/"F Pneaet
4 s 6

igi nf OF 9
UXa3 og 94 ~<edi 4
| uy
£4
R 331Hle 4H 8
X AW
oa A Pr ay Yor Ri
ani ‘
BRISHITABX 4 Fs pwu yg
ey. CUM4 IIHS AAA? 4H
QA) » 22P IPE Y Ty garosnu J ap
Pu pdr Pd xpe rine ~

‘. Aneel re ea ie ote.
ay Be SS gE pe

ae ee | Se Aaa ec ¥
au ee 3 Be ae .

Jeurr as. Sve, kod IW PEXLIW

Trscriptions E of Hammam on the coast of Arabia |

&

- +IM6o
bx vygoinedind no
oc Ofn i+
Bs , mA Y ie :
TineAo+neimnhm HP
oi°o+ oA 44]
eo weal
arent mer A
6
Aux fi 4mkign
ONAmA g eae
oo MMA PTCNNIA ~ mint rgain¢nn
nAyno+aM RhO++t!
OBininhisopi di+no
+104
IY
7
Didsn

(xm onhdéniaisf+
So b oftaihy$+en ne
es la+onin

Oo+r0@]
™hooro

ie

is re mg ey oe
i eae fer

ge

AER ee

—
4
=

ns ae kit a Bt i Ties
bi = art bee pets . ig t 4 e, s ie

——_

s, +o
coeeumialia =e

eh) i ~
Pa) RL ee et ee) ee os Opie 8

: r-

r . er.

7 tr LT}

wh: : vA : le
- ;. 2 va hone oy
v;

x ;

r 4 ‘ le

SOMME? fe a ee es oe aa on

- Sa y
S 3 ; @ GA ae Wh)
F Ss ; ers aie ee eS ew 4 + ai
*.+% aie a. a TG 5 EL ila as
oS \ 5 ak: ry) : dng Ss vet. - as Fog, i ' +
my % ; a Teoma ME. Gr?) ia Obese -
q ee ee ee rere rita ee” OL aS
¥ ‘ ; Pree Ba OS) ee eee
; A Vp PAL |B Os maa A gee ete Sy oe
J rT oe
5 ee ee ping ae a ae
{ 2 ¥ . *
. iS saa

i etl
ri.

a

Pye

ye - he 4
ae,

1835.] Account of Siingie Ujong, &c. 537

can now be inferred only, from the loose dark nature of the soil, and
a few small fragments of glass and copper, scattered here and there, so
common a circumstance in most of the ancient towns on the Arabian
coast.

A walk of about 12 miles brought us on to Nakhul Mayuk, a
very small date grove, at the foot of the lofty range of mountains a
little to the eastward of Wady Shulkhowi. Here we began to
ascend, and having attained an elevation of about 1500 feet, we came
to a spacious cave, in a part of which we found the adjoining charac-
ters, written exactly in the same manner with red paint as those at
Hammam. \mmediately underneath is said to have been a well, more
probably a small reservoir for water, from its position and the dryness
of the soil. Itis now filled up with loose stones and rubbish. The
surrounding country, with the exception of one or two very small date
groves, pressing out from some obscure corner of a valley, is one
unvaried scene of barrenness and desolation. We were told, however,
that after a fall of rain, the scanty herbage which springs up was
a sufficient inducement for the Bedouins to bring their flocks up to
the hills, and during which time, they inhabited this and any other
caves which they found convenient.

Having slept here for the night, under the protection of a few
Bedouins of the Menahil tribe, we started early the following morning,
to return by the same dreary path which conducted us on our pilgri-
mage.

11.—Account of Siingie Ujong, one of the States in the interior of Ma-
lacca. By Ensign T. J. Newsoup, 23rd Regt. Madras Light Infantry.
[Read at the Meeting of the 5th August. ]

(The following information, touching the population, customs, amount of pro-
duce, boundaries, &c. of the states described, has been principally and necessarily
derived from the natives themselves. It is therefore offered with diffidence ; but, at
the same time, it is to observe here, that fully alive to the disadvantages of such
sources, no labor has been spared by me to check and render by collation and
patient investigation, such information now submitted, as correct and near the
truth as possible. }

The states in the interior, formerly under general sway of the
princes deputed from Menangkabowe, are under the immediate
government of their respective Panghilds and Sékus. As each state
has its peculiar features, it would seem advisable to give them a separate
notice. By Malays, the precedence is ascribed to Stingie Ujong;
the Panghili of which territory is addressed, by his brethren, by the

538 Account of Stingie Ujong, [Oct.

appellation of Abang, elder brother; the second place is given to
Rumbowe, and the third to Johole. Srimenanti, whose claims still
remain unsettled, aspires to the fourth place.

Boundaries.—Sungie Ujong is situated towards the source of the
right branch of the Lingie river. It is bounded to the north by
Jellabu; to the south, by part of Rumbowe and the Lingie river; to
the east, by Srime: Anti, and to the west, by Salangore. Its boundaries
with Jellabii are said to be Bukit Tangoh and Dhéldkaru bander
Barangan ; with Rumbowe, Bukit A’ngin, part of the right branch of
the Lingie river, and Parentian Tingih; with Srimenanti, part of
Terachi and the Paro stream: and with Salangore or Calang, by the
river Langkat, Kobak Kambang, and Tongal Sejaga.

Population.—The population in 1832, was estimated at 3,200
Malays, principally Menangkabowes; and 400 Chinese employed in
the mines. Many of the latter have since fled to Malacca, in conse-
quence of the disturbances in 1883. The principal villages are Lingie,
(the residence of the Dattu Muda, KAtas;) Pantei, (the residence of
the Panghilé;) Jiboi, Sala, Linsom, Durian, Tanjong, Rassah,
Kopaiyong, Rantou, Siliou, and Jirrah. The Terachi territory, a
portion of which appertained to Sdngie Ujong, now claims indepen-
dance.

Trade.—The trade of Singie Ujong is principally in tin, which is
got at Sala, Sa Maraboh, Battu Lobong, Kayu Arra, and Timiong.
Thence it is brought down to Lingie, and landed at Pank4langs,
Cundang, Durian, and Mangis. It is here deposited in ware-houses,
and generally bartered for rice, opium, salt, tobacco, cloths, oil, and
shells for making lime, brought up by boats, from} to 14 coyans
burthen, which cannot easily ascend higher than this part of the river.

The tin is conveyed by Malay coolies, by land, from the mines, as
far as Jibdi; a village estimated at 30 miles from Lingie; and
thence to Lingie, by small boats, down the river.

From the following extracts from treaties made by the Dutch, it
would appear that they did not neglect to avail themselves of this
source to increase the revenue of Malacca.

Article I, of a treaty concluded by the Dutch Governor W. BorLan
in Council, with the chiefs of Rumbowe and Calang, dated Malacca,
24th January, 1760.

‘‘The tin being the produce of Lingie, Rumbowe, and Calang,
without any exception, will be delivered to the Company at 38 drs.
a bhar of 3 piculs ; and this price will always continue, without its
ever being enhanced ; it will be in the power of the Company to seize
and confiscate, and to appropriate for their use, all tin which might be

1835.] one of the Malacca States. 539

discovered to have been fraudulently exported from the places above-
mentioned.”’

A profit equal to about 18,000 Spanish dollars is supposed to have
accrued to the Dutch annually from this monopoly; which so rigid
were they in enforcing, that we find it stipulated in the same treaty,
‘that no boats or vessels, to whomsoever they may belong, shall be
allowed to pass the Company’s settlement at Lingie without touching,
in order that a search may be made in such boats or vessels for tin ;
any person attempting to evade these rules, will be liable to have
their boats, and the tin which may be found in them, confiscated and
sold, and the proceeds appropriated for the use of the Company and
the said chiefs.” Also, that ‘‘ no boats or vessels of any description
whatever be permitted to proceed from the north to south, or passing
from the latter to the former part, or passing the straits of Malacca,
without being provided with a pass, on pain of being seized.”

During the British Government at Malacca, from 1795 to 1818, the
trade fell into the hands of private individuals, principally Dutch and
Chinese merchants residing at Malacca. In 1819, the Dutch resumed
the monopoly, as we find from the 7th article of a treaty, dated Naning,
the 5th day of June, 1819, between the Supreme Government of
Netherlands India and Raja Aut, the Panghili and Ampdt Suku of
Rumbowe, which runs thus: “ Raja Auf, the Panghdli and Ampat
Suké of Rumbowe, must give up to Government all the tin from Lingie,
Sangie Ujong, Rumbowe, and any place under their authority, without
reservation. The Government binds itself to pay 40 Spanish dollars
per bhar of 300 catties, or 370 Ibs., &c.”

On the resumption of Malacca by the English, in 1825, the tin trade
relapsed into the hands of the private merchants.

Miners.—In 1828, the number of Chinese miners amounted to
nearly 1000 men, who were regularly divided into nine Kongsis or
companies, each under its respective Tao-kae. They were chiefly of
that singular fraternity, the Tian Tay Huay, or Triad Society, whose
mysterious oaths and secret laws appear to be not very dissimilar
from those which bound the Carbonari of Modern Europe. Jealousy
of their fast increasing power and numbers, or some alleged offence,
but more probably the treasure amassed by this brotherhood, (whose
property was in common,) led in 1828, to their massacre by the
Malays.

In 1880, the mines were again worked by about 400 Chinese, who
went up, at the inducement of some Malacca merchants, and continued
there until the late disturbances in 1833, when many of them returned
to Malacca. The mines at present are but partially worked, and very

540 Account of Stingie Ujong [Ocr.

little of the tin passes down the river, in consequence of the feud
existing between the Rumbowe chiefs and those of Siingie Ujong
and Lingie.

The Malays and Chinese employed in the mines were liberally paid.
The rate of their wages will shew the difference of value set upon
the services of the two classes ;—a Chinese being paid at the rate of
5 to 8 dollars per mensem ; and a Malay from 8 to 5 only.

From day-break to 7 a. m., they are employed in clearing the mines
from the water which accumulates during the night. From 7 to 8,
they rest and breakfast. At 8, the process of digging out the
earth and ore is commenced. At 11, they go to dinner, and return to
work again about 1 p. m.

At 5, their labours cease for the day. No work is done at the
periods of new and full moon.

Like their Cornish brethren, the M alay miners are very superstitious.
They believe in the existence of a spirit (Kummang), who watches
over the mines, and whose wrath they are particularly careful not to
provoke by work or deed. They have “‘ wise men,” or Puwdngs, who
pretend to be able to ascertain the most favorable spots for sinking a
mine, by various spells and charms; these may be compared with
the charlatanic wielders of the virgula divinitoria in our own “ en-
lightened country.”

Previous to a description of the mines, a short outline of the
principal geological features of the peninsula, as far as present imper-
fect informatiom extends, may not wholly be out of place.

The southern part of the Malayan peninsula and Banca assimilate
in geological formation. Dr. Horsrigxp, in his observations on the
mineralogical constitution of Banca, observes, that ‘‘ the direction
of the island being from north-west to south-west, it follows not
only the direction of Sumatra and the Malayan peninsula, but
the large chain of Asiatic mountains, one of the many branches
of which terminates in Ceylon, while another traversing Arracan,
Pegu, the Malayan peninsula, and probably Sumatra, sends off an
inferior range through Banca and Billitoa, where it may be considered
to disappear.”

This chain of mountains may be considered as the termination of
one of those beams or pillars of lofty hills, spoken of by M. ps
GuieNes, in his work on the Huns, as supporting the stupendous
edifice, to which he compares the elevated regions of Tartary, compre-
hending the lofty ranges of Jmaiis and Caucasus; and the dome of
which is represented as one prodigious mountain, to which the Chinese
give the epithet of celestial, down the steeps of which numerous
broad and rapid rivers pour their waters.

1835.] one of the Malacca States. 541

The Malayan range, as far as has been hitherto explored, is of
primitive formation ; principally grey stanniferous granite.

In the gold countries of Tringanu, Pahang, Gominchi, and Mount
Ophir, rocks and crystals of quartz are met with. At the southern
extremity, and in some parts of Salangore, porphyry occurs.

The islands in the neighbourhood of Malacca, and those off the
eastern extremity of the Salangore coast, consist principally of granite
and laterite with sienite.

According to Dr. Warp, ‘‘ The small hills in the neighbourhood
of Malacca are formed of a conglomerate, the base of which is clay
iron stone, containing imbedded portions of felspar, in a state of
decomposition (having all the properties of yellow ochre), and small
grains of quartz and iron glance, scattered through its substance.

‘The specific gravity of the rock is 2°536; when recently dug, it
is soft, can be easily cut, and readily stains the fingers; but after
exposure to the air for some time, it acquires such a degree of hard-
ness as to be broken with difficulty: and its durability is shewn by
the present state of the ancient buildings, which have stood unim-
paired for nearly 300 years.

«In its dry state, it is porous, from the destruction of the ochreous
particles by moisture and exposure to the air, resembling old lava in
its external appearance.

*« In all its properties, it agrees exactly with the rock common on
the Malabar Coast, and described by Dr. BucHANAN under the name
of laterite.”

The mountains at Penang are also “‘ composed of fine grey granite,
and all the smaller eminences are of the same material.” ‘‘ Some of
the small hills near the coast are partly formed of the laterite already
described when speaking of Malacca; and Saddle island, at the south-
western angle of Penang, is apparently entirely composed of the same
ingredient.”

At the Carimons, hornstone is found. Mr. Martin states, the
aspect of the Island of Singapore, (situate on the southern extremity
of the peninsula, in Lat. 1° 17’ 22” north, and Long. 103° 51’ 5” east,)
to be ‘‘low and level, with an extensive chain of saline and fresh
water marshes; in several parts covered with lofty timber and luxuri-
ant vegetation, here and there low rounded sand-hills interspersed
with spots of level ground, formed of a ferruginous clay, with a sandy
substratum. The principal rock is red sandstone, which changes in
some parts to a breccia or conglomerate, containing large fragments
and crystals of quartz. The whole contiguous group of isles, about
thirty in number, as well as Singapore, are apparently of a submarine

4a

542 Account of Stngie Ujong [Ocr.

origin, and their evulsion probably is of no very distant date.” It
may be added, that bouldered pieces of primitive trap are found on
the shores of Singapore, though none has hitherto been seen in siti.

The range of mountains on the peninsula, as it approaches the
equator, diminishes in height. The highest of the Rumbowe and
Johor ranges, (with the exception of Mount Ophir,) not exceeding,
probably, 3000 feet ; while many of those to the north of Kedah are
said to be upwards of 6000.

Mount Ophir, a detached mountain, between 30 and 40 miles to
the eastward of Malacca, I calculated roughly (by means of the
thermometer.and boiling water) to be 5693 feet above the level of
the sea; its summit is granite. Gold dust and crystals of quartz are
found in considerable quantities around its base*.

From information hitherto collected, and inquiries made among
the natives, it would not appear that any volcanoes exist in the interior ;
though the circumstance of numerous hot-springs, scattered over
the face of the country, and other indications, sufficiently testify the
presence of subterrancous fires. Severe shocks of earthquakes have
been felt from time to time, but whether caused by violent eruptions
from any of the volcanoes on the opposite coast of Sumatra, or by
under-ground explosions there, or in the peninsula itself, is uncertain.

There are hot-springs in the vicinity of Malacca; at Ayerpdnnas,
and also near Sabang, and at Lindi in the Naning territory. I have
‘visited the two former places, and found the temperature of the water
at noon of the springs at Ayerpannas, to be 120° Fahrenheit, and
at 6 a. m., 113°.

The temperature of the hot-springs at Sabang was found at 6 A.M.
to be 110° Fahrenheit. The variation in the former instance is
accounted for by the different temperatures of atmosphere at the time
of taking the heat. The heat of the springs in both cases, I found
to exceed that of the atmosphere by an average of 35° Fahrenheit,
in several comparative trials.

At the wells near Sabang, when the bulb of the thermometer was
pushed into the soft vegetable mould at the bottom of the spring, the
mercury rose to 130:.

The springs at both places are situated in swampy flats, environed
by small hills. They average from 1 to 23 feet in depth, and are
discernible from a distance by the steam and odour that escapes.
The water is of a pale bluish green tinge; from the bottom bubbles
of air (probably sulphuretted hydrogen) ever and anon find their
way to the surface, where they burst.

* See J. A. S. vol. ii. page 497..

1835.] one of the Malacca States. 543

Dr. Warp analysed a portion of the water from the springs at
Ayerpannas, and found, that on slow evaporation in asand-bath, 1000
grains of the water left a residuum of eight grains of saline matter,
principally muriate of soda, with a slightly bitter taste, indicating the
presence of sulphate of magnesia.

The surface of the peninsula is covered generally by alluvial
deposites, rich in ore of tin, and not unfrequently mixed with gold;
over this lies a layer of vegetable mould, in which stones or pebbles
are seldom found.

In the interior, the land is mountainous, but undulating towards
its coasts, shaded by primeval forests, and stored with treasures to the
botanist and naturalist ; it is almost devoid of plains. The strips of
low ground lying in the hollows of the undulations are almost inva-
riably swampy, and are converted into Sawahs, or wet rice-grounds,
by the natives.

At various places along its western coast are low cliffs, if they
may so be termed, of a reddish steatite.

The banks of the most considerable rivers are generally low,
swampy, and covered with mangrove, Nipah, Nibong, and other trees
of the same nature.

The bottom is for the most part of mud, except at short distances
from the estuaries, where sand banks and coral reefs are often met
with.

The tin of the peninsula, and the eastern islands, (particularly those
of Junk Ceylon, Lingga, and Banca, which may be styled the eastern
Cassiterides,) is diffused over a great geographical extent.

Mr. Crawrurp observes, that ‘tin, wherever found, has a limited
geographical distribution ; but where it does exist, it is always in
great abundance. The tin of the Indian Islands has, however, a much
wider range of distribution than that of any other country, being
found in considerable quantity from the 98° to the 107° of east longi-
tude, and from the 8° north to 3° south latitude.”

It has, however, been since stated by Mr. ANpgrson, that tin has
been found in considerable quantities much farther north, viz. in the
interior of Tavoy, in latitude 12° 40’ north; the mines are situated at
a place called Sakana, about four days’ journey from the city of Tavoy.

It has been affirmed, that tin exists so high as 14° north, in Siam.

The peninsula of the present day, although auriferous, appears not
to deserve its appellation of ‘‘ The Golden Chersonesus,”’ so much as
its neighbour, the Island of Sumatra, to which, by the way, there is a
tradition, mentioned by the early Portuguese historians, that it was
formerly united. Sumatra, by some, has been supposed to be the

4a 2

544 Account of Séngie Uj.ng [Ocr.

Taprobdana of the ancient geographers; this Mr. Marsprn denies,
ascribing rather the name to Ceylon, the Serendib of Muhammedan
writers, and the Lanca of the Hindus; and afurms, that Sumatra was
unknown to them, denouncing the descriptions given by Srraso,
Pomronivus, Mgta, Purny, and Protemy, as obscure and contradictory.

Admitting the tradition to be based on truth, it might be conjec-
tured, that the Peninsula and Sumatra, thus united, formed that tract
of country known to the Greeks and Romans by the title of ‘‘ Aurea
Chersonesus.” ‘This might serve in some measure to explain why so
extensive an island, and one so rich in gold and spices, the two great
desiderata of ancient, and I may venture to surmise, modern days,
should have escaped the notice of ancient geographers.

The quantity of gold dust exported annually from the south-west
coast of Sumatra and Achin alone, according to Marspen and Hamit-
TON, amounts to 26,400 oz. The former states, that there are no
fewer than twelve hundred gold mines in the dominions of Menang-
kabowe alone ; a considerable portion of the produce of which (per-
haps one-half) never comes into the hands of Europeans.

The gold of the peninsula, on a rough estimate, amounts to 19,800
oz. annually. It is chiefly got at Ulu Pahang, Tring4nu, Caldntan,
Johole, Gominchi, and Jeleye; Reccan, Battang, Moring, and other
places at the foot of Mount Ophir.

A small quantity of iron is found in the interior of Quedah, in the
peninsula, and also in Sumatra. Siam and Billiton produce this metal
in tolerable abundance.

I do not find that silver is produced in any part of the peninsula ;
although Perak, from its name, which signifies silver, and which is
conjectured by Marspen to have been the Apyvoa of Protemy, might
have been supposed to have derived its appellation from the presence
of this metal.

The tin produced annually in the peninsula, including the adjacent
Island of Junk Ceylon, is estimated at 34,600 peculs.

According to Crawrurp, the tin of Banca, produce of 1817,
amounted to 35,000 peculs, or 2,0834 tons.

Tin Mines.—The mines are generally excavated on the swampy
flats at the base of hills of primitive formation. They average from
six to twenty feet in depth, following the streams of ore (Hilir bit),
which will-sometimes run in a horizontal direction to the distance of
three miles, according to the nature of the ground. These excava-
tions are termed Lombongan. The streams vary in diameter from
six inches to eighteen and twenty, and consist of a quantity of small
heavy granulated portions of a dark hue, and shining with a metallic

1835.] one of the Malacca States. 545

lustre, intermixed with a glittering white sand. The excavations
made by the Malays, are more superficial than those dug by the
Chinese, as they are too lazy to work the streams, which lie deep.

The strata under which the ore is found are commonly, lst, a
black vegetable mould ; 2nd, red clay ; 3rd, white clay, with white peb-
bles, apparently decomposed quartz, and 4th, a bed of shining white
sand, called Passtr bijt. Under the ore lies a stratum of steatite, called
Népal, or a hard bed of decomposed rock. The native term for the
tin ore is Bit timah, literally seeds of tin; when melted, it has the
name of Timah masak. Crystals of quartz and fragments of micaceous
schist are sometimes found among the alluvial earth thrown out.

The soil is carried out by the miners in baskets, suspended at the
extremities of a stout elastic bambi or pendga, which passes across
the shoulders. The men are divided into two parties, which work in
regular succession, one entering the shaft with emptied baskets,
while the other makes its egress, with the filled ones. At Ulu
Pondoi, in Naning, and at Jerram Kambing, | am informed, the mines
are natural caverns in the rock. The Malays and Jacoons collect the
ore by the light of dammer torches.

The ore is taken to astream, conducted by artificial channels, lined
with the bark of trees, to the vicinity of the mines, and stirred about
with an iron rake, or a choncole. The water carries off the sand,
small pebbles, and earth, leaving the ore and large stones at the bot-
tom, which are afterwards separated by a riddle and the hand.
The ore, thus cleared of extraneous substances, is deposited in the
koppos, to await the process of smelting.

Smelting or Melanchir.—The smeltings are carried on at stated
periods, twice or thrice a year, according to the quantity of ore col-
lected, and always at night, to avoid the great heat.

The ore and charcoal, (of the Kompas, Kamoui, or other hard woods,)
are gradually heaped up, in alternate layers, in a rude furnace of clay,
called a Bullowe, with an aperture below, to allow the escape of the
fused metal. The fire is urged, and the whole mass brought into a
glow by a sort of leathern bellows called Hambisan, and sometimes
by ruder ones, constructed like an air-pump, and made from the hol-
lowed trunk of a strait tree, with a piston, headed by thick folds of
paper. These are called [alibongs.

The Malays for the most part content themselves with the Tropong,
which is merely a hollow bambu converted into a sort of blow-pipe,
and worked by the mouth.

As the heat increases, the melted metal is received into a hole dug
in the ground, called the Teldga, or reservoir; and thence, with the
assistance of iron ladles, poured into the moulds.

546 Account of Sungie Ujong [Ocr.

The tin now assumes the shape of the ingots of commerce, of which
there are two kinds common in Sungie Ujong, viz. the Tdmpang and
Kepping or Bangka. The former weighs from half a catty to two
catties, and the latter, from fifty to sixty catties ; one catty is equal
to one pound and three-quarters.

The Tampang is generally used by the Malays.

In the furnaces used by the Chinese, 800 dbs. of metal may be pro-
duced during the course of a night. Those of the Malays seldom
produce more than one-sixth of this quantity.

From 100 parts of the ore, it is calculated, from 65 to 77 of pure
metal are produced. The ore of Banca yields 58. That of Junk
Ceylon, according to an assay made by Mr. Buaxg, 644.

The water is drained from the mines, if shallow, by means of a
channel, leading into a neighbouring stream ; but if deep, the Putdram
Ayer is had recourse to. This hydraulic machine is, I believe, of
Chinese invention. The Rev. Mr. Tomuin, a zealous missionary, gives
the following description of it :

‘«« The apparatus is simple, consisting of a common water wheel, a
circular wooden chain about 40 feet in circumference, and a long
square box, or trough, through which it runs in ascending. The
wheeland chain, | think, revolve on a common axis, so that the mo-
tion of the former necessarily puts the latter into action. The chain
consists of square wooden floats, a foot distant from each other,
and strung as it were upon a continuous flexible axis, having a move-
able joint between each pair.

“« As the float-boards of the chain successively enter the lower part
of the box or trough, (immersed in water,) a portion of water is con-
stantly forced up by each, and discharged at the top. At one of the
mines we were much struck with the simple but efficient mode of
its application. There were three distinct planes or terraces rising
above each other. On the middle one was the wheel; the lower
was the pit of the mine; from the higher a stream of water fell and
turned the wheel, which, putting the whole machine into motion,
brought up another stream from the pit; these two streams, from
above and below, uniting on the middle plane, run off in a sluice, by
which the ore was washed.”

Regarding the smelting of tin, in a recent number of Dr. Larpner’s
Cabinet Cyclopedia, (No. 54, pp. 21 and 22,) are the following
remarks on the advantages of pit coal over charcoal: ‘‘ Authorities are
not agreed as to the time when pit coal first began to be substituted
in the reverberatory smelting houses (of Cornwall) for wood or char-
coal, though this is generally supposed to have been about 1680.

1835.] one of the Malacca States. 547

‘*« In the smelting of this (tin), as of other metals, the application
of this fuel has been productive of immense advantages; and such is
the perfection to which our metallurgic operations have been carried
since the economical introduction of this cheap and plentiful fuel,
that the regulations of our custom-house alone prevented the carry-
ing a scheme set on foot some years ago, for the importing of the
tin ore from the eastern mines, for the purpose of being smelted in this
country, and afterwards re-exported.”

It would appear to have escapea the observation of the author of
this article, that the enormous forests which thickly cover the whole
of the Malayan peninsula, and the Island of Banca, under the very
shade of which the miners may be said to work, furnish on the spot a
cheaper and more economical fuel than the coal pits of Newcastle or
Whitehaven do to the miners of Cornwall, at the sole expence of the
labor of felling them ; setting aside the loss of time, the expence of
importation and exportation, and disinclination of the natives to such a
scheme. Moreover, according to Mr. Crawrurp, the cost of producing
a cwt. of Banca tin is but 22s. 8d., whereas that of Cornwall amounts
to 64s. 7d. The cost of producing a cwt. of the metalin Singie Ujong
is estimated by an intelligent native at 23s. The immense natural
obstacles in Cornwall. only to be surmounted by the most powerful
steam engines, and the unremitting application of all the means
human ingenuity can devise, together with the high price of labor, are,
however, the principal causes in the enhancement of the cost of
production in England.

The time perhaps is not far distant when like ingenuity and similar
means will be applied to the unlocking of the hitherto partially
developed resources of the Kast.

According to the best native information, the annual produce of the
peninsula, before the late disturbances in the tin countries, was as.
follows :

Places. Peculs.
Sangie FSS SR A a te aa RA SAIS 7,000
Perak etsiiers « ‘ sepa stae sky cietstaes SG atte. cranmll oth) 107,500
acich, Sielehalohs, oy {ous s/er eke ebete ad. /alnct al eas ined x rR OMER oven ACLS 600
unk Ceylon, 2.0.0 es eeeeeeeeeeeee eevee ieee teen 1,500
Pungah, siaia'D olpiaeetackeetil sieemiote .. elt) 1a, 500
Salangore, Calang, and ‘Langkat, AGE ADCO COURE oe or Ge oe ALI
Lakat, 2 os Histol settee cermeceisivas esters | vl, O00
Mh: interior of Malacca,...o5ce tee a 900
Pahang, »..... Broader ed 3 oor Go Adak eo CORE Ome LL
edamenand Tringano, ... Be aces cis ss 67,000
MPL ARTHANION gi ale . n'e: <1c}ias<l'eie Sioyeis)injcha allele ara sean) woe Ee arele «Se utes S000

Patani, CP eer ee eH TF HHT HHT TFT HHTSHETE SHOT HFT HH FER OE BHR HHP HOH Oe HR OE 1,000

34,600

548 Account of Stingie Ujong {Ocrt.

The discovery of tin in the peninsula cannot be traced, but it is
assuredly of ancient date. Part of Perak is said to be the Temdia,
or land of tin, of Pronmmy, and Cdlang, (a name signifying tin in
Malay,) to be the Malaiou Colon of the same author, and the Malaya-
Culam of the Hindus.

The tin mines of Banca are of modern origin, being accidentally
discovered, Mr. Marspen tells us, in 1710, by the burning of a house ;
the trade of the peninsula suffered considerably in consequence.

According to Mr. Crawrurp, (as before stated,) the tin of Banca,
produce of 1817, amounted to 35,000 peculs, or 20834 tons, equal to
half the produce of England. But under the management of the
Dutch, I am informed, it now scarcely produces half that quantity.

The price of Banca tin is from 16 to 164 dollars per pecul = 1334
Ibs., and of Straits tin, (chiefly from the peninsula,) from 144 to 15.
British block tin, in 1832, was selling at £3 12s. 6d. per cwt.

In consequence of a supposed adulteration of Straits’ tin, some
specimens of ingots of this metal, rejected at Canton, were sent
from Singapore to be assaved at Calcutta in 1831. This was
done at the Calcutta assay office, which pronounced the specimens
to be of good quality, and perfectly good in a mercantile sense.
“Great Britain, (according to Dr. LarpNneEr’s work already quoted,)
notwithstanding the productiveness of her own mines, imports upwards
of 700 tons per annum of oriental, or, as it is more commonly called,
Banca tin, from the name of one of the Malay islands, where it is
chiefly obtained. The Malay countries are reckoned the richest de-
positaries of this metal in the world; and from them, China, Hin-
dostan, and many European markets are chiefly supplied. England
exports annually about 2,000 tons of tin, including 400 or 500 tons
of that received from abroad.” Her produce varies from 3 to up-
wards of 4000 tons annually.

Revenue.—Besides the Kapala dégang, and other sources of revenue
previously mentioned, as enjoyed in common by the Panghili Delantye
of the interior states, the Panghalié or Kldna of Stingie Ujong, and the
Raja adhi Rua have the privilege of purchasing, at every smelting,
from each bongsal, three bhars, equal to nine peculs, or nine hundred
eatties of tin, at six dollars per bhar less than the market price, and
exact a duty of six dollars a month for each mine dug on their own
lands.

The Dattu Mida of Lingie levies also a dollar per bhar, on tin
passing down the river.

The Kapdla dagang is a sort of poll tax on slaves imported into

* See GLEANINGS IN ScrIENCE, Vol. III.

1835.] one of the Malacca States. 549

the interior, from four to six dollars per head; they are generally
Battaks from the vicinity of Battu Bara, on the opposite coast of
Sumatra, and average twenty annually. They fetch a price from 20
to 60 dollars each ; according to age, condition, and sex ; a higher
value being set on the females.

In addition to these imposts, the chiefs of Singie Ujong formerly
enjoyed the division of a premium paid annually by the Chinese and
other merchants of Malacca for the tin monopoly, amounting, it is
said, to 2500 dollars; 1000 of which went to the Dattu Miida, and
100 each to the three elders of Lingie; 800 to the Kldna of Singie
Ujong, and the remaining 400 to the Raja adhi Raja.

The deputed Menangkabowe prince, it is affirmed by the Rumbowe
people, had the right of levying a duty, at Sempong, on the Lingie
river, of two dollars per bhar, on tin passing that settlement from
Singie Ujong, which was afterwards given up as a subsistence to
their Lang de perttian Midas. In consequence of the disavowal of
this claim by the Stingie Ujong and Lingie chiefs, and other causes
too long for detail, a war ensued in 1833, and a consequent blockade
of the river by the Zang de pertiian Miida, Sayep SaaBan, at Sempong,
still existing, and by which the trade of Sungie Ujong has suffered
very materially.

Government.—Sungie Ujong was ruled, under the Lang de pertiian
Besdr, by a Panghéli, three Stkus, and a Raja adhi Raja. The
Panghélé, as has been already remarked, owes his title, Kiana Putra,
to one of the kings of Johor. He now refuses to acknowledge the
control of the Jang de pertian Besar.

BANDAHARA SEKUDAI is supposed to be the first chief invested with
this title; and regarding his origin, a long tradition was related to
me by the present Raja adhi Raja, the abstract of which amounts to
this, viz. “In ancient times, one of the princesses of Sungie Ujong
having had the presumption to laugh at the naked state of a Batin
of the Jacoons, incurred his resentment, and was forcibly compelled
to follow him through thicket and brake, until moved with compassion,
this sans culotte maitre de danse broke the spell and married her.

*« The offspring of this sylvan union is said to be Sexupar; from
whom descend the Panghilis of Singie Ujong.”

In all popular traditions of rude nations, there is more or less of
truth to be gathered ; and in absence of written and other historical
evidence, such testimony ought not to be entirely neglected, and set
aside as valueless; though frequently ridiculous, and mingled up with
matter known to be incredible and void of truth. We need not
instance here the works of the early poets of Greece and Rome,

48

550 Account of Stingie Ujong, [Ocr.

It is certain, that to this day, in Singie Ujong, Johole, and Jompole,
the twelve Batins, or chiefs of the savage tribes, have a considerable
share in the election of the Panghilis of these states, though there is
not now apparent any permanent mark of connexion, either social or
religious, between the Malays and these aborigines.

As Kafirs and infidels they are despised by the Malays, but super-
stitiously dreaded. Converts are made to Islam; but slavery, as far
as my observation extends, is their lot. .

A few years ago, the late Panghild of Sangie Ujong, Kléna Leuer,
died, leaving two nephews, Kawat and Buarr. It is an ancient cus-
tom prevailing in the interior, and, I believe, generally throughout
Malayan nations, that when a chief dies, his successor must be elected
on the spot, and previous to the interment of the corpse, (which is
not, unfrequently, protracted through the observance of this usage to
a considerable length of time,) otherwise the election does not hold
good*,

The following are the traditional lines, or Serdpa, in which this
custom has been handed down in Singie Ujong.

\s Va Serdpa.
zea? eX er SSS w yee Amar-nia pendék langkah-nia panjang
ab) (3 SbQS Rew Stew Siidah Sampei Kahéndak Allah
Brae &S Ge 543 7 Gdi> Handak berqabar ditannah mérah
0 i) 2S hg tse us ee Sa-h4ri hilang, Sa-h4ri bertannam,
Vals Us Lew Syho3 yy usj\ew Sa-héri ber-tamboh, Sa-hari palihar&.

Short has been his life, though long his stride!
When the will of God has arrived,
The grave shall be dug in the red earth:
In one-day lost, in one-day planted,
In one-day sprung up, in one-day cherished.

Now it happened that Kawau was absent at the time of Panghili
Lener’s death. The three Skis and one of the twelve Batins took
advantage of Buair’s being on the spot, elected him, and buried the
body of the deceased chief. Against this proceeding, the Radja adhi
Raja, and the remainder of the elective body, the eleven Batins,
protested; a war ensued, which terminated in 1828, pretty much as
it began. Kawat, however, by virtue of the suffrages of eleven out
of the twelve Batins, and by the support of the Rdja adhi Raja, is
generally considered the legitimate chief.

* In consequence of this custom, the present Sultan of Johor’s younger
brother was elected during the absence of the elder brother,

whose claims were
subsequently acknowledged by the British.

1835.] one of the Malacca States. 551

He resides at Pantoi, a village on the left bank of the Lingie river,
about 40 miles from the village of Lingie. I had an interview with
him at the latter place in 1833.

His features are regular and pleasing ; but their expression conveys
an idea of indecision and imbecility, probably increased by the immo-
derate use of opium, to which he was formerly much addicted ; the
whole tenor of his conversation and manner evinced plainly how
completely he was in the leading strings of his adviser, the wily
KaStas, the Dattu Muda of Lingie, who accompanied him.

His dress manifested a disposition to finery, consisting of a gaudy
red Uaju, or surcoat, flowered with yellow; a broad crimson sash
thrown round his waist, suspending several weapons of Malayan
fashion ; a Battik handkerchief, with the bicornute tie, and a plaid silk
sarong, resembling the tartan worn by the Highlanders, descending
to his knees ; underneath the plaid he wore short embroidered trowsers.

In the left-hand slash of his close vest of purple broad cloth, which
was lined with light-green silk, and adorned with silk lace and small
round buttons of gold filigree, lay a watch of an antique shape, to
which were appended a gold chain and seals. He wore his hair long,
and it was very palpable to two of the five senses that he, like
DemosTHENES in the composition of his orations, had not spared the
oil in the arrangement of his tresses.

Raja adhi Raja.—Next to the Panghilii ranks the Rdja adhé Raja.
The jurisdiction of this officer is confined to the river, and its naviga-
tion. The office and title, as would appear from the inscription on
the seal, were renewed or granted to his ancestors by Munammep
Jauiz, Sultan of Johore, A. H. 1211. (A. D. 1796-7)

The present Rdja adhé Raja is a young man, of an extremely pre-
possessing address and person.

Stikiis.—There are only three Svkus in Stingie Ujong. The Raja

adhi Raja may be perhaps considered as occupying the place of a
fourth Sku in councils.
_ The functions of the Sikiis are similar to those already described,
as possessed by the former Ampat Suki of Naning*. Their titles are
Dattu Mantri Jumahad, Dattu Mendalika, and Dattu Maharaja
Inda. The tribes, of which they are the heads, are those of Sa
Melongang, Bodoanda, and Tannah Dattar.

Lingie.—The village of Lingie proper, in contradistinction to the
settlement of Qualla Lingie, which is within the Company’s territory,
at the mouth of the river, is a dependency of Stingie Ujong.

It is situated high up the right branch of the river, and consisted,

* See page 298 of the present volume.—Ep.
4B2

552 Account of Siingie Ujong, &c. [Ocr.

in 1882, when I visited the place, of a straggling collection of upwards
of 100 houses. The Pankalangs of PemAatang, Passir, Candang, Darian,
and Mangis, may be styled the wharfs of this little entrepét, for the
produce of the Siingie Ujong mines, and the articles brought up for
barter. Many of the houses have been pillaged and burnt in the
subsequent disturbances.

The establishment of Lingie is of recent date. Between 50 and
60 years ago, six individuals, subjects of Rumbowe, (but originally
from Rhio,) removed from Rumbowe to a place on the Malacca coast,
between Tanjong Kling and Qualla Lingie, called Kubu Achi, (the
fort of Achin;) where, according to local tradition, the Achinese
erected a work during one of their expeditions against the Sultan of
Malacca. Be that as it may, they had commenced the clearing of
the jungle, when one of their number was crushed on the spot by
the fall of a tree.

This his companions regarded as a supernatural prohibition to
settling there, and quitting the place, passed up the river to the present
spot; where, with the permission of the Siingie Ujong chief, they
finally established themselves. Their names were Haman, Maumoup,
JAHIUDDIN, LugByeE, JumAN, and Kdpir Att.

Haman was appointed head of the little colony, by the title of
Datiu Mada, and his four companions, as elders. Of these only one
now survives Maumup, who is a hale old man of 70.

Haman was succeeded by his son-in-law the present Dattu Mada
Manomep AAdrTas, more commonly called Kasras; and the three
deceased elders, by H&si CAsim, H&s1 Munammep, and Incut Satr-
HuDpDIN.. This last chief was killed in the disturbances at the close
of 1833..

Karas, the leading character in Stingie Ujong, is a bony, muscu-
lar personage in the prime of life; tall in stature for a Malay, and of
erect carriage.

His features are harsh and decided; his dress plain and simple.
In character, he is selfish, crafty, persevering, and gifted with some
foresight ; a quality by no means common among Malays.

He possesses unbounded influence over the weak and sensual KZdéna ;
and it is said that his ambition extends to the undivided sway of
Stingie Ujong, and the monopoly of the duties on tin. The opposition
of the Rumbowe chiefs, with whom he is at present at deadly feud,
and the Malay popular antipathy to innovation and deviation from
ancient usage, or as they term it, the “ Addat Zeman Dhili,” the
‘* Addat Dattu Nenek,” &c. will prove considerable obstacles in the
attainment of his wishes.

1835.) : Ascent of the river Min. 553

Karas has, on various occasions, evinced an inimical disposition to
the English government.

The following are copies of the inscriptions on the seals of the
present Panghaili and Raja adhi Raja of Singie Ujong, and of the
Dattu Mida of Lingie.

19 ab wy alas wy elu
. Sa Yee * BAe ~
fa stooge epee ee
Tale ae
Seal of Kadras. Of the Raja adhi Raja. Of the Panghiti.

From the dates and inscriptions on these seals, it would appear that
the two first were originally granted, or more probably, renewed to
their possessors, by Sultan Munammep Jauit of Johor, in 1211 A. H.

The Jast is of still more modern date (1239), and merely bears the
date, name, and assumed title (Inchi Bander ) of Kaatas.

III.—Journal of an attempted Ascent of the river Min, to visit the Tea
Plantations of the Fuh-kin Province of China. By G. J. Gorpvon,
Esq. Secretary Tea Committee.

May 6th.—Anchored in the evening in the Min river, a short way
below a narrow passage, guarded on each side by a fort, and hence
named by Europeans, the Bogue, as resembling the entrance to the
inner river of Canton. We immediately hoisted out our boat, and
prepared every thing for setting out, as soon as the return of the
flood, which we expected would be about midnight, would enable us to
doso. We determined on trying the western branch of the Min, as
laid down in Du Haupn’s Map of the province of Fuh-kin. We
took with us one copy of a petition, for permission to import rice, on
the same footing of exemption from charges as is granted at Canton,
and grounded upon the unusual drought of the regular season for
planting rice. Another duplicate we left with Captain McKay of the
“ Governor Findlay,” to be presented bv him to any Mandarin who
might come on board to urge the departure of the vessel from the
river. As the subject of the petition would require reference to
Pekin, we calculated, that sufficient time would thus be gained to
enable us tg accomplish our object. The copy in our own possession
would be resorted to only in case of our being intercepted. The
delay in its delivery might be attributed to the altered appearance of

554 Attempted visit to the [Oct.

the couutry in consequence of some rain having already fallen, which
made it doubtful whether the prospects of the season were so bad as
to render the present a favorable occasion for such an application on
our part, founded as it was on the assumption that the country was
threatened with famine. Captain McKay was requested to be in no
hurry about presenting his copy, but to let all persons understand
that he had come with such a petition.

May 7th. At 1 a. m. we left the ship with a fair wind and flood-tide.
We were 14 persons in all; namely, Mr. Gurzuarr, Mr. STEvens,
and myself, the Gunner of the ‘‘ Findlay,” a native of Trieste, a
tindal, eight lascars of various nations, Bengal, Goa, Muscat, Macao,
and Malayan Islands, and my Portuguese servant, a native of Bombay.
Having studied such charts of the river as we possessed, we resolved
on turning to the left as soon as we came to the entrance of a river
called in them the Chang : its position corresponding with that of the
rejunction of the right branch of the Min, as laid down in the Jesuit’s
Map. Mr. Stevens kept the look out at the head of the boat, and the
Gunner steered, while the tindal sounded. The night was fortunately
clear, and by 4 o’clock, we struck off into the western river. This
soon widened into a very broad channel, which a little further on
seemed to branch into two. That to the left-hand appeared full of
shoals, and low sedgy islands, and we accordingly followed that to
the right, which appeared still broad and clear. It was on our right,
besides, that we had to look for the main stream of the Min. We
had not proceeded far before the expanded sheet of water we were
proceeding by gradually diminished in width, sending off several
small branches in various directions, until at last it dwindled away
into a narrow nullah, over which there was a stone bridge. Relying
on the strength with which the tide flowed up this creek, as proof
that it must lead into some other channel, we struck our masts, and
passed the bridge, going on, till we saw reason to believe the reports
of the villagers, that there was really no passage into the Min by
that course. We accordingly came to, that our people might cook,
intending to retrace our way with the assistance of the ebb. Unfor-
tunately, however, the depth decreased so rapidly, that before we had
proceeded far, we were fairly brought up, and obliged to wait for the
return of the flood. Mr. Srnvens and Mr. Gurzuarr went ashore
to reconnoitre, and satisfied themselves that the branch we had
avoided in the morning, was the proper one to be pursued ; in which
opinion they were confirmed by the villagers. We were unable to
get a pilot. To all inquiries as to our destination we replied that
we wished to go to Min-Tsing, the next Hin town above Fuhchow.

1835.] Tea Province of Fuh-kin, in China. 555

We bought a few supplies, but had a copper basin stolen while we
were aground. The flood began to make at 54 p.m., but it was 84
before we got into the right channel. For two hours nothing could
be more flattering than appearances ; but suddenly the water began
to shoal, and we were obliged to come to anchor.

At day light of the 8th, we found ourselves surrounded by sand-
banks in all directions, without any visible channel by which we
might advance when the tide should rise. One man agreed to pilot
us into the Min for five dollars, and then left us. A second agreed
for two, taking one dollar in advance, and after accompanying us a
short way, made off. At 3 past 9a. m., Mr. Gurzuarr landed with
the view of engaging some one to show us the way, when all at once
a Kwanfou with a gilt knob said he would be happy to be of any use
to us; and as the wind was contrary, would assist by towing us with
his own boat. Mr. Gurzuarr accepted his offer. The man appeared
to be of the rank of a subaltern officer ; such a proffer coming from
such a quarter was of a very ambiguous character. He was probably
sent to watch our motions, and took this method of defeating our
object. We had, however, no alternative ; our attempts to engage a
pilot had failed, and we had found from experience, that without
some guide, we could not advance. Besides, we could cast off from
our professed friend as soon as we should see grounds for alarm. In
fact, he led us back towards the mouth of the Chang river, and when
he came close to a small hill fort, which we had observed the pre-
ceding morning, went ashore. We cast off immediately, and went
into the Fuh-chow branch, where, after running up a little way, we
anchored for the night. A cold drizzling rain made our situation not
very comfortable, and what was more, we found ourselves about two
in the morning in danger of canting over into deep water, from the
fall of the tide, leaving the boat’s keel deeply fixed in the mud of a
sloping bank.

May 9th.—The tide favoring us at 7 a. M., we got under weigh,
followed by a Government boat, and witha rattling breeze, soon
reached Fuh-chow-foo. When near the bridge, we anchored, and
struck our masts, and then shot through one of the openings with
great ease. There were about a score of soldiers drawn up in arms
at the bridge, and after we had passed through, four boats with soldiers
put off after us. Mr. Gurziarr told the people on board, that if they
came alongside when we came to an anchor, we would communicate
with them. They continued to follow us ata little distance. Soon
afterwards we came in sight of a second bridge, when we feared we
should have been obliged to disrnast ; on approaching it, however, we

556 Atiempted visit to the [Ocr.

perceived that the road-way, connecting the piers, had fallen in at
two places, through both of which boats under sail were able tu pass.
We selected what appeared to be the widest, and got safely through ;
but Mr. Stevens observed, that the stones, which had fallen in, were
but a trifle below the surface, and narrowed the passage so as to leave
very little to spare beyond the width of our boat. We were now
so far ahead of the war boats, that a fisherman ventured alongside
to sell us fish. At $ past 11 a. m., we came to anchor, that the people
might refresh themselves ; and the tide having turned against us, we
remained at ‘anchor till 4in the evening. The war boats, in the
mean time, came up, and a civil enquiry was brought from one of them
as to what nation we belonged, whither we were bound, and
with what object. Mr. Gurzuarr, in reply, stated, that we wished to
ascend the river, to see tea plants growing, to talk with tea mer-
chants, and to ramble amongst the hills. No objection was made, but
that the river was rapid and dangerous. When we weighed, however,
these war boats weighed also, and after we had come to at night, they
came up and took their station near us. We weighed early on the
morning of the 10th, the drizzling rain still continuing, and the
thermometer at 57°; but having no boats in sight, to serve for our
guidance, we thought it better to come to anchor again, and let the
people have breakfast; as we weighed, the war boats weighed, and
when we again anchored, they too came to an anchor. Before we
set out the second time, two other war boats came up, which made
at first, as if they intended to run foul of us, but showed no other
marks of opposition, and we pushed on. I now reminded my friends
of my uniform declaration, that I would not attempt to force my way
if any actual resistance was offered, and that I even questioned the
expediency of proceeding at all, if we were to be continually under
the eyes of the government officers. However, as we greatly out-
sailed them, and might possibly wear out their vigilance, we resolved
to persevere. As we advanced, we found that none of the boats
going up the river would answer our questions, the people sometimes
clapping their hands on their mouths, or answering, that they durst
not give us any information. After having got along way ahead
of the war-boats, however, we found the people communicative and
friendly. We weré told of several rapids on the Min river, which
could not be passed without a very strong wind, and of other places
where the current was not only violent, but the stream too shallow
to float our boat. We had in fact already reached a place, where
the stream, swollen by the hill torrents, that conveyed the rain, which

had fallen during the last 30 hours, was so rapid, that with a light

1835.] Tea Province of Fuh-kin, in China. 557

breeze, and our oars, we were unable to make any way against it,
and were obliged to come to an anchor accordingly.

The war-boats, by dint of pulling and tracking, surmounted the
obstacle, and did not come to till they were about a mile or upwards
ahead of us. We found the people very kind and friendly; but they
were soon checked by the appearance of a Kwanfoo, who came to us
in a little Sampan, with some loose papers in his hand. He address-
ed himself to me, but I answered with truth and nonchalance, that I
did not understand him : Mr. Gurzuarr, who stood by, recommended,
that little notice should be taken of him; that all communications
with the mandarins should be avoided, if possible; and that the papers
which he offered, not being in the form of a letter, or otherwise in
an official shape, should not be received. The officer then asked some
of the people who were on shore near our boat, whether they knew
if any of us could speak Chinese. Pointing to Mr. Gurzuarr, they
said he knew a few words, enough to enable him to ask for
fowls, eggs, and ducks, which he wanted to buy; and that he
spoke about nothing else. One of them was saying something
about his distribution of books; but the Kwanfoo was at that
moment laughing heartily at the odd appearance of one of our
men, and the remark about the books, which was immediately checked
by one of the by-standers, passed unnoticed. He still persevered,
rather vociferously, in requiring us to receive his papers ; when he was
motioned to be off. Our Gunner gave the boat a hearty shove with
his foot, which decided the movement of the envoy. After it was
dark, the people of the village brought us bambis for pulling, with
other supplies. The lull of the wind continuing during the night,
we distinctly heard much beating of gongs, firing of arms, and
cheering in the quarter where the war boats lay; but at day-break
of the 11th, we thought we saw them under weigh in advance. A
rather suspicious-looking man came to the shore, with a paper which
he wished to deliver. We showed no inclination to receive it, and
in attempting to throw it into the boat, tied to a piece of stick, it fell
into the water, and was lost. Soon after, a simple looking peasant
boy showed another piece of paper, which, from its rude appearance,
I thought not lixely to have come from the authorities, and therefore
received and handed it to Mr. Gutzuarr. It was an intimation, that
multitudes of officers, with an army of 9000 men, were drawn up close
_by, and that there were many tens of thousands of soldiers further
on. This was the first decided threat we had of resistance, and it
was so grossly exaggerated, that we attached no other importance
to it, than that it intimated decided objection to our further advance.

4c

558 Attempted visit to the [Ocr.

We had already fully resolved on not having recourse to force, unless
it became necessary to resort to it, in order to extricate ourselves, if
an attempt were made not merely to drive us back, but to seize our
persons; and we now proposed to use every exertion to get as far as
possible ahead of the war-boats, engage chairs for our conveyance
by some inland route, and send back the boat under the charge of
the Gunner.

The day being for the first time clear, we were engaged all the
morning in baling out and washing the boat; and in cleaning our
weapons, much rusted by the wet weather we had hitherto experienced.
A breeze springing up a little after 11 o’clock, we hastened to avail
ourselves of it, and all our arms were stowed away as speedily as
possible.

We had gone on some way ploughing the stream in beautiful style
when all at once shot began to fall about us. We deliberated for a
moment what was to be done. We believed that retreat would not
Save us from further firing, as long as we were within its reach, if we
would take the practice of the troops at the Bogue as an example of
the general rule of the Chinese in such cases ; and if we could get
out of the reach of their shot by running ahead, we might have time
for negociating. On turning a point, however, the wind failed us,
and our enemies pursuing us, the firing became more hot and danger-
ous than ever. Mynext idea was to run the boat ashore, and attack
the Chinese, but the river was very narrow, and on the opposite bank
they had erected a mud breast-work, from which they could fire on us
with their small cannon, with full effect ; and it would be exceedingly
difficult to get at our assailants, on account of the steepness of the
bank where they now stood. After receiving a good peppering, we
put about ; but as I anticipated, they continued to fire upon us: and
my servant, with one of the lascars, was wounded, though both
slightly, and all of the party had narrow escapes from death. The
strength of the current soon carried us beyond their fire, and we
were in a fair way of reaching Fuh-chow before day-break of the
‘12th, when we unfortunately missed our way some time after the
top of high-water, at 2 o’clock a. m. At day-break, we found
ourselves on high ground, 60 yards from the nearest point of the
river. We had nothing for it, therefore, but to wait the return of
the tide. Numbers of men, women, and children came about us
to sell geese, fowls, and fish. Some amongst the crowd we recog-
nised, as having been amongst those we had seen while attempting
the western branch of the river. They noticed the marks of the
balls that had passed through the gunwale, or stuck in the sides of

1835.] Tea Province of Fuh-kin, in China. 559

the boat; but this did not seem to make any difference in the friend-
liness of their demeanour. While we were at breakfast, two boats
came up filled with soldiers, who were immediately landed, and one
party marched towards our boat, while another was drawn up as a
reserve. The officer, who commanded the advance, with several of
his men, scrambled into the boat. They were desired by Mr. Gutz-
LAFF to retire; but not complying, our people were desired to turn
them out, which they did accordingly. I collared their officer, and
was on the point of tripping up his heels, when he threw himself
down, and Mr. Gurzuarr begging me to leave him to him, I desisted
from further violence, though the loud and insolent manner of the
man made forbearance not very agreeable. Mr. Gurzuarr then
commenced rating the fellow in such animated language, that he
became apparently thunderstruck, having no apology to offer for the
rudeness and violence with which he came to execute his commission,
which he said was merely to inquire who we were, and what we
wanted, and to desire us to be off. Mr. Gurziarr informed him
that we came to present a petition to the Viceroy, but not having
met with an accredited officer, its delivery had been postponed ; that
we had taken an excursion on the river, in order to see the tea plant ;
that we had proceeded openly, and avowed our intention without
being told; that so innocent an object could never draw on us treatment
such as no civilized government would offer to innocent strangers.
He then harangued with great energy and effect, on the base,
treacherous, cowardly, and barbarous conduct we had experienced
on the preceding day, and on our own forbearance in not returning
the fire; showing him, that we had plenty of arms, which we had
taken for our defence against robbers, and assuring him, that we were
not afraid to risk our lives against numbers: but had not come with
the intention of making war on the government of the country, and
would therefore wait to see whether that government would afford
us redress by punishing those villains who had thus without any
provocation attempted to take our lives, before having recourse to
other means. If justice should be withheld by the provincial govern-
ment, the case might go before the Emperor, and if punishment
were not then inflicted on the guilty, the affair was not likely to end
there. Mr. Gurzuarr’s eloquence, with the display of our firearms,
left the Kwanfoo without a word to say for himself, or for his coun-
try. He acknowledged, that we had been shamefully treated; but
that he was not of the party, and could not be implicated in their
guilt, and promised that we should experience nothing but civility
from himself. He received our petition, which he handed to one of
4c2

560 Aitempted visit to the [Ocr.

his people to take to his boat, and ordered off the rest of his men.
He agreed to assist us in getting off from the field where we lay,
and to tow us on our way as far as Mingan—a tower and fort, a
short way below the place, where the western branch rejoins the
Fuh-chow river. We asked him if there was no way of going down
without passing under the bridge of Fuh-chow. He said, there was ;
and that he would probably take us by that route. We got afloat
about 11 a. m., and two or three hours afterwards, recognised our
position to be that which we had abandoned in despair four days
before. Had we remained where we lay on the 8th, till the flood
had made, it would have carried us into the main river, and we
should have had one or two days start of the war-boats, or perhaps
entirely escaped their observation. The Kwanfoo continued on board,
except when relieved by an inferior officer from the towing boat,
intending, as we presume, that we should appear to be his prisoners.
In the afternoon, the wind became very strong, and the fleet ran in
towards a large village, where they proposed anchoring for the day.
Finding, however, that the bottom was stony, and that there was
already too little water for our boat, we refused to remain, and were
preparing to set sail, when the officer, who had brought us on, earnestly
requested to be taken into our boat again. We received him on board,
and were again taken in tow, the other war boats accompanying. At
dusk, they wished to take us to another large village ; but we pointed
out a more sheltered spot, and they took us there accordingly. The
officers still remaining on board, Mr. Gurzuarr was requested to
desire them to withdraw, which they did; and as they had been
uniformly civil since morning, I sent each of them a pair of blue
printed cotton handkerchiefs. It was settled that we should again
get under-weigh with the morning’s ebb, and that after reaching
Mingan, we should pursue our way to the ship, without further attend-
ance. At 10 0’clock yp. m., I was surprised by a letter from Captain
McKay, of that day’s date ; he stated that he had been importuned in
the most abject manner, to recal us, as orders had been issued to
drive us out ; which could not be carried into effect. He concluded that
we must by that time have got so far on our way, that before we
could be overtaken, we must have accomplished our object. At
l a.m. of the 13th, we got under-weigh, towed as before ; but escorted
by a numerous flcet of war junks, one of which carried three lanterns,
and the others, one each, on their poops; as all these vessels had to
make short tacks in a narrow channel, the sight was rather fine; and
when we reached Mingan, a number of rockets were discharged, which
had a very grand effect. We had not permitted any Chinese officer to

1835.] Tea Province of Fuh-kin, in China. 561

come on board our boat when we started ; but contrary to stipulation,
they now again insisted on coming ; while we showed a determined
resolution to resist : on consulting their commander, they were direct-
ed to let us go freely. Welost our way however in the darkness of the
night, and were assisted by a war-bouat in the morning, in recovering
it. As we approached the right channel, we found several war ju ks
stationed as a guard. Three or four of them accompanied us for
some time, but gradually dropped off. The towing junk too took
occasion to make us over to a large open boat, from which we soon
afterwards cast off. On passing the forts at the Bogue, we were
honored with a salute of three guns from each, as well as from some
war junks above, and others below, the forts. At 2 Pp. M., we got on
board the “Findlay.” In pursuance of our declared intention,
I prepared a petition to the Viceroy, praying for inquiry into the
conduct of our assailants on the 11th, and the infliction of adequate
punishment upon tkem for their unjustifiable attempt on our lives.
Mr. Gurzuarr was good enough to put my petition into Chinese
form, and have it ready for delivery next morning, in expectation,
that as had been the practice hitherto, some officer of rank might
come on board. None having arrived, however, I resolved to go
on board the admiral’s junk, and deliver my petition there, explain-
ing its object to that officer. Mr. Gurzuarr and Mr. Stevens
accompanied me; we found in the cabin two messengers from the
Viceroy, both of them assistant magistrates, wearing colorless
erystal knobs; two vice-admirals, Tsung-ping knan, one of them,
the naval commander-in-chief of this station; one colonel of the
army, Yen-keih, and one Pa-tseang, or subaltern. Having handed
to them the petition, one of the messengers wanted to open it;
but on being requested to deliver it to the Viceroy, began to enquire
what were its contents. Before coming to that subject Mr. GurzLarr
adverted generally to our character as foreign merchants, and our
wish to import rice. The Chinese assured us that it was from no un-
willingness on their parts, that we were not allowed to trade, but that
they were obliged to act under the prohibitory orders of the Emperor.
As to the importation of rice, the Fu-Tseang at first affected to mis-
understand us, as if our application were for permission to export
rice to our own country from Fuh-kin. One of the messengers told
us, that the Viceroy would give us no answer, when Mr. Gutzuatr
quoted some instances of official replies from head quarters, that made
him waive this objection.

Having shewn them the impracticability of efficiently excluding
foreign trade from so long a line of coast, Mr. GutzuarF urged very

562 Attempted visit to the [Ocr.

strongly the expediency of rendering legitimate what was now con-
ducted with all the defiance of the laws, and other evils attendant
on a smuggling trade already so apparent in Canton. Both messen-
gers assented very readily to the soundness of the advice, adding

arguments of their own ina very conciliatory strain, and regretting
much that it was against the imperial orders. Mr. Gurzuarr dwelt
particularly on the facility which Fuk-chow possessed for the tea
trade: this they fully admitted ; but again the Emperor having con-
fined the trade to Canton, there was really no remedy; and it was
quite in vain attempting to open the trade at this port. Mr. Gurzuarr
then adverted to the murderous attack upon us on the 11th; of this
they at first alleged total ignorance, and then ascribed the attack to
the treachery of the common natives. Mr. Gurzuarr however told
them, that it was their officers and soldiers who acted to the best of
their ability the part of treacherous and ‘cowardly murderers ; while the
poor peasantry had always conducted themselves towards us with the
greatest kindness, That we were now come with a petition, calling
for redress by the punishment of those assassins, the granting of which
was the only means of preventing retaliation; the lives of peaceful
people having been brought into the most imminent danger, which
violence justified violence in return, even if we were to take a
life for each of our lives that had been so endangered. Here
all concurred in reprobating such conduct as we had experienced,
and in assuring us, that we should meet with no such molestation
from them, trying to put as good a construction as possible on the
past. Mr. Gurzuarr repeatedly requested them to allow the people
to bring us provisions ; but to this they turned a deaf ear. As we
rose up to come away, the messenger of the Viceroy, to whom I had
handed the petition, wished to return it; but 1 refused to receive it
back. He said he could report what we had said; but durst not deli-
ver the petition. Mr. Gurzuarr, however, succeeded in getting him
to promise its delivery, by reminding him, that he had been sent hither
on our account, and it would be strange, if after all, we should be
obliged to carry our remonstrance ourselves to Fuh-chow. This hint
had the desired effect. On the afternoon of the 15th, a polite note
was sent to the admiral’s junk, requesting a supply of provisions, to
be procured for us, as the people were prohibited from bringing any
thing to the ship. The boat brought back a remnant of a shoulder of
pork, a dried cuttle-fish, and four pieces of sugar-cane ; these were
immediately returned. Mr. Gurzuarr was good enough to go on board
by another boat, accompanied by Captain McKay and Mr. Stevens,
to require an explanation of this piece of rudeness ; and to inform them

1835.] Tea Province of Fuh-kin, in China. 563

that if in two days I got no answer to my petition for redress, the con-
sequences would not be imputable to me, but to their government.
They at first denied that any thing had been sent; but finding this
would not do, they alleged, that the pork and fish were intended for
the boatmen, and the sugar-cane for the little lad that steered the
boat. No indication of such appropriation was made when the things
were put into the boat, so that the excuse was evidently an after-
thought. Finding that another admiral, who had arrived in the fore-
noon, was of the party, Mr. Gurziarr again expatiated on the atroci-
ty with which we had been treated. No attempt at defending it was
offered. The messenger of the Viceroy said, that the petition had
been sent, but he was unable to say, how soon we might expect an
answer. At this second meeting, Mr. Gurzuarr pointed out the
freedom with which Chinese subjects were allowed to follow any
honest avocation they chose at our settlements, and claimed, on the
principles of reciprocity, the accordance of similar privileges in
return.

On the 16th, Mr. Gutzuarr, having found some passages of Chinese
law particularly applicable to our assailants, went in the evening to
point them out to the mandarins, and for their further consideration,
copied them out in their presence, and left the extracts with them.
Applications for provisions, and promises to supply them, were renew-
ed. On the 17th, a boat arrived from Fuh-chow, at 8 a. m., and was
received by the junks with a salute. A little after, a boat came along-
side, and made off again with all expedition, after leaving an open
note, stating that the orders of the Viceroy had arrived, and that we
ought to go on board the admiral to receive them. Mr. Gutzuarr
wrote in reply, that the person who was charged with the communi-
cation of the order was in duty bound to deliver it, and that we ex-
pected he would bring it accordingly. This was sent by the ship’s
boat, which soon after returned with a note, stating that since we
were afraid to go on board the admiral’s junk, they had made out a
copy of the order, not choosing to send the original by the young
man whom we had sent in charge of the boat. The half hour that
our boat was detained was entirely occupied in framing and copying
this note. The paper which they pretended to have copied in that
time was a roll nearly six feet in length, which could not have been
written in the fair style which it exhibited by the most expert pen-
man in less than a couple of hours. We afterwards compared it with
the original, and found that it was written in the same hand, and was
in every respect, except in the sealing, a fac-simile of the original.
Our second petition accompanied this copy. The intention was no

564 Attempted visit to Fuh-kin. [Ocr.

doubt to cheat us out of the original—an object of some value in the
eyes of the Chinese diplomatists, who are always anxious to withhold
authenticated papers, for fear of furnishing documents that may some
day be brought forward in evidence against themselves—a use to
which no unsealed documents can be applied, according to Chinese
law and practice. The possession of this copy enabled us to prepare
a final communication to the Viceroy, and in order to secure the deli-
very into our hands of the original, the ship was dropt up with the
flood abreast of the junk fleet, and her broadside brought to bear
upon them. There were 19 vessels in all on the spot; but all the
smaller ones immediately got under-weigh, and passed within the
forts. When we went on board the admiral of the station, we learned
that the orders of the Viceroy were addressed to the admiral of Hae-
tan, who was on board another junk. He and the envoys from Fuh-
chow were sent for; but it was some time before they made their
appearance. Our host, in the mean time, appearing very uneasy and
dispirited, we asked what was meant by saying that we -were afraid
of going on board his ship. Some of us had been there on each day
since our return. It was obvious, that fear of retaliation had pre-
vented him from renewing his visits since we came back; but if we
thought it right to retaliate it, we should not have imitated the treacher-
ous and cowardly conduct of his countrymen, but openly brought
our ship to fight the whole of theirs, and he must be perfectly aware,
that as she then lay she could sink his whole fleet, and destroy every
one on board. But this was not our object. The government had
implicated itself in the business by inventing such a string of notori-
ous falsehoods in defence of the conduct of its officers, and we should
leave it to our Government to obtain for us the redress which theirs
refused to our simple and respectful application.—The original letter
of the Viceroy and his colleagues having been at last produced and
taken possession of by me, I returned the copy sent in the morning.
We were promised our supply of provisions as soon as we got under-
weigh. The final reply to the Viceroy, along with my second peti-
tion, under a fresh cover, were now placed in the hands of the prin-
cipal envoy, who pressed me hard to receive them back, and even
followed me out, as if he intended to throw them after me into the
boat. Judging apparently that this would be of no avail, he kept them
till evening, and then sent a small fishing boat with them to the ship.
The fisherman, however, being warned off, carried them back, and we
saw no more of them. On the 18th and 19th, we gradually dropped
down to the outer bay. No provisions were ever sent us.

1835.] Fossil bones of the Sub-Himdlayas. 565

IV.—Selected Specimens of the Sub-Himdlayan Fossils in the Dadupur
Collection. By Lieut. W. E. Baxer, Engineers.

The discovery of the existence of fossil organic remains, in the
vicinity of the viJtage of Rdyawdla, and in the Markanda pass, has led
to the examination of the tract of tertiary hills lying between the
river Jamna and Pinjor. From different points on this line, speci-
mens have been obtained, and the fact of its richness in such relics
fully established.

The greater number of the specimens in the Dddupur collection, are
from the hills lying between the Markanda pass and Pinjor. The cal-
careous sand-stone prevalent in these formations has usually appeared
as the matrix containing them; an exception, however, occurs in the
neighbourhood of Dadgarh, where the matrix, instead of sand-stone, is
a red indurated marl, in which not only the remains of Mammalia
and Reptilia are found, but those of Mollusca also. The native col-
lector reports them to occur together, and along with the shells, pro-
duced fragments of bones and vertebre.of Saurians. Having as yet
had no opportunity of visiting the place, I can neither corroborate
his statement, nor particularise the site of the deposit. The shells
appear to belong to fresh water species; they are not abundant, and
are generally in a bad state of preservation. The red marl is with
difficulty disengaged from the specimens; any attempt to separate
the shell from the matrix, being usually at the expence of the epider-
mis, and too frequently at that of the valves themselves. Nos. 45,
46, 47, 48, (Pl. XLVII[. 4 size,) shew the usual state of the speci-
mens; the varieties are few in number, but the determination of
fossil species requires so much experience and nice discrimination,
that no apology will be requisite to excuse silence on this interesting
point. A selection, which is to be placed at your disposal, will, it is
hoped, afford the means of determining the question. The univalves
bear a small proportion only to the bivalves, being in the ratio of 1
to 100; it must, however, be remarked, that the quantity hitherto col-
lected being small, the above proportion might be materially affected
by an inconsiderable increase to the number of specimens*.

* We have ventured to preface Lieut. BAkER’s enumeration of the principal
Sub-Himéalayan fossils of the Dadupur collection by the above extract from a
paper previously drawn up by his friend and coadjutor Lieut. Duranp, on the
remains of the hippopotamus -of the same field, for the sake of pointing out
the locality in the extensive range of lower hills, whence they have been exhum-
ed. Lieut. DurRANpD’s beautiful drawings, being, from their size, better adapted
to the pages of the Researches, will, in the first instance, receive publication in

4 D

566 Selected Specimens of = — (Oct.

The accompanying plates contain drawings {th the-natural size
of a few of the Sub-Himélayan fossils in the Dadupur collection,
viz. selected specimens of the remains of the horse, the hog, rumi-
nants and carnivora.

To save a lengthened description, and the use of technical terms,
with which I am not familiar, as well as for the sake of ready com-
parison, I have accompanied my drawings of several fossils by those
of the corresponding bones of their existing analogues.

I may here remark, that the greater part of the fossil, as well as of
the recent bones, were sketched with the assistance of the Camera
Lucida, and allowing for the slight errors incidental to that instru-
ment, I believe them to be correct ‘ plans and elevations,” if I may
use the term, of what they are intended to represent.

The fossil horse—Pl. XLV. figs. 1 to 19.

The remains of this animal, now in our collection, are amongst the
latést of our acquisitions; and as many of them present a marked
difference from the fossil horse, described by Cuvier, which appears
not to have been distinguishable from the existing species, I have
been induced to figure nearly all our recognized bones of this
genus.

Fig. 1 represents a fragment of a left molar of the upper jaw;
though a mutilated specimen, it clearly shews the same complicated
flexures of the crown, compared with fig. 2, which is the fourth left
upper molar of the existing horse. Fig. 3, shews the fourth and fifth
molars of the left 1Oe jaw of the fossil, and fig. 4, the same teeth of

the volume’ now in the press, along with the highly interesting desoviption of
the Sivatherium, by Messrs. FALconer and Cautuey.
- The shells: of the red marl, alluded to above, are perfectly identical, both
in form and state of preservation, with those we received with the collection of
“Ava fossils. from Colonel Burney. No drawing is given of these shells in
Professor BucKLAND’s account of the Burmese Mastodon, and he remarks, that
‘*neither the insulated concretions from Ava, nor those adhering to the bones,
contain traces of any kind of shells;’’ but on noticing the peculiarities of the
tertiary strata in the neighbourhood, he says, ‘‘among the most remarkable of
these strata is a fresh-water deposit of blue and marly clay, containing abun-
dantly shells that belong exclusively to a large and thick species of Cyrena.”’
This doubtless coincides with figs. 45, 46, of our plate :—and further, ‘also a
dark-coloured slaty lime-stone, containing shells which Mr. Sowrrsy has iden-
tified with some that occur in our London clay. There is also, from the hills
opposite Prome, granular yellow sandy lime-stone, containing fragments of
marine shells, and much resembling the calcaire grossiér of the environs. of
Paris.’”” This I presume alludes to the spiral univalve, fig. 44, which I find pre-

cisely among Colonel BurRNEyY’s specimens, and which much resembles the primer
‘pal shell of the calcaire grossiér.—Ep.

1835.] Sub-Himalayan Fossils. 667

the recent horse: between these, the difference, though obvious, is
less remarkable than in the upper teeth.

The fossil axis, fig. 5, differs from the recent fig. 6, in its greater
proportional breadth, and the greater expansion of its lower
articulating surfaces, a. a.

The fossil femur, (fig. 7,) or rather its upper extremity, has a
strong resemblance to the recent fig. 8; a slight difference only ap-
pearing in the form of the condyle, and the greater flatness in the
fossil, of the space between the condyle and trochanter.

In the lower extremity of the radius, (fig. 9,) in the astragal,
(fig. 10,) in the metacarpal and phalanx, (fig. 11,) I am unable to
detect any distinctive difference from the corresponding parts in the
recent horse.

To the above collection, I have since been enabled to add further
drawings of the fossil teeth of the horse, to aid in determining
whether it exhibit any difference from the existing species.

Figs. 12 to 18, are from specimens in the cabinets of Captain
CavutTLeEy, with whose permission I send them. Fig. 19, is from a tooth
now belonging to Colonel Cotvin, and by him intended for presenta-
tion to the Asiatic Society, who will, I trust, excuse the liberty I
have taken in drawing it, which I would not have done, had our own
specimen (No. 1 of my last sheet) been sufficiently perfect to stand
for the type of the species found in the upper formation.

Figs. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, are from the bed of the Jamna, be-
tween Agra and Allahabad.

Fig. 12, appears to be a right upper molar, perhaps the 3rd: this
very perfect specimen has a close resemblance to the teeth of the
existing horse; but the flexures of its enamel are undoubtedly more
complicated than those of the specimens of horse and ass, with which
I have compared them. The pillar, a, is also much longer, though the
proportions of this part are doubtless affected by the degree of at-
trition to which the tooth has been subjected, as will be seen more
clearly in figs. 13 and 14; of which,

Fig. 13, is from the right side of the upper jaw of, apparently, a very
old animal; it may be observed, that the pillar, a, is very much
enlarged.

Fig. 14, is also from the right upper jaw. I suppose it to be a
young tooth, of which the flexures of enamel have not completely
burst through the original envelope, and have not been worn down to
the usual form : in this, as was to be expected, the pillar is small.

Fig. 15, is the 2rd or 3rd molar of the jaw, right side.

Fig. 16, a fragment of a similar tooth.

4p 2

568 : Selected Specimens of [Ocr.

' Fig. 17, probably the rear molar of the right lower jaw; these
three present no remarkable difference dont similar teeth of the
recent horse.’

Fig. 18, is the beautiful specimen from the marl formation in the
Kdlawala pass, alluded to by Dr. Fauconer, in his letter, read to the
Society on the 14th January, 1835.

Fig. 19; the 2nd or 3rd right upper molar from the upper or sand
formation of the Sub-Himalayas: there is-a’slight difference between
the flexures of enamel of this, and of the fragments, fig. 1, of my
own collection, but not more than 1s perceptible between the several
molars of the present horse.

From the above specimens, (if I may be allowed to generalize
from so few,) it would appear, that we have three varieties of upper
molars of the fossil horse.

Ist. From. the *Jower marl formation, (Kalawdla pass,) fig. 18.
This tooth.is distinguished from the recent, and from the Jamna
varieties, by the pillar, a, being detached from the rim of enamel
encircling the rest of the tooth, (as was remarked by Dr. Fatconzr.)
and from the 2nd (undermentioned) var ey by the comparative sim-
plicity of the flexures.

2nd. From the sand formation, fig. 19.

In this variety also, the pillar is detached, but more die eee. tlie
in the Ist; the interior flexures are remarkably complicated.

3rd... From the bed of the Jamna, between Agra and Allahabad.
In this the pillar forms a part of the exterior rim of enamel: in shape
it resembles that of the 2nd variety, but the interior flexures are more
like those of the Ist. It appears doubtful, whether or not this last
variety will be considered identical with the existing species.

Fossil hog—Pl. XLVI. figs. 20, 21.

The specimen represented by fig. 20, is in its substance so soft and
friable, that it was difficult, without destroying the fossil, to remove
even so much of the matrix as enabled me to take the accompanying
sketch. It must still remain in doubt, whether the exterior incisors
be wanting, or whether they be only concealed under the sand-stone,
covering the’ parts a, a. Tam myself inclined to the latter supposi-
tion, from the close agreement in other respects of this fossil with the
lower jaw ofa wild sow, lately killed in the Rdyawala jungles; in
both instances the molars appear to have been very much worn. The
comparative sizes of the fossil, and the above-mentioned recent spe-
cimen, are 21 and 17.

* An upper marl has also been met with, containing shells, and the teeth of
crocodiles. See remarks in page 565.

Vol VP XLV.

tossil Bones of the SubLimatayas - Horse.
Z = ‘ 3 (rat. Stze)

_—=<

WIE. Baker del. Haragovinda Se.

Journal As. Soe. UV ot. IV Pl. XLVI

Fossils of the Sub Limatayas-Dadupur Collection

I a

F the larger thaw natere

Linear Dimensions - ome fourth of the rateeral sexe

EF. Baker ded.

Hurrogobe nd Roy

eet Tes

1 -o eer

wer Et een

AST

Journ .As Sov. Vol 1V.P XLVI.

Poss Bones Of the Sub -Limatayas Dadupur Collection
LuUmin anes. 3f

To

ee

the nat Size.

feast © A ea ; AR Ae
> % ie MY ms) "

JSourn. As. Soe.

3 eee Web IV PL ELV
Lossl Bones of the Sub-Limatayas Dadupusr Collection
AnueAope.

adanernemneenee

Wacecsaa

NSS

(il

See I I,
x

sia

IN

<=
rl

l]

= a -
WE. Baker det

WSF
SSS

SSSSSSSSSESSS

Leeth/ of the Vandiemans Land Tig

a=

DoW yy pS INA
Za VE Sz
SN EN SS SS y

Maragovinda SO.

a Ree

W

Ws, cui Siig ets Ag aay?
a I aah:

1835.] Sub-Himalayan Fossils. 569

The upper part of the femur, fig. 21, must have belonged to a
smaller animal; it is chiefly remarkable for the lowness of its tro-
chanter major.

Carnivora.—Pl. XLVI.

Amongst our fossil remains of this family, the hyena is the most
abundant. Of other genera, we have one fragment of a head, which
even the assistance of Cuvier has not enabled us to name with cer-
tainty. We have also a molar indubitably belonging to an animal of
the genus canis.

Of the hyena, there appear to be two varieties: figs. 22 and 23,
may be considered the type of one; of the other I will say nothing, as
the Society will shortly be in possession of specimens of it, now in the
collection: of Colonel Cotvin.

The skull represented by figs. 22 and 23, is the most perfect fossil
we have yet been so fortunate as to meet with. It appears to have
been enclosed in the stratum, with the lower jaw in position, but not
quite closed. The only injuries which it has sustained are the loss
of its left zygomatic arch, a slight displacement of the half of the
lower jaw, of which the canine tooth is broken off near its base, and
the mutilation of the occiput, which is perhaps the greatest loss of all.

This skull must have belonged to a full-sized animal, as some of
the molars are worn flat at the tops: it is smaller then Cuvigr’s fossil
hyena, and somewhat different, though having a much nearer re-
semblance to it than to the existing hyena of the country of which
I have given the skull, figs. 24 and 25, With reference to the latter
skull, I have toremark, that it was brought from the lower hills in
this neighbourhood, and said to belong to the charakh ,s >

or hyena; it however wants the small first molar of the upper jaw :
and in the disposition of the molar teeth of the same jaw, slightly
differs from another less perfect skull of a hyena, with which it has
been compared. Whether or not these differences may be attributable
to age (for the individual was evidently a very old one), or to acci-
dent, I cannot determine.

Tig. 26, is the fifth, and part of the fourth left upper molar of a ca-
nine animal.

Ruminantia—Pl. XLVIT. XLVI.

Of this order we possess a great diversity of species, of which
some individuals appear to have been of gigantic dimensions, as may
be judged from the specimens which I have selected to illustrate this
point.

Figs. 40, 41, and 42, are different views of a skull of an animal
allied to the antelope; the length and narrowness of the face, the

570 Selected Sub-Himdlayan Fossils. pGer:

height of the nose, and the peculiar setting on of the horns, are all
more conspicuously exemplified in another specimen of a similar skull,
which Colonel Cotvin purposes presenting to the Asiatic Society. Our
specimen, however, has the advantage of possessing the cranium and
occiput entire.

Fig. 43, is the last molar of the left lower jaw of an antelope or
goat.

Fig. 27, a horn, perhaps of a similar animal.

Fig. 28, part of the frontal of a small stag.

Figs. 29 and 39, ditto antler ditto.

Fig. 44, milk molar of a stag.

Fig. 30, tibia of a stag or antelope.

Fig. 31, fragment of head of a femur of bos.—This specimen, com-
pared with the similar part of the domestic buffalo, is in size as 5 to 4.

Fig. 32, fragment of head of a bos.—This has a general resemblance,
as far as it goes, to the very perfect one offered to the Society by Mr.
Dawe.

Fig. 33, lower extremity of the metacarpal of a ruminant : compared
with that of buffalo, as 83 to 45. .

Fig. 34, a, 6, two views of the lower extremity of the femur of a
bos, one-third longer than the longest of which I have met with a
description in Cuvier; its width across the condyles is 6°2 inches.

Figs. 35 and 36, are two similar fragments of axis, which I have
selected to show the diversity of size of our fossil ruminants: to com-
plete the comparison, I have added the corresponding bone of the
small plough bullock of the country, fig. 37.

Fig. 38, is a lower extremity of a radius, compared with the cor-
responding bone of the bullock, as 18 to 7°5.

It is not impossible that some of these large bones may hereafter
be found to belong to Capt. Cauriey’s Sivatherium*.

Seharanpur, July 9th, 1835.

* Sivatherium.—The name given by Capt. CautLey and Dr. FaLconer to
one of the recently discovered fossil animals, of which their description has just
been published in the Society’s Researches. We shall take an early opportunity
of republishing the account of this important discovery, so fraught with inter-
est to the geologist and the naturalist.

It will be seen by the extract of a letter from Captain CauTLEy, read before
the Society at the Meeting of the 4th November, and published with the present
number, that this conjecture is completely confirmed; and that other animals,

particularly the Anoplotherium of Cuvier, have been added to the growing
catalogue of Sewalik fossils.—Ep.

1835.] List of Fossil Specimens from Bilwan., 571

*V.—List of Fossil Specimens from Bilwan, and from the Betwa,
collected by Lieut. Vicary, in December, 1834.

Right branch to the 13th tooth of the lower jaws of a crocodile,
I believe the muggur (magar) ; all the alveoli are empty, except the
7th, which contains a germ.

The scapula, part of a rib, and another bone of the same animal :
all found together within 300 yards of the Bugowt?/, about a mile to
the N. W. of the village of Bilwan, between Mirzapur and Chunar :
they were bedded in clay, mixed with kankar and some shells like
those of the river; the clay rests on sandstone, which was exposed in
the bottoms of the water-courses.

A bone, found on the surface, at the same place.

From the Betwd in Bundelkand, January, 1834.

Bones of a bovine animal, found imbedded in cemented gravel, on
the right bank of the Beéwd river, about one mile east of Jeldlpur,
between Kalpi and Keitah.

No. 1.—Clay on which the gravel rests, and which forms the bed
of the river on that side.

No. 2.—The cemented gravel in which I found the bones, at this
place; it is about twenty feet in thickness. Half a mile nearer to
Jelalpur, it decreases to two feet ; and in some places, is very slightly
cemented.

No. 3.—The bones: some had fallen to the base of the gravel, and
were lying on the surface ; others were still firmly imbedded, and broke
in the effort to get them out. (I had not a hammer with me.)

No. 4.—Stems or roots? (Dendritical kankar perhaps,) above the
gravel; in a light colored clay, of about four feet in thickness.

No. 5.—Plate kankar, alternating two or three times with the
above clay, containing shells not differing from those of the river, and
often perforated by the roots ?

a. A thin seam, resting on sandstone in the Sonar river, at the
waterfall near Hatta, containing shells (recent).

6b. <A bone from the left bank above the same fall.

c. A bone from the Byarmé river.

* This paper was accidentally mislaid, when the article on the Jamna fossils,
of the last No. was in the press. It is referred to in page 502 of that paper, and
is here printed both to illustrate the remarks there made, and to preserve the
record of Lieut. Vicary’s donation. The Mirzapur site of fossils is new, and
deserves further examination. In regard to the theory of the Jamna fossils being
derived from the Betwd river, Mr. Dean has pointed out to us that Karim
Khan is 20 miles above the junction of that river.—Ep.

572 Dentition of the Van Diemen’s Land Tiger. {Ocr.

VI.—Note on Thylacinus Cynocephalus. Extracted from the Osteological
Section of the Catalogue of the Museum of the Asiatic Society. By
J. T. Pearson, Esq.

Class—Mammauia. Order—Carnassiers. Fam.—Marsupiata. Gen.—

Thylacynus. Sp.—Thylacynus Cynocephalus.

Van Diemen’s Land Tiger.
A Skull.

This specimen (Pl. XLVIII. fig. 49) was taken from the skin of
an animal called the Van Diemen’s Land Tiger, presented to the
Society by Dr. J. Henprrson; and described in the 3rd vol. of the
Gleanings in Science, by Dr. J. Grant.

lt was before described in the 9th vol. of the Transactions of the
Linnean Society, by Harris: and it is mentioned in the Synopsis ©
of Mammalia of Grirrira’s Cuvisr, under the name of Dasyurus
Cynocephalus. Mr. Brooks, as it is there stated, thought it the
type of a new genus, to be named Paracyon: and M. TEmminck
has since formed it into one, under the name of Thylacynus. In all
these, however, the dentition is incorrectly given. In the Linnean
Transactions, and in the Gleanings in Science, the cheek teeth are
represented as $$, and in the Synopsis of Grirriru’s, the dentary
system of Dasyurus is attached to it, viz. incisors §; canines, ;7;
cheek teeth, £8. So far as relates to the incisors and canines,
GrirFitus is probably correct; for, although some of the incisors
are wanting in the present specimen, there are eight sockets above,
and six below; the second on each side of the latter being situated
apparently within the row of the other four, as happens to the middle
incisors of Brooxs’ genus Lycaon. The dentition of Thylacynus is
therefore, incisors, $; canines, +7; cheek teeth, 77 — 46, and omitting
the incisors, some of which are wanting in the present specimen,
the teeth may be described as follows : |

SUPERIOR MAXILLA—canines strong, large, and curved backward,
with the points inclining rather inward ; separated from the incisors
by a deep, round fossa, or hollow, nearly half an inch in diameter,
to receive the point of the opposing canine of the lower jaw. Cheek
teeth gradually increasing in size to the last but one, which is the
longest. The three anterior ones are compressed, cuspid, with a
heel at the posterior side ; but little developed in the first, more so
in the second, and largely in the third, where it is formed into almost
a sharp tubercle. The fourth, fifth, and sixth cheek teeth irregularly
triangular, with the most obtuse angle forward and outward, and
the most acute, backward and outward. The fourth tooth has a

1835.] Dentition of the Van Diemen’s Land Tiger. 573

tubercle at each anterior angle, the outer one having a point, forming
a small heel before it ; a larger and sharper central process ; a very
small additional point arising out of a concave surface between the
central process and posterior angle; and a curved, sharp, cutting
edge extending along the inner and posterior side of the tooth, from
the central process to the posterior angle. The fifth tooth is, in
general appearance, similar to the fourth, but rather larger than it ;
with the central process longer in proportion, with only a rudiment
of the small point of the concave surface, and the posterior and
inner cutting edge larger and sharper. The sixth tooth is the largest :
the heel of the anterior tubercle is more strongly developed, and the
outer and central processes are larger and sharper than in the other
teeth ; the posterior interior cutting edge is very sharp, and there is
scarcely a trace of the additional point. The seventh tooth is also
triangular in its form, but with its longest axis placed cross-wise,
with an obtuse anterior interior tubercle, another posterior one, and
a third rather sharper than those in the centre, with a sharp elevated
ridge extending across to the most acute angle at the outer side,
uniting the central with a fourth tubercle at the outer angle.

With regard to the placing of the teeth in the jaw: the sockets of
the four incisors on each side are close together, but between those
of the two central incisors there is an interval of about 35th of an
inch, indicating a corresponding gap between the teeth. Between
the incisors and canines there is the pit in the intermaxillary bones
already mentioned. The first molar is almost close to the canine of
its side; the second molar is separated by an interval of ,?,ths of an
inch nearly, from the first; the third molar is rather more than jth
of an inch from the second, and it adjoins the fourth, forming with
it, the fifth and the sixth, a continuous series of four teeth, from
which the seventh is separated by about ,';th of an inch.

INFERIOR MAXILLA—canines strong, much curved, approximating
at the base, then proceeding outward, with the points turned back-
ward, and rather inward ; placed close to the incisors, which appear
jammed between them ; and the points not going on the outside of
the intermaxillary bones when the jaws are shut, but received into
the fossa in those bones, between the upper incisor and canine teeth.
Cheek-teeth gradually increasing in size to the third, than which
the fourth is rather smaller; and again, from the fourth to the last,
which is the largest of all: first, second, and third, like those in the
upper jaw: fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh tricuspid, with an acute
angular point in front, a very elevated sharp process, with cutting
edges in the centre, and a tuberculous process behind. This last

42

574 Analysis of Nellore Copper ores. (Oct.

process approaches to a grinding surface, with an acute margin at
the outer and posterior sides, in the fourth, fifth, and sixth teeth;
and it is of a rather round, tuberculous form, in the seventh tooth.

The first molar in the under jaw is placed close to the canine tooth
of its side; the second is about ,;ht of an inch from the first; the
third rather more from the second; and there is another space
between the third and fourth of about ;,th of an inch: the four last
teeth form a continnous row.

The lower canines being received into pits in the intermaxillary
bones, is somewhat like an approach to what takes place in some of
the Saurian reptiles; and indeed, the whole view of the skull of
Thylacynus Cynocephalus reminds the casual observer almost as much
of a Saurian as of a Mammiferous animal.

When presented to the Society, the stuffed specimen was, as it is
said, in a bad state; and when the present Curator entered upon his
office, there was, owing to no care having been taken of it, nothing
to be done, but to take out the bones, to preserve them. This, how-
ever, was so far fortunate, as it has led to the discovery of the real
dental system.

Mr. Grant, who drew up the paper in the “ Gleanings in Science,”
proposed the name of Lycocephalus for this species, apparently not
aware that Harris had before named and described it. His mistake
as to the number of teeth arose from not having been able to open
the mouth far enough to allow him to examine them properly; and
Harris's specimen may have been an old one, and lost a tooth on
each side. The Society’s specimen was of a middle age, rather
young perhaps than otherwise: the bones of the skull being well
knit together, though not fixed by bony union.

It is greatly to be wished, that some friend to the Society would
present another specimen.

VII.—Analysis of Copper Ore from Nellore ; with notice of the Copper
Mines at Ajmir and Singhdna. By Jamus Prinsep, Sec. &c.

Through the kindness of Mr. C. A. Kurr, 1] have had a further
opportunity of examining the produce of the Nellore copper mines,
of which cabinet specimens were presented to the Asiatic Society
two years ago*, before the formation of the ‘‘ Indian Copper Mining
Company” at Madras, for the purpose of turning to profit the mineral
stores of this promising district.

* See Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, Feb. 1833, in vol. ii. p. 95.

1835.] Analysis of Nellore Copper ores. 575

From a pamphlet published at Madras, we learn that the copper
mines in the Nellore and Cuddapah districts were discovered about
40 years ago, by Mr. Bensamin Hayne, whose report to Govern-
ment, inserted in his Tracts on India, gives the fullest and most
satisfactory account of them. From this pamphlet, we glean the
following particulars of the locality, and of the quality of the ore.

‘* The districts on the coast in which copper ores have been discovered are
those of the Calastry and Vencatagherry zemindaries, and the Udygherry Jaghire,
in the zillahs of Nellore and Duppaud, and other places in the ceded districts.

‘¢'The principal mining places are at the distance of about 30 miles N. W. from
Nellore, 30 miles from the sea, about the latitude of Ramapatam, and about
40 miles N. E. from Cuddapah.

‘* Several rivers run right through it on their way to the sea from the western
hills, of which the Pillapeyroo, Vuppovagoo, and Manyroo form a junction not
far from Guramanypenta, the principal mining place, and form a pretty large
river, which is said to have a good deal of water throughout the year. Its beds are
very stony, which seems in the eyes of the natives the greatest objection against
its being made navigable for boats: it deserves therefore an accurate survey.

‘« The general aspect of the country is barren, and uncomfortable in the ex-
treme : large trees are only found in and near the villages; and on the wide
extended plains, on both sides of the river, nothing encounters the eye, but here
and there a small thorny shrub. The grass, which, in the rainy season, every
where else carpets the country with a refreshing green, is here both scanty and
of the poorest kind, a species of ‘‘ aristida,’’? which, as the name implies, is a
compound of long beards or bristles. This is the case in most mining countries ;
the surface of the soil contains in many places so much salt, that the inhabit.
ants could make enough, if allowed to do so, for their own consumption.

“To the eastward, the country is open; only here and there a few low hills are
to be seen; but to the westward, there are ranges of hills, the nearest at the dis-
tance of about 10 miles. Due west is one called Malla-coudah, from being the
highest hill in the range. It is said to abound with wood. The Udygherry
mountains are to the south-west, about 16 miles, and the highest in this part of
the country: the highest point I take to be about 3000 feet above the level of
the low country: I have seen myself, that plenty and large wood grows there,
particularly between the valleys.

‘* About 20 miles on the way to the sea, in the direction of Ramapatam, are ex-
tensive jungles, consisting of—1l. Korra, Panicum italicum, L. 2. Aruga, Paspalum
tomentacium, L. 3. Woolava, Glycene tomentosa, L.

‘This country is, geologically speaking, of a primitive description ; the general
rock formation is a mica-slate, of different colors and consistence, It shews it-
self first in the low country, at the distance of about 15 miles east from the
hills ; it forms sloping mountains, which are often capped with horn-stone slate,
which passes into sand-stone, and on the other hand, into jasper. The tabular
summits and mural precipices of the Udygherry hills consist of the latter stone
kind : the layers or strata of the mica-slate occur in different positions, and incli-
nation to the horizon; often in the low country forming a right angle with it; on
and about the Udygherry hills, the strata appear in the utmost confusion, as if
thrust by force out of their proper position. Traces of copper ores are often found

4&8 2

576 Analysis of Nellore Copper ores. [Ocr.

in this rock, and it is generally known to contain various metallic veins, as gold,
silver, and copper.

‘Subordinate to the former is green-stone slate, in mighty layers, often as to
appearance constituting the principal rock of a district for many miles. This is
the case about Guramanypenta and the other mining places. The layers or
stratification of the latter rock I have as yet always found in a horizontal position.

‘¢ The green-stone slate is often approaching to green-stone ; it occurs then only
obscurely slaty, has a jet black color, strong glossy lustre, foliated fracture,
hard in a small degree; in this state it seems here barren of metals of any kind.
The real green-stone slate is of a bluish black color, with small white spots of de-
composed felspar, half hard ; and when exposed to the air, it crumbles soon to
pieces, and takes a green color. The rock is reckoned one of the richest ‘ mo-
thers of ores’ of any in the world. In it are found silver and copper in
rich beds or layers, as is the case here ; but never in veins, as in other formations*.

‘‘The layers of copper are of different thickness, and distances from each
other: the general run of the pieces of ore, constituting the layers, is two inches
in thickness; but they have been found also of several feet. The pieces are in
general flat, as if compressed, and coated with ochre. The vertical distance be-
tween the layers is 4 to 8 feet, and the horizontal is even more uncertain.

‘¢ A corroded honey-combed quartz is found in great abundance in the green-
stone slate, particularly along with the copper ore. It appears often on the sur-
face, in such places where the water has washed the earth away. It looks then
like indurated marl, which in other parts of the country is very common.

“¢The rockt is covered with a red coarse gravel, which is the superficial soil of
this part of the country. In my opinion, this is formed from the decomposition
of the green-stone slate, and its quartzoze and ferruginous contents; for copper
ore is often found in it in considerable quantity, and in the same situation, as in
the slate rock.

‘¢ At Yerrapillay,.in a new mine, which I opened, I found two layers of ore in
it, at distances of four feet asunder.

‘‘ The thickness of this stratum of gravel differs according to its situation, whe-
ther it is on a high or low ground. I have found it from 4 to 6 feet, and
more.

“The copper ore which Dr. THomson calls Anhydrous, the most
common kind, is in flat pieces, externally, of a brown ochry color; in-
ternally, of a black iron color, which often passes into green; when
moistened with water, it becomes almost immediately throughout green; in some
places, itis bluish grey throughout. Lustre, in some places, where it is
black, semi-metallic; and in the bluish grey, metallict. The copper indeed

* One of my specimens from Nellore is abundantly curious and interesting. It
consists of distinct layers of the carbonate, alternating with black micaceous schist,
or rather green-stone, affording exactly the appearance of gradual deposition from a
liquid at this earliest period of geological formations. The angle formed by the strata
of this striated rock with the horizon is stated by Mr. KrRR to be about 45°,—J. P.

+ See Dr. BENZA’s observations on veins of quartz pervading decomposed peg-
matite, J. A. S. iv. 421.—Ep.

{ This description accords so completely with that of No. 3, in the subjoined analy-
sis, that I have no doubt Dr. HAYNE bas mistaken the sulphuret for Dr. THom-
sON’s ore.—J. P.

1835.] Analysis of Nellore Copper ores. 577

is in an almost metallic state in it. | Fracture approaching to even fine
grained streak; of the black, brighter metallic; powder, ‘‘ greenish ;’? not very
hard, except the iron black and bluish grey part; which is with difficulty
scratched by quartz; brittle; not particularly heavy. Specific gravity, 3.09.
Some pieces are found of a nut brown color, and some with conchoidal fracture.
The foreign admixtures are various, as white and green quartz, mica, iron ore ;
mountain blue and malachite are in some places found with it. In other places,
I suspect the admixture of silver. For the analysis, I must refer to that of Dr.
THOMSON, in a paper laid before the Royal Society of London, which I was per-
mitted to publish as an appendix to my ‘‘ Tracts on India.’’ I will only men-
tion here, that on an average, he procured 50 per cent. of pure copper. In the dry
way, or by simply smelting the ore, we have received the metal in greater propor-
tion, which may be easily accounted for by the quantity of iron, which the ore
contains, that cannot be separated, as when the analysis is carried on by acids and
other re-agents.’’

Mr. Hayne seems to have been wrong in imagining, that the
natives had only discovered these mines 50 or 60 years before (about
1750). Mr. Kerr, who has since visited the whole of the mining
district, and examined all the formations, and the old works, with great
care, states, that the former excavations are of prodigious magnitude,
many of them occupying several hundred feet square, and having a
depth of 50 or 60 feet. The matrix rock and rubbish are now
accumulated in these immense tanks ; but on clearing them away, the
mouths of the galleries extending into the rocks were discovered ;
blocks of the ore, (perhaps some that had been gathered previous to
the discontinuance of working the mines from some political convul-
sion or oppression,) have been used to mend the village tank at
Guramanypenta ; and Mr. Kerr imagines, that any quantity of the
richest ore* may be obtained at a trifling expence, and within 100
feet of the surface. Extensive hills, formed of lumps of ferruginous
slag, now covered with vegetation, point out the situation of the
ancient smelting houses. A piece of this slag (which was at first
mistaken for a volcanic product) was analysed by myself. It yielded
but faint traces of copper, shewing that the native processes of
extraction, however rude, were effectual in completely separating the
metal. But I must now proceed to observe upon the actual specimens
of the ore submitted to my examination, purposely avoiding all allu-
sion to the mercantile value of the mines, the estimates of the expence
of working them, and the invitations to join in an association for this
purpose :—objects which are highly interesting to the community, con-
nected with so laudable a measure for developing the natural riches of

* The ‘‘ steel-grained, crystallized silvery ore, invariably found in green-stone

slate, and partly imbedded in quartz, the richest ore met with,’’ is doubtless
No. 3, the sulphuret.—J, P.

578 Analysis of Nellore Copper ores. [Oct.

the country; but which cannot with propriety be entered upon in a
work devoted exclusively to literature and science.

The ores now presented to me are from three different ‘localities.
They differ considerably in quality one from the other, and all from
the former ore, which Dr. THomson pronounced to be an anhydrous
carbonate, new to mineralogy.

No. 1. A parcel, weighing 90 lbs. of roughly-picked and cleaned
ore, has a quartzose matrix, in some parts colored green, or appear-
ing so from the malachite beneath the transparent crystal. It con-
tains much iron, which, on solution in an acid, appears in the form of
a yellow ochre. Ten per cent. of quartz was separated from this
specimen on pounding it roughly, before setting it apart for analysis.

No. 2. A parcel of the same weight is labelled ‘‘ Bungeral Mettah,”
and is the species stated to be found in clustered nodules in the
alluvium, of rounded exterior, as though they had been detached from
their original site, and reburied here. The ferruginous matrix of this
ore, on solution, assumes the appearance of a dark-red oxide. It is
the same probably as that of Dr. THomson’s specimen. The carbo-
nate of copper runs through it in veins, but the mixture of sulphuret
of iron and perhaps of copper with the oxide, gives the whole a dark
arenaceous texture.

No. 3. The richest ore of the three is at the same time the most
abundant, and promises to yield the safest return, as it runs in unbroken
veins. This ore is a combination of carbonate and sulphuret, the
former intermixed with the latter, but readily distinguishable from
it, as the sulphuret is crystallized, and has the grey metallic lustre
of galena. The specific gravity of this ore is 3°77, being intermediate
between that of the carbonate, 3:2, and the sulphuret, 4:5.

The analysis was conducted for the sake of expedition on separate
parcels of 100 grains each, in lieu of attempting the separation of the
ingredients from a single parcel. Some variation may thus be in-
duced from the irregularity of the ore; but, on the whole, the results
ought to be more trust-worthy. Thus: the carbonic acid was estima-
ted by the loss of weight on digesting 100 grains, finely pounded, in
dilute nitric acid. The water, (for none of these ores was found to be
anhydrous,) by heating in a glass tube, removing the aqueous vapour
by bibulous paper, and ascertaining the loss. As the ore generally
lost its green colour by this operation, it is possible that a portion of
carbonic acid was also driven off. Calcination in an open dish, in the
muffle of an assay furnace, gave a loss, which was compounded of that
of the carbonic acid and the water. Calcination drives off the sulphur
also, but the equivalent of oxygen, which replaces it, being of precisely

1835.] Analysis of Nellore. Copper ores. 579

equal weight, this operation affords no test of the quantity of sulphur
present.—In fact, not expecting from Dr. Taomson’s analysis, to find
sulphur in the Nellore copper ore, I at first neglected the precautions
necessary for its separation. This was accordingly effected on other
samples, by boiling in strong nitric acid, which, from its heat, caused
part of the sulphur in a pure state to, rise in fused globules to the
surface : while a portion, being oxygenated, was afterwards separated
by precipitation with barytes.

The quantity of copper was most conveniently estimated from the
black oxide taken up from the calx by dilute nitric acid. It was also
obtained directly from other samples by reduction of the oxide with
charcoal and borax.—The iron and pyrites were deduced from the
difference between the residue in the cold solution, and that from the
hot dissolution in strong acid of another parcel, before calcination.

Collecting together the results of the above operations, we have
the following data, whence to deduce the composition of the three
specimens.

No.1. No.2. No.3.
a. Loss of carbonic acid rt dia in dilute nitric

acid, eietele piers AStanodmeob 6 UPAD 14.6 7.0
b. Loss of Metis (and some Na. seid ») by heating

without air in a glass tube,.........0ce0e cece 5.0 7.0 3.0
ec. Total loss on calcination with access ofair,...... 17.5 17.8 21.0

c2. Ditto average of two other trials (more carbonate,) 20.0 20.3 23.5
d. Oxide of copper taken up from calx ec by dilute acid, 37.7 49.2 73.7
e. Residue of insoluble earths and ox. iron, afterd, 44.8 33.0 5.3*
J. Residue from digestion of crude ore in boiling nitric

SEM ass <0 Naar els ii aratais’ state's sd citric csesm« 20.0 13.9 19.0
g. The same, after burning off the ie and redi-

ESET ENTE OO. fo chels lo elas leidteinte sixleiele siviels ctthists ci hk eOLOln tt OL 0.0

h. Sulphur, separated on boiling i in ees acids. oes 0.6 2.1 9.0

2. Sulphate of barytes precipitated afterwards, ...... 14 17.8, 28:5

k. Weight of metallic copper actuallyrecoveredfrome2, 28.5 52.2 59.0
In regard to d, No. 3, it was observed on digestion in cold nitric
acid, that a very considerable portion of the calx of copper was of a
red color, or in the state of protoxide, or perhaps in a metallic state,
and was not taken up without disengagement of nitrous gas ;—the
weight 73.7 must therefore be increased, to give the true weight in
terms of the peroxide. ‘This is also proved by the amount of loss in
c, 21.0, which is considerably in excess ; and it was remarked on
removing the calx from the fire that it was agglutinated, so as per-
* This residue may have consisted partly of sulphuret of copper that had

escaped decomposition in the fire; for another specimen was wholly soluble, and
little iron was present in the solution,

580 Analysis of Nellore Copper ores. [Ocr.

haps to have prevented the access of air to oxidate the interior.—
The sulphur enables us to approximate the correction of this item ;
for 12.8 requires 51.5 copper,=64.3 black or peroxide; and this,
added to 22.8, the peroxide of the carbonate, would give 87.7 ; which
is 14.0 greater than the actual return from the fire.—Again, deducting
the deficiency after calcination (c.) 21.0, from the sum of the three
volatile ingredients—sulphur, 12.8 ; carbonic acid, 7.0; and water 3.0
== 22.8, there remains but 1.8 for the weight of oxygen absorbed in
place of the sulphur; whereas 12.8 are required.—Adding the dif-
ference 11.0 to d, we shall have 84.7. This number will be found to be
a little in defect from the subsequent results; while 87.7 is a little too
great; a mean may therefore be adopted. ;

From the above data, we may now proceed to extract the simple
elements of each specimen of ore :

No.1. No.2. No.3.
1. Metallic copper, calculated from the oxide d, .... 3052 33985" 6920
m. .Pure sulphur strom and 7, ).).)-\s)slercicisislelole oer ele 0.8 4.5 12.8°
n. Carbonic acid, less 74th for hygrometric moisture,.. 10.8 13.1 6.3

The carbonic acid being supposed to be wholly combined with
copper, while the sulphur may be partly united with iron, we may
calculate the proportions of the carbonates and sulphurets by means of
the scale of chemical equivalents, thus : |

; No.1. No.2. No. 3.
o. The carbonic acid will require copper, .......... 31°4 = 38°6 18°3

Now in the first two of these, the copper required so nearly agrees
with the calculated weight of metal, 7. that the latter may be looked
upon as existing here wholly in the form of carbonate, and the sulphur
as united entirely with iron*. In No. 3, however, we find that the
majority of the copper remains ; and knowing the nearly total absence
of iron in this specimen, we may conclude it to be a mixture of nearly
two parts sulphuret, with one of carbonate.

The miner would rest content with the determination of the pure
metal in the ore, and would have good reason to be satisfied with the
60 per cent. ‘‘ actual yield” of No. 3, or even with the 30 per cent.
of the poorest of the three ores ; but the mineralogist will prefer an
exhibition of the component salts of the ores, according to the usual
synthetical formula. I may here remark, that the water separated (6)
is more than is required to convert the carbonate into a hydrate or
ordinary malachite: thus,

* In the second Analysis of No, 2, however, the copper actually recovered, k, so
much exceeds this quantity, that it is evident this ore frequently contains sulphuret,
or is of very variable quality.

1835.] Copper Mines of Singhdua. 58

No.1. No. 2. No. 3s
p. Tbe copper combined with carbonic acid being, .. 30°2 39°53) =: 183
g- will require water to hydrate it, ................ 4°2 5°5 2°6
The excess in 6 may have been carbonic acid, partially driven off.
The chemical composition of the three minerals may therefore be
thus expressed:
Ne. 1. No, 2. No. 3,

Hydrated carbonate of copper, ........-.s-eeeeeses 52°4 68°5 S17,
DUMMEUMECEEE CONDEY 5 oie. 2o. win. che.0'ai om 6.5m o\n:S aso nieie.es oe 0° 0°? 63°0
MIR TIMIEGIE oo 6.0) aa) «6i'o. <1 Hin! 8.) 6. 'a.o)'0 bi Sino oa)'n e019 9,0 2°. *12'4 00
MEPMERGIMEQI SUCK, OCh cess tere cccclersscssstsee. 49°59 Zork 53

NMEMCERH AEs ie Se ete Oe, DR A 2:0 —6:0 0:0

ee

100°0 100°0 100-0

The excess in No. 2, is doubtless owing tothe irregularity of the
rocky admixture in different specimens, whereof one yielded 44, and
another only 13°9 of insoluble matter, on digestion in acid.

The richness of the last of the three minerals will more than com:
pensate for the increase of trouble and expence in the reduction of
the ore by successive roastings ; and practical miners assert, that the
glance or grey sulphuret is a much steadier and more plentiful ore
than the carbonate.

I should add, before concluding the above imperfect analysis of
the Nellore copper ores, that 1 tested them in vain for silver and
other metals. Neither did arsenic appear to be present.

I may here mention, that among the specimens of minerals pre-
sented to me by Mr. Kerr, as occurring within the copper mining
district, associated with the micaceous schist, are the following ;
corundum and adamantine spar, garnets, dark-green actinolite, red
chalk, manganese; besides carbonate of magnesia, and other minerals
of which specimens have not yet reached me. An ore of mercury is
also suspected to exist in the same range of rocks. The surface of the
gneiss or micaceous schist, where exposed to the air, is frequently seen
tinged of a green colour, from the trickling of water holding carbonate
of copper in solution, through crevices of the rock.

Copper Mines of Singhdna, in the Shekdwatt country.

I take this opportunity of acknowledging the receipt of further
specimens of the ores of these mines from Colonel Stacy.—They
consist of the yellow and grey sulphurets, carbonates, and the
blue native sulphate in deliquescent crystals. The latter is probably
produced from the pyrites ; as is the sulphate of iron from its sulphuret.
Both of these occur also at Singhana: the sulphate, from its dif-
ferent tints, having the native names of pila and hara kasis, or
yellow and green vitriol. There is also among the specimens a mungya

4 Ff

582 Ajmir Copper Mines. [Ocr.

kasts, which appears to be a compound of alum, and the sulphates of
iron, and copper. There are two very beautiful specimens of virgin
copper in mammellated concretions, coating oxide of iron, which appear
to have been formed by a natural decomposition of the blue soluble
sulphate on coming in contact with the iron ore.

A full description of the Singhana mines, and the mode of extract-
ing and working up the ore, (by Captain Bortzau, of the Engineers ?)
is printed in the third volume of the Gleanings in Science, page 380.
It does not appear from that notice, that any previous roasting of the
ore is resorted to ; but instead of this process, the ore is ground toa fine
powder, formed into cakes with cow-dung, then burnt in a “ clamp,’’
and lastly, mixed with scoria of iron to be blasted. The iron in this
operation, deoxidated by the charcoal, doubtless assists in removing
the sulphur from the copper by its superior affinity. The metal pro-
duced from these mines is, however, not thoroughly refined; but
according to Captain Boixeav, is brittle, and of a lilac colour: while
that of Basawar in the Bhartpur district, (most probably a carbonate)
is at once melted down into a fine malleable metal—but on the other
hand, the latter is too pvor an ore to be worked profitably.

The extent to which the Shekdwaiz mines have been worked in for-
mer ages of Hindu prosperity is fully equal to that we have seen of
the Nellore mines, and strikingly similar in every respect. ‘‘The
scorie, or khangar, that have been accumulating for ages, have at
length formed a line of small hills, several hundred feet in length, and
from thirty to sixty feet high: there are four insulated stone bastions
built on ore of these artificial mounds. The rocky ridge in which
the excavations have been carried on for generations is pierced by
numerous shafts, giving access to the galleries, by which the hills are
honey-combed in every direction to the length of a kos, if the natives
are to be believed.”’ But I must refer to the article whence these
paragraphs are quoted; for the whole account will be read with
interest.

I am in expectation of further specimens of the Shekdwati minerals
from Mr, Dean.

Ajmir Copper Mines.

A new locality of copper ore has recently been brought to notice
by Captain C. J. Dixon, in the neighbourhood of Ajmér, where three
different shafts have been opened. Specimens of the ore extracted
thence were forwarded to me by the present Governor General, along
with a copy of the report from Captain Dixon, on the subject, dated
8th May, 1835, from which I extract the following particulars :

1835.] Ajmir Copper Mines. 583

“«The Ajmir ore in mineralogical phraseology is ‘ termed a ferru-
genous red oxide of copper,’ and being free from sulphur, two ope-
rations are sufficient to metallize it ; one smelting, and one refining.
The ore in Shekdwatz, as well as the principal ores worked in Corn-
wall and Wales, are sulphurets, copper pyrites. They require suc-
cessive calcinations, roastings, and smeltings ; eight separate processes
being essential to perfect metalisation. At the same time, that our
operations are conducted with celerity, and consequently at a compa-
ratively small outlay ; inasmuch, that the ore, on the third day after it has
been dug from the vein, is reduced to a metallic state, adapted for sale ;
(while in Europe calcination alone occupies several months,) the busi-
ness of smelting is wholly free from that noisomeness, so injurious to
health, which characterises works of this nature at home, when sul-
phur forms an ingredient in the chemical composition of the ore.

“ The first vein was opened near Giigra, four miles N. N. East of
Ajmir. It runs north and south, and its breadth varies from a span
to four inches. It is situated on the plain, within one hundred and
fifty yards from the range of hills; its greatest depth being sixty feet
from the surface. An admixture of ores from separate veins is essen-
tial to a complete fusion ; and with this intention, a vein was sought
and opened at Rdjgarh, twelve miles S. S. West of this. This vein,
also on the plain, but near the hills, is only twenty-five feet from the
surface, while a third has been opened, within the last fifteen days,
near Rajauri, ten miles south of Ajmir. The presence of copper
has been detected at other spots: indeed, it is beyond doubt the whole
of the Ajmir valley is traversed by veins, which run from Kishen-
garh to Rajgarh, a distance of thirty miles; industry and capital
being the sole requisite to their complete development. In Corn-
wall, good veins are not met with, until attaining a depth of three
hundred feet and upwards. At present, our labours are confined
almost to the surface. The transmission of these specimens will,
I hope, prove so far useful, that should the Honorable the Governor
General be pleased to make them over for analyzation to some scien-
tific gentleman in Calcutta, their intrinsic value as ores will be ascer-
tained ; for though the studies of the laboratory be as widely different
in their issues from the labors of the furnace, as theory is from prac-
tice, still a favorable result in the former will be highly satisfactory,
and may at a future period warrant the establishment of the works on
a large scale. In exemplification of the observation in reference to
theory and practice, various specimens treated in the study yield from
twenty to eighty per cent., while the average produce of the mines in
Cornwall for some years past has ranged from eight and a quarter to

4¥F2

584 Ajmir Copper Mines. [Ocr.

ten per cent. of metal. The reason is obvious. In the small way,
assorted specimens are selected, and by proper care and attention to
their treatment, every particle of metal is recovered. But in the
large way, in the smelting furnace, rich and poor ores with a good
deal of extraneous matter incorporated therewith are fused together.
Hence the result of the furnace always falls short of the issue of
experiments in the study.”

Captain Dixon is quite correct as to the fallacy of trusting to the
results of the laboratory in regard to the average produce of mining
operations. The nature of the ore, and of its associated minerals, is
all that the chemist can pronounce upon. In this respect, the Ajmir
ores, like those of Bhartpur, hardly offer much encouragement: none
of the specimens, small as they are, consist of homogeneous ore, but
are in general, merely coatings of carbonate on a ferruginous matrix,
or veins in quartz and a micaceous schist. It is probable, however,
that small cabinet specimens would be selected for this very object of
shewing the connection with other rocks, and that far richer lumps
are taken to the smelting house.

The ore from Rdjgarh, twelve miles S. S. W. of Ajmir, is accom-
panied with slender prismatic crystals of selenite, of black augite,
hydrated red oxide of iron, and carbonate of the same metal. There
are also veins of an aluminous or silicious malachite, which may be
termed turquoise copper ore ; it is of a fine blue colour, translucent
where thin, breaking with conchoidal fracture, and apparently capa-
ble of being converted to ornamental uses. It differs from the tur-
quoise*, in being insoluble in acids, which take up only the green
colouring matter, a carbonate of copper. I have not further analysed
this curious mineral. At Rdjauri, ten miles S. W. of Ajmir, the
carbonate is of a lighter colour, more earthy, and accompanied with
small yellow scales of mica and iron. At Gugra, four miles N. N. E. of
Ajmir, the malachite is associated with carbonate of lead, a micaceous
carbonate of iron, and witha rich galena or sulphuret of lead. Yel-
low copper pyrites also shews itself, and earthy veins of a pale blue,
very similar to some of the streaks in the turquoise rocks of Nisha-
pur, in Persia. It is possible that this mineral itself might be met
with, on farther search, if felspar or other aluminous minerals exist in
the Ajmir hills: the matrix of the turquoise is also a red iron clay ore,
very similar to that of the copper mines.

* See analysis of this mineral in the Gleanings in Science, ii. 375.

1835.) Asiatic Sociely. 585

VIII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednseday Evening, the 4th November, 1835.

Captain Pemperron, Senior Member present, in the chair.

The Hon’ble Sir Bensamin Maxi, Kt., and Cuartes Hay CAMERON,
Esq., proposed at the last meeting, were ballotted for, and unanimously
elected Members of the Society.

Read a letter from Lieut. W. C. Baxer, acknowledging his election
as a member. ‘

Read a letter from Tuomas Dickenson, Esq., Secretary Bombay Branch
of the Royal Asiatic Society, acknowledging the receipt of a copy of the
Index to the Asiatic Researches.

Read a letter from Cuarues Konre, Esq. Foreign Secretary to the Royal
Society of London, acknowledging the receipt of a copy of M. Csoma pg
K6ros’s Tibetan Grammar and Dictionary.

Library.

The following books were presented:

Proceedings ot the Geological Society of London, No. 39—by the Society.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No. 9, October 1835—by the
Madras Literary Society.

A Treatise on the manufacture of Saltpetre, descriptive of the operations and

proper plans to be used for the manufacture of Culmee and Cooteah—éy Mr. J.
Stephenson, and presented by him.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 23—by the Editors.
Meteorological Register for September, 1835—dy the Surveyor General.

The following books were received from the Oriental Translation
Fund:

The Chronicles of Rabbi Joseph Ben Joshua Ben Meir, the Sphardi. Trans-
lated from the Hebrew by (. A. F. Bialloblotzky, vol. I.

Miscellaneous Translations from Oriental languages, vol. 2nd.

Les Aventures De Kamrup, par M. Garcin De Tassy.

Harivansa, or Histoire de la Famille de Hari, part lst—by M. A. Langlois.

Ethiopic Didascalia, or the Ethiopic version of the Apostolic Constitutions

received in the Church of Abyssinia, with an English translation—hy Thomas
Pell Plat, Esq., F. A. S.

Nipon o Dai itsi Ran, ou Annales des Empereurs du Japon, 1 vol.—dy M. J.
Klaproth.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, Swainson’s Animals,

A piece of ancient Hindu Sculpture, representing a female (goddess),
with a child, walking, dug up in the ruins of Canouj, was presented by
Colonel Sracy.

Literary.

Read a letter from W. H. Macnacaren, Esq., Secretary to Govern-
ment, Political Department, forwarding on behalf of the Honorable the
Governor General of India in Council, a copy of notes taken by Captain
Wane, relative to the territory of Iskardoh, and of his correspondence
with the ruler of that country.

A memoir on the mountain tribes, on the extreme N. E. frontier of
Bengal, by J. McCosu, Civil Assistant Surgeon at Goalparah—presented
by the Author.

Extracts from both these papers were read.

Physical,
The following extract of a private letter from Captain Cauruey to the

Secretary was read, noticing the discovery of further fossils in vast quan-
tity in the Sewa4lik range.

586 Asiatic Society. [Ocr.

‘* A trip to the Sewdliks, near the Pinjore valley, lately, has introduced us to the
Anoplotherium ?* in a perfect line of six molars on one side, and four ditto in the other
side of upper jaw. I say Anoplotherium, for the rear molars have the distinguishing
mark in the insulated mamilla pointed out by CuvieRT, as that which distinguishes
the Anoplotherium from the Palezotherium, although the position of the molar bone,
part of which is distinguishable, appears to differ from that of the former animal,
and gives it a greater resemblance to the Paleotherium ; this is a beautiful fossil,
and dug out: but I must give you a history of the last week.

‘“*T had to visit Dadupur on canal matters, and found both BAKER and DURAND
as eager as myself for ashort excursion into the Sewaliks ; and as all our parties
were out, we determined on visiting those most westerly, who were working
at a village called Moginund (a common name apparently) in the Ramgurh dis-
trict, about 50 miles W. of Dadupur: our route took us through Sidaura,
Naraingurh, Mir k4 Gurhi, Ramgurh, to the village of Moginund, which lies in
a nook of these little hills, open only on the west: here we remained three days,
returning to Dddupur by regular marches, and visiting Khet Parali, another
little, village close under the hills on our way, asnear this village is a stratum
of a clay conglomerate, or marl full of testaceous remains chiefly Bivalves (varie-
ties of Unio,) reptiles, and fish; of the former, you have already specimens, and
with the latter, you shall be provided in due course. The country on this route was
open and well cultivated, rice in great abundance, and cultivation of all sorts up to
the foot of the hills. These hills differ much in appearance from those between the
Jamna and Ganges ; the abruptly scarped precipices, and mural cliffs, with the huge
strata of shingle, are here replaced by a comparatively lowseries of undulating hills,
consisting of an eternal succession of sands and clays, with here and there beds of a
coarse sandstone, or fine shingle conglomerate, accessible at all points excepting
those where slips have taken place, and free from jungle and high vegetation, except-
ing in hollows, and the lines of ravines skirting the tributaries to the main outlets
of drainage.

‘©The hills were covered with fossils like all the others (how they could have
escaped observation before, must remain a source of wonder). Mastodons and
hippopotamus’s remains looking one in the face at every step! Amongst the remains
collected were those of the rat and porcupine, too perfect to admit of any doubt. The
specimens of each consisting of the palate, with the two lines of molars !// Although
three days at this place, and superintending my digging parties, I must confess my
inability to decide strictly whether we were working in a stratum or in debris: this
may appear strange to a person who has been unaccustomed to examine and decide
on the position of strata, but will be understood and appreciated I imagine by any
one who has had his attention strictly brought to bear upon the point. Shrubs,
inequalities of surface, ravines, et hoc genus omne, all and each of them battling
every inch! I am however inclined to consider that we had both, and that we were
working in both a soft sandstone stratum, and also in a superficial coating of debris.
A great number of perfect bones, the whole series of a leg for instance, jaw bones,
and other remains were fairly found and dug out from the rock ; at other places, huge
masses of hard rock were found imbedded in the softer rock or soil, the said masses
consisting in most cases of agglutinated bones: the shape of these masses give an
appearance of their having fallen formerly from some parent rock, and being now
found as debris ; but the circumstance of finding the connected joints of animals is
altogether in favor of the excavation being in the stratum in which they were ori-
ginally deposited. The question does not appear to me of much consequence, as the
bones are not rounded by attrition, and are as sharp and perfect in their form and
outline, as when belonging to the living animal, although frequently broken, and
jammed together, as would be the case in a skeleton or a mass of bones being forced
together in an upheavement of the country upon which or in which they were col-

-lected.

‘¢T may remark that our excavation was not on the outcrop of the strata, but in
the slope, and the working parties were successful in their operations at many points
on the whole surface of that side of the mountain. This deposit appears to be alto-
gether wanting in the mastodons, reptiles, and hippopotami : the remains at present
‘dug out consist of portions of anoplotherium or palzotherium, rhinoceros, hog,
horse, ruminants of the most gigantic dimensions, with those of the smaller classes,
earnivora, hyena, canis, tiger (or lion), anda small species of a feline animal, a very
perfect cranium of which is in the possession of Lieuts. DURAND and BAKER. Many

* This fossil is either the Anoplotherium, or a new variety of the Paleotherium, and if it was
‘not for the insulated mamilla, referred to, its classification amongst the latter genera would, 1
suspect, be undoubtedly correct. The discovery of more perfect remains of the head, will settle
this point at once.

+ Volume iii. p. 21. Ossemens fossiles.

1835.] Asiatic Society. 587

of the bones of these animals are coming out perfect, and some have been found, as I

before mentioned, in connected joints !

‘‘ With reference to the Sivatherium, I regretted much my inability to obtain
the dimensions of one of the most superb fossils, I suppose that ever was found;
it was unfortunately discovered and excavated by a party of work-people em-
ployed by a gentleman with whom I was unacquainted, and although 1 saw the
fossil when in the rock, I was prevented from getting the measurements after-
wards. This specimen consisted of the femur and tibia, with the tarsal, metas
tarsal, and phalanges of one of these gigantic ruminants that time and patience
will and must introduce us to! In the bones of all the animals discovered, there are
differences from those of their existing congeners that will be pointed out hereafter ;
it may be sufficient here to advert to the fact. The teeth that are found at this spot
are beautifully perfect, and from the softness of the matrix or rock in which they
are imbedded, easily cleared and exhibited. There is an evident grouping of animals
throughout! The hippopotami, mastodons, &c. which in some localities are in such
abundance, are in others wanting ; their place being occupied by carnivora, rumin-
ants, &c. The testaceous remains as yet found have been accompanied by reptiles
and fish. We have in fact an extended tract of country upheaved, and the different
groups as might be expected in their natural habitats!! It is hardly a month since
1 attempted, in a note on the Gavial of these hills, to enumerate the probable propor-
tions of animals that existed on this tract! During this short period, we have added
another family, Rodentia, to our catalogue, and another genus of the Pachydermata,
besides the splendid additions to our former list in the further elucidation of those
already found, in the discovery of more perfect specimens of bone, especially of the
horse, rhinoceros, and the larger ruminants!! You will join with me in an excla-
mation, which has been upon my lips, day after day, since the discovery of the first
fragment of bone—‘ What shall we have neat ??””

1. A small, but splendid, collection of stuffed birds, presented by
Captain PemBerRTON.

As they were received only the same morning, the Curator deferred his report until
the next meeting.

2. Aspecies of Pteromys, presented by Captain Davinson, from Goal-
parah, Assam.

3. A collection of Mammalia and Birds from Goalparah, Assam,
presented by Dr. McCosn. The collection consists of the following
specimens :
Mammalia.

1.—Mungusta Mongoz.
2.—Pteromys.

3.—Moschus Memina.
4.—Moschus Memina—(Skeleton).

Birds.

1.—Alcedo Bengalensis.
2.—Dicrurus Cerulescens.
3.—Turdus Saluaris.

4.—Oriolus Melanocephalus.
5.—Eudynamys Orientalis.
6.—Buceros Homrai.

7.—Buceros Malabaricus.
8.—Garrulus Bengalensis.
9.—Polypleitron Hardwickit.
10.—Phasianus Gallus—2 male and | female specimens.
1].—Phasianus Lineatus.
12.—Gallinale Porphyris.
13.—Fuligula Caryophyllacea.

The Buceros Homrai is considerably larger than the one described by Mr.
Honeson in the 2nd part, 18th vol. Researches of the Asiatic Society. From tip
of the bill to tip of the tail, Dr. McCosu’s specimen measures five feet two
inches; that of Mr. HopGson’s is only four feet 53 inches in length: and by
comparing the bill and casque with two of the Nipal bird, in the cabinet of the
Curator, the inferior size of the latter is very apparent. There is, belonging to
Captain PemBERTON, a specimen now upon the table, of the bill and casque of
the same bird, from Chittagong, even larger insize than that from Assam,—Cur.

1X.—Meteorological Register.

rm a a RE ea a ES ae

‘yensn se posed pue owes oy} syuswNAYsUT

*UIGI 9} UO WIIO}s BUO sul 39S MOOSUOUL YIION | S6°S , OCLIL | PPL 4 98 | LL [EG | 1°o8 (L0z‘T| SIs’ (LOL) 16 |3°9 | 8°9 | *E8] SET‘T 089°82 96863) UeAIX
Azey “Azey op ‘nN <NU PEN 9°L2r | Of G°G1 | G°18 66L‘ €O1| s‘6l 116‘ 1g
Sittin) op op *N *N “N OFSL | SOL EBT | S18 16L‘ O11] 6°82 806‘ 0g
op “Tey op “AU ‘MN “AN B‘9a1 | 789 | 6L | oor] LIL | ef2e ttt | 269 |gu8t ¢9 | 28 | 06 | ofog| BS0°T|9E8° | FEB" 66
“AIRY -auy op “MU “MN “AN s9zt | 929 | 18 | ror | IIL | Pas zor’ | 929° |86L:] 9g | 0°8 | 88 | T'og] SPOTL|FLE GIG! | 8%
op *110 “und op ‘MU ‘N ‘AN | c‘ozt | s‘89 | €8 | 2:8 | 266 | size lpar< | 869% |ace't ce | 068 | 0'6 | a‘og| TPOST|808. 686. 16
op “13s ‘und *1e9[9 “AL *N ‘M goat | 2'89 | 18 | ¢6 | 8‘Or| otzg joer’ | 269° [2284 0g | 6 | 6'8 | Gog] T40°1|9F8" [226° 9%
op “und *ILRy "MU “N “N Lett | 0°¢2 PG | 008 e88* cB
‘aug ‘uy ‘und | “4u =*MN 'O SL | vcL | 86 | of¢ |0'9 | Lee leer’ | 329° |PoZ‘| gg | afe | 8°E | Z’an| Cot‘t|LG9° [968% | Fs

‘nes ured *13s ‘wind ‘ud ‘N “NO GLE E SSLor | 0%S2 £8 | 0°38 969° 9¢ | et 1826 &@
*Apnojo op “sey 0 "N ‘o «=f cof | corr | 2°92 18 | 0°€8 Beg‘ ee | ete 6026 (£6
“Aurel “wind *13s “Und *@) ‘a °S sorr | 9f92 rg | ele €e9' PG | FR cel 1G
‘TynuNs op *1yMuIND “MS ‘MS *s Lou fase | 002 | £6 | e%¢ (99 | cg lets | sar‘ |Fe9| 96 | 0'€ | 9° | g‘zal Zor‘t|9e9° |8EL° 06
*‘Surayyes *482919 AO “UIEI ‘as ‘as as |oee | ote | ocd | 96 {oc | S°o | o%Fe lOLt® | OLP UFO 96 | FF | 9°F | O'GA| OB0'T|ZPN‘ GGLS 61
‘W10}S PALY Tr) B) 2410 ‘tUnd ‘u *O ‘0 P98 | sol | 96 aL | 0g 029° I'¢ | ¢feg pps 81
*uIed *1ynuIND op “MU “au “q | 99° | r'zit| sZZ | 16 | po |b | 2699 9ze* | 968% jecO'l 6 | B'S | $9 | Tig] BRST |OLFE oLLs LT
op *4st019A0 “Azey s) fy) ‘a etr| sz | 28} e | 08 | Ze leres | ate’ \ezo'l $6 | 1°S | 8°¢ | o%cq] Sea‘T|9GP. FEL 91
“‘Sumyesayy *Azey “110 a) “ou “a § Sao | O'FIT | 094 &6 a9 10% | o'dg |6Le* | 268° |9L9F $6 | 9°¢ | B'¢ | Z<cq] eat T\ase® | UBL" cI
op op “WIND “110 "aI “ou ‘gu | 09° | aor | 8°82 fF 94 06 | eZ |8£z° | a0‘ jog9F 98 | e°Z | 89 | gfeg] Gest |rus’ 918” tL
‘ouy op op “mC AAN *Aua ofezt | ae | £8 | 9G | 258 | et9Q |0cas | BLh* \zcZ‘t 68 | 2°9 | 69 | a%paQl BGL‘T\8E9" |9EB” 1
*1eayo ‘auy op ‘mu 6 MN CMU Bear | seZ | 88 leg | 1°8 | og \ges° | OFS I8LZ4 Le | LZ‘ | Bz | Ze] POLI |S69" [668 | st
op *1va]o “Soy ‘O “MU “MU over | OF4 9°9T | ose IsLF 28 16 | 0fE8 L8* IT
"Ivy *T1Py op "A “MMS ert | atl | 92 | L111 | Ot | L'99 |Foes | 80r‘ larZ‘] os | 2°8 | 8°e | r'pq] Z9T‘1\6e9° 962" Ol
*1¥9]9 sauy op "N ‘MN ‘Ad ‘cer | oF£ | €Z | Ter | Ist | 6ieg [813° | 96H JIL‘ 28 | HL | 32 | epg] SBITI|OFO. |8E8. | 6
auy op *1¢a]0 ‘uu |6|C CAN OU sect | 9cZ | 98] 62 | #2 | ofcg [91aS | 86P° |FIZF £6 | 2S | Sc | ope] OBTI\BPO" |PEBT | 8
*1]MUuIND op 0°9 *3 OWN = Xa) « | Sear | ssl | G6 | aio | FS | efcg 61a° | PGP l9IZ‘} L6 | 9°€ | 9%e | T'bg] OST‘T/989° che" Z
*Alamoys op op ‘u “es ‘a G6 oer | 094 | 6 | FG | 39 | ofFe 691° | 689 l8cZF C6 | OF | I'¢ | efeg] G0G°T\ZP9° 968 9
“snquiru op op ‘as ‘a i) Ltr | 9°92 | 76 | ae | 6% | ofca |eaa'T | ZPS° |G9Z‘}c6 | 6‘ | Fp | ofgg| 161‘T|\G69"gz £88" g
*s [yenbs und *wind ‘Ss <) i) 6801 | B°L4 09 | $298 69L‘ ets | ofog 8E8 b
‘mys ‘und op op axe) ~ MU B6SL | BSL BSL | S16 69‘ 0% | ef998 cLL €
op op op “M Teh ANN BZer | BBL £91 | 8°¢6 069‘ 96 | 0°28 40g. | &
ar) p) *189]9 "0 "Ni 0 0°@aL | S‘6L 9°ZI | °Z6 eel‘ Lt, | ol 6r8‘6s; T

> = > ‘= es) gaQ [a ~ ap} » a (us) o3|2>] 8 Sie=he)
‘ S = ee 2] PF] F | so (SESS) PS) 83) eb) SPSS 25] 28) 82) a0 ae\lnesl ©

: > < . > 5 5 © me Per ee!) GR] eo] oe” BSlPBISsieS] pRieele? | Se |Sosl
Ss : od s es 7 =z oO 6 oo|Fs eS} | 5 © Blo 5a1o0_|72/ 83 “bh oo & °
a z tk Eile ae meee = ae 5 eg [BZ So) 98 /e8) Be) micels |seige ek) Be) ee) sal

ee ° Dit acliase 24 + fe 9 f°) is] 2 t=] wo ro) >

“soUoIT XY . sg

*I9YICI AA *pulm foveuO egy ‘W *d f Je SUOTJCAIOSAO Wl *V OT 38 SUOTJBAIOSCO >
1e}sisoy z

fae ee eee
“cag ‘uaqoz9Q fo yluopy ays wof <nz]nII09 ‘a0xfQ hossp ay) 3D jday ‘sagsthaxy 4001b0)0.10049 AT

JOURNAL

OF

THE ASTATIC SOCIET Y.

No. 47.—November, 1835.

I.—Notes taken by Captain C. M. Wann, Political Agent at Ludidna, in
1829, relative to the Territory and Government of Iskardoh, from infor-
mation given by Cuardcu Aut, an agent who was deputed to him in that
year by Aumap Su&u, the Gelpo or ruler of that country.

[Read at the Meeting of the 4th November. ]

[In publishing the accompanying memoir, we have purposely not availed ourselves
of the permission given us by the author, to omit the copies of his correspondence
with the Gelpo of Iskdrdoh, because the dates of these letters establish the fact
of Captain WaDE’s attention having been drawn to the traditionary history of this
place in 1829, previous to the information acquired in Lieut. BuRNES’ travels that
appeared in our second volume. In 1831, Captain WApbE urged M. JaquEMoNnT
’ to push his way into little Tibet, as may be seen by a remark in his letters, and
the deputation from the ruler of Iskdrdoh therein described, consisted of the same
individuals whom our author interrogated at Ludidna. Mr. ViGNE, an English
traveller, is now on his way to little Tibet, and will doubtless clear up the important
question suggested to the native ruler by MoorcROFT, whose own papers probably
contain some speculations on the subject. (See also Csoms DE KOrés’s note on the
geography of Tibet, J. A. S. vol. i. 121, and Burnes’ note, ii. 306.)—Epb.]

PRELIMINARY CORRESPONDENCE.

From Aumap Sua’n, the Gelpo or ruler of Iskardoh (capital of little Tibet), to
Captain C. M. Wans, Political agent at Ludidna.

After Compliments,

Sometime ago Mr. Moorcrorr came towards my country*, and by his
friendly disposition and great kindness, sowed the seeds of a lasting friendship
in my heart.

Adverting to the general rule and practice which the English observe of
making a friend of every stranger, and that, please God, they will never alienate
themselves from one with whom they are already connected; on hearing the news
of your auspicious approach (Captain Waps’s first mission to the Panjab in
1827, from Earl AMuerst, the Governor General of India,) I wrote to you and
sent you a message ; but my letter was intercepted on the way by my enemies, and
prevented from reaching ite destinationt.

* Mr. Moorcrort opened a correspondence with AHMAD SHa’H from Ladikh,
but did not visit Iskardoh.

+ The letter of whicha translation is now given was brought by way of Kolu. It
was folded in the size and shape of a rupee, and was enclosed in a piece of leather
and worn as an armlet to elude discovery ; the Sikhs and the people of Ladékh both

4a

590 Notes relative to Iskdrdoh, [Nov.

Several letters addressed to me by Mr. Moorcrort, are in my possession, and
I bear his communications in my mind. I would send you one of his letters, but
I regard them as sacred relics, and do not like to part with any one of them,
lest it might fall into the hands of malevolent enemies on theway. The follow~-
ing isa passage from one of the letters which I received from him: “ It is
supposed that ALEXANDER the GREAT came to Iskandaria, and that some vestige of
him is still to be found there. In that event, isitin the form of arms or weapons,
or books; and if books, are they in the Persian or Grecian language*.’’? He gave
me at the same time some kind and considerate counsels. I was not then aware
of any vestiges, and Mr. Moorcrort departed on bis journey. After some research
I have ascertained that there isa part of the foundation of an old dilapidated
fort, which was destroyed by fire. If there should be any thing, it will probably
be found beneath these ruins. God knows. Let me recommend you therefore to
depute an intelligent gentleman of your own tribe, who will be able to satisfy
himself by personal inquiry on every subject, as well as on the existence or
otherwise of the Macedonian relics that are supposed to be here.

There was a report, that Mr. Moorcrort was desirous of finding a way to
Yarqand ; but his scheme was frustrated by the intrigues of the people of
Ladakh. If you have the same design, there is a passage to Yarqand through
my country, which is available to you if you please. Consider my humble roof
as your own.

Do not fail to despatch some one on your part. Iam anxiously waiting to
receive him. Although it is like the ant preferring a petition to SoLAIMAN,
there is no impropriety in making an application, and I trust that you will not
withdraw your hand from the request of the petitioner.

I suspect that some vestiges of ALEXANDER the Great are likely to be dis-
covered beneath the foundation ; but God knows whether there are any or not.

From Captain Wave to Auman SHa'n, dated the 22nd of August, 1829.
After Compliments,

I have been delighted by the receipt of your friendly letter, transmitted by the
hand of Cuara’GH Att SHaA’H, youragent. The perusal of it afforded me the
highest gratification in the glad tidings that it conveyed of your health and
happiness. What you write regarding the journey of Mr. Moorcrort in your
direction, and that he cultivated amicable relations with you, is very intelligible.
It is the duty of the officers of the British Government to consider those who are
well affected towards them as their sincere friends, and to attach them by daily
increasing ties of unity and friendship.

As I have been engaged on a journey (to Delhi), the dismission of your
agent has been delayed. I now take the first opportunity of giving him his
leave to return. On his arrival in your presence, he will communicate to you
the sentiments of esteem and regard which you have established in my heart.

Considering me among your well wishers, continue to delight me often by the
receipt of your friendly letters.

From AuMapD Sua‘ to Captain WADE.
After Compliments,

Praise be to God, that by the blessing of his infinite favour, the garden of
friendship and unity, watered by his mercy and bounty, is blooming between us,
loaded with fragrance and joy.

I offer thanks to the Almighty, that I have had the pleasure to receive your
propitious letter by the arrival of my agent CuHara’GuH ALI; adverting to the
gratifying expressions contained in it, that, it isthe rule of the British nation

being supposed to be jealous of the writer’s design. There is enmity between
AHMAD SaHA’H and the chief of Ladakh, and the presence of the Sikhs in Kashmir
Ceres it difficult to maintain a communication by that route without their know-
ledge.

* AHMAD SHA‘H’S agent informed me, that there was a book in his master’s
possession in a character which no one could read. He described it to be bound in
aclasp cover. It is probable, that this book is a Latin Bible, left by some of the
Jesuits who visited this part of Asia in the 15th century, and not of any Grecian
origin.

1835.] the capital of little Tibet. 591

to cultivate relations of friendship, and make friends of strangers, and never to
alienate themselves from their friends ; thank God, that my wish is gratified.

Cuara’cu Arr has delivered to me your message, that you were desirous of
receiving intelligence from this quarter as well as of the state of affairs in the
neighbouring countries. Immediately on his arrival, I sent one of my people
to collect information ; but unhappily, he had scarcely reached the midway of
his destination, which is two months journey from hence, before he died. I forth-
with despatched another person ; but he has not yet returned. In consequence
Thave postponed Cuara’cu Aui’s departure to you until his return. If the
man whom I have sent come back before the snow begins to fall, Coara’Gu ALI
will soon have the honor of presenting himself before you ; but if, God forbid,
he should not have returned when the winter has commenced, and the road be-
comes impassible, I will still depute Cuara’eu At to you with intelligence of
such passing events as may come to my knowledge*.

I have nothing more to add than to express my hope, that you will not forget
to gratify me constantly by tidings of your welfare.

From Captain Wave to AuMAD SuHA/’H, dated the 8th of Feb. 1831.
After Compliments,

The receipt of your friendly letter, at a time when I was very anxious to hear
from you, has delighted me beyond measure, and the news which it contained of
your health and happiness have afforded me the highest gratification.

I am rejoiced to learn, that you have sent a person to collect intelligence
regarding the state of affairs in your quarter, and your intention of communicat-
ing the result to me by the hand of Caara’cu Aut, when your messenger should
return. These friendly offices bear ample testimony to your good will towards
the British nation. I expect that ere now you will have despatched your agent
with intelligence from that quarter. It is evident that there is nothing in the
world more exalted than friendship, for the peace and good order of the affairs
of mankind depend on it. When its benign influence reigns between different
nations, it is especially productive of mutual advantages.

Regard me among your sincere friends, and gratify me often by your friendly
communications, as they area source of great delight to my mind.

From AuMap Sua’n to Captain WaDE.
After Compliments,

Praise be to God, that through his blessing, affairs in this quarter at the present
date are ina satisfactory state. The mirror of my heart is soiled with no care
but the desire of an interview with you, which by the divine favour I hope will
soon take place. May success and prosperity attend your tribe.

It must not be concealed, that from the beginning I have been moved by an
anxiety beyond bounds to connect myself with the well-wishers and faithful
servants of your Government, by ties of friendship, and to identify myself
without reserve with their interests. My mind was occupied with these thoughts
when Mr. Moorcrort happily came and resided in my vicinity (Ladakh), where
he was delayed for a time from a cause which I have heard, but do not exactly
know the secret of the affair. At that period he opened a cordial communication
with me by the interchange of friendly letters ; after which, I had no opportunity
of gratifying my heart’s desire. I then despatched Cuara’cu ALI with a letter
to you, and had the pleasure to receive one inreply. Although my agent was
engaged to return to you soon, his departure has been delayed owing to a
circumstance which the bearer will explain. Since that time, | have written
several letters successively to you, which do not appear to have reached their
destination. ,

Mean while, M. Jaquemonr came to Kashmir, and renewed the friendly
sentiments which posesssed my heart. I deputed Coara’cGa Avi and another person
named Na’zim to him, and had the gratification of cultivating through them the

* With the present letter I received a separate paper, containing an account of the
recurrence of the insurrection in Eastern Turkistén, which I forwarded at the time
to the Secretary to the Governor General, who had received information of the event
from the Select Committee at Canton, and was desirous of receiving any intelligence
that I might have on the subject.

462

92 Notes relative to Iskdrdoh [Nov.

seeds. of friendship with that gentleman. I afterwards addressed several letters
to him, which with the exception of one’ which I despatched by the hand of a
man Mouamovu by name, and to which I had the pleasure to receive a reply,
failed to reach him. Since that period, notwithstanding every exertion on my
part, I have not been able to renew my correspondence with him.

I have now the felicity todespatch Na’zim to you, who, please God, will, on his
arrival, mention to you in person every thing connected with me and my affairs.
My object is to request that you will depute a confidential agent to me, that I may
entrust to him some secrets which I wish to impart. Although the application
of an humble individual is considered forward and presumptuous, yet recollecting
your kindness, and the reputation which you enjoy with the world for your
friendly disposition, I have taken the liberty of communicating my wish to you,
and I hope that it will be deemed deserving your consideration, that both parties
may be reciprocally benefitted.

From Captain Wave to AuMap Sua’ na, dated the 22nd of February, 1834.
After Compliments,

I have been gratified by the receipt of your kind letter at an auspicious moment,
when my thoughts were directed towards you. Its arrival has expanded my heart
with joy, as it assured me of your health and welfare.

The communications with which you charged your servant Na‘zim kave been
delivered to me. What you wrote regarding the feelings of attachment and
regard by which you are moved towards my countrymen, I can well appreciate.
The fact is, there is nothing more valuable or estimable in the world than friend-
ship, tending as it does to promote the peace and prosperity of mankind. It is
particularly conducive to their welfare, when its fruitful influence prevails be-
tween different nations. The British Government has a due regard for every
one with whom it has any amicable relations. I, as well as the Government
which I serve, are aware of your sentiments of attachment and friendship; but as
I cannot properly depute a person on my own part, nor answer your questions
without the permission of my Government, and the Right Honorable the Gover-
nor General: happens at present to be absent ona distant journey (at Utaca-
mund), and the hot season is rapidly approaching, I do not consider it advisable
to detain Na’zim with me, until I can get a reply from His Lordship. I have
therefore dismissed him on his return. He will communicate to you the sin-
cere regard which I entertain for you, while I inform my Government of the
contents of your letter, and will let you know hereafter what reply I receive.

Considering me among your sincere friends, continue to gratify me frequently
by the receipt of your welcome letters. 5

Sitwation.—Iskardoh is a mountainous country, divided into valleys
of various extent. It is situated towards the point where the Belat
Tak and Mus Ték mountains converge and separate the lofty ledges.
of Tibet, from the plains and valleys of Turkistan ; among the natives
it is generally known by the name of Beldestdn.

Tradition.—The tradition is, that ALExanpER the Great came here
on an expedition towards A fatd or Scythia (modern China), and that
the Koteli Musték, or the Mustdk mountains, which lie between Yargand
and Khatd, being at that time impassable, on account of the depth and
severity of the snow, the Macedonian halted on the present site of
the capital, until a road could be cleared for his passage ; when, leaving
every part of his superfluous baggage, together with the sick, old, and
infirm of his troops behind, in a fort which he erected while there,
he advanced against Khatd. These relics of the army founded a city,
which they named Iskandaria, or Alexandria, now pronounced Iskar-
doh.

1835.) the capital of little Tibet. 593

Extent.—In length, the territory of Iskérdoh is estimated to be a
journey of 11 days, and its average breadth about nine days’ journey.
On the east it is bounded by Ladakh, which is a journey of 11 days
from the capital ; and on the west, by Gilget, a journey of nine days.
Ydrgand bounds it on the north at a distance of 12 days’ journey, and
Kashmir, on the south, a journey of nine days*.

Climate.—The valleys which intersect the country are warm, but
free from the excessive heats of summer; and though cold in
many places, partake of a more uniform and temperate climate, than
might be inferred from their extreme elevation. During the winter
months, the snow lies in the city about three spans in depth. It
snows, but never rains. The atmosphere throughout the year is
stated to be remarkably dry and clear. On the summits of the neigh-
bouring mountains, the snow is perpetual.

Vegetable and mineral productions.—Its vegetable productions are
nearly the same, but not so exuberant as those of Kashmir. There
are a few trees, such as the plane, poplar, and willow, which grow to
a considerable size. It produces every kind of fruit peculiar to a
cold climate, such as plumbs, cherries, apricots, currants, walnuts, &c.
An oil is extracted from the kernel of the apricot, which is universally
used by the people for culinary and other purposes. The country
abounds with rhubarb and asafcetida. Among the mineral produc-
tions may be named gold, sulphur, arsenic, and Sohan Makhi, which
are found in the Shakar district. In Revend also, there are mines of
gold, arsenic, crystal, and Sohan Makhi ; and in the district of Baraldoh,
there is a sulphur mine, the effluvia of which is so strong as to be
suffocating to those who approach it. A stone called Murdar Sangh,
said to possess an antipoisonous quality, is found in some places.
Forwards, the western extremity of Shakar, on the bank of a stream
which comes from the Nagar territory, there is a hot spring ; by bathing
a few days in the water of which, persons who are subject to rheumatic
affections or cutaneous disorders are sure of being cured, particularly
those who are infected with disorders of the latter kind. On the top
of the hill, which is situated near this spring, stands a Chilldé or cell,
where the superstitious Muhammedans are in the habit of worshipping
the diety in abstraction for 40 days, during which they take no other
food than a few grains of barley and the smallest possible quantity of
water, consistent with the support of lifet. The shrine was built by
Suu Nasir Ama Syep Kuusro. To the north of Hazird, in the

* A day’s journey averages about 15 miles.
+ A form of penitence common in other Muhammedan countries,

594 Notes relative to Iskardoh, [Nov.

district of Duvan, there is another hot spring, the water of which is
so warm that if a drop of it fall on any tender part of the body, it
will produce a blister. It rises to a height of 24 feet.

Mountains.—The territory of Iskdrdoh lies in the midst of a region
of mountains, exceeding in grandeur any in the known world; but
depending for a description of the country on the oral evidence of a
native, whose limited range of observation renders it difficult for him
to convey his knowledge in a manner easily intelligible to an European
inquirer; it would be vain to attempt a particular account of the
mountainous features of the country* ; much of the information that
is now given must partake of the vagueness of the source from which
it is derived. Where there is nothing, however, but a complete
blank in the latest maps regarding a country which is likely to be
interesting to the antiquarian, it seems better to throw even these
faint rays of light on its history and geography, than to withhold
them altogether, because they may not happen to pussess the best
claims to accuracy.

Rivers.—There are two great rivers, besides several small streams
and innumerable springs; one of the rivers has its source in the
direction of Chélui, and another comes from Ladakh. They unite near
the fort of Karkes, and then taking their course by Iskdrdoh, where the
united stream, which forms a large river, is called Gemsi. On its
passage towards the plains, the same river is known by the name of
Atak,or Indus. When the river rises, it overflows its banks, and spreads
below the city to a breadth of 300 paces. Its ordinary width is about
100 paces. There are two boats in use here on the river, the first
that are to be seen on the Indus in its course through Tibet. The
other river rises near Shakar, and after being joined by the Saghar
stream, falls into the Indus below the fort of Iskdrdoh. The people
from Chili and Iskardoh travel in the winter season by the river
Indus on ice, and drag their baggage over the frozen surface by ropes.

Roads.—A high road leads from Iskdrdoh to Yargand, merchants
travel by it in qafilas, but travellers and servants of the Government
who go on business, proceed singly, or not, as may suit their conveni-
ence. It is crossed by a very lofty range of mountains, which is
only passable with safety at a particular season of the year. There
is a considerable road also by Gilget to Kunduz, Balkh, and Bokhara.
The Usbeks came to Gilget with horses, which they exchange for

* From the magnitude and variety of streams which flow west and east of the
Belat Ték, and Must4k ranges, it is probable that the mass of mountains which
spring from their basis reach their greatest height in the vicinity of Sirakot,
which is on the north-west frontier of Iskardoh.

1835.] the capital of little Tibet. 593

gold. Other roads go to Ladakh, Kashmir, and the territory of the
Yusafzais. Between Iskdrdoh and Kashmir there is an extensive
Dasht, or wilderness, called Beyarsa, but by the Kashmirians, it is
named Deosu ; towards the southern end of which is a small lake,
where travellers alight. The plain is covered with a coarse kind of
grass and bushes. There is not a tree to be seen on it. It abounds
with bears, and tabarghan, an animal which resembles and equals a
monkey in size and appearance. A traveller from Jskardoh to Kashmir
enters the valley of Kashmir by the Khoyameh pass, which is subject
to the authority of the Government of Kashmir. Dinawar Kuan, the
late proprietor of Khoyameh, is at present in confinement with the
Governor of Kashmir, and Suras Buan, one of the Pandits of Kashmir,
has been placed in charge of the district*. The road to Laddkh,
passed by Chili, opposite to Jhoriet, which lies on the frontier of the
Chélé district, is the Teara province, which forms the western frontier
of Ladékh. From Tedrato Ladakh is three days’ journey eastward.
There is a station for levying transit duties on the Tedra frontier, the
collections of which are remitted to the Ladakh treasury. From
Tedra, the pass of Rahara Kharam is three marches distant, beyond
which extend the dominions of the Emperor of China. <A regular
communication is maintained on the Chinese frontier from one station
to another by Chapars or Suwars, instead of foot runners, who convey
intelligence with great rapidity.

Divisions of territory.—Including the district of Iskdrdoh itself,
there are altogether nine divisions of territory actually subject to
Aumap Suu, the ruler of that country. Their extent is determin-
ed by the limits of the valleys in which they are situated. First, the
district of Baraldoh, which is held by Sutiman Kun, the nephew
of the ruler. From Baraldoh to the city of Yargand is a journey of
eight days. Second, the district of Parkotah, in charge of Guouam
SuAu, his brother. It stands in an open valley, from which issues
aroad to Kashmir, practicable for horses. Third, the district of
Talti, which belongs to Aumap Kud&n, his cousin. Fourth, the dis-
trict of Aartadkhshad, assigned to Aur Sauer Ku&n, his nephew.
There is a considerable stream between the district of Kartakhsha
and the fort of Soet, situated in Porakh, a territory subject to Ladakh,
and west of Kartakhshdéd ; and east of Soet, situated also in the

* There are twelves passes leading into the valley of Kashmir. Each of them
is held by a Malik, or chief, who is responsible for their safety. The Maliks derive
the offices from the Moghals, who granted to them the territory in the immediate

vicinity of the passes for their own support, and the pay of the guards necessary
to their defence.

596 Notes relative to Iskardoh, (Nov.

Porakh territory, there is another stream of nearly the same size.
From the limits of Kartékhsha to Laddkh, a light kasid can travel
in seven days; but a traveller with baggage requires ten days to
make the journey. Fifth, the district of Karkes, which is held by
Yaous Kua’n, one of the AnMAD SuHa’un’s relations. Karkes is
bounded on three sides by the Jskardoh district, and on the fourth,
or eastern side, by Chili, which was originally included within
the government of Iskardoh ; but about three years ago, the chief of it,
named Meuo1 Ku&n, revolted and setting the authority of the ruler of
Iskardoh at defiance, has entered into an alliance with the ‘‘ Gelpo” or
ruler of Ladakh. As the Governor of Chili is married to a niece of
Aumap Suéu, the ruler of Iskdrdoh is restrained by considerations
of delicacy from attacking and reducing him to obedience. The
district of Child lies five days’ journey distant to the east of Iskdrdoh :
and from Chili, the Ladakh frontier is only one day’s journey. Sixth,
the district of Nagar is situated in the hills, about seven days’ journey
to the north-west of Iskdrdoh, and constitutes the Jagir of Firoz
Susu, a dependent of Anmap Suu. From the town of Nagar to
Sirakol is eight days’ journey, and from Sirakol to Ydrgand is the same
distance. Seventh, the district of Randoh, the Jagir of Au1 Ku&n, the
nephew of Aumap Suu, which is reported to be much less elevated
than other parts of the country, and the climate and productions to
partake of the difference in elevation. It is famous for grapes, and
also produces rice, figs, and pomegranates, which are not found in
other parts of the country. Formerly, it was subject to the authority
of Aumap Su&u’s ancestors; but it was wrested from them during a
period of anarchy by the chief of Gilget, in whose possession it now
remains. Beyond the fort of Randoh a journey of five days’ is the
territory of Gilget, in the possession of Surman Sudn. Eighth, the
district of Hazira is the Jagér of the son of the ruler of Iskardoh,
and is bounded by Kashmir on the south.

City of Iskardoh.—The city of Iskdrdoh appears to be situated in
a valley of some extent. It is built on an isolated hill, bounded on
two sides by the river Indus. From the south, the ascent by the road
is about two anda half kos. On the summit of the hill is the fort
supposed to have been erected by ALEXANDER the Grzat. It is now
merely used as a citadel or station for a guard of soldiers. The
residence of the ruler, together with some habitations belonging to his
relations and dependents, is situated on a projection of the hill about
half way from the top. At its base runs the river, and on the other
side of the river, about a kos and a half distant, lies another isolated
hill, which is called Barkh Kharah ; beyond which, in the same direction,

1835.] the capital of little Tibet. 597

to Baraldoh, three days’ journey from the capital, the country in
general is of a level description. To the south of the city there is a plain
about seven or eight kos in extent, which is covered with cultivation
and gardens. The other two sides of the hill of Iskdrdoh are chiefly
occupied by the population of the city, and the aspect of the country
for a day’s journey in those directions also is open and well cultivated.

Fortified places.—There are several fortified places within the
limits of the [skdrdoh territory ; some are situated on the frontiers, and
others in the interior parts. Every fort has a separate jurisdiction.
The fort of Iskardoh has already been described. It is called by the
natives That Iskdrdoh and Kharpuicheh, which means the chief fort.
At a distance of half a day’s journey to the south of Iskdrdoh lies the
fort of Shakar. Shakar is the chief town of any note in the province
next to Iskdrdoh. It is situated in a narrow and well-cultivated
valley, about 13 miles long. The hill itself is about 500 paces high.
There are several hills in its vicinity but none of the same height.
The fort is supplied with water from the foot of the hill. There
is a stream running through the valley of Shakar, from the bed
of which the people collect gold, the quality of which is stated to be
superior to that which is found in any other part of the country. At
the eastern end of this valley is a hot spring, where the Gelpo has
formed a residence, to which he occasionally resorts. Kartakhshda is
also a fort of some note. It is situated on the Indus, in the vicinity
of some high hills. The country about it is said to be rugged and
difficult, and the fort itself to be a place of some strength and import-
ance, from its situation on the Laddkh frontier.

Population, character, and habits of the people——No_ correct
estimate can be formed of the population of the country. It is
said to amount to three lakhs of families, which in all probability
greatly exceeds the actual number. The people are divided into
several different tribes, but they are generally known by the name
of Baldi. Among them there is a tribe called Kerah, the members of
which are enjoined by their religious laws to follow four ordinances,
viz. first, to destroy their female infants ; second, not to tell falsehoods ;
third, not to desert their party in the day of battle ; fourth, not to
slander any one. The natives are described to be of a phlegmatic
disposition, like other Tibetan tribes*. They are a stout, well-made
race of people, with ruddy complexions and good features; but have

* Asiatic physiologists maintain the opinion, that the temperament of man is
affected by the nature of the animal or vegetable production on which he feeds ;
and the phlegmatic character of the inhabitants of little Tibet is accordingly
ascribed to barley, millet, and fruits, being their chief articles of food,

44

598 Notes relative to Iskardoh, [Nov.

little hair on their body, and scarcely any beard. It is said, they are
deficient in enterprise, and of a treacherous and designing disposi-
tion. Barley, wheat, and flesh are the chief articles of food; rice is
not generally used. All those who can afford it are in the habit of
drinking tea at their breakfast, and in the course of the day, it is usual
with them, as with their neighbours of Laddkh, to greet their visitors
with a cup of tea. The use of this luxury is becoming more general
than it was, though it bears a high price. There is little variation in
the dress of the people from their neighbours of Ladakh. The wealthy
classes generally wear gdbas, (a kind of coat, with skirted margin all
round,) and caps, &c.; while the dress of the peasantry consists of
jamahs, (another kind of eoat, formerly much used in India.) It resem-
bles the vest worn by the Indian dancing girls, and is made of paiti,
which is manufactured both of a coarse and fine quality, from goat’s
wool. They wear caps of the same stuff*. Cotton is not produced
here. It isimported from Ydarqand to Kashmir, but very few people
shew a desire to wear cotton clothes. Their houses are mostly made
of layers of stones and wood, with flat roofs, and are two or three
stories high, with far projecting roofs, somewhat similar to those on
the southern face of the Himalaya range.

Religion, language, and means of exchange.—The common religion of
the people is Muhammedan, of the Shia sect, and the followers of the
Imdm JAvar; but towards Gilget, there is a race of people which does
not seem to possess any well-defined religious system: some of them
are idolators, and worship trees ; while others, like the Hindi, do not
eat the flesh of kine, and yet profess to be Muhammedans. Tibetan is
the common language of the country, but the people have no books
in it. They are beyond the influence of the Lamas, and receive
their education, which is exclusively confined to the chiefs and
priesthood, in Persian. They have no system of coinage in the shape
of rupees, pice, or kouris. The only means of exchange known
among them is in small pieces of unwrought gold, which is found in
the country both in mines and in the beds of rivers.

Government, military establishment, and revenue.—The government
of Iskdrdoh is absolute, but the ruler Anmap SuHAu, who claims his
descent from Josrpu the prophet of the Israelites, is mild and benevo-
lent; his title is Ergh maydm, signifying the Lord of the mountains ;
but among his people he is called ‘‘ Gelpo,” or king, and his tributaries
and petty chiefs, Ju. He usually resides in the fort of Iskardoh. It

* It is not customary to milk the goat in this country, which is supposed to
add to the softness of the wool.

1835.] the capital of little Tibet. 599

is asserted, that the dynasty of the present ruler has been in uninter-
rupted possession of the country for the last 14 generations. He does
not owe allegiance to any foreign state, being subject to none in tribute
or service; but the Sikhs have attempted to extend their conquests
beyond Kashmir in that direction, which has tended to excite his alarm
and jealousy. There is no standing army ; the troops of Aumap Su&u
consist of his vassals. They are landed proprietors, who receive no
regular pay, but are exempted from taxation in requital of military
service. Whenever an exigency occurs to render the collection of a force
necessary, the ruler calls out the peasantry of the country, and forms
them into a sort of militia. He provides them with arms and ammu-
nition, so long as they may be kept embodied; and when the occasion
for their services is over, they are disarmed and dismissed. The
revenue of the state is collected in kind inthe following form :—one
kharwar of wheat, one of barley, and one of mustard or millet are
levied from each landholder. Some of the zemindars pay their
rents in one kharwar of ghi each, instead of the other three articles.
A kharwar is about 40 seers in weight.

Extension of Sikh conquests in the direction of Iskardoh.—Lying
between Kashmir and Iskdrdoh, there is a small territory called Kathai.
About seven years ago, Kirpa R&m, the Governor of Kashmir, sent a
force of 500 men to erect a fort there. The Muzaffardbdd chief, of
whom it was subject, opposed the design ; but Kirra RAm persisting in
his object, an action ensued, in which the Sikhs were defeated, 200 of
them were killed and wounded, and the rest taken prisoners, who
were converted to Muhammedanism. After the action, the chief of
Muzaffardbdd advanced to Bard mula, and reduced the Sikhs to take
refuge in the fort at that place; but he was soon obliged to retire. The
Sikhs being reinforced, renewed the attack, and ultimately established
their authority in Kathai.

Connexion with the Chinese frontier.—The northern limits of Isk4r-
doh are connected with the Chinese frontier. There are known to be
three great tribes among the people of China: one of them is called
Manchu, from which the royal family is descended; another Kara
Khatai, (implying black-colored,) which inhabits the eastern part of
the Chinese empire ; the third, Tingani: these are Muhammedans, and
occupy the country on its western frontier.

State of the north-western provinces of China, with an account of the
origin and progress of the insurrection which broke out in 1827, to sub-
vert the Chinese authority in that quarter.—Kashghar, Yiérgand, Khotan,
Azu, Ilah, and the country of the Sarah Nashin, generally called

4H 2

600 Notes relative to Iskardoh, [Nov.

Kalmaks, as well as five or six other extensive tracts of territory
formerly belonged to the Turkmdns. A long time ago the Emperor of
China invaded these places with a large army, and seized them from the
Khojan, who was then in possession of the government, and exercis-
ed both a temporal and spiritual authority over his people. In the
course of the war, many of the Turkman chiefs, as well as the Khojan
himeelf, fell into the hands of the Chinese, and were put to death ;
while the rest of the royal family, among which was the eldest son of
the Khojan, who took the title of his father, sought an asylum with
the ruler of Indajan, where they remained waiting a favorable oppor-
tunity to recover their country. The Emperor of China offered 700
Zambus, (silver ingots, weighing about 150 Rs. each,) to the Indajan
chief, if he would prevent the escape of the Khojans. About three years
ago, when the Khojan was still at Jndajan, the Chinese force stationed
on the frontier was withdrawn towards the Kara Khatai country.
When the Khojan heard of the departure of these troops, the ruler
of Indajan \et him loose, and the Khojan collecting a party to Kirkpiz,
whence he sent a man to Kashghar, to ascertain the disposition of the
people, they replied that the Chinese force had gone to Kara Khatai,
and he had only to come and possess himself of the whole country.
According to their invitation, the Khojan marched towards Kashghar,
where, no sooner had the Khojan made his appearance, than the
people declared in his favor, and rose against the Chinese, about 8000
of whom were sacrificed to their fury. The Aubu or Chinese governor
of the province destroyed himself by gun-powder. As soon as the
news of the occupation of Kashghar by the Khojan reached the ear
of the governor of Yarqand, he announced the event to the Emperor,
by means of lighted balloons, which were set off and repeated at
every stage, until the information reached its destination. The
Emperor returned a reply in the same way. This mode of conveying
intelligence was never adopted by the Chinese authorities. The
Khojan succeeded in recovering Ydrgand and Khotan, and every one
who was suspected of being in the interest of the Chinese was imme-
diately killed; but the Khojan met with some resistance in his attempt
to occupy Awu, Ilah, and the Kalmak territory, in consequence of the
presence in them of the Chinese garrisons, and their vicinity to each
other. Reinforcements were sent also from China to Kashghar, and
after the lapse of a year, the Chinese succeeded in dispossessing the
Khojan of his acquisitions; and making a prisoner of him, they confined
him in a cage, and led him captive to the Emperor. His fate is not
exactly known; some say that he who has been carried into captivity

1835.3 the capital of little Tibet. 601

is not the Khojan; that the Khojan himself effected his escape to
Indajan, and is now alive,

The tribes of Kashghar, Yarqand, and Khotan, and the part they took
in the insurrection.—The population of Kashghar, Ydargand, and Khotan
consists of two tribes ; the one is called Aghtaghlaq, and the other,
Karataghlaq. When the Chinese troops arrived for the recovery
of Ydrgand, the Aghtaghlaqs were all on the side of the Khojan, in
revenge of their adherence to whom the Chinese authorities slew all
their males, gave their females and children to their own countrymen,
and sent them into distant parts of China. Of the Karataghilag, such
as favored the Khojan, were killed, and the rest set at liberty.

Commercial operations of the Russians on the Ilah frontier.—About a
year and half ago, a report was received of the Russians having taken
Kapchagq, and arrived at Ilah, which is a great entrepét of commerce.
Between Ilah and the Russian frontier post is an extensive lake, on
the border of which the Russians are stated to have established a fort,
and to have built a town in its vicinity. Not wishing to be involved
in hostilities with the Russians, the Chinese are said to have
paid them a large sum of money to purchase peace. The chief of
Ladékh has informed the Emperor of China, that the English are
constructing a road to Kaughri, which is situated near Jspitti. On the
receipt of which intelligence, the Emperor sent a Zandu, or personal
inquiry, to Arzeng, to watch the state of affairs in that quarter; and
ordered at the same time, his garrison of Rodokh, which is 12 stages
from Laddkh, to be reinforced by a large force.

Opinion of the people of Iskdrdoh of the power and authority of the
Emperor of China.—lIt is said, that the Emperor of China has 3000
Zandu in his service, and that whenever any affair of importance
occurs, one of them is dispatched to settle it. They enjoy great
confidence, and supersede the authority of the Aubus or governors,
where they may happen to be sent. If at any time he should suspect
or be dissatisfied with the conduct of the Aubus, he deputes a Zandu
to look after him; they are his most confidential agents, and possess
high influence in the state. Wherever a Zandu is, his acts are
supreme, and no one can dare dispute his authority.

Articles imported from Russia.—Twisted gun barrels; Bulghar
hides ; cast-iron vessels ; horses.

Imports from Yargqand and Kashghar.—Colored cotton piece goods ;
scarfs; salt; China silk pieces; tea; and China crockery-ware.

Exports.—Unwrought gold; zard alu (apricots), and other dried
fruits; rhubarb ; asafcetida.

602 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

II].—Journal of a Tour through Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia.
By Captain R. Mienan, Bombay European Regt. F. L. S. and
M.R.A.S.

[Continued from page 590, vol. I1I.]

After arranging our baggage, and paying the boatmen a tomaun,
which is equivalent to 12s. 4d., we directed our course due south, and
soon arrived at the gates of Meand&b or Meandow. On entering
the town, we passed through filthy lanes, bordered by mud walls ;
scrambled over ruined huts, and descended deep pits, that furnished
materials for new ones; till at length we gained a lofty dilapidated
wall, enclosing the principal dwellings, and entering the gateway,
passed through a miserable bazar. We looked in vain for streets,
much less decent buildings, (a few ants’ nests presented themselves,)
until we were conducted to the houses of some wealthy merchants—
these were most carefully concealed from view by high mud walls of
the most wretched appearance, and encircling them were the huts of
the poor artisans and cultivators. Although night was fast approach-
ing, no lights were seen in any quarter, except the bazars, which
were in fact, the only thoroughfares that deserved the name of streets.

We took possession of a large house, the property of one JArar
Kv'tr Kuan. Its rooms were capacious, its walls white-washed, and
what is very uncommon in Persia, its height was nearly one hundred
feet. This edifice was fast crumbling to decay, and upon its summit
great numbers of storks had built their circular nests of reed. The
natives of the place called them ‘‘ Haji Lag-lag,” the former title,
from their making a yearly pilgrimage to the level countries during
the winter season, (yea, the stork in the heaven knoweth her appointed
time ; Jeremiah, viii. 7,) and the latter, from the loud clattering
sound made by its long bills. Although these birds are considered
unclean, (these are they which ye shall have in abomination among the
fowls, the stork and heron after her kind ; Leviticus, xi. 13, 19;) yet,
they are marked by qualities of an amiable nature, and so attached
to house-tops, they appear under no fear of being dislodged. Indeed
the natives entertain an idea that they bring a blessing to the
dwelling on which they build, and in Egypt, they are held as objects
of veneration. Brucs in his travels, remarks that it was a great
breach of order to kill any of these birds in Cairo, and Axi Bry
mentions an extraordinary establishment at Zez for the treatment of
lunatics: ‘‘it is very strange that great part of the funds has been
bequeathed by the wills of various charitable testators, for the express

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 603

purpose of nursing sick cranes and storks; and burying them when
dead.”’—(See Travels of Aut Bry.)

Meandab is on the frontiers of one of the most remarkable regions
in the world—Kurdistan, the Switzerland of the East—an immense
succession of hill, valley, dells of exhaustless fertility, and mountains
towering to the height of Mont Blanc. The top of the great range
of Zagros rises upwards of 12,000 feet above the level of the ocean !
The oppression and cruelties it has endured; the vengeance it has
inflicted upon its Turkish and Persian neighbours; and, above all,
its acquisition of independence: these circumstances together invest
this country with a peculiar interest. The geographical division of
Kurdistan is nearly as follows :

Kafrdistan proper, comprising the country lying between the degrees of
northern latitude 35 and 38, and longitude 43 and 46, .. Inhabitants, 250,000
Ardelan, ; Bee a rte ieetee Mont an fateh deta cD Os damien s « , LO0;000

ee

PERAPICHO CPN Tt Tet a caste Bb) ols ‘afalevel wis clo"e'g Gre abe cilelece ane ciate caf ate Do... .... 100,000

LIEN Ad 86 Goeb oda BUONO:

Of this population, at least four-fifths are Kurds; the rest are
Christians and Jews. The mountainous regions have at no period
been under the Turks or Persians. The horse and the sword had made
them masters of the plain; they became feudal possessors of the
territory under the tenure of service to the SuAu, and held the
remaining Kurds as cultivators of the soil. But thousands removed
to the security of the mountains, and as the Turkish or Persian chain
became heavier, they flung it off, and joined their free countrymen.
The vacancy produced by this flight has never been filled up, though
large emigrations have entered the country; and in whatever quarter
they settled, they have been hardy, active and intrepid.

Turkish oppression, on the one hand, and Persian, on the other, has
been so directly the source of the chief defects in the Kurdish charac-
ter, that in proportion as that fatal influence is weakened, so rises the
national character. Its nature is so elastic, that it springs up, even
in every momentary removal of the pressure; but its true displays
are to be found where the tyrant dares not come. The greatest
contrast to the inhabitants of the plains is to be found in those
mountainous retreats where there are no foreign inhabitants. Here
the Kurds are hardy and heroic, passionately fond of their homes
and country, and subsisting on little. The picture has its dark side.
They are inconstant, envious, and treacherous. But it must be
remembered, that these defects would be the natural qualities of any
people leading such uncertain and distracted lives. In his most

604 Journal of a Tour through | Nov.

inaccessible hold, pent up amid wild tracts of country, shut out from
general communication, liable to frequent and sudden inroads of a
merciless enemy, and from his cradle to his grave, either the spoil or
the antagonist of the oppressor. Poverty, suspicion, loneliness—a life
of hazard—flight or attack—what original constitution of virtue could
have attained its true stature? There is no national character that
would not have darkened under this perpetual rudeness of fortune. It
is really astonishing that the Kurd retains any qualities entitling him
to rank among men.

For several centuries Kurdistan has been a continued scene of
war, turbulence and robbery. Some of its eastern districts have
remained in the power of Ass&s Mirz, whose force has never been
able to reduce to subjection the various chieftains in the north and
south, who claimed a predatory independence. The form of the
country, indeed, is sufficiently favorable to such pretensions ; being
intersected by mountainous tracts, over which it is extremely difficult
to conduct an army. The Eliats, or wandering tribes, roam over
its extensive plains, and the Persians, from Azerbijan, have long
carried their ravages not only over the frontier, but into the heart
of the country, over its ranges of hills, and to the gates of its towns.
The desolation and want of security can hardly be conceived, when
occasioned by these ravages. In some tracts, the whole open country
has been swept, the inhabitants having been put to death, or carried
away as slaves. The consequence is, that numerous small towns,
particularly near the frontiers, have been abandoned, as well as all
cultivation. The peasant goes out to his labour with his matchlock
slung over his shoulder. All intercourse between villages is carried
on with the greatest timidity, and at intervals, when a sufficient
number of men can be collected to form a kafilah, and to resist the
bands of robbers, even these are frequently attacked, and the
merchants and travellers composing them not only plundered, but
detained in captivity, or murdered. This state of things has given
rise to extensive dealings in slaves.

The tribes which range the deserts differ in their habits, according to
the circumstances in which they are placed. In some parts they are pas-
toral, hospitable, and kind to strangers; in others, they are reserved,
and shun all intercourse; in others again, predatory, cruel, and feroci-
ous. Those of the latter description are to be found near Lake Van, and
in Armenia, towards Erzeroum*. We find them to the north, on the

* As a proof of this, I may mention the recent murder of M. Scuuttz, a
distinguished antiquarian and indefatigable traveller. This melancholy event

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 605

borders of Georgia, plundering villages, committing outrages, attacking
towns, and carrying off Georgian and Circassian girls. On the south,
they dispose of their captives, to the traders who supply Bagdad and
other Turkish cities; and on the east and west, are found the wild
mountaineers, who are not naturally cruel, but obliged in self-defence
to assume a fierce character. This effect can onlv be ascribed to the
distracted state of Kurdistan, and its inability to afford security to
the people.

April 5th.—My muleteers were slow and reluctant to load the
mules this morning, having heard during the night that the Kurds
of these parts were a most desperate set, caring for neither God nor
devil; that they never took off their boots from one year’s end to
another, much less prostrated themselves in prayer; that in fact, we
should starve by entering the country, as it would be impossible to
hold any communications with them. With little difficulty I convinced
them in some degree that these opinions were erroneous, and we
quitted Meandab, directing our course south-east, over a plain
surrounded by argillaceous mountains. We then struck into a deep
valley, profusely covered with coarse weeds and herbage, and through
which flowed a stream formed by the melting snow. When we got
half way up this valley, we saw several Kdrdish encampments on
our right. They appeared very meanly built, chiefly of mud: they
were low, having only one small door to admit light and air, and
were roofed with a thatch of reed. There were others formed of
two stone walls, with a covering of goats’ hair cloth. Although our
people were dying with thirst, they would not stop from the fear of
being plundered ; I, however, rode up to one of these encampments,
and was served with dubbon, which is a very refreshing beverage.
After this, I rejoined the baggage, and we continued to pursue a
southerly course, and passed a large body of Kurds, whose extraor-
dinary dress and appearance, so different from that of the Persians
whom we had been accustomed to see, gave a novelty to the scene
that was extremely interesting. Their arms, their habits, the furni-
ture of their horses, resembled those of the Turks ; but they possessed

took place near the village of Bash-Kullah. Sir Jon KinNeEIR immediately
sent a confidential person to the spot to collect, if possible, the traveller's papers
and effects, aud to take steps for the punishment of the murderers, The loss of
this intelligent traveller is one of the greatest which oriental literature has ever
sustained ; it is to be hoped, that the larger portion of his manuscript collections
had been received in France, and that those which were in his possession at the
time of his death may yet be recovered: so that the fruit of his extensive travels
and laborious researches may not be lost to the world.

4 1

606 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

a wild ferociousness of air, which is highly characteristic of their
wandering life. This interesting group would have been a fine study
of costume for Hayter’s accurate pencil. Two of this party joined
us, and in a mixed dialect of Persian and Arabic, asked me if I was
not going to Sulimaniah ; for, said they, ‘‘ we are anxious to visit that
city, to pay our respects to Su’niman Paswa, and if possible, to
obtain his head for a foot-ball.”’ Not liking the appearance of these
cavaliers, I was determined to try at an escape by a ruse de guerre ;
so exclaimed, with a feigned astonishment, ‘‘ Sulimaniah! then, I
have been misdirected, I am bound for Hamadan, and find I am
wandering from my way!’ This had a proper effect; for they faced
about, and joined their companions. We rode for nine farsangs
through a country remarkably well cultivated. The valley we had
entered presented an inclined surface to the west, from ten to fifteen
miles broad, including the skirts of the hills on either side, little
interrupted with irregularities, and all capable of the richest culture,
though a great portion lay waste; but the villages were so thinly
scattered over it, that it was surprising to see the extent cultivated.
The whole soil of the valley was of a fine light-coloured clayey loam ;
its surface being slightly diversified by hillocks, chiefly artificial, the
sites of old villages. A stream of no great natural size, but at this
time swelled by the dissolving snows, glided through it, and the hills
undulated and retreated into small plains, which were luxuriantly
cultivated. I was told that these glens produced wonderful crops,
with the aid of a little artificial irrigation. The main valley appeared
less productive, but sufficiently so to prove the existence of great
fertility of soil, and human industry. Few parts of Persia could equal
it. As the inhabitants of the villages are both shepherds and
cultivators, they were at this time ploughing the land. During
summer they descend to reap the harvest, and leave their wives and
children in care of their meadows, and the flocks that graze upon
them.

Continuing our route, we passed through an irregular and winding
ascent, which brought us to the village of Bogam, situated on the
bank of a small rill, which ran into the river Jakunti. Nothing
could exceed the appearance of poverty which prevailed throughout
the place, or the want of comfort and security. This is doubtless
to prevent the excitement of any cupidity; for even this appearance
of squalid misery does not protect the inhabitants from oppression ;
nor in this neighbourhood are they ever free from the incursions of
the Persians. It was only the other day, that JArar Ku’ Kuan,
the governor of Marangha, was ordered by Prince Apps Mirza to

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 607

render this part of Kurdistan a desert, and to destroy by fire and
the sword all the hamlets and their inmates that might cross his
track. The Prince’s order ran thus: “hang the men upon the trees,
and tear them asunder; rip up the women, and tread over them.”
Upon his approach, the inhabitants flew to the adjacent mountain
gorges, and over summits which, as the Persian poet observes, ‘‘ were
never trod by human foot, and scarcely ever by the wild birds of
heaven.” The order was obeyed in regard to this village, which is
now little better than a heap of ashes. Two short years have only
passed since I was here on my homeward route, and then Bogam
was a flourishing little town.

Not being able to procure forage for our cattle, or even refresh-
ment for ourselves, we departed hence before the dawn of day.
Mirady, the object of our march, lay at a distance of thirty-five miles,
-and the road appeared unusually rugged. About noon we reached
a lovely plain surrounded by mountains. Spring had already strewed
the ground with her richest bloom ; and the brightness of the sky,
together with the picturesque appearance of the country, filled the
mind with delightful ideas. A serpentine stream meandered through
this delicious spot, and the most beautiful lawns diversified the scene.
At length we came in sight of the village, and were soon received by
its chief, who ordered his women to give us the best room in his
cottage. They busied themselves with great humour in clearing
away their domestic utensils, and lighted a bright fire for the evening.
These women were fair and handsome; they had black eyes, and
long dark hair; low in stature, with delicate features. The children
of both sexes had fine ruddy complexions, though of course they
soon contract a tawny hue. The women of this district appeared
very industrious, and always were seen assisting in the toils of
agriculture ; and on no occasion did they conceal their faces, but
went about entirely unveiled; though it was considered a mark of
impoliteness to stare at them, nevertheless, they appeared highly
gratified at exciting our attention, and we clearly perceived that
vanity was the characteristic of the sex in this, as well as other,
countries.

After being served with delicious cheese made from the milk of
sheep, and some excellent flat cakes of bread, the chief of the village
invited me to his home. On entering the house, I saw three or
more men seated in a corner of one of the rooms, with some rude-
looking instruments resting on their laps. One resembled our
flageolet ; another, the guitar ; and a third, the kettle-drum. A signal
being made, one of the men advanced, and seating himself in the

fies

608 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

centre of the room, sung a wild air, which was neither pleasing nor
melodious. After this, two boys got up and danced ; placing them-
selves in a variety of extraordinary attitudes, which consisted princi-
pally of gesticulation. The old chief said, he considered dancing
both mean and ignoble, as it was practised by none except such as
make a trade of it for hire. But he must have spoken ironically ;
since the moment they were done, one of the boys presented me
with a chibouque, and was very officious, which intimated, that a
recompense was expected for the evening’s amusement.

April 7th.—After taking a hasty meal, and smoking a chibouque
with the chief of the village, we continued our way south-easterly,
through a glen, where it was refreshing to observe the quantity of
cultivation that appeared on every side. On entering a larger valley,
a great extent of meadow land was observed, as well as several
hamlets.» Here also, for the first time, did we remark wood in any
considerable quantity upon the hills on our right, which were a
ramification of the great Zagros range. The trees were bare of
leaves, which made it difficult to determine their species. We now
entered a thick jungle, intermixed with rocks, and matted over by
creepers. This spot I can never forget, for we were amid an endless
variety of forest scenery. The masses of shade thrown down from
the naked and fantastic crags that burst abruptly forth, the luxuriant
fertility of the mountains, seen through the transparent clouds that
floated along below their forest-crested summit, the awful stillness,
and the immensity of individual objects, were pregnant with delight
and amazement. I have often gazed amid these wilds, while beauty
after beauty bore in upon my eye and mind, till I have turned away
with a painful fulness at heart; and if my delight were more than
was fit for the frame that felt it, I sometimes really thought there
must have been some deleterious power in the air breathed in these
scenes, until | remembered their palpable and irrefutable beauty.
I looked upon the present prospect as if I knew I should never see
it again. The snow-capped mountains were towering before us, the
sea of forests spreading around ; far below, a beautiful stream rippled
in the sun, and sent up the music of its plash! The small Muhamme-
dan sepulchre, overshadowed by the tamarisk, crested the banks on
the opposite shore, whence streams spread through the bright green
land they fertilized, to where a bulwark of hills rose to the clouds
beyond the white summits of Mount Zagros.

To clear us from this wooded bower, we hired a shepherd, who
appeared to have returned from the plain we had crossed in the
morning. The man performed his task faithfully, being allowed no

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 609

temptation to do otherwise ; and from his knowledge of the road,
greatly shortened our distance. During the march, we frequently
passed parties of ill-looking fellows, who were travelling to the town
of Ouroomia, and whose inquiries about us, as they greeted our guide,
excited something more than my curiosity. I therefore asked him,
if those people would have lightened our cattle of their loads, had we
been less prepared ? ‘‘ Of course,” he replied, ‘* and we of our village
would do the same—we none of us scruple, when fair opportunities
occur.’ This avowal, uttered with the greatest sang froid, evinced a re-
solute principle of rascality ; but as we afforded no ‘‘ fair opportunities,”
we got on famously together, till the necessity of our acquaintance
ceased. We passed an extensive encampment of Eliats under some
overhanging rocks: their wild appearance, mingled with horses,
asses, oxen, and sheep, were admirably characteristic of the place,
as they met the eye, gathered together in groups around a fire, which
emitted its thin spire of smoke. Had we known of their vicinity,
we should certainly have endeavoured to pass by a circuitous path ;
and had they been apprised of us, our property would not perhaps
have remained unmolested. They were verv inquisitive, demanded
whither we were travelling, talked both loud and long, and endea-
voured to persuade us to remain for the night under the protection
of their tents. ‘The scenery around us became so singularly wild,
that I regretted the approach of night. Our progress was often
much impeded by the thickness of the wood; but on descending
towards a small village, which appeared in a retired nook of the
opposite hills, the cliffs grew more majestic, the precipices more lofty,
and the forest more beautiful. On reaching the enclosure of the
village, we were forced to remain a long time in waiting, before any
shelter could be found for us; and after all, to take possession of a
hut, hastily emptied for the occasion, full of dirt and vermin. Every
thing was in confusion, and our foolish Muhammedan, instead of
exerting himself, stood like a drunkard biting his whip, without ever
offering the slightest assistance. Our evening meal was late and
cold, and we retired to rest as little pleased with ourselves, as with
our attendants. Next morning the inhabitants came in a body to
assure us, that it would be impossible to cross the mountains without
lightening the mules; and that even then, the passage would be
extremely difficult. I thought this a mere pretext to obtain some
money, so refused to employ them in any manner. However, they
knew the state of the road better, and following the muleteers, soon
convinced us that their services were indispensable. The morning
was excessively cold, and as we approached the mountains we had

610 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

to ascend, the cattle wound through a sort of rut, or channel, worn
in the solid rock, where the width barely allowed us to pass without
touching its sides, so that we were frequently obliged to hold up
both feet in a horizontal direction, level with the animal’s back, to
prevent their being bruised between its sides and the rock, which
could not be avoided by any other mode. On reaching the base of
the mountain, we found that it was extremely precipitous, and con-
sequently were obliged to indent upon the villagers, who triumph-
antly came forward, and assisted in supporting our cattle. The
ascent, which was circuitous and abrupt, occupied the space of four
hours, and proved so distressing to the mules, that they were forced
to be relieved of their loads. This appeared to assist them very
immaterially, as huge masses of snow lay in ravines in every direction,
and they sunk to the girths at each step, when, in endeavouring to
rise, two of them rolled down the precipice with their loads, which
consisted of dead bodies en route for Kerbala. On nearing the
summit, the road was so terribly furrowed by the dissolving snows,
that its ascent became nearly impracticable. The difficulty of this
passage was heightened by the conduct of a body of Kiards, who
from the top had been watching our approach, and now commenced
hurling large stones upon those bearing our baggage. My muleteer,
who had been quaking for the safety of his mules, became much
alarmed. ‘‘ Stakhferallah!” he exclaimed, ‘‘ there’s enough of them,
to be sure!’ <‘‘ Never fear, I replied ; by the help of Allah, and the
Prophet, we may check their fury.” ‘‘ Had we only a dozen brave
Kazilbashes, with their matchlocks and swords, you might then talk
so; but now,” said the old monkey-faced muleteer, ‘‘I fear I shall
become a beggar; nevertheless, Allah-hu Akbar!” By this time our
trunks had been thrown down in the snow, and the fray commenced
with huge crooked sticks, sabres, and matchlocks, mounted with
prongs, resembling a hay-maker’s pitch-fork. The enemy soon lost
the support of four of their party, who were conveyed away wounded,
and the majority of the rest in all probability would have willingly
given up a contest in which so little was to be gained. But there
were among them some of a determined spirit, who urged on the
rest to revenge their wounded companions, and exerted themselves
successfully to inspire them with confidence. My pistols being loaded,
I went amongst them, and threatened to shoot the leader, when they
cried out with surprise, ‘They have guns.” This appeared to
cool their rage and determination, and on their retreating to the
edge of the mountain, we succeeded on rolling them over its side, '
while the snow shelved down upon their heads, and nearly buried’

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 611

them. The Memandar, who had hitherto remained an inactive
spectator of the scene, approached me, bowing respectfully, and said,
«« Barik-allah ! Mash-allah ! may your shadow never be less; may
your servant find grace in your eyes!’ but instead of noticing his
nauseous expressions, I ordered him to return to his country, as his
services were dispensed with. The success of this debut gave anima-
tion to the old muleteer and his assistants, who exclaimed, ‘‘ Pundh-
be Khodah,” and recited a passage from the Qoran, in which the
words ‘“‘ La Allah il Allah, Muhammed Rasdl il Allah,” were very
frequently repeated.

After a most laborious descent from the mountain, we traversed
its base in a southerly direction, passing on our way a ruined cara-
vansary, from whence the Kurds had issued ; thereby converting into
a place of molestation to the traveller, what had been erected for his
accommodation. This mountain terminated in a sharp point; after
rounding which, we entered upon well cultivated land, extending to
the village of Bannah. Two miles to the northward of this place,
we crossed a considerable stream of water, and near its bank several
extensive burying places were situated. ‘These places of sepulture
were at a considerable distance from any town, and the graves were
all distinct and separate, each having a rough block of stone placed
upright, both at the head and feet; while the intermediate space,
instead of having a slab placed horizontally, was either planted with
flowers or covered with broken pieces of tile. Some few graves had
circular rooms, with cupolas built over them, which being kept white-
washed and ornamented, exhibited an excellent comment on the
expression of our Saviour, when he compares hypocrites to ‘‘ white
washed sepulchres, which appear outwardly beautiful, but within
are full of dead men’s bones and all uncleanness.’’ The funerals of
the Kurds have a reference to those of the Hebrews. How earnestly
does the patriarch Jacob enjoin his sons to bury him in Canaan, in
the family sepulchre ; and Joseph, in like manner, exacts an oath from
his people, to carry his bones with them when they leave Egypt. If
a Kurd dies at a distance from his native village, the inhabitants are
bound to remove the corpse, and inter it with decency. I have often
met a party escorting one who was never more to smile or weep in
this mortal world, and on conversing with them, they dwelt upon
the disgrace and ill-luck which would be attached to him who neglect-
ed to bury a body in its ‘‘ proper place of rest.” We observed
graves decorated with garlands as among the Welsh, which are
removed at the end of the mourning. We reached Bannah at night-
fall, nearly exhausted by fatigue and hunger, and assembled round a

612 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

blazing fire in the Sheikh’s house, where some excellent coffee was
ready to be offered. I have often wondered how these people could
have lived before the discovery of this beverage, the champaigne of
the East. In the most desolate Khan it is handed round, and if you
refuse to carry it to your lips, you are considered to be displeased
with your accommodation, or at the behaviour of your attendants.

In the room next to the one we occupied, three Turks were repos-
ing. In the course of the evening they requested I would share a
pipe with them. After smoking together for some time, one of them
said, ‘‘ We have just arrived from Bagdad, and are travelling Chupper
(post) to Tabriz. Where are you going? Have you got any money?
Are you a Russian spy? Perhaps you wish to enter Daoup Pasna’s
service. He has already a Feringhi (alluding to Mr. Littiesonn,
formerly Adjutant of H. M.’s 2nd or Queen’s Royal Regiment,)
instructing the half-starved Fellahs how to put themselves into a
number of odd positions.” One of his companions interrupted him,
saying, ‘‘He is not a Feringhi, but one of the Ingrése from Hind,
and a sharp fellow too; though I don’t like to see these changes, or
we may all be turned into the great desert.’’ I asked what had
occurred at Bagdad? The Turk raised his head, and without ceasing
to attend to a large coffee-pot which was on the fire, began, ‘‘ By
my soul, Daoup Pasa, our master, will soon have no more Tchoco-
dars ; he prefers the Giaours to us already! What shall we do if the
Pashas and Aghas are able to eat us as they like? We must all fly
to these mountains, and become Kurds! Our Fellahs are all discon-
tented, the taxes of the unbelievers have been increased, and perhaps
even Mussalmans will have to pay them. Those Muscovite dogs have
revolted against the Sultan, because he would not make their Sheikh
a Sultan also. Even the Ingrese will soon compel the true-believers
to chastise them, as I have heard say they now refuse to pay tribute,
and even Maumoup himself is more like them than a true believer.
He likes their ways better than his own. God is great; he knows if
these changes are for the better: and as to that son of a dog
Munammep Aut Pasua, who has done it all, may Allah grant that
his eyes may burst.” ‘‘ Inshallah, Inshallah,” shouted his companions,
who considered their friend’s speech a very eloquent one.

On our quitting Bannah, the temperature became more moderate,
the country was hill and dale, and the whole one continued coat of
verdure. From hence the sloping sides of the mountains were
covered with oak trees, and to us, who had been accustomed to the
arid hills and mountains of Persia, it was a luxurious prospect. The
road afterwards wound through wild and rocky defiles in the moun-

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 613

tains, and by the side of a rapid torrent. We followed its rills, which
were beautifully fringed with willows, presenting to the eye a pretty
appearance. It is this plentiful supply of water which renders these
tracts so fertile; while in Persia, this inestimable blessing is the most
scanty of nature’s bounties. The plains and hills are also equally
destitute of wood—a few trees only being planted in the environs of
cities, chiefly, if not entirely, for the purposes of building. So great
and manifest are the natural advantages of Kurdistan, that the verdict
of all traveilers is unanimous in commending the fertility of her soil.
But since the beginning of that time from which we have any
authentic records of her history, wars, dissentions, and violent
distractions, have scared away improvement, and Kurdistan is still
— ‘‘ An unweeded garden
That grows to seed.”’

In ascending a very abrupt mountain, the mules had to walk literally
upon the edge of a precipice, where the least false step would have
consigned them to inevitable destruction: yet the confidence of the
muleteers in the steady tread of these animals was such, as to make
them trot on without the slightest apprehension. From the top of
the mountain a most sublime and extensive view presented itself.
Immediately in front of us appeared the snowy ranges of Mount
Zagros towering to heaven, and beneath them several beautiful
valleys and plains extended to the base of the mountain we were
commencing to descend; while on either side, and in the rear, were
hills of various elevation, without assuming a bare or barren appear-
ance. Had I seen this picture of nature upon canvas, I should at
once have pronounced it a production of the imagination. Here
was an assembly of natural beauties, precipitous mountains, rich
valleys, clear brooks, fantastic rocks, and wooded crags! Man alone
has steeped it in gloom, and rendered its inhabitants a desperate
people. But Kurdish history is one of suffering, and well may [
address that beautiful country in the feeling language of the poet—

Oh tu! cui feo la sorte

Dono infelice di bellezza, ond’ hai

. Funesta dote d’infiniti guai,

Che in fronte scritti per gran doglia porte?

Without any exception, I may safely aver that Kurdistan is the
loveliest country I ever beheld. The passes over its mountains are
of the highest interest to the traveller, as they offer opportunities of
observing portions of the globe, which must from their nature have
been in their present state since their creation. In their recesses, he
may observe from the wonderful and varied position of their stratifi-

4x

614 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

cation what have been the operations of nature on the grandest scale.
These passes are in truth the most sublime and solemn solitudes that
can possibly exist, and rouse the breast of man to meditations border-
ing upon rapture. Uninterrupted by the intrusions of the world, he
can hold converse with his God in the midst of his most awful works—

To sit on rocks, to muse o’er flood and fell,

To slowly trace the forest’s shady scene,

Where things that own not man’s dominion dwell,

And mortal foot hath ne’er, or rarely been ;

To climb the trackless mountain all unseen

With the wild flock that never needs a fold ;

Alone o’er steeps and foaming falls to lean ;

This is not solitude; ’tis but to hold

Converse with nature’s charms, and view her stores unroll’d.

On arriving at the base of the mountain, we descried the wide
prospect of the windings of the Bostan river, that issues from the
Carducian mountains. Bost4n, being interpreted, signifies the
‘‘ garden,” and gives its name to a small hamlet and valley situated
on the southern bank of the river—a denomination well due to the
whole of the surrounding country. Its hills are clothed with wood,
its villages embosomed amongst trees, and its fruitful soil reminded
me of countries where man is, “like a tree planted by the rivers of
water, that bringeth forth his fruit in season, whose leaf shall not
wither, and whatsoever he doeth shall prosper.”

Independent of these lovely valleys and plains which display the
most abundant fertility, the mountains in general possess a soil of
considerable depth; and the wild luxuriance of unforced vegetation
proves their productive qualities. The order of cultivation appears
to be thus: the plains and valleys are appropriated to grain, the
southern slopes of the hills form vineyards; the northern produce
the oil and tobacco plants; and on the summits and inaccessible crags
the goats and mountain sheep browse upon the heath, while oxen,
horses, and cows, graze upon the pasture that skirts the villages.
Wheat and barley are both plentiful and cheap ; grapes are not so richly
flavoured as the Persian, but cherries and other stone fruits are the
finest I ever ate. The Kurdistan walnut is the largest in the world,
and nearly all the European fruits are very abundant. The cattle
are small, but of the best breed, and so are sheep and goats. They
all sell cheap, as well as horses, which are proverbial for performing
the most astonishing journeys. Sir Jonn Macponatp KinneIr
assured me, that he had ridden a distance of seventy miles over this
mountainous country without once dismounting from his horse; and in
June, 1828, 1 purchased a gelding at Bagdad, that carried me to

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 615

Tiflis in sixteen days. The distance is nearly a thousand miles! The
cows yield about half a gallon of milk daily, and the sheep and goats
assist to supply the dairy: cheese being always made of their milk.
They use the wild artichoke to turn the milk, and their cheeses are
made up into small round cakes. Their butter is well flavoured, but
not of much consistency. It is churned by putting the cream into
a goat’s skin suspended to the side of a tent, and tossed to and fro.
The Bedouins practise the same method. ‘‘ Dans un peau de chévre,
encore garnie de ses poils ils mettent le lait, comme dans une outre.
Une femme Bedouine aprés avoir fortement noué les deux bouts,
et suspendu le tout 4 une branche d’arbre, en secouant l’outre de
toute sa force, parvient a faire le beurre.” —/(Castellan. Meurs des
Ottomans, t. 6, p. 60.)

Several tribes have five thousand sheep: they seldom kill any, but
subsist chiefly on milk and butter. Hence, the number is continually
increasing. A

The Kiurdish villages, although small, are very numerous, and all
built in the same style, of large unhewn stones, which have no bind-
ing material. They consist of an outer and inner room only, having
a floor, and walls plastered with mud, and a roof formed by cross
beams of wood, covered with reeds, or straw matting, and over that
again, a thick covering of mud. They are generally seated upon the
declivity of a mountain, and some idea may be formed of the steep-
ness of their streets from this peculiarity of position, that the top of
one house forms an exact level with the bottom of the one above it;
and each house having a door that opens into this space; the roof
of one dwelling forms a level walk for its next, or upper neighbour,
where the inhabitants sit to enjoy their chibouques. We remained
the night in one of these hamlets, and left shortly after day-break
for the capital. After descending with great abruptness for ten
miles, crossing several mountain torrents that wriggled over our
track like serpents, we entered a gorge in the mountains, and com-
menced our ascent up the wildest mountains I had ever seen. The
morning was unusually sultry; and during our journey, a dreadful
storm of hail and sleet, accompanied by thunder and vivid lightning,
broke upon us. We were soon enveloped in a thick mist, which
brought to my remembrance the situation of the ten thousand
Greeks under ZenorHon, during their ever memorable retreat over
these very mountains. They were hid from the enemy by a mist
similar in density to the one we here experienced ; for it was with
difficulty we could at times discern objects at ten yards’ distance.
Having reached a considerable height, a sublimely vast extent of

4x 2

616 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

mountain, ravine, and glen Jay exposed to our glance; but were
quickly obscured by the passing clouds. It was now easy to discover,
without the help of any barometer but that of our own feelings, that
we had reached a great elevation—a fact which was proved by the
successive risings of hill over which our road was directed. Still
ascending, we came to the extreme summit, from whence we saw
the city of Sulimaniah marked by trees in a nook of the mountains.
It appeared beneath our feet, although we were full ten miles from
it. In fact, from this lofty pinnacle, we seemed to descry at once
‘‘all the kingdoms of the world, and the glory of them.’’ Our descent
was one of extreme difficulty ; but our eyes were delighted with the
general aspect of the valley below, and the situation of Sulimaniah
at the end of it. The hills by which it was surrounded on all sides
were sufficiently broken in their outline to be picturesque, and the
plain which skirted them at their feet was clothed in the richest
verdure. The grain-fields assumed a lovely appearance; the gardens
occupying distant portions of the valley, and a stream meandering
through it, gave such a luxuriance to the picture, as to unite beauty
with fertility, and wealth with usefulness.

On nearing the city, a mound of considerable magnitude rises on
the left of the road, which nearly resembled the tumuli of Greece.
It is not improbable that the spot may mark the tomb of some Greek
general. Many similar may be seen in Kurdistan, which nearly
resemble those in Wiltshire. Indeed, such remains of antiquity are
spread over the whole surface of the globe.

Sulim4niah, or Sulimaney, the Shehrazour of the ancients, is most
romantically situated on the northern bank of the river Diala, in a
deep valley, irregularly formed by the bases of the Carducian range,
which, covered with forests of oak, and clothed in snow to its
summit. entrench it on every side. Its geographical position is 35°
30’ north latitude, and 44° 45’ east longitude. During the retreat
of Heracuius this city was distinguished by the name of Siazuros,
and not far hence was the city of Holw4n, the retirement of
Yezprserp after the battle of Cadesia, a spot to which the Khalifs of
Bagdad resorted during the summer season. It was ruined by
Hvuaxo, and has never since recovered its consequence.

Sulim4niah is an unwalled town: its houses are built extremely
low, which gives them a mean appearance, though doubtless they
are better secured against the snows and cold of this elevated region.
The streets are narrow, and run irregular; and there are neither
good bazars nor fine mosques to relieve the dull monotony of the
common buildings. The houses are mostly built of unhewn stones,

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotomia. 617

plastered over with mud; though some few are constructed with
bricks. The climate is said to be very fine, and the inhabitants,
who approach to the number of 20,000, are robust and active: their
aspects forbidding, their expressions of countenance harsh, and
their complexions dark. The government of Sulimaniah is in the
hands of a Pasha, who is by birth a Kurd, and subject to neither
Torks nor Persians. His name is Sunzman, and he is highly
popular and very indulgent. For the purpose of pleasing the Russians,
he sends an annual present in cash to Appds Mirza, who the
northern barbarians hope will soon employ their officers in preference
to those of the English. Connt Paskewirtcn is desirous of taking
the Kurds under his especial protection, that in case of need, they
may harass by their sudden and repeated incursions the inhabitants
of those countries by which they are bounded. For such a duty
they are eminently fitted. The military force for the defence of the
town does not exceed 2000 men. About a fourth of that number
are frequently in attendance at the palace, which is the Pasha’s
residence. It is a mean and ruined pile, composed of spacious courts
and extensive inclosures. The trade of Sulmaniah is in a very
declining state ; there are only two or three Armenians, agents for
some Bagdad merchants, who receive gall-nuts in exchange for a
few Indian commodities, which come up by the way of Bussorah.

Nothing is known of the history of Sulimaniah. M. Nissunr
visited this part of the country in the year 1769, and found the
people subject to a sort of feudal government. They are imagined
to be the Carduchai of Zenopuon, and their national character has
descended unchanged from time immemorial. Kinneir has made
Sennah, which is situated about ninety-five miles to the eastward,
the capital; but the Waly or chief of that town is a mere creature
dependent upon His Majesty of Persia, to whom he transmits a
handsome sum annually. The father of the present Waély was a
man of great power and independence; but he became deranged,
and unfortunately, madness would seem to run in the family, as his
son has given ample proofs of it.

Sulimaniah is an extensive place, and forms a central emporium
to the neighbouring tracts of cultivation. The country which sur-
rounds it is charming; the soil gravelly, as far as its immediate
vicinity ; when it becomes more sandy, and of a light loamy nature.
The rich appearance of the wheat and barley I have already noticed,
the green at this time was most beautiful. We found the tillage
of the district excellent ; the fields being neatly divided into square
compartments, for the benefit of irrigation,

618 Journal of a Tour through [Nov.

Being the bearer of a letter for the Pasha, he assigned me a house
in the best part of the city, and I found the people both civil and
obliging. They pretend to pique themselves upon hospitality, but
how its duties are discharged, will depend entirely on circumstances.
For instance, in the year 1828, habited as a Turk, I travelled through
Kiirdistaén in company with a man who pretended to be a lineal
descendant of the prophets; and we journeyed a distance of six
hundred miles, halting at this city on the way, without spending the
sum of ten Persian rials. The Seyad afterwards assured me, that he
was offered a wife at every village through which we passed ; but,

added he, ‘‘ as I was your Mehmandar, I could not act with such
indecorum.” However, he actually had a wife of his own, at every

town of note between Bagdad and Tabriz. This man’s name is
IsumaEL; he has often served English travellers, and has always
given infinite satisfaction. At the time I am now writing, I have
not disguised myself, but am in the costume of my own country ;
the consequence is, I find travelling here more expensive than in
Persia. Nevertheless, 1 would advise all travellers who care not for
the expence, and have plenty of spare time, to pass hence in their
own dress; for their persons are respected, and in security: whereas,
by adopting a foreign garb (although better opportunities are afforded
of observing the people and country), a traveller might be murdered
for the value of a decent pair of shulwars (breeches). My own life
was attempted more than once at the time I have just referred to,
but, now I feel as secure as if I were passing through Regent Street.

Amongst those tribes whose morals have been vitiated by habits of
rapine, it is unsafe to trust to the strongest professions. For there
can be no doubt that cruelty and avarice characterize this people,
though they by no means hoard their money; always preferring to
convert it into horses, mares, lances, pistols, swords, and ornaments
for their women. Cash is not very current amongst them, purchases
being made by barter. In all my travels I never could procure change
for a sum equivalent to a rupee.

The females are not shut up in this or any other Kurdish town ;
nor are they veiled, like those of most Muhammedan countries. On
entering the house of a Kurd, you are not annoyed by women rush-
ing in every direction to escape notice. During my stay amongst
them, I constantly met women in company with men, without veils.
It is true they are not permitted to eat with the men, but in every
other respect they are entirely free. As far as my own observation
extended, they were not possessed of those personal charms which
might impose the necessity of restraint, though a few of them, if

1835.] Georgia, Persia, and Mesopotamia. 619

dressed up in the Parisian fashion, would be considered pretty
brunettes; their complexions were not so dark as to veil their blushes.
They were generally small and well made, and had large dark eyes,
the appearances of which they take great pains to show off to the
best advantage. They dye their eye-brows with a collyrium called
in the Arabic ‘“khattat.” It is reduced to a fine powder. The
eye-lids are painted with the “ kahel,” and the lashes blackened with
a reed, which is passed between the eye-lids. The angles of the
eye are also tinged and prolonged, which makes it appear much
larger. The ancient Egyptian ladies, as well as the modern Persian,
are represented as having resorted to the same arts of the toilette.
Juvenal admirably satirises the Roman ladies for this coquetry,

‘¢Tila supercilium, madida fuligine tartum,

Obliqua producit acu, pingitque trementes

Attollens oculos.’’—(Juv. Sat. ii. 1. 93.)

Another fashion equally essential to Kurdish beauty, requires that
the nails of the hands and feet should be stained with henna; and so
very general is this custom, that any woman who should hesitate to
conform to it would be considered immodest. The soles of the feet
are likewise daubed with the same coloring. The fingers are some-
times partially painted; and to prevent the henna taking every
where, the fair artists twist tape round them before they apply it, so
that when the operation is completed, their fingers are fancifully
marked with orange-colored stripes, which is by no means improving
to a fine hand. In fact, the delicate whiteness of the palm, and the
rose color of the nail, is utterly effaced by this dye.

In a large town like Sulim4niah, it is not to be supposed that the
women enjoy the same degree of liberty as they do in villages ; indeed,
they are often much watched; and in the marriage contract, it is
insisted that the bride shall exhibit those proofs of her innocence,
which afterwards she is expected to confirm by her conduct. In
fact, a bride would be returned to her parents, should she be unable
to produce the testimonials of her virginity. I have certainly seen
them very familiarly inclined, but I was told they are not backward
in assuming the semblance of enticement, that the incautious stranger
may proceed to improper liberties, upon which these artful females
accuse the unhappy guest of freedom and insult; when their male
relations seize upon his baggage, and otherwise molest him.

In their mode of life, the Kurds are habitually abstemious, subsisting
on the coarsest rye-bread and manna; and when meat is introduced
at their meals, it has seldom undergone any further culinary prepara-
tion than that of boiling in plain water. Some travellers have

620 Journal of a Tour through Georgia, &c. [Nov.

spoken of their personal cleanliness, but on this point I certainly
cannot agree with them. In regard to cleanliness, none of fhe
Asiatics can be compared to ourselves. Their repeated ablutions
very imperfectly remove the evils attendant on the jength of time
they wear their clothes. I speak from an intimate acquaintance with
the practices of Muhammedans in general. Circumcision is supposed
to contribute to cleanliness, and is not confined to our sex alone, as
the girls of many tribes undergo an operation somewhat similar just
before they reach the age of ten. Iam ignorant of the manner in
which it is done, as the natives are not very communicative on such
subjects ; but there are women who live by the performance of it.
The barbers operate on the males, and are esteemed unclean from
the profession they exercise. .

The Kurds have a practice of removing all the hair from the parts
of the body, where we suffer it to remain; and where we carefully
shave, they as carefully cherish its growth. The women also prac-
tise depilation in the following way: A thin cord is dipped into
some particular gum, and drawn slowly over the parts, when it
removes all that adheres to it. This process is extremely painful ;
but the remedy does not require a frequent recurrence, as it either
produces a complete eradication, or if a new growth appears, it is
merely a soft down, which may be removed with facility.

Another remarkable contrast between European and Asiatic taste
is, that corpulence and bulkiness form the greatest trait of beauty.
It is natural enough, therefore, that the females are desirous of
acquiring a superiority in this particular. They accordingly eat a
great variety of sweetmeats, candied fruit, and particular vegetable
substances, grated down, and mixed with conserves. This latter
composition is thought to be adapted both for vigour, and that en
bon point, which is so delightful to their admirers. A Kiird of some
rank, in describing the charms of his intended bride, said to me with
much seriousness—‘‘ She is as large as an elephant !”—He con-

sidered this comparison the very acme of perfection.

1835.) On ancient Hindu Coins. 621

II1.—On the connection of various ancient Hindu coins with the Grecian
or Indo-Scythic series. By James Prinsup, Sec. &c.

In my last notice on the subject of coins, I promised to bring
forward demonstrations in kind, of the direct descent of the Hindu
coins of Kanouj, from what have been denominated the Indo-Scythic
series. In attempting to redeem my pledge, I am aware that [ run
counter to the opinions of those who maintain that the Hindus prac-
tised the art of coinage, and had a distinct currency of their own
before the Greeks entered India ; especially my friend Colonel Sracy.
To him my opposition might appear the more ungracious, since the
weapons I am about to use are chiefly those he has himself so gener-
ously placed in my hands; but that I well know he is himself only
anxious to develope the truth, and will support a cherished theory
no longer than it can be maintained with plausibility at least, if not
with proof.

Iam not, however, about to contend that the Hindus had no in-
digenous currency of the precious metals. On the contrary, I think
evidence will be found in the collection about to be described, that they
circulated small pieces of a given weight ; that stamps were given to
these, varying under different circumstances ; and that many of these
earliest tokens exhibit several stamps consecutively impressed on the
same piece, until at last the superposed impressions (not those of a die
but rather of a punch) came to resemble the devices seen on the Indo-
Scythic coins, in company with which they have been found buried
in various places, particularly in Captain Cauriey’s Herculaneum at
Behat near Saharanpur.

That from this period, in round terms, may be assumed the adoption
of a die-device, or of coined money properly so called, by the Hindus,
is all I would venture at present to uphold ; and in doing so, I will not
again appeal to the assertions of Pausanras*, quoted in RoBertson’s
disquisition, that the Hindus had no coined money of their own ; nor
to the silence of the Mahabharat and other ancient works on the
subject ; but solely to the close family resemblance of four distinct
classes of Hindu coins to what may be called their Bactrian prototypes ;
namely, those of Kanouj; the later class of the Behat, or the Buddhist,
group ; the coins of Saurdashtra, found at Ujjain, in Guzerat and Cachha ;
and those which Colonel Sracy has denominated Rajput coins, having
the device of a horseman on one side, and a bull on the other.

Before proceeding to comment upon the first of these classes, my
tribute of obligation and praise is due to Colonel Sracy, for the

* See J. A. S. vol. i. page 394.
4Nn

622 Continuation of Observatians [Nov.

persevering labour and true antiquarian zeal, which have alone
enabled him to gather together such a rich collection of this peculiar
and rare type, and for the disinterested readiness with which he has
placed them at my disposal, to select from and publish at once,
thus depriving him as it were of the first fruits of his enterprize and
toil. It is true that so far at least as regards the merit of discovery,
his title will rather be confirmed than injured by early publicity ;
but the employment of another hand to illustrate his materials may do
injustice to his own careful classification ; and modify the opinions and
deductions regarding the origin, connection, and antiquity of various
groups, which he may have derived from a larger and more intimate
study of the subject, and from the actual inspection and handling of
thousands of coins, that have been withheld from insertion in his
select cabinet.

The home collector, who like myself, but receives contributions
from others, may learn, from the superior fulness and novelty of
many of the following plates, to appreciate the advantage of per-
sonal exertion over second-hand acquirement. In further proof of
this, I could produce some of the letters now lying before me, re-
ceived from Colonel Stacy on his several coin excursions. Here
he would be seen putting up with every inconvenience, endur-
ing the burning heats of May, or the cold of December, under trees
or in common serais in Central India ; digging in deserted ruins, or
poring over the old stores of village money-changers, after having
(the principal difficulty and art), won their confidence, sometimes
their interest, in the object of his pursuit: sparing neither money nor
time to gain his end, and after a hard search and fatigue, sitting down,
while his impressions were still warm and vivid, to communicate the
results of his day’s campaign.

Col. Stacy felt himself for 2 moment disheartened on behulding
the treasures of Gen. Ventura and his followers: but although the
character of the Bactrian relics necessarily eclipses all that can
be expected from a Hindu source, while their prolific abundance
astonishes the gleaner of Hindu relics, a moment’s reflection should
restore a full or even increased degree of satisfaction. Hindu his-
tory is even more in need of elucidation from coins than Bactrian.
The two countries are in fact found to be interwoven in their history
in a most curious manner, and must be studied together. The alphabe-
tic characters, the symbols, and most especially the link-coins, (empha-
tically named so by Colonel Sracy,) are fraught with information on
this head, which can only be extracted by multiplying the specimens,
and thus completing the chain of evidence. It will be seen shortly, that

1835.] on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 623

several of the dynasties to which the coins belong have been identi-
fied through the names and legends they bear, and many new princes»
hitherto unheard of, have been brought to light. Let not therefore
Colonel Stacy desert his line for one more engaging, but persevere
in it as long as anything remains to be explored.

I cannot resist in this place pointing out the line of search recom-
mended by Colonel Top, (to whom is justly ascribed the paternity of
this branch of numismatic study,) in a note on the late Panjab discoveries
published by him in the Asiatic Journal of London for May: ‘ Let
not the antiquary,” he writes, ‘‘ forget the old cities on the east and
west of the Jamna, in the desert, and in the Panjab, of which I have
given lists, where his toil willbe richly rewarded. I possess bags full
of these Indogetic gentry; and I melted down into several sets of
basons and ewers, the rust of ages from which the tooth of time had
eradicated whatever had once been legible.... I would suggest the
establishment of branch-committees of the Asiatic Society at several of
the large stations, which would havea happy moral result in calling forth
the latent talent of many a young officer in every branch of knowledge
within the scope of the Society. Agra, Mathura, Delhi, Ajmir, Jaipur,
Némuch, Mhow, Sagar, &c. are amongst the most eligible positions
for this object .... A topographical map, with explanations of
ancient Delhi, is yet a desideratum, and of the first interest: this I
had nearly accomplished during the four months I resided amidst the
tombs of that city.”

In thanking Colonel. Top for his encouragement and advice, I
must be allowed to differ altogether as to the means to be employed.
Committees are cumbrous, spiritless, and inactive engines, for such
an end; when anything does appear to be effected by them, it is gene-
rally the work of one member, whose energy is only diluted and
enfeebled by the association. Give me rather the unity of design,
and quickness of execution of (I will not say agent, as Colonel Top
suggests, but of) an independent pursuer of the object for its own
sake*, or for his own amusement and instruction. It is by such as

* These I may say are already provided at more places than Colonel Top
points out: Colonel Stacy at Chitor, Udayapur, and now at Delhi : Lieutenant
A. Cono.ty at Jaipur ; Captain Wane at Ludidna ; Capt. Cautiry at Sehdran-
pur; Lieut. CunninGHAM at Benares; Colonel Smita at Patna; Mr. TREGEAR
at Jaunpur; and Dr. Swiney (now in Calcutta), for many years a collector in
Upper India. And for the exterior line, Lieut. BurNEs at the mouth of the
Indus; Messrs. Ventura, Court, Masson, Kera’mMat Ati and Monan La’t
in the Panjdb; besides whom I must not omit Messrs, H. C. Hamixton,
Spiers, EpcewortH, Guspins, Capt. JENKINS, and other friends who haye
occasionally sent me coins dug up in their districts.

4n 2

624 Continuation of Observations [Nov.

these that all the good has hitherto been done; the extension of
patronage followed rather than preceded or prompted the great disco-
veries of last year in Kabul*.

The plates I have prepared to illustrate my subject have not been
numbered in the most convenient order for the purpose; but as it is a
matter of indifference which line we commence upon, it will be fair to
give our first attention to Plate XXXIV. containing the so long post-
poned continuation of the coins and relics dug up by Capt. CauTLey
at Behat, and noticed in the Proceedings of the Asiatic Society on
the 14th January last.

The exhumation of this subterranean town has not perhaps been
followed up with so much vigour as it would have been, had not its
discoverer’s attention been diverted to other antiquities of more
overwhelming interest—the fossil inhabitants of a former world—be-
fore which the modern reliques of a couple of thousand years shrink into
comparative insignificance. Perhaps indeed the notion of a city at the
spot indicated by these remains should be modified. Professor WiLson
writes me, that he cannot suggest any ancient city of note so situated;
yet if it existed so late as the 3rd or 4th century of our era, it ought
surely tobe known. It may probably have been the site of a Buddhist
monastery, which became deserted during the persecutions of this
sect, and was then gradually destroyed and buried by the shifting
sands of the hill torrents. Some of the relics now to be noticed
forcibly bear out this supposition.

Plate XXXIV. Behat Group.

The upper half of ‘this plate contains a continuation of the relics
dug up at Behat by Captain CautLey.

Fig. 1 is the object of principal interest, because it stamps the
‘loeality as decidedly Buddhist, and leaves us to infer, that the coins
are the same, although their devices have nothing that can be posi-
tively asserted to be discriminative of this sect. The figure represents
two fragments of a circular ring of baked clay. In the inner circum-
ference are carved or stamped, a succession of small figures of BuppHa
seated, apparently 12 in number; and onthe upper surface, a circular
)train of lizards. It is difficult to imagine the purpose: to which

it could have been applied. In some respects it may be compared

* We have arrested the press of this sheet to announce the arrival of the
“second memoir by Mr. Masson, on the produce of his labours at Beghram—
“the same announced some time since by Captain Wapr. We shall hasten to
‘ prepare lithographs of the numerous figures with which it is illustrated, although
~ comparatively few (not more than 5 or 6) of them are altogether new after Gen.
VenTuRA’S collection.—Ep.

1835.] on Indo-Scythie and Hindu Coins. 625

to the semi-circular sculpture near the Bo-tree at Anurddhapura in
Ceylon, depicted in the 38rd volume of the Royal Asiatic Society’s
Transactions; but, in that, the ring of animals consists of elephants,
horses, tigers, and bulls, alternately* ; four animals, which have a
place in the Bauddha mythology; whereas I am not aware that the
lizard is regarded in any degree of reverence by the Buddhists.

Fig. 3, an old ring of copper. This, like the more ornamental ring
of Plate XVIII., volume 3rd, may in some respects be looked upon as
a Bauddha relic; for in its metal it accords well with an extract from
the Dulva in M. Csoma Korés1’s Analysis of the Tibetan Scriptures,
containing Shékya’s injunctions that his priests should only wear
seal-rings of the baser metals. ‘‘ Priests are prohibited from wearing
rings, and from having seal-rings of gold, silver, or precious stones ;
but they may have seals made of copper, brass, bell-metal, ivory, horn.
A man of the religious order must have on his seal or stamp a circle
with two deer on opposite sides ; and below, the name of the founder
of the Vihara. A layman may have a full length figure, or a head,
cut on his signet.”—Leaf 11, 12, volume X. of the Dulva—dAsiatic
Researches, xix. 86.

The circular devices of some of the coins (23 of this Plate, 31 and
32, of the following,) may perhaps also be explained by the rule
of this teacher cited in the same extract, that the priests should
use no other impress than that of the circle; and it is remarkable,
that the deer is the very animal found on the most prominent silver
coins of the group, such as fig. 16 of the present plate, and 48 of
Plate XXXV., (see also volume ill. pp. 227 and 434.)

Fig. 4. A small image of baked clay; is more like a plaything for
children than an object of worship.

Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, are varieties of the peculiar coins of the
Behat series already noticed in Plate XVII. of volume ii.

The characters in many are tolerably distinct, and are clearly
allied to, if not identical with, those of fig. 22a true descendant of
the Kanerxos series, as will be presently shewn in my Indo-Scythic
Plate, LI., figs. 16, 17, (q, v.) The emblems also on many, a bull

* « At the foot of the steps to this second building, and let into the ground,
is a very remarkable slab of hard blue granite: it is semi-circular, and sculptured
in rings or bands of different widths. Some of the patterns are scrolls, equal in
beauty to any thing Grecian; one consists of the Hansa or Brdhmana duck,
bearing the root of the Lotus in its bill; and the most curious has figures of
the elephant, the horse, the lion, and the cow, which are repeated in the same
order, and sculptured with great spirit and accuracy of outline.’’—Roy. As.
Soc. Trans. II. 467.

626 Coniinuation of Observations [Nov.

and an elephant, may be imitations of the Azos coin. In fig. 7, the
¢& symbol is exactly a Chaitya, or Bauddha monument, as I had from
the first supposed.

The tree is also satisfactorily made out in fig. 15, and in many of
the coins in the following plate. In fig. 23, it is seen at the side of
a walking figure; and above it, in a very perfect coin of the same
type, since sent to me by Lieut. Conouiy, the sun shines,—as it were
on the saint and his holy tree.

The three most conspicuous letters on all of these coins are wqu
or y dk y, and it does not seem any great stretch of imagination to
see in them apart of the word Ayodhaya, the seat of one of the
earliest Hindu dynasties, and which was at the commencement of
Buddhism almost as much the resort of its founder Safkkya, as
Rajgriha the capital of Magadha. Still from the association of these
coins with those of the Indo-Scythic dynasty, it would be hazardous
to attribute to them any greater antiquity than the early part of the
Christian era.

The metal of these coins is a mixture of tin and copper, which
retains its figure well, and is white when cut.

Figs. 11, 12, will be recognized as Indo-Scythic coins: being found
along with the rest, they serve to settle the point of antiquity.

On fig. 13, are the letters uyég (in Tibetan YTRN. t) p rdja s.
- On fig. 16, are a further supply resembling more the lath alphabet
HxUCLL.. a mapasdte ... The same combination occurs in fig. 45,
otherwise so different a coin; on the reverse, the letters under the
symbol very much resemble the Pehlevi PY Lu malakdo. This silver
coin is of M. Ventura’s collection.

Fig. 17, is peculiar for its multitude of symbols, most of them
known to us by their occurrence on other coins. This specimen is
also of the Ventura ‘collection.

Fig. 18, a coin in Mr. TREGEAR’S possession. Several of the same
kind have been before introduced into my plates, but hitherto the figure
under the elephant has been supposed to be a prostrate elephant
vanquished by the upper animal. The multiplication of specimens has
at length shewn us the true character of the doubtful part, and that
it merely consists of two of the common symbols of the series.

But we must now turn to Plate XXXV. in which, thanks to Colonel
Sracy, I have been able to attempt.a more methodical classification
from his abundant supply of this Buddhist series of coins.

Plate XXXV. Stacy’s earliest Hindu Coins.

It is an indisputable axiom, that unstamped fragments of silver and

gold of a fixed weight must have preceded the use of regular coin

Jour, As. See. | Vol IWPL_XXXW

A ni

as Pr aN ay

CAT
G “ih | i
if ‘ AANA Wy

nih

Ze 4
(on ae
oe oe

p>

vos

Gntral India

jrom Central India

from

yen ie |
in

t

Wie. Soc. Vol. IV PLXXXV.
Aneient Hindu Coins.

26.

i A}
EN) fet) 1)
! f'| DN eon
, Te | ri
A g, i
1 " ph)

nn |

iy pil
| MA) '

AN

umpl mpuonays

mi)

fons
vai

AUT i
vy at at
Is

essai
Mined

S 2 25
= S55
SEF eS

ey ASS al ee es bt
a Me fk Ye

\ ss wale tO sai 2% ¥
aire as se 7) Lp ee
oh MMM oe a

o ti a epee
; | slag ean \ pny am i my
+ ¢ | bial ta ge: ae
; ey aR RS i
_ “i zs ’ ‘ we
i ee eat ae on TPR: May eae
D9 |
Pa ie nites See, Pawo

Lar}

1835.] on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 627

in those countries where civilization and commerce had induced the
necessity of some convenient representative of value. The antiquarian
therefore will have little hesitation in ascribing the highest grade of
antiquity in Indian numismatology to those small flattened bits of
silver or other metal which are occasionally discovered all over the
country, either quite smooth, or bearing only a few punch-marks on
one or both sides; and generally having a corner cut off, as may be
conjectured, for the adjustment of their weight*. Many instances of
this type have been given in Col. Macxenztn’s collection, (figs. 101
to 108 of Wizson’s plates) who describes them as ‘‘of an irregular
form, bearing no inscription, occasionally quite plain, and in any case
having only a few indistinct and unintelligible symbols: that of the
sun, or a star is most common; and those of the lingam (?) the
crescent, and figures of animals may be traced.” The Colonel’s
specimens were chiefly procured in South India: others have been dug
up in the Sunderbans :—-and many were found at Behat (fig. 14.)

But the few selected specimens in Col. Sracy’s collection, (figs.
25—29) yield more food for speculation than the nearly smooth
pieces above alluded to. On all these we perceive the symbol of the
sun to be the faintest of those present : in two instances (figs. 28, 29)
it is superposed by symbols which may be hence concluded to be more
recent. These are severally, the @ chaitya, the tree, the swastika fh
and the human figure ; besides which in fig. 26, we have the elephant,
the bull, and the peculiar symbols of figs. 34-37. They are all stamped
on at random with punches, and may naturally be interpreted as the
insignia of successive dynasties authenticating their currency.

In one only, fig. 30, does there appear any approach to alphabetic
characters, and here the letters resemble those of the Jdths, or of the
caves on the west of India, the most ancient written form of the Sanscrit
language.

From the above original seem to have descended two distinct
families, of which one was produced by the hammer and die, the
other by casting in a mould. Of the latter, easily recognizable by
the depth of relief, the projecting keel on the margin, shewing where
the moulds were united,—and the greater corrosion due to the soft-
ness of the cast metal,—we have various groupes, and sub-divisions,
but most of them agree in bearing the & monogram for their obverse *
sometimes, as in figs. 34, 35, 36, 37, with addition of two smaller
symbols, g, like the sign of Taurus reversed.

* Their average weight is 50 grains, or the same as the tak (= 3 mdshas)

of the ancient Hindu Metrology. Indeed the word tan’ k-sdla, mint, goes far to
prove that these are the very pieces fabricated for circulation under that name.

H28 Continuation of Observations [Nov.

On the reverse, we have frequently a dog with a collar (and bell ?)
guarding a sword or flagstaff of victory, (jaya dhvaja ?) figs. 20, 21,
34, 35, 36. At other times an elephant (fig. 39); a bull (37), or the
sacred tree (15, 38): and, in rarer cases, the device on both sides is
changed, as in 40, 41. Figs. 18, 42, and 43, (in the latter of which
the elephant might easily be mistaken for a deva nagari letter,) are of
the cast species ; to which also belongs the multi-symbolic coin, fig. 18,
of the last, and its fellows of former plates. The leaden coin 49,
is also cast, but it is probably a forgery of some copper original.

Of the second branch, or die-struck coins, we have also several sub-
divisions—l1s¢, the peculiar bronze-metal ( Ayodhya ?.) coins of Behat
in the last plate; to which belongs 44, with the tree symbol, and
a sitting dog on the obverse: 2nd, a groupe, (figs 45, 46, 47,) having
a horse on one side, similar to Lieut. Conouuy’s coin, fig. 1, Pl.
XXV. of vol. iii. ; 3rd, the stag and chaitya coin, (figs. 16, 48; also
figs. 1, 2, and 6, of Pl. XVIII. and fig. 4, of Pl. XXV. vol. iii.) ; and
4th, those square rude coins, first pointed out by Masson, having an
elephant on one side and a lion (dog) on the other, with the charac-
teristic symbol & figs. 50 and 51, of this kind are from the Ventura
collection.

Upon most of the latter or die-struck species are portions of inscrip-
tions in the /dth character, as was first clearly determined from Lieut.
Conotziy’s coin, (Pl. XXV, vol. iii.) The lettersso well defined on
that type coin may be read, faareaa, viddhévasa ; the second in the
list there given was converted into a@yaaaqe; the third into
wungaeq: but such renderings, having nothing beyond their being
real Sanscrit words to recommend them, are hardly admissible. In the
same manner, nothing can be made of the combination patama dasata
of fig. 45; pasaha of 46 ; or ramahata of 47; the last coin is curious,
from having an alligator or lizard symbol, similar to the sign on the
porcelain ring from Behat (fig. 1.)

In explanation of the absence of any of the titles of sovereign-
ty in these legends, the quotation already cited from M, Csoma’s
analysis of the Dulva may be again brought forward—that under the
symbols of the circle, deer, &c. the name of the founder of the
Vihara should be inscribed ;—indeed the whole of the above passage is
singularly applicable to this group of coins; and, in conjunction with
other evidence, suggests the idea that the Buddhist coinage was
struck in the monasteries of the priesthood, where the learning,
skill, and riches of the country would naturally follow their attainment
of influence, and ascendancy over princes and people. The same
argument may account for the imitation of Bactrian or Indo-Scythic

Vol. WPULLL

\ i H tits. ] \ rh \

\y) at ip i | | |

\ nih f fl :
iN npn fie M
Ss MU

| i i) ‘
ene Dhl
Munieas
) mM | si val !
nes gay
Bay SAA),

4 Vey go

Lae. ’ 1 ant
ay a hte Dl sereoiersbid PPR hopes nwt 4

1835.] on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 629

devices in the later coins of the series ; since it is well known, that
Buddhism prevailed through these countries also, and a constant inter-
communication must have been consequently kept up. How far the
antiquity of the first Buddhist groups of coins may have approached
the epoch of Buppua (544 B.C.) it is difficult to determine, but the
acquisition of their similitude to the Indo-Scythic coins must have
been posterior to the breaking up of the genuine Bactrian dynasty,
perhaps about the commencement of the Christian era.

Plate LI. Indo-Scythic Coins resumed.

Having disposed to the best of our knowledge of the earliest
Hindu coins, we must now return to the Indo-Scythic series, for the
purpose of conducting the reader through the promised line of con-
nection into the second great field of Hindu imitation.

Enough has been said on former occasions of the two principal
families of this type, the Kappuisss and the KaNErKos groupes; but
with a view of systematizing a little the information already obtained ;
and, at the same time, of introducing a few new and very beautiful
coins lately added to our list, I have collected in the present plate the
principal varieties of the Kanerxkos mithriacs, subsequent to the
adoption of the vernacular titles 7ao and rao nano rao.

With the most common obverse of the Indo-Scythic family, a raja
clad in the Tartar coat and inscribed PAO KANHPKI, fig. 3, I have
traced on the copper coins, as well as in the gold ones, the follow-
ing series of reverses, NANA (for nanaia), NANAO, MAO, MIOPO, MITPO,
MIOPO, MiPO, A@PO, OKPO, and a word not very clearly made out on
fig.8, OAAo. Of these, the explanations have been already attempted* ;
mithro, mitro, mirot are but varieties of mithra, the sun, whose effigy
on the genuine Greek coins of Kanerxos is plainly entitled patos. Okro
} have conjectured to be intended for arka, the Sanscrit name of the
sun; and his four-armed effigy in fig. 7, more beautifully developed
on the gold coin fig. 1, an unique obtained by Krerdmar Aur at Cabul,
confirms this opinion. Athro has been before stated to be the Zend
word for the igneous essence of the sun, and accordingly, we find
flame depicted on the shoulders of the figures bearing this epithet, in
fig. 6, and in fig. 2, a very pretty little gold coin, for which I am
also indebted to KerAmat Aut. Nanaia, remaining feminine in NANA
of fig. 4, has been shewn to be the Persian Diana, or the moon :—and
in strict accordance with the Brahmanical mythology, this deity is
made masculine in NANAO and MAO, the mds or lunus of the Hindus,

* See vol. iii. p. 452, et seq.

+ Lieut. Cunnincuam has added this variety from a fine gold coin.

4M

630 Continuation of Observations (Nov.

and on his effigy in figure 9, (as in former drawings in vol. iii.,) the
horns of the moon are seen to project from behind his shoulders.

The same devices in every respect are continued upon several
succeeding coins of the Rao nano rao series. The chief varieties of the
obverse of these are given in figs. 2, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,14. The
order in which they should be placed is necessarily doubtful; but
judging from the comparative perfection of the Grecian letters, the
‘“‘couch-lounger,”’ fig. 9, and the ‘‘ elephant-rider,” fig. 10, should
have precedence over the rest.

Fig. 9, from the Venrura collection, is a very perfect specimen of
the couch-lounger. He hasa glory extending around his body, as well
as his head, and his titles, rao nano rao and korano, are distinct; but
the name is unfortunately missing, no more than O O being visible.

In fig. 10, we are not more fortunate, but from the succession of
o’s, we may guess the word to be OOHMO Or OOHPKI, names already
known on the gold coins. Some of the Maniky4la elephant coins had the
name KEN PANO. This family is extremely numerous, and is procu-
rable among the old pice of every bazar in Upper India.

The names on the last series, figs. 11 to 14, are illegible; but the
letters are still Greek. The three first specimens are selected from a
number in Col. Sracy’s cabinet, to exhibit the varieties of the sitting
posture, and its gradual transition to the squat position of the Hindus.
Col. Top has supposed the figure in a coin similar to fig. 11, to be
Parthian ; but what he there took for a bow was evidently the orna-
mental contour of the back of the prince’s throne or sinhdsan. Fig.
14, is from a coin in Col. Smiru’s possession.

In fig. 15, of this plate, drawn from a plaister cast of a bronze, em-
bossed, chapras or badge-in the VenTuRA collection, we may conceive
the full device of the elephant obverse to be developed. ‘The faulty
proportion of the rider still prevails :—the flowing fillets to the head-
dress; the ankush to guide the animal ; the glory around the face, are
visible in both ; but the name is wanting.

Of figs. 16 and 17, the former from Col. Sracy’s, the latter from
Col. Suirn’s, cabinet, I have already noticed a less perfect specimen
while descanting on the earliest Hinducoins. The general style of
the figures on both faces so strongly resembles that of the KanERKos
coins, that I feel disposed to look upon them as imitations. The
legend has a fourth letter very distinct, besides some less distinct on
the left hand, wyquy KEW yodhiyala. . tajaya.

Plate XXXVIII. Indo-Scythic and Hindu Link-Coins.

It is worthy of remark, that none of the Kanerkos coins have a

Pehlevi legend; although the collateral series of KappuisEs, which

ae 4 ee .

ee ee: ee

so eS

Vol. V PLXXXVUL

PO ee
Yah if)

1835.] on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 631

possesses so many attributes in common with them, invariably has
this accompaniment. Considering that all the Bactrian family have
the same, it would perhaps be better to place Kappursxs as the last
of the Pehlevi series, immediately before Kanerxkos*, and he will thus
follow most conveniently the Kadaphes choranos described in my last
paper. Indeed, as the word Kadphises never occurs except in conjunc-
tion with some other name, as OOHMO, Or OOKMO, it may be read as a
patronymic appellation of the family—the descendants of Kapapugs.

Ofthe gold coins of Kapruisss, two varieties only were hitherto known
to us. By singular good fortune, Colonel Smirx has met with a third,
and with duplicates of the former two, in the common bazar of Bena-
res! His agent purchased the three, which are engraved at the top of
Plate XX XVIII. from a shroff, who said they were sold to him two
years ago by a Marhatta pilgrim to the holy city, in whose family
they must doubtless have been hoarded for many centuries, for their
character precludes any suspicion of their genuineness. Of fig. 2, I
have since found a duplicate in Krrdmat At1’s last despatch to myself :
fig. 3, is a duplicate of the one Dr. Marrinf extracted from the

* They must have been nearly contemporaneous. Lieut. Cunnincuam tells
me, he has just obtained 163 KaANneRxKI and KappuisEs copper coins, which were
dug up in a villagenear Benares. The proportions of each type were as follows:
Kappuises and bull, 12; Kanerxt, 60 ; elephant-rider, 48 ; running or dancing
figure on reverse, 13; couch-lounger, 13; cross-legged, 5; squatted figure, 8 ;
and undistinguishable, 4. In the collections from the Panjab, the ill-executed
descendants of the bull reverse predominate.

+ The May No. of the Asiatic Journal of London contains an announce-
ment of the safe arrival of this coin and of the collector himself, in Italy. Col.
Top on his travels happily found, and translated the following notice from the
Bulletin of the Archeological Society of Rome, which our readers will read with
avidity, although in fact it adds nothing new to our information.

‘‘ Signor HonteBerGeR has returned from a voyage in the east, laden with
an abundant antiquarian harvest of most important medals. Among the more
remarkable are a large one of Demetrius ; another, very beautiful, and in fine
preservation, of EurayprMus; and a third, extremely perfect, of Hornmuspas
of the Sassanian dynasty : all three, it would appear, hitherto unknown (inédites).
But what seems to us to merit still more consideration, is a similar monument,
with the name of a king Kaprise written in Greek characters. Signor
HoniGBerGer discovered it in the vicinity of K4bul; where, in a small wood-
en case, amongst a quantity of ashes and earth, he found a little silver box
containing the above-mentioned coin, together with a blackish (or dark-colour-
ed) Nerastra (stone in the form of an egg), with some small bones, apparently
those of a child. Upon the medal is the bust of an aged man, of no very noble
expression, bald-headed, in a simple garb, and holding in his right hand an im-
plement resembling a hammer. Around it is a very distinct inscription, in
Greek characters, KAA®IZEC BAZIAETC; and less-well-preserved, other cha-

4m 2

632 Continuation of Observations | Nov.

Jelalabad tope, depicted in Masson’s Plate XIII. vol. iii. Fig.1, is
as yet unique, and is of particular interest, from the style of the
obverse. The king is here seen mounted on a Grecian or Roman
war-chariot, drawn by two horses, and driven by an auriga of dimi-
nutive proportions. The execution is very perfect, with the exception
of the exaggeration of the principal figure. The inscription is quite
perfect, BACIAEYC OOHMO KAASICHC, and on the reverse, in Pehlevi
“SEIA hy AIIM Fu... WAPI EY1 Lu as nearly as can be made
out by a careful collation of the three coins. I cannot attempt to
interpret this long inscription, but the commencement seems to be
Malakdo Kadiapas.... The symbols are the same as usnal, and the
perfect preservation of this beautiful coin enables us to note the
flames playing on the shoulders of the monarch similar to those on
the effigy of Athro in the last plate, and to those on the image of
Buddha dug up by Dr. Gurarp at Cabul, (see Plate XXVI. vol. IIL.)

I have hitherto been unable to determine the meaning of the
bull reverse. The next two figures (4, 5,) of the present plate remove
this difficulty. They are both gold coins of the Venrura collection ;
on the obverse, the titles rao nano rao and korano are visible; and in
the area of fig. 4, what appears to be the Sanscrit syllable G; only we
know that the Sanscrit of that ancient period was of a different form.
But the reverse of these is what we should particularly notice, because
the word OKPO, (in one coin written downwards, in the other upwards,)
marks the bull and his priest as dedicated to the solar worship, and
not to Siva of the Brahmanical creed.

The next gold coin, No. 6, requires no particular notice, nor does
fig. 8, on which the simple title PAO, seems to designate a young
prince; but the three following, also of General Ventura’s superb
collection, must arrest us for a moment.

The name on the obverse of these is OHPKI, the sameas on the Ma-
nikydla small gold coins : on the reverse, fig. 7 shews us the two radical
emblems united, Nanaia and Okro, on the same coin, with the four-

racters resembling MO. (OOHMO.) On the reverse is a naked youth, on
whose head are traces of aturban or cap, (berretta,) and an inscription in Persian
characters of the ancient Pehlvi (caratteri Persiani de ll’ Antico Pehlvi). Honte-
BERGER States, that he has other medals of this same king, hitherto unknown to
history and numismatics. Another medal in gold, which the same traveller left
with an amateur of antiquities at St. Petersburgh, shews the entire figure of a
similar king, armed from head to foot ; and in the inscription, which is well pre-
served, the Greek characters B and O are legible. On the reverse is a man,
clothed, with a horned animal before him. The epigraph on this is likewise in
the ancient Pehlvi character.’

1835.} on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Cois. 633

pronged symbol between them, and a mysterious triangle above. This
little coin is unique. The next, fig. 9, is equally curious, though others
in copper have been met with by Colonel Stacy. The epigraphe borne
by these is APAOXPO, which I suppose to mean “‘ the great sun ;”’ arda
or arta in Ardeshir and Artaxerzes, having that acceptation. On the
copper coins, the word appears corrupted to OPO OKPO, and this is
probably the epigraphe of the dancing figure in Plate L.

In fig. 10, the name of the moon, MAO, and the lunar crescent, are
satisfactory and conclusive, as to that being the correct reading.

And now we come at last to the main object to which this essay
was directed, namely, to discover the prototype of the Kanouj coins
in those of Indo-Scythic fabric.

The great majority of what are called the Kanouj gold coins have
on the obverse a prince standing precisely in the attitude of Kap-
puisres and Kanerxos. The dress alone betrays a slight variation, being
in some instances almost the coat and trowsers of the present day.
On the reverse is a female seated sometimes on a couch, more
frequently in the native fashion, holding in her left hand a cornucopia,
in her right a pdsa or noose. This class of coin has long been
known. A brass-pot, containing, it is said, two hundred of them, was
accidentally discovered by the wearing away of the east bank of the
river Hugli, 10 miles above Calcutta, some vears ago. Twenty-four
were presented to the British museum, an equal number to Dr. W.
Honter, and a portion to the India House ; the remainder were dis-
persed among private collectors. It was from one of these that Mr.
Witson’s No. 13 was drawn ; and the same store furnished the figures
in Marspen’s plate. The latter author in his Numismata Orientalia,
vol. ii. page 725, has the following passage, which will serve excel-
lently well as a text to the present section of our essay:

«Some learned antiquaries think they discover in these the evi-
dences of a Greek origin; but on this point I do not see enough to
justify an opinion, and shall refrain from conjecture; cherishing the
hope that future discoveries of Indian medals may throw a light upon
the subject, which is in itself of the highest interest.”

To this challenge we have now the good fortune to be able to
respond most satisfactorily, for in figs. 11 and 12 (ofthe Ventura
collection), we find precisely the obverse and reverse above described
with the marginal legend in Greek, rao nuno rao. .korano, and the
superaddition of some incipient rude Nagari in the position afterwards
occupied by legible Sanscrit vames and titles. To set the comparison
in the clearest light, the two lowest coinsin the page have been in.
serted, fig. 16 from Gen. VenTuRAa’s, fig.17 from Col, Smirn’s, cabinet,

634 Continuations of Observations [Nov.

to shew the identity of the two classes. The description of them in
detail belongs to the next plate, where instead of deteriorating, they
will be found to improve, while they become indianized. An oppo-
site effect is, however, observable in a second branch, derived from the
same stock, which it is difficult to account for, unless by supposing a
divided realm, one portion flourishing and patronising the arts, while
the other maintained naught but the shadow of its pristine glory and
ancestry. This declining gradation is exemplified in figs. 14 (VEN-
TuRA) ; 13(Stracy) ; and 15 (Kerdmat-Ati) ; whereinat last it is barely
possible to trace the semblance of the sacrificing raja on the obverse,
or of the female on the reverse ; although from the insensible gradations
in a multitude of specimens, such are undoubtedly the figures. Fig.
15, is avery common coin in silver and copper : one was extracted from
the Mdnikyala tope, and was then supposed to bear the representation
of acrab anda dagger! That coin, it will be remembered, bore the
obvious Nagari letters =tga. Many others have been since discovered
with the same; and it should be remarked, that the form of Nagari in
these differs essentially from that of the collateral branch.

Here then we have the Indo-Scythic paternity of the Kanouj coinage
proved by the best evidence : and now we will proceed to examine in
detail its Hindu offspring, before entering upon the natural enquiry
whether such a fact is borne out by the meagre remnants of history
and tradition that are applicable to this obscure period.

Plate XX XIX. Hindu Coins—First Kanouj Series.

The Deva Nagari alphabet, published with Mr. Waruen’s transla-
tion of the Guzerat copper-plates two months ago, will be found to
apply in every respect to the coins before us: it is also nearly identical
with the Gaya and Allahabad alphabets; the principal exceptions
having place in the m, which in the latter is written more like Y,
while in the former it is 3x; and thes, which is respectively ay in the
latter, and (Ul in the former. To avoid the necessity of casting a new
fount of type to illustrate the following observations, I have availed
myself of the pervading similarity of the Tibetan alphabet ; which,
though several centuries later, can, with the alteration of a few
letters, be employed for our purpose much more readily than the
modern Deva Nagari.

The Tibetan vr, X, answers for ¢ of this alphabet: c& for d, and the
prosodial stroke T for r. The latter letter when inflected with the
a or é vowel, may be represented exactly by the Nagari short and long
1, f'and}. For the k, g, dh, and m, I have been obliged to cut new
type , 9, q, X; and for the letter which I have supposed from some
likeness to the Tibetan wy, to be a, I have given the new symbol 4

1835.1 on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 635

the same, it will be remarked, that was excluded from the conso-
nants in the /ath alphabet No. 1. The remaining letters require no
explanation, as a comparison of the type with the engraved figures
will shew their slight difference of form.

The readings of the inscriptions in the present plates are for the most
part new, and have been made out, dictionary in hand, by one unac-
quainted with Sanscrit :—they therefore claim indulgence, and will suc-
cumb to any more plausible interpretation from the professed scholar.

To begin with the two coins of the last plate, which appear to be-
long to the same sovereign ;—we find on the obverse (combining the
two figures),the words QNIRFLSNReUMATLYH Sri? Ca) parajita davaja.
On the opposite side of a duplicate fig. 17, we find the name zx;Oy¥Y:
Kumdra gupta, and on the reverse, to the right, NI¥&: parakramah.
The whole title may be interpreted, (ifin davaja we suppose an igno-
rant writing of the word dhvaja,) ‘‘ The hero of the unconquered
standard, the blessed KumMARA-GuPTA.”

Beneath the left arm of the Raja also are three letters superposed
J in the Tibetan manner, spyw ; which we learn from M. Csoma pg
K6rés to be pronounced chu, and to signify Riga. The same word
is prefixed to every prince’s name in the list of Assam Rajas. The
triliteral compound may, however, denote a date. A duplicate of
Colonel Smiru’s coin, 17, was presented to me by Captain Wane.
The Wr.iovcHBy cabinet possesses another, and Mr. Witson has
given one precisely similar, in which we find the gy 9 [as Kumara
gu (pta) of the obverse, and the »{7 7 FX parakrama of the reverse
very well marked—the first letter however in this, as in our coin,
is more like bhu or su than ku.

In all of these specimens the trident of the Rao coins is changed
into a standard, having a bird at the top, somewhat resembling the
Roman eagle.

Figs. 18 and 19, are placed next in succession, because the cornu-
copia lady still sits on a couch in the European fashion. The Radja
here holds a bow in the left hand, and in the right, a short stick ; for
the fire altar below it is now removed. A bracelet on the shoulder,
and the head dress, begin to look Indian. The letters on the margin of
the obverse are lost, but in the bow, we find 348 chndr superposed
as before. Marspren reads this combination Chandra, with some
plausibility. On the reverse of 18, is the name or title of the prince
Qqyx; Sri Vikrama. :

On fig. 19, the name is quite different HNL [,6: pati rurha,

‘The averter of misfortune.”

636 Continuation of Observations [Nov.

The first and last letters of this name or title are doubtful, and on
my first exanination of the coin whence the drawing was made, I
thought the first two letters might form the 64 of WatHeEn’s Gujerdti
alphabet, making the word bhipati rurha, ‘ the overthrower of kings.’
I have named the last letter from its resemblance to the @ of the
NAgar{ alphabet. These two coins were dug up at Juappur by Mr.
Treeear, whose description will be found in vol. iii. p. 617.

Figs. 20 and 22, are of the kind described by Marspren. The
goddess of plenty here sits in the native fashion on an ornamental
stool, or a lotus flower. The cornucopia also is transformed into
a large flower at the end of a stalk. The Raja still holds the bow,
but he has a sash in fig. 20. The letters on the area are new, but
hardly legible ; and only on the reverse of fig. 22, can we attempt
to decypher $x a portion perhaps of the former name, Vikrama,
Fig. 20, was given to me by a lady; fig. 22, by Mr. Cracrorr.

Fig. 21, is a thin one-sided coin found by Lieut. Conoxty, in the
ruins of Kanouj; the letter beneath the left arm is here } or kra:
its meaning doubtful.

The next two coins were assorted together in the plate, because
they had both two figures on the obverse; they are, however, essen-
tially of different periods ; and, if our former reasoning be correct, fig.
23, (of Lieut. ConoLty’s collection,) should be classed before the
last two, or even earlier than any of the set ; for it is difficult to form
any Sanscrit name out of the characters on either side. Lieutenant
Counnxinenam has kindly favored me with an impression of a similar
coin in his possession, by which the legend of the obverse appears to

be composed of the letters FUAATY kragipta paragu (pta).

In the obverse of the coin before us the same letters may be traced ;
but after the fy follows a K making the word kragipta paraguja, a
strange and unintelligible compound. On the reverse, the first three
or four letters agree with the above; but the final is rather a & pha,
and the one preceding it is closed at the top, making it Q va. These
may be faults of execution in a foreign artist, but they place the
interpretation beyond conjecture.

' Fig. 24, presented to me by Mr. G. Bacon, as discovered (or rather
purchased) at Kanouj, has already found a place in Prof. Wixson’s
plates. The dress of the male and female onthe obverse is com-
pletely Hindu, as is the attitude of the reverse. The legend was

giyen in facsimile in the Researches thus ; KY4 AAG é and may

be read, with allowance for imperfections, QSayy Sri Chandra gupta.
Fig. 25. We now come to an old acquaintance, the happy discovery

Vol. IV. PLXX XIX.
Hindu Coins. Canou) Serves.

ant)
fs AYA EASY .

oh
q 2222
7 : sta Ties oy
‘4 4 Prinsep be
P,
ao
'

1835.] on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 637

of Lieut. Conotiy, which has acted as a key to all the rest. An
account of it is inserted in vol. iii. p. 227, where, however, on Dr.
Minu’s authority, the name was read as Sri mad Ghavo Kacho, from
a misapprehension of the letter m. The reading commences on the
obverse with the full title X#tRAFS* Mahdrdja Adhi Raja Sri (the
name is cut off), and on the reverse QVANIXE Sré Sacnwa Vrera-
ma. The second word is doubtful, and without sense : perhaps it may
be Sri Pradyu, ‘the heavenly,’ or simply Sré mad Vikrama.

Fig. 26, is another most important acquisition, for which we are
beholden to Colonel Stacy. An imperfect drawing of a similar coin
appeared in Witson’s plates, which only misled as to the device, as
well as the legend: both are here equally distinct. The Raja sits on
a chair playing on a kind of harp, whence we learn his accomplish-
ments; while the margin teaches us his titles and part of his name
XBIRGES. .. SUA Mahé Rdjddhi Raja Sri... dra gupta. The first
letter of the name is the only one at all doubtful, and it is possible that
the name may be simply a repetition of the one more unequivocally
legible on the reverse, viz. NSSVUA Samupra curta.

I insert here the facsimile inscription of the duplicate coin of the
Researches, of which I have luckily preserved the lead-cut:

SMT ECIED LAAMV,:

Its identity with the above is manifest, Mahdrdjddhi raja Sri Sa-
mudra- gupta.

Fig. 27, is a sorry duplicate of the Conoxty coin, belonging to
Colonel Stacy, with a variation of the epigraphe QxX:4taxye
Vikrama Narinamagupta. I incline to think that the x is intended
for =, and that the word should be Narendra-gupta, or it may be in-
tended for Nardyana-gupta. The name on the reverse corresponds
with fig. 25, Sri pradyu Vikrama.

Fig. 28, is from a sketch of a coin in Lieut. A.CunninGHAM’s cabinet
at Benares. He has since sent me faithful wax impressions, which
expose slight imaccuracies in my outline. From neither, however,
can the inscription encircling the hero triumphant over the lion be
satisfactorily deduced; it may possibly be Qnqyfex: Sri bal pa-
rakrama ; the letter on the field is, in the facsimile, £ ku.

On the reverse we are more lucky ; for the legend, which I take to
be the prince’s name, LXILUA Kumdra-gupta, ‘« the protected of Mars,”

*JIn using the Tibetan character, sometimes, we are forced to omit the long a
vowel mark, whichis merely a prolongation of the matra, or horizontal head-
stroke in the coin writing.

4 N

638. Continuation of Observations [Nov.

is illustrated by an effigy of the wife of KArtixa, or KumArr’ feeding
his favorite bird the peacock. The same reverse is repeated in the.
two following varieties, where, however, the female is seated on a
wicker morha, or stool, as in fig. 26.

Fig. 29, a coin of Lieut. Burt's, and its fellow, (presented to me
by Miss Wartson,) introduce us to a perfectly novel device. The
Raja is here mounted on a horse dressed in native trappings. It
would be a loss of time to guess the superscription of 29. The same
letters occur on both sides of fig. 30, and are plainer: they appear to
be Ajita Man’atri qu......

Two coins of the same style are depicted as figs. 17 and 18, of
Witson, who states that the natives designate them the coins of
Hriranya Kasirv. I presented to the Asiatic Society in 1830 a bronze
image of a horseman dug up in Bandelkhand, which bears as close an
affinity to this class of coin as the Ventura chapras of Plate L. does
to the elephant coin.

Of the next two coins, No. 31 had been added to my cabinet by
Miss Watson, and had excited not a little curiosity, before Colonel
Sracy’s cabinet fell under my inspection ; my attention was immediate-
ly attracted to his more perfect duplicate, (fig. 32,) which at once
confirmed the reading I had as yet feared to pronounce, although the
image of a richly bedecked horse, unfettered by bridle or rider, had
led me to imagine some allusion to the celebrated horse-sacrifice
undertaken by one or two of the most powerful of the ancient sove-
reigns of India. The deficient letters of one reading happen to be
every where supplied by the other, so that there can be no doubt

about the whole HARGNFEX: Asvamedha Parakrama, ‘the hero
or paramount hero of the Asvamedha.”’ The female holding a chowry,
to fan the flies from the devoted horse, is I presume one of the
princesses acting as his attendant. Under the horse on both coins is
the syllabic letter N Si. History must be searched, if indeed any
history can be found, ere we can determine who may lay claim to this
fine and curious medal, which for the present closes our series of the
earlier Kanouj coinage.

Fig. 38, of which Dr. Swinry has numerous specimens, is inserted
in this plate because of the style of its alphabet. The inscription is
read by Dr. Swinzey, 295iF1 qNT Muahdraja Ganapati.

[t will be right to mention here, that one more of the Gupta family
appears on a coin in the WrtLtouGHBy collection depicted in the
Asiatic Researches Plate I. I have seen the coin itself, and the faesi-

mile AA cy: is correct, though the two first letters are of doubt-

1835.] on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 639

ful nature. Mr. Wixson read the whole Nara-gupta: Dr. Mrtu, Sasi-
gupta. I have nothing new to offer on the subject*.

Having now ocular demonstration of the intimate relation of the
Indo-Scythic with the 2nd class of Hindu coins, the question naturally
suggests itself, whether history is altogether silent on a point of such
curious interest ?

In first contradiction of such an inference, we find that the Indo-
Scythic origin of the Rahtore dynasty of Kanouj has been advanced
on very plausible grounds by the highest authority on this subject,
Col. Top, the annalist of Rajputanat. He obtained from a Jati,
(Yati) or Jain priest of a temple at Nadolaye, an ancient town in
Marwar, a genealogical roll of the Rahtores, about 50 feet in length.
“After detailing the usual theogony, it describes the production of
the first Rahtore ‘from the spine (raht) of Indra,’ the nominal father
being ‘Yavanaswa, prince of Parlipur. Of the topography of
Parlipur, the Rahtores have no other notion than that it was in the
north: but in the declared race of their progenitor, a Yavan or Greek
prince of the Aswa or Asi tribe, one of the four which overturned
the Greek kingdom of Bactria, we have a proof of the Scythic origin
of this Rajptit family.”

May it not be possible that the Yavana prince here alluded to may
be the Azos (in Pehlevi Azo) of the series of Bactrian coins published
in my last notice? The Sanscrit word Aswa would be pronounced
Aso, and be thus written in Persian or Pehlevi (as deo for deva, &c.)
The number and variety of his coins would imply that the name or
title was that of a considerable dynasty, and some of the devices, for
example, Nos. 10, 11, Plate XXII. of the goddess holding a cornucopia,
may have naturally been the prototype of the Kanouj coins.

A considerable interval (from 3800? to 470 A. D.) provokingly
occurs between the name of Yavanasva and the next prince, in
Col. Top’s list—whether also omitted in the Jain original, or filled up
only by barbarous and uninteresting names, we are not informed. The
blank is relieved at length by the name ofa genuine Hindu, Nayana-
PALA; but it happens that the missing part is the very one that could
alone throw light upon our numismatic discoveries. Several coins
(including the whole series of Kadphises and Kanerkis, intervene after

* Since finishing my plate, I have received a drawing of a small silver coin

from Mr. TrEGrAR, found at Jaunpur, having a head on one side, and on the
other a bird, with outspread wings, under which in clearly defined characters is

33 me Chandra-gupta.
+ Top’s Annals of Rajasthan, vol. ii. p. 5.
‘ 4nN 2

640 Continuation of Observations [Nov.

Azos, before we are brought to the absolute link coins of the Indo-
Scythic and Hindu dynasties.

The name of Ndyana-pdla bears so near a resemblance to Nardyana-
gupta, that a strong temptation arises to regenerate Colonel Top’s
prince in him, on the same grounds on which his predecessor has
been brought to life in Azos.

Indeed it would hardly be exceeding the bounds of legitimate
conjecture, (where all is mere conjecture,) to adopt a historical re-
presentative of our Kanerxr himself in the Kenex-sen of Colonel
Top, Sén being according to him merely a martial affix, equivalent
to General or Sénapati.

Krnex-Sen, the founder of the Balhdra dynasty according to the
concurrent testimony of all the chronicles consulted by Top, emigrated
to Saurdshtra about the year 144 A. D*. “from the most northern
province of India, Lohcote or Lahore.” In date and locality this
origin would agree well with Kanerx1: nor would it even set aside
the former supposition of the same prince being the Tartar KanisKa
of the Cashmir history ; since that prince is made the sixth in suc-
cession after Asoka, the great patron of the Buddhists, who is placed
by their chronology in 250 B. C., but who, when the correction
for Chandra-gupta is applied, will fall full 50 years later.

In reasoning upon the probable seat of these obscure dynasties, it
is by no means necessary to confine ourselves to one spot. The
annals of Mewdr, Delhi, Malwd, Saurdshtra, shew a continual inter-
mixture, as different princes acquired the ascendancy.

Kanouj has been fixed upon as the locale of the present class of gold
coins, for the obvious reason that they are most frequently found in
its ruins, not that any history ascribes them to this town; for the
history of Kanouj is a perfect blank anterior to the fifth, we may
even say the tenth century: and if the town had been suddenly involv-
ed in destruction, it is only certain that the coins found afterwards
in its ruins would be those of the particular epoch, whether coined
there or elsewhere.

There are arguments in favor of placing the seat of government
further to the west, for instance at Ujjain (Ujjayini.) In the first
place, the perfect identity of the coin-alphabet with that of the
Guzerat inscriptions lately decyphered by Mr. Warnent :—then, the
prevalent worship of the sun in Saurdshira, and at Ujjain, where this
object still forms the distinguishing symbol on the coinage}, agrees

* Top’s Rajasthan, I. 215.

+ See preceding page 480.
{ The greater banner of Mewar also exhibits a golden sun on a crimson field,

Top I, 137.

1835.] on Indo-Scythic and Hindu Coins. 641

well with the effigy of okro and ApaoK po on the Indo-Scythic coins*.
Again, the peacock of many of the Kanouj reverses is found on one
of the principal series of Saurdshtra coins, as will hereafter be shewn ;
and Colonel Top states that this sacred bird of the Hindu Mars
(Kum&Ara) was the favorite armorial emblem of the Rajput warrior.
Lastly, many of the names on these coins may be traced in the
catalogues of the Mdlwd and Guzerat princes; Vikrama, Chandra,
Samudra, Kuméra, Ajita, &c. the last four are coupled it is true with
the family affix pdla instead of gupta; but both of these have the
same signification.

In the Réjdvali of Raja Racuundru, quoted by Witrorp as the
chief authority in Central and Western India, we find a sovereign
named VikRAMA reigning in the year 191 A. D. and succeeded, or
rather supplanted 90 years later, by a Samupra-pdta. The deeds
attributed to these two are supposed to be merely an interpolation of
the fabulous history of VixramApirya and SduivAnanat: but the
occurrence of these two names is very curious, allied to the circum-
stance and appearance of the two coins, figs. 25 and 26, of Plate
XXXIX.

The only other instance of the occurrence of the name SamuprRa-
Gupta, that I am aware of, is on the Allahabad pillar, where he appears
as the son of a CHanpRA-Gupta; and from the close similarity of the
alphabets of the coins and of the laths, no reasonable doubt can be
entertained that they relate to the same individual—a fact predicted
by Dr. Miz in his valuable observations on this new race of kings
(vol. ii. p. 267), to which the reader is referred for all the light that
collateral history affords on the subject.

The name of Vixxama is referred by Marspen to Bikram-tschand
(Vikrama-chandra) of the fourth century, in ANqueErTiu’s list of the
kings of Central Indiat. KumAra-pata is also one of the many names
of SALIVAHANA,

There is no reason however why Kanouj should not at some periods
have been united under one sovereignty with the western provinces.
The great VixramApitya (whose appellation in full is found on one
of Marspen’s coins) conquered Indrapreshtha, and extended his sway
over the whole of India.

The Rahtore sovereigns of Kanouj, after its conquest by Nayana-
pdua, Col. Top says, assumed the title of Kam dhuj (Kama dhvaja ).

* Bhatarka (sun-cherished) is a title of the earliest Balabhi Rdja’s in Mr,

WATHEN’S inscriptions, p. 480.
+ As. Res. IX. 135. t Num, Orient. IT. 727.

642 Note on ancient Hindu Coins. [Nov.

If this alluded to their armorial insignia, we may thus find an ex-
planation of the standard on the earlier coins ;—and it may be equally
applied to the Aparajita dhvaja of fig. 16.

Another curious circumstance is mentioned in Col. Ton’s chronicles
of Mdrwar, that may help us a step forward in the investigation of
this obscure history. It is there said, ‘‘ Daarma-Buumso had a
son, AgAyA Cuanpra. For twenty-one generations they bore the
titles of Rao, afterwards that of Rija.”’ We are again left in
the dark as to who first assumed the title of Raja; but as we find
the title Rao in Greek visible on the very latest coin that bears an
inscription in that character; while on the fine gold coin discovered
by Lieut. Conotiy, of Vixrama, fig. 25, we have the title Mahd-
rdja Adhirdja Sri, quite distinct ; it must have been between the two
that the chauge of title was assumed. But I should be inclined to inter-
pret the above passage in the Yatz’s roll, as meaning that up to Ast
Cuanpra, or for the 21 generations preceding him, the title Rao had
been used, and henceforward that of Raja was adopted: for why
should the historian allude to the circumstance until the change of title
actually took place? Moreover, there are only 16 generations men-
tioned from Ast CHanpra down to the last of the Kanouj sovereigns,
the celebrated Jaya Cuanpra or Jzey-Cuanp, anterior to whom
the title was certainly borne, for we find it on the coins of Vixra-
MA, SAMUDRA-GUPTA, and others, names not included in the list, but
which we know from the style of the Deva Nagari character must have
belonged to a much earlier epoch than the seventh or eighth century,
in which BuumBo is placed.

The Rev. Dr. Miu has led us to put little faith in the authority
of the bards and panegyrists of the native courts; and it must be
confessed, that the contrast of Colonel Top’s genealogy with the
incontestible testimony of the Sanscrit inscriptions read by Couz-
BROOKE, F'eLL, and WILSON, is enough to perplex the most ingenious
amalgamist ! We must then maintain a thorough independence of all
such traditionary documents, and adhere in preference to the faithful
evidence of monuments and coias. In the present case, I have
shewn how these confirm one another in a remarkable and unexpected
manner, in regard to the names on the Allahabad pillar, inscription No.
2, all of which re-appear on these early Kanouj coins. In a subsequent
paper I shall produce equally convincing evidence that those of the
Benares and Delhi inscriptions are reproduced upon a second series of
Kanouj coins of a much more modern character.

All then that can be now attempted is, to recapitulate the names

1835.] Application of Iron Rods to Pianos. 643

that have been brought to light in the present investigation, names
for which we are indebted to the joint contributions of not less than
a dozen friends*, leaving the proper arrangement of them to a more
advanced stage of our knowledge than we at present possess.

The following are the names and titles that appear on the coins
of the two last plates.

1. Sri Aparajita dhvaja Kumdragupta parakrama.
Sri Vikrama Chandra.
A’patti rurhah, ov Bhupati rurha.
Kragipta paragu (pta.)
Chandragupta.
Maharaja adhi rdja Sri .... Sri pradyu Vikrama.
Sri Vikrama Narendra gupta.
Mahéraja adhi raja Sri Samudragupta.
.. Sri bal vikrama Kumdragupta...... PAPO
Ajita manatrigupta
11. Asvamedha pardkrama.
To these may be added the
12. Vikramaditya of Marspen’s collection, and the
13. Sasi-gupta, of Prof. Witson’s plates.
[To be continued. ]

~
S

1V.—Application of Iron Rods, proposed to compensate for the strain
occasioned by the tension of the strings upon Piano Fortes, thereby to
prevent warping, and to render them more durable and better adapted
to keep longer in tune. By Col. D. Prescrave.

By a notice in your Journal, No. 17, May 1833, of some improve-
ments that had been made in square piano-fortes, I am induced to
send an account of a scheme, which I devised and put in practice in
January, 1833. The object of which is to strengthen the instrument,
so as to prevent warping or twisting, thereby rendering it more
lasting and less liable to get out of tune.

It is stated in the above-quoted article, that it is by the slipping of
the round iron pegs in their wooden sockets, that a piano gets out of
tune; but I am inclined to think, that this is not to be attributed so
much to that circumstance, as to other causes, such as change in the
level of the instrument by the unceasing strain or tension upon it;
the effect of temperature on the wires, and of the atmosphere on the
porous material (wood) of which the instrument is constructed,
Whilst pianos are very new, they require comparatively little tuning ;

* VenturA, Kera’mat Ai, WADE, TREGEAR, CUNNINGHAM, Burt, Stacy,
Watson, SmirH, Swiney, Cracrort, and ConoLiy.

644 Application of Iron Rods to compensate [Nov.

but as they increase in age, so do they, in consequence of progressive
warping, require it the oftener.

The constant tension of the strings effects such a strain upon the
piano, that the opposite corners (in the direction of the wires) of
almost every one, however new, will be found, if accurately examined,
to be turned up more or less. Thus it will be easy to conceive, that
so long as the bed retains inflexibly its straight or level form, the
piano will last, possessing the property of remaining longer in tune,
and of being more easily tuned: but let the strings once gain an
ascendancy over the horizontal level of the bed, and the turning up
thereof will proceed with accelerated speed.

In Calcutta, where people enjoy the means, and have the opportunity,
they do not keep their pianos beyond a year, but pay for an annual
exchange ; thus getting rid of them before the warping gives annoy-
ance, and is not so great as to render them unsaleable; but it is not
so with people situated away from the metropolis, who are compelled
to take whatever pianos are sent them, which they are doomed to
use for years, until they may be seen with two inches and even more,
turn up: in this state many are quite unconscious of the defects of
their pianos, and attribute their not remaining in tune to climate, to
want of skill in the tuner, or to any other cause, rather than to the
deplorable state of the instrument.

To prevent this warping, several plans (and patents I believe) have
been adopted by makers. Some of them consist in the application, in
various ways, of plates and bars inserted at the back, and in the inside
of the piano. One of the plans adopted is, that of a square iron bar,
about three and a half feet in length, and upwards of 15 lbs. in weight,
screwed (in the direction of the wires) to the underside of the piano,
with five wood-screws, scarcely weighing three drachms each, and a
slight bolt, to connect the end of the bar, by means of a nut and screw
to the end of the piano; indeed, if this bar were even more substan-
tially fixed to the instrument, it does not appear to me calculated to
be of any material service in strengthening it.

In January, 1833, I took to pieces an old piano belonging toa
friend, with the intention of trying to straighten it. During this
operation, whilst reflecting on the immense pull that the wires con-
stantly exert beyond all power of the bed, as at present constructed,
of any piano to resist; it occurred to me, that ifa counter strain to the
wires above could be contrived and attached to the opposite or
underside of the bed, the desired object of keeping the piano straight,
thereby rendering it far more durable, and disposed to keep longer in
tune, would be accomplished.

Sour. Ws. 50. Wet IV. Pl. LW.

Presgrave’s Compensation Rods, for Peano Fortes

Ins, 2 6 9 / 2 3 feet
ss ee

SB. Tassins Lith’ Press.

i
[
)
q
4
u
———
ie il

et x <n)

| Re halt btn yey pe “ip:
Sim tings aN ie ut calle ae wre ;
eee ken eee eee he ee oe sole te &%

AF ie” oe 4 aon, ee et ke see va
re " : = tee aeliss pa i we Lviv ay :

‘ : : t * in a «
4 Be ig A pn’ _— ipw 1 aia whe i. fam, ta it -

Roan ae -~— - Pa cy 2 i 7 ¢ tage no ant
ee

Veh are my ee tk ae bar Tape Ste cate ss"
Mere ne re eS
i <n gt ti yi SaNeie # sae Aan dpe Deletes nape “ta

ete ae. aor eat shes its vi ae: *"y vues nhs a ie

iene Maas ae witty ph
Nag, SIME ar ra! > RE,
Cede matory htot SRR ears yee Si ne

a tx VE = tag
i ptt EA * APE eS i hae
* fetes Aah cetiy a ey tent Ts
a ¥ “ey . k 7
peti — " rd ke ps ‘, 5%: mis
7 i =
ratte 1 Mise ts se sy ke
2 mle Ag
s - pes pre inlet gli tas. a5s.aie
7 .
is a

Bi ea, a eS “Be %
‘ ae fee apes vet ‘ sh An _,
q i mrs — Ss oe ~~ — roy
é ao . : spd * (Sars i
ee ae a .
e io * —e es 4 oe ate ¢

ee een are
err. vee ww Pe 12 Te Pn PWT sales shat. ety a

i Rae 2, Cae bee Manes as cab ty
ahaa Ames? eb

"ie ee ee apa ek

1835.] the strain of the wires in Pianos. 645

The compensation for the strain of the wires above is effected bv
placing iron rods (two or three) in a direction parallel with the
strings, but below the bed of the instrument. The rods are fixed at
their extremities by a joint, to iron clamps, which are screwed to the
underside of the bed, and bolted at one end of the piano, through the
bed and block that holds the tuning pegs, and at the other, through
the bed, block, and plank. The extremities of the rods being thus
fixed, their power is obtained by drawing them over a stout wooden
bridge, placed at about two feet from the end, just below the keys of
the highest notes, and then drawn by adjusting frame, nuts, and
screws, as tight as is necessary ; as will, I hope, be distinctly shewn
by the accompanying plate and description.

Fig. ], is an elevation of a piano, which shews one of the rods, A, as
applied below, drawn by the adjusting screw C tight over the bridge
B. (The same letters apply to all the figures.) The bridge B is shewn
on a larger scale at fig. 3. By the drawing, fig. 1, the end of the
bridge B seems to present an unsightly appearance, but it is not so
in reality ; the rods crossing the bridge, at some distance from the
front, as at Tin figs. 2 and 3; and so little are they visible, that they
would not be observed, unless attention was drawn towards them.

_The frame or adjusting nut C turns at one end on a knob or head,
formed on the end of the (short) rod, having a flat brass ring inter-
posed (to reduce the friction) between its head and the inside bearing
of the frame: the other end of the frame is made thick, as at figures
6 and 7, having a screw formed within it, to receive that on the end
of the rod. The screws are raised above the surface, and not cut into
the thickness of the rods.

Fig. 2, represents the piano, turned upside down. A A A are the
reds, running in the same direction with the strings of the piano,
intended to be expressed by the shaded part between D D D.

E E E£, clamps with joints 6, figs. 4 and 5, to receive the ends
of the rods, in which they are held by a small bolt. The clamps are
sunk in the wood, as shewn by the dotted line cc, are broader
towards their outer ends, d d, and thicker towards e e, that they may
oppose more surface in the wood, against the tension or drag of the
rods A.—F. figs. 2 and 6, is a clamp of another description, (it was
applied to one of the pianos operated upon ;) by it the bolts fixing the
ends of the three rods are connected ; the two outer bolts GG, passing
through the end plank of the piano, and the centre one, H, through the
bed, block, and metal plate, on which the wires. are fixed ; instead of
thus connecting the ends of the rods by one clamp, separate clamps
like EE, figs. 4 and 5 have been used: the clamps EEE, besides .

40

646 Application of Iron Rods to compensate [Nov.

being bolted through the piano, are each further secured by two wood
screws.

The exact spots for fixing the clamp at both extremities of the
rods, must be determined, according to circumstances, by the judg-
ment of the individual applying them, because pianos vary in their
tnternal construction ; on which account also, it is obvious, that they
would be applied, with the greatest advantage, by manufacturers in
the first construction of the instruments, as the makers would have it
in their power to accommodate the internal arrangement of the pianos
to the most desirable position for fixing them.

The rods should be applied to new pianos, before warping takes
place ; they may be put to old instruments, though not with equal
advantage, from the circumstance of the blocks of wood placed at the
end, under the sounding board, together with the iron bar, which is
screwed at one end on to the block, bearing the tuning pegs, fixed at
the other to the metal plate, on which the strings are hooked, being
thrust, by the warping of the instrument, out of their places; for
when a piano has been straightened, they will be found to have
parted from those original bearings, on which mainly depended the
strength of the piano. However objectionable this loss of bearing
may be, the power of the rods is nevertheless the more clearly indi-
cated by their sustaining the piano in its straightened state against
the tension of the strings.

Fig. 3, B, is the bridge; ff are holes cut obliquely through it, to
lighten it; ggg are the places where the rods cross it; the bridge
is 24 inches thick, and with the plank ’h above it, in depth 33 or 32
inches ; the dotted lines at I and L shew the body of the piano,
across its breadth.

Fig 5, K, is the bolt that fixes the clamp E, by passing through
the block, (bearing the tuning pegs,) the bed of the piano, and by a
nut and screw fastening below the clamp. The whole of fig. 5, is
represented upside down.

The rods are of round iron wire, ;3, of an inch in diameter. Hither-
to, not less than three rods have been put to a piano; but perhaps
two might be found sufficient. It is possible to draw the rods too
tight, especially when first put on, and if the piano was much warped;
for the instrument does not accommodate itself to the new tension for
some time: it will therefore be necessary, until it settles, to examine
it daily; for if the rods are not slackened by turning the adjusting
screws, the strings might be endangered.

Many pianos may be seen with the end plank M. figs. 1 and 2,
split; occasioned entirely by the pull of the strings. The bolts GG,
figs. 2 and 6, secure the plank against this failure. The block

1835.] the strain of the wires in Pianos. 647

k, fig. 1, on which, in the absence of a metal plate, the strings are
hooked, is also, by the tension of the wires, liable to separate from
the end plank M. In two instances, where this had occurred, previous
to applying the rods, bolts with their heads resting inside at 77 were
passed through the block k, plank M, and a broad substantial plate
of polished brass N, on the outside of which they were evenly
rivetted.

The foregoing plan for keeping piano-fortes straight was, I have
been informed, mentioned to Messrs. Broapwoop anp Co. in Lon-
don ; but from what they said, I am inclined to think, was in the
absence of drawings, or written description, imperfectly explained to
them. They observed, that ‘“‘they found the iron bar, as offering
a resistance to the pull of the strings of the piano-forte, would best
effect the purpose.” Ifthe iron bar here alluded to is that which
props between the block bearing the turning pegs and the metal plate
on which the strings are hooked, it must be well known to those who
are conversant with the mechanism of piano-fortes, that although it
may be of some service, it is quite inadequate to prevent warping in
India. A piano that had warped an inch and a quarter, but which
had been fitted with one of those bars, was straightend by weight
and other means, and secured with a set of three rods, when the iron
bar, no longer reaching its original bearings, required to be lengthened
before it could be again applied.

The rods have been successfully applied to five piano-fortes, and
approved of by judges competent as well by their musical as by their
mechanical skill. Although possessing powerful command over the
instrument, they do not, as it may be supposed solid iron bars would,
at all check, as far as the vibrations of sound are concerned, the
elasticity of the pianos.

When a piano-forte warps, a corresponding twist is gradually com-
municated to all the keys, throwing them out of their places, and caus-
ing them to stick : it also detaches the hammers partially from their
own strings, and makes them touch those of the neighbouring notes ;
thus occasioning an unpleasant discord.

Piano-fortes would probably, without detriment to their tone, be
greatly preserved and defended against the effects of climate, parti-
cularly the damp atmosphere of the rainy season in India, by the
application of good oz varnish, such as is used by coach-makers,
not only to the under sides and backs of pianos, which are invariably
found in the state left by the joiner’s plane, but also to the beds,
side, ends, and blocks within, wherever it can be spread, prior ta the
putting in of the sounding board, keys, dampers, &c. &c,

402

648 New site of Coal in the Nerbada. [Nov,

V.—WNotice of two beds of Coal discovered by CaptainJ. R. Ouszuzy,
P. A. to the Commissioner at Hoshangabad, near Bara Garahwara, in
the Valley of the Narbada, 5th Jan. 1835, Pl. LIII.

Hearing of black stones being found near Mohpdni, seven or eight
miles from Chicheli, and 12 or 14 from Garahwara proper, on the
Sakar, I went there, and found, as they described, black stones ; but
placing them on the fire, they did not burn. They are in strata of 10
feet to 15 feet thick, solid masses, perpendicular, (strata,) as if thrown
up by some convulsion of nature, intermixed with strata of grey yellow
and brown sandstone, mica-looking grit, (vide A, plan of coal bed,)
and marl, on the left bank of the Sita Rewa, which flows along the
bottom. I proceeded up the bed of this nalla for about two miles,
when I came upon what appears to me to be a very fine bed of coal,

The river Sita Rewa, flowing from the south, here emerges from
the hills at the N. E. angle of Nimbuagarh, a name given to one of
the hills within half a mile of the coal bed. The current has unco-
vered for 100 yards the coal: its thickness is unknown as yet; that
exposed, being about 14 feet thick. After so many attempts at
discovering coal, which only proved to be mere seams of anthracite,
I felt much gratified at discovering so large a bed. The road by
which I proceeded up and along the river, I found very bad; but I
returned by a most excellent one, being that used by the villagers for
bringing wood from the jungles: the whole way being a plain, and
practicable for any kind of carriage.

At the junction of the Hard and Sakar rivers, I also discovered a
bed of coal, seemingly of as good quality: the seam about three feet
thick ; but on account of the magnitude of ths other bed, this became
an object of less inquiry. I ascertained also that limestone and iron
ore were in abundance.

VI.—Specific name and character of a new species of Cervus, discovered
by B. H. Hopeson, sq. in 1825, and indicated in his Catalogue by
the local name of Bahraiya.

In the catalogue of the Mammalia of Nipal, a new species of
Cervus is designated by the local name of Bahraiya, and it is therein
remarked, that the species forms, with C. Wallichii, a chain of
connexion between the Elaphine and Rusan groups. The horns,
which at once fix the specific character and its novelty, were some-
time back given in the journal. But these notices having failed to
fix attention, and the animal in question being still confounded with
the Saumer, Jerow, or Jardi, it may be as well to define the species
more precisely, and to give it a scientific name.

Genus—Crrvus. Sub-Genus Elaphus, (English Regne Anim.) Cervus
Elaphoides. Stag-like deer, mihi.

C. Hl. brown-red deer, with moderate-sized, stout, pale horns,
branched at the summits, as in Elaphus; but with no bezantler,
and only one browantler to each beam. In stature and aspect,
mediate between Hippelaphus and Elaphus. Icon penes nos,
Bahraiya of the Cat. Nip. Mam., called Maha in the Western
Tarai.

*

Jour: AS. Soe. é Vol. IV Pl. LM.

Sketch of Mimbuagarh Coal Bed _ Nerbada Viulley.

T. wo
°o

Coal Stone
Sand Stone |

RSS

AY a,

MiP

Hachery, R é me wil ay Wil Wh we
este iy Dy \ enol if Ae

sails Ae VG sf

JB. Tassin’s Lih*Fress. Calcutta,

=

if wu
SKUs ‘& oe xa

os
+.
as en ais e

Aen
ae
‘
yen ‘
} } ‘9 }
Y y r tae ties
hi pie PRS OENS
; . ahaa a. teal
| ey bom
ae: vt pat ere 48 p
Ro
‘

aru
~ 4
i:
‘ ;
Re %
1 i y : 4 4
E. 5 , jt cA 5 ont. . ie av 43 me. } Wert he.
bs | rs a : ee
i
ie
if
|
ea
at
aw
me}
O's ”"
ad
Brest.
= A
4 rs
i
ae
A ee

1835.) Characters of anew species of Cervus. 649

Remarks.—The horns of this animal differ from those of any known
species. In size, curvature, and thickness, they agree with those
of the Hippelaphus of Du Vaucen and of Cuvier: and are consider-
ably less large than those of Elaphus. But in colour and rugosity,
they depart from the former, to approach the latter, with which they
have, besides, a strict correspondence in the numerous snags crown-
ing their summits, and also in the anteal insertion and forward
direction of the browantler. The absence of the median process,
and the singleness of the basal one, are points of similitude with the
Hippelaphine or Rusan group, in which, however, the basal or brow-
antler has always an oblique insertion and upward direction.

Watticu’s deer, again, has two browantlers directed forwards ;
but has only a single superior process from the beam ; and it is almost
deprived of tail, whilst that member is more developed inthe Rusan
than in the Elaphine group. The dark and shaggy coat of the
Rusans is not traceable in Wallichii, which is even paler than the
European red deer. In these respects, our animal more nearly than
Wallichit approaches the European stag ; but in the singleness of
his browantler, he recedes further from the European type than does
Wallichii. He serves, in all respects, to form a fresh and striking
link of connexion between the Hippelaphine and Elaphine groups,
which groups, H. Smirx supposes to be respectively the Asiatic and
European types of Cervus. The first discovered link in this cone
nexion was Watuicu’s deer. Elaphoides, (mihi,) constitutes another,
equally distinct and remarkable. In the synoptical arrangement of
the English Regne animal, L/aphoides must havea place immediately
after or before C. Wallichit; with which species our’s will serve to
smooth the transition from Hlaphus to Rusa. The crowned summits
of the horns, each of which bears four or five processes, inclusive of
the point of the beam, at once distinguishes Klaphoides from the
Jerows, Jarais, or Saumers of the continent and islands of India.
All the latter belong to the Rusan group, and in their manners are
remarkable for exclusive adherence to the heaviest forest jungle,
whence they frequently penetrate into the proximate mountains or
hills. On the contrary, Hlaphoides (the Bahraiya or Mahd) never
was known to enter the mountains; nor does he, save casually,
resort to the depths of the forests. His lair is on the skirts of large
forests, amid the grassy and swampy glades which abound in such
vicinities. Lastly, his female is of a whitey-brown or pale dun hue:
whereas the females of the Rusans are dark-hued, as the males.

Explanation of Plate LIII.

Fig. 3. Cervus Elaphus, Nipalese Sd/ forest: vulgo, Bdra Sinha, type of
Cervus.

Fig. 4. Cervus Elaphoides, mihi: vulgo, Bahraiya and Mahd, Nipalese and
Western Tarais ; osculant.

Fig. 5. Cervus Hippelaphus : type of Rusa.

Note.—All three heads on an uniform scale. The stag’s horns shew the two
basal processes, and the soedian on either beam; but the terminal crown of
snags is not developed, owing to youth. Each horn has but one superior process
from the beam, instead of three or four.

650 Asiatic Society. [Nov.

VIil.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
Wednesday Evening, the 2nd December, 1835.

The Rev. W. H. Mitt, D. D. Vice-President, in the chair.

His Excellency Sir Henry Fane, Commander-in-Chief, and Mr. Caaryes
Avucusrus Nort, proposed at the last meeting, were ballotted for, and
duly elected members.

Read letters from Colonel W. H. Syxzs, se Professor W. Buckuanp,
acknowledging their election as honorary members.

Read letters from H. Harkness, Esq. Secretary to the Royal Asiatic
Society, and Nicnonas Caruisie, Esq. Secretary to the Society of Anti-
quaries, acknowledging the receipt of copies of Mr. Csoma’s Tibetan
Grammar and Dictionary.

Read a letter from Dr. Laurarp, Secretary to the Royal Academy of
Marseilles, proposing an interchange of publications, and inclosing a diplo-
ma of honorary membership for the Secretary of the Asiatic Society ; also
presenting two volumes of the “ Histoire de l’Academie de Marseilles.”

Resolved, that copies of the Researches be sent in return to Marseilles.

The recent change in the currency of the Bengal currency, having
been brought under consideration by the Secretary, it was

Resolved, that from the 1st January, 1836, all quarterly subscriptions
and fees of admission to the Society, be collected in the new rupee; viz.
32 Company’s rupees for the admission fee ; 16 Co.’s Rs. for the quarterly
subscription of ordinary members ; and 4 Co.’s Rs. for the yearly piled
tion of Associate Members.

Mr. Csoma bE Korés, in a letter to the Secretary, intimated his intention
of quitting Calcutta for the Western Provinces, and reqnested the loan of
some Sanscrit books, which was granted.

Library.

Read a letter from M. Rovy pe Rocnette, President of the Central
Committee of the Geographical Society of Paris, forwarding a copy of
Bulletin de la Société de Geographie, vols. Ist and 2nd.

The following books were presented on the part of Lieut.-Col. W. H.
Syxes, the Author.

A Catalogue of the Mammalia and Birds, observed in Dukhun.

On the Atmospheric Tides and Meteorology of Dukhun.

Description of the Wild Dog of the Western Ghats.

Some account of the Kolisura Silk-worm of the Dukhun.

Proceedings of the Statistical Society of London, No. I. vol. Ist.

The following works by Sir J. F. W. Herscuet.

A list of Test Objects, principally Double Stars.

Notices on the Orbits of revolving Double Stars.

Micrometrical measures of ditto,

On the Satellites of Uranus, and Observations of Breza’s Comet.

Also :—

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 24—dy the Editors.

Two copies of Impression of the Orrery and Simple Illustrations of Eclipses,
translated into Benghli by Maha Rajah Kauixissen—by the Author,

1835.] Asiatic Society. 651

Meteorological Register for October, 1835—by the Surveyor General.

Dumouttin’s Gulistan, 1807, and Karab-ud-din, a Medical work, MS. were
presented—dby Professor H. FI. Wilson.

The following books received from the booksellers :

LarpNER’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Germanic Empire, vol. 3rd.

Ditto ditto—Greece, vol. Ist.

Literary and Antiquities.

Read a letter from W. H. Warnen, Esq. forwarding a memoir on
Chinese Tartary and Khoten.

[This will be published in our next.]

The Hon’ble Lieut.-Col. Morrison, presented, on the part of the Author,
a paper on the State of Arts of the Cotton Spinning, Printing, and Dyeing
in Nepal, by Dr. A. Campsei ; with specimens.

Read a letter from Capt. T. J. Taynor, forwarding extract from a
Journal of the late Major Warp, of the Madras European Regiment,
regarding the inhabitants of the Varshagiri mountains in the Peninsula.

Read a letter from Lieut. H. Assorr, Mhow, forwarding an essay
upon Comets, containing a new theory of the phenomena of the coma.

Read a letter from G. W. Train, Esq. forwarding copy of an inscrip-
tion in the nail-headed form of Sanscrit in Kemaon.

Read extracts of a letter from Dr. Benza, on the subject of some
ancient coins dug up in a ‘ cairn’ on the Nilgiris.

From. Lieut. A. Cunninenam, at Benares, were received several very
beautifully sculptured small Buddha images, discovered in the excavations
at Sdrndth ; also copies of various inscriptions, and impressions of coins.

Physical.

The Secretary announced the arrival of six chests of fossil bones from
the sub-Himdlayas, forming the first dispatch of Colonel J. Coxvin’s
munificent donation promised on the 14th January, 1835. (see page 56.)

In this collection, which Colonel Cotvin’s letter describes as containing the
fossils in their rough matrix, as they were brought down by the native workmen
employed in their excavation, a cursory inspection shewed several very large and
complete jaws of the elephant, mastodon, hippopotamus, crocodile, and of other
animals not immediately recognized. Col. Coivin’s letter of the 4th October,
intimated the further dispatch of seven chests of fossils, more carefully selected
and classified, of which a full catalogue has been furnished by the indefatigable
collectors at Dadupur.

[We postpone our account of the whole until the second dispatch arrives, ]

Specimens of a crustaceous animal taken from the Greenland W hale,
presented by Mr. Srepuenson, with an explanatory note.

A specimen ef Lophophorus Impeyanus, by Mr. C. W. Surru.

A collection of bones of various mammalia, by Mr. J. T. Pearson.

Specimens of the soil and strata of the bed of the Samar lake, and of the
salt in its different stages of formation, were presented by Capt. A. Conone
ty, Assistant Resident Jaipur.

A note of their chemical analysis by Mr. SrepnEnson, and the Secretary,
was at the same time submitted.

VIII.—Meteorological Register.

*£10}s puooas ay} UO paoe{d mou ‘sAepuns uo se}9WOIN_ Oy} 0} par[dde osye st 0Z()"—UoNIeI109 Mau YW “AVP ay) UT YSTY Os eduULI 4OU PIP I JUNODIE sIy} UD *YUL} B Ava
«punosg ay) way Joa Z Uapaed v Ur paced sem 4! aTaym saaysULIMOY D 0} ‘eyINI[eD Ul asnoy v Jo doz ayy WIZ paAoutar sem JoJUIOUIIEY,L JosoyY yy JUeIsUI IFT 243 UO

“plod pue auy usey} ‘WI0}s oUO *UION PLE » 8°96 | L°29 | €8(G°8 | 0OT | 6°LL (9960 | 296‘ 926‘, 68 | 9°9 | L‘L | 9°92) FIG‘O\B01‘8a 60°62, UeSTN
op op op W ‘u 8 «*AU 8°88 sve fis | 06 | e6 ee crs. | 760° 98 | 2 nS eEL| 128° |Aa61’ |ez0*
op op op ‘MU SU “u c‘gg_ | 9'9¢ Fel) SP 666. €6 | 1°69 $r0°
op op op ‘Mu "UO TAS oe | o2o Fey | POL | sil! 24° |068° | 8E0* Igo] 18 | 6 | 8°0T!] o‘p2] O9B* JoZT* oRos
op op ‘op ‘Mu *U ‘0 088 | 0°8S Jes | POL] OCTL| 2°94 |ar6* | OF |ZQ6°] 68 | 6°9 | FZ | g%H2) 928° lezs* 660°
op op op ‘u ‘u 0 slg | 2°89 Jog | 056 | 8°6 | POL [ee6. | 940° \g00‘] G6 | E°9 | of9 | ops] 698° fggz° [eat
op op op ‘cu ‘MN ‘u e06 | 32S 16Z | 00] Ss Or | 2°92 |1e6* | 260‘ \geo'} 68 | 2°9 | of8 | 2&2] 618° |2p2* loat‘
op op op Ns 0 B68 | BPS Jos | OCOT| SIL | S°94 |e6. | F80° loto| 28 ofl ‘8 | 7e2| 168° \age* |60I'
*1e9]9 op op ‘u ‘N ie, 8*€8 Brg fol | et UIT | Tied 988° | L60‘ £866 18 | 0°6 66 8‘e! GE8" {8Pa‘ 140"
ies op Tea Kuta as Bes | S109 i Lgl Oe Page lanene 086° on” ue 8°oL sh" , (040
5 cA 803 N 0 0 oes [p09 Pe | ieer | eae] OL |. lee foal Tet las
“11119 op “doy F ¥ A i 00° ‘L198
op op “Map ‘N CMU 0 1°98 | S°19 Jeg | 8°L | 36 | E82 |F46 L665 |7L64 68 | $9 | $2 aay 026‘ |o9t* {980°
op *IBayo “1e9]9 u “MU 0) $88 | 09 | 1g | 9°8 | OOT| T'8L\SZ6° | P86° |gcg| 26 | 96S | T°9 | T*o7] OIG. Jeri {gcof
‘uy op “1419 ‘AU “MU ‘o 3°68 B'€9 cg | 8'Z | 68 | 9°22 Tc0f 0206 146} 26 | 9°F | Of | L6o7 s88* ras) Z90°
op nua op “u ge IN B06 | S29 | ze | U6 | BOT | 9°22 946° | 910“ |zog‘| F6 | O'S | 29 | o’g/| 968° JOLT |c905
RD onset Gy | Steen cae om8 | 129 16 | Od baer 59 (803 rer"
oO ni 3 & D i} 9
Bh op op ‘Mu | SMU ‘u 0°68 re 18 pe He ties uF ae 9c6‘4 06 0£9 TZ | ez a G61¢ 690°
ra a) op ‘Mu "MU SAAN OFIT | S6S Jzg |e “6 | L°9L \066 196} 08 | 0°6 | 8°0T| L°pL| BFB |PGIS \er0
on on op ‘MU “MN “MU OBIT g*19 zg | S*hL | O'9T | E22 OF i 0208 096) GZ | 06 | ¥6 qe £98° |/61° jo90°
op “aey op “au ALND “aA PiZoI | G9 Jol | OFOT| 68 | OBL |F96(0 | FPG \gog4 ZB | OL | 0'8 | E’GZ| E98. 26k |c86. :
oul -ouy ae ae AN ran oe gL | O'OL Bo Bee GEO'T | 998° jeged 08 | £68 6 | TLL 986° |4F0 a6 °
“T7MuINd op *Apnoya : O i 9FR* ay | Pel P16.
*Al@MOUS op “ured prey ‘fouu ‘eum “*N Hee Bch | 689 [O0T | BS | B.S | g°92 [26640 | B62" logs} oOT| 1°E | Te | 9°42) Le6%0]SpRS |a6L‘ L
*]SE010A0 Azey *4S@0190A0 “ou au ‘eu €*10T g*IL 86 | VE | GE | Bog \090 1 965" [9c9'} 66 | LE | 16 | e'62| La0°T}OZL" |26L6 9
op *ureL ‘ured “Jas jouer a ‘ou 0408 | IL [66 | oe BP | 9°81 (646.0 | O88" 16/14 66 | 9'€ | oe | T°6L| T86‘Ol9F6. |Zz6° g
uum fap tga fe cae atc | Pee | aur [25 [EL foe [8 het: | AE URe) mt 169 [sal de. eh Ue: |g
“STU op op : ; : Bs ¥ 9°68 4" |c98} 98 | 12 | 6% | 8*08| 690° |Ze8* jose.
*1vajo op op ‘N "N *N B°LE1 | S°69 ., | 9,90 | $18 ¢ _ [pte 28 | 9°L | $8 | s*08| 840°T| 998° |FF6* cd
aug *qeafo ec) A) ‘MN ‘OU CN “6ct | GOL |B | FB | 1°6 | Bag JOLI'T| OTL‘ jozes £°8 | 9°31] 9°62 s16‘6e) t
reg = = & z so len] cel aglecl eel #eleobal eel acl eal Se
. 5 S |e 5S BY] P|] FE se (Se Fh) eS) s2| 2) Slee sei sy sul ee | eS laea F
: > oe = - 3 PPR | PR PBR SE oF ee |e" | st ABI a Sel ol ec) ee | ao Sse Ss
Ee 2 S > = 5 3 oe PS Ss) S8) 25) SF] om/SSI® | Sa Soles Sal eePl Ze] *
: 3, oR e Byes iS =o | og slonfo | S7 eal 85)/ 0/88 | ont a
> E pal GSR Nagel eS a OSB ale BF ol cele abe!
5 oe a ® . “< ac] eee ) ° .
7 : 5 ; ; : =;
*soWady xX g
*IOYICAM “pula Pe atone W *d $3 SUOTJVAIOSAO "Ww °V OL 18 SUOTJVAISSCO >

“GEQ] ‘uaqumaaony fo yjuopy ey2 of “vjInII0D ‘a0ffQ hussp ay, yw jday ‘sajsthay poorbojoLoaja py

eee anes seseaereee ere essere reece career creer TT ESSE TE PE DOE EO ORE OO OL I I TE LIT EI

=

JOURNAL

OF

PRE ASIATIC SOCIETY.
No. 48.—December, 1835.

I.—Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. By W. H. Wartuen,
Esq., Persian Secretary to the Bombay Government.

[Extract of a letter to the Sec. As. Soc. read at the Meeting of the 2nd inst. |

Having had opportunities of conversing with many natives of Chinese Tartary,
several of whom were intelligent and well-informed men, I have drawn up a
description of the country, from the information I obtained from them; and, as
in the absence of any more correct accounts of a region which has not been
visited since the time of GeNeGu1z Kua’n and his successors, this may prove
interesting, I transmit the memoir to you, to be laid before the Society.

I am well aware of the great caution with which oral information on such
points should be received. The accounts I obtained were not elicited by any
formal queries, or by giving the persons addressed any idea of the object in
view; but in the course of daily interviews, and by friendly intercourse with
them ; and all my questions were casually introduced in the course of desultory
conversation.

I have been on friendly terms with at least ten of these persons, who were
on their way to perform pilgrimage at Mecca; and where I had any doubts
regarding the authenticity of information received from one, I took advantage,
on a different occasion, to address myself, on the same subject, to another, and
thus an opportunity was afforded to rectify any thing which might have been
incorrectly stated.

My sole object has been to add, in any degree, however trifling, to our know-
ledge of a country so near our own frontier, and of which, at present, so little
is known; and I trust I shall be excused, at least, in my humble attempt to
imitate those great men MM. Humsoxipr and Kiaprotu, who have been
gaining information, in precisely the same manner, from natives of Chinese
Tartary, who have resorted to Orenburg, or Orsk, on commercial pursuits, the
result of which they have lately published at Paris.—W. H. W.

4p

654 Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. [Dec.

Chinese Tartary.—The province of Chinese Tartary contains, at
present, nine towns of considerable magnitude, namely, Yarkand,
Kashgar, Auksi, Hela, Yengi Hissar, Ooch Tirfan, and Koneh
Tiérfan, (which is sometimes called Hami,) Gummi, and Lopp.

Yarkand.—Of these, Yarkand, from the extent of its population,
may be said to be the capital of the province, though, in a political
point of view, each of the governors and Chinese residents of those
towns exercises independent authority. Ydrkand is described as
being a flourishing and populous city. It has two forts: the prin-
cipal one is of large extent, but its walls are of clay; and it is
uninhabited; the other, which is rather smaller, has four gates, is
inhabited, and is considered by the natives as very strong, being
built of stone and chunam, and surrounded with a ditch. The suburbs
extend over a considerable space. The population of Yarkand is
said te consist of about 30,000 families, as found by a census made
by the Chinese—each family consisting of from five to 10 persons.
Only 200 Chinese merchants are fixed residents; but many other
traders of the same nation resort to the city—departing after a
temporary stay. There are also many Tingani merchants resident
in the place, and a number of Chinese artisans. Many natives of
Kashmir have settled at Yarkand, a very few Hindus, and some
Shiahs, or, as they are called, worshippers of Ali; but no Jews or
Nogai Tartars. The houses are generally one story high, and built
of clay, which answers the purpose sufficiently well, as very little
rain fallsin these countries. Yarkand boasts of numerous mosques and
colleges. There are two spacious bazars—one within the fort, and
the other in the suburbs, besides other smaller bazars in different
quarters of the city. Horse-flesh is sold in the butcher’s shops, and
generally eaten : it is not considered unlawful food by the people of
the country, and generally sells for the same price as mutton. Kim-
miz is not used by the inhabitants of the towns, but by the Kalmuks,
and other roving tribes. The tenets of the Musalman religion do
not appear to be very strictly observed in Chinese Tartary; and the
inhabitants seem to be much more tolerant than those of Kokan, and
other places in Independent Tartary.

The Chinese government has a force stationed at Ydarkand, stated
to consist of about 7000 soldiers, partly Chinese, and partly Mand-
shus, or Mongols, of whom a portion garrison the forts; the remain-
der.are cantoned outside the town, much like the English troops in
India. ‘The whole are under the orders of an officer, who has the
title of Umbaun. There are no Tung4ni soldiers in Chinese Tar-
tary ; for, as they are Musalmans, the Chinese fear that they would,

1835.] Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. 655

being of the same religion, join the Usbeks in case of any insurrec-
tion taking place. The Tuingdnis live in the country, the chief
towns of which are Salar and Seiram. A.ExANDER the Great is said
to have penetrated as far as Salar, and to have left a colony of his
soldiers in the country, from whom the Tiingdnis are descended. They
derive the name from several Turkish and Persian words, in different
ways, signifying, left behind, looking back, &c. &c. It is a general
tradition, that ALEXANDER carried his conquests through this country,
to the frontiers of China proper. The Umbaun, who is the Chinese
resident, is the chief political, as well as military, authority in each
district. The present Governor of Yarkand is Asput Reumsn Bre
Waue, who is the nominal Usbek ruler of the country; but is, to
all intents, under the most complete control of the Umbaun, who has
sole authority over the regular Chinese troops stationed in the district.

There are many small towns and villages dependent on Yarkand.
The whole district round it is said to be most populous, and is thickly
interspersed with villages and hamlets. The country is described as
very fertile also; and amongst its productions are enumerated wheat,
barley, rice, gram, jawdri, bajrt, and various seeds from which oil
is extracted. Melons, grapes, apples, and other fruits of temperate
climes, are also abundant. A large portion, however, of the wealth
of the people of the country about Yérkand is said to consist of flocks
of the shawl goat, called by them Akhchahs, of which almost every
landed proprietor possesses a large number. The dumba, or fat-
tailed sheep, is also common. Plantations of mulberry trees are very
numerous, and great quantities of silk are produced.

Irrigation is said to be carried on to a great extent, the whole of
the lands in the vicinity being plentifully watered by rivulets, and
streams of water, flowing from the mountains.

Kashgar.—The city of Kashgar is the ancient capital of the pro-
vince; but since the rebellion of JenAncik Kuoseu, when its inhabi-
tants suffered much from both friends and foes, it has fallen greatly
to decay. Kashgar is the frontier station, and five days’ journey from
Yarkand; with a kafila it is six days; but with quick travelling the
distance may be traversed in four. ‘The city itself contains about
16,000 inhabitants : many towns, villages, and castles are also depend-
ant on it, the population of which is very considerable. The Usbeck
chief of Kashgar is named Tani’rutpi'N Bre, who has not the
title of Wave; but his government is distinct from that of AspuL
Reuman Beo Waue, the chief of Yarkand. He is, however, inferior
in rank to the Waue. Eight thousand Chinese regular troops age
constantly cantoned at Kashgar, as a check on the Khan of Kokan.

4rp2

656 Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. [Dsc.

Yengi Hissar—On the road, about half-way between Yarkand
and Kashgar, lies the town of Yengi Hissar, which is famous for its
dancing girls and musicians, who are Musalmans, and resemble those
of India.

Auksi.—Auksi is north-east from Yarkand, and distant about
20 days’ caravan travelling. This town is represented as a very
flourishing place, and a great commercial mart for the products of
China and Russian Tartary. It is the residence of a hakim, named
AuMED, son of Oozax, whose authority is distinct from that of the
other chiefs. He is an Usbek, and lower in rank than the Wave
of Yarkand ; and, in like manner, subordinate to the Chinese Umbaun.
The number of Chinese troops in Auksi is 2000. The silver coin
called Tankeh, the current money of the province, is struck at this
place.

Eela, or Gouldja.—The town of Eela, which is also called Gouldja,
is situated north of Auwksié, distant 25 or 30 days’ journey; but it
may be reached in 20 by quick travelling. From Ydarkand to Eela,
the distance is greater, and ordinarily, a journey of 40 days. To
this place, as also to Yessik and Kouché, the Emperor of China
banishes criminals of magnitude, for three, five, seven years, or for
life. Owing to the fertility of the surrounding country, fruit and
grain are very cheap at Hela; and good horses, sheep, and dumbas,
may be had at very moderate prices. It is at this place, and the
neighbouring country, that great numbers of the Kalmuks, or Hleuth
hordes, have been located by the Chinese government. The climate
is said generally to prove fatal to foreigners.

Kouché.—Kouché is situated north-west of Auksi, and south of
Eela, at a distance of 40 days’ journey from Ydrkand, and about
three months’ journey from the Russian frontier. The population of
Kouché consists chiefly of Kalmuks. The principal people of substance
reside in the city, and the poorer classes in tents on the plains.
These generally follow pastoral pursuits, and have numerous herds of
cattle.

Ooch Tirfdn and Koneh Tirfan.—There are two towns called
Tirfdn : one Ooch Tiirfan, which is only two days’ journey from
Yurkand and Auksté ; the other Koneh Tiarfdn, called also Hami,
which is at a distance of two months journey from those places.
Koneh Tiirfdn is a very ancient city; and remarkable for the fine
grapes which are there produced.

Lopp.—Lopp is situated at a great distance from Ydrkand. The
inhabitants are principally Chinese; but few Usbeks reside there.
Lopp is remarkable for a salt-water lake in its vicinity.

1835.] Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. 657

Gammt.—Between Yurkand and Eelchi (in Khoten) is the town
of Gummi, the chief of which some time since was KursBaAn Bza,
who was said to be in possession of the stone called ‘‘ Yedeh Tash,”
(rain-stone,) which, according to popular belief, possesses the extra-
ordinary virtue of causing rain to fall, whenever it is placed in sweet
water.

Khoten.—In the country of Khoten are the towns of Karakash,
Eelchi, and Kirrea, besides many others of less magnitude. Helchi
was anciently called Khoten, but at present there is no town bearing
that name, which is now applied to the whole district, of which
Karakash is the capital ; distant about ten or twelve days’ journey from
Ydrkand. The district is governed by two Chinese Umbauns, or
residents, to whom are subordinate two Usbek hdakims ; one in
EKelchi, and the other in Kirrea. There is a Chinese regular force
of 2000 men stationed in the district; and the number of subjects
paying tribute is estimated at 700,000. The population is chiefly
Usbek ; but Kalmuks, or Eleuths, are also settled in large numbers in
different parts of the country. The Musalmans are more numerous
than the Buddhist idolators. The policy of the Chinese is said to be
opposed to the adoption, by any of their nation, of the Muhammedan
faith. ))

Helchi.—Eelchi is 12 days’ journey from Ydrkand. In this town,
and generally in Khoten, there are many Baudh priests and temples.

Kirrea —Kirrea is five days’ journey on horseback from Eelcht.
At this town is a gold mine; the sand of the river which flows near
it is also found to contain that precious metal. Two or three hundred
labourers are always employed in the mines, which are said to be
very productive. The produce of this mine is monopolized by the
Chinese government.

Revenue and Trade.—The revenues of Khoten are said to exceed
those of Ydrkand. A considerable trade is carried on between these
places by kAfilas, which carry mushroo, satin paper, gold dust, silk,
grapes, raisins, and other commodities, to Ydrkand; whence they
bring copper pots, leather, boots, &c. to Khoten.

Trade of Chinese Tartary.—A very extensive commercial intercourse
is also carried on between Yarkand and the large towns near it, as
well as with Kashmir, Badakshan, China, and the Russian territories
on the north-western borders of the Chinese empire.

From Kashmir the natives of that country bring to Ydrkand,
shawls, kincdbs, chikun, white piece goods, and leather; and take
back ambi, or pure silver, the wool of the shawl goat, called tbbit,
and other articles.

658 Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. {Dec.

The merchants of Fyzdbad, which is the capital of Badakshan, bring
to Ydrkand slaves, and precious stones, taking back silver and tea.
The kafila, which comes once a year, is generally about 40 days on
the road; but by forced marches, the journey may be performed in
twenty.

From Andejan, in the Khanate of Kokan, piece goods and other
commodities are brought via Kashgar ; the return trade from whence
consists of pure silver, China-ware, tea, in boxes and bricks. The
brick tea is of a very inferior quality, and is used only by the poorer
classes. This trade is carried on by means of horses, mules, and
camels.

Kafilas come from the Russian frontier, by way of Hela, Auksi,
and Kouché, bringing broad cloth, brocades, silver, gold ducats,
copper, steel, furs, &c. and they take back tea, rhubarb, sal-ammo-
niac, &c.

Communication with Pekin.—From Yarkand it takes a caravan from
four to six months totravel to Pekin, (which the natives call Pechin ;)
but by quick marches, the journey may be performed in three months.
There is but one road to Pekin, which caravans, or travellers, can
use; for though there is said to be another, and shorter, route, its
use is prohibited by the Chinese government. In the way there is
one very difficult pass, where 20 matchlock men may oppose a whole
army. <A party of Usbeks is stationed there. At every stage is a
Chinese Ortung, or post, of seven or eight Chinese, and about 20
Usbeks. No passport is necessary for persons going from Ydarkand
to China; neither are they prevented from remaining there as long
as they choose, the leave of the Emperor not being requisite for this
purpose.

An extensive trade is carried on between China and Yarkand.
Great quantities of silk, great numbers of cattle, &c. are taken to
China ; articles of China manufacture, porcelain, and especially tea,
form the returns.

Road to Tibet.—From Yarkand to Laddk, (or little Tibet,) which
is nominally dependent on China, is a journey of 30 or 40 days.
The country on the way is inhabited for two stages, where Chinese
Ortungs are met with, five Chinese and 20 Usbeks in each; but for
the next twenty days, the country passed through is a succession of
plains and mountains, without inhabitants. The people at the Ortung
inspect the passes given by the Umbaun, and after stamping it with
their seals, return it; but it is kept at the last post, and given back
on the return of the party, which must account for absentees. These
Ortungs, however, it is said, may be easily avoided. By forced

1835.] Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. 659

marches, Tibet may be reached from Ydrkand in 17 or 18 days.
Thence to Kashmir, it takes a kafila 25 days; but the journey, by
quick marches, may be performed in 15; there is plenty of wood,
water, and forage, on the road.

To AukstiimFrom Ydrkand to Auksv is 20 days travelling by cara-
van: and on the way are 17 Ortungs, at most of which there are
seven Chinese and 13 Usbeks; but at some, there are more. The
road passes through a very woody country.

Rivers. —There is a river near Yarkand, the name of which is
Zurufshan. It is generally frozen for three months in the winter ;
when horses, camels, and men may pass over it. From the part of
the country about Auksi two streams join the Zurufshan: one of
them flows five kos distant from Auksé, and the other is seven days’
journey from that place.

Climate.—In the summer, when the melons ripen, it is very hot
in these countries ; but during winter, it is extremely cold. In this
season, a great deal of snow falls on the mountains, which are twenty
days’ journey from Ydrkand ; but in the city itself, very little falls.
It rains very rarely, only twice or thrice in the year, for an hour
or so; and then the weather becomes very cold.

Volcanoes—Sal-Ammoniac.—At the distance of 10 days’ journey from
Auksv, are two very high ranges of mountains, between which there
is a valley, the surface of which, to a considerable depth, is covered
_ with sal-ammoniac. There is a dreadful heat at this place, oecasion-
ed by a volcano, which, by the people of the country, is called ‘‘ God’s
fire.’ The heat prevents them approaching it in the summer. During
the eruptions, the sal-ammoniac is said to be thrown out, and shower-
ed over the valley, like mist, to the distance of one kos; it afterwards
hardens, and becomes, during the winter, crystallized like ice. People
go there in that season, cut it into convenient pieces, and carry it
away. It is said, that near old, or Koneh, Tuirfan, also, is a mountain,
out of which flames of fire are seen to issue.

Earthquakes—Cholera.—The natives state, that about three years
ago, there were constant earthquakes in the province; and that the
cholera committed great ravages at Vdrkand. In Badakshdn, the
earthquakes destroyed a great number of houses and people.

History of the Province.—About eighty years ago, the whole of the
country was in the hands of the Kalmuks, or Eleuths ; and there was
one Tarah, or chief, in each district, as governor. The Kalmuks
were subsequently conquered by the Chinese in the reign of Kren
Lune, and the authority of the Emperor was established over the
whole province, For a long period after that event, the Chinese

660 Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. (Dec.

held it in possession, without any attempt being made, either by the
Kalmuks to regain their lost authority, or by the natives, to assert
their independence. Subsequently, however, the Chinese began to
oppress the people to such a degree, as to excite much discontent,
and a general feeling of dislike towards them. Taking advantage
of this state of things, A1 Kuoszn, a descendent of the ancient
princes of the country, and a Syed of noble family, to whom the
Kalmuks, as well as the whole of the Muhammedan population, were
much attached, headed a rebellion against the Chinese, and opposed
them with various success for some time; but was, at length, forced
to retire before their superior number. The Chinese are said to
have made a cruel use of the advantage they had gained, and mas-
sacred the Muhammedans in every quarter where the least resistance
was apprehended.

Ar Kyosen, and his followers, finding it impossible to continue
the contest, fled to Badakshdn ; but the prince of that country betray-
ed him, and gave him up to the Chinese, who put him to death. In
re‘ribution for this treachery, his country, the people of Yarkand
believe, has been visited with the miseries that have since befallen
it, and fell an easy prey to Munammep Murdo Bue, of Kundiz, who
some years ago invaded and conquered it. When Ar Kyosen was
thus delivered into the hands of the Chinese, his son, and his grand-
son, JeHAnGi’R Kuosen, fled to Andejan. Some years afterwards, Ar
Kuosern’s son died, leaving his son JenAncirn Kuossn, then a youth,
under the care of the KuAn of Kokan. About 10 or 11 years ago,
observing how unpopular the Chinese had become, he formed a plan
for regaining the possessions of his forefathers. Having succeeded
in bringing over to his cause Ens Bandour, one of the influential
men of Andejan, who joined him with a large body of the Khirgiz,
and being supported also in his attempt by the Kan of Kokan, who
sent a force of about 8000 horse to assist him ; he advanced into
Chinese Tartary, and attacked the Chinese in their cantonment at
Kashgar. The Chinese, and Yunis Wave, who was then the Usbek
hakim of Kashgar, took refuge in the fort ; but the Chinese apprehend-
ing that this chief and the Muhammedans would join Jmu4neir, put
Yunis Wave, and many of the inhabitants, to death. This inhuman
proceeding, however, failed of its object ; for it did not deter the rest
of the inhabitants, who were Musalmans, from going over to JEHAN-
cir; who, thus strengthened, attacked the fort, and carried it by
storm: the Chinese, who were taken by surprise, being either driven
out, or cut to pieces.

1835.] Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. 661

JeuHAnGcir Kuoseu then marched to Yarkand, where also he was
well received by the inhabitants. The Chinese, after sustaining
several defeats, abandoned the country. Encouraged by his success,
the Kuosen then proceeded to Khoten, and expelled the Chinese
from that province. Whenever he made his appearance, the Chinese
either gave way, or, resisting, were put to the sword. Thus JaHAn-
Giz acquired possession of the whole country, which remained in
his hands for five or six months; but, abusing his power, he tyran-
nised over the people, and oppressed them. He became, in conse-
quence, disliked, and was not supported by the inhabitants in oppos-
ing the Chinese, who returned with an army estimated at about
60,000 men, besides many Kalmuk horse. Being unable to check
their progress, the Kuoseu retired to the mountains, and his Khirgiz
and Andejdn allies retired to their own countries, carrying away with
them property of immense value, of which, on the approach of the
Chinese, they had plundered the inhabitants. Shortly afterwards,
IsHdx Kuosuu, of Kashgar, being jealous of JenAncir, betrayed
him into the hands of the Chinese general at Auksi, by whom he
was sent to Pechin, (Pekin,) where he was put to death by order of
the Emperor. For the service which IsHdx Kuogen had rendered,
he received from the Chinese, the office and title of Waua, or prince
of Kashgar. The real cause of the defeat of JenAncir Kyosen was,
that the Usbeks of Chinese Tartary were divided into two tribes,
the Ak Tak, to which he belonged, who are of the Nagsh-bandi sect,
and the Kura Tak, who are Kadaris, and who never cordially joined
the other. IsHAx KuoszH was the chief of the latter. Sometime
subsequent to his being appointed governor of Kashgar, he was
called to Pekin, but never heard of after. It is supposed the Chinese
were afraid of his influence, and that he was got rid of by poison.

Revenue—Albaum, or Land Tar—and Customs.—The revenue derived
by the Chinese, or rather the payment made to them by their subjects
in Chinese Tartary, is denominated ‘‘ Albaum,” which consists of a
capitation tax of one rupee from each man, per month, and a tenth
of the produce of the land.

Syeds, millahs, pirzddehs, faquirs, soldiers, &c. are excused from
paying the ‘‘ Albaum,” according to the laws of Gencurs Kudn.
Formerly, land customs were levied on merchandize in transitu
through the province ; and were collected at the rate of 24 per cent.
on the value, (or as the narrator described it, ‘‘ 1 in 40, that is, of 40
pieces of cloth, one was taken ;’’) but, about twelve years ago, this
duty was entirely abolished, by order of the Emperor of China, and
merchandize now passes free of impost.

4a

662 Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten. [Dxe.

Population and Language.—The native population of the country
is Usbek, divided, as before stated, into two distinct classes, the Ak
Tak, and Kura Tak. The language generally spoken is the Jaghatai
Turki, which the Kalmuks also understand. This is probably the
purest dialect of the Turki language, there being less admixture of
Arabic and Persian, than in any of the others. A collection of a
few common words will be found annexed to this memoir, which
will show its great affinity to the other branches of that widely diffused
tongue.

Chinese Troops.—The military force stationed by the Chinese in
their provinces, is said to amount to between twenty and thirty
thousand men.

Nature of the Government.—The Chinese government is repre-
sented to be very unpopular, at the present time, throughout these
countries. There seems to be nothing in its system calculated to
conciliate, or productive of advantages tending to reconcile the people
to subjection to foreigners. The feeling of dislike, with which the
Chinese are regarded, has been latterly much increased, in conse-
quence of their carrying on vast works of fortification, and building
walled towns, by the forced labour of the natives. The Musalman
princes, chiefs, &c. are said to occupy, by the natives who had passed
through India, nearly the same political position under the Chinese
residents, or Umbauns, and stand in the same relation to them, as
they supposed the Nawabs, Rajas, &c. of this country do to the
residents of the English government, the Chinese interfering little
in the direct management of the people, and leaving to the native
princes the administration of the government and laws. The
revenue, however, is realized entirely by the Chinese, the princes,
&c. having large landed assignments.

English in India.—It is known at Yarkand, that India is governed
by a nation of Europe (Feringis) ; and, it is said, that the Chinese
entertain a high notion of the power of the English, which they view
with feelings of apprehension, connected with an idea, that is preva-
lent in the country, of its being destined to fall into their hands.

Chinese Tartary accessible to Kuropean travellers.—It is said, that
provided a person would dress as a native, allow his beard to grow,
and accompany pilgrims on their return from Mecca, there would
not be much difficulty in penetrating into Chinese Tartary ; but that
the easiest way would be by way of Kokan and Kashgar, as large
kafilas of merchants pass that way. The person must, however, be
able to speak Turki, as very few of the natives of the country under-
stand Persian ; whereas, in the Kokan country, in Independent Tartary,

1835.] Vocabulary of Turki words. 663

the population of whole towns speak nothing else. It would not be
difficult for the individual to go even to Pekin, in China. All that is
requisite is to get a pass from the governor, by paying a few tenkehs
to the Chinese officers, giving out that his object is trade. My
informants stated, that some years ago, a European made his appear-
ance at Yarkand, in a native dress. He was discovered accidentally,
and brought before the governor, who threatened him with torture
if he did not confess who he was; but assured him that he would
be well treated, if he spoke the truth. He admitted that he was a
European, and was sent out of the country.

The foregoing particulars were elicited from various natives of the
country, and at different periods, as they happened to arrive at Bom-
bay, in their way on a pilgrimage to Mecca. One of these indivi-
duals was a prince of the country, another a pirzddeh, both persons
of considerable education and information: the first was a native of
Auksi ; the second had travelled to Badakshdn, Kurratigin, Dervdz,
and Kokan. Another was an inhabitant of Helchi, in Avhoten.

At the time this information was collected, I had not seen the
works of Lieut. Burnes, or Timxowsky, nor the papers by the Baron
Humsotpt, and Monsieur Kuaprortg, in the Journal Asiatique.

[t is remarkable, however, and perhaps, may add to the value of
this information, that the accounts given me generally corroborate
those of the above-named distinguished characters, with the excep-
tion of what Lieut. Burnes’ informants told him respecting the troops
in Chinese Tartary being Tinganis, which mine say is not the case;
and the reason given by them seems to prove the truth of their
assertion.

ood

Collection of Words of the Turké dialect, spoken at Yarkand.

Water Su Well Kuduk and\Light Taghatteh
Fire Ot Kulduk |\Far Zirak
Smoke Chakan Salt Tus Near Yakin
Steam Ohak Ghi Siriluja High Agis
Man Ar Kisheh Milk Sut Mountain Tayh
Woman Mazlam Kisheh|Dog It Valley, or yeh
Girl Kiz (billa) Cat Mushshak Pass, } i
Boy Oghal (billa) \Horse A’t Head Bash
Red Kizzil Sheep, | Ko ; Mouth Yaghis
Black Kara Dimba, y Nose Baxiin
Green Yashil Cow Galleh Hair Tik
Yellow Sarak Ox Oyi Foot Put
White A’k Bull Bokakeh Ear Kullak
Good Abdin Camel Togheh The goat

Bad Yamin Ass Ashakr roducing =
Old Aski Mule Khacha the Kash- Akhcheh
New Yengi Dark Kurango mir wool

4° qr 2

664 Some Account of the Hill Tribes | [Dec.

Arm Kul Ice Muz Five Bash.
Sun Kitn Snow Kar Six Alteh.
Moon Ai Rain Yamghur Seven Yetteh.
Night Kicheh Deer Kk Hight Sakis,
Star Yelduz Road Yol Nine Tokus.
Year Yel A Sheep Koi Ten On.
Stone Tash The wool } Twenty Yegirmi.
Silver Gumish used for | Thirty Otus.
Gold Altur making } Jibddit. Forty Kerk.
Tron Tumir Kashmir | Fifty Alek.
Wool Yung Shawls J Sixty Altmish.
Fool Tukheh One Bir. Seventy Yetmish.
Sister Saulin Two Iki. Highty Saksen.
Brother Yanim Three Uch. Ninety Toksan.
Wind Shamal Four Tut. Hundred Yuz.
Thousand Ming.
VERBS.

To give Birmak. To sell Satmak.

To take Almak. To eat Kich kanch almak.

To speak Dimak. To buy Satab almak.

To strike Urmak. To drink IJIchmak.

To carry Makmak.

11.—Some Account of the Hill Tribes of the Piney Hills in the Madura
District. Extracted from the MS. Journal of the late Major Warp.
Madras European Regiment, communicated by Capt. T. J. Taytor,

The primitive inhabitants residing in the Varshagherry and Kum-
nundaven mountains, are the Kunnuver Villalers, in number amount-
ing to about 4000 of both sexes, who resorted to them, it is supposed,
about four centuries ago. They may be classed with the Villalers of
the plain, yet differ in their habits and manners, scarcely having any
intercourse with each other, or forming any connection by marriage.
This latter circumstance may, however, in some degree be attributed
to the difference of climate, the extreme cold of which the inhabitants
of the low lands are unable to endure. It is still more singular that
even among themselves they have peculiar habits and customs, which
distinguish those in the east from their western neighbours : the latter
consider themselves as something superior, and have no communica-
tion with each other. In their marriages, the Kunnuvers of the east
invariably use a teak-wood stool when performing the ceremony by
way of distinction: those of the west are not so particular, the bride
and bridegroom are seated on stools, the floor of the house being
previously garnished with cow-dung, and fantastically ornamented
with streaks of flour. When the operation of sprinkling saffron-water
is over, the husband performs the most important part of tying the
tally, a small golden ornament, around the neck of the bride; the
whole concludes with an entertainment to the relatives and friends of

1835.] of the Piney Mountains, Madura District. 665

both parties. The Puryum, or marriage gift, to the relations of the
bride, is a pair of oxen; to the west only one bullock, and sometimes
a cloth, as a present to the mother of the bride. Incontinency is
however very predominant, and separation between man and wife, not
unfrequent, subject often to caprice. Ifa man feels an inclination to
alienate himself from his wife, he has only to make his intention
known to her parents, who receive her back with an offer of a pair of
oxen. To the west she is turned over, simply with a Vatti, or
metal dish, in use, to eat victuals out of. In case a woman is dis-
pleased with her husband, and absolutely wishes to part from him,
she is at liberty, only she must leave all her golden trinkets, if she
has any, to her husband ; those of silver she takes, being considered
as her own property. ‘To the west, however, the wife is only per-
mitted to take back such articles as she may have possessed before
marriage, and if she has any children, they are left behind as the sole
property of her husband. Should such separation take place, when
the woman is in a state of pregnancy, (and in the interim, be
married to another man,) the child then born must revert to the
legitimate father. The care and expense of weaning it, to the east,
is recompensed by a donation of 30 fanams ; towards the west, it is
delivered to the father, on his demand, and no recompense made:
the children of such a connection are allowed to grow up, and then
as if by instinct return to their real father, who is bound to receive
and protect them. A woman may marry as often as she chooses, but
can have only one lawful husband at a time, though she may bestow
her favors on another, provided he be of the sume caste: any sexual
connection with a man of another tribe would tend ultimately to ex-
pel her from the caste. A man may marry, if his circumstances will
admit, as many wives as he pleases ; for concubinage is not permitted :
and to a man of some opulence, two or three women are necessary in
his domestic affairs; they are also very useful in the fields, as the toil-
some labour of weeding and watering devolves chiefly on them.
Among the western Kunnuvers, a circumstance rather singular is
supposed to prevail, in case of an estate devolving on a female, which
is likely to occur from the default of male issue; she is prohibited
marriage, but undergoes the ceremony of being betrothed to some
part of the dwelling ; she is however allowed to have an intercourse
with the opposite sex, and to the offspring of such a connection, if a
male, the estate devolves. The women of the eastern parts are very
uncouth, and wear brass and metal necklaces, with a profusion of
bangles on their arms and legs, and bore the membrane between the
nostrils ; the latter is also peculiar to the women of the west, who are

666 Some Account of the Hill Tribes (Dec.

rather superior, and more modest in the wear of ornaments: a few
stone or glass beads around the neck, called Kulpashy, and rings, are
their only decoration ; they wear a white cloth, not very clean, from
above the shoulders, knotted in front, and made fast round the waist
with a bandage; those to the east wear theirs similar to the females
of the low country. The men are very simple in their finery, having
a couple of cloths, one worn round the head, and the other about the
waist; they seldom or ever wear sandals, and by way of ornament,
display a few golden trinkets, pendent from their ear. ‘Their dialect
is the Tamul, which they speak fluently ; but are otherwise illiterate.
The Kunnuvers burn their dead, with the exception of barren women,
and those who may die of the small-pox, who are buried.

The Karakat Vellalers.—This class of people are the primitive in-
habitants of Anjinad, or five counties, or portions into which this di-
vision appears to have been divided on their first settlement in these
regions: they are considered a people of superior caste, their custom
and manners being indicative of it, though not in any manner esteem-
ed above those of the same caste in the low country. A brahman
usually performs the duties at their temple, and the other ceremonies,
&c. &c., as marriages, &c. are performed by a Pandarun or priest of
their own caste. They speak the low TAmul, but are most of them illi-
terate. AT4mul schoolof late has been established at Murair. Theyare
a very abstemious race. Rice constitutes their principal food, as also
tyre, milk, and butter. They have no aversion to fowl or animal food,
and use ghi as a substitute for oil; with it they also anoint themselves
previous to bathing. They are not addicted to spirituous or fermented
liquors. Opium is in use among them in moderation, and they chew
and smoke tobacco. The apparel worn by both sexes does not differ in
the least from the inhabitants of the plains, and consists chiefly of
coarse white cloths ; the women, besides the small ornaments worn in
the nose and ears, decorate their arms with silver bangles, and stich
whose circumstances will not admit of their being of silver have them
made of brass. A few of the men have the exterior membranes of
the nose bored; and all invariably decorate their ears with rings:
sandals for their feet are prohibited them. They are known to
associate with the Kunnuvers, to the east: though their customs and
manners greatly differ. Both castes make no scruple about eating what
is cooked by either. But a Kunnuver, when invited to an entertainment
by a Karakat, is not admitted to that part of the house, where the
meats are dressed, nor is he allowed to touch any of the cooking
implements. This class, by the laws of their sect, are contracted in
marriage, when very young; it however happens, when the parties

1835.] of the Piney range, Madura District. 667

are at an advanced age, (owing, it is said, toa deficiency in the
number of females,) that some of the men are obliged to lead a life of
celibacy. A plurality of wives isnot uncommon. It is only admitted,
however, in case the first proves barren ; but a connection of such a
nature cannot take place without the consent of the first wife, which
must be obtained eventually. A widow is by no means restricted,
she being at liberty to marry another man, if she feels inclined to do
so. It is not uncommon for them to prefer remaining in widowhood.
Chastity among the fair sex does not appear to be a leading virtue
among them; they are supposed, unknown to their husbands, to
bestow favors on their male relatives, as well as on their neighbours.
But in the event it is ascertained, that a female has had sexual
connection with an individual of a lower caste, she is immediately
expelled, and banished beyond their limits, when she becomes the
property of some Kunnuver, who is always happy to afford her an
asylum: in case an individual of this class debases himself by
cohabiting with a woman of another caste, he also undergoes the
sentence of banishment from his native soil. In the primitive times
this crime was punished with death. The marriage ceremony is
performed at the house of the bride: a Pandal being raised before the
door, under it the parties about to be consummated undergo oblation :
they then retire into the house, and are seated on the floor, previously
garnished, with their faces towards the east; a lamp is kept burning
on a stool, also a measure full of paddy, and a symbol of Vignashner,
made of cow’s dung, on the head of which are stuck two blades of the
Acruvumpulla grass, to which the bride and bridegroom prostrate
themselves ; on rising, the relatives present the Tully, a small golden
trinket, to the bridegroom, who ties it round the neck of the bride.
A bason of milk being introduced, in which are steeped some areca
leaves, ficus religiosa, with some of which the elder relations sprinkle
the heads of the bride and bridegroom ; they then get up and pro-
strate themselves before their joint relations, and the marriage con-
cludes with an entertainment. On distributing betel and areca to
the company the bridegroom, accompanied by his bride, retires to his
own house, where the day after he entertains his friends and relatives.
The Puryum or marriage gift is 30 fanams, and a cloth given by the
bridegroom to the bride’s relations. The money is converted into
jewels to adorn her person. Estates invariably devolve to the eldest
son. In case there be two or more, the property is equally distri-
buted among them. They purchase the polians as slaves; price of a
male 30 fanams; that of a female, 50. She is considered of more
value on account of the children she may bear, who when born are
the property of the master.

668 Continuation of notes on Hindi Coins. [Dzc.

IlI.—Notice of ‘Ancient Hindi Coins, continued from page 640. By
James Prinsep, Secy. &c.
Plate L.— Hindi coins of middle age.

To whatever period it may be finally determined to adjudge the
series of Gupta coins described in my last paper, there can be no
hesitation-in regard to the first group of the present plate; though
here again, had it not been for inscriptions relating to the same period,
the absence of credible history would have left us as much in the
dark as ever.

These coins are found, like the former, in greatest abundance in
the vicinity of Kanowy. Ten of them were picked out of a remittance
from.the Cawnpur collectory. The Asiatic Society possesses some
found at Allahabad by Dr. A..Tyrier; I have several from Azimgarh,
and other places, besides four of gold in KerAmat Att’’s collection
from the Panjab ; Col. Smitu, Dr. Swinzy, Lieut. Cunninenam, also
possess specimens, and I have examined those in Col. WinLovensy’s
cabinet; but the most plentiful supply, of gold, silver, and copper
exists in Col. Stacy’s cabinet, whence I have selected most of the
specimens now engraved. .

It is rather singular that no mention of a species of coin compara-
tively so common, is tobe found in MarspeEn’s Numismata Orientalia.
Theonly published drawings of them are, I believe, those accompanying
Mr. Witson’s notice, in the seventeenth vol. Asiatic Researches, which
were taken from coins in his and my own cabinets. This gentleman
was the first to attribute them to their rightful place in history,
although he had but one well ascertained name (Govindu Chandra) to
guide his judgment. Upona careful examination of the several collec-
tions mentioned above, I have now succeeded in adding five new
names to _ his list, so rapid is the progress and success of the efforts
now directed to this line of research.

The figure on the obverse of all these coins is of precisely the same
character ;—a rudely executed front view of a male or female (it is diffi-
cult to say which), seated in the native fashion, with a glory round
the head, and some unintelligible objects in her hands. Prof. Witson
names her Laxmi, on the ground that the princes of the Rahtore
dynasty were of the Vaishavi sect. In this case, we may recognize
in her the female holding the cornucopia of the former Canouj group,
sadly altered for the worse in point of execution.

The inscriptions on the reverse are, with one exception, easily legible ;
they are in a much more modern form of Devanagari than the last,
differing little from the present style, except as to the vowel inflec-
tion e, which falls behind the consonant to which it is attached, as in -

Jour. As. Soc.

h
wut

i qm
sey

Wy. "2
Cuming my y

CARES

Sp la IM
as

Ny

d |
pid

A) ibm
e| ‘Uni

Uherat

guy

Lit
an

i

Wi

ri ree
male ar \ y
}) K Ah i)
hank oon

Doha
it

tee

iy

, re de v4 x
4 ‘ af ; x

: v

fist nly
ay

iee ret

oe

ut rl

4

“4

1835.] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 669

the Gaur or Bengdli alphabet. The same remark applies to the letter
j (fig. 8), which assimilates to the Bengali and Tibetan forms, and serves
admirably to shew the transition of this letter from its original shape
in the most ancient alphabet where it closely resembles the Roman E,
to its present modified form 3.

The figures in my plate are not placed with any regard to chrono-
logical order, but rather according to their comparative frequency of
occurrence: figs. 1 and 2, being by far the most numerous of the set.

On figure 1, we make out the words 3 AgT eaqeq |} Sri mad Jadje-
ya deva. This variety is comparatively common i in gold. Lieut. Cun-
NiNGHAM has one of silver.

On figure 2, the most common of the class, are the very distinct
words 4 H#aliaeazea ; below the letters fa and ¥ are dots, which
supply the place of the 2 or anusvara, so that the full reading should
doubtless be 31 HE WIfA Wasa, Sri mad Govinda Chandra déva ; the
gold of some specimens of this variety is of inferior quality.

Figure 3 is the one I have noted as being difficult so decypher. I
have as yet only found one of the sort; it is of Col. Sracy’s cabinet.
The letters visible are 3t axl Aza wa, Sri mad Rdéma have che nam.
The 4 may possibly be an t, making the reading Rama Hari ; but we
must wait the discovery of duplicates before we can complete or rectify
this uncertain name.

Fig. 4, (Kursmar Aur’) is more easily legible, 3 HRACITS aq Srv
mat Kumara Pala deéva.

Fig. 6, from the same collection, is a small coin of the same prince.

Fig. 5, is equally distinct, 7} wastage fa Sri man Mahé Pdla deva.
It is from a single coin in Col. Sracy’s collection.

Figs. 7 and 8, (Sracy,) one of copper, the other of silver, help to
decypher one another. The complete legend is At Way ea Sré
Ajaya deva.

Lieut. Cunnrneuam has sent me an impression of a copper coin of
the same class, on which the name appears to be At az™ Al SF pro-
bably Sri mad Laxmi (Pala or Chandra ? ) deva.

It was, as I have said above, the occurrence of the name of Govinpa
Cuanpra vDE'vA, which led Mr. Witson to ascribe this group to the
Rdhtore princes of Canouj, who held the sceptre of that ancient city
for a century prior to the overthrow of their last and best known
Raja, Jycuanp (Jaya Chandra), by SuHaudn-up-pin. One of our
coins undoubtedly belongs to the former prince, and it may perhaps
be allowable to give the last two, figs. 7 and 8, to Jycuanp himself,
whose proper name may have been Ajaya Chandra déva; the family

4R

670 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. [Dee.

name €handra being frequently omitted both in writings and in
inscriptions. But the remaining coins of our series, two of them hav-
ing the family name P@/a, cannot be reconciled with any of the prin-
ces in the short Rahtore line, of which every individual from the first
conqueror Cuanpra De‘vA,in A. D. 1072, is known to us through the
concurrent testimony of several inscriptions. What was the antecedent
dynasty ? has been a question hitherto imperfectly answered ; the tra-
ditions cited by Colonel Top being, as stated in my last paper, at total
variance with inscriptions. The latter indeed only record two names,
Yasovierana (or Sripdla ?) and Masicuanpra prior to the conquest
of Cuanpra pe'vA. The latter of these should probably have been
Maurras, of whose reign in the early part of the eleventh centu-
ry, the inscriptions at Sdrndth, Dindjpur, and A’mgachi supply ample
evidence, now indeed confirmed by the superscription of his coin in
fig.5. Yasovierawa, in like manner, may be referred to the VieraHa-
PALA DE'va of the Dindjpur inscription, and thus the sur-name of Pala
may be restored to both these princes. |

Although Gaur in Bengal was the original seat of the Pala family,
there is no reason to doubt that they had acquired the paramount
sovereignty of India, and that the seat of their government was fixed
for a time at least in Canouj. Indeed, branches of the same family may
be traced to the westward—to the Pdlas of Malwa, one of whom
(AnanGardzLa) rebuilt Delhi, or re-established it as his capital; and
perhaps even to Guzerat, where we find the occurrence of a KumAra
PALA, in 1100, who may probably be the owner of our coin, fig. 4,
especially as his son is named Asaya Pda, who may be the Asaya
pE'va of figs. 7, 8. In evidence of the identity of this family, it may
be sufficient to note a few facts, referring to the elaborate observations
of Winrorp, and the subsequent notices of CoLusrooxg, and those of
Feu, and Witson, in the 15th volume of the Asiatic Researches.

The list of the kings of Gualior, noticed by Wixrorp, consists of
85 names, all having the affix of Pdla, ‘‘ in accordance with the predic-
tion of Guapala the hermit, their progenitor*.” Now the founder of
the Gaur family of Bengal is equally a Gopdla, though some au-
thorities call him Bhupala, a name of much the same import, and de-
noting his rustic extraction.

Again, the grandson of ANANGAPALA, the Tuar conqueror of Delhi,
is stated to have returned to Gaur, ‘‘ his native country,” after the
defeat and death of Priraivi Paua, or Pirnaura. Thus ANANGAPALA
too was of the Bengal family : moreover he was either the grandson or
the fifth in descent from Chandra Palat, or Chaitra Palat, of Malwd,

* As. Res. ix. 154. + Ayin Akberi. + Witrorp.

4

1835.) Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 671

,

‘‘who swayed all India,” after JayananpA: and the Musalman
writers affirm that “after Gebdl (or Chait Pala), the Balhdra kings
of Guzerat became paramount emperors of India*.’’ It is not, how-
ever, absolutely necessary to travel so far to the west for a Kumara
Pala, since in Anuu Fazu’s list we find a prince of this name imme-
diately following ANANGAPALA in Mdlwd ; and Ferisuta also makes a
Kunwer ray (raja Kumdéra pala) reigning at Canowj on the invasion
of Maumup. There is evidently some connection between all these
different dynasties, and although the subject is now involved in almost
inextricable confusion, from the discrepancy of the several lists in the
Ayin Akberi, in Racuundtu's Rajevali, and in the Agni Purdna, we
may hope, through the fortunate discovery of the present coins, and
others that we may now confidently hope will succeed them, to arrange
the names in a satisfactory and coherent manner. Itis evident that
the Canouj mint produced this series continuously, as the alphabetic
type is preserved through the whole unaltered. It will be seen pre-
sently that the same distinctive characters appear at a particular
point, both in the coinage of Guzerdt, and in that of Chitor or Mewar ;
and in both cases sufficient of the name remains visible to shew that
it terminates in Pdla déva, and therefore, that it marks the spread and
paramount sovereignty of the Gaur family across the whole continent
of India,

Figs. 13, 14, 15, 16, are silver coins found in abundance in
many parts of India, but chiefly towards the desert to the west of
Delhi. Colonel Sracy’s cabinet is rich in them. Mr. Witson’s
plates exhibit others from Colonel MacxEnzin’s and my own collec-
tion. They weigh on an average 50 grains, or three massas.

On the obverse is a figure of the boar, or the Vardha avatar of Visu-
nu, and the chakra or discus of this god is visible on many of the spe-
cimens. The character on the reverse is again of quite a new form.
Instead of the square-built Gaur alphabet, or the Gujerdtt letters, we
have here the nail-headed letter common to the inscriptions of the
Takshac, Jit, and Mort princes, of Haravati and Mulvd, described in
Top’s Rajasthén, App. vol. I. which belong chiefly to the 7th, 8th and
9th centuries. This vague coincidence may help in assigning the place
and period of their coinage, which otherwise there are no data to trace.
The full legend of the coins, made out from collation of the engraved
figures and from many others in Colonel Sracy’s cabinet, is#\i wetfea-
are: Sri mad ddi Varaha, which is nothing more than the title of the
incarnation, and affords no clue to its appropriation. Below the

* Wixrorp, As. Res. ix. 164.
4r2

672 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. (Dec.

legend is in general visible a square or oblong central ornament, with
two balusters on the sides: their intent is bevond my apprehension.

Fig. 17, differs from the preceding in the reverse, although
its general similarity and its being found in company shew it to
belong to the same family. The two baluster-looking ornaments
again meet the eye—on the reverse is the initial word 3 Sri, and
below it 4 or G1, yo or po.

The flourish on the left hand is evidently intended for a haman
face viewed in profile.

In 18, the word Sréis again very distinct, but the head of the
boar-god is also apparent. In the Society’s plate, I was the cause of
Mr. Witson’s mistaking the word 37 for the letter @ reversed, from
my having engraved the figure upside down.

In 19, and 20, the human profile is better defined than in 17.
The contour of the ear, cheek and shoulder may be distinguished ;
the eye, nose, and lips, are represented by dots. In 20, the word Sri
is still discernible.

On the reverse is a single letter, either k, s, or m, amidst flourishes.

In 21, the boar again appears, with the letters 4% vaha or per-
haps ea ek. Of this sort, a quantity were dug up while I was at
Benares, by Mr. Taytor, judge of Mirzapur, near Sultdnpur. Mr.
Gusgsins found several at Gurgaon to the south-west of Delhi.

It seems impossible that coins so plentifally found in Upper India
should have been struck in the peninsula, or we might from the
device and superscription attribute them to the Vijyanagar sovereign-
ty; for Colonel Witks informs us, that ‘‘ Vardha, the boar, one of
the incarnations of Visunu, was the emblem which these rajas
adopted, as the impression on their gold coins, and the coin was and
is named Vardha in consequence, in the Hindu languages of the south.”
The restriction however of this name to the small gold coins or huns
of the south is against this hypothesis. One of the Vijyanagar Vard-
has (of Deva Raya ?) is depicted as fig. 80 of Mr. Wizson’s plates;
and though the attitude of the avatdr is a rude imitation of ours, the
form of the Nagarf character is there essentially different, and much
more modern.

Similarity of name might tempt us to assign them to the Varéhas,
a powerful Indo-Scythic tribe to the west of Jesalmér, who were fre-

quently in collision with the Bhattis in the eighth century, or the foun-

dation of Tunnote*. But it does not appear from Col. PortineEr’s

description of them, under the name of Brahooes, that these were ever

* Top’s Rajasthan, ii. 229.

1835. ] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 673

of the Hindu faith, whereas the emblem and inscription could have
proceeded only from an authority strictly Vaishnav.

Fig. 22, from the Stacy collection, would appear to be an interlo-
per in the Upper Provinces ; since the majority of this type have
hitherto been found in Ceylon, some in the palace at Candy, others
by Colonel McKenzrz at Dipaldinna. They all however belong to the
genuine Hindu rajas of that island, judging from the alphabet and
the name.

The rude outline on the obverse, is intended, probably, for a raja
holding some mace or warlike weapon in his right hand. On the
reverse he is seated in a lounging position, with a view to make room
for the inscription on the side. This in the specimen before us is
Jt war aq wae Sri maya traya mallu. The second word is read by
Marspewn, in a specimen very like it, 4 daya. And on another coin
he finds the name of Visaya fas1q (Ha?) well known in the history
of Ceylon. Mr. Witson does not attempt to read the names on his
coins, which are badly drawn; but on comparing them, they appear not
essentially to differ from Colonel Stacy’s. No family of the name of
Maila occurs in the Indian genealogies except in Nipal, where, from
the 13th century to the Gorkha conquest, the reigning prince almost
always bore the affix of Malla. In the honorable Mr. Turnour’s
catalogue of the Ceylon monarchs, I do not find any such name.

Figs. 24 and 25, are two more modern copper pieces, selected from
many of a similar nature in Colonel Sracy’s cabinet, as forming a
good land-mark in judging of the antiquity of other Hindu coins.
The rude attempts at a human figure in 24, are far inferior to any
thing we have yet seen, unless in its companion 25, where we can
hardly pronounce them to be other than signs and symbols. The
name and date on most of these coins are distinct enough, and in the
present type of Nagart, MW da1a fae wute, Sri Sangrama Sinha,
1580 (samvat). Sometimes the name is written 34494, and at others
dau, Sangrama and Sangama, variations to be expected in such im-
perfect samples of the engraver’s art.

Fig. 27, is of the latter description, having the name Sangama pre-
ceded by the letters waa. The reverse of this coin has the figure
of a heart, which is very common on copper money dug up in the
S4gur district, of the Muhammedan princes of the Berar provinces.
Arabic letters are clearly distinguishable above the heart.

From the date of these coins, we recognize them as belonging to the
celebrated Sancrdma Sinu, or Sinka of the Moghul historians, who
for a short period successfully resisted the victorious Bagerr at Biana.

674 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. (Dec.

A romantic account of the chivalrous adventures of his youth is
given by Colonel Top*. He succeeded to the throne of Mewdr, in S.
1565, (A. D. 1508,) and is accounted by the Rajpit bards the
** kalsa,” or pinnacle of its glory. His encounter with Baser at
Kanua occurred on the 5th Kartik, S. 1584, (=15th October, 1527,)
four years subsequent to the striking of these coins, which, by the
way, are no very convincing evidence of the flourishing state of the
arts in Chitér at the summit of its splendour and glory.

Fig. 26, is a small square copper coin in Colonel Sracy’s cabinet,
also of modern fabrication ; on one side inclosed in a marginal frame,
which proves that the whole inscription is before us, are the Nagari
letters wa faa ek lis. It may be that lis is the name of a coin of
which the specimen represents the unit ; or possibly it should be read
warfaa ekalis, the fortieth or rather forty-first of the current silver
coin of the place? The division of the field on the reverse into upper
and lower compartments, so far resembles a gold coin from Canouj,
described by Mr. Witson, as fig. 52, Plate III. The letters are
@wW AA an unintelligible compound.

Fig. 28, is another rude Hindu paisa of a late period. A human
figure on the obverse, holds a staff in his right hand; on the reverse
are the letters 7 @ WT Hl Sasan sar ji, an unknown and doubtful
name.

Plates XXXVI., XXXVII. Rajput Coins.

In the two following plates, I am again indebted to Colonel Stacy’s
numismatic zeal for the greater part of a very curious series of Hindu
coins, on the one hand linked by the subject of their impression with
the Indo-Scythic series, and on the other gradually mixed with and
transfused into the Arabic currency of the first Mohammedan con-
querors of Central {ndia.

Now that I am myself in possession of nearly 300 of these coins
in silver, it appears strange that they should hitherto have escaped
so. completely the notice of our Indian numismatalogists ; neither
Marspen, Wixzson, nor Top, having published a single engraving
of them. When therefore I first received a sealing-wax impression
ef one from Dr, Swiney, in August, 1833, it is not surprising that
I should have announced it as an unique. Colonel Stacy’s letters
soon taught me to consider it’in a very contrary light, and now on
reference to Colonel Top’s personal narrative, I find that they had

* Rajasthan, i. 295.
+ See Journal, Vol. II. page 416, and fig. 11, Plate XIV. of the same volume :
I then supposed the cojn to be of gold; it was of silver.

Vol. WV. PLXXXVL

Jour. As . Soc.

Anewnt ‘ flinda (OLS.
Diver
ne
IL)
Sale:

i

Wks.
nal

Wy eee

*
»

it

tte = esta he ee sil

ae

Vol IV. Pl_XXXVIL

Jour. As. Sec.

S$
s
N
S
=

Hindu

1835.] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 673

not escaped him in his travels, although he has not favored the public
with any drawings of them, or any comments on their age and
locality.

Munshi Mouan LAu’s collection of coins made at Cdbul, afforded
me a favorable opportunity of ascertaining the accurate names and
readings of the silver group, but unfortunately these do not embrace
so much variety as the copper coins. The reason for this may be, that
the munshi’s collection was discovered in a foreign country. A treasure
accidentally dug up, however numerous, would naturally consist of
the money then current, with a small admixture of that of preceding
reigns: in fact, out of 100 coins, 65 belong to one type (figs. 3, 4, 5,),
25 to another (figs. 1, 2,), and only three or four to a third (figs. 6,7,).
Colonel Sracy on the other hand had the advantage of exploring
the very field in which they must have been at one period current,
and his series is, therefore, much more complete, though rarely so
numerous in any particular species. A letter from this gentleman to
my address, dated 2nd August, 1834, suggests, that ‘as the figures
‘both on the obverse and reverse of these coins are evidently made up
of letters, either of Sanscrit or some other Hindu characters, they
should be submitted to the kind attention of the professors of the Hin-
du college. The great variety, and the general distinctness of the cha-
-racters on them, holds out fair hopes of our becoming acquainted with
the dynasty they belong to, as well as with many of the individuals
of that dynasty. The names placed against each by pandits, to whom
they have been shewn, are worthy of no reliance. The natives possess
neither enterprize nor invention; when they find a letter or letters
wanting, they will not attempt to fill up the blank.”

The opinion here broached, that the outline figures were made up
of letters, is supported by the authority of Colonel Top, who remarks
in the only passage I can find on the subject, (vol. i. p. 698.) “*« My
envoys brought, from Nadolaye, a small bag full of curious hierogly-
phical (if I may so use the term) medals of the Chohan princes. One
side represents a warrior on horseback, compounded out of a charac-
ter to which I have given the above term; on some there was a bull ;
while others, retaining the original reverse, have on the obverse the
titles of the first Islamite conquerors, in the same manuer as the
currency of France bears the effigies of Lovis XVI. and the emblems
of the republic. Whoever will pay a visit to Nadolaye, will find his
labour amply rewarded ; I had only leisure to glean a few of these
relics, which yet formed a rich harvest.”

When the singular contour of the horseman and bull is traced back
to its original type in figures 1, 2, where the whole substance of the

676 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. [Dxc.

figure is filled up, there does not seem to be much reason for imagin-
ing any intention of mystifying the device, otherwise than hy the
clouds of ignorance; when the engraver retained only sufficient
knowledge of his craft to cut the outline of his device in relief, and
latterly even seems himself to have lost sight of its meaning altogether,
as in figs. 48, cum multis aliis ;—certain it is, that the title of hiero-
glyphic has been earned and won for this coin even from the anti-
quarians of the west; witness the following highly curious passage,
brought to my notice by Dr..Swinry, in an American work on scrip-
ture geography*, applied to a wood cut ofa coin in all respects the
counterpart of our figure 3, which may have found its way to Egypt, in
the course of commercial dealings, eight or ten centuries ago :—

‘© This is an extremely curious medal, of silver, struck in Egypt before the
reigns of the Protemigs. It represents on one side, a man on horse-back, and
on the other, an ox of the humped kind lying down: between his horns is the
lunar crescent, and within that is a globe. These symbols clearly refer this ox to
Egypt. The man on horse-back is the most singular part of this medal; none
of the countries adjaceut having adopted the type of a horseman. There is every
reason to believe that the letters on this medal are Persian, and that the person
represented is ARYANDES, governor of Egypt under Darius, the last king of
Persia, who then possessed this country, and who caused the governor to be put
to death for cvining money in his own name’’ !!

It can hardly be believed, that the nature of the characters should
have been unknown to any but Transatlantic antiquaries, for they are
in a very obvious form of Deva nagari, and may be easily read where
the letters are not cut off or otherwise obliterated.

_ At the commencement of the feregoing essay, I alluded to this series
as one of the four palpable imitations of a Grecian or Indo-Scythic
model :—I had in my eye the coins of Azos and Aziuisos in particu-
lart; which have a horseman with spear for the obverse, and a humped
bull for the reverse. On being Indianized, the bull has become the nandé
of Hindu mythology, with its ornamental jhui/ or saddle cloth, and the
trident or dirsul of Siva impressed on its haunch. The horse has in
like manner, received the trappings peculiar to the country, the zér-
band and dumchr. The rider has still some traces of a flowing fillet
from his cap (see fig. 5,) but his dress is not otherwise open to critic-
ism. I would not pretend to insist upon the direct filiation of the
Hindu coin to what I have assumed as its prototype : but the adop-
tion of the same elements for the device, it may be surely contended,
argues some connection or descent :—it is like the preservation of
armorial insignia in a family; and on these grounds, we have pre-

* SmiLey’s Scripture Geography, Philadelphia, 1835, page 151.

+ See Plates XXII. XXIII. of the June No., figs. 9, and 28.

1835.] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 677

sumptive evidence either of the Indo-Scythic descent of the reigning
dynasty,—an hypothesis borne out by the traditions of many of the
Rajput states,—or of a mere imitation of the coin of a neighbouring
nation, in consequence of a poverty of native invention.

Before we proceed to canvas the epoch and country of this our third
division of Hindu coins, which are matters entirely open at present,
except so far that they have been called Chohdn by Colonel Top, and
Rajpit by Stacy, it will be convenient to take a view of all the speci-
mens that have been collected.

The whole series may be conveniently classed under three heads;
namely, Ist, such as have genuine Hindu names and the oldest form
of character; for the alphabet evidently undergoes modification as we
advance :—2ndly, those with Nagari characters only, but expressive
of Muhammedan names, either alone or conjointly with those of
Hindu princes; and 3rdly, those retaining the equestrian device of
the obverse, with also the name of the raja, but having the reverse
occupied by a pure Arabic inscription.

I may premise that the average weight of the whole series of silver
coins a little exceeds 50 grains, and that therefore they may be re-
garded as ¢ankas of 3 massas, as was remarked of the oldest group and
of the Varahas.

Figs. 1, 2. These have been placed at the top of the list, because
the relief in them is not confined to the mere outline. The device
has already been described. There are letters on both sides of
all the series, leaving us somewhat at a loss to know which side
contains the raja’s name, or whether the longer legend over the bull
may not be merely his titles; the frequent occurrence of the second
formula, on coins of various forms, is in favor of this view, but the
actual name in the third is against it. On the present coin, the most
obvious reading of the longer epigraphe is 4] @rwufa ea Sri Sydlapati
déva. Unfortunately the letters on the other side are cut off.

Figs. 3,4, 5. The selection here was from 65 specimens, the
collation of which left no doubt as to the context, unless in regard to
the value of the fourth letter. Of the two readings suggested in my
first notice of this coin 4t arag ea Sri Sdmagra déva, or Ft ara7~a
ea Sr2 Sdmanta déva, the latter is the most plausible, because S&-
MANTA is a common Hindu name, a leader, captain, or champion:
and although the nta is more like 4 gd, in the best specimens, there
are other cases, such as figs. 19 and 21, where it more nearly re-
sembles the Bengali =.

On the reverse, are the letters at and J, on either side of the
head. These are ancient forms of Ht and @ bhi and ta. On fig. 4,

4s

678 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. [Dxc.

the latter is replaced by a non-descript flourish, so that the two are
probably independent of one another in the reading.

Figs. 6 and 7, the last of the silver specimens, exhibit the cognate
name of 3t wa 27, S:t Bhima déva ;sand on the obverse, the # of
the foregoing example.

Of the copper series, we may specify figs. 14, 15, 194, 21, 27, and
30, as having the Sémanta déva legend over the bull, with other addi-
tions, or variations of style, on account of which they have been intro-
duced into the plates,

But first m order should be noticed the six small copper coins, figs.
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 of Colonel Sracy’s cabinet, which are connected
with the present group by the effigy of the horseman; while on the
opposite we recognize the latter Canouj form of letter, and the usual
termination of the coins, described in the preceding plate. A scrutiny
of the whole series (some not included in the plate) has elicited the
letters Mt @I@.... Wea; the blank may be filled up with the letters
nta, pd, making the whole title Sri Samanta Pdla déva; or if it be
thought that there is not room for other letters, it may stand as Sri
Samala deva.

Fig. 17. Of this curious variety we have two or three samples :
the bull is omitted, and the field occupied entirely by the legend. In
the engraved figure, the commencement of the second line is cut off.
Colonel Stacy’s has a letter there, and his pandits read the whole,
Sri mam Kripa bamm bas ; but from the resemblance of the two final
strokes to numerals, the appendage to the second m, and the analogy
of the ordinary legend, I should prefer the reading 3} a@. . amy aq
aa.. Sri man m.. thavarmma déva, Samvat 1.., the name and the
date unfortunately remaining doubtful.

Figs. 21 and 30, are duplicates: one completing the missing por-
tion of the other impression ; but owing to the strange form of two or
three letters, some doubt remains as to the correct reading. On the
obverse, we find SIv@ tIM Sa A’prichha Radja deva, and on the
reverse 3t Va ea Sri Samanta déva, with the addition of garae
Asdavari ; the last syllables, 4c}, might almost be read # mi or aa vaga.

Fig. 27, with the Sri Sdmania déva very much perverted on the
bull side, has a new name on the right of the horseman, 3] f4qrq@ eq
Sri Dana (or data) Pdla déva.

Fig. 28, has an unintelligible name on the bull side: the letters
visible are .. At Farqt...., .. Sri Vadd sura..

In fig. 29, the outline of the sacred bull is somewhat difficult to be
traced. The name below it begins with the letters 7} q UT.. Sri
kupd, or @t Gat Sa kusha. .

1835.] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 679

Fig. 31, bears on the obverse the name of 3} =t &a@ Sri Hara déva.
The reverse seems to begin with the same letters as fig. 30, viz. Y €@T
Asa ; after which follow at a short interval, .. warw eq. . Masana deéva,

It may be hereafter found that some of the above belong to what
may be called the transition period, when attempts were made to
express Musalmani names and titles in the vernacular character of
India, of which I will now endeavour to produce such instances as
Colonel Sracy’s rich collection offers.

The name of the Raja on the obverse of all the transition or link
coins is 3} watt: Sri Hamiras ; this important and well-known name
may be found, either in full or in part, on figs. 20, (in this the engra-
ver has reversed the whole die,) 22, 36, 37, 38, 39, and 40. The same
name also occurs on figs. 44, 47, and 49, with an Arabic accompani-
ment, as will be presently noticed.

The first example of a Moslem title in its simplest form occurs in figs.
32 and 35, in the Nagari word Ofcarw Suritén ; this has no meaning
in Hindi, and I conjecture that it is intended for the Arabic title, Sud-
tdn : the remainder of the sentence is in these two instances wanting.

Figs. 34, 39, 40, and 41. In these four we find a more complete
paraphrase of the far sounding titles of the Delhi sovereigns ; at least
I conjecture that @ftatwar Waee|ly (or asin 34, fu) is nothing
more than Sulidn Shéh Shamsh ud-din.

Figs. 36, 37, and 38, are equally capable, and only capable, of an
interpretation on the same principle: the Devanagari letters on the
reverse run thus: @lwea]e ara Sd Mahamada Same, which [ would
convert into Shah Muhammed Same. The initial word will admit of
being read Sri; but the rest of the legend is quite clear and satis-
factory.

The name of Hamira, as before stated, is repeated on the obverse
of all these curious coins. We have now to trace it into a field one
step farther removed from the primitive standard.

Figs. 48 and 49. In these, the first of the succeeding group in
point of date, the horse and his rider, are transformed into singular
symbols, which only our prior acquaintance with the original could
enable us to decypher: the word 4{ on the first, and the termination
of AHamirah Att on the other, are still discernible in their usual
position. On the reverse, the characteristic style of the Afghan coin-
age is adopted, and the Arabic version, were it completely visible,
would evidently be (+4! wf My bys OG whlu!) U7 suitén
Shems ul-dunya va ul-din Altamsh. The reading commences from below.

Figs. 42 and 44, again exhibit to the right of the horse’s head, the
name of At wait: Sri Hamiras, as usual. On fig. 43, it escapes detec-

432

680 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. [Dxc.

tion only by want of room on the field. In all three, the hieroglyphic
which has hitherto passed for the helmeted head of the horseman,
has been either designedly or unintentionally removed, and the Arabic
word 4 9s=* Mahmid substituted. On the other face, the full titles
of this sovereign, who was the son of Altamsh, may be recognized
without much trouble, thus: Y) yell) Ul Sultan ul A-
dj) cls Be dzem Nasir ul du-
upd) gles nya va ul din.

the inscription terminating in the ‘‘ Mahméd’’ of the opposite face.

Fig. 25, of the preceding plate, is another coin of the same name
and nature. ;

Fig. 47. On this variety of the Hamira group, the Arabic titles
are apparently el all lab] Ul Sultén Fatdh ul-dunya va
ul-din. I only perceive one specimen of this reading in Col. Sracy’s
collection.

Fig. 45. The next variety of the mixed impression retains the
horseman with the Hindu name, but the Arabic titles are now

pane eo >) yiehud} Ul Sultan Abu ul fateh ul Moazzem......

Fig. 24, is the last on the list, exhibiting the semblance of a horse-
man. The small portion of the Arabic legend, included on the reverse,
is fortunately sufficient to point out the owner, and enable us to com-
plete it upXl, ii a) Ne pee MI ylelell U7 Sultan ul dtizem Ala ul
dunya va ul din, (Muhammed Shah.)

Figs. 23 and 46. There still remains undescribed a curious variety
of the “‘ bull and horseman” coin, in which the bull side is retained
with the Sri Samanta déva; while, contrary to usage, the horse is
omitted, or replaced by an Arabic legend in the connected or flowing
character. ‘The whole purport of it is not well ascertained, but the
legible portion of the two middle lines is thus read by some elas)

Joe bed) ylbull U1 Sultdn ul ditzem, ul Sultén Adil. . Others find in
it the name of Subactegin; and I am inclined to adjudge it rather
to an earlier period than the Giéri dynasty, both from the Arabic style,
and from the retention of the name of Samanta deéva on the reverse.
Figs. 26 and 50. We now pass to a new form of coin, allied to
the foregoing, indeed, by the retention of Hindi on one side, but differ-
ing from them in the total] rejection of the pictorial emblems. That
the proper orthography of the word Sultan was now attained is evi-
dent in the initial letters 3t gaat. . Sri Sulta. . The lower line presents
three letters Ha mavuaj, which may be intended for moazz, thus
agreeing with the Arabic of the opposite face (73 a], Cas MN) jx bcd)
balan! Ul Sultdn ul ddzem moaz ul dunya va ul din (eitherBairam

1835.] Continuation of notes on Hnidu Coins. 681

Shah, 1239, or Kai Kobad, 1286?) the only two emperors which bore
the appellation of Moaz ul-din.

From the last coin, the passage is easy to those of purely Muham-
medan aspect, such as are described in Marspen’s Numismata, vol.
ii.; but this author does not appear to have had an opportunity of
examining an intermediate group of coins, on which, in deference to
the conquered people, a Nagari inscription was retained on the margin.

They are by no means uncommon ; yet it is rare to find the marginal
legend perfect. Marspren’s DCCXIII., of Toghlak Shah, is of this
species; but in it the Nagari falls beyond the limits of the disc.

I have therefore thought that a few examples of this group might
form a proper appendage to the present series, and have accordingly
introduced three varieties from Colonel Stacy’s and my own collec-
tions, to fill up the plate.

Fig. 51, the earliest in date, must be read from the reverse
ae) opel, (ias} cole ebed) wali!) Ul Sultan ul édzem Ghids ul
dunya va ul-dén, (and in the centre of the obverse,) Balban ; the latter
is encircled by a Nagari sentence, of which 3} q@ Wart. . is visible.

Figs. 54, 55, and 56, are coins of the celebrated ALauppiN*, the
disposition of the titles and name as before la dom” wr Jl, al)
We pala] Ui Sultan Alu ul dunya va ul-din Muhammed Shah. On the
margin, Mt GMatawt oe¢ Sré Sultdn Shah, (A. H.) 706.

Figs. 52 and 53, close our present series; they bear the titular
designations of Tocutax Sn’an, v% glas opel, as Wlolic be 3)
whelu!l Ul Sultdn ul atézem Ghids ul dunya va ul-din, Toghlak Shah.
The Nagari of the margin is similar to the last, but imperfect, as if
cut by one ignorant of the language.

After the complete and satisfactory evidence we have just examin-
ed, little need be said as to the epoch to which at least the mixed or
Hindu-Muhammedan portion of the bull and horseman group belongs :
for, from the names inscribed in Nagari or Arabic, or from the titles
or cognomina, which are in fact as frequently the names by which the
Musalman sovereigns are known, we can nearly fill up the first cen-
tury of the Patan monarchs of Delhi, thus :

Sri Muhammed Same is, | presume, Mvnammep 31n S&mub Guort,
the first of the dynasty, commonly known by his cognomen Shahdb-
ul-din, who possessed himself of the throne of Delhi, A. H. 588,
aD) 192,

Shamsh ul-din, in Nagari and Arabic, is Altamsh, A.H. 607 A. D. 1210
Moaz ul-din, must be Barram SuH&u, his son, 637 1239

* At the time of engraving the plate, I mistook the MuHAMMED Sna/’n for
the son of Toguuax : the date corrects me.

682 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. [Dxc,

Ald ul-din, may be Masaup, the son of Frroz, A. H. 640 A. D. 1242

Nasir ul-din, denotes Maumup, son of ALTAMSH, 643 1245
Ghias ul-din, Bazan, has the full name also, 664 1265
Ald ul-din, MuuammMep SuAu, bears its own date, 695 1295
Ghids ul-din, Toguuak Suu, cannot be mistaken, 72] 1321

It is not from these names, however, but rather from the Hindu
ones, that we must seek to fix the locality of the bull and horseman
insignia, and the readiest mode of arriving at the truth is to proceed
backwards, the best chance of verifying the names of Réjas being
through their preservation, even in a corrupt form, in the pages of
Moslem history. Hamrras, the name common to so many of the
series, is admirably adapted for our purpose. He can be no other
than the Hamrr* of the Mewar chronicles, who, born and nurtured
in the forests of Ondwa, was destined to revive the glory of Chitér,
even after it had succumbed to two successive assaults under the
unsparing Atta. We find it recorded in Ferisnra’s history, (A. D.
1304,) that ‘at length finding it of no use to retain Chitér, the king
ordered the Prince Ku1zr Kuan to evacuate it, and to make it over
to the nephew of the Raja. This Hindu Prince, in a short time,
restored the principality to its former condition, and retained the
tract of Chitor as tributary to ALLA-up-pIN, during the rest of his
reignt.” According to Topt, ‘‘ Hamir succeeded to the throne in
Samvat 1357, (A. D. 1300,) and had sixty-four years to redeem his
country from the ruins of the past century, which period had elapsed
since India ceased to own the paramount sway of her native princes.”
These 64 years would include nearly the whole reign of Atta TI., and
that of his successors Omar, Musdnrix, Kuosru, Tocuiak, his son
MuuamM_ED, and Firoz. Onthe coins themselves, we have found
the obverse of Hamixa coupled with the stamp of Mahamad Same,
Shams ul-din, Alla ul-din, Nasir ul-din, and Fatah ul-din ; three
of whom are clearly anterior to the reign of Ata-up-pIN; as
AutaMsH alone bore the cognomen of Shamsh ul-din; his son
that of Nasir ul-din; and Manammep Guori that of Same. We
might indeed read the latter word Sdai, and so apply it and the
title of Nasir ul-din to Munammep II. the son of Tocutax, whose
cognomen is not recorded. But still Shamsh ul-din remains unex-
plained, and the apparent anachronism cannot be accounted for. It
should be noted that the name of Hamrris not mentioned in FerisHta ;
but only the ‘“‘ nephew of the Raja Ratan Sinh.” The cognomen
Fatah ul-din is not to be found in the whole line of the Patan Sultans.

* Humberdew of Brice’s Ferishta, Amir deo of Dow, when speaking of the
siege of Rintimpore: he is not mentioned afterwards by name, nor as of Mewar.

t+ Brice’s Ferishta, i. 363. t Rajasthan, i. 269.

1835. ] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 683

Mewédr had been in subjection to the Delhi monarchs since the
invasions of Munammep Guor1; AtTamsa also invaded it in 1210:
hence there can be the less doubt that the barbarized names, Sri
Mahamad Sdme and Sri Samasoden, on the indigenous coinage applied
to these two sovereigns, notwithstanding the difficulty above alluded to.

The fortunate preservation of Hamrra’s name, in conjunction with
those of his allies, upon thesecoins, proves at anyrate the identical place
of their coinage, and fixes it at Chitér, the seat of the dynasty founded
by Barra, in A. D. 727, after the destruction of the Balhdra monarchy
of Saurdshtra. This information also limits our search for the names
previous to Hamira, to the descendants of Barra Rawel, of whom
two or three genealogical lists have been preserved in various inscrip-
tions, some decyphered and explained by Mr. Wutson, in the As.
Researches, vol. xv., and others by Colonel Top. The latter authority
enjoyed the advantage of filling upthe history of Mewar from the
national poems and traditions of the place; but it must be confessed, as
strangely perplexing, that the names of the immediate predecessors of
Hamira should be at total variance in the Hindu and the Muhamme-
dan accounts. Thus, Fertsara makes Ray Ratan Sz‘n the Raja of
Chitér, who was taken prisoner at the sack of the fort, and who
escaped through a romantic stratagem of his daughter, and continued
to ravage the country until his nephew was installed as above stated
in the masnad. Colonel Top makes the name of the imprisoned
Raja, Buimst, and that of his daughter, Papmani. The circumstances
which led to the admission of the fair heroine into the hostile camp
with her 700 litters, each freighted like the Trojan horse, are also differ-
ently related by the two authors. It will be astrong motive for the
preference of the Hindu account, if the Burma pe'va of our coins
can be identified with this Buims1 (Bhima sinha) : but the short inter-
val from his return to Chitér to the death of himself and his family
in the sack which followed, would hardly allow the issue of a regular
coinage in his name at such a turbulent period. The style also of
the Nagari alphabet (the g 6/ especially) differs materially from that
of Hamrra’s name. Yet there is no other Bhima in the Mewdr list.
Ferisura mentions one (Bhim-dew) as the brother of SaunkuL Dew,
the Prince of Deogir, contemporaneous with Ata; but he does not
seem to have attained the throne. In the collateral line of the
Gujerét Rajas, the same name occurs thrice, the last in 1209, of whom
the Moslem histories make frequent mention ; but the insignia of this
Raj are of a distinct character, and will not admit of our transferring
the bull and horseman device thither for an owner*.

* Burma DE‘va of Gujerdét was defeated by MunammMegp Guori’ (or Sdmé 2)
in A. D, 1178.

684 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. [Dac.

It provokingly happens that the nine rajas:immediately preceding
Buimst, in Top’s list, are omitted as an uninteresting string of names ;
thus shutting out a chance of recognizing many of the petty names
of our coin list. We must in consequence pass over Danapala déva,
Kripa, Vaddsur, &c. and retrograde to Sdmanta déva. This name is
one. of those on the inscriptions from mount Abu ( Arbuda)*, the 18th
of the Guhila family, to whom an actual date is also assigned, namely
A. D. 1209. The objection to this is, like that to Bhima, that the
date is too modern for the alphabetical type; moreover, from Top
we learn, that it was Rauup of Mewdr who was attacked by Suemsn
uL-pDin (Aliamsh), in 1210-20, and this name we have recognized in
the more modern Nagari on several of the horseman coins.

There are other Sdmanta (Sinha) dévas in the Anhulwara line of
Gujerat of an earlier period, both in the Ayin Akber?, and in the native
chronicles ; indéed, Banardsa himself, the founder of the Chohdn race
at Anhulpur, was the son of a SAmanra S1nua, fixed by Top in A. D.
745. and it.is worthy of particular note, that the first prince restored
to the Gujeratthrone, near two centuries after the overthrow of the Bal-
haras by the Parthians, is called in the Ayin Akbert, ‘‘Sa1za pr'va, who
was previously living in retirement at Ujjain im A. D. 696.” Now the
name on the coin which J have assumed as the most ancient of the
series, and therefore placed at the top of Plate XVI., is SYALAPATI
DE'VA; aname apparently taken from the country where he ruledt; but
which might easily be converted, either with or without intention, into
S’AILA DE'VA, a title denoting dominion or birth among the mountains.

In conclusion, it should be borne in mind, that both the Mewdr and
the Gujerat lines are of one family, that of the Gehlote or Sesodia
tribe, to which, though arrogating to itself a descent from the Sun,
the Persian historians uniformly ascribe a Parthian origin. May
not this be received as a good foundation for the Indo-Scythic device
on their coinage; or on the other hand does not the latter fact, sup-
ported by historical tradition, go far towards the corroboration of the
extra Indian origin of the Mewdr dynasty ?

Plate XLIX. Saurashtra Coins.

In antiquity the present series doubtless should take precedence of
those depicted in the three last plates; perhaps it should rank next
to the Behat or Buddhist group, for it has an important symbol
in common with them. My only reason for delaying to notice it
until the last, has been the hopes of receiving a further accession of

* As. Res. vol. xvi. page 322.
t Syalakoth, the fort of Syala near the Indus, was once attacked by the
armies of Mewdr.

Jour. As. Sec. FOLD FOX ELX.

a NE PY AVIyy pa |
a8 b HUE VY SY os ui} vuYyss ( >
i OVP MIS FV MAGE D TIA *

|
ats
‘Og
; Why BA ba Y i) ®
| CUP), ti)
Mal ict in WiC iii f\
Bul {india y
<u i jiu i
Seth
“pl
‘ Ly
a awl, 2
Ie NN)
ba ‘I } y {
my (

nt

fe OC,

IPrind

aw

a

1835.] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 685

specimens from Lieutenant Burnes, who lately forwarded me several
coins, and afterwards wrote me that he had come on a further trea-
sure of them in the course of some excavations in Cutch.

A few specimens of the new accessions, selected by Mr. WaTHEN
at Bombay, did not add much to the variety with which I had already
become acquainted from the collections of Ker<mat Aut and Mowan
Lat, of Lieutenant Conotty, and especially of Colonel Stacy. Some
of these I have before made known: other varieties have been long
since published in Colonel Ton’s plate of coins in the Transactions
of the Roval Asiatic Society, but there are many entirely new in the
plate I am now about to introduce to my readers.

In the first place, however, I am pledged to prove that the type of
this series of Indian coins is a fourth example of imitation of a Grecian
original. The very style and beauty of the profile on some of the
earlier specimens, (figs. 1, 3, 10,) might he enough to convince an
artist or a sculptor of the fact, for we might in vain seek such accu-
rate delineations of the human features on any genuine Hindu coin ;
witness the degradation to which the very same device soon arrives
under its Hindu adoption. But a comparison with the coins of the
Arsakian and Sassanian dynasties of Persia, which are confessedly of
Greek origin, may go farther to satisfy a sceptic on this point. The
mode of dressing the hair belongs exclusively to Parthia: none of
the genuine Bactrians even have it, and in the whole of our Indo-
Scythic acquaintance, it will only be seen on the medals of Kopos,
engraved as figs. 11, 12, and 13, of Plate XXV. of the present volume.
In him the likeness is perfect, and him, therefore, I would deem the
progenitor of this Saurdshtra group, so similar in size, weight, metal,
and contour of the head. The marked distinction between the two
is confined to the reverse. Here along Devanagari inscription, encir-
cling a curious monogram, is substituted for the standing figure
with his hitherto uninterpreted motto, MAKAP....PAHG@POY.

Apropos of this seemingly impossible Greek combination; even
while I am writing this passage, the explanation starts to my imagi-
nation, like an enigma or puzzle laid aside for an interval, and taken
up by chance ina position in which its solution strikes palpably on the
eye, and the wonder arises how it could have escaped detection at the
first ! It may be remembered, that in describing the various mottos
on the reverses of the Kanerki and Kadphises group, in my last notice,
I remarked a curious instance of the word OKPO “ the sun,” being
changed into APAOKPO, ‘‘ the great sun*.”

* Mr.V. TreGear writes tome, that hehas just met with a duplicate of the gold
APAOKPO coin, plate L., fig. 6. It was stated to have been dug up by a pea-

4T

686 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins- (Due.

Now a@po was also one of the original simple denominations of
the same class, supposed to be of a like import with Mithra, or the
sun. By the rule of mutations, the addition of APAA or APTA, great,
would lengthen the initial vowel of this word, or change it into an
H, and produce the compound form APAHO@PO, ‘‘ the great Athra.”
Giving a Greek termination and putting it, as usual, in the genitive
case, we shallhave MAKAPOS APAHOPOr, “ of the blessed ard-Athra.”
This is the very expression existing on the coin, supplying only a
single letter, A, which is cut off through the imperfection of the die.
Hear we havea happy illustration as well of the connection between
the several groups and their respective objects of worship, as of
the gradual and necessary development which these interesting re-
searches are calculated to produce. Further, on conversing, this
moment, with a pandit from the Panjdb, I learn that the sun is
called in the Pushtu language, Ait, wreaq. or Ayat BWraa; a
corruption, he says from the pure Sanscrit aifea Aditya, whence
may be derived in a similar manner Ait-war or etwar, the common
Hindut expression for Sunday. To all of these forms, the similarity
of the Zend word Athro is obvious, and we need therefore seek no
refined subtlety in admitting it to worship as the etherial essence of
the sun, since it can with so much more simplicity be understood as a
common denomination of the solar orb itself. It should be remarked,
that the effigy of aPAHOPO, like that of A@Po, has flames on his
shoulders.

I will not stop to inquire whether the change from the Sanscrit
OKPO (Arka) to the Pushto or Zend a@po (Aita) has any possible
connection with a parallel charge in the family designation of the
Saurdshtra princes, who were in the first centuries of the Christian
era marked by the affix Bhatdrka, (cherished by Arka,) but afterwards,
for a long succession of reigns, were known by the surname of
A’ditya ; but will proceed to describe the immediate contents of the
plate now under review.

Figs. 1, 2, 3, are placed at the head of the series, because in them
the head bears the nearest analogy to its prototype. In fig. 1, indeed,
the letters behind the head may be almost conceived to belong to
Kwaor. In the centreof the reverse is the so called chaitya symbol &:
which, had it only occurred on these descendants of a Mithraic coin,
I should now be inclined to designate a symbol of the holy flame,

sant in the Juanpur district, along with 50 others, which were immediately com.
mitted to the melting pot. I may here take occasion to notice, that the pilgrim
who sold the three coins of Kapruiszs in the bazar of Benares was not a Mar-

hatta, but a native of the Panjab.

1835.) Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 687

trilingual and pyramidal, of the Sassanian fire-worship. The marginal
writing may with certainty be pronounced to be an ancient form of
Sanscrit ; but I cannot attempt to read it. In figures a, 0, c, I have
copied the lines from three other coins, and have thus ascertained that
a portion of the legend is the same in all, while the remainder varies.
The former doubtless comprehends the regal titles; but in it there is
no approach to the ordinary Indian terms of Raja, Rao, &c. The six
parallel letters may be read YCHaUT.

Figs. 4 and 5, differ from the preceding in the central device, which
now bears a rude resemblance to the human figure. The letters and
general execution are very imperfect.

Figs. 6 to 9, are one step further removed from perfection. The
legend where best preserved, as in fig. 9, appears a mere repetition of
the letter p, with the suffix r, ri, andy. There are three letters
behind the head in fig. 7, which may be taken either for corrupted
Greek, or for the Pehlevi of the Sassanian coins, ou0. The cen-
tral symbol has the form of a trident. Lieut. Burnes informs me
that several hundred of these three species of coins were found in
Cutch in 1830 in a copper vessel buried in the ruins of Puragarh, 20
miles west of Bhoj, a place of great antiquity, and yet marked by the
ruins of a palace and a mint.

Figs. 10, 11, 12, are of a different type, though nearly allied to the
former ; they are not only found in Gajerat, but at Kanouj, Ujjain, and
generally in Upper India. Lieut. CunnuveHam has just sent me
impressions of five very well-preserved specimens procured at Benares,
on which in front of the face are seen some letters very like the
Pehlevi character, «<™. The Sanscrit too is not of the elongated
form of the upper group, but exactly like that of Mr. Watnen’s
Gujerat inscriptions. Not having yet succeeded in decyphering them,
it is needless to copy out the mere letters at present. The symbol
in the centre will be recognized as the peacock, sacred to Kumara,
the Mars of the Rajputs, alluded to in the preceding observations.

Figs. 13,14, 15. The popular name for these rude coins, of silver
and of copper, is, according to Lieut. Burnes, in Gujerdt, ‘‘ Gadhia
ké paisa,’ Ass money, or rather, ‘‘ the money of Gadhia,” a name of
VIKRAMADITYA, whose father JayanTA, one of the Gandharbas, or
heavenly choristers, is reputed to have been cursed by Inpra, and
converted into as ass. Wiirorp, in his Essay on the Era of Vikrama-
ditya, endeavours to trace, in this story, the Persian fable of BAHRAM-
GOr’s amours with an Indian Princess, whence were descended the
Gardabhina dynasty of Western India, (gardabha, being, in Sanscrit.

ae 2

688 Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. [Dee.

equivalent to gér*, an ass.) The story is admitted into the prophetic
chapters of the Agni Purdna, and is supported by traditions all over the
country. Remains of the palace of this Vixrama are shewn inGujerdt, in
Ujjain, and even at Benares ! the Hindus insist that this VikramMa was
not a paramount sovereign of India but only a powerful king of the west-
ern provinces, his capital being Cambét or Cambay : and itis certain that
the princes of those parts were tributary to Persia from a very early
period. The veteran antiquarian, Colonel Witrorp, would have been
delighted, could he have witnessed the confirmation of his theories
afforded by the coins before us, borne out by the local tradition of a
people now unable even to guess at the nature of the curious and
barbarous marks on them. None but a professed studier of coins
could possibly have discovered on them the profile of a face, after the
Persian model, on one side, and the actual Sassanian fire-altar on the
other; yet such is indubitably the case, as an attentive consideration
of the accumulation of lines and dots on figs. 13, 16, will prove. The
distortion of the face has proceeded from an undue relief being given
by the die-cutter to the forehead and cheek : and this has by degrecs
apparently deceived the engraver himself, who at last contents himself
with a deeply projecting oblong button, encircled by dots, (figs. 16—
18)! Should this fire-altar be admitted as provf of an Indo-Sassanian
dynasty in Saurdshtra, we may find the date of its establishment in the
epoch of Ysspryirp, the son of Bawrameor ; supported by the con-
current testimony of the Agni Purana, that Vixrama, the son of Ga-
pHARuPA, should ascend the throne of Mdlavdé (Ujjain) 753 years after
the expiation of Cadnaxya, or A. D. 441.

Fig. 17, is one of several very curious coins in Colonel Sracy’s
cabinet. The obverse shews it to be a direct descendant of 15 or 16,
the ‘ Chouka-dika” of Colonel Stacy; while the Nagari inscription
of the reverse is at once perceived to agree with the second, or Gaur,
series of the Kanouj coins. I adverted to this fact before, and stated
that it seemed to point to the paramount influence of the PAxa family
of Kanouj from Gaur in Bengal to Gujeratt. The inscription has the
letters 4 8... . Wea probably Sri Sdmanta or Sémara Pala deva.

Fig. 18, is a more modern variety of the Chouka-dika, on which
the fire altar is replaced by Nagari letters of the eleventh or twelfth
century. The reading appears Mt @Ist Srf Kanja? but it is more
probably 3t ara Sri Kala, for we find a K&ta pe'va in the Gujerat
list towards the close of the 11th century, whom WiLrorp would
identify with Visaxa pr‘va of Delhi.

Figs. 19, 20. I have placed these two novelties from Colonel

* Ag, ees. 1x. 155. + See observations in page 682.

1835.] Continuation of notes on Hindu Coins. 689

Sracy’s cabinet, in juxtaposition with the Saurdshtra group, because
we see in them the evident remains of the fire-altar device of figs. 13,
15. The body of the altar only is removed and replaced by the
Sanscrit BY Sri; the opposite face has the very legible letters ¥raa ve
and #8 Héasas, 40 or 41. The explanation of @1twa@ in Wi1son’s Dic-
tionary is ‘“‘the moon (in the language of the védas ;)” but it would
be hazardous to interpret Sri Hdsas, as indicative of a lunar worship,
or an adoption of a lunar motto, in contrast with the solar effigy and
the fire emblems that preceded it. 4 Sri, by itself, is still impressed
upon the Shdh- Alem coin of Mdlwa, which is denominated from this
circumstance the Sri-sdhy rupee*. It is an epithet of the goddess
Laxmr’, and denotes pure Hinduism in the reigning dynasty.

Has, taken separately, may bea contraction of Héstinapur, or Hdnsi,
the place of coinage, and ¥ v* may be Samvat 40 or 41, the year of
reign.

Figs. 21 and 22, should rather have found a place among the Pala
coins of Kanouj; for on the reverse of both, sufficient of the Gaur
alphabetic characters are seen to enable us to fill up the whole reading
as 7 wsTq aa Sri Ajaya deva. The obverse seems to be a rude
outline of a horse or a bull.

At the foot of this plate I have inserted a few miscellaneous coins,
which I was doubtful where to place with propriety, or which have
reached me since the foregoing plates went to press.

Fig. 23, is in Colonel Sracy’s collection, a brass coin of unique
appearance; on the obverse, a seated figure, adorned with a glory; on
the reverse, an urn containing flowers, and across the field, in the
ancient form of Sanscrit QoyNh Vagupati ; around the margin, on
both sides, is a garland of roses.

Fig. 24, is a recent accession to Colonel Sracy’s collection; on one
side a bull and staff, with the unknown word N¥X; on the other
side, the peacock of Kumara and a palmtree? This coin is evidently
allied to those found by Mr. Spiers, in the Allahabad district, and
figured in Plate XXVI. of vol. iii.; two of them are here re-engraved
as being more in place. Lieut. CunnrncHAmM has a duplicate of 25,
with a fuller inscription in the Allahabad form of N&gari ; I shall take
a future opportunity of engraving it.

Fig. 27, is a copper coin found in the parcel lately received from
Syed KerAmar Aur’. It is remarkable for containing the motto of the
Rajput series 31 8ay|aq Sri Samagri (or Samanta) déva, with an
elephant instead of a bull; while on the reverse, the rude outline of a
horse without rider seems encircled by a Pehlevi legend; a coin

* See Useful Tables, Part I.

690 Geological Observations made [Dec.

nearly similar was engraved in the plate of Lieutenant Burnes’ coins,
Plate XI., fig 17, page 318 of vol. ii.

Fig. 28, from the same source as the last, is also nearly a duplicate
of fig. 14, of the above plate, except that it has the sinha, a lion, for
reverse, instead of the horse ; the letters correspond exactly, but though
individually distinct enough, I can make nothing of the context.

With these I close my present notice, not I fear before I have tired
out many of my readers! and it is with some compunctious feelings
towards all but the few whose zeal in the cause of Indian numismato-
logy equals or surpasses my own, that I announce my having received
fresh materials, from various quarters, wherewith to revive the sub-
ject in the ensuing year. Mr. Masson’s second memoir must also
find a place in the January number. On some future occasion I hope
to be able to strike off a fresh edition of the coin plates, and to
gather all that has been written on the subject, into a distinct volume,
when the train of discovery shall begin to relax, and the materials
scattered through the pages of the journal may be supposed to com-
prise most of the varieties of the ancient coins of India*.

IV.—Geological Observations made in a journey from Mussooree
(Masiri) to Gungotxee (Gangautri). By the Rev. R. Eversst.

Mussooree is situated upon the outermost ridge of the Himalaya
mountains, which these ranges is made from N. W. to S. E. nearly,
and presents a bold escarpment towards the valley of Dehra, or the
Diin, above which it rises to the height of nearly 4000 feet.

This ridge consists of beds of compact limestone alternating with
others of a soft slate with an earthy fracture, and exhibits certain
characteristics, both in its mineral structure and in its general out-
lines, analogous to the transition limestone of the north of Europe,
and the mountain limestone of England. Its most general colour is
bluish black, and from this it passes through grey to greyish white,
and again, on the other side to perfect black, not differing there
from the lucullite, or compact black marble (as it is called). It is
carboniferous: it is highly cavernous. Many varieties emit a fcetid
smell, probably of sulphuretted and carburetted hydrogen: indeed
where the rock is quarried, the smell is similar to that at the mouth

* T issue with the present number a continuation of the Appendix of ‘‘ Useful
Tables,’’ containing Genealogical Tables of the principal Hindu dynasties, which
will assist the reader very much in understanding the allocation of the various

series of coins described above: the tables were formed principally with this
view.

1835.] Srom Masuri to Gangautrt. 691

ofa coal-pit. These carboniferous or coaly varieties have, however,
one peculiarity. They are in some places highly vesicular, so much
so as to resemble a grey lava; and in this state appear to have par-
tially suffered from the action of heat. Mr. Fisner, in his account
of the Mussooree limestone, (see GLEANniNGs for May, 1832, p. 194)
states that it is “ highly crystallized,’ but I did not meet with any
such rock during my stay in the neighbourhood, nor see any speci-
mens of it.

The slate that alternates with the limestone is of various colours,
bluish black, grey, greenish grey, brownish red, purplish, and yellow.
It is generally soft, and crumbling, and will not split into large
plates: but about two miles west of the station, below the peak called
Hiati-paon and nearly half way down the hill, a bluish black variety
is found, hard enough to be used as a roofing-slate. Somewhat to
the west of this, on the Dudhillee hill (a station of the Trigonome-
trical Survey), a trap rock makes its appearance. It is to be met with
at the bottom of a small water-course, and may be traced for about
half a mile in a direction nearly parallel to the range of the moun-
tains. It is composed in some parts principally of compact white
felspar and green diallage, in others principally of hornblende.
It was not possible to trace the manner of its connection with the
adjacent strata, which are evidently much disturbed, though they had
not suffered any change in mineral character by contact with it.
Probably it has cut through them as a dyke, and the continuation of
it may again be met with about a mile to the eastward, where a black
heavy trap is to be seen, containing crystals of bronzite imbedded.
The general range of these alternating beds of slate and limestone
appears to be nearly parallel to that of the direction of the moun-
tains, but not exactly so, as it approaches somewhat more to a north
and south line, the dip being alittle to the northward of the east, and
the angle of it from 20° to 30°. The slopes are very steep, usually
covered with a luxuriant vegetation, and remind us of those in Cum-
berland and Derbyshire, though, of course, on a much larger scale.
In the Mussooree rock, however, there is a great deficiency of mineral
veins. As we travelled eastwards from Mussocree to Landour, we
found, a short distance beyond the hospital, quartzy-sandstone, of a
white and greyish colour lying upon the soft, earthy slate. This
appearance continued four miles further on to Soakolly, the quartzy-
sandstone capping the peaks, and the slate underlying it. From
Soakolly we descended for several miles, in aN. N. E. direction,
over alternating beds of quartzy-sandstone and slate, to the Agilwar
river, which runs with a westerly course to the Jumna. The slate,

692 Geological Observations made [Dec.

which alternates with the quartzy-sandstone, often becomes a distinct
grey-wacke, consisting of a grevish green base, with numerous angu-
lar fragments of clay-slate imbedded. No such appearances could be
observed in the slates which alternate with the Mussooree limestone,
and this circumstance, coupled with that of superposition, seems to
mark the quartzy-sandstone as the newest formation of the two.

To the north of the Agilwar, we passed over one more ridge of
apparently similar composition to the one just described, and then
descended into the valley of the Ganges. This valley, where we
came upon it, is full a mile broad, and exhibits at different heights,
say from 2 to 300 feet above the present level of the stream, flat
terraces of gravel, containing boulders, from the size of a pumpkin
downwards, perfectly similar to what form the present bed of the
river. These appearances continue all the way to its source. In the
bed of the river and the precipitous banks that enclose it, we found
strata of blue slate, hard and splitting into large plates, uniform in
colour and general character, and inclined at a considerable angle to
the N. E.—a slate widely different from the soft and parti-coloured
varieties, that alternate with the limestone of Mussooree. As we
advanced northwards, where our road led us toa considerable height
above the river, we met again with a limestone and slate similar to
that at Mussooree, aad the overlying quartzy-sandstone, apparently
capping all the heights in the neighbourhood. At the end of our
second day’s march along the course of the river, the quartzy-sand-
stone had become the predominant rock, and the slate had nearly
disappeared, being only found in the lowest ground opposite Balla-
haut. The line of junction of the two was seen only a few feet above
the level of the river. Somewhat before this, the slate had partly
assumed the character of talc-slate, having a faint glimmering lustre,
and a soapy feel. Beyond Ballahaut we continued travelling near
the line of junction of the two formations, the slate gradually passing
into a perfect talc-slate, and the quartzy-sandstone becoming rather
more crystalline than before. Perhaps the name of quartz rock
might be more appropriate to it, though it still exhibits in some places
traces of round grains agglutinated together. About Batwaree, two
marches in advance of Ballahaut, the quartzy-sandstone ceases on the
low ground and the slate contains a mixture of quartzy and felspar,
forming a talcose gneiss. with hornblende occasionally intermixed.
Traces of the quartzy-sandstone yet remain upon the cliffs above for
some miles farther to the north, where a gradual passage of it may
be observed into-the talcose gneiss. We found this talcose gneiss for
two marches further to the north, containing, however, at times a

Ts a

1835.] From Masurt to Gangautri. 693

good deal of mica, and, rarely, garnets. The valley in which the river
flowed had become narrower day by day, and was now nothing but
a channel of the breadth of the water course, from which cliffs nearly
perpendicular rose, on either side, to the height of several thousand
feet, shewing a section of the different beds from the top to the bot-
tom, The rock was evidently approximating to a real gneiss, but it
was not until the third day’s march from Butwaree, between Daugal
Dhurmsala and the village of Sookee, that a gneiss and mica slate
formation appeared in its usual features of grandeur, and with its
usually-accompanying minerals. Here the river flows in a cut
through a ridge, which to the west forms the snowy peaks from
which the Jumna takes its rise, and continuing to the east, always
above the line of forest, and often far above that of perpetual snow,
runs to the south of the temple at Gungotree. Bare precipices, thou-
sands of feet in height, and pinnacles thrust into the sky—those cha-
racteristic pinnacles which in other countries have received the names
of Aorns, spids, and aiguilles, and here are called by a term of similar
import, kantas, present themselves prominently to our view—and as we
climb over the ruins below, among blocks bigger than houses, by the
side of which the foaming river runs, we find a well-defined gneiss
and mica slate, with kyanite and garnet imbedded. A thin stra-
tum of coarse-grained snow-white marble was also seen. On
approaching the village of Sookee, white layers and veins were seen
in the cliffs that overhung us. They were composed of a coarse-
grained granite, containing crystals of black tourmaline imbedded,
This granite is seen in the massa short distance further on, where
the river takes a sharp turn to the eastward towards Dilaree. Here
the precipices on the northern bank were composed of mica slate over-
laid by a rock, the rounded outlines and bare ruggedness of which
indicated granite. About a mile beyond Dilaree the line of junc-
tion changes from the horizontal to the vertical. Both rocks may
be traced in contact for several hundred feet upwards, but the slate
does not appear to have been at all disturbed by contiguity of the
granite. The dip is here, as it has been throughout the whole of our
journey, between N. and E., with little or no variation. We met with
granite further on, all the way to Gungotree—granite often having
mica rarely, and acicular crystals of black schorl abundantly imbedded.
Yet, besides the ridge of snowy “ aiguilles,” which runs three or four
miles to the south of us, and peers everywhere above the intermedi-
ate rocks, another similar one is seen to the north of us, which meets
the first at an acute angle, a short distance beyond the temple at
Gungotree. Both these ridges, from their peculiar outlines, must be
4u

694 Note on the Fossil Camel {Due.

of mica slate, or gneiss. We find too on our way masses of slate
several feet accross lying in the granite, and pieces again of the size
of a brick, as if they had been imbedded in it in a state of semifusion,
so as to form an irregular gneiss. But these appearances are only
partial. This granite appears to range in nearly an east and west
line. We have crossed three different masses of trap on our journey,
besides the diallage rock, I mentioned, to the west of Mussooree, viz.
one on the ridge before deseending into the valley of the Ganges, and
two others in the clay-slate, and talc slate. We could not, in either
case, trace their connection with the surrounding rock: but we, pro-
bably crossed them at nearly a right angle, and, if so, their ranges
must approach to a parallel with that of the granite. They had all
the characters of a common greenstone. From Gungotree to Dilaree,
the river runs through a gloomy chasm in the granite; the branch
from Gungotree has rather a dingy hue, but the northern one called
the Melung, that comes from Tartary, is, indeed, a beautiful water—
as blue as the Rhone when it issues from the lake of Geneva. As the
stream becomes larger below Sookee, it is a grand and singular ob-
ject—with a body of water as great as that at the falls of Schaffhausen,
perhaps much greater, it preserved the appearance of a mountain
brook during the whole of the time we saw it. There is no perpen-
dicular fall, but the slope is so great that it tumbles and foams over
the rocks for the entire distance.

To recapitulate the rocks observed in the order of succession, they
are—l1l, granite; 2, gneiss and mica slate; 3, talcose gneiss
and talc-slate; 4, clay-slate; 5, Mussooree limestone; 6, quartz-
rock, or rather quartzy-sandstone, and grey wacke slate.

The relative position of these two last, however, needs fartherinves-
tigation, for there are undoubtedly seams of quartzy-sandstone alter-
nating with the Mussooree formation ; one in particular, several feet in
thickness, may be observed near the bottom of the hill, just above the

village of Rajpoor.

V.—Note on the Fossil Camel of the Sub-Himalayas. By Lieut. W. E.
BaxEr, Engineers.

With reference to a doubt expressed in your Journal for September,
the specimens of ‘‘ Camelide” now in our possession, will, I hope,
be sufficient to establish the existence of that genus in the fossil state.

They are: A cranium, with portions of both rows of upper molars,
shewing also the occipital and parietal bones, so peculiar in the camel.

1835.) of the Sub-Himdiayas. 695

A fragment of upper jaw with molars.

Two fragments of lower jaw with molars.

The upper and lower extremities of a metacarpal bone (the central
piece wanting).

The lower extremity of a radius.

In the above specimens, I have been unable to detect any point of
difference from the camel of the country, with which also they appear
to correspond in size. The cranium, however, has not yet been
cleared from the matrix, which may conceal some distinctive mark.

The existence of fossil Capride, (in which I include antelopes,) is
established by numerous specimens of teeth and jaws, and several
heads, more or less perfect ; these, with the Cervide and Bos, nearly
complete the known varieties of ruminant of the larger unknown
genera: we have yet much to learn.

I have lately seen a nearly perfect fore-leg (consisting of the hu-
merus, radius, cubitus, carpus, metacarpus, and one phalanx), of a
ruminant which must have united the height of the camel with the
proportions of the bos, judging from the great excess in length of
radius compared with that of the humerus and metacarpal bone. Of a
similar animal we possess chains of vertebrz, cervical and lumbar, at
present buried in matrix ; should their clearance determine any inter-
esting point, I shall not fail to communicate it.

Of rhinoceros remains, we have now a plentiful and most interest-
ing collection, comprising, besides teeth, heads, &c., more numerous
perfect bones than of any other animal.

Our latest acquisitions are teeth and jaws of the porcupine and rat,
several fragments of fish with their scales beautifully perfect, and a
small species of felis about the size of the jungle cat.

P.S. Your fig. 19, Pl. XXXIII. vol. iv. appears to me the upper
articulating surface of an axis of horse or camel, whether the former
or latter might be judged by the size.

I make this guess, from the appearance of the angle with which the
pivot rises out of the flat articulating surface.

In the bullock, antelopes, goat, sheep, and stag, the rise is nearly
perpendicular : in the horse or camel, it has a concave shape. Fig: 19,
is apparently much interwoven ; the axis which I have supposed may
belong to the elk*, is not in its proportions similar to the correspond-
ing bone of the camel, but belongs to an animal with a shorter and
thicker neck.

* See plate XLIV. and page 506.
4u 3

a

696 Examination of a Mineral [Dec.

Vi.—Eramination of a Mineral Exudation from Ghazni. By H.
Pippineton, Esq.

[Among the specimens of minerals and drugs received from Syep Kera’MaT
Aut, and collected by him while on Government employ in Cébul, as noticed in
the Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 7th October, 1835, a bottle containing
a mineral exudation from Ghazni excited attention ; it was labelled by Lieutenant
ConoLLy,

** Rock Chetny which, according to the Syed’s informant, oozes out of a
fissure in a rock at Ghizni. Native appellation Mumia ? A. C.”

Having placed this in Mr. Prpprneton’s hands for chemical analysis, we now
hasten to publish the account he has been so kind as to draw up of the results of
his examination.—ED.]

1.—Description. An unctious, viscid mass, semi-transparent, of a
dirty light-brown colour, interspersed with small dark-brown and
black specks; and mixed with angular fragments of calcareous rock,
varying from the size of a lentil to that of a horse-bean.

The smell faint and sickly, and very peculiar. The taste pungent ;
when diluted with water sickly.

IIl.—Tests. 1. Solution in cold distilled water is turbid and clogs
the filter ; does not affect litmus or turmeric papers.

29. When boiled the same. The residue contained calcareous stones
with a little siliceous matter, and a coarse bran-like powder, which
when freed from the calcareous matter by dilute muriatic acid, proved
to be the remains of half decomposed dung ; evidently, by comparison
with fresh dung, that of birds, and probably of pigeons or bats, &e.
I recognised in it minute fragments of straw, pith, shells of seeds,
&c. The brown and black specks were minute seeds, quite perfect,
or fragments of a carbonaceous looking crust.

3. Boiledin highly rectified alcohol, silky crystals were left in the
mass, which was now tough and pasty : these crystals were nitrate of
soda. The alcohol evaporated was found to yield nearly pure nitrate
of lime, mixed with a little fatty and very fcetid animal matter.

4. The solutions were tested by—

Oxalate of ammonia, giving plentiful precipitate. Lime.

Muriate of barytes; } Trace of sulphates

: li i ;
nitrate of silver ; slight cloud and muriates.

nearly solidified }

Sulphuric acid to ; it, and evolved “Nitric acid.
concentrated solution ; . fumes of nitric :

acid.
Gold leaf boiled in solution, ] ,- dbo gals
2 5 ee ; : t .
with alittle muriaticacid added; LeSuligs eed
Muriate of platina ; no effect. No potass.
Tincture of galls; no effect. No iron.
Nitro-mariate of gold, | no effect. No albumen.

Deuto-chloride mercury ; f
Tannin ; no effect. No gelatine.

1835.) Exudation from Ghazni. 697

To the chemist some of this may look superfluous, but I was always
suspicious (and thought the fact worth ascertaining), that this singular
looking compound might be artificial.

On platina foil, before the blow-pipe, it tumifies with strong effer-
vescence, blackens, decrepitates with minute sparks, and passes into a
whitish mass. The platina scarcely affected.

The bran-like matter left from the aqueous and muriatic solution,
No. 2, was heated in a tube in which litmus and turmeric papers
with a bit of silver foil were so disposed, that the vapour from the
assay would pass over them. When heated, a strong ammoniacal
(burnt feather) smell was evolved, followed by a sickly odour like
that of turf, or tan refuse. The upper part of the tube was browned
as from turf smoke. The silver foil and test papers were no way
affected, proving the absence of sulphur or matters affording ammonia
in this residuum.

Analysis.

In a compound necessarily so variable, little more satisfaction was
to be expected from an analysis than the test afforded, saving that of
being convinced that nothing had been overlooked ; 400 grains of it
gave

By alestiel une water, Nitrate of lime, with a little ie ARH rh 162*5

animal matter, ... 3 «.- «
Ai CP ATG a 23°5
By muriatic acid, Carbonate of lime, fromthe rocky fragments, 136°5
Water byanindependentexperiment, 62°0
Residuum of dung of birds, va b

9

~

a very little siliceous matter and 5

sulphate of lime,.............

TOSS y¢-0) 600 6°0

400

Assuming the information on the label to be correct, we may sup-
pose that the fissure from which this “‘ rock Chetny” oozes commu-
nicates with some limestone cavern frequented by birds, (or in which
are large deposits of animal matter,) from which or from the decom-
position of the dung, as in many similar situations, the nitrates of
lime and soda are formed and gradually ooze out. The presence of
the vegetable remains and the absence of all traces of bitumen or
sulphur, quite exclude the idea of its being ‘‘ Mumia,” as suggested
on thelabel. 1 have somewhere seen it mentioned, that a nitre cave,
as they are commonly called (I think in Kentucky), produces a matter
assuming this unctuous, but not the viscid, state, but cannot now
recollect the work.

698 Character of Pelagian Shells. [Dec.

VII.—Corrected Character of the Genus Cuvieria of Rane, and notice
of @ second species inhabiting the Tropical Indian Ocean. By W.H.
Benson, Esq. B. C. S.

In my catalogue of Pelagian shells, vol. iv. p. 176, I mentioned
that the capture of perfect specimens of the Pteropodous genus
Cuvieria would enable me to correct the characters given by Rane,
in his Manuel, from shells met with in the imperfect state in which
they are usually found. I now redeem the promise implied in that
communication. The following is the corrected character.

Cuvieria (Rane). Testa svmmetrica, anticé subcylindricea, posticé
elongato-conica, apice acutissimo, medio septo tenui, imperforato,
concavo, versus apicem convexo, concamerata; apertura supra depressa,
subcordiformi.

Rane gives as a character ‘“ le cété opposé 4 l’ouverture fermé par
un diaphragme convexe a l’extérieur, non terminal, étant débordé
par les parois du cylindre ;”’ and this is the general appearance of the
shell, which in the numerous specimens captured by us, was, with
the exception of two individuals belonging to the smaller species
hereafter described, defective in the conical termination. One of
these two, taken in my tow-net, I broke on extracting the animal ;
the other, which was secured by Lieut. Hatrron, H. M. 62nd regi-
ment, was kindly presented to me by him.

The ordinary condition of Cuvierta appears to be analogous to the
truncation observable in Bulimus decollatus, and in some of the
Melanie, in which the part excluded by a diaphragm is liable, from
the loss of vascular connexion with the inhabited part of the shell, to
become brittle and deciduous.

The larger species, C. columnella of Rane, the only recent one
hitherto observed, is that which is most widely distributed, and was
met with by us in the Southern Atlantic, as well as in the Southern
Indian Ocean. The range of the smaller species, which differs in being
about half the length of the other, and in being somewhat more
depressed, and more ventricose laterally, appears to be more confined.
I shall describe it from its resemblance, in its ordinary mutilated state,
to a grain of rice, as

C. Oryza. Testa levi, intida, depresso-cylindrica, lateribus versis
septum ventricosioribus ; apice elongato, peracuto.

Length ;% of an inch, of which the spire occupies nearly one-half.
Taken, from the 15th December, 1834, to the Ist January, 1835, in
a tract of the Tropical Indian Ocean contained between the parallels
of 8° 6’ south and 5° 0’ north, and between the meridians of 86° 38/
and 91° 0’ east from London.

1835.]} Synopsis of the Vespertilionide of Nipal. 699

VIII.—Synopsis of the Vespertilionide of Nipal. By B. H. Hopason,
Esq. Resident at Katmandi.

I have the pleasure to forward to you herewith the names and
characters, which I have provisionally affixed to the Vespertilionide
of the central region of Nipal. Without access to large museums
and libraries, it is scarcely necessary to observe that the naming and
defining of species can be but very imperfectly performed.

RHINOLPHUS.

* Prosthem. memb. sup. transversa. adpressa. Sinu frontali.

Rh. armiger, mihi. Bright brown, with darker membranes. Fron-
tal sinus round, and furnished with a pencil of hairs. Nasal append-
age very large quadrate, adpressed, skinny in the lower part, fleshy
in the upper, shaped like a coat of arms, with double field ; the superior
and inferior fields separated by two parallel, subtrilobate ridges,
whereof the upper is fleshy like the proximate field. The lips with
a triple fold of skin on each side. The antitragus vaguely developed,
and wavily emarginated. Snout to rump, 44 inches ; tail 2}; expanse,
22; weight 3 oz. Females and young males, of a duller, deeper-toned
brown.

* Prosthem. memb. sup. erecta. haud sinu frontali.

Rhinolphus tragatus, mihi. Uniform deep brown, with the lips
paler and rusty. Of the nasal appendage, the upper salient process
is like a barred spear-head (?), and the lower like a raised door-
knocker. Antitragus considerably developed, so as to form a semi-
circular mock oreillon, whence the trivial name. Lips simple, 23
inches in length; the tail 12; expanse, 154; weight 2 oz.

Remarks.—Both the above species have the pubic teats strikingly
developed. In form they are just the same as the true or pectoral
teats, and in size, even larger than the latter. At their bases is a
distinct indication of a gland, under the outer coat of the animals.
The ears of both species are ‘ tremblingly alive all over,’ and capable
of considerable movement and compression, whence perhaps the
transverse striz or rays by which they are distinguished. In both
species, there is some appearance of tragal and antitragal development.
In tragatus (recté anti-tragatus), the latter is prominent. These animals
have manners nearly similar to those of the true Vespertilios. So
soon as it is dark, they come forth from the cavities of rocks, in
groups, to skim the surface of standing crops, or to glide around and
between umbrageous trees, in search of nocturnal insects, which

t N. B.—The érue oreillon, peculiar to Vespertilio, is an enlargement of the
tragus,

700 ‘Synopsis of the Vespertilionide of Nipal. [Duc.

constitute their sole food. They make their exit rather sooner than
the true bats, and always in considerable numbers. They are not
migratory, nor subject to hibernation. They breed once a year,
towards the close of summer, and produce two young, differing from
the parents chiefly in the very restricted development of the nasal
appendages.
PTEROPUS.
* Keaudate.

Pt. leucocephalus, mihi. Whole head and sens with the body
below, rufous yellow; face, as far as the eyes, the body above, and
the membranes, deep brown. Snout to rump, 10 inches. Expanse,
46. Weight, 22 oz.

* Caudate.

Pt. pyrivorus, mihi. Wholly of an earthy brown; nude skin of lips,
of joints, and of toes, fleshy gray ; tail very short, with its base enve-
loped in the interfemoral membrane, and its tip free. Snout to rump,
six inches; tail, half an inch. Expanse, 24 inches. Weight, 5 oz.

Remarks.—The Pteropi never appear in the central region of
Nipal, save in autumn, when they come in large bodies, to plunder
the ripe fruit in gardens. The lesser species is a perfect pest, from
the havoc it makes amongst the ripe pears. Hence I have called
it pyrivorus. These animals are never. seen in Central Nipal, save
at midnight, at which time they come to feed, and necessarily from
a very considerable distance. In the plains it is noted of them, that
they will travel 830 or 40 miles, and as many back, in the course of
a single night, in order to procure food.

VESPERTILIO.

V. formosa, mihi. Entirely cf a bright, soft, ruddy yellow, with
the digital membranes triangularly indented, blackish. Head, conical ;
face, sharp ; muzzle and lips, confluently nudish ; the former, anteally
grooved, not above ; ae He ears acutely pointed, moderate,

I
less the head ; teeth —— = in gp sMout to rump, 24 inches; tail, 2;

expanse, 124.

V. fuliginosa, mihi. Wholly sooty brown. Ears, lips, and muzzle,
as in the last: and face sharp, but the rostrum somewhat recurved,
owing to the concave seas of the nasal bones, which in formosa are

Ty ahs
rather convex. ‘Teeth — a ee In size somewhat less than

Jormosa.

V. labiata. Thick-lipped Bat, mihi. Head broad and depressed,
with a bluff physiognomy, and all the organs placed low down on the
sides of the head; muzzle, small, clearly defined, rounded, grooved ;
lips very tumid, but not warty nor nude ; ears shorter than the head,

1835.) Note on the Red-billed Erolia. 701

remote, erect, spheroidal: auricle of the same form, and directed
towards the conch of ear; posterior margin of the helix folded out-
wards, and carried forwards to the gape.

Saturate brown throughout. Skin, wherever denuded, purpure-
scent. Teeth a — ; Snout to rump, three inches ; tail, two;
expanse 15.

Remarks.—The bats remain with us throughout the year, and do
not hibernate. They quest for food solitarily, and therein chiefly
their manners differ from those of the Rhinolphi. Labiata is closely
affined to M. Gxorrroy’s Noctula, and has a very different physiog-
nomy from the other two species, which have both a sharp visage,
though their crania exhibit in the facial part a considerable diversity,
In Formosa, the nasal bones are slightly convexed in their length,
and unite easily with a low forehead: in Fuliginosa, the same bones
incline to a concave bend in their length, and join a high forehead,
with a considerable curve.

1X.—WNote on the Red-billed Erolia. By the same.

With reference to the paper on the Red-billed Erolia, published in
your No. for August, I beg to acquaint vou that I have been induced
to adopt a new genus for this bird, and that the change of the generic
has led me to the alteration of the specific name also. As I am
no friend to the multiplication of names, I would observe, that in
adopting a new genus, I have been governed by these two circum-
stances—lIst, that Visttor’s genus Erolia has been rejected; 2nd,
that Goutp’s genus Ibidorhyncha is inaccurate. I have had opportu-
nity to examine three specimens, and from careful comparison of
them, have drawn the following generic character.

Genus CLoRHYNCHUS.

Rostrum omnino Numeniacum: differt tamen tomiis inflexis denti-
culatisque, necnon apicibus acutiusculis.

Corporis, alarum caudzque forma sicut in Grallatoribus typicis.

Tibiz et tarsi sub-breves, tibiz trans medium plumosze, teres: tarsi
leviter reticulati.

Pedes tridactyli typicé cursorii, marginibus tamen digitorum subdi-
latatis, externoque digito libero.

Species nova. C/. Strophiatus, Anglicé Gorgeted Clorhyne.

Cl. corpore supra, colloque plumbeis. Cauda pallidiore, fasciisque ni-
gris transyersim instructa. Corpore subtus albo. Capitis vertice, facie,
guttureque nigris. Pectore strophio nigro ornato. Iridibus rostroque
sanguineis. Pedibus purpurescente griseis,

4x

702 Description of the Kathiah Nyil (Dec.

Synonyma. Red-billed Erolia of Asiatic Journal. Ibidorhyncha
Struthersii of Goutp’s Century.

The denticulation of the bill, and the strictly cursorial character of
the feet, (with short, stout, very unequal, full, solid toes, and depress-
ed truncated nails,) constitute, I conceive, the marks of this genus.

The species is 16 inches by 30 in length and extent, and 10 oz.
heavy.

The intestines are 20 inches long, larger above than below, tough,
frequently semi-convolved or doubled, syphonwise, and at three inches
from the anal end, they have two ceca, nearly two inches in length,
each of them.

The stomach is small, but very muscular and gizzard-like, and the
food of the species, chiefly, minute univalve mollusca, which it picks
up on the sandy margins of rivers and streams. In such sites it is
usually found; nor does it appear to be gregarious.

The generic name Clorhynchus, is derived from Clorios, a Greek
term for the curlew. The trivial name bears reference to the con-
spicuous gorget borne on the bird’s breast. Had the former specific
name (red-billed) been retained, there must have been tantological
intrusion on the generic style, upon turning the specific appellation
into Latin or Greek: hence the change.

Time and the discovery of more species will prove whether my
generic character be worthy of retention. Quoad the single known
species it is, I hope, both accurate and distinctive.

X.—Description of the little Musteline animal, denominated Kuthiak
Nyiil in the Catalogue of the Nepdlese Mammalia. By B. H.
Honeson, Hsq. Resident at Katmandu.

Genus.—MusteE.a.

Sub-genus.—Putorices.

Species new. P. Kadthiah, mihi. The Kathiah Nyil of Nepal.
Habitat, the Kachar or Northern region. Specific character, deep
rich brown above, golden yellow below, chin whitish. Tail, limbs,
and ears concolorous, with the body above. Tail cylindrico-tapered,
and half the length cf the animal. Snout to rump, 10 inches: tail
(less hair) 5 inches.

This beautiful little creature is exceedingly prized by the Nepalese
for its services in ridding houses of rats. It is easily tamed; and
such is the dread of it common to all murine animals, that not one
will approach a house wherein it is domiciled. Rats and mice seem
to have an instinctive sense of its hostility to them, so much so that

1835.] of the Himalayan range. 703

as soon as it is introduced into a house, they are observed to hurry
away in all directions, being apprised, no doubt, of its presence by
the peculiar odour it emits. Its ferocity and courage are made sub-
servient to the amusement of the rich, who train it to attack large
fowls, geese, and even goats and sheep. The latter, equally with
the former, fall certain sacrifices to its agility and daringness. So soon
as it is loosed, it rushes up the fowl’s tail, or goat’s leg, and seizes
the great artery of the neck, nor ever quits its hold till the victim
sinks under exhaustion from loss of blood.

The Kathiah has the true vermiform structure of the typical mus-
teline animals; its head, neck and body forming a continuous equable
cylinder. Its action is purely digitigrade, and even the palms and
soles of its extremities are clad in hair beyond the limits of the
lines defining the digits, and the balls supporting them and the wrists.
The fore and hind legs are of equal and moderate thickness ; but the
hands are rather larger than the feet: both quinquidactylous, with
the thumbs or internal digits a little withdrawn, as in the human
hand. Of the rest of the digits, the two central are equal, and the two
lateral, sub-equal, especially in the hinder extremities. Four oblong
conjunct balls support the bases of the digits, and two the palms, an
outer large ball of an elliptic shape, and a tiny round one its inner
side. No metatarsal balls exist in the hind feet. The digits are
more than half involved in a dilatable membrane which spreads
freely to aid grasping. The talons or nails are all of sub-equal size,
compressed, curved, and acute, suited to scansion and tearing, but
not so well to digging. The fur is short, shining, and adpressed ;
that of the tail being a little larger, but not much so. The tail itself
(i. e. exclusive of the hair which projects beyond its termination) is
just half the length of the animal, and is slender, round and tapering.
The head oval, with a short conical face ending in a clearly-defined
round muzzle, having the nostrils entirely to the sides. The eyes are
prominent, with round pupils, and they are seated much nearer the
snout than the ears. The hairs issuing from the lips, cheeks, chin,
and brows, are not rigid or thick; and a slight tuft of a similar
character is set on above each carpus, as in some of the squirrels. The
ears are lateral, transversely developed, formed upon the general model
of the human ear, and more nearly of that of the mungooses. There is
helix and antihelix, tragus and antitragus; but no lobe. Those who
are familiar with the structure of the ears in the common Indian
mungoose (Herpestes Griseus) will understand the exact form of the
same organs in our animal, when I tell them that the only differences
consist in the helix of the latter being more exserted, but not pro-

4x2

704 Further Discovery of Coal Beds in Assam. (Dec.

duced anteally towards the eyes, nor reflected on the edge. The helix .
too, is entire in the mungoose; whereas in the K&athiah weasel, it has
a large simple fissure in the posterior part, resembling that of Martes
Flavigula. The front teeth stand free of the canines in the upper
jaw, in contact with them in the lower, wherein the intermediate ones
are ranged rather within the line of the rest of the teeth. Molars,
#.4. The great carnivorous tooth in the upper jaw has a small flat-
ish heel on the internal side, placed forwards, and at the base of
great cutting process. The same tooth in the lower jaw has notrans-
verse or lateral process ; but the third longitudinal tubercle is nearly
flattened on its crown, and the hindmost or fifth tooth in this jaw is
small, and nearly flat-topped. The hindmost or fourth molar of the
upper jaw runs transversely, and has two obtusely-conical points.

A horrible offensive, yellowish grey fluid exudes from two open-
ings, placed laterally just within the sphincter ani. The scrotum
is nearly without hair, and not larger (including the testes) than a
marrow-fat pea. The omentum as delicate as a spider’s web, and
without a particle of fat.

The liver divided into six lobes. <A small pea-like gall-bladder is
deeply imbedded in the largest lobe. The stomach is nearly pyriform,
and purely membranous ; the cesophagus entering it close to the
fundus. Length of stomach, 34 inches; greatest diameter, 14 inch.
Spleen, 12inch long, jth of an inch in diameter. Coats of stomach
thin, almost transparent, Entire length of intestinal canal, four feet,
of uniform calibre, from the pylorus to the vent. No cecum. Length
of animal from snout to vent, 10 inches. This gives less than five times
the length of body to the intestines. Lungs, six lobes, four right,
two left.

XI.—FPurther Discovery of Coal Beds in Assam. By Captain F.Juenxtys.
[Extract of a letter, dated Goalparah, 5th December, 1835.]

I wrote you sometime back that we had fallen upon a shell lime-
stone in the Nowgong district, similar in all respects to that of Sylhet ;
there was every reason, therefore, to suppose, that we should find coal
associated with the limestone, as to the south of the Khdsia hills,
and I have just now the satisfaction to report that this has been
realized, and to send you small samples of coal that has been sent
down to me by Ensign Bropiz. If I am not mistaken from the
appearance, it will turn out to be a valuable and highly bituminous
coal, and I shall be much obliged by your reporting upon it. A large

1835.) Further Discovery of Coal Beds in Assam. 705

supply of it has been brought down for me to Gowahatti, from which, on
my return, I will dispatch a good quantity to you. Of course what
we have now to show are merely chance pieces, brought in by persons
we put in search, and many of them are slaty and earthy; but what
{ send you, is sufficient, I hope, to show that there are good coal beds
connected with these. I do not exactly know the site of this deposit ;
but I believe it has the advantage of being within reach of navigable
nullahs ; it is on a nullah falling into the Jumuna, a river which divides
Cachar from Assam, and joins the /vopili, the Kalung, (a branch of
the Brahmaputra,) and other streams entering the Brahmapuira, a
little above Gowahatti. This will be a most convenient site whence to
draw supplies of coals, if the quality turns out suitable for steamers,
whenever there be occasion for sending any in this direction. It now
becomes almost certain that we shall find very large supplies of this
invaluable mineral on the south bank of the Brahmaputra ; we know
already of four places where coal has been found, viz. Ist, under the
Caribari hills; 2nd, that of the Dharmpur Pergunnah; 3rd, on the
Suffry, a nullah near the Borhat salt formation, and 4th, on the Noa
Dihing, in the Singpho district, south of Sadiya. We may besides
of course confidently expect to find coal on many intermediate spots,
when we come to be better acquainted with the province.

Nors.—The three specimens of Assamese coal, received with the
above note, turn out to beof very respectable quality ; they are rather
slaty in fracture, and do not coke; but burn with a rich flame, being
very bituminous: on this account they would be very suitable for
steam encine fires, though unfit for the forge, or for the smelting
furnaces. Analysed in the usual way, they yielded the following
ingredients :

No. 1. No. 2. No. 3.

Volatile matter, expelled by coking process, .... 63.1 56.9 62.8
Carbon, ascertained by incineration of coke, .... 29.6 31.1 29.0
Baarthy residte, oe 00. cess cienc cove rcccces soles 7.3 12.0 8.2

100.0 100.0 160.0

The weight of the three coals gives a somewhat different result,

No. 2, being the lightest, and consequently the least earthy, of the
three.

viz: No. 1. has a specific gravity, ............. 1.226
ee ee a Br feet. L96
Bs arse oe See Te VS ¥.223

706 Synopsis of the Fossil Genera of the Sivdlik Hills. [Dsc.

XII.—Synopsis of Fossil Genera and Species from the upper deposits
of the tertiary strata of the Sivalik Hills, in the collection of the
authors. By Capt. P. T. Cautiny, Supt. Dodb Canal, and H. Fat-
coner, M. D. Supt. Botanical Garden, Sehdranpur. Northern Doab,
Nov. 15th, 1835.

I. PACHYDERMATA.

1.

2s

Elephas.
1. E. Primigenius.
Mastodon.
: M. Lati . Clift.
heonte eae nae, ; ve Pleplnanceeniea
2. M. Angustidens.
Hippopotamus.
a H. Sivalensis. (Nob.)
2. H. dissimilis. (Nob.)
Rhinoceros. i
Bs R. angustirictus. (Nob.)
Da (undetermined.)
Equus.
le E. Sivalensis. (Nob.)
Porcus. (Species undetermined.)
Anopletherium.
1. A. posterogenium. (Nob.)
Anthracotherium.
1. A. Silestrense ? (Pentld.)
Cheerotherium. (Nob.)

1. C. Sivalense. (Nob.)

Ti. RuMINANTIA.

10.

ll
12
13

14,

II. RopEentia.

15

16.

Sivatherium. (Nob.)

1. S. Giganteum. (Nob.)
Camelus. (Species undetermined : two undoubted.)
Cervus. (Species undetermined : numerous.)
Antilope. (Species undetermined : numerous.)
Bos. (Spec. undetermined : 1 new sect. in the genus.)
Indications in teeth, &c. of other genera.

Hystrix.

1. (Spec. undeterd.)

Mus. (Spec. undeterd.) Cautiey’s letter, Jour.

Dadupir collection: vide
A_S. Oct. 1835 ; p. 586.

* We consider the M. Latidens, and VU. Elephantoides of Clift (Transactions
of the Geological Society,) to be varieties merely of one species, dependent on
age and sex.—-C. and F.

1835.] Note on the Asurhar of the Rajmahal Hiils. 707

IV. Carnivora.
17. Felis. (Spec. large: No. and character undetermined.)
18. Canis. (Species undetermined.)
19. Hyena. (Species undetermined.)
20. Amyxodon. (Nob.)
ie A. Sivalensis. (Nob.)

Indications of other genera.
V. Repriia.

21. Crocodilus.

C. Biforcatus ?
22. Gaviala.
. G. Gangetica ?

23. Emys. (Several species undetermined.)

24. (Trionyx. (Several species undetermined.)
VI. Piscxs. (Heads, vertebre, &c. of unknown fishes.)
VII. Testacea. (Univalves and bivalves undetermined.)

XII1.—Note on the Asurhar of the Rajmahal Hills. By Capt. H. TANNER,

[The following letter has reference to an extract from BucHANAN’s geological
account of the Réjmahal hills, to which the Editor drew attention on the cover
of the May number of the Journal, in consequence of a report having reached
him that fossil bones had been discovered in the same range of hills towards
Burdwan. This present information removes any hopes of meeting with the
expected fossils, and may save the trouble of further search ; for reference sake,
the passage is here reprinted :

‘The other calcareous matter, in mass, is called asurhdr, or giant’s bones.
The greatest quantity is found at a place, in the centre of the hills, called asurni,
or the Female Giant. As the lime, produced from this substance, is whiter and
better than that made from the nodules, a great part has been removed. It oc-
cupied a space, on the surface of the declivity of a hill, about 40 or 50 yards in
length ; and from the bottom of the hill, extended upwards, from ten to forty
yards, and seems to have formed a crust from 2 to 3 feet thick, covered by a
thin soil, filled with loose masses of stone. It has evidently been fluid, or at
least gradually deposited from water, as it has involved many fragments of stone,
some earthy matter, and a few univalve shells, of a species with which I am
not acquainted, and cannot therefore say, whether they are a marine or land
production*, The masses of stone that had been involved vary from the size of
the head to that of a walnut, and the asurhdr, or calcareous tufa, does not ad-
here very firmly to them ; so that in breaking, the mass being very hard, these
nodules are generally shaken out. Near the quarry 1 saw no rock ; but all the
fragments involved, and those under the calcareous matter, are of a dark-coloured
siliceous matter. In this place I saw appearances that, in some measure, justify
the native name ; for one piece of the asurhdr contained what had very much
the appearance of a flat bone, with a process projecting at one end. I also ob-
served a curious impression, a semi-cylinder, about three inches in diameter, and
18 inches long, not quite straight, and exposed to view, as if, by breaking the
rock, the other half of the cylinder had been removed. The surface of the
cavity was wrinkled with transverse folds, like the inside of an intestine, but
may have possibly been the bark of atree, although I have seen no bark with
such wrinkles ; I rather suppose that this has been the impression of some
marine animal, The greater part of this asurhdr, as I have said, has been
burned by Mr. Curisrian, a Polish merchant of Monghyr, who, Iam told, owing

* I have since found these shells in the rivers of Gaya.

708 Note on the Asurhar of the Rdjmahal Hills. (Dec.

to the expense of carriage, did not find it advantageous. His overseer gave me
a piece of it crystallized, which differs, in some respect, from any calcareous
spar that I have seen. I myself found no crystallized matter in any of the
asurhdr. This substance is also found close adjoining to the hot sources of the
Angjana river, and by the natives has been wrought to a trifling extent. It is
in a stratum, about a foot thick, lying on loose siliceous stones, to which it ad-
heres, and is covered by about a foot of soil, mixed with stones. So far as I
saw, it contained no animal exuvia.

‘*On the stones, through which the hot-water issues, both of the sources of the
Avgjana, and at Bhimbandh, there adheres a tufaceous matter, so like this asurhdr
that I at first sight concluded it to be the same ; but on trial, I found that it
does not effervesce with the nitric or muriatic acids, and is probably of a siliceous
nature.’’—Ep. |

My attention was first directed to Asurni by the Superintendent of
Buildings having requested me to search for limestone in the neigh-
bouring hills. I heard from natives, that Captain (late General)
Garstin had procured lime from that place to build the Government
granary at Patna.

I proceeded there in November, ]819, and encamped 12 days in
the valley.

Natives who had worked for General Garstin, and subsequently
for Mr. Curist1an, described the lime rock as a large mass at the
foot of the hill, of considerable height, inclining over tothe north, so
as to afford shelter when it rained ; and when it was quarried, they
placed fire underneath, to heat the stone, and then poured water from
above, to burst it.

I conceived some remains of a stratum might be found, and had a
trench excavated some distance along the base of the hills, another
intersecting it up the slope, but could only find incrustations on the
fragments of siliceous stones, some nodules imbedded in the scanty
soil, a few of them crystallized; but all were indiscriminately called
asurhdr by the natives, without reference to form, merely from the
porous texture.

I found a superior sort of tufa at various places in the valley, and
remarked that each lump formed invariably, as if from percolation,
round the roots of the sal-hur tree, thickest near the tree and thin
towards the edges, and in many instances extending along the thin
roots, assuming a cylindrical form, but not perfectly round: these
were also called asurhdar.

The lime from this species of tufa was considered so good, that
the Superintendent wished for a large quantity, for the purpose of
white-washing, but the cost of transit across the hills was too great.

I availed myself of the ‘‘ Jellinghi,” passing the other day, to send
you a sample of actynolite; it is only a few inches long, but generally
the pieces are two or three feet long and a foot thick, standing verti-
cally on each other to a great height, presenting a precipice of
columns, near to Asurnt.

1835.) Temperature of Kandy, in Ceylon. 709

XIV.—Extract from a Meteorological Journal kept at Kandy, Island of
Ceylon. By Captain Orv, R. E.

Thermometric Range. Rain-guage.

Monthly |Greatest Range} Least Range Rain |Fallen in
Range. in 24 hours. in 24 hours. fallen. |24hours.

Dau saa ——| Mean |——_-——_/______

Max. Max. Max. Temp.| Iothe | Max.

and |Range| and |Range} and |Range month and

- Inches. | Min.

N.B. Highest range in the shade, 88°. Lowest, 59°. Mean Temp. of the year—
73°3. Total quantity of Rain—inches, 78°6

Remarks.—Kandy is situated in a mountainous district, in Lat. N. 7°18’ ;--Long.
80°49’, and at an elevation of about 168C ft. above the level of the sea. Itis so
surrounded by high hills, as to render both the direction and force of the wind very
difficult to be obtained—but it is strongly affected by both monsoons.

710 Analysis of Raw Silk. (Dec.

XV.—Postscript to the Account of the Wild Goat of Nipdl, printed
in the September No. of the Journal, page 490. By B. H. Hone-
son, Esq.

Carefully as I thought my account of the wild goat of Nipal,
recently published by you, was executed, I find that there is one
material error in it, viz. the statement that the species has only two
teats or mamme. A recent dissection of a fine male led to the
notice of the fact, that there are four teats, which fact was confirmed
by the examination of two live females. There can, therefore, be no
question that this species of goat has four teats: and the circum.
stance is so remarkable, that I propose to substitute the name Quadri-
mammis, or four-teated; for the popular name of Jharal under which
1 described it. Deer are distinguished by four teats; goats and
sheep, heretofore, by two; the intermediate genus, antelope, by four
or two, in the several species. Capra Quadrimammis vel Jharal, by
its four teats, offers a singular and unique approximation (in this
genus) to cervus ; and another proof that the infinite variety of nature
cannot be designated by our artificial signs and peremptory divisions.
Antilope, capra, and ovis, how shall we contradistinguish them ? solid
cored horns, in the first, is no unerring mark: and now we havea
species of the second, and a beardless species too, abandoning his
congeners to tally himself with cervus—quoad, the number of mamme.

XVI.—Analysis of Raw Silk. By Mr. J. W. Latvray.

A. A hundred grains of yellow raw silk were digested in moder.
ately strong alcohol, which soon assumed a fine orange tint. At the
end of some days, much colour remaining unremoved, heat was
applied, and the solution gently boiled. The alcohol was then decant-
ed, and successive portions of the same solvent were employed,
till the silk appeared perfectly decolorized. The solutions were then
reduced to a moderate compass by distillation, and on cooling deposited
a feeble cloudy precipitate, which subsided slowly. The clear fluid
being decanted, and evaporated at a gentle heat to dryness, left a
deep orange brown mass, which weighed 09 grains. This substance
was adhesive, fusible, scarcely, if at all, soluble in water, but readily
so in alcohol, to which in small proportions it communicated a fine
orange tint. A concentrated solution deposits on cooling a vast
number of minute shining crystals, which subside to the bottom in
the form of a brilliant orange-brown powder. When this precipita-

1835.] Analysis of Raw Silk. 711

tion has ceased, the solution lets fall, by spontaneous evaporation, a
few filamentous bunches of a white colour, and apparently fatty nature ;
but in quantity too small for more particular examination.

B. The flocculent precipitate above mentioned, being collected
and dried, weighed 0'1. It had the consistency, fusibility, and other
sensible properties of wax.

C. The silk, still perfectly elastic, was now transferred to a deep
silver vessel, and boiled with successive portions of distilled water as
long as any sensible action was produced. A colourless, opalescent
solution was obtained. It was frothy and viscid; and exhibited
scarce any tendency to deposit the particles it held in suspension. A
solution of bi-chloride of mercury, cautiously dropped from a gradua-
ted tube, threw down a bulky coagulum, which after boiling, became
much condensed, and permitted the easy decantation of the clear
fluid. This precipitate, well washed and dried, weighed (deducting
1-4 grains, the amount of metallic salt employed), 8°9 grains. It had
all the well known characteristics of albumen.

D. The clear fluid decanted in process C. being evaporated to
dryness in a steam bath, left a nearly colourless, transparent, brittle
mass, resembling gum. It weighed 13:0 grains, and had a tendency
to soften, from the presence of a small quantity of deliquescent salts.
It dissolved readily in water, from which neither the bi-chloride
nor tan threw it down. It exhibited no tendency to gelatinize,
however concentrated; and was copiously precipitated by sub-acetate
of lead. |

E. Alcohol now took but a feeble tinge from the silk, which still
retained a little harshness. A very dilute solution of caustic potash
was accordingly exhibited ; and after a few hours digestion, was
poured off, exactly neutralized with muriatic acid, and treated with
the bi-chloride as in process C. The precipitate of albumen thus
obtained weighed 0:4 grains.

F. Finally, the silky fibre, which had now attained its full lustre
and flexibility, weighed 76°5; exhibiting a loss of 0°6 upon the total,
attributable to hygrometric moisture ; the whole of the products
being dried at a steam heat immediately before weighment. The
following are the results of the analysis :

A. Resinous colouring matter, and white filamentous substance, ....
EPMMMULISLEA.S cits c ccs cieyhhc clan teie c, Meio bron ans Dlote ois ere wens Spee cee te vases
Meee ers ANDIUMIER, 8: or, siaicle.s.0 5.6 ee crete te: diene Lsteaierein Otic e's o os es Saas
PPPOMEURULC HI atatete isle cuit wa lerc mieicaic’s cers Peteie te c crus crerinitene cs ca erneee
RUEEMERENCU EITC, s.. cc ciclclaetls ce intite sso site neclee cee etece cede
RremeraepEnGEriC MOISCIEE, sacs eu sees bene nelpdeha teed cece cc 6¥eb om

~~“
SBeKwvnee
aucoert

Grains, 100.0
sy 2

712 Extracts from Correspondence. (Dec.

An analysis of white silk gave identical products ; and in amount
differing only fractionally from the above ; except in the particular of
the resinous colouring matter, which was indeed present, but in a
very much smaller proportion. It is probable that the varieties of
colour observable in cocoons, the yellow, the orange, the buff, the
white and the greenish hues, depend only upon the greater or less
amount of this resin in the fibre.

XVII.—Exrracts rrom CoRRESPONDENCE.

1. Note regarding the Bhilsa Monument. By Dr. Sp1uspury.

With respect to the Biilsa monument, 1 see Mr. Hopesow also agrees in
thinking it similar to the Manikydla tope, and which I have been at you so
long about, and for which reason I sent you a selected drawing. With regard
to apartments within, none exist. When Mr. Mappocxk was Political Agent at
Bhopal, he obtained leave from that Government to dig into it, and I visited it
soon after, (in December, 1822,) when Captain Jounson, his Assistant, had
completely opened it from the top to I think about 30 feet below the level,
and to what he considered, the bottom of the foundations, and found the whole
solid brick-work, without any appearance of recess or open space of any kind.
Fri should have stated that the gate-ways are four, three of which are standing,
the fourth having been thrown down by an earthquake, the whole of which is
strewed on the ground, and that in no long time, another will follow : it would be
well worth an amateur’s while to take copies of the compartments, the sculpture
of which is like nothing you seein India. There is another style of sculpture
that I have seen from Kallinjer and Adjeegurh down as far south as I have
been—some of them magnificent temples and ruins, always indecent, frequently
highly obscene—sculpture that I have never remarked in any part of the
provinces: to what era does it belong ?

2. Note on the Sarnath Building, by the Baron Hugel.

Je joins quelques mots 4 ma lettre pour vous faire quelques remarques sur
le Sarnath et le Atala Mosjid 4 Juanpur.

Le Sarnath, ce Dagoba (ou Dhagoba) des Buddhistes, ce qui par parenthese
peut étre Vorigine du nom Pagoda par l’anagram des syllables, est d’une forme
inusitée en Ceylon ou parmi quelques centaines qui j’y ai vu depuis les petits prés
de Colombo, jusqu’aux immenses d’Anaradjapura, toutes différentes l'une de
Vautre, aucune n’a la forme du Sarnath. Tout ceux de Ceylon ont un second
batiment sur le premier : mais celui-ci dans son dessein ne forme que l’accessoire,
comme la lanterne 4 la coupole moderne, pendant que le Sarnath a dans son
dessein le batiment d’en haut pour objet principal ; pour lequel la partie d’en
bas n’est que le fondement, la base: ces Dagobas sont toujours batis sur un
quarré qui (chez les petits, et le Sarnath est de ce nombre) ne forme que partie
d’un plus grand quarré, qui contient l’entrée et une Vihare: ces deux quarrés
sont visibles dans les debris du Sarnath.

La relique sur la quelle l’édifice est batie se trouve toujours au niveau du
premier quarré: mais pas toujours au milieu. L’Atala Mosjid 4 Juappur cet
decidemant un ancien Agar, je crdis que e’est le nom, ou maison d’école Buddhu :
une de ce genre se trouve 4 Bijapur, et plusieurs en Ceylon, dont la plus grande et
celle mentionnée par TuRNER dans son Epitome, nommé dans les auciennes cartes
de Ceylon, 1000 colonnes. Celle de Juanpur contient 1060 colonnes ou plutdt
pilastres détachés, (colonnes quarrées est une fausse dénomination :) J’ai cherché
mais en vain de trouver une inscription sur ces colonnes 4 Juanpur, mais je suis
sure quw’une personne avec plus de tems que j’avois moimeéme finirait par en

1835.) Extracts from Correspondence. 713

trouver une. Dans tous les autres édifices 4 Juanpur se trouvent des fragmens
de monumens Buddhistes. Quel était l’ancien nom de cette ville?

3. Note on the occurrence of the Bauddha Formula.

Turning by accident to the copy of the inscription on an image of Buddha,
found along with two urns in the excavations at Sarnath, made in the year 1798,
and described by J. Duncan in the 2nd volume of the Asiatic Researches, I
was much pleased to discover the identical sentence ‘‘ ye dharmma hétu prabhava,
&c.”’ about which so much discussion has lately taken place, occupying the two
bottom lines of the page. They are disguised by several very gross errors of the
copyist, and it is therefore not surprising that no attempt should have been made
by Witrorp, who alludes several times in his essay to the other part of the
inscription, or by other Sanscrit scholars, to read it ; the lines are thus given:

Guaed THUS, Ai AIG Wea
aa a Bafactiadaial ast Baw: |

By comparing this with the version given in page 137, its real accordance
will be at once perceived through the disguise of numerous blunders.—J. P.

4. Extracts from a Journal of a Residence, and during several Journeys, in the

Province of Behar, in the years 1831 to 1834. Ry Mr. J. SterpHEeNson.

Lunar Iris.

I had the pleasure of observing this beautiful phenomenon two miles to the
east of Singhea in Tirhut, at 5 a. M. on the 4th of August, 1831. It appeared
in the eastern part of the sky, the moon being in her last quarter, and only a
few degrees about the western horizon. The prismatic colours were distinctly
developed, and the arch perfect, though not so intense as those generally seen
in the solar iris. The radius of the arch appeared also less than the one formed
by the sun. It remained distinctly visible for the space of 15 minutes; after
which it gradually lost its radiancy, and disappeared. The morning was cloudy,
with light showers of rain, and the temperature 85° of Fahrenheit.

I have reason to observe that this phenomenon is not of frequent occurrence ;
for this is only the second one I have seen during my life-time.

Frost Rind, January 16th, 1832.

The native thatched buts in the village of Singhea in Tirhut were this morn-
ing covered white with a frost rind, although the thermometer did not indicate
a lower temperature than 46° of Fahrenheit, with light airs of wind from the
west,

Beautiful Meteor observed near Singhea, Tirhut, April 11th, 1832.

At four hours 45 minutes a. M., and at day-break, observed a meteor in the
form of a globular ball of fire, which passed through the air, from west to east,
in a horizontal direction, and with a motion moderately rapid. Its size appear-
ed to be about a foot in diameter, having a fiery train of the most splendid
brilliancy, apparently many yards long. It illuminated the couutry as far as the
eye could reach, and remained visible for five seconds, after which it exploded
like a rocket throwing off numerous corruscations of intense light; but without
any report or uoise of any kied. Its apparent elevation inconsiderable,

Another beautiful Meteor observed at the same village on the 20th of May, 1832.

At 6 hours 40 minutes p. M. a large pear-shaped meteor was observed shoot-
ing very rapid in a horizontal position, and in a direction from N. to S.
Nothing could exceed the brilliant mixture of green, tinged with blue colours,
exhibited during its rapid progress. It left a luminous train of great length
behind, and remained visible about three seconds, then disappeared in the south-
ern horizon, without exhibiting any signs of exploding.

Remarkable Phenomenon seen opposite Singhea, in Tirhut, July 15th, 1833.

This evening, during a thin shower of rain, J observed on the opposite side of
the great river Gandak, at the distance of two miles, the phenomenon called by
the natives *‘ Raja Harchand ka Pura.’ An aérial city appeared, with its

114 Extracts from Correspondence. [Dec.

palaces, temples, houses, spires, columns, &c. forming altogether a very beautiful
spectral appearance, which remained visible for the space of 10 minutes; after
which, it began to alter its appearance, becoming faint and dilapidated, till it
gradually disappeared altogether with the passing shower. This phenomenon I
do not remember to have ever before seen. It seems to differ from what is
called the Fata Morgana in Staly, and I think, partakes more of the nature of
what is called the French Mirage, for I observed no reflection on the intervening
water ; but it was considerably elevated above the west bank of the river, directly
above a grove of mango trees, which were not seen during the shower of rain,
and I suppose caused this very singular appearance by the refraction, or reflec-
tion of the atmospheric air, of different densities, surrounding the grove.

Parhelia or Mock Suns, 19th May, 1834.

About 5 hours 30 minutes p. m., I observed the most singular and beautiful
phenomenon I ever beheld. A dense black cloud, (cumulus,) of a large size, formed
itself to the west of Singhea. The sun had just retired behind it, when suddenly
there appeared on the upper edge of the cloud four parhelia, or mock suns, exhi-
biting the most brilliant colours of green, blue, and scarlet, intermingled, which
neither pen nor pencil could describe. The upper part of the cloud was fringed
with radiz, or small innumerable black rays, shooting upwards with a slow but
perceptible motion.

To heighten the already beautiful effect, in a few minutes the sun burst through .
an aperture in the middle of the cloud, with a spieudour past description.
This phenomenon remained visible for the space of ten minutes, when it gra-
dually disappeared, and heavy lightning succeeded, flashing its way towards the
south-east.

Sand Columns.

During my travels in Behar, I had frequent occasion to notice this phenomenon
on the desert sand-banks of the Ganges. The first I ever saw was between
Rajmahal and Sicligully, on the 23rd of November, 1830. Several sand columns
formed from twenty to sixty feet high, having a whirling motion similar to a
water spout at sea. They passed at about half a mile distance, and remained
visible for five minutes.

Feb. 10th, 1833. Observed several sand columns on the large island between
Bar and Mowah. The whirling motion was very perceptible, and they rose in
a perpendicular column to more than 100 feet. They only remained whole a
few minutes, when they gave way at the base, and dispersed in a cloud of sand.

Feb. 25th, 1833. On the sands formed by the confluence of the river Soane
with the Ganges, we observed two large sand columns, which reared their heads
to a great height in the atmosphere, with an obvious whirling motion. The
apparent diameter of each seemed to be twelve feet. They remained perfect for
the space of several minutes, and then gradually dispersed, forming a cloud of
sand, which remained visible for a considerable time, till wafted away to the east,
by a slight breeze of wind from the west, which just ruffled the surface of the
Ganges.

These sand columns have not passed unnoticed by the natives, who call them
Bundoah. 1 was told by a respectable native that instances have been known of
people being caught in the whirl, and either killed, or severely hurt by their
force. I have to notice that on every instance that I have observed this pheno-
menon, the sky was clear, and not a cloud to be seen.

Bruce was one of the first to describe these columns in his travels to discover
the source of the Nile. That celebrated traveller describes them as tremendous,
overwhelming, and destroying whole caravans of men and cattle.

In Burnes’ travels, I find mention made of them under the name of whirlwinds :
‘¢In this neighbourhood (meaning the desert), and more particularly while on
the banks of the river, we witnessed a constant succession of whirlwinds, that
raised the dust to a great height, and moved over the plain like water-spouts at
sea. In India, these phenomena are familiarly known by the name of devils ;
where they sometimes unroof a house; but I had not seen them in that country
either of such size or frequency as now prevailed in the Turkman desert. They
appeared to rise from gusts of wind, for the air itself was not disturbed, but by
the usual north wind that blows steadily in this desert.’’

1835.] Extracis from Correspondence. 715

I dare not venture an opinion with reference to the cause of this phenomenon ;
but in all probability it is the same that creates water-spouts at sea. However,
wheu a sufficient number of well-described facts are made known, some future
Sir Isaac Newron may collect and form a theory from them upon a firm basis,
and if this notice contribute but an iota towards it, | am well rewarded.

Mirage seen on the 1ith Dec. 1832, near Jandaha in Tirhut,

A little to the east of Barbatta Ghdt, on the Byah Nullah, is a wide extended
plain, without trees or jungle of any kind; nothing of vegetation is to be seen,
except a stunted species of grass, which serves to feed numerous herds of cattle,
that seem to thrive on this sterile waste : patches of saline matter are here and
there to be seen white with efflorescence. On the above day, I travelled across
this plain, and at 3p. M., observed the phenomenon of Mirage. Every object
in sight was rendered five or six times its ordinary size. The men and cattle
appeared gigantic spectres, stalking about in the distance ; a few of them appear-
ed as if walking on stilts, while some of the buffaloes’ heads seemed larger than
their bodies. A few were elevated to such a height, that their legs appeared
like the trunks of palm trees, These distortions continued to change as the
objects moved about, to such a degree, that the men and cattle changed their
shapes every moment like shadowy spectres. A transparent bluish kind of
vapour could now and then be seen when stooping down, and looking towards
the horizon, and having an undulatory motion, which, I have no doubt, caused
this phenomenon. It is, however, not common, for my servants, when asked
about it, looked grave, and their countenances expressed more of fear than curiosity ;
while at the same time, they did not like to talk or say any thing on the subject.
They, however, stated, that it was something not good, and that ‘* many people
would die after seeing it.’’ 1 could not even prevail on them to stay to witness
its disappearance.

This plain is bounded on the east by a swampy j’hil of considerable extent.
Could the blue vapour which I distinctly saw, be what is generally called Maia-
ria? If so, I have certainly seen it, though ‘‘ in a questionable shape,’’ contrary
to the opinions of many who deem it impalpable and invisible; at first I attri-
buted the fears of my servants to superstition, but I have subsequently thought
that they have reason to fear it, especially if the appearance was really caused by
Malaria, which is probable ; for a great mortality of the people in the neighbour-
ing villages took place iu a few days after I had returned from my journey.

The Mirage representing water I have so often observed, that I thought it too
common to notice.

5. Range of the Barometer and Thermometer at Port Louis in the Mauritius in

1828, dy Listet Georrroy, Cor. Roy. Ac. Sc. of the French Institute, for the
2nd Vol. Roy. As. Soc. Trans.

Hygro- >
Month. Barometer. Thermometer. meter. | Rain. |&| Wind.
Max., Med.) Min.| Var. | Max.)Med.)Min., Var. |Max.)Min.JInch. ; 4 | a
from \from eae
mean. mean. a |\A
Jan ....|29°85|29°75 |29°65|/—.04] 89 | 82 | 74 +4 196° |78°O} 2°87/14 | GIN. N. EL
Feb.... |29°74/29°64 |29°54/—.15] 89 | 85 | 81 |-+7 }96-3'78°0] 5°O0/13 | 2) N. E.
March, .|29°74|29°34 |29°14/—.45] 57 | 84 | S0 +6 101-0 78°0]13°07/17 | 3) N.E.
April,... |29°86/29°46 |29°16)—.33] 83 | 77 | 72 j\—1 |95°075°1f 6.63] 6 | 4/s.E.ESE.
May, .. |30°17|29°87 |29°77|-++.08} 80 | 76 | 72 |—2 ]95°0,.73-0f 0°67] 5 | 1] Ss. 5.
June, .. |29°87|29°86 |29°77/-+4-.07] 80 | 75 | 71 |—3 ]94°0|76-0] 0°66] 7 | O]s. E. s.
July, .. .|29°98)28°98 |28°98|-4-.19] 77 | 73 | 70 |—5 ]94°0/79-0} 0°25] 6 | o| iE.
Aug. .. .|29°98/29°98 |29°88|-+-.19] 77 | 72 | 68 |—6 ]95°0/77°3f 2713/11 | 1] s. EB.
Sept. ... |29°97|29°97 |29°87 +.18] 80 | 76 | 73 |—2 ]90°3/78°1} 0°27] 2 | O| s. &.
Oct..... |30°06/29°96 |29°96)-+4-.18] $2 | 77 | 72 |—1 [97°3|76-0] 0°21) 6 | 0} &.
Noy..... |29°95/29°86 |29°86|/-+-.07] 83 | 79 | 75 |--1 [92°3/76°0} 1°29] 5 | 2ivariable.
Dec.. .|29°90/29°85 |29°S5|-+-.06} 86 | 83 | 77 |--5 [92°3/76-O} 0-44/12 | 3) EL
Mean,.. 29°793 78.2 33°49) 104/22

In adding this to the number of Meteorological abstracts published in our

Journal, we have corrected several obvious mistakes in the decimals of the
original,

. )- “ce K FERT “AON
8Y “IIA 99S) *WlOIeg “Ss *Yy 947 JO 8I10-—sino surye *o6F SIV] “ode 32 piepueys 00g *AoY 9} UeYy Jamo) OGI- *IS¥] ounE UT 4
3 ! i ; TYPUI *.GF Je Plepueis NO MOTAq ZOT‘ 9q 07 punoy Mou

japew pubic SANAS [OD ‘adeAoa gs notAoid 98} a10Joq UeY 19MO api © puis 3 UOpUuOT UI [eA te uo punoz sem rah 18] Simo YjIm paieduios 1m eq a
S UeWay}UaS sty] ISNOF{ ZOSIBULOS Je Ayer0s [eAoy 9) F q, { H 4d F ‘a \ ae ig
Ki O 1aJIWOIeq 343 YIM UOsIIeduio0D jo jtunj10ddo 4syjoue sn pa , ; ae

d A proye sey *IOSPUIMA 9} JO ‘ONINN )

I 9H ureydey

— a S00 , 8°e8 (ees 28 (3's | 6°8 |
5 wen ae | 8 | OSL LeL‘o = c 6
ar op ST APain oe ae aea loco | 6 l1'9 | 9°9. al EFI’ |4c6'1 98 | 9 | 19 | 8°69) 912 ‘olate'6a)ae0‘0e “ueoN
°23 "3 "ou ‘6 ‘ yo 0) ocl‘ ‘ - j pace 4
a, _op pir | ie ea Se divg jacte | ez 9° |6%6 | t02 loez+ | dere (8° oe | era [Oa | viel tee: Ioeee (0nOe f te
peal rea[d “op. | MU ‘aN *AN (62 j01Le | OL | OIE | BIT) L°69 Gol! | Fore [E88 98 | 3:9 | 09 | 1°29) GOS jRzes ILL6* | oF
Puple “ured Apnopa | -au oq * _, | Bee leer | OL | 6 | oT! 6°89 Tod | ogee (2584 94 | 9.8 | 84 | 9149] 699° JAre* loToS | 62
Ss Op syns op “MS * AA a Ua re £6 961" Hea £8 | L's | 8°9 | 99] €29* loces I6t0* | gz
3s op op *4Ba]o “u 5 om 0'€8 |8.09 68 | 1°9 | 9°9 | 6°SL 1906" | ope |P88. 66 coo’ | Zz
PA oe op o une Tae aile |Li9g at 6 lovee] 16 | O'b | 6 | O*€L) Bae‘ lort’ |g96°
“<= op op Gp “MU at S 168 |9°¢¢ €8 | eZ 69° ob lzea* Clg. VG OFT 896" 9%
‘mu ‘ «|g pc | dee ati g
> op op op Paar - 9°68 |a‘o¢ 68118 | £8 | eZ oe Mie Log] 26 | Of | 9%F | 6rIL 951° a6" s
RS FAs op op *M AA ‘0 ee Log cB 68 26 oF €c9° Leos 6S 66 e's oc CAVA e9L° (WA e20‘ &%
~ 7 op op a te eo 2a java | e8 | pte | 28 | oe lease | gaye (O68 oo | Sg | Pe | Ai04 Sede Were’ loser | ae
S Sp rele op Te = on Bee alee be age 0 lpgad 36 | °S g'2 | s'0l OFL* |898° Igoo’ | 12
2) = op ‘M8 ae pee 8 | £8 | 6°TL |zoLs 006° re WO 00s
Ss sare op (6) s “MU ‘is acy 8°b8 ets gl 16 66 Le Soe one GLAS cs ath el LoL LeLs 992° nie ue
S wee op “1ea]9 Memes Mig seen fea [Leo | 18 | oe | 6% | eed \L6Z oeee ore 16 | 169 | £66 | O04] aL‘ pee’ |ocos | gy
S ine *1eayo “T1110 one Seats Ita €b8 pes 1 921 0% | 92 | ofl lozes PL lene 16 | B'S | a'9 | 9°02) TSL* ja6e* luror Fz
© Haug *azey op oc aie Seg aos [ees | og foto | rz lorcet ltoze | bole (ORGY PO | Lb | LP | 2°69) BBL’ \ateC IoL0° aH
> P op *BOy eee ir oa 6819's 189 |ETZ Igcze | ahte (8864 36 | US | of¢ | E°0L) ObL* 1863" |ZF08
= Be op op een eke eee COT 881° igpad 26 | 9° | oe | seo] G0d* lace’ laror | $t
= op ob op ‘wu uu 18 | 18 | 6% | 112 oct | gore (EEE eg [8 zoe | EL
0 ae OP ‘MU SMU OMU 8 | eZ [9% | pre lead: | ogre (92od oo | 28 | US 169] 269° \26e° \eGo | at
| = op iL) fy ‘MU CMU io 8 | LL \o's | 262 lease | « iT loge'| 68 | £°9 | 0cZ | 1°69] B0L* |8Ze° logos Il
i Pp op op Stir sh ‘ £8 | 22 |e | o« , | 96° laces} 28 | L°9 | eZ | 669] 0126 \9ee* lopos
= op op °h 5 u ae ‘ 0*@L |89L 99t* a3 ‘ ‘ 6p ¢ lero 9F0 Or
= 5 zey MU oMU 7 18 | 68 | 9°8 | ces \o6L‘ _ |P864] 88 | 0°9 | TZ | P6G9| BOL. PFE" JopoS 6
= oP op op | ac - 98.189 |e |$<<7 lore | BOE. 0964 88 | 6°2 | 6'9 | 9*60] OTLS [FOES ps0"
> mee ‘reaps op eave a “3 FOL PTL t9Z 961‘ 096° +2 0G 2°¢ $09 OILS gge* ae f
I 2 ‘auy op “u Sater ; ae |e! | 0% ‘ ‘ 066° 9°9 ‘ GOL‘
~ a UIND *119 op "MUe me east , LL 126 | 101 re Le 9Fe" 166‘| 98 | 9°9 | eg | 699) 999° [ORFS ee 4
‘ouy AES op “MU u an IL | “STL | BSL | HELE leg’ 263" \e964 F8 | 9°Z | 1’ | aisg] 09° |P6ES |Ze0¢ | Fb
ee > ae Sun wap | MN Nu 8 G01] BEC | Te BOR? <| hens eee eee (7.8 | e3| 269! Lve* lorot |g
= z 5 8 | £8 186 | ee \oeR'0| ores ode 22 | S% | 086 | OFte| TEL! |6z" | logos | 3
6 S S| cS = 2 | ean OLI |cbET 16 | O'9 | ¥*2 | 1°22] $8Z‘ulF9a‘GelgRo‘Gs
2 > & ~ = e 5 m 3) oe Ayl su] a> sales -c| || I
; . ESA Se ae ogee foe oe Seiea| On| S| 8a] “slsales| sel SS Sol ee las lePe gy
S > 5 5 Baez Sol BS] Es] STC SE SS oF esl ee | ao ees] &
* = a Sal Belo |» 8 oo] SeiSSie jee) ae | 55/8 © Sos
2 eee ee 2 eee s BF ola sl eS] PS] slants Eejsols Bi S3)/ ES Eel &
: aimee Gees TINA SS Fel Bl es| SA s
*IomIea AA miata *sauleIy xq a Se re Sy lr %! . ©
wo : JOJIULOUIOY, T, “Hr =
—_ “d } 7 suor
= qaqs1say BEAISEIO “WV QL 38 suoigeAIasqo Ey
ims

“CEQ] ‘4aquasza :
q C fo yquopy ay7 sof ‘nzqnaQn9 ‘af finssp ay2 jo qday ‘saysthaay jv9thoj 0.10890 Fy

INDEX.

Page
Albatross, Observations on the, ... 106
Alexandria, whether Iskardoh? .... 589
Analysis of Tibetan Medical Work, 1
Analysis, Chemical, of Sea-water,.. 509
-, of Carbonate Magnesia, 510
of Tin from Malacca, .. 512
of American Lamp Liquid 512
of Mineral Waters, .... 513
of Moulmein Minerals,.. 513
of Sulpht. Molybdenum, 514
of Rangoon Petroleum,..
of Nellore Copper, ....
of Momea, or Mountain

CHENIN... FS. neh oak eiite 696
— -, of Raw Silk, .......... 710
Ankoy Tea Hills, Visit to, aide idle 95
Antelopes, of Nepal, Acco eeu cue 487
Assam, Tea Plant discovered in, 42, 47

, Coal discovered in, ........ 704

Ashmolean Society, Questions from,
Associate Members, Resolution re-

BERLIN LOO n 6 civic cic «cine wacoase's 287
Astronomical Instruments, Correc-
UCN ain oo oie lei sev, wi es\el'ereyc:. « ies 258
Asurhar, Note regarding, .......... 708
Bactrian Coins, Note on, ......... 327
BakKeER, Lieut. W. E. on Sewdlik

REANEMIR ET Glas feo kie ica rec. a cic,0 ans 565,
Barometer, Influence of the Moon on

oo eee 252
———- , Horary Observations of, 514
Beams, Table of Scantlings of, . 227

Benson, W. H. on new Pelagian

RFOUES i ctale vi gierstaveler cielo to hls ot 173;
-————_, on Carinaria,....
, on three Indian Bi-

PUIG 5 ne.c 4 eicjet er os coo afeetare «late
Benza, Dr. P. M.’s Geology of
INGLES ES Ca ee AOenGOCic (Aare :
Bhilsa, Monument at,
Birds, Mode of preserving, ..... ade
Bombay, Trappean Rocks of,......
Books, Notice of New, ...........-.
Boring, Instructions regarding, ....
BoucuHeE, stuffed Specimens presen-
LO? AB ate orn: BEC OaUecacricees
BovuLpeERSON, S. M., on Climate of
Masuri,
Bridges, Suspension Tables for, ....
Buddhist Priests of Ramree, 29,.... 91
Image, inscription on, 132,
Remains in Scotland,
Sacred Formula, .....
Coins. of Behat, .........
BuRNeEY, Col., Papers presented by,
, Account of Pugan,..

ey

)

CAMPBELL, Dr. A., on Nipalese
SHS BAB e BBs Seratickaldicialehtia Bogs’ 282
Carinaria, new Species of, ....... BOS

Page
CAuTLEY, Lieut., on new Species of
Snake 7s. qaheiatenhe..4 Me. owe 217

Washisop presi. bts aaiaere trchetsield

ELECTUS OM -veystaysle we lsa) ofeteh tote ste ata’
Ceylon, Ancient History of,.......
Chardwar, Ruins of, in Assam, ....
Chemical—(see Analysis.)

Chetni, Mountain, analysis of, ....
China, Fuhkin, Province of, .......
Chinese Tartary, Description of, ...
Coal, new site of, at Nerbada, .....
——, inAssam, .. .ee--e slaved afer o*2
Cochin Chinese Dictionary, Note on,

182,

Coins, from Behat, 56, Oe Oye ete
, Col. Sracy’ s Collection

oamf, Baie MCT» ololarciale sista ate wieiote, ¢ . 295
——-, VENTURA Collection of, ....
—-, Ancient Buddhist, ....... eee
——-, Indo-Scythic,............ .
——.-, Ancient Canouj,............
——-, Hindu, second series, ......
Collimation, on the Measure of,.... 258
Cotvin, Col., Present of Fossil

BONES DY ean ooicteteraeete © 56, 236,
Copper Mines at Ajmir, 295,......
a Of Nellore, .). sce ceee
of Singhana, .......
Correspondence, Extracts from, 517,
Csoma, Mr. A., on Tibetan Medi-

Call MONG > taj5-7lersacere th cicrane Nec sre-wne 1
Dawe, Mr., Fossils presented by,.. 236
buen, Ee, on the Jamna Alluvium, 261
, Account of ShekhawiAti

ple, BG Ugiais ores asavereletwaty ate 7

-, on Jamna Fossil Bones,..
Desiderata of the BritishAssociation, ;
Im; BGtaAnysi- ore oc) 0 60s
Dictionary, Cochin Chinese, Note

SPAS CESS CE nee annoooggoacd oe
Distillation, Native Mode of, Efevevoke¥o
Dixon, Capt. C.J., on Ajmir Copper

Mines, nae, s¥piald te xeleveietsic' brs iels &ialath
EDGEWORTH, M. P., on Climate of

Apna Daa. hee h stie cle «» 405
Egypt, Tour through part of, . . 438
Electro-magnetism, Experiments on, 182
Exxiort, J. B., on Kesariah mene

UGE EASA G © « «075 = ensibshaoiesite cles
Erolia, Red- billed, of Nepil,. . 458,
Errors of Astron. Insts. corrected,

518,
Evans, Dr. G., Account of a Mum-

IOV NGAGS. Teliseteite’cl- 1s» srw'sjeiiw’es
EVEREST, Rey. R., on Rain at Cal-

CULtAscesaye,c.sisis Siole ete; o/«lpatepptota od ate im
» on Jumna Wells,
, on Moon’s Influ-
ence on the Barometer, .,,..... « 262

651
582
574
581
712

409
495
116
294

182
282

582

286
701

519

ee

————————

718

Page

EVEREST, Rev.R., geological visit to
Gangautri, . aVavetei aia) Bro lvarsrarevaystaletg 690

FALCONER, Dr.’ sCatalogue of Fossil
SOMES fh iene stercRerstar es ceetotavec veueeye ee ve 57
Fish, on an extraordinary, ........ 218

Fo.ey, Lt., Description of Ramree,
20°62 \See:). seas ton doe 199

» ona Sea- monster in the
Baye. Givet ht dhe coer 62
Formule for Strain “of Materials, ae '5

Fossil Bones, Col. Convin’s Dona-
GION Of -<ctelerecis -ee-e 56, 236, 651

—, list of Dr. FALCONER’s,
Didis: srehorsyapetete teiersyfelisls tole @abcicieran niche 179

—-, Col. BuRNEY’s Do-
MAWONIOLW. Higcrvleiaceieeiee eee 179

—-————-, from Betwa and
Chunar tard). ieee ae 183
Fossil Buffalo’s Head, ........... 236
Bones of the Jamna, 267, 495, 500
Elk, Note on the, ...... 409, 506

Vegetables of the Sone A-
SEALE Si ieinrs redelevesatorete’evereleleteta ayake iors 507
Sivatherium, Wag Beret sakes . 517
Shells of Kasia Hills, 520
--—— Bones of the Sub-Himalayas, 565
Discoveries at Pinjor,...... 586
- Camel discovered, ......... 694
Fossils, Synopsis of Sivdlik, ..... 706
Geography of Ramree, 20, 94, ..... 199
—_——- of Socotra, ........... 138
of the Maldives, ....... 319
————- of Palestine, .......... 438
— Of Persia age. kr cakes 602
—— of Chinese Tartary,.... 654
Geology of the Doab Alluvium, ... 261
— of the Nilgiris, 409, ..... 413
——_——, Silicious Tufa,.......... 410
, Elevation of the Ghats,.. 433
————- of the Northern Circars,.. 435
———— of Bombay, ....... ees... 532
——— of Malacca, ............. 540
———— of Nellore, ............0. 575
of Gangautri, .. ........ 690
Ghazni, Saline Exudation at, ...... 699
Gold Washings of the Gimti, ...... 279

Gorpon, G. J. Visit to Ankoy Tea
EDGVIGS “oie ‘oe rare core fois: 6)0: slaueis rototetsietaneks 95

——., to Fuhkin Tea Province,.. 553
Gujerat, Copper Plates found in,.... 477
Hammam, Inscriptions from,...... 533
Harsha, Temples of,in Shekhawat, 361
Hayne, B. Extract from Tracts of.. 575
HERSCHEL, Sir JON, on Taylor’s

Collimator eset ree ie einen slates 518
Hindu Schismatics, .......... pots. (oy
History of Kamrup, .... ......... 191

of Arracan~ i223 Ge we 206
of Menangkdbowe, ........ . 244
Of Naming ~a1c2.010% 6-07 tafe toterole 300
Of Bachria ei. keel eide 339
Critique on Indian, ........ 394
of Burma, extracted,... ... 401
Of Ceyloiigr.s.+.tereretetecste tere a's e's 407
of Balabhi Dynasty, ...... 460
——— of Chinese Tartary, ........ 659

Index.

Page
Hoveson, B. H., Visitto Simroun, 121
on Tibetan Inscription, 196
—— on Sarnath Inscription, 211
Zoology of Nepal, 356, 521
——-—— on Bearded Vulture, .. 454
on Red-billed Erolia, 458, 701
—— on Thar and Ghorél An-
telopes of Nipaly.. Socereaee sneer
on Wild Goat of do....
on Wild Sheep of do..
on Specific Characters of

——

492

QELVUS s:)ieis iatecsc iets eee pecee 648
—— on Nipal Mustela,...... 704
Horary observations at Calcutta,.. 514
HuGEL, Baron, on Sarnath, .... . 712

Human Bones, supposed Fossil,.. .
HutcuHinson, Major, Roof built by, 111
Hotton, Lt. T.,on theAlbatross,.. 106
, Notes ona Voyage, .... 167
Hutton, T. G., on Hammam In-
SCIIPCLONS) i-inr. viele ctelelehe ets sence 533
Image of Buddha,..............+. 56
Inscriptions from Kasariah, 233, .. 286
——_—_—_—_., Pehlevi, of coins,.... 329
—, Ethiopic, from Ham-
WAM, Hc c's wie cleles|-b= ale ietorererarseemreeers
on Seals of orgs Ra-

corer aes cere ee es

533

553

on Buddhist Images,
from Benares, 134,
211, 713
———- from Bhagalpur, .... 166
in Lantsa character, 183
found at Pompeii,.... 475
from Garhwal, 475
from Guzerat,
Insects, on the Preservation of ....
Iron Suspension Roof,.......... ae
BES VA USN OE So ob ogno. ooocdo08
TIskardoh, Description of,......... - 589
Jacos, Lt. W. P., on Correction of
OTS 2 DN Henolag Cece oboodn on Ac
Jamna, Rocks of the..............
JENKINS, Capt. F., on Assam Tea, 43
Jerusalem, Monkish Frauds at....
Kankar Strata of the Jumna,......
Kemaon, Mountain trout of,
Keneksén, Speculation regarding, ..
KERAMAT ALI, curious Salt pro-
CUTER Dp) -bejeicielersiale =< eee steer tele
, Coins presented by,..
” Saline Substance pre-
sented by, ... 680
KLAPROTH’S Translation ‘of "Bud-
dhist formula, 198
Kirroge, Lt., oa Allahabad Pillar, 127

ever cesses ee se

oem cower eseerees

LAIDLAY, J. W. on Raw Silk, .... 710
Lamps, G. W., Table of Rain by,.. 405
Language of Socotra,............ 165
Ancient Pehlevi, .......... 329
IN Eat cle cong. coeesOeemeee cae c 477

Laterite, Questions regarding, 427, 433
Lath—(see Monument.)

Index. 719
Page Page

LEA, J., Notice of Indian Shells by, ai 4 Natural History, Notes on a Voyage
Longitudes of Nasirabad, ....... : FLOMME LANG yells = «ler oiela'el< ss ete 'e 167
Lunar Transits at Nasirabad, Hh 4 , new Pelagian Shells,173 698

Malacca, States ofthe interior of, 179, 240
; Dutch Documents regarding, 305
MAtLcotmson, Dr., on Hyderabad
Monuments,
Maldive Islands, Account of,
Mammalia, Preservation of,
Marcert on Lunar Influence,. okt
Masson, Mr., Coins discovered by,
Materials, Strength of,............
McCieLLAND, Dr., on Kemaon

Trout,
el on Silicious Tufa,..
——— Noteon Fossil Shells,
McCosu, Dr. Specimens present-
Gil Lis oe BORE De Re COOgre OU OmEOre
Medical System of Tibet,...-..-. ee
Menangkabowe States,..........
Meteorological Register of Calcutta,
64, 120, 184, 240, 296, 360, 412,
476, 532, 588, 652, ....ss.06
—— Associations at the
ORDO. AMR Gos Oficonebn so aKo88U
———_—_——_—, Phenomena in Tirhut,
Meteorology of Nasirabad,.... ... 49

Cr eo ee ey
eeeeere

ee ereoe

es of Masuri,.......... 230
— of Ambala, ........ 405
——— of Kandy, Ceylon,.... 709
——_————__ of Mauritius,........ FS
MIGNAN, Capt. R., Tour through
SIGs, SMB EAA tan ooo ccooreceias 602
Miu, Rev. W. iey ee on Buddhist
ormula, 136, 198, 2. ses. eee 214
—_—_—_—__—__—__,, on K esariah In-
BCHIPULON 233 ge oo aslo «<0 01 00 3 286
—__—_—___—__—_—., Restitution and
Translation of Shekawati Inscrip-
BACEMM SN Se eiefis 0) oare!ctohe'ecyssara olere ae earey 367
Monuments, Sarun and = Tirhut
PEE Seep etcrivsps ars’ a taloisrakas'e ic ert Oe 124
——_———, Allahabad Lfath,...... 127
————_, Ancient Moundat Bakra, 128
» Bakra’ Pillar, .))... 05 129
———_——, Ancient, in Hyderabad, 180
—, Ancient, in Assam, .. 185
———__——__,, Bactrian, of Topes,.... 234
—- , Ruinous, in Shekawati, 361
TAG ESDMISAs sock oles pi 712
ees == Of Sarnathss. «oe «ace 712
Moon, Influence of on Rain, ...... 208
, Influence of on Weather, .. 525
Moorcroft’s Papers, Note regarding, 177
Mummy Head, dissected.......... 322
Museum, Resolutions regarding the
of Asiatic Society, 183, ........ 232
Nanning, onthe Government of,179, 297
Nasirabad, Meteorology of........ 49
Natural History of Ramree, .... 35
-———- Mountain Tr out of
IRETAAOM Yoke de itd ele oc a hele saree et 39

, Assam Tea Plant,42 48
, Sea-monsterinBay, 62
——, Albatross,... 107,
, Of Socotra, .....

———

—,newlIndianBivalves, 450

, new Carinarie, .. 215
, Snake, new species, 217
, extraordinary Fish, 218
, Fetus of Squalus
Mais Pesce tes ale slateeiel <j sie 324
—_ of Kemaon, Note on
they aS \SbONS AG: ankaed Sree cag 410
—- of Nepal, Prospectus, 356
, Unicorn Fish, .... 411
a , Bearded Vulture,.. 454
, Red-billed Erolia,.. 458
_ , Hintsforpreserving
(lis Opeasenececssacoocstine 462
—_——__—____, Mustela of Nipal,. Sur.

Specimens presented, 475

— , Nipal Antelopes, .. 487

—_——_——_., Wild Goat of Nepal, 491

, WildSheepof Nepal 492
of Nepal illustrated, 521

, fresh-water Shells, 529
of Van Dieman’s

Land Tiger, ...... nAnHOOODe ODS 572
————., Assam, Specimens, 587

, Nepalese deer,.... 648
Vespertilionide of Nipal, ........ 699
Neilgiris, Geology of the, 409,... 413
Nellore Copper Ore, Analysis of.... 574

NEWBOLD, Ens., Memoir of Nan-

297
-, on Menangkabowe States 241
————--, Account of Sungie Ujong, 537
Nip4lese Spirit Still,..............
Outver, Col. T., on Nasirabad

Climate pelt .cictio-) cats tetera as
Longitude of

—_——-, on
Nasiraébad,
Oriental Publications, Discussions
regarding, 236, 290,349,407,.... 410
» Memorial re-

GALAING DC Syraiolaralwrevelela a ielsin 91 aa 472
OvuSsELEY, Capt. J. R., Coal discov-

entlliWelpocedcc.0o footed c eoevsece 648
Palestine, Tour through,. Bue Acacon ” St)

PEARSON, J.T.on Squalus Maximus, 324
_ » on preserving Ob-

jects of Nat... Elistagactere st. sia0.0.0,. 462
—_——_——-—,,on Thylacinus Cyno-

cephalus) Aemirer teenies laias ee aa 572
Persia, Tour through part of, ereievieke 602
Petroleum, Analysis of, .......... 527
Piano Forte, Suspension Rods appli-

CG CO ese Retake ads nteeuaielaLsetonble (ere e\e 643
PIDDINGTON, H., on a Monstrous

LOG) NE Aerio rit Oo Occ e CCMOnCOr 218
Pora, in Assam, ‘Account Dit retsts. sie 180
POWELL, Lt. Account of Maldives... 319
PRESGRAVE, Col. D.’s, Improve-

ments on Pianos, .... iid. fein's LOL

PRINSEP, J. ‘onBuddhist Inscription, 133
————, on the Ventura en se 327

, on Pehlevi Alphabet, .... 329
————, on Jumna Fossils, 500

720 Index.
Page Page
PRINSEP, J., Chemical Analyses by, 509 Table of Rain at Dacca, .......... 403
, Horary Observations by, 514 - of temperature at Ambala,.. 406
, on Nellore Copper Mines, 574 Tartary, oral description of, ...... 650
onAncientHinduCoins,621, 670 Tathagata, a name of Buddha, 133, 214

and all editorial matter. Tattooing, at Arracan, mode of,.... 206
Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, TAYLOR, T..G. on anew Collimator, 258

53, 177, 232, 287, 348, 407, 472, ——————., on Instrumental er-

516, 585,.. 0... es ceeeecesereeee 650 TOPS, oso-01e alah Steak Ree ee 518
Pugan, Capital of Ancient Barma, ——____ Gbarevation of Hal-

BOOS) fae io ota e tase le lellevelial foie aero tara etetets 409 ley’s Comet, SAUMO SACOG tcc on 521
Rain, quantity of, at different eleva- Tea Plant in Assam,.. <j weteie pa2

tios explained cy 2. 3 Ss-<- ce otolere 59 —— Hills of China, Visit to, . m etohch ols 95

grtall atiCaleuttas’ \) 5 cohesion 207 Plantations of Fubkin,.. x 3593
——, Influence of Moon on,...... 208 Temperature at Ambala,. ....... . 405
——, Register of, at Dacca, ...... 46 of Deep Wells, 229, .. 230
Rajas, of Simroun, .............. 124 THomson, Capt. J., on Suspension
——- of Kamrup, oo... -. eee. eee: 191 Bridges, 4 .<.cs0sccm. «pangs 222
——- of Canouj, .......066 eevee 369 ——___—___-_—, on Saul-wood
——- of Shekhavat, .............. 390 BGA S gaia, on. < <lesncmint be rieateemterae eas 227
——- ofthe Balharadynasty, 486,.. 640 Tibet, on the Capital of Little, .... 589
——- of Canouj,............ 643, 673 Tides, atiMadrais; ini. a2! geteiets 325
Rambree Island, Account of, 20, 82, 199 —-, Semimenstrual Equation of, 517
Ramcharan, Founder ofa Sect, .... 65 Tiger, mode of catching in Ramri, 94
Ramsanehis, Hindu cma ««» 65 Tin Mines of Malacca, .......... 543
Report of Asiatic Society, 1834,. 54 —-—- Analyses of, ....... .cceeeeee ero
Roof of Kasipur Foundry, ........ 111 Translations of Panjabi Hymns, .. 78
Saltness of Red Sea Water,........ 509 —— — of Buwmese Prayers, 92
Sarnath Inscription, Note on,.. 211, 712 of Simroun Slokas,.. 124
Sanscrit Verses, classes of,.. .... 396 —————-——. of Tibetan Banddha
ScHULTZ, M., notice of his Murder, 604 Lkopgreeiheis ee 8 Big rinsiyqun: Coot ee 135
Seals of Malay Princes, 245, ..... » 553 -——- of Pali or Pracrit For-
Sect of the Ramsanehis, BP salt ete 65 MUA SHS Te bs.0sh ate aa 138
Shahpura, a town in (Wdipuary scx, ce oe ae Bhagelpur Inserip- :
Shells, new genera of Pelagian,.... 173 TIONS NSS © Sako o.dasinudde aeons 167

, Benson’s collection of, . 183. ————_-——_. of Sarnath inscription, 213
, new species of Carinaria, . «. 215 —————— of Malay Princes’ Sa-
, new Indian Bivalve, ..... 450 NAG). one eo aes ove. vin eee etna 248
Silk, Analysis of, ..........0.. aheta eg O —_— of eval. tae iption 286
Simroun, Ruins of, described,...... 126 of Shekhawati In-
Sivatherium, Noticeof............ 587 TOWNS saeoeeoreeh SEsood 370
Snake, new species of,.......... . 217 ———— of Burmese History,
Socotra, Report on the Island of, . 138 GRC REC SAS ORASNSe agen 268c oc 401
SprtsBuRyY Dr. presentsFossilBones, 56 of two inscriptions
Stacy, Col. T., Collection of Coins, 621 fram Gauwzetiak:: > 1. )> teem fare itercts 484
Stalactite Caleareous Pea of Tibet,.. 520 TurnourR, Hon. Gs letter on Ceylon :
, of little Tibet, ...... ... 596 FVIStOR Ys cick lo cis is Jeiciaisrg wi wees e- 408
Statistics, Population of Ava,..... - 180 Unicorn Fish, note regarding,.... 411
of Ramri Island,........ 200 WVicary, Lt. presents Fossil Bones, 183
of Malacca, .......... -. 316 Vulture, bearded of Nepal,........ 454
of Kemaon, ............ 359 WADE, ‘Capt. C. M. on Isk&rdoh,.. 589
of Chinese Tartary, ...... 65+ WATHEN, W. H., on Guzerat in-
STEPHENSON,J., excursionto Bakra, 128 SCLUPLIOMS le lotete alate calete tet Relel eee 477
, on Vegetable Agates, 507 — on Chinese Tartary, 650
, on Pea Stalactite, .. 520 Wells, Deep, Temperature of, .... 229
Sunjie Ujong, Malacca, Account of, 537 WHELLSTED, Lt. J. R., on Socotra,.. 138
Survey of Brahmaputra, suspended, 63 WersrmacotTt, Capt. G. E., on the
Table of Dew Point and Wet bulb RamSanehi Sect. <j)cteterow lolel ote 65

TPMEPMOMACHEH s.r sire.) a1etercerenere seve sole 50 ————_—_—_——_———,, on Ruins
——- of Rain at different elevations, 60 Of @hardwiar;) fntsteelsyscten wallet te 185
——- of Strength of Materials, 114, WHEWELL, REV. W., on Tide Equa-

DIGI? Ba eiresistere ete stole chee Sele 227 TOW, oS hes ala eo telteeneioe states 517
——- of Rain fall at Calcutta, .... 207 Zoological Society, extracts from
——- of Suspension Bridge Rods,.. 223 Proceedings Of, 260... .0ssceve ne 528.
——- of strength of Iron Bolts,.... 225 eo of f Nepal, Proposals to pub-
——.- of Scantlings of Beams,...... 227 TISHI(E RK oc ccso cette inencteiese, « siereyennn ite 356
—ofLunarBarometricDepressions, 254. —— — : Catalogue of, 521
——.- of Tides at Madras, ........ 325 ——— Fossil, Synopsis of, 706

4S

(aN he

Raid

Ba

‘

t

oe

ede,